diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h.zip | bin | 798541 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h/54331-h.htm | 17385 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h/images/brown.jpg | bin | 48312 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h/images/chased.jpg | bin | 48863 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 50273 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h/images/fire.jpg | bin | 50384 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h/images/marquesas.jpg | bin | 49667 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h/images/surrounded.jpg | bin | 50752 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h/images/typical.jpg | bin | 50503 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331-h/images/war.jpg | bin | 49053 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331.txt | 17313 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/54331.zip | bin | 396643 -> 0 bytes |
15 files changed, 17 insertions, 34698 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e928c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #54331 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/54331) diff --git a/old/54331-h.zip b/old/54331-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 65ec727..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/54331-h/54331-h.htm b/old/54331-h/54331-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index b4c4085..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h/54331-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17385 +0,0 @@ - -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd"> -<html> -<head> - -<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> - -<title> -The Project Gutenberg E-text of Life of a Pioneer: Being the Autobiography of James S. Brown, by James S. Brown -</title> -<link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg"> -<style TYPE="text/css"> -body { color: Black; background: White; margin-right: 10%; margin-left: 10%; - font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; text-align: justify } - -h1 { text-align: center } - -h2 { text-align: center; padding-top: 15%; } - -h3 { text-align: center; padding-top: 4%; } - -h4 { text-align: center } - -p.chapterHeading { margin-right: 20%; margin-left: 20%} - -p.caption { text-align:center; font-style: italic; margin-right: 20%; margin-left: 20%; padding-bottom: 4%} - -img {display: block; margin-left: auto; - margin-bottom: 0; margin-top: 1%; margin-right: auto; } - -.pagenum { position: absolute; left: 1%; font-size: 95%; text-align: left; text-indent: 0; - font-style: normal; font-weight: normal; font-variant: normal; } - -.centered {text-align: center} - -.right {text-align: right} - -sup { font-size: 60%} - -.sidenote { right: 0%; font-size: 80%; text-align: right; text-indent: 0%; width: 17%; - float: right; clear: right; padding-right: 0%; padding-left: 1%; padding-top: 1%; - padding-bottom: 1%; font-style: normal; font-weight: normal; font-variant: normal; } -</style> - -</head> - -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Life of a Pioneer, by James S. Brown - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Life of a Pioneer - Being the Autobiography of James S. Brown - -Author: James S. Brown - -Release Date: March 9, 2017 [EBook #54331] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LIFE OF A PIONEER *** - - - - -Produced by the Mormon Texts Project -(http://mormontextsproject.org), with thanks to Heidi Billy - - - - - - -</pre> - - - -<p><img src="images/brown.jpg" id="brown" alt="James Brown"></p> - -<h1><br><br>LIFE OF A PIONEER -<br> - -BEING THE -AUTOBIOGRAPHY -OF -JAMES S. BROWN.<br><br></h1> - - -<p class="centered">SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH: -<br>GEO. Q. CANNON & SONS CO., Printers. -<br>1900. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="PREFACE"></a>PREFACE. -</h2> -<p>THE life of a pioneer in Western America always is full of peril -and hardship; often it has a large share of startling episodes and -thrilling adventures; not infrequently it is associated with notable -historic events; and the experiences met with develop independence of -character, firmness of purpose, and, in those whose spiritual nature -is not dwarfed by unworthy conduct, a sublime faith in God that when -man puts forth his highest endeavor all things beyond the scope of his -efforts are ordered for the best by the Great Ruler of the universe. -When to the pioneer's experiences are added those that come from travel -in foreign lands, perils of the sea, and the hostility of warlike foes, -the narrative of such a life cannot fail to be alike profitable and -interesting reading to both young and old. -</p> -<p>The subject of the autobiographical sketch in this volume feels that -he is not presumptuous in saying that each class of experience named -in relation to the pioneer and the traveler has been his. The perils -and hardships of the pioneers in whose work he commingled have been -the theme of song and story for half a century; the thrilling and -adventurous character of his experiences as frontiers-man and Indian -interpreter were of a kind notable even in those avocations; his -association with historic events of moment includes the period when -the territorial area of the great Republic was almost doubled by the -acquisition of the Pacific slope and the Rocky Mountain region, and -when the great gold discovery in California was made, since he was -a member of the famous Mormon Battalion and also was present at the -finding of gold in California, being the first man to declare—on -tests made by himself—that the little yellow flakes were the precious -metal; and his reliance on Deity is portrayed in his missionary work -at home and in foreign lands, with civilized people and among savages, -often in circumstances when life itself apparently was forfeit to duty -conscientiously performed. -</p> -<p>In the following pages there is no claim to transcendent literary -merit. Yet the writer feels that the narrative is presented in the -plain and simple language of the people, with a clearness and force -of expression that will be pleasing and impressive to every reader -possessed of ordinary or of superior educational attainments; while -the very simplicity and directness of the language used, far from -embellishing the events described, prove an invaluable guide in -securing accuracy, that not an incident shall be overdrawn or given -undue importance. -</p> -<p>The purpose of the writer has been to relate the story of his life, for -the benefit and entertainment of his children and friends, and of all -others who may read it, and to do so with a strict regard for veracity; -for he feels that the numerous thrilling and sensational incidents in -his life were sufficiently exciting to bear a toning down that comes -from calm contemplation when the agitation of the immediate occurrence -has passed, rather than to need the coloring of a graphic pen. In such -a presentation, too, he feels that the result of his labors in this -respect will be a further step in carrying out that which has been the -leading purpose of his life, namely, to do good to all mankind, to the -glory of God. -</p> -<p>With a fervent desire and firm confidence that every worthy aim in -presenting this autobiography shall be achieved, and shall find a -vigorous and ennobling response in the hearts of those who read it, the -leading events of his life, and the narration thereof, are respectfully -submitted to his family and friends by -</p> -<p>THE AUTHOR. -</p> - - -<h2>CONTENTS. -</h2> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERI">CHAPTER I. -</a></p> -<p>Home of the Author—A Career of Thrilling Experiences—His Birth -and Parentage—Early Avocations—Migration from North Carolina -to Illinois—Life on the Frontier—Dangers to Early Settlers—A -Frontiersman—Father's Advice—More Settlers Come—Churches and -Schools—Limited Opportunities—Frozen Feet—Unimpressionable to the -Preaching of the Time—Talk of a New Religion, Prophets, Miracles, -etc.—Prosecution of the New Church—"Showers of Stars"—Popular -Adverse Views of the Mormons—The Mormons Driven from Missouri -Into Illinois—Mormon Elder Comes to Preach—Converts Uncle -James Brown—Preaches Again—Preparations to Mob the Elder—His -Scriptural Doctrine Disconcerts Enemies and Secures him Friends—His -Discourse—Effect on Young James S. Brown of the First Gospel Sermon to -him—His Testimony to the Spirit and Truth of the Elder's Message. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERII">CHAPTER II. -</a></p> -<p>Persecuted by Playmates—Give Them an Effective Check—Fight -with Wild Beasts—Parents Join the Mormons—The Author Holds -Back—Assassination of Joseph and Hyrum Smith—Mormons Leave Illinois -for the West—Exciting Times—My Winter's Work—Father Decides to -Wait a While Before Leaving Illinois—My Determination to go with the -Mormons—Confide a Secret to my Mother—A New Consultation—Change In -the Family Plans—Father Prepares to Start—Gives me Permission to -Go—Thinks of Leaving me because of My Illness—I Feel to Prefer Death -to Being Left Behind. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERIII">CHAPTER III. -</a></p> -<p>Start for Nauvoo—Taken Severely Ill—The Lord Answers my Prayer -for Relief—Pass through Carthage—In Nauvoo "The Beautiful," -but Almost Deserted City—Scene on the Iowa Shore—Cross the -Mississippi—Curious Make-up of the Exiles' Teams—The Bad Roads—Stuck -in the Mud—Repairing Camps—Good Order Maintained—Unnecessary -Killing of Game Forbidden—Reach Grand River and Put In a Crop—Learn -of the Call for the Mormon Battalion—Apostles as Recruiting -Officers—Call for Volunteers—Response by the Camp—Received into -the church by Baptism—Filled with the Love of the Gospel—Get the -Spirit to Enlist—Consult my Relatives and Ezra T. Benson—An Elder's -Promise—Join the Mormon Battalion. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERIV">CHAPTER IV. -</a></p> -<p>Start for the Battalion Rendezvous—A Journey of Hardship—In the -Mormons' Camp on Missouri River—First Experiences in the Army—Blessed -by Apostles—Prophetic Address by President Brigham Young—The -Battalion starts on its Long Journey—Doing Camp Duty—Heavy Storms and -Insufficient Rations—Hard Experiences—At Fort Leavenworth—Mexican -Mules as a Cure for Egotism—Colonel Allen Taken Ill—On the Santa Fe -Road—Suffering from Thirst—Sickness among the Troops—Dr. G. B. -Sanderson, a Tyrannical Quack—Army Merchants—Order of Marching. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERV">CHAPTER V. -</a></p> -<p>Crossing of the Kaw River—Indian Farmers—Fierce Storm on Stone Coal -Creek—Crossing a Creek with Precipitous Banks—Ruins of an Ancient -City—Wagonload of Sick Upset in a Stream—Sad News of Col. Allen's -Death—Dispute over His Successor—Military Rules Disregarded In -Settling The Question—Troops Dissatisfied—Sickness In Camp—Harshness -of the New Commander, Lieutenant Colonel Smith—Brutality of the Doctor -—Doses of Objectionable Medicine in an Old Iron Spoon—In the Comanche -Indian Country—-Abuse from Lieutenant Colonel Smith—Scarcity of -Fuel—Buffalo Chips—Cooking Food under Great Difficulties—Increase of -Sickness—Up the Grand Valley of the Arkansas—Detachment of Sick Sent -to Pueblo—Mirages—Herds of Buffalo—On the Sick List—Reach the Rocky -Mountains—Prehistoric Ruins—In Mexican Villages—Arrival at Santa Fe. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERVI">CHAPTER VI. -</a></p> -<p>Exemplary Conduct of the Mormon Troops—Lieutenant Colonel P. St. -George Cooke Arrives and Assumes Command—A Welcome Change—Another -Detachment of Sick, also the Laundresses, Sent to Pueblo—Selecting -Men to Continue the Journey to California—Reducing the -Baggage—Difficulties of the 1,100 Miles Journey Ahead—Poor -Equipment Therefor—Leave Santa Fe—Roads of Heavy Sand—On One-third -Rations—Hardships Increase—Galled Feet and Gnawing Stomachs—More -Sick Men for Pueblo—Leaving the Last Wagons—Mules and Oxen In a Pack -Train—In an Unknown Country—Hunting a Pass over the Mountains—Alarm -of an Enemy—A Beaver Dam—Crossing the Rio Grande Del Norte—Great -Suffering Among the Troops. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERVII">CHAPTER VII. -</a></p> -<p>Pushing to the West—Overhearing a Conversation with Col. Cooke—The -Colonel Fears the Men Will Starve—No Berries, not even Bark Of Trees, -for Food—True State of Affairs as to the Outlook Kept from Most of the -Troops—Hides, Intestines, and even soft Edges of Hoofs and Horns of -Animals Eaten—"Bird's Eye Soup."—In a Snowstorm—Relics of Ancient -Inhabitants—Camp without Water—Old Silver and Copper Mines—Hardest -Day of the Journey—Men Appear as if Stricken with Death—The Writer -so Ill as to be Unable to Travel Longer, and Expects to Die—Uncle -Alexander Stephens Comes with Water and Revives Him—Awful Suffering in -Camp—Reported Sick Next Morning—Brutal Dr. Sanderson Gives a Deadly -Dose of Laudanum, but the Writer Vomits it After Being Made Fearfully -Sick—In Terrible Distress for Days—Healed by the Laying on of Hands -of the Elders of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERVIII">CHAPTER VIII. -</a></p> -<p>On the Summit of the Rocky Mountains—Crossing the Backbone of the -North American Continent—Review of the Journey—Graves Opened by -Wolves—Mutilated Bodies—An Unparalleled Journey of Hardship—The -Prospect Ahead—A Matter of Life and Death—Start Down the Pacific -Slope—Descending the Cliffs with Wagons—One Vehicle Slips and is -reduced to Kindling Wood and Scrap Iron—Into a New Climate—Change -in the Character of Vegetation—Wild Horses and Cattle—Attacked by -Wild Cattle—Several Men Hurt and one Mule Gored to Death—A Number -of Cattle Killed—Supply of Beef—Reach the Pan Pedro River—Traveling -Through a Heavy Growth of Mesquit and Chapparal—Approach the Mexican -Garrisoned Town of Tucson—News of Approach of a Large American Army -Sent to the Mexicans—Order Issued by Colonel Cooke. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERIX">CHAPTER IX. -</a></p> -<p>On the Trail to Tucson—Excitement In the Town—Meet Mexican -Soldiers—Our Numbers Overrated by the Indians—Mexican Commander -under Orders to Oppose us—Colonel Cooke Announces his Wish to Pass on -Without Hostilities—Arrest of Corporal Cassaduran, son of the Mexican -Commander at Tucson, and other Mexicans who are Held as Hostages -for the Return of our Interpreter—The Interpreter is Liberated—An -Armistice Proposed—Surrender of Tucson Demanded—Mexican Prisoners -Released—Surrender is Refused—Colonel Cooke orders the Battalion to -Prepare for Battle—Advance toward the Town—Flight of the Mexicans—At -the Gates of Tucson—Our Line of Battle—Address by Colonel Cooke—We -Enter the Town, and Pass Through to Camp—Purchases of Wheat, -Corn, etc.—The battalion nearly Starved—Night Alarm of a Mexican -Attack—Difficulties of Getting into Line—No Enemy in Sight—Start -Across the Gila Desert—Agony on the Burning Sands and Alkali -Flats—Strengthened by the Divine Blessing—Reach the Gila River. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERX">CHAPTER X. -</a></p> -<p>On the Gila River—Pima Indian Village—Welcome Gifts from the -Pimas—Among the Maricopa Indians—Asleep on the Trail—Visit from -a Bear—Loss of Provisions Through an Attempt to Float a Quantity -Down the Gila—Hard Traveling—Crossing the Colorado River—Gloom In -the Camp—Lower and Upper California—Terrible March over the Tierra -Caliente, or Hot Lands—Digging Wells for Brackish Water—Advance -Guard Reach a Mountain Spring—Water Carried back to Revive the -Fainting Troops—Last Spoonful of Flour Used—Dividing the Rations—In -the Canyons of the Sierra Nevada—Hewing Roads through Rocks and -Brush—Feeding on Live Acorns and Green Mustard—News of Victories -by United states Troops in California—Preparing to Engage the -Retiring Mexican Army—First House Seen in California—Beef Without -Salt—Trade for Acorn Mush—Heavy Storm and Flood In Camp—a Few Pounds -of Flour Secured—Dancing in Mud and Water—Receive Orders to go to -Los Angeles—Discover a Body of Troops in Line of Battle—Advance -to the Attack—Supposed Foe Proves to be Friendly Indians—Presence -of the Mormon Battalion prevents an Intended Attempt by Mexicans to -Retake California, also an Uprising of Californians Against the United -States—On a Battlefield where General Kearney had Fought—Relics -of the Encounter—Prophecy of President Brigham Young and its -Fulfillment—Source of His Inspiration. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXI">CHAPTER XI. -</a></p> - -<p>Ordered to San Diego—First View of the Pacific Ocean—Rumors -of the Enemy—Complimentary Order, by Lieut. Col. Cooke, on -the Achievements of the Mormon Battalion—Reported Hostility of -Col. Fremont to Gen. Kearney—Living on Beef Alone—Obtain some -Flour—Routine of the Camp—Ordered to Los Angeles—Damage by an -Earthquake—Wild Horses and Cattle Driven Into the Sea—Arrival at -Los Angeles—Rumors of an Attack—Constructing a Fort—Guarding Cajon -Pass—Surrounded by Wild Cattle—Take Refuge In a Ravine—Col. Fremont -Arrested—Site of San Bernardino—Getting out a Liberty Pole—Brush -with the Indians—Clearing Los Angeles of Dogs—Wickedness in the -Town—Brutality of Bull Fights, Horse Racing, etc.—Always Ready for -an Attack—First Raising of the Stars and Stripes on a Liberty Pole in -California. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXII">CHAPTER XII. -</a></p> -<p>Term of Enlistment Expires—Battalion Members Preparing to Return to -their Families—One company Re-enlists—An Insolent Spaniard—Pistol -Snapped in the Writer's Face—Almost a Deathblow—Desperate Fight -Stopped by Bystanders—Serious Trouble with Another Spaniard—Learn -the Lesson to Avoid those who Gamble or Drink Intoxicants—Spanish -Character—Class of California's Inhabitants in 1847—Condition of the -Country—Appearance of the Towns and Villages—Difficulty in Securing -an Outfit for Members of the Battalion to Journey Eastward. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXIII">CHAPTER XIII. -</a></p> -<p>Mormon Battalion Mustered out of Service—One Hundred and Fifty -Members Organize to Return Fast to the Rocky Mountains—Start on the -Journey—Difficulties of the Route—Dealing with Wild Horses and -Cattle Stampede of a Pack Animal—Chase Into an Indian Camp—Lost All -Night in a Swamp—Suffering on the Desert for Lack of Water—Arrive -Near Sutter's Fort—On the Site of Sacramento Party Decide to Remain -Over for the Year, and Obtain Employment—Meet Captain J. A. Sutter -and James W. Marshall—Proposition to Capt. Sutter—Engaged to Work -on a Sawmill—Proceedings at the Millsite—Mill Started Up—The Writer -Engaged to Direct Indians Laboring at the Tail Race—Conversation with -Mr. Marshall—Marshall Talks About Finding Gold—He and the Writer make -a Search for Gold, but Finding None, Defer the Investigation till Next -Morning—Marshall's Faith in his Being Successful In Discovering the -Precious Metal. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXIV">CHAPTER XIV. -</a></p> -<p>Arrival of the Members of Mormon Battalion at Sutter's Fort Opens the -Way for the Discovery of Gold In California—James W. Marshall out -Early on January 24, 1848—"He is Going to Find a Gold Mine"—Regarded -as a "Notional" Man—"Boys, I have got Her Now!"—Testing the Scales -of Metal—"Gold, Boys, Gold!"—First Proclamation of the Great Gold -Discovery—Second and Third Tests—All Excitement—Three or Four -Ounces of Gold Gathered—Agree to Keep the Discovery Secret—Find -the Precious Metal Farther Down the Stream—How the Secret Leaked -out—More Discoveries—First Publication of the News made in a -Mormon Paper—Washing out the Metal—First Gold Rocker—Gathering -Gold—Part taken by Mr. Marshall, the Mormons and Capt. Sutter in the -Discovery—Misfortunes of Sutter and Marshall—Account of the Gold -Discovery Certified to by Several Eye Witnesses -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXV">CHAPTER XV. -</a></p> -<p>Prepare to Leave California—Snow in the Mountains Causes a Wait till -the Last of June—Discover a Rich Gold Prospect—Leave it to Make the -Journey over the Mountains—No Regrets at Abandoning the Mines in -Answer to a Call of Duty—Camp Organized in Pleasant Valley—Start -on the Trip—Three Members of the Party Ahead, Looking out the -Route, Found Murdered by Indians at Tragedy Springs—Covering the -Bodies—Stampede of Animals—Guarding Against Hostile Indians—Crossing -the Divide in Snow—The Writer Fooled—Take Two Indians Prisoners—Cutting -a Road—Horses Stolen by Indians—Pursuit to Capture them—In -Carson Valley—Along Humboldt River—At Steamboat Springs—Over the -Desert—Member of the Party Wants to Kill Indians—The Writer's -Emphatic Objection—Indians Wound Stock—Addison Pratt as a Lucky -Fisherman—Writer Trades with an Indian—The Red Man's Trick—Writer -Pursues him into the Indian Camp—Escape from Danger—Journey to Bear -River—Hot and Cold Water Springs—Reach Box Elder—View the Great -Salt Lake—Arrive at Ogden, where Captain Brown and some Saints had -Settled—Journey to the Mormon Camp on what is now Pioneer Square, Salt -Lake City—Heartily Welcomed by Relatives and Friends—Rejoicing and -Thanksgiving. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXVI">CHAPTER XVI. -</a></p> -<p>Contentment Among the Saints in Great Salt Lake Valley—Rude Dwellings -and Short Rations—Trying Experiences—Rescue of Mormon Battalion -Members from Starvation—Carry News of California Gold Discovery to -the East—Re-union of Mormon Battalion Members—Addresses by the -First Presidency and Others—Settling a New Country—Organization of -Minute Men—Cold Winter—The Gold Fever—Tenor of the Preaching and -Prophesyings of those Times—Instructing the People in Industrial -Pursuits—Policy Towards the Indians. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXVII">CHAPTER XVII. -</a></p> -<p>Scarcity of Food in the Great Salt Lake Valley—Wild Vegetables -for Greens—Fair Prospects for Crops—Clouds of Crickets lay -Bare the Fields—People struggle Against the Pests Almost to -Despair—Vast Flocks of Sea Gulls, as the Clouds of Heaven, Come to -the Rescue—Destruction of the Crickets—People Praise the Lord—The -Writer Invited to a Meeting, Ordained a Seventy, and Called with -Others to go on a Mission to the Society Islands—Words of Presidents -Brigham Young and Heber C. Kimball—Preparations to Travel to -California with an Emigrant Company—Description of the Route by -Captain Jefferson Hunt—Start on My Mission—Prophecy by President -Willard Richards—Battle with Indians at Provo Averted by Apostle C. -C. Rich—Prospects of Utah Valley to Support Population—Overtake the -Emigrant Company—Discussions at Beaver River—Company Starts for -Walker's Pass—Turned Back by Scarcity of Water—Experience on the -Desert—Dissensions in the Company—Futile Attempt to send some of -the Members Back—Apostle C. C. Rich Foresees Further Trouble, and -Endeavors to Save the Mormon Part of the Train by Advising Them to -Return to the Old Spanish Trail—Methodist and Campbellite Ministers -Incite the Company Against their Mormon Guide, Captain Hunt—Main -Company Disregards Captain Hunt's Warning of Danger, and Leaves the Old -Spanish Trail to Search for the Route Through Walker's Pass—Mormons go -with Captain Hunt on the Southern Route. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXVIII">CHAPTER XVIII. -</a></p> -<p>Caught in a Snowstorm—Via the Santa Clara and Rio Virgen to -the Muddy—News of Sad Disaster to the Emigrant Company—Making -Charcoal and Nails—An Apostle as a Blacksmith—Searching for Water -on the Desert—Crossing an Alkali Stream—Discover Gold near Salt -Springs—Hurrying on over the Desert—Cattle Poisoned at Bitter -Springs—Killing Animals to Relieve their Sufferings—First Wagon -over Cajon Pass, going West—Severe Journey to the Summit of the -Pass—All get Over Safely—Sense of Great Relief—Grass and Water -In Abundance—Overtaken by survivors of the Emigrant Company—Their -Story of Terrible Suffering—Divide Provisions with Them—Celebrating -Christmas, 1849—Continuing the Journey North—Spanish Warning in a -Cemetery to Indians—Cruelty of the Spaniards to the Indians—The -Writer Placed In Charge of the Company—Directed to go to the Gold -Mines. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXIX">CHAPTER XIX. -</a></p> -<p>Journeying Toward the Gold Diggings—Threatened by Wild -Horses—Difficulties of Traveling—Convocation of the Feathered -Creation—Rejoin Our Friends—Ferrying Across a River—Strike a Gold -Prospect—On a Prospecting Tour—An Agreement that Failed—Instructed -to go to San Francisco to proceed on a Mission—Trip to -Stockton—Gamblers, Sharpers and Miners at that Place—A Temptation -Overcome—Arrive in San Francisco—Welcomed by Saints—Receive Kind -Treatment—On Hoard a Vessel Bound for Tahiti. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXX">CHAPTER XX. -</a></p> -<p>Sailing for the South Pacific—Severe Attack of Seasickness—Becalmed -in the Tropics—Intense Heat—Marquesas Islands—Cannibals—Reach -Tahiti—Land at Papeete—Meet with Friends—Hearty Welcome—Preaching -to the Natives—Animosity of Protestants and Catholics Toward the -Mormons—Jealousy of French Government Officials on the Island—Watched -by Detectives—Six Natives Baptized—Learning the Language—Rumors -of an Intention to Expel the Mormons—Elders B. F. Grouard and T. -Whitaker Arrested—Appeal for Aid—Their Release and Return to their -Missionary Labors—Meet with Brother Pratt Again—Interview with the -Governor—That Official Refuses Elders Pratt and Brown Permission to -Visit Another Island—Scarcity of Food at Huaua—Eating Seasnails and -Bugs—Strange Dishes of Food—Almost Perish from Thirst—Visit to -Tiarara—Acquiring the Language. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXI">CHAPTER XXI. -</a></p> -<p>Offer of Transportation to the Island of Tubuol—Apply to the Governor -for Permission to go—Troops on Parade—Suite of Queen Pomere—Call -on the Governor—Conversation in Three Languages—Directed to Come -Again Next Day—Put off by the Governor—Latter Refuses the Permission -Asked—His Prejudice Against the Mormons—Demands a Statement of Their -Doctrines—Not Required of Other Denominations—Writer's Interview -with the Governor—Return to Huaua—Other Elders Requested to Assemble -then—Bitterness of Protestant Ministers—Natives comment on Mormons -Learning Their Language Quickly. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXII">CHAPTER XXII. -</a></p> -<p>Visit to Papeete—Duck-Hunting Trip—A Peculiar Woman—Along a -Perilous Path—An Opinion of English Ministers—Arrival of S. A. -Dunn—Learn of More Missionaries Arriving at Tubuoi—News from my -Father and Others—Letters from the First Presidency and Some of the -Apostles—Written Statement Sent to the Governor of Tahiti—Visit the -Governor—Our Statement Rejected—List of Questions and Statement -Presented by the Governor—Reply of Elder A. Pratt—Objections by the -Governor—Permission given us to Travel and Preach on the Islands. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXIII">CHAPTER XXIII. -</a></p> -<p>Return to Huahua—Heavy Rainstorms—Refusal of an Offer to be -Carried Over a Stream—Perilous Swimming Feat—Episode with a Wild -Boar—Start on a Trip Around the Island—Obtain a Loaf of Bread—People -not Desirous of Listening to the Mormon Elders—Customs of the -Natives—Reputation of Protestant Clergy on Tahiti—With the Chief -Magistrate of Uairai—Across a Small Bay in a Canoe—French Garrison at -the Isthmus—With my Friend Pohe—Review of a Hard Journey—Again at -Huaua. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXIV">CHAPTER XXIV. -</a></p> -<p>Scarcity of Food—Traveling In Heavy Rains—Call on a Protestant -Minister—Arrival of Another Missionary and Letters from Home—Visitors -from Metia—Hold a Sacrament Meeting—Go to Papara—Abused by the -Protestant Minister—Preach to the People—Young Woman Miraculously -Healed at Baptism—Great Excitement—Rage of the Protestant -Ministers—Persecution Instituted—Arrested for Preaching—Released on -Promising to Return to Huaua—Plenty of Friends—Unintentional Escape -from Gen d'Armes—Arrival at Papeete—Charge on which Officers seek to -Arrest me—Abused by Rev. Mr. Howe—A Quiet Answer Calls Out Cheers -from the Crowd—Tide Turns in my Favor—Excitement Calms Down, and -Efforts to Arrest Me Cease. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXV">CHAPTER XXV. -</a></p> -<p>Several Baptisms—Visit Papara Again—Coldness of the People—Bitter -Efforts of the Protestant Ministers—Natives Visit Me In -Secret—Anti-Mormon Mass Meeting—Foolish and Vicious scheme to -Ensnare the Writer—It is Easily Defeated—Return to Papeete—More -Baptisms—Departure of Elder Dunn—I am left Alone—Brethren come -from Tubuoi—Elders Appointed to Labor in Different Islands—The -writer Assigned to the Tuamotu Group—Leave on the Elders' Schooner -the <em>Ravai</em> or <em>Fisher</em>—Meet with Contrary Winds—Driven to Various -Islands—Encounter a Violent storm—In Great Peril—Vessel Beyond -Control—Storm calms Down—Reach Tubuoi—First Preaching of the Gospel -there, in 1844. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXVI">CHAPTER XXVI. -</a></p> -<p>Hearty Welcome in Tubuoi—Start for Tuamotu—Reach Papeete, -Tahiti—Visit to Huaua—Leave Tahiti—Writer gets Relief from -Seasickness—Broiled Fish and Cocoanuts—in a School of Whales—Thrown -onto a Coral Reef—Total Wreck Imminent—Three Persons yet Ashore—Boat -goes out to Sea—Wreck of Elder Dunn's Party—Three Days In the Sea, -Clinging to a Capsized Boat—Clothing Torn off by Sharks—Skin Taken -off by the Sea and Sun—Reach the Island of Anaa—Recognized by a -Man who had seen me in a Dream—Preaching and Baptizing—Many of -the Natives Church Members—Make a Rude Map of the California Gold -Fields—Tell of Having been in the Mormon Battalion—Catholic Priests -Elicit this Information as Part of a Scheme to have me Expelled from -the Island. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXVII">CHAPTER XXVII. -</a></p> -<p>Invited to Organize Schools—Catholic Priests Displeased at -Mormon Success—Good Attendance at the Schools—Threats by the -Priests—Discomfiture of the Latter—Feast and Address of Welcome by -the Natives to the Writer—Preaching and Baptisms—Catholic Priests -seize a Schoolhouse Belonging to the Saints—Disturb a Saints' -Meeting—More Baptisms—Further Annoyance by Catholics—People Decide -Against Them—Town Officials Appealed to—They Uphold the Decision in -Favor of the Mormons—Priests Write to Governor Bonard, Making False -Charges Against me—A Peculiar Dream. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXVIII">CHAPTER XXVIII. -</a></p> -<p>Go to Temaraia—Miraculous Healings—Child Assailed by an Evil -Spirit—Strange Occurrence—Gift of Sea Biscuits—Perform a Surgical -Operation—Hammering out Teeth—The Writer as a Surgeon and -Dentist—Roughs Disturbs Meeting—They are Stricken with Death—Fatal -Sickness among the People—Lower Classes of Natives at a Feast—Their -Reverence for Religious Services and Preachers—Two Parties of Natives -in Battle Array—Fighting Averted by the Writer Addressing the -Contending Factions in Favor of Peace—Wars among the Natives—Some -of their Practices—Gathering and Keeping Human Heads—Causes of -Cannibalism—Conversation with one who had been a Cannibal—Flavor of -Native and White Men's Flesh Compared—The Tastiest Part of the Human -Body. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXIX">CHAPTER XXIX. -</a></p> -<p>Hold Conference in Putuhara—Instructions to the Saints—Go to -Otapipi—Opposition at Temaraia—Officials Bribed by Catholic -Priests—Arrival of a French Warship—The Writer is Arrested while -Expounding the Scriptures to the Natives—Cause of Arrest is False -Accusation by Catholic Priests—I Plead Not Guilty—Ordered Taken -to Tahiti—Painful Prison Experience—Cannibals in Custody—Start -for the Ship—Sympathy of the Natives—Hurried into the Ship's -Boat—In a School of Whales—A Frightened Boat Load—On Board the -Warship—Uncomfortable Quarters—Questionable French Courtesy—Among -Cockroaches, Filth, and Inconveniences—Soft Side of a Plank for a Bed. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXX">CHAPTER XXX. -</a></p> -<p>Voyage to Papeete—In a Tahitian Dungeon—Cruel Treatment—Write to -Friends—Kindness of the American Hotel Keeper—Brought Before the -Governor—False Charges Read, and Plea of Not Guilty Entered—Perjured -Testimony Against Me—Forbidden to Look at, or even Cross-Examine -Witnesses—Secrecy of the Alleged Trial—Demand My Rights as -an American Citizen—Confusion of the Governor—Returned to My -Cell—American Consul takes up my Case—Gives Bonds that I will Leave -the Protectorate—Elders and Friends Call on me—My Visitors Allowed to -Say but Little, and Sometimes Excluded—Decision of the Governor that I -must Leave the Society Islands—Fair Trial Refused me—Letter from the -American Consul—Taken to the Consul's Office—Advised to Leave—Elders -Decide that I should go Outside of the French Protectorate—Set Sail -from Papeete. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXXI">CHAPTER XXXI. -</a></p> -<p>Leaving Tahiti under the Order of Banishment—Supply of Provisions -Exhausted—Caught in a Calm—Suffering from Lack of Food—Reach -Tubuoi—Go Ashore upon Invitation of the Queen—Sail for Raivavai—Meet -Elder Pratt There—Left Alone on the Island—Savage Character of the -Natives—The Governor a Friend—Visit from House to House—People -Generally Unwilling to Receive the Gospel—Council Decides that I must -Leave the Island or be Killed—A Time of Excitement—Storm Passes for -a while—Baptize Twenty Persons—Noted Chief and the Heiress to the -Throne Join the Church—More Bitterness and Excitement—Two Parties of -Natives Meet to Engage in Battle—Manage to Reconcile Them and Prevent -Bloodshed—Further Threats Against the Mormons—Some Church Members -feel to Retaliate but are Restrained—Passengers Arrive with False -and Scandalous Stories About the Mormons—Persecution Increases—The -Few Saints on the island Become Sorrowful and Discouraged—Protestant -Ministers Advise Expulsion of the Saints—Renewal of the Faith and Zeal -of the Church Members. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXXII">CHAPTER XXXII. -</a></p> -<p>People Gather at a Feast, and to Decide what to do with the -Mormons—Threats to have Roast Missionary—Saints hold Prayer and -Testimony Meeting—Kept Awake all Night—Council of Natives Decides -to Roast and Eat me—Fire is Built—Men Sent to Drag me to the -Council—Promises of Presidents Brigham Young and Willard Richards Come -to my Mind—All Fear Is Banished—Saints and Their Enemies Ordered -to Separate—All but Two Mormons Stand by me—Sublime Courage of a -Native and His Wife—The Charge Against Me—I Appeal to the Bible, but -our Enemies Refuse to be Guided by the Law of God—Notified of the -Decision that I am to be Burned—Spirit of the Lord Rests upon me in -Great Power, Inspiring me to Defy our Enemies—Spirit of Confusion -Enters our Foes—They Quarrel and Fight With Each Other—Difficulty In -Restraining Church Members—Deliverance which the Lord Wrought out for -me—I am Allowed to proceed Unmolested—Meet a Member of the Council -which Condemned me to Death—His Testimony that a Pillar of Light -Descended from Heaven and Rested on me, Filling them with Fear—No more -Anti-Mormon Councils—Natives show no Disposition to Receive the Gospel. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXXIII">CHAPTER XXXIII. -</a></p> -<p>Long time without News from Home—Letter from Elder B. F. -Grouard—Released from my Missionary Labors in the Islands—Little -Opportunity to Leave Raivavai—Natives Build a Schooner—Fast and -Pray to Learn whether I should sail on the Vessel—The Answer—Sail -for Rapia—Driven Back to Raivavai—Make a New Start—Arrive at -Rapia—Ridiculous Idea of the People Concerning a Mormon Elder—I am -Forbidden to go Ashore, on Pain of Death—Feeling is Modified Somewhat, -and I go Ashore—Battle Between the Natives—An Old Man Gives me -Food—Attend a Meeting, get Permission to Speak a Few Words and am -Ordered from the Island—Increase of Sentiment of Toleration—Invited -to Supper at the Governor's—Strange Custom of Women Waiting on -Men—Rather than Follow it, I Submit to being Called a Heathen. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXXIV">CHAPTER XXXIV. -</a></p> -<p>Determine to Preach to the People—Refused a House—Hold an Open-Air -Meeting—Strange Congregation—Six other Meetings—Visit a Native -King—He Commands me to Leave—I do so In Order to Avoid Being Put -to Death—Watermelons and Other Vegetables—Native Tradition of the -Peopling of the Islands—Visit of a Protestant Minister—Sail for -Tahiti—In a Heavy Storm—Prayers by Frightened Natives—I am Asked to -Pray with them, but Decline to Follow their Methods—Reach the Harbor -of Papeete—American Consul Obtains Permission for me to Land—Go -to Work with a Carpenter—Warned not to be Alone lest I should be -Killed—Watched by Gen d'Armes—Trouble at Anaa, and Arrest of Native -Mormons—These are Brought to Papeete—How they got Letters to me, and -their Replies—My Former Persecutors of Raivavai Come to Me for Advice, -and I Return Good for Evil. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXXV">CHAPTER XXXV. -</a></p> -<p>Watched Closely by Gen d'Armes—Experience when at Prayer—Take Dinner -with the Rev. Mr. Howe—Dining with a Catholic Bishop—Impatience -of the Governor—Leave Tahiti on the <em>Abyssinia</em>—Curiosity of -Passengers and Sailors—Difficulty in Getting out of the Harbor—Hear -of More Trouble at Anaa—Captain's comment on Mormon Books—A -Waterspout—Crossing the Equator—Encounter a Terrible Storm—A -Tidal Wave—Ship Springs a Leak—Panic on Board—All Hands to the -Pumps—Stopping a Leak—Fair Weather Again. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXXVI">CHAPTER XXXVI. -</a></p> -<p>Arrive at San Francisco—A Wrecked Ship—The <em>Abyssinia</em> -Condemned—Gathering Wreckage—Drunken sailors—My Trunk Held for -Hospital Fees—Go Ashore, where all Is Changed and Strange—My -Dilapidated Appearance—Seek Guidance of the Lord—Wander -Almost in Despair—Meet an Old Friend—Find a Home—My Trunk -Released—Meet Elders Going on Missions—Well Treated by Saints and -Strangers—Providences of the Lord—Outward Bound Elders Entrusted -Money to me for their Families—Engage to Carry Mail to Los Angeles—On -a Steamer for San Pedro—Taken Severely Ill. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXXVII">CHAPTER XXXVII. -</a></p> -<p>Become Desperately Ill—Nursed Back to Consciousness—Kindness -of an Aged Spanish Couple—Belt with Money Entrusted to me -Disappears—Intense Anxiety—Discover the Money—Great Suffering—Land -at San Pedro—Left on the Beach—Drag Myself to the Shelter of an Old -Wall—Kindness of a Spaniard and His Wife—A Terrible Night—Seek -a Passage to Los Angeles with Freighters—Refusals—Meet a Kind -Teamster—Reach Los Angeles—Dumped on the Street—Find Shelter, but -a Chilly Welcome—Start Next Morning, Sick and Hungry, to Find a New -Place—So Ill I have to Lie Down in the Street—Two Friends from San -Bernardino—Am Told that I have the Smallpox—My Friends Give me Money -and start in Search of a House where I can be Cared for—Failing to -Secure a Room, they Engage the City Marshal to get a Place, and they -Leave for San Bernardino—I wander for Shelter, but Doors are Closed, -and People Avoid me—Lodge in a Doctor's Office while the Doctor is -out—Scare the People by Shouting "Smallpox!"—The Doctor Returns but -Leaves me in Possession. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXXVIII">CHAPTER XXXVIII. -</a></p> -<p>City Marshal and Doctor Come to Remove me—Taken to a Deserted House, -which had been Used as a Sheepfold—Bedded In Sheep Manure—An Indian -Nurse who Becomes Frightened—Spanish Nurse Sent to me—In a boat with -Patient Job—My Fever Increases—Attacked by Robbers—Relieved by -City Marshal with Posse—Marshal takes the Money I have in my care, -for Safe Keeping—Spanish Nurse Scared off—Queer Sailor Nurse—He -Drinks Whisky, Sings and Dances—His Thoughtful Care of me—Visited -by my Cousin—Kindness of San Bernardino Saints—Recovering from my -Illness—My Clothing Burned—Heavy Expense Bill Against me—Tell the -City Marshal of my Arrival in California as a United States Soldier in -the Mexican War—Kindness of the Marshal—Los Angeles Assumes the Bill -for Medical Attention Given me—Start for San Bernardino—Exhausted -on the Journey—Almost Die of Thirst—Relieved by a Party of Spanish -Ladies—Kindness of Spanish Families—Arrive at San Bernardino and Meet -Friends and Relatives -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXXXIX">CHAPTER XXXIX. -</a></p> -<p>Report my Mission—Prepare to Continue the Journey to Utah—Have -to Remain at San Bernardino for a Time—Sickness among the -People—Instances of Healing by Administration—Engage to Travel -with a Pack Train to Salt Lake City—Get a "Bucking Mule"—Start on -the Journey—In a Hostile Indian Country—Signs of Danger—Prepare -for Trouble—Sudden Appearance of an Indian—Our Party Want to -Shoot—I Protest, and make Friends with the Indian—Other Red Men -Appear—Difficulty of Restraining our Party—I converse with the -Indians, who tell of a Camp of Mormons and Mexicans a short Distance -Ahead—How I Understood the Indians—Discover the Camp Spoken of—Rest -a Day—Move Toward the Santa Clara—Danger Ahead—A Fire Across our -Path—We Dash Through It—Hostile Indians—An Exciting chase—Meet -Apostles A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich—Arrive at Cedar City—Stop -at Parowan—Journey North, Preaching en Route—Reach Salt Lake -City—Settle with the People for whom I have Money—Report to President -Young—Preach In the Tabernacle—Released from my Mission—Cost of my -Mission to the Society Islands. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXL">CHAPTER XL. -</a></p> -<p>Travel on Foot to Ogden—Well Received by Relatives and -Friends—Reply to Inquiries by the People Regarding the Society -Islands and the Inhabitants Thereof—Called to go to Fort Hall -Order Countermanded—Called on a Mission to the Indians—Design of -the Mission—Organization of the Company, and Start from Salt Lake -City—Hard Work of the Journey—Attacked by Wolves—Fatal Duel at -Fort Bridger—Plans of Desperadoes—We go to Smith's Fork—Build -a Blockhouse—Arrival of More Men and Supplies—Threatening -Attitude of the Indians—Writer made Sergeant of the Guard and -Quartermaster—Instructions from Elder Orson Hyde—Life in our -new Camp—Cold Weather and Wild Beasts—Learning the Indian -Language—Give Shelter to Indians—Desperado Chief Killed by one of -his Men—Animals Perish from Cold and Starvation—Terrific Storms and -Snowdrifts—Saving our Stock—Shoshone Indians Ask for and Receive -Assistance—Hunt tor Antelope Falls—A Bachelor's Dance—Raising a -Liberty Pole—Partitioning out Lands—Plowing and Planting—Arrival of -and Instructions by Elder Orson Hyde—Selections for a Special Mission -to the Indians—Organization of Green River County. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXLI">CHAPTER XLI. -</a></p> -<p>Set Apart by Elder Hyde for our Special Mission—Blessing Conferred -on the Writer—Discontent In Camp—Unity Again Prevails—Start on our -Journey—Warned at Green River to go no Farther—Not Deterred from -Performing our Mission—Proceed on our Journey—Futile Chase after -Buffalo—Scarcity of Water—A Welcome Snow Storm—Reach the Camp of -Washakie, the Shoshone Chief—Received with Caution—Tell the Chief -the Object of our Visit—Give him Bread and Sugar—Boiled Buffalo for -an Epicure Indian Powwow Called—Proceedings at the Council—Objection -to one of our Propositions, which we were not Annoyed at—Recital of -how Government Agents Sought to Supplant Washakie as Chief—Washakie a -Great Orator. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXLII">CHAPTER XLII. -</a></p> -<p>Leave Washakie's Camp for the Other Portion of the Shoshone -Tribe—Indian Guide Leaves us—Following a Trail—Sight the Other -Camp—War Songs and Dances—Indians Preparing for War—Chief Gives -up his Lodge to us, Warning us of Men in his Camp he Cannot Control -—Indian Braves in War Paint—Surrounded by Fifteen Hundred or Two -Thousand Indians—Learn that L. B. Ryan, a White Desperado Chief, is -in Camp, and has sworn Vengeance on Mormons Escape seems Impossible, -but we Trust in God—Retire for the Night—Ryan and Seven Warriors -at our Lodge—Ryan Enters and Demands to know where we are from, and -our Business—He is Told, Threatens us, and Summons his Indian Braves -Inside our Lodge—Though the Enemy are two to one, we are Ready for -them—Prepare for a Fight to the Death—Ryan and his Men Leave the -Lodge, War Dance Outside—We Conclude to Sell our Lives as Dearly -as Possible—War Party Approach the Lodge and Slit it In a Number -of Places, then suddenly Depart—Our Lives being Spared, we Remain -in Camp till Next Day—The chief Befriends us, Warning us not to -Return the way we Came—Dispute as to the Route of Travel, and how -it is Settled—Satisfied that Ryan intended to Ambush us—Rainstorm -Obliterates our Tracks—Camp in the Rain—On the Alert for an -Enemy—Shoot a Buffalo—Ward and Davis give chase, while Bullock -and I continue on our Route—Camp at a ash—Bullock Taken very -Ill—A Terrible Night—Ward and Davis not Returning by Morning, we -Move on—Fear that Bullock will Die—Discover our Comrades in the -Canyon—Being Hungry, we Overeat—Another Night of Sickness—Emerge -from the Canyon—Press Forward to Green River—Welcomed by -Friends—Three of our Party go on to Fort Supply, and I Remain to meet -Chief Washakie. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXLIII">CHAPTER XLIII. -</a></p> -<p>Engaged as interpreter—Class of People at Green River—Appointed -Deputy Sheriff—Drover Threatens to Kill Boatmen Arrest Ordered—Ride -into the Outlaws' Camp—Bluffing the Captain—A Perilous Situation -—Parley with Drovers—Compromise Effected—Dealing with -Law-breakers—"Bill" Hickman as Sheriff Swimming Cattle Over Green -River—A Drover's Failure—Writer Employed to get Cattle Over—How it -is done Secret of Success—Arrival of Washakie—The Ferryman Offends -him—The Angry Indian Swears Vengeance on the White Man—His Parting -Threat—In Peril of an Indian Massacre. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXLIV">CHAPTER XLIV. -</a></p> -<p>Consternation at Washakie's Declaration—People Hurry across the -River—The Writer is Asked to Attempt a Reconciliation—Night too Dark -to Travel—Chief Washakie and Braves Appear at Sunrise—The Chief -notes that the People are Terror-Stricken, and Decides that he will be -their Friend—Troublous Exploits of Mountain Men—Sheriff's plan of -Arrest—How the Scheme Worked—Desperadoes Freed by the Court—Chasing -an Offender—Surrounded by his Associates—Coolness and Pluck of the -Sheriff Win—Ready to Return Home—A Trying Experience. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXLV">CHAPTER XLV. -</a></p> -<p>Go to Fort Supply—Start back to Green River and meet O.P. Rockwell -at Fort Bridger—He brings me a Trader's License, also Goods to Trade -to the Indians—Being Late in the Season, We Store the Goods, and go -to Salt Lake City—Receive the Approval of Governor Young—Move to -Ogden—Accompany Governor Young as Interpreter—My Horse Stolen—Called -on a Mission to the Shoshones—On going to Salt Lake City, I am -Released—Ordered to take part In Disarming Indians at Ogden—A -Difficult Job—Chase to Mound Fort—Hand-to-hand Struggle with a -Powerful Savage—Indians Disarmed, but Sullen—Chief's Brother Offers -all his Possessions for his Gun—Precautions Taken to Feed the Indians -that Winter—Teach the Indian Language in School—Prosper In Business. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXLVI">CHAPTER XLVI. -</a></p> -<p>Another Mission to the Indians—Start for the Shoshone -Camp—Difficulties of Travel—Near the Crows and Blackfeet—A Dream -gives Warning of Danger—Discover a Large Body of Indians—No -Opportunity of Escape—Ride into the Camp of a Hunting and War -Party—Meet chief Washakie—A Day's March—Situation Critical—Hold a -Council—Present the Book of Mormon—All but Washakie Speak Against us -and the Book—Awaiting the Chief's Decision. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXLVII">CHAPTER XLVII. -</a></p> -<p>Washakie's Bold Attitude—Tells his Councilors they are Fools—Says the -White Men, who are Wise, have Books—Tells the Tradition of how the -Indians fell into Darkness—Great Spirit Angry at the Red Man—Advocates -that the Indians live like White People—His Powerful Speech Gains the -Day for us—Shoshone Tradition—We Start Home—A Hungry Trip—Return to -the Indians, Finding them Sullen—Fourth of July Celebration at Fort -Supply—Return Home. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXLVIII">CHAPTER XLVIII. -</a></p> -<p>Affairs at Home—Start for Fort Supply—Illness of myself and -Family—Gift of Healing—Trouble with Indians at Fort Supply—Turbulent -Red Men—I Help one off my Bed—They Persist In Taking or Destroying -our Property—We Stop them—One Attempts to Kill me—Indians -Retire from the Fort—Almost a Conflict—I check the White Men -from Shooting—Indians Withdraw—We send to Governor Young for -Assistance—Our Stock and Guards Driven in—Indian Agent Appears with -Annuities—The Savages Submit—We Guard Day and Night—Indians more -Peaceful—Reinforcements Arrive from the Governor—Matters Quiet Down. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERXLIX">CHAPTER XLIX. -</a></p> -<p>Start Home from Fort Supply—Camp alone at Needle Rook—Awakened by my -Horse—Surrounded by Wolves—Flash Powder all Night to keep off the -Wild Beasts—Reach Home—Supplies Short—Hardships of a Grasshopper -Year—Getting my cattle out of a Canyon—Perils of being Caught in the -Snow—Great Suffering—Breaking a Snow Road—Business Affairs. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERL">CHAPTER L. -</a></p> -<p>Called on a Mission to Deep Creek Indians—Short Time for the -Journey—Prepare for the Trip—Journey in the Desert—Horses -Stolen—Travel on Foot—Saved from Perishing with Thirst—Meet the -Indians—Could Understand and Speak to them—Indian Agent's Offer—I -act as interpreter—Preach to the Indians—On the Return Trip—Visit -Governor Young with a Delegation of Bannock Indians. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLI">CHAPTER LI. -</a></p> -<p>Utah Militia Organized—Elected Captain of a Company—Hear of -Johnston's Army—Scouting Party sent out—I am Chosen as Guide—Travel -to the Bear Lake Country—Cold Nights and Little Food—Complaint in -the Party—Prove that I am Right—Reach Lost Creek—Some of the Men -Object to Double Guard—A Discovery that Removes all Objections—Strike -the Trail of Horsemen—Prepare for Action—Take a Camp by Surprise—The -Men are Friends—Arrive at Ogden—Called to go on an Important -Errand—Tussle with an Indian—Fail in Getting Desired Information, and -Return to Ogden. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLII">Chapter LII. -</a></p> -<p>Off on Another Scout—Again on Bear River—Dream of Seeing -Troops—Dream Fulfilled—Send Word back of Discovery—Five Hundred -Cavalrymen—Heavy Storm—My only Remaining Companion taken Ill—He -is Healed and I am Stricken Down—Camp in the Snow—My companion, -Expecting me to die, Prepares to take my Body Home—He Returns, Prays -for me and I am Healed—Stricken Down Again—I Direct him to Leave -me and Return Home—He obeys Reluctantly—I Expect to die—Peculiar -Experiences—Four Young Men, sent by my Comrade, come to my Relief— -Journey on—Lighting fire in a Storm—The Young Men Pray for me, and I -am Relieved—Traveling Homeward—Kind Treatment—Reach Ogden—Act as -Sexton—Guard over Spies—Utah Militia Recalled—Missionary Labors in -Weber County. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLIII">CHAPTER LIII. -</a></p> -<p>Mormons Abandon their Homes and Move South—Prepare for the Worst—Go -to Payson—Affairs Being Settled, Return to Ogden—-Called to go -East as a Missionary—Journey across the plains—Meet my Parents In -Iowa—Preaching and Traveling—My Father's Testimony—Missionary -Labors—Called to Missouri—Sent to bring a Herd of Cattle—Return to -my Parents' Home—Bid Farewell to Them—Purchasing Cattle. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLIV">CHAPTER LIV. -</a></p> -<p>Given Charge of a Company to Cross the Plains to Utah—Composition -of the Camp—Start West—Perform Baptisms—Meet a War Party of -Sioux Indians—Place where A. W. Babbitt was Killed—Meet More -Indians—How Trouble was Avoided—Camp Life and Duties—Enter Salt Lake -Valley—Company Greeted by the Church Authorities—Report to President -Young and am Released—Trade at Camp Floyd—Experience with a Thief—Go -to Work on the Ogden Canyon Road—Hardships Endured. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLV">CHAPTER LV. -</a></p> -<p>Called on a Mission to Great Britain—Prepare to Depart—Start Without -Purse or Scrip—Journey to Salt Lake City—Set Apart for the Mission -—Begin the Journey Eastward—Organization of the Company—My Post as -Chaplain—Overtaken by Apostles A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich—Traveling -Through the Mountains—Snowstorms and Wind—Forage is Scarce—Meetings -with the Indians—Captain Reynolds' Exploring Party—Army Deserters in -our Camp—Mail from Home—Emigrants Westward Bound—Dissatisfaction -In Camp—Feeling about Apostles Lyman and Rich—I Resign as Captain, -but am Elected again, and Finally Resume Command—Mail Robbery—More -Disagreeable Storms—Meet a Handcart Company and Apostle George Q. -Cannon—Reach the Missouri River—Visit my Father and his Family—Go to -St. Joseph, Missouri—My first View of a Railway Train—At my old Home -in Brown County, Illinois—Journey Eastward by Rail—Arrive in New York -for the First Time—Find Friends. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLVI">CHAPTER LVI. -</a></p> -<p>Visit Various Places of Interest in New York and Vicinity—Arrival -of the Great Eastern—Preach at Williamsburg—New York's Celebration -of the Fourth—My Thirty-second Birthday—Secure Passports and Ocean -Passage—Crowded in the Steerage—Foggy and wet Weather—View of the -Irish Coast—Fleet of British Warships—Land in Liverpool—Assigned -to Birmingham Conference—In Birmingham—Listen to an Anti-Mormon -Lecture—Visiting from House to House as a Mormon Missionary—Places -of Interest—Transferred to Nottingham Conference—Preaching and -Visiting—Mission Travels—Go to London—See Notable Places—News of my -Daughter's Death—Birth of Another Daughter—Return to Nottingham. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLVII">CHAPTER LVII. -</a></p> -<p>Again at Missionary Labors—Baptisms—Become Quite Ill—Appointed -President of the Nottingham District, Embracing three -Conferences—Visited by Apostles A. M. Lyman, C. C. Rich and -Others—Settling Differences among Church Members—Attend a -Phrenological Lecture—Get a Chart—Go to Liverpool—In Conference -at Nottingham—My Pastorate Enlarged—Witness a Military -Review—More Baptisms—Visit Sheffield—Fixing my Name—Poverty in -Nottingham—Invited to take a Trip to Paris—Go to London—Have to -give up the Visit to France—In Poor Health—Return to Nottingham—See -Professor Blondin. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLVIII">CHAPTER LVIII. -</a></p> -<p>Prolonged Illness—Attend to my Duties with Difficulty—Letter Telling -of the Battle of Bulls Run—Witness an Execution by Hanging—Visit -from George Q. Cannon, Joseph F. Smith and Others—Death of the -Prince Consort—Go to Birmingham—Conference of the Priesthood In the -British Mission—Large Meeting In Odd Fellows' Hall, Birmingham—Again -at Nottingham—Visit Liverpool—Consult a Physician, but get little -Relief—See the Liverpool Grand National Races—Depravity Among Poorer -Classes in Liverpool—Again at Nottingham—Released to Return Home—Bid -the People Farewell—Display of their Affection for me—Report of my -Labors Published in the Millennial Star—On Board Ship—Placed in -Charge of the Company—Sail for America—Driven by Headwinds along -the Coasts of the Isle of Man, Wales, Ireland and Scotland—Severe -Seasickness—Get to Sea—Slow Voyage—Deaths and Burials at sea—Land -at New York—Guest of Hon. W. H. Hooper—Journey to Florence, -Nebraska—Captain and Guide of Independent Company—Reach Salt hake -City—Report to President Young—Again at Home. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLIX">CHAPTER LIX. -</a></p> -<p>Remove from Ogden to Salt Lake City at the Request of President -Young—Necessity for Preaching among the Saints—In the Employ of -President Young—On Another Mission, this time in Utah—-Preaching -and Lecturing—Build a House—Go to the Canyon to get Finishing -Lumber—Shot in Mistake for a Bear—My Wound very Serious—Taken to -Wanship to Receive Care—My Family Notified and Surgical Assistance -Obtained—Moved to my Home—In Bed Nine Months—Two Surgical -Operations—Grow Stronger—Employed at the Warm Springs—Dr. -Robinson—Abscesses in my Wounded Limb—Out of Employment—Go to the -California line to Examine a Gold Prospect—Perilous Journey—Indians -on the Warpath—Remarkable experience with a Band of Savages—Gift of -Speaking their Language—Unable to work the Gold Claim Because of Lack -of Water—Return to Salt Lake City—Go to the Gold Discoveries on the -Sweetwater—Discover a Placer claim—An Attempt to Rob me of It—Bush -for a Mine—Hold the Claim—Assailed by Hostile Indians—A Race for -Life—Three Men Killed—We Abandon Camp—Suffer with my Lame Limb—Lose -the Mining Claim—Hauling Coal and Produce—Almost Die—Confined to Bed -for Months—Amputation of my limb to save my Life—Recovery—Attend to -my Nursery—Advent of the Railway—Traveling and Preaching—A Slight -Sunstroke. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLX">CHAPTER LX. -</a></p> -<p>Called on a Mission to the United States—Journey Eastward—Visit -Relatives en Route—Reach New York—Measured for an Artificial -Limb—How It was Paid for—Visit and Preach—Meet Poor -Encouragement—Go to Boston—World's Peace Jubilee—Bunker Hill—Again -at New York—Released to Return Home—Back in Utah—Traveling and -Preaching—Sent for by President Young—Called on a Mission to -Arizona—Directed to Furnish Names of Others—Send the List—President -Young adds other Names—Set Apart for our Mission—Difficult to Collect -Money due me—Leave my Family Poorly Provided for but Trusting In the -Lord—Placed In Charge of the Mission—Letter of Instructions—Start -South—People Contribute Liberally—Traveling in Storm—Arrive at -Kanab—In Arizona—A Hard Journey—Marriage of my Daughter—Reach Lee's -Ferry on the Colorado—Crossing the River—Reach Moencoppy Wash—Decide -to Winter There—Explore the Vicinity—Meet Friendly Indians—Building -a House—Exploring the Little Colorado—A Difficult Trip—Description -of the Route—Find a Place for Another Settlement—San Francisco -Mountains—Fine Forest Growth—Caught in Deep Snow—Through with a -Perilous Journey—Decide to Return to Salt Lake City and Report—Heavy -Snow—Trip Homeward—Cordially Greeted by President Young—With my -Family. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLXI">CHAPTER LXI. -</a></p> -<p>Attend Meetings with the First Presidency and Apostles—More -Missionaries called to Arizona—Many Inquiries Regarding the -Mission—Outline the Route—Preparations for Travel—Start -South—Aided by Contributions—Reach Moencoppy—Meet Lot Smith -and Company—Baptisms—Start for the Little Colorado River—Guide -Missionary Companies to the Place we had Selected for Settlement—Lot -Smith Refuses to Acknowledge my Appointment from President Young -as President of the Mission—He Assumes Leadership of the new -Settlement—I Return with my Party to Moencoppy—Other Companies of -Missionary Settlers sustain my Presidency—My Health is Poor—Settlers -Discouraged—Cheer them up—Work of Frontier Life—Succor a Company -whose Water Supply is Exhausted—Taking up Land—Make a Long -Exploring Trip—Introduce Book of Mormon to Navajos—Return to -Moencoppy—Indians Dissatisfied—Go to Salt Lake City with a Delegation -of Navajo Chiefs—Their Supposed Grievances Settled—Tell President -Young I have come Home to Stay—He Sends me out Again—Directed to -Procure Volunteers—Letter of Instructions—Lecture, and take up -Contributions—Return Home—My Family Ill—Provide Supplies for -Them—Conditions Improve. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLXII">CHAPTER LXII. -</a></p> -<p>Again in Arizona—Settling Difficulties Among the People—Our -Reservoir Bursts—News of Notable Events—Prepare to Repel an -Indian Raid—Indians Quarrel, and the Trouble Passes Over—Funeral -at Moencoppy—Exploring Trip to the Southeast—A White Indian -Child—Meet the Head Chief of the Navajos—His Address, and -Proposition to Accompany me to Salt Lake City—Agree on a Date for -the Journey—Continue my Trip Over into New Mexico, then Return to -Moencoppy—Accusation Against me Disproved—Indians Gather to go to -Salt Lake City—Make the Trip—At President Young's Deathbed—Visit -the Indians—Honorable Release from my Mission—Resume Home Missionary -Labors—In Prison for Conscience Sake. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLXIII">CHAPTER LXIII. -</a></p> -<p>Visited by President Joseph F. Smith—Called on Another Mission to the -Society Islands—Prepare To Respond—A Blessing by Apostle Lorenzo -Snow—Appointed to Preside over the Society Islands Mission—Attempts -to Discourage me from Undertaking the Journey—Surprise Party by my -Children—Farewell Reception In the Ward Hall—Start on my Mission, -Accompanied by my Son and Others who had been Called—Voyage to -Tahiti—Madman on Board the Vessel—At Marquesas Islands Strange -Characters—Tattooed White Man—His Peculiar Career—Catching Sharks -—Arrive at Papeete—My Reception There—Meet Native Josephite -Preachers, who seem Confused—Elders from Utah Greet us—in Poor Health. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLXIV">CHAPTER LXIV. -</a></p> -<p>First Sabbath in Tahiti—Meet Several Persons whom I Knew over -Forty Years Before—How they Remembered me—Seek Permission to hold -Public Meetings—Widow of my Old Friend, John Layton, Calls on -me Other Friends—Preach to the Josephites—Governor Refuses to -Permit us to Hold Public Meetings—Get Advice of the United states -Consul—A Lawyer's Counsel—Josephites tell of B. F. Grouard—I -Explain how he had Turned into the wrong Path—The Church Never -Disorganized—Missionary Labors—Greeting a French Admiral—Early -Missionaries to Tahiti—Their Severe Experiences—Sixty-fourth -Anniversary of my Birth—Learn of Mormons who were Hanged for -Having Killed a Policeman in the Trouble when I was Arrested on -my First Mission to the Islands—Meet a Native of Pitcairn's -Island—His Story—Visit Tautila—Severe Voyage—A Baptism—Sail for -Tubuoi—Among Strangers Celebration of a French Fete Day—Dine with -the Governor—People Become less Unfriendly to us—Breaking of the -Clouds—Baptize Twenty-four Persons—Encouraging Results of Missionary -Efforts. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLXV">CHAPTER LXV. -</a></p> -<p>Miraculous Healing—Meet and Confound the Josephites—Further -Missionary Success—Meet a Native who was Present when I was -Sentenced to be Burned—Elder John Layton's Grave—Arrange to Return -to Tahiti—Disappointed—Preach a Funeral Sermon—Forbidden to Hold -Public Meetings—Blind Woman one Hundred and Twenty Years Old Her -Testimony—Administer to her for her Eyesight, and she Is Enabled to -see a Little—She Praises the Lord—Preaching and Baptizing—Sail -for Papeete—An odd Cargo—Hard Voyage—Held by a Calm—Land on -Tahiti—Sail for Avaroa—On a Well-ordered Schooner—Call at Various -Islands—Lance a Carbuncle—Christmas Day at Sea—Watermelons—A -Beautiful Residence and Cordial Welcome—Perform Three Marriage -Ceremonies—Conference of Saints in the Tuamotu Islands—Meet a Native -Chilean—Visit Various Places—Public Welcome—Fishing—On the Island -of Anaa—Visit Where I was Imprisoned—Graves of those Concerned In -the Trouble Then—Warrant Served on me—Summoned to the Government -House—Warned Against Creating a Disturbance. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLXVI">CHAPTER LXVI. -</a></p> -<p>Preaching and Visiting—Pearl Fishing—Place of my Arrest in -1851—Accident to a Young Man—Incident with the Governor of Anaa—See -a Leper—Capture of an Eel—Conference on Anaa—Time of Dedication -of Salt Lake Temple—Specially Interesting Meetings—New Elders from -Utah—Start back to Tahiti—Another Funeral Sermon—Meet the French -Governor of the Tuamotu Islands—His Cordial Greeting—Arrive at -Papeete—Appointments for the New Missionaries—Fall to get a Passage -to Tubuoi—My Health Very Poor—Learn of the Dedication of the Salt -Lake Temple—Elders Unanimous in the Decision that I should Return Home -Because of my Illness—I Demur—Conclude to go—Trouble on Anaa—My -Sixty-fifth birthday—Notable Kindness of a Native child—Sail from -Papeete—Difficulty In Landing from Small Boats—In the Society -Islands—Reach San Francisco—Arrive in Salt Lake City—Report the -Successful Opening of the Society Islands Mission. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLXVII">CHAPTER LXVII. -</a></p> -<p>Invited To the Midwinter Fair, San Francisco, and Accept—Journey to -California—Kind Treatment Received—An Honored Guest—Write a Pamphlet -on the Discovery of Gold at Sutter's Mill Race—First Accurate Account -Published—Again at Home—Preparing my Autobiography for Publication—A -Great Task—Progress of the Work—My History of the First Mission to -the Pacific Islands—Utah's Semi-Centennial Jubilee—Not a Utah Pioneer -of 1847—Pioneer Just the Same—Mormon Battalion Recognized in the Utah -Celebration—Invited to join In the Parade—Comparative Narrowness of -Committee's Courtesy—Letters from California Regarding the Pioneer -Celebration there in 1898—Invited with three Others of the Mormon -Battalion, to be Special Guests as the Survivors of the Party that -Discovered Gold In California in 1848—Appreciation of the Courtesy -Extended by Californians. -</p> -<p class="centered"><a href="#CHAPTERLXVIII">CHAPTER LXVIII. -</a></p> -<p>Trip to California—Met by the Committee on Reception of the Society -of California Pioneers—Received with Great Cordiality—Honored Guests -at California's Golden Jubilee—The Celebration—Courtesies Extended -to Mormon Battalion Members Present at the Discovery of Gold—Return -Home—Resolutions by Society of California Pioneers—Report of -Reception committee of California Golden Jubilee—Sketch of -Marshall's Surviving Companions—Complete my Autobiography—My Son -Homer Accidentally Killed—The Old Folks—Publication of Life of a -Pioneer—Conclusion. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="ILLUSTRATIONS"></a>ILLUSTRATIONS. -</h2> -<p><a href="#brown">Portrait of James S. Brown</a> -</p> -<p><a href="#fire">Fire Prepared to Roast the Missionary—Sentenced to Death</a> -</p> -<p><a href="#typical">A Typical Tahitian with his Burden of Bread Fruit and Feii</a> -</p> -<p><a href="#war">A War Party of Shoshones Dancing around their Prisoners while in the -Chief's Lodge</a> -</p> -<p><a href="#surrounded">Surrounded by a Pack of Hungry Wolves</a> -</p> -<p><a href="#chased">Chased By a War Party</a> -</p> -<p><a href="#marquesas">Marquesas Fire Dancers</a> -</p> - - -<h2><a name="LIFEOFAPIONEER"></a>LIFE OF A PIONEER -<br>BEING -THE AUTOBIOGRAPHY -OF -<br>JAMES S. BROWN. -</h2> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERI"></a>CHAPTER I. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">HOME OF THE AUTHOR—A CAREER OF THRILLING EXPERIENCES—HIS BIRTH -AND PARENTAGE—EARLY AVOCATIONS—MIGRATION PROM NORTH CAROLINA -TO ILLINOIS—LIFE ON THE FRONTIER—DANGERS TO EARLY SETTLERS—A -FRONTIERSMAN—FATHER'S ADVICE—MORE SETTLERS COME—CHURCHES AND -SCHOOLS—LIMITED OPPORTUNITIES—FROZEN FEET—UNIMPRESSIONABLE TO THE -PREACHING OF THE TIME—TALK OF A NEW RELIGION, PROPHETS, MIRACLES, -ETC.—PERSECUTION OF THE NEW CHURCH—"SHOWERS OF STARS"—POPULAR -ADVERSE VIEWS OF THE MORMONS—THE MORMONS DRIVEN FROM MISSOURI -INTO ILLINOIS—MORMON ELDER COMES TO PREACH—CONVERTS UNCLE -JAMES BROWN—PREACHES AGAIN—PREPARATIONS TO MOB THE ELDER—HIS -SCRIPTURAL DOCTRINE DISCONCERTS ENEMIES AND SECURES HIM FRIENDS—HIS -DISCOURSE—EFFECT ON YOUNG JAMES S. BROWN OF THIS FIRST GOSPEL SERMON -TO HIM—HIS TESTIMONY TO THE SPIRIT AND TRUTH OF THE ELDER'S MESSAGE. -</p> -<p>THE subject and author of this Life-Sketch of a Pioneer is James -Stephens Brown, now (1900) in his seventy-second year, a resident of -Salt Lake City, Utah, his home less than a quarter of a mile from and -within the summer morning's shadow of the majestic Temple of the Lord -erected on that spot which he beheld a barren and desolate wilderness, -on his entrance into the valley of the Great Salt Lake, over half a -century ago. His life has been one of thrilling experiences—more than -ordinarily falls to the lot even of a pioneer settler in the Great -West—a life in which hardship and perils by sea and land, among dusky -savages and with white men, have contributed largely to the events -of his career; withal one in which he has had abundant occasion to -recognize and acknowledge the power and protecting care of an Almighty -Providence. -</p> -<p>It is at the urgent request and advice of valued friends, familiar -to a considerable extent with my life and labors, that I place this -autobiography in form to be easily accessible to those desirous of -perusing it; and I am not unmindful of the fact that this simple -recital of events is not only of intense interest in numerous episodes -which it records, but is of historic value in being a plain and -truthful narrative of the personal experiences of a western pioneer. -</p> -<p>I was born on Independence Day, July 4, 1828, in Davidson County, North -Carolina, U.S.A. My father was Daniel Brown; he was the youngest son -of his father's family, and was born in Rowan County, North Carolina, -June 30, 1804. My father's father was James Brown, a native of Rowan -County, North Carolina, 1757 being the year of his birth. His wife -was the widow of a Revolutionary War soldier named Emerson, who was -killed in the war for American independence, leaving his wife and -two children, Margaret and John Emerson. My grandfather James Brown -married the widow Emerson, who bore him nine children—three sons and -six daughters—Jane, Polly, Nancy, Susan, Patsy, William, Obedience, -James (captain of Company C, Mormon Battalion), and Daniel (my father); -her maiden name was Mary Williams. All the family had an excellent -reputation, being upright, thrifty, and good and industrious citizens. -</p> -<p>With these introductory remarks, I will proceed to an account of my -boyhood's days. I was reared at the farming and stock business, also -at getting out saw timber and wood for cooperware. My parents had -moved from North Carolina to Brown County, Illinois, in the autumn of -1831, and had purchased an extensive tract of land. We were a large -family; the country was then wild and with very few inhabitants, and -the climate was unhealthy; so it was with great effort that father and -mother succeeded in making a home and gathering about them the comforts -of life. -</p> -<p>We were frontier settlers, and while father had his pick of land, he -also had the hardships and privations of a new country to endure. There -were no churches or schoolhouses nearer than ten miles from our home, -and grist mills and blacksmith shops were equally distant. Thus the -family was reared without the advantage of schools, or of church-going -religious training. But we were thoroughly acquainted with border -life, with hunting, fishing, and all the sports indulged in by hardy -pioneers, and even learned to shake terribly from the ague, and burn -with fever spells, while we were well dosed with quinine and calomel, -and had enormous doctor's bills to pay. -</p> -<p>In our operations we trained horses and cattle to work, stocked our own -plows, made our own harrows, rakes and forks, braided our own whips -from the pelts of wild beasts which we ourselves dressed, raised our -own honey, and made our own sugar, with some to sell. We had a good -sugar orchard, and plenty of wild fruits and nuts for the gathering. As -the first settlers of new countries are more or less subject to dangers -from outlaws, wild beasts, and savage men, we found it important to be -well armed, and on the alert day and night to defend life and liberty. -</p> -<p>Thus we learned the use of firearms and the tomahawk. My father was -an expert with the old Kentucky rifle, and some of his boys were not -far behind him; he trained them always to shoot with a rising sight, -to keep cool, and always to have their powder dry and plenty of it. He -also taught us to tell the truth, and used to say: "Be honest, stand up -for your rights, and fight for your country and friends." -</p> -<p>In the year 1835, people began to settle in around us, and then the -circuit riders, as they were called—the ministers—commenced to call -around and hold meetings in private houses. There were Baptists, -Freewill Baptists, Methodists, Campbellites, and others. From 1836 to -1838 some small churches and schoolhouses were built, so that we began -to get spiritual food, such as it was; and also some schooling, with -the benefit of the hickory rod that always was kept "in soak," so to -speak, and woe to the unruly student when it was called into service! -</p> -<p>So far as the author is concerned, he managed to get along without the -rod the short time he was permitted to attend school. He was kept close -at work on the farm in summer, and in the winter months was engaged -getting out timber and hauling to market the farm products. Once his -feet were frozen so that he lost every nail from his toes. As to the -religious teachings of the time, there was a great deal of thundering -and thundering, but it failed to indicate any lightening of the -author's path, for he fished and hunted on the Sabbath day, just the -same. -</p> -<p>Some time in the '30s we began to hear a little about false prophets, a -new religion, miracles, money-diggers, thieves, liars, miracle-workers, -deceivers, witches, speaking in tongues and interpretation of the same, -walking on the water, and visits from angels. As time went on, all -these things were combined to form a grand excuse for raising mobs to -expel the new Church from the borders of civilization. Then came news -of murder, rapine, house-burning, and destruction of towns and cities -in Missouri. There were great "showers" of stars in the firmament -about this time. On popular rumor, and from hearing only one side of -the story, almost everybody decided that such a previously unheard-of -people as the Mormons ought to be shot or burned at the stake. This was -the sentiment to be found on every hand. -</p> -<p>As a culmination of these things came the tidings that the Missourians -had driven the Mormons from the state of Missouri into Illinois. A -little later, and a Latter-day Saint Elder named Jacob Pfoutz entered -the neighborhood of my Uncle James Brown's home, converted him, his -wife, and several of the neighbors. This Elder was brought down by my -uncle to see his two sisters, Aunts Polly and Nancy Brown. -</p> -<p>Elder Pfoutz was given permission to preach in the schoolhouse about -three miles from my father's house. The news spread like a prairie fire -that the Mormons had come and would preach on Friday. I think this was -in the autumn of 1840. I was at my aunt's at the time, and decided to -go and hear the strange preacher. Like most of the people, I went out -of curiosity, more than anything else. I had just turned my twelfth -year, and had begun to take some interest in religion, going to every -meeting for which I could obtain permission from my parents, yet not -thinking for a moment but that all religions were right. -</p> -<p>At the first meeting held by the Mormon, the house was pretty well -filled. Some who attended did so with the thought that after the -services were over they would tar and feather the Elder and ride him on -a rail, as such things had been indulged in in Missouri, and threats -had been made freely. Others were going to confound him, and still -others wanted to see the fun, as they said. -</p> -<p>The preacher was a plain-spoken man of thirty-five to forty years old, -of German descent. He was plainly dressed, and without that urbane -polish which ministers usually have. When he began his discourse, -he raised up very calmly and deliberately and read from Matthew, -seventh chapter, verses fifteen to twenty. He spoke from that text -and corroborating passages, supporting his argument throughout by -scripture. At the conclusion of his address, some of the people said -they did not want to mob a man who preached like that, while others -"sniffed" their noses and tried to get up a sneering laugh, but failed. -The Elder was invited to my aunt's house and was granted permission to -preach on Sunday in their oak-grove, while several of the religiously -inclined followed him to his stopping place and plied him with -questions. -</p> -<p>As to myself, it seemed that I had not only heard it thunder, but I -had seen the lightning and felt it through every fibre of my system, -from the crown of my head to the soles of my feet. I was revived as -the showers of heaven revive the parched earth and impart life to -the languishing vegetation. Notwithstanding the fact that I knew -the Latter-day Saints, or Mormons, were looked upon as filth, in -fact as even worse than rubbish, that they had been called the very -off-scourings of the earth, that they were regarded as deserving to be -put to death, yet from that very day I received their doctrine in or by -the spirit. -</p> -<p>Now that sixty years have rolled by since the events here narrated; -that I have passed through mobbings, robbings, fines and penalties; -have been banished and once sentenced to death; Paul-like have fought -with wild beasts, have been shipwrecked and almost starved; have -famished on thirsty deserts; have had the scalping-knife wielded over -my head while the Indian warwhoop saluted my ears and the savage -warrior danced with tomahawk in hand, exulting over the victim intended -to be slain and scalped in trophy of victory; have laid in dungeons -for my religion's sake—thanks be to God that I yet live and bear a -faithful testimony of the truth and spirit that possessed my soul from -that first Gospel sermon I ever heard. I have listened to ministers of -various Christian denominations advocate good and virtuous principles, -but I never knew any of them to preach the fullness of the Gospel of -the Lord Jesus as did that humble Mormon Elder. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERII"></a>CHAPTER II. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">PERSECUTED BY PLAYMATES—GIVE THEM AN EFFECTIVE CHECK—FIGHT -WITH WILD BEASTS—PARENTS JOIN THE MORMONS—THE AUTHOR HOLDS -BACK—ASSASSINATION OF JOSEPH AND HYRUM SMITH—MORMONS LEAVE ILLINOIS -FOR THE WEST—EXCITING TIMES—MY WINTER'S WORK—FATHER DECIDES TO -WAIT A WHILE BEFORE LEAVING ILLLNOIS—MY DETERMINATION TO GO WITH THE -MORMONS—CONFIDE A SECRET TO MY MOTHER—A NEW CONSULTATIONS—CHANGE IN -THE FAMILY PLANS—FATHER PREPARES TO START—GIVES ME PERMISSION TO -GO—THINKS OF LEAVING ME BECAUSE OF MY ILLNESS—I FEEL TO PREFER DEATH -TO BEING LEFT BEHIND. -</p> -<p>FROM the very day my parents entertained the Latter-day Saint Elders in -their house my former playmates in the neighborhood commenced a crusade -on me, calling me a Mormon, and many hard names, whenever they met me. -When we gathered at the mill pond, our usual place of bathing, they -would baptize me, as they called it, in the name of Beelzebub; but I -called it drowning, for it seemed to me that when three or four of them -got me under the water they never knew when to let me up. Then when I -got out of the water they would mockingly "lay hands" on me in the name -of Beelzebub, going through a ceremony and at short intervals calling -"Pluck," when they would pull my hair with a severe twitch, and would -spit on me and laugh. Once my clothes were taken and thrown into a bed -of itching nettles, and when I tried to get them out with a pole I was -pushed in among the nettles. At the gristmill, also, they would punish -me in a shameful manner. At last I became so provoked that I went after -them with a strong jack-knife. Though some of them were eighteen or -nineteen years old, they ran off, fully convinced that I would have -hurt them if I could have caught them. The miller interposed and gave -them a severe reprimand. From that time they never tried to punish -me. My medicine had worked well, and thereafter I was looked on as a -leading boy among them. -</p> -<p>During this period I had some perilous experiences with wild animals. -My father had a pet deer, and a bulldog owned by the family caught -it by the nose; I tried to get the dog off, when the frightened -deer kicked and tore my clothes almost off, lacerating my flesh -considerably. Soon after this the deer was followed, in the woods near -the house, by a large buck, which my father shot. The animal's shoulder -was broken, and I followed it to the millpond and sprang into the water -to hold it. As I seized its horn the buck, which had a footing, threw -me around, lacerating my left hand considerably. For a time my life -was in peril from the wild animal, but I struggled and finally used my -pocket knife on its throat. Some time after this episode a man named -John Bos shot and wounded a big buck near our home. It being night, he -came to the house for assistance, and father and I went out. The dogs -reached the buck, which charged on them, and as it was seized by the -nose by one of them father and I caught the buck's hind feet. It kicked -us free, and I had a close call from being severely if not fatally -hurt; but we returned to the attack, and finally secured the game. -</p> -<p>As time went on the older people in our neighborhood took interest in -the Mormon Elders, and some of them joined the new Church, while others -became very intolerant and hostile. My parents and my eldest brother -and sister united with the Mormons; yet I held back, for though fully -in sympathy with what my relatives had done I did not consider myself -worthy to join, for I thought that to be a church member I must have -some great experience and see great lights, such as I had heard people -testify of. Thus I stayed out and watched developments. -</p> -<p>Finally, in July, 1844, the news reached us that the Prophet Joseph -Smith and his brother Hyrum, the Patriarch, had been assassinated -in Carthage jail by a mob; also, that the Mormons had been ordered -to leave the state, and were going either to the Rocky Mountains, -California, or Vancouver Island. In fact, there were many kinds of -rumors afloat, and there was great excitement. -</p> -<p>In the fall of 1845 permission was given me to go to a river town five -miles from home, to work at a slaughter and packing house, where my -cousin, Homer Jackson, and I got employment that season. We heard that -the Mormons were going to start west the next spring—in fact, their -purpose was a topic of frequent conversation. We returned home in the -latter part of January, 1846, and soon learned that the Church leaders -were leaving Nauvoo for a new home in the unknown western wilds, and -that every true Mormon was expected to join them as soon as possible. -</p> -<p>Shortly after this, father called a family meeting to consider what -to do. It was a great venture to start out with a large family on -a journey of a thousand miles or more into an unknown wilderness, -among savage tribes; so after long discussion of the matter, it was -decided to be too great an undertaking at that particular time. It was -regarded as inadvisable to take the chances of starving to death in the -wilderness. Besides, property was very low, and it was folly to sell -out a good home at so great a sacrifice as seemed necessary. -</p> -<p>When this decision was reached, father turned to me and said: "Well, -Jimmy, what do you think about it?" I answered that where the Mormons -went I would go, and where they died I would die. This was the first -time I had been asked a question, and as I was not a member of the -Church my reply surprised the others. Being inquired of as to how I -would go, I suggested that perhaps someone wanted a teamster, or maybe -there was some widow who would take a boy for his labor in return -for food and clothing. Father asked if I would leave the family and -go out west and starve; and he suggested that as I did not belong to -the Mormons they would not have me. To this I said I would join them, -and that my mind was made up to go with the Mormons at all hazards. -Then father ordered me to keep quiet, saying he would thrash me if I -talked of leaving home. This closed the discussion, for in those days -thrashing was the great panacea for disobedience, whether at home or -in the school room. But that threat clinched my resolve to go with the -Mormons even at the risk of life, for I was thoroughly satisfied of the -justice of their cause. -</p> -<p>I said no more then, but at the first opportunity told my mother that -soon I would come up missing, as I was going with the Mormons, and -should hide if searched for, if I had to go among the Indians. Mother -said I would starve, but my reply was that I could live on what others -did. My mother was convinced that I would go, and her mother's heart -was as so touched that she could not withhold my secret from my father, -who believed, too, that I would do as I had said. -</p> -<p>One evening, soon afterward, I overheard them talking of the matter. -Father said it would break up the family if they did not move west, for -Jim certainly would go; they were satisfied that the Mormon doctrines -were true, and thought that perhaps they had better make an effort to -sell out and move. My heart was filled with joy at these words. -</p> -<p>When morning came, father set out to buy oxen, and was successful. He -also sold his farm but reserved the crop, as he had to wait till after -harvest for part of his pay for the land. He thought that by fitting -out two good teams, and providing wagons and tools, he and Alexander -Stephens (mother's brother) and two of his sisters (old maids), and -myself could go out into Iowa, where we could put in some corn and -build a cabin or two. Then my uncle and I could do the rest while -father returned, took care of the harvest, and brought up the family, -when we would follow the Church as best we could until a resting place -was found. -</p> -<p>The way now seemed open. My father felt encouraged, and all went well -until a few days before the time for starting, when I was stricken down -with fever and ague, and shook or chilled every other day till the -first of May, at which time all was ready for moving. Efforts were made -to persuade me that I could not stand the journey, but should allow one -of the other boys to go in my stead. But I could not see it in that -light. While father was talking of the matter to mother I overheard -him say, "We will have to let James go, for he will not be satisfied -without, but he will get enough of it when he has had a few days, and -has camped out and shaken a few times with the ague." I thought to -myself, "You are mistaken, father, for I would rather die than be left -behind." -</p> - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERIII"></a>CHAPTER III. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">START FOR NAUVOO—TAKEN SEVERELY ILL—THE LORD ANSWERS MY PRAYER -FOR RELIEF—PASS THROUGH CARTHAGE—IN NAUVOO "THE BEAUTIFUL," -BUT ALMOST DESERTED CITY—SCENE ON THE IOWA SHORE—CROSS THE -MISSISSIPPI—CURIOUS MAKE-UP OF THE EXILES' TEAMS—THE BAD ROADS—STUCK -IN THE MUD—REPAIRING CAMPS—GOOD ORDER MAINTAINED—UNNECESSARY KILLING -OF GAME FORBIDDEN—REACH GRAND RIVER AND PUT IN A CROP—LEARN OF THE -CALL FOR THE MORMON BATTALION—APOSTLES AS RECRUITING OFFICERS—CALL -FOR VOLUNTEERS—RESPONSE BY THE CAMP—RECEIVED INTO THE CHURCH BY -BAPTISM—FILLED WITH THE LOVE OF THE GOSPEL—GET THE SPIRIT TO -ENLIST—CONSULT WITH MY RELATIVES AND EZRA T. BENSON—AN ELDER'S -PROMISE—JOIN THE MORMON BATTALION. -</p> -<p>MAY 1st, 1846, was a pleasant day, and we made our start for Nauvoo, -passing through Versailles to a point some ten miles from home to the -first night's camp. I was encouraged to think I had kept so well, but -about ten o'clock the second day I began to shake, and my teeth fairly -to crack. I prayed earnestly to the Lord to heal me. I was quite weak, -and all thought me very sick. But that was the last "shake" I had, for -I began to get well from that time. -</p> -<p>It was on May 4th, I believe, that we reached Nauvoo, having passed -through Mount Sterling, the county seat of Brown County, also through -Carthage, where the Prophet Joseph Smith and his brother the Patriarch -Hyrum Smith had been assassinated. We found the roads so muddy and such -hard traveling that we did not make more than fifteen miles a day. When -we came in sight of the Temple at Nauvoo our hearts were filled with -mingled joy and sorrow—joy that we had seen the Temple of the Lord, -and sorrow that the Saints had been so cruelly driven from it. -</p> -<p>As we passed through the city we saw many houses which had been -abandoned—indeed, the city itself seemed almost deserted. At some of -the houses stood covered wagons, into which people were packing goods -preparatory to their flight into the wilderness, they knew not where. -</p> -<p>Looking westward across the great Mississippi River, we saw long trains -of wagons strung out over the high rolling prairie. The country was -new, and the roads muddy, so we rested three or four days, visiting the -Temple and viewing the city that was beautiful for situation, but now -was left with few inhabitants. Everything in and about the city that -formerly hummed with industry and life was now lonely, saddened, and -forlorn, and silent but for the preparations for flight by the remnant -therein. -</p> -<p>About the 8th of May we crossed the great "father of waters" and -joined the "rolling kingdom" on its westward journey. We found friends -and acquaintances, made up a company of our own, and passed and were -repassed on the trip. Climbing an eminence from which we looked east -and west, covered wagons could be seen as far as the eye could reach. -The teams were made up of oxen, milch cows, two-year-old steers and -heifers, and very few horses and mules. The teamsters were of both -sexes, and comprised young and old. The people who could walk did so, -and many were engaged in driving loose stock. -</p> -<p>Hundreds of teams stuck in the mud, and we had to double-up and help -one another out. Many times we had to wade in mud half to our knees and -lift our wagons out of the mire. In this the women not infrequently -would join their husbands and sons, and the old adage came true in -numerous instances—women for a dead lift; when they plunged into the -mud and put their shoulders to the wheels the men were urged to do -double effort, and the wagon always rolled out and onward, at the rate -of twelve to fifteen miles per day. -</p> -<p>At every creek we found campers, some repairing wagons, yokes, chains, -etc., doctoring sick cattle, washing clothes, or helping forward -friends whose teams were weak. In all this there was excellent order, -for the camps were organized in a general way by tens, fifties and -hundreds. Peace and harmony prevailed all along the line. Evening -prayers were attended to in each camp. There was much singing, mostly -of sacred hymns or sentimental songs; and from no quarter could coarse -songs be heard. Sometimes the camp would meet in a sociable dance in -the evenings, to drive dull care away; and then there always was good -order and the most perfect friendship and peace. -</p> -<p>The camps were instructed not to kill game of any kind to waste its -flesh; they were not even to kill a snake on the road, for it was their -calling to establish peace on earth, and good will toward man and -beast. Thus all went on in peace and order. -</p> -<p>At one of the headwaters of the Grand River, Iowa, we found some -hundreds of people putting in gardens and field crops (corn and -potatoes). A few cabins had been built, so father and our party decided -to stop there. We put in a few acres of corn and garden stuff, then -father returned to Illinois to bring up the rest of the family, leaving -my Uncle Alexander Stephens and myself to look after the crop and -stock, which we did faithfully. -</p> -<p>About the 6th of July we heard that President Young and several of the -Twelve Apostles had returned from the most advanced companies, and -that there would be a meeting held at the white oak grove—the usual -place of meeting—the next day. There was also a rumor in camp that a -government recruiting officer had come to enlist volunteers, for the -United States had declared war against Mexico. -</p> -<p>Of course this latter tidings was a great surprise, as the Mormons had -been denied protection against mob violence and had been forced beyond -the borders of civilization in the United States, and our camps were -stretched out in an Indian country, from the Mississippi River to the -Missouri. Surprised as we were at the government's demand, we were -still more so to think that our leaders would entertain for a moment -the idea of encouraging compliance therewith. Yet rumor said that -President Young and the prominent men with him had come as recruiting -officers as well. -</p> -<p>All who could be spared from the tents went eagerly to the White Oak -grove, and there learned that the rumors were true. The United States -government demanded that a battalion of five hundred men be raised -by the Mormon Church, then fleeing from mob violence for the want of -protection by that government whose right and duty it was to protect -them. The men of the moving camp were required to leave their families -in the wilderness, almost unprotected, and go to a foreign land to -fight their country's battles. -</p> -<p>But wonders never cease. The leading men among the Mormons—Brigham -Young, Heber C. Kimball, Wilford Woodruff, and others of the Twelve -Apostles—stood before the people and called for volunteers to engage -in the Mexican war, saying that the five hundred men must be raised if -it took the whole strength of the camp to do it. If the young men would -not enlist, the middle-aged and old men would, said President Young; -the demand of our country should be met if it took the Twelve Apostles -and the High Priests. -</p> -<p>At the close of the meeting there were many who were enthused, while -others appeared confused and did not seem to catch the spirit of -the matter. I was not yet a member of the Church, but all the old -stories of the war of the Revolution and that of 1812, with the later -Black Hawk Indian wars, brightened in my memory so that the spirit -of the patriots awoke within me, and although I was averse to war -and bloodshed, I had a desire to serve my country in any legitimate -way. Yet I felt that, as I was under age, and, as my Uncle Alexander -Stephens had decided to enlist, the responsibility of my father's -affairs now rested on me. -</p> -<p>My uncle and I were standing by the roadside talking over the -situation, when along came Ezra T. Benson, who had been recently -selected as one of the Twelve Apostles; there also came Richmond -Louder, one of my associates from boyhood, and Matthew Caldwell. -Richmond Louder and I had talked previously of being baptized together. -He said they were going down to attend to that sacred ordinance, and -invited me to accompany them, which I did gladly. We went to the south -fork of the Grand River, and with Uncle A. Stephens as a witness were -baptized. This was on the 7th of July, 1846. Then we went to the house -of General Charles C. Rich, where we were confirmed, I think under the -hands of Elders Willard Richards and Ezra T. Benson, in the presence of -President Brigham Young and others of the Twelve Apostles. -</p> -<p>This done, the happiest feeling of my life came over me. I thought I -would to God that all the inhabitants of the earth could experience -what I had done as a witness of the Gospel. It seemed to me that, if -they could see and feel as I did, the whole of humankind would join -with us in one grand brotherhood, and the universe would be prepared -for the great Millennial morn. -</p> -<p>When we returned to camp, my aunts partook of the same feeling that -had filled me. Then I got the spirit to enlist, and after a short -consultation with those most concerned they advised me to lay the -matter before Ezra T. Benson. Accordingly, the next morning Uncle A. -Stephens and I went over to the grove. I told the Elder my feelings, -and the responsibilities left upon me by my father. Elder Benson said -the Spirit's promptings to me were right, and I had started right. He -told me to go on, saying I would be blessed, my father would find -no fault with me, his business would not suffer, and I would never be -sorry for the action I had taken or for my enlistment. Every word he -said to me has been fulfilled to the very letter. -</p> -<p>Uncle Alexander Stephens and I then went to a tent where men were -giving in their names as volunteers. We handed in our names, and were -enrolled as members of the historic Mormon Battalion. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERIV"></a>CHAPTER IV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">START FOR THE BATTALION RENDEZVOUS—A JOURNEY OF HARDSHIP—IN THE -MORMONS' CAMP ON THE MISSOURI RIVER—FIRST EXPERIENCES IN THE -ARMY—BLESSED BY APOSTLES—PROPHETIC ADDRESS BY PRESIDENT BRIGHAM -YOUNG—THE BATTALION STARTS ON ITS LONG JOURNEY—DOING CAMP -DUTY—HEAVY STORMS AND INSUFFICIENT RATIONS—HARD EXPERIENCES—AT FORT -LEAVENWORTH—MEXICAN MULES AS A CURE FOR EGOTISM—COLONEL ALLEN TAKEN -ILL—ON THE SANTA FE ROAD—SUFFERING FROM THIRST—SICKNESS AMONG THE -TROOPS—DR. G.B. SANDERSON, A TYRANNICAL QUACK—ARMY MERCHANTS—ORDER -OF MARCHING. -</p> -<p>IT was about one o'clock in the afternoon of July 9 when we bade our -friends an affectionate farewell, and started on what we understood to -be a journey of one hundred and thirty-eight miles, to join the army -of the United States at our country's call. We had provisions enough -put up to last us on our trip. The night previous our old clothes -had received the necessary repairs. Our preparations were hasty and -incomplete, for we had been told (by an unauthorized person, as we -afterwards learned) that when we got to Sarpy's Point, on the Missouri -River, we would draw uniforms, clothing, blankets, and rations, and -would have to cast aside our old clothes. -</p> -<p>Our initial trip was begun without a blanket to wrap ourselves in, -as we thought we could find shelter in the camps along the line of -march. But in this we were mistaken, for everybody seemed to have -all they could do to shelter their own. The first night we camped on -the bank of a small stream, where we fell in with twelve or fifteen -other volunteers who had not so much as a bit of bread, but plenty of -assurance in asking for what others had. We divided with them, then -scraped what leaves we could and laid down thereon, with a chunk of -wood for our pillow. Next morning we divided our last morsel of food -with what we learned later were the very roughest element of the -battalion. -</p> -<p>For five days we journeyed, much of the time in heavy rain and deep -mud, sleeping on the wet ground without blankets or other kind of -bedding, and living on elm bark and occasionally a very small ration -of buttermilk handed to us by humane sisters as we passed their tents. -We thought our experience was pretty rough, but I do not remember that -I heard murmuring from the lips of anyone, for we felt that we were in -the service of God and our country. -</p> -<p>When we reached the Missouri River we found that some four hundred men -had rendezvoused there. In the camps of the Latter-day Saints, close -by, there were some thousands of men, women and children; a brush -bowery had been erected, where the people met for religious worship. -We soon found friends who welcomed us to camp, and we were invited to -a social dance and farewell party. We had excellent music, the best -dinner that the country could afford, and, above all, a spirit of -brotherly love and union that I have never seen surpassed. With all on -the altar of sacrifice for God and His kingdom and for our country, it -seemed that everything and everybody looked to the accomplishment of -one grand, common cause, not a dissenting voice being heard from anyone. -</p> -<p>July 16, 1846, we were mustered into the service of the United States, -and, under command of Col. James Allen, marched down the bluffs to the -Missouri bottoms, where we camped in a cottonwood grove. Some flour -and other provisions were issued to us, and we peeled the bark off -a tree for a bread tray or kneading trough. Some rolled their dough -around sticks and stuck or held it before the fire, and others baked -their bread in the ashes; for we had not yet drawn any camp equipage. -We received one blanket apiece, and had that charged up, the amount to -be taken out of our pay. -</p> -<p>I am not writing a history of the Mormon Battalion, but am relating my -individual experiences in that detachment of the United States army, as -I recollect them; so it will not be expected of me to tell much of what -others saw, or to narrate events as they remember them, but as they -impressed themselves upon my mind at the time of occurrence. -</p> -<p>Just before our last farewell to friends at the Missouri River, and -preparatory to taking up our line of march, we were formed into a -hollow square, and President Brigham Young, with Heber C. Kimball and -others of the Apostles, came to our camp, rode into the square, and -gave us parting blessings and instructions. The words of President -Young, as they fastened themselves upon my memory, were in substance as -follows: "Now, brethren, you are going as soldiers at your country's -call. You will travel in a foreign land, in an enemy's country; and -if you will live your religion, obey your officers, attend to your -prayers, and as you travel in an enemy's land, hold sacred the property -of the people, never taking anything that does not belong to you only -in case of starvation; though you may be traveling in an enemy's -country, do not disturb fruit orchards or chicken coops or beehives, do -not take anything but what you pay for—although it is customary for -soldiers to plunder their enemies in time of war, it is wrong—always -spare life when possible; if you obey this counsel, attending to -your prayers to the Lord, I promise you in the name of the Lord God -of Israel that not one soul of you shall fall by the hands of the -enemy. You will pass over battlefields; battles will be fought in your -front and in your rear, on your right hand and on your left, and your -enemies shall flee before you. Your names shall be held in honorable -remembrance to the latest generation." -</p> -<p>Heber C. Kimball and other prominent men of the Church confirmed what -President Young had said, and all bade us an affectionate farewell, -with "God bless you and spare your lives." -</p> -<p>Thus we set out in good cheer on our journey of more than two thousand -miles in a section of the continent wholly unknown to us. -</p> -<p>In the month of July, from about the 20th, we passed down through the -towns and villages along the river, for two hundred miles, to Fort -Leavenworth. The heat was excessive, and the roads dusty, when we -started out. A great part of the way we had only a small ration of -food, for it did not seem to be in the country, and we suffered much -from want. We took regular turns in standing guard around the camp and -in herding the stock. Heavy rains came on, and for several days we -pressed forward amid such terrible storms as I never had experienced -before. With less than half rations, and that badly or insufficiently -cooked, from lack of proper utensils and experience, and having to lie -on the ground without any bedding save one blanket each, it is a wonder -the entire camp were not down sick instead of a few. But with all this -hardship there were no desertions and few complaints. Everything seemed -to move harmoniously among the men. -</p> -<p>The command crossed the river at Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, and soon -afterwards we drew a tent to each mess of six men. This afforded us -great relief at nights, protecting us from the dews and rain; but in -the daytime the whiteness of the tents seemed to intensify the heat so -that there was no comfort in them. While at Fort Leavenworth we washed -our old clothing and made ourselves as comfortable as possible. Soon we -drew camp equipage and rations from the government. We got flintlock -muskets, and accoutrements consisting of bayonets, cartridge-boxes, -straps and belts, canteens, haversacks, etc., also a knapsack each. -We drew our first pay, forty-two dollars each, sent part of it to our -families, and fitted ourselves out with new clothes and shoes. -</p> -<p>With all the paraphernalia of soldiers, we seemed so burdened as to -be able neither to run nor to fight. Then to be obliged to travel all -day under a broiling sun, or in driving rain or fierce winds, across -sandy deserts and over trackless mountains, going sometimes sixty to -ninety miles without water, in an enemy's country—kind reader, you -may picture such scenes in your imagination, but it is impossible for -you to realize the conditions except by actual experience therein. -It is equally impossible for me to find language to describe fitly -the situation at that time at the United States military post of Fort -Leavenworth. -</p> -<p>The place being an outfitting station for United States forces in the -war with Mexico, all was bustle and activity; steamboats were unloading -material, and teams filled the streets; many of the new recruits -were very rough indeed, and drinking and fighting seemed to be their -pastime; myself and companions were amazed and shocked at the profane -and vulgar language and vile actions that we were compelled to listen -to and witness; with all else, squads of soldiers were being drilled, -the bugle sound was frequent, as were also the beating of the drum and -the playing of the fife; everywhere the men were preparing for victory -or death, and many were so reckless they did not seem to care which -came. -</p> -<p>As our battalion was preparing quietly for the great march before us, -a band of very small Mexican mules was brought in to be used as teams -in our transportation department. The animals were unaccustomed to -harness, and very wild, so there was a detail of men from each company -assigned to do the harnessing. It fell to my lot to engage in the work, -and great was my surprise to see one of those little mules dragging -three to five men about the yards. I thought I was able to handle one -of the little long-eared animals myself, but had the conceit taken out -of me in quick order by having my hands burned with the rope, as I -was jerked and dragged about in fertilizer in the yards—there being -an abundance there. But we accomplished our work, with some sport and -considerable cost to our patience and muscular energy. -</p> -<p>From the 10th to the 15th of August, companies A, B, and C moved out on -the Santa Fe road, and in two or three days were followed by companies -D and E. Our esteemed colonel, James Allen, having been taken ill, -ordered Captain Jefferson Hunt of company A to take command until the -colonel should recover and settle up the business of outfitting the -battalion. -</p> -<p>Our route lay over rolling hills, through some timbered country and -some prairie. The weather was warm, and there was much suffering, -especially from lack of drinking water, this being scarce. The sick -felt the hardship particularly, and there was quite a number down with -chills and fever; such water as was obtainable was of poor quality, -warm and unhealthy, and added to the number of the sick. -</p> -<p>Each company had a large wagon and three or four yoke of oxen to haul -the tents and camp equipage, and one issue of rations, I think it was -for one week. The government had assigned a doctor to our command, -George B. Sanderson of Platte County, Missouri. He proved to be so -cruel and tyrannical as to incur the ill-will of every man in the -command. He had immediate charge of the hospital wagons, and no matter -how ill a man was, he was not allowed to ride in the company's wagon -until he had reported to this cruel quack, who had to be honored with -the title of physician and surgeon. With his permission a man was -allowed to crawl into his company's wagon, which was filled nearly to -the bows with tents and other camp equipage. Sometimes there would be -five or six crowded in together, some shaking with ague and others -burning with fever. Our company wagon was called the Gray Eagle; John -Gilbert was the teamster, and did all in his power to favor those of -his comrades who deserved it. -</p> -<p>Besides the company and hospital wagons, there were sutlers' or -merchants' wagons—speculators that are permitted to follow the army -for what they can make off the troops. They carry in stock such -things as they know from experience the soldier most needs, and many -luxuries; they had almost everything to entice the famishing soldier, -who had to stand guard over them and their stores. Many times, through -hardships, we seemed compelled to patronize them. Our suffering was -their opportunity, and they were not slow to take advantage of it. -Their prices were enormous, and their bills never failed to reach the -paymaster by each payday; after these were paid, the soldier came in -for the balance, if there was any. Some were very unfortunate through -sickness, and had to patronize the sutler, or merchant; others were -unwise in their purchases; and thus the eight dollars a month wages -often was spent before it was earned. -</p> -<p>Our commissary and ammunition department included over a hundred -wagons; the three or four pieces of artillery followed close in our -rear, in charge of a wagonmaster and assistants. -</p> -<p>The usual order of marching, as I remember it, was: an advance guard; -then the colonel and his staff; next came the body of the command; then -a rearguard, the baggage and hospital wagons, etc. Only on special -occasions was the main body of the battalion permitted to march at -will, as long as it remained between the front and rear guards. When -the country was specially rough, and roads had to be made, the road -hands, or, in military language, the sappers and miners, were allowed -extra rations, and had to start out very early with the advance guard. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERV"></a>CHAPTER V. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">CROSSING OF THE KAW RIVER—INDIAN FARMERS—FIERCE STORM ON STONE COAL -CREEK—CROSSING A CREEK WITH PRECIPITOUS BANKS—RUINS OF AN ANCIENT -CITY—WAGONLOAD OF SICK UPSET IN A STREAM—SAD NEWS OF COL. ALLEN'S -DEATH—DISPUTE OVER HIS SUCCESSOR—MILITARY RULES DISREGARDED IN -SETTLING THE QUESTION—TROOPS DISSATISFIED—SICKNESS IN CAMP—HARSHNESS -OF THE NEW COMMANDER, LIEUTENANT COLONEL SMITH—BRUTALITY OF THE -DOCTOR—DOSES OF OBJECTIONABLE MEDICINE IN AN OLD IRON SPOON—IN THE -COMANCHE INDIAN COUNTRY—ABUSE FROM LIEUTENANT COLONEL SMITH—SCARCITY -OF FUEL—BUFFALO CHIPS—COOKING FOOD UNDER GREAT DIFFICULTIES—INCREASE -OF SICKNESS—UP THE GRAND VALLEY OF THE ARKANSAS—DETACHMENT OF SICK -SENT TO PUEBLO—MIRAGES—HERDS OF BUFFALO—ON THE SICK LIST—REACH THE -ROCKY MOUNTAINS—PREHISTORIC RUINS—IN MEXICAN VILLAGES—ARRIVAL AT -SANTA FE. -</p> -<p>WE crossed the Kaw River about the 17th of August, being ferried over -in flat boats by some half civilized Delaware and Shawnee Indians. -Where we crossed the river it was from three to four hundred yards -wide. The country in the neighborhood seemed to be well adapted to -farming. The Indians had good crops of corn and watermelons, and knew -as well as white men how to charge for them. These Indians were an -intelligent-looking people, having log cabins for dwellings. -</p> -<p>From the Kaw we traveled to Spring Creek, over a beautiful country, and -there joined the companies that had preceded us. We met with rainstorms -that made it very disagreeable for us at night, when two of us would -spread one blanket and lie down on it. It would wet through at once; -and though we had tents over us, we often slept on the wet ground, in -wet clothes. -</p> -<p>Moving onward to Stone Coal Creek, we there endured one of the severest -storms of wind and rain that any of us ever had experienced. Nearly -every tent was blown down; several government wagons were overturned, -and others were sent rolling before the wind as though they were -express or stage coaches; many men fell on their faces and held to -the shrubbery to avoid being carried away by the violence of the -hurricane, while others not so fortunate as to be able to catch hold -of a shrub were driven some rods before the blast. Some were bruised -and others badly frightened, but none received serious injury; and -although everybody was thoroughly soaked, not even the sick seemed to -be unfavorably affected in health by their experience. -</p> -<p>The storm over and our clothing dried, we resumed our march. Coming to -a deep creek with precipitous banks, we had to hold the wagons back -with ropes and let them down gradually to the bed of the stream; then -a number of men with ropes, on the opposite side, assisted the teams -in drawing the wagons up the steep bank. We passed over some very fine -land to a place we named Allen's Grove, and camped. Next day we came -to the ruins of a city of the dim, distant past; the stone walls were -yet visible to the traveler. That night we rested on Beaver Creek. On -the 25th or 26th, while traveling through a beautiful country of rich -soil, one wagon with five or six people was upset into a creek, and -the occupants received a dangerous ducking, though I do not recall any -serious results following. -</p> -<p>It was on this day that a messenger from Fort Leavenworth overtook us, -bringing the sorrowful news of the death of our esteemed commander, -Colonel James Allen. It was a sad blow to us, for all had learned to -respect, and, indeed, even to love him. Yet I have felt sometimes that -it was a kind providence to him that he was taken from us, for his -nature was too kind and sympathetic to have forced his men through what -the Mormon Battalion had to endure before reaching its destination. -</p> -<p>Colonel Allen's death left a vacancy in the command that was not -difficult to fill according to military rules, as the next officer -in rank should have occupied his place. But plain as is the military -law on the subject, there arose a dispute, and much feeling was -worked up. The council of officers decided that, as Captain Jefferson -Hunt of company A had been placed in charge by Colonel Allen till the -latter should rejoin the command, he should continue in that position. -Accordingly, he led the battalion to Council Grove, where it was -learned that Lieutenant Colonel Smith was on the way, intending to -assume command. Thus the quiet of the camp was again disturbed, and -much feeling manifested. There were many warm discussions between the -officers and among the soldiers as well. -</p> -<p>It was at Council Grove that Lieutenant Colonel Smith, Major Walker, -and G. B. Sanderson overtook us. The question of command was further -discussed, Captain Hunt standing up for his rights. But in the council, -Captain Nelson Higgins of Company D (my company) moved that Smith -should be recognized as the commanding officer; this was seconded by -Captain Davis of Company E; all the officers but three, viz.: Laron -Clark, Samuel Gully, and Wesley W. Willis, voted for the motion, and -the question was settled. Lieutenant Colonel A. J. Smith took command, -to the disgust of the soldiers, a large majority of whom, if not all, -were quite dissatisfied. Next day we reached Diamond Springs, where the -battalion was inspected by Lieutenant Colonel Smith. -</p> -<p>At this time there was much sickness in camp, chills and fever and -mumps. This condition was produced by frequent changes of drinking -water, and by poorly-cooked food, as many times we had to depend on -dry weeds for fuel. When a man became sick, it had been the custom for -him to crawl into the company wagon. Our new commander soon dropped -on the kindness of the teamster, and put an end to it without mercy. -The commander was so rough and ungentle, and had so much pomposity and -assurance, that the whole command was disgusted, and almost all were -angry. He ordered the sick out of the wagons, and directed that before -they could ride they must be reported by the doctor as unable to walk, -and had to take a dose of the doctor's drugs from his old rusty spoon. -We soon began to realize that we had fallen into bad hands. -</p> -<p>The doctor often talked to the men as though they were brutes. He was -very unfeeling, and the men would not respond to his sick call ("Jim -along, Josey") when it was possible for them to walk alone. When we -stopped he would sit in front of his tent with his book on his knee, a -long chest of medicine before him, a colored man for his body servant, -and a hospital steward standing in front of the wagon. At sick call, -everyone who could not walk had to be taken before the doctor's tent, -and there be seated or laid down, sometimes on the wet ground, then, -like going to a mill, wait for his grist, or dose of calomel. There -was not much chance to miss it, for, when a man's name was called and -responded to, the hospital steward was ordered to give him such and -such a dose, and the old iron spoon, with its contents of we knew -not what, was presented in the presence of the doctor. Under these -circumstances we began to feel at least the rigors of military rule. -</p> -<p>About this time we entered the Comanche Indian country, and on -September 2 camped on Cottonwood Creek. The Indians were said to be -very hostile, yet we had no trouble with them. I think it was here that -we began to see signs of buffalo, and the prairie dog villages. Timber -was very scarce, and the country was more uninviting than that we had -passed over. -</p> -<p>Shortly after Lieutenant Colonel Smith took command we were drawn up -in line, and some military laws were read to us. At the end of almost -every sentence there was the word death, as punishment for infraction -of the law. We were then talked to in a most offensive and domineering -manner, until some of us began to wonder what we had done to merit such -severity and downright abuse. -</p> -<p>We were tired and footsore, and suffered much from lack of water. The -country showed such a sameness of forbidding features that the journey -became very monotonous and tiresome. Fuel was so scarce that we had to -dig trenches two or three feet long, and eight or ten inches wide and -a foot deep, fill these with dry grass, and start a fire and pile on -buffalo chips, with which to do our cooking. The result was our food -often was half raw and badly smoked, and many of the men were brought -down with severe diarrheal complaints. As many had traveled the road in -advance of us, even buffalo chips for fuel were so scarce that often we -had to go for miles to gather them. -</p> -<p>When we reached Pawnee Fork we found it a very difficult stream to -cross. The wagons had to be let down the steep bank with ropes, by the -men, and had to be taken up the opposite bank in the same manner. -</p> -<p>The events narrated here will indicate that it is not all of a -soldier's duty when on a long march to tramp all day with musket and -accoutrements and knapsack, but the soldier on such a journey as we -had must push and pull wagons up hill, hold them back when going down -hill, haul them through deep sands, and help them and the teams out -of quicksands; he must stand guard and night-herd stock; must press -on, over rough or smooth ground, rain or shine; must wade rivers, and -when crossing streams is not allowed to take off his clothing, but has -to plunge into the water, and then travel on in wet clothes; besides, -there are many other experiences that are far from pleasant. -</p> -<p>We pushed along the best we could to the Arkansas River, through a -very uninviting country, in which we began to find brackish water and -saleratus. We traveled up the broad river bottoms of the Arkansas -eighty to one hundred miles, the water being poor and unhealthy. Many -were added to the corps of "Jim along, Joseys," and had to be led or -carried by their comrades to the unfeeling doctor, many times to be -cursed at by him, and then to take a dose from his nauseating spoon. -Quite a number of the sick were badly salivated by the drugs given them. -</p> -<p>About September 15 or 16, we crossed the river where the roads fork, -one going toward Fort Benton, and the other leading to Santa Fe. There -we parted with Captain Nelson Higgins, he having been detailed to take -a small squad of men and the families to a Spanish town called Pueblo, -some hundred miles away, there to winter. Meanwhile, we pushed our -way over barren plains and sandy deserts to the Cimmaron River. We -saw deceptive rivers, ponds and lakes; we chased after them for miles -sometimes, till we found that, like jack o' lantern or will o' the -wisp, we could not get nearer to them. Finally we learned that they -were mirages—a peculiar reflection of the sun upon the great plains or -sandy deserts. It seemed impossible for the inexperienced to discern -the difference between the mirage and a body of real water. -</p> -<p>In this barren country we saw immense herds of buffalo; in our long -march we came to ponds of water made perfectly filthy by the buffalo, -and rendered offensive by the broiling hot sun, the liquid being almost -as thick as gruel; but we were so terribly famished with thirst that we -were glad to get even such foul water. -</p> -<p>When the Cimmaron River was reached, there was good water, and good -feed for our stock, but our rations were reduced one-third, and we were -pretty well worn down. -</p> -<p>On the 18th or 19th of September it was my place to be on guard. I had -stood the journey very well, but by this time had become affected by -the alkali, and that day was so badly afflicted with diarrhea as to be -almost unable to drag myself into camp. But rather than march to "Jim -along, Josey," I took my place on guard. That night there came on one -of the most terrible storms I ever have experienced. I had to brace -myself with my musket to stand. From that date I have never been free -from pain in the right limb, near the instep, caused by the severe -exposure. Next day it became necessary to go on the sick list, to -remain several days. -</p> -<p>About the 23rd we began to come to timber in the hills, and having been -for nine or ten days with nothing but grass and buffalo chips for fuel, -we were in a situation to appreciate the change. Soon we were among the -sandhills, where traveling was hard, and passed the Rabbit Ears (Black -Peak and Agua Fria Peak), two high mountain peaks. In this mountainous -region we found traces of the inhabitants of a past age, in old stone -walls and in numerous' irrigation canals long since dry. -</p> -<p>On the 2nd or 3rd of October we came to the Red River. The mountain -air was bracing, but there were many men who yet remained sick. About -this time the command was culled over by Lieutenant Colonel Smith and -the doctor, and all who were considered able to stand a forced march to -Santa Fe were ordered forward on the double quick. -</p> -<p>The sick men were left to take care of themselves as best they could, -with the broken down teams of the command to look after. My lot was -still with the invalids, and of course I had to remain. Yet we were -only about two days behind the strong men who left us in the mountains; -we reached Santa Fe on October 12th, having passed through several -Mexican villages, the houses of which were low and flat-roofed, and -covered principally with cement and tile. We saw the very small Mexican -sheep and goats, the people milking the latter, by sitting at the back -end, in an earthen pot, and there milking regardless of anything that -might drop into the vessel intended for milk only. -</p> -<p>From the appearance of Santa Fe we had no reason to doubt that it was -between three and four hundred years old; for it looked at least that -far behind the times. Mexicans and Indians, badly mixed, made up the -population. Their costume, manners, habits, and in fact everything, -were both strange and novel to us, and of course were quite an -attraction. Many of the people looked on us with suspicion, and if -it had been in their power no doubt they would have given us a warm -reception; others appeared to be pleased, doubtless because it made -trade better for them, and on that account they seemed very friendly. -They brought into camp, for sale, many articles of food; the strongest -of these were red pepper pies, the pepper-pods as large as a teacup, and -onions (savoyas) as large as saucers, to be eaten raw like turnips. -</p> -<p>A few days' rest and change of food at Santa Fe, and the command was -ready to resume its arduous march. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERVI"></a>CHAPTER VI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">EXEMPLAR'S CONDUCT OF THE MORMON TROOPS—LIEUTENANT COLONEL -P. ST. GEORGE COOKE ARRIVES AND ASSUMES COMMAND—A WELCOME -CHANGE—ANOTHER DETACHMENT OP SICK, ALSO THE LAUNDRESSES, SENT TO -PUEBLO—SELECTING MEN TO CONTINUE THE JOURNEY TO CALIFORNIA—REDUCING -THE BAGGAGE—DIFFICULTIES OF THE 1,100 MILES JOURNEY AHEAD—POOR -EQUIPMENT THEREFOR—LEAVE SANTA FE—ROADS OF HEAVY SAND—ON ONE-THIRD -RATIONS—HARDSHIPS INCREASE—GALLED FEET AND GNAWING STOMACHS—MORE -SICK MEN FOR PUEBLO—LEAVING THE LAST WAGONS—MULES AND OXEN IN A PACK -TRAIN—IN AN UNKNOWN COUNTRY—HUNTING A PASS OVER THE MOUNTAINS—ALARM -OF AN ENEMY—A BEAVER DAM—CROSSING THE RIO GRANDE DEL NORTE—GREAT -SUFFERING AMONG THE TROOPS. -</p> -<p>WHILE we were in Santa Fe, Colonel Sterling Price came in with his -cavalry command, and soon the town prison was filled with them, so that -it became necessary for a guard from the Mormon Battalion to be posted -at the prison. I do not recall that any of our command was put into the -prison, though it is possible one or two might have been, for a few of -them got rather too much wine; but it was a very few who acted that -way. There were many invalids of other commands left to garrison Santa -Fe, and they caused considerable disturbance, many of them getting into -prison. -</p> -<p>It seems that word had gone ahead to the Mexican town that the Mormons -were a very hard class of outlaws, consequently at first we were looked -upon as "toughs" of the very worst kind. But when the people had an -opportunity to see our superior conduct in contrast with that of the -other troops, they realized the true situation, and male and female -thronged our camp in friendly visit. -</p> -<p>It was on October 13, 1846, that Lieutenant Colonel P. St. George Cooke -assumed command of the Mormon Battalion, having been designated for -that purpose, and by this proceeding we were liberated from the little -tyrant Lieutenant Colonel A. J. Smith. -</p> -<p>By order of Colonel Cooke, Captain James Brown of Company C took -command of all the sick that were unable to continue the journey to -California; also of most of the laundresses, and a few able-bodied -men, with directions to go north to Pueblo, and join Captain Higgins. -In order to determine who were not able to continue the march to -California, we were drawn up in line, and the officers and Dr. -Sanderson inspected the whole command. The doctor scrutinized every one -of us, and when he said a man was not able to go, his name was added to -Captain Brown's detachment, whether the man liked it or not; and when -the doctor said a man could make the trip, that settled the matter. The -operation was much like a cooper culling stave timber, or a butcher -separating the lean from the fat sheep. -</p> -<p>My desire was very strong to continue the overland journey, and when -the doctor neared me, I braced up and tried to look brave and hardy. -To the doctor's inquiry, "How do you feel?" my answer was, "First -rate." He looked at me suspiciously and said, "You look d—d pale and -weak," then passed on, and I was greatly relieved at having gone safely -through the inspection. -</p> -<p>In order No. 8, Colonel Cooke called the particular attention of the -company commanders to the necessity of reducing baggage as much as -possible; that means for transportation were very deficient; that the -road was almost impracticable, much of it being in deep sand, and -how soon we would have to abandon our wagons it was impossible to -ascertain; that skillets and ovens could not be taken, and but one -camp-kettle to each mess of ten men. -</p> -<p>Colonel Cooke very properly and correctly pointed out that everything -seemed to conspire to discourage the extraordinary undertaking of -marching the battalion 1,100 miles, for the much greater part of the -way through an unknown wilderness, without road or trail, and with a -wagon train. He said the battalion was much worn by traveling on foot, -marching from Nauvoo, Illinois; their clothing was very scant, there -was no money to pay them, or clothing to issue; the mules were utterly -broken down; the quartermaster's department was out of funds and its -credit bad; animals were scarce, and those procured were inferior and -deteriorating every hour from the lack of forage. All this made it -necessary that such careful preparation as could be should be made in -advance. -</p> -<p>It can be easily seen from this statement that the condition and -prospects of the battalion were not very encouraging; yet there -were very few of the men who had the least desire to retrace their -steps—they knew what they had passed through, but looking ahead they -tried to hope for the best, realizing, just as they had been told, that -the country through which they had to travel was an unknown region. -</p> -<p>With the colonel's orders carried out, we got ready to move, and about -the 21st of October we left Santa Fe and traveled six or eight miles -to a stream called Agua Fria (cold water). Grass for animals was very -short, the nights were very cold, and our road was in heavy sand almost -from the start. Our advance was slow, for the best teams had been taken -for extra service or express duties in other departments. Besides, -there was added to our already overburdened animals the load of sacks, -packsaddles, lashing-ropes, etc., necessary in the event of being -compelled to abandon the wagons, so we would not be entirely without -means of transportation. There was also the burden of sheep pelts and -blankets to use under pack saddles, and as most of these were bought -second-hand, they were well stocked with the insects commonly called -"greybacks." -</p> -<p>In a short time we drew near to the mountains, and the weather became -colder. Having but one blanket each we began to use the pelts and -saddle-blankets to splice out our scanty store of bedding. Thus -we proceeded over sandy roads, through the towns and villages of -Spaniards, Indians and Greasers—the surroundings presented being of -such a sameness that the journey became very monotonous. -</p> -<p>Soon after leaving Santa Fe our rations were reduced to one-third -the regular amount allowed by law to the soldier. A detail of men -was called as a substitute for mules, to move and to lighten the -loads of the ammunition wagons. Each soldier was required to carry -sixty-four rounds of cartridges that contained each a one-ounce ball, -three buck-shot, and powder enough to send them where they should be, -besides the heavy paper they were wrapped in, and extra flints for the -firelock—about two hundred ounces added to the already overburdened -soldier. -</p> -<p>Now the soldier must wade the tributaries of the Rio Grande del Norte, -sometimes waist deep and more, and is not allowed even to take off his -shoes, or any of his wearing apparel. An officer, perched on his white -mule on some point or eminence overlooking the whole command, with a -hawk's eye for keen military experience, calls to this or that squad of -men, with a horrid oath, as if they were brutes; often he curses the -men until they long for a battle where perchance someone would remember -the tyrant with an ounce ball and three buckshot. And yet, if that -feeling were not quenched in the soldier's bosom it would not require -an engagement with the enemy to accomplish the deed. But, praise God, -that feeling quickly passed off as the men marched along, their clothes -wet, and their thick soled cowhide army shoes partly filled with -sand—the chafing and galling of the flesh without and the gnawing and -grinding of the stomach within defied the mind to dwell upon any one -subject for long at a time. -</p> -<p>Is it any wonder that under these conditions fifty-five of our comrades -wore down and collapsed so they had to go on the sick list and it -became necessary for Lieutenant W. W. Willis to take command of that -number of invalid soldiers, and join Captains Higgins and Brown at -Pueblo? This company of sick and exhausted men left us, on their -return, about the 10th or 12th of November. -</p> -<p>About this time, the quartermaster was ordered to leave the remaining -two heavy ox-wagons, while the company commanders were directed to -reduce their tent-poles two-thirds; that is, to cast away all the -upright poles and use muskets instead, and to put gores in the back -part of the tents so they could shelter nine men in place of six; we -were also to leave one-third of the campkettles. -</p> -<p>Then came some sport in putting packs on a number of our mules and -worn-out oxen. Some of these, which did not look as though they could -travel a hundred miles further, when the crupper was put in place would -rear up, wheel around, and kick in a most amusing style; nor did they -cease until their strength failed them. -</p> -<p>When this sport, if sport it may be called, was over we began to -realize in a small degree the gravity of our situation. Our guides -were "at sea," so to speak. We were in an enemy's land, with not a -soul in camp who knew anything of the country. Men had been sent ahead -to hunt a route for us to travel, and every time, on their return, -they reported impassable barriers ahead—rough, high, steep mountains, -without springs of water or creeks, or sandy plains, and barren deserts -that it would be impossible to cross. In this dilemma we had to bear to -the south, along the river, in hopes of finding a pass to the west. -</p> -<p>One night, while camped near the Rio Grande del Norte, we heard a great -noise as though a band of horses were crossing the river. This created -quite an alarm, as there had been rumors of Mexicans revolting. For a -short time it was thought it was Mexican cavalry crossing to attack -us by night, but on the colonel making inquiries of the guides it was -learned that the noise proceeded from beaver playing in the river. -After watching and listening for a time, all settled down, contented -that there was no enemy at hand. -</p> -<p>On resuming our march next day, we passed through a grove of cottonwood -trees, and saw where many of them had been cut down by the beaver. Some -of the trees were two feet or more in diameter, had been cut off in -long sections, and a surprisingly large dam had been constructed by the -beaver across the river. This dam had caused to be formed a large pond, -in which the beaver congregated at certain seasons, for sport. Thus the -mystery of our midnight disturbance was solved to our satisfaction. -</p> -<p>We passed along the sandy road to a large bend in the river, which -Colonel Cooke decided was the place where we would cross the stream. He -stationed himself on an abrupt point of rock, from which he could view -the whole proceeding. Men were detailed from each company to follow the -wagons through the river. In order to avoid a rocky ridge the stream -had to be crossed twice within quarter of a mile. There were very heavy -quicksands, and if the teams were allowed to stop one minute it was -doubtful whether they could start again; consequently the precaution of -having men close at hand was very important, though the average soldier -did not understand the real reason for forcing him into the water -without stripping off at least part of his raiment. -</p> -<p>The crossing was made early in the day, and the water was very cold, as -I had ample evidence, being one of those detailed to attend the wagons. -Our comrades took our muskets over the point while we lifted at the -wagons. As the water was waist deep, when the men would stoop to lift -it would wet our clothing very nearly to the armpits; our shoes also -were filled with sand. -</p> -<p>Wet and cold, almost chilled, we continued our march through deep -sands, pushing and pulling at the wagons till our clothing dried on our -bodies, our shoes became so dry and hard that walking was very painful -and difficult, and our feet became raw. If this had been all, we might -have had less reason to complain; but when an irritated officer (not -all the officers pursued such a reprehensible course, but a few of them -did) swore at us as if we were brutes, when we were already burdened -almost beyond endurance, it is no wonder there was an impulsive desire -to retaliate. For my own part, my feelings never were so outraged, -and the desire for revenge never ran so high and wild as then. But we -cooled down, though our physical sufferings were not lessened; as we -tramped on through the sands we became so weak it was almost impossible -to keep our ankles from striking together as we walked, and our hard -and dry shoetops would cut our ankles till the blood came. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERVII"></a>CHAPTER VII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">PUSHING TO THE WEST—OVERHEARING A CONVERSATION WITH COL. COOKE—THE -COLONEL FEARS THE MEN WILL STARVE—NO BERRIES, NOT EVEN BARK OF TREES, -FOR FOOD—TRUE STATE OF AFFAIRS AS TO THE OUTLOOK KEPT FROM MOST -OF THE TROOPS—HIDES, INTESTINES, AND EVEN SOFT EDGES OF HOOFS AND -HORNS OF ANIMALS EATEN—"BIRD'S EYE SOUP."—IN A SNOWSTORM—RELICS -OF ANCIENT INHABITANTS—CAMPING WITHOUT WATER—OLD SILVER AND COPPER -MINES—HARDEST DAY OF THE JOURNEY—MEN APPEAR AS IF STRICKEN WITH -DEATH—THE WRITER SO ILL AS TO BE UNABLE To TRAVEL LONGER, AND -EXPECTS TO DIE—UNCLE ALEXANDER STEPHENS COMES WITH WATER AND REVIVES -HIM—AWFUL SUFFERING IN CAMP—REPORTED SICK NEXT MORNING—BRUTAL DR. -SANDERSON GIVES A DEADLY DOSE OF LAUDANUM, BUT THE WRITER VOMITS IT -AFTER BEING MADE FEARFULLY SICK—IN TERRIBLE DISTRESS FOR DAYS—HEALED -BY THE LAYING ON OF HANDS OF THE ELDERS OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST -OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS. -</p> -<p>IT was but a little while after this that we left the Rio Grande del -Norte, and pressed on toward the west. One day, while passing up a -brushy canyon, my place being with the advance guard, in the rear of -the road hands, I had occasion to step into the brush by the roadside. -While there, out of sight, Col. Cooke and staff and guides came along -and stopped right opposite me, so close that I dared not move lest they -should see me. As they came up, the colonel inquired of the guides if -there were no fruit or berries that men could live on; the reply was, -no, not a thing. They were talking about some place ahead that the -guides were acquainted with. The colonel then asked if there were no -trees that had bark something like elm bark, which men could live on -for a few days; but the answer was that there was neither fruit, roots -nor bark, that the country was a barren waste. -</p> -<p>Upon receiving this information, the colonel exclaimed, "What can we -do?" In response, the suggestion was that the guides did not know -unless some of the stronger men and mules were sent on a forced march -to the first place in California, where they could get a bunch of beef -cattle and meet us on the desert with them. There was some further -conversation, when it was ended by the colonel exclaiming, with a -despairing oath, "I expect the men will starve to death!" -</p> -<p>The deep gloom of sadness hung over those who knew of the situation. -All of the men, however, were not informed of the gravity of the -position we were in. At that time we were drawing less than half -rations. The fresh meat we had was more like glue or jelly than beef. -The plan had been adopted of slaughtering the weak cattle first, so -that the stronger animals could travel faster. When an animal became -too weak to hold up one end of a yoke, or to carry a packsaddle, it was -slaughtered, and the flesh issued to the men. Not a scrap of the animal -would be left on the ground; the hide, intestines—all was eaten; even -the tender or soft edges of the hoofs and horns would be roasted, and -gnawed at so long as a human being possibly could draw subsistence -therefrom. Many times we were without water to wash the offal. The -bones would be carried along, broken up, and boiled and re-boiled, in -some instances as long as there could be seen a single "bird's eye" -(the name given to solitary spots of grease that would come to the -surface) of grease rise on the water; then each man was eager for his -share. -</p> -<p>Sometimes cattle became so weak that men were left with them to come -up to the command after night. On one occasion, when an old ox could -not be got into camp and had to be left four or five miles back, men -were sent bright and early next morning, to bring him in. It snowed -that night, and in camp things generally were disagreeable. The ox was -brought in, slaughtered, and issued to us for rations. If any man had -failed to get his share of that white ox at that time there might have -been a row, but a fair distribution maintained peace. The place of our -camp was called White Ox Creek, and we laid by for one day to rest and -refresh ourselves. -</p> -<p>From there we traveled over a rough country, but one that evidently -had been inhabited ages ago, for we found stone walls, pottery by the -acre, and old and dry canals—their former source of water having -disappeared. We found in a rock a deep and large hole with water -sufficient to supply the command; we secured it by drawing all night, -until everything was watered. Then we moved on, and next night camped -without water. We passed many old mines, supposed to be of silver and -copper, and there were said to be gold mines in the vicinity. Late at -night we traveled, and were on the march early the following morning. -All day we pressed forward as rapidly as possible, there being no -water, and late at night the command came to a place called Dry Lake. -</p> -<p>That was the hardest day for me that came in the experience of the -whole journey. I had been run down so low with a severe attack of -dysentery that I could travel no longer, and laid down. My thirst was -intense, and it did not seem possible that I could live till morning. -It seemed that everyone was traveling as best he could, for the -rearguard passed me without taking any notice. Men went by, looking -like death, their mouths black, their eyes sunken till it was difficult -to recognize them. Some eyes had a staring glare, which looked as if -the monster death were close at hand. Yet the men staggered on, their -feet hitting each other, tit for tat, as one was dragged past the -other. The hopes of these men were greater than mine, for I had ceased -to march. This was the first time I had felt there was little reason to -hope that I would ever reach camp again, for I supposed that all the -men had passed me. The sun's rays faded away on the eastern mountain -tops, and the bright orb dropped beneath the western horizon. For -a moment I felt that with me the vital spark would soon sink below the -mortal horizon, as if to accompany the king of day. -</p> -<p>Just when my hopes were flickering as does a candle when the wick has -all but burned out, there came to my ears the sound as of the tinkling -of a tin can that seemed to keep time with a soldier's step as he -marched. Gradually the sound became more distinct until its approach -was a certainty. Then my uncle, Alexander Stephens, came in sight. He -had been left to bring up an old spotted ox which had failed, and had -driven the animal into the shade of a rocky cliff, where the ox laid -down, while the driver hunted around and found a dripping of water -as it seeped from a crevice in the rock. He had quenched his thirst -and filled his canteen, resting in the meantime, then followed on the -trail, pricking the ox with his bayonet. -</p> -<p>When Uncle Alexander Stephens came up he handed me his canteen, and the -draught of water quickly revived me. I did not think myself able to -rise to my feet, but with a little assistance I got up, and took hold -of the packsaddle. My knapsack, musket and accoutrements were lashed to -the ox, and by a final effort we reached Dry Lake camp, by halting at -short intervals along the four miles we had to travel. -</p> -<p>Wretched, wretched indeed, was the condition of the command that night. -It is doubtful whether at any time in the long march the men suffered -more than they did then and the forty-eight hours preceding. Next -morning, at the doctor's call, many had to be helped by their comrades -to the place designated for the sick. -</p> -<p>For myself, two men sat me upon the ground, and held me up till my time -came to be questioned. Dr. Sanderson called out, "What is the matter -with you?" When he received the information asked for he remarked -gruffly: "I've a d—d great mind not to report you sick. I never saw -such a d—d set of men in my life. They will not report till d—d nigh -dead." I answered that it did not matter to me whether he entered me on -the sick list or not, for I could not walk. At this he said sharply. -"Not a d—d word out of you or I'll make you walk." -</p> -<p>Then he ordered the steward to give me a dose of castor oil and -laudanum, stating the quantity. The steward, William Spencer, said, -"Isn't it a rather heavy dose?" to which the doctor responded with a -curse, telling him to do as he was ordered. At that the dose was poured -into a teacup, filling it half full. It was given to me, the steward -saying in a low tone of voice. "If you do not throw it up it will kill -you." I was assisted back to the company's wagon, and soon vomited the -medicine, but not until it had changed my countenance so much that the -lieutenant of my company, Cyrus Canfield, did not know me. He came and -ordered me out of the wagon, telling me to go to my own company. It was -sometime before he could be convinced who I really was, then remarked -that I looked so near dead that he could not believe it was I. But when -he recognized me he was very kind, and was willing to do anything he -could for my relief. -</p> -<p>For four days I lay in a dull stupor, when that phase of the disease -was checked, and a very high fever set in. My sufferings were so -terrible that some of my messmates came into the tent, anointed me with -oil, then administered to or prayed for me; and although burning with -a high fever till it seemed that I could not live, I was instantly -healed, so that when they took their hands off the fever was entirely -gone, and I was wet with perspiration. From that time I began to gather -strength. That was my first experience with the ordinance of healing by -the laying on of hands by the Elders of the Church of Jesus Christ of -Latter-day Saints. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERVIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">ON THE SUMMIT OF THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS—CROSSING THE BACKBONE OF THE -NORTH AMERICAN CONTINENT—REVIEW OF THE JOURNEY—GRAVES OPENED BY -WOLVES—MUTILATED BODIES—AN UNPARALLELED JOURNEY OF HARDSHIP—THE -PROSPECT AHEAD—A MATTER OF LIFE AND DEATH—START DOWN THE PACIFIC -SLOPE—DESCENDING THE CLIFFS WITH WAGONS—ONE VEHICLE SLIPS AND IS -REDUCED TO KINDLING WOOD AND SCRAP IRON—INTO A NEW CLIMATE—CHANGE -IN THE CHARACTER OF VEGETATION—WILD HORSES AND CATTLE—ATTACKED BY -WILD CATTLE—SEVERAL MEN HURT AND ONE MULE GORED TO DEATH—A NUMBER OF -CATTLE KILLED—SUPPLY OF BEEF—REACH THE SAN PEDRO RIVER—TRAVELING -THROUGH A HEAVY GROWTH OF MESQUIT AND CHAPPARAL—APPROACH THE MEXICAN -GARRISONED TOWN OF TUCSON—NEWS OF APPROACH OF A LARGE AMERICAN ARMY -SENT TO THE MEXICANS—ORDER ISSUED BY COLONEL COOKE. -</p> -<p>AT the camp at Dry Lake, which we reached between November 20 and 25, -we laid over a day, and a party was sent ahead to cut a road over the -divide. I was too weak for four or five days to take much interest in -what passed; and in the meantime the command reached and crossed the -divide, or summit of the Rocky Mountains—the backbone of the North -American continent—where the waters are divided, flowing on either -side to the Atlantic and Pacific respectively. -</p> -<p>For eighteen hundred miles the Mormon Battalion members had made a hard -and weary march. Starting from Nauvoo, on the Mississippi River—the -"father of waters"—as exiles, they had passed over a lovely country, -yet at a season of the year when travel was difficult, to the Missouri -River. At the latter point the battalion was mustered into service, and -moved over an excellent country two hundred miles to Fort Leavenworth; -thence through what is now the state of Kansas, passing over a goodly -land to the Great Plains, a timberless country, where water is scarce. -There they began to be footsore and leg-weary, and to suffer severely -from heat and thirst. Soon they came to the desert, and for nine days -tried cooking their shortened rations over "buffalo chip" fires, with -fuel even scarcer than it was poor; often having very little water, and -that brackish, so that men and hearts began to grow weak and ill. -</p> -<p>At this point in the long journey they commenced passing the open -graves of soldiers, many of whom laid down their lives in the advance -companies. Their graves were open for the reason that wolves had dug -up the dead bodies and devoured the flesh from the bones; the blankets -in which the bodies were wrapped were torn to shreds, while in some -instances the carcass still hung together, except that the fingers and -toes had been eaten off by wild beasts. The road was also strewn with -dead horses and cattle, so that as the battalion advanced the gruesome -sights became more frequent and therefore excited less comment. And in -turn the battalion contributed a share of dead to the lonely graves of -the plains. -</p> -<p>Then, on the sandy roads, there was the rough order to put the shoulder -to the wheel and help the jaded teams; and the battalion waded creeks -and rivers with quicksand bottoms, or lifted or pulled at ropes in -lowering or raising their wagons over rough and precipitous places—in -what appeared at that time a rough and worthless country, which may not -have changed greatly since. -</p> -<p>At times they were called forward to tramp sand roads for teams, and -then to return and pull at ropes or push at wagons which, without -assistance, the teams could not control. Then when Santa Fe was passed -the journey was proceeded upon with reduced rations, down the difficult -country along the Rio Grande del Norte. Onward the struggle continued, -over sandy deserts and through a rough, mountainous region, where the -hardships were intense, and where there seemed no eye to pity and no -hand to pass even a drop of water to moisten the parching tongue. It -was not human capability, it was the divine power that sustained them -in such extremities as they had to endure. -</p> -<p>It was thus the renowned Mormon Battalion toiled and struggled on their -journey to the summit of the lofty Rocky Mountain range—the crest -of the continent—a journey whose details of privation, and peril, -and patient courage, cannot be told in human words, and never can be -realized except by those who experienced it. So many lofty mountain -spurs had been crossed, that the final ascent seemed quite gradual. -</p> -<p>Leaving now this general survey of the past, I recall that from the -lofty eminence we had reached on our march, the descent was very abrupt -and difficult, through the rugged defiles to the west. But with the -battalion it was a case of life and death. That was no place to remain, -there was no earthly help at hand, no way to life open but to trust -in God and persevere in the onward movement. So with the pick-axe and -crow-bar we commenced to clear the most feasible road down by chopping -away the shrubbery and brush and removing that and the rocks. -</p> -<p>After much of the baggage had been taken down the mountain one way by -pack animals, long ropes and guy-ropes were attached to the wagons and -the descent with them began by another way. The wagons were lowered for -a distance of half a mile or so, men standing as best they could on -the mountain side, letting the vehicle down gradually, then holding it -till other men could get a fresh footing and lower it still further. -Thus one by one the wagons were let down in safety, all but one. By -some mishap that got adrift from the men, and to save their lives they -had to let it go until there was nothing of it but scrap-iron and -kindling-wood. As there was already an abundance of the latter around -us, no one was desirous of descending to the rugged depths of the -ravine to secure even a relic of that terrible descent. -</p> -<p>It was thought by our commander and guides that it would require from -six to eight days to make the descent, but thanks to the tact and skill -of some of our men who had been accustomed to frontier life, the work -was done in two days, and we were again where the wagons could stand on -partially level ground. -</p> -<p>In a very brief space of time we found ourselves plunged into a warm -climate, where we could not see any plant or shrub that we had been -acquainted with before. There was some small, scrubby ash, sycamore -and black walnut, but everything, even to the rocks, had a strange -appearance. We also had entered the land of wild horses and cattle, -which roamed the hills by thousands. The wild cattle became excited at -the rumbling wagons, and gathered thickly along our way. -</p> -<p>At last the muskets commenced to rattle, partly through fear, and -partly because we wanted beef. Finally a herd of wild cattle charged -our line, tossed some men into the air, pierced others with their -horns, knocking some down, and ran over others, attacking one light -wagon, the hind end of which was lifted clear from the road. One large -bull plunged into a six-mule team, ran his head under the off-swing -mule, throwing him entirely over the near one and thrusting his horn -into the mule's vitals, injuring our animal so it had to be left on the -ground, where it expired in a few minutes. There were several men and -mules roughly used and bruised, just the number I do not now recall. -The attacking party lost twenty or twenty-five of their number killed, -with many others badly or slightly wounded. -</p> -<p>We had plenty of beef for a few days, and might have secured much -more. I never understood the reason why we were not allowed to lay -by and "jerk" an abundance of meat for the subsequent use of the -command, but the stop was not permitted. Many of the men felt greatly -disappointed and indignant because we were denied the privilege of -availing ourselves of this splendid opportunity of replenishing our -scanty rations. We were half starving at the time, and perhaps if we -had been allowed to lay by a few days we would have gorged ourselves to -our injury. It may be that would have been more serious than to have -stormed, as some did, at being ordered to march on. It is possible this -was the view taken by our commander, though we never knew. -</p> -<p>Continuing our advance to lower levels, the climate was mild and -pleasant. Our course was northwesterly until we passed a deserted -ranch called San Bernardino, in what is now Arizona, and followed -down the San Pedro River. I think this was the south fork of the Gila -River. There was some good country along this lovely stream. It was -there we first saw the mescal and mesquit, the former being the plant -from which the Mexicans distil their whisky (pulque), the latter a tree -somewhat resembling the black locust, but growing with a very spreading -habit, making it difficult to travel among. In many places it had to be -cut down and cleared away before we could proceed. There was another -scrubby tree-growth which the Spaniards call chapparal. This brush grew -very thick in places, so that in cutting it away travel became very -tedious. -</p> -<p>Here the guides told Colonel Cooke that if we followed along the stream -it would be a hundred miles farther than if we cut across the bend, but -if we took the latter route we would have to pass through a Mexican -fortified town, where a body of soldiers had been left to guard it as -an outpost. At that time it was impossible for us to learn the strength -of the place; but it was thought that we might get some supplies of -provisions and some animals. At the same time there was considerable -risk that we would have to fight, and perhaps get defeated, in which -case it would be not only a loss of property but of life as well. -</p> -<p>On December 12 and 13 we followed down the San Pedro, our course -being nearly due north, near the base of a mountain extending towards -the Gila River. The guide, Leroux, with others, returned from an -exploration of the table-land to the west, leading to Tucson. They -found a party of Apache Indians and some Mexicans distilling mescal, -and learned from them that the Mexican garrison at Tucson numbered -about two hundred men. The interpreter with the guides, Dr. Foster, -had thought it proper to go to Tucson, and Leroux told the Mexicans to -inform the commander at Tucson that an American army was approaching -en route to California; that the advance guard numbered about three -hundred and sixty men, and if it stopped to drill it would give time -for the main army to come up; that the strength of the main army could -be judged by the size of its vanguard; and that if Foster did not -rejoin the advance guard by a given time it would be understood that he -was a prisoner at Tucson. Upon learning what had been done and said, -Colonel Cooke issued the following order: -</p> -<p>"Headquarters Mormon Battalion, Camp on the San Pedro, Dec. 13, 1846. -</p> -<p>"Thus far on our course to California we have followed the guides -furnished us by the general. These guides now point to Tucson, a -garrison town, as on our road, and assert that any other course is -one hundred miles out of the way, and over a trackless wilderness of -mountains, rivers and hills. We will march then to Tucson. We came -not to make war on Sonora, and less still to destroy an important -outpost of defense against Indians. But we will take the straight road -before us and overcome all resistance, but shall I remind you that the -American soldier ever shows justice and kindness to the unarmed and -unresisting? The property of individuals you will hold sacred; the -people of Sonora are not our enemies. -</p> -<p class="centered">"By order of Lieutenant Colonel Cooke. -</p> -<p class="right">"P. C. Merrill, Adjutant." -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERIX"></a>CHAPTER IX. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">ON THE TRAIL TO TUCSON—EXCITEMENT IN THE TOWN—MEET MEXICAN -SOLDIERS—OUR NUMBERS OVERRATED BY THE INDIANS—MEXICAN COMMANDER -UNDER ORDERS TO OPPOSE US—COLONEL COOKE ANNOUNCES HIS WISH TO -PASS ON WITHOUT HOSTILITIES—ARREST OF CORPORAL CASSADURAN, SON OF -THE MEXICAN COMMANDER AT TUCSON, AND OTHER MEXICANS WHO ARE HELD -AS HOSTAGES FOR THE RETURN OF OUR INTERPRETER—THE INTERPRETER IS -LIBERATED—AN ARMISTICE PROPOSED—SURRENDER OF TUCSON DEMANDED—MEXICAN -PRISONERS RELEASED—SURRENDER IS REFUSED—COLONEL COOKE ORDERS THE -BATTALION TO PREPARE FOR BATTLE—ADVANCE TOWARD THE TOWN—FLIGHT OF -THE MEXICANS—AT THE GATES OF TUCSON—OUR LINE OF BATTLE—ADDRESS BY -COLONEL COOKE—WE ENTER THE TOWN, AND PASS THROUGH TO CAMP—PURCHASES -OF WHEAT, CORN, ETC.—THE BATTALION NEARLY STARVED—NIGHT ALARM OF -A MEXICAN ATTACK—DIFFICULTIES OF GETTING INTO LINE—NO ENEMY IN -SIGHT—START ACROSS THE GILA DESERT—AGONY ON THE BURNING SANDS AND -ALKALI FLAT—-STRENGTHENED BY THE DIVINE BLESSING—REACH THE GILA RIVER. -</p> -<p>ON the 14th the battalion ascended to the plateau, traveling up hill -for eight or nine miles, when it struck the trail leading to Tucson. -Colonel Cooke selected fifty men, with whom he pushed forward. Passing -the vanguard, he soon reached water, where he found four or five -Mexican soldiers cutting grass. Their arms and saddles were on their -horses near by, easily accessible to our men. But these had no wish to -molest them, and the Mexicans appeared to pay little attention to us. -</p> -<p>The colonel learned from a Mexican sergeant that rumors of a large -force of American troops coming had reached Tucson, and great -excitement prevailed in the town. Of course the colonel, who was -possessed of generalship as well as a stern sense of discipline, took -no pains to disabuse the Mexicans' minds, and thus possibly expose -our little army to unnecessary peril. Indians who had seen us from a -distance had overestimated largely our numbers, and thus served to -impress the people of Sonora with the accuracy of the statement made by -the guides. -</p> -<p>The colonel also learned from the Mexican sergeant that the commander -of the garrison had orders from the governor not to allow any armed -force to pass through the town without resistance. A message was -therefore sent to the commander by this same sergeant, saying that the -people need not be alarmed, as we were their friends and would do them -no harm, as we wished merely to purchase supplies and pass on. -</p> -<p>The next day we traveled about twelve miles, passing a distillery, and -camped without water. The battalion marched in front of the wagons, to -protect the provisions. Here a new (to us) species of cactus proved -very troublesome. It was jointed, and when an animal rubbed against the -thorns it broke loose at the joints, and sections about three inches -long would stick fast to the animal. The same variety of cactus is -found in southern Utah. -</p> -<p>This day a corporal, the son of Cassaduran, commander of the Mexican -post at Tucson, and three Mexican soldiers were met with. They showed -no signs of fear until Colonel Cooke ordered them arrested, when they -seemed terribly frightened. On arriving at our camp, the corporal was -questioned by the commander as to Dr. Foster. He said (and it proved to -be true) that Foster was under guard, but had been requested earnestly -to come with them, and had refused. He had feigned indignation at being -arrested, lest the Mexicans should be suspicious as to our numbers and -should get reinforcements and fight us. As he anticipated, his conduct -inspired them with terror. -</p> -<p>One of the Mexican prisoners was released and sent to the garrison -with two of the guides, one of whom took a note to the commander of -the post, demanding Foster's release and stating that the other three -Mexicans were held as hostages. About midnight, Dr. Foster was brought -into camp by two officers, one of whom was authorized to arrange a -special armistice. -</p> -<p>Colonel Cooke sent a proposition to the Mexican commander that he -deliver up a few arms as a guaranty of surrender, and that the -inhabitants of Tucson would not fight against the United States, unless -released as prisoners of war. The Mexican prisoners also were released. -Our camp at this time was about sixteen miles from Tucson; and on our -advance the following day, when a few miles out, a cavalryman met us -with a note from Captain Cassaduran, declining the proposition to -surrender. We were thereupon ordered to load our muskets and prepare -for an engagement. We had not traveled far, however, before two other -Mexicans met us, with the news that the garrison at Tucson had fled, -and had forced most of the inhabitants to leave the town. They also -had taken two brass pieces of artillery with them. A little later in -the day, about a dozen well armed men, probably soldiers in citizens' -dress, met and accompanied the battalion to Tucson. But before passing -through the gates a halt was ordered. -</p> -<p>That morning, when we were striking camp for the march into Tucson, Dr. -Sanderson opened up again by remarking that "every d—d man who could -stand alone ought to fall into line." Our first move was to form ranks -with everything in proper order to make an assault or receive a charge. -Then we moved out in line of battle. When within three or four miles of -the fort a stop was made, we were faced to the right, and the command -came to forward march, double-quick time. At that the whole column -moved on a smart trot. Some of us, at least, thought we were advancing -upon an enemy that had been discovered by the commander; but when we -had gone pell-mell over cobblerock and gullies, through brush and -cactus, for a distance of nearly three quarters of a mile, we received -the command to halt. Then came orders to left face, file left, march. -This move brought us back into the road, where we filed to the right -and marched on to the fort. -</p> -<p>At the gates of the fort. Colonel Cooke made a brief speech, stating -that the soldiers and citizens had fled, leaving their property behind -and in our power; that we had not come to make war on Sonora; and that -there must not be any interference with the private property of the -citizens. -</p> -<p>We then marched through the town, where a few aged men and women and -some children brought us water and other small tokens of respect. We -made no halt in the village, which had contained some four or five -hundred inhabitants, of which number all but about a hundred had fled. -Our stop was made about half a mile down stream from the place. -</p> -<p>In the town we made purchases of wheat, corn, beans and peas, which we -parched or boiled. We were so near starved that we could not wait for -this food to be more than half cooked before we ate it. There was no -general supply purchased at Tucson, but each man or mess obtained as -much as could be with the scanty means on hand. -</p> -<p>On the night of December 17, Albern Allen and his son Rufus C. Allen -had been placed on picket guard above Tucson, with orders that if any -body of men, say ten or more, appeared, an alarm was to be fired, and -the guards were to run into camp. Sometime between midnight and two -o'clock a body of Mexicans put in an appearance, and the alarm was -given as ordered. The bugle sounded at the colonel's quarters, and soon -Lieutenant George Oman, who was officer of the day, rushed through the -camp, shouting, "Beat that drum; if you cannot beat the drum, beat the -fife!" The drum-major, R. D. Sprague, obeyed the order, and hit the -drum. Immediately the stern voice of the colonel shouted to cease that -music. In less time than it takes to tell it, lights sprang up through -the camp. Then came the sharp command from the colonel, "Dust those -fires!" and the flames went out; the adjutant rushed through the camp -with orders to the officers to form their companies into line, the men -were commanded to fall in, and all was rustle and bustle. -</p> -<p>The writer had been up relieving his stomach of half-boiled wheat, -corn and peas, and had just got settled back in bed when the alarm -was fired, so he heard all that was going on. As we all slept in our -pantaloons, the first thing I thought of in that country of prickly -pears was my boots; and while reaching for these and bumping heads with -comrades, some of the men whose muskets were used for uprights for the -tent thought these the first articles in the emergency and seized them, -the tent coming down and the ridge-pole making another bump on heads. -At the same time we were all trapped in the fallen tent, which was -pinned down tight. I was trying to get the left boot on the right foot, -and my footwear being rather small I had no easy job. All being caught -in the tent-trap, the thought came how easy it would be for a body of -Mexican cavalry in a charge to cut us to pieces, and we soon burst -through the tent and fell into line. -</p> -<p>For the first time in the whole march the writer brought up the rear -in getting to his place, and received a rebuke from the officer -in command, George P. Dykes. Right here, however, in that brief -experience, I learned a lesson I have never forgotten, namely, order -in dressing and undressing. We had been in the habit of putting -our clothing anywhere and each throwing his on top of another's, -if convenience appeared to suggest it, so that in the dark it was -difficult for each to get into his own raiment. I realized then how -important it was to have "a place for everything and everything in its -place;" hence to put every article of wearing apparel down so that in -the darkest hour of night I knew where to place my hand on it, and when -armed always to have my weapons in the best possible order and where -the hand might be laid on them without any mistakes. -</p> -<p>Notwithstanding all the confusion, it seemed to me we were in line of -battle in very short order, awaiting an attack of Mexican cavalry. -There was a few minutes' breathless silence after we were ready for the -assault, and no enemy appearing, reconnoitering parties were sent out -to ascertain the true situation. We were held in readiness an hour or -more, then learning that everything was quiet, were permitted to retire -to our tents, but not without some apprehension of danger until the -dawn of day, which came bright and peaceful, and we began our march out -on what was known as the Ninety-five Mile Desert, which lay between us -and the Gila River. -</p> -<p>After the first day's march on that awful stretch of barren waste, we -began to straggle along, and before the Gila was reached the command -was scattered along on the clay beds and sand strips for twenty miles. -We traveled night and day, not stopping at any one place more than six -hours. -</p> -<p>The command was in a most deplorable condition on this journey. Many -were the men that lay down by the wayside without a hope that they -would live to reach water, and often thinking that they were behind the -command. But after they had rested for a few hours and perhaps dozed -long enough to dream that they died on the desert, and that the wolves -that were howling around were dragging their emaciated carcasses over -the sands or perchance in the alkali pools, so strongly impregnated -with poisonous stuff that it would consume, in a short time, the flesh -if not the bones also, then the thought of home and loved ones would -come; and what was sometimes last, though not the least, would be the -memory of the promises which the servants of God had made when we left -the dear ones of home. Then the worn and weary soldier would stagger -to his feet, survey the surroundings, and perhaps would catch sight, -in the distance, of some comrade who was staggering and reeling onward -toward the setting sun, and would follow in his path. -</p> -<p>So the almost dead soldier would go on, his feet playing pit-a-pat as -they dragged past each other, until his limbs would refuse to carry him -farther, and down he would go and repeat the agonizing experience of -a few hours previous. He would also chew a buckshot or two to induce -moisture in his parching tongue, and would offer an earnest prayer from -his humble soul—a further exertion which he would not have brought his -wearied mind to do if it had not been for the confidence he placed in -the promises of God, made through His faithful servants. -</p> -<p>Thus, dear reader, the renowned Mormon Battalion passed forward across -the great Gila Desert, almost without a human reason to hope that they -would reach the goal, and only able to accomplish their aim through -divine grace. When they succeeded in reaching the banks of the river, -their clothes were so tattered and torn that it was with difficulty -they could cover their nakedness. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERX"></a>CHAPTER X. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">ON THE GILA RIVER—PIMA INDIAN VILLAGE—WELCOME GIFTS FROM THE -PIMAS—AMONG THE MARICOPA INDIANS—ASLEEP ON THE TRAIL—VISIT PROM -A BEAR—LOSS OF PROVISIONS THROUGH AN ATTEMPT TO FLOAT A QUANTITY -DOWN THE GILA—HARD TRAVELING—CROSSING THE COLORADO RIVER—GLOOM -IN THE CAMP—LOWER AND UPPER CALIFORNIA—TERRIBLE MARCH OVER THE -TIERRA CALIENTE, OR HOT LANDS—DIGGING WELLS FOR BRACKISH WATER—ADVANCE -GUARD REACH A MOUNTAIN SPRING—WATER CARRIED BACK TO REVIVE THE -FAINTING TROOPS—LAST SPOONFUL OF FLOUR USED—DIVIDING THE RATIONS—IN -THE CANYONS OF THE SIERRA NEVADA—HEWING ROADS THROUGH ROCKS AND -BRUSH—FEEDING ON LIVE ACORNS AND GREEN MUSTARD—NEWS OF VICTORIES -BY UNITED STATES TROOPS IN CALIFORNIA—PREPARING TO ENGAGE THE -RETIRING MEXICAN ARMY—FIRST HOUSE SEEN IN CALIFORNIA—BEEF WITHOUT -SALT—TRADE FOR ACORN MUSH—HEAVY STORM AND FLOOD IN CAMP—A FEW POUNDS -OF FLOUR SECURED—DANCING IN MUD AND WATER—RECEIVE ORDERS TO GO TO -LOS ANGELES—DISCOVER A BODY OF TROOPS IN LINE OF BATTLE—ADVANCE -TO THE ATTACK—SUPPOSED FOE PROVES TO BE FRIENDLY INDIANS—PRESENCE -OF THE MORMON BATTALION PREVENTS AN INTENDED ATTEMPT BY MEXICANS TO -RETAKE CALIFORNIA, ALSO AN UPRISING OF CALIFORNIANS AGAINST THE UNITED -STATES—ON A BATTLEFIELD WHERE GENERAL KEARNEY HAD FOUGHT—RELICS -OF THE ENCOUNTER—PROPHECY OF PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG AND ITS -FULFILLMENT—SOURCE OF HIS INSPIRATION. -</p> -<p>WHERE we reached the Gila River it was a lovely stream, four or live -rods wide; but the country was covered with alkali grass and mesquit -brush. We rested part of a day, then proceeded down the river eight -or ten miles, coming to a Pima Indian village. The Pima Indians were -superior to any that we had fallen in with heretofore. They were an -agricultural people, peacefully inclined, and kind and loving toward -each other. Those in the village appeared the picture of good health. -They came and went by twos, the males and females keeping each sex, -to themselves. They seemed the most affectionate people I had ever -met; happy and innocent in appearance—a large and handsome class of -persons. Each Indian was wrapped in a large home-made blanket. -</p> -<p>The Pimas had corn, wheat, pumpkins, beans, and, I think, peas. Some -of the Indians noted our wretched and starved condition, and cut up a -lot of pumpkins—as we cut them for cows. These they boiled, and handed -to the soldiers as the latter passed by and took the proffered food in -anything they could get to hold the steaming hot vegetables. The men -were indeed thankful for these favors, although they came from Indians. -</p> -<p>It was between the 20th and 25th of December when we left the Pima -Indian village, and passed down the Gila River to a broad, open, -fertile valley in the Maricopa Indian country. At the Maricopa Indian -villages we met many fine specimens of the native inhabitants. We -traded brass buttons for food. One brass button had more purchasing -power than a five dollar gold piece. -</p> -<p>It was some five or six days before we passed out of the Maricopas' -farming country. There was a large bend in the river, and we traveled -three days over a rough, sandy country before we came to the stream -again. On this march we camped without water. The writer was one of -those who stood guard around the stock. The feed was so scarce that -we were kept running all night. I was so completely worn out next day -that at about eleven a.m. I sought rest by dropping out of the command -and hiding from the rearguard behind a clump of brush that grew on a -sand knoll. No sooner had I laid down than I fell into a sound slumber, -oblivious to all danger. -</p> -<p>When the writer awakened from that sleep the rearguard had passed on -long before; the sun had changed position so that the drowsy soldier -felt perfectly lost, but gradually he came to realize that it was three -or four o'clock p.m. Some six or eight feet from where he had been -lying he found fresh bear tracks, telling him of the wild beast that -had been viewing him while wrapt in slumber. He hurried forward on the -trail, and reached camp just as the night guards were being posted and -his comrades were becoming greatly concerned for his safety. -</p> -<p>Our route lay down the river, through deep sand and mesquit brush, -where we had not only to chop and clear away the brush, but had to push -and pull the wagons until our souls as well as our bodies were worn -out. We gathered mesquit and a kind of pod to feed our mules. We were -six days traveling sixty miles, to the crossing of the Colorado River, -or Red River, as it was called by some. -</p> -<p>The reader will not wonder that on reaching this point a mountain of -gloom rested upon the whole command, causing the men almost to despair -as they, on the 10th day of January, 1847, stood on the banks of the -swift-flowing Colorado—the stream being half a mile wide at that -place—with no alternative but to wade across, pulling and pushing at -the wagons, then to cut and burn their way out, through the thick brush -on the bottom land, to the bench or bluff that opened out on a barren -desert, known to the Mexicans as Tierra Caliente, or the Hot Lands. -</p> -<p>Now the command entered upon another soul-trying march. The route from -the crossing of the Colorado was over the northeast corner of Lower -California, some sixty miles above the Gulf of California, then into -the south-eastern part of Upper California. The stronger men, with a -little extra ration, preceded the main army, to dig wells in the desert. -</p> -<p>No sooner was the almost hopeless march commenced than men began to -lag behind, so that when the advance guard came to a halt at any part -of the journey, others were miles behind. The first day we came to a -well that General Phil. Kearney and his men had dug, but it had caved -in so badly that it was almost as much work to clean it as to dig a new -one; and when it was cleaned, our men dug another. The water was scant -and brackish. We remained at that point only until the rear of the -command caught up, then proceeded on our way, stopping but a short time -in any one place, until we reached Cariza, a splendid spring near the -base of the Sierra Nevada range of mountains. The first men to reach -water filled kegs and canteens, lashed them to the stouter animals, and -hastened back to succor and revive the famishing men who were bringing -up the rear. -</p> -<p>On that terrible march many of the weaker men despaired of ever -reaching water. We passed several, who, with sunken and glazed eyes and -blackened mouths and looking as ghastly as death, stammered to us as -we passed them: "Goodby, I shall never live to reach water. I cannot -go a step farther, but shall die on this spot." Poor fellows! I verily -believe that if they had not been resuscitated by the water that was -carried back, their words would have been painfully true before the -rising of another sun. -</p> -<p>If it had not been for some fresh mules and beef cattle that we met on -this tedious march, we never could have got through with the wagons, -and possibly would have lost some men, as our flour had given out and -we were reduced so near to starvation as to eat every particle of the -worn-out beef ox; even the tender part of the horns and hoofs, and the -intestines, were broiled on the coals and eaten, without water to wash -them. -</p> -<p>In our mess, the last spoonful of flour was made into a thin gravy by -stirring it into some water where some of our glue-like beef had been -boiled. This so-called gravy was divided among the men by spoonfuls, -then the pan was scraped with a table knife and wiped into a spoon, -and with the point of the same knife it was divided into seven parts. -Each man watched the division; and I do not believe there was one man -out of the seven but would have fought for his share of that spoonful -of pan-scrapings. Nor do I believe there was one of them who would -have robbed his comrades. For the last three or four hundred miles we -had been in the habit of cooking the food, and dividing it into seven -equal parts. Then one man would turn his back, and the cook or the one -who made the division would touch each morsel and say, "Who shall have -that?" whereupon the one whose back was turned would say, so and so, -calling each messmate by name, until all had been "touched off," as we -used to call it. -</p> -<p>From our camp at the spring we passed into the canyons of the Sierra -Nevada. The days had been excessively hot on the desert, and it was -very cold and frosty in the mountains at night. We soon came to where -the canyons were too narrow for our wagons; then with crowbar and -pickaxe and sledge we went at the jagged rocks until the pass was -sufficiently widened, and with our shoulders to the wheels or by -tugging at ropes we got our train to the summit. -</p> -<p>It was while passing through this range of mountains that we first saw -live-oak acorns. They were bitter as wormwood; yet we ate considerable -quantities of them, and as we descended the western slope they became -very abundant, and served for a change. As we passed down to the -valleys we found green mustard, which was boiled and eaten without -pepper or salt. -</p> -<p>About this time one of our guides or interpreters brought word from -the governor of San Diego that several battles had been fought by the -California troops and United States forces, and that we might meet a -large Mexican army retreating to Sonora. In consequence of receiving -this news, Colonel Cooke ordered a drill. We had secured a few beef -cattle and some fresh mules, and with this increase of strength and the -prospect of engaging the Mexicans we were spurred on from one mountain -summit to another, pushing and pulling the wagons—a business we were -well versed in, from oft repeated lessons. -</p> -<p>At Warner's Ranch, we came to the first house we had seen in -California. Mr. Warner hailed from the state of Massachusetts. From him -the colonel purchased two or three fat beeves. The beef was good, yet -we had nothing to eat with it, not even pepper or salt for seasoning, -and it did not satisfy the cravings of hunger. We rested a day at the -ranch, and some of us wandered off up the creek in hopes of finding -wild fruit or game. We came to a small camp of Indians who were engaged -in hulling and leaching live-oak acorns, then pounding them to a pulp -in stone mortars; this was boiled to a thick mush in home-made earthen -pots. The writer bantered one of the old ladies for about three or four -quarts of that cold-ochre mush, by offering her the belt that held -his pantaloons in place. She accepted the offer, and he, being without -proper utensil to receive his purchase, substituted his hat for a pan, -and the mush was scooped into it. Then when he found himself in the -dilemma of his pantaloons threatening to desert him, he seized the -alternative of holding up that portion of his attire with one hand, and -carrying his hat and its contents in the other, and proceeded to camp, -where his purchase was divided and devoured as a sweet morsel. -</p> -<p>From Warner's Ranch we traveled over low hills and camped on a little -narrow flat between two hills. In the night it came on to rain -terribly, and the flat was so flooded that we awoke to find ourselves -half-side deep in water. At dawn one of the boys crawled out of the -water and wet blankets, and crowed; for he had learned that the men who -had been sent back to recover some flour which had been left in the -boat had come in with about four hundred pounds. Soon every man in camp -had heard the glad tidings of the arrival of this expedition, about -which there had been much anxiety. -</p> -<p>In a short time the writer was called on by the orderly sergeant of -his company, D, to go with him and receive the portion of flour to be -issued to the company. At the door of the tent where the flour was -being divided we met Col. Cooke, who was sitting with his head down, as -if in deep study. Some of the boys had found a riddle that had fared -better than its owner, and near by one of them struck up the tune -of "Leather Breeches Full of Stitches," or some similar lively air. -Immediately a number of men formed a couple of French fours and began -dancing in water half to their shoe tops. The colonel caught the sound, -started up, and inquired what it was. Some one replied, "Oh, nothing, -only the boys are dancing and making merry over the prospect of getting -a little flour." The colonel shrugged his shoulders and remarked, "I -never saw such a d—d set of men before in my life. If they can get out -somewhere so they can dry their clothes and have a little flour they -will be as happy as gods!" -</p> -<p>Doubtless the colonel could call to mind often having seen us stagger -into camp, and perhaps could remember a dozen or so of us rush to where -his mule was being fed corn mixed with beans, which the well-fed mule -would object to by throwing his head first one way, then the other, -scattering the half-chewed corn and beans in the sand, where the hungry -soldiers would pick it from, rub it in their hands, and eat it raw; for -to the famishing soldier beans are not so objectionable. -</p> -<p>I am reminded at this point in my narrative that three croaking ravens -had followed the command nearly all the way from Santa Fe, for the -bits that escaped the soldier's eye. Surely if it had not been for the -ravens' keener vision they would have left in disgust, and would have -given us a very hard name. Even the wolf might have told his fellows -not to follow such a greedy lot, which did not leave a bone till it was -pounded and boiled and re-boiled till it could not be scented, and if -perchance a bit was found it was too hard for even wolves' teeth. -</p> -<p>From this camp we moved to the west under orders from General Kearney -to go to Los Angeles. While on the march toward that point, just as we -emerged from a canyon, we heard the drum and fife in an open valley. -Soon we saw a military force forming in line of battle, and as we drew -nearer we discovered their spears or lances gleaming in the sunlight, -and officers dashing up and down the lines giving commands. Our advance -guard slowed up, and we were ordered to form in line of battle. Every -officer took his place, the command dressed in proper order, and, as we -advanced, comrades looked into each other's faces as if to say, "How -do you feel about it?" One asked Alexander Stephens the question, and -received a prompt reply, "First-rate. I had as lief go into battle as -not. If we must die, the sooner the better, for it seems that we must -be worn till we starve and die anyhow. I do not fear death a particle." -Others were heard to say as much, and although the ashy look of death -shone in many faces, from the privations undergone, I do not think -there was a tremor in any heart, or a single man who showed the white -feather. -</p> -<p>As we drew near the force in our path, there was a dead silence, as if -awaiting the order to wheel into line and open fire, for we were within -rifle range. Just then two of the opposite party came out on horseback -to meet us. The colonel sent two of our interpreters forward, and -the command was halted. Soon our guides returned and stated that the -supposed foe was a band of Indians which had had a battle with Mexicans -in the vicinity a few days before, and the Indians had returned to bury -their dead. They had taken us for enemies, but their fears were turned -into joy on discovering that we were American soldiers. -</p> -<p>With all our bravery, there was a sigh of relief when we heard the news -that our supposed enemies were friends. It was now late in the day. -and both parties went into camp within a short distance of each other. -Friendly visits back and forth were made that evening. The Indians were -dressed in Spanish costume and were armed the same as the Mexicans; -as I remember them they displayed bravery, and some skill in Mexican -military tactics. -</p> -<p>Next day we proceeded on our way, and passed down a dry wash, the -bottom of which was mostly lined with a whitish cobblestone, upon which -the feet of some comrade showed blood at every step for a hundred yards -or more. I cannot now recall the man's name. We continued our march -from that place, and afterwards learned that the Mexicans had intended -to make an effort to regain California, but the timely arrival of the -battalion prevented any attempt to execute the movement. -</p> -<p>So far as I can remember, it was between January 23 and 27, 1847, that -we passed over a battlefield where General Kearney and his little -command had fought and beaten the Mexicans. There lay broken swords and -firearms, and dead horses and mules; and there also were the graves of -the slain, while all around the blood-stained soil was plainly within -our view, fixing the scene upon our memory. -</p> -<p>Here came to our minds the words of President Brigham Young, in his -farewell address to the battalion, in which he said: "You are now going -into an enemy's land at your country's call. If you will live your -religion, obey and respect your officers, and hold sacred the property -of the people among whom you travel, and never take anything but what -you pay for, I promise you in the name of Israel's God that not one of -you shall fall by the hand of an enemy. Though there will be battles -fought in your front and in your rear, on your right hand and on your -left, you will not have any fighting to do except with wild beasts." -</p> -<p>Here I pause and ask: Who on earth dare to make, of himself, such a -promise, under the circumstances and in the name that this promise had -been made? And yet over three hundred men who heard it could stand -up after they had filled the time of their enlistment, and before -high heaven and all the world could bear testimony to the literal -fulfillment of those words spoken eight months before, in the camp in -Missouri Valley, two thousand miles distant. I ask the honest reader: -From whence came such foresight, if not from the Eternal God, the -Creator of the heavens and the earth, and all things therein? To Him we -ascribe all honor and glory, power and praise, for our success in that -great, wonderful and unparalleled march of twenty-five hundred miles -made by infantry. Who shall say that God had not made bare His arm in -support of that ever memorable Mormon Battalion? But as yet the whole -task of the battalion had not been completed. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXI"></a>CHAPTER XI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">ORDERED TO SAN DIEGO—FIRST VIEW OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN—RUMORS -OF THE ENEMY—COMPLIMENTARY ORDER, BY LIEUT. COL. COOKE, ON THE -ACHIEVEMENTS OF THE MORMON BATTALION—REPORTED HOSTILITY OF -COL. FREMONT TO GEN. KEARNEY—LIVING ON BEEF ALONE—OBTAIN SOME -FLOUR—ROUTINE OF THE CAMP—ORDERED TO LOS ANGELES—DAMAGE BY AN -EARTHQUAKE—WILD HORSES AND CATTLE DRIVEN INTO THE SEA—ARRIVAL AT -LOS ANGELES—RUMORS OF AN ATTACK—CONSTRUCTING A FORT—GUARDING CAJON -PASS—SURROUNDED BY WILD CATTLE—TAKE REFUGE IN A RAVINE—COL. FREMONT -ARRESTED—SITE OF SAN BERNARDINO—GETTING OUT A LIBERTY POLE—BRUSH -WITH THE INDIANS—CLEARING LOS ANGELES OF DOGS—WICKEDNESS IN THE -TOWN—BRUTALITY OF BULL FIGHTS, HORSE RACING, ETC.—ALWAYS READY FOR -AN ATTACK—FIRST RAISING OF THE STARS AND STRIPES ON A LIBERTY POLE IN -CALIFORNIA. -</p> -<p>ORDERS had been received changing our destination from Los Angeles to -San Diego, passing by way of the Mission San Luis del Rey. When we -reached the San Diego Mission we passed it by and camped between it and -the town. It was en route to this place that we came in sight of the -waters of the great Pacific Ocean, a view that was most pleasurable to -us, and which we hailed with shouts of joy, as we felt that our long -march of starvation was about over. We were now drawing five pounds of -fair beef, without salt or pepper. -</p> -<p>Another day's march, and we had completed the journey over the nation's -highway across the continent. We were allowed one day at San Diego, -when we were ordered back to the San Luis del Rey Mission. There -was some disappointment, but the order to return was obeyed without -murmuring. It was thought we would meet the enemy, as it was said there -was a force of about eighteen hundred Californians, under General -Flores, lurking in the mountains northwest of San Luis del Rey Mission, -but we did not see them. At the Mission we were required to do fatigue -duty, as it was called, which included cleaning up the place, it having -been neglected a long time. At this place the following was issued by -Col. Cooke: -</p> -<p class="right">"HEADQUARTERS, MISSION OF SAN DIEGO, -</p> -<p class="right">"January 30, 1847. -</p> -<p>"Lieutenant Colonel commanding congratulates the battalion on its safe -arrival on the shores of the Pacific Ocean, and the conclusion of its -march of over two thousand miles. History may be searched in vain for -an equal march of infantry; nine-tenths of it through a wilderness, -where nothing but savages and wild beasts are found, or deserts where, -for want of water, there is no living creature. There, with almost -hopeless labor, we have dug deep wells, which the future traveler will -enjoy. Without a guide who had traversed them, we have ventured into -trackless prairies, where water was not found for several marches. With -crowbar and pickaxe in hand, we have worked our way over mountains, -which seemed to defy aught save the wild goat, and hewed a passage -through a chasm of living rock more narrow than our wagons. To bring -these first wagons to the Pacific, we have preserved the strength of -the mules by herding them over large tracts, which you have laboriously -guarded without loss. -</p> -<p>"The garrison of four presidios of Sonora, concentrated within the -walls of Tucson, gave us no pause; we drove them out with their -artillery; but our intercourse with the citizens was unmarked by a -single act of injustice. Thus marching, half naked and half fed, and -living upon wild animals, we have discovered and made a road of great -value to our country. -</p> -<p>"Arrived at the first settlement of California, after a single day's -rest, you cheerfully turned off from the route to this point of -promised repose, to enter upon a campaign, and meet, as we believed, -the approach of the enemy; and this, too, without even salt to season -your sole subsistence of fresh meat. -</p> -<p>"Lieutenants A.J. Smith and George Stoneman of the First Dragoons, have -shared and given valuable aid in all these labors. -</p> -<p>"Thus, volunteers, you have exhibited some high and essential qualities -of veterans. But much remains undone. Soon you will turn your strict -attention to the drill, to system and order, to forms also, which are -all necessary to the soldier. -</p> -<p class="right">"By order of Lieutenant-Colonel P. St. George Cooke. -</p> -<p class="right">[Signed.] "P. C. Merrill, Adjutant." -</p> -<p>It is stated by Sergeant Daniel Tyler, in his "History of the Mormon -Battalion," that February 4th was the date of the reading of the order. -Its spirit and tone were an agreeable surprise to us, as the general -tenor of the colonel's course had been so different, apparently, that -we did not look for him to do the battalion justice. Yet if he had -been less stern and decisive, it would have been worse for us. We had -stern realities to deal with, consequently like means were necessary -to overcome the obstacles we had to contend with. It required push and -vim to enable the battalion to perform the heroic deeds demanded of it, -and a sympathy that would have caused the men to shrink back instead -of seeing that every one stood to his post of duty would have been a -fatal error. After all, Col. P. St. George Cooke was a good military -commander, maintaining excellent military discipline; and for one the -writer feels to say, Peaceful be his sleep. -</p> -<p>It was about the 4th or 5th of February when we got back to the -mission, and the order given, with others, was made known. The other -orders included such directions as to trim the hair so that none came -below the tip of the ear, and shave the beard all but the mustache. -</p> -<p>We were informed that we had no right to think in acting for -ourselves—that the government paid men to think for us, and it was our -duty to obey orders. We were allowed very little time in which to wash -our rags and hunt down the insects that had waged a continuous warfare -on us all the way from Albuquerque or the Rio Grande del Norte to the -coast; yet we turned on the creeping foe, and never relented till we -routed him, nor showed any quarter till the last one was gone. We also -had to repel an attack from the nimble flea in great numbers, in which -we realized that this impudent insect did not care where he hit. -</p> -<p>While we were still living on beef alone, without pepper or salt, we -were ordered out on squad drill, which seemed to continue about eight -hours per day. The reason given for this was the supposed threatened -attack from eight hundred Californians in the mountains; and further, -the rumors that Col. John C. Fremont, with eight hundred or a thousand -men, claimed it was his right, and not Gen. Kearney's, to dictate -to the United States forces in California. In fact, it was reported -that Col. Fremont was in open hostility to Gen. Kearney, who was -military governor of California by orders from Washington. Under these -circumstances, we were kept in constant readiness, not knowing the -moment we would be called into active service. -</p> -<p>Our training daily was one hour for each pound of beef issued, the beef -costing less than a cent a pound to the government. Sergeant Tyler says -our rations were five pounds a day, and I say it was not half enough, -for we were ravenously hungry all the time. If the reader doubts this, -let him try the ration for a little while, and doubt will disappear. -</p> -<p>About February 25 we obtained bolted flour and some other supplies of -provisions that had been brought from the Sandwich Islands, by Major -Sward, to San Diego, and thence to San Luis del Rey by mule team. In -the meantime we had received a small amount of unbolted flour, brought -by Lieutenant Oman and a small detachment of the battalion sent out for -the purpose. Then the beef rations were reduced; so that during the -whole twelve months' service we did not once have issued to us the full -rations allowed by the government to the American soldier—if we had -full rations in one thing, another was lacking. Either the government -made a great saving from regulations in feeding us, or a steal put -money into some contractors' pockets. -</p> -<p>Day after day the duties of soldier were performed, drilling, out on -detached duty, or marching here, there and everywhere, early and late, -by day and by night, just to suit the fancy of some of our officers, -and not always upon real occasion for the movements. It would seem that -in many respects the soldier's life is much like a faithful wife's; and -in others much unlike a woman's work. Like hers, in that the task seems -never done, busy all day and up at every hour of night in response to -calls of first one child, then another, or even to the exploits of -some mischievous cat, her rest broken and her life worn away; unlike -hers, in that she usually has a dry shelter, regular meals, and a -place to lie down when she can rest, while the soldier in time of war -never knows where he will make his bed at night, often is without food -and drink, having to move at the word of command over deserts, rocks, -mountains, plains and rivers—a stranger to the locality he may call -his home. But the toils of both are necessary, she to rear the nation's -pride and strength—a soldier in the right; he to protect her and -himself, to defend their country's rights and avenge her wrongs. -</p> -<p>Returning to the narrative of garrison duty, it appeared to me the -hours of drill were more than Sergeant Tyler's account will admit of; -but I shall not dispute with him, as I write from memory. I do recall -that roll call came at daylight, sick call at 7:30 a.m., breakfast call -at 8:40, drill at 10 a.m. and 3 p.m. roll call at sundown, tattoo at -8:30, and taps at 9 p.m., after which lights must be out except in case -of sickness. All must be silent then, as the men are supposed to have -retired for the night. -</p> -<p>On or near the 20th of March, companies A, C, D and E took up their -journey to the Puebla de Los Angeles. We traveled over a hilly country, -where there were numerous herds of cattle and bands of horses. In some -places we passed down to and along the sandy beach around big bluffs -over which, so we were told, the Californians, some years previously, -had driven thousands of horses and cattle to rid the country of them, -as they had overrun the place so that all were suffering for food. This -story seemed confirmed by the great amount of bones that we saw among -the rocks and sands at the foot of deep declivities along the seashore. -</p> -<p>On the way to Los Angeles we passed a stone church that had been badly -shaken; the walls had been good mason work, but now were mostly broken -down. We were told that an earthquake did the damage, and that some -three hundred people had been killed. On by the San Gabriel River we -went, arriving at Los Angeles in about four days' march from where we -had started out. We marched into the main street and stacked our arms -as if to say, "We have possession here." -</p> -<p>Most of the citizens stood aloof, looking as if the cause they had -supported was lost, but soon the merchants brought out buckets of -whisky and wine, which they set before the command, inviting us to help -ourselves. Some accepted the invitation rather freely, while others -refrained from touching the beverages. We returned to the river at -night, and camped. In a day or two we were marched about two miles up -the stream, and above the town, where we again ran out of provisions -and had to go hungry; nor did we break our fast till 11 a.m. next day. -</p> -<p>At this time the air was full of alarming rumors. A revolt of Californians -was talked of; then it was Fremont who was said to be in -rebellion against General Kearney's authority; and again, a powerful -band of Indians was ready to pounce down upon us. It was not very -unexpectedly, therefore, that we received orders to occupy the most -commanding point overlooking the town. Soon after this we learned that -a supply of provisions for the command had been landed at San Pedro, -about twenty-one miles distant, and teams and wagons were sent at once, -under an escort of soldiers, the writer being one. We returned next -day, heavily loaded. -</p> -<p>About this date, the command began the erection of a fort, or rather -began to throw up earthworks. Lieutenant Rosecranz was ordered with a -small detachment to Cajon Pass, a narrow opening in the Sierra Nevada -range, about eighty miles east of us. The object was to guard the pass -against the advance of any foe, for, as has been said, there were many -rumors of impending danger. In a short time, Lieutenant Pace, with -twenty-nine officers and men of the battalion—the writer being one of -the number—received orders to relieve the detachment of Lieutenant -Rosecranz. Pace's command had just reached the Rosecranz party, finding -the latter in the act of striking camp, when a dispatch came by pony -express ordering us to return as well. -</p> -<p>On our march out, the wild cattle, which were there by thousands, -became excited and began to bellow and crowd toward us. We could see -them for miles coming on the run. They closed in quickly until we were -surrounded by them on three sides, with a deep gulch or very brushy -ravine on the fourth. We retreated in double-quick time to this gulch, -and were compelled to remain in what shelter it afforded until the next -day, before we could pass on in safety. -</p> -<p>The unsettled state of the country kept us constantly busy. Our fort -was pushed to completion, and we having obtained what artillery Colonel -Fremont had, the twelve or fifteen pieces now in our possession were -placed in proper position for defense. Everything was made as complete -as could be, and the warclouds began to give way. Fremont had been -placed under arrest for insubordination or rebellion, I do not recall -which, and this contributed to the peace of the country. -</p> -<p>A Spaniard was hired to haul a liberty pole from San Bernardino Canyon, -a distance of eighty miles, and as he dared not undertake the journey -without a military escort, Corporal Lafayette Shepherd and fourteen -men, among whom the writer was included, were sent to protect the -Spaniard and help get the pole down to the fort. On that trip we camped -on the present site of San Bernardino City, then a wild and lonely -wilderness, with not a house or farm in sight. At that time the country -abounded in wild cattle, bear, and other wild animals. -</p> -<p>Just where we came out on the plain we camped for the night, and in the -morning our Spanish friend went out into the hills to see if he could -kill a deer. Soon he came upon a party of Indians jerking beef, and he -shot into their camp. They came out, returned his fire, and gave him -chase. We were getting breakfast when he dashed into our camp, shouting -that the Indians were upon us, and for us to get our guns. Of course, -we complied, and were ready in short order, but as no Indians came, the -Spaniard insisted that we go in and rout them, as they were killing the -citizens' cattle, and our commander had given a promise of protection -from this. Hastily we saddled our mules and started, expecting every -moment to meet the Indians, who were on foot. We found no one before we -came to the campfires, around which was strewn considerable beef. Soon -we discovered the Indians fleeing up the mountain, and on our jaded -mules we gave chase, but when we reached the summit the Indians were -going up the opposite ridge. We dismounted and poured a few volleys -into the brush above them. They did not fire back. I do not think any -harm was done. They were fleeing for their lives and did not show -any opposition to us, and we had no desire to harm them, but simply -to demonstrate to the Californians that as United States soldiers we -were ready to protect them and their property, as was promised by our -officers. -</p> -<p>We hastened back to the fort with our charge, the logs in the rough -being about fifty feet each, the two making a pole between ninety and -ninety-five feet long when completed, which was done by the members of -the battalion at the fort. -</p> -<p>Another event about this period was an order by Colonel Cooke for a -detail of good marksmen and trusty men to go through the town and shoot -or bayonet all the dogs to be found in the streets. The colonel had -notified the town authorities of his intention. Accordingly the detail -was made and ammunition issued. The writer was one of the trusted -marksmen. We sallied forth in the town of Los Angeles, where the dogs -were more numerous than human beings, and commenced our disagreeable -and deadly work. Muskets rattled in every street and byway, dogs barked -and howled in every direction, and women and children wept to have -the animals spared. But military orders had to be obeyed, for the dog -nuisance had become intolerable. After that, there were sanitary orders -sent forth, and the streets were cleared of the dogs and a great amount -of bones and other rubbish. -</p> -<p>With all this cleaning up, there still was tolerated the greater -nuisances of liquor drinking, gambling, the most lewd and obscene -conduct that could be imagined, Sabbath breaking by horse racing, cock -and bull righting, men righting and knifing one another—indeed, the -Sabbath was the greater day for all these vices. -</p> -<p>Bull fighting was carried on inside of a square of one to four acres -surrounded by one-story adobe flat-roofed houses, on which spectators -would climb, and thus have an excellent view of the whole exhibition -of cruelty and bravado and jeopardy to life. Numbers of the wildest -and most ferocious bulls were taken, and were brought into the arena -one at a time. The animal was turned loose, and a man would tease him -into fury with a sharp lance. A horseman would charge and make thrust -after thrust at the maddened bull, striving to pierce him just behind -the horns, the aim being to cut the pith of the spinal column at that -point. If this were done, the animal would fall dead on the spot. As -a general thing, the bull was more apt to gore the rider's horse, and -give the rider himself a very close call; but a number of very expert -horsemen were kept in readiness to lasso the bull or cast a blanket -over his eyes and thus blindfold him until his tormentor got out of -danger. In this cruel sport many horses were sacrificed, and sometimes -the riders as well. It was not an unusual thing for a hundred or more -of these wild bulls to be collected at a time, and the bloody sport to -be kept up three or four days and perhaps more. Sometimes a grizzly -bear would be captured and turned loose with a wild bull, the death -of one and perhaps both being the result. The whole populace seemed -to enjoy this cruel sport, shouting and screaming thereat all the day -long. Males and females, of all ages and conditions, met on a common -level to witness this wild and reckless amusement. -</p> -<p>Horse racing took place on the principal streets. One popular part of -this pastime was to secure an old male chicken; this was buried all but -the head in a hole in the street, the soil being packed in as tight as -could be and have the bird live. An Indian stood by to rebury the fowl -as fast as the horsemen resurrected him by seizing him by the head when -riding past at full speed. The aim was to swoop down, seize the cock's -head, pull the bird out of the hole, and hold to the head to the end of -the contest, which was indulged in by a dozen or more. When one rider -tore the bird from the hole all the others would charge on him and try -to capture it. The possessor would strike right and left, to hold his -prize, until the poor fowl was torn to pieces. Often the bird fell to -the ground alive, was buried again, and some one else would lead in -the dash for it. Just before the rider reached the fowl, a horseman -on either side would lash the horse unmercifully, so that the rider -could not slow up to get a better chance at the exposed head. This game -would be continued till some one carried the fowl's head to the end in -triumph. -</p> -<p>It was said that a scheme existed to draw the attention of the -Americans during the most exciting of these sports, and then raid our -camp; but if this ever was thought of it failed, for with us everything -was kept in readiness for an emergency, and sometimes we lay at night -with loaded muskets and fixed bayonets. Besides, we had become very -proficient in military tactics, and every man had learned well his duty -as a soldier. -</p> -<p>The fort having been completed, and every reasonable anticipation for -surprise in the return of the Mexican forces or for an uprising having -been cut off, on the morning of the Fourth of July, 1847, the Stars and -Stripes was hoisted on the pole in triumph, and floated in the breezes -from the Pacific Ocean—I think the first time that glorious banner -waved from a liberty pole in California, although Commodore Sloat had -raised the American flag at Monterey on July 7, 1846. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXII"></a>CHAPTER XII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">TERM OF ENLISTMENT EXPIRES—BATTALION MEMBERS PREPARING TO RETURN TO -THEIR FAMILIES—ONE COMPANY RE-ENLISTS—AN INSOLENT SPANIARD—PISTOL -SNAPPED IN THE WRITER'S FACE—ALMOST A DEATHBLOW—DESPERATE FIGHT -STOPPED BY BYSTANDERS—SERIOUS TROUBLE WITH ANOTHER SPANIARD—LEARN -THE LESSON TO AVOID THOSE WHO GAMBLE OR DRINK INTOXICANTS—SPANISH -CHARACTER—CLASS OF CALIFORNIA'S INHABITANTS IN 1847—CONDITION OF THE -COUNTRY—APPEARANCE OF THE TOWNS AND VILLAGES—DIFFICULTY IN SECURING -AN OUTFIT FOR MEMBERS OF THE BATTALION TO JOURNEY EASTWARD. -</p> -<p>THE members of the Mormon Battalion had been purchasing horses and -mules and a general outfit for a return to our friends at the close -of our term of enlistment, which was drawing nigh. At the same time, -Col. Stephenson, of the New York volunteers, and other commissioned -officers, were making strenuous efforts to have us re-enlist for -another twelve months, or six months at least, telling us they had -authority to impress us if they chose, but they preferred to have us -come as volunteers. It had been reported that although the Californians -had been whipped, there was not concord, and that as soon as the Mormon -Battalion left the country the Californians would revolt and make an -effort to overthrow United States supremacy; but while we remained -there was no fear. -</p> -<p>Now, as there were many of the battalion who had spent all their -wages—ninety-six dollars for their year's service—it may have -appeared to them that the only thing to do was to re-enlist. Horses -could be purchased cheaply, and provisions were not high, but some -money was needed. Consequently, one company re-enlisted under Capt. -Davis of company E, while the rest of the command were busy preparing -for their journey east to meet the Saints somewhere, they knew not just -where. -</p> -<p>Comparatively few of our command had acquired sufficient knowledge -of the Spanish language to do their own trading, and these acted as -interpreters for their comrades. The writer happened to be one of -the few who had made some success in picking up the language. On one -occasion, when hunting the town and adjacent country for such articles -as we needed in our outfit, he became fatigued and went into a cafe -for a cup of coffee. On entering the restaurant he found, besides the -landlord, three or four good-appearing Spaniards, who soon began to -question him about the United States and its people. Their questions -were being answered in a courteous manner, when the attendant, who was -a tall, fine-looking Spaniard, interposed with the remark that America -was a fine country, but her soldiers were cowards and babies. The -writer was alone, and scarcely knew how to treat the insult; besides, -there was a possibility that it was intended as a joke. Therefore, he -felt that it would be improper to be too abrupt in replying, and said, -quietly, that America was a good country and her soldiers were the -bravest of the brave. -</p> -<p>At that moment the Spanish-Californian stepped back and brought out -an American hat that had been cut through on the side by some sharp -instrument. Said he: "Here is one's hat—I killed him in battle. He -was a great baby." Reaching back, he brought out a dragoon's sword and -a holster, with two iron-mounted U. S. pistols. His eyes flashed, and -he mimicked the dying soldier, saying all the Americans were cowards. -My blood was up, and I taunted him by asking him how it was, if the -Americans were such cowards and babies, and fled from the Spaniards on -the battlefield, that the Americans had taken the country. Pointing to -the Stars and Stripes floating over the fort on the hill, I said, "That -shows where the brave men are; it is the Californians who are cowards -and babies." In an instant a pistol was snapped in my face, and I saw -the fire roll from the flintlock. Quick as a flash, I caught a heavy -knife that was handy, leaped on to the counter, and was bringing the -weapon down on the head of my assailant, when both of us were seized by -bystanders, and were disarmed. I started for camp, but was dragged back -to compromise the affair. When I re-entered the room the proprietor -was priming his weapon with mustard seed. He said it was all fun, and -we should make up. The spectators were anxious to settle, and offered -to treat. Some of the Spaniards expressed regret at the occurrence. -The matter was dropped, though I never was convinced that that Spanish -attendant did not have murder in his heart. -</p> -<p>On another occasion I had an unpleasant experience with another -Spaniard. It was when I was on guard duty at the prison in Los Angeles. -A very large, well dressed Spaniard came across the street from a -drinking saloon and gambling den. He wore a large sombrero worth about -eight dollars. He had been gambling and drinking, but was not drunk. -Said he, "I have lost all my money, and I want to leave this hat with -you for four dollars. If I do not bring the money back, you may keep -the hat; it is worth eight dollars, and will sell for that any day." -His offer was rejected, when he showed some displeasure, again -urging the loan, and promising to bring the money back in a short time. -Finally he prevailed, left the hat and took the money. -</p> -<p>In two or three hours the Spaniard returned, saying he wanted his -sombrero, at the same time promising to bring the money next day. Of -course this proposition was rejected, whereupon he showed considerable -temper, but at last said it was all right, he would find the money; and -added, "Come over to the saloon and have a drink of wine, and we will -be good friends." Thinking that would settle the matter, I complied -with his request. He had on a long Spanish sarapa, or blanket, and as -we neared the door he stepped ahead, leaned over the counter, and said -something to the bartender. As I entered the door I was again asked for -the hat, and he in turn was requested to hand over the money. He grew -angry, threatened, and finally challenged me to fight. As I squared off -to meet his impending assault, the Spaniard drew a large bowie knife -for a thrust at me, but was stopped by some bystanders. I was at the -time nineteen years of age, and my young blood was thoroughly aroused. -I rushed for my musket, which was loaded and had bayonet fixed, and -with the hurting end foremost I was quickly back at the saloon, -forcibly declaring my readiness for the conflict. The bystanders closed -in and called for peace, the four dollars was soon raised, and the -sombrero found its way back into the hands of its angry owner, who -displayed considerable effect of the liquor he had been drinking. But I -learned an impressive lesson, namely, to avoid the companionship of men -who drink intoxicants or who follow games of chance for a livelihood. -Even if a man does not indulge himself, those who do are liable to -ask favors, and if these are not granted the next thing is insult, -which often ends in bloodshed, or did in those days in California. In -illustration of the light estimate of human life, I can recall a man's -foot being kicked about the street, and no more notice being taken of -it than if it were an animal's. -</p> -<p>As to Spanish character, the writer can say from a close acquaintance -that when the Spaniards are sober and friendly, they are very friendly, -hospitable and polite, being very good company; in fact, we seldom -met with a more wholesouled and agreeable people. Yet it is doubtful -if there are any people who will resent an insult quicker and more -seriously than they will. They are brave and manly; yet those who are -of mixed blood, such as the Greasers, are low, degraded, treacherous -and cruel. In California there were a few of the higher class, many -more of a medium kind, and still more of the lower class; so that in -summing up the total of California's inhabitants in 1846-7, the country -was only half civilized and thinly inhabited. -</p> -<p>At that time the country was wild, being overrun with wilder horses, -cattle, sheep and goats. In places, wild oats and mustard abounded, -in many sections the mustard being as high as a man's head when on -horseback, and so dense that a horse could be forced only a few -feet through it. In the foothills and mountains wild game was very -abundant, consisting of elk, deer, bear, and smaller game. Along the -water courses and on the lakes waterfowl was plentiful. There were -millions of acres of uncultivated land, as good as any on the globe. -The climate is scarcely equalled anywhere. The chief products of the -soil then were wheat, barley, beans, peas, apples, peaches, plums, -apricots, pears, dates, figs, olives, grapes, black pepper, spices, -and many fruits not named here. These all seemed to grow very near to -perfection, especially when properly cared for. The greater part of -the labor was performed by native Indians, and that too with the most -primitive tools. The buildings were low, being one-story adobe, with -flat roofs covered with cement, or a natural tar that exuded from the -earth; sometimes tile was used, but I do not remember seeing one brick -building or shingle roof in all the land. -</p> -<p>Under the conditions which existed, it was no easy matter for a hundred -and fifty men to get an outfit together to travel over the mountains -east, as that number of the battalion intended to do; but having -commenced before we were discharged from service—say some time in -June—to purchase our horses, saddles, and everything necessary for a -pack train, we were partly prepared for the journey when the day came -for us to be mustered out. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">MORMON BATTALION MUSTERED OUT OF SERVICE—ONE HUNDRED AND FIFTY -MEMBERS ORGANIZE TO RETURN EAST TO THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS—START ON THE -JOURNEY—DIFFICULTIES OF THE ROUTE—DEALING WITH WILD HORSES AND -CATTLE—STAMPEDE OF A PACK ANIMAL—CHASE INTO AN INDIAN CAMP—LOST ALL -NIGHT IN A SWAMP—SUFFERING ON THE DESERT FOR LACK OF WATER—ARRIVE -NEAR SUTTER'S FORT—ON THE SITE OF SACRAMENTO—PARTY DECIDE TO REMAIN -OVER FOR THE YEAR, AND OBTAIN EMPLOYMENT—MEET CAPT. J. A. SUTTER AND -JAMES W. MARSHALL—PROPOSITION TO CAPT. SUTTER—ENGAGED TO WORK ON -A SAWMILL—PROCEEDINGS AT THE MILLSITE—MILL STARTED UP—THE WRITER -ENGAGED TO DIRECT INDIANS LABORING AT THE TAIL RACE—CONVERSATION WITH -MR. MARSHALL—MARSHALL TALKS ABOUT FINDING GOLD—HE AND THE WRITER MAKE -A SEARCH FOR GOLD, BUT FINDING NONE, DEFER THE INVESTIGATION TILL NEXT -MORNING—MARSHALL'S FAITH IN HIS BEING SUCCESSFUL IN DISCOVERING THE -PRECIOUS METAL. -</p> -<p>ON the 16th of July, 1847, the close of the Mormon Battalion's term of -enlistment, we were called into line, and an officer passed along as in -ordinary inspection. Then, without further ceremony, he said. "You are -discharged." I do not think one-half of the command heard him, he spoke -so low. Some of us thought he may have felt ashamed because of his -conduct toward us on our march to Santa Fe. He was the little bigot, -Lieutenant A. J. Smith. -</p> -<p>Thus we bade adieu to United States military authority and returned -to the ranks of civil life. One hundred and fifty of us organized -ourselves into hundreds, fifties and tens, and were soon on our way -to meet our friends somewhere, as we supposed, in the Rocky Mountains -east; and still we did not know just where. We sought information as -best we could, and the most that we could learn was that by following -under the base of the Sierra Nevada range six hundred miles we would -come to Sutter's Fort, where we could obtain further information as to -the best route to where we supposed we would find our friends. -</p> -<p>It was about the 20th of July when the first company moved out on the -intended journey; and in three or four days the remaining hundred -followed. We passed Gen. Pico's ranch about twenty miles northward, -and from there crossed over a mountain so high and steep that it made -our heads swim, and it was with difficulty that we could sit on our -horses. In places, it was impossible for us to dismount, for lack of -room. Two mules lost their footing and fell twenty-five or thirty feet -before they could regain a foothold, and it was very hard work to get -them back on the trail. We traveled some eighteen or twenty miles from -Pico's ranch to Francisco ranch, where we joined the fifty who had -preceded the main body, and were waiting for us to come up. -</p> -<p>A meeting was held, at which it was decided to purchase forty or fifty -beef cattle, which was done at not to exceed four dollars per head. The -course of our journey from this time was northward. The country where -we were traveling was a wilderness of hill and dale, deep gorges, and -brush, so that the first two days we lost ten or fifteen head of beef -cattle. It was decided to make sure of the remainder by slaughtering -and jerking or curing the beef, and next morning there came a battle -with the cattle, which had become wild and ferocious, plunging at the -men on horseback everywhere, so we had to shoot them down as best we -could. After stopping two or three days to jerk the beef, we proceeded -on our journey. -</p> -<p>Many of our horses were bronchos, or wild, when we purchased them, and -gave us much trouble. The packs would get loose and turn under the -animals, which would run and kick, scattering things as they went. -One day Alexander Stephens, William Garner and I had a horse stampede -with its burden. I gave pursuit, and as I had no thought of anything -but capturing the animal, I chased it about three miles, right into -an Indian camp. The Indians must have seen me coming and fled. Their -fires were burning, pots boiling, and camp equipage laid around. From -appearances there must have been fifteen to twenty families; their -tracks were thick and fresh. The runaway horse seems to have been -so excited that, like its pursuer, it ran in among the camp before -observing the danger; then it turned and I secured it with a lasso. -At that moment I recognized the peril of my own position, in the -possibility of being ambushed by Indians. It may be needless to state -that I got out of that place in a hurry; although I had lost sight of -the camp and was confused for a little time till I found my trail. -</p> -<p>Upon returning, I met my two comrades, who had had all they could do -to take care of the other pack animals, and were very anxious about -me. It was getting late in the day, and the company had passed out of -sight. We followed as fast as we could, but darkness overtook us and -we soon found ourselves wandering in the bullrushes and marshes of the -east end of Tulare Lake. Turn which way we would we could not find any -trail out. At last we found a spot more solid than the surroundings; -we halted and felt around in the darkness; every way we went it was -mud and water. The night was so dark that we could not see each other -or the horses, and finally we tied the animals together so we could -hold them, took off the pack, and waited around till daylight. I do not -think either of us slept fifteen minutes that night. We had nothing to -make a fire with, and if we had, it would not have been wise to have -attracted savage Indians with one. Early in the morning we prepared to -seek a way out, and to our surprise, discovered close by a bullrush -boat which an aged Indian was pushing through the rushes. The boat had -been made by twisting and braiding the rushes together, and reminded us -of what the prophet says about embassadors going forth in vessels of -bullrushes. We could not learn from whence the Indian came or whither -he was going, nor yet his errand. We bade him good day, and soon found -the trail of our company. After going three or four miles, we met some -of our men who had been sent in search of us; they had passed the night -in great anxiety concerning our safety. Thankfully we reached the camp -to have a bite of food and proceed on our journey, grateful that we yet -had our hair on the top of our heads, where the darkey says; "the wool -ought to grow." -</p> -<p>Our journey took us over cold mountain streams, some of which we -forded, carrying our baggage on our heads and making from three to five -trips each way; others we built rafts for, by tying dry logs together -with our lash-ropes, piling them with baggage, and drawing them over -or pushing them with poles, the men swimming their horses and often -themselves. These streams were quite numerous. Among those I remember -were the Tulare, the San Joaquin River, and others. The crossing of -these streams was hard on man and beast, the water being cold close to -the mountains, and the work hazardous owing to the rapid currents and -boulders in the channels of the rivers. On this journey we were two -days on dry plains, and suffered almost to death; some of our horses -became so thirsty that their eyes turned white as milk and blind as -bats; they staggered against anything they came to. Some of the men -gave out entirely, and if it had not been for some of the stronger men -and horses that pushed forward and then returned to aid the others, -many of the latter never would have been able to have reached camp. Men -had their tongues swollen and eyes sunken and glazed; some could not -drink water when it was brought to them, until their lips and mouths -had been bathed and some of the liquid poured into their throats. -Fortunately for the writer, he was one of the stronger ones who went -ahead and returned to his comrades the last day on the desert; the -scene was terrible beyond the powers of description. -</p> -<p>Fully five hundred and fifty miles of that journey was made without -seeing a house, or a white woman or child. There were many Indians -and their ranches, but the savages gave us no particular trouble. We -pressed forward till August 26, when we came to the American River, -two miles above Sutter's Fort and about a mile and a half from the -Sacramento River, at the point where the city of Sacramento now stands. -The locality was then a forest of cottonwood timber and undergrowth. -</p> -<p>When we reached the vicinity of Sutter's Fort a consultation was held, -at which it was decided that most of the party would remain until -next year, and obtain employment where they could. Captain John A. -Sutter and James Marshall contemplated building a gristmill and also a -sawmill, but had no skilled workmen to perform the task. Accordingly, -a committee was appointed from our number, who informed Captain -Sutter that we had among us carpenters, blacksmiths, wheelwrights, -millwrights, farmers and common laborers; that we were in need of -horses, cattle, and a general outfit for crossing the mountains early -the next summer, and that if we could not get all money for our pay -we would take part in supplies for our journey; the committee also -inquired what the prospect for employment was. Captain Sutter gave the -committee encouragement, and asked them to call on him again in two or -three days. -</p> -<p>The result was, that between August 29 and September 5, from forty to -sixty of us called on Captain Sutter. Some were employed to work on the -gristmill; others took contracts on the mill race. The race was seven -or eight miles long, and was also intended for irrigation. -</p> -<p>Between the 8th and the 11th of September, Alexander Stephens, James -Berger and the writer started for the site that had been selected by -Mr. Marshall for the sawmill; we were the first Mormons to arrive at -the place. Peter L. Wimmer and family and William Scott had preceded -us a few days, having two wagons loaded with tools and provisions; the -teams were oxen, and were driven by two of Captain Sutter's civilized -Indians. Some weeks after we went up, Henry W. Bigler, Azariah Smith, -William Johnston, and Israel Evans, members of the Mormon Battalion, -came to the camp. -</p> -<p>Upon our arrival at the millsite, work was begun in earnest. The cabin -was finished, a second room being put on in true frontier style. While -some worked on the cabin, others were getting out timbers and preparing -for the erection of the sawmill. The site was at a point where the -river made considerable of a bend, just in the bank of what appeared to -be an old river bed, which was lowered to carry the water from the mill. -</p> -<p>Between January 15th and 20th, 1848, the mill was started up. It was -found that it had been set too low, and the tail race would not carry -off the water, which would drown or kill the flutter wheel. To remedy -this defect, several new pieces of timber were needed, and all hands -were put to work within ten or fifteen rods of the tail race, getting -out the timbers. -</p> -<p>Part of the time I was engaged in directing the labors of a gang of -Digger Indians, as I had picked up sufficient of their dialect to make -them understand me clearly. It had been customary to hoist the gates of -the forebay when we quit work in the evening, letting the water through -the race to wash away the loosened sand and gravel, then close them -down in the morning. The Indians were employed to dig and cast out the -cable rock that was not moved by the water. -</p> -<p>On January 23, I had turned away from the Indians and was with the -white men. Mr. Marshall came along to look over the work in general, -and went to where the tail race entered the river. There he discovered -a bed of rock that had been exposed by the water the night before, the -portion in view in the bottom of the race being three to six feet wide -and fifteen to twenty feet long. Mr. Marshall called me to him as he -examined the bed of the race, and said: "This is a curious rock; I am -afraid it will give us trouble." Then he probed a little further, and -added: "I believe it contains minerals of some kind, and I believe -there is gold in these hills." -</p> -<p>At this statement I inquired, "What makes you think so?" He answered -that he had seen blossom of gold, and upon my asking where, he said it -was the white quartz scattered over the hills; on my inquiring further -as to what quartz was, he told me it was the white, flint-like rock so -plentiful on the hills. I said it was flint rock, but he said no, it -was called quartz in some book he had read, and was an indication of -gold. He sent me to the cabin for a pan to wash the sand and gravel, -and see what we could find. I went to a cabin which had been built near -the millsite by Alexander Stephens, Henry W. Bigler, James Berger, -Azariah Smith, William Johnston and myself, and in which we were doing -our own cooking. I brought the pan and we washed some of the bedrock -that we had scaled up with a pick. As we had no idea of the appearance -of gold in its natural state, our search was unsuccessful. -</p> -<p>Mr. Marshall was determined to investigate further, but it was no use -that night. He rose and said: "We will hoist the gates and turn in all -the water that we can tonight, and tomorrow morning we will shut it -off and come down here, and I believe we will find gold or some other -mineral here." -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">ARRIVAL OF MEMBERS OF THE MORMON BATTALION AT SUTTER'S FORT OPENS THE -WAY FOR THE DISCOVERY OF GOLD IN CALIFORNIA—JAMES W. MARSHALL OUT -EARLY ON JANUARY 24, 1848—"HE IS GOING TO FIND A GOLD MINE"—REGARDED -AS A "NOTIONAL" MAN—"BOYS, I HAVE GOT HER NOW!"—TESTING THE SCALES -OF METAL—"GOLD, BOYS, GOLD!"—FIRST PROCLAMATION OF THE GREAT GOLD -DISCOVERY—SECOND AND THIRD TESTS—ALL EXCITEMENT—THREE OR FOUR -OUNCES OF GOLD GATHERED—AGREE TO KEEP THE DISCOVERY SECRET—FIND -THE PRECIOUS METAL FARTHER DOWN THE STREAM—HOW THE SECRET LEASED -OUT—MORE DISCOVERIES—FIRST PUBLICATION OF THE NEWS MADE IN A -MORMON PAPER—WASHING OUT THE METAL—FIRST GOLD ROCKER—GATHERING -GOLD—PART TAKEN BY MR. MARSHALL, THE MORMONS AND CAPTAIN SUTTER IN -THE DISCOVERY—MISFORTUNES OF SUTTER AND MARSHALL—ACCOUNT OF THE GOLD -DISCOVERY CERTIFIED TO BY SEVERAL EYE WITNESSES. -</p> -<p>IT is my understanding that when Captain Sutter and Mr. Marshall -were contemplating the erection of the two mills, an apparently -insurmountable obstacle confronted them in the inability to get and -pay for the skilled labor necessary for portions of the work. This -obstacle was removed by the proposition our committee had made to -Captain Sutter at the first interview; and in the two or three days' -time asked in August, 1847, by the captain, a decision was reached to -go ahead. Therefore, if it had not been for the opportune appearance of -the mustered-out members of the Mormon Battalion, the sawmill would not -have been built that winter, nor would the discovery of gold have been -made at that time. But for the action of those Mormons in connection -with the enterprise proposed by Captain Sutter and Mr. Marshall, in -offering the desired class of labor upon the terms they did, the state -of California might have waited indefinitely to have been developed and -to be christened the Golden State, and the entrance to the bay of San -Francisco might never have received the title of the Golden Gate. -</p> -<p>Resuming the narrative of my association with Mr. Marshall on the -afternoon of January 23rd, I will state further that each of us went -our way for the night, and did not meet again till next morning. I -thought little of what Marshall had said of finding gold, as he was -looked on as rather a "notional" kind of man; I do not think I even -mentioned his conversation to my associates. At an unusually early hour -in the morning, however, those of us who occupied the cabin heard a -hammering at the mill. "Who is that pounding so early?" was asked, and -one of our party looked out and said it was Marshall shutting the gates -of the forebay down. This recalled to my mind what Mr. Marshall had -said to me the evening before, and I remarked, "Oh, he is going to find -a gold mine this morning." -</p> -<p>A smile of derision stole over the faces of the parties present. We ate -our breakfast and went to work. James Berger and myself went to the -whipsaw, and the rest of the men some eight or ten rods away from the -mill. I was close to the mill and sawpit, and was also close to the -tail race, where I could direct the Indians who were there. -</p> -<p>This was the 24th day of January, 1848. When we had got partly to work, -Mr. Marshall came, with his old wool hat in his hand. He stopped within -six or eight yards of the sawpit, and exclaimed, "Boys, I have got her -now!" Being the nearest to him, and having more curiosity than the -rest of the men, I jumped from the pit and stepped to him. On looking -into his hat I discovered ten or twelve pieces or small scales of what -proved to be gold. I picked up the largest piece, worth about fifty -cents, and tested it with my teeth; as it did not give, I held it aloft -and exclaimed, "Gold, boys, gold!" At that, all dropped their tools -and gathered around Mr. Marshall. Having made the first proclamation -of the very important fact that the metal was gold, I stepped to the -work bench and put it to the second test with the hammer. As I was -doing this it occurred to me that while en route to California with the -Mormon Battalion, we came to some timber called manzanita. Our guides -and interpreters said the wood was what the Mexicans smelted their gold -and silver ores with. It is a hard wood and makes a very hot fire, and -also burns a long time. Remembering that we had left a very hot bed of -these coals in the fireplace of the cabin, I hurried there and made the -third test by placing the metal upon the point of an old shovel blade, -and then inserted it in among the coals. I blew the coals until I was -blind for the moment, in trying to burn or melt the particles; and -although these were plated almost as thin as a sheet of note paper, the -heat did not change their appearance in the least. I remembered hearing -that gold could not be burned up, so I arose from this third test, -confident that what had been found was gold. Running out to the party -still grouped together, I made the second proclamation, saying, "Gold, -gold!" -</p> -<p>At this juncture all was excitement. We repaired to the lower end of -the tail race, where we found from three to six inches of water flowing -over the bed of rock, in which there were crevices and little pockets, -over which the water rippled in the glare of the sunlight as that shone -over the mountain peaks. James Berger was the first man to espy a scale -of the metal. He stooped to pick it up, and found some difficulty in -getting hold of it, as his fingers would blur the water, but he finally -succeeded. The next man to find a piece was H. W. Bigler; he used his -jack-knife, getting the scale on the point of the blade, then, with his -forefinger over it placed it in his left hand. -</p> -<p>As soon as we learned how to look for it, since it glittered under the -water in the rays of the sun, we were all rewarded with a few scales. -Each put his mite into a small phial that was provided by Marshall, and -we made him the custodian. We repeated our visits to the tail race for -three or four mornings, each time collecting some of the precious metal -until we had gathered somewhere between three and four ounces. -</p> -<p>The next move was to step and stake off two quarter sections, beginning -at the mill, one running down the river and the other up. Then we -cut and hauled logs and laid the foundation of a cabin on each of -them; one was for Sutter, the other for Marshall. This matter being -finished, Mr. Marshall was prepared to dictate terms to us, for every -tool and all the provisions in that part of the country belonged to -Sutter and Marshall. They had full control, and we were depending on -the completion of the mill for our pay. Marshall said that if we would -stay by him until the mill was completed and well stocked with logs, he -would supply us with provisions and tools, and would grant us the first -right to work on their gold claims. We all assented to his proposition, -and also agreed that we would not disclose the secret of the gold -discovery until we learned more about it and had made good our claims. -Not having the remotest idea of the extent of the gold deposits, we -pushed the mill as rapidly as possible; for as yet we had not received -one dollar's pay for our four months' labor. -</p> -<p>Soon there came a rainy day, when it was too wet to work. H. W. Bigler -thought it a good day to hunt ducks, so he put on an old coat, and was -gone all day. When he returned, we said, "Where are your ducks?" -</p> -<p>He said, "Wait a while, I will show you; I have got them all right." -</p> -<p>Finally he drew an old cotton handkerchief from his pocket; in the -corner of it he had at least half an ounce of gold tied up. For a while -all were excited, and he was asked a great many questions like the -following: "Did you find it on Sutter's claim along the river?" "How -far is it from here?" "All in one place?" "Is there any more?" "How did -you get it, you had no pick or shovel?" "Can you find the place again?" -</p> -<p>He replied that he had found it down below Sutter's claim, along the -river where the bedrock cropped out along the bank, and in little rills -that came down the hills to the river, indeed, everywhere that he found -the bedrock cropping out. -</p> -<p>"Then you found it in more than one place?" -</p> -<p>"Yes, more than a dozen." -</p> -<p>It was now proposed that we keep this discovery a secret, as the -discovery in the race had been kept. So the mill work was pushed with -vigor to completion. But in the meantime Marshall had felt it his duty -to inform his partner of the discovery. Accordingly, he wrote a letter -stating the facts, and sent me out to find a strange Indian who would -take it to Captain Sutter, fearing that if he sent it by someone who -was acquainted with the circumstances the secret might leak out. About -this time Wm. Johnston found that he had some urgent business below and -must go there, and did so; he went to the gristmill and along the camps -on that mill race. Then somehow or other the bag came untied and our -old cat and all the kittens ran out, and to the camps they went, until -everybody heard of the gold discovery. But, like all great truths, -people were slow to believe the story. -</p> -<p>In a short time, however, Sidney S. S. Willis and Wilford Hudson, whose -curiosity had been aroused, began to feel that they would like a little -venison; and with that for an excuse they took their guns and set out -on foot, having been assured that by following up the river they would -come to the sawmill, which they succeeded in doing the first day. I -think it was only a thirty-five miles journey. I believe they stayed -one day and two nights with us; then, after a thorough examination of -the bedrock, sand and gravel, and the surroundings, they gathered a few -specimens, among which was one nugget worth about five dollars—the -largest by long odds that had been discovered up to that time. -</p> -<p>As Willis and Hudson passed back on their way home, they discovered -a small ravine or creek in which there was some of the same kind of -bedrock which they had seen at the mill race, and by picking around -in the sand and gravel they discovered quite a rich prospect. That -was just above what was afterwards called Mormon Island, about twelve -or fifteen miles above the gristmill, and about the same distance -below the sawmill. Then they returned to the mill, told their story, -and showed the specimens to the boys. Some of these went to Sutter's -Fort, to a little grocery store kept by a Mormon named Smith, who came -around Cape Horn to California by the ship Brooklyn. The story of the -find was told, and specimens exhibited to Smith, who wrote to Samuel -Brannan. The latter was publishing a paper in San Francisco at the -time; and from that press the news went forth to the world. Brannan was -a Mormon Elder, and the press was owned by a company of Mormons who had -sailed from New York around Cape Horn, and were presided over by Samuel -Brannan. -</p> -<p>From one hundred to one hundred and fifty Mormons flocked to Mormon -Island; then people from every part of the United States followed, and -the search for gold commenced in earnest. With jack, butcher, and table -knives, the search was made in the crevices, after stripping the soil -from the bedrock with pick and shovel. Next, we conceived the idea of -washing the sand and fine gravel in tin pans, but these were scarce -and hard to get hold of. Alexander Stephens dug out a trough, leaving -the bottom round like a log. He would fill that with sand and gravel -that we scraped off the bedrock, and would shake it, having arranged it -so as to to pour or run water on the gravel; finally he commenced to -rock the trough, which led to the idea of a rocker. His process caused -the gold to settle at the bottom; then he arranged the apparatus on an -incline so that the gold would work down and also to the lower end of -the trough. At short intervals he would turn what was collected into a -tub of water, and at night it would be cleaned and weighed on a pair of -wooden scales that Stephens made also, using silver coins for weights, -counting the silver dollar equal to one ounce of gold. This rocker led -to the renowned gold rocker; I am under the impression that Stephens -made the first rocker ever used in California. -</p> -<p>The next and last process that we used in gathering gold was to spread -a sheet on the sandy beach of the river, placing some big rocks on the -corners and sides to keep it well stretched. We then would fill in the -rich dirt on the upper edge, and throw on water to wash the dirt down -into the river, leaving the gold on the sheet. Occasionally we took -up the sheet and dipped it into a tub of water, washing the gold off -the sheet into the tub. At night we would clean up our day's work, -averaging from twelve to fifteen dollars each. Our best paying dirt was -carried on our shoulders from Dry Gulch, fifteen to sixty rods to where -we could find water to wash it. We made buckskin pouches or wallets to -carry the gold in; it was not dust, nor yet nuggets, but small scales. -</p> -<p>Sutter's capital and enterprise and Marshall's shrewd sagacity have -been given the credit of the great gold discovery in California. The -facts are, that James W. Marshall discovered the first color; in less -than an hour six Mormons found color as well, and within six weeks -Mormons had discovered it in hundreds of places that Mr. Marshall had -never seen, the most notable of which was Mormon Island, to where the -first rush was made, and from where the news was spread to the world. -As to Sutter's enterprise and capital, he furnished the graham flour -and mutton, wheat and peas, black coffee and brown sugar, teams and -tools, while we, the members of the Mormon Battalion, did the hard -labor that discovered the metal. It is also true that we were in -Sutter's employ at that date, and that we did not get paid for our -labor. I worked one hundred days for the firm, and never received a -farthing for it. I heard a number of other men say they never got their -pay. It was our labor that developed the find, and not Marshall's and -Sutter's, and we were never paid for it; when we went for a settlement -we were told by Captain Sutter that he could not settle with us, for -his bookkeeper had gone to the mines, and his books were not posted. He -cursed Marshall and the mines, and declared that he was a ruined man; -that the discovery was his ruin, for it had drawn off his laborers and -left everything to go to rack, and that he was being robbed. -</p> -<p>I do not wish it to be understood that I charge Sutter and Marshall -with being dishonorable, for I do not. I think they were honorable men -in a business way. The fact is, they were completely overrun with all -classes of people, and were confused, so that the people took advantage -of them, their business was undermined, and there was a general -collapse of their affairs and of every industry and business. The cry -was, "Gold! Gold! More Gold! Away to the gold fields!" Every other -enterprise was sacrificed in the rush for gold. -</p> -<p>With due respect to Captain John A. Sutter and James W. Marshall, -to whom the world has given the credit for the great gold find, I -believe that if they had been taken out and shot to death the day of -the discovery, they would have suffered less, and would have met their -Maker just as pure, if not more honored in this world, than to have -lived and endured what they did. As far as I am concerned, I say peace -to their remains, for on this earth they have been greatly wronged, if -I have read their history correctly. Like a lynching scrape where there -is an outburst of the people, it is very difficult to find those who -are responsible for the crime. Regarding the wrongs did these men, it -seemed as if the whole population of that locality picked on them. -</p> -<p>I will add here, that my account of the gold discovery in California -was submitted in 1893 to the following members of the party who were at -the place in January, 1848, and who were the only survivors within my -reach at the time: Orrin Hatch and William S. Muir, Woods Cross, Davis -County; George W. Boyd, and H. D. Merrill, Salt Lake City; and Israel -Evans, Lehi, Utah County, Utah. They united in giving me a certificate -that they knew this account to be a true and correct statement of the -discovery of gold in California, at Sutter's mill race. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXV"></a>CHAPTER XV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">PREPARE TO LEAVE CALIFORNIA—SNOW IN THE MOUNTAIN—CAUSES A WAIT -TILL THE LAST OF JUNE—DISCOVER A RICH GOLD PROSPECT—LEAVE IT TO -MAKE THE JOURNEY OVER THE MOUNTAINS—NO REGRETS AT ABANDONING THE -MINES IN ANSWER TO THE CALL OF DUTY—CAMP ORGANIZED IN PLEASANT -VALLEY—START ON THE TRIP—THREE MEMBERS OF THE PARTY AHEAD, LOOKING -OUT THE ROUTE, FOUND MURDERED MY INDIANS AT TRAGEDY SPRINGS—COVERING -THE BODIES—STAMPEDE OF ANIMALS—GUARDING AGAINST HOSTILE -INDIANS—CROSSING THE DIVIDE IN SNOW—THE WRITER FOOLED—TAKE TWO -INDIANS PRISONERS—CUTTING A ROAD—HORSES STOLEN BY INDIANS—PURSUIT -TO CAPTURE THEM—IN CARSON VALLEY—ALONG HUMBOLDT RIVER—AT STEAMBOAT -SPRINGS—OVER THE DESERT—MEMBER OF THE PARTY WANTS TO KILL -INDIANS—THE WRITER'S EMPHATIC OBJECTION—INDIANS WOUND STOCK—ADDISON -PRATT AS A LUCKY FISHERMAN—WRITER TRADES WITH AN INDIAN—THE RED -MAN'S TRICK—WRITER PURSUES HIM INTO THE INDIAN CAMP—ESCAPE FROM -DANGER—JOURNEY TO BEAR RIVER—HOT AND COLD WATER SPRINGS—REACH BOX -ELDER—VIEW THE GREAT SALT LAKE—ARRIVE AT OGDEN, WHERE CAPTAIN BROWN -AND SOME SAINTS HAD SETTLED—JOURNEY TO THE MORMON CAMP ON WHAT IS NOW -PIONEER SQUARE, SALT LAKE CITY—HEARTILY WELCOMED BY RELATIVES AND -FRIENDS—REJOICING AND THANKSGIVING. -</p> -<p>IN June, 1848, some thirty-seven members of the Mormon Battalion -rendezvoused at a flat some six or eight miles from Coloma, California, -near where the first gold discovery was made. This assemblage was -preparatory to crossing the Sierra Nevada mountains at or near the -head of the American River; for we had learned that it was next to -impossible to take wagons at this time of the year by what was called -the Truckee route, and as we had become accustomed to pioneer life it -was thought we could find a better route, so it was proposed to open -up one by the way stated. We had been successful in getting a few -hundred dollars each from the mines, and had fitted ourselves out with -wagons and ox teams, seeds and tools; for our protection on the journey -we bought of Captain Sutter two brass Russian cannon, one a four -pounder and the other a six-pounder. -</p> -<p>Some of the company, eight or ten, had pitched camp at the site -selected, and were waiting for others who were tardy in getting -their outfit. Early in May, a party consisting of David Browett, Ira -J. Willis, J. C. Sly, Israel Evans, Jacob M. Truman, Daniel Allen, -Henderson Cox, Robert Pixton, and, I think, J. R. Allred, went out -about two or three days ahead, and found the country covered with deep -snow, so that at that time it was impracticable to go forward with the -wagons; the party therefore returned to the main camp, and waited till -the last of June. During this wait, David Browett, Daniel Allen and -Henderson Cox, being anxious to be moving, started a second time to -search out the route, and were surprised at night and all were killed -by Digger Indians. They had been gone some eight or ten days before -the main body got together, and about twenty days before we started. -Alexander Stephens and I, it seems to me, and some two or three others, -did not join the party, as I remember, until June 29. -</p> -<p>The day before starting from the gold diggings on our journey was kind -of an off-day, in which the writer had some spare time and wandered off -from camp, with pick and shovel, up into a dry gulch, where he soon -struck a very rich prospect of gold, about a quarter of a mile from -water. This was about 11 o'clock a.m. By sundown he had carried the -rich dirt down in his pantaloons, and washed out forty-nine dollars -and fifty cents in gold; yet kind reader, strange as it may appear, -he, with his partners, hitched up and rolled out the next morning, and -joined the main camp at what we called Pleasant Valley, but now, I -think, known as Dutch Flat. I have never seen that rich spot of earth -since; nor do I regret it, for there always has been a higher object -before me than gold. We had covenanted to move together under certain -conditions, and those conditions existing we were in honor bound to -move the next day. We did move, leaving that rich prospect without ever -sticking a stake in the gulch, but abandoning it to those who might -follow. Some may think we were blind to our own interests; but after -more than forty years we look back without regrets, although we did see -fortunes in the land, and had many inducements to stay. People said, -"Here is gold on the bedrock, gold on the hills, gold in the rills, -gold everywhere, gold to spend, gold to lend, gold for all that will -delve, and soon you can make an independent fortune." We could realize -all that. Still duty called, our honor was at stake, we had covenanted -with each other, there was a principle involved; for with us it was God -and His kingdom first. We had friends and relatives in the wilderness, -yea, in an untried, desert land, and who knew their condition? We did -not. So it was duty before pleasure, before wealth, and with this -prompting we rolled out and joined our comrades in Pleasant Valley. -</p> -<p>At our camp in Pleasant Valley we organized with Jonathan Holmes as -president, and with captains of tens. Then there were chosen eight or -nine vaqueros or herdsmen, to take charge of all the loose stock from 4 -a.m. till 8 p.m.; but in the main the herdsmen were the chief pioneers -for the camp. I remember only a few of them: W. Sidney, S. S. Willis, -Israel Evans, Jacob M. Truman, Wesley Adair and James S. Brown. -</p> -<p>The date of our start from Pleasant Valley I cannot now recall, further -than that it was between the 25th of June and the 1st of July. We -made slow progress, for the road was very rough. About six of us rode -ahead, and looked out and marked the route. We would go ahead half the -day, and then return to meet the train, often finding them camped, the -men working the road, cutting the timber, rolling rock, and digging -dugways, or mending wagons. Sometimes we had to lay over a day or two -to make the road passable. -</p> -<p>Thus we pushed forward on our journey till we came to a place we called -Tragedy Springs, for near a beautiful spring at this place we found the -remains of the three brethren who had preceded us, they having been -murdered by Indians, and buried in a shallow grave. We first found -bloody arrows, then stones with blood on them, then the nude bodies, -partly uncovered; these were recognized by Daniel Allen's purse of gold -near by. Our feelings cannot be described through the medium of the -pen, therefore I must leave these to the reader's imagination. We built -a wall of rough rock around the grave, then covered it with flat stones -to protect the bodies from wild beasts. This was the best we could do, -for the bodies were so decomposed that we could not do more. The names -of the deceased and manner of death, with proper dates, were cut in a -large tree that stood near by. -</p> -<p>The night we came to Tragedy Springs was very dark, and our camp -being in a dense forest of large trees, the darkness was intensified. -Guards were at their posts around stock and camp, when suddenly, from -some cause we never knew, the stock stampeded. This raised a great -excitement, and before it subsided one of our cannon was discharged; -as it belched forth its stream of fire, and the sound of the explosion -echoed in forest and hills, the animals were stampeded still worse, -only a few horses that had been securely tied remaining. We were -compelled to lay by for two days to get things together, but we finally -did so, recovering all our stock. -</p> -<p>We made another start, going to a place we called Leek Springs, because -of there being so many leeks growing wild. We had to stop over and mark -our way among rocky ridges. Thence we moved on, musket in one hand, or -in a handy place to the teamster, with his goad or whip in the other -hand, the train moving in close order and constantly on the alert for -an attack by man or beast. -</p> -<p>We ascended a very high spur of the Sierra Nevada range, on the south -side. When we reached the summit the wind blew as if it were the middle -of November. As we crossed over we came to a large snowdrift; on the -north side of the mountain our wagons rolled over the snow as if -on marble pavement, but when we came to where the sun had shone in -the latter part of the day, our wagons went down to the hub, and four -were capsized and some of them badly broken. The others succeeded in -reaching the bottom in safety. It took us till after dark to pick up -the pieces and get them together to be ready to start the next morning. -</p> -<p>We all gathered around the campfire and discussed the subject of -standing guard, when the writer remarked that there was no need of -guards—that he would agree to take care of all the Indians that would -come around that night, for it was so cold and disagreeable that he -supposed no human being would come there from choice. Just then someone -inquired what an object on a rock was. Some said it was an owl, others -that it was an Indian. Two or three of us took our guns and sallied -forth to settle the dispute finding to our surprise two Indians with -feathered headdresses on, and with long bows, and quivers full of -arrows. They were within easy bowshot of us. The party had the laugh on -the writer for once. -</p> -<p>We took the Indians prisoners, disarmed them, and prepared a place -for them to sleep, after giving them their supper. The writer was one -called on to guard them, and he promptly complied. The Indians made -good company, though they were very nervous, and we had to threaten -them frequently to keep them from making a break for liberty. At -midnight the guards were changed, and at dawn we made ready to descend -to the camp below, arriving there just as the Indians moved off; we had -released our prisoners. The Indians soon began to come in from every -quarter, all armed. We moved in close order, every man well armed. -The savages numbered three to our one; they flanked us and we could -see them on every hand, in threatening attitude. In this situation -we had to chop and roll logs out of the way, move rock, and make -dugways, lifting at and holding wagons to keep them from turning over. -Consequently, our progress was slow, and the journey very hazardous. -Finally, when we had worked our way carefully along the difficult -route, passing over the summit of the great Sierras, which divide -the waters of the great deserts from those which flow to the Pacific -Ocean, the threatening red men slunk out of sight, and we found a rough -camping place, where we lay all night upon our arms, but nothing came -to alarm us. -</p> -<p>We continued down the canyon and came to a more open country, camping -by a river bend where there was good feed, water, and fuel. We had -begun to feel more safe from the red men, yet that night they stole -in past our guards and took some of our saddle horses which were tied -within four or five rods of our wagons. The Indians escaped, and were -detected only by our guards hearing them cross the river; this was -about 4 a.m. Early in the morning we learned more definitely our loss, -and eight or ten of us gave pursuit, following the trail across a sandy -country and over the foothills, ultimately succeeding in the recovery -of all our horses but one, and for that we captured an Indian pony that -had the distemper, as we discovered after it had been turned into our -herd. That was one of the hardest day's rides that the writer remembers -in all his experiences, for we put our horses through all they could -live for. Every moment we were liable to ambush, for the Indians -divided into three parties and we did the same. One of our party -supposed he had killed an Indian, or certainly wounded him, just as he -entered into the thick brush. -</p> -<p>It was late the next day when we resumed our journey, and that night -we camped in Carson Valley, where we looked on an extensive plain or -desert. Being unable to discern any evidences of water, we turned to -the north, just under the base of the mountains, traveling over a very -hard route, until we came to the Truckee River, where we entered the -old emigrant road. We followed that road till we came to the sink of -the Humboldt, then called St. Mary's River. The distance was said to be -forty-five miles; be that as it may, we were twenty-four hours covering -it, and I do not think we had any rest or sleep during the whole trip. -</p> -<p>We passed the wonderful Hot or Steamboat Springs. I remember seeing -a dog run up to one of them as if to lap the water, and as he did so -his feet slipped into the edge of the pool. He was so surprised at the -heat that he gave one yelp of pain and jumped into the middle of the -spring, stretched out his legs, and never gave another kick. In a very -short time the hair was all scalded off him. The incident reminded me -of the story of a Dutchman who, when he came to a hot spring, ordered -his teamster to drive on, as hell could not be more than a mile away. -We did not feel to blame the Dutchman, if the springs were like this; -for, from the surroundings, hades did not appear to be far off, and we -passed on without any desire to linger about the dreadful place. It was -about 4 a.m. when, as we approached the Humboldt River, our horses and -cattle hoisted their heads, began to sniff, and broke into a trot; from -that they started into a run, and we had enough to do to keep up with -them till they reached the water. -</p> -<p>We had a short rest, and resumed our journey, for there was no food -for our stock, and the water was brackish, so we traveled eight or ten -miles and camped for the night. As the grazing was still short, we made -a very early start, and were soon joined by two Indians, who remained -with us all day and were very friendly. When we camped they stopped -with us, and as we had been told the place was a dangerous one for -Indians, the presence of these two caused a suspicion that they were -spies, and probably would signal their fellows when to attack the train. -</p> -<p>We had been in camp only a short time when a white horse was led in. -The animal had a slight wound on his wethers and a mark of blood some -six inches down on his shoulder. This wound had been caused by the -horse rolling on some burned willow stumps, one of the men having seen -him roll; and there were on the animal the black marks from the charred -wood. Yet some of the camp insisted that the wounds were from Indian -arrow's. At this time some one came up from the river and caused a -flame of excitement by saying he had seen an Indian skulking in the -brush, although he admitted that it might have been a bird or a wild -animal, for, while he saw something move, he was not in a position to -say just what it was. The discussion now waxed hot, and one man leveled -his gun at one of the Indians, declaring he would shoot him. The writer -was standing near by and caught the gun to prevent such an act, and was -in turn threatened with being shot, when the trouble was stopped by -others interfering. -</p> -<p>That night, when the camp was called together as usual, for prayers -and consultation, and prayers had been said, the same man who had -threatened to shoot the Indian moved that we lay by the next day, hunt -down all the Indians we could find, and by killing rid the country of -the "d—d black rascals." This startling proposition seemed to stun -the senses of the men for a moment, for no such spirit had invaded the -camp before, our motto being peace on earth, good will to man. The -proposition was so repugnant to the writer's feelings that he made his -maiden speech in strongly opposing the motion, declaring that if such -a cruel step were taken he would be a swift witness against all who -engaged in the wicked and savage action; he also asserted that he would -inform on them at the earliest opportunity, for as yet the Indians in -that vicinity had done us no harm, and it was as much murder to kill -one of them as to kill a white man. Others sided with the writer and -the matter was dropped. -</p> -<p>We passed on up the river until we came to near the narrows or canyon. -There some of our stock was wounded by Indian arrows. I do not recall -just how many were injured or died from their wounds. The Indians who -did the damage kept out of our sight. -</p> -<p>I must mention Elder Addison Pratt, who joined us at Sutter's Fort, as -he was returning from a five years' mission to the Society Islands, in -the South Pacific Ocean. He was a great fisherman, and it was along -this part of the route that he used to catch the little speckled trout -in such numbers as to attract both our admiration and our gratitude. -He would go where no one else would ever think of finding fish, and -would meet with wonderful success. In fact, some of the party were so -astonished at his good luck that they declared he could catch fish in a -cow track. He was a good, jolly soul, and made the best of everything. -</p> -<p>Our train journeyed on in peace till we came to Goose Creek, where the -writer traded a mare to an Indian, for a mule. The red man was given -several articles for the difference. He sauntered around for a little -while, then mounted the mule, and away he went, taking the articles -with him. The writer pursued alone for four or five miles, and first -thing he knew was too near the Indian camp to turn back, so he rushed -in among them, dismounted, changed the mare for the mule, and rode off. -The Indians looked surprised and frightened, and made no resistance. I -never realized the hazard I had taken till the danger was over; then I -was glad to rejoin my fellow-travelers. -</p> -<p>We crossed Goose Creek Mountains and again struck out into the -trackless desert, pioneering our own way, rolling the rocks and cutting -the road. We reached the Malad, a very difficult stream to cross, but -we succeeded in getting over without serious damage. From there our -route lay to the Bear River, which we crossed in safety by blocking up -our wagon boxes. I think the crossing was made just above where Bear -River City is now located. From there we traveled southward under the -base of the mountains to where we found two springs, one of hot water -and the other of very cold water, within a very few feet of each other; -they flowed in the same gulch or ravine. Along this route we had naught -but an Indian trail to guide us. When we reached Box Elder we thought -it the finest place we had seen since leaving Carson Valley. -</p> -<p>While in California we had learned that the Latter-day Saints had -settled near the south end of the Great Salt Lake; and as we had -been in sight, from the mountains, of the north end of the lake for -some days, we began to feel that we were nearing a place of rest. We -journeyed on till we came to the Ogden and Weber rivers, where we found -that Captain James Brown, of company C of the Mormon Battalion, and a -few of the Saints had settled; the country looked very wild. We still -pursued our way southward, till we reached the present site of Salt -Lake City, entering the Sixth Ward Square—now Pioneer Square—where -the Saints had built houses and a stockade. I think the date of our -arrival at this place was the 28th of September, 1848. -</p> -<p>We were heartily welcomed, by relatives and friends, after our long and -tedious march of near four thousand miles, and our more than two years' -absence from those we loved and who loved us. Our meeting and greeting -were far more joyous and precious than the glittering gold we had left -behind. Neither our friends nor ourselves had any regrets for our -having left the gold fields when we remembered our marching away, over -two years before, to the tune of "The Girl I Left Behind Me," for we -were so very glad to find her again, no matter if it were in a desert. -We all rejoiced, and gave thanks to God for His protecting care and our -safe return to the bosom of friends. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">CONTENTMENT AMONG THE SAINTS IN GREAT SALT LAKE VALLEY—RUDE DWELLINGS -AND SHORT RATIONS—TRYING EXPERIENCES—RESCUE OF MORMON BATTALION -MEMBERS FROM STARVATION—CARRY NEWS OF THE CALIFORNIA GOLD DISCOVERY -TO THE EAST—RE-UNION OF MORMON BATTALION MEMBERS—ADDRESSES BY THE -FIRST PRESIDENCY AND OTHERS—SETTLING A NEW COUNTRY—ORGANIZATION OF -MINUTE MEN—COLD WINTER—THE GOLD FEVER—TENOR OF THE PREACHINGS AND -PROPHESYINGS OF THOSE TIMES—INSTRUCTING THE PEOPLE IN INDUSTRIAL -PURSUITS—POLICY TOWARD THE INDIANS. -</p> -<p>NOTWITHSTANDING the fact of the aspect in the Great Salt Lake Valley -being gloomy, most of the people were contented with their lot, -although the experiences of 1847 and 1848 had been anything but -encouraging. Some of the inhabitants were living in log cabins, others -in dugouts, and still others in wagons, while some who did not have -the latter had built brush sheds; almost everybody was living on short -rations, crickets and grasshoppers having destroyed most of the crops. -The whole face of the country was brown and dry, except small streaks -along the water courses. There was no provender for our stock, and we -could only turn them out upon the range, and trust them and ourselves -to a kind Providence. Timber for fuel was in the mountains, and higher -up in these there was timber for fencing and building purposes. In -order to get either, we had to make roads at great expense, building -bridges and cutting dugways, sometimes going in armed companies to -protect ourselves from the threatening Indian tribes. A long brush -bowery was built in the town; we met there for religious services, and -for all other purposes that made it necessary for the people to be -called together. -</p> -<p>October 6, 1848, a general conference of the Church was held, and the -people as a rule felt blessed, although there were a few who were very -much discouraged as the rations grew short and the cold weather pinched -more closely. -</p> -<p>Some time in October, news reached us that a small detachment of the -Mormon Battalion coming from California was starving to death on the -western deserts. Their old comrades in arms soon gathered supplies and -fitted up a team, and six or seven of us went out to give assistance. -We met the suffering company at the point of the West Mountains, about -two days earlier than we had expected. The men were suffering, but not -quite so badly as we had been led to believe from the word we had got. -It was snowing when we met them, and continued to do so the greater -part of the night and of the next day, so that we suffered much from -cold before we reached shelter, for everything was soaked through. The -company brought considerable gold, which was exhibited to many of the -people. -</p> -<p>Some of our comrades were not so fortunate as to find their families in -the Great Salt Lake Valley, so they pushed on to where these had been -left, in Iowa or Nebraska. Those men bore the news of the great gold -discovery in California, and, as evidence of the truth of their story, -showed the precious metal they had secured. Thus the Mormon Battalion -not only was at the discovery of gold in California and took part -therein, but bore the news thereof eastward, until it spread to the -world, causing great excitement. -</p> -<p>The last detachment of the battalion for the season having arrived in -the valley, a feast was prepared, and a re-union of the soldiers and -their friends was called. It was made as grand an affair as could be -under the circumstances, Presidents Brigham Young and Heber C. Kimball -leading out with liberal hands. We were welcomed in royal style; -interesting speeches were made by the First Presidency of the Church, -and also by the officers and soldiers of the battalion. -</p> -<p>From that time things moved quietly, people making roads and getting -out timber for various purposes, herding stock, fencing, and so on. -At length the Indians began to run off and kill the stock. A meeting -was called and one hundred men selected to enroll themselves as minute -men, the writer being one of the company. We were required each to -keep a horse on hand, and to be ready at a minute's warning to march -to any point of attack. We had to fit out ourselves, as there was no -quartermaster's department on which officers could issue requisitions -and have them honored. We had to provide our own provisions, and -everything necessary for a campaign, at our own expense. Most of the -young men having horses of their own, and many of them having become -expert horsemen, a full quota was furnished for the company. We had -turned over to the Church authorities, for the public defense, our -two brass Russian cannon. The minute men met for drill at regularly -appointed times. -</p> -<p>The winter of 1848-9 was quite cold. Many people had their feet badly -frozen. For one, the writer suffered so severely from this cause that -he lost every nail from the toes of both feet. In February and March -there began to be some uneasiness over the prospects, and as the days -grew warmer the gold fever attacked many so that they prepared to go -to California. Some said they would go only to have a place for the -rest of us; for they thought Brigham Young too smart a man to try to -establish a civilized colony in such a "God-forsaken country," as they -called the valley. They further said that California was the natural -country for the Saints; some had brought choice fruit pips and seed, -but said they would not waste them by planting in a country like the -Great Salt Lake Valley; others stated that they would not build a -house in the valley, but would remain in their wagons, for certainly -our leaders knew better than to attempt to make a stand in such a dry, -worthless locality, and would be going on to California, Oregon or -Vancouver's Island; still others said they would wait awhile before -planting choice fruits, as it would not be long before they would -return to Jackson County, Missouri. -</p> -<p>This discouraging talk was not alone by persons who had no experience -in farming and manufacturing, but by men who had made a success at -their various avocations where they had been permitted to work in -peace, before coming west. Good farmers said: "Why the wheat we grew -here last year was so short that we had to pull it; the heads were -not more than two inches long. Frost falls here every month in the -year—enough to cut down all tender vegetation. More, James Bridger -and Gudger, who have been in this country ten years or more, say that -corn cannot be raised anywhere in these mountains. In fact, Bridger has -told President Young that he will give a thousand dollars for the first -bushel of corn raised in the open air here, for he says it cannot be -done." -</p> -<p>It was at this time of gloom that President Young stood before the -whole people, and said, in substance, that some people had misgivings, -and some were murmuring, and had not faith to go to work and make their -families comfortable; they had got the gold fever and were going to -California. Said he: "Some have asked me about going. I have told them -that God has appointed this place for the gathering of His Saints, -and you will do better right here than you will by going to the gold -mines. Some have thought they would go there and get fitted out and -come back, but I told them to stop here and get fitted out. Those who -stop here and are faithful to God and His people will make more money -and get richer than you that run after the god of this world; and I -promise you in the name of the Lord that many of you that go, thinking -you will get rich and come back, will wish you had never gone away from -here, and will long to come back but will not be able to do so. Some -of you will come back, but your friends who remain here will have to -help you; and the rest of you who are spared to return will not make -as much money as your brethren do who stay here and help build up the -Church and kingdom of God; they will prosper and be able to buy you -twice over. Here is the place God has appointed for His people. We have -been kicked out of the frying-pan into the fire, out of the fire into -the middle of the floor, and here we are and here we will stay. God has -shown me that this is the spot to locate His people, and here is where -they will prosper; He will temper the elements for the good of His -Saints; He will rebuke the frost and the sterility of the soil, and the -land shall become fruitful. Brethren, go to, now, and plant out your -fruit seeds." Stretching his arms to the east and to the west, with his -hands spread out, he said: "For in these elements are not only all the -cereals common to this latitude, but the apple, peach and plum; yea, -and the more delicate fruits, the strawberry and raspberry; and we will -raise the grape here and manufacture wine; and as the Saints gather -here and get strong enough to possess the land, God will temper the -climate, and we shall build a city and a temple to the Most High God -in this place. We will extend our settlements to the east and west, to -the north and to the south, and we will build towns and cities by the -hundreds, and thousands of the Saints will gather in from the nations -of the earth. This will become the great highway of the nations. Kings -and emperors and the noble and wise of the earth will visit us here, -while the wicked and ungodly will envy us our comfortable homes and -possessions. Take courage, brethren. I can stand in my door and can see -where there is untold millions of the rich treasures of the earth—gold -and silver. But the time has not come for the Saints to dig gold. It is -our duty first to develop the agricultural resources of this country, -for there is no country on the earth that is more productive than this. -We have the finest climate, the best water, and the purest air that can -be found on the earth; there is no healthier climate anywhere. As for -gold and silver, and the rich minerals of the earth, there is no other -country that equals this; but let them alone; let others seek them, -and we will cultivate the soil; for if the mines are opened first, we -are a thousand miles from any base of supplies, and the people would -rush in here in such great numbers that they would breed a famine; -and gold would not do us or them any good if there were no provisions -in the land. People would starve to death with barrels of gold; they -would be willing to give a barrel of gold for a barrel of flour rather -than starve to death. Then, brethren, plow your land and sow wheat, -plant your potatoes; let the mines alone until the time comes for you -to hunt gold, though I do not think this people ever will become a -mining people. It is our duty to preach the Gospel, gather Israel, pay -our tithing, and build temples. The worst fear that I have about this -people is that they will get rich in this country, forget God and His -people, wax fat, and kick themselves out of the Church and go to hell. -This people will stand mobbing, robbing, poverty, and all manner of -persecution, and be true. But my greater fear for them is that they -cannot stand wealth; and yet they have to be tried with riches, for -they will become the richest people on this earth." -</p> -<p>My dear reader, the writer stood on the Sixth Ward Square, Salt Lake -City, in the year 1849, fifty-one years ago, and heard the foregoing -spoken by President Brigham Young. Now it is 1900. and I bear my -testimony to the literal fulfillment of most of those sayings, and that -portion which has not yet come to pass I most assuredly believe will do -so. I entreat the reader of this to pause and reflect. Was there divine -inspiration in this matter, or not? -</p> -<p>About the same time, Parley P. Pratt, one of the Twelve Apostles, told -the people to save the hides of their cattle, tan them, and make boots -and shoes for their families. He said that in the mountains there was -spruce, pine bark, and shumac, with tanning properties; advised that -they be gathered, and the beef hides tanned; and predicted that the -time would come when leather would be tanned here, and boots and shoes -would be manufactured and exported. It was also stated that we would -raise sheep here, and would manufacture woollen fabrics and export them. -</p> -<p>As the writer walked away from meeting that day, in company with some -old and tried men, who had been mobbed and robbed, and driven from -their homes, and whom he looked upon almost as pillars of the Church, -one of them said he had passed through such and such trials in the -past, but that that day, 1849, was the darkest he ever had seen in the -Church. The thought of trying to settle this barren land, he said, was -one of the greatest trials he had met. There were some three of the -party particularly whom the writer thought were staunch men; one of -these asked another what he thought of the preaching that day, and got -the reply that it would do "to preach to d—d fools, but not to men of -sense"—that it was insulting to a man's better senses, it was absurd -to think that it was possible to manufacture anything for export from -a country like this, where we were more likely to starve to death than -to do anything else. Now, after half a century has passed away, the -writer refers to the manufacturing and mercantile establishments in -these mountain valleys to establish which were the divinely inspired -utterances of that day. -</p> -<p>On one occasion in 1849, President Heber C. Kimball, when preaching to -the people, exhorted them to be faithful as Saints, to cultivate the -earth, and let others dig the gold. He said it was not for the Saints -to dig it, but the time would come when they would learn to use it, -and not abuse it, or the power that it gives; they would possess it by -millions, and the time would come when people would be willing to give -a bushel of gold for a bushel of wheat, when judgments and calamities -would be poured out on the nations of the earth. He declared that -people would come here by thousands, yea, tens of thousands would yet -flee to Zion for safety; they would come with their burdens on their -backs, having nothing to eat, and the people here would have to feed -them; others would bring their gold and silver, and envy the people -here their peace and comfort, for God would temper the climate so -that the Saints would be able to raise everything they needed. Elder -Kimball further said: "Brethren, build good, large granaries, fill -them with wheat, and keep it against the time when it will be needed. -Some people think we have passed the day of trial, but let me tell you -that you need not fear that, for if you are faithful you shall have -all the trials you can bear, and if you are not faithful you will have -more, and will apostatize and go to hell. Some people have come from -the eastern states and the old country and said: "Brother Kimball, O -that we could have been with you in Kirtland, in Jackson county, and -in Nauvoo, and shared the trials of the Saints with you!" Brethren, -hold on a little while, and you shall have all the trials you will -be able to stand; for God has said that He will have a tried people, -so you may prepare yourselves; for before the roof is on the temple -that we will build here, the devils will begin to howl, and before -the capstone is laid you will begin to have your trials. Your leaders -will be hunted as wild beasts; we shall not be with you, and men will -be left to themselves for awhile. Then is the time that you should be -filled with light, that you may be able to stand through the days of -trial. Now, you can leave your bench-tools on the workbench, and your -plows and farming tools in the field; and can lie down and go to sleep -without locking or bolting your doors; but the time will come when, -if you do this, your tools will be stolen from you. These mountains -will be filled with robbers, highwaymen, and all kinds of thieves and -murderers, for the spirit of the old Gadianton robbers lurks here in -the mountains, and will take possession of men, and you will have to -watch as well as pray, to keep thieves away. Therefore, brethren, -begin now to take better care of your tools; attach locks and bolts -to your doors, and do not wait until the horse is stolen before you -lock the door." Elder Kimball referred to the fact that the young men -were becoming restless and did not know what to do; they ran hither -and thither to the mines, and became rude and uncultivated. Said he: -"Let me tell you, boys, what to do. Marry the girls and build homes for -yourselves. Do not leave the young ladies to take up with strangers -who will marry them and then desert them. If you do not marry them, -I counsel the middle-aged and old men to marry the girls and treat -them well, and let them have the opportunity to obey the first command -of God to man, to multiply and replenish the earth. Brethren, take -to yourselves more wives; for if you do not, the time will come when -you will not be permitted to do so. Seek wisdom by faith and prayer; -study and read all good books; study the arts and sciences; build good -schoolhouses, and educate your children, that they may be able to -perform the great work that will come upon them." -</p> -<p>Some of the most practical and best informed men in the community -were called to deliver free lectures on farming, stockraising, etc., -for many of the people had come from manufacturing centers and had -no experience in agricultural life, consequently these people needed -instruction, and it was given in every industrial pursuit that was -practicable at the time, and that by experienced men. Thus the people -were incited in their labors to subdue this wild and then desert -land—for it was barren and waste in the extreme. -</p> -<p>President Brigham Young also instructed the people to treat the Indians -kindly, and divide food with them, "for," said he, "it is cheaper to -feed than to fight them. Teach them that we are their friends. Indeed, -treat every man civilly and kindly; treat every man as a gentleman -until you prove him to be a rascal—then let him alone." -</p> -<p>The foregoing is the tenor of the teaching and preaching to the people -in 1848 and 1849, in what is now the State of Utah. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">SCARCITY OF FOOD IN THE GREAT SALT LAKE VALLEY—WILD VEGETABLES FOR -GREENS—FAIR PROSPECTS FOR CROPS—CLOUDS OF CRICKETS LAY BARE THE -FIELDS—PEOPLE STRUGGLE AGAINST THE PEST ALMOST TO DESPAIR—VAST -FLOCKS OF SEA GULLS, AS THE CLOUDS OF HEAVEN, COME TO THE -RESCUE—DESTRUCTION OF THE CRICKET—PEOPLE PRAISE THE LORD—THE -WRITER INVITED TO A MEETING, ORDAINED A SEVENTY, AND CALLED WITH -OTHERS TO GO ON A MISSION TO THE SOCIETY ISLANDS—WORDS OF PRESIDENTS -BRIGHAM YOUNG AND HEBER C. KIMBALL—PREPARATIONS TO TRAVEL TO -CALIFORNIA WITH AN EMIGRANT COMPANY—DESCRIPTION OF THE ROUTE BY -CAPTAIN JEFFERSON HUNT—START ON MY MISSION—PROPHECY BY PRESIDENT -WLLLARD RICHARDS—BATTLE WITH INDIANS AT PROVO AVERTED BY APOSTLE C. -C. RICH—PROSPECTS OF UTAH VALLEY TO SUPPORT POPULATION—OVERTAKE -THE EMIGRANT COMPANY—DISCUSSIONS AT BEAVER RIVER—COMPANY STARTS FOR -WALKER'S PASS—TURNED BACK BY SCARCITY OF WATER—EXPERIENCE ON THE -DESERT—DISSENSIONS IN THE COMPANY—FUTILE ATTEMPT TO SEND SOME OF -THE MEMBERS BACK—APOSTLE C. C. RICH FORESEES FURTHER TROUBLE, AND -ENDEAVORS TO SAVE THE MORMON PART OF THE TRAIN BY ADVISING THEM TO -RETURN TO THE OLD SPANISH TRAIL—METHODIST AND CAMPBELLTTE MINISTERS -INCITE THE COMPANY AGAINST THE MORMON GUIDE, CAPTAIN HUNT—MAIN COMPANY -DISREGARDS CAPTAIN HUNT'S WARNING OF DANGER, AND LEAVES THE OLD SPANISH -TRAIL TO SEARCH FOR THE ROUTE THROUGH WALKER'S PAST—MORMONS GO WITH -CAPTAIN HUNT ON THE SOUTHERN ROUTE. -</p> -<p>WHEN seed time came that year, provisions were very scarce. People dug -segos and thistle roots, and gathered cow cabbage, as we called a plant -that was found in the canyons. We ate these as greens, cooked the hides -of beef cattle—in fact, gathered everything eatable, and worked hard -and put in our crops. These started out with fair prospects for harvest -until the grain was from one to six inches high. Then there came down -from the mountains myriads of black crickets, their bodies nearly as -large as a man's thumb. They entered upon wheat and corn fields, and -swept or ate every green thing before them. Field after field was -cleared of vegetation. Whole families with their chickens moved out to -their farms and made war upon the crickets. Men, women and children -fought from morning till night, and still the enemy advanced from field -to field. Men almost despaired, women wept, and to all human appearance -our cause was lost. The crickets ate the crops so close into the ground -that they could not start again. The people held fast meetings and -prayed for protection. I am not positive that there were any special -meetings for that purpose, but it was customary to fast and pray the -first Thursday in each month. -</p> -<p>Almost everybody was in despair, and the enemy did not seem to be -diminished in numbers. With their war cry, or ce-ce, the crickets -advanced, and, seeming to call up their reserve forces, with a bold -front kept up their march. Then there came from the west and northwest -what seemed to me might be justly called the clouds of heaven, or -perhaps more properly the clouds of salvation. These were white sea -gulls, which flew so close together and were so numerous as to form -a cloud wherever they went. They covered almost the whole farming -district north and southeast of the city—the main farming district -in Salt Lake Valley at that time; they visited Davis County and other -places as well; and when they lit down the fields looked as though -covered with snow. The gulls came at sunrise and returned to the west -at sundown, after having gorged and disgorged themselves the entire -day, being tame as chickens. They kept up the work of deliverance day -after day, as the crickets continued to come down from the mountains. -I believe that was the first time this kind of birds had been seen by -any of the settlers. When they had completed their work of mercy they -went away, leaving a grateful people who returned thanks to the Giver -of every good gift. The Saints in the valley then were united and their -meetings were well attended. -</p> -<p>One Sunday, Brother Jedediah M. Grant came down from the stand, took -the writer by the arm, and asked him to take a walk. The request was -granted readily, and I was led to Brother Lorenzo Young's house on City -Creek, where we found the First Presidency, some members of the Twelve -Apostles, and some of the first council of the Seventies. There the -writer was ordained to the Priesthood of a Seventy, and his name was -enrolled in the third quorum. Shortly after that he was invited with -others to attend a council meeting of the First Presidency and Twelve -Apostles, in President Kimball's schoolhouse. When we got in and were -seated, President Young said, "Brethren, if any of you have anything to -say, say on." There being no response, the president rose to his feet -and said, "I move that Elders Addison Pratt, Hyrum Blackwell and James -S. Brown take a mission to the Society Islands, in the South Pacific -Ocean." President H. C. Kimball said, "I second the motion." The -question was put and unanimously sustained, and the president turned to -me and asked, "Brother James, will you go?" The answer was, "I am an -illiterate youth, cannot read or write, and I do not know what good I -can do; but if it is the will of the Lord that I should go, and you say -so, I will do the best that I can." The president then took a seat near -me, placing his right hand on my left knee, and said, "It is the will -of the Lord that you go, and I say go; I am not afraid to risk you. And -I promise you in the name of the Lord God of Israel that if you go you -will be blessed, and do good, and be an honor to yourself and to the -Church and kingdom of God. Although men will seek your life, you shall -be spared and return to the bosom of the Church in safety." -</p> -<p>This council was on Sunday evening, some time in September, 1849, and -we were to start no later than the 10th of October; indeed, we were -instructed to get ready as soon as possible, so that we could join a -company of emigrants which was organizing to go through to California -by the southern route, as it was too late to go by the northern route. -</p> -<p>As Elder Addison Pratt and I had agreed to go sowing wheat together on -Monday morning, I thought I could speak to him without any notice being -taken of it. I said to him, in a low tone of voice, that I guessed we -would not sow much wheat next day. President H. C. Kimball jumped from -his seat as quick as a flash, and pointing his finger directly at me, -said, "What is that, Brother Jimmie?" When I told him what I had said, -he continued, "Jimmie, it is not for you to sow wheat or to reap it, -but your calling is to sow the good seed of the Gospel, and gather -Israel from this time henceforth. Mind that, now; let others sow the -wheat." From that time I felt a weight of responsibility that I had -never thought of before. -</p> -<p>We then went to preparing for our journey, Apostle C. C. Rich had been -called to go through to California, so he and Brother Pratt and I -fitted up a team, I having a good wagon and one yoke of oxen; they each -furnished a yoke of oxen. In a few days we were ready for the start. We -had a rodometer attached to our wagon, to measure the distance. -</p> -<p>In the meantime, the emigrants called a meeting before taking their -departure. They had employed Captain Jefferson Hunt of company A, -Mormon Battalion fame, to be their guide, as he had come through that -route with pack animals. He was invited to tell them what they might -expect. He described the route to them with the roughest side out, lest -they might say that he had misled them by making things more favorable -than they really were. In concluding his remarks he said: "From Salt -Springs, we cross to a sandy desert, distance seventy-five miles to -Bitter Springs, the water so bitter the devil would not drink it; and -from thence away hellwards, to California or some other place. Now, -gentlemen, if you will stick together and follow me, I will lead you -through to California all right; but you will have to make your own -road, for there is none save the old Spanish trail from Santa Fe to -California, by the Cajon Pass through the Sierra Nevada Mountains." -</p> -<p>The emigrant company consisted of about five hundred souls, and one -hundred wagons and teams, the latter in poor condition. Feeling in high -spirits, the company moved out between the 1st and 8th of October. C. -C. Rich, Francis Pomeroy and I remained to follow up on horseback, in -three or four days. Pratt and Blackwell, taking our team, started with -the main body. They got to the Cottonwoods, when one of my oxen became -so lame that they could not proceed any farther. Blackwell returned to -inform me of the situation, and I went down and traded with John Brown, -late Bishop of Pleasant Grove, for another ox, mine having been pricked -in shoeing. Then they overtook the main company, and all proceeded -together. -</p> -<p>On the 8th we followed. I started out alone, to meet with the others -at Cottonwood. As I passed the home of Dr. Willard Richards, counselor -to President Brigham Young, Dr. Richards came out and met me; he took -me by the right knee with his right hand, as I sat on my horse, and -said, "Starting out on your mission, I suppose?" I replied, "Yes, sir." -"Well, Brother James, I am glad, and sorry; glad to have you go and -preach the Gospel, and sorry to part with good young men that we need -in opening up a new country." At that he gave my knee an extra grip. -Stretching his left hand out to the southwest, his chin quivering and -his eyes filling with tears, he said, "Brother James, when you are -upon yonder distant islands, called to preside over a branch of the -Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, men will seek your life, -and to all human appearance, there will be no possible escape; then -look unto God, and His angels shall draw near unto you, and you shall -be delivered, to return home to this people. Do not stop to write to -Brother Pratt, your president, to Brother Brigham, or to me, for you -will require the immediate protection of God. Then put your trust -in Him, and He will deliver you; for I promise you in the name of -Israel's God that you shall be delivered from your enemy and return -to this people. Goodbye, and God bless you." Need I tell the reader -that my mind was greatly impressed by those prophetic words, their -inspired character being established so vividly in my later experience? -Prophetic I knew them to be, and impressive they were indeed; and the -impression has been deep and lasting. -</p> -<p>I then went on to Brother Jacob M. Truman's, on Big Cottonwood Creek, -and stayed with him that night. Next morning I passed on to Brother -William Bills', where I met with Brothers C. C. Rich and F. Pomeroy, -and we proceeded on to Provo by the Indian trail, having been joined by -Alexander Williams, with whom we stayed. -</p> -<p>At Provo we learned that the citizens and Indians had had some trouble, -and there was considerable excitement, as there were but few settlers -at that place and the Indians were quite numerous. The latter were -singing war songs and working up a spirit of war preliminary to making -an attack that night or next morning, as was supposed. The people -were preparing to receive them as best they could. Guards were posted -around the camp, and men put on picket duty, so that any enemy might be -discovered readily. -</p> -<p>The Indians made no move until after daylight; but just before sunrise -they started from their camps in force, to attack us. We advanced to -meet them, so as to prevent their assailing us in the small fort, -where the women and children were. The savages marched up as if to -give us open battle. We formed across the road, and each man took his -post ready for action. I always have believed that if it had not been -for the presence of Apostle C. C. Rich, and his cool, conciliatory -action, there would have been bloodshed, for there were some very -hot-headed white men, who would have preferred war to peace. Through -Brother Rich's influence, the cause of the trouble was looked into, a -conciliation effected, and war averted, so that after breakfast we of -the missionary party proceeded on to what was called Hobble Creek—now -the city of Springville, with a population of over two thousand souls. -I remember that we thought the place would be capable of sustaining -eight or ten families, or a dairy, believing there was not enough water -for more. -</p> -<p>From Hobble Creek we passed on from one small stream to another, -expressing our opinion as to the capacity of the water supply; and in -no instance did we suppose that there was water sufficient for more -than fifteen families, judging from what we could see then. Again, -the barrenness of the country was such that it did not seem that more -than seventy-five or a hundred head of cattle could find feed within -reach of water. Now thousands of head of horned stock and horses are -sustained at the same places. -</p> -<p>We kept on our way until we overtook the wagon train on Sevier River. -We came up with the emigrants just as they were ready to move on, but -did not find them so full of glee as they were on the start from the -city. Still, we rolled on very peaceably until we came to Beaver River, -where the country began to look more forbidding. Then the ardor of the -emigrants began to weaken. -</p> -<p>At this place the company was joined by a man named Smith with a pack -train of about seventeen men; also James Flake, with thirty Latter-day -Saints; besides, there were William Farrer, John Dixon. H. W. Bigler, -George Q. Cannon, and others, whose names I do not now recall. Smith -felt confident that he could find Walker's Pass, in the Sierra Nevada -Mountains. This supposed pass had been spoken of often, but men had -been disappointed as often in finding it, or rather in not finding -it. Smith's story excited our whole camp so that there was a general -desire to try the new route, and go down through the canyon and out on -to the sandy desert. The whole company except a very few favored the -idea of leaving the route they had hired a guide for, and they urged -Captain Hunt to strike out and look for water. He said, "Gentlemen, I -agreed to pilot you through to California on the Old Spanish Route by -the Cajon Pass. I am ready to do so, and am not under any obligations -to lead you in any other way; and if you insist on my doing so you must -be responsible, for I will not be responsible for anything. On this -condition, if you insist on changing your route, I will do the best I -can to find water, but I do not have any reason to hope for success -when I leave the trail." -</p> -<p>The company hurrahed for the Walker Pass, and Captain Hunt struck out a -day ahead while the company shod and doctored their lame and sick stock -for one day. Then we moved out ten miles on to the plain southwest of -where Minersville, Utah, now stands, and camped. -</p> -<p>Sometime in the night Captain Hunt came into camp, so near choked from -the lack of water that his tongue was swollen till it protruded from -his mouth; his eyes were so sunken in his head that he could scarcely -be recognized. His horse, too, for the need of water, was blind, and -staggered as he was urged on. Their stay had been thirty-six hours, -on the sands, without water. About 2 o'clock next morning our stock -stampeded from the guards and ran back to water. Two-thirds of the men -went in pursuit, and animals and men did not return to camp till 2 -o'clock in the afternoon. -</p> -<p>By this time confusion and discontent abounded in camp. A committee was -appointed to inquire into the condition of every team, and to ascertain -the food supply, with the avowed intention of sending all back who -failed to have what were considered the requisites for the journey. I -think that one-third of the company, our wagon included, were found -wanting when weighed in that committee's balances. But when we were -ordered to return, those who gave the command found that they were -without authority and no one would heed them. So the discontent was -patched up for a time, and we proceeded on to Little Salt Lake Valley, -where we struck the old Spanish trail again. Then the company began to -split up, some going on after night, and others stopping. -</p> -<p>Brother C. C. Rich told me that it had been shown to him that there was -going to be trouble, and he felt led to believe that if we would go -with the pack train he could at least lead the brethren there back on -to the trail and save them. This was in the night, as we slept together -in the wagon. He awoke and asked me if I were awake. Finding that I -was, he told me what would befall the company. To save the brethren -and all who would heed him, he purchased some ponies and went with the -packers. -</p> -<p>As we passed along the Spanish trail—said to be three hundred and -fifty years old—on the great desert, we could follow the route by -the bones of dead animals in many places. It is said that many fierce -battles have been fought between Mexicans and Indians along this trail. -So far as we were concerned, although it was known that the Indians -were very hostile, they gave us no trouble. -</p> -<p>When we reached what is called the Rim of the Basin, where the waters -divide, part running into the Colorado River and on to the Pacific -Ocean, and part into the Salt Lake Valley, the company called meetings, -and several made speeches, saying there must be a nearer and better -route than that on which the Mormon guide was leading them. One -Methodist and one Campbellite preacher in the company said that they -had started to California, and not hellwards, as the Mormon guide had -stated at the outset, quoting what Captain Hunt had said just before -starting. Others claimed that they had been on the mountains, and upon -looking west had seen something green, which they asserted was an -indication of water. Some of them celebrated the proposed separation -from us by boring holes in trees then filling these with powder and -firing them, exploded the trees in symbol of the break-up of the -company. -</p> -<p>Next morning all but seven wagons turned off to the right, -toward the supposed Walker's Pass. We preferred to follow the guide. -The company was thoroughly warned by Captain Hunt of the danger of -dying from lack of water. In our party there were eleven men, two women -and three children. The main company expressed pity for us and tried -to persuade us to go with them, but we felt confident that our course -was the safest, notwithstanding their superior numbers. They seemed to -rejoice at their conclusion, while we regretted it for their sakes. -Thus we separated, the emigrant company heading for Walker's Pass, and -our small party continuing on the old Spanish trail, or southern route -to California. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">CAUGHT IN A SNOWSTORM—VIA THE SANTA CLARA AND RIO VIRGEN TO -THE MUDDY—NEWS OF SAD DISASTER TO THE EMIGRANT COMPANY—MAKING -CHARCOAL AND NAILS—AN APOSTLE AS A BLACKSMITH—SEARCHING FOR WATER -ON THE DESERT—CROSSING AN ALKALI STREAM—DISCOVER GOLD NEAR SALT -SPRINGS—HURRYING ON OVER THE DESERT—CATTLE POISONED AT BITTER -SPRINGS—KILLING ANIMALS TO RELIEVE THEIR SUFFERINGS—FIRST WAGON -OVER CAJON PASS, GOING WEST—SEVERE JOURNEY TO THE SUMMIT OF THE -PASS—ALL GET OVER SAFELY—SENSE OF GREAT RELIEF—GRASS AND WATER IN -ABUNDANCE—OVERTAKEN BY SURVIVORS OF THE EMIGRANT COMPANY—THEIR -STORY OF TERRIBLE SUFFERING—DIVIDE PROVISIONS WITH THEM—CELEBRATING -CHRISTMAS, 1849—CONTINUING THE JOURNEY NORTH—SPANISH WARNING IN A -CEMETERY TO INDIANS—CRUELTY OF THE SPANIARDS TO THE INDIANS—THE -WRITER PLACED IN CHARGE OF THE COMPANY—DIRECTED TO GO TO THE GOLD -MINES. -</p> -<p>WHEN the company had separated the weather was very threatening, and it -soon began to snow very fast. We pulled on until late in the afternoon, -and camped on the mountain. Next day we came to some Indian farms -where the savages had raised corn, wheat and squash. We passed on to -the Santa Clara, followed it down for three or four days, and found -a written notice to those who came that way: "Look out, for we have -killed two Indians here." With this warning, we felt that we must keep -a vigilant guard all the time. From the Santa Clara we had a very long -drive across the mountain and down a long, dry, rocky slope until we -came to the Rio Virgen. We went along that stream three or four days; -where we left it we found a cow with an Indian arrow sticking in her. -We next passed over a high plateau to a stream well named the Muddy. -There we laid by and doctored and shod our lame cattle. -</p> -<p>While we were on the Muddy, Brother C. C. Rich and party came down -the stream to us, bringing sad and heartrending news from the great -emigrant company, which had broken into factions and become perfectly -demoralized and confused. Some had taken packs on their backs and -started on foot, their cattle dying, their wagons abandoned. All were -despondent, and unwilling to listen to anybody. I think, from the -best information we ever got of them, I would be safe in saying that -four-fifths of them met a most horrible fate, being starved or choked -to death in or near what was afterwards called Death Valley. In after -years the miners of Pahranagat found the irons of the wagons very handy -for use in their pursuits. -</p> -<p>On the Muddy we burned charcoal and made nails to shoe our cattle, -having to throw the animals down and hold them while Apostle C. C. Rich -shod them. Brother Rich did his work well, for the shoes never came -loose till they wore off. -</p> -<p>From the Muddy I accompanied Captain Hunt and Henry Rollins twelve -miles and found some small pools of water about two miles to the right -of the trail; I went back to turn the packers to it, while Captain -Hunt and Henry Rollins went ahead in search of more pools of water and -found some. George Q. Cannon and I stayed there as guides for the wagon -train, and turned them off to the water. When the train arrived, about -11 o'clock p.m., we had to dip water with cups and water the stock from -buckets. Then we pressed on till daylight, made a halt long enough to -take breakfast, and pushed on, for there was no feed for our stock. -</p> -<p>About 2 p.m. we came to the Los Vegas, where we rested a day, then -continued our journey over mountains and across dry deserts from day -to day until we reached a stream of water about three rods wide. It -was so strong with alkali that we dared not allow our cattle to drink -of it, but put the lash to them so that they could not get a sup as we -crossed it twice. Thence we traveled across a very sandy desert for -twelve miles to the Salt Springs, where the train went around a point -of the mountain. A. Pratt and I, with three or four others, followed -on a small trail that passed over a notch of the mountain. While going -through a narrow pass, Brother A. Pratt said it looked as if there -might be gold there. At that we went to looking in the crevices of -the rock, and in a few minutes one of the party found a small scale, -and then another. Among the rest, I saw the precious metal projecting -from a streak of quartz in the granite rock. From there we went over -about one and a half miles to the Salt Springs, and met with the teams. -Several of the party journeyed back to look further for the gold. I -took along a cold chisel and hammer, and chipped out some at the place -I had found, but as our teams were weakening very fast and there was -neither food nor water at that place to sustain our stock, we had to -push on across the sandy desert of seventy-five miles, day and night, -until we came to the Bitter Springs. -</p> -<p>These were the springs that Captain Hunt had told the emigrant company -about before they left Salt Lake City, that from thence it was "away -hellward to California or some other place." It certainly began to -look that way now, when our cattle began to weaken and die all along -the trail. The springs would have been as properly named if they had -been called Poison Springs, instead of Bitter, for it seemed that from -that place our cattle began to weaken every moment, and many had to -be turned loose from the yoke and then shot to get them out of their -misery. -</p> -<p>We had to shoot one of Brother Pratt's oxen to end its suffering. This -act fell to my lot. Oh, how inhuman and cruel it seemed to me, to drive -the patient and faithful dumb animal into a barren desert, where there -is neither food nor drink, to goad him on until he falls from sheer -exhaustion, so that he bears any punishment, to make him rise, that his -master sees fit to inflict, without giving a single moan, then to walk -around and calmly look him in the face and fire the deadly missile into -his brain, then leave his carcass to the loathsome wolves and birds of -prey! -</p> -<p>In looking back over a period of fifty years since then, the writer -cannot call to memory a single act in his life that seemed so cruel -and ungrateful as that; and still there was no earthly means to save -the poor creature from a more horrible death, which would have come if -he had been left in that driving snowstorm, when his whole frame shook -with cold, there to lie and starve—one of the most miserable deaths -that the human mind can conceive of. Of the two evils we chose the -least by ending the suffering in a moment, when it would have taken -hours if it had not been for this act of mercy, as we call it after -taking in the whole situation. -</p> -<p>From Bitter Springs our team took the lead to the end of the journey, -or to Williams' Ranch, being the first team that ever crossed over -the Cajon Pass going west, as I remember. Ascending to the first pass -from the Bitter Springs our situation was most gloomy. In mud and -snow, with darkness come on, every rod of the road became more steep -and difficult. The summit was two miles ahead and the nearest team -half a mile back. We moved by hitches and starts, and could only make -three or four rods at a time. Two of us pushed at the wagon while the -other drove. Our guide was a few feet ahead, marking out the road, and -saying, "Crowd up, boys, if possible. Let us wallow on over the summit, -for it is our only salvation to cross and try to open the road if -possible for the weaker teams." -</p> -<p>Finally, with a shout of triumph, we reached the summit in two feet of -snow, at 11 o'clock at night. Our guide told us to go on down and build -fires at the first place where we could find anything for our stock, -and he would go back and cheer the rest on as best he could. -</p> -<p>The descent being quite steep, we soon made the distance of three or -four miles to where there was but about six inches of snow, and where -we found some feed. Our matches were all damp, and we were wet as could -be. We split up our spare yoke and struck fire with flint and steel, -crawled into the wagon, and started a fire in the frying-pan. Then, as -there was plenty of fuel, we made a roaring fire outside, took a bite -to eat, and turned in for a few moments' rest, being satisfied that the -others of the party had halted before they reached the summit, and as -the guide was with them we thought they would take a rest and come on -at daybreak. -</p> -<p>This conjecture proved right, for about 4 o'clock a.m. Captain Hunt -hallooed to us and called for a cup of coffee. He seemed to be chilled -to the bone, so we soon stirred the fire and got him something to eat. -He told us all the teams would make the riffle, but for us to have -a good fire, for some of the men would be chilled nearly to death. -Then he directed us to go ahead until we found feed for the stock, -and he would remain until the company came up. We advanced about ten -miles, and halted for our cattle to feed and rest. In the meantime -we discovered the company coming down the slope of the mountain. Our -feelings, as well as theirs, were much relieved at the sight, as we -beheld each other, and when they had rested their teams they came on to -our camping place for another stop, while we moved ahead to the Mohave -River. When we reached that stream, I presume that we felt as pleased -as a man liberated from a life sentence in a dungeon, for we had reason -to feel assured that we would succeed in our journey, as we had only -one more hard scramble of thirty miles, and had pleasant weather and -plenty of feed and water for our stock, with time to rest in. Some -shouted: "Daylight once more; thank God for our deliverance!" -</p> -<p>It was while we lay here that some of the company which had parted -with us at the Rim of the Basin came up to us with packs on their -backs, half-starved. The story of the condition of their comrades was -horrifying beyond description. Men, women and children suffered death -alike by thirst and starvation. This painful episode affords one more -instance of where the majority had been wrong and the minority right. -The new arrivals said that when we parted from them they were sorry for -us. But now we were more sorry for them than they had been for us. -</p> -<p>We divided our food the second or third time to relieve these starving -people, then pursued our course up stream for nine or ten days. There -we rested our cattle, did some hunting, and replenished our food supply -with wild meat, principally venison, quail and the gray squirrel. We -found plenty of wild grapes, and also discovered that the raccoon lived -in that part of the world. -</p> -<p>It was about the 17th of December when we crossed the Cajon Pass, in -the Sierra Nevada Mountains; from thence we moved via the Cocomonga -Ranch to Williams' Ranch, arriving there on December 24th. At Williams' -we found C. C. Rich and party; we joined in with them and had a -good Christmas dinner. There we traded for new supplies to last us -up to the gold mines on the Mariposa and the Stanislaus rivers, in -northern California, or the upper country. The writer acted as pilot, -interpreter and quartermaster for the company of something like fifty -men. -</p> -<p>It was about the 27th of January when we left the ranch, from which -we traveled to Los Angeles, thence twenty miles to the north, where -C. C. Rich and ten or fifteen men left us, and H. Egan took charge of -the company as captain. We followed up the Santa Barbara road at the -rate of fifteen miles per day. The roads were very rough and hilly. -The whole country was still in a very wild state. We were frequently -warned to be on our guard for bandits, which were said to be roaming in -the locality. We passed in peace, however, nothing out of the general -routine happening until we arrived at the San Antonio Mission. The -alcalde invited me into the chapel. To me, at that time, it seemed -to be very grand, so attractive was the decoration. The alcalde then -opened the gates of the cemetery, in which I saw a pillar of burnt -adobes with four Indian skulls on it, for the rest of the Indians -to see what they might expect if they committed any outrages on the -citizens. -</p> -<p>From all that I have learned about Spain's treatment of the red men, -it has been very cruel, yet the Spaniards claimed their methods were -necessary in order to Christianize the aborigines. At that time the -Indians in California were more cruelly treated than the slaves in the -south; many of them had scars on their backs ten or twelve inches long, -caused by the lash of the Spaniards. -</p> -<p>We continued our journey up towards San Francisco until the 11th of -February, when we arrived at a town called the Mission San Juan. There -we received a letter from Apostle C. C. Rich; it was dated February -8, 1850. The mission was old and dilapidated, and at that date was -occupied by a very rough class of men. The surrounding country was very -beautiful and fertile. -</p> -<p>About 7 o'clock that same evening Captain Howard Egan assembled the -company together, and called on the writer to take charge. Then he went -forward to overhaul the company that had preceded us. Next morning we -continued on our journey, crossing a deep stream of water, and going to -near Fisher's Ranch, where we received a few lines from Captain Egan, -ordering us to stop the ox teams and forward the mule teams to San Jose -to get provisions. We obeyed, and purchased a beef animal and dried the -meat. -</p> -<p>When Captain Egan returned to camp he told me that Apostle C. C. Rich -thought I had better continue with the company on to the mines, until I -saw or heard from him again. Accordingly I did so. -</p> -<p>Retracing our steps about four miles, we turned to the left on a trail -that led us to Gilroy's Ranch, thence to Rancho Pacheco. There we met -a Frenchman who directed us across the mountains. Meantime our company -appointed six of us to precede the wagons and mark out the road, as we -were again entering into a wilderness with no roads except Indian and -wild animals' trails. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">JOURNEYING TOWARD THE GOLD DIGGINGS—THREATENED BY WILD -HORSES—DIFFICULTIES OF TRAVELING—CONVOCATION OF THE FEATHERED -CREATION—REJOIN OUR FRIENDS—FERRYING ACROSS A RIVER—STRIKE -A GOLD PROSPECT—ON A PROSPECTING TOUR—AN AGREEMENT THAT -FAILED—INSTRUCTED TO GO TO SAN FRANCISCO TO PROCEED ON A MISSION—TRIP -TO STOCKTON—GAMBLERS, SHARPERS AND MINERS AT THAT PLACE—-A TEMPTATION -OVERCOME—ARRIVE IN SAN FRANCISCO—WELCOMED BY SAINTS—RECEIVE KIND -TREATMENT—ON BOARD A VESSEL BOUND FOR TAHITI. -</p> -<p>ON the second day of our journey toward the mines we were confronted -by a band of wild mustang horses. Two of our men who happened to be -half a mile ahead of the other four of us were cut off from us by the -wild animals, so that the confusion of the situation was such that we -did not rejoin them for three days. The band was about three hours -in passing us, and the trail was one mile in width. We thought it a -low estimate to say that there were seven or eight thousand horses. -There seemed to be hundreds of the finest animals dashing up and down, -flanking the main herd, and driving, and shaping the course followed. -To save ourselves and our horses from being taken in by them, we tied -our horses' heads close together, and then stood between them and the -wild band with our rifles in hand ready to shoot the leaders or any -stallion that might attempt to gather in our horses, as we had heard -that they did not hesitate to attempt to do when out on the open plains -as we were. We supposed from all that we could learn that they had been -to the San Joaquin River for water, and were returning over the plains -to the foothills for pasture. The noise made by them as they galloped -past us was like distant, heavy thunder, only it was a long, continuous -roar or rumbling sound; we stood in almost breathless silence, and -mingled fear and delight, and viewed the magnificent picture. At last -the animals passed, and we heaved a sigh of relief. -</p> -<p>We proceeded on for about four hours, when we had to call another halt -and take similar precautions, and for the same reason, except that -there were only about five hundred horses. When they passed we steered -our course for the lower end of the Tulare Lake, where, so we had -heard, a ferry had been located a few days before. As there was no road -to travel, we thought we would go high enough and then follow the San -Joaquin River down until we came to the crossing. -</p> -<p>Night overtaking us, we camped by a slough where bear tracks, large and -small, were in great abundance. For fear of Indians we dared not make -much fire, so we passed a very lonely night, being filled with anxiety -about our lost comrades, not knowing what had become of them; for, as -near as my memory serves me, this was our second night camp since they -were separated from us. To add to our troubles and gloom, the night was -intensely dark, and a drizzling rain was falling. -</p> -<p>Suddenly our horses all broke from us. We followed them by the sound -of their feet as they ran, and after a long chase through swamps and -sloughs we succeeded in capturing them. Then the next trouble came. We -had lost one man and all our pack, and were without supper. Being out -of hailing distance, it was by mere chance that we found our man and -camp late in the night. Our horses had become so frightened that it was -necessary to sit up till morning, to keep them quiet; so that only two -of us could get a dreamy snooze at a time. -</p> -<p>Next morning dawned and our friends were still missing. We journeyed -on, passing down the sloughs to the river. At times it seemed that the -whole feathered tribe had met over our heads and all around in one -grand carnival, to consult over the advent of the white man into that -swampy country. We had never before beheld such a grand aggregation of -waterfowl, and the writer has never seen its equal since. For a time, -we could not understand each other's talk, because of the clatter. Our -next surprise was about five hundred elk which passed in front of us, -but the deep sloughs between prevented our replenishing our scanty -store of rations. -</p> -<p>Soon we were pleased at falling in with our lost friends. They had -found a lone wagon trail towards the river. We dispatched two of our -party to meet the main company, and the rest of us followed the wagon -trail to the river, where we found a man named Woods who had got -there three days ahead of us, with a rowboat and a small supply of -provisions and groceries. Salt pork and hard sea biscuit were selling -at seventy-five cents per pound, and everything else proportionately -high. The boat had just been launched. -</p> -<p>The next day, when the wagons came in, we took them apart and crossed -in a boat, all except my wagon; it being heavy and having the rodometer -attached to it, we got a cable rope and thought to tow the wagon over -with the load, but when it had reached the middle of the river, which -was about fifteen rods wide, the rope parted and the wagon turned over -and over. Then Irwin Stoddard jumped in and made the rope fast to the -hind axle, and as he could not manage the pole of the wagon, I jumped -in to help him. Between us, we liberated the pole, so that after great -exertion and hazard of life we finally succeeded in saving the vehicle, -but we were thoroughly chilled through. We did not cross our animals -till next morning, when we drove them in and they swam over, and we -were soon on our way to and up the Merced River. Six of us proceeded -ahead of the teams, traveling on horseback, to see what we could learn -that would be of benefit to the company. -</p> -<p>On the third day, I think it was, we came to a small mining camp called -Burns' Diggings, on the south side of the Merced River. There we struck -a very good prospect, and stopped until the main company came up. As it -was evident that we could take from twelve to fifteen dollars per day to -the man, we advised the company to begin work there, as the country was -so muddy and soft that we could not make much headway in traveling -higher into the foot hills. They agreed to accept our advice; then came -a quite laughable performance. Those who had been the very worst drones -in camp were now the first with the pick and washpan. They pitched into -the creek as if they expected to scoop up the gold by shovelfuls, leaving -their teams hitched to their wagons; while those who had been on hand -early and late, taking a more methodical view of things, first formed -the camp, got their dinner, and then went quietly to prospecting up -and down the creek. By this time our drones decided there was no gold -there, and that they would go where there was some. What a lesson we -learned there of human nature! The next day, however, things settled -down a little more like business, after it was ascertained that some -had been making from fifteen to twenty-five and fifty, and some even as -high as one hundred dollars per day, to the man. Next day, Captain Egan -and five others of our number were elected to go further up into the -mountains and prospect for the company, while the others dug gold. The -latter were to keep an account of all they earned, and when we returned -they were to give us an equal share with those who stayed and worked. -</p> -<p>On these conditions six of us set out on horseback and with pack mules. -When we got well into the mountains it began to rain and snow so that -we were not able to do much but cut browse for our horses. The snow -became so deep that we had to go ahead of our horses and break the road -so as to get out. We were soaked to the skin, and our bedclothes were -all wet. Our provisions were almost gone; so we set out for our camp, -after spending ten days in a most miserable condition. We traveled -in snow two and a half feet deep from 2 p.m. until 6 a.m. before we -succeeded in reaching camp, when we found that Apostle Rich had been -there, and the men had sent every dollar's worth of gold they had dug -in our absence to Stockton for supplies of provisions, clothing, tools, -etc., so there was none left to pay us our proportion. -</p> -<p>As Apostle C. C. Rich had brought word that Brother A. Pratt desired me -to meet him in San Francisco by a certain date, I packed up my effects, -sold my oxen to Captain Jefferson Hunt for two hundred dollars, and -bade adieu to the rest of the camp, who owed me one hundred dollars, -and they yet owe it. -</p> -<p>I traveled in company with C. C. Rich and Howard Egan. On the 20th of -March, when we got out of the hills, we took the main road to Stockton, -crossing the Merced, Tuolumne, and Stanislaus rivers, all tributaries -to the San Joaquin River. We arrived in Stockton on March 28th. The -place was at that time a point of debarkation where freight was landed -for the many mining camps. There were a few trading establishments and -warehouses, and three or four large gambling houses in and around which -were gathered freighters, packers, and one of the most motley gangs it -has ever been my lot to see. Bands of music were in the gambling halls. -At one of these I noted twelve tables, four men at each, armed with -bowie knives and revolvers; and to me it looked as if there were more -gold and silver exposed on those twelve tables than six mules could -draw. On the street and around the door, calling on the passers-by to -come in and have a free drink and listen to the music, were men whom I -soon learned were called cappers, or ropers-in, to the gambling hall; -they would steam men up with drink, get them to gambling, and rob them. -Sometimes men would come in from the mines with their buckskin wallets -containing three to four hundred dollars' worth of gold. They would -stand around with perfect strangers and drink free whisky until they -became dazed, then would set down their wallets of gold on a card, and -the next moment their money would be taken up by the gambler, who would -continue dealing his cards as unconcernedly as he would knock the ashes -from his cigar. The poor, silly miner would turn away with a sickly -look, having not even enough left to get him a change of clothing. -He would go into the street with his old miner's clothes on, without -a dime to pay for his supper or to get a night's lodging. Sometimes -thousands of dollars would change hands in a few moments. This was -in the spring of 1850, when the strong, with revolver and bowie -knife, were law, when gamblers and blacklegs ran many of the towns in -California. -</p> -<p>By this time I imagine that the reader asks what, as a missionary, -I was doing there. I might answer by quoting the saying of Christ, -that it was not the righteous but the sinners that He had come to -call to repentance. But I will not offer this excuse, for it was -not applicable; and as open confession is good for the soul, I will -make one, hoping that it may be not only good for my soul, but be a -warning to all who read it. I was twenty-one years old at the time, -and was alone on the street. I did not know where to go or what to -do. My companions had left on business, and as I started along the -street I met with an old time friend who appeared very much pleased to -see me. His pleasure was reciprocated. He asked me to go in and have -something to drink; I thanked him and said that I was not in the habit -of indulging. He said, "Oh, come in, and have a little wine for old -friendship's sake. There is no harm in a little wine; come, go in and -hear the music, anyway." With that I turned in with him to the largest -gambling den in the town. The place was packed with men of almost every -nationality. This was the house I have described. -</p> -<p>In the time of great excitement, it must be confessed, the writer was -tempted to lay down a purse of one hundred dollars, as he had that -amount with him. But the next instant the thought came to him, Would -you try to beat a watchmaker or a gunsmith at his trade? The idea -was so absurd that he then thought how foolish it was to try to beat -these professional gamblers at their own game. Then the disgrace that -attached to the act became so repulsive to his nature, that he felt -ashamed that he ever had been tempted; and to this day, in a life of -seventy-two years, he has never gambled. He has always felt thankful -that that simple thought came to him at that time and place. -</p> -<p>As soon as I could arrange a little business that detained me at -Stockton, I boarded a steamboat called the <em>Captain Sutter</em>, bound for -San Francisco, paying twenty-five dollars for a seventy-five mile ride -on the crowded deck. I paid two dollars for a dinner that consisted -of tough beef, poor bread, and a cup of tea. Such were "times" in -California in 1850. -</p> -<p>We landed at the great wharf in San Francisco about 8 o'clock that -evening, April 5th. I went up town, where the streets were crowded, -then returned and slept on the deck of the boat. Next morning, I took -my trunk to the Boston House, and leaving it there, sought friends. -I was not long in finding Brother Morris, who directed me to Brother -Cade's, who, together with his good lady, received me very kindly. He -inquired if I had any place to stop at, and when I told him no, he -said, "Stop and have dinner with us, then bring your trunk here and -stay until you can do better, if you can do with such fare as we have. -We are old and cannot do very well, but you are welcome to stay with us -as long as my old lady can cook for us." -</p> -<p>With thanks, the writer accepted the kind offer, and from there visited -the Saints in San Francisco. I met Amasa M. Lyman and Charles C. -Rich, two of the Twelve Apostles, also found Addison Pratt, my fellow -missionary. Brother and Sister Cade were not willing that I should stop -over night at any other place, or pay for my washing. The good old lady -said she had money enough to last her while she lived and pay for the -washing of my clothes. Sister Ivins, who lived near by, sent for my -clothes and had them well laundered. While I stayed there, Sister Cade -presented me with five dollars and a nice silk handkerchief, and the -old gentleman gave me a good inkstand. Sister Patch, who lived near by, -gave me five dollars and a silk vest, and many of the Saints showed us -favors. -</p> -<p>On April 19th we carried our trunks on board the brig <em>Frederick</em>, -Captain Dunham commanding. The fare was one hundred dollars each, in -the cabin. We returned on shore and stayed over night, and having -received our instructions and blessings from Apostles A. M. Lyman and -C. C. Rich, we boarded the vessel at 6 o'clock a.m., April 20, and -sailed away to the southwest, for the island of Tahiti, South Pacific -Ocean. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXX"></a>CHAPTER XX. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">SAILING FOR THE SOUTH PACIFIC—SEVERE ATTACK OF SEASICKNESS—BECALMED -IN THE TROPICS—INTENSE HEAT—MARQUESAS ISLANDS—CANNIBALS—REACH -TAHITI—LAND AT PAPEETE—MEET WITH FRIENDS—HEARTY WELCOME—PREACHING -TO THE NATIVES—ANIMOSITY OF PROTESTANTS AND CATHOLICS TOWARD THE -MORMONS—JEALOUSY OF FRENCH GOVERNMENT OFFICIALS ON THE ISLAND—WATCHED -BY DETECTIVES—SIX NATIVES BAPTIZED—LEARNING THE LANGUAGE—RUMORS -OF AN INTENTION TO EXPEL THE MORMONS—ELDERS B. F. GROUARD AND T. -WHITAKER ARRESTED—APPEAL FOR AID—THEIR RELEASE AND RETURN TO THEIR -MISSIONARY LABORS—MEET WITH BROTHER PRATT AGAIN—INTERVIEW WITH THE -GOVERNOR—THAT OFFICIAL REFUSES ELDERS PRATT AND BROWN PERMISSION TO -VISIT ANOTHER ISLAND—SCARCITY OF FOOD AT HUAUA—EATING SEASNAILS AND -BUGS—STRANGE DISHES OF FOOD—ALMOST PERISH FROM THIRST—VISIT TO -TIARARA—ACQUIRING THE LANGUAGE. -</p> -<p>LEAVING San Francisco on April 20, 1850, the wind being fair, we made -about eight knots per hour, and soon lost sight of the land over which -the Stars and Stripes waves. The writer became very seasick, and -remained so for the voyage. He was seven days without an action of his -bowels, and he could not retain any kind of food on his stomach until -we got down in the tropics, when two flying fish flew aboard ship at -night, and the steward cooked them for the sick man. That was the first -thing he had a relish for. The captain said that if he had ever heard -of anybody dying of seasickness he would have had no hopes of getting -the writer ashore. -</p> -<p>The monotony of the voyage was broken only by vast fields of seaweed, -so dense that it greatly impeded our progress. Seabirds and fish were -very plentiful, and many times attracted the attention of the voyagers, -who caught several kinds of fish, including dolphin, shark and -porpoise. The fishing afforded some amusing sport, the writer gaining -courage enough at one time to crawl out on the jibboom and catch one -fish. -</p> -<p>The most trying event of the whole voyage was a calm in the torrid -zone, where we lay for eight days; it was said that in that time we -gained only eight miles. During that calm all the pitch broiled out of -the seams of the deck, making it leak so that it had to be recalked and -repitched. It became so hot that a man could not endure his bare feet -on it, and if it had not been for the seamen throwing water on deck -it seemed that we could not have lived through the terrible ordeal. -Finally a gentle breeze came to our relief, and we were wafted in sight -of the Marquesas Islands. We passed so close to these that the captain -expressed a fear that we were in danger of being attacked by the -natives of Nukahuia, the principal island. He said they were cannibals, -and that small vessels had been captured by the natives coming off in -such numbers, in canoes, as to overpower the crews. Hence he thought it -dangerous to be so close with such light winds as we had. The wind soon -freshened to a gale, and thus our fears were allayed as we bore down -close along to the northward of the Tuamotu group, sighting some of -them, to Tahiti, on which we landed on May 24, 1850. -</p> -<p>Tahiti is the principal island of the Society group; it is said to -be eighty miles in length, varying from two miles at the isthmus to -forty miles in the widest place. The highest mountain summit is said -to be five thousand feet or more. The capital, Papeete, is in latitude -17 degrees 32 minutes south, longitude 144 degrees 34 minutes west. -The islands were invaded by the French in 1843. In 1847 the war was -concluded, but not until much blood had been spilled and the country -laid waste. Then a French protectorate was established there, and -consequently, at the time we arrived, we found ourselves under the -French flag, and had to apply to Governor Bonard for permission to -go on shore. This was granted, but very reluctantly, and we paid the -secretary three francs for each of us. -</p> -<p>Once on shore, we found Brother Pratt's old friends, Hamatua and -Pohe, who treated us very kindly and on May 25th got our baggage from -the vessel, then took us in their boat around the northeast of the -island to their home in a little village called Huaua, where we were -met by their families and six or seven Church members. It seemed to -be impossible for them to rejoice any more than they did, and under -the circumstances we could not be treated with greater kindness. They -provided us with the best the land produced, making us cordially -welcome. -</p> -<p>Brother Pratt preached to them, while I was deaf and dumb, so far as -the spoken language was concerned; but the actions of the natives spoke -louder than words. When it came to meal time, they spread before us -roast pig, and fish, taro, fais, bananas, cocoanuts, sweet-potatoes, -popoie, oranges, pine and vee apples, doavas, bread fruit, etc. We had -appetites equal to the occasion, and felt no remorse for not having -done justice to the table, or to the chest which was a substitute for a -table. -</p> -<p>We soon learned that the Protestant ministers and Catholic priest were -very much prejudiced against us, and were doing all they could to -prevent the people receiving us into their houses, advising them not to -hold any conversation with us, or attend our meetings. We also learned -that the government officials were jealous of Mormon influence, and -that a watch was kept over us, in other words, the natives said that -detectives were on our track, and that a ship of war had been sent -to Tubuoi for Elders B. F. Grouard and T. Whitaker, who were on that -island as Mormon missionaries, and who had been accused of speaking -against the government. It may be imagined, therefore, that in all -respects our stay was not so pleasant as otherwise it might have been. -</p> -<p>As it was, however, we made the best of the situation. Brother Pratt -preached and talked much of the time to a few who gathered around, and -he soon baptized six persons. I studied the language by committing a -few words to memory, then forming them into sentences, and having them -corrected by the natives. Then, when I heard one tell another what to -do, I watched what was done. I collected many sentences, and walked -the beach till I committed them to memory. At first it seemed a very -difficult task to catch the sounds, but in a short time I could begin -to understand, and then to talk. For a change I would rest myself -from studying the language by practicing reading and writing, having -provided myself with copybooks and other necessary material before -leaving San Francisco. -</p> -<p>The home we had been made so welcome to was situated a few rods from -the beach, and between two little streams of water that came tumbling -down from the steep precipices in the background into a small valley, -which was heavily timbered. There were some six or seven small huts or -dwellings and twenty-five or thirty people all told. No business was -carried on further than gathering the fruit that grew, uncultivated, -in abundance for the needs of the population; and with little effort -they caught fish as they cared to consume it. As most of the people -of the village were quiet and peaceable, it will be understood why we -called the place our lonely retreat, or lonely Huaua. We visited other -villages occasionally, and tried to interest the inhabitants and preach -to them, but in vain. They would give us food, and sometimes offered to -keep us over night, but as a rule they were very cold and indifferent -towards us. -</p> -<p>Under the circumstances the best we could do was to study the language -and prepare ourselves for future usefulness as the way might open. -Meanwhile, many rumors were in circulation about the French driving -the Mormons out of the country; and the Protestant ministers and -Catholic priest seemed to spare no pains to spread all the slanderous -stories they ever had heard about the Mormons. So many rumors were in -circulation that we did not know what to believe, so we remained in -suspense till July 17, when, to our surprise, Brother Grouard came in -through a heavy rain and told us that he and Brother Whitaker had been -brought from Tubuoi, where they had been building a small schooner for -the use of the mission. He said they had been arrested on the charge of -speaking against the French government. They had landed that morning -from a ship of war, and he had got permission to come and see us, but -had to return that evening so as to be at the trial next morning. He -had left a horse five miles back, because the road was so rough that he -could cover the distance on foot quicker than on horseback, and had no -time to lose. He greatly desired that Brother Pratt and I should be at -his trial. Said he, "I am innocent, but I do not know what they will -prove, and we want you to stand by us." So it was agreed that Brother -Hamatua and I should go on foot early next morning, and Brothers Pratt -and Pohe would come as soon as the wind quieted down, as it was then -too high to venture out in the boat. -</p> -<p>Brother Hamatua and I set out early in the morning, in a heavy rain, -which continued to pour down till we reached Papeete, at 11 o'clock, -when we met Brother Grouard coming from his trial, he having been -discharged. He said Brother Whitaker would also be acquitted, although -the prejudice against them was very strong. -</p> -<p>Brothers Grouard and Whitaker thought the government would board and -lodge them at least till it got ready to return them home again, but -in this they were mistaken, so they and I did the best we could for -ourselves. We soon learned that the steamship <em>Sarien</em> would leave for -Tubuoi in three or four days, and the brethren would be taken back on -that. Brother Grouard sought the permission of the governor for Brother -Pratt and me to go on the <em>Sarien</em> with him. This was refused on the -ground that two Mormon missionaries were enough on that island. The -governor did not wish any more to go until he knew more about them. -</p> -<p>The wind kept so high that Brother Pratt did not reach Papeete until -Brothers Grouard and Whitaker had been acquitted and had gone. I had -started home, and was overhauled by Brother Grouard, who said something -had broken on the ship and they had to stop to repair it; that he -could not remain to see Brother Pratt, but would stay with me as long -as he could. He had only a few moments to stop, so I proceeded about -six miles, when I learned that Brother Pratt was on the way by boat. -Upon obtaining this information I went back to the house where we had -stayed two or three nights, finding the place barren and uninviting. -Everything was very lonely with no friends there. I feared that I would -be alone that night, but at last Brother Pratt came. The boat had -stopped, with our bedding and provisions, three or four miles up the -coast. Although the night was very dark, and the road lay through the -woods and across creeks, Brother Pratt thought we had better try to -make the boat for the night, as we had to give up going to Tubuoi. -</p> -<p>This course was followed, and we found our friends and bedding all -right. Not being satisfied, however, with the situation, we went back -to Papeete next morning, to see the governor ourselves. When we met -him, Brother Pratt asked the reason why we could not be free to go -where we chose. He replied that there had been some trouble with Mr. -Grouard, and as it was his business to look after government affairs, -he wished to inquire into the matter further before permitting more -American missionaries to go there. Said he: "While I do not wish to -interfere with religion, it is my duty to keep peace, and if you will -call again in a month or six weeks, I will let you know more about it." -</p> -<p>At this we went to the boat, and with our friends returned to lonely -Huaua. Indeed, if it had not been for our friends Hamatua and Pohe and -their families, our stay at the place for some time after this would -have been very uncomfortable. Food had become very scarce, so that we -had to eat seasnails, and bugs that played on the surface of salt water -pools. These bugs were about the size of the end of a man's thumb; in -form and action they very much resembled the little black bugs found -along the edges of our fresh water streams, and called by some people -mellow bugs. I submit that a dish of these, without pepper or salt, was -a strange sight to present to a white man—their legs sticking out in -all directions; yet, when a man has gone long enough without food, they -become quite tempting, and he is not very particular about the legs, -either. -</p> -<p>We also had other strange dishes set before us. When other food failed, -the natives would go to the mouths of small fresh water streams, and -dig in the sands, just where the high tide flowed, and at a depth of -twelve to eighteen inches they would find a something that resembled -young snakes more than anything else I can compare them to. They were -from six to ten inches in length, had a snake's mouth, and a spinal -column, or we should have called them worms; they were without fins, or -we might have called them eels. The natives had a name for them, but -I have forgotten it. When they were boiled in salt water—put a quart -or two into a pot of cold seawater, then hang them over the fire and -see them squirm a few moments—they were ready for the missionary's -meal, taken without pepper or salt. When cooked, a person seizes one -by the head and extracts it from the dish, or the banana leaf, as the -case may be. He retains the head between his thumb and forefinger, then -takes hold of the body with his teeth, draws it through these, and -thus strips off the flesh in his mouth. He then lays down the head and -backbone, and repeats the operation until he has completed his repast. -</p> -<p>Just a moment, my friendly reader; we have another dish for you on the -Society Islands, that you may enjoy better. It is a peculiar kind of -fish, very rare indeed, for they seldom appear more than once or twice -in a year: then they are present by myriads. They come up out of the -sea into the fresh water streams so thickly that they can be dipped up -with a frying-pan or bucket. Sometimes the natives dip them up with an -open bucket, or with a sack having a hoop in the mouth, thus taking -them by bushels. These fish are of a dark color, and from half an -inch to an inch and a quarter long. When boiled they look like boiled -rice, and a man can eat about as many of them as he can grains of that -vegetable. When they are eaten with the cream of the cocoanut they are -quite palatable. This dish is not very common, as I remember seeing it -in only three or four places. -</p> -<p>Besides the dish named, we had a small shellfish called maava. It -lives in a shell so much like a snail's that we called it a seasnail. -It was cooked in the shell, and was quite acceptable for a change in -hard times. We also had a large shellfish called pahua; again, we had -a jelly-fish which, when taken and laid in a dish, very much resembled -the white of an egg; it had neither scales nor bones, and was eaten -raw, without pepper or salt. -</p> -<p>Still another course of food which we had was wild boar from the -mountains. I can only say that the flesh is hard and tough. Brother -Pratt shot a boar with his shotgun. This pleased the natives very much. -I also gave chase to one which led me so far away from water that I -felt I should die of thirst and heat. On my descent returning, I came -to a lone cocoanut tree that had plenty of nuts on. I tried in vain to -climb the tree; then I clubbed the nuts that were only forty feet or -so up, but finding that it was impossible to obtain drink in that way, -I sat down in the shade in despair, and felt for a moment that I could -not live to reach water. At last my nerves became somewhat steadied, -and I took aim at the stem of a nut, it being not so thick as my little -finger. The bullet cut one stem entirely away and passed through -another close to the nut. Thus two cocoanuts dropped, and hopes of -life sprung up anew, only to perish, for I found it impossible to open -the nuts. After a brief rest, I started down the mountain again, and -succeeded in reaching a cocoanut grove where an old man was throwing -down nuts. I told him of my suffering and he hastened down, opened a -nut, and gave me a drink that was most refreshing. May he receive a -prophet's reward, for he gave me drink when it seemed that life was -fast ebbing away. The welcome draught refreshed me so that I gained the -village early, being wiser for the experience of following wild boars -in the mountains away from water. Although the temptation came to me -several times afterward, I never chased a wild boar again; but at one -time I killed one which appeared to be about two years old, without a -chase. This, and hunting ducks and fishing a little, greatly relieved -the monotony of our involuntary stay. -</p> -<p>For a change from our living at Huaua, I went to visit Pohe, nephew -of my old friend Hamatua, who lived at Tiara, three miles up the -coast, making my home with him. I visited among the people there, and -by hearing none but the Tahitian language spoken, I progressed very -fast therein; indeed my progress astonished the natives at Tiara, who -said. "The Lord helps the Mormon missionaries learn our language, for -in three months they speak it better than other foreigners do in five -years." -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">OFFER OF TRANSPORTATION TO THE ISLAND OF TUBUOI—APPLY TO THE GOVERNOR -FOR PERMISSION TO GO—TROOPS ON PARADE—SUITE OF QUEEN POMERE—CALL -ON THE GOVERNOR—CONVERSATION IN THREE LANGUAGES—DIRECTED TO COME -AGAIN NEXT DAY—PUT OFF BY THE GOVERNOR—LATTER REFUSES THE PERMISSION -ASKED—HIS PREJUDICE AGAINST THE MORMONS—DEMANDS A STATEMENT OF THEIR -DOCTRINES—NOT REQUIRED OF OTHER DENOMINATIONS—WRITER'S INTERVIEW -WITH THE GOVERNOR—RETURN TO HUAUA—OTHER ELDERS REQUESTED TO ASSEMBLE -THERE—BITTERNESS OF PROTESTANT MINISTERS—NATIVES COMMENT ON MORMONS -LEARNING THEIR LANGUAGE QUICKLY. -</p> -<p>DURING my stay at Tiara, news came to Brother Pratt that a schooner -from Lurutu was at Papeete, and that the captain had proffered to take -us to Tubuoi free of charge. On receiving this message I returned at -once to Huaua. Brother Pratt requested me to visit Governor Bonard, and -see if we could get permission to make the trip, it being near the time -when we were to call on him again. It was necessary for us to give him -eight days' notice of our coming, and as the vessel was to sail in ten -days, there was no time to lose. -</p> -<p>On August 9th I set out, two native boys accompanying me. When we -reached Hapape, we saw there about four hundred soldiers. Then we met -Governor Bonard and staff, and after them saw Queen Pomere and suite, -all in their military dress. It was difficult to tell which made the -finest appearance. On our arrival in Papeete we were told that the -troops had gone out on dress parade and review, preparatory to sailing -to the island of Huhine, to settle some trouble between the natives -of that island and some shipwrecked foreigners. It was late when we -reached Papeete, and we went to the house of a native named Didi, -staying over night; he was very kind to us. I also met with the owner -of the Lurutu vessel, who told me he would take us to Tubuoi free of -charge, if we wished to go. He seemed very friendly toward us. -</p> -<p>The next day, August 10th, I went to see the governor. I met a sentinel -at the gate, who ordered me to halt. Then he called for the officer -of the day, who told me to wait till he gave notice to the governor. -The officer went in, and soon returned and beckoned me forward. I -advanced past a second sentinel, when the officer ushered me into the -presence of his excellency, who rose from his seat and met me. When -we had shaken hands, he very politely bade me to be seated, and then -said pleasantly: "Do you speak English?" This question being answered -in the affirmative, he said, "Me speak lete." Then we entered upon a -conversation. As I understood a little French, and both of us could -speak a limited amount of Tahitian, we made a jargon of one-third -English, one-third French, and one-third Tahitian. Then we laughed -heartily at each other because of our novel attempts in the three -languages. The governor invited me to call next morning, when his -French captain, who could speak English, would be there. Then, with -French politeness, he bowed me out and off. -</p> -<p>Next morning I went, and met the governor going to church. He said he -had forgotten it was Sunday, so I would have to wait an hour or two, -and come again. This I did, being stopped by the sentinel as before, -going through all the ceremonies of the previous visit, and being -ushered into the same room. I met the English-speaking captain, to whom -I made my business known. Said he, "The governor declines to grant -your request." I was not disappointed, for I was well satisfied from -what I had learned the day before that that would be the result, but -as the talk had not been very conclusive, I had called for a clearer -understanding, hoping the governor might yield when he understood us -better. In this I was mistaken, however, as it seemed the governor was -thoroughly filled with prejudice against even the name of Mormon Elder. -</p> -<p>I asked Governor Bonard his reasons for detaining us where we were. He -said that in the first place he had no proof that we were good men, -and he wished to know what we would preach, and what our doctrines -and faith were. I told him that we preached the Gospel which Jesus -Christ and His Apostles preached, and could produce our credentials, -if he desired to see them. He said no, he did not wish that of us; -neither did he wish to interfere with religious matters, but it was -for peace in the country that he wished us to stop there; for if we -and everybody who desired it were allowed to set forth new doctrines -among the people, and get them divided among themselves, they would -be fighting, and it was his place to keep the peace. Said he, "Before -you go from this island, I wish to know more about your doctrine." I -told him that was what we wished him and every good man to know, and to -embrace it if he would. Then he said that he desired the Mormon Elders -to get together, and make a declaration of what they would preach -and how far they would obey the laws. I replied that that was just -what we wished to do, but if he refused us the privilege of going to -Tubuoi we did not know when we could get together. Said he, "You had -better write to your friends at Tubuoi, and have them come here. Your -faces are strange to me, and you are from a foreign country. We have -no proof that you are good men. The doctrine you preach is new to me -and if you will gather all your white brethren, and make a declaration -of the doctrine you preach, and how far you will obey the laws of the -land, signing your names to it, then, if I accept of it as being good -doctrine, you will have liberty to go anywhere you wish, and have our -protection." My answer was that we had no objection to acquainting him -with our doctrine. I asked him if he made the same requirement of other -denominations that he did of us, and received the information that he -did not. Upon this, I inquired why he made it of us, and he stated that -there had been some difficulty already with B. F. Grouard. "Well," -said I, "did you not acquit Grouard?" "Yes," he said, "but we would -like to look further into the matter, and if possible prevent further -trouble." They had lost two good seamen going after Grouard, and one -fell overboard on the return trip, but they succeeded in rescuing him. -</p> -<p>When I found that I could not prevail on the governor to allow us our -liberty, I left and visited the captain of the <em>Lurutu</em>. With him I -boarded his novel vessel. It was of very frail construction; all the -stays and braces were made by hand from the bark of a tree called by -the natives burson, and resembling somewhat the basswood of the Eastern -and Middle States. The captain said he sailed by the sun by day, and -at night by the moon and stars, but in cloudy weather by instinct, -or guess. I asked if they did not get lost sometimes; he said no, -they were well acquainted with the sea. They had been three years -in building the schooner. It would carry about forty tons. The crew -conveyed the products of their island three hundred and sixty miles to -Tahiti principally, but occasionally to other islands. To me the vessel -appeared a frail craft, and wholly without comforts, for white men at -least. -</p> -<p>Having satisfied my curiosity about the strange craft, I returned -to Huaua on August 11, and reported results to President Pratt, who -wrote immediately to the different Elders to come and sign with us -the document the governor had suggested. The mails were so irregular -and uncertain that we had not the remotest idea when our release -would come, for if ever our letters were received by the Elders, it -might be three or even six months before they could get a passage to -Tahiti. Thus the reader can see that we were doomed to tarry almost as -prisoners in the little valley of Huaua, which was only about eighty -rods wide by one hundred and fifty in length, being bounded on the -south by high, steep mountains, that were almost impossible to cross, -at least by a white man not accustomed to climbing them; and on the -northeast the open sea rolled and surged upon the rocks and the sandy -beach, to within fifteen rods of where we slept, our heads being not -more than ten feet above high water mark. This was not all; for the -Protestant ministers were very bitter against us, and so prejudiced -that it was useless for us to try to enlighten them in regard to -ourselves or our faith. They seemed to spare no pains in spreading -their venom among the people, and in every way possible intimidated the -natives so that our friends were but few, though our enemies had no -power over them. With the aid of a book, however, we could improve in -the language, and did so to the extent that when we had been there five -months the natives who were not of us said, "Surely the Lord is with -the Mormons, for in five months they speak our language better than -other foreigners do in five years. No one can learn our language like -the Mormon Elders unless the Lord helps them." Thus encouraged, we bore -our imprisonment the best we could. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">VISIT TO PAPEETE—DUCK-HUNTING TRIP—A PECULIAR WOMAN—ALONG A -PERILOUS PATH—AN OPINION OF ENGLISH MINISTERS—ARRIVAL OF ELDER S. -A. DUNN—LEARN OF MORE MISSIONARIES ARRIVING AT TUBUOI—NEWS FROM MY -FATHER AND OTHERS—LETTERS FROM THE FIRST PRESIDENCY AND SOME OF THE -APOSTLES—WRITTEN STATEMENT SENT TO THE GOVERNOR OF TAHITI—VISIT THE -GOVERNOR—OUR STATEMENT REJECTED—LIST OF QUESTIONS AND STATEMENT -PRESENTED BY THE GOVERNOR—REPLY OF ELDER A. PRATT—OBJECTIONS BY THE -GOVERNOR—PERMISSION GIVEN US TO TRAVEL AND PREACH ON THE ISLANDS. -</p> -<p>ON September 5th, 1850, I met with the opportunity of going to Papeete -in a boat that was passing. My friends took me out in a canoe to the -larger vessel. I was very seasick. The wind was so high that in two -hours we were in Taunoa, where we stayed over night. On the 6th we got -to Papeete, where I received a letter from B. F. Grouard. I answered -it the same day. We found friends who treated us very kindly; then -returned to our lonely retreat, traveling through a heavy rainstorm all -the way. -</p> -<p>We continued our studies without anything to vary the monotony until -October 2nd, when President Pratt and Hamatua, and three children from -the latter's family, took their blankets and went into the mountains -for a change, while I made a visit to my friend Pohe to get my books, -which had been left with him. When I returned I continued my studies -alone until Brother Pratt and party came back; then, on September 15th, -I went to Papeno, duck-hunting. As Sister Hamatua had some relatives -there, she and her stepdaughter accompanied me, thinking that my stay -would be made more pleasant. Sister Hamatua was between fifty and sixty -years of age, was well versed in the scriptures, and as true to her -religion as anyone I have ever met. She had never had any children of -her own, and yet she had taken three young babes, from their birth, and -nursed them at her own breast, and gave them suck and reared them. I -think one mother had died at her child's birth, and with another child -the young mother had cast it away to die, as it was illegitimate, and -she denied its being her child. The third had been promised to Sister -Hamatua before its birth, and at that time she claimed it and took it -home the same hour. I saw the children, and the natives bore witness to -the truth of the narrative here given. The youngest child was princess -of Tubuoi, her name was Aura, and at the time I write of she was a -bright girl of eight years. -</p> -<p>We went on our journey to Papeno, passing down along the cliffs of rock -and precipitous and deep, dark caverns that were almost impassable. -The shrieking and howling of the wind as it was forced up through -the crevices in the rocks by the surging waves from the open sea, -combined with the dangers of the route, had such an effect on my nerves -that I have never desired a repetition of the hazardous trip, though -I traveled many times on the Brom (state road), parallel with the -perilous path. I had no desire to pass over or even to think of the -jeopardy we were in on that terrible trail. Suffice it to say, that we -reached our journey's end in safety, and stayed with the governor of -the village, who treated us very kindly. We returned next day, the 16th -of September. On our way we saw a ship heading for Papeete. This gave -us hope that we would get some news from the outer world. -</p> -<p>September 22nd. Pipitila and I started for Papeete, thinking we would -meet with the Elders, or at least get some word from them. All that we -could learn was that they were expected in Tubuoi instead of in Tahiti. -We stayed in Taunaa, where we met with friends who treated us well. One -old man said that he had become tired of the English ministers, for -they preached one thing and did the opposite. Said he, "I have been a -fool that has no eyes all my life. I have belonged to the Protestant -church ever since it has been here, and still I am like a fool, for I -am black or dark in my heart. I have tried ever since the missionaries -came to get light. They came and went back and died, and still I am -a fool, and darkness fills my soul, for I never learned before that -Christ was baptized. You have given me the first light that I have ever -had on the Gospel." We returned to our home on September 25th and found -all well. On October 3rd friends from Tiara came to visit us, and for a -time broke the monotony of our island-prison life. -</p> -<p>Nothing out of the usual happened till November 6th, when I was ready -to start on a trip of inquiry. A little girl came in and said there -was an old white man out at the creek, and that he was asking for -Brother Pratt. In a few minutes Brother S. A. Dunn came in, and to our -great surprise and joy he brought word that Brother Pratt's family and -a company of Elders had arrived at Tubuoi, all well. He had letters -for us, too. I received one from my father—the first word that I had -had since 1847. I also had a letter from my old friend and comrade, -Jonathan C. Holmes, stating that my Uncle Alexander Stephens had been -wounded in a battle with the Ute Indians in Utah County, but that he -was getting around again very well. -</p> -<p>Brother Pratt received letters from the First Presidency of the Church, -also from Apostles Amasa M. Lyman and Charles C. Rich, all bringing -good news and words of encouragement to us. Elder Dunn told us that he -had called on Governor Bonard, who seemed very pleasant and who told -him that as soon as we would get together and make a statement of what -we would preach, and signed the same, we would have liberty to go where -we chose, and should have the protection of the French government. -</p> -<p>November 8th we wrote as follows to the governor: -</p> -<p>"Whereas, we, the undersigned, have been requested by his excellency, -Governor Bonard, of Tahiti, to make a statement of the intentions of -our mission to the Society Islands, in compliance therewith we proceed -to give the following: -</p> -<p>"1st. To preach the everlasting Gospel, which brings life and salvation -to the children of men. 'For I am not ashamed of the Gospel of Christ, -for it is the power of God unto salvation to every one that believeth, -to the Jew first, and also to the Greek.'—(Romans 1:16.) -</p> -<p>"2nd. To teach the people by precept and by example the habits of -virtue and industry, which are so desirable to the happiness and -prosperity of civilized life. -</p> -<p>"3rd. To observe and keep the laws of every land wherein we dwell, -so far as it is required of preachers of the Gospel in Christian -countries; and to teach and admonish the people to observe and keep the -laws of the land. -</p> -<p>"Huaua, Tahiti, November 8, 1850. -</p> -<p class="right">"[Signed] Addison Pratt, -<br>"Simeon A. Dunn, -<br>"James S. Brown." -</p> -<p>We started on November 10th to see the governor and present to him -the foregoing. Traveling on foot, we went to Papeno, where we were -very kindly received by the governor, at whose house we stopped over -night. Many of his friends called to see and greet us. On the 11th we -proceeded to Papeete, arriving there in time to pass the guard and -be ushered into the governor's office, where we were received very -coldly. The governor was engaged talking with two officers. We stood -until observed, from a side room, by a French officer, who invited -us (speaking in English) to come in and be seated; he then called an -interpreter. When the latter came he looked over the article that we -had presented, and rejected it. Then he produced one which the governor -had had drawn up, and which he read as follows: -</p> -<p>"On my arrival at Tahiti, two or three persons styled Mormon -missionaries were residing either at Tubuoi or at the Pamutus. As -they were already there, I thought it proper to allow them to remain, -considering the small number of persons forming the mission, upon -conditions, however, that they attended strictly to the laws which -govern the lands of the protectorate, not interfering in any way with -politics or civil matters, but solely religious, with which I have no -intention whatever to interfere. -</p> -<p>"Now that a large number of persons attached to the Mormon mission -request permission to reside at the Society Islands, tending to create -a sort of church government embracing all the lands of the protectorate -of France, to create, it might be said, a new existence in the -population of the islands, it is now my duty to interfere. -</p> -<p>"I requested to be informed as to what are the means of the Mormons for -their living. -</p> -<p>"1st. From whence the society of Mormon missionaries derive the power -of forming themselves into a body? -</p> -<p>"2nd. What are the forms of government and the discipline which govern -this society? -</p> -<p>"3rd. What guarantee of morality and good conduct do they require from -members appointed as missionaries for the foreigners? -</p> -<p>"4th. What guarantee do they require before conferring grades and -offices on natives? -</p> -<p>"5th. What duty do they require either from foreigners or from native -members, not including religious dogmas, with which I shall not -interfere? -</p> -<p>"6th. What number of religious services do they hold weekly or monthly? -</p> -<p>"7th. Finally, what morals do the Mormons preach? -</p> -<p>"These questions put, and satisfactorily answered. This is what it is -my duty to make known to the Mormon missionaries: As men, they, as all -foreigners, are permitted to reside in the islands of the protectorate, -and have a right to French protection by conforming themselves to the -laws of the country; as missionaries, with an open pulpit which might -consequently give them great influence over the population, and create, -as it were, a new power, it is my duty to impose conditions that they -guarantee, consequently: -</p> -<p>"1st. The Mormon missionaries shall bind themselves to preach their -religion without interfering in any way or under any pretext with -politics or civil matters. -</p> -<p>"2nd. They shall withhold from speaking from the pulpit against the -religion established in the islands of the protectorate, or the laws -and the acts emanating from the authorities. -</p> -<p>"3rd. They shall not exact from the inhabitants of the islands of the -protectorate any tax, either in money, labor, provisions or material. -</p> -<p>"4th. They shall not inflict penalties upon any one, either in money, -labor, provisions, or material, for failing to comply with the rules of -the religion they preach. -</p> -<p>"5th. They cannot acquire land in the name of the society, without the -approbation of the protectorate government. -</p> -<p>"6th. No person can be allowed to unite himself with them, as a Mormon -missionary, in the Society Islands, before having signed that he -adheres to the present declaration, and whenever proof might be made -of guilt of an infringement of these articles, it would occasion his -exclusion from the islands of the protectorate. -</p> -<p>"The persons calling themselves Mormon missionaries, and who sent -a delegate to me whom I could not recognize officially, are hereby -informed that before I can authorize them as a society they must reply -categorically to the questions which I have put to them; that until -then their residence is illegal, and I refuse, as it is my duty to -do, all authorization to the Mormon missionaries to take up their -residence. Moreover, it is my duty to inform them that when they are -constituted a society no meetings, except on days regularly known as -days of prayer and preaching, can be held without the permission of the -authorities, on pain of being prosecuted according to law." -</p> -<p>When this long and proscriptive roll had been read and strongly -emphasized, we were handed a copy, and the interpreter said we could -make such answers as we saw fit. At this we went to a quiet place, and -on November 12th President Pratt wrote out the following reply: -</p> -<p>"As it has been requested by his excellency, the governor of Tahiti, -to give answer to certain questions that he has propounded to us, we -herein comply: -</p> -<p>"1st. First, as it is declared in the New Testament of our Lord and -Savior Jesus Christ, that they that preach the Gospel shall live off -the Gospel, we are sent forth by the authority of the Church to which -we belong with expectation that those to whom we preach will contribute -to our necessities, so far as life and health are concerned, of their -own free will. Second, we have no authority from those who sent us to -the islands to form ourselves into a body compact, either civil or -religious, nor have we any intention of so doing. Third, the reason of -our going to Tubuoi is this: I, Addison Pratt, arrived at Tubuoi in -the year 1844, in the capacity of a missionary of the Gospel of Jesus -Christ. I remained there in that capacity about nineteen months, and -when I was about to leave there I was invited, by the authorities of -the island then in power, to return to them with my family, and reside -with them as their preacher. They wished also to be instructed in the -arts and sciences of civilized life. After I left Tubuoi, I went to -Anaa, to assist Mr. Grouard in his missionary labors, having been sent -for by request of the people living there. I remained at Anaa about -nine months, and while there a general conference was held, by the -people we had baptized, on the 6th of October, 1846. At that meeting a -request was made by the people of whom Aniipa was head, to send by me -to our Church, in North America, for more missionaries to assist Mr. -Grouard and myself, as the Gospel had spread in several islands of that -group. The company that has arrived at Tubuoi are the missionaries who -have been sent for, as I returned to North America in the year 1847 -and laid the minutes of the conference held at Anaa, and the request -of the people of Tubuoi, before the Church. A part of that company -now at Tubuoi are preachers of the Gospel, and a part of them are -mechanics and husbandmen; they have brought with them tools and seeds -for carrying out the object for which they were sent. -</p> -<p>"2nd. The forms of government by which the society is governed are -those set forth by Jesus Christ and His Apostles, as laid down in the -New Testament, to which we have referred. -</p> -<p>"3rd. We request them to be strictly virtuous in every sense of the -word, observing and keeping the laws of the land wherein they dwell, -and teaching the people so to do. -</p> -<p>"4th. We request of them all that is contained in the articles. -</p> -<p>"5th. We request of them what is contained in the third article and -nothing more. -</p> -<p>"6th. We have no stated times for religious services except upon the -Sabbath; we hold semi-annual conferences. Besides these, we are subject -to the will of the people. -</p> -<p>"7th. We preach to and admonish the people to keep all the commandments -of God, and strictly obey the laws of the land wherein they dwell." -</p> -<p>Our answer was signed by Addison Pratt, Simeon A. Dunn and James S. -Brown, and was presented to his excellency, who objected to the first -statement, about our means of support. He said he wished men to get a -living in a more honorable way than that. The second paragraph he did -not like. He seemed to dislike scripture references. We told him we had -been reared to work, that we still expected to labor for our living, -and that a part of our people had come to work and a part to preach the -Gospel. -</p> -<p>After he had interrogated us to his satisfaction, and placed about us -all the restrictions that seemed possible, the governor told us that -if we would go with Mr. Dugard, one of his officers, he would give us -permits to reside among the islands of the protectorate, after we had -signed the articles he presented to us. -</p> -<p>As we left the governor's presence, Mr. Dugard told us that, as it was -getting rather late, we had better call at his office the next morning -at 8 o'clock, and he would attend to our case. We complied with his -suggestion but did not find him at home. The lady of the house told -us to call at 2 o'clock and he would be there. In a short time we met -the interpreter who advised us to call at 11 o'clock, which we did, -finding the official ready to wait on us, as we supposed; but instead, -he directed us to go to a certain notary public, who would give us our -permits. We did as instructed and obtained the documents, paying three -francs each. Thus we were permitted to go as ministers of the Gospel -among the islands of the French protectorate. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">RETURN TO HUAUA—HEAVY RAINSTORMS—REFUSAL OF AN OFFER TO BE -CARRIED OVER A STREAM—PERILOUS SWIMMING FEAT—EPISODE WITH A WILD -BOAR—START ON A TRIP AROUND THE ISLAND—OBTAIN A LOAF OF BREAD—PEOPLE -NOT DESIROUS OF LISTENING TO THE MORMON ELDERS—CUSTOMS OF THE -NATIVES—REPUTATION OF PROTESTANT CLERGY ON TAHITI—WITH THE CHIEF -MAGISTRATE OF UAIRAI—ACROSS A SMALL BAY IN A CANOE—FRENCH GARRISON AT -THE ISTHMUS—WITH MY FRIEND POHE—REVIEW OF A HARD JOURNEY—AGAIN AT -HUAUA. -</p> -<p>AS there were no vessels bound for where we wished to go at this time, -on November 13th we started on our return from Papeete to Huaua, but it -rained so hard that we had to seek shelter after traveling six miles. -We came to a creek about two rods across, and began to take off our -shoes preparatory to wading it. Just then a sprightly little woman came -along and told us she would carry us across on her back. She said, -"There are little sharp shells and rocks that will cut your feet, and -they will not hurt mine, for I am used to them. My feet are tough, but -you are not used to going barefoot like us, and your feet are tender. -I will gladly carry you over free rather than see you cut your feet." -She plead with such earnestness and so innocently that it became almost -a temptation, especially as she would have considered it a great honor -to carry the servants of God, as she was pleased to call us. Said she, -"You need not be afraid that I will fall down with you; I can carry you -with ease." When her very kind offer was declined, she seemed very much -disappointed. We tried to console her by telling her how greatly we -appreciated her kindness, then proceeded on our way, but owing to the -heavy rain soon called at a native's house, where we were pleasantly -entertained. He spread the best food he had. This was put on the bed. -He also asked us to take seats on the bed, offering as an excuse, "The -fleas are so bad we have to get up there to be out of the way, or they -will get in the food." -</p> -<p>We accepted the situation with thanks, and felt that we were right -royally treated. The people from around flocked in until the house -was so thoroughly packed with humanity that the fleas had a fine -opportunity to gorge themselves. The people did not seem to be much -annoyed by them, but talked and sang till 11, o'clock, when we turned -in for the remainder of the night, concluding that the fleas had been -so feasted that they were willing to let us slumber in peace, which we -did. -</p> -<p>November 14th we resumed our journey, only to be driven in by the rain, -but not until we were thoroughly drenched. Having met with our old and -well tried friend, Hamatua, when the storm subsided we continued our -journey to Papeno. A call was made on the governor of that district, -who told us that the river was so swollen that it was not safe for -white men to attempt to cross. He said the natives could go over -safely, but we could not do so, and told the party they were welcome -to stay with him all night. The writer thought that if a native could -cross the river he could, so he prepared for the attempt. The stream -was about fifteen rods wide. The governor, himself a very large and -powerful man, said, "If you go I will go with and assist you, for you -cannot cross there alone. Two natives have been swept down to the sea -and drowned. If I go with you we can cross safely, but I am afraid to -have you go alone." At that both of us got ready to cross. He took -hold of my right arm close to the shoulder. We waded in till the swift -current took our feet from under us, then we swam with all our power, -and finally gained the opposite shore by swimming three times the -width of the river. The governor could have turned and swam back again -without any trouble, but I had quite enough to satisfy my conceit, and -ever since have been willing to acknowledge that a native can beat me -in the water. -</p> -<p>Brothers Pratt and Dunn were well satisfied to wait for the water to -fall before they tried to cross, and by late in the evening the stream -was down so that they came over with comparative ease. We stayed with -some very good friends, and on the 15th of November reached home. All -were well. Things went on as usual until the 28th, when the natives -came running and said a wild hog had come down from the mountains and -was at the next door neighbor's, with his tame hogs. The people wished -us to come with bubus (guns) and shoot him. On a previous occasion, -before I could understand the natives, a wild hog had come down and -was with the hogs of our host. There was great excitement among the -natives, so Brother Pratt hastened and got his shotgun, and went out -and killed the hog. He told me to hold on with my gun, and would not -let me know what the excitement was until it was over. Now, the natives -shouted that Prita's (Pratt's) gun was the strong one, that he was the -brave hunter and knew how to shoot, but that my weapon was too small -a bore—it could not kill if I hit the hog. But on this occasion I -outdistanced the old gentleman with my small-bore rifle. I shot the -hog just behind the shoulder; it ran a few jumps and fell in the thick -brake. As the animal was out of sight, and the natives could not see -any evidence of its having been hit, they blamed me for not letting -Brother Pratt get there first, saying he would have killed the hog and -we would have had something to eat. Brother Pratt good naturedly joined -in with them; they looked disappointed, and tried to laugh me to shame, -but in the height of their ridiculing me a lad who had followed the -track a rod or two into the brake shrieked out in terror: "Here is the -hog, dead! I was near stepping on him before I saw him!" The laugh was -turned. -</p> -<p>The hog was soon dressed, and the natives had to examine my gun. They -concluded that both Brother Pratt and I were good gunners, and had good -weapons. The hog was a boar, a year and a half old or more, and if -it had been fat would have dressed two hundred pounds. All were well -pleased for it was a time of scarcity of food. -</p> -<p>On December 2nd Brother Dunn and I started to go around Tahiti on foot, -passing by Papeete. Hametua Vaheni, John Layton's wife, and the two -small girls of the house, went with us to Papeete. We stayed at Faripo -the first night, with Noiini, who was very kind to us. Next morning we -proceeded on our way to Hapape, where we stopped at the house of Teahi, -a relative of Hametua Vaheni. There we took breakfast, and continued -our journey to Taunoa, where we remained over night with Tamari. There -we left our baggage while we went on to Papeete to see what news we -could get. We spent most of the day to no purpose, returning to where -we had stayed the night before. -</p> -<p>Next morning, the 4th, we started without breakfast. On the way we -purchased a loaf of bread—a rare treat to us, as we had not even seen -bread for several days. We ate it as we walked along, stopping at a -small brook to get a drink. At Wamau, a man invited us into his house. -As it had begun to rain we accepted his kind offer with thankfulness. -Upon entering the house we were requested to take a seat upon the bed. -Some very fine oranges were set before us, and soon the house was -filled with young people mostly, who seemed very desirous of learning -who we were, where we were from, and what our business was. We told -them, and they appeared to be very much disappointed. We soon found -that they had no use for us, so we went on our way and soon came to a -cemetery in which was a large monument of masonry with an iron cross on -it. At one grave there was a candle burning. We were told by some of -the people that in the time of the war a great battle had been fought -there between the natives and the French, and that the monument had -been built in honor of a great French general who had fallen. -</p> -<p>From there we passed on through a large cocoanut grove, and in a short -time came to a small village called Tapuna. We turned into a house and -not finding anyone at home, sat down for a rest. In a little while we -were discovered by some of the villagers, who invited us in, and as is -usual among that people, inquired of us, saying, "Who are you, where do -you come from, where are you going, and what is your business here in -our land?" When we informed them that we were ministers of the Gospel, -they were very much pleased, but when we told them that our Church -was called the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, commonly -known as the Mormon Church, they almost invariably showed signs of -disappointment, and seemed to have less interest in us. Still there -were some in almost every village who were kind enough to keep us over -night, give us the very best they had, and often go with us a little -way on our journey the next day. They never failed to have a hymn sung, -and often a chapter from the Bible read, and would call on us to offer -prayer. Then the eldest of the young men who had called in—sometimes -there were ten or fifteen—would shake hands with us, followed by all -the rest, apparently according to age. The young women then would do -likewise, observing the same rule, after which the older people would -follow, the women coming first in this case, such being their custom. -</p> -<p>Before we left Tapuna, one man desired us to visit his mother, who -was sick with consumption. We complied with this wish, but found that -she had no faith in the Gospel. From there we passed on to an English -missionary's home, the headquarters of one Mr. Chisholm. He was not in, -so we passed on to the next house, where, according to what the people -said, a very dissipated missionary had lived, and the other had come to -take his place. We were told that the newcomer was no better than the -old one, for both were drunken and lustful and behaved very badly with -the women. Such was the general reputation, among the natives, of the -Protestant clergy at that date. -</p> -<p>We went on till we were called into a house where the people said they -wished to know what we had to say of religion. As soon as they learned -that we differed from their views they displayed no further concern in -us, and we departed. After wading many streams, and getting very tired -and hungry, we reached a village called Uairai, where we were invited -in to have a meal. We had been indoors but a few minutes when the -people of the village came running in as if to a dog fight or a monkey -show; for it was rarely they saw two white men traveling as we were, -they being accustomed to seeing the missionary in a hammock carried by -four stout men. -</p> -<p>When we had been there a short time two men came in with a message from -the governor or chief magistrate of the village, desiring us to call at -his residence. As soon as we had partaken of refreshments we complied -with the request, the whole assemblage of people following us. We found -his honor holding some kind of meeting with the more aged people, the -exact nature of which we did not learn. He invited us in, gave us -seats, and shook hands with us very warmly. He then stood before us and -said, "Who are you, where do you come from, what is your business here, -and where are you going?" We answered that we were ministers of the -true Gospel of Jesus Christ, and were traveling to preach to all people -that were willing or wished to hear the Gospel of salvation. "Well," he -said, "that is what we want here, but I must see the French governor -and our ministers before I can give permission for any one to preach." -</p> -<p>When the meeting was over he came to us again and said he would be -pleased to have us stop over night with him. We accepted his kind -invitation to visit his house, and all the congregation followed, for -a time seeming very desirous of learning from us the true Gospel. We -conversed with them quite awhile and there was not one to oppose us, -but all seemed very well pleased with what we had to say. -</p> -<p>Supper over, we returned to the house of Miapui, where we had left our -valises, and where we spent the night, being well treated by our host -and by all who called on us. -</p> -<p>Next morning our host accompanied us on our way until we met his -brother, whom he instructed to see us across a small bay that extended -up to the base of the mountain, which was so steep that we could not -go around its head. We were taken across in a canoe, paying a dollar -and a half. The man said the use of the canoe cost him that amount, but -he would take nothing for his services. He then conducted us through a -thick forest of timber and underbrush to the Brom (state) road. -</p> -<p>We next proceed to the isthmus, to a French fort garrisoned by one -company of soldiers. The isthmus is about one and a half miles across. -From there we turned to the northwest, towards Huaua, as it was too -rough, steep and dangerous to proceed closely along the coast. We -traveled homeward till 1 o'clock p.m., when we came to a little hamlet -called Otufai. There we met a man named Aili, who invited us to dinner. -We accepted his courtesy and while there the school-teacher called and -asked us to go home with him. We also availed ourselves of this kind -invitation, finding the teacher, whose name was Tuamau, very friendly. -We spent the night with him, being treated well, but he did not evince -much interest in what we had to say on religious matters. -</p> -<p>The following morning it was raining very hard, and for a time it -seemed that we were weatherbound; but breakfast over, it cleared off, -and we proceeded on our way to Hitia, where we stopped at the house of -Fenuas and got dinner. Then we went on to Tiara and visited with our -friend Pohe (in English, dead), or, as he was sometimes called, Mahena -Toru (third day). He made us feel very much at home. This we were in a -condition to fully appreciate, for we had traveled on foot in the hot -sands and sun about one hundred and fifty miles, until we felt that -we were almost parboiled. We had waded many streams of water, which, -though very disagreeable, helped to make our journey more tolerable, -through being cooling. The sharp rocks and shells in the water courses -made us pay penance instead of pennies for crossing them. Sometimes the -streams were so swollen and ran so swiftly as to be very dangerous, -because the crossings were so near the sea that if a man were to lose -his footing he was liable to be carried into the billows, from whence -it would be almost if not quite impossible to escape. -</p> -<p>On the 9th of December we passed down three miles to Huaua, where we -found all our friends well, and some prospects of getting an opening to -preach. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXIV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">SCARCITY OF FOOD—TRAVELING IN HEAVY RAINS—CALL ON A PROTESTANT -MINISTER—ARRIVAL OF ANOTHER MISSIONARY AND LETTERS FROM -HOME—VISITORS FROM METIA—HOLD A SACRAMENT MEETING—GO TO -PAPARA—ABUSED RY THE PROTESTANT MINISTER—PREACH TO THE PEOPLE—YOUNG -WOMAN MIRACULOUSLY HEALED AT BAPTISM—GREAT EXCITEMENT—RAGE -OF THE PROTESTANT MINISTERS—PERSECUTION INSTITUTED—ARRESTED -FOR PREACHING—RELEASED ON PROMISING TO RETURN TO HUAUA—PLENTY -OF FRIENDS—UNINTENTIONAL ESCAPE FROM GEN D' ARMES—ARRIVAL AT -PAPEETE—CHARGE ON WHICH OFFICERS SEEK TO ARREST ME—ABUSED BY REV. MR. -HOWE—A QUIET ANSWER CALLS OUT CHEERS FROM THE CROWD—TIDE TURNS IN MY -FAVOR—EXCITEMENT CALMS DOWN, AND EFFORTS TO ARREST ME CEASE. -</p> -<p>ON the 16th of December I set out from Huaua on a short journey to -a small hamlet called Tapuna. Everywhere I went the people were -complaining of the great scarcity of food; still they managed to -furnish me with plenty, treating me very hospitably. About the 20th I -returned to Huaua and preached to the people. On the 29th and 30th I -attended to my correspondence. -</p> -<p>January 1, 1851, I started for Tarepu, finding the roads quite muddy. -It rained heavily, so that all the streams were so swollen as to make -my journey very hard and tiresome. The majority of the people were -rather surly and indifferent, so much so as not to invite me in out of -the storm, so I had to pass along to where I found more hospitality. -The trip altogether was a hard and ungrateful one. I had to swim some -of the watercourses, and barely escaped being carried into the sea. -I got everything I had with me, even to my watch, thoroughly soaked. -Then I sought a place sheltered from the view of the passers-by, and -there dried my clothes. As I was alone almost all the time on this trip -I felt it to be long and tedious, without any profitable results, as -far as I could see. Yet I remembered that my experience was that of a -fisherman; and as my calling was to fish for men I did not complain, -but continued my journey to Hitia. There I called on one Mr. Baff, a -Protestant minister. I left a copy of the Voice of Warning for him to -read. When he returned it he sent a note thanking me for the privilege -of perusing it, but he did not express an opinion of the work. I never -had the pleasure of meeting the gentleman again. -</p> -<p>Having been informed that Elders Pratt and Dunn had an opportunity of -going to Tubuoi, I hastened back to Huaua, to find that they had not -yet engaged their passage. After resting two or three days, Brother -Pratt sent me down to Papeete to secure passage for them on Captain -Johnson's schooner, which was expected to sail in a few days. I met -Mr. Johnson, with whom I made a contract, and returned next day. Then, -on January 13th, all hands went down to Papeete. We found that Brother -John Layton had come from California, and brought letters for us from -the Elders who had been sent to the Sandwich Islands. -</p> -<p>Mail matters considered and answers written, the program was changed so -that Elder Dunn did not go to Tubuoi, and as Brother Pratt had to wait -a few days before he could start, part of the native family that had -accompanied us remained to see him off, while the others returned with -Brother Dunn and I to lonely Huaua. In the meantime we learned that -Priest John Hawkins was expected down from Anaa in a few days, when -Brother Dunn was to return with him to Anaa. -</p> -<p>When we were at Huaua without Brother Pratt, the place seemed doubly -lonesome. On January 30th, I went to Papeete and learned that Brother -Hawkins had arrived with some native brethren from Metia, and that all -had started in their canoes for Huaua, to which place I repaired the -next day. All were well. The native brethren went back to Papeete, and -Brother Hawkins and wife stayed at Huaua a day or two; then he also -went down, returning to us in eight or ten days, accompanied by Elder -Joseph Busby, from Tubuoi. The latter said that he had started for -home, if it was agreeable to the brethren. He told us that it would -be two months before the brethren would come with their new schooner, -which they were building. -</p> -<p>March 2nd, all hands went to Taunua, to a sacrament meeting. We met in -a house close down by the beach, where we saw the vessel that Brother -Busby sailed on for home. There were sixty-seven brethren and sisters -at the meeting, and we had a very good-spirited time. We returned -to Huaua; and it was on March 12th, when, in company with our old, -faithful friend and brother, Hamatua, and family, I set sail in a -whaleboat for Papara. We had a fine breeze till we came to a hamlet -called Otura, where we stayed one night and were well cared for by our -host, a brother in the Church. On the 13th we continued our voyage by -sea, having to row most of the time, for there was no wind. We reached -our destination, Papara, on the 14th, and stopped at the house of -Purua, a brother of Hamatua, who had died, and his widow had sent for -Hamatua to come and move her and her family to his home. We found our -friends here very kind, and well pleased to meet us. -</p> -<p>While at Papara, many people came in to see us. These manifested a -desire to know who I was, and my business there, but showed great -reluctance in shaking hands with me. I learned that the cause of this -diffidence was that they were afraid of the Protestant ministers. For -a while they kept very shy of me. I called on their minister, Mr. -Chisholm, and presented him with a Voice of Warning, which I asked him -to read; but when I held it out to him he said no, he would not read -it or anything the Mormons had; "but," said he, "I want to exhort you, -and show you that you are deluded." I asked what he knew about our -Church to cause him to be so excited. He said he had had a letter from -Simeon A. Dunn, one of our Elders, and that public opinion was enough -to satisfy him that we were false teachers and deceivers of the people. -At that he called one Mr. Davis from a side room. The latter was -totally blind, and had spent most of his life on the islands. Both of -them reviled at me, and rehearsed many of the old slanders about Joseph -Smith and the Mormons. I left them in disgust, returning to my friends, -where I found many people congregated. These were quite sociable. -</p> -<p>Soon a messenger came from the minister and asked what kind of baptism -we believed in. When I said that we believed in immersion, that seemed -to please the people very much, as I turned to the third chapter of -Matthew and showed them that Christ was baptized in that manner. From -that time the house was thronged with people anxiously inquiring for -the doctrines we taught. -</p> -<p>On March 16th I was sent for by a sick man, who wanted to be anointed. -When I told him about the order of the Church, and that he should -repent and be baptized for the remission of his sins, and thus become -entitled to the blessings of the Gospel, he said that it was of no use -to him for he was a great sinner and could not repent in one day. Then -he said, "I shall have to remain sick." He had his own way to look at -things, and as we were unable to convince him otherwise, we returned to -our stopping place. -</p> -<p>Shortly after this I was called to see a young woman who had been under -medical treatment by the Protestant ministers for four months. Her -name was Maui. She had been reduced to a mere skeleton, and was unable -to stand alone. When I came, she said she had heard of the doctrine -that I had preached to the people, and knew it was true, "for," said -she, "it is all in the Bible." She was the foremost scholar of the -district, and was highly respected by the ministers as well as by the -whole people. When it became known that I had been called to see her, -it aroused an excitement, and many people came together, insomuch that -the house could not hold them all. As I talked with her on the first -principles of the Gospel, she would say, "Yes, that is so, for it is in -the Bible;" and she said, "I am willing to be baptized now, for I know -that what you tell me is the truth." I asked the consent of her parents -and of her young husband, who readily acceded to her desire. Then I -told them that if they would take her to a suitable place by the creek, -I would meet them there and attend to the baptizing. Accordingly, they -carried her to the creek, some ten or twelve rods away, where I met -them, prepared for the work. There were probably one hundred people -assembled. After singing and prayer, I went into the water and the -friends of the young woman helped her to me, I having to aid in holding -her on her feet while I said the baptismal ceremony. When she came up -out of the water she thanked God, saying, "I am healed of the Lord," -and walked out of the water and home without assistance, although her -friends offered aid. This excited the people so much that some of the -young woman's particular friends prepared to come into the water of -baptism, but the older ones prevailed on them to wait a while, saying -maybe they would all go together. -</p> -<p>When I had changed my clothing and had gone to where the new convert -was, I found her sitting on the bed and praising God, bearing her -testimony that she was healed of the Lord, and that we had the true -Gospel. The baptism of this young woman was the first that I had -administered, she being my first convert. The house where we had -assembled was crowded to overflowing, and when I had confirmed her I -returned to my stopping place, the people following me. There must have -been at least three hundred of them. Several brought bedding and camped -under the trees around the house, while others were preparing a feast -for the occasion, in which they roasted eleven big hogs, and gathered -fish, fruit and vegetables for the roast. -</p> -<p>This was too much for the Protestant ministers, for, as I was sitting -at a table expounding the scriptures to the people, in came a lusty -Frenchman in citizen's clothes. He took a seat among the people for a -short time, then slipped away and donned his police uniform, with belt, -sword and pistol; then, with a comrade similarly attired, he reappeared -at the door and asked me if I had a permit from the governor. I told -him I had one at home, but not with me. At that he, in a rather rough -tone of voice, bade me follow them. Without hesitation I did so, and -about a hundred of the people came after us to the mission station, -where I was ushered into the presence of Messrs. Chisholm, Howe -and Davis. All of them were what were called English or Protestant -missionaries. Mr. Howe acted as chief spokesman or prosecutor, while -Mr. Chisholm filled the role of justice, Mr. Davis appearing to be his -assistant. Thus arrayed, they told me that I had been arrested and -brought before them because I had raised a very unusual excitement -among the people, and I could not produce a permit from the government -as a resident on the island. They said I was capable of making much -disturbance among the people, and the decision they had come to was -that if I would not agree to leave the place by 8 a.m. next day I would -be locked up in a dungeon until I did agree to leave. -</p> -<p>Of course I consented to depart at the appointed time, thinking I -could get my permit and return in a few days. Then they told me I -was at liberty, but they did not release me until they had scored -me unmercifully with their tongues for belonging to such a set of -impostors as "Old Joe Smith and the Mormons" were. Said Mr. Chisholm, -"You are a fine young man, capable of doing much good if you had not -been deceived by that impostor, Old Joe Smith." They told me to cease -my preaching and deceiving the people, and that I had better go home. -At that I pocketed their insults and left them. Many of the people -followed me to my stopping place, some of them shouting triumphantly -for the young Mormon missionary, and calling shame on the English -ministers. -</p> -<p>A house full of people had assembled, and we sat up till a late hour -that night talking on the principles of the Gospel. Early next morning -our boat was filled with the family and provisions, and we sailed at 8 -o'clock. I put on a fisherman's suit and took the helm, facing outward -from the shore. I did not have any particular object in view at the -time in doing this, yet it seemed to serve a purpose, for we had sailed -but a few miles when we saw two mounted gen d' armes come out of the -woods to the sandy beach, where they stopped and watched our boat till -they seemed satisfied there was no missionary on board, and passed on. -Then it occurred to us that if I had not been in the unintentional -disguise they would have stopped our boat and arrested me, for they -were well armed, and could have reached us easily with their firearms. -As we afterwards learned, they passed on to where we had come from -and made a thorough search for me, going through houses, turning up -the beds, and scouring the coffee groves and every place the supposed -Mormon missionary could have hidden. Then they and the Protestant -missionaries called a meeting of the people and thoroughly warned them -against the Mormons, and especially against young Iatobo (James), as -they called me. At this mass meeting Mr. Baff, one of the oldest of the -English missionaries, appeared with the others I have mentioned. -</p> -<p>There was another incident that seemed to be very providential, though -disagreeable at the time. The wind died away to a perfect calm, and -when we came to an opening in the outlying coral reef, we thought that -by going out through the opening we might catch a breeze, and could -hoist the sail and make better headway; so we steered for the open -sea. There we found that we had to row all day before we could get -back within the reef. Thus we were carried so far from the land that -passers-by could not discern who we were, and we were kept from the gen -d' armes till sundown. Then we landed away from the thoroughfare, in -heavy timber. In that way we escaped our enemies, for next morning we -were off and out in the open sea soon after sunrise. We rowed all day -and till 11 o'clock p.m., then landed in an obscure place, and were up -and off again by sunrise, putting out to sea and keeping there till we -reached the western passage to the harbor of Papeete. There we went -ashore near a large American tile establishment's wholesale and retail -department. Just in front of this lay a large American warship. The -water was very deep, so that the vessel was moored to the shore, the -gangway resting upon the street, where a great many people had gathered. -</p> -<p>As soon as we landed I stepped into the retail department referred to, -on some little errand. In a couple of minutes or so I was confronted by -the Rev. Mr. Howe, who has been mentioned before. He was a fine-looking -English gentleman of thirty-five or forty years of age. He came up and -shook hands with me, saying, "Mr. Brown, are you aware that the gen -d' armes are in search of you? You must have been in hiding somewhere. -They have searched Papara for you, and now are searching this town, and -there is great excitement over your actions. You had better be cautious -what you are about." I could not understand at first what he meant, so -I asked him what I had done to create such a great excitement as to -have the police hunting for me. I said I had not been in hiding at all, -had not thought of such a thing. He replied, "Why, sir, you have gone -and plunged a young lady head and ears into the cold water, and we have -had her under medical treatment for four months, and expected her to -die. Now you have endangered her life by plunging her into cold water. -She is one of the most talented and smartest women of this island. We -have taken great pains to educate her, and she is widely known and -respected by everyone who knows her." -</p> -<p>"Well," said I, "what harm have I done? She was healed of her sickness, -as she and her mother testified to me before I left, and every person -who was present can bear witness of the same." -</p> -<p>"Ah, well," said he, "you have such a fierce countenance and expressive -voice as to excite a person under the most excruciating pain until -they would not realize they had any suffering at all. She may relapse -and die, then you will have grave responsibilities to meet for your -unwarranted act." He continued talking, turning to intimidation and -abusive language until he said it was a great pity that one of my -natural endowments lacked in educational attainments, for if I had -been taught in Greek or Latin I would have understood that baptism was -<em>baptiso</em> in Latin, and meant merely the application of water, and not -to plunge people head and ears in the shameful and ridiculous manner -that he said I had done. -</p> -<p>By this time we were talking so very loud as to attract the attention -of all around. Finally Mr. Howe said, "Do you teach the people that -baptism is essential to the salvation of man or the soul?" I told him -I did. "Then," said he, "you teach a lie, and I will follow you up and -tell the people that you are a liar and teach false doctrine." As my -calling as a missionary would not admit of a violent retaliation, I -merely said to him that in my country that would be very ungentlemanly -language for one minister to use towards another, but I supposed it was -some of the Greek and Latin that he had been learned in. Then I turned -away from him. -</p> -<p>My action brought a tremendous cheer from the Americans on board the -warship, and from all who understood the conversation. The people -assembled hurrahed for the Mormon boy. At that my antagonist turned -very red in the face. Some of the natives ran up to him, pointing their -fingers at him, and shouting, "Look how red his nose is! The Mormon boy -has whipped him!" They rushed around me to shake hands, and seemed as -if they would carry me on their shoulders. It should be understood that -we talked partly in English and partly in Tahitian, so that all could -understand in a general way what we said, for we had grown very earnest -if not heated in our discussion. -</p> -<p>Soon after this I went up through the town and there learned from -several people that there had been much excitement over my having -baptized the sick young lady, and that the police had searched the -place over for me. I realized then that if it had not been for the -calm weather we had had at sea we would have got into town just at -the height of the excitement, and I would have been locked in prison. -So, thanks for the calm, although when we were in it we wished for -wind that we might make better headway; but that delay gave time for -reflection, and for the news of the young lady's convalescence to reach -Papeete, so that I could pass on my way without further insult. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXV"></a>CHAPTER XXV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">SEVERAL BAPTISMS—VISIT PAPARA AGAIN—COLDNESS OF THE PEOPLE—BITTER -EFFORTS OF THE PROTESTANT MINISTERS—NATIVES VISIT ME IN -SECRET—ANTI-MORMON MASS MEETING—FOOLISH AND VICIOUS SCHEME TO -ENSNARE THE WRITER—IT IS EASILY DEFEATED—RETURN TO PAPEETE—MORE -BAPTISMS—DEPARTURE OF ELDER DUNN—I AM LEFT ALONE—BRETHREN COME -FROM TUBUOI—ELDERS APPOINTED TO LABOR IN DIFFERENT ISLANDS—THE -WRITER ASSIGNED TO THE TUAMOTU GROUP—LEAVE ON THE ELDERS' SCHOONER, -THE RAVAI OR FISHER—MEET WITH CONTRARY WINDS—DRIVEN TO VARIOUS -ISLANDS—ENCOUNTER A VIOLENT STORM—IN GREAT PERIL—VESSEL BEYOND -CONTROL—STORM CALMS DOWN—REACH TUBUOI—FIRST PREACHING OF THE GOSPEL -THERE, IN 1844. -</p> -<p>WE reached our home at Huaua on the 20th of March, and found all well. -On the 23rd I baptized Tereino and Maioa, and on the 24th Brother Dunn -baptized two other persons besides Brother Hamatua and two of his -children. Then I sailed for Papara, after providing myself with the -permit that I lacked on our previous visit. We stopped at Taunua the -first night, the 25th, having had to row all the way. -</p> -<p>On the 26th we reached Papara, where the people acted very coolly -towards us. There was one friend, however, who dared invite us in and -provide us with food and lodging. On inquiry, we learned that the young -lady who had been ill and was healed at her baptism was sound and well, -and had been so from the time she was baptized. We also learned that -Messrs. Howe, Chisholm, Baff and Davis had called the people together -after the baptism, inquired of them where I was, had the town searched -for me, and had sought diligently to learn if I had spoken against them -or against the French government; but they failed to learn anything of -this kind on which to base an accusation against me and had to content -themselves by telling the people all the foul slanders they had heard -against the Mormons and Joseph Smith, and by warning the people against -us, saying that if they took us in or bade us Godspeed they would -not be permitted to partake of the sacrament in their church, and if -they went to hear us preach they would be excommunicated. They sent a -delegation to the young lady whom I had baptized, to see if she had -been healed, and through being intimidated she said no. Her relatives -had quarreled over the matter, some being in favor of her saying that -she was not, while others said that she was healed. The report that the -delegation made to their masters, however, was that she said she had -not been healed; when I went to see her, she ran out to meet me, and -told me that she had not been sick one day since she had been baptized. -</p> -<p>By such means as those I have named, the ministers sought to turn the -people against us, and strongly forbade them to show us any favors -whatever; and when the natives could come secretly and talk with us -they would explain, "Now, if we come openly and investigate your -doctrine and are not satisfied with it, then we will be turned out -of society. For that reason we dare not receive you or come and talk -openly with you. Our hearts are good towards you, but we are watched by -the police, so that we dare not be friendly with you where we can be -seen." -</p> -<p>As soon as the ministers learned that we had returned, they called -another meeting, at which they seemed to take delight in abusing and -vilifying the Mormons in general and me in particular. When the meeting -was over, they called two pretty young women, and privately told them -to dress themselves as nicely as they could and perfume themselves and -make themselves as attractive as possible, then to take their Bibles -and hymn books and get into conversation with the Mormon missionary, -Iatobo (James). They were to be very sociable and friendly to me. -They had been told also that they would learn that the Mormons were -licentious deceivers, and that my actions would show that I was a -licentious rascal and would lead them astray. Orders were also given -them that when they had proved this they were to return and report to -the ministers. I came into possession of this information regarding the -scheme through the spirit of discernment, and by the confession of the -parties themselves. -</p> -<p>The young ladies came as instructed, and the moment they entered the -door and I inhaled the perfumes I had the discernment of their mission -and the instructions they were under from their ministers. Nevertheless -they were welcomed in and took seats just in front of and close to the -writer, on a mat. In the blandest and most pleasant manner they began -to make scripture inquiries, accepting every answer as final, and -assenting to all I had to say. They became more and more sociable and -bold, until at length one of them raised on her knees, and placing her -open Bible upon the writer's knee, at the same time looked him squarely -in the face with her most pleasant smile. He at once moved his chair -back, and said to them, "You have not come here with the object that -you profess to come with, but your mission is a deceptive one, and you -have been sent here by your ministers to try to deceive me, thinking to -lead me into lewd and wicked practices that I am a stranger to. Now, -if you wish anything of that kind you must return to your masters who -sent you, and tell them that if they wish you to be accommodated in -that way, they will have to do it themselves, for Mormon Elders are not -guilty of such practices, though they have proofs that the ministers -are. And I exhort you to be ashamed and to repent of your sins, and be -baptized for their remission, and you will know that what I have told -you is true." -</p> -<p>At this rebuke, they both confessed openly that every word I had said -was true, and that they had been sent for no other purpose than the one -I have stated. As they had come straight from the minister's house, -they wondered how the writer could tell them so directly what their -ministers had ordered them to do, and how he came to read their mission -so accurately. They said, "<em>No te varua tera</em>" (that is of the Spirit); -for no one else could have told him so correctly. At that they took -their leave, and I heard no more of them or their mission. -</p> -<p>The ministers called another meeting on March 29th. I attended that, -and after service asked permission to speak a few moments. This being -granted by Mr. Davis, I merely gave notice that I was a minister of -the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, there on a mission -to teach the true Gospel, and if any wished to hear me I was at their -service, if they would permit. There was no response, so a hymn was -sung, and the people dispersed. At night a few came to hear me, but -seemed to be under such restraint that there was no pleasure in talking -to them. -</p> -<p>We spent several days at the place without any success, owing to the -great prejudice of the people, and the unwarranted hatred of their -ministers. Then we left for Papeete, starting on April 2nd, and -arriving at our destination at daylight on the 3rd. Having had to row -all the way, we were very tired, so stopped to get some needed rest. -In the evening we baptized one person, Maua. On the 6th we attended -meeting with about twenty of the Tuamotu Saints, then the boat and the -others of the party went home while I tarried till the next day, going -home by land to Hapape, where I found a boat bound direct for Huaua, so -I took passage on it, and was wafted there speedily. -</p> -<p>It was on April 19th that I started for Otumaro. On the 21st we got to -that place, where I stayed while the others of the party made a visit -to Papara. On their return I joined them and proceeded to Papeete, -where I left the boat again and walked the remainder of the journey. -The next day the rest of the party came up by sea; and on the 29th we -baptized three more persons. -</p> -<p>While at Otumaro, some Matia brethren came from Hitia after a -missionary or two. Matia is a small island about ninety miles north -of Tahiti. Brother Dunn, being very tired of Huaua, concluded that -he would go with them, they taking his trunk and bedding on their -shoulders and marching off, apparently in triumph. They insisted that -I should go with them as well, but having been left in charge of the -mission on Tahiti, I did not feel at liberty to leave, as Brother Pratt -had told me to remain there until the new schooner should arrive. -Therefore I turned alone to my missionary labors. On the 29th I -baptized Tuane; and at Huaua on May 4th I baptized Tafatua and Tafai, -who had been baptized by Brother Pratt; they confessed that they had -been led astray, but desired to return to the true fold. The same day I -administered the sacrament to twenty-one souls. -</p> -<p>Just at dark on May 12th, 1851, we heard a gun fired at sea. We -hastened to the beach, and, sure enough, it was our long-looked-for -brethren on their new schooner, which was named the Ravai (Fisher.) -Brother John Hawkins having joined us, he and Hamatua went off in a -canoe to get the news. They found all well. Next day we joined them in -the harbor of Papeete, and remained with them on board the schooner and -wrote letters. -</p> -<p>On the 15th Brothers Pratt, John Layton, Hawkins and the wives of the -last two, as well as some of the native brethren, sailed in a whaleboat -for Huaua, while we stopped at Hapape and took a nap, and at 2 o'clock -a.m. started back, reaching our destination at daylight on the 16th. -We rested on the 17th, and on the 18th, in council, Elders Thomas -Whitaker, Julian Moses and two native brethren were appointed to -labor as missionaries on Tahiti; Elders John Hawkins, Alviras Hanks, -Simeon A. Dunn and James S. Brown were appointed to labor among the -inhabitants of the Tuamotu group of islands. -</p> -<p>On May 19th, Brothers Pratt, Layton and Hawkins set out for Papeete, -and at 3 p.m. Brothers T. Whitaker and Pohe, with their families, -started for Pueu in a boat belonging to some of their relatives. On -the 21st, the schooner—the new one built at Tubuoi, and commanded by -Benjamin F. Grouard—called with the brethren who went down the day -before on board. She was bound for Anaa, two hundred and ten miles -east, or nearly so. When they got opposite Huaua, Captain Grouard came -ashore and said they desired me to accompany them, as they intended to -call by Tubuoi before returning to Tahiti. -</p> -<p>In fifteen or twenty minutes I was ready, and we soon boarded the -little vessel. She was thirty-five or forty tons burden, had poor -accommodations on board, and was insufficiently supplied with -provisions. We started, but the wind being contrary, we soon had to -change our course, so that on the 24th we sighted Riroa, and on the -25th we touched at Uratua and got some cocoanuts. In consequence of -the strong current there, we could not make much headway, but in -trying to beat around it we sighted Anutua. On the next tack we came -to Aunua, where we went ashore and found a small branch of the Church. -The Saints were very kind to us, showing every favor they could, and -pressing us to allow one of our number to remain with them. But it was -not considered proper to grant the request, so we held two meetings and -preached to them, giving them all the cheer and comfort that we could, -and then left. They seemed to appreciate our visit and counsel as only -Latter-day Saints can. -</p> -<p>Again we sailed for Anaa, but the strong wind and waves prevailed -against us, so that we were driven so far from our course that we -sighted Faraua on May 31st, and on June 1st we encountered a very -heavy storm, commencing at 5:30 and continuing till 11 p.m. when it -seemed to abate a little. At 7 p.m. all sails had been taken in save -the foresail, which was close-reefed, and as the vessel was beyond our -control, our best seamen being willing to admit that they could do -nothing for us, the helm was lashed down, and all hands went below. -The hatch was securely fastened down, leaving only two of our best and -bravest men lashed on deck with slack rope. Everyone seemed to realize -our peril, and that we must rely alone on the Almighty to save us from -destruction. There was land all around, and the wind and currents -were so strong that it was impossible, with the means at our command, -to direct the course of our little Fisher. I must leave the friendly -reader to draw his own conclusions as to the condition we were in, for -I have not the ability to describe it. Suffice it to say that through -the mercies of the Lord we were spared to find ourselves perfectly -landlocked by three islands, namely, Anutua, Apatai and Aunua. Again -getting control of the vessel, we put into the harbor at Apatai, that -being considered the safest place. There we found some Church members, -and were treated very kindly. We remained there until the 6th, holding -meetings and preaching to the people. -</p> -<p>Apatai is one of the islands of poison fish, and we felt the effects of -these slightly before we left. We had a fair wind for Anaa on the 6th, -when we started, but it soon died away and we were left to drift with -a very strong current. On the 7th we found ourselves drifted down by -the side of Anutua. Having some natives of that island on board they -were sent ashore. Jonathan Crosby went with them, and returned with the -boat. From thence we had a pleasant voyage to Anutua. There we went -ashore and preached to the people. Brothers Grouard's and Hawkins' -wives also landed. -</p> -<p>We left them on the 9th. and sailed for Tubuoi. Having a fair and -strong wind, we were wafted to Matia, where we left some passengers -belonging to that island. We also took in a small supply of provisions, -as our store was very scanty. Then we continued towards Tubuoi, having -a favorable wind till we got within eighty miles of our destination. -Then a strong headwind forced us to change our course, so that we put -into a small island called Loivivi. This was on the 17th. The island -does not exceed four miles in length and two in width; there were three -hundred and eighty-three people living on it. They had the wildest and -fiercest look of any that we had met on our cruise, yet they behaved -very well to us. On the 18th we sailed again for Tubuoi, and on the -20th we cast anchor at that island, which lies between the twenty-third -and twenty-fourth parallels, south latitude. It is only twelve or -fifteen miles in length, and from a distance resembles the tops of -mountains in a plain. Its inhabitants numbered four hundred, all told. -</p> -<p>It was on this island that the Gospel was first preached in this -dispensation, in the islands of the Pacific Ocean. This preaching was -by Elder Addison Pratt, July 12, 1844. He was accompanied by Elders -Noah Rogers and B. F. Grouard, they having been sent by the Prophet -Joseph Smith, from Nauvoo, Hancock County, Illinois, U.S.A., in the -year 1843. Knowlton Hanks was one of the missionaries who left Nauvoo, -but he died on the voyage from Boston to Tubuoi, after the vessel had -rounded Cape Horn. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXVI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">HEARTY WELCOME IN TUBUOI—START FOR TUAMOTU—REACH PAPEETE, -TAHITI—VISIT TO HUAUA—LEAVE TAHITI—WRITER GETS RELIEF FROM -SEASICKNESS—BROILED FISH AND COCOANUTS—IN A SCHOOL OF WHALES—THROWN -INTO A CORAL REEF—TOTAL WRECK IMMINENT—THREE PERSONS GET ASHORE—BOAT -GOES OUT TO SEA—WRECK OF ELDER DUNN'S PARTY—THREE DAYS IN THE SEA, -CLINGING TO A CAPSIZED BOAT—CLOTHING TORN OFF BY SHARKS—SKIN TAKEN -OFF BY THE SEA AND SUN—REACH THE ISLAND OF ANAA—RECOGNIZED BY A -MAN WHO HAD SEEM ME IN A DREAM—PREACHING AND BAPTIZING—MANY OF -THE NATIVES CHURCH MEMBERS—MAKE A RUDE MAP OF THE CALIFORNIA GOLD -FIELDS—TELL OF HAVING BEEN IN THE MORMON BATTALION—CATHOLIC PRIESTS -ELICIT THIS INFORMATION AS PAST OF A SCHEME TO HAVE ME EXPELLED FROM -THE ISLAND. -</p> -<p>WHEN we landed on Tubuoi on May 20th, we found the people feeling well. -They were greatly pleased to see us, and we rejoiced to meet with and -preach to them. We traveled from village to village preaching, and -visited the people from house to house, being received everywhere in -the most friendly manner. -</p> -<p>On July 1st and 2nd we attended to correspondence, and on the 3rd -everything was in readiness and we sailed with a cargo of cattle for -Tahiti. Elder A. Hanks and the writer were bound for the Tuamotu group -of islands. On the 6th, after a pleasant voyage, with the exception of -seasickness, we landed at Papeete, Tahiti, all well. -</p> -<p>Our captain said that he would only remain in harbor a day or two, -then would sail for Anaa. As I desired to visit the brethren at Huaua, -fifteen miles up the coast, I started at 4 p.m., afoot and alone, and -reached my destination the same evening. I was surprised when the whole -family, men, women and children, leaped from their beds and embraced -me, and wept for joy. Some refreshments were provided, and we then -turned in for the remainder of the night. -</p> -<p>I stayed there until the 8th, and met with Elders Julian Moses and T. -Whitaker, who accompanied me to Papeete, where we arrived at 1 o'clock -p.m., and found the vessel being prepared to sail. Brother Hanks was -detained in getting his permit until it was too late to get out of the -passage till the 9th, then the wind came straight into the passage, so -that we had to drop anchor till late in the afternoon. We managed to -get clear that night, but the wind being contrary we did not lose sight -of land till the 10th; then we had a perfect calm for two days. Late in -the evening of the 12th we got a light breeze. This day was the first -time in my life that I could say that I was well at sea. Never before -that evening had I gone below and enjoyed a meal of victuals; but from -that time on I could take my rations with the rest except in a storm. -</p> -<p>On July 13th we sighted and passed Metia, and sighted Tikahau; the -14th Matea was in view, and we passed along close to the weather end -of Riroa; the 18th we were near Uratua. There two boats were let down, -one to pull up through the lagoon of the island, twenty miles long, to -where Brother Hawkins lived, and the other to fish. About 11 p.m. we -neared the village when the natives came and conducted us to the place. -They spread some broiled fish and cocoanuts before us; and of course we -were thankful to get that, for there was no other food on the island. -This was all that some of the inhabitants ever had to eat on their own -island, save an occasional pig or a chicken. After the refreshments we -turned in for the night. -</p> -<p>Next morning we were feasted as best the people could do. We preached -to them, then sailed away; for our schooner was waiting for us. We -next headed for Riroa, as we could not get a wind for Anaa, which we -had been trying to reach from the time we left Tahiti. On the 21st we -passed through a school of whales to the harbor. Again we encountered -a strong current coming out of the passage, and a headwind. Then, in -trying to beat up into the harbor, our vessel failed to stay, and we -were driven into the coral rock, which stood up in the water like -tree-tops. Crash we went, and the vessel began to quiver and jar. All -hands and the cook had an awful scare, and for a few moments it looked -as though our vessel would be a total wreck, and we be all spilled into -the raging billows, among crags and rocks. But thanks to the Lord, this -was averted. Three of us succeeded in gaining the shore in safety, and -the vessel put to sea for the night, coming in on the 22nd to anchor. -</p> -<p>On shore we were feasted on broiled fish, cocoanuts and roast pig. The -people seemed overjoyed at our visit. We called a meeting and preached -to them, encouraging them in their religious duties. -</p> -<p>It was while we were on this island that we heard from Brothers Dunn -and Crosby, who were well. We also heard from Manahuni and party, who -left Tahiti at the same time that we departed on our first cruise. They -sailed for Anaa, in a small, open boat called the <em>Anaura</em>, the same that -Brother Grouard made many trips in from island to island, and in which -he had many narrow escapes. But Manahuni and his party of six brethren -and sisters had a much severer experience than any former party. Their -boat capsized in a heavy storm, the same that we had been caught in on -our former cruise. They lost everything save their lives, and these -were preserved only by clinging to the keel of the boat for three days -and three nights. Finally the boat righted itself, and they drifted to -the island of Tikahau, but not till the last rag of clothing had been -torn from their bodies by sharks, and much of the skin—all of the -cuticle—had sloughed off through their being in the salt water and -hot sun so long. But their lives were spared to them, and they were -nourished by the kind people of Tikahau, until they were able to reach -the island of their destination, Anaa. -</p> -<p>A fair wind for Anaa came on July 26th, so we left for that place. -At dawn on the 28th we sighted the island, and at 10 o'clock a.m. we -landed at Tuuhora. As we neared the shore I was seated in the stern of -the boat, when a man came bounding through the water and passed all our -party till he came to me. Then he reached out his hand, which had in it -five pearls wrapped in a little rag, and said, "Here! I have seen you -before. You have come to be our president, for you have been shown to -me in a dream. Welcome, welcome to our land!" Just then he turned his -back for the writer to get on, and in this way took me to the shore, -where the people soon prepared a feast of welcome, as is their custom -when their friends come to see them. No feast, no welcome. -</p> -<p>The feasting over, with Brothers Hanks and Hawkins I visited the -branches, the three of us traveling together, preaching and baptizing -the people, who came forward in large numbers to receive the ordinance. -August 5, 1851, Brother Hanks left for Taroa, and Brother Hawkins -for Arutua. I had been appointed to preside on Anaa, and commenced -my labors in that duty. On the 6th I was instructed, by Elder B. F. -Grouard, to travel and preach, to reorganize the branches wherever -it was necessary, and to organize and teach schools as I might find -it prudent; in fact, to do all things pertaining to my calling as a -missionary. Thus I started out alone. -</p> -<p>One of the first things I found after I began my labors was that there -were four Catholic priests on the island, building four stone churches; -that they had about thirty natives employed on them, and that no others -would attend their religious services; it was claimed that there were -about nine hundred persons belonging to the Mormon Church, most of them -being members in good standing. There were no natives there belonging -to the Catholic church. -</p> -<p>On one occasion soon after my arrival, I was being questioned, in a -conversation, about California and the gold fields, and also about my -birthplace and the city of my residence. I took a sheet of paper and -sketched a rough outline of the gold fields. One of the natives who -apparently had been greatly interested in the narrative, asked for the -sketch. It being given to him, he went off and soon returned with a -large sheet of drawing paper, on which he requested me to draw a map, -on a larger scale, showing my birthplace, where Salt Lake City was -from there, and the location of the gold fields. Then the question was -asked, how I came to be in California at so early a date. I told them -I went there in the Mormon Battalion, in the service of the United -States, during the war with Mexico. Little did I think I was mapping -out the outlines of a foundation for a wicked and false charge to be -preferred against me by the Catholic priest. Neither did I have the -remotest idea that my rude sketch would be used in crediting me with -being a civil engineer of no mean ability, nor that my having been in -the army of the United States would entitle me to the dignity of a -highly educated military graduate from some United States army school; -nor was I aware that my walk and carriage were that of an officer in -the military establishment of my government. Yet the sequel will show -that all this was the case. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXVII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">INVITED TO ORGANIZE SCHOOLS—CATHOLIC PRIESTS DISPLEASED AT -MORMON SUCCESS—GOOD ATTENDANCE AT THE SCHOOLS—THREATS BY THE -PRIESTS—DISCOMFITURE OF THE LATTER—FEAST AND ADDRESS OF WELCOME BY -THE NATIVES TO THE WRITER—PREACHING AND BAPTISMS—CATHOLIC PRIESTS -SEIZE A SCHOOLHOUSE BELONGING TO THE SAINTS—DISTURB A SAINTS' -MEETING—MORE BAPTISMS—FURTHER ANNOYANCE BY CATHOLICS—PEOPLE DECIDE -AGAINST THEM—TOWN OFFICIALS APPEALED TO—THEY UPHOLD THE DECISION IN -FAVOR OF THE MORMONS—PRIESTS WRITE TO GOVERNOR BONARD, MAKING FALSE -CHARGES AGAINST ME—A PECULIAR DREAM. -</p> -<p>ON August 7th I was solicited by the chief men of Putuhara to assist -them in organizing a school. Indeed, the whole people were anxious to -have me aid them in this, therefore I took hold as requested. They had -no school at that time, and were looking for a white Elder to start -one, as they themselves had but a vague idea of the proper order or -rules to govern such an organization. The writer did not have the -remotest idea that he would meet with the antagonism of the Catholic -priests in this matter, as there was a unanimous desire for him among -the people, who had rejected the offer of the priest stationed at that -place. However, I soon heard that the priest was displeased because the -people had rejected him and supported us by sending their children to -our school, and by feasting me and showing me marked preference in many -ways. Our house was crowded to its full capacity every evening, while -the priest sat alone in his studio. -</p> -<p>On August 12th we had thirty-six students; by the 14th the school had -increased to sixty-five. The priest came to the door, looked in, then -turned short on his heel, and went away without speaking, yet showing -his displeasure in his manner. Soon he got a house to run opposition -in school work, but he failed to get pupils. Then he became very cross -and snarly at every one he came in contact with; at least, so said the -people. -</p> -<p>In company with some of my friends, I went to Otapipi on August 15th. -We met a man with a letter from the head Catholic priest, for me. It -was in the Tahitian language, and began as follows: "Iarran Iatobo, i -te Atua" (James, how do you do in the Lord?) and continued, translated -into English: "This is what I have to say to you: Do not trouble our -schools, and we will not trouble yours. If you do so again, I will send -for the governor's aide de camp, and we will have you tried before -him. You must not trouble us any more." It closed with "Tidar Paran -Iaraan ae, Tavara" (That is all the talk. Good bye to you.) As we had -not knowingly interfered with their schools we did not make any reply, -but continued our journey to Otapipi, and held a prayer meeting at -that place at 3 o'clock p.m. While there I saw a priest and his two -attendants coming across the lake. They landed, and came straight to -the house where we had put up. The priest walked in without hesitation, -and politely offered to shake hands. We met him as politely, and took -his hand. Then he asked if we had received a letter from the priest -below. We informed him that we had. "Well," said he, "we don't want -you to interfere with our schools, and we will not with yours." At -the same time he threatened me with the governor's authority, if we -did not "walk straight." After some discourse, I asked him what kind -of a God he worshiped. He said a spirit without body or parts; but he -failed to find any Scripture to support his belief, and the people -who had gathered around laughed at him, making him feel very much out -of temper. On August 16th he called a few children together and spoke -briefly to them in Latin or some language that I did not understand. -Then he departed for another village. -</p> -<p>Soon after this, the people prepared a feast in honor of our visit. -The food consisted of roasted fish and fowl. Many little presents were -also brought, such as could be made from the fiber of the cocoanut -husk, mats, shells, etc. When all was laid before us, the spokesman -said, in substance, in the Tahitian language: "James, as a token of -our great love and respect for you, the servant of God, we, the people -of Otapipi, Anaa, have collected of all the varieties of food that our -land affords, and a few articles of use. Here is a pig, there is a -fish, and fowl, and here are cocoanuts. This is meat and drink for us, -and all that is produced in our land. We wish you to accept it from all -of us as your true friends, and we wish you to eat and be full. Be our -president and teacher in the Gospel, and a teacher of our children; for -we are glad to have you come to our land as a father and guide. Our -hearts are full of gladness that God has sent you to our land, that we -may be taught to love the true and living God, for we have always been -in the dark, and did not know there was a true and living God to love -and worship. Now we have no more to say. Amen." -</p> -<p>The foregoing is a fair representation of the addresses made to us on -occasions such as that was. That night the house could not hold all -who came to search the Scriptures and sing sacred hymns. Three persons -offered themselves for baptism, and were put off till Sunday, the 17th, -when I preached on faith, repentance, and baptism for the remission of -sins. At the afternoon services, I exhorted the people to be faithful, -told them the conditions on which they could be admitted into the -Church, and said that all who felt to accept those conditions might be -accommodated that evening, as I had three candidates to wait on at the -close of the services. -</p> -<p>When the meeting was over, the whole congregation gathered down by the -seaside. We sang a hymn and prayed, and I went down into the water and -remained there until I had baptized thirty-five souls. When these were -confirmed, the people remained together to a late hour before they -would disperse. On August 18th, agreeable to the request of the people -and with the approval of the rulers of the village, I opened a school, -classified the students, and chose teachers for each class, then laid -down rules to govern them. The feasting was continued from day to day -to August 24th. On Sunday, the 25th, I preached from the second chapter -of the Acts of the Apostles. At the close of the meeting three persons -presented themselves for baptism, and we attended to the ordinance. -One of those baptized was Mahia, who, forty years later, presided over -the entire mission, being, at the latter time, totally blind. Besides -the three mentioned, sixteen others were baptized, and all of them -confirmed. -</p> -<p>On the 26th, the school was continued in good order. That day the news -came that the Catholic priest had taken charge of our meeting house -at Temarari, although the house was built and owned by the Latter-day -Saints. The priest claimed the right to control it in the interest of -his church; and the Saints requested me to come and help them regain -possession of the house. With two of the natives, I started on the -27th, quite a company, male and female, following us. When we arrived -a feast was prepared; the people gave us a perfect ovation. We held -meeting that evening, the 28th, and I preached from the twelfth chapter -of Luke. -</p> -<p>At the close of the meeting the bell was rung for school. In came the -priest to take charge, but as he had no right to the hour, and the -people did not want him to teach, but desired me to take charge, I told -them that when they settled the dispute about the house, if it was -desired by the whole people and their officers that I should proceed, I -would do so. They arranged to settle the matter in a day or two. -</p> -<p>On the 30th I received a letter from Elder T. W. Whitaker, of Tahiti, -and I wrote to the white Elders. The same evening I had a call from two -of the Catholic priests, whose names were Tavara and Harara. Evidently -they were very much disturbed in their feelings, as the people were -still feasting with and showing every respect possible to me, while -they passed the priests by with a cold nod. -</p> -<p>Sunday morning, August 31st, I preached on the attributes of God. At -the close of our meeting the priests rang the bell and came marching -in with their lamps and images, demanding possession of the house. We -told them we had business matters to attend to, and were not ready to -give up the place. Nevertheless, they piled their things on the table -in front of me as I sat writing. They had as much as two or three men -could carry. They crowded their things right into my way, so I asked -what they meant by such conduct, and who had invited them there before -we got through with our business. They replied that it was their time -for meeting, and demanded the house, claiming it was a public building, -and that they had a right to hold their meetings in it. I said that -it had been built and was owned by the Mormon people, and that we did -not propose to be disturbed by the intruders until we had finished our -business. At that they flew into a rage and threatened us with the law, -as they had done before, but finally they cooled down, carried their -things out, and waited until we were through and had left. Then they -held their services. I do not think they had over six persons in their -congregation. They dispersed quietly, and at 10 o'clock a.m. we held -meeting again. I preached on faith and baptism. One hundred and thirty -people attended our meeting. In the evening I baptized and confirmed -twenty-five persons. -</p> -<p>On Monday, September 1st, I took up school by request of the people -and their peace officers. On the 4th we had thirty students. On the -5th, two native Elders went with me to Tuuhora. We received a call from -a priest; also held a prayer meeting, but few people attended it. On -Sunday we held three meetings, administered the sacrament, baptized -nineteen souls, and confirmed them. On Monday, the 8th, we organized -a school with fifty students, and with the peace officers selected a -teacher for each class. The Catholic priest called on me and forbade -me changing his hours of school. As I had not attempted to interfere -with him or his schools, I came to the conclusion that he was seeking -an occasion against me under the law, as they had threatened me with -before. I knew they were jealous, for where I stopped the people would -throng around me and the priests were left alone. -</p> -<p>When the older people had gone through some morning exercises that -day, desiring on my part to prevent further trouble with the priest, I -sent him word that as soon as we got through with the younger classes -he could occupy the building, but not before, as he had threatened -to do. Just as the messenger returned, the priest rang the bell most -spitefully, and then came rushing into the school room, his eyes -flashing angrily. Our school was greatly disturbed. I advanced, and -asked him civilly if he wished to attend our school. He said yes, -evidently misunderstanding me. I pointed him to a seat, saying we were -much pleased to have our school increase, and would he please give -me his name. I must confess that I felt a little mischievous, and to -retaliate slightly for their constant meddling in our affairs. He saw -the point, flew into a rage, and sent for the landholders of the place -to have me put out of the house. The landholders came, and told him -they did not wish to have me disturbed, as they had sent for me to come -and take up a school; that the people preferred me to him; that he was -the one who had made the disturbance, not me, and that he must give way -and cease his interference. -</p> -<p>Not satisfied with that decision, the priest sent for the governor -and chief men of the town, who came, and with them a large crowd of -citizens. When the governor had heard both sides, he confirmed the -decision of the landholders, and called for a vote of the people to say -which of us should teach school. The vote was unanimous against the -priest. Then the governor told him that as the people did not want him -he must leave the house at once, and not disturb me or my school any -more, for none of the people had any use for him, as he had witnessed; -they had all voted against him, and all wanted Iatobo. -</p> -<p>At this, the priest took up his books and slates, and after accusing me -of everything that was mean and low, and calling the Mormon people the -vilest names, he withdrew. Later, he wrote a letter to Governor Bonard, -of Tahiti, and circulated it for signatures. We learned afterwards -that he got thirty signers. I believe that eleven were French traders, -and the other nineteen were natives whom the traders had in their -employment. We also learned, at the cost of inquiry, that the priest's -letter contained the charges upon which I was subsequently arrested. -But at that time we continued our school in peace. -</p> -<p>On September 12th I was feasted in royal style by non-members of the -Church. They called on one of the native Elders to deliver the address, -which he did in a most eloquent manner. I responded in the usual way, -and accepted their kind offering. The cook disposed of the spread to -the great satisfaction of the whole assembly, on such occasions all -present being directly interested in the distribution of the eatables. -</p> -<p>About this time the writer had a remarkable dream. He dreamed that God -appeared, and told him to go to a field of his earthly father's, and -replant where the birds and squirrels had destroyed the grain. Then his -father appeared and showed him where to begin the labor. When he had -been furnished with seed and a hoe, he went to work, and the replanting -was soon done. Then he was shown a field of wheat that, in the spring -of the year, was about eight inches high. The ground was quite wet, -and the grain was growing nicely. While he was gazing on the bright -prospects, a herd of cattle came in, breaking down the fence. They -seemed to trample everything they came to. Then he heard a voice say, -"Drive them out;" and as he attempted to do so, a fiery red bull made -a charge toward him so that it seemed impossible for him to escape -being gored to death; but as the animal lowered its head to make the -deadly thrust, the writer seized it by both horns and bore its head -to the earth. The animal was coming with such force that it turned a -somersault, both horns being sunk to the head in the earth, and the -bull's neck being broken. Then a black and white bull, very peculiarly -marked, came up in the same fierce manner, only to meet with a similar -fate. At that the herd cleared the field, but not until much damage had -been done. -</p> -<p>When he awoke, the writer felt that there was more trouble ahead for -him, but he did not know from what source it would come. Of the priests -who had given so much annoyance, one had fiery red hair, and another -was white and dark spotted, or freckle-faced. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXVIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">GO TO TEMARAIA—MIRACULOUS HEALINGS—CHILD ASSAILED BY AN EVIL -SPIRIT—STRANGE OCCURRENCE—GIFT OF SEA BISCUITS—PERFORM A -SURGICAL OPERATION—HAMMERING OUT TEETH—THE WRITER AS A SURGEON -AND DENTIST—ROUGHS DISTURB A MEETING—THEY ARE STRICKEN WITH -DEATH—FATAL SICKNESS AMONG THE PEOPLE—LOWER CLASSES OF THE NATIVES -AT A FEAST—THEIR REVERENCE FOR RELIGIOUS SERVICES AND PREACHERS—TWO -PARTIES OF NATIVES IN BATTLE ARRAY—FIGHTING AVERTED BY THE WRITER -ADDRESSING THE CONTENDING FACTIONS IN FAVOR OF PEACE—WARS AMONG -THE NATIVES—SOME OF THEIR PRACTICES—GATHERING AND KEEPING HUMAN -HEADS—CAUSES OF CANNIBALISM—CONVERSATION WITH ONE WHO HAD BEEN A -CANNIBAL—FLAVOR OF NATIVE AND WHITE MEN'S FLESH COMPARED—THE TASTIEST -PART OF THE HUMAN BODY. -</p> -<p>ON September 19th, Nihiru, a native brother, came with his canoe and -gave the writer a free passage to a village on the east end of the -island, called Tematahoa. We arrived in the evening and found a great -deal of sickness among the people. Just at dark on the 20th, a brother -named Pasai came from Temaraia with a sick man to have him anointed and -administered to. I attended to that and he was healed. -</p> -<p>On the 21st, Sunday, I preached on the signs, gifts of healing, etc. -There were about two hundred and fifty persons in the congregation. In -the evening I baptized and confirmed eighteen persons. Monday morning I -opened school with twenty-eight pupils; next day there were forty-one. -</p> -<p>On the following day, September 24th, a man and his wife came to me -with a child three and a half months old. They said that a short -time before their child had been taken sick in the night, and they -had talked to each other of having it anointed. At this, the child -spoke, and stated in plain words, like an adult, that it would not -be anointed. It said many words as plainly as any person could do. -From that time it grew worse to the day it was brought to me to be -administered to. The parents said they did not belong to the Church, -but desired to be baptized, for they believed the Gospel as the Mormon -Elders taught it. Their names were Tauahi and Taui. We baptized them -and one other person, then administered to the child, which lay limp -as if dead. We could not tell whether it was dead or alive. However, -when we took our hands off its head, it opened its eyes and looked as -if nothing was the matter. Then it nursed as any healthy child might. -There were many people gathered there, and all were astonished at what -had taken place. Finally the babe went to sleep as if nothing had been -wrong with it, and the whole company rejoiced at the great change that -had come. They said that truly it was the Almighty who had healed the -child through His servant. -</p> -<p>I turned and gave my attention to some writing that was necessary, and -the crowd became unusually quiet. In a few minutes a strong rushing or -movement among the people attracted my attention, and as I turned to -face the people there appeared to be an ashy paleness over the faces -of the whole assembly. All seemed terrified and speechless. At that -moment an aged couple, a man and his wife, entered the door and went -straightway to where the sleeping infant lay. They bowed down over it -and kissed it, and then went through some ancient heathen ceremony that -I could not understand. Then they walked direct to their canoes and -sailed across the lake to where they had come from. From that moment -the relatives of the child began to mourn and say that it would die; -and sure enough, inside of an hour it was a corpse. The parents were -asked why they had lost faith and given up the child. They said the old -people who had kissed the babe had power with evil spirits, and had -afflicted it in the first place; that their power had been broken by -the Priesthood, and they could not reunite it with the babe until they -could come and touch it; and when they had done that, the parents and -all concerned lost faith, and could not resist the influence that came -with the old pair of witches, as we think they would be called by some -civilized people. I must confess it was a strange thing to me. I had -never before witnessed anything so strange. -</p> -<p>It was on the 27th of September that the child died. On the same day a -Scotchman came and brought me a few sea biscuits. I was very thankful -to him for the favor, for bread was such a rarity in that part of the -country as to give a man some satisfaction in seeing it, even though -he might not have the pleasure of eating it. Thanks to the benevolent -Scotchman. I regret that I have forgotten his name. The next day I -preached on the resurrection of the dead, and baptized and confirmed -eighteen persons into the Church. -</p> -<p>Before leaving my reminiscences of this place, I will narrate two -incidents of some note to me. In one, we were called to see a man -who had been confined to his room the greater part of a year with a -swelling in his hip and thigh. On examination it was found that his -whole hip and thigh were filled with a thick and very noxious pus. -No one in the village dared to lance it, but when I told him his -condition he insisted that I should cut it whether it killed or cured. -I hesitated to comply with his wish until all his immediate relatives -had been consulted, and had given their assent. Otherwise, the -superstition of the people was so great that if in the operation the -patient succumbed the operator would have the gravest responsibility to -meet. But when all concerned had given sanction, and each had assumed -his or her responsibility, I performed the operation most successfully, -the wound discharging at least six pints of the most offensive matter, -and the patient being greatly relieved from his terrible suffering. The -operation was performed with a penknife, for in that country at that -time the only surgical instrument ever used for cutting was a shark's -tooth or a scale from a broken bottle. -</p> -<p>In this case the operation seemed to the people very little less than -a miracle. The news thereof spread all over the island, insomuch that -the operator acquired much practice in similar cases, such as swollen -jaws, boils, carbuncles, etc., and though he performed many operations, -he never received one cent as pay. If the people had toothache, he was -called on and performed the operation of extraction, in some instances -using a rusty nail, or any kind of an old iron, in place of a hammer -or mallet, to punch the tooth out. His best dentist tool was his rifle -bullet mold, using both ends for forceps. He never failed to give -satisfaction, for there were neither dentists nor surgeons in that part -of the world. -</p> -<p>The other incident, and a very singular one, which occurred at that -place was this: On one occasion seven very rough characters came into -our sacrament meeting. Some of them were said to be from an adjacent -island. They came, took seats at the back of the hall, and behaved -very rudely, making loud remarks and threats about the young ladies of -the choir. When they partook of the sacrament they said that when the -meeting was out they would administer ihe sacrament in a very different -manner to that in which the Mormons did it. Sure enough, at the close -of the meeting they pushed along through the congregation till they -came to the young ladies, and made wicked propositions to them, which -were very quickly spurned. Then they passed on, still making their -boasts of what they would do at nightfall. But they failed in carrying -out their threats, for in a very short time three of them were stricken -down with violent cramps, so terrible that all three were corpses -before the next morning. The other four had strong symptoms of the same -complaint, and inside of a week they were dead also. The people said it -was the power of evil spirits that had been sent to destroy them, that -they might not be permitted to carry out their wicked purposes. The -whole people were so excited that they shot off guns, blew horns, built -large fires, prayed and shouted in wild confusion, to drive away the -evil spirits; and many people were smitten with sickness and some died. -</p> -<p>On the 29th of September we sailed for Putuhara. The wind blew a gale, -and we had a fearful passage, but succeeded in reaching our destination -in safety, and in time for evening meeting, when we preached to a large -congregation. October 1st, I baptized and confirmed three persons. On -the same day the roughest people of the island assembled to feast and -dance. It seemed that to quarrel and fight was the principal number -on their program, and they appeared to indulge in everything that -was wicked. They killed pigs, chickens and dogs, roasted all alike, -and ate them with great relish. They also ran through the streets -with torchlights and firebrands, and the confusion was so great and -turbulent that it looked more like an actual battle of savages than a -dance. All ages participated, from the child of tender years up to the -old grayheaded man and woman, all of them two-thirds naked, and some of -the children entirely nude. -</p> -<p>I had seen Indians in their warpaint and dances, but this excelled in -confused savage deeds anything I ever beheld before. It seemed that -they never knew what order meant. Yet, strange to say, at the first -tap of the church bell they reminded me of a turkey gobbler which, -when in full strut, seeing a dog run at him, drops his feathers so -suddenly that he does not look like the same bird. So it was with that -savage-looking lot. At the first tap of the bell they became as silent -as if dead, then retreated to their hiding places, and not another yell -was heard from any of them, so great was their reverence for religious -services. At one time, though, it did seem that they could not be -silenced short of bloodshed, for there were two opposing parties mixed -up together. -</p> -<p>When the confusion was straightened out and peace apparently restored, -the parties separated, only to come together again later, with more -roast pigs, chickens and dogs. Then they ate of their feast until full, -when some unwise person of one party made an insulting remark about the -other party. Quickly the participants in the feast formed for battle, -armed with clubs and stones. At that moment one man from each party -ran for the ormatua (missionary). I went out and stepped up on to a -large chest, at the same time calling aloud for peace. Strange as it -may seem, although their clubs and stones were raised to strike fatal -blows, and the women and children were shrieking and crying, the moment -the natives recognized me among them they dropped their ugly weapons -and listened, and the spokesman of each party came forward to plead his -particular case. I caught the spirit of the situation and addressed -them briefly on the subject of peace, order and good will to all, and -exhorted them to leave their grievances to two or more of their cooler -and wiser men to settle. This they agreed to do; then they joined -forces and made an attack on the writer, not for blood, but of love and -respect. Men and women seized on to him, embracing him and shaking his -hands until he was nearly smothered and almost borne to the ground. -</p> -<p>I would not have it understood that this great reverence and respect -was shown to me for any superiority that I would claim; but it was a -man's calling as a minister of the Gospel which they held sacred before -the Lord. So long as he did not betray their confidence, the minister's -influence was almost unbounded, and with all their faults the natives -had many most estimable qualities. -</p> -<p>From this great excitement, and the accounts that he had heard from -time to time, the writer was led to inquire into the manner of warfare, -the traditions and the superstitions, as also into the causes for and -cannibalism of the islanders. Their wars usually had an origin in very -trivial causes, such as family quarrels, thefts, politics and disputes -over land or over fishing waters. At one time the islands had a dense -population, and the strong would go on the warpath for conquest, one -village or island being pitted against another. Their ariis (kings), -as they call them—I think it would be more proper to designate them as -chiefs, as the Indians do—attain power through brave and heroic acts, -and the great havoc they make among their adversaries. Their weapons -consisted chiefly of spears made from fish bone and hard wood, stones -and slings, clubs, and a rudely fashioned glove made by winding bark -and shark's teeth together in such a way as to have the teeth stand out -thickly on the inside of the hand. With this latter weapon they would -grapple with and tear out each other's entrails. They had rude drums -and some kind of whistles for musical instruments. -</p> -<p>In war, the two parties approach each other, dancing, boasting and -threatening, until within a few feet of each other, when they leap -at and onto one another in a hand-to-hand conflict, fighting as wild -beasts, to a finish. Their mothers, sisters, daughters and aunts -prepare themselves with strong baskets made from the cocoanut leaf, and -swing these on their backs; then (each with a sharp rock or a seashell -in her hand) they enter the battlefield in rear of their nearest male -relative. When the latter has dispatched his man or disabled him so -that the women can finish him, he engages another adversary, while the -woman beheads his victim, puts the head into her basket, swings it on -her back, and continues to follow her male relative to victory or death. -</p> -<p>When a war is over, and the victorious party returns home, each family -has a place for the captured heads, where they are put in rows, being -set some six or eight inches below the surface of the ground, and easy -of access. This was done so that when any question arose as to the -bravest family, or the member of a family to take the first place as -dictator or chief, the mori, or place of skulls may be visited and a -tally made, when the one with the highest number of skulls or heads is -given the coveted position. In these contests they also count the heads -taken by their ancestors, as far back as they can find them, no matter -how many generations they cover. Thus the family with the most skulls -gets the place sought, which is generally that of chief or king. -</p> -<p>When a battle is ended, the victors pass over the ground, often -bleeding from their wounds, and starved and well nigh exhausted from -being without food. The islanders have a tradition that whatever gives -them pain they should eat. So if they are wounded by a sharp stone -which by any means has fastened itself into a man's flesh, or by a -sliver, they extract and eat it, saying, "You are my enemy, you never -shall hurt me more." Thus they seem to satisfy the vicious spirit of -revenge. This strange proceeding may have had something to do with the -origin of cannibalism. Still, I am rather inclined to think it had its -beginning in starvation, and to that was added the spirit of revenge. -Thus the appetite was cultivated until, with very slight pretext, -human life became sacrificed to a depraved and vicious appetite. These -practices and others seemed to be justified in their savage minds, -insomuch that they did not scruple in gathering up the slain and -feeding upon them. -</p> -<p>His curiosity having been awakened in searching into heathen life, the -writer made inquiries at the most authentic sources of information for -further light on this custom. In one case he found an old lady who was -the last of the fifth generation back. Her intellect seemed bright, -although she could not open her eyes except with her fingers. When -questioned in regard to cannibalism, she lifted her eyelids and said, -"I have followed my fathers, brothers, husband and sons in battle, and -we ate our victims as we would eat pork or fish." When asked if she -had eaten white man's flesh, she replied, "Yes; we captured some white -men on a small schooner and ate them." The next inquiry was whether -there was any difference in the taste of the white man's and of the -native's flesh. "Yes," said she; "the white man's flesh is hard, tough -and salty, while the flesh of the native is sweet and tender." Then -came the question as to what part of the human body was preferable to -eat. She said the heel and the hand of a fourteen year-old girl were -the sweetest morsels of flesh she ever ate. Being asked if she did not -have feelings of remorse when they had committed actions like these, -her answer was: "Not a bit, it was in our days of heathendom; but now, -since the Gospel has come to us, we have no desire for anything of that -kind, though formerly we took pleasure in our practices, for our minds -were very dark." -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXIX. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">HOLD CONFERENCE IN PUTUHARA—INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SAINTS—GO TO -OTAPIPI—OPPOSITION AT TEMARAIA—OFFICIALS BRIBED BY CATHOLIC PRIESTS -—ARRIVAL OF A FRENCH WARSHIP—THE WRITER IS ARRESTED WHILE EXPOUNDING -THE SCRIPTURES TO THE NATIVES—CAUSE OF ARREST IS FALSE ACCUSATION BY -CATHOLIC PRIESTS—I PLEAD NOT GUILTY—ORDERED TAKEN TO TAHITI—PAINFUL -PRISON EXPERIENCE—CANNIBALS IN CUSTODY—START FOR THE SHIP—SYMPATHY -OF THE NATIVES—HURRIED INTO THE SHIP'S BOAT—IN A SCHOOL OF -WHALES—A FRIGHTENED BOAT LOAD—ON BOARD THE WARSHIP—UNCOMFORTABLE -QUARTERS—QUESTIONABLE FRENCH COURTESY—AMONG COCKROACHES, FILTH, AND -INCONVENIENCES—SOFT SIDE OF A PLANK FOR A BED. -</p> -<p>LEAVING the revolting subject of cannibalism, I will return to our -missionary labors. Peace and quiet having been restored, the people -assembled in Putuhara on October 5th for conference, Elder James S. -Brown presiding. After reports of the various branches had been made, -as presiding Elder I reported the condition of the Church generally on -the island, made a few opening remarks, and called on the different -Elders to speak. One after another these referred to themselves and the -people generally having a desire for me to write home to the Church -authorities, to get a missionary to each village. All spoke of their -love for the Gospel, and their wish to have it preached on all the -adjacent islands. There was such enthusiasm among the people that it -seemed unwise to hold a lengthy conference. The zeal of the people -there was such that it well nigh drove them into a frenzy; so after -the business of the conference had been done, I addressed them on the -object of a house of worship, that it was a place in which to worship -the true and living God, and not a dancehouse or a place to have -lawsuits, quarreling, fighting, and worshiping of idols in, as they had -been doing. A motion was made and carried that our building be kept -exclusively for a house of worship. Thus everything else was forbidden -by the landholders. At the close of the conference eight persons were -baptized and confirmed. -</p> -<p>The schools of the different villages met on October 6th, to read and -spell in friendly contest. October 7th, the school in Putuhara had -increased to one hundred pupils. That day the rougher element of the -place assembled again in their wild dancing; they sold their jewelry -for fat dogs and pigs. On the 11th, the non-Mormon women of the place -prepared a great feast for us, and turned it over with pride, saying, -"Here is a token of our love for you, and we desire you to accept it -and remain in our town and teach us of the Lord." -</p> -<p>We preached on Sunday, the 12th, and on that day also baptized and -confirmed five persons. Next day, school was opened with one hundred -pupils. A great deal of sickness was reported in the town. On the 14th, -school was continued in good order, and we departed in a small canoe -for Otapipi, where we found the people pleased to see us. The school -there was intact. Next day I wrote to Elder Alviras Hanks that I had -heard of his having been cast away on another island. -</p> -<p>Sunday, October 19th, I preached, and baptized two persons. On the -24th I went to Temaraia, where I met with more opposition from the -Catholic priest, with regard to school matters, and learned that he had -bribed Governor Telidha, also Parai, the mouthpiece of the town, as -he was called. Having them for his backing, the priest was very bold -and defiant, and no doubt thought that by keeping up an excitement the -Catholics would gain some support for the foul and false charges which -he had made against me. By the means I have named, the priest got a -decision against us, and for the first time we were compelled to yield, -but much against the people's desires. Still, all settled down from -high excitement to peace and quiet, till October 28th, when the French -frigate <em>Durance</em> made its appearance northwest of the island. -</p> -<p>The warship had on board the governor's aide de camp, who landed at -Tuuhora with his guards. On the 29th he crossed the lagoon to Temaraia, -where we were. At 8 p.m., while I was engaged in expounding the -scriptures to a few of the natives, in came a French gen d' arme and a -native officer. They presented me with a warrant, which, being in the -French language, I could not read. The officers stood for a minute or -so, when I gave them to understand that I was unable to decipher the -document. Thereupon the native officer said that it meant that I was -to appear before the governor's aide de camp, down at the stockade, at -9 o'clock, and if I did not come willingly, they had orders to drag me -there like a dog. They being armed with swords and pistols, I thought -it wisest to go willingly, especially as there was no chance to do -otherwise. The officers were quite haughty, yet somewhat nervous, for -they had been told that I was prepared to make a strong resistance. Of -course, I accompanied them readily and without a word, and was soon -ushered into the august presence of the governor's aide. I found him -seated in a small room, in which were four or five other officers and -a few soldiers armed with muskets and cutlasses. When I entered, the -interpreter arose, read a long list of charges, and asked for my plea. -I answered not guilty to each accusation. -</p> -<p>It will be remembered by the reader that when I first landed on the -island I sketched, at the request of some of the natives, a rough -outline of the United States, pointing out my birthplace, also Salt -Lake City, and where gold had been discovered in California. From that -time the Catholic priests had conspired to entrap me, to break my -influence, and to close my schools. -</p> -<p>The charges against me began, as near as I now remember them, and -with memory refreshed from brief notes taken at the time, by an -assertion that I had subverted the laws of the French protectorate; -had interfered with government schools; had hoisted the American flag; -had enrolled some three thousand men for the American government, to -be controlled by the Mormon Church; had armed the men; was a civil -engineer of no mean ability; had ordered the people to demolish some -of the towns, and rebuild with better fortifications; that my walk -and general movements indicated military ability, and undoubtedly I -had been brought up at a military school in the United States; that -I had mapped out plans of defense; had great power with the native -people, and was capable of doing much mischief in the country. These, -and many other charges of a frivolous nature, were in the list, all of -them without the slightest foundation in fact, except that I had much -influence with the people. -</p> -<p>I stated that I proposed to prove myself innocent of every one of the -accusations made. To this the officer made answer that they had the -most positive proof to establish the charges, which were very serious. -He gave me two hours to settle my business, and see friends, when I -would have to return to the stockade and stay where the governor's aide -thought proper. The next day I was to be taken on board the man-of-war. -and go as a prisoner to Tahiti, for trial. -</p> -<p>Upon receiving this information, I claimed the right to be tried where -I was accused of having committed the offense, and where I had the -witnesses in my behalf. "No;" said the officer, "your crime is too -great to be tried before any less authority than the governor." I asked -to have witnesses summoned, and the officer inquired if I had any way -of taking them to Tahiti. He knew, of course, that I was helpless in -that regard, and being so answered, told his men to take me in charge. -Accordingly, they marched me to where the arrest had been made. -</p> -<p>I gathered up some of my effects, bade goodbye to my friends, and -returned to the stockade. There I was ordered to a seat under an open -shed till daylight, being guarded by two lustful police, who took -unwarranted liberty with some lewd females, behaving most shamefully -in the prisoner's presence. My friends brought bedding for me and -attempted to spread it, but were rudely driven away by the guards, who -took turns at pacing in front of me, while the other interested himself -with the females spoken of, who were void of shame. -</p> -<p>That night I was mortified and disgusted as I never had been before -with peace officers. At last the long night wore past, and dawn -appeared. Then close to my right, in a stockade, I saw about fifteen -native cannibals, who could barely hide their nakedness. They had been -captured by French soldiers on some island in the north, and were -accused of killing, upon different occasions, the white crews of three -small schooners. They were also charged with eating their victims, as -well as robbing and scuttling the schooners. -</p> -<p>I took my last glance at those fierce-looking monsters just at sunrise -on October 30th, when I was called before the aide de camp to sign my -name four times in English, and four times in the Tahitian language. -Then I was ordered into a filthy old boat that was used to collect oil. -The boat's crew were rough and dirty, and scoffed and jeered at me and -otherwise made the sail across the lagoon to Tuuhora as disagreeable as -they could. -</p> -<p>When we landed at Tuuhora it was among about one hundred and fifty -French marines. They, too, must jeer, and satisfy their curiosity by -gathering around and impertinently staring me in the face, jabbering -together and laughing, while the natives met me with sympathy expressed -in their countenances. Two soldiers kept close to me, however, and did -not allow much opportunity for conversation with anyone. I was served -with a bowl of fish broth and a small piece of bread, and when this -was eaten I was ordered to the landing, to one of the boats from the -warship. By this time there were probably five hundred native people -gathered. These followed to the boat, declaring that where their -missionary went they would go, too, and saying, "It is the Catholic -priests who have done this, with their lies." -</p> -<p>The news of the arrest had been heralded during the night to every -village, and boats and canoes were coming in, laden with sympathizing -friends, not only Church members, but full as many that did not belong -to the Church. They said, "E mea hama teie" (a shameful thing, this). -The excitement became so general that the guard was increased to about -twenty armed men, and the prisoner was urged to hurry into the boat. -As the water was from shoe-top to knee-deep between the shore and the -boat, I attempted to take off my shoes and turn my pants up, but I was -forbidden to stop, and was crowded into the vessel. When I reached -it, it was full of sympathizing men, women and children, weeping and -accusing the Catholic priests. Fully five hundred people lined the -shore, some with rolls of bedding, while others were laden down with -baskets of cocoanuts. -</p> -<p>When the guards arrived with their prisoner, the boat was ordered -cleared, and as the native people were rather slow to obey the command, -the soldiers pricked them with their cutlasses and bayonets. I was -urged into the boat, which was soon manned, and the boatmen soon pulled -from the shore, while many scores of people wept aloud, shrieking out -my native name, "Iatobo, Iatobo; no te Catholic te i a ne peapea" -(James, James, of the Catholics this trouble). They waved handkerchiefs -as long as we could see them. -</p> -<p>As the boat was going out to the ship, it ran into what seemed to us to -be hundreds or even thousands of whales. For a while the sea seemed to -be black with them. At the same time the boatmen took in their oars and -became pale and still as death, lest the monsters should take fright -and knock us into eternity and the boat into splinters. The oarsmen -were better aware of the danger than I was, and were ashy pale. Indeed, -it may have been the same with me for aught I know, for I did not see -my own face as I saw theirs. But I had been where cattle stampeded, -where the wild buffalo was rampant, or wild mustangs were charging by -thousands on the plains by night and by day; had been surrounded by -packs of fierce and hungry wolves; had been in the brush when grizzly -bear were thick around, or when rattlesnake and deadly viper hissed -in my ears; and I had been chased by savage Indians; still I do not -remember a time when I felt that every hair on my head was trying -to let on end more than I did for a few moments as these great sea -monsters glided past so near that we could almost put our hands on -their long, black backs, while they shot by swiftly, spouting the briny -spray almost in our faces. The thought of the loss of the boat did not -concern me so much as it did to think how easy it was for a whale, at -one stroke of its monster tail, to make of us convenient shark's food. -While in this truly great peril, minutes seemed hours to us, and when -it passed we breathed freely again, and soon gained the great warship -that was lying off shore, for there was no harbor or anchorage at that -island. -</p> -<p>I was next required to try a new experiment, to me, that of climbing -a rope ladder up the side of a ship as the latter rolled and pitched -in the waves. After a struggle I succeeded in reaching the deck in -safety, there to be surrounded by the marines as though I had been a -wild beast. When their curiosity had been satisfied, I was ordered down -on to what was called Swaltses' battery, the gun deck. There I found -that as I walked my head came in uncomfortable contact with the beams -of the upper deck, and at each one I had to duck my head. This greatly -amused the marines, and they got a mopstick, a broomstick, or any kind -of a stick. Some would press the sticks on the sides of their noses, -while others held theirs back of them, poking their sticks up so as to -hit the beams above. Then they would form into a squad and march by and -duck heads with me, while some were giving commands which I supposed -meant, "Left, duck, left duck"—at any rate, that was the action. Then -they would shout and laugh. -</p> -<p>Soon meal time came, and I was conducted into the hold of the ship, -and there assigned to a small, filthy room. There was an old chair in -it, and a bunk without bedding. The room swarmed with cockroaches, -which seemed to be thicker than flies. I was served with a bowl of fish -broth, and one small loaf of bread and a bottle of wine, for the day's -rations. Then an officer called me to follow him to the upper deck and -to the bow of the ship, where he made me understand, by unmistakable -motions, that I was to use the chains for a water closet. In disgust I -remembered that I was among Frenchmen, the most stylish, the proudest, -and the most fashionable people in the world. I was an American, -"honored" with two uniformed and armed French attendants, who never -left me alone only when I was in my room, following me everywhere, -allowing none to obstruct my path, and even being careful to keep me -from falling out through the portholes, as, when I leaned over a big -gun to look out upon the deep, they would take me by the arm, lead me -away, and show me the big hole in the deck, and my room. -</p> -<p>By this time the writer began to understand French courtesy, under some -conditions, and to realize his own situation. He asked himself what the -outcome would be, he reviewed every action performed on the island of -Anaa, and could not see wherein he had trenched upon anybody's rights -or done anything against the law. He failed to discover one intentional -or other wrong; so he felt to trust in the Lord, and made himself as -contented as possible, though he found the boards in the berth as hard -as American boards, notwithstanding that they were French lumber. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXX"></a>CHAPTER XXX. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">VOYAGE TO PAPEETE—IN A TAHITIAN DUNGEON—CRUEL TREATMENT—WRITE TO -FRIENDS—KINDNESS OF THE AMERICAN HOTEL KEEPER—BROUGHT BEFORE THE -GOVERNOR—FALSE CHARGES READ, AND PLEA OF NOT GUILTY ENTERED—PERJURED -TESTIMONY AGAINST ME—FORBIDDEN TO LOOK AT, OR EVEN CROSS-EXAMINE -WITNESSES—SECRECY OF THE ALLEGED TRIAL—DEMAND MY RIGHTS AS -AN AMERICAN CITIZEN—CONFUSION OF THE GOVERNOR—RETURNED TO MY -CELL—AMERICAN CONSUL TAKES UP MY CASE—GIVES BONDS THAT I WILL LEAVE -THE PROTECTORATE—ELDERS AND FRIENDS CALL ON ME—MY VISITORS ALLOWED TO -SAY BUT LITTLE, AND SOMETIMES EXCLUDED—DECISION OF THE GOVERNOR THAT I -MUST LEAVE THE SOCIETY ISLANDS—FAIR TRIAL REFUSED ME—LETTER FROM THE -AMERICAN CONSUL—TAKEN TO THE CONSUL'S OFFICE—ADVISED TO LEAVE—ELDERS -DECIDE THAT I SHOULD GO OUTSIDE OF THE FRENCH PROTECTORATE—SET SAIL -FROM PAPEETE. -</p> -<p>ON November 3rd, 1851, we set sail for Tahiti, and on the 6th made the -port of Papeete, having had a rough voyage. When the ship anchored, a -police boat came alongside, and the prisoner was ordered to try his -skill at climbing down the rope ladder. He promptly obeyed orders, and -soon found himself locked up in a cobblestone dungeon, six by eight -feet, quite damp, and so dark that not a ray of light penetrated it -anywhere. For his bed he had a board dressed out like a washboard. He -had a good mattress and pillows and blankets of his own, but they were -locked up in an adjoining room and he was denied the use of them. What -the object was he never learned, unless it was done to punish him. He -remained in that condition fourteen hours out of the twenty-four, and -was fed on bread and water that was very filthy. The water was kept -in a small keg in a corner of his cell, and was thick with a green, -moss-like substance. In an opposite corner was a different kind of -French water closet to that he had on shipboard—a keg which was never -emptied during the prisoner's stay there. Unlike the water keg, it was -replenished often. As to the result of such conditions in that hot -climate, I leave it to the reader to conjecture; for I had enough of it -without dwelling further on the subject. -</p> -<p>On November 7th I wrote letters to Elders Thomas Whitaker and Julian -Moses, the brethren who had been assigned to labor on Tahiti. On the -8th, one Mr. Lampher, proprietor of the American hotel in Papeete, -sent me a prime dinner. It was received with thanks, and was duly -appreciated. -</p> -<p>On the 10th I was called out by the turnkey; immediately an armed -soldier took position on either side of me, while a sergeant stepped -directly in front, then moved three steps in advance, and gave the -command to forward march. In this order we passed two lines of -sentinels and went to the governor's mansion, where we met another -officer, who commanded a halt, and I was directed to be seated for -thirty minutes. Then I was called into the governor's office, where I -was confronted by his excellency and seven officers. They were in full -uniform and had sidearms. Each had in his hands what appeared to be -notes. I was at once ordered to be seated, and the very profligate son -of a Protestant professor acted as interpreter, read the long list of -charges spoken of, and asked for my plea thereto. I answered not guilty. -</p> -<p>Then the trial began. They placed on the witness stand a native named -Tania, who had been admitted recently to the Catholic church. He -had been posted in what he should say, but seemingly had some pangs -of conscience, for when he stood up he turned his eyes toward me, -then to the court, and back to me, and answered the questions in -a hesitating way, his confusion being so great that the governer, -through the interpreter, ordered me not to look at the witness, as -he said my countenance was so fierce and vivid as to baffle the most -substantial witness. I was not permitted to ask a question, not even to -cross-examine the witness. -</p> -<p>The next testimony came from a man who had been brought to Papeete -a prisoner, but who had been discharged without the formality of a -hearing, evidently that they might have him for a witness against -me. Both he and the preceding witness were put on the stand without -being sworn. Not a single spectator was permitted to be present, so I -concluded that if it was a court at all that was trying me it was a -military court martial. -</p> -<p>When I saw how onesidedly things were going, I arose and asked the -court what right it had to try me with closed doors, not even allowing -me the opportunity to defend myself. I told them I was an American -citizen, and claimed my rights as such under existing treaties and -international laws. I quoted law that I had never read or heard -mentioned, for it was given to me of the Lord in the hour that I had -need. I can never forget the expression on the faces of those officers. -Not one of them would look me in the eye. As I spoke, every face was -turned downward. At the conclusion of my remarks I was marched back to -the filthy cell, without another word being said. -</p> -<p>About this time Mr. W. H. Kelly, the American consul, called on the -governor, and on making inquiries about me and my alleged crime and -arrest, was told that I was a very dangerous man, a man learned in -treaties and international laws. "Why," said the governor to Mr. Kelly, -"he can quote more of them than my officers, and he has great power -and influence with the native people. He is undoubtedly a military -man of no mean ability. For these reasons he cannot be permitted to -take up his residence as a minister under the French protectorate." I -learned the foregoing from Mr. W. H. Kelly, who told me that he had to -sign bonds to the amount of fifty thousand francs, and that sum would -be forfeited if I did not leave the protectorate by the first vessel -sailing from port, or if I was known to preach another discourse under -the French government. -</p> -<p>That evening Elder T. Whitaker called at my cell with two pies for me. -We were allowed to speak but few words to each other. When the prison -door had been locked again, I wrote to Elder B. F. Grouard, who, as I -learned from Brother Whitaker, had arrived in port. November 11th, my -old friend Pahe called with a basket of fruit, which was admitted, but -the giver was permitted to say scarcely a word. -</p> -<p>I had a call on the 12th from Elders S. A. Dunn and Julian Moses. Their -short visit gave me much satisfaction, as they brought news from home. -On the 13th Elder Grouard and some other friends called with some -food, but they were not admitted, the food being passed in to me by a -murderer. -</p> -<p>On November 14th I was called before the governor's aide de camp, who -said, "I suppose you have heard the decision of the governor and his -council?" I told him no. He then said, "They have decided that you must -leave the protectorate by the first vessel sailing from port, or you -will be detained until you are willing to comply with that decision." -I asked if they intended to send me away without a fair trial. He said -yes; that the governor had it in his power to send out anyone that -raised a disturbance in the country. I asked him to show that I had -raised a disturbance. He said, "It does not need proof, for the Mormon -missionaries have caused the government a great deal of trouble, and -the decision is that you must go by the first vessel leaving port, or -remain in prison till you agree to do so." With this, I was satisfied -that there was no redress for the wrong that was being done me. -</p> -<p>I was then marched back to the cell, where I received a letter from W. -H. Kelly, the American consul. It read as follows: -</p> -<p class="right">"CONSULATE OF THE UNITED STATES, TAHITI, -<br>November 14, 1851. -</p> -<p>"<em>Mr. James Brown</em>: -</p> -<p>"DEAR SIR:—Having been informed, through the governor of the -protectorate, that you are a state prisoner in Papeete, charged with -the crime of rebellion and attempting to subvert the laws of the -protectorate established on the island of Anaa, I am bound to furnish -the honorable secretary of state of the United States with all charges -and punishments to which the citizens of the United States may render -themselves amenable, under the laws of the countries in which they may -reside. -</p> -<p>"You will therefore oblige me by furnishing me with an unbiased -and clear statement of the facts connected with your arrest and -imprisonment. I do not wish to know what has been told to you, or of -what you have heard from others, but simply the truth of the whole -transaction. -</p> -<p>"This letter will be forwarded to his excellency, Governor Bonard, who -will, through the proper channel, have it forwarded to you. -</p> -<p>"I remain, sir, your obedient servant, -</p> -<p class="centered">"W. H. KELLY, -</p> -<p class="right">"United States Consul." -</p> -<p>Elder B. F. Grouard kindly came down and wrote my reply to Mr. Kelly. -This was on November 15th. The same day I was called out into the yard, -when a sergeant and two soldiers took me in charge and marched me along -a back alley to the rear of the consul's office. Then the sergeant -stepped forward and notified Mr. Kelly that they had brought their -prisoner to him, and without further ceremony the officers disappeared -by the same alley by which they came. -</p> -<p>Mr. Kelly welcomed me to his office, and congratulated me on regaining -my liberty. Then he told me of his visit to Governor Bonard, the -conversation they had had, and about his signing the bonds for my -release. He said, "Mr. Brown, the French authorities are afraid of you. -They say that you are a highly educated man, and that you are capable -of doing much mischief in the country. Now you have your liberty in and -about my office, but you must not go off alone in any by-place, for -the French are a very excitable people, and they will watch every move -that you make, and would shoot you if they could find you alone in the -brush or where they could do it without being detected. Now, I have -got horses, and will accompany you to any place you may wish to go, to -visit your friends or to settle up what business you may have to do. -But you must not be caught alone, for the French fear that you could -raise an army and cause much trouble. As your friends are in town, you -and they had better have a consultation here in my office, and see what -you can do." -</p> -<p>Accordingly, the Elders came into the consul's office, and together -with him said the best thing they thought could be done was that I -should go on board the little schooner <em>Ravai</em>, and that they get -it ready for sea as quickly as possible, so as to leave port before -any other vessel did, for if I did not go the fifty thousand francs -would be forfeited. The schooner was the vessel owned by the Saints -of Tubuoi, and commanded by Captain B. F. Grouard; it was bound for a -cruise among the Tuamotu group of islands before going to the island of -Raivavai, four hundred miles southeast of Tahiti, and outside of the -protectorate. It was thought that we could make the cruise intended, -and then go on to Raivavai without any danger of forfeiting the pledge. -Conformably with this conclusion, the vessel was got ready, and on the -17th we sailed from Papeete. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXXI"></a>CHAPTER XXXI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">LEAVING TAHITI UNDER THE ORDER OP BANISHMENT—SUPPLY OF PROVISIONS -EXHAUSTED—CAUGHT IN A CALM—SUFFERING FROM LACK OF FOOD—REACH -TUBUOI—GO ASHORE UPON INVITATION OF THE QUEEN—SAIL FOR RAIVAVAI—MEET -ELDER PRATT THERE—LEFT ALONE ON THE ISLAND—SAVAGE CHARACTER OF THE -NATIVES—THE GOVERNOR A FRIEND—VISIT FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE—PEOPLE -GENERALLY UNWILLING TO RECEIVE THE GOSPEL—COUNCIL DECIDES THAT I MUST -LEAVE THE ISLAND OR BE KILLED—A TIME OF EXCITEMENT—STORM PASSES FOR -AWHILE—BAPTIZE TWENTY PERSONS—NOTED CHIEF AND THE HEIRESS TO THE -THRONE JOIN THE CHURCH—MORE BITTERNESS AND EXCITEMENT—TWO PARTIES OF -NATIVES MEET TO ENGAGE IN BATTLE—MANAGE TO RECONCILE THEM AND PREVENT -BLOODSHED—FURTHER THREATS AGAINST THE MORMONS—SOME CHURCH MEMBERS -FEEL TO RETALIATE, BUT ARE RESTRAINED—PASSENGERS ARRIVE WITH FALSE -AND SCANDALOUS STORIES ABOUT THE MORMONS—PERSECUTION INCREASES—THE -FEW SAINTS ON THE ISLAND BECOME SORROWFUL AND DISCOURAGED—PROTESTANT -MINISTERS ADVISE EXPULSION OF THE SAINTS—RENEWAL OF THE FAITH AND ZEAL -OF THE CHURCH MEMBERS. -</p> -<p>AS we were leaving the Tahitian harbor we encountered a strong -headwind, and beat our way against wind and waves until our little -schooner became somewhat disabled. Provisions began to be scarce, and -everything seemed to be against us. Finally we changed our course, -heading for Tubuoi. When we got within about eighty miles of that -island, our food supply became exhausted; we had not one mouthful on -board, and were in a dead calm for some time. Then a gentle breeze -sprang up and wafted us to port, where we arrived on November 29th. -Before this relief, however, we suffered considerably from lack of food. -</p> -<p>I supposed that I had to remain on board the schooner until it was -ready to sail for Raivavai; but when Pitamai Vehene, the queen, heard -that I had been banished she came off in her own canoe and invited -me to go ashore with her, saying, "This is my island, and the French -have no right here. I will be responsible for all the trouble that may -arise." As the brethren and general authorities of the island thought -it was safe to do so, I accepted the invitation, going ashore in the -queen's canoe, and remained on the island till December 8th. Then I -boarded the little schooner again, and we started for Raivavai, where -we landed on the 9th, and found President Pratt in good health. -</p> -<p>On December 10th, Elder Pratt sailed away in the schooner, leaving me -to take his place in presiding over the interests of the Church on the -island. Brother Pratt's friends became my friends, and gave me food and -shelter. There were eight Church members on the island; all the rest of -the inhabitants, three hundred and eighty-three in number, opposed us, -many of them being the most savage and rudest I had met—in fact, they -were scarce removed from cannibalism. Some of them did not hesitate -to tell of their experiences in eating human flesh, and that they had -sacrificed infant children to their idols. They showed the coals before -their heathen gods, where they had roasted their babes. Some of them -felt proud to relate these things, saying it was in their heathenish -days, before the Gospel had come to their land, but now they thought it -very bad, and they had no disposition to repeat their evil deeds. -</p> -<p>I was shown to the house of Governor Fate, who received me very kindly. -He and his wife had received the Gospel on Anaa, and although he was -the legal heir to the throne, as they called it, through his joining -the Church he had lost much of his influence. But he was a very good -man, rendering me all the assistance in his power, while I visited -from house to house, trying to make the acquaintance of the people. I -went to every home on the island, endeavoring to inform the people on -the Gospel, but they were unwilling to give heed, and treated me with -marked indifference, often passing by and looking as surly as mad bulls. -</p> -<p>The island was not to exceed fourteen miles in circumference, its high -and very rugged peaks penetrating the clouds, which nearly always were -hanging over and about. The mountains were so steep as to defy all but -the wild goats, of which there were some hundreds among the cragged -rocks. It was said that the beginning of the existence of these animals -on the island was that a sea captain had turned three or four pairs of -them loose some years before, and they had increased to hundreds. -</p> -<p>Having satisfied my curiosity by traveling over and around the island, -visiting the ancient places of worship and seeing the heathen gods and -places of skulls and sacrifice, I again called at every house, trying -to become more friendly and sociable with the people; but the same -stolid feelings still prevailed. I attended their meetings, told them -my business in the land, and asked the privilege of preaching to them. -Part were favorable, and part were not. I baptized a few, and that -caused much excitement. -</p> -<p>A council was called to adopt some way by which the islanders could -get rid of Mormonism and the American plant, as they called me. Some -proposed to fasten the "plant" on a log, and tow it out to sea, where -the sharks would eat it, while others suggested burning or making a -roast of me. -</p> -<p>At last the matter was carried so far that it was decided that I must -leave the island or be killed. I learned that they had just about -decided on the latter course, so I hastened to go before the council to -try and allay their feelings, if possible, and appease their wrath, but -I found it utterly impossible to reason with them. My presence, instead -of having a conciliatory effect, created the wildest confusion. I was -confronted by a native called Tabate, who was a very stout, heavy set -man, and who exclaimed, "I will slay you!" At that moment my friend, -Governor Fate, stepped between us, and some of the more peaceably -disposed took hold of Tabate, while my friends insisted that I leave -the house to save bloodshed, saying that Tabate was a very desperate -man, but if I left the room they thought the council could restrain -him. Accordingly I withdrew with my friends. The council had a hot time -of it for awhile, but finally the more consistent party prevailed, so -that the matter passed over for the time being. Still, a bad feeling -rankled in their bosoms, and I could hear threats that the more rabid -party was going to have a fat missionary for a roast. -</p> -<p>Although this bitterness continued with many of the people, I baptized -some twenty souls, and blessed several infants. I also administered to -the sick, and, as I can now remember, all were healed but one child, -which died of hip disease, it being a mere skeleton when I was called. -</p> -<p>Other councils were held to see what could be done to get rid of the -"plant Mormonism, from America," before it spread over the island and -became master. But the friends and relatives of those who belonged to -the Church would oppose any harsh measures, saying, "Wait until our -missionaries of the English church come and we hear what they say." -</p> -<p>Now, Elder Pratt had baptized one man who was seventy-five or eighty -years of age. He was one of the first born, and his feet had never been -wet in salt water. His name was Tauteni (thousand), because he had -slain so many people in war, and he could count skulls in his mori or -place of skulls, with the best of them. He was well acquainted with the -taste of human flesh; had been a great high priest of the natives in -their heathenish days, and was supposed to have great influence with -the spirits of men. He had a grand-daughter who was said to be the -heir to the throne. This girl was brought forward by the old man for -baptism. He had reared her, and her parents being willing, I baptized -her. This created great excitement and another council was held, where -feelings ran so high that it was very hard to conciliate our opponents. -But the old man told them that it was his and her father's fault, and -not the missionary's, that she was baptized. The girl, whose name was -Teraa, also declared that it was by her wish and not mine that she -became a member of the Church. This cooled them down a little, but -occasionally local difficulties would arise, and the natives would take -sides and arm themselves for war. One time I heard the shrieks of the -women, and the warwhoops of and commands given among the men. -</p> -<p>Although, one day when I was stopping at a village called Tatake, I -had heard that there was going to be a battle fought, such rumors were -so frequent that I did not pay much attention thereto till I heard the -warwhoops and shouts. Then I jumped up, ran out, and beheld thirty to -forty men coming from the upper village, Anatomu. They were armed with -muskets, and were in their war costumes, dancing and going through the -manoeuvres peculiar to the natives just before going into an action. -At the same time another party was approaching from the inland village -of Atibona. These, too, were ready, and with their drums, whistles and -shrieks made quite a showing. Still there were some among them inclined -to conciliation rather than war. -</p> -<p>With my friends, I went out and plead with the two parties to be -reconciled, and finally we prevailed so that both bodies of men retired -without fighting, and a few of each party met and shook hands, some of -both parties seeming friendly to us for a time. -</p> -<p>For a short time after this we had comparative quiet, yet threats came -about the Mormons, and there was talk of taxing us for the support -of the Protestant church. Our brethren claimed rights in the school -and meeting houses, but were refused these; then they threatened to -burst open the houses, and came to me to get my sanction to do so; -but I could not consent to being a party to such a movement, knowing -that would give the enemy the pretext they wanted, in order to carry -out their threats. My party was not pleased with my position, and -threatened to break in the houses anyway, and assert their rights to -occupancy. I told them that if they did I would disown them; that they -could not be my brethren if they indulged in anything of the kind, as -it was for us to be on the side of peace and defense, and not to be -aggressors. Finally they said they would obey my counsel. Then things -passed along more smoothly for a time. -</p> -<p>Soon a schooner came from the island of Ruruta, with about one hundred -passengers on board. They brought the alleged news that all the -American Elders had left Tubuoi, and were going home. These passengers -also seemed to have been well posted in all the old slanders about the -Church, and with many new ones about the Elders. These slanders were -industriously circulated by the new comers, who said that the people -of Tubuoi were glad that the Mormons had left their land. From these -stories, and the persecutions the Saints had endured on the island, -the few Church members grew sorrowful and discouraged. When I went -from Anatomu to Tatake, I found two of the native brethren and two -sisters very sad, and as soon as we met they gave vent to their pent-up -feelings, wept bitterly, and said that I had to leave the island, and -they intended to follow me, no matter where I went. I told them not to -fear, and tried to pacify them as best I could. -</p> -<p>At our next appointment for a meeting there were but five out of -thirty attended. This seemed strange, for there always had been a -full attendance; but now everyone was sad and gloomy. The spirit of -mobocracy seemed to thrive on the filthy slanders that had come by -the Ruruta schooner. Meetings were called and threats made. Clouds of -darkness lowered and filled the atmosphere; the spirit of death seemed -to hover around, for the boisterousness of the people had given way to -a sullen, murderous disposition, more to be dreaded than when there was -abundance of noise and threats. -</p> -<p>At this time two young Protestant ministers came and made three or four -inflammatory speeches, telling the people that they had admitted a wolf -into the fold, and if they did not get rid of him the ministers would -not call again. "Drive him off, and pluck up that American plant, or -it will overshadow your land, and control you," said they. Thus the -wild and heathenish passion was fanned into a lively flame of renewed -persecution. Yet, strange to say, when the spirit of death seemed to -rest most heavily upon us, the brethren and sisters returned to me with -renewed zeal, and all but two men stood firm thereafter. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXXII"></a>CHAPTER XXXII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">PEOPLE GATHER AT A FEAST, AND TO DECIDE WHAT TO DO WITH THE -MORMONS—THREATS TO HAVE ROAST MISSIONARY—SAINTS HOLD PRAYER AND -TESTIMONY MEETING—KEPT AWAKE ALL NIGHT—COUNCIL OF NATIVES DECIDES -TO ROAST AND EAT ME—FIRE IS BUILT—MEN SENT TO DRAG ME TO THE -COUNCIL—PROMISES OF PRESIDENTS BRIGHAM YOUNG AND WILLARD RICHARDS COME -TO MY MIND—ALL FEAR IS BANISHED—SAINTS AND THEIR ENEMIES ORDERED -TO SEPARATE—ALL BUT TWO MORMONS STAND BY ME—SUBLIME COURAGE OF A -NATIVE AND HIS WIFE—THE CHARGE AGAINST ME—I APPEAL TO THE BIBLE, -BUT OUR ENEMIES REFUSE TO BE GUIDED BY THE LAW OF GOD—NOTIFIED OF -THE DECISION THAT I AM TO BE BURNED—SPIRIT OF THE LORD RESTS UPON ME -IN GREAT POWER, INSPIRING ME TO DEFY OUR ENEMIES—SPIRIT OF CONFUSION -ENTERS OUR FOES—THEY QUARREL AND FIGHT WITH EACH OTHER—DIFFICULTY IN -RESTRAINING CHURCH MEMBERS—DELIVERANCE WHICH THE LORD WROUGHT OUT FOR -ME—I AM ALLOWED TO PROCEED UNMOLESTED—MEET A MEMBER OF THE COUNCIL -WHICH CONDEMNED ME TO DEATH—HIS TESTIMONY THAT A PILLAR OF LIGHT -DESCENDED FROM HEAVEN AND RESTED ON ME, FILLING THEM WITH FEAR—NO MORE -ANTI-MORMON COUNCILS—NATIVES SHOW NO DISPOSITION TO RECEIVE THE -GOSPEL. -</p> -<p>ABOUT the 5th of May, 1852, the whole people were called to assemble -at the village of Tatake and prepare a feast, and at the same time to -decide definitely what to do with the Mormon minister and his pipis -(disciples). Everything was excitement. The young braves came armed -with muskets, shouting and yelling, saying they were going to have a -fat roast for tomorrow, while the old councillors, twenty-five or -thirty in number, came with slow, quiet steps and grave countenances, -and filed into the schoolhouse just at dark. Then the people gathered, -loaded down with roast pig, and fruit, fish and poultry. They kindled -fires and began shouting, singing and dancing. -</p> -<p>Soon the young braves were dancing around the house that they were in; -for by this time every member of the Church had come to one place. -The mob seemed to be fully enthused with the spirit of murder, as -they shouted, "Tomorrow we will have a fat young missionary for a -roast!" Just then they fired a salute, seemingly under the foundation -or sill of the house—a frame building. Then they commenced to tear -down the post and pole fence that enclosed the premises. This fence, -together with other wood, was piled up in a heap, as people in timbered -countries stack timber to burn it off their land. Then the natives -covered the wood with coral rock, as if they were going to burn a lime -kiln. They kept up a continual howl all the night long, firing their -guns, singing their war songs, and burning their camp-fires. -</p> -<p>While this was going on, we held prayer and testimony meeting, never -sleeping a moment the whole night. Many times we could hear the crowd -outside boasting what a fine, fat missionary roast they were going to -have enanahe (tomorrow.) -</p> -<p>Daylight came, and the village was all alive with people, as in -America on the Fourth of July, at a barbecue. Soon the feasting began. -The council had been all night in deciding what they would do with -the Mormons and their minister. The provisions at the feast were -apportioned to each village according to its numbers, and subdivided -among the families, so that a full allowance was made for the Mormon -pupu (party). They sent to me the portion of ten men, saying: "Here, -this is for you, Iatobo (James), eat it and get fat for the roast," -laughing contemptuously as they did so. By this time the whole people -were in high glee, eating, drinking, talking, laughing and jeering, as -if all hands were bent on pleasure only. When the feasting was over, -all became silent, and it seemed as though everybody had gone to sleep. -</p> -<p>By 1 o'clock p.m. all were astir again. Two great ruffians came into -my apartment, armed with long clubs. They said they had been sent to -order me before the council, and if I refused to come they were to drag -me there. Everybody seemed to be on the qui vive. As quick as thought, -the promises of President Brigham Young flashed through my mind; also -the promise of Dr. Willard Richards, in which he told me, in the name -of the Lord God of Israel, that though men should seek my life, yet I -should return in safety to the bosom of the Saints, having done good -and honor to myself and the Church and Kingdom of God. He also gave me -instructions what to do; this was when starting on my mission. The next -thought that came to my mind was: Have I forfeited those promises? The -answer that came quickly from the Spirit was no; and this drove away -all fear. Not a doubt was left in my mind. -</p> -<p>Without hesitation I arose and walked out to the beach, where the -people had assembled, the Saints following me. We passed by the log -heap to the assemblage, at the head of which stood twelve or fifteen -stout, athletic, young braves, with hair cut close. They were stripped -naked to their breechclouts, and were oiled. They stood with folded -arms, and certainly seemed formidable, although they were without -weapons, for they had a fierce and savage look about them that must be -seen to be realized in its effect. -</p> -<p>As we came near, the man Tabate stepped out from the crowd and said, -"All the Britons stand to the right hand with the sheep, and all the -Mormons stand to the left hand where the goats are." Everyone responded -to the order except two men from the Mormon party, who drew off to -themselves and were neutral. At that, one faithful Mormon man named -Rivae and his wife with an eight months old babe in her arms, stepped -forward, well knowing what the sentence was to be. This brave brother -said, "If you burn this man," pointing to the writer, "you burn me -first." His heroic wife stepped forward, holding her babe at arm's -length, and shouted, "I am a Mormon, and this baby is a Mormon, for -'nits make lice,' and you will have to burn all of us, or Mormonism -will grow again." I had told the people the story of the massacre at -Haun's Mill, Missouri, in which some of the mob shot the children who -had crept for safety under the bellows in the blacksmith shop, the -murderers saying, as they butchered the innocents, "Nits will make -lice"—Mormons in that instance. -</p> -<p>Rivae and his wife was ordered to stand back, while as a prisoner I was -called to take a position in the space between the two parties. As I -obeyed the command, I was confronted by Tabate, the spokesman or judge, -who had been the chief promoter of all the trouble from the beginning. -Said he: "Iatobo, you have caused the people of our land to sin by -having them to travel more than a Sabbath day's journey on the Sabbath. -You have also taught the people that God is a material God, and that is -not lawful to teach in our land." To this I answered, "Show me where -the teaching is wrong from the Bible." At the same time I opened the -Bible. A strong and determined voice told me to shut the book, and put -it up, for that was the law of God, and the decision of the landholders -and authorities was that I should be burned to death, and thus they -would rid the land of Mormonism. -</p> -<p>Pointing to the left and rear of the prisoner, to the log heap, which -was then at the zenith of its burning, with haughty demeanor and in an -exulting voice, Tabate said, "Look there at that fire. It is made to -consume the flesh off of your bones." In that moment the Spirit of the -Lord rested mightily upon me, and I felt as though I could run through -a troop and leap over a wall. "In the name of Israel's God," I said, -"I defy ten of your best men, yea, the host of you, for I serve that -God who delivered Daniel from the den of lions, and the three Hebrew -children from the fiery furnace!" -</p> -<p><img src="images/fire.jpg" id="fire" alt="Image: Fire Prepared to Roast the Missionary--Sentenced to Death."></p> -<p class="caption">Fire Prepared to Roast the Missionary—Sentenced to Death. -</p> -<p>Dear reader, it is impossible for me to describe the power, the cool -resignation, the unshaken confidence, and the might that overshadowed -my soul and body, that thrilled through every fibre of my existence. -For there was absolutely not one particle of fear or tremor in my -whole being. But I did feel thankful for that great and marvelous -deliverance, because in the very moment that I defied the host the -spirit of division rested upon the judge who had passed the sentence, -his counselors, and the executioners, insomuch that the counselors -faced the executioners, and they grappled with each other in a sharp -tussle. From that ensued a fight, until the whole people were mixed up -in it. -</p> -<p>Even two of our old tottering Mormons, Tautene and Hauty, came in with -their clubs, and were so enraged that they actually champed their -teeth together till the froth filled the corners of their mouths, as -I have seen it with mad dogs. Both of them had been great warriors -in their time, and could boast of having eaten human flesh, but at -this time they were so old and feeble that I took each of them by -the arms and forced them from the fight into the house, where I had -ordered all the Mormons to go. I told them to stay in the house or I -would excommunicate them from the Church. As they seemed to be almost -ungovernable, I gave Fute, a priest and a stout man, a club, and told -him to keep them in the house if he had to knock them down to do it, -while I went back to the battleground, picked up my Bible and hat, and -returned to find my party reconciled to their fate, and feeling more -like rejoicing than fighting. In an effort to free himself from her -clinging embrace Hauty had struck his wife with a club. This was before -I had got hold of him. She was trying to keep him out of the melee. The -woman was very lame for weeks after receiving the blow. -</p> -<p>During all this time our enemies quarreled and fought with clubs -and stones, pulled hair and screamed. They did not cease fighting -till sundown. Then, with many sore heads, and more sore limbs, they -dispersed, and I doubt very much if the majority of them knew what they -had been fighting for. After they left, a feeling of quiet and safety -pervaded the village, especially in and about our residence, such as -we had not before known on the island, and for weeks everything was -strangely peaceful. People who once seemed surly and defiant, now had -a tame and subdued expression in their countenances, and appeared to -prefer passing by unnoticed rather than otherwise. -</p> -<p>Some two months later, I was traveling alone in the timber, and at a -short turn in the road I chanced to meet one of the old counselors who -decided that I should be burned. We were close together before we saw -each other. At sight of me he turned and ran as hard as he could, and -I, without any particular object in view, gave chase and ran him down. -I seized him by the neck, and asked why he ran from me and why he was -afraid of me. Said he: "Your God is a God of power, and I was afraid -to meet His servant." I inquired how he knew that my God was a God of -power, and why they had not burned me when they had decided to do so. -He answered: "At the moment that you defied us there was a brilliant -light, or pillar of fire, bore down close over your head. It was as -bright as the sun. We remembered reading in the Bible about Elijah -calling fire down from heaven so that it consumed the captains and -their fifties, and we thought that you had prayed to your God of power, -and that He had sent that fire to burn us and our people if we harmed -you. The young men did not see the light. They were going to burn you, -and we tried to stop them. So we got into a fight. Now we all know that -you are a true servant of God, and we do not like to meet you, out of -fear." -</p> -<p>From what I was able to learn, that feeling was shared by the whole -community, and I was treated with great respect ever afterwards. I -felt freer and safer when alone than ever before. Indeed, there never -was another council meeting called to devise a way to get rid of the -Mormons from that island, while I remained there. But for all that, the -islanders did not want to learn the Gospel. Yet ever afterward, when -they feasted I was always remembered with a very liberal portion of -the very best they had. I do not remember baptizing another soul there -after that event. There I remained, and part of the time I fished, also -hunted the wild chickens that abounded in the mountains—fowls of the -common Dominique variety, which had grown wild in the fastnesses of the -hills, and could fly equal to the sagehen or prairie chicken. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXXIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">LONG TIME WITHOUT NEWS FROM HOME—LETTER FROM ELDER B. F. -GROUARD—RELEASED FROM MY MISSIONARY LABORS IN THE ISLANDS—LITTLE -OPPORTUNITY TO LEAVE RAIVAVAI—NATIVES BUILD A SCHOONER—FAST AND -PRAY TO LEARN WHETHER I SHOULD SAIL ON THE VESSEL—THE ANSWER—SAIL -FOR RAPIA—DRIVEN BACK TO RAIVAVAI—MAKE A NEW START—ARRIVE AT -RAPIA—RIDICULOUS IDEA OF THE PEOPLE CONCERNING A MORMON ELDER—I AM -FORBIDDEN TO GO ASHORE, ON PAIN OF DEATH—FEELING IS MODIFIED SOMEWHAT, -AND I GO ASHORE—BATTLE BETWEEN THE NATIVES—AN OLD MAN GIVES ME -FOOD—ATTEND A MEETING, GET PERMISSION TO SPEAK A FEW WORDS AND AM -ORDERED FROM THE ISLAND—INCREASE OF SENTIMENT OF TOLERATION—INVITED -TO SUPPER AT THE GOVERNOR'S—STRANGE CUSTOM OF WOMEN WAITING ON -MEN—RATHER THAN FOLLOW IT, I SUBMIT TO BEING CALLED A HEATHEN. -</p> - - -<p>WHEN I had spent seven months alone on the island of Raivavai, without -any news from the outer world or perhaps it would be more proper to -say inner world—for this island and Rapia are as near out of the -world as any portion of it can be—I began to wonder when I could hear -some tidings of the brethren on the other islands. I had not had an -opportunity to leave Raivavai in all the time that I had been there; -nor did I have the slightest idea when it would be possible for me -to return to the land of my nativity, for the natives told me that -within their memory there had been seven years at a time when they had -not so much as seen a sail, and it was not infrequent for from one to -three years to pass without a vessel calling. Therefore it will not be -thought strange when I say that the time became very monotonous. -</p> -<p>Here is an extract from a letter received just before I did leave the -island; it was from Elder B. F. Grouard, counselor to President Pratt -in the presidency of the mission, and bears date of Papeete, Tahiti, -April 18, 1852: -</p> -<p>"DEAR BROTHER JAMES:—I embrace the present opportunity of writing you -a line, perhaps for the last time before leaving for California, though -I hope we may be able to arrange matters so that you will be permitted -to come here and make one of our party across. The governor is now -absent, down at Raiatea, consequently nothing can be done about your -case until he returns. * * * * -</p> -<p>"Wednesday, 21st.—Mr. Kelly has sent for you on his own -responsibility. You must be careful and not go on shore on the -protectorate islands, but be sure and come, or rather, he has -authorized me to send for you. -</p> -<p>"I have the honor to be, your brother in Christ, and fellow laborer in -the Gospel, </p><p class="right">B. F. GROUARD." -</p> -<p>From this it will be seen that I was released from further labors in -that mission. I also was without any means in sight to get away from -the land that had been so fruitful of troubles to me. It is true that -the natives had a schooner of twenty or twenty-five tons burden in -course of construction, but they were so uncertain and tardy in their -movements that there was really no dependence to be placed in anything -of the kind that they undertook. Indeed, it was doubtful whether they -would complete the vessel at all, though six or eight weeks was ample -time in which to finish it. Besides, they were liable to get into a -quarrel that would cause delay for many months. Again, so frail was -the boat that it did not seem that it ever could be safe to go to sea. -Nearly every stave and brace was made from the bark of the buru tree, -and twisted by hand. The anchor was a chunk of wood with old scraps of -iron spiked on to it, and for a chain the same kind of material was -used as for the stays and braces. The galley was only a square box of -two and a half feet, filled with soil and tied down to the deck with a -bark rope; and as to the helm, it had to be held by hand, taking two or -three men to manage it, especially in rough weather. The compass was -no better than a tin plate; in fact, it could not be of any service -whatever—and the sails were almost rotten. But at last the boat was -launched, and leaked so badly that it did not seem possible to make it -of service; but the natives persevered and baled it out, and it was -soaked up until they considered it safe. -</p> -<p>This boat being built, it seemed to offer a possible means for me to -see white men's land again. There was no one for me to advise with, the -very men who had planned my destruction being the owners and masters -of the craft. The voyage they anticipated taking was said by them to -be seven hundred miles, to the island of Rapia, and from thence a like -distance to Tahiti, in all fourteen hundred miles. The food and fresh -water supply was also very uncertain. The water had to be carried in -large gourds and cocoanuts. Nor was this all that had to be considered. -In those parts there are dense fogs and rainstorms, for days together, -so that navigation is very hazardous where there is only the sun, moon, -and stars to depend upon, and these obscured. -</p> -<p>The reader will perceive the gravity of the situation that confronted -the writer when he came to decide what to do. As the time drew near for -the boat's departure, I retired to a lonely place in the woods, and -there fasted and prayed for three days, fasting all the time and going -to my retreat to pray as often in the three days as I thought proper. -This was done in order to ascertain from the divine Source whether or -not I should take the risk of going on that vessel at that time. The -answer came plain and distinct to my understanding, though not in words -to the natural senses, yet to my entire satisfaction that all would be -well if I went. From that moment I hungered and thirsted, but had not -done so before in all the time that I had fasted. -</p> -<p>Accordingly, on September 22, 1852, I engaged passage on the Raivavai -schooner, bound for Rapia. On the 23rd I went aboard, and we sailed -out, but some of the rigging gave way, and we were bound to return for -repairs. On the 24th we tried again, passing out of the harbor with a -light breeze, at 5 o'clock a.m. There were sixty-two souls on board, -all seasick. On the 26th and 27th there was a dead calm. At daylight -on the 28th we found ourselves on the opposite side of the island and -very near it, surrounded by hundreds of great whales. Our navigators -were so confused that they did not know their own island until they -went ashore. Again the rigging gave way, and we had to put into port to -repair it and to replenish our food supply. -</p> -<p>On October 4th we sailed once more, and with a strong and fair wind on -the 9th we reached the island of Rapia, which has a high and abrupt -coast with a good harbor, but a very narrow passage thereto, in which -we were hailed by a fisherman who inquired about the white man on -board. When the crew told him it was a Mormon Elder, he hastened to the -shore, ran to the village and told the people that a Mormon Elder was -on the schooner. The people had never seen a Mormon, but had heard the -most ridiculous stories about us. They became excited, and frightened -as well, for they had heard that Mormons had cloven feet and shells -on their backs, and were some kind of mongrel between man and beast. -They also had been told that the Mormons were so lustful that it was -very difficult for the females to escape from them. This being the -only information the people had about the Latter-day Saints, it was -no wonder that the men armed themselves with muskets and fish spears, -and came to the landing or lay in ambush, the females keeping at a -respectful distance, while the more brave and fearless ventured to come -on board, inspect the "animal," and forbid him to set his foot on shore -on pain of death. Strange as this statement of affairs may appear, it -is nevertheless true. -</p> -<p>At length a number of the people came on board and spied around as if -to discover the peculiar features of a Mormon Elder, and they, with -my friends, thought that possibly it was safe for me to go ashore; -accordingly I went in the first canoe. As we neared the landing, six or -seven men, some with muskets and some with fishing spears, rose up out -of the brush and tall grass, and peeked and pried, as they afterwards -said, to discern the cloven foot. As they could not discover the -deformities which they had expected to find, they said, "Why, he looks -like any other white man or minister; we do not want to kill him." -There were others who, however, acted very surly, and would not speak -nor shake hands, but told my friends that I must leave their island or -I would be killed. Finally we were permitted to go up to the village, -where the people all ran together to see the stranger. None dared -invite him into their houses, so he took his seat out on a log, while -they feasted. His friends joined with the feasting parties, thinking -it would be better for him if they were sociable with the people and -acquainted them with the supposed monster's customs and habits, as also -with what he had been teaching the people. -</p> -<p>Two weeks before we landed, the inhabitants of this village had had a -battle with the people of another village across the island, and some -of both parties had been killed, while others were yet suffering from -their wounds. This, I suppose, had something to do with the spirit of -murder and bloodshed that hung so thickly around the place. When the -people finished feasting, one old man brought me some food on a banana -leaf, and then slipped away as if he did not wish anybody to see him. -To me it seemed a case of root hog, or die, or at least it was to eat -or starve, so the kind offer was thankfully received. I found the -admonition of Paul, wherein he said, eat what is set before you, and -ask no questions, for conscience, sake appropriate in this case. -</p> -<p>The bell was soon rung for meeting, and the people quickly came -together. I met with them, and at the conclusion of their services -asked the privilege of acquainting them with my business in their -country; for myself and native friends were the first Mormons who had -ever been there, and to save the necessity of anyone else coming I felt -it my bounden duty to offer them the Gospel, as it has to be preached -in every land and to every people. I succeeded in saying a few words, -and received for my pains an order from the presiding priest to go out -of the house and leave the island. -</p> -<p>Although many of the people seemed to sanction the course of the -priest, there were a few who did not seem to favor it; but to save -trouble I left the house. The people then began to discuss the order -and to question its justice, as we had been mild and made no display of -obstinacy. At last they concluded that the Mormon was not quite so bad -as he had been represented, and that he might come into the governor's -and have supper at a table which the Protestant ministers had furnished -for their own accommodation, and where they had left some dishes and a -chair; so I was comfortably seated at the table and the food brought -on. Quite a handsome young girl of about sixteen stood by the table, -and as soon as a blessing was asked, she, with her fingers, tore the -roasted chicken to pieces, stripped the flesh from off the bones, and -held this to my mouth, saying, "There!" -</p> -<p>I drew back a little, as that was so strange a custom that I did not -appreciate it. The girl was quite dark complexioned, and some one -observed, "She is so dark that he thinks she is dirty. Let her get some -soap and wash before him, and then see if he will eat." As the people -seemed so strange in their actions, I thought there was some trick to -be played, so I waited until she had washed her hands and, in obedience -to orders, stepped up, saying that her hands were clean, "Look, that is -my color, and not dirt." Still I felt dubious about taking the bait. -Then she was told to step back, and another young lady was called for. -This one was quite fair, with rather light brown or auburn hair. They -said "Now he will eat, for he will think she is white," but I still -refused the courtesy. Then some one who was standing by said, "Let him -feed himself, like a heathen." At this the master of ceremonies said, -"Why do you not eat?" I tried to explain to them that it seemed to me -to be wrong to require so much of the females—that they should prepare -the food and then stand or sit by and put it into a man's mouth. -"Well," said he, "she was the first to sin, and she ought to wait on -the man." -</p> -<p>At this an old man who lay flat on his stomach with the Bible before -him, opened the book to where Paul said that when he was in Rome he did -as the Romans did. The old man had his hair bushed, and, apparently, -the very brand of heathenism in his face. I would have thought as much -of looking on a brush heap or in a muskrat house for intelligence as to -have anticipated anything smart from him. He said, "My friend, do you -believe in the Bible?" I said, "Yes, and it is good to do as it says." -"Then," said he, "you are a liar; for Paul said that when he was in -Rome he did as the Romans did, and now you are in Rapia you will not do -as the Rapians do; for it is our way for the women to put the food into -our mouths. That is the way we do in this land." -</p> -<p>Sure enough, I learned that this was true; for when the meal is ready -it is brought into the room in baskets, and the male portion of the -household get down on their hands and knees, while the females pick -the bones from the fish, pork or poultry, as the case may be, and with -their fingers put the flesh into their masters' mouths. To conclude -with, the woman dips her hand into a dish of water, and wipes his -mouth. Then he moves away, and the wife and daughter take the scraps, -or what may be left. It is considered as great a shame on that island -for a man to put food into his mouth as it is in China for a Mongolian -to have his queue cut off. But to me it seemed so ridiculous that my -stay there was too short to make it seem even human. I did not adopt -the custom, preferring to be called a heathen by those who did practice -it. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXXIV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">DETERMINE TO PREACH TO THE PEOPLE—REFUSED A HOUSE—HOLD AN OPEN-AIR -MEETING—STRANGE CONGREGATION—SIX OTHER MEETINGS—VISIT A NATIVE -KING—HE COMMANDS ME TO LEAVE—I DO SO IN ORDER TO AVOID BEING PUT -TO DEATH—WATERMELONS AND OTHER VEGETABLES—NATIVE TRADITION OF THE -PEOPLING OF THE ISLANDS—VISIT OF A PROTESTANT MINISTER—SAIL FOR -TAHITI—IN A HEAVY STORM—PRAYERS BY FRIGHTENED NATIVES—I AM ASKED TO -PRAY WITH THEM, BUT DECLINE TO FOLLOW THEIR METHODS—REACH THE HARBOR -OF PAPEETE—AMERICAN CONSUL OBTAINS PERMISSION FOR ME TO LAND—GO -TO WORK WITH A CARPENTER—WARNED NOT TO BE ALONE LEST I SHOULD BE -KILLED—WATCHED BY GEN D' ARMES—TROUBLE AT ANAA, AND ARREST OF NATIVE -MORMONS—THESE ARE BROUGHT TO PAPEETE—HOW THEY GOT LETTERS TO ME, AND -THEIR REPLIES—MY FORMER PERSECUTORS OF RAIVAVAI COME TO ME FOR ADVICE, -AND I RETURN GOOD FOR EVIL. -</p> -<p>AS I felt the great need of reform among the people of Rapia, I tried -again to get the privilege of preaching to them in their house, but -found them unyielding on that point. There were three native brethren -and their wives who had come with me. I was impressed that we ought -to make yet another trial to leave our testimony with the islanders, -so we went out by the side of their meeting house, which was a frame -building set up on blocks some eighteen inches or two feet from the -ground, the dirt floor being thatched with dry grass. We stood within -ten feet of the house and commenced to sing. Before we were ready to -read our text, it seemed that everybody in the village had come around, -but not in the ordinary way. They crowded into the meeting house and -some filled the windows, while others lay down and poked their heads -out under the sills of the house; still others got down on their hands -and knees some five or six rods off and crawled along through the -shrubbery, taking hold of the brush as they drew near, lying flat down -and drawing themselves along, taking sticks and poking the weeds aside -so they could get a better view. With this most singular congregation -before us, and the most perfect order (for it seemed as if there was -not a whisper,) we read a chapter in the Bible—the third of Matthew, -I believe—then preached on faith, repentance, and baptism for the -remission of sins. At the dismissal of our services the whole assembly -withdrew, and after that I had lots of food, such as it was. -</p> -<p>We held seven meetings on that little fragment of terra firma, and -visited the king in the west village. We found the royal personage at -home, sitting Indian fashion on his couch, half naked. He appeared to -be a man of unusually strong character, very surly, and did not want -to talk. When I attempted to tell him the object of my mission to -his country, his neck swelled out, and he began blowing through his -nostrils like a mad bull. He said, "You leave my country." By this time -my native friends discovered that danger was gathering around us, and -told me that we must not delay one moment, but must get away as quickly -as possible, for that village had suffered defeat at the hands of the -people of the other village, and we could not be friendly with the king -and his followers if we were to the others. -</p> -<p>We got away, and afterwards it developed that my friends had foreseen -a peril that I had not fully understood, for when the king said we had -better get away from his country, that was his ultimatum, and if we had -remained longer every one of us would have been slain, as the people -were preparing for the slaughter. -</p> -<p>On our retreat I observed a castor oil bean tree loaded with beans. -Its trunk was as large as a man's body. I began to inspect it when my -friends called out, "Hurry up, or we will every one be killed," so we -hastened to more friendly and hospitable parts, where we came across -a large gourd, or calabash vine, and a watermelon patch. Never having -seen anything of the kind on any other island where I had been, my -inquisitive propensities were set to work ascertaining how those things -came there. Were they a spontaneous growth? If not, where did they come -from, since this little island is so remote from all others, and the -natives tell me that white men seldom visit them? I inquired of the -people where they got the seed of the vegetables named. "Why," said -they, "our forefathers brought them here." -</p> -<p>"Where did they come from?" -</p> -<p>The reply was, "From the rising of the sun." On hearing this, I asked -from what country, and was answered, "We do not know. It was a big -land, so big they did not know its boundary. It was a land of food, and -of great forests of big trees, and great fresh waters that were filled -with fish." -</p> -<p>I next inquired, "How came they to leave such a good land?" The -response was in these words: "We do not know, only they said they got -lost in the fog, and were several days without seeing the sun. Then -the strong winds came and blew them over here, and their vessel was -wrecked on this island. They never could get back to the lands of their -forefathers, so they stayed here. They increased so fast that all could -not live on this land, so they made canoes and tried to get back, but -the winds were against them, that they were carried away to the west, -and for a long time those left here supposed the others were lost in -the sea; but after a time it was learned that there were other lands -where the sun goes down. Then our people made canoes and went to them, -and we think that is the way these islands became peopled, for they are -the same kind of people as ourselves." -</p> -<p>"Have you any other knowledge of your forefathers?" -</p> -<p>"No, we do not know anything but that which the fathers have said. They -used to say that if they could get back to their fatherland they could -find metal to make fish spears and hooks with. When the first white -men's ship came in sight we tried to go to it, thinking we could get -some fishing tackle therefrom. We thought that vessel must have come -from our fathers' land. But the wind was so strong we could not get to -the ship, and it was a long time before another one came. Finally we -reached one, and got such things as our fathers had told us about." -</p> -<p>Read the Book of Mormon, page 427, 63d chapter, 5th to 9th verses. Was -the ship that Hagoth built the same that was wrecked on the island of -Rapia, South Pacific Ocean, about 25 deg. south latitude, and, as near -as I can find out from French charts, time reckoned from Paris, France, -in longitude 140 west? -</p> -<p>The reader may form his own conclusions, as I return to my narrative -of our stay on the island. When we had returned from our visit to the -surly king, one man by the name of Mesearee opened his house for us to -hold meeting in, but very few attended with us. -</p> -<p>October 17th, the bark <em>John Williams</em> called with one Mr. Platt, -a Protestant minister, on board. This clergyman was a man of fine -address. He came ashore and preached, then sprinkled all the infant -children of the village. Though very pleasant, he refused to talk with -me in the Tahitian language, saying that if we did so on the Scriptures -it would cause a split among the people. I insisted that he show the -natives the scripture for his mode of baptism, but he declined to do -that, and boarded his vessel and sailed away. -</p> -<p>October 27, 1852, we sailed for Tahiti. On the 29th we encountered a -very heavy storm, so severe that we lost all of our sails, and had to -lash two of our strong men on deck with slack rope so that they might -fasten down the hatch and companion ways. The rest of us had to go -below, for the sea was lashed into a foamy mass as white as snow. It -did not seem possible for us to survive the terrible ordeal. As in -almost all similar cases, the wicked will pray—that is in times of -great danger, if at no other time—so the natives who went below, some -fifty-nine in number, divided themselves into three praying parties. -One of these occupied the bow, one stationed itself amidships, and one -was in the stern of the vessel. Then a man in one party would pray at -the top of his voice, and so on with each party in turn. Thus they -prayed, passing the word back and forth, as long as the sea raged in -its fury. -</p> -<p>In all of our travels together, those in charge of the vessel had never -honored me with a request to attend prayers, or once called me to ask a -blessing, but now, in our great peril, one of the old priests found his -way in the dense darkness to my berth, and said: "Iatobo, you pray to -your God of power, to spare us, that we may not die in this great sea." -I told him no, for I had done my praying on land, before I had boarded -the schooner, and now I had all that I could do to hold myself in the -berth, that I might not be thrown out and killed. He returned with -a grunt, and commanded the rest to pray. These conditions continued -for six or seven hours, when the wind abated, and the little schooner -pitched and rolled as if she would go to the bottom. -</p> -<p>November 1, 1852, we sighted a reef called Hereheretue. On the 9th -we came in view of Metia, and on the 10th we went into the harbor of -Papeete, Tahiti. It was on the 11th when, through the intervention -of Mr. Kelly, American consul, I got permission to land. The same -gentleman gave me an introduction to one Charles Hill, a carpenter, -who was rather a backslider from the Mormon Church. Still, he was very -friendly, and said that if I would assist him in carpenter work he -would board and lodge me until I could get a passage home. Mr. Kelly -counseled me not to be alone anywhere, as a watch would be kept over me -every minute I was on the island. He said he would not be responsible -if I preached or traveled out of the town, as I was liable to be shot -the moment that I was found alone. Said he, "The French are more bitter -towards you than ever. They seem to think you would turn everything -upside down if you were allowed to run at large. I have never seen -them so excited over anything as they are about you. They are actually -afraid of you, for fear that if you were permitted to go among the -people again they would revolt at once, and there would be another -war." He also said that he would arrange matters so that I could go -with Mr. Hill to and from his work, and if we kept close together, he -thought it all safe, as Mr. Hill was well known; but that I had better -stop in his office till he could see the governor, and I could go out -to Mr. Hill's in the evening with him, as he lived in the suburbs of -the town. Mr. Kelly also told me there had been more trouble at Anaa, -and a number of our people from there were in prison on Tahiti; and -further, that I was held responsible for all the trouble on that island. -</p> -<p>It having been arranged for me to stop with Mr. Hill, he called for -me in the evening, and next morning I went to work with him at his -business. In the meantime the news of my arrival on Tahiti spread very -fast, and the sons of the prisoners from Anaa, who had followed their -parents in disguise, and could visit the prisoners one at a time, put -pencil and paper into their hands on the sly, so that they could write -to me. Five or six of the young men dressed themselves as the regular -"toughs" of the town, and met Mr. Hill and me, one of them bearing a -note in his hand. When they got near us they began to dance and sing -in a very rude manner, acting as if they would not give any of the -road to us. Then they pushed the one with the note against me, and -as he passed it into my hand the rest circled clear around so as to -obscure me from two gen d' armes who followed us day and night. Then -the young men would shout and laugh as if they had done it to annoy me -in particular. Thus I received letters from the natives. The young men -would meet us again, and I would pass to them the answers, while they -would appear to the looker-on to be running against me purposely, to -insult and annoy me. Sometimes I would try to show my displeasure by -scolding at them. In this way a regular correspondence was carried on -between the unfortunate prisoners and myself, during my stay. In that -manner I learned that there were twenty-three of them in prison, there -being ten Elders, five Priests, four Teachers and four Deacons. On the -12th there were eight more prisoners brought from the island of Anaa, -six brethren and two sisters. All of the thirty-one were put to work on -the steep side of a mountain, to make a road up to a fort. The hillside -was so steep that some of them fell and were hurt quite seriously. -Sometimes the prisoners were beaten by the guards that attended them. -Their provisions were very poor, and they had not even enough of that. -</p> -<p>I will again mention my former persecutors of the island of Raivavai, -with whom I traveled to Tahiti, for they came to me in great trouble, -and said their schooner had been so badly damaged in the storm we had -been in that the French had condemned it, and would not allow them to -go to sea again. They were four hundred miles from home, without money, -provisions or friends. They very humbly asked my advice, which I gave -freely, telling them to state their case to the French authorities, -and these would be bound to find a way to have them returned home and -give them support until they did so. This pleased them very much; they -seemed to appreciate the counsel of one whom they had sat in judgment -and helped to pass sentence upon, ordering him to be burned. Doubtless -some of them had aided in gathering the fuel to make the fire for the -burning. I condoled with them as much as the conditions would admit -of; and when I came to part with them they seemed to feel, and in fact -said, that I had been a true friend to them. They wept as though they -were my near relatives. Thus returning good for evil brought blessings. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXXV"></a>CHAPTER XXXV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">WATCHED CLOSELY BY GEN D' ARMES—EXPERIENCE WHEN AT PRAYER—TAKE DINNER -WITH REV. MR. HOWE—DINING WITH A CATHOLIC BISHOP—IMPATIENCE OF THE -GOVERNOR—LEAVE TAHITI ON THE ABYSSINIA—CURIOSITY OF PASSENGERS AND -SAILORS—DIFFICULTY IN GETTING OUT OF THE HARBOR—HEAR OF MORE TROUBLE -AT ANAA—CAPTAIN'S COMMENT ON MORMON BOOKS—A WATERSPOUT—CROSSING -THE EQUATOR—ENCOUNTER A TERRIBLE STORM—A TIDAL WAVE—SHIP SPRINGS A -LEAK—PANIC ON BOARD—ALL BANDS TO THE PUMPS—STOPPING A LEAK—FAIR -WEATHER AGAIN. -</p> -<p>SO far as my own conduct was concerned, now that I was again on -the island of Tahiti, I continued with Mr. Hill. Two gen d' armes -followed us or hung around where we were at work all day, and at night -tramped about the house where we lived. At daylight the night guards -disappeared in the brush. One morning I stepped three or four rods into -the brush, for my morning devotions, and as I was engaged with my eyes -closed I heard a rustling in the leaves. Supposing it was the hogs that -ran around there, I paid no attention until I was through, when I saw -two officers standing within fifteen feet of and in front of me, gazing -straight into my face. They were heavily armed, but did not interfere -with me, so I returned to the house, while they mounted the fence and -sat there till we went to work, when they followed us up as usual. -</p> -<p>During this time I met with Mr. Howe, the presiding official of the -Protestant mission on the islands. He appeared to feel very sympathetic -toward me, and invited me to take dinner with him and his good old -lady. I accepted the invitation, and he made me a present of a Tahitian -Bible, also of a Tahitian and English dictionary. He is the same Mr. -Howe spoken of before, when he was so radically opposed to me, but -now he seemed charitable and kind. After I left his house, and was -passing along in sight of the Catholic bishop's office, the bishop -sent a servant after me, inviting me in to dine and wine. Accordingly, -I called, finding him a very polite gentleman. He met me at the door -of his library, took me by the hand and courteously led me to a seat, -then set out some wine, saying he was very sorry that he had but one -glass of wine in the room, though he set out two glasses, but poured -all the wine into one, which he presented to me. At that moment the -saying of the Lord Jesus came to my mind, to be harmless as doves but -wise as serpents. I adopted as much French politeness as I was capable -of, divided the wine into the two glasses, presented him the one with -the most wine in, telling him that I could not think of drinking -alone—that he must join me or I should decline his very kind offer. I -thought that if he could stand to drink the largest half of the wine, I -could afford to try the least half, and as I preferred him to drink his -first, I delayed until he had swallowed it, when I drank to his health. -We had a sociable chat, and he insisted on my stopping to supper, when -he would have plenty of wine. I told him I could not, as my attendants, -the gen d' armes, were waiting patiently for me. He next presented -me two books, telling me that they would show how the priesthood had -descended from Peter down to the present pope. The books being in the -French language, were of no use to me, so I bade him good-bye. -</p> -<p>I learned from Mr. Kelly that the governor was impatient at my stay -on the island, so I disposed of everything that I could spare, raised -sixty dollars thereby, and prepared to sail on the English ship -<em>Abyssinia</em>, from Sydney, Australia, and commanded by Captain George -Gordon. -</p> -<p>November 24, 1852, I boarded the <em>Abyssinia</em>, paying sixty dollars -steerage passage to San Francisco, California. When I got on the deck, -the seamen and some of the passengers crowded around me, and stared at -me as if I had been a wild beast. When I saluted them with, "Gentlemen, -how are you?" they looked at each other as much as to say, "Shall we -return the compliment?" At last one of the sailors took off his hat, -made a bow, and said, "Please sir, can you speak English?" I answered, -"Yes, sir, a little." The next question was, "And are you a Mormon -Elder?" My reply was, "Yes," and was followed with, "Well, pardon me, -but I thought a Mormon Elder had a cloven foot and a shell on his back, -and I expected that you would be brought aboard in a case, as I have -been told that the Mormons were a kind of half beast, fierce, and wild." -</p> -<p>Some of the others said that they had had the same ideas. A third party -exclaimed, "What d—d lies they have told us! We have been anxious -to see this Elder ever since we heard there was one coming on board, -and we thought to see you brought in a big cage. We cannot see any -difference in you and common men." So much for wild and slanderous -stories afloat in those days and in that part of the world. -</p> -<p>Shortly the vessel was got under way, but just as we entered the -passage the wind slackened so that we came very near being crushed -against the reef. Five boats from a French warship came to our aid, as -we had cast anchor to save ourselves, and the Frenchmen towed us back -to a safe location, where we lay until the 26th. -</p> -<p>We tried it again on the 27th, and as we passed out of the harbor we -went close to the French warship, which was weighing anchor. On the -deck stood the Catholic bishop, who held up his cross and made signs. -He said there was trouble in Anaa again, and he was going there. -</p> -<p>After we sailed, the captain of the <em>Abyssinia</em> asked me to lend -him some books on Mormonism. I let him take the Book of Mormon and -the Doctrine and Covenants. He returned them on the 29th, saying, -"I believe the books and your prayers have made me sick." He did -not trouble me any more about Mormonism, yet treated me with proper -respect, as a rule. -</p> -<p>There were several male and female passengers on board, a portion of -the latter being of the lewd class, judging from their actions; and -the former were not much better. I loaned all the books that I had to -passengers and seamen. Nearly all on board treated me in a courteous -manner. -</p> -<p>On November 30th a waterspout passed close to our ship, causing much -excitement. Its roar was frightful, as it carried a very great column -of water up into the air, and spread it out into the clouds like a -whirlwind on land, but on so much larger scale as to be a dread to -seamen. -</p> -<p>December 1st we sighted what the captain called Flint's Island. It was -large and high, and appeared to be inhabited. On the 10th we crossed -the equator, where the seamen had some sport at the expense of several -of the passengers who had not crossed it before. They made preparations -for Neptune, and told many stories of his pranks with those who dared -cross his path without paying penance, or treating the ship's crew. -</p> -<p>On the 20th we encountered a terrific storm, which carried away most of -our sail, and left us badly damaged. On Christmas day we had something -like a tidal wave in a calm sea. The wave was so great that it swept -away the main topgallant sail and the jib boom. Two seamen were carried -below for dead. The ship sprung a leak in the bow, and the peril became -so great that all the seamen and the male passengers were called to -lend a hand. It being in the night, the consternation was so intense -that passengers were on the deck in their night clothes, screaming. -Some shouted to pray, and others did pray with all the fervor at their -command, especially when the carpenter, reporting that the vessel -was parting in her beams, called for men to turn the windlass, and -for kettles of hot tar, blankets, caulking, chisels, and anything to -make repairs. As the wind began to freshen, the boat headed before -it, without any regard to course. The next order was, "Down with the -hatches!" -</p> -<p>"Aye, aye, sir." -</p> -<p>"Then sound her." -</p> -<p>"Aye, sir." -</p> -<p>"How is she?" -</p> -<p>"Gaining water, sir." -</p> -<p>It was hurry to the pumps, and the carpenter was asked, "How is she?" -</p> -<p>"All right, sir." -</p> -<p>"Heave away at the windlass! Keep the pumps going!" -</p> -<p>The carpenter had been pinning timber across the breach, and with -windlass power preventing if possible the seam from spreading any more -until he could make it safe. Blankets were dipped in hot tar and driven -into the parting. With these efforts and by keeping the pumps going -steadily for eight hours, the boat was partly freed from the rolling -sea, and at length was patched up and put on her course. The captain -then said that his greatest fear had been that, as his cargo was coal, -the friction of the fuel and the water coming in below would cause the -cargo to take fire. When we got righted and on our course, we had light -winds, and cold and wet weather until the voyage was ended. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXXVI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">ARRIVE AT SAN FRANCISCO—A WRECKED SHIP—THE ABYSSINIA -CONDEMNED—GATHERING WRECKAGE—DRUNKEN SAILORS—MY TRUNK HELD FOR -HOSPITAL FEES—GO ASHORE, WHERE ALL IS CHANGED AND STRANGE—MY -DILAPIDATED APPEARANCE—SEEK GUIDANCE OF THE LORD—WANDER -ALMOST IN DESPAIR—MEET AN OLD FRIEND—FIND A HOME—MY TRUNK -RELEASED—MEET ELDERS GOING ON MISSIONS—WELL TREATED BY SAINTS AND -STRANGERS—PROVIDENCES OF THE LORD—OUTWARD-BOUND ELDERS ENTRUST MONEY -TO ME FOR THEIR FAMILIES—ENGAGE TO CARRY MAIL TO LOS ANGELES—ON A -STEAMER FOR SAN PEDRO—TAKEN SEVERELY ILL. -</p> -<p>ON January 8th, 1853, we passed into the bay of San Francisco, where -we came close to a big New York clipper ship, fast on a rock in the -passage. While we were looking at the vessel, the tide came in and -lifted it up; then it dropped back and was smashed as if it were only a -matchbox. Luckily, the ship had been there long enough to be surrounded -by boats sufficient to save the passengers, and perhaps their baggage. -</p> -<p>We soon dropped anchor from our dismantled bark, which, as I afterwards -learned, was condemned as being unseaworthy, and never was allowed -to go to sea again. The seamen on our vessel went to picking up the -wreckage from the clipper ship. They chanced to catch a barrel of -whisky, when the captain ordered it to be carried below. That made -the sailors desperate. They seized an ax, crushed the barrel head in, -and each seaman dipped with his cup. Within fifteen minutes they were -wild with drunkenness. They armed themselves with axes, hand-spikes, -belaying pins, marlinspikes, and any and everything they could lay hold -of. Then the officers, and some of the passengers who had incurred -their displeasure, were made to hunt hiding places below in doublequick -time. That condition did not last long, however, before a compromise -was effected, the captain took his position again, and the men went to -landing passengers and baggage. I got my trunk ready to depart, when -the captain demanded five dollars of me, for hospital fees, he said. As -I had not so much as one dollar, I had to leave my trunk and go ashore, -very sick and cold. -</p> -<p>When I reached the streets I found things so changed from when I was -there before that I felt lost in the throng of people. It seemed to me -that everyone was seeking his own gain, regardless of his fellow-men. -It was push, ram, jam, on all sides. I had worn my clothes pretty well -out, my hat had been so crushed that my hair was showing in the crown, -and my shoe soles were worn very nearly off. -</p> -<p>In this condition I asked the Lord, in silent prayer, to show me -what I should do. The Spirit said, "Go up the street." I was then on -California Street. I obeyed the whisperings, until I got near the top -of the street. Without any consolation the thought came, What shall I -do? The still, small Voice said, "Go up the street," and I obeyed again. -</p> -<p>At last, almost despairing of everything, wholly sick and tired, -suffering from lack of some refreshment, and feeling that there was no -relief for me, I saw a man start across the street above me, and from -the same side. When he neared the center of the street, he stopped and -seemed to be looking at me. As I advanced, he turned around, and walked -back two or three steps. By this time I started across toward him, and -he came to meet me. It was Redick N. Allred, of the Mormon Battalion. -</p> -<p>We did not recognize each other until we went to shake hands. He said, -"How are you?" I answered, "Tired, sick, and hungry." "Well," said he, -"come back across the street with me, to a lunch stand, and we will -have something to eat." Soon the inner man was comforted, when Brother -Allred told me there were thirty-six Elders in San Francisco, bound to -foreign lands on missions. He led me to some of my old friends, and -I found John Layton, whom I had been acquainted with on the Society -Islands. He told me that if I would I could come and stop with him, and -chop the wood and do the marketing; for his wife, being an islander, -could not talk English well. I accepted the kind offer, and thus was -provided with a home. -</p> -<p>I also met with Major Jefferson Hunt. We saw a Captain King, took -supper with him, and told him that the captain of the vessel I had come -on had retained my trunk because I had not five dollars to pay the -hospital fees. Brother Badlam gave me the money to get my trunk, and -Captain King gave me a note to a custom officer. I obtained my trunk -after I had paid the captain of the <em>Abyssinia</em> the money, and I followed -him up to the custom house, to the officer there, to whom I showed -Captain King's note. The officer gave the sea captain a look, then said -something to him, and without a word more he returned me the money. -</p> -<p>I next visited the Elders, and attended meetings with them. They -had arrived several days before me, and had sold their teams in the -southern part of California. They had also taken up some collections -among the Saints. Brother John M. Horner having been very liberal to -them, a number of them rendered me assistance. -</p> -<p>One day, as I was passing Widow Ivins', she called to me, and ran out -to meet me, saying, "Here is ten dollars that a lady gave me to hand to -you, and here is thirty dollars more that she wishes you to convey to -that body of Elders that is in town, to help them on their missions." -I asked the name of the lady, and the reply was, "I am not at liberty -to disclose her name." She said the lady was not a Mormon, but had -attended our meetings, and had stated that she was unworthy to be -personally known to us; so I never learned who she was. -</p> -<p>At one time, when I was walking along the street alone, I was met by -a stranger, who offered to shake hands with me. As we grasped hands, -he pushed a five-dollar gold piece into mine. I said, "What does this -mean?" He replied, "None of your d—d business. Take it, and bless -yourself with it. I have money due me, and if I am successful in -collecting it, I will see you again." At that he dashed away in the -busy throng, and I never saw him more, that I am aware of. -</p> -<p>On a still further occasion, I was met by an entire stranger, who put -a dollar in my hand and said, "Come, let us have some good cider and -cake." I begged to be excused, but he would not listen to it; I had -to go with him anyhow. We stepped to a lunch stand, where he said, -"Let this man have what he calls for; I want to catch that man," and -away he went. The proprietor asked what I would have, and I told him I -would await the return of my friend. He said, "Never mind him, he is -all right; he may not be back again till tomorrow morning." Then he -insisted on my order, so I took some crackers and cider; but I never -saw my friend again. Thus it seemed to me that great and wondrous -were the mysterious providences of the Lord, for I had landed in -San Francisco on the 8th of January, 1853, and by the 26th I had -seventy-five dollars handed to me, much of it by entire strangers -whom I had never seen before, nor have I seen them since. It seems -mysterious to me how my way opened up and my necessities were met. -</p> -<p>The Elders outward bound treated me very kindly. They fitted themselves -out for their several destinations, paid their passage, and then had -some fifteen hundred dollars to send to their families, with their -photographs and some small parcels, all of which they entrusted to me, -with three small trunks, to take to San Bernardino. Of the money seven -hundred and fifty dollars in gold was put into a belt and girded around -my body; the balance was in drafts or checks. -</p> -<p>In the meantime, some of the Elders had met with Mr. Holliday, overland -mail contractor. As he had not perfected his arrangements for regular -mail service, he made some inquiries of the Elders about sending mail -sacks by chance carrier to Los Angeles. They referred him to me, as -they thought there would be something in it for me. He called, and I -agreed to take charge of three sacks if he would deliver them on the -steamer <em>Sea Bird</em>, on the morning of the 29th. On that date he sent the -sacks just as we were putting off. He told me the pay would be all -right when the sacks were delivered. -</p> -<p>I had paid thirty-five dollars for my passage to San Pedro, and we -steamed out. On the morning of the 30th we landed at Monterey, and -lay there till 4 p.m. During that time I had a severe chill, followed -by a very high fever, which held on till next morning, when a heavier -chill came on, like the ague, followed by fever. I had made my bed -down on some nail kegs that were on deck; for the boat was so crowded -with passengers of all classes that there was no possible chance for -comfort. It semed that everyone was seeking his own convenience, -regardless of his neighbor. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXXVII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">BECOME DESPERATELY ILL—NURSED BACK TO CONSCIOUSNESS—KINDNESS -OF AN AGED SPANISH COUPLE—BELT WITH MONEY ENTRUSTED TO ME -DISAPPEARS—INTENSE ANXIETY—DISCOVER THE MONEY—GREAT SUFFERING—LAND -AT SAN PEDRO—LEFT ON THE BEACH—DRAG MYSELF TO THE SHELTER OF AN OLD -WALL—KINDNESS OF A SPANIARD AND HIS WIFE—A TERRIBLE NIGHT—SEEK -A PASSAGE TO LOS ANGELES WITH FREIGHTERS—REFUSALS—MEET A KIND -TEAMSTER—REACH LOS ANGELES—-DUMPED ON THE STREET—FIND SHELTER, BUT -A CHILLY WELCOME—START NEXT MORNING, SICK AND HUNGRY, TO FIND A NEW -PLACE—SO ILL I HAVE TO LIE DOWN IN THE STREET—TWO FRIENDS FROM SAN -BERNARDINO—AM TOLD THAT I HAVE THE SMALLPOX—MY FRIENDS GIVE ME MONEY -AND START IN SEARCH OF A HOUSE WHERE I CAN BE CARED FOR—FAILING TO -SECURE A ROOM, THEY ENGAGE THE CITY MARSHAL TO GET A PLACE, AND THEY -LEAVE FOR SAN BERNARDINO—I WANDER FOR SHELTER, BUT DOORS ARE CLOSED, -AND PEOPLE AVOID ME—LODGE IN A DOCTOR'S OFFICE WHILE THE DOCTOR IS -OUT—SCARE THE PEOPLE BY SHOUTING "SMALLPOX!"—THE DOCTOR RETURNS BUT -LEAVES ME IN POSSESSION. -</p> -<p>ON the voyage down from San Francisco I grew so desperately sick that -I lost my reasoning powers, becoming so delirious that afterwards I -could only remember removing my coat and vest and turning into bed, on -the nail kegs, with my trunks and the mail sacks about me. The next -thing that I recall was in the after part of the day, February 1st, -1853, when I began to regain consciousness. There was an old Spanish -gentleman and his good old "mahara" (wife) rubbing my hands and feet, -while a big crowd of the passengers stood around. My first thought -was: What does this mean—who am I—where did I come from—where am I -going—-how did I come here, and why are these strangers so interested -in me as to be rubbing my hands? The next thing, the old gentleman -brought me some refreshments, with a cup of coffee; and when I finally -returned to consciousness I inquired what had been the matter. I was -told that I had been a very sick man, but was much better, and would -soon be well. When the crowd were satisfied that the worst was past -they dispersed, but the old gentleman and lady sat near, as if to -anticipate any favor I might need. Doubtless the good old couple have -been gathered home to their fathers long ere this writing. If so, -peace to their ashes; may they in no wise lose their reward, for they -administered to the suffering stranger, although they were foreigners, -while my own countrymen passed rudely by. -</p> -<p>With consciousness returned, I remembered the money that I had in -charge. I felt about my body, and to my surprise and mortification -the belt was gone. The next thought I had was that I had been robbed -by some one on board, and I wondered what could be done to regain the -property, or, if it could not be recovered, how could I make amends to -the poor women and children whom their husbands and fathers had sent -it to? How could I prove my innocence to them? By this time the mental -sufferings had overcome the physical pain, and in despair I drew the -blankets close about me. In so doing I felt the belt of money lying -at my back, under cover. The buckle had been ripped or cut off, most -likely the latter, for, as I learned afterwards, in some way it was -noised around that I had money. -</p> -<p>The reaction of the mental faculties was too much for my weak state, -and I almost swooned away; but when I fully recovered from the shock -to my nerves, I rolled the belt snugly up, and raised on my knees with -my blankets so drawn about my shoulders as to cover the front part of -the trunk. Then I placed the belt inside, at the same time taking some -article out, so as to divert the observers' attention from my real -purpose; I then laid down, suffering with a terrible fever, and put in -one night more of great wretchedness. -</p> -<p>About 3 or 4 p.m. next day, February 2nd, we landed at San Pedro. There -was a great rush for the shore, and for the four or five vehicles -that were in waiting. The most of the passengers seemed to be without -baggage, save a roll of blankets or a satchel, and as the the writer -had so much and was sick, he was the last person to land. Every vehicle -was gone, and all the passengers were out of sight before he got his -baggage ashore. When this did come, it was thrown on the beach just -above high water mark. -</p> -<p>At that early date there was not a hotel, boardinghouse, or restaurant -anywhere in sight from the landing. One wall of an old adobe warehouse -stood near by, and the only thing for the writer to do was to seek -what shelter that wall afforded. Thither he dragged his effects, then -dropped down on his bedding exhausted. He lay there until he had -excited the curiosity of a Spaniard and his wife who were some distance -away. They came down and asked what was the matter, and as I did not -know, I could not tell them. They saw that my face was swollen and -they seemed afraid to come close, but inquired what I wished, and if -they could do anything for me. I asked for milk and bread, which they -supplied, and left me to my fate for the night. -</p> -<p>The experiences of that terrible night baffle the writer's powers of -description. Suffice it to say, he passed it alone, with the heavy mist -of the briny deep resting upon him, while the fever and thirst seemed -to be consuming his body. -</p> -<p>At last the morning light came through a dense fog; but by 8 or 9 -o'clock that had partly passed away. Some freight teams came down from -Los Angeles, and the sufferer felt somewhat encouraged to think there -was a prospect of his reaching civilization at the place where he had -helped to rear the first liberty pole which was to bear aloft the Stars -and Stripes on the Pacific coast. He accosted the freighters, feeling -assured that he would not be denied a passage, as he was prepared to -pay for this accommodation. The first man said no; he had all that he -could haul. The second teamster said no, he was not doing a passenger -business. The third said, "I don't know. It is too d—d bad to leave -you here sick. I guess I can take you. Throw on your things if you can, -and hurry about it." When the writer made an effort to do as invited, -the freighter lent him a hand, and when the baggage was aboard the -teamster said, "Come, get on here. It's a poor place for a sick man, -away up on a goods box, among the bows, but it's your only chance with -me. Up there!" and away we went on our journey twenty-one miles to Los -Angeles, where we arrived about 8 p.m. -</p> -<p>Near the center of the city, on the sidewalk at a street corner, my -effects were dumped. I wandered around to find shelter, and at last -reached Jesse D. Hunter's place. Hunter had been captain of Company B -in the Mormon Battalion, and I thought I could do no better than stop -with him, though I did not meet anything very inviting. I was coldly -granted the privilege of dragging my blankets into the kitchen, and of -bunking down on the dirt floor, after a light supper of bread and milk, -the first food I had had since the night before. But I was too ill to -do better, and Mr. Hunter was so cool and indifferent that I was glad -to leave his place next morning without any further accommodations. -</p> -<p>I started out alone, and turned so sick and dizzy that I had to lie -down in the street on my blankets. While there I was approached by -Daniel Clark and James Bailey from San Bernardino. They asked if my -name was Brown, and if I was a returning missionary. I told them yes. -They said they had heard of me, and that I had the smallpox, so they -had been searching the town for me, and happening to see me lie down in -the street, they became satisfied they had found the object of their -search. Each of them threw me ten dollars in gold, and went in search -of a room or place where I could be cared for. Failing in finding that, -they called on the mayor, who started the marshal out to hunt a place. -When Clark and Bailey had done all they could—and they were as kind -as they could be—they had the mail sacks delivered, but did not find -the pay that was to be all right on delivery. Then they went home to -San Bernardino, while I did the best I could to find shelter, but my -face was so terribly swollen that every door was shut against me; and -when the news spread that there was a man around the streets with the -smallpox, I could have the sidewalk to myself wherever I went. -</p> -<p>At last I found Dr. Jones' office open, but dark and with no one in it. -I dragged my bedding through the office to the bedroom, where I spread -my blankets and turned in, leaving the door open and lights burning. -When anyone came to the door I would shout "Smallpox!" and it was -amusing to hear the people run. -</p> -<p>About 11 p.m. the doctor came, and I shouted "Smallpox!" Said he: -"Who is here?" I answered, "The man whom you said had the smallpox." -He responded, "All right, but I would not have had it happen for five -hundred dollars. Be quiet, you have done just right. But how did you -get in?" -</p> -<p>"Why, the door was open," I replied, and he said: "I never did such a -thing before in my life. It must have been done on purpose for you, for -it was not fit for you to be out." The doctor then held his breath, -stepped in over me, took up his bed, and walked away. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXXVIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">CITY MARSHALL AND DOCTOR COME TO REMOVE ME—TAKEN TO A DESERTED HOUSE, -WHICH HAD BEEN USED AS A SHEEPFOLD—BEDDED IN SHEEP MANURE—AN INDIAN -NURSE WHO BECOMES FRIGHTENED—SPANISH NURSE SENT TO ME—IN A BOAT WITH -PATIENT JOB—MY FEVER INCREASES—ATTACKED BY ROBBERS—RELIEVED BY -CITY MARSHAL WITH POSSE—MARSHAL TAKES THE MONEY I HAVE IN MY CARE, -FOR SAFE KEEPING—SPANISH NURSE SCARED OFF—QUEER SAILOR NURSE—HE -DRINKS WHISKY, SINGS AND DANCES—HIS THOUGHTFUL CARE OF ME—VISITED -BY MY COUSIN—KINDNESS OF SAN BERNARDINO SAINTS—RECOVERING FROM MY -ILLNESS—MY CLOTHING BURNED—HEAVY EXPENSE BILL AGAINST ME—TELL THE -CITY MARSHAL OF MY ARRIVAL IN CALIFORNIA AS A UNITED STATES SOLDIER IN -THE MEXICAN WAR—KINDNESS OF THE MARSHAL—LOS ANGELES ASSUMES THE BILL -FOR MEDICAL ATTENTION GIVEN ME—START FOR SAN BERNARDINO—EXHAUSTED -ON THE JOURNEY—ALMOST DIE OF THIRST—RELIEVED BY A PARTY OF SPANISH -LADIES—KINDNESS OF SPANISH FAMILIES—ARRIVE AT SAN BERNARDINO AND MEET -FRIENDS AND RELATIVES. -</p> -<p>EARLY next morning, the marshal and doctor were there with suitable -refreshments, and when the patient had made a feint at eating they told -him they had secured a room if he could put up with it. Sheep had been -kept in it, and it was smoked very black, but they assured him that -the conditions were favorable to recovery from the disease. Then they -took him by his arms and assisted him into an old cart that they had -standing at the door; they had an Indian to lead the horse. -</p> -<p>The patient could not see a particle only as he held his eyes open with -his fingers. He told them of his trunk, which had been left all this -time where the freighter had dumped it when the writer came into town. -The trunk was brought, and the Indian led out, the marshal and doctor -bringing up the rear. -</p> -<p>When we passed the suburbs, we turned to the right, to an old deserted -adobe house of two rooms. The front yard had been used as a sheepfold. -The doors had been broken down, and the sheep had had free access to -the rooms, until the sheep manure was some five or six inches deep on -the dirt floor. The rooms were very poorly lighted at best; and to add -to the darkness, the sheepherders had camped in them till the whole of -the inside of the rooms was smoked as black as a stove. The doctor said -it was the best they could do, adding: "It is too d—d bad to put you -in such a place, but if you will put up with it, it will be the very -best thing for you in the end. The sheepy smell, and the darkness, with -some ointment that I will give you, will prevent your being marked; -whereas, if you were kept in a light, clean room, you have got the -disease so bad that you would be marked all over. Then again you have -been so badly exposed that you must put up with the treatment in order -to recover properly, lest something else follows." -</p> -<p>I told him that my condition was such that I was compelled to submit to -any treatment they saw fit to give. Then they got some tools, removed -the dry, hard packed manure, and placed my mattress down on the dirt -floor, so that when the covering was spread ready for me it was just -level with the manure on the front, the foot, head and back being -against the walls. -</p> -<p>Having turned in, I opened my eyes with my fingers, and found myself -in twilight, with an Indian man for a nurse. The marshal and doctor -left, saying that I should be cared for. Then the nurse went off, and -soon returned with a custard in a coffee basin; this he said was worth -fifty cents. He brought it, and an iron spoon to eat the custard, but -when I opened my eyes in such an unnatural way, they appeared so badly -bloodshot that the nurse took fright and ran away, leaving me to my -fate until 5 or 6 o'clock p.m. Then an old Spaniard, who was very badly -pox-marked, came and said he had been engaged as a nurse, as the Indian -was so frightened at the disease that he would not return. The Spaniard -seemed to comprehend the conditions. He got a Spanish roll of bread and -a pint of milk for fifty cents, then straightened up the bed and left -for the night. Next morning he was on hand to attend to my wants. -</p> -<p>This was on February 6, 1853. The smallpox began to appear in pustules, -or rather boils; for it so resembled the latter that I began to think -of patient old Job. I was sore from the crown of my head to the soles -of my feet, and yet it was only blisters that day, comparatively -speaking. -</p> -<p>The Spanish nurse seemed to understand his business, for as I would -roll and toss, the old gentleman would tuck the bedclothes about me, -saying, "Must not let the air to you. Must keep warm, and have warm -drink, and have the bowels moderately easy." Then he would apply the -ointment, and be as cheerful as possible, doing all that he could to -divert my mind from my sufferings. -</p> -<p>Night came on and the blisters enlarged; I became very sick at the -stomach, and the kind old nurse stayed by me till daylight on the 7th. -The fever still raged fiercely. Night again came, and the nurse got -alarmed at seeing some six or seven rough men, armed, approaching the -house. He hastily gathered his arms full of cobblestones, ran in and -piled them on the edge of the bed, and cried out, "Can you fight? The -robbers are coming. Murder! murder!" At that I raised in bed, opened my -eyes in the new way, and took up a cobble rock, the nurse standing by -the bed shouting "Murder!" -</p> -<p>The next moment three ruffians appeared at the partition door, in the -house, while another presented himself at the window, near the head -of the bed. So far as I could see, they were armed with revolvers and -bowie knives. There must have been two or three men at the outside door. -</p> -<p>The shock came so suddenly that I had no time to get thoroughly scared -until I heard men running around the northwest corner of the house. -The latter noise was by the marshal and a posse which he had summoned -hastily, for a party had been in the saloon and had heard the ruffians -say, "Let's go and rob that man who has got the smallpox, for he has -got money." It must be that some of the party had been the ones who -had ripped the belt off of me while on shipboard, where they had been -disturbed before they had time to slip it away. Thus they had learned -about the money, and when they got to drinking and gambling, they -probably had decided on robbing the smallpox man to make a raise, but -had talked too loud for the success of their plan. The marshal acted -so promptly that they were foiled in their plot, for when they heard -him and his posse coming, and the nurse shouting "Murder!" they fled -to the southeast and passed over into a dark, deep, brushy ravine, -out of sight, just as the marshal and party gained the south side of -the building. The officer said he saw them, but had not time to shoot -before they disappeared in the brush and darkness. -</p> -<p>The marshal came into the house and informed me of the plot and how he -came to hear of it. He said, "Now, if you have any money or valuable -papers, you had better send for some trusty friend to come and take -care of them. I will send for anyone that you will name." I told him -I did not know of a better friend than the one who had come to my -relief, and if he, the marshal, would take care of the valuables, I -would be much obliged. He said he would take charge of them and have -them deposited for safekeeping till I wanted them. I then handed out -my memorandum book, with the names of the men who sent the money, the -amounts, and the names of those to whom it was sent. Then, my eyes -being propped open, I poured the money on to a handkerchief they had -spread over my lap. As the money was mostly in gold ten and twenty -dollar pieces, in fifty dollar packages, it was easily and quickly -counted, and found to tally with the memoranda. Then the drafts and -checks were counted, and all put together in the belt—some fifteen -hundred dollars—and handed over to the marshal, with Dr. Jones as -witness. -</p> -<p>When the gold was being counted out, some of the would-be robbers -appeared at the window, and doubtless saw that the marshal was taking -charge of the valuables, by which action their plot fell through, -and I was not troubled any more. But the experience was enough for -the Spanish nurse, for the robbers undoubtedly were Spaniards or -"greasers," and if they could take revenge on him they would do it. -Some of the marshal's posse stayed till they felt satisfied the danger -was all over, then they, with the nurse, left, and next day sent to -me an old badly pox-marked sailor for an attendant. He came in with a -bottle of whisky that he said was a hundred years old. -</p> -<p>The first thing the new nurse said was, "Hello, old chum! What are you -doing there? Come, and have a drink with me." The next breath he said, -"No, no, for I know it would not do for you. I will drink for you. So -here goes." He then took a liberal draught, and wanted to know what he -could do for my comfort. On being told there was nothing I wanted just -then, he said, "Let me sing you a song," and he sang a very comical -ditty. Then he said, "I'll dance a jig for you," and at it he went. In -the performance he kicked the dry manure pretty nearly all over me and -my bed, for he was "three sheets in the wind and the fourth fluttering" -(three-fourths drunk, or more.) -</p> -<p>When he saw what he had done, he dropped on his knees and begged -pardon, making the most humble apology. Said he, "Never mind, old chum, -just lay over to starboard, and I will make it all right." He brushed -and brushed away, then said, "Now to larboard, and I will fix you all -right." So he pounded away, talking all the time in his sailor phrases. -Finally he partially sobered up, and it would have been hard to find a -more thoughtful and attentive nurse. From that time on he stayed with -me, told many interesting sea stories, and sang love songs. -</p> -<p>On February 10th my cousin, John M. Brown, who was passing through that -part of the country, came to the door and called. "Is that you, James?" -At the same time he threw a ten dollar gold piece on the bed; but not -having had the smallpox, he dare not come in. We had not met before in -eight years. At that date I was suffering intensely, if not the worst -that I had done, for I was down so weak that I could not help myself at -all. -</p> -<p>On the 11th, W. G. Sherwood, of San Bernardino, came in, saying that -the Saints had raised some money for me, and had sent him to take care -of me until I was able to come out to them. Brothers D. Clark and J. -Bailey had told President Seeley of my condition. I felt indeed very -thankful for the favors shown me. -</p> -<p>On the 14th the smallpox had nearly died away, and by the 19th I was -considered out of all danger, with prudence. On the 20th, the doctor -and marshal came and ordered all of my bedding and a good suit of -clothes that I had on when taken down, boots, hat, and all, piled in -the yard, and there burned. They said my expenses had been five dollars -per day for the house, because of the disease and being close to where -the landlord and his family lived. The nurses also had to be paid the -same amount per day. I told them I had been out on a long mission at my -own expense, and now had so little money that it would cost me every -dollar that I had to meet the loss of my clothes and bedding, so it was -impossible for me to settle such a bill, one hundred and forty dollars. -I had paid for every article I had used except a little medicine the -doctor had furnished. -</p> -<p>The marshal and doctor said they understood that I had come into the -country as a soldier in the time of the Mexican war. I told them that I -had helped to build the fort that overlooked the town, and that I went -to San Bernardino canyon and helped get down the first liberty pole -that ever bore the Stars and Stripes on this western coast. At this -they asked a number of questions, as if to satisfy themselves whether -or not I had told them the truth, and when they became convinced the -marshal said: "Mr. Brown, do not make any trouble, for we will see that -you do not have to pay that bill; you are worthy of all the care that -you have had, and more too. Los Angeles will pay that, and you are -free to go on your way. We are pleased to have made your acquaintance, -and that you have recovered so well; for your case has been a very -remarkable one, to have had the disease so badly and after being -exposed as you were, to have recovered so soon, with scarce a mark left -on you. It has been a most wonderful case, and we congratulate you on -your safe recovery, and wish you success on your journey to Salt Lake." -Of course I could not feel otherwise than very grateful to those two -gentlemen for their kind attention and largeness of soul. Then we bade -each other good-bye and I am not conscious that we have ever met since -that day. -</p> -<p>Brother Sherwood and I stored my trunk, put our other effects on his -poor old stallion, went down town and got my money and some provisions -and a bottle of old whisky, and were amused to see so many people run -from the smallpox, while others stood afar off and gazed. Finally, on -February 21st, we set out for San Bernardino, eighty miles, on foot, -one leading and the other punching the old horse, which was so weak -that he stumbled wherever the road was a little rough. We only got ten -miles that day. -</p> -<p>On the 22nd we proceeded on our journey another ten miles, when it was -impossible for me to go any further. I was thoroughly exhausted, and -had to lie down or drop. We were ten miles from water, and so thirsty -that it seemed that I must die on that arid plain. Brother Sherwood, -however, proved equal to the emergency. He got me on to a pair of -blankets, led the old horse up so as to cast a shadow over me, then -hastened to soak a piece of bread in some old whisky. He gave me the -bread, saying it would slake my thirst, and stimulate me. Strange as it -seemed to me, it did so, and in a short time I was able to rise alone, -and sit up. -</p> -<p>We had not been there a great while when we saw a party of Spanish -ladies coming in on another road, that appeared to unite with the one -we were on; so by an effort we gained the junction just as they did. -They stopped their cart, and asked if we would have some wine. We said -we preferred water, and they gave us both. Seeing that I was very ill, -they invited me to ride with them, making room so that I had a place -between the two on the front seat and rested my head and shoulders on -the laps of the two on the rear seat, while they bathed my head with -water, and urged me to take a little more wine. It did seem that if it -had not been for this most unexpected kindness I should have died of -thirst and exhaustion before we could have reached any other source of -support. -</p> -<p>Brother Sherwood followed in the rear to where the ladies lived, but -before he came up I was helped on to a bed in a cool room, and had some -refreshments, with a cup of chocolate. Oh, how thankful I was to those -blessed Spanish "senoritas!" When their husbands came in, they shook -hands and seemed to be pleased that their wives had dealt so kindly -with the strange American. Brother Sherwood soon arrived, and they -unpacked his horse and took care of it, while the women supplied him -with water to bathe his hands and face, and with refreshments. Then he -and I retired early. -</p> -<p>Next morning, February 23, we were served with chocolate and tortias -(pancakes) before we were out of bed. Our hosts had only a humble -home, but so kind were they in their attentions to us that it aroused -suspicions of a large bill to pay, but when we asked them the amount -they shrugged their shoulders Spanish fashion, and with a pleasant -smile said, in Spanish, "Nothing; friendship; no more." As we bade them -good-bye they said they would be pleased for me to allow them to have -the little smallpox scab that was on my nose, if we thought it would -not leave a mark, so they and Brother Sherwood removed it, and thought -it would not leave any pit; therefore I allowed him to remove it and -leave it with them. Still it did leave its mark till this day. -</p> -<p>We proceeded on to a ranch where we met with a fourth cousin of mine, -John Garner, who kindly offered me a seat in his wagon. He was loaded -and could not start till late, but we could reach his place before -midnight, and Brother Sherwood could push on; for when we started -Sherwood would not be able to keep up. I accepted his proposition, and -we reached his home at 11 o'clock p.m. -</p> -<p>On the 24th I went to what they called at that time, I believe, Fort -San Bernardino. There I found many warm-hearted friends, and a number -of relatives, among them John M. and Alexander Brown, my cousins. I -made my home with the latter, who, with his wife, was very kind to me. -I also visited many old acquaintances. My trunk I sent for by Sidney -Tanner, and he brought it from Los Angeles free of charge. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXXXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXXIX. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">REPORT MY MISSION—PREPARE TO CONTINUE THE JOURNEY TO UTAH—HAVE -TO REMAIN AT SAN BERNARDINO FOR A TIME—SICKNESS AMONG THE -PEOPLE—INSTANCES OF HEALING BY ADMINISTRATION—ENGAGE TO TRAVEL -WITH A PACK-TRAIN TO SALT LAKE CITY—GET A "BUCKING" MILE—START ON -THE JOURNEY—IN A HOSTILE INDIAN COUNTRY—SIGNS OF DANGER—PREPARE -FOR TROUBLE—SUDDEN APPEARANCE OF AN INDIAN—OUR PARTY WANT TO -SHOOT—I PROTEST, AND MAKE FRIENDS WITH THE INDIAN—OTHER RED MEN -APPEAR—DIFFICULTY OF RESTRAINING OUR PARTY—I CONVERSE WITH THE -INDIANS, WHO TELL OF A CAMP OF MORMONS AND MEXICANS A SHORT DISTANCE -AHEAD—HOW I UNDERSTOOD THE INDIANS—DISCOVER THE CAMP SPOKEN OF—REST -A DAY—MOVE TOWARD THE SANTA CLARA—DANGER AHEAD—A FIRE ACROSS OUR -PATH—WE DASH THROUGH IT—HOSTILE INDIANS—AN EXCITING CHASE—MEET -APOSTLES A. M. LYMAN AND C. C. RICH—ARRIVE AT CEDAR CITY—STOP -AT PAROWAN—JOURNEY NORTH, PREACHING EN ROUTE—REACH SALT LAKE -CITY—SETTLE WITH THE PEOPLE FOR WHOM I HAVE MONEY—REPORT TO PRESIDENT -YOUNG—PREACH IN THE TABERNACLE—RELEASED PROM MY MISSION—COST OF MY -MISSION TO THE SOCIETY ISLANDS. -</p> -<p>ON February 27th, I was called on by President Seeley of the branch of -the Church at San Bernardino, to give a report of my mission, and I did -so before the congregation. On March 9th, I prepared to come home with -John and Alexander Brown, to Salt Lake City, but for some reason they -gave up the idea of traveling at that time, and I had to await another -opportunity. Then we looked about the country, thinking that we would -make some improvements, if we did not meet with a better chance to come -to Utah. -</p> -<p>About this time there was a great amount of sickness in the place, and -Elder Thomas Whitaker, from the islands, and I had numerous calls to -administer to the sick. Many seemed to be possessed of evil spirits; -certainly, if they had lived in Mary Magdalene's day it would have -been said of them that they had seven devils in them; for the actions -were the same as in those days, and the evil spirits would not come -out except through fasting and prayer. Consequently, President Seeley -ordered a fast and a prayer meeting for the Saints. It was very well -attended, and good results followed. Many people were healed of the -diseases afflicting them. One incident I will mention: There lived -in the town a man named John Brown; he had a Spanish wife and one or -two children. One evening, Major Jefferson Hunt's wife called on me -to come as quickly as possible, for Mr. Brown's child looked as if it -were dying. I went in, and found the mother and child in bed together. -The little one acted as if it were choking to death, and was fighting -for breath; it gnashed its teeth and frothed at the mouth. I anointed -it with consecrated oil, and as there was no other Elder handy I -administered to the child, when every symptom of its trouble left it -immediately, but seized on the mother. She raved, frothed and foamed -at the mouth, gnashed her teeth, cramped, and seemed so ill that she -could not live five minutes. Sister Hunt anointed her with oil, and I -administered to her. She was healed that moment. An Indian woman was -sitting there sewing, and the same power that had afflicted the child -and its mother took hold of the Indian woman. By this time another -sister had stepped in, and she and Sister Hunt raised the Indian woman -up, for she had fallen over. They called on me to lay hands on her, -but I did not feel to do so at once. I told them to wet her face and -rub her hands. They did so, and she grew worse every minute, until I -administered to her, by laying my hands upon her and praying, rebuking -the evil spirits, commanding them in the name of the Lord to come -out of her and to depart from her and from that house, and from the -houses and homes of the Saints, and to get hence to their own home, -and trouble us no more. That moment the evil spirits left, and did not -return again. The three persons who were afflicted were perfectly well -next morning, and I never heard of their being afflicted afterwards. -</p> -<p>There had been a number of cases where persons had been similarly -affected, and some of them were not healed until they had been baptized -seven times in succession, when they were permanently cured. Indeed, -there were very many remarkable cases of healing in San Bernardino -about that time. -</p> -<p>On April 15th, my cousin, John M. Brown, learned that a man named -Lamper was going to start with the mail to Salt Lake City, and had only -four men with him. As that was too small a number to be safe, it was -ascertained that if he could have three or four more he would like it -very much. He told John M. Brown that if he would raise two or three -other men, he would wait at the mouth of the Cajon Pass for them. -</p> -<p>As my cousin had never had any experience with pack animals, he told me -that if I would go with him and help with the stock and packs, for that -service he would furnish everything needed en route, he knowing that I -had had experience in that line, and in the handling of wild horses and -mules. -</p> -<p>I accepted the offer, so we made ready, and were off on the 19th of -April. We overtook the party in waiting at the place agreed upon. The -animal provided for my saddle mule was wild, large and strong, and -given to jumping stiff-legged, or bucking, as it is called. It was a -hard animal to handle, and was successful in dumping its rider three -times in the fore part of the journey, to the amusement of his five -comrades. We had nineteen head of animals, and traveled at the rate of -fifty miles per day, for the first half of the journey, because our -route led us through a hostile Indian country. -</p> -<p>We stood regular turns of guard, and all went well till the last day -before we came to the Muddy. That day we saw danger signs, of Indians. -I will say now, my friendly reader, if ever you travel in an Indian -country, and come to fresh Indian tracks, yet do not see an Indian, -then you may be sure that some red man wants a few horses and some -plunder, if, indeed, he does not want a scalp or two to hang to his -bridle-bit or surcingle. That was our danger sign, plenty of fresh -Indian tracks, where they had rolled large boulders into the narrow -passes in the road, or gorges where the road passed through. This -satisfied us that we were in danger of an unpleasant surprise, so we -examined every firelock, made sure there was powder in every tube, good -waterproof caps on, ammunition handy, packs securely bound, saddles -well girt, and every man prepared to act promptly in case of an attack. -</p> -<p>At this time we were crossing from the Las Vegas to the Muddy. I -think the distance without water was sixty-five miles, so there was -no alternative for us but to press forward to the Muddy River, were -we arrived in safety about 4 a.m., watered our stock, and got a hasty -meal, giving our animals a very short time for rest and to feed. -</p> -<p>At daylight we began to saddle up for another start. Just as we were -ready to mount, a large, stout Indian raised up out of the willows -within bow-shot, and hallooed. He had his bows and arrows in hand. At -that my cousin John leveled his gun on the red man, when I seized it -and forbade anyone to shoot, as others of the party had made ready for -the worst. At that moment the Indian held out his hand and came toward -us, as if to shake hands. Every man of the party but myself was ready -and anxious to open fire on the Indian, but I stood between him and -them until they had mounted. I told them if there was one shot fired -every one of us would be killed. The Indian said to me that he wished -to be friendly. Then I mounted and the party started, and at the same -time twenty-five or thirty Indians, all well armed, raised up out of -the brush within easy pistol range. My party again drew their guns, -when I told them to hold on, for the Indians were friendly, and their -object was merely to beg some food; but some of my party were hard to -control. -</p> -<p>As my companions trotted up, I fell back with the Indians, who talked, -and I began to understand them, although I had not been among them -one day. It was given me to understand them, and I told my companions -that I did so. I told them further, that I would stand between them -and the Indians, if they would not shoot. One said, "How do you know -that they are friendly if you have never been among them before? They -are following us up. Send them away, if you know so much about their -friendship." -</p> -<p>The Indians told me that when the sun got to such a position, pointing -to where it would be at about 9 o'clock a.m., we would come to a large -camp of Mormons and non-Mormons, with their families; that they had -horses, mules and horned stock, and wagons, also some sheep and goats. -There was a lot of Mexicans camped with them, and these had pack-mules. -This, and more, was told me in the Indian dialect, and was as plain to -my understanding as if it had been spoken in my native tongue; yet my -party were slow to believe, and some of them cursed the Indians, saying -that if the black rascals were friendly, why did they not go back, -instead of following us up. Being fearful that our party could not be -restrained much longer, I halted and talked with the Indians, telling -them I was afraid my friends would shoot them unless they fell back, -and ceased to follow up so closely. The Indians replied that I would -soon learn that what they had said was true, as they did not talk two -ways. -</p> -<p>Just then we saw a Mexican come dashing down the hillside towards us. -When he came to us and shook hands, then confirmed what the Indians -had told me, my cousin John said, "I believe Jim does understand the -Indians, for he understands the Spanish language, and the Spaniards -have told him just what the Indians have said. I believe he is half -Indian, or he would not be so friendly with and understand them so -well." -</p> -<p>Soon we came to a raise, from which we could see the camps, just as -they had been described to us minutely in the morning, by the Indians, -who followed us up to the camps, and with pride pointed out to us -everything they had spoken of, saying, "We do not lie." I believe that -our party had become satisfied that the Indians had made the signs seen -on the road the day before, and then had laid in ambush to intimidate -us, that they might get something to eat, for they were very closely -run for food; again, it may have been that they meant more serious -things and were deterred therefrom by learning of the approach of the -company we found in camp. -</p> -<p>At any rate we felt safer to lay by with the camp one day, and rest -ourselves and stock; then we proceeded over a big dry bench to the Rio -Virgen, then up that river and across another high plateau to Beaver -Dam. From there we crossed another high rolling country of some forty -miles or more, to Santa Clara. When we got half way across we saw -a signal smoke, apparently on the Santa Clara where the road comes -to that stream, or perhaps a little above. Feeling conscious of our -weakness, we watched the smoke with no little concern, and as I had had -considerably more acquaintance with the red men than any others of the -party, I told them that from the way the fire was managed there was -mischief ahead, and we must prepare for the worst. Our animals were -thirsty and well jaded, yet there was no choice for us but to brave the -danger ahead. Then the examination of firelocks and the cinching of -saddles was in order. That matter, however, was delayed so long as we -felt safe. -</p> -<p>When the preparation was made, and the smoke had grown denser, we -advanced and saw that the streak of fire was in the narrows of the -canyon. It extended from cliff to cliff, and evidently was made -in a scheme of plunder or massacre, most likely both. Under the -circumstances, we were compelled to run the gauntlet, so it was hastily -decided for me to lead the way. I agreeing to do this if the party -would obey my orders, and not fire until I did, or gave the command to -them. If I gave the warwhoop they were to do the same. The first order -was to draw weapons for action, then charge with all possible speed. -Away we went, and as we neared the flames we chose the most open spot, -or that which seemed freest of fire. Although there was a continuous -stream of flames clear across the canyon, some places were freer than -others. We chose the place where the least fire was, the flames there -being not more than two or two and a half feet high. If the timber in -the canyon had been larger, it might have afforded the Indians a better -opportunity, but instead of secreting themselves in the bottom of the -ravine, they had chosen the cliffs on either side. -</p> -<p>Just before we reached the fire, we urged our animals up to the best -speed, and, raising as big a warwhoop as we were capable of, and -brandishing our firearms in the most threatening manner, we dashed -through. At the same time, the Indians showed themselves in the cliffs -with drawn bows, trying to take aim through the timber. They answered -our whoop or yell, and gave chase, but they being on foot, and our -animals having become thoroughly frightened at the sudden change that -had taken place and with the evergoading spurs of their riders, rushed -on ahead. Though very thirsty, our animals never attempted to drink, -although we crossed the stream a number of times. For fully five miles -we never slackened our speed, the Indians keeping in sight of us for -fully that distance, when they gave up the chase. Then our stock and -ourselves quenched our thirst, and we continued on at as good a speed -as was consistent with our conditions. Finally we met Apostles Amasa M. -Lyman and C. C. Rich, with two or three wagons and twelve or fourteen -men, mostly mounted. As it was camp time, we made a joint camp, and -had no more trouble. If an arrow had been shot at us, we did not know -it, though there may have been a hundred or more. We did not think it -advisable to try to ascertain, as we felt that our scalps were more -precious than this information, or than money or horseflesh. It was -distance between us and the scalping-knife of the red men that we were -hunting for just then. -</p> -<p>We stood double guard that night, and all passed off peacefully. Next -morning, each party proceeded on its way in peace, we to Cedar Fort, or -city, where we arrived May 5th, and met with many friends. We attended -meeting with the people, I was called on to give an account of my -mission, and did so. -</p> -<p>On May 6th, we proceeded to Parowan, and as it was considered safe from -there on, my cousin John M. Brown and I stopped there with friends -we had not seen for years. The rest of the party, having the mail in -charge, went ahead, and we tarried one week, being royally treated. I -preached two or three times. We resumed the journey on the 15th. In -passing along, I preached in most of the towns where we stayed over -night. -</p> -<p>When we came to Lehi, I commenced to settle with the people whom I had -money for, then went on to Little Cottonwood and settled with more, -then to Big Cottonwood, where I found still others for whom I had money. -</p> -<p>On May 22nd we arrived in Salt Lake City, and stopped with our uncle. -Alexander Stephens. On the 23rd, I called at President Brigham Young's -office and reported myself and mission. He received me very kindly, and -welcomed me home again. I also met Brothers H. C. Kimball and Jedediah -M. Grant, a number of the Twelve Apostles, and other prominent men. All -were very courteous, and expressed pleasure at my safe return. -</p> -<p>On the 24th and 25th, I called and settled with all I had money, -checks, or drafts for, and I found them all well, and much pleased to -get the needed relief, financially. On the 26th, as I desired to go to -Ogden City, I called at President Young's office to bid him good-bye. -He kindly invited me to come to the stand in the Tabernacle on June -7th, to preach. I did so, though it delayed me in my intended visit to -my friends and relatives in Ogden City. When I filled that call, I was -honorably released from further labors in the missionary field at that -time. My mission had occupied three years and eight months, and cost me -every dollar that I had when I started out. I was then worth fifteen -hundred dollars in good property, which I spent; but I never regretted -it. The experience that I had gained I counted worth much more than the -money expended. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXL"></a>CHAPTER XL. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">TRAVEL ON FOOT TO OGDEN—WELL RECEIVED BY RELATIVES AND FRIENDS—REPLY -TO INQUIRIES BY THE PEOPLE REGARDING THE SOCIETY ISLANDS AND -THE INHABITANTS THEREOF—CALLED TO GO TO FORT HALL—ORDER -COUNTERMANDED—CALLED ON A MISSION TO THE INDIANS—DESIGN OF THE -MISSION—ORGANIZATION OF THE COMPANY, AND START FROM SALT LAKE -CITY—HARD WORK OF THE JOURNEY—ATTACKED BY WOLVES—FATAL DUEL AT -FORT BRIDGER—PLANS OF DESPERADOES—WE GO TO SMITH'S FORK—BUILD -A BLOCKHOUSE—ARRIVAL OF MORE MEN AND SUPPLIES—THREATENING -ATTITUDE OF THE INDIANS—WRITER MADE SERGEANT OF THE GUARD AND -QUARTERMASTER—INSTRUCTIONS FROM ELDER ORSON HYDE—LIFE IN OUR -NEW CAMP—COLD WEATHER AND WILD BEASTS—LEARNING THE INDIAN -LANGUAGE—GIVE SHELTER TO INDIANS—DESPERADO CHIEF KILLED BY ONE OF -HIS MEN—ANIMALS PERISH FROM COLD AND STARVATION—TERRIFIC STORMS AND -SNOWDRIFTS—SAVING OUR STOCK—SHOSHONE INDIANS ASK FOR AND RECEIVE -ASSISTANCE—HUNT FOR ANTELOPE FAILS—A BACHELOR'S DANCE—RAISING A -LIBERTY POLE—PARTITIONING OUT LANDS—PLOWING AND PLANTING—ARRIVAL OF -AND INSTRUCTIONS BY ELDER ORSON HYDE—SELECTIONS FOR A SPECIAL MISSION -TO THE INDIANS—ORGANIZATION OF GREEN RIVER COUNTY. -</p> -<p>ON June 9, 1853, I started to Ogden City, afoot and alone. On the 10th, -I paid out the last quarter of a dollar that I had to the ferryman, to -set me across the Weber River, at East Weber. From there I crossed the -hills to my Uncle John Stephens', and found him and his family well and -pleased to see me. I reciprocated the pleasure, had dinner and a short -visit, then went on to Ogden City, where I again met with Cousin John -M. Brown and his father's family, and our two aunts, Polly and Nancy -Brown; as also more relatives and former friends, all of whom treated -me with much kindness, and as if the lost had been found. -</p> -<p>The first Sabbath after my arrival in Ogden, I was called on to give -a report of my mission, and to preach. By doing this, there was a -great spirit of inquiry excited about the Society Islands and their -inhabitants. I found that scarce one in a thousand of the people -had the remotest idea of affairs on the islands I had been to. The -questions asked and the answers given were about like this: -</p> -<p>Q. Where are the islands? -</p> -<p>A. In the South Pacific Ocean. -</p> -<p>Q. What are they like? -</p> -<p>A. The spur of a mountain in a vast plain. -</p> -<p>Q. What are the chief products? -</p> -<p>A. Cocoanuts, oranges, lemons, limes, citrus fruits, arrowroot, sweet -potatoes or yams (a species of potato that takes about eighteen -months to mature), coffee, cotton, chili pepper, corn, rice, tobacco, -sugarcane; a root called taro grows in the swamps and somewhat -resembles the Indian turnip that grows in the Middle States, and on the -islands is cultivated for food, being one of the most staple products; -breadfruit grows in great abundance; there is a fruit called viapple -and another called doava, neither of which is of much importance. There -are also pineapples, bananas, and a fruit called feii which grows on a -plant like the banana, and is one of the best and most generally used -fruits there. -</p> -<p>Q. Is the soil rich? -</p> -<p>A. Yes; but this is limited to small strips along the coasts and the -water courses. -</p> -<p>Q. What kind of a climate is it? -</p> -<p>A. Very hot. Papeete, the capital of Tahiti, is in seventeen degrees -thirty-two minutes south latitude, and one hundred and forty-four -degrees thirty-four minutes west longitude, computed from Greenwich, -and if it were not for the frequent rains, southerly breezes, and the -constant trade winds, it would be almost impossible for human beings to -live there. -</p> -<p>Q. What kinds of timber grow there? -</p> -<p>A. Various kinds of scrubby timber not known in our country, chief of -which is hutu or tamana, an excellent timber for shipbuilding, and for -fine furniture; there is also sandal wood, the heart being of great -value, as it is used for perfume, and decorating musical instruments, -work-boxes, etc. -</p> -<p>Q. Having given a brief description of the islands composing the -Society group, the Tubuoi and Tubuoimono archipelago, and of their -principal products, the next question was: What kind of people inhabit -them? -</p> -<p>A. They are very large in stature, are brave, and formerly were very -warlike. Their complexion is like that of the American Indian, and -their habits are much the same. They are hospitable to a fault. In -their heathenish days, they were idol-worshipers and very devout. -Originally, their government was patriarchal, but as they increased it -became tribal, then confederate. A district of country called monteina -would combine for war purposes, and finally would become a monarchy. -Thus they had their kings and queens, and began to have royalty. As -to other matters, there are no native animals, but of fowls there are -such as sea birds, and the common wild duck; also of reptiles, a small, -harmless, greenish lizard. The greatest insect pests are the nimble -flea and the common mosquito, in numberless quantities. Many years ago -the people had the smallpox, and as it was a strange disease to them, -and they were without the knowledge of how to treat it, they died by -hundreds, if not by thousands. As soon as they learned that it was -contagious, the people fled to the mountains, and there hid away until -their swine and chickens went wild, in which state these increased, -producing the wild boar and wild chickens, which are frequently -hunted by the people, and which, but for the rugged fastnesses of the -mountains, soon would become extinct. -</p> -<p><img src="images/typical.jpg" id="typical" alt="A TYPICAL TAHITIAN WITH HIS BURDEN OF BREAD FRUIT AND FEII."></p> -<p class="caption">A TYPICAL TAHITIAN WITH HIS BURDEN OF BREAD FRUIT AND FEII. -</p> -<p>I will leave that subject now and return to my own experiences after -getting home. I turned my hand to farm labor, and anything I could get -to do until the 6th of September. Then Major Moore, having received -orders from Governor Young to raise a company of men and send them -north to Fort Hall, to protect or assist a company there on some -business, called me to take charge of that company. When we were within -three hours of starting, the order to go was countermanded, and I -continued to work for two dollars per day until the 8th of October, -when, at a general conference, I was called, with several others, to -take a mission to the Indian tribes east of the Salt Lake valley. -</p> -<p>Elder Orson Hyde was chosen to lead the company to somewhere in the -region of the Green River, select a place, and there build an outpost -from which to operate as peacemakers among the Indians, to preach -civilization to them, to try and teach them how to cultivate the -soil, to instruct them in the arts and sciences if possible, and by -that means prevent trouble for our frontier settlements and emigrant -companies. We were to identify our interests with theirs, even to -marrying among them, if we would be permitted to take the young -daughters of the chief and leading men, and have them dressed like -civilized people, and educated. It was thought that by forming that -kind of an alliance we could have more power to do them good, and keep -peace among the adjacent tribes as also with our own people. -</p> -<p>It was known that there were wicked and cruel white men among the -Indians, working up the spirit of robbery and murder among the savage -tribes, and against the Mormon people. Our missionary call was to take -our lives in our hands, as true patriots, and head off, and operate as -far as possible against the wicked plots of white men who were trying -to carry their plans to success through the Indians, and possibly set -the savages on the war path, that the government might send troops out. -and thus make a better market for the schemers' herds of cattle and -horses. -</p> -<p>From the October conference I returned to Ogden City, settled what -little business I had, and prepared for the mission, going to Salt Lake -City on the 15th, ready for the work assigned me. There I reported -myself, but the majority of the men who had been called at the same -time that I was were not ready until the 1st of November, when we met -in the Council House, and there effected an organization. -</p> -<p>It was in the evening, about 8 o'clock, when we met. There were -thirty-nine men who reported themselves ready to start next morning. -November 2nd. Elders Orson Hyde, Parley P. Pratt and Ezra T. Benson, -of the Twelve Apostles, were present, and organized the company by -appointing Elders John Nebeker president and captain, John Harvey -first counselor and lieutenant and James S. Brown second counselor -and lieutenant. The captain and lieutenants were so that we might act -in a military capacity if necessity required it, and the president -and counselors were for ecclesiastical affairs. The officers were -blessed and set apart by the three Apostles named. The Apostles told -the members of the company that they would be blessed equally with the -officers if they would be prayerful, do their duty, and hearken to and -be united with their officers. We were also told that some of us might -have to take Indian wives. -</p> -<p>On November 2nd twenty wagons, with one hundred and ten head of cattle, -horses and mules, were ready for a start. To each man there was three -hundred pounds of flour, seventy-five pounds of seed wheat, and forty -pounds of seed potatoes. Each man fitted himself up with such other -provisions and seed as he chose or could do. We started out at 1 -o'clock p.m., and that night camped in Emigration Canyon. -</p> -<p>We crossed the Little Mountain on November 3rd. Having to double teams, -we made slow headway, and only got to within four miles of the Big -Mountain. On the 5th, we crossed that, and camped at its eastern base. -The road was very bad, so that we made but few miles on the 6th, and -camped in the foothills, where our stock was attacked about 3 o'clock -a.m. by a pack of big gray wolves, which were so savage that every man -had to be called out to fight them. The night was very dark, and we -fired guns, built fires in a circle around the stock, and stayed with -them till daylight. Yet, with all that, some of the milch cows had part -of their udders torn off, while others were badly gashed as by a sharp -knife. By hard work we succeeded in preventing the wolves killing any -of our animals, and then got an early start on the morning of the 7th. -</p> -<p>As we were heavily loaded, and the roads very rough, we did not reach -Fort Bridger until November 15th. At that place there were twelve or -fifteen rough mountain men. They seemed to be very surly and suspicious -of us and the spirit of murder and death appeared to be lurking in -their minds. Many of our party could feel that terrible influence and -made remarks about it. It was not long till we were informed by some of -the party at the fort that two men there had fought a duel the night -before with butcher knives, and both were killed. The others of the -party had dug a hole and had thrown both men into it as they had fallen -and died—clasped in each other's arms. Thus the gloom and cloud of -death that we had felt so plainly was partially explained. We passed -one and a half miles above the fort, and camped on Black's Fork. That -night it snowed about six inches. -</p> -<p>We learned from the men at Fort Bridger that fifteen or twenty mountain -men had moved over on to Henry's Fork, and that the Ute Indians were -coming over there to winter. That was the place we were heading -for, and some of the roughest men of the mountains were claiming -that as their country. Our information now being that there was a -well-organized band of from seventy-five to a hundred desperadoes in -the vicinity of Green River, at the very point that we had hoped to -occupy with our little company, the situation was serious; and with -snow on the ground, to decide what to do was an important matter. -We broke camp and passed over the divide to Smith's Fork. There the -Spirit seemed to forbid us going any farther, and we held a short -consultation, which resulted in the appointment of a committee of five, -of which the writer was one. -</p> -<p>This committee followed up the creek to a point where the water comes -down through the foothills, and there, between the forks of the stream, -selected a spot for winter quarters, and to build a blockhouse. Then -they returned and made their report, which was accepted by the captain -and his men. The camp was moved to the chosen ground on November 27th. -We at once pitted our potatoes, the committee named being retained -to draft and superintend the erection of the blockhouse. The writer -made the plans of the blockhouse, which was built with four wings, or -rooms, of equal size; these, uniting at the corners, formed a center -room, which was built two stories high. All the rooms were provided -with port holes, the center being used for storage, and the upper for a -guardhouse, from which the country around could be overlooked. The plan -being accepted, every man went to work with a will, and in two weeks -the house was ready for occupancy. This was not an hour too soon, for -the weather was very cold and threatening. -</p> -<p>On the 26th, Captain Isaac Bullock came in with fifty-three men and -twenty-five wagons. When they joined us our company was ninety-two -strong, all well armed; and when our blockhouse was completed we -felt safer than ever. The work of building was continued until all -were comfortably housed in log cabins, and a heavy log corral was -constructed for our stock in case of an emergency. -</p> -<p>We had not been settled down long, when some of the mountaineers paid -us a visit and applauded our energy and enterprise. Notwithstanding -that, we could easily discern a feeling of envy on their part. In -consequence, we did not feel any too safe, especially when the snow -became deep between our friends and ourselves, for we frequently -heard that the Ute Indians, then a very warlike and hostile tribe, -were threatening to come upon us from the east, by an open country. -Under the circumstances, we could see the wisdom of our military -organization; and as we had to have a regular guard, we found that -we must have a sergeant thereof; accordingly, the author was elected -to fill that position, and as we had several beef cattle and other -provisions in common, a commissary or quartermaster was necessary, -and the sergeant was called to fill that position also. We further -perfected our organization by electing a captain for every ten men. -We were also instructed to keep our firearms in perfect order, and to -have our powder dry, that we might be prepared for any emergency. Thus -provided for, we continued to get out fencing limber, and exploring -parties were sent out, which acted as scouts, and we learned the -resources of the country, and sought out every advantage. -</p> -<p>It was on December 8 when Apostle Orson Hyde came into camp. He -preached to us that evening, and gave many words of encouragement. On -the 9th he examined our work and defenses. He was highly pleased with -the country, and applauded our choice of location; in fact, he seemed -generally well pleased with what we had done. He preached again, and -gave us much cheer and sound instructions. We prepared our mail in -answer to the one he had brought us, and on the 10th he set out on his -return trip, every one feeling blessed by his visit. -</p> -<p>In our religious and social arrangements, we held regular meetings, had -lectures on different subjects, organized a debating society, and had -readings. On December 26, F. M. Perkins and a party returned from Salt -Lake City, bringing much interesting news, and also supplies of food. -On the 28th, the weather was so cold that we had to abandon outdoor -work. -</p> -<p>Wolves became troublesome to our stock, so we put strychnine and set -traps for the wild beasts, which killed several head of cattle and one -of the strongest horses in our band. The wolves were very numerous, -and when they band, as they do sometimes, and did then, it is almost -impossible for any kind of stock to escape without some loss. Yet, with -rifle, trap and poison, we kept about even with our ravenous enemies. -</p> -<p>January 1, 1854, the weather was fine. On the 5th cold and storms came, -and we also heard more threatening news from the Ute Indians; but this -did not alarm us much, though it prompted us to increased diligence in -looking after our stock. There was some dissatisfaction about guard -duty, as some thought there was too much of it to suit them, and felt -that others should stand two hours to their one; but that was soon -settled and we continued our studies in the Shoshone Indian dialect, -having Elisha B. Ward, an old mountaineer and trapper, and his Indian -wife, Sally, to assist us. Then there was an Indian family of four who -got starved out and came to us for help. We took them in, fed them, -and gave them a room to themselves. Then Sally's brother, Indian John, -and his wife, Madam, came, so that we took them in and fed them. This -condition afforded us increased facilities for studying the Shoshone -dialect, which we carefully availed ourselves of. -</p> -<p>About this time, Louis Tromley, a Frenchman, stabbed Samuel Callwell. -The affair took place near Fort Bridger. Callwell was said to be at the -head of the gang of desperadoes who plied their vocation from Bridger -to Green River, and back on the emigrant route to Laramie; he was a -large, trim built man, about six feet six inches tall, and very daring. -But after a bowie knife was plunged into his vitals he did not survive -long, dying in about twenty-four hours from the time he received the -fatal wound. Tromley was one of Callwell's band, and made his escape. -It was thought by some that if his victim had lived he would have made -trouble for us, but this quarrel gave the gang something else to do. -</p> -<p>We continued our labors and studies; yet with all the opportunities -at hand, there were only about six of us out of the ninety-two that -made even fair progress in learning the Indian tongue. On February 7, -we received more mail. About the 22nd we lost many of our cattle from -starvation and cold. Deep snows fell, and drifted so that our houses -were completely buried, and from the south side we could walk right -up on top of our cabins, while on the north the snow drifted to the -tops of the doors, and packed so hard in one night that it had to be -cut out with the spade, the large chunks being laid back on the floor -until we could get out far enough to clear the houses. This condition -continued for many days. On March 8, the wind blew fearfully, and the -snow drifted so deep that we had to break snow roads, and then drive -our poor cattle and horses from point to point where the snow had been -blown off, leaving the grass bare. In this way many of our animals were -saved. -</p> -<p>On the 12th of March, a party of fifteen or twenty Shoshone Indians -came and pitched camp close to the blockhouse. They were very hungry, -and we divided bread with them, that being the only kind of food we -had left; and in turn their presence afforded us better opportunity -to study their language and customs, a knowledge of the latter being -essential to the successful interpreter. On March 18, more hungry -Indians came. They appeared almost starved, and they begged until they -became a nuisance; yet we divided with them, and ran ourselves short -before our store could be replenished. On the 27th we turned out on a -general hunt for antelope; at this time we were living on bread and -water. Our hunt failed, as it was probable the starving Indians had -killed or run off all the game from that part of the country. On the -29th the weather was still blustery, with heavy snow. We cleared the -blockhouse, and had a jolly dance, to drive dull care away. There being -no ladies to join with us, we christened it the bachelor's dance. -</p> -<p>April 1st came, and we cleared the snow and ice from our houses. On the -5th we received another mail from Salt Lake City, and on the 6th we -hoisted the first liberty pole that was raised in Green River County -to spread the Stars and Stripes of the United States of America to -the mountain breeze. On the 17th there was continuous snow and rain, -making very disagreeable weather. Committees were appointed to select -and stake off the farm land, the writer being on one of the committees. -We also placed out picket guards and chose men to herd our stock, and -corral them at night. On the 18th we started the plows, marking to each -mess their portion, as the committee had been directed to do. From the -23rd to the 26th we had cold, snowy weather. -</p> -<p>On the 28th President Nebeker and C. Merkley started for Salt Lake -City, and on May 1st D. R. Perkins and some others left for their -homes. The rest of the company continued to plow and plant. On the 7th -it snowed, and on the 8th Apostle Orson Hyde came with twenty-five new -men, bringing us a fresh supply of provisions. This supply was very -much appreciated, for we were, and had been for some weeks, living -on bread alone. The new company also brought our mail. I had eleven -letters, all containing good news from home. -</p> -<p>Elder Hyde preached to us on the evening of the 9th, and we had good -cheer; everyone seemed to be encouraged. We also held a council meeting -to select Elders to go to the Indian camps, and learn as near as -possible the feeling of the red men, and their movements, and to carry -out the object of our mission. In that meeting, Elder Hyde called on -the council for four or five Elders to volunteer to go east and hunt -up the Indian camps. There were seven volunteered, namely, E. B. Ward, -Isaac Bullock, John Harvey, J. Arnold, W. S. Muir, James S. Brown and -one other whose name I have lost. Elder Hyde said that E. B. Ward, -Isaac Bullock, and James S. Brown were three accepted from that list, -while James Davis was taken for the fourth. The persons named were then -sustained by the vote of the council, without a dissenting voice. Elder -Hyde gave us some instructions, and said the party would start in one -week from that day, or as much sooner as they chose. -</p> -<p>The council meeting then adjourned, and Judge W. I. Appleby organized -the county of Green River by appointing the officers therefor, Mr. -Appleby having been duly commissioned as judge, and authorized to act -in the capacity in which he did. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXLI"></a>CHAPTER XLI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">SET APART BY ELDER HYDE FOR OUR SPECIAL MISSION—BLESSING CONFERRED -ON THE WRITER—DISCONTENT IN CAMP—UNITY AGAIN PREVAILS—START ON OUR -JOURNEY—WARNED AT GREEN RIVER TO GO NO FARTHER—NOT DETERRED FROM -PERFORMING OUR MISSION—PROCEED ON OUR JOURNEY—FUTILE CHASE AFTER -BUFFALO—SCARCITY OF WATER—A WELCOME SNOW STORM—REACH THE CAMP OF -WASHAKIE, THE SHOSHONE CHIEF—RECEIVED WITH CAUTION—TELL THE CHIEF THE -OBJECT OF OUR VISIT—GIVE HIM BREAD AND SUGAR—BOILED BUFFALO FOR AN -EPICURE—INDIAN POWWOW CALLED—PROCEEDINGS AT THE COUNCIL—OBJECTION -TO ONE OF OUR PROPOSITIONS, WHICH WE WERE NOT ANNOYED AT—RECITAL OF -HOW GOVERNMENT AGENTS SOUGHT TO SUPPLANT WASHAKIE AS CHIEF—WASHAKIE A -GREAT ORATOR. -</p> -<p>ANOTHER meeting was held on the 10th of May, and Elder Hyde preached -again. Then he called on those who had been selected for the mission, -told us to be wise as serpents and harmless as doves, to be cautious -and do all the good that we could to the red men, and said that God -would bless us. He also said, "I do not know which to appoint for the -leader, Brother Brown or Brother Bullock. They are both good men, but -as Brother Bullock is the eldest, he may have more experience." He -then blessed us, and promised me in my blessing that angels should go -before me, the visions of the Lord should be open to my view, and no -weapon that was raised against me should prosper, but that I should go -forth in the power and demonstration of the Lord God, and be mighty -in gathering Israel. Then he further instructed the party, and turned -again to me, pronouncing more blessings in line with those he had -given. Elder Hyde then started on his return trip home, and we prepared -ourselves as speedily as consistent for our expedition into a country -mostly unknown to us. -</p> -<p>April 11th and 12th were blustery, and there was snow. A reaction of -spirit took place among the brethren of the camp, or probably it would -be more proper to say that another spirit came upon the camp—a spirit -of great discontent. For a time it seemed as if it would break up the -mission, but finally it was overcome, and all went well again. -</p> -<p>On the 13th of April we set out on our journey, and went to Green -River the first day, through rain and sleet part of the time. At -Green River we found about thirty of the roughest kind of mountain -men, engaged in drinking, gambling and carousing. Some Frenchmen, -Mexicans or "Greasers," Indians, half-breeds, and some Americans of a -low class, associated there, and insisted on us dining with them, and -were very hospitable. They warned us not to venture any farther in the -direction that we were going, saying that if we did so we would not -return alive—that there would not be a "grease spot" left of us. This -statement corresponded with what we had heard before, yet it did not -deter us. There were in the crowd, Joshua Terry, also four Spaniards -from the west, bound for Taos, New Mexico. They joined us, and we -crossed the river, which was so deep that it was all that we possibly -could do to ford it. The venture was harder than we expected it to be, -but we succeeded, and struck out for the head of Bitter Creek, via -Pilot Butte, making all the distance consistent with the condition of -our animals. When we reached Bitter Creek, we followed up to the head, -then bore to the southeast, crossing a high, dry country, for two days -without water, then came in sight of a small herd of buffalo. -</p> -<p>The Mexicans, with Ward and Davis, gave chase to the herd, while -Bullock and I kept on our course with the pack animals, guided across -the plains by mountain peaks and openings in the range of mountains. -The hunters did not rejoin us until the latter part of the next day. -They succeeded in killing one poor buffalo bull, and were so thirsty -that they opened the tripe and drank the liquid it contained, to save -their lives, for they were so far gone as not to be able to bring any -portion of the carcass to camp. That day we came across a shallow pool -of water, where we rested a short time. -</p> -<p>We had been told that by crossing the country in the direction we were -going we would be sure to strike the Indian trail leading in toward the -headwaters of the Platte River; consequently we continued on till we -came to the main divide between the waters of the east and the west. -There Joshua Terry and the Spaniards parted with us, and we kept along -on the divide, or summit of the Rocky Mountains, between the Platte and -the Rio Grande, while they passed over. That night we camped on the -divide, and had a snowstorm on us, in which we were fortunate, as by -that means we obtained water for ourselves and animals. The next day -we struck the trail of a few Indians, and by following it up five or -six miles reached another trail which it ran into. This we continued to -follow until 3 p.m., when we came to the camp of Washakie, the Shoshone -Indian chief. -</p> -<p>The first Indian we met would not speak when we accosted him. He shook -his head, and pointed to the chief's lodge. That spirit of "mum" seemed -to pervade the entire camp, and when we rode up in front of the chief's -lodge, that Indian dignitary came out, bowed, and shook hands with each -one of us, but without uttering a word. By gestures he invited us to -dismount, come in, sit down, and tell the truth regarding our errand to -his camp, but no lies. Then he had some clean, nice robes spread for -us. At the same time his women folks came out, taking our horses by the -bits. We dismounted, and took seats as invited. The chief and ourselves -were all "mum" until the horses had been unsaddled, and everything -belonging to us had been put under the bottom of the lodge, just to the -rear of where we sat. -</p> -<p>These proceedings being over, the chief said: "Who are you, from where -do you come, and what is your errand to my country?" Then, by gestures, -he said, "Tell me the truth; do not tell me any lies, nor talk any -crooked talk." Here he paused, and, by motions, invited us to reply. -</p> -<p>We told him we were Mormons, from the Salt Lake country, sent by the -big Mormon captain, to make the acquaintance of him and his people, -that we might talk and be friendly with them, as we wished them to be -friendly with us and with all good people, as also with all the Indian -tribes, for we all had one Peap (father), and it was not pleasing to -Him to see His children nabitink (fight). We said the Great Father had -told our chief many things about all the Indian tribes, and one part -of our business was to learn better the Indian dialects, manners and -customs, so that we could tell the Indians what the Great Spirit had -told our big captain about them. Another part was to warn them that -it would not be many snows before the game of their country would -be killed off or disappear, and we wished to tell them, and to show -them how to till the earth, and raise stock, and build houses, like -the white man did, so that when the game was all gone their wives and -children would not starve to death. We said that some of us might want -to come out into his country and marry some of their good daughters and -rear families by them. We would educate them, so they could read some -good books that we had, and from them they could learn more about the -Great Father, or Spirit. -</p> -<p>Washakie sat and listened very attentively until we were through, when -he said, "Wait a while. My little children are very hungry for some of -the white man's food, and they want some sugar." -</p> -<p>At that we gave him all the bread and sugar we had. He passed it to -his wife, who in turn distributed it to the hungry little ones. Then, -without another word, the chief walked out, but soon returned. His wife -then set a camp kettle partly filled with buffalo beef that had been -partially dried. -</p> -<p>If I should tell the stranger to Indian customs how it was seasoned, I -doubt not he would say. "I could not eat of such food. I know I should -starve to death first." But stop, my friend, do not be too positive -about that. These Indians have a custom among them that when they kill -a buffalo they skin it, leaving the carcass on the hide; then they -slice the flesh in long strips, remove the bones, turn the contents of -the tripe over the meat, thoroughly knead or mix it all through the -beef, and, with a slight shake, hang the meat on a horse rope or lay it -on some sticks for a few hours; then they put it into a camp kettle and -boil it, when it is ready for their guests. Such was part of the life -on the great western plains in 1854. -</p> -<p>Supper over, the council of the camp began to file in; the pipe was -lit, and a rude figure of some of the planets drawn in the ashes of the -fire that occupied the center of the lodge. Then the old man sitting -on the left of the chief held the pipe, we having been seated on the -right of the chief. The latter commenced, and told the story of our -visit, from the time we came into the lodge up to that moment. It was -told without interruption, and then the pipe was started on its way, -following the course of the sun. Every man except the one holding the -pipe put his hand over his mouth, and sat perfectly silent and still. -The one with the pipe took from one to three long draws, allowing the -smoke from the last one to escape gradually through his nostrils, at -the same time passing the pipe with his right hand to the next person; -then, if he had anything to say, he did it in as few words as possible, -and put his hand over his mouth, thus signifying that he had no more to -say. Occasionally some old man, when he took the pipe, made some signs -above and in front of him, struck himself on the breast and offered -a few words of prayer. Thus the pipe was whiffed by all the Indians -of the council, and was then passed into the hands of the white men, -who, in turn, took a whiff as a vow of peace and friendship. Then -the pipe went to the chief, who glanced around the circle, and, as -every man's hand was over his mouth, the chief summed up the subject -in a few words, but always to the point. There being no appeal from -this decision, it is usual at the conclusion of councils for some one -present to walk through the camp and cry aloud that portion intended -for the public, or if it is an order for the whole camp, they get it in -the same way. This crier was called the high ranger of the camp. -</p> -<p>In our case, the only objection that was raised to our proposition was -when we suggested that some of us might want to take some of the young -Indian women for wives. One old and wise counselor said, "No, for we -have not got daughters enough for our own men, and we cannot afford to -give our daughters to the white man, but we are willing to give him -an Indian girl for a white girl. I cannot see why a white man wants -an Indian girl. They are dirty, ugly, stubborn and cross, and it is a -strange idea for white men to want such wives. But I can see why an -Indian wants a white woman." Then the old man drew a graphic picture of -the contrast he was making, and we gave up that point without pursuing -our suit farther. Chief Washakie, however, said the white men might -look around, and if any one of us found a girl that would go with him, -it would be all right, but the Indians must have the same privilege -among the white men. With this the council ended. -</p> -<p>At that time Washakie told us that only a few snows before then he was -chief of all the Shoshones, and the Indians acknowledged him as such, -but he was called to Fort Laramie, to have a talk with the agents of -the big father at Washington, and to receive blankets and many other -things. There the agents called a quiet, unobtrusive man, who never had -been a chief, nor was in the line of chiefs, and designated him as head -of the Shoshones, telling the Indians they must have him as chief, and -respect him as such, and that they, the agents, would recognize him in -that position, and through him they would do all government business. -Then the agents passed out a great quantity of blankets and other -Indian goods, through their appointed chief. In this act, the Indians -saw that the agents had chosen a favorite of their own, so the red men -called him "Tavendu-wets" (the white man's child), but never recognized -him as chief. -</p> -<p>That act of the government agents was the opening wedge to divide the -Shoshone tribe into discontented factions, and thereby weaken it. -Possibly that was the purpose in view, for before that the tribe was -very powerful, with a chief at their head unexcelled for bravery, skill -and farsightedness. Chief Washakie was a bold, noble, hospitable, and -honorable man. As an orator, I think he surpassed any man I ever met. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXLII"></a>CHAPTER XLII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">LEAVE WASHAKIE'S CAMP FOR THE OTHER PORTION OF THE SHOSHONE -TRIBE—INDIAN GUIDE LEAVES US—FOLLOWING A TRAIL—SIGHT THE OTHER -CAMP—WAR SONGS AND DANCES—INDIANS PREPARING FOR WAR—CHIEF -GIVES UP HIS LODGE TO US, WARNING US OF MEN IN HIS CAMP HE CANNOT -CONTROL—INDIAN BRAVES IN WAR PAINT—SURROUNDED BY FIFTEEN HUNDRED -OR TWO THOUSAND INDIANS—LEARN THAT L. B. RYAN, A WHITE DESPERADO -CHIEF, IS IN CAMP, AND HAS SWORN VENGEANCE ON MORMONS—ESCAPE SEEMS -IMPOSSIBLE, BUT WE TRUST IN GOD—RETIRE FOR THE NIGHT—RYAN AND SEVEN -WARRIORS AT OUR LODGE—RYAN ENTERS AND DEMANDS TO KNOW WHERE WE ARE -FROM, AND OUR BUSINESS—HE IS TOLD, THREATENS US, AND SUMMONS HIS -INDIAN BRAVES INSIDE OUR LODGE—THOUGH THE ENEMY ARE TWO TO ONE, -WE ARE READY FOR THEM—PREPARE FOR A FIGHT TO THE DEATH—RYAN AND -HIS MEN LEAVE THE LODGE—WAR DANCE OUTSIDE—WE CONCLUDE TO SELL OUR -LIVES AS DEARLY AS POSSIBLE—WAR PARTY APPROACH THE LODGE AND SLIT -IT IN A NUMBER OF PLACES, THEN SUDDENLY DEPART—OUR LIVES BEING -SPARED, WE REMAIN IN CAMP TILL NEXT DAY—THE CHIEF BEFRIENDS US, -WARNING US NOT TO RETURN THE WAY WE CAME—DISPUTE AS TO THE ROUTE -OF TRAVEL, AND HOW IT IS SETTLED—SATISFIED THAT RYAN INTENDED TO -AMBUSH US—RAINSTORM OBLITERATES OUR TRACKS—CAMP IN THE RAIN—ON THE -ALERT FOR AN ENEMY—SHOOT A BUFFALO—WARD AND DAVIS GIVE CHASE, WHILE -BULLOCK AND I CONTINUE ON OUR ROUTE—CAMP AT A WASH—BULLOCK TAKEN -VERY ILL—A TERRIBLE NIGHT—WARD AND DAVIS NOT RETURNING BY MORNING, -WE MOVE ON—FEAR THAT BULLOCK WILL DIE—DISCOVER OUR COMRADES IN THE -CANYON—BEING HUNGRY, WE OVEREAT—ANOTHER NIGHT OF SICKNESS—EMERGE -FROM THE CANYON—PRESS FORWARD TO GREEN RIVER—WELCOMED BY -FRIENDS—THREE OF OUR PARTY GO ONTO FORT SUPPLY, AND I REMAIN TO MEET -CHIEF WASHAKIE. -</p> -<p>THE morning after the council, Chief Washakie asked us where we were -going to from his camp. We said we wished to go to White Man's Child's -camp of Shoshones. Said he, "Maybe that is good, maybe not. I don't -know. I hear there are bad men over there. I don't know." As there -was no trail leading to that camp, we asked him to send a guide with -us. He replied, "Maybe one go." Our horses having been brought up, -we saddled them, and after a good friendly shake of the hand of the -chief and of some of his council, we started to the southeast, with a -young brave on the lead. When we had traveled about twenty miles, our -guide disappeared over a ridge, but as we had come to a trail it did -not matter to us so long as we could see pony tracks to follow. Still -a feeling of mistrust lurked within us, as it had done all day. We -discussed the matter, but could see no other way open than to press -forward. -</p> -<p>Soon we ascended a hill, from the top of which we could hear a drum, -then many voices in a war song. As we rounded a little point of the -hill we saw numerous lodges, and what appeared to be thousands of -Indians. A large proportion of the latter were dancing and singing -songs. About this time we felt a heavy feeling, and were certain that -the spirit of murder was in the Indian camp. Everybody we met until we -came to the chief's lodge looked as if they were going to war, judging -by the expression of their eyes. -</p> -<p>The chief came slowly out, coolly shook hands with us, ordered our -stock taken care of, and a dish of boiled meat set before us. Then his -family left the lodge, taking their effects, leaving only three robes -for us. The sun was just setting, and the chief said we could occupy -his lodge that night, as he was going away, being afraid to stop there, -as there were men in camp that he could not control. Then he walked off -and out of sight. -</p> -<p>At this time three braves came by in their war paint, stepping along -very lightly, and stripped and armed as if ready for a fight. They took -a sharp glance at us, then passed on up the creek, to where the singing -and dancing were going on. Then war whoops rent the air, and we were -alone around the campfire. -</p> -<p>There we were, surrounded by three hundred Indian lodges, and between -fifteen hundred and two thousand Indians, principally Shoshones, -though there were Cheyennes and Arapahoes mixed with them, for trading -purposes, we supposed. It was dark, our horses had been taken away, we -knew not where, and we were between four and five hundred miles from -any source of protection, so far as we knew. The chief had confessed -his inability to control some men in his camp, and had acknowledged -that he was afraid to stop in his own lodge, he and his family seeking -safer quarters. We were also without food, and the shadow of death -seemed to hover over and close around us, while the war song and dance -were heard plainly. We had also learned that L. B. Ryan, successor to -Samuel Callwell as chief of the organized band of desperadoes, was -at that time beating up and organizing a war party to carry on his -nefarious work of robbery, and that he had sworn vengeance on the first -Mormons that he met. We believed that he was the uncontrollable power -that the chief had referred to. -</p> -<p>Under these circumstances, it was a grave question as to what we could -do for the best. Escape by flight was impossible, and as for attempting -to fight three hundred to one, that was folly. Then what should we do? -Put our trust in God, and go to bed, and if we were killed we wouldn't -have to fall. This was our conclusion, so we attended prayers, and -retired about 8 o'clock. -</p> -<p>Soon the drum and some kind of whistle were heard drawing closer to -us. In a few minutes our outdoor fire was surrounded by L. B. Ryan and -seven young warriors, all well armed with Colt's revolvers. The Indians -had bows and arrows in hand, ready for action. Their paleface companion -undoubtedly was the leader. -</p> -<p>After a brief pause, Ryan came into the lodge and squatted down just -opposite to where Bullock and I lay. He picked up a stick of wood, and -with a cutlass chipped off pieces and stirred up the coals, starting -a bright light. Then he said. "Gentlemen, where do you hail from, and -what is your business here?" -</p> -<p>Mr. Bullock being spokesman, informed him that we were from Utah, -and our business in part was to get acquainted with the Indians, to -ascertain the openings for trade, and to look out the resources of the -country. -</p> -<p>Ryan continued, "Gentlemen, if you have got any papers for me, bring -them out. I have been robbed by the Mormons of my bottom dollar, and by -the eternal gods I am going to have revenge." -</p> -<p>He then smote the billet of wood a heavy blow, at which signal the -seven braves filed into the lodge, and squatted in order, with bows -tightly corded, and arrows in hand. Ward, Davis, and I, were fully -prepared to meet the attack as best we could. Bullock having the -talking to do, was not so well prepared, until I rubbed his ribs with -my bowie knife handle, when he got ready as quickly as possible. There -were eight against four, all inside of one Indian lodge, watching for -the signal from Ryan, and we would have acted promptly on his signal, -or that of one of his braves, and without doubt would have got our -share of the game, in exchanging lead for arrows. It is possible that -Ryan took the same view, for he suddenly rose up and walked out, the -warriors following him. They closed the lodge door behind them, thus -giving us the opportunity to consult, while they held their council and -danced around the fire and sang. -</p> -<p>We hastily concluded that if they entered again it would be to massacre -our party, and that if they began to come in we would fire on them the -moment they opened the deerskin door. I, being in the most convenient -position, was to give the first shot, presuming that Ryan would be -in the lead, and we would be sure to dispose of him in that way. -Meanwhile, all the rest would fire into the war party, whose shadows -could be seen through the lodge, as they were between it and a big -outdoor fire. The next move on our part was for Davis, who lay most -convenient to the back part of the lodge, to make with his knife as -large an opening as possible in the lodge, that we might escape through -it into the creek that passed near by, the banks of which were only six -or eight feet high. Our decision was that the moment we left the lodge -every man was to try and if possible make his escape, no matter what -the conditions might be, so that if either one of us could get away, -and tell where he last saw the rest, it might be some satisfaction to -our friends and relatives. Then each man took the most easy position to -act his part, made ready his firelock, and held it with finger on the -trigger. -</p> -<p>Just then the party outside came around in their dance circle, straight -for the lodge door, Ryan in the lead. They sang and danced right up to -the door, but did not lift it. Next they circled around the lodge, and -with their scalping knives, or some other sharp instruments, slit the -lodge in a number of places. Then, as they came around to the front, -they gave a war whoop, and passed up the creek in the direction whence -they came. Thus we still lived, and were spared the awful necessity of -shedding man's blood, even in self-defense, thanks be to God for His -protection and mercies. Still the clouds hung so low, and so thickly -around, that we could not feel safe in an attempt to leave camp. -</p> -<p>Next morning the chief sent us some boiled buffalo beef, and called and -talked a few moments. He impressed us with the fact that the danger -was not yet over, and that we were safer in his lodge and camp than -we would be out of it, so we contented ourselves as best we could by -loitering around, while the drum and the whistling reeds of the war -party, and the wild shouts, continued all day. At last night came, and -we turned in, as we had done the evening before, with all our clothes, -arms and boots on. -</p> -<p><img src="images/war.jpg" id="war" alt="A WAR PARTY OF SHOSHONES DANCING AROUND THEIR PRISONERS WHILE IN THE CHIEF'S LODGE"></p> -<p class="caption">A WAR PARTY OF SHOSHONES DANCING AROUND THEIR PRISONERS WHILE IN THE CHIEF'S LODGE -</p> -<p>Nothing occurred that night to mar our peace, but the ever threatening -din of the drum and the savage yell of the red man. Again the morning -light broke over us, and our scalps were still in place, but the very -elements seemed to say, "Stay in camp." The Spirit whispered to every -one of us the same thing. We were a unit, and therefore lingered in the -place, closely watching every move. -</p> -<p>Finally the chief came, and our horses were brought. This was at about -1 o'clock p.m. Then, as plainly as ever we saw the clouds in the -firmament break and scatter, we felt the clouds of death begin to part. -We waited no longer; our horses were saddled, packs were put in place, -and the chief gave us a slight indication, letting us understand that -it was a good time to move. At that moment Ryan and his allies came up, -apparently changed in their behavior. Ryan inquired of us by what route -we intended to return. Mr. Bullock said we expected to go to Washakie's -camp, and thence back by the same route we had come on. Immediately the -chief stepped away into the brush, we mounted, and saying good-bye, -started down the creek. -</p> -<p>A few moments later, as we rounded a bend, the chief popped out of the -brush just in front of and so as to meet us. Without seeming to notice -us in the least, he said, "Do not go the way you said you would, for -there are men in my camp that I cannot control." Brother Bullock did -not catch the idea, but the other three of us did. We understood his -action as well as his words. Soon we came to where we had got to decide -which course we would take. Brother Bullock was determined to keep his -word, and go by the route that he had told Ryan he would do, but the -three others were a unit in insisting on taking another way. We told -him we understood perfectly the chief, that if we went by that route we -would be ambushed, and every soul of us would be killed. Still Brother -Bullock insisted on keeping his word with the Indians; and more, he had -promised Washakie that he would return by his camp. Then Ward and Davis -came straight out and said they knew that meant death, and they would -not follow on that trail; so they started off another way. -</p> -<p>At this juncture I said: "Brother Bullock, I never deserted my -file-leader in my life, and I will not do it now. I will follow you to -the death, for I am certain that path leads there, and if you persist -in going that way I will follow, and will claim my blood at your hands, -for the others, the three of us, see alike." Then Ward and Davis turned -and said that on the same conditions as those I had named they would go -with Brother Bullock; but the latter said the price was too great, and -he would go with us, but he very much regretted breaking his word with -the red man. -</p> -<p>Every minute was precious at that time. We were well satisfied that -Ryan would not shrink to do from ambush what he had hesitated to do in -the chief's lodge, and that if he could strike our trail he would do it -to the death; so we made the best speed consistent with the conditions -surrounding us. -</p> -<p>As we were passing up the long slope of the mountain, and while yet -almost in sight of the camp, a small, dense, black cloud arose in the -south. It passed in our rear and over the Indian camp, and torrents of -rain seemed to fall there, while we were caught only in the storm's -edge. Thus our tracks were completely obliterated. Soon we came into a -trail leading along our way, and followed it to quite a bold running -creek. As the rain had ceased where we were, to further elude our -enemies we followed up in the bed of the creek until we came to a rocky -ridge which led us up among the cliffs, where it would be difficult -for any one to follow us and make much headway. While there among the -rocks, Ward and Davis saw an old mountain sheep, which they pursued -and captured, but he fell in a place so difficult of access, and night -coming on, that it was impossible to get but a small portion of him. -Bullock and I kept on our course, and were overtaken by our companions -just at dark. -</p> -<p>We pushed on as quickly as possible, for the rain was coming on in -torrents. At last the night became so densely dark that we could only -keep together by the noise of our camp equipage, and by talking. It was -impossible to see where we were going, so we camped in a sag. It rained -so hard that it was with much work that we started a fire, and then it -was quite as difficult to keep it going till we could frizzle a morsel -of the old ram; so each bolted his rations half raw, and having hobbled -our animals securely, we rolled ourselves in half-wet blankets and laid -down or the ground, which already had been soaked to the consistency of -mud, and we wallowed there until next morning. Then two of us brought -up and saddled horses, while the other two frizzled a little more of -the ram, which was bolted, as before, for it was too tough to chew in -a way anything like satisfactory. We then wrung our blankets, for they -were full of water, as in the place where we had laid down the water -was half shoetop deep. -</p> -<p>By sunrise we were mounted, feeling satisfied that our track of the -day before had been covered up, and thirty miles of our flight was -behind us. The country was high and barren, but we avoided conspicuous -points, and traveled the most secluded way, ever on the alert to catch -the first sight of an enemy, or of any kind of game, for our portion of -flesh of the ram of the Rockies had disappeared. -</p> -<p>In the after part of the day the sun shone. This was while we were -crossing the head of an open flat, in a dry country, with a dry gully -coursing down through it. This gully was fringed with an abundant -growth of sagebrush, and as we looked down the flat we saw some animals -coming out from a bend in the gully. We ascertained to our delight that -there were seven buffaloes. Our decision was to spare no efforts in an -endeavor to secure one of the animals, for this was a rare chance, as -the Indians had hunted every bit of game that it was possible for them -to do in that part of the country. -</p> -<p>To accomplish our most desirable object at this particular time, Ward, -Davis and I secured our horses, leaving Bullock to guard them and -the pack mules. The three of us made our way down the gulch, and as -the wind came to us from the buffaloes, there was no danger of them -scenting us. Thus we secured an excellent position, and waiting a few -minutes for them to feed to within about sixty yards of us, we decided -on the one that had the sleekest coat, thinking he would be the best -beef; for all were very poor old bulls, and we did not wish to injure -more than we needed to keep us from starvation. We all took deliberate -aim, and three rifles rang out as one. The only result visible to us -was that the game wheeled, and ran directly on the back track, leaving -us without even a hope of buffalo meat until we followed on their trail -seventy or eighty rods. There we found where one animal had cast his -cud, and later we saw some blood splattered about. All felt sure we had -hit the buffalo, for each knew how his rifle shot, and said he never -drew a nicer bead on an animal in his life. Then Ward and Davis got -their horses and gave chase, as the game had run almost parallel with -our route toward the notch in the mountains for which we were aiming. -</p> -<p>Bullock and I kept on the course our party had marked out to travel, -but before we reached the mountain pass we were heading for, night and -rain came on, and we had to camp in an open greasewood plain. Coming to -a very deep wash that had good feed in it, we concluded to hobble our -animals in the wash. It was difficult to get our stock in, as the banks -were very steep, but at last we succeeded in getting them down, and -felt that they were tolerably safe for the night, with some watching. -We gathered a little greasewood, for there was no other fuel, and tried -to get a tire started in the rain and darkness. -</p> -<p>During this time, Bullock began to have cramps, in the stomach and -bowels, and then in his limbs, and soon he was taken with a heavy -chill. It seemed that he would die, in spite of all that I could do -for him. I rubbed him, prayed for him, and put him in a pack of wet -blankets, for we had no other, and were without any earthly comfort for -such an emergency. At last I caught some rain in the frying-pan, then -got hold of our cracker sack, in which was about two tablespoonfuls of -crumbs and dust that had rubbed off the crackers. I heated the water, -put the crumbs in, and brought the mixture to a boil, stirring it so -that it appeared something like gruel, and gave it to the sick man, -who became easier. Then I went out, feeling my way, to see what had -become of our stock, and got so far off in the darkness that I had -great difficulty in finding my way back to my sick companion, but after -much anxiety and bother I found him suffering intensely. I set to work -rubbing him and encouraging him the best I could. I spent the entire -night in attending to him and watching the stock. -</p> -<p>Morning came, and still the hunters were unheard of. At one time I -almost despaired of the sick man's life, and thought, if he died, -what could I do with him, so far away from help. I could not take him -home, neither could I put him out of reach of wild beasts, for I had -no spade, pickaxe or shovel; nor was there timber in sight to cremate -him. I had not a mouthful of food, and what had become of our partners, -Ward and Davis, I could not tell. Then came the reaction of the spirit, -and the thought that I must do the best that I could. It would not do -to despair. I must pray for the patient, pack up, and get out of that -place. -</p> -<p>The patient seemed to rally with the dawn of day, and by sunrise we -were on our way, and entered the canyon we had been heading for. We -saw no signs of our friends until we reached their camp in the canyon, -for it had rained so heavily as to obliterate the horse tracks. As -they had gone on, we were not quite sure that it was their camp and -tracks, and the canyon afforded excellent opportunity for ambush. But -we were there and must go through. The sick man held up with wonderful -fortitude, though suffering greatly. About 2 p.m. we sighted our -comrades, the buffalo hunters. They mistook us for enemies and fled, -until they found a convenient place to hide themselves and horses, and -where they watched until they saw the gleaming of the sunlight upon our -rifle barrels. Then they recognized us, and as we came up we had a warm -greeting. -</p> -<p>Being together once more we hid our animals among the cedars, and -selected our camp with care, as it was night. Our hunters had been -successful, after a chase of ten miles, in getting the buffalo; they -had a hard and hazardous fight with the wounded animal, and it took -them till after dark before they could get what buffalo meat they could -carry on their horses. They also had a very severe night of it; but -the lost were found, and with plenty of buffalo meat in camp we were -thankful. -</p> -<p>We broiled and ate, boiled and ate and ate raw liver, and marrow out of -the bones; for be known that men in the condition we were, with severe -hunger, do not always realize how much they have eaten until they -eat too much. So it was with us. When we were through with the meal, -we prepared to "jerk" the remainder of the beef, but before that was -done my three companions were attacked with vomiting and purging; then -followed chills and cramps, and for about four or five hours it seemed -they might all die. I could not say which would go first, and the -previous night's experience was reiterated. I confess that I had been -guilty of as much folly and unreason as they, but being more robust -than the others, I could endure more than they; but I had the very same -kind of an attack as they did, before the journey was over. -</p> -<p>When morning came, a sicker and a harder looking lot of men seldom -is seen in the mountains. Yet we must travel, so passed through that -canyon out onto an open plain, leaving the creek to the south of us. -In the afternoon we came to a smooth clay grade, on which were fresh -horse and moccasin tracks, and four large capital letters, in English; -I think they were N, W, H and E. We concluded they had been marked out -with a sharp stick, but not in a manner intelligible to us, so we were -suspicious and cautiously pushed on to a place of shelter and rest. -</p> -<p>It was on the 1st day of June that we reached the Middle Ferry on Green -River, Green River County, Utah. There we met with W. I. Appleby, -probate judge, Hosea Stout, prosecuting attorney, William Hickman, -sheriff, Captain Hawley, the ferryman, and his family and some others. -They did not have to be told what we most needed, but supplied with -liberal hand our necessities, for all were aware that the object of -our mission had been to protect just such as they, and the innocent -immigrants, and their property, from not only the raids of the red men, -but also from the more wicked and baser white brigands. -</p> -<p>We rested at Green River until the 4th of June, when my fellow -missionaries left for Fort Supply. I remained as interpreter, and to -fill our appointment with Chief Washakie, who was to be at the ferry by -July 15. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXLIII"></a>CHAPTER XLIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">ENGAGED AS INTERPRETER—CLASS OF PEOPLE AT GREEN RIVER—APPOINTED -DEPUTY SHERIFF—DROVER THREATENS TO KILL BOATMEN—ARREST ORDERED—RIDE -INTO THE OUTLAWS' CAMP—BLUFFING THE CAPTAIN—A PERILOUS -SITUATION—PARLEY WITH DROVERS—COMPROMISE EFFECTED—DEALING WITH -LAW-BREAKERS—"BILL" HICKMAN AS SHERIFF—SWIMMING CATTLE OVER GREEN -RIVER—A DROVER'S FAILURE—WRITER EMPLOYED TO GET CATTLE OVER—HOW IT -IS DONE—SECRET OF SUCCESS—ARRIVAL OF WASHAKIE—THE FERRYMAN OFFENDS -HIM—THE ANGRY INDIAN SWEARS VENGEANCE ON THE WHITE MAN—HIS PARTING -THREAT—IN PERIL OF AN INDIAN MASSACRE. -</p> -<p>AS I had become a fairly good interpreter, the ferry company proposed -to pay my board at Green River while I stayed, as there was no one else -there who could converse with the Indians. The country was new and -wild, and while there were some very good people, the road was lined -with California immigrants and drovers, many of them of a very rough -class, to say the best of them. They would camp a day or two on the -river, and drink, gamble and fight; then the traders and rough mountain -men, half-caste Indians, French and Spaniards, were numerous; there -were also blacksmith and repair shops, whisky saloons, gambling tables, -and sometimes there would be a perfect jam of wagons and cattle, and -two or three hundred men. There were quarrels and fights, and often -men would be shot or stabbed. As the court had been organized only -about two months, it was almost impossible for the sheriff or any -other officer to serve a writ or order of court, unless he had a posse -to back him. Sometimes the ferryman at the Upper Ferry would be run -off his post, and a company of mountain men would run the ferry and -take the money, and it would require every man that was on the side -of law and order to back the officer. In this situation I, though a -missionary, was summoned to take charge of a posse of men to assist the -sheriff in making arrests. -</p> -<p>One time there came a man with four thousand head of cattle. He crossed -the river, passed down about four miles and camped under a steep sand -bluff. He had missed a calf, and sent a man back for it. A small -party of Indians, passing along that way, had picked up the animal -and carried it off, supposing that the drovers had abandoned it. The -man who had been sent for the calf, not finding it, rode up to the -ferry and demanded the animal of the boatmen. These told him they did -not have his calf, whereupon he swore at them, called them liars and -thieves, and threatened to kill them, at the same time leveling his -double-barreled shotgun at them. -</p> -<p>Judge Appleby happened to be standing within a few feet of the boatmen, -and heard the whole conversation. He ordered the sheriff to take the -man, dead or alive. The sheriff summoned me to his aid, and we started -at once for the culprit. When we got to within four rods of him he -called out, "Do you want anything of me, gentlemen?" The sheriff said, -"Yes; I am the sheriff, and you are my prisoner." The man being on -horseback, defied the sheriff and fled. We fired two shots in the air, -thinking he would surrender, but he did not, and the sheriff pressed -into service the horses of two immigrants near by, and he and I pursued -the fugitive, following him about four miles, where we suddenly came -upon his camp of twenty-four men, armed with double-barrelled shotguns. -</p> -<p>The man having had considerably the start of us, had time to get the -camp rallied and ready for action, telling them that two men had shot -at and were then in hot pursuit of him. We were not aware of his camp -being there until we reached the brow of the bluff; then our only -chance was to ride boldly down into the camp, which we did, the sheriff -shouting, "Hold on, gentlemen! I am the sheriff of this county." The -captain of the camp, being a cool-headed and fearless man, said to his -men, "Hold on, boys, wait for the word." -</p> -<p>The moment we got into camp we dismounted, and I presume that at least -a dozen guns were leveled at us, their holders being greatly excited, -and swearing death to us if we dared to lay a finger on the fugitive, -or on any other person in the camp. The captain, however, said, "Hold -on, boys! Let's hear what these men have to say." Then the sheriff said -the man (pointing to the culprit) had committed an offense against the -law, in threatening the lives of the boatmen, and leveling his gun as -if to carry out the threat, and the sheriff had been ordered by the -judge to arrest him, but he had defied the officer and fled. "But," -said the captain, "you shot at him." To this the sheriff replied, "We -called on him to halt, and as he refused to obey, a couple of shots -were fired over his head to make him stop, but he did not do so, and we -followed him to your camp. I now demand him of you as his captain." -</p> -<p>At this the captain declared that the sheriff had shot at his man and -had scared him almost to death. He pointed to the man, who was shaking -as if he had a treble shock of the ague, and continued that before -the sheriff should take him every drop of blood in the camp should be -shed. The men brawled out, "Hear! Hear!" when the sheriff said, "All -right, Captain. You may get away with us two, but we have between -seventy-five and one hundred men just over the hills here, and in less -than twenty-four hours we will have you and every man in your camp, and -your stock will have to foot the bill." -</p> -<p>Thereupon the captain made response that he would come and answer -for his man, but the sheriff could not take him. Thus the matter was -compromised subject to the court's approval. The captain promised to be -at the judge's within two hours, and was there. So the whole matter was -settled without bloodshed. -</p> -<p>This incident is only an illustration of what had to be met every few -days, in which men would refuse to yield to the law until they had to -do so or die, and many were the times that we had to force them down -with the revolver, when, if we had not had "the drop" on them they -would not have yielded. We met men face to face, with deadly weapons, -and if it had not been for the cunning and the cool head of "Bill" -Hickman, as he was commonly called, blood would have been shed more -than once when it was avoided. I speak of "Bill" Hickman as I found -him in the short time I was with him. In his official capacity he was -cunning, and was always ready to support the law while I was with him -on Green River. -</p> -<p>One day about 10 o'clock a.m., a herd of four hundred head of cattle -came up, and the owners ferried their wagons across the river. Then -they tried to swim their cattle over but could not do so. I stood by -and watched their futile efforts until I observed the reason the cattle -would not go across. Then I attempted to tell the captain that he could -not swim his stock with the sun shining in their faces. The captain -being one of those self-sufficient men often met with, rather snubbed -me, saying, "I have handled cattle before today." I turned away, -remarking that he never would get his cattle across in that manner, and -saying that I could put every head over at the first attempt. -</p> -<p>Some one repeated to the "boss" what I had said, and asked him why he -did not get that mountaineer to help, as he understood the business -better than anyone else on the river. "Well," he said, "we will make -another try, and if we do not succeed, we will see what he can do." The -trial was another failure. Then he came to me and said, "Cap., what -will you charge me to swim those cattle, and insure me against loss?" -I answered, "You have wearied your cattle and fooled them so much that -it will be more trouble now than at first, but if you will drive your -stock out on that 'bottom' and call your men away from them, I will -swim them and insure every hoof, for twenty-five cents a head." Said -he, "I will do it, for it will cost fifty cents a head to cross them in -the boat. So you will take charge of them on the 'bottom?'" -</p> -<p>"Yes," said I, "so you do not let them scatter too much." -</p> -<p>The river was booming, but I knew of a place where the bank was three -or four feet higher than the water, and where the stream ran swiftly, -setting across to where the cattle would reach a gradual slope. I then -went to a camp of Indians near by, and hired four of them to assist -me. They stripped and mounted their ponies with their robes about -them. One went between the cattle and the river, so as to lead, and -the others circled around the stock and got them all headed toward the -place designated for them to take to the water. Then they caused the -cattle to increase their speed until they were on the gallop, when the -Indians gave a few yells and shook their robes, the man in the lead -leaped his horse into the river, and every hoof took to the water, -and were across safe and sound within thirty minutes from the time -they started. The captain paid without objecting, and would have me -go over and take supper with him and his family. He said, "Aside from -having my cattle across safe and sound, I have the worth of my money in -valuable experience." Next day he was back over the river, and would -tell of the incident and say to the drovers he met with, "There is that -mountaineer. I am —— if he can't beat any man swimming cattle that I -ever saw." And others would tell the drovers the same story. -</p> -<p>Now, my friendly reader, I will tell you the secret of swimming horses -and cattle across a river. It is: Find a place (which you always can -do) somewhere in the bends of the watercourse, where you can swim -your stock from the sun, and where they take to the water the deeper -the better, even if you have to make them jump from the banks. The -swifter the current the better; then they are not so likely to injure -one another in jumping. Again, see that the outcoming place is on -a grade, and the water is shallow. Then have some good swimmer, on -horseback, take the lead; push your stock to a lively gait, and success -is assured. I had charge of swimming ten thousand head of cattle across -Green River, in the months of June and July, 1854, and never lost a -hoof, yet forced hundreds of them over banks eight to ten feet high, -into the water. In such case, the water must be deep, or we might have -sustained damage. I have found, as a rule, that nearly all men who have -much money or property think that they know it all, and are hard to -convince. But some of the drovers learned by object lessons, and almost -all of them thought they could swim their own cattle; and so they could -have done, if they had known the correct plan, or had made the effort -after sundown or before sunrise. -</p> -<p>About the time set for his arrival, Washakie, the great Shoshone -chieftain, came in with seven of his braves, and quietly walked around. -First, he inspected the boat and its fixtures, or tackle; then he -went to the brewery, the bakery, store, court room, whisky saloon, -blacksmith shops, card tables, saw much money changing hands, and -observed that money would purchase about anything the white man had. -</p> -<p>When the chief had had a friendly visit all around, he went to the -office of Captain Hawley, the ferryman. There he saw the captain taking -and handling considerable money, among the precious metal being two -or three fifty-dollar gold slugs. He asked for one of these, but the -captain laughed at him, and offered him a silver dollar. -</p> -<p>This action offended Washakie, who walked away, and by some means got -hold of some intoxicants. Then he began to think what was going on -in the land of his forefathers, and came to me and said: "This is my -country, and my people's country. My fathers lived here, and drank -water from this river, while our ponies grazed on these bottoms. Our -mothers gathered the dry wood from this land. The buffalo and elk -came here to drink water and eat grass; but now they have been killed -or driven back out of our land. The grass is all eaten off by the -white man's horses and cattle, and the dry wood has been burned; and -sometimes, when our young men have been hunting, and got tired and -hungry, they have come to the white man's camp, and have been ordered -to get out, and they are slapped, or kicked, and called 'd—d Injuns.' -Then our young men get heap mad, and say that when they have the -advantage of the white man, as they have often, they will take revenge -upon him. Sometimes they have been so abused that they have threatened -to kill all the white men they meet in our land. But I have always been -a friend to the white man, and have told my people never to moisten our -land with his blood; and to this day the white man can not show in all -our country where the Shoshone has killed one of his people, though -we can point to many abuses we have patiently suffered from him. Now -I can see that he only loves himself; he loves his own flesh, and he -does not think of us; he loves heap money; he has a big bag full of it; -he got it on my land, and would not give me a little piece. I am mad, -and you heap my good friend, and I will tell you what I am going to -do. Every white man, woman or child, that I find on this side of that -water," pointing to the river, "at sunrise tomorrow I will wipe them -out" (rubbing his hands together). He went on: "You heap my friend; you -stay here all right; you tell them to leave my land. If they are on the -other side of my water, all right, me no kill them, they go home to -their own country, no come back to my land. Tomorrow morning when the -sun come up, you see me. My warriors come, heap damn mad, and wipe them -all out, no one leave." -</p> -<p>"Good-by, you tell him, chief, he mad!" was Washakie's parting -exclamation, as he mounted his horse and rode away to his camp on the -Big Sandy, some fifteen miles back from the Green River. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXLIV"></a>CHAPTER XLIV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">CONSTERNATION AT WASHAKIE'S DECLARATION—PEOPLE HURRY ACROSS THE -RIVER—THE WRITER IS ASKED TO ATTEMPT A RECONCILIATION—NIGHT TOO DARK -TO TRAVEL—CHIEF WASHAKIE AND BRAVES APPEAR AT SUNRISE—THE CHIEF -NOTES THAT THE PEOPLE ARE TERROR-STRICKEN, AND DECIDES THAT HE WILL BE -THEIR FRIEND—TROUBLOUS EXPLOITS OF MOUNTAIN MEN—SHERIFF'S PLAN OF -ARREST—HOW THE SCHEME WORKED—DESPERADOES FREED BY THE COURT—CHASING -AN OFFENDER—SURROUNDED BY HIS ASSOCIATES—COOLNESS AND PLUCK OF THE -SHERIFF WIN—READY TO RETURN HOME—A TRYING EXPERIENCE. -</p> -<p>AS might have been expected, I lost no time in apprising the people -of the Indian threat, and the white population promptly complied with -the order to move; so that by daylight there was little of value -on that side of the river. There was great consternation among the -people, and Captain Hawley was quite willing to send a fifty-dollar -slug to the chief; but it was late in the evening, and no one to go -but myself. There was no telling how much liquor there might be in the -Indian camp, so it was not a pleasant job for either friend or foe to -approach the savages on such a dark night as that was. Although I had -Washakie's promise of friendship, I knew that when the Indians were -drunk they were not good company, and I did not care to expose myself -to unnecessary danger. -</p> -<p>Individually I had nothing at stake, but there were others who had -their families and thousands of dollars' worth of property at the -mercy of the enraged red men. In this crisis, when I was asked if I -would take the risk, and what amount I would give my service for, I -said I would undertake to go that night and attempt a reconciliation, -and charge fifty dollars, if they would provide me with a good horse. -That they agreed to do. The night was so dark, however, that it was -impossible to get hold of a horse, so we had to move all of value that -could be taken across the river. We also made every preparation for -defense that was possible during the night. -</p> -<p>Next morning, true to his promise, Chief Washakie, with fifteen well -armed men, came up, just at sunrise. I went out to meet him, and found -him perfectly sober and friendly, as also his men. The chief rode up -and glanced at the desolate appearance of everything, and saw that -the women and children were greatly frightened. His companions sat on -their horses and looked across the river. Finally the noble chief said, -referring to those who had left their homes. "Tell them to come back. -We will not hurt them. We will be good friends." -</p> -<p>Thus ended the big scare, and the people returned. But there was -another stir to come; for in a few days the ferryman from the Upper -Ferry, ten miles above the Middle Ferry, told Judge Appleby that a -party of rough mountaineers had driven him off, threatening his life -if he did not leave immediately. They had taken charge of the ferry, -and were running it and pocketing the money. There were twenty-eight -of them, determined "cut-throats," a part of the desperado band I have -referred to before. The judge ordered the sheriff to summon every -available man, and go at once and ascertain who the leaders were, -then arrest them and bring them before the court. There were only -fourteen men obtainable for the posse, and this number included the -ferryman. The sheriff delegated me to take charge of the posse and -go up on the east side of the river, ahead of him and the ferryman, -who would come up on the west side some time after, so as not to -create any unnecessary suspicion. He instructed us to be sociable with -the outlaws, treat and be treated, and join in any game that might -be engaged in. Said he, "We will get them drunk and divided among -themselves, and then I think we can manage them." -</p> -<p>The plan was laid, and every man being well armed, we set out on our -hazardous mission. We had with us one man who could drink an enormous -amount of whisky and yet not get drunk, for he would turn around and -put his ringer down his throat and vomit up the liquor before it would -affect him much. He said, "Boys, I can make a dozen of them drunk, -and keep straight myself." He was asked how he would go about it, and -replied, "Well, I will offer to drink more whisky than any man on the -river, and we will drink by measure; then I will slip out and throw -it up. To hide the trick you must push me out of doors roughly, as if -mad. At other times jam me up in a corner, so I can throw up. Thus I -will have half of them so drunk that anyone of you can handle half a -dozen of them at once." His statement of his ability to drink and empty -his stomach of it being corroborated, he was assigned that part of the -strategy. Then another man, who had been a soldier in the Mexican war, -said, "Well, if you will get them drunk, I will win the money from -their own party to buy the whisky, for I know just how to do it." He -was given that part, for whisky was fifty cents a drink. -</p> -<p>When we had perfected arrangements as far as possible, we rode up, -dismounting as if we had just happened to call and knew nothing of the -trouble. Each man took his part, and played it well. To our surprise, -we found their leader, L. B. Ryan, apparently in a drunken stupor; he -was the same person I had met in the Shoshone Indian camp, five or six -weeks before. As he and the sheriff had been on good terms, they drank -together and appeared to be quite friendly; but the ferryman and one of -the band of outlaws got into a fight, and revolvers and bowie knives -were drawn. Twenty-five or thirty of the mountain men, with deadly -weapons flourishing, rushed into the saloon in front of which the fight -began. One man slashed the other with a knife, and one of them fired -two shots, but some bystander knocked the weapon up, so it did no harm. -The prompt action of the sheriff and his supports, together with the -aid of a number of immigrants, stopped the row. If it had not been for -that, a dozen men might have been slain in as many minutes. Some of the -men were of the most desperate character, and swore and made terrible -threats of what they would do. -</p> -<p>At last the combatants drank together, while a number of others got so -intoxicated they could scarcely stand alone. Then the sheriff called -Ryan to one side and quietly arrested him, placing him under ten -thousand dollars bonds for his appearance in court on a certain date. -The ferryman and some of the more moderate of the outlaws compromised -their difficulties, and business settled down to a normal condition. We -went back to the Middle Ferry, and the sheriff made his returns on the -official papers. -</p> -<p>At the time appointed for Ryan to appear in court, he was there, -with seven young, well-armed warriors and a number of his band, who -sauntered around the court room. Ryan was so desperate and so well -supported by his clique that the court was glad to let him down and out -as easily as possible; for it was evident that the court must do that -or die. So Ryan and his gang returned to their haunts more triumphant -than otherwise. -</p> -<p>So we had to deal with desperate men every day or two, and it was -seldom indeed that we could effect an arrest without a determined show -of arms. Yet, we were not compelled to use them. The offenders must -see that we had them, and had the nerve to use them, before they would -yield. In one instance I was ordered by the sheriff to take a man who -had broken from the officer. The man was running, and I followed, -revolver in hand. As the fugitive ran, he drew his weapon and wheeled -around. I was so near as to place my revolver uncomfortably close to -his face before he could raise his weapon. He saw at once that I had -the "drop" on him, as we used to say, and delivered his revolver to -me. The next moment the sheriff and posse had their backs together and -weapons raised, while twenty-four armed men appeared on the scene and -demanded the man. But when they looked into the muzzles of fourteen -Colt's revolvers with bright, shining, waterproof caps exposed, and the -sheriff called out in a firm and decisive voice, "I am the sheriff of -Green River County, and have a writ for this man," they paused, though -some of them swore the officers could not take the man from camp, and -advanced in a threatening manner. Then the sheriff commanded, "Halt! -The first man that advances another step, or raises his weapon, is a -dead man. Stand! I, as sheriff, give you fair warning." At that some of -the more cautious said, "Hold on, boys! We must not oppose an officer," -and all concluded they must give up the man and submit to the law for -that time. The offense of the accused was shooting the ferryman's dog, -while the latter was eating something under the table, and while the -ferryman's wife and daughter were standing at the table washing dishes; -and when the ferryman remonstrated at such conduct, threatening to -shoot him. Ultimately the matter was compromised, the culprit and his -friends paying the costs. -</p> -<p>On the 7th of July, I began preparations to return to Fort Supply, as -my real missionary labors seemed to have come to an end in that part, -and I was glad of it. From May 13 to July 8, 1854, had been one of the -most hazardous, soul-trying, disagreeable experiences of my life, for -the short period it occupied. I have written a very brief synopsis -of it in the foregoing account; for it might seem impossible to the -person of ordinary experience for so many thrilling incidents as I had -witnessed to happen in so short a time. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXLV"></a>CHAPTER XLV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">GO TO FORT SUPPLY—START BACK TO GREEN RIVER AND MEET O. P. ROCKWELL -AT FORT BRIDGER—HE BRINGS ME A TRADER'S LICENSE, ALSO GOODS TO TRADE -TO THE INDIANS—BEING LATE IN THE SEASON, WE STORE THE GOODS, AND GO -TO SALT LAKE CITY—RECEIVE THE APPROVAL OF GOVERNOR YOUNG—MOVE TO -OGDEN—ACCOMPANY GOVERNOR YOUNG AS INTERPRETER—MY HORSE STOLEN—CALLED -ON A MISSION TO THE SHOSHONES—ON GOING TO SALT LAKE CITY, I AM -RELEASED—ORDERED TO TAKE PART IN DISARMING INDIANS AT OGDEN—A -DIFFICULT JOB—CHASE TO MOUND FORT—HAND-TO-HAND STRUGGLE WITH A -POWERFUL SAVAGE—INDIANS DISARMED, BUT SULLEN—CHIEF'S BROTHER OFFERS -ALL HIS POSSESSIONS FOR HIS GUN—PRECAUTIONS TAKEN TO FEED THE INDIANS -THAT WINTER—TEACH THE INDIAN LANGUAGE IN SCHOOL—PROSPER IN BUSINESS. -</p> -<p>ON July 9, I started for Fort Supply, arriving there on the 11th, where -I found all well. On the 14th I began a journey back to Green River, -but met Porter Rockwell at Fort Bridger. He had a license from Governor -Brigham Young for me to trade with the Indians; also some two or three -thousand dollars' worth of Indian goods for me to market. At that time -there was no opportunity to trade, as the Indians had disposed of their -robes, pelts and furs for the season, so we sent the goods to Fort -Supply and had them stored there. -</p> -<p>I accompanied Rockwell to Salt Lake City, arriving there on July 19. We -reported conditions to the governor, who received us very kindly, and -approved of what we had done. On August 15 I went to Ogden City and on -the 28th accompanied Governor Young, as interpreter, to Chief Catalos' -camp of Shoshones, four miles north of Ogden. This large camp of -Indians had some grievances to settle, and particularly desired to ask -favors and get a better understanding with the white men through their -big chief. The Indians claimed that they were friendly to the whites, -and wanted the latter to be friendly to them; they also wished to have -trade brought to them. The governor gave them a liberal present of -assorted Indian goods, talked friendship, and told them he would leave -other goods with me to trade. He also advised them to be good people, -and to live at peace with all men, for we had the same great Father. -Governor Young told them it would be good for them to settle down like -the white man, and learn of him how to cultivate the land as he did, -so that when the game was all gone they could live and have something -to eat and to feed their families on. The Indians said this was "heap -good talk," and their hearts felt good; so we parted with them in the -best of feelings, notwithstanding that some of their bad Indians had -stolen my only horse from where I had picketed him on the bottoms. I -did not learn the facts in the case in time to get redress, and all the -consolation I could obtain was that the thief did not know it was my -animal—"heap no good Indian steal your horse." -</p> -<p>I returned to Ogden City, and there continued to trade with the Indians -as they came, until October 10, on which date I received a letter -from Elder Orson Hyde, stating that Governor Young wished me to go on -a mission among the Shoshones that winter. I answered the call, but -when I got to Salt Lake City, on the way, it had been learned that the -Indians had gone out so far into the buffalo country that it was not -advisable for me to follow them; so I returned to Ogden and continued -to visit and trade with the Indians, and got up my winter's wood. -</p> -<p>On November 20 Wm. Hickman, L. B. Ryan and D. Huntington came up from -Salt Lake City with an order to Major Moore and the citizens of Weber -County to disarm Chief Little Soldier and his band of Indians, and -distribute them among the families in Weber County where the people -were best able to feed and clothe them for the winter, and set them -to work; for they had become very troublesome to the citizens of that -county, by killing cattle, burning fences, and intimidating isolated -families. On the 30th the major called on me to go with his party to -the Indian camp at West Weber. I did so, and with considerable talking -we got the Indians to accompany us to Ogden City. Still, they felt very -warlike and stubborn, being unwilling to give up their arms. -</p> -<p>In the midst of the parley, the three men from Salt Lake City returned -to that place, and the Indians were allowed to go with their arms -across the Ogden River and camp among the willows near Mound Fort. On -December 1st we went after them, finding them so hostile that we had -to make a show of arms before they would submit to our proposition of -distributing them among the whites, but when we brought a squad of -armed men they very reluctantly and sullenly complied, so we marched -them back to Ogden City, to a location on Main Street, near where the -old tithing office stood. Almost every man that had side arms was -called to mingle among the Indians, so that each man could command a -warrior by disarming him by force if he refused to surrender his arms -at the command of the major, which command I was required to repeat -in the Indian dialect. At the word, each man was to take hold of an -Indian's gun, and I was to tell the aborigines to surrender; but there -was not a man who obeyed the order, for what reason I do not know. I -then went through the crowd of Indians and took every weapon with my -own hands. The white men took them from me, and they were stored in the -tithing office, a guard being placed over them. -</p> -<p>Just then a young Indian was observed on horseback, going northward -as fast as his horse could carry him. Some one said, "There goes that -Indian boy to warn a camp over by Bingham Fort!" Major Moore had one of -the fastest animals in the county; he ordered me to "take her and beat -the boy into camp, or run her to death. Don't spare horseflesh. Call -out the citizens and disarm every Indian you find." -</p> -<p>I obeyed the order, and found a small party of Indians camped in the -center of what was called Bingham Fort. Just as the Indian boy reached -the camp, I entered the east gate of the square, and rode to the west -gate, shouting to the people, "To arms! To arms! Turn out, every man, -and help to disarm the Indians!" Men turned out quickly and surrounded -the camp. I succeeded in reaching the west gate just in time to wheel -and grab a big Ute's gun as he was trying to pass me. He held to it -firmly, and both struggled with a death-like grip. We looked each other -squarely in the eyes, with a determined expression. At last his eyes -dropped, and his gun was in my possession. He was full of wrath and a -desire for vengeance. I found him to be one of the strongest men I had -ever grappled with anywhere. -</p> -<p>I next turned to the camp and disarmed all the Indians in it, placed -their weapons under guard and sent them to Ogden, then vainly tried -to talk the red men into reconciliation. I next returned to Ogden, -and there found the whites and Indians on the streets, the latter as -discontented as ever. The major and I tried to pacify them, but they -were very stubborn and sullen. At last the chief's brother said, "Here -are my wife, my children, my horses and everything that I have. Take -it all and keep it, only give me back my gun and let me go free. I -will cast all the rest away. There is my child," pointing to a little -three-year-old, "take it." The little innocent held up its hands and -cried for the father to take it, but he frowned and looked at it as -with a feeling of disgust, saying, "Go away. You are not mine, for I -have thrown you away, and will not have you any more." -</p> -<p>This spirit was but a reflex of that which animated the whole band; -"for," said they, "we are only squaws now. We cannot hunt or defend our -families. We are not anybody now." But finally, though very sullenly, -they went home with the whites and pitched their tents in the back -yards. To us it did seem hard to have them feel so bad, but they had no -means of support for the winter, the citizens could not afford to have -their stock killed off and their fences burned, and it was the better -policy to feed the Indians and have them under control. They could husk -corn, chop wood, help do chores, and be more comfortable than if left -to roam; but for all that, they were deprived of that broad liberty to -which they and their fathers before them had been accustomed, therefore -they felt it most keenly. As I was the only white man who could talk -much with them, I was kept pretty busy laboring with them. -</p> -<p>In the evening of December 3rd the Indians had a letter from Governor -Young. I read and interpreted it to them. Then for the first time they -seemed reconciled to their situation. Their chief was filled with the -spirit of approval of the course that had been taken with them, and he -preached it long and strong. After that, the Indians and the citizens -got along very well together, and I continued teaching and preaching to -the former. -</p> -<p>December 5th I took up school and taught the Indian language, or rather -the Shoshone dialect. I had about thirty male adults attending. Brother -George W. Hill, who afterwards became the noted Shoshone interpreter in -Weber County, was one of them. -</p> -<p>I was very much prospered that winter, purchased a city lot and quarter -of another on Main Street, fenced the lot, closed my trading with the -Indians, and settled with D. H. Wells for the goods I had had. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXLVI"></a>CHAPTER XLVI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">ANOTHER MISSION TO THE INDIANS—START FOR THE SHOSHONE -CAMP—DIFFICULTIES OF TRAVEL—NEAR THE CROWS AND BLACKFEET—A DREAM -GIVES WARNING OF DANGER—DISCOVER A LARGE BODY OF INDIANS—NO -OPPORTUNITY OF ESCAPE—RIDE INTO THE CAMP OF A HUNTING AND WAR -PARTY—MEET CHIEF WASHAKIE—A DAY'S MARCH—SITUATION CRITICAL—HOLD A -COUNCIL—PRESENT THE BOOK OF MORMON—ALL BUT WASHAKIE SPEAK AGAINST US -AND THE BOOK—AWAITING THE CHIEF'S DECISION. -</p> -<p>AT a general conference held in Salt Lake City, April 6, 1855, I was -again called to go east among the Indians, to labor with and for them. -I was appointed by President Brigham Young to take the presidency of -the mission among the Shoshones. At this call I hastened to provide -as comfortably as possible for my family, and to fit myself for the -mission assigned me. -</p> -<p>I set out on May 8, 1855, in company with four other Elders, going -east via Salt Lake City. I drove one of the two teams, to pay for the -hauling of my baggage, as I had no team of my own. On the 10th we -reached Salt Lake City, and left the same day. On the 11th we overtook -another wagon and two of our fellow-missionaries. We arrived at Fort -Supply on the 17th, having had a pleasant trip. We found seven Elders -planting the crop. On the 18th we joined them in the work of plowing -and seeding, and repairing the stockade and fences. On the 29th, eight -of us fitted up a four-horse team and wagon and six saddle horses -and started for the Shoshone camps, which we had heard were on the -headwaters of either the Green or the Snake River. On June 1st we came -to a tributary of the Green River, called the Fontenelle. There we -rested one day, then moved camp up to the mouth of the canyon. -</p> -<p>On the 3rd of June, E. B. Ward, Joshua Terry and I crossed over the -divide between the Green and Snake Rivers, leaving Elder George W. -Boyd in charge of camp. The three of us went along the western slope, -passing one lodge of friendly Indians. On the 5th we came to Siveadus' -camp of twenty lodges. He and his people were very cool towards us, -so we proceeded to a stream called Piney, and up that to the top of -the divide, from where we could see to the head waters of the Wind -River. Having been told that Washakie and his camp were somewhere on -the headwaters of Horse Creek, we made for that point, traveling over -snowdrifts that we supposed were fifty feet deep. The descent was very -steep, and in some places rather dangerous. That night our coffee -basins, that were left standing half or two-thirds full of water, had -become frozen solid; and the weather seemed seasonable for Christmas. -</p> -<p>We suffered much with cold until 10 o'clock a.m., on the 7th of June. -We turned northeast, and came onto Horse Creek, camping just below -its mouth, under a high, steep bluff, in a fine grove of cottonwoods. -Everything seemed deathly still. We were in the borders of the Crow -and Blackfeet Indians' country, with jaded horses, so that if we were -discovered it would be impossible to escape. We began to feel a little -concern for our scalps, for we were aware that both the Crows and the -Blackfeet were hostile. We gathered our wood, taking care that no -branch or anything connected with our fire would make much blaze or -smoke, lest by it we should be discovered. Everything being placed in -the best possible position for flight or fight, as might seem best if -emergency should arise, we rested there that night; and something told -us we should not go farther north, but that south should be our course -in the morning. -</p> -<p>Early the following morning, about 3 o'clock, I dreamed that I saw a -large band of Indians come down and pitch camp on the creek above us. -I was so forcibly impressed that I awoke the other two men, and told -them I felt confident that the dream was true, and that we would prove -it at daylight. They agreed with me, so I told them to make as dark a -fire as was possible, and to get breakfast, while I would go on the -high bluff that overlooked camp and the country adjacent, where I would -watch everything that moved, and if there were friends or foes in the -country we would see them or their lights before they should see ours. -We all arose at once, the others preparing the meal and saddling the -horses ready for a hasty move, while I went up on the bluff and there -kept a sharp lookout until the dawn. At the first streaks of daylight I -saw a blue smoke creeping up through the willows, perhaps a mile and a -half above me, then another and another, until it was plain there was -a camp of Indians just where I had dreamed they were. Soon the tops of -lodges appeared, then a band of ponies was driven up. By this time it -was fairly daylight. -</p> -<p>I reported to the others what I had seen, and we took breakfast. By the -time the sun cast his earliest rays over the landscape, we were in the -saddle. Then came the question, what shall we do? To flee was folly, -for it was not likely that we would escape the ever vigilant eye of -the red man, in an open country like that was. We decided to ride out -boldly on the open bench, and go straight to their camp. No sooner had -we done so than we were discovered, and some twenty or more warriors -started to encircle us, but we rode direct for the camp without showing -any concern. -</p> -<p>Soon we were completely surrounded by a score of armed warriors in full -costume of war paint; as these closed in their circle, they saluted us -with a war-whoop. Some had "green" scalps hanging from their bridle -bits, while others had them suspended from their surcingles. As the -warriors drew nearer to us it became evident that they were of the -Shoshone tribe, but we could not recognize any one of them, and they -did not appear to recognize us. When we spoke to them and offered to -shake hands, they shook their heads and pointed us to the camp, while -they proudly escorted us there, some going before us and clearing the -way up to the lodge of Washakie, their chief, who, with some of his -leading men, stood waiting to receive us. As we rode up, Washakie and -his associates stepped forward, and in a very friendly manner shook -hands. By gestures they said, "We are moving camp, and you will go -and camp with us tonight. Then we will hear what you have to say. -We fell in with a war party of Crows and Blackfeet yesterday, and -defeated them, and now we are fleeing to a safe place for our women -and children, lest they get reinforcements and come upon us and our -families;" then with a motion, the chief said, "Forward," and soon the -whole band was on the move. -</p> -<p>We estimated that the Indians numbered about three thousand all told, -and there was a pony for every soul; they were well supplied with -rifles, Colt's revolvers, bows, arrows, shields and some cutlasses, -and large, heavy knives. They were excellently mounted, and their -discipline could not well be improved for the country they were -passing over and the force they were most likely to fall in with. -Their flanking party was so arranged as to act as a front guard, and -at the same time drive all the game into a circle and thence into a -second circle, so that everything, down to the smallest chipmunk and -squirrel, was bagged. This was over a strip of country about eight -miles by thirty; and the pack of sagehens and squirrels that was -brought into camp was astonishing. The old and middle-aged men formed -the rear guard, while the whole female portion of the camp drove the -pack animals. The chief and his most confidential advisers rode just in -front of these, and we were called to be a part of the escort. -</p> -<p>When all was on the move, the camp made quite a formidable appearance. -It looked to us as if the shrubbery on our way had changed suddenly -into a moving army, what with people and ponies all moving up hill and -down, over the rolling country, to the south, between the high Snake -and Wind River ranges of the great Rocky Mountains. We thought of -ancient Israel, of the Ten Tribes coming from the north country, and of -the promises that had been made to the Indians by the prophets of their -forefathers. -</p> -<p>To us this was a great day of thought and meditation, for at times it -seemed to us that we could see the opening glories of a better day, and -could almost declare, "Now is the dawn of the day of Israel," for we -had a letter from that modern Moses, President Brigham Young, to read -and interpret to the red men, and also the Book of Mormon to introduce -to them that very evening, for the first time; and the question -uppermost in our minds was as to whether they would receive it or not, -for there were many hard looking countenances in the throng, and we -could see plainly from their frowns that they were not at all friendly -to us. -</p> -<p>When we had traveled till about 3 o'clock p.m., camp was made in -a lovely valley. The chief's lodge was first pitched, clean robes -spread, and we were invited to take seats thereon. Our horses, packs -and all, were taken charge of by the women of the camp, just where we -dismounted, and we had no more to do with our animals until we had use -for them next day. -</p> -<p>A little fire having been built in the center of the lodge, the -councilors began to file into their places, each very quietly shaking -hands with us, some of them very coldly. When all was quiet, the chief -said, by gesture, "Now tell us what you have to say. Tell it straight, -and no crooked talk, for we do not want any lies, but the truth." It -seemed to us that they were ready for square work, so, with as few -words as possible, we told Washakie we had a letter from the big Mormon -captain to him and his people. Then he said, "Tell us what it says," -and between the three of us we could tell him every word. -</p> -<p>I am sorry that I have not at hand the full text of the letter, but -it was a very friendly document, and, so far as I can now remember, -told them that President Young had sent us to Washakie and his people -as their friends, that we were truthful and good men, who would tell -them many good things about how to live in peace with all people; -that President Young and the Mormon people were true friends to the -Indian race, and wished them to be our friends, that we might live in -peace with each other, for it would not be many years before all the -game would be killed off or driven out of the country, and the white -men would want to come and settle in the land; that if the Indians -would settle down and build houses like the white man, and cultivate -the land as the white man did, when the game was gone they and their -families would have something to eat. President Young proposed to -furnish seed and tools, and some good men to show and help the Indians -to put in their crops. The letter further said that after a while, -when we understood each other better, we would tell them about their -forefathers, and about God; that we had a book that told a great many -things regarding the Great Spirit's dealings with their forefathers, -and what He would do for them and their children. Then we presented the -Book of Mormon to Washakie, while his lefthand man filled the pipe and -drew a rude figure of the sun, in the ashes of the smouldering fire; -he also muttered a few unintelligible words, smote his chest with his -hand, took a whiff or two from the pipe, passed it to the next man on -his left, and reached for the book; he opened it and said it was no -good for them—that it was only good for the white man. -</p> -<p>In that same order the pipe and book passed around the circle -twenty-one times, and each time the Indian made a new figure in the -ashes, each representing a different planet. During the whole time only -one man spoke at once. One said, "This book is of no use to us. If the -Mormon captain has nothing better to send than this, we had better send -it, his letter, and these men, back to him, and tell him that they -are no good to us, that we want powder, lead and caps, sugar, coffee, -flour, paints, knives, and blankets, for those we can use. Send these -men away to their own land." -</p> -<p>Another of the council, when it came to his turn, said, "We have no use -for this book. If the paper were all cut out and thrown away, we could -sew up the ends and put a strap on it, and it would do for the white -man's money bag; but we have no use for it, for we have no money to -put in it." He could not understand what good it was to the Shoshone, -and said, "Let the white man take it and go home, and come back with -something that we can eat, or use to hunt with." -</p> -<p>These were the sentiments expressed by the members of the council. But -Washakie had not yet spoken, and we anxiously awaited his decision. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXLVII"></a>CHAPTER XLVII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">WASHAKIE'S BOLD ATTITUDE—TELLS HIS COUNCILORS THEY ARE FOOLS—SAYS -THE WHITE MEN, WHO ARE WISE, HAVE BOOKS—TELLS THE TRADITION OF -HOW THE INDIANS FELL INTO DARKNESS—GREAT SPIRIT ANGRY AT THE RED -MAN—ADVOCATES THAT THE INDIANS LIVE LIKE WHITE PEOPLE—HIS POWERFUL -SPEECH GAINS THE DAY FOR US—SHOSHONE TRADITION—WE START HOME—A -HUNGRY TRIP—RETURN TO THE INDIANS, FINDING THEM SULLEN—FOURTH OF JULY -CELEBRATION AT FORT SUPPLY—RETURN HOME. -</p> -<p>THE book passed around the entire circle without a solitary friend, -and came back to our hands. The chief reached for it, and when he got -hold of the volume he looked at and opened it, turned leaf after leaf -as readily as though he had been accustomed to books, then straightened -to his full height as he sat there, and looked around the circle. "Are -you all done talking?" he asked. Seeing every man with his hand on his -mouth, he spoke: "You are all fools; you are blind, and cannot see; -you have no ears, for you do not hear; you are fools, for you do not -understand. These men are our friends. The great Mormon captain has -talked with our Father above the clouds, and He told the Mormon captain -to send these good men here to tell us the truth, and not a lie. They -have not got forked tongues. They talk straight, with one tongue, and -tell us that after a few more snows the buffalo will be gone, and if -we do not learn some other way to get something to eat, we will starve -to death. Now, we know that is the truth, for this country was once -covered with buffalo, elk, deer and antelope, and we had plenty to eat, -and also robes for bedding, and to make lodges. But now, since the -white man has made a road across our land, and has killed off our game, -we are hungry, and there is nothing for us eat. Our women and children -cry for food, and we have no meat to give them. The time was when our -Father who lives above the clouds loved our fathers who lived long ago, -and His face was bright, and He talked with our fathers. His face shone -upon them, and their skins were white like the white man's. Then they -were wise, and wrote books, and the Great Father talked good to them -but after a while our people would not hear Him, and they quarreled and -stole and fought, until the Great Father got mad, because His children -would not hear Him talk. Then He turned His face away from them, and -His back to them and that caused a shade to come over them, and that -is why our skin is black and our minds dark." Stripping up his shirt -sleeve, he continued: "That darkness came because the Great Father's -back was towards us, and now we cannot see as the white man sees. We -can make a bow and arrows, but the white man's mind is strong and -light." Picking up a Colt's revolver, he went on: "The white man can -make this, and a little thing that he carries in his pocket, so that -he can tell where the sun is on a dark day and when it is night he can -tell when it will come daylight. This is because the face of the Father -is towards him, and His back is towards us. But after a while the Great -Father will quit being mad, and will turn His face towards us. Then -our skin will be light." Here the chief showed his bare arm again, and -said: "Then our mind will be strong like the white man's, and we can -make and use things like he does." -</p> -<p>The chief next drew a strong contrast between the Indian's way of -living and the white man's, telling his people that the mode of the -white man was far preferable to that of the Indian. He also told them -that the Great Father had directed "the big Mormon captain to send -these men to us to talk good talk, and they have talked good, and made -our hearts feel very glad, and we feel that it is good for them to come -and shake hands. They are our friends, and we will be their friends. -Their horses may drink our water, and eat our grass, and they may sleep -in peace in our land. We will build houses by their houses, and they -will teach us to till the soil as they do. Then, when the snow comes -and the game is fat, we can leave our families by the Mormons, and go -and hunt, and not be afraid of our families being disturbed by other -Indians, or by anybody else, for the Mormons are a good people. Let -these three good men go, and find a good place for us to live, close -by where they live; and after a while we will come, and they will show -us how to build houses, for they are our good and true friends, and -we wish they would go home, and bring some blankets, powder and lead, -knives, paints, beads, flour, sugar and coffee, to trade for our furs, -pelts and robes." -</p> -<p>Washakie spoke thus with great power and wisdom, while his wise old -councilors sat with their heads bowed, and their hands over their -mouths, only grunting assent to the strong points of his powerful -speech, of which this account is only a brief synopsis. -</p> -<p>No vote was taken, but seemingly every man gave his assent to the -chief's decision, by a grunt of approval. Then each man quietly -withdrew, and a kettle of boiled antelope meat was set before us. The -chief had a separate dish put before him. Then we retired for the night. -</p> -<p>The camp was almost destitute of food, notwithstanding the squirrels -and sagehens that had been taken the day before. The whole camp was -hungry, and the last morsel of our provisions was gone, so next -morning, June 9th, we left camp, having a very scant breakfast of meat; -but we had introduced the Book of Mormon, and had had the pleasure of -having it received favorably by Washakie, the great Shoshone chief, and -his council, as the history of their forefathers. The chief said the -wolves had written that book when they were men, but had since been -turned into wolves; that being an ancient tradition among the Shoshones. -</p> -<p>We rode hard all day the day that we left the Shoshone camp, and at -sundown camped by a mountain leek spring, without a bite to eat. Nor -had we had anything to eat at dinner time; so we made our supper of -mountain leeks. Next morning, the 10th, we had leeks for breakfast, -and at sunrise we were in the saddle, and on our way back to where we -had left the other brethren. I was on the lead, with a double-barreled -shotgun before me. We had not gone very far before a blue mountain -pheasant flew up from under my horse's head, and lit in the trail a few -yards in front. I shot it so quickly that I never thought of my horse -being frightened. Another man jumped from his saddle, and had the bird -skinned before the blood had stopped flowing, while the other built a -fire. The pheasant was broiled and eaten before the animal heat could -have gone out of it, if it had been left where it was shot. Then we -traveled all that our horses could bear until 3 o'clock p.m., when we -came to a flock of sagehens. As I was still on the lead, I shot three -of them before the rest fled. We broiled one of them, and soon devoured -it, as we had the other bird, then continued our journey till evening. -</p> -<p>As we traveled along by a small stream of water, I saw a fish about -eighteen inches long, and almost as quick as thought shot at and -stunned it, so that it turned up at the top of the water long enough -for an Indian boy who was traveling with us to shoot an arrow through -it. With the arrow sticking through it, the fish shot up to where the -creek widened out, and I, thinking the water only knee-deep, plunged in -up to my hips. I caught the fish, we broiled it for supper, and ate it -as we had done the birds and leeks—without salt or pepper. -</p> -<p>On the 11th we had a bird for breakfast, and traveled till afternoon, -counting that we had journeyed about one hundred and twenty-five miles, -and reached our camp, where we found all well. The boys soon spread -a white man's meal before us, and each of us did our part without a -grumble. Then we made a short drive, and on the 12th pushed forward on -our way to Fort Supply, reaching that place on the 14th. We found all -well, and in good spirits. -</p> -<p>June 15th we loaded two wagons with a large assortment of Indian goods, -as we had agreed to meet the Indians with the merchandise, in twenty -days, on the Labarg, a tributary of Green River. On the 20th we reached -that stream and as there were no Indians there I sent Joshua Terry, E. -Barney Ward, and my cousin James M. Brown, to inform the red men that -we were on time as agreed. It seemed that after we left them they had -quarreled and divided into three parties, and came very near righting -among themselves. They were therefore very different in spirit to when -we left them. At last they began to come and lodge in three distinct -camps around our wagons. -</p> -<p>On the 28th, all the Indians were very sullen and did not seem to be -the same people they were a few days before. Knowing something of their -nature, we turned out about seventy-five dollars' worth of provisions -and other goods as a present. Still that did not seem to satisfy them; -they wanted all we had. Finally I told them that we had done as we had -agreed to do, and if they wished to trade we were ready. They continued -to manifest a very mean spirit, and we were not able to sell more than -five hundred dollars' worth of goods out of a stock of three thousand -dollars. -</p> -<p>On June 30th we left three of our party with the Indians, while the -rest of us returned to Fort Supply with our stock of goods. The -Indians felt very bad because we had not given them all we had. It was -July 4th when we arrived at the fort, and found the brethren there -celebrating the glorious Independence Day. I was quite ill, but the -brethren insisted on my taking the lead of the ceremonies. That being -my birthday, I accepted the offer, and we had a very enjoyable time. -</p> -<p>From July 5th to the 18th we continued our farm labors. Then E. B. Ward -and three or four other men, including myself, set out on a little -exploring trip among the hills. We crossed over to Henry's Fork, then -returned to Smith's Fork, where we selected a place for the Indians -to settle when they saw fit. Having thus completed our obligations to -them, we returned to the fort, and continued our labors until August -1st, when we had a recruit of twelve men sent to us, under command of -John Phelps. About August 3rd or 4th I rebaptized all the Elders, and -baptized three of the first Shoshone women that ever came into the -Church. Their names were Mary, Sally Ward, and Corger. I also baptized -a young Indian man named Corsetsy. From the 5th to the 7th, the Indians -came and went, attended our meetings regularly, and felt very friendly -and somewhat inquisitive. We gave them a few presents. They said -they were well pleased to have us locate in their country, and were -satisfied with the places we had selected for them to settle and live -upon as we did. On the 7th of August, Joshua Terry and I started for -Salt Lake City, each with an ox team and two wagons loaded with furs, -pelts and robes. We arrived in the city on the 11th, and reported our -success to Governor Young, who was pleased with our efforts. We also -settled for the goods we had had of him. -</p> -<p>On the 13th I started for Ogden City, and reached there the next day, -meeting my wife and firstborn child, a daughter, who was born August -10th. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXLVIII"></a>CHAPTER XLVIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">AFFAIRS AT HOME—START FOR FORT SUPPLY—ILLNESS OF MYSELF AND -FAMILY—GIFT OF HEALING—TROUBLE WITH INDIANS AT FORT SUPPLY—TURBULENT -RED MEN—I HELP ONE OFF MY BED—THEY PERSIST IN TAKING OR DESTROYING -OUR PROPERTY—WE STOP THEM—ONE ATTEMPTS TO KILL ME—INDIANS -RETIRE FROM THE FORT—ALMOST A CONFLICT—I CHECK THE WHITE MEN -FROM SHOOTING—INDIANS WITHDRAW—WE SEND TO GOVERNOR YOUNG FOR -ASSISTANCE—OUR STOCK AND GUARDS DRIVEN IN—INDIAN AGENT APPEARS WITH -ANNUITIES—THE SAVAGES SUBMIT—WE GUARD DAY AND NIGHT—INDIANS MORE -PEACEFUL—REINFORCEMENTS ARRIVE FROM THE GOVERNOR—MATTERS QUIET DOWN. -</p> -<p>AUGUST 14, 1855, I went to Salt Lake City, and on September 3rd -returned home. On the 5th my family were taken sick with cholera morbus. -</p> -<p>Notwithstanding this sickness, I started on my return to Fort Supply, -for it was the faith of myself and family that if I went to my mission -they would be healed. Just as I mounted my horse to start out, my -uncle, Captain James Brown, came along and said, "Jimmie, are you going -off and leaving your family sick?" -</p> -<p>I told him, "Yes, sir." -</p> -<p>Said he, "You are cold-hearted, and I would not do it." -</p> -<p>When I told him that they with me believed that if I would go to my -missionary labors they would be healed sooner than if I should neglect -my duties in that line, he, with uplifted hands, said, "Jim, you're -right. Go ahead, and God bless you. Your family shall be healed, -and not suffer. I will go in and pray for them." He did so, and I -afterwards learned that they were healed the same hour that I proceeded -on my journey. I did not see them again till December 20th, when they -told me that they had not been sick one day after I left. -</p> -<p>Although when I started out I was very ill myself with the same -trouble, and had to call at a friend's and get a dose of painkiller, -and take a rest for an hour or two before I could proceed on my way to -Salt Lake City, yet on the 13th I started for Fort Supply, and overtook -the two wagons which had preceded me the day before. I travelled with -them until the 17th, then left them and went on horseback forty-five -miles to the fort. I was very sick for five days, so that I had to keep -my bed part of the time. I found all well and the wheat harvest ready -for the laborers, a heavy frost having injured the crops considerably. -On Friday, September 28th, I sent four men to invite Washakie to the -fort, and on the 29th we learned that Chief Tibunduets (white man's -child) had just returned with his band from Salt Lake City. October 1st -I sent Isaac Bullock and Amenzo Baker to visit him. They found him and -all of his band feeling very bad and revengeful. -</p> -<p>October 10th Tibunduets and his band threw down our fencing and came -charging up through our field, riding over wheat shocks, and singing -war songs. At the same time the warriors from a camp above came into -the fort with their weapons in their hands. Our men tried to be -friendly and talked peace to them, but it was not what they wanted. -They said they were "heap mad," for when they were in Salt Lake City -the big Mormon captain had written with blood on their children, and -a number of these had died while they were among the Mormons. These -Indians refused the seats offered them, but jumped on the beds and -behaved very saucily, saying they wanted pay for the death of their -children who had died on the Mormon lands. Of course, we could not -afford to give presents of that kind, and their demands were rejected. -</p> -<p>Three of the hostile Indians went to my room, and one engaging me in -conversation, the other two jumped on my bed and stretched themselves -full length on it. My cousin James M. Brown called my attention to -their rude actions, and I turned around and told them to get off my -bed, but they answered with a contemptuous laugh. I told them a second -time, and they sneered again. I stepped to the side of the bed and told -them the third time, and as they refused, I jerked one of them off the -bed so quickly that it surprised him, and the other one thought he -preferred to get off without that kind of help, and did so quickly. -</p> -<p>Tibunduets made heavy demands on us, which we could not comply with. We -told him that we were not prepared to do his bidding, and he replied, -"You're a wolf and a liar, and you will steal." Then the Indians turned -their horses into our fields among our shocks of wheat and oats, while -their women went to digging and sacking our potatoes, the Indians -throwing down our fences in many places and ordering our men out of the -fields. They told us to leave their lands, and continued their insults -until I sent some men out to order their women out of the potato -patch. The squaws only laughed at our men, who returned and reported -the results. Then I went out myself, and as I passed a brush fence, I -caught up a piece of brush and started towards the potato diggers, who -screamed and ran away before I got near enough to use the stick. -</p> -<p>I returned to the house and soon was followed by two young braves, who -rode up in front of the door and called for the captain. I answered -in person, when the braves said, "You heap fight squaw, you no fight -Injun." They continued their insulting words and threats of violence, -until at last I ordered them out of the fort, upon which one of them -drew his bow and pointed his arrow at me, within three feet of my -breast. At that one of my men pushed the horse's head between me and -the arrow. At the same time Amenzo Baker handed me a Colt's revolver, -and another man covered the Indian with a revolver. -</p> -<p>At that movement the Indians started for the big gate, and as there was -quite a number of warriors inside the fort I called my men out with -their guns, for the Indians seemed determined on bloodshed. They rushed -outside, and the white men followed them to where a young chief sat -on his horse, just outside of the gate. There must have been a signal -given to the camp above, for the warriors came running with their -rifles in hand, until seventy-five to one hundred warriors were on the -ground, while there were only about forty white men. Everybody wanted -to say something, and in the confusion that followed some ten or twelve -men leveled their guns to shoot, being in such close quarters that they -struck each other as they brought their weapons into position. -</p> -<p>At that moment I sprang under the guns and held some of them up, and -forbade the men to shoot. This act seemed to please the young chief, -and he commanded his men to desist. I ordered my men back and into -their bastions, and to bar the gate. This done, I took a position in -the watchtower, where I talked with their chief through a porthole, and -told him that we were in a position to do them harm, but did not wish -to do so, yet they must withdraw in peace and not molest our property, -for we should defend it and ourselves to the best of our ability. I -said that if they would withdraw peacefully we would not interfere with -them, but to that they would not agree. After considerable parleying, -however, they did withdraw to their camp among the cottonwood timber -and willows on the creek, and built large fires, around which they -danced and sang war songs the greater part of the night, while we made -every possible preparation for defense. -</p> -<p>As captain of the fort, I wrote a despatch to the governor and -superintendent of Indian affairs, stating the facts. Then we covered -with blankets a slab bridge that had to be crossed near the gates, to -deaden the sound of the horse's feet as he went out, and a clever young -man by the name of Benjamin Roberts speeded away with the note to Salt -Lake City. -</p> -<p>On the 11th all was quiet. A few Indian lodges remained near our fort, -and the women and children were around them as usual, so Isaac Bullock -and I went down to learn what the situation was. We found some of them -friendly, while others were very sulky. The main part of the Indian -camp had gone down the creek, and we thought it safe to turn our stock -out under a mounted guard, with one man in the watchtower to keep a -lookout. About 2 p.m. the man at the watchtower sounded an alarm, -saying he saw a great dust in the north; and a few minutes later he -shouted that a large body of horsemen was in sight, coming rapidly from -the north, while our horse guards were coming with our band of horses, -hastening with all speed to the fort. Immediately every man was called -to take a position for prompt action. I occupied a commanding place, -giving instructions to the men not to shoot without my order, and then -not unless they felt sure of making every shot tell. They were told to -see that every tube was filled with powder, "for here they come," said -I; "keep cool boys, for it is a close race with our men and horses." -</p> -<p>It was a question of which would reach the fort first, they or the -Indians. The race was so close that the guards with our band just -succeeded in getting in with the animals in time to close the gates -against the Indian ponies, whose riders called out, "Open the gates!" -They were answered with a positive "No! not until you give up your -arms." They had three mountain men in their party of over one hundred -warriors, who shouted that they would be responsible if we would let -them in, for the Indian agent, George Armstrong, was a short distance -in the rear, with two wagons loaded with goods for the Indians. -</p> -<p>As I had not been advised of the agent's approach from any other -source, I still refused them admittance. Soon the agent's wagons were -in sight, and some of his party came up and told the Indians they would -have to give up their arms before they could enter the fort, for the -captain was determined not to allow them in with their arms. At last -they submitted, and the gate was opened just wide enough for one man to -pass through. I stepped outside, the Indians handed their arms to me, I -passed them to the other men, and they placed them on a part of a wagon -sheet. Then the weapons were bound up strongly and taken away and put -in my room, and a guard placed over them. The Indians were then told -that they could enter the fort and pass directly into the blockhouse, -but would not be permitted to wander around in the fort. -</p> -<p>About this time the agent's wagons rolled up and were hastily unloaded. -Then a friendly smoke took place, and a short council, in which the -Indians agreed that they would withdraw in peace and go to their -hunting grounds, and would not molest us any more. They said we might -remain on their lands let our stock eat grass and drink water in peace; -that we might cultivate the lands and use what timber we wanted, and -that they would be our friends, and we their friends. The goods the -agent had for the Indians were then turned over to them. -</p> -<p>On the 13th the red men brought in a report that the Sioux Indians -had killed one of Jack Robinson's beeves. This they did to screen -themselves, for it was they and not the Sioux who had killed the -animal. The agent gave them a beef ox, and they moved down the creek. -On the 14th the agent and party returned home, and we kept up a guard -day and night to prevent being surprised by the renegades of the Indian -camps; for we had evidence of their treachery. We had given them back -their arms, and when they obtained all we had for them they said the -white man was "heap good, Shoshone no kay nabatint Mormon." (Shoshones -do not want to fight Mormons.) They packed and left, feeling quite -pleased. -</p> -<p>General R. T. Burton with a party of twenty-five men were met at Fort -Bridger on the 16th, by myself and a small party. On the 17th I went -with them to Fort Supply, while they concluded to send out a scout -to ascertain whether the Indians really had crossed the Green River -or not, thinking that if they did we could be satisfied that all was -right. When our scouts returned and reported that all had crossed the -river and gone farther on, General Burton and command returned home, -while myself and men did up our fall work at Fort Supply. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERXLIX"></a>CHAPTER XLIX. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">START HOME FROM FORT SUPPLY—CAMP ALONE AT NEEDLE ROCK—AWAKENED BY -MY HORSE—SURROUNDED BY WOLVES—FLASH POWDER ALL NIGHT TO KEEP OFF THE -WILD BEASTS—REACH HOME—SUPPLIES SHORT—HARDSHIPS OF A GRASSHOPPER -YEAR—GETTING MY CATTLE OUT OF A CANYON—PERILS OF BEING CAUGHT IN THE -SNOW—GREAT SUFFERING—BREAKING A SNOW ROAD—BUSINESS AFFAIRS. -</p> -<p>THE writer left Fort Supply December 14, 1855, and started for his home -in Ogden City on horseback and alone, having placed Isaac Bullock in -charge of affairs at the fort. The first night out I camped at a place -called Needle Rock, just east of Yellow Creek. There I selected a spot -where the feed was good, picketed out my horse, set my saddle over the -picket pin, and spread my blankets so as to lay my head on the saddle, -lest the coyotes should cut my riata and turn loose the horse. -</p> -<p>As I was alone and yet in an Indian country, I did not make a fire, but -ate a cold lunch, rolled up in my blankets, and soon dropped to sleep, -to be awakened by my horse snorting and kicking. The animal brushed his -nose on my head before I was sufficiently awake to understand what he -meant by his actions; but no sooner was I aroused than I found that he -was surrounded by a pack of large, grey wolves which were growling and -snapping at his heels and at each other. The night was so dark that I -could plainly see the fierce eyes of my ravenous enemies shining in the -darkness all around me. -</p> -<p>I had a good Colt's revolver, but having heard that if wolves smelled -blood when they were gathered in such a pack they would attack man -or beast, I reserved my fire. I remembered having heard that these -wild beasts were afraid of the flash and smell of burning powder, so -I spread some gunpowder on the leathers of my saddle, and with flint -and steel struck fire, and in that way flashed powder by intervals all -night. The wolves would run off, but return in a short time, as if -determined to have flesh. My horse was too weak to attempt to flee, -and as for myself I had become so chilled and benumbed that it was -with some difficulty that I could keep up the flashes till daylight, -at which time the pack of wolves went away, leaving horse and rider -to resume their sufficiently hazardous journey without such unwelcome -company. -</p> -<p>I crossed over to the head of Echo Canyon, where I found a yoke of oxen -that some emigrants had left to die. As the animals had got rested -up, I thought I could drive them in and save their lives, but had to -abandon them in Round Valley, Weber Canyon. Then, on a poor, jaded -horse, I pursued my way, arriving at home about 9 p.m. on December 20th. -</p> -<p><img src="images/surrounded.jpg" id="surrounded" alt="SURROUNDED BY A PACK OF HUNGRY WOLVES"></p> -<p class="caption">SURROUNDED BY A PACK OF HUNGRY WOLVES -</p> -<p>I found all well, but winter supplies of food so short that I sold the -only respectable suit of clothes I had for breadstuff. I had about worn -out all the rest of my clothing when I was in the Indian country, so -that I had but one old flannel shirt left, and that I had made out of -two old ones. I had one pair of buckskin pants, a rough beaver cap and -a pair of moccasins. -</p> -<p>It will be remembered by the early residents of Utah that the year -1855 was a grasshopper year, as well as a season of great drought, and -therefore one of the hardest years that many of the people had ever -experienced, both for man and beast. Hundreds of horses and cattle -starved to death, and many of the people barely escaped the same sad -fate. I could do no better than to let my horses go out on the range to -die of starvation and cold, and turn my hand to anything I could get to -do to earn an honest dollar. -</p> -<p>Soon after arriving home I was called to devote a portion of my time in -traveling from settlement to settlement, and preaching to the people; -also in visiting the Indian camps along the Weber River and preaching -and talking to them, for it was a terrible winter for the Indians. -Before entering upon these duties, however, I returned to where I had -left my cattle to rest for a few days, and where the feed was tolerably -good. When I started out it commenced to storm and by the time I -reached the cattle the snow was eighteen inches deep. -</p> -<p>Before I could get out of the canyon with the animals the snow was two -and a half feet deep. My horse gave out, and I had to travel on foot, -breaking the trail and leading the horse a few rods, then going back -and driving up the cattle. I continued these efforts until myself and -stock were exhausted. When I tried to start a fire, my matches were -all wet. I had left my rifle and shotpouch at home, and in the pouch -were my faithful flint and steel, which had never failed me. But for -the snow, the night was total darkness. At last I reached a clump of -cottonwood trees, and for a time I thought I would die of exhaustion -and thirst. I knew that if I ceased to exert myself I would chill to -death. Finally it occurred to my mind to tear off a piece of my shirt, -roll it up, hold it in one hand, and with my revolver shoot through it -and start a fire. I found a large sagebrush, and from it gathered the -dry bark. This I wrapped around the roll of shirt, then fired a shot -through it, and in that way succeeded in starting a flame. As there -was plenty of wood handy, I built and kept up a large fire during the -night. The river banks were so steep that it was impossible in the -darkness to get water to drink. I was driven almost frantic by thirst, -but finally thought to take off my heavy leggings, place them in a -position so that they would form a kind of basin, and cover them with -snow, so the fire would melt it to water in the leather bowl. In that -way I obtained water and quenched my terrible thirst. My blankets and -everything I had on had been soaked thoroughly with the melting snow, -but I succeeded in drying all during the night. -</p> -<p>The dawn of day was welcome indeed, but my troubles were not yet over, -for I found my animals standing in snow to their necks, and they would -not move out of their tracks only as I broke an opening around and -urged them on. The snow was so wet and heavy that it was an awful task -to break a road and get those animals through for the first five miles. -After that the snow was not so deep, and with a very great effort and -hazard of life I succeeded in reaching Ogden, as thankful as I ever was -in my life to get home—to "home, sweet home." -</p> -<p>Being once more with my family and friends, I got up my winter wood -and visited the people as a teacher. In the spring I finished a -two-roomed house that I had under way on Main Street. I then moved -into it, preparatory to going to Fort Supply again, but was honorably -released by President Young from further missionary labors in that -part. I rented land, put in corn and potatoes, and spent the fore part -of the summer at farm labor. Having acquired a fourth interest in -three ferries on Green River, I arranged with my three partners, Isaac -Bullock, Louis Robinson and W. Hickman, so that I did not have to go -there, as my health was not very good; hence I remained at Ogden. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERL"></a>CHAPTER L. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">CALLED ON A MISSION TO DEEP CREEK INDIANS—SHORT TIME FOR THE -JOURNEY—PREPARE FOR THE TRIP—JOURNEY IN THE DESERT—HORSES -STOLEN—TRAVEL ON FOOT—SAVED FROM PERISHING WITH THIRST—MEET THE -INDIANS—COULD UNDERSTAND AND SPEAK TO THEM—INDIAN AGENT'S OFFER—I -ACT AS INTERPRETER—PREACH TO THE INDIANS—ON THE RETURN TRIP—VISIT -GOVERNOR YOUNG WITH A DELEGATION OF BANNOCK INDIANS. -</p> -<p>ON August 22, 1856, I received a letter from President Young, calling -me to take a mission of thirty days, west across the desert, to Deep -Creek, to the Indians in that region. As I did not understand fully -the object of the mission, I thought there was some mistake in the -letter, since the distance that had to be traveled out and back would -be about five hundred miles and I was to preach to a tribe of Indians -I had never seen, much less being able to speak their dialect, and do -it all with only thirty days' rations. To me it was, to say the least, -a singular call; so I went to Salt Lake City August 23rd, to find out -that the letter meant just what it said, no less; only that Geo. W. -Armstrong, an Indian agent from Provo, was going out to distribute some -goods among the Indians, and it would be a good time to send a few -missionaries to preach to the red men. -</p> -<p>From Salt Lake City I returned to Ogden and purchased a splendid mare -of widow Ruth Stuart, on credit, promising to pay when I could. On the -27th I joined Mr. Armstrong and twenty-five other men in Salt Lake -City, fitting up for the journey, some as guards to the agent and some -as missionaries. Among those I remember were Seth M. Blair, Oliver -Huntington, Ormus Bates, John Whitney, J. Cooley, Harrison Sagers, -Harrison Sevier, and Peter Conover; there were others whose names I do -not now recall. -</p> -<p>The company left the city on August 29th, and traveled through Tooele, -Rush Valley, and over Johnson's Pass into Skull Valley. With five -others of the party, however, I went around by what is now called -Dugway, and met the rest of the company at the springs in Skull Valley. -</p> -<p>On September 2nd, we reached Granite Rock, sometimes called Granite -Mountain, as it stands out in the midst of the desert. There the -company camped at some alkali springs, where, with cup and bucket, it -took all night to dip water for the stock. Next morning we found that -the Indians had stolen all the team horses, eight head, so the agent -called on the men to volunteer their saddle horses to take his wagons -across the desert. Among the rest, I let my horse go, and eight of us -set out on foot to cross the desert, while some went after the stolen -stock. Other horsemen pushed across to water, and the teams brought up -the rear. -</p> -<p>The route was brushy and rocky, in some places there was heavy sand, in -other parts stiff alkali mud, and much of the time without a sign of a -road. The writer was taken very sick with a severe bowel complaint and -was compelled to turn to one side, so I fell behind my fellow footmen. -The teams lagged in the sand and mud till long after dark. I became so -weak and faint that I could not travel any longer, and I laid down on -the damp ground, so tired and thirsty that it seemed impossible for me -to live until morning without relief. When I had laid down for some -time, I heard my bunkmate, Doc. Woodward, shout that he had found water -and filled his canteen, and was coming back hunting the missed and -needy one. When he got near enough for me to answer him, I did so, and -with a drink I was somewhat revived. I was helped on my friend's horse, -and we proceeded on for about five miles to camp and water. One of the -party gave me a brandy toddy, spread my blankets, and I turned in, a -very grateful sufferer. I was given a cup of coffee, after which I felt -very much relieved, and by morning was ready to resume the journey, the -wagons having come up about 11 p.m. Next morning, September 4th, we -moved up five or six miles, to what was called Fish Springs. There we -found a number of Indians, and the party pitched camp for a few days. -</p> -<p>When the animals had been cared for and fires built, the Indians -gathered around in considerable numbers. As they were talking among -themselves, the writer understood and commenced to speak with them -in their own dialect, at which they were surprised and said one to -another, "Who is this man, that talks our talk? He has never been in -our country before." I was no less astonished myself; and I call the -reader's attention now to the peculiar feature of a man being called -to fit himself out with provisions to last him thirty days, travel out -in the desert two hundred and fifty or three hundred miles, and preach -to a tribe of Indians in whose country he had never been and whom he -had never seen before. Yet when the agent's interpreters failed to get -the Indians to understand, the agent asked if I could talk with them. I -told him I had never seen these Indians before that hour, "but," said -I, "I understand them, and you see they understand me." "Yes," said -the agent, but I do not see how it is that you can talk with them. I -have two men employed as interpreters, but they cannot make the Indians -understand. Now if you can make them comprehend what I wish to tell -them, I will pay you three dollars per day from the time that you left -home until you return there." -</p> -<p>"I do not know whether I can do your talking or not," was my response -to this proposition. "I came here to preach to this people, and I have -power given me to do it in their own tongue. But I do not know whether -I will be permitted to speak for you or not; if I am, I will talk for -you." "All right," said Mr. Armstrong, "have them form a circle in -front of my wagons, and tell them who I am, and what the great father -at Washington has sent me here for; that I have brought them clothing -and blankets as a present from the great father at Washington, and that -he expects them to be good people and live in peace with each other, -and also with other people, and if they will do so the great father -will send good men to bring more goods to them." -</p> -<p>When I told them what the agent wanted, they at once formed a circle as -desired, to the satisfaction of all present. Then the agent distributed -the goods, to the great pleasure of the Indians. He talked very kindly -to them and gave them much good advice. I interpreted what he said, and -then continued to preach to them, telling them about the Book of Mormon -and their forefathers, and many other things of interest to them. I -seemed to have perfect liberty of speech as I desired it, in their -dialect, and they listened attentively to all I had to say. -</p> -<p>The next day Seth M. Blair, Peter Conover, Ormus Bates and myself and -four or five other men that belonged to the missionary part of the -camp, employed an Indian guide to travel south around the head of Deep -Creek, to see what natural advantages there were for settlements, but -we failed to find anything inviting until we came to Deep Creek, where -the country seemed quite suitable for stock raising. About the 11th of -September the party returned to the agent's camp, where we again met -with many of the Indians, who wished us to stop and live with them as -their friends, adding, "If you will not stop with us, then tell the big -Mormon captain to send some good Mormon men that will tell the truth -and show us how to make clothes like the white man." -</p> -<p>It was the next day, I think, that the party started back to Salt Lake -City, the agent having secured his team horses. We traveled north of -Granite Rock, and around the point of the mountain to the lake, thence -along the shore to Grantsville. We tarried one day with Mr. Cooley, and -partook of the hospitality of himself and family. -</p> -<p>After our visit to the Deep Creek Indians, some of them claimed to have -received dreams and visions, in which heavenly messengers appeared and -told them to go into Tooele and call on the Bishops, who would tell -them what to do, and for them to obey the Bishops. Accordingly, scores -of them went to Grantsville and related their story, when they were -told to believe in Christ and repent and be baptized. Many of them -obeyed this advice, and then a missionary was sent out and located -among them. -</p> -<p>With our one day's rest at Grantsville, the party continued on to Salt -Lake City, where Mr. Armstrong paid me ninety dollars in cash for my -services as interpreter. I returned home and paid the ninety dollars -on the mare I had purchased on credit for the mission. My labors as -a missionary, however, were still called for, and I visited all the -settlements in Weber County, also the Indian camps, and acted as a -presiding teacher in Ogden City, often being called to arbitrate -differences between the white people and Indians. About that time Snag, -the Bannock Indian chief, and twelve of his prominent men called on me -to accompany them to Salt Lake City to see President Brigham Young on -some business. They said they wished a friendly talk, and to tell some -of their grievances and ask some favors of him. The latter constituted -the greater part of their business. I accompanied them to President -Young's residence, where he received them kindly, furnishing them with -necessary supplies of food and fuel. Next day, after they had had a -very friendly talk with the President, he gave orders to the Bishops -in the northern settlements to supply the Indians' wants as far as -practicable, as it was cheaper to feed than to fight them. Then after -all the complaints of the Bannocks had been satisfactorily adjusted, we -left, they for their homes in the north near Fort Hall, the writer for -Ogden, where I continued my labors. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLI"></a>CHAPTER LI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">UTAH MILITIA ORGANIZED—ELECTED CAPTAIN OF A COMPANY—HEAR OF -JOHNSTON'S ARMY—SCOUTING PARTY SENT OUT—I AM CHOSEN AS GUIDE—TRAVEL -TO THE BEAR LAKE COUNTRY—COLD NIGHTS AND LITTLE FOOD—COMPLAINT IN THE -PARTY—PROVE THAT I AM RIGHT—REACH LOST CREEK—SOME OF THE MEN OBJECT -TO DOUBLE GUARD—A DISCOVERY THAT REMOVES ALL OBJECTIONS—STRIKE THE -TRAIL OF HORSEMEN—PREPARE FOR ACTION—TAKE A CAMP BY SURPRISE—THE -MEN ARE FRIENDS—ARRIVE AT OGDEN—CALLED TO GO ON AN IMPORTANT -ERRAND—TUSSLE WITH AN INDIAN—FAIL IN GETTING DESIRED INFORMATION, AND -RETURN TO OGDEN. -</p> -<p>IN the spring of 1857 I rented some land and put in a crop. Soon after -this an order came from Governor Young to the Weber County officials -to organize the militia of the county, which was done. I was elected -captain of the first company of infantry in the Weber militia district. -The company consisted of captain, commissioned and non-commissioned -officers, and one hundred men of the rank and file. Chauncey W. West, -then the Bishop of Weber County, was commissioned general of the -district. He appointed days for drill, and four companies came together -in Ogden City for that service. -</p> -<p>At that time we had not learned of threatened danger from any source -except occasional Indian raids; but no sooner had we got properly -organized and ready for self-defense than news came from the east to -Governor Young that an invading army was coming, with hostile threats -against the citizens of Utah. -</p> -<p>As the governor had not been officially notified of the approach of -United States troops, his official oath bound him to repel any invading -forces. He accordingly sent out scouts to ascertain the movements of -the troops referred to, and soon learned that there was a well equipped -army of nearly ten thousand men on their way west, with the avowed -purpose, it was said, of destroying the Mormon Church and people. -</p> -<p>Some time in August General West called out twelve or fifteen men as a -scouting party, to go over in the Bear Lake country, along the emigrant -road, and from there to the head of Lost Creek and down the Weber -River. He had heard of a party going up Lost Creek, and over to the -Bear Lake country. General West appointed Major Monroe to take charge -of the party, of which the writer was called to be one, as I had been -acquainted with mountain travel and understood the Indian language. -General West told the major to make no move of importance without -consulting me as to the journey. -</p> -<p>The party proceeded to the divide between North Ogden and Ogden -Valley, where we halted and the major privately told me that he was -not accustomed to journeys of that kind, and wished me to lead the -party through, for I had more experience than he had. I declined the -responsibility, but the major said: "I will be responsible if you will -lead." so I headed out to Blacksmith Fork and thence to Bear Lake, and -around the east side thereof to the river. We crossed to the California -road near the present site of Montpelier, thence back east to the -road where Cokeville settlement is now located. As we failed to learn -anything of importance, we returned back over the river and struck out -for the head of Lost Creek, where it was supposed that we would fall in -with the scouts from the approaching army. -</p> -<p>The nights began to be cold, and the food supply was getting low. The -horses were somewhat jaded, the route very rough, and the most of the -party were young and inexperienced. They began to complain and said -that nobody had ever traveled in so rough a country as that, and it -was all foolishness to be wearing ourselves out in that way. They -said the writer did not know himself where he was going, and I had -no business to be on the lead, as that was Major Monroe's place. The -major, however, promptly told the party that I was in the proper place. -Finally I called a halt and told the party that I knew that we were -going just right and had been on a trail all day, but they did not know -it. They asked, "Where is your trail?" and I again told them that we -were on it. They laughed at me when I said, "I can prove it to you, and -even tell you the color of the horses that have passed this way." But -they thought me a fool to talk thus, so I told one of the young men to -jump down and remove the leaves from a root of a tree that stood near -by a steep bank, as it was plain to the practiced eye that an old trail -passed there, and when the leaves were removed he would find that the -bark had been bruised at the roots of the tree by the hoofs of passing -horses. He found the trail and the bark off the tree roots, as I had -said. I told the men to look on the tree about the height of a pony's -side, and they would find hair that would tell them the color of the -ponies that had passed there. They found bay and white horses' hair. -Next I said to them, "Look on the point of that snag which projects -over the trail." They did so, and found a duplicate of the hair they -had found on the tree. Then they said that I could prove anything I -pleased, and they would not dispute with me any more. -</p> -<p>The party passed on down Lost Creek, to a point where the country was -more open. When camping time came we turned into a little creek bottom -and put out the stock. I remarked to the major that I felt as though we -should put on a double guard that night. This was more than some of the -boys thought they could stand. Several said that I would run the party -to death, but that they would not submit to any extra guard. Others -said there was no use for any guard, for nobody but Brown would ever -lead a party there; but just then some one hallooed, and we found, on -looking, that no one was missing from camp. One said it was a coyote, -another that it was an owl. Again the cry was heard distinctly, and no -doubt remained of its being a human voice. Then the order was given to -get up the stock, ready for whatever might come. The horses were soon -picketed near camp, and every man thought it was proper to put on a -double guard that night, some of the boys remarking that Brown was not -such a fool as they had thought. -</p> -<p>Things settled down for the night, and next morning the party started -out. We had gone less than a mile when we saw fresh horse tracks made -by shod horses, and the droppings looked so new that I directed a -young man to ascertain if they were warm. The novel way in which the -young man performed that task created some merriment for the moment. -Then the party continued on a short distance, when we saw a smoke just -over the creek bank ahead. Every man was ready to obey orders, and all -dismounted at command and tightened up their saddle girths. Then came -the order to see that every tube was filled with dry powder, and each -man was assigned his position for action. -</p> -<p>The party was instructed not to halt without orders, and not to let -a horse put his head down to drink. If perchance we saw a blanket, -a handkerchief, or any camp equipage, we were to pass it unnoticed; -if brush or any obstructions were observed, we might be certain that -all such signs meant ambuscade. We then advanced cautiously and found -evidence of a party about our own number, lying encamped at the fire. -We pressed forward on the trail, and found several bushes lapped across -it, so that we felt certain we would soon fall in with those ahead, -whom we felt sure could be none other than a scouting party from -Johnston's army. We prepared for the worst, and as we were moving on -double-quick time we saw a man running towards a grove of cottonwood -trees, from a point of the mountain. Next we saw the horses of a party -of scouts, the top of whose tent was soon discovered. -</p> -<p>Quickly capturing the horses, we charged on the tent and surrounded it. -taking the men by surprise. As they began to file out of their tent, -our party leveled their rifles and called on them to surrender. Just -at that moment one of the surprised party recognized one of our men, -so that we only required them to acknowledge that they were "dropped -on," a phrase used in those times to express the condition. We were not -long in ascertaining that the party was a scout from Davis County, in -pursuit of the same reported detachment we had been sent to intercept. -But neither of us had seen or heard anything of the party that was -supposed to be in the region of country we had been over. Without much -delay, our party hastened home to Ogden City, and joined our regiment, -finding much excitement and hearing many rumors. -</p> -<p>It seemed that there was no rest for me, for in a day or two General -West called on me to visit the camp of James and Ben Simons, who lived -about twenty miles up the Weber River. The men named were Cherokee -Indians who, it was said, were in possession of some important -information which the general wanted to get. He told me to learn what I -could from the Simonses, as they were friendly. -</p> -<p>When I got to the mouth of the canyon I chanced to meet Ben Simons -coming from Salt Lake City. It was evident the Indian had been -drinking, and as soon as I met him he drew his Colt's revolver and -said, "Hold on there!" threatening to kill me if I was Uncle Sam's man. -I succeeded in riding close alongside of him, grabbed his pistol and -held the muzzle away from me. I tried to persuade him not to shoot, for -we must be good friends. He yelled again that if I were a Mormon I must -fight his old uncle or he would kill me. He was a powerful man, and I -had all that I could do to keep the pistol turned from me. -</p> -<p>For ten miles I had to tussle with that Indian, and at times thought -I would have to shoot him in self-defense; but after the most -disagreeable and hazardous ten miles' ride of my whole life, we came -to Gordon Beckstead's ranch. Simons regarded Beckstead as his friend. -The latter persuaded the warrior to dismount and have a drink of whisky -with him, and let me go my way, for I was a good friend to both of them. -</p> -<p>I went to James Simons' camp but failed to get the information desired. -Simons was very friendly, and said that if he heard anything of -interest he would be pleased to let us know it at once. I then returned -to my regiment, which was ordered into camp the next day. We bivouacked -on the east bench in Ogden City. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLII"></a>CHAPTER LII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">OFF ON ANOTHER SCOUT—AGAIN ON BEAR RIVER—DREAM OF SEEING -TROOPS—DREAM FULFILLED—SEND WORD BACK OF DISCOVERY—FIVE HUNDRED -CAVALRYMEN—HEAVY STORM—MY ONLY REMAINING COMPANION TAKEN ILL—HE -IS HEALED AND I AM STRICKEN DOWN—CAMP IN THE SNOW—MY COMPANION, -EXPECTING ME TO DIE, PREPARES TO TAKE MY BODY HOME—HE RETURNS, -PRAYS FOR ME, AND I AM HEALED—STRICKEN DOWN AGAIN—I DIRECT HIM -TO LEAVE ME AND RETURN HOME—HE OBEYS RELUCTANTLY—I EXPECT TO -DIE—PECULIAR EXPERIENCES—FOUR YOUNG MEN, SENT BY MY COMRADE, -COME TO MY RELIEF—JOURNEY ON—LIGHTING FIRE IN A STORM—THE YOUNG -MEN PRAY FOR ME, AND I AM RELIEVED—TRAVELING HOMEWARD—KIND -TREATMENT—REACH OGDEN—ACT AS SEXTON—GUARD OVER SPIES—UTAH MILITIA -RECALLED—MISSIONARY LABORS IN WEBER COUNTY. -</p> -<p>THE first night in camp at Ogden, General West and his adjutant, D. -Gamble, called at my tent, and told me I was wanted to take charge -of a scouting party to go over in the Bear Lake country, and start -by sunrise next morning. They directed me to choose the men I would -like to have accompany me, and they should be released to go home and -prepare. I made a list of five young, active men, who met me next -morning at sunrise, having received their orders. We proceeded to the -emigrant road across the Bear River, about fifteen miles above the -lake. There we met with some emigrants, but could not learn anything -from them, so we crossed back to the foot hills, and there camped in a -secluded place, where we could overlook the emigrant road. Next morning -at 4 o'clock I awoke from a dream, in which I had seen two hundred and -fifty cavalrymen come and pitch camp just across the river from where -we were; then I saw two hundred and fifty more come and reinforce the -first detachment; I also saw their baggage and artillery wagons. I was -impressed so forcibly with the dream that I called my comrades and told -them to prepare for a move, while I went up one of the high points -and watched developments. At daybreak I saw the camp of the first two -hundred and fifty men, saw them form in line for roll call, and a -mounted guard drive their horses across the river towards our camp. -</p> -<p>The main object of our scout was to learn if the army or any portion of -it was coming down Bear River and into Salt Lake Valley from the north, -and if we saw any troops on that route to communicate the information -to headquarters at the earliest moment possible, so that our forces -could meet them at the best places on the route, and repulse them. -That that end might be served I sent two of my men with a dispatch to -General West, and as soon as the messengers had gone out of call I -again went on the hill. Everything was ready to move as developments -might indicate, and just as the first party was saddling its horses I -saw the second two hundred and fifty come up and join the first party. -Then the five hundred cavalrymen proceeded down the river, just as I -had seen them in my dream. This necessitated a second dispatch and two -more of my men, leaving me only one, with whom I followed up the troops -till they camped. It rained and snowed alternately all that day and -night. My comrade, James Davis, and I went after dark within the lines -of the troops, but did not learn of their intentions. Davis was taken -with something like a congestive chill, and we were forced to retreat -into the hills, where we camped for the night. Davis was so bad that I -worked in the storm all night with him and prayed for him; at last he -was healed and we set out on our way home at daylight. -</p> -<p>About 8 a.m. the writer came down sick, just the same as my friend had -been, only I also suffered with pleurisy in the right side. I could -ride no further, so we camped in the snow, where it was about eight -inches deep. Snow was still falling as it can only in the mountain -country. Our clothes were wet as could be, and our blankets were in the -same condition. The only food we had was the crumbs and dust from some -crackers. -</p> -<p>Davis succeeded in making a fire, but by that time I had cramped so -that I could not speak. Davis, supposing I was dying, started out to a -quakingasp grove to get some poles to make an Indian litter or drag, -on which he thought to take my body home. As he went he felt he ought -to have faith and pray for his comrade, as he had been prayed for the -night before; so he fell on his knees and prayed, as he afterwards -said, as he never had done before. Then something said to him, "Go back -and put your hands on him and pray again, and he will be healed;" and -it was even so. -</p> -<p>We then traveled some fifteen miles, when the sun shone. We partly -dried our blankets by a fire and the sun, and continued our journey -for some ten miles, when I had a second attack of illness, which was -so severe that I thought I had better die alone in the mountains than -to allow the enemy to gain the advantage in the country. Consequently, -I told Davis to make my horse fast by the trail and spread my -blankets, that I might lie down. This done, I directed him not to -spare horseflesh, but take the news to our friends as soon as it was -possible. Davis did not want to leave me in that plight, but was urged -to go. He started reluctantly, and in tears. -</p> -<p>For a time it seemed that I had rendered my last services to family -and friends, as I lay down by an Indian trail, sixty miles from any -white man's habitation. While I was pondering the situation, a magpie -came flying down over me, and said "quack," then alighted on a willow -near by, in plain sight. Next came a raven, which gave its "croak," as -it settled down near me, and it seemed as though it had found prey. -Being aware of the habits of these carrion birds, I wrapped my head -in blankets, to prevent the birds from picking out my eyes, if the -worst came to me; yet I knew that my body could not be protected from -the wild beasts that roamed in the mountains, such as the bear, wolf, -wolverine, panther or mountain lion, wild cat and lynx, some of which, -if not all these various kinds, would be tugging at my carcass inside -of twenty-four hours. -</p> -<p>Then the birds circled over me, as if to say, "We want an eye," or -some fragment of my body, I felt that my time was nigh, and unless the -providence of God interposed, I would go the way of all the earth before -the rising of the sun. I was chilled to the very bone, and cramped so -that it was impossible for me to build a fire. It did not seem possible -for me to survive until my companion could ride sixty miles and send -relief. -</p> -<p>While I pondered the situation, four young men who had been sent with -fresh horses and food supplies came up, they having met Davis, who -sent them on with all speed. I think the eldest of them was not over -seventeen years old. They soon built a fire and prepared much needed -refreshments, and I was greatly benefited by that special providence of -God, as it certainly seemed to me to be. While I partook of the food, -the young men saddled my horse, rolled up my blankets, and we rode -eight or ten miles that night, and camped while the rain came down in -torrents. The boys soon provided me with shelter by sticking willows in -the ground and winding the tops together and spreading blankets over, -so that it afforded a little protection for me, and I was soon wrapped -in wet blankets. -</p> -<p>The next thing was to start a fire. Every match had got wet, and the -boys thought it impossible to make a fire, so they asked me what they -should do. I told them to get some cotton out of a quilt if they could -find a dry spot in it, then put a small priming of powder in a rifle -and ram down the cotton on the powder; in the next place, go to the -heaviest topped sagebrush they could find, and carefully reach under -and strip the dry bark off the main stalk of sagebrush, and in that way -get a tinder, then come to my shelter and hold the bark loosely over -the muzzle of the gun and fire it off. They got a light, but they had -too much powder and it blew the fire out. They tried repeatedly without -satisfactory results, and the case was becoming desperate, as darkness -was coming on. Two of them got under cover with me, and I finally -succeeded in measuring the powder to them. Then they started a flame, -and as wood was plenty they made a rousing fire. -</p> -<p>In the meantime I took to cramping and suffered so severely that one -of the boys remarked. "Brother Brown will die. O what shall we do?" -Another said, "Let us pray." Then one led in prayer, and he prayed -mightily. As soon as he was through, one said, "Let us go in and lay -hands on him," and in a moment they all gathered around me, placed -their hands on my head, and prayed from their hearts. The cramping -ceased and never returned as severe as it was before; yet I suffered -greatly from the pain in my side. The writer regrets very much that he -cannot recall the names of those young lads. I believe they were all -sent from Willard City, Box Elder County. God bless them, whoever they -are. Their action showed them to be young heroes, with great faith in -God; and but for them I would have died that fearful night. -</p> -<p>Next morning, the party was up, and off we went down Blacksmith's -Fork Canyon and across to Wellsville, where I was taken in by Bishop -Peter Maughan and his good wife, who did all they could to relieve my -sufferings. The Bishop also saw that the boys were well taken care of. -</p> -<p>The following morning Samuel Obray drove up with a light, covered -wagon, and a good team, and I was helped into the wagon. Sister Maughan -had provided a large canteen full of composition tea. She came to the -wagon, and without thinking of anything else, she placed it partly -under the side where I had the pleurisy pain. Then the team started -for Brigham City, and before we had gone five miles the pain had -disappeared from my side, thanks to the Bishop and Sister Maughan for -their special kindness, and S. Obray. The latter delivered me into the -hands of Colonel Smith in Brigham City, where I was cared for until -next day, and then the colonel forwarded me to my home in Ogden City, -where I recovered after suffering from a severe cold and cough for a -few days. -</p> -<p>During my absence the regiment had gone to Echo Canyon, and there was -scarcely an able-bodied man to be found in the city. The women and -children were cutting and hauling wood, and doing all the outdoor work -as best they could. A great deal of sickness was brought on by exposure -and hardships. At a Sabbath meeting a general vote of thanks was given -the writer for his efforts for the general good of the people and his -self-sacrifice. -</p> -<p>About this time there was a very worthy young man named Yough, who -died, and I was called on to take the part of sexton and bury the -deceased, as well as some small children that had died. Meanwhile, -there were four prisoners brought in from the north; they were -supposed to be spies. I was called on to be one of the guards to take -them to Salt Lake City, where they were turned over to the military -authorities. Then I returned home, to learn that the troops my scouts -and I had seen on Bear River were General R. T. Burton's battalion of -Utah cavalry, which had been sent out to intercept a detachment of -Johnston's army which had been discovered in that direction, but had -returned to the main body, which went into winter quarters at Fort -Bridger. Then the Utah militia was withdrawn from Echo Canyon. -</p> -<p>I was next called to take up my missionary labors in Weber County. -From 1856 to 1859 I baptized and rebaptized four hundred persons, and -visited with the catechism from house to house. In that work I spent -the winter of 1857-8. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLIII"></a>CHAPTER LIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">MORMONS ABANDON THEIR HOMES AND MOVE SOUTH—PREPARE FOR THE WORST—GO -TO PAYSON—AFFAIRS BEING SETTLED, RETURN TO OGDEN—CALLED TO GO -EAST AS A MISSIONARY—JOURNEY ACROSS THE PLAINS—MEET MY PARENTS IN -IOWA—PREACHING AND TRAVELING—MY FATHER'S TESTIMONY—MISSIONARY -LABORS—CALLED TO MISSOURI—SENT TO BRING A HERD OF CATTLE—RETURN TO -MY PARENTS' HOME—BID FAREWELL TO THEM—PURCHASING CATTLE. -</p> -<p>SOME time in May, 1858, as I remember, an order came from President -Brigham Young for everybody living north of Utah County to move south -and leave their homes prepared for burning; for it had been decided -that if Johnston's army came in, as it had threatened to do, with -hostile intentions, the people would lay waste the country and fight -to the bitter end. I do not remember that there was a dissenting voice -from this determination. -</p> -<p>Everybody moved out to the south, myself and family going to Payson, -one hundred miles from Ogden. There we made a camp, and I cut wild hay -and hauled it for a livelihood, that being the only employment I could -find. -</p> -<p>In the latter part of July, when peace had been re-established, I -returned home and made hasty preparations for my family for the winter, -as I had been called by President Brigham Young to accompany General -Horace S. Eldredge to Florence, Nebraska, with a company consisting -of twenty men who were going on business and partly as missionaries. -I belonged to the latter class. I went into the western part of Iowa, -being assigned to that field of labor, while the others went to their -several destinations. -</p> -<p>The company was to have moved out on the 1st of September, so I. A. -Canfield and I, fitted with a four-mule team and light wagon, were in -Salt Lake City ready to start at the appointed time; but the rest of -the party would not or could not be ready for ten or twelve days, so we -returned home and stayed until the 11th. We then went to Salt Lake City -and waited until the 14th, and, as the party was still tardy, we moved -out to the top of the Little Mountain, and there camped. From that -place we proceeded to the Weber River, where we were overtaken by John -Neff and Dusten Arna, who were to join the party when it came up. As -their teams were not in the best of plight for the journey, we traveled -together to Ham's Fork, where we stopped on the 19th, and waited for -those yet in the rear to come up. About 8 o'clock that evening H. S. -Eldredge, Jos. W. Young and Horton Haight reached our camp. -</p> -<p>On the 20th, the company having got together, proceeded on the way to -the Sweetwater. On the 26th we reached the Platte River, where I was -taken very sick with hemorrhoids of the bowels. With that exception, -all moved smoothly. On the 28th we passed Fort Laramie, and my health -began to improve, though I had been brought almost to death's door, and -the company was detained one afternoon in consequence. After that I -improved, and the company made rapid headway. October 3rd two deserters -from Fort Laramie passed the party. They had stolen two horses and a -mule from the government, and, as I remember it, made good their escape. -</p> -<p>Nothing happened out of the ordinary until October 19th, when the -party arrived at Florence, Nebraska, on the Missouri River. From that -point each went to his field of labor or to his business, as planned -beforehand. Canfield and I crossed the river to L. O. Littlefield's, in -Crescent City, and stayed over night with him and his family, and on -the 20th proceeded on our way to Calhoun, Harrison County, Iowa, where -my father lived with his family. We were soon overtaken by Clayton Webb -and B. H. Dennis, my brothers-in-law. I accepted a seat in their buggy -and they took me to my father's home. -</p> -<p>I had not seen father for eleven years. I was an entire stranger to -every one of the family, who kept a hotel. I went in and ate with -strangers, and did not make myself known until after all the evening -work was done. Then after I was satisfied that they had not the -remotest idea of my identity, I told them who I was. It was some -time before they could realize that what I said was true. To them it -seemed that the dead had come to life, and the long lost had been -found, for they had all given up hope of ever seeing me again. It was -not difficult for me to recognize my father and mother, but my elder -brother and sister were dead, and the younger ones had all grown out of -memory. -</p> -<p>When I had visited with them a few days, I preached several times in -the public schoolhouse, and then traveled and preached. On one occasion -I had a walk and talk with my father alone. We talked of my absence, -and he said, "James, I had given up all hopes of ever seeing your face -again, but thanks be to God I have that privilege. You always have -stood up for the faith and have been a man through thick and thin for -your religion." Then he said, "Oh that I had the faith that I once had, -and felt as I have felt! I would be a happy man if I had the spirit -that you have, and that I once had." He burst into a flood of tears, -and exclaimed, "Oh, my God, I am in the dark and I do not know that I -shall ever feel as I once felt. Then I could divide the last loaf, yes, -the last morsel of food that I had with a Mormon. Talk about heaven! -The true spirit of Mormonism is heaven. I thank God that you have kept -the faith, though you have had a hard time of it." Then he added, -"James, stick to it and never give it up; for if there is any salvation -for me or any of my family it will be through you, for you are the -Joseph of my family, and I have known it since before you were born." -He then seemed as humble as a little child, and continued: "James, be -faithful in the work, but as for me or any of my family going to Utah, -I don't think we will ever go." -</p> -<p>I told him he could do no better than to go with his entire family and -renew their covenants, for the good Spirit was for all who would seek -it in the proper way. At last father said that he did not know what -they should do yet, the weather being wet and cold. -</p> -<p>We returned into the house and I stayed with the family the first -month, preaching in the public schoolhouse every Sabbath. Then my -brother Willis and I traveled around from place to place, and preached -everywhere we found an opportunity, first to Raglan Township, and then -to the northeast, forty miles into Shelby County. We preached several -times in Garden Grove schoolhouse, and went from there to a small town -called Monteno, thence to Pottawatomie County. We preached to a full -hall in Council Bluffs City, then went out on Mosquito Creek, in what -was called the Garner settlement. Thus we continued to travel and -preach from place to place and bear our testimonies, as health and -opportunity permitted. -</p> -<p>In January, 1859, preached my cousin Ira Johnson's funeral sermon; he -had been accidentally shot and killed while out with a surveying party -in that region of country. The same day I baptized six persons and -confirmed them; this was at my father's house, and from that time my -father seemed quite changed in his feelings. He said it was all that he -could do to keep out of the water, and stated that he had never felt -better in his life than he did on that occasion. Said he, "James, I -want you to preach all the time." -</p> -<p>On April 7th I received a letter from General Horace S. Eldredge, -asking me to come down to Platte County, Missouri, and receive one -hundred and seventy-seven head of work oxen that he had contracted -for with Mr. Lampton and Mr. Thompson, cattle merchants. Having also -received the written contract for the cattle, I started on the 8th, -and on the 9th I took passage on the steamboat <em>Satan</em>, which lay -at the Council Bluffs landing. I paid ten dollars for passage to -Parkville, Platte County, Missouri. The boat called at all important -towns and landings. Nothing out of the ordinary happened except that -we were driven under a high sandbank in a short bend of the river, -by a powerful wind storm, and in trying to extricate the boat, the -side-wheel next the shore threw the water with such force against the -bank as to cause it to cave in onto the boat, so that the guards and -wheelhouse were carried away. -</p> -<p>I landed at Parkville on April 13th, stopped overnight, and on the 14th -proceeded eight miles to Mr. Thompson's. On the 15th I went with him -to his partner in the contract, Mr. Lampton. The men General Eldredge -promised in his letter on the 15th to send to help drive and care for -the cattle, did not arrive until the 27th, when Eldredge came with five -men. He furnished money to pay the expenses, and gave instructions, -then returned to St. Louis. On the 28th, 29th and 30th, myself and -party received and branded one hundred and seventy-seven head of work -oxen and two valuable mules. -</p> -<p>We started for the north on May 1st, traveling through Rochester, -Marysvale, Lindon and Sydney, keeping from the river and on the high, -rolling prairies, through what was called the Platte purchase in -Missouri. We arrived in Council Bluffs on May 15th, and went from -there to Florence, Nebraska, where I delivered up the drove of cattle -and span of mules, on the 16th, to Bishop Frederick Kesler, who was -General Eldredge's agent. We lost but one head from among the cattle, -although we had an exceedingly stormy and muddy time of it most of the -way, having to swim several streams that had been swollen by the heavy -rains, so that the journey was taken with great hardships, and danger -as well. -</p> -<p>I went to my father's home on the 17th, in Calhoun County, Iowa, -settled with my father, who was very kind to me and my brother Willis, -helping us to two yoke of oxen to cross the plains with. We bade -farewell to the parental home and to the family on the 27th. Father -accompanied us to Council Bluffs and paid our expenses until the 30th, -when we parted with him. We crossed the river at Omaha, and moved up to -Florence, where we went into a camp or rendezvous and waited for others -to come to make a company strong enough to cross the plains. -</p> -<p>The company had its camp some three miles northwest of Florence, where -General Eldredge, the Church agent, and Elder George Q. Cannon, agent -for the European emigration, both called on me to go out into Nebraska -and also to cross into Iowa and purchase work cattle for them. Each -furnished me with five hundred dollars in gold then, and as it was the -time that hundreds of gold hunters were returning from Pike's Peak, I -had great success in my purchases, spending a thousand dollars some -days in the purchase of cattle, buying whole teams as they stood on the -road, sometimes wagons, equipage and provisions. I would hire a trusty -man to drive them up to Florence, and then I would replenish my pockets -and go on again. For ten days I traveled early and late, and did -thousands of dollars' worth of business for the Church and emigration. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLIV"></a>CHAPTER LIV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">GIVEN CHARGE OF A COMPANY TO CROSS THE PLAINS TO UTAH—COMPOSITION -OF THE CAMP—START WEST—PERFORM BAPTISMS—MEET A WAR PARTY OF -SIOUX INDIANS—PLACE WHERE A. W. BABBITT WAS KILLED—MEET MORE -INDIANS—HOW TROUBLE WAS AVOIDED—CAMP LIFE AND DUTIES—ENTER SALT LAKE -VALLEY—COMPANY GREETED BY THE CHURCH AUTHORITIES—REPORT TO PRESIDENT -YOUNG AND AM RELEASED—TRADE AT CAMP FLOYD—EXPERIENCE WITH A THIEF—GO -TO WORK ON THE OGDEN CANYON ROAD—HARDSHIPS ENDURED. -</p> -<p>ON Sunday, June 12th, Elders Eldredge and Cannon visited the camp and -held meeting, then organized the company, naming James S. Brown for -president and captain, the selection being unanimously sustained. -George L. Farrell was made sergeant of the guard, William Wright -chaplain, and John Gordon secretary. A captain was appointed over each -ten wagons, namely: first, Wm. Steel; second, W. Williams; third, -Christopher Funk; fourth, Newbury; fifth, Kent; sixth, Giddens. -These names were suggested by Messrs. Eldredge and Cannon, and were -unanimously sustained by the company of three hundred and fifty-three -souls. The outfit consisted of fifty-nine wagons and one hundred and -four yoke of oxen, eleven horses, thirty-five cows, and forty-one -head of young cattle that were driven loose. We had provisions for -seventy-five days. -</p> -<p>On June 13th, 1859, the company set out for Salt Lake City, Utah. -There were nine different nationalities of people represented, namely; -English, Irish, Scotch, Welsh, Danish, Swedish, Norwegians and -Icelanders; we also had some Americans from the Eastern, Middle and -Southern States, all mixed together. Many of them had never driven an -ox one mile in their lives, and the result was almost like herding -a train on the plains. If it had not been for G. L. Farrell, James -Hickson, Samuel Garnet and Willis Brown, all excellent ox teamsters, -besides some five or six others that were quite handy, we would -doubtless have had most destructive stampedes. As it was, the company -did not have any serious mishaps. In a few days the train became -regulated and we had more system and order in travel. For the first -five or six days of the journey the stock seemed in danger of being -destroyed by flies and mosquitoes, and the people suffered much from -the same cause. On the 18th we passed Captain Rowley with the handcart -company. -</p> -<p>On June 19th the camp stopped on the Loup Fork, a tributary of the -Platte River. There was a small town there called Columbus. On the 20th -the company moved up the river and camped on a small stream, Looking -Glass Creek. That afternoon I baptized and rebaptized eighty souls, -and other Elders confirmed them, while some men of the company bridged -the stream. On the 21st we proceeded to Genoa Ferry, where we were -joined by Captain Walding's company of thirty-seven souls and ten more -wagons, thus increasing my company to three hundred and ninety persons -and sixty-nine wagons, with cattle and other property in proportion. -At that place we chartered the ferry boat from J. Johnston and did the -work ourselves. We paid seventy-five cents a wagon, and it took fifteen -hours' hard labor to cross. The stock all swam safely over, and the -company camped on the west bank. The handcart company came up that -night about 10 o'clock. On the 23rd our company proceeded up the river. -</p> -<p>We met with a company of Sioux Indians on the 24th. These formed a -line of battle across the road ahead of the company, and sent two men -to meet us. I was traveling in advance of the company, and although -I had never been among the Sioux Indians in my life for an hour, nor -had I ever been where I had an opportunity to study their language, I -had not the slightest difficulty in talking to them, or they to me. -Consequently I learned at once that these Indians were on the war path, -and were hunting the Omahas and Poncas. They were hungry and said they -must have food from the company; so they were told to form a line -parallel with the road, and to keep one-fourth of a mile back, so as -not to stampede the train or frighten the women and children. They were -allowed to send two men on foot to spread blankets where the company -could put such food as we had to share. -</p> -<p>Meanwhile I gave orders to the sergeant of the guard, G. L. Farrell, -and the several captains to draw up in close order, have every teamster -in his place, and all the women and children in the wagons, and for -each man to have his gun where he could lay his hand on it without a -moment's delay. Each family was to place some food on the blankets by -the roadside. Not one team was to stop without orders. The wagons were -to be corralled as quickly as possible, if they must be, at the first -signal from the captain to do so; for the Indians appeared very warlike -in their paint and feathers. -</p> -<p>When the red men learned that it was a company of Mormons they had -met, they readily complied with the captain's terms, and a number rode -up and shook hands with him. As the company passed their lines of not -more than one hundred and fifty warriors, there came fourteen buffalo -in sight, quite close, and attention was turned to them so much that -the Indians took what the company had placed on their blankets and we -passed on without further interruption. -</p> -<p>It was about this date that the teamsters had become acquainted with -their teams and the latter acquainted with their drivers, so that -things began to work more orderly than before. The camp was called -together every evening for prayers, and for instructions for the next -day. -</p> -<p>About the 26th the company started across from the Loup Fork to Wood -River. That night the stock took fright and gave some trouble before -they were recovered; but the next morning the company resumed its -journey, leaving Wood Birdno to pursue two valuable young fillies, one -his own and the other belonging to Captain Brown. Mr. Birdno did not -overtake the company till the fifth day. -</p> -<p>One evening the company camped on a tributary of the Platte River, -where Almon W. Babbitt was killed by the Sioux Indians some eighteen -months or two years before. The company crossed the stream and camped -just opposite where that terrible tragedy occurred, and just as the -cattle were being unyoked the Sioux Indians flocked into camp, all -well-armed warriors. I saw that it was quite possible that they meant -mischief, as there were no Indian families in sight; so I called to -the company to continue their camp duties as if nothing unusual had -happened, but for every man to see to his firearms quietly and be ready -to use them if an emergency should arise. Then I turned to the chief, -and it being again given to me to talk and understand the Indians, I -asked what their visit meant, if it was peace that they go with me to -the middle of the corral of wagons and smoke the pipe of peace and have -a friendly talk, as myself and people were Mormons and friends to the -Indians, and that I wished them to be good friends to me and my people. -</p> -<p>The chief readily responded, and called his peace council of smokers -to the center of the corral, where they seated themselves in a circle. -I took a seat to the right hand of the chief and then the smoking and -talking commenced. The chief assured me that their visit was a friendly -one, and to trade with the emigrants. I inquired of him why, if their -visit meant peace, they all came so well armed. He answered that his -people had just pitched camp a short distance back in the hills, and -not knowing who we were had come down before laying down their arms. -</p> -<p>By this time it seemed that there were about three Indians to one white -person in the camp. I told the chief that it was getting too late to -trade, my people were all busy in camp duties, and I was going to send -our stock to where there was good feed for them. It was my custom, I -said, to send armed men to watch over them, and the guards always had -orders to shoot any wild beast that might disturb them, and if anybody -were to come among the stock in the night, we thought them to be -thieves and our enemies. If they attempted to drive off our stock, the -guards had orders to shoot, and our camp guards also were ordered to -shoot any thief that might come prowling around camp at night. I said -that, as we did not desire to do the Indians any harm, we wished the -chief and his men to go to their camp, as it was now too late to trade. -But in the morning, when the sun shone on our wagon covers, not when it -shone on the mountain tops in the west, but when it shone on our tents -and wagon covers, they could leave their arms behind and come down with -their robes, pelts and furs, and we would trade with them as friends; -but he was not to allow any of his men to visit our camp or stock at -night. -</p> -<p>The chief said that was heap good talk, and ordered his people to -return to their own camp. They promptly obeyed, to the great relief -of the company, which had been very nervous, as scarcely one of them -except myself had ever witnessed such a sight before. -</p> -<p>Next morning, between daylight and sunrise, the Indians appeared on -the brow of the hill northeast of camp. There seemed to be hundreds of -them formed in a long line and making a very formidable array. Just as -the sunlight shone on the tents and wagon covers they made a descent -on us that sent a thrill through every heart in camp, until it was -seen that they had left their weapons of war behind, and had brought -only articles of trade. They came into the center of the corral, the -people gathered with what they had to trade, and for a while a great -bargaining was carried on. For once I had more than I could do in -assisting them to understand each other, and see that there was no -disturbance or wrong done in the great zeal of both parties. -</p> -<p>The trading was over without any trouble, there was a hearty shaking of -hands, and the company resumed its journey up the river, passing and -being repassed by numerous companies moving west to Pike's Peak and to -Utah, California, or Oregon. There were gold seekers, freighters, and a -host of families of emigrants; and as the company advanced to the west -we met many people going to the east. They were traveling all ways, -with ox, horse and mule teams, as well as by pack trains of horses and -mules; while some were floating down the Platte River in small row -boats. -</p> -<p>I have omitted many dates, but feel that I must say that some time -in July we came up with Captain Horton Haight, who started two weeks -ahead of us, with a Church train of seventy-five wagons of freight. -Both trains passed Fort Laramie that same day. Mine camped seven miles -above the fort on the river, where we laid over the next day, and had -our wagons unloaded and thoroughly cleaned from the dust and dirt; -then they were reloaded so as to balance their loading anew. All sick -cattle were doctored, while the female portion of camp washed and did -considerable baking. The next day we proceeded on to the Black Hills, -in good spirits, the people generally well and encouraged. The road -then began to be rough and gravelly, so that the cattle began to get -sore-footed, and that changed the tone of feelings of some of the -people. -</p> -<p>We went on in peace over hills and dales to the Sweetwater, thence up -that stream to what was called the last crossing, where we stopped -one day, and again overhauled our load, doctored sick cattle, baked, -etc. From there we crossed the summit of the great Rocky Mountains to -Pacific Springs, so called because their waters flow down the Pacific -slope. From that point we traveled over very sandy plains and saleratus -deserts, to the Little Sandy, then to what was called the Big Sandy, -and thence to Green River, the last hundred miles being the most -soul-trying of the whole journey, owing to being sandy and poisonous to -the stock. We traveled day and night, all that the cattle could endure, -and in fact more than many of the people did endure without much -complaint and fault-finding. -</p> -<p>After a day's rest on the Green River, however, and being told that -there was no more such country to cross, the train entered on the last -one hundred and fifty miles of the journey, crossing over to Ham's -Fork, then to Fort Bridger on Black's Fork, and on to the two Muddys -and to Quaking Asp Ridge, the highest point crossed by the emigrant -road. From there we went down into Echo Canyon, then to Weber River, -crossed it and over the foothills to East Canyon Creek and to the -foot of the Big Mountain, where we met Apostles John Taylor and F. -D. Richards. A halt was called to listen to the hearty welcome and -words of cheer from the Apostles. Then the company passed over the Big -Mountain to the foot of the Little Mountain, where we camped. Many of -the people were sick from eating chokecherries and wild berries found -along the roadside. -</p> -<p>Next day we proceeded to the top of Little Mountain. When I saw the -last wagon on the summit, I left the sergeant, G. L. Farrell, in -charge, and went ahead to report the approach of my company and their -condition, as there were one hundred or more without food for their -supper. I called first on General H. S. Eldredge, and took dinner with -him. He received me very kindly, and accompanied me to President -Brigham Young's office. The President welcomed us as cordially as a -father could. After he had inquired and was told the condition of the -company, he sent word to Bishop Edward Hunter to have the tithing yard -cleared for the cattle, to have cooked food for all who needed it, and -to have the company camp in Union Square. -</p> -<p>When steps had been taken to carry out these orders, I called at my -father-in-law's in the Fourteenth Ward, where I learned that my family -were well. Then I went back, met the company on the bench east of the -city, and conducted it down to the square, where we found Bishop Hunter -and a number of other Bishops and people of the several wards, with -an abundance of cooked food for supper and breakfast for the whole -company. Several of the Twelve Apostles were on the ground to bid the -company a hearty welcome, and delivered short addresses of good cheer. -This was August 29, 1859. -</p> -<p>Next morning, the 30th, Orson Hyde, Orson Pratt, Wilford Woodruff, Ezra -T. Benson, Charles C. Rich and Erastus Snow of the Twelve Apostles, -Bishop Hunter and other prominent officers of the Church, came to the -camp, called the people together, and again bade the Saints welcome to -our mountain home. They advised the people where to go, and what to do -to support themselves for the winter. -</p> -<p>It was while yet on the Union Square that Apostle Charles C. Rich told -me that he and others had been called to take a mission to England, -leaving home in the spring, and that they would like me to go with -them; he thought I had better shape my affairs so that I would be ready -for the call. -</p> -<p>During the day the people found shelter and friends, and I reported -to the <em>Deseret News</em> office and to President Young, who told me I was -honorably released from any further responsibility for the company. -</p> -<p>On our journey across the plains we had two deaths in the company, and -five births, and had lost twenty-five head of cattle—a very small -percentage compared with losses in general. -</p> -<p>After the interview with President Young, I followed up my brother -Willis, who had gone ahead with our team. We stopped that night at -Charles C. Rich's, twelve miles north of Salt Lake City, and on -September 1st reached my home in Ogden City, where we found all well -and pleased to meet us again. -</p> -<p>At Ogden many friends and relatives called to see us. In a day or two -after our arrival, we went to cutting bulrushes along the slough on -the bottom lands, with a scythe, that being the only chance for us to -winter our stock. In a short time we purchased a wagon load of butter -and eggs, and took it to Camp Floyd, forty miles southwest of Salt Lake -City. We made a good profit on that load, then made a second trip and -had stolen from us one of our mules worth one hundred and fifty dollars. -</p> -<p>As we could not get a trace of the mule, Willis returned to the city to -get another animal, so we could move our wagon. About 12 o'clock one -night, while he was gone and I was sleeping alone in the wagon, the -moon shining bright and clear, a thief cut the hind end of the wagon -cover open, and drew out one of the quilts. As he was taking the second -I awoke and caught him in the act. I asked what he was doing there, -and was told it was none of my business, but to get out of his wagon, -or he would send an officer after me. At the same time he put his hand -on an old fashioned United States holster pistol that he had in his -belt, then staggered off, feigning drunkenness. I saw that he went -into a corner where he could not pass out, so I hastened and called -the landlord, Mr. Kinney, a man about sixty years old, and told him -what had happened. Said he, "If he went in there he cannot get through -that way." He peeped into a dark corner, where the buildings were so -close that a man could not squeeze through. "Here he is; come out, you -thief," said he, and the midnight marauder made a break to pass. The -old gentleman struck at him as he went by, and the next instant I had -him by the throat. By that time the thief had got his pistol disengaged -from his belt, but before he could turn it towards me I caught it from -his grasp, threw him heavily on the ground, and held him there till Mr. -Kinney brought an officer. -</p> -<p>Meanwhile we were surrounded by half a dozen gamblers, one of whom -said to the thief, "What are you doing down there, Rainbow?" A second -ordered him to get up. They all seemed to know him, but all were -strangers to me. I had passed the pistol to the old landlady, who -brought it out, offered it to the officers, and told them she saw the -thief try to shoot me when I snatched it and passed it to her. At that -the thief swore the weapon was not his, but mine, and that I had drawn -it to shoot him. Then the officers told me to keep the pistol, and they -let the thief go to a saloon in a gambling house, where he treated the -crowd, and told them that he had an engagement for a woman to meet him -there that night, but he found a man instead, and that was all there -was of it. At that the officers liberated him, and I concluded that I -had got into a den of thieves, so disposed of my load and left for home -as soon as I could. All the profit that we had made in the first trip -was lost in the second, for we never recovered the mule. -</p> -<p>The weather being cold, we threw up that business and took a contract -amounting to two hundred and fifty dollars on the Ogden Canyon road, -and in the bitter cold weather of winter worked till the job was -completed. That work finished, we took another contract to get out -timber for the first county jail in Weber County, and continued to work -in the canyon until April 1st. The winter had been so long and severe -that we sold part of our wearing apparel and bed clothes for hay to -keep life in our animals. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLV"></a>CHAPTER LV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">CALLED ON A MISSION TO GREAT BRITAIN—PREPARE TO DEPART—START -WITHOUT PURSE OR SCRIP—JOURNEY TO SALT LAKE CITY—SET APART FOR THE -MISSION—BEGIN THE JOURNEY EASTWARD—ORGANIZATION OF THE COMPANY—MY -POST AS CHAPLAIN—OVERTAKEN BY APOSTLES A. M. LYMAN AND C. C. -RICH—TRAVELING THROUGH THE MOUNTAINS—SNOWSTORMS AND WIND—FORAGE -IS SCARCE—MEETINGS WITH THE INDIANS—CAPTAIN REYNOLDS' EXPLORING -PARTY—ARMY DESERTERS IN OUR CAMP—MAIL FROM HOME—EMIGRANTS WESTWARD -BOUND—DISSATISFACTION IN CAMP—FEELING ABOUT APOSTLES LYMAN AND -RICH—I RESIGN AS CAPTAIN, BUT AM ELECTED AGAIN, AND FINALLY RESUME -COMMAND—MAIL ROBBERY—MORE DISAGREEABLE STORMS—MEET A HANDCART -COMPANY, AND APOSTLE GEORGE Q. CANNON—REACH THE MISSOURI RIVER—VISIT -MY FATHER AND HIS FAMILY—GO TO ST. JOSEPH, MISSOURI—MY FIRST VIEW -OF A RAILWAY TRAIN—AT MY OLD HOME IN BROWN COUNTY, ILLINOIS—JOURNEY -EASTWARD BY RAIL—ARRIVE IN NEW YORK FOR THE FIRST TIME—FIND FRIENDS. -</p> -<p>SOME time in February of this year (1860), I received a letter from -President Brigham Young, informing me that I had been selected to -accompany Apostles Amasa M. Lyman and Charles C. Rich on a mission to -Great Britain, starting in April. The letter authorized me to call on -Bishop Chauncey W. West, to have my city and five-acre lots fenced and -cultivated by labor tithing, for the benefit of my family; also for the -Bishop to furnish my family, from time to time, with such necessary -articles as they needed and could not otherwise obtain. I called on the -Bishop as authorized, and showed him the letter, but the work he was -called on for never was done, and my family suffered in consequence. -</p> -<p>I settled my business and prepared for the mission, and in April -attended conference in Salt Lake City, where my name was presented and -sustained with those of many others called to perform missions. On the -19th of April, I blessed my family and bade farewell to them till I -should be released from the duty which now rested upon me of preaching -the Gospel among the inhabitants of the British Isles. I had a ham -and a few articles of food, a light change of clothing, and my rifle. -These I put in the wagon of H. Hanson, who was starting to Salt Lake -City, on his way to fill a mission in Denmark. Then, with my shot-pouch -and a new pair of boots across my shoulder, I began my journey from -Ogden, intending to hunt up a yoke of cattle I had on the range, and -drive them to Salt Lake City. Not a dollar of money did I have—I was -entirely without purse or scrip. I found my cattle, drove them to Salt -Lake City, turned them over to my father-in-law, Nathan Tanner, to pay -a debt I was owing and to obtain some flour for food on my journey, and -I was ready on April 20th, the date appointed, to leave on my mission. -But some of the others were not ready, and the departure was postponed -to April 25th. -</p> -<p>On the last named date, we gathered at the Church historian's office -in Salt Lake City, to be set apart and receive instructions for our -missions. President Brigham Young there gave us counsel never to -be forgotten, and our hearts rejoiced therein. Each of us received -a certificate of our missionary appointment, signed by the First -Presidency, Brigham Young, Heber C. Kimball, and Daniel H. Wells. -We were then instructed to meet next day, the 26th, at the mouth of -Parley's Canyon, and to proceed therefrom under command of Joseph W. -Young, our baggage being hauled by teams owned by the Church that were -going to Florence, Nebraska. -</p> -<p>President Young had designated me to take charge of one of the teams, -with permission to leave it when Apostles Lyman and Rich overtook us, -which they expected to do in three or four days. Thus I had in my care -four yoke of oxen and a large government wagon; and, in company with -several others, went to President Young's mill south of the city. We -took on from a thousand to twelve hundred pounds of flour to each -wagon, and proceeded to the place of rendezvous, where there were -gathered thirty wagons, with about forty missionaries and the Beebe and -Buzzard families, who were going back to their farms in Iowa. -</p> -<p>On April 17th, Presidents Young and Wells came out and organized the -company, appointing Joseph W. Young as captain, and John Woolley -as sergeant of the guard. Myself and two others were selected as -chaplains. The company was instructed as to necessary duties in -crossing the plains, and we started. Our route was up Parley's Canyon, -then down Silver Creek to the Weber River, thence up to the mouth of -Chalk Creek. At the Spriggs coal pit a number of us visited the mine, -the tunnels of which went straight into the mountain side. Then we -proceeded across to Bear River, and followed along the Big Muddy. The -Beebe and Buzzard families and E. D. Woolley and company continued on -by way of Fort Bridger, while the rest of us made a road across the -bend of the Muddy. -</p> -<p>Apostles A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich overtook us on May 4th, and we all -camped together that night. Walter M. Gibson and I were transferred -to Samuel White's wagon, and on the 5th we bade farewell to Joseph W. -Young's company, taking an early leave of them, and proceeded to Ham's -Fork, on which we camped for the night. There I was made captain of the -company, with John Tobin as sergeant of the guard, and W. H. Dame as -chaplain. Guards were placed out to take care of the stock. That night -there was quite a snowstorm. -</p> -<p>Next morning, the weather was cold and disagreeable. We made our way -to Green River, where we met some people who had apostatized from the -Church, and were going back to St. Louis; we also met some Shoshone -Indians who were friendly. We camped on the Big Sandy that night, and -had quite a hunt for our animals, which strayed off because there was -so little grass. But we recovered all of them. -</p> -<p>On May 10th we came to Pacific Springs, where we met Buzzard, Beebe, -Woolley and company, and received them into our company without any -change in organization. That day we crossed over the South Pass and -the Sweetwater River, and camped on Willow Creek. Next day we went -through a number of snowdrifts, passed over the Rocky Ridge and to -the Sweetwater, following along the river. That night we met a party -of Shoshone Indians returning from a fight with the Crow Indians. The -following morning, the 12th, we missed part of our animals, and were -detained till 11 o'clock securing them again. We then moved forward on -our journey, and on the 13th, at the second crossing of the Sweetwater, -encountered a severe snowstorm. -</p> -<p>From then till the 18th the wind was very high, and the weather -disagreeable. Grass was very scarce. On the 14th we met a band of -Arapahoe Indians on a buffalo hunt, and on the 15th met Captain -Reynolds with a party of explorers. We afterwards heard that the -entire party were killed by Blackfeet Indians, on the headwaters of -the Missouri River. On the 18th, as we were traveling down the Platte -River, Sergeant Min, with a small party of soldiers from Fort Laramie, -searched the wagons in our company for three deserters from Camp Floyd. -There were two of them in our camp. They had come to us in Parley's -Canyon, saying they had been discharged. One of them, George Kelly, -showed his discharge papers, but he had re-enlisted, and deserted after -receiving his bounty. The other was a servant who had stolen a gold -watch. His name was Alexander Demster. Both were taken to Fort Laramie. -</p> -<p>On May 20th we arrived within seven miles of Fort Laramie, where we -rested our animals and attended to necessary work for proceeding -farther. We also built a raft and went across to the fort for our -mail, getting a few letters. There was none for me. We wrote to our -families, and on the 22nd again moved forward. This time we had two -other discharged soldiers with us; one of them had a wife and child. -I had changed from Samuel White's wagon to D. Savage's, and drove his -six-mule team most of the way. From the 23rd on we met many people -bound for California, Oregon, or the Pike's Peak gold mines. -</p> -<p>We passed Chimney Rock on May 25th, and rested that evening at a -fair camping ground. There had been some dissatisfaction on the part -of owners of teams because the grass had been short and the animals -were not doing well. Fault was found with the camping places, and as -Apostles Lyman and Rich often had been consulted and had suggested the -location for camp, these prominent members of our company felt that -if there were any blame in making the choice it belonged to them. So -the Apostles asked forgiveness for what they had done, and promised -they would have no more to do with directing the journeyings of the -company. When I found that I was deprived of the counsel of such men, I -resigned my office as captain. John Tobin also resigned as sergeant of -the guard. That night was passed with the camp in a disorganized state, -and next morning there was no one to lead out with orders to proceed. -The team owners and others found themselves well puzzled, and began -to realize the mistake that had been made. By advice of Apostle C. C. -Rich, I called the company together, but none knew what to do. Finally, -Elder Rich suggested that they elect as captain someone they would not -find so much fault with. The vote was for me, and at the request of -Elder Rich I again assumed command, and we moved on. John Brown was -selected as sergeant of the guard. -</p> -<p>At Ash Hollow we learned that the St. Joseph and Great Salt Lake mail -coach had been robbed on Greasewood Creek, by Shoshone Indians, and -that the mail carriers had been killed. We were detained at Ash Hollow -several hours on the 27th, by the severe illness of A. Beebe's wife. -For several days thereafter there were high winds, and showers, making -the roads very disagreeable, so that it took us till May 31st to reach -Buffalo Creek, where we saw some buffalo. The next night we camped -ten miles above Fort Kearney. On June 2nd we called at Dr. Henry's -ranch for dinner, and seven miles further on reached the place where -Joseph E. Johnson and his brother had located, and were publishing a -paper called the <em>Mountain Echo</em>. At this point Nephi Johnson and Daniel -Babbitt left us, as they had reached the end of their journey. We -continued on four miles further, and camped. -</p> -<p>Proceeding on our journey, we reached and crossed the Elkhorn River on -June 6th, and that night met and camped with a company of Latter-day -Saints crossing the plains with handcarts. The company was in good -spirits, and glad to see us, and we spent the evening in singing the -songs of Zion. Just as we had gone to bed, Apostle George Q. Cannon; -who had charge of the Church emigration that year, came up, in company -with Horton Haight and others, and we were glad to arise and shake -hands with him. He was a particular friend and brother with whom -several of us had traveled many miles and spent many pleasant hours. -After a long talk Elder Cannon turned in with me for sleep. -</p> -<p>On the morning of June 7th, the members of the handcart company were -called together, and Apostles Lyman and Rich gave them some good -instructions. Then we bade them good-bye, and proceeded to Florence, -where we met many warm-hearted Saints from Europe. On the 8th, I -procured a span of mules from Horton Haight, and a carriage from George -Q. Cannon, and accompanied by J. C. Rich, crossed the Missouri River -to Calhoun, Harrison County, Iowa, where we met with my father and his -family. They were well, and greatly pleased to see me. We visited with -my relatives till the 11th, when J. C. Rich and I parted at Crescent -City, while I returned to Florence, where my father visited me on the -12th, and invited Apostles Lyman and Rich and myself to take dinner at -the finest hotel in the town, which we did. My father promised me there -that if he lived and was able to sell his property, he would accompany -me to Utah when I returned from my mission. -</p> -<p>On June 15th, I went to Omaha in company with J. C. Rich, F. M. Lyman, -and R. McBride, where we were joined next day by A. M. Lyman, C. C. -Rich, G. Q. Cannon, and John Tobin. We took passage on the steamboat -<em>Omaha</em> for St. Joseph, Missouri, where we landed on the morning of the -18th. That day while strolling through the city with Francis M. Lyman, -I first saw a locomotive and railway train in motion. It was to us a -grand sight, and we viewed it with admiration and satisfaction. At 6 -a.m., on the 19th, we boarded the train, C. C. Rich, J. C. Rich and -John Tobin going to St Louis, and the rest of us to Quincy, Illinois, -where I left the party and went to Versailles, Brown County. There I -received a hearty welcome from relatives and friends. -</p> -<p>I remained in that locality five days, until the 24th, visiting uncles, -brother-in-law, cousins, and other relatives, and also the farm on -which I was reared. At Versailles, on the evening of the 21st, I -lectured, by request, on my travels and experiences. The schoolroom -being too small to accommodate the people, the Methodist church was -procured, and was well filled, many of the audience being my old -schoolmates. They were glad to meet me, as I was to meet them. -</p> -<p>I stayed that night with Joseph F. Vandeventer, and next day, in -company with him and his brother Thomas, visited my father's old farm, -then owned by William Knox. There were many changes about the place. -The cemetery was fenced into a pasture, and I was unable to find my -brother's grave. The fruit trees in the orchard were well grown, and I -was given some good apples and the best cider I ever tasted, made from -fruit from trees I had set out with my own hands. -</p> -<p>That day's walk brought to my recollection my youthful days, my hunts -through the woods and my adventures, my toilsome labors in grubbing -underbrush and clearing the land, threshing wheat in the hot, autumn -sun, feeding stock in the cold winter, my cold fingers, benumbed body, -and frozen toes—once shedding my toenails through frost, and peeling -the skin off my feet—in short, I was reminded of much toil on the -part of my parents, brothers and sisters and myself, and of many days -of sickness with fever and ague. We returned to Versailles, and next -evening, the 23rd, after more visiting, I consented to preach, and was -given good attention by a large congregation. On the 24th, I went down -to the river landing at the mouth of Crooked Creek, with my uncle and -Joseph F. Vandeventer, but learning that the boats were uncertain, I -resolved to go to Meridotia and there take train for New York, in order -to meet Elder C. C. Rich. To do this, it was necessary for me to borrow -twenty dollars, which I did of Mr. Vandeventer. At 9 o'clock that -evening I was on my way, on the Quincy and Toledo line, passing through -the great Wabash valley. After several changes of cars, and crossing -North River on a ferry boat, I landed in New York City on June 26th, -without knowing a soul that lived there. -</p> -<p>I walked up to Broadway, and took a Sixth Avenue omnibus to -Twenty-third Street, where I found the residence of Brother Jonas -Croxall, and introduced myself to his wife, as he was not at home. I -had eaten but two meals since I got into the cars at Meridotia, and -they cost me seventy-five cents. I had ridden over one thousand miles -on the cars from Illinois, and had ninety-five cents when I reached -the end of the journey. My supper that night was provided at Brother -Croxall's. About 11 o'clock in the evening Brothers Croxall and A. -M. Lyman came in, they having been on a visit together at Brother -Schettler's. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLVI"></a>CHAPTER LVI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">VISIT VARIOUS PLACES OF INTEREST IN NEW YORK AND VICINITY—ARRIVAL -OF THE GREAT EASTERN—PREACH AT WILLIAMSBURG—NEW YORK'S CELEBRATION -OF THE FOURTH—MY THIRTY-SECOND BIRTHDAY—SECURE PASSPORTS AND OCEAN -PASSAGE—CROWDED IN THE STEERAGE—FOGGY AND WET WEATHER—VIEW OF THE -IRISH COAST—FLEET OF BRITISH WARSHIPS—LAND IN LIVERPOOL—ASSIGNED -TO BIRMINGHAM CONFERENCE—IN BIRMINGHAM—LISTEN TO ANTI-MORMON -LECTURE—VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AS A MORMON MISSIONARY—PLACES -OF INTEREST—TRANSFERRED TO NOTTINGHAM CONFERENCE—PREACHING AND -VISITING—MISSION TRAVELS—GO TO LONDON—SEE NOTABLE PLACES—NEWS OF MY -DAUGHTER'S DEATH—BIRTH OF ANOTHER DAUGHTER—RETURN TO NOTTINGHAM. -</p> -<p>THE 27th of June was spent with Apostle A. M. Lyman and J. Croxall, -walking about the city of New York. That day F. M. Lyman and Reuben -McBride arrived, and next day Apostle Lyman and his son Francis M. left -for Boston. With Reuben McBride, I visited the various departments of -the place where J. Croxall and his son worked. We then crossed East -River with Thomas Miller, and strolled through Williamsburg. We were -introduced to a Brother Stone and family, with whom we stayed all -night. On the 29th we were made acquainted with many Latter-day Saints -in Williamsburg, then crossed over to Brooklyn, where we went through -the navy yard and other places; at the first named place we went on -board the old ship of war <em>North Carolina</em>. That day we heard the salutes -fired for the <em>Great Eastern</em>, as she steamed up the wharf in New York. -The ocean monster was hailed with joy and enthusiasm. She had been -sighted at sea the evening before. -</p> -<p>In New York City, on the 30th, we visited Barnum's museum, Castle -Garden, the postoffice, and had a view of the <em>Great Eastern</em>. I received -a letter from my family reporting all well. The 1st of July was Sunday, -and we met with the Latter-day Saints in Williamsburg. The speakers at -the meetings that day were Apostle C. C. Rich, Elder Walter Gibson and -myself. I crossed over to New York that night, and the remainder of our -stay in the city was the guest of Bernard A. Schettler, who treated me -very kindly. During the next few days we visited many factories, ships -and places of interest, and wrote letters home. On the 4th, which was -my thirty-second birthday anniversary, there was a grand celebration. -The militia of New York City paraded, passing the George Washington -monument in review. There was a grand fireworks display in the evening; -and in the afternoon we witnessed the aeronaut, Mr. Wise, ascend out -of sight with a balloon. On the 9th we sent to Washington for our -passports. W. H. Dame and I were appointed on the 12th to take the -money of our party, secure berths on the steamship <em>Edinburgh</em>, of the -Blackball line between New York and Liverpool, and to purchase articles -necessary for the journey across the Atlantic Ocean. We attended to -this duty on the 13th. -</p> -<p>July 14th, our party, thirteen in number, went on board, and at 12 -o'clock noon, the vessel left the landing. We paid twenty-five dollars -each for steerage passage. There were nearly three hundred passengers, -and the berths were all taken up, so our lot was rather hard. Being -very much crowded for room as well, it was plain that our part of the -voyage was not to be very pleasant; but we were on board and had to -make the best of it. -</p> -<p>By the 18th we were off the banks of Newfoundland, in a dense, damp -fog, that obscured the sun and made it impossible to see more than a -few rods from the ship. The steam siren kept up a constant whistling, -to warn other vessels of our location and approach. The fog lasted till -the 23rd, when it lighted up, but the weather was cloudy, with some -rain. On the 24th a vessel bore in sight. -</p> -<p>Next day we had headwinds, and the sun shone for a short time. We came -in sight of the southwest coast of Ireland, and at the cry of "Land!" -every countenance brightened. All were on deck to catch a glimpse of -the welcome scene. As this proceeding was going on, we heard the cry, -"Sail ho!" and in a short time there came into full view a fleet of her -majesty Queen Victoria's warships, eleven in number. They were steaming -along the coast to the south and in advance of us. Suddenly they -changed their course and came to meet us. When they drew near, their -signal flags were hoisted on the masts, making a beautiful and imposing -appearance. -</p> -<p>That night at 11 o'clock we ran into Queenstown, the harbor of Cork, -Ireland. There some passengers for Ireland, and mail were taken off, -and we headed for the coast of England, coming in sight of Wales the -next day. -</p> -<p>Early on the morning of the 27th we were on the muddy, dark waters -of the Mersey, and soon landed in Liverpool, where the dank, smoky, -mildewed walls looked to us as if they had stood for a thousand years. -To our eyes the city had a very dismal and forbidding appearance. -</p> -<p>After the usual custom house inspection, we sent our baggage to the -Latter-day Saints' office at 42 Islington, and walked there ourselves, -a distance of a mile and a half. At the office we met Elder N. V. Jones -and others, who received us very kindly. The following day we were -appointed to our various missionary fields, J. C. Rich and I being -assigned to Birmingham pastorate. That afternoon Elder Rich and I paid -a visit to Birkenhead, across the river Mersey, and met with some of -the Saints. -</p> -<p>Sunday, July 29th, we all attended meeting with the Liverpool Saints, -in their assembly room on Great George's Street. Next day, Elder Rich -and I took train for Birmingham, passing through a tunnel a mile and -a half long on the route. Arriving at New Street station, Birmingham, -we hailed a cab and were taken to No. 163 Burton Place, Spring Hill. -There we had expected to find Elder Charles W. Penrose, but he was not -at home. His sister-in-law met us, and seemed surprised at our call. I -told her who we were, and we received a rather mistrustful invitation -to come in; but after questioning us some she became satisfied of our -identity, and provided us with something to eat. -</p> -<p>Later, F. G. Blake, who was traveling Elder in that place, came in, and -we took a walk with him, meeting Elder Penrose. We all went to West -Bromwich that evening, and heard one Mr. Bird, an old apostate from -Utah, lecture against the Mormons. He was doing this for money, and the -large hall was full of people. He made many false accusations against -the Latter-day Saints, which were loudly applauded by his ignorant -hearers. After the lecture we returned to Birmingham, and stayed all -night at Elder Penrose's. -</p> -<p>To us, Birmingham seemed as dark, smokey and mildewed as did Liverpool; -but it was well located. The place was one of the busiest manufacturing -centers of the world. The railway lines passing through do not obstruct -or occupy the streets; on one of the roads, which is built on a series -of arches, the cars run level with the chimneys on three-story houses; -and other roads pass beneath the city, running under large houses. -The New Street station was one of the best and most commodious I have -ever seen; indeed it is now one of the largest in the world, occupying -eleven acres, with a fine iron and glass roof eleven hundred feet long. -</p> -<p>After visiting from house to house with the Saints on August 1st, we -preached that evening in the Oxford Street Hall. Next day our visiting -continued, and we found a dull spirit among the people. Trade was -very bad, and the working people were extremely poor. Many of them -were unable to give us a good meal of victuals unless they suffered -themselves in consequence; yet they seemed very kind to us, but -sluggish in spirit. That night we preached in Hockley Chapel, Farm -Street. -</p> -<p>On the 3rd we visited the different markets in the city; on the 4th -met Elders A. M. Lyman, C. C. Rich and N. V. Jones; and on the 5th -were with the Saints in conference in the Odd Fellows' Hall, where -large congregations assembled. The presidents of the branches in the -Birmingham conference made favorable reports, and the Gospel was -preached by Apostles Lyman and Rich and others of the Elders. That -night J. C. Rich and I stayed at Brother Acock's. It did not seem -possible to get the people into the notion of going to bed before -midnight; that seeming to be the custom in the English cities. -</p> -<p>The Gillott steel and gold pen factory was the object of an interesting -visit by J. C. Rich, F. G. Blake and myself on August 6th. We passed -through the factory, and saw the work from rolling the large bars -of steel down to finishing the pen ready for use; there were four -hundred persons employed in the factory. That evening the Elders met in -council, and J. C. Rich and I were appointed to labor in the Nottingham -pastorate. Next day, in company with several others, I visited the -grave of Elder James H. Flanagan, who died while on a mission; his body -was interred in the old Birmingham cemetery. In the evening we had a -pleasant sociable at the home of Brother Smith, and next day J. C. Rich -and I took the train for Nottingham, where we were met at the station -by Elder Edward Reid, president of the conference, and were conducted -to No. 24 Promenade, Robinhood Street, where the wife of Elder David -John had dinner waiting for us. We next went to Radcliffe Chapel, -where we met with a goodly number of Saints, and preached to them. -Elder David John presided over the Nottingham pastorate. The day after -reaching the town I took a severe cold, and had to lay by the next day. -</p> -<p>We found Nottingham a very different place to Liverpool and Birmingham. -The town and adjacent country were not so smoky and unhealthful. The -town had about one hundred and eighty thousand inhabitants, and was the -center of the silk and cotton lace and hosiery industries. -</p> -<p>On Sunday, August 12th, Elders A. M. Lyman and N. V. Jones (who had -come from Liverpool) and I preached to the Saints; on the 13th J. C. -Rich and I went to visit G. Wright, at the request of his niece who -lived in Utah; his home was at Fisherton, on the river Trent, and after -an unwelcome greeting there we returned to Nottingham. Next day we went -to Mansfield with Elder James Payne, passing through the place where -Robin Hood roamed. That evening we preached to the Saints, then spent -the next two days preaching in different villages. At Pixton, on the -16th, we visited a coal pit. -</p> -<p>Leicester, the county seat of Leicestershire, and center of the boot -and shoe trade, was our destination on August 19th. We preached there -that night, and on Monday visited the museum. The rest of the week we -spent in visiting and preaching in several villages, then returned to -Nottingham. At Loughborough, on the 22nd, our meeting was disturbed -by several rude young men, who laughed and asked questions in an -offensive manner. A stone was hurled through the window at me, while I -was preaching. It passed just in front of me, but no one was hit. The -meeting was dismissed in confusion. -</p> -<p>On the 26th, we went to Derby for a couple of days. My health continued -to be very poor during this period of my travels. Burton-on-Trent, a -place noted for the brewing of malt liquors, was visited on the 28th, -and that night I preached at Branston, then stayed at the house of a -chimney-sweep named Doman. He had been in the Church nineteen years. -Next day we preached in the pottery district, then returned to Derby, -where, on the 31st, we went through Fox & Company's shot factory, going -to the top of the tower, two hundred and twenty steps. That evening we -went to a theatre. -</p> -<p>During the first part of September, I traveled and preached, visiting -Nottingham, Derby, Belper and several adjacent villages. I attended -the Derby races on the 6th; there were about twenty thousand people in -attendance. On the 12th, I left Nottingham for London in company with -Brothers J. C. Rich and Blackburn, and Sister Cook and daughter, going -via the Midland railway. From St. Pancras station we went to Brother -John Cook's, at No. 30 Florence Street, Cross Street, Islington, -London, where I made my home during my stay in the metropolis. There we -met with Elders John Brown, F. M. Lyman, and John Gleason. -</p> -<p>I remained in London and vicinity until October 3rd. During our stay -at the national capital we visited many interesting places, among them -being the tunnel under the Thames, which is reached by a flight of one -hundred steps, is four hundred yards from end to end, and while we were -passing through there were some fifteen to twenty ships lying above it, -and steamboats passing over it up and down the river. We visited the -British hospitals for invalided soldiers and sailors, and went from -there to Greenwich, whence is measured longitude east and west, and -where we also saw the standard weights and measures of Great Britain. -</p> -<p>The British Museum; the King's Library; Westminster Abbey, where Great -Britain's rulers are anointed and crowned by the archbishops of the -Church of England; the Parliament buildings, wherein are the House -of Lords and House of Commons, with the throne and the woolsack; -Buckingham Palace, the city residence of Queen Victoria; St. Paul's -Cathedral, which was undergoing repairs; National Gallery; Cattle -Market; Zoological Gardens, with the giraffe, the hippopotamus, the -rhinoceros and all manner of beasts and birds; South Kensington Museum; -Hyde Park; White Tower of London, where are the block and ax used in -beheading Queen Anne Boleyn and Mary, Queen of Scots, also the royal -regalia, and much other material of historic value; London Bridge, with -its vast traffic; Crystal Palace with its tower four hundred and twelve -steps to the top, from which can be seen six counties of England; -Anatomical Museum; Madame Tussaud's Bazar; the Dockyards, and the rich -residence portion of London, all were visited by us, and were very -interesting and entertaining. -</p> -<p>On September 13th we attended a tea party of the Saints near King's -Cross station. Several times I preached to congregations, both on the -Surrey side of the Thames, and on the north side. On the 14th, Elders -A. M. Lyman and N. V. Jones came from Scotland to London. I received a -letter from home on the 25th, Tuesday, bringing the sad intelligence -of the death of Deseret Ann, my second daughter, also of the birth to -her mother, my wife Rebecca, of a daughter. I wrote an answer to that -letter the same day. During the time I was in London I had a severe -cold and my health was far from good. I returned to Nottingham on -October 3rd, via the Great Northern railway, and resumed my missionary -labors in that conference. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLVII"></a>CHAPTER LVII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">AGAIN AT MISSIONARY LABORS—BAPTISMS—BECOME QUITE ILL—APPOINTED PRESIDENT -OF THE NOTTINGHAM DISTRICT, EMBRACING THREE CONFERENCES—VISITED BY -APOSTLES A. M. LYMAN, C. C. RICH AND OTHERS—SETTLING DIFFERENCES AMONG -CHURCH MEMBERS—ATTEND A PHRENOLOGICAL LECTURE—GET A CHART—GO TO -LIVERPOOL—IN CONFERENCE AT NOTTINGHAM—MY PASTORATE ENLARGED—WITNESS -A MILITARY REVIEW—MORE BAPTISMS—VISIT SHEFFIELD—FIXING MY -NAME—POVERTY IN NOTTINGHAM—INVITED TO TAKE A TRIP TO PARIS—GO TO -LONDON—HAVE TO GIVE UP THE VISIT TO FRANCE—IN POOR HEALTH—RETURN TO -NOTTINGHAM—SEE PROFESSOR BLONDIN. -</p> -<p>THE month of October was occupied in traveling and preaching in the -district where I was assigned to labor as a missionary. In fulfilling -this calling I visited, besides the town of Nottingham, which was -headquarters, Derby, Leicester, Burton-on-Trent, Radcliffe, Arnold, -Hucknall, Mansfield, Pixton, Ilkiston, Woodhouse, Wirksworth, Mount St. -Bernard, Tutbury and other places, preaching in some of them several -times. On October 23, I visited the Mount Saint Bernard monastery, and -a reformatory for incorrigible boys. The first named was a Catholic -institution. -</p> -<p>November was occupied similarly to October, and in addition to most of -the places visited in the last named month, I was at Belper, Carlton, -Coalville and other small towns. On the 11th I baptized three young -women, Annie Simpson, Harriet Cadman and Eliza Bates. The weather -turning cold and stormy, my health was not very good. Apostle C. C. -Rich came on the 24th and on the 28th we went to Sutton, where I had to -stop for several days, I was so ill. -</p> -<p>The month of December had some very cold and stormy weather, but my -health was somewhat improved. I continued in my missionary district, -going to several new places. I was invited by Sisters Underwood and -Burrows to take dinner on Christmas. Mr. Burrows was a policeman, -and was not a member of the Church. I stayed with him at his home -on Christmas night. The next evening we had a meeting in Radcliffe, -at which an unpleasant spirit was displayed by some. I advised the -Saints to fast and pray to get the Spirit of the Lord. Brother John -was offended with this advice, and remonstrated, and when the meeting -was dismissed there was a feeling of dissatisfaction among the people. -On the 30th of December I was appointed to the presidency of the -Nottingham pastorate, embracing the Nottingham, Derby and Leicester -conferences of the Church. I was quite ill at this time, with the -mumps. My appointment came from Apostles A. M. Lyman, C. C. Rich and -George Q. Cannon, the presidency of the European mission of the Church -of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. -</p> -<p>The opening of the year 1861 found me quite ill, and for the first few -days of January I was confined to my bed most of the time. On the 6th -we held conference in Nottingham, and on the evening before, Elders -A. M. Lyman, C. C. Rich, G. Gates, J. Gleason, C. Welsh, A. Orme and -H. Druce came to meet with us. We had a good time at the conference. -Elders A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich stayed with us till the 11th, and I -visited part of the time with them, going to various villages in the -neighborhood, where they preached. During the remainder of the month I -traveled and preached and attended to the conference books and business -generally. Brother David John came to me on the 28th, being very -sorry for the unpleasant remarks he had made, and we settled matters -satisfactorily to both, parting with the best of feelings. The next day -he and his family moved to South Wales. My health continued to be quite -poor. On the 30th I took a shock from an electric battery, hoping it -would do me some good. -</p> -<p>My health was not much improved during the month of February; but I -continued my missionary visits and other duties, writing to my father -and family, and endeavoring to carry the Gospel message wherever I -could. On the 13th, at the urgent request of Sister Mary Wilson, I -visited her parents and sick sister at Newark, being kindly received -and invited to call again. From the 19th to the 23rd, Elder C. C. Rich -paid a visit to the conference and preached to the people. -</p> -<p>On March 2nd I attended a meeting called at Pinxton to settle a -difficulty among some of the members of the Church. It had continued -about three years, but after a long meeting we succeeded in arranging -matters, and three of the parties concerned agreed to repent and be -baptized. My visits to the various branches continued. On the 6th I -baptized Wm. Burton, Miss Cadman and Miss Betts. On the 12th I was -associated in the confirmation of twelve persons who had been baptized -by Elder J. C. Rich the evening before. On the 25th of this month I -attended one of the Fowler and Wells lectures on phrenology, and was so -interested that on the 28th I obtained a phrenological chart of myself. -</p> -<p>I attended a tea party on April 1st, about two hundred persons being -present. The evening was spent pleasantly, in singing, reciting and -speech-making and partaking of lunch. The next day I baptized seven -persons at Nottingham. In the course of my missionary duties, I called -a meeting of the Mansfield branch on April 9, to settle a difficulty -of long standing. I released from performing any Church official -duties all who held the Priesthood, because of continual jarring and -contention among them. On the 18th I went with some emigrating Saints -to Liverpool, to assist them, settling their business and getting their -tickets. -</p> -<p>At Liverpool, on the 19th, I accompanied Apostle C. C. Rich on a -search among the docks for a ship that could be chartered, but we were -not successful in finding one. The next day the Saints went on board -the ship <em>Underwriter</em>, which had been chartered previously for this -company, and I assisted those who had come with me to get settled on -the vessel. The next day, Sunday, the presidency of the mission went -on the ship, where the company was organized with Elder Milo Andrus -as president, Elders H. Duncan and C. W. Penrose as counselors, and -John Cook as steward. The migrating Saints were also given appropriate -instructions by Apostles Lyman, Rich and Cannon. Next day the vessel -sailed, and on the following day, Tuesday, I returned to my missionary -duties at Nottingham and vicinity. On the 29th, the day after holding a -conference at Nottingham, I baptized six persons. -</p> -<p>In the early part of May—the 5th—conference was held in Leicester, -Apostle C. C. Rich being in attendance. He remained till the 9th, -preaching to the people in different places. On the 17th I received a -letter from Apostle George Q. Cannon, informing me that my district -had been enlarged, the Lincolnshire conference being detached from -Elder Joseph F. Smith's district and added to mine, so there were four -conferences in my pastorate. On the 20th I baptized one man and two -women who had been cut off the Church, but desired to return. Next day -I was a spectator, with about forty thousand other people, at a review -of the Nottingham Rifles, before the Duke of Newcastle, at Nottingham -Forest. On the 25th Apostle G. Q. Cannon came from Liverpool, held -meetings, and attended to business in conference. -</p> -<p>On June 2nd I attended to three more baptisms, and on the 6th was at -the Sheffield conference, which was in charge of Elder Joseph F. Smith. -During my stay there I visited a large manufactory of steel and iron -ware, and called on the Norfolk giant, but he was too ill to be seen. -On the 13th I returned to Nottingham, traveling as far as Grantham with -Apostles Lyman and Rich, who went on to London. The remainder of the -month was occupied in my general duties. It was in this month that I -wrote to the <em>Millennial Star</em>, explaining how my name was James Brown, -and then because of others of the same name I became known as James -Brown 2nd, then James Brown 3rd, and had concluded to take my mother's -maiden name, Stephens, so that thereafter I would have an initial to -distinguish me, and be known as James S. Brown. -</p> -<p>At Nottingham, on June 6, many poor people marched through the streets, -asking and singing for food, or money to buy it. The next day after -meeting, I was presented by Sister Elizabeth Wilson with a small -anchor, cross and heart she had made out of a stone she had picked up -on the beach at Folkestone, England. On the 8th I received a letter -from Apostle C. C. Rich, inviting Elder J. C. Rich and myself to meet -him and Apostle A. M. Lyman in London on the 14th, to take a trip to -Paris, France. Accordingly, I arranged the conference business, and we -were in London on the date named, attending conference. -</p> -<p>Our contemplated visit to France had to be given up, however, as the -Apostles were called to Scotland to attend to some matters there. We -visited many places of interest in London, such as the Anatomical -Museum, the Polytechnic Institute, Crystal Palace, Bank of England, -the Fire Monument, the Docks, Tower of London, St. Paul's Cathedral, -Smithfield Market, the Mint, Windsor Castle, and Eton College. On the -17th, at Crystal Palace, we heard the chorus of three thousand five -hundred children. At Eton College we found the students inclined to be -impudent, throwing pebbles at passers-by and staring rudely at them. -</p> -<p>During the latter part of my stay in London I was quite ill, and had -to remain indoors part of the time, once being in all day. I returned -to Nottingham on the 24th, where the only thing of particular interest -outside of my missionary duties that I observed during that month was -on the 30th, when I went out to the park and saw Professor Blondin -perform on the tight rope. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLVIII"></a>CHAPTER LVIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">PROLONGED ILLNESS—ATTEND TO MY DUTIES WITH DIFFICULTY—LETTER TELLING -OF THE BATTLE OF BULL'S RUN—WITNESS AN EXECUTION BY HANGING—VISIT -FROM GEORGE Q. CANNON, JOSEPH F. SMITH AND OTHERS—DEATH OF THE -PRINCE CONSORT—GO TO BIRMINGHAM—CONFERENCE OF THE PRIESTHOOD IN THE -BRITISH MISSION—LARGE MEETING IN ODD FELLOWS' HALL, BIRMINGHAM—AGAIN -AT NOTTINGHAM—VISIT LIVERPOOL—CONSULT A PHYSICIAN, BUT GET LITTLE -RELIEF—SEE THE LIVERPOOL GRAND NATIONAL RACES—DEPRAVITY AMONG POORER -CLASSES IN LIVERPOOL—AGAIN AT NOTTINGHAM—RELEASED TO RETURN HOME—BID -THE PEOPLE FAREWELL—DISPLAY OF THEIR AFFECTION FOR ME—REPORT OF MY -LABORS PUBLISHED IN THE MILLENNIAL STAR—ON BOARD SHIP—PLACED IN -CHARGE OF THE COMPANY—SAIL FOR AMERICA—DRIVEN BY HEADWINDS ALONG -THE COASTS OF THE ISLE OF MAN, WALES, IRELAND AND SCOTLAND—SEVERE -SEASICKNESS—GET TO SEA—SLOW VOYAGE—DEATHS AND BURIALS AT SEA—LAND -AT NEW YORK—GUEST OF HON. W. H. HOOPER—JOURNEY TO FLORENCE, -NEBRASKA—CAPTAIN AND GUIDE OF INDEPENDENT COMPANY—REACH SALT LAKE -CITY—REPORT TO PRESIDENT YOUNG—AGAIN AT HOME. -</p> -<p>DURING the remainder of the year 1861 I was in very poor health, often -having to stay in my room all day, and when I was able to get about, -many times it was with great difficulty, as I was quite lame in my -hips and shoulder. I tried various applications and simple remedies, -but to little purpose. I moved around as best I could, however, and -by determined efforts I was able to attend to my duties, visiting the -Saints, and preaching the Gospel wherever opportunity offered, whether -at indoor or outdoor meetings. Sometimes, when I was able to get to -the meetings of the Saints, I was too ill to stand up and preach, but -toward the latter part of the year my health improved a little. -</p> -<p>The civil war in America was on, having begun after I left; and on -August 5th I received a letter telling of the battle of Bull's Run, -near Manassas Junction, which was fought July 21, 1861, and in which -the Union forces were defeated. On the 16th of August I went to the -Derbyshire jail yard in Derby, and there saw a young man named George -Smith executed by hanging. He had murdered his father. From thirty-five -to forty thousand people witnessed the execution. -</p> -<p>On the 1st of September Apostle George Q. Cannon was in Nottingham, -attending conference, and we had large meetings and an excellent time. -On October 1st Elder Joseph F. Smith and other missionaries came from -Sheffield on a visit, and remained several days, spending the time -among the Saints. At Nottingham we had a tea party in the Arboretum, at -which about two hundred persons were present. I was visiting the Saints -at Pinxton on December 14th, the day that Prince Albert, husband of -Queen Victoria, died at Windsor Castle. -</p> -<p>I started for Birmingham on the 31st of December to attend a conference -of those in the British Mission who held the Holy Priesthood. This -conference began on Wednesday, January 1, 1862, and was largely -attended. We had a most enjoyable time in making reports of our -experiences and in receiving instruction and testifying of the -blessings of the Gospel. The meetings began at 10 a.m. and lasted -till 2 p.m., then at 4 p.m. and lasted till 7 p.m. They continued -through Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday, the presidency -of the European Mission, Apostles A. M. Lyman, Charles C. Rich and -George Q. Cannon, being in attendance and directing the meetings. On -Sunday, the 5th, we met with the Saints in Odd Fellows' Hall, the -congregation numbering about fifteen hundred persons; an excellent -feeling prevailed. Next day the Priesthood meetings were concluded, and -on Tuesday I left Birmingham for Derby, in my own missionary district. -On the 27th of January I was in Nottingham, and baptized and confirmed -Elizabeth Hardy. -</p> -<p>My health again became quite bad, but I performed my duties, preaching, -baptizing, visiting and conversing with the people on the subject of -the Gospel, and attending to the business in my pastorate, until March -5th, when I took the train for Liverpool. There I consulted Apostles A. -M. Lyman and G. Q. Cannon, and on the 7th Elder Cannon introduced me to -Dr. Smith, who pronounced my ailment neuralgia, and prescribed turkish -baths and the magnetic-electric machine. I remained in Liverpool till -the 22nd, occasionally visiting, in company with some of the Elders, -places of interest such as the new park and the botanical gardens. On -March 11th we saw the Liverpool races at Aintree, a suburb. There were -two plate races and the grand national steeple chase. At one hurdle -a horse fell on his rider and the latter was picked up for dead, but -he recovered; three other riders were unhorsed. About twenty thousand -people were in attendance at these races. It was while in Liverpool, on -March 18th, as I was walking through the northwest part of the town in -company with Elder George J. Taylor, that I saw hundreds of people in -the most degraded state in which I ever beheld human beings. -</p> -<p>My health having improved a little, I returned to Nottingham on the -22nd, Apostle G. Q. Cannon's wife and child accompanying me. Mrs. -Cannon had been very ill, and had been advised to go to Nottingham in -the hope of the change benefiting her health. On reaching Nottingham, -I there resumed my missionary labors. My health again began to fail, -and early in April I received notice of my release to return home. On -the 7th of April Sister Cannon went to Liverpool in company with her -husband. I settled business of the conference and went to different -branches and bade the Saints good-bye. They exhibited their affection -for me by many words and acts of kindness. On April 13th I preached -my farewell sermon in Nottingham, and it was with mingled feelings of -sorrow and joy that I bade the Saints farewell—sorrow to leave them, -and joy to see the display of love toward me by both members of the -Church and numbers of people who were not members. On Monday, April -14th, I went to Liverpool. The next day I wrote the following, which -was published in the <em>Millennial Star</em>: -</p> -<p class="right">"Liverpool, April 15, 1862. -</p> -<p>"<em>President Cannon:</em> -</p> -<p>"DEAR BROTHER:—I take pleasure in writing to you a brief report of -my labors in the ministry of the Nottingham District. On the 7th -of August, 1860, I was appointed by the presidency here, namely: -A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich, to labor as a traveling Elder in the -aforementioned district, where I continued my labors in company with -Elder Joseph C. Rich and under the pastoral charge of Elder David -John, until January 1st, 1861. I then received an appointment to the -presidency of the Nottingham District, composed of the Nottingham, -Derby, Leicester and Lincolnshire conferences, where I continued my -labors until the 14th instant, when I arrived in Liverpool, having -received your letter of release, with the privilege of returning to our -mountain home in Utah. -</p> -<p>"I can truly say that I have taken much pleasure in my field of labor, -for I have seen my feeble exertions in connection with the Priesthood -laboring with me crowned with success. I have witnessed an increase -of the good Spirit among the Saints. We have not only witnessed these -symptoms of increase, but have added by baptism some two hundred and -fifty souls, besides many rebaptisms; and many misunderstandings of the -Saints have been corrected, so that, with a few exceptions, the Saints -are in fellowship with one another. -</p> -<p>"In that district, I think, there have been some four excommunicated -and five disfellowshiped during the last twenty-one months; and with -the present year's emigration, we have two hundred emigrated from -that district. Suffice it to say, that the district is in a healthy -condition. The Saints are feeling very well, and are full of the spirit -to emigrate. Many strangers are becoming very much interested in our -meetings, insomuch that some of them attend regularly; and on Sunday -evening, the 13th, after I preached my farewell sermon in Nottingham, -some four or five strangers, whom I have no recollection of ever seeing -before,—shook hands with me, saying, 'God bless you,' and at the same -time they did not forget to bless me themselves, thus exemplifying -their faith by their works. I find the people in the midland counties -to be a kindhearted people; and when once you get the crust of -tradition in which they are encased cracked, so as to feed them with -the bread of eternal life, they generally receive it with great joy and -gladness. -</p> -<p>"Although I have not enjoyed very good health any of the time I have -been in this country, I feel sometimes to regret leaving the mission, -when I reflect upon the memory of so many warm throbbing hearts for -Zion, whose circumstances are rather forbidding at present; yet I -feel that if they would arouse with more energy and life, and be -more faithful in reading the <em>Stars</em> and <em>Journals</em>, attend their -meetings, and be more faithful in their duties, and not pore over their -poverty so much, the time is not far distant when they will be able to -accomplish that most desirable object of going to Zion. -</p> -<p>"And now I beg to bid good-bye to the Saints of the Nottingham -District, and say, may the God of Israel bless and preserve them, -together with all the Saints and the honest in heart in all the world. -And as I expect to leave this country on the 21st instant, I bid adieu -to her majesty's dominions and to all her subjects. I have lifted up my -voice and cried aloud, and spared not, till I feel that my skirts are -clear, so far as this mission to the British nation is concerned. -</p> -<p>"And now with kind regards to yourself, Presidents Lyman and Rich, my -brethren and co-laborers in the ministry and the many faithful Saints -under their watchcare, I bid all an affectionate farewell, praying God -to bless and prosper every effort made to advance the interests of His -kingdom. -</p> -<p class="right">"I subscribe myself your brother in the Gospel of Christ, -</p> -<p class="right">"JAMES S. BROWN." -</p> -<p>I was variously engaged the next two days in preparing for the voyage, -and in assisting others. On Saturday, the 19th, I went on board the -ship <em>John J. Boyd</em>, on which we were to sail. That day a young man who -resided at Nottingham and who had been courting Miss Mary Oakey, from -the same district, came to Liverpool, and the young lady went out with -him. They were never seen again by us. We supposed they had eloped. -</p> -<p>On Monday, the 21st, I again went on board. Apostles A. M. Lyman, C. C. -Rich and George Q. Cannon came on the vessel and organized the company -of emigrating Saints, with the following presidency: James S. Brown, -president; John Lindsay and J. C. Rich, counselors. The Apostles gave -us much good instructions and bade us good-bye, after which we made a -further temporary organization so as to call watches for the night; -then, after prayer, we retired, it being about midnight. Next day the -company was organized into nine wards, with a presiding teacher over -each. There were on board six hundred and ninety-six emigrating Saints, -and the crew, which made the total up to seven hundred and thirty-five -souls. -</p> -<p>At half-past seven o'clock on the 23rd we weighed anchor, and the -vessel was towed about twenty miles out to sea, and left, in a strong -headwind. We beat about the Irish Channel all day, and about 4 p.m., -drew so close to the Isle of Man that we could see the towns and -distinguish the houses. Then we tacked about and sailed away along the -coast of Wales. Nearly everybody on board was seasick, and one child, -about five months old, in a family named Hardy, died. It was buried at -sea on the 24th. Myself and counselors went among the people, waiting -on them and cheering them. -</p> -<p>Next day the heavy headwind continued, and the seasickness seemed very -severe. I was affected myself, but still was able to help others. We -went along between the Isle of Man and the coast of Ireland, and by the -26th, when the wind became lighter, we could see the coast of Ireland -on our left and the Scottish hills on the right. We could also see the -Irish houses, farms and roads quite plainly. It was noon on the 27th -before we passed out of sight of land, the last we saw being a small -island off the northwest coast of Ireland. -</p> -<p>From that time on we experienced all kinds of weather, from a dead calm -to a heavy gale. On the 1st of May the wind was so strong it carried -away the jib-boom and fore-top-gallant mast. On the 5th a little boy -named Benjamin V. Williams died from a fall down the hatchway on May -1st. Taking all things together, however, we got along fairly well. -Once we had to complain to the captain of rough treatment by the third -mate and some of the sailors, and it was checked. On May 21st we -sighted Sandy Hook, and on June 1st we cast anchor in the bay of New -York. On the voyage we had had cases of measles and whooping-cough, and -there were seven deaths in our company while we were at sea. -</p> -<p>On landing in New York I received an invitation from Hon. Wm. H. Hooper -for the Utah Elders to stay at the Astor House at his expense. Eleven -of us availed ourselves of the courtesy extended. On June 2nd the -emigrants were landed and we proceeded west via Niagara Falls and the -lakes to Detroit, then by way of Chicago, Quincy and Hannibal to St. -Joseph, Missouri. From that point we went to Florence, Nebraska, by -steamboat, and there I turned over my charge to Joseph W. Young, who -was conducting affairs at that place. -</p> -<p>I was next assigned to an independent company which had its own -outfit, and was selected as captain and guide. The company consisted -of two hundred and fifty souls, with fifty wagons and teams. We left -Florence in the latter part of June, and arrived in Salt Lake City on -September 23, 1862. I made my report to President Brigham Young, and -was honorably released. I stayed in the city till after the October -conference of the Church, then hastened home to my family in Ogden -City, finding them all well. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLIX"></a>CHAPTER LIX. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">REMOVE FROM OGDEN TO SALT LAKE CITY AT THE REQUEST OF PRESIDENT -YOUNG—NECESSITY FOR PREACHING AMONG THE SAINTS—IN THE EMPLOY OF -PRESIDENT YOUNG—ON ANOTHER MISSION, THIS TIME IN UTAH—PREACHING -AND LECTURING—BUILD A HOUSE—GO TO THE CANYON TO GET FINISHING -LUMBER—SHOT IN MISTAKE FOR A BEAR—MY WOUND VERY SERIOUS—TAKEN TO -WANSHIP TO RECEIVE CARE—MY FAMILY NOTIFIED AND SURGICAL ASSISTANCE -OBTAINED—MOVED TO MY HOME—IN BED NINE MONTHS—TWO SURGICAL -OPERATIONS—GROW STRONGER—EMPLOYED AT THE WARM SPRINGS—DR. -ROBINSON—ABSCESSES IN MY WOUNDED LIMB—OUT OF EMPLOYMENT—GO TO THE -CALIFORNIA LINE TO EXAMINE A GOLD PROSPECT—PERILOUS JOURNEY—INDIANS -ON THE WARPATH—REMARKABLE EXPERIENCE WITH A BAND OF SAVAGES—GIFT OF -SPEAKING THEIR LANGUAGE—UNABLE TO WORK THE GOLD CLAIM BECAUSE OF LACK -OF WATER—RETURN TO SALT LAKE CITY—GO TO THE GOLD DISCOVERIES ON THE -SWEETWATER—DISCOVER A PLACER CLAIM—AN ATTEMPT TO ROB ME OF IT—RUSH -FOR A MINE—HOLD THE CLAIM—ASSAILED BY HOSTILE INDIANS—A RACE FOR -LIFE—THREE MEN KILLED—WE ABANDON CAMP—DEFER WITH MY LAME LIMB—LOSE -THE MINING CLAIM—HAULING COAL AND PRODUCE—ALMOST DIE—CONFINED TO BED -FOR MONTHS—AMPUTATION OF MY LIMB TO SAVE MY LIFE—RECOVERY—ATTEND TO -MY NURSERY—ADVENT OF THE RAILWAY—TRAVELING AND PREACHING—A SLIGHT -SUN-STROKE. -</p> -<p>SHORTLY after my return from my mission to Europe, President Brigham -Young was in Ogden, and told me he wished me to locate my family in -Salt Lake City, preparatory to my going on another mission, if not a -foreign, a home mission; "for," said he, "I don't know of any people -on earth that need more preaching to than do the Latter-day Saints -at home. We send our Elders out to preach and to gather the people -from workshops and factories, then set those people down here in a -new country and leave them to do the best they can, without necessary -experience; and the result is that many of them get discouraged and -apostatize; whereas, if the Elders would keep the harness on, and -preach to and encourage them, they would stay and make good Latter-day -Saints." -</p> -<p>I moved to Salt Lake City according to President Young's advice, and -was about eleven months in his employ. Then, by his appointment, I -traveled through the Territory, preaching, and lecturing on my travels -and experiences. The people in Utah were liberal, giving me much -assistance, principally in the way of farm products. -</p> -<p>In 1863 I purchased a lot from President Young, began the erection of a -two-story-adobe house, and moved into it in 1864. It was not completed, -and in August I went into the mountains to get finishing lumber. On the -night of the 20th of that month I was shot by a camp mate, in mistake -for a bear. The young man who shot me was Alexander Gilbert. The bullet -entered two-thirds of the way above my knee, on the inside of the left -thigh, and shattered the bone into many fragments. The weapon was a -United States yauger, and carried a half-ounce ball, which was broken -to bits, and, with parts of my clothing, including two pieces of a -brass suspender buckle, lodged in my limb. -</p> -<p>The accident occurred in Alexander Canyon, about three miles above -Wanship, Summit County, between 11 and 12 o'clock at night. There were -four of us in camp at the time. The man who did the shooting ran and -told George G. Snyder, who was soon at my side with a team and light -spring wagon, and with some stimulants. He and my camp mates tenderly -lifted me on the bed, and conveyed me to the home of my father-in-law, -Nathan Tanner, in Wanship, where I was kindly cared for by him and his -family, and my own family notified of the accident that had befallen -me. My wound being of a most serious character, the best surgical -attention procurable at the time was obtained. -</p> -<p>The surgeon advised amputation, but I objected as long as there was any -hope of saving the limb. I laid there till November, then was moved to -my home in Salt Lake City. For nine months I laid on my back, unable -to move from that position. During that time two surgical operations -were performed, taking out parts of shattered bone and the bullet. I -was reduced to a skeleton, and became so weak I could not feed myself -or even lift a sheet of paper between my thumb and finger. After the -second surgical operation, however, I began to improve, and in a few -weeks could get around with a crutch and a cane. -</p> -<p>As I grew stronger, I was able to work some in my nursery; and when, in -the autumn of that year, 1865, the municipality opened the Warm Springs -to the public I was given charge thereof, and remained in that position -till the autumn of 1866. I was there at the time Dr. J. King Robinson, -who had had a dispute with the city over the Warm Springs property, was -killed, October 22, 1866. When I was brought from Wanship in November, -1864, after being shot, Dr. Robinson, as associate surgeon in my case, -was the first one to do any cutting on my limb. -</p> -<p>During the time after I was able to move around, subsequent to the -months I had to lie in bed, my wounded limb gave me much trouble. -Abscesses would form, causing me severe pain, then would burst, and -when the pus was drained the flesh would heal again. But I was able -to perform only light physical labor, so when, late in the autumn of -1866, business fell off at the Warm Springs, I was notified that, as I -was unable to do all the work required and the bath house did not have -sufficient patronage to pay two men's wages, my services were no longer -required. While business was good I had purchased a hack, one of the -first in the city, to convey passengers to and from the Warm Springs, -the route being to the business part of town, but as traffic fell off I -had to dispose of the vehicle. Thus when I was thrown out of employment -I was left without means of obtaining a livelihood for myself and -family. -</p> -<p>I had some specimens of the gold I had discovered near the southeastern -boundary of California in 1849, when I was going on my first mission to -the Society Islands. I showed the specimens to President Brigham Young, -and in the spring of 1867, with a company which he had authorized me -to select, started for the California border, our destination being a -point in the desert known as Salt Springs. The company included Wood -Birdno, Lemuel Steele, Dr. Hickman, Robert Egbert and seven others -besides myself. -</p> -<p>On reaching Los Vegas, we learned from white men, of whom there were -about fifty there, that the Indians were on the warpath. Two of the -savages had been killed by the white men, and their tribe was seeking -revenge. The red men had challenged the white men to come out of their -fort and fight; but the challenge was not accepted. We were warned that -to continue the journey meant certain death, so I told my companions -they were at liberty to return, but I proposed to go on. All of the -company elected to do the same. -</p> -<p>We proceeded very carefully, and in going along a narrow canyon we -observed fresh Indian tracks. These were noticeable for about five -miles, but in that distance we saw no Indians, though we momentarily -expected them, and kept a sharp lookout. At last we discovered one -Indian who claimed to be friendly, but he left us soon—an action which -we accepted as an indication of trouble. In the afternoon we selected a -camping place on an almost bare knoll, where it seemed impossible for -a man to find shelter enough to hide himself. As I was very tired, my -companions spread some quilts for me to lie down on. Scarce had they -done so when a large Indian rose up from a little gully where he had -been hidden. He was within shooting distance, and was well armed. As -soon as we saw him, my companions seized their weapons, whereupon I -shouted "Hold on!" -</p> -<p>The Indian made a motion as if to express a wish to shake hands, and -I threw my hand up and down again, in an involuntary movement, the -meaning of which I did not know in Indian sign language. The stranger -received it as a friendly invitation, and came forward and shook hands. -Again, as on former occasions, I had the gift of the tongue or language -which the Indians in this vicinity—near Williams' Ranch—spoke, though -I had never heard it before. I talked to him, and learned that there -were other Indians secreted close by. He called to them, and about -fifteen rose up and came to camp. I was informed that white men had -killed some of their number, and that one wounded Indian was lying a -short distance away. This one I asked to be brought in and laid near my -bed, which was done. Dr. Hickman examined his wounds, a shot through -the cheek and one in the hip, which he said were not fatal. -</p> -<p>I also directed a piece of wagon cover spread out, and told the Indians -I wanted their weapons laid on that, which was done. Then some of our -company rolled the wagon cover up and tied it, so the guns could not be -got at readily if there were trouble. Then, when our guards had been -set for the night, we laid down and slept in peace and safety. We made -a bargain with the Indians to take care of our animals at a place where -there was good grass, and they did so. -</p> -<p>The next day we moved on and met no further trouble or danger. We -reached our destination in due course, and examined the gold prospect, -which was quite rich. But there was no water within twenty-five miles, -and it was not practicable to work the mines with the methods within -our reach in those days. We had to give up and return home, our route -of travel being by way of the Colorado River as far as Call's Fort, -then by the settlements on the Muddy into Utah. I reported the trip and -its results to President Young. -</p> -<p>At that time there had arisen some excitement over gold discoveries -on the Sweetwater, near South Pass. Fourteen years previous to that -date I had related to President Young how the Indians had told me of -gold in that locality. President Young showed me specimens that had -been brought him from the new discovery, and told me to get a few men -and see what I could do, as he believed it was a good opportunity for -me. I did so, and in July, 1867, in company with Foster Curtis, Brower -Pettit, Benjamin Brown and B. Y. Hampton, started for the Sweetwater. -</p> -<p>Reaching our destination, we prospected for the precious metal. One -day I went out alone, and at the base of a slope near the Teresa mine -I discovered free gold. I dug a hole and worked at it, securing dirt -that carried fifty to sixty cents per pan. It was a placer claim, and -I decided that we would occupy it. While I was getting out some of -the gold, S. Sharp Walker came along and saw it, and on going to camp -told the men. I did not know this till after, but early next morning, -before daylight, I overheard a man in the tent next to our wagon tell -of a plan to seize the claim. A lot of men were there, Mormons and -non-Mormons. I awoke my companions, and it was agreed that they should -go and stake the claim, while I should get it recorded. This we did, -and had the work accomplished before day was fairly on. I reached the -claim, to which the others had preceded me, before those who intended -to jump it arrived at the place, and when the latter came up I was -prepared to defend it. One man said he had staked the claim before -us, but as his statement was not true, we stood him off and retained -possession. -</p> -<p>Our party went to work, while I started to find my horses, which had -strayed away. As I rode up on a knoll, I discovered a war party of -seventy-five or eighty Indians, supposed to be Sioux. I had intended to -dismount and fasten my saddle, but finding I was discovered and that -about twenty-five of the Indians were closing in on me with horses much -faster than I had. I started for camp with the loose saddle, skurrying -over rocks and sagebrush. On the way back I found my horses and started -them, and they ran directly into camp. In the ride my foot came out of -the stirrup, and my lame limb dangled, beyond any power of mine to use -it. Two Indians ran close up on me and one drew his bow with a fixed -arrow. I straightened up, expecting to receive the missile in my back. -Just then some of the men who were in our camp, and who had heard my -shouts, came out and fired, and my pursuer turned to save himself, -while I escaped injury. -</p> -<p>At the camp all was excitement. One man, Corinth Lawrence, had been -shot and scalped, his body being found some time after I came in. -Isador Morris had had a narrow escape. That day there were two others -killed on their way to camp. They were Anthony Showell, an eastern -man, and Orson Taylor, from Springville, Utah. Showell was found and -buried, but Taylor's body never was discovered, that I can recall. -In the camp there were George Naylor, Gilbert Webb, Jesse West, John -Pitts, Robert Watson, Jr., George Boyd and many others from Salt Lake -City, as well as men who had come from various parts of the country. -The man who had tried to jump the claim I had found assumed charge and -got the camp together, intending to make a stand in the brush. I knew -the danger of such a proceeding with seventy-five or eighty hostile -Indian warriors near, so, with my companions, withdrew to a better -position; soon all the camp followed, and we prepared for defense. The -intended claim-jumper, whose name I am unable to recall, was a partner -of Corinth Lawrence, and requested me to take charge of the funeral of -the dead man, which I did, and he was buried as carefully as we could -do it. That day I suffered greatly with my lame limb, and an abscess -burst and discharged freely. -</p> -<p><img src="images/chased.jpg" id="chased" alt="CHASED BY A WAR PARTY"></p> -<p class="caption">CHASED BY A WAR PARTY -</p> -<p>Next morning we broke camp and returned home, for it was not safe to -remain there, in a hostile Indian country. Later in the season, Brower -Pettit and Foster Curtis returned to our claim, but it had been seized, -and was held by parties from California. There was a great rush in -of people, and the town of South Pass, or Atlantic City, was built. -The next spring I went out with more men, but our claim could not be -regained, so we had to give it up. The parties who seized it took many -thousands of dollars out of it. The second year, however, the mining -boom collapsed. -</p> -<p>During the summer and autumn of this year, 1868, grading for the -Union Pacific Railway was going on. I hauled coal from Coalville to -Salt Lake City, and also hauled tithing produce from Ogden and Logan, -taking produce for pay, so that my family was well supplied with -provisions. On my last trip from Ogden I was caught in a snowstorm on -the sandridge, took a congestive chill, and almost died on the way. -When I reached home I was unable to get off my wagon. I was cared for -by my family, but suffered greatly, and in addition to the suppuration -in my thigh, the wound bled so as to endanger my life. Finally, on May -27, 1869, my left limb was amputated about four inches from the hip -joint. The surgeons were Dr. W. F. Anderson, Dr. H. J. Richards and Dr. -J. M. Bernhisel. Apostles Wilford Woodruff and George Q. Cannon were -present also. The operation which I had objected to for nearly five -years became necessary to save my life. -</p> -<p>In a few weeks from the time of the amputation I was able to get out -a little, and pruned a few trees. From that time on I worked, though -it was under many difficulties, till I had pruned my nursery of ten -thousand trees, and had given them necessary care. I was able to be -present at the ceremonies at the entrance of the railway into Salt Lake -City, January 10, 1870. During the succeeding two years I attended to -my nursery, also traveled and lectured on my experiences and preached -as a home missionary, from Paris, Idaho, on the north, to St. George, -Utah, on the south. In the summer of 1871, while working in my orchard, -I was overcome by heat, having a slight sunstroke, some of the effects -of which have never left me. Still my health was better than before my -limb was amputated, and with crutches I got along fairly well. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLX"></a>CHAPTER LX. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">I CALLED ON A MISSION TO THE UNITED STATES—JOURNEY EASTWARD—VISIT -RELATIVES EN ROUTE—REACH NEW YORK—MEASURED FOR AN ARTIFICIAL -LIMB—HOW IT WAS PAID FOR—VISIT AND PREACH—MEET POOR -ENCOURAGEMENT—GO TO BOSTON—WORLD'S PEACE JUBILEE—BUNKER HILL—AGAIN -AT NEW YORK—RELEASED TO RETURN HOME—BACK IN UTAH—TRAVELING AND -PREACHING—SENT FOR BY PRESIDENT YOUNG—CALLED ON A MISSION TO -ARIZONA—DIRECTED TO FURNISH NAMES OF OTHERS—SEND THE LIST—PRESIDENT -YOUNG ADDS OTHER NAMES—SET APART FOR OUR MISSION—DIFFICULT TO COLLECT -MONEY DUE ME—LEAVE MY FAMILY POORLY PROVIDED FOR BUT TRUSTING IN THE -LORD—PLACED IN CHARGE OF THE MISSION—LETTER OF INSTRUCTIONS—START -SOUTH—PEOPLE CONTRIBUTE LIBERALLY—TRAVELING IN STORM—ARRIVE AT -KANAB—IN ARIZONA—A HARD JOURNEY—MARRIAGE OF MY DAUGHTER—REACH LEE'S -FERRY ON THE COLORADO—CROSSING THE RIVER—REACH MOANCOPPY WASH—DECIDE -TO WINTER THERE—EXPLORE THE VICINITY—MEET FRIENDLY INDIANS—BUILDING -A HOUSE—EXPLORING THE LITTLE COLORADO—A DIFFICULT TRIP—DESCRIPTION -OF THE ROUTE—FIND A PLACE FOR ANOTHER SETTLEMENT—SAN FRANCISCO -MOUNTAINS—FINE FOREST GROWTH—CAUGHT IN DEEP SNOW—THROUGH WITH A -PERILOUS JOURNEY—DECIDE TO RETURN TO SALT LAKE CITY AND REPORT—HEAVY -SNOW—TRIP HOMEWARD—CORDIALLY GREETED BY PRESIDENT YOUNG—WITH MY -FAMILY. -</p> -<p>ON the 8th of April, 1872, at the general conference of the Church in -Salt Lake City, I was called on a mission to the eastern part of the -United States, and hastened to settle my business preparatory to my -departure. At 5 p.m. on May 1st I left Salt Lake City, going by train -to Ogden, and then east. There were about twenty-five other Elders -in the company. My companion in the Pullman car was Moroni Brown, of -Ogden. On reaching Missouri Valley Junction, Iowa, I stopped over with -my brother-in-law, B. H. Dennis. On May 4th, I went to Calhoun and -preached in the schoolhouse; returned to Missouri Valley Junction on -the 6th, preaching in the courthouse. My father paid the expense of -securing the last-named building. -</p> -<p>I continued my journey on the 7th going by way of Chicago, -Philadelphia, Newark and Jersey City, to New York. There we met with -Elder Wm. C. Staines, and on the 12th went with him to Brooklyn. On the -13th I was measured at Mr. Hudson's, 696 Broadway, New York, for an -artificial limb. The way I came to do this was through Leonard Wines, -of Salt Lake City. Mr. Wines and I had been good friends in our younger -days. In later years he had made some money on the mail line west, -and meeting me one day on the train the idea struck him that I ought -to have an artificial leg. The result was that he and some friends -whom he called on raised the necessary amount to pay for it, which sum -he presented to me, telling of his purpose. Naturally I had a high -appreciation of his kindness. It was on May 27th that I received the -artificial limb. -</p> -<p>We obtained lodgings with Brother Isaac Elkington and family, and -visited and preached where we could. We met very little encouragement -from the people. On June 13th we left for Boston on a steamer of the -Neptune Line, going first to Providence, from which place we went by -rail to Boston, and thence to Portsmouth, N. H. At the latter place I -visited my father-in-law, Thomas Lester. -</p> -<p>On the 17th of June we were at the World's Peace Jubilee, in Boston, -and also visited Bunker Hill and mingled with the vast assemblage -there. I paid a visit to the home of Thomas Lester, Jr., about fifteen -miles out from Boston, on the 18th, and then returned to New York, -where, on the 19th, we met President George A. Smith of the First -Presidency of the Church. He told us we were at liberty to return home, -as the antagonism was so great that there was no chance to preach -the Gospel to the people at that time. That evening we filled an -appointment at Paterson. N. J., staying at the home of W. Dover till -the 23rd, when we returned to New York. -</p> -<p>Having been released from our mission, owing to the indifference of the -people, we started home the first of July. For some three years after -my return I traveled and preached as I had done formerly, in southern -Idaho, western Wyoming and northern Utah. -</p> -<p>On Wednesday evening, September 29, 1875, on returning from a preaching -tour in the northern part of Utah County, I was informed by my family -that President Young had sent for me to do some interpreting in the -Navajo language. I had met the Navajo Indians going away from his -office, and as I knew my presence was not necessary then, and as I was -quite ill with a nervous headache, I did not go up till next day. -</p> -<p>Going to see President Young, I met him in front of his office, in -his carriage. He said he had wanted me to talk with the Navajos, but -I was too late, for they were gone, "but," said he, "I knew you had -the spirit of it." He then drove off, and his private secretary, Elder -George Reynolds, invited me into the office, saying the President -wanted to see me particularly on missionary business. At this I went -inside and waited. Soon the President came in and after speaking to -some others who were waiting for him, came to me and said, "Oh, Brother -James, that I could see you as I have seen you, strong and active! I -should like to send you on a mission to those Indians, for you are just -the man to go there with a few other good men. The Spirit of the Lord -is upon them and they need a few men among them who will teach them the -truth." -</p> -<p>To this statement I replied that I was unable to endure hardships and -exposure as I had done, for my health was very poor and I was not able -to wait on myself in camp life. I stated, however, that what the Spirit -of the Lord directed through him I was willing to try to do to the best -of my ability; and added, "You know where to find me; I am just where I -always have been, on hand." -</p> -<p>President Young then said. "Bless your soul, the Spirit does and has -dictated to me all the time to send you to take charge of a mission -in that country. You are just the man for it, and if I had sent you -before, we would have had a mission and settlements there now. I think -that if we fit you up with a good spring wagon or carriage, and some -good brethren to wait on you, that you can go. Just get a list of names -of good men, and hand them to me—a list of men that will stand by -you, but none of your babies. I want good men to go with you on this -mission, so hand me a list of names." -</p> -<p>When the conversation ended, I returned home, and after much thought -and prayer for the guidance of the Lord, wrote the following names, my -own at the head of the list: Daniel B. Roson, John C. Thompson, Seth B. -Tanner, Morton P. Mortenson, Bengt Jenson, Hans Funk, Ernest Tietjens -and John Davies. The latter got excused, and President Young added the -following: Andrew L. Gibbons, Luther C. Burnham, Thales H. Haskell, Ira -Hatch, Warren M. Johnson and William H. Gibbons. These were called on a -mission October 9, 1875, at the general conference. On Monday, October -11th, we were set apart for our mission. -</p> -<p>I found some difficulty in collecting debts due me, over a thousand -dollars altogether, so that I could not get enough to fit me out -comfortably nor to provide for my family. Still I was determined to go. -When it came to parting from my family, it was hard to leave them, with -only ten days' supply of fuel and less than fifty pounds of flour in -the house, and not knowing where the next would come from. It seemed as -if they could not endure the separation when they saw me fitted out so -poorly. But I blessed them in the name of the Lord, and told them that -if they would live their religion they would not suffer so much want -when I was away as if I had stayed home. Then we separated sorrowfully, -and on October 30th I went by train to Provo. Some of the company had -preceded me a day or two. I had in the meantime received much personal -instruction from President Young, and was given the following letter: -</p> -<p class="right">"SALT LAKE CITY, U.T., October 28, 1875. -</p> -<p>"<em>Elder James S. Brown. Salt Lake City:</em> -</p> -<p>"DEAR BROTHER:—You are hereby appointed to take charge of the mission -about to go south and southeast of the Colorado River. -</p> -<p>"It will become your duty to found settlements in suitable locations, -where the brethren can congregate in cultivating the earth to bring -forth substance for the families of the brethren who may feel disposed -to join you. -</p> -<p>"You will work in harmony with other brethren who are now in the south -building up new locations, and will in all things seek the welfare of -those associated with you, and the building up of the kingdom of God. -</p> -<p>"In the formation of settlements, and in all circumstances that may -arise on your mission, you will seek the wisdom of the Spirit of the -Lord, and be guided by its whisperings in all things from day to day. -</p> -<p>"The brethren with whom you are associated are counseled to act under -your directions, that the spirit of union and concert of action may -characterize all your movements. And we call upon all men unto whom -you shall come to aid and assist you according to their ability in -promoting so good and glorious a cause as settling this rugged new, -country. -</p> -<p>"We would counsel you, if you will do it, to sustain each other as -brethren, and work together in the holy order that God has revealed. -</p> -<p>"We pray God our Heavenly Father to bless and prosper you and to make -you instrumental in accomplishing much good to those with whom you are -called upon to associate, and to labor for on this mission, in the name -of Jesus Christ. Amen. -</p> -<p class="centered">"Your brethren in the Gospel, -</p> -<p class="right">"BRIGHAM YOUNG, -<br>"DANIEL H. WELLS, -</p> -<p class="right">"First Presidency of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints." -</p> -<p>From Provo I got a ride with a team to Spanish Fork, where, on Sunday, -October 31st, I preached to the people, having great liberty of the -Spirit. Then Bishop Snell asked the people for a contribution and they -responded liberally, raising twenty-two sacks of flour, twenty-six -bushels of potatoes, and thirteen dollars in money. That night I went -on to Salem and preached, and also received a small donation from the -people. I next went to Payson, where I preached on Monday evening, and -where the people subscribed liberally, so that I had thirty-three dollars -in currency, fifty sacks of flour, and twenty-six bushels of potatoes. -Thus my words to my destitute family were fulfilled, and they were -provided for as well as myself. -</p> -<p>At Payson I met some of my missionary companions, and we moved on -southward. Others joined us on the journey, and on November 9th we -reached Salina, where we pitched our tent and I camped out for the -first time on our trip. At Richfield we received contributions of -provisions, and again at Panguitch. Much of our journey between these -two places was in storm—rain and snow—and was far from comfortable. -On the 18th we crossed the rim of the Great Basin. We reached Kanab on -the 20th, where we were joined by the four brethren who had been called -from the southern settlements. -</p> -<p>I left Kanab on November 22nd, going to Navajo Wells. Before leaving -Kanab I had telegraphed to President Young, written to my family, and -arranged with Bishop L. John Nuttall to have our mail sent after us as -soon as possible. At Navajo Wells I joined our party, and next day we -went on to the Buckskin Mountains, making dry camp that night. On the -24th we reached House Rock Spring, where we were overtaken with letters -from home. I had one from my eldest daughter. Lydia Jane, stating that -she was to be married to Homer Manley Brown on November 22nd. It had -been arranged before I left home that the wedding was to take place -this month. -</p> -<p>We traveled steadily on, the country being dry and forbidding. Our -beef cattle having run off, Ira Hatch and Luther C. Burnham went to -find them. Burnham brought them into camp at Badger Creek, on the -26th, but it was 2 o'clock on the morning of the 27th when Ira Hatch -got in from his fruitless search. That day we went on to Lee's Ferry, -on the Colorado River. We had sent two men ahead to arrange for us to -be ferried over the river, but they reported that it was not possible -to cross that night. I thought differently, and as it was Saturday, -I determined to get over. Some of the party objected and some were -willing, and this division delayed our crossing with the wagons till -about 10 p.m.; but we were safely over the stream. Next day our animals -were ferried over. At the ferry, Mrs. Lee was out of provisions, and -we helped her to some, and also gave her ten dollars, of which I -contributed two dollars. Next morning she sent me a Navajo blanket and -a cotton handkerchief. -</p> -<p>We left Lee's Crossing on November 29th, and continued over a dry, -rough, difficult road till December 3rd, when we reached Moancoppy, -the pleasantest spot we had seen since before arriving at Kanab. I was -impressed to make this place winter quarters, and designated a site -for a fort. We were all pleased to have a rest from traveling, as our -feed had given out and our stock was sick with the epizootic. Near this -place there were some old Indian farms and a few stone huts laid up -without mortar, but all had been deserted. There were also some springs -near by. -</p> -<p>The morning after we had camped there, a small hunting party of Navajos -came in, and after we had given them their breakfast they smoked -their corn-husk cigarettes and departed. A. S. Gibbons, Ira Hatch and -I examined the country around Moancoppy, and found a few ponds of -water and a good place for a reservoir to catch the spring rains; we -also discovered a fertile spot of a few acres, and two small springs. -December 5th was Sunday. We held a meeting, and all our company, -thirteen in number, expressed themselves as feeling well and zealous in -our missions. -</p> -<p>On Monday we explored the vicinity, but found nothing inviting outside -the neighborhood of our camp, where we all were satisfied a missionary -station should be built, as it was the best we could do. We went to -work getting timber and doing other necessary work, my part being -to guard against hostile Indians. T. H. Haskell and Ira Hatch, our -interpreters, went to the Oriba Indian village, some fifty miles away. -On their return they reported all was peaceful; they were accompanied -by Chief Tuba and his wife Telassinimki, who were highly pleased to see -their old Mormon friends. -</p> -<p>On the 8th we laid out a house twenty by forty feet and twelve feet -high, to be built of stone. Our beef cattle having become very wild, we -had to kill them and cure the meat. -</p> -<p>J. C. Thompson, Ira Hatch, S. B. Tanner, L. C. Burnham and I started -on December 9th on an exploring trip up the Little Colorado River and -around the San Francisco Mountains. When we had gone twelve miles, -breaking the road through the canyon, we were glad to find some pools -of water, and to rest for the night. Next day we came to the Little -Colorado River from forty to fifty miles above its mouth. The river -bottom was about half a mile wide, and the water very low. We continued -up the river to the Black Falls, where the stream passes over a ledge -of volcanic rock twelve or fourteen feet high. Four miles farther up -it ran through a very narrow gorge, and we had to pass over the hills -through deep sand, which our team found it very difficult to cross. -</p> -<p>Fifteen miles farther on we came to Grand Falls, where the river runs -over shelving rocks for eighty to a hundred feet. Higher up the stream -the bottoms widened out, in some places to four miles, the timber was -better and the stream was larger. We killed two antelope and dried the -meat. Our forward journey continued to the old Beel trail, then on to -Sunset Crossing and the old Prescott road. Seven miles above was a mail -station, and there, at 9 o'clock on the night of Friday, December 17th, -the mail carriers met, and we learned some general news from them. Next -day we traveled fifteen miles farther, to where some Mexican herders -were camped with about four thousand sheep. The water in the river had -improved in quantity and quality, and the surroundings were such that -we felt we could recommend it as a place for settlement. We were also -impressed to return to Moancoppy, and started on that journey on the -19th. We changed our course and took more to the hill country, heading -for the San Francisco Mountains. -</p> -<p>The return trip was very hard. We saw plenty of timber—the finest -forest growth I ever beheld. On December 24th, when crossing the divide -between the San Francisco Mountains and Mount Hendrick, we encountered -a terrific snowstorm, and had to camp for the night. Next day we -continued on our way, making slow progress in the deep snow. We passed -below the snow line on a very rough country, where sometimes, with -brake set, it took the four of us all we could do to keep the wagon -right side up. We were thankful to reach the river on the 28th and -Moancoppy on the 29th. -</p> -<p>At a brief consultation that day, it was decided that I should return -to Salt Lake City and report to President Young the result of our -explorations. Next day the bandaging of my artificial leg gave way and -T. H. Haskell repaired it. On New Year's Day, 1876, J. C. Thompson, W. -H. Gibbons and I set out for Kanab, where we arrived on January 6th. -</p> -<p>I requested Bishop Nuttall to forward me to Orderville, which he did. -From there Bishop H. O. Spencer took his team and conveyed me to -Panguitch. We met a heavy snowstorm on the road, the snow on the rim of -the Basin being up to the wagonbox. From Panguitch I was forwarded to -Monroe, where I telegraphed President Young that I would be in the city -by January 15th. I was advanced by team from there to the railroad, -where a pass sent by President Young was ready for me, and I arrived -in Salt Lake City and reported to him at 6 p.m. on the 14th. At the -railway station I was met by my children and the neighbors and two -vehicles. If I had been President Young's own son he could not have -received me more cordially than he did when I reached his office. After -our conversation I returned home, where my folks thought I should have -gone first; but they were overjoyed to see me, as I was to see them, -all in good health and well provided for. We were highly gratified to -realize that the Lord had heard and answered our prayers. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLXI"></a>CHAPTER LXI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">ATTEND MEETINGS WITH THE FIRST PRESIDENCY AND APOSTLES—MORE -MISSIONARIES CALLED TO ARIZONA—MANY INQUIRIES REGARDING THE -MISSION—OUTLINE THE ROUTE—PREPARATIONS FOR TRAVEL—START -SOUTH—AIDED BY CONTRIBUTIONS—REACH MOENCOPPY—MEET LOT SMITH -AND COMPANY—BAPTISMS—START FOR THE LITTLE COLORADO RIVER—GUIDE -MISSIONARY COMPANIES TO THE PLACE WE HAD SELECTED FOR SETTLEMENT—LOT -SMITH REFUSES TO ACKNOWLEDGE MY APPOINTMENT FROM PRESIDENT YOUNG -AS PRESIDENT OF THE MISSION—HE ASSUMES LEADERSHIP AT THE NEW -SETTLEMENT—I RETURN WITH MY PARTY TO MOENCOPPY—OTHER COMPANIES OF -MISSIONARY SETTLERS SUSTAIN MY PRESIDENCY—MY HEALTH IS POOR—SETTLERS -DISCOURAGED—CHEER THEM UP—WORK OF FRONTIER LIFE—SUCCOR A COMPANY -WHOSE WATER SUPPLY IS EXHAUSTED—TAKING UP LAND—MAKE A LONG -EXPLORING TRIP—INTRODUCE BOOK OF MORMON TO NAVAJOS—RETURN TO -MOENCOPPY—INDIANS DISSATISFIED—GO TO SALT LAKE CITY WITH A DELEGATION -OF NAVAJO CHIEFS—THEIR SUPPOSED GRIEVANCES SETTLED—TELL PRESIDENT -YOUNG I HAVE COME HOME TO STAY—HE SENDS ME OUT AGAIN—DIRECTED TO -PROCURE VOLUNTEERS—LETTER OF INSTRUCTIONS—LECTURE, AND TAKE UP -CONTRIBUTIONS—RETURN HOME—MY FAMILY ILL—PROVIDE SUPPLIES FOR -THEM—CONDITIONS IMPROVE. -</p> -<p>MY stay at home lasted till January 30, 1876. I attended several -meetings with the First Presidency, the Twelve Apostles, and other -leading brethren in the Church. They were consulting as to the best -means of colonizing that part of Arizona we had been exploring, and two -hundred missionaries were called to go there and settle the country. -Scores of visitors also came to my house to inquire regarding my -travels and the place where I had been. I went over to Apostle John -Taylor's house on invitation, and there George Goddard reported our -conversation, as I was requested to outline the route to Arizona, which -outline was afterwards published in the Deseret News. During my stay I -also made a brief visit to Ogden. -</p> -<p>As the time drew near for me to start south again, President Young -loaned me a team and light wagon to travel with. He also advised me to -find a boy about sixteen years old to go with and wait on me. I was -thinking of how I should follow this counsel, when John Reidhead, who -was one of those called to the Arizona mission, came in and proffered -his son—an offer I was pleased to accept. On Friday, January 28, -Brother Reidhead and son started south with my team and baggage. -</p> -<p>Early on the morning of Sunday, January 30, I took leave of my family, -and went by train to Spanish Fork, making an appointment at Springville -as I passed. I was met at the station at Spanish Fork, and conveyed to -the meetinghouse, where I addressed the congregation. That evening I -returned to Springville and filled the appointment there. Next morning -I was met by Brother Reidhead and son, and proceeded to Payson. I -had had raised for me, by subscription, a span of small mules, so I -sent back President Young's team and harness, and went on my journey, -preaching almost every evening in one or other town on the way. We were -treated very kindly. Our route lay through Fillmore, Beaver, Parowan, -Cedar City, Toquerville, and on to Kanab, which we reached February -23, finding Bishop Nuttall quite ill. We made our home at Bishop Levi -Stewart's. -</p> -<p>On March 2nd we set out from Kanab, and reached Moencoppy on the 8th, -where we found all well. The building constructed by the settlers was -so far completed as to protect us comfortably from storm and cold; and -a dam had been constructed, with a water ditch three miles long, giving -us quite a reservoir. Plowing also had been begun, though the weather -was very disagreeable. -</p> -<p>On the 11th, J. C. Thompson and A. S. Gibbons went to meet Lot Smith -and a company coming from Utah. On Sunday, the 12th, we held meeting, -and a young man named Franklin D. Gillespie, who had fallen in with us, -desired to be baptized into the Church, as did Ly and his wife, two of -the Oriba Indians. The ordinance was attended to, and I also ordained -the chief, Tuba, a Priest. -</p> -<p>During the next three days I arranged affairs of the company, some -of the men being directed to locate springs, to act as guides to the -companies coming, attend to our mail, etc., and on the 15th, with S. -B. Tanner, Ira Hatch, and J. B. Reidhead, set out with six mules and -a light wagon to search a road for vehicles between Moencoppy and the -Oriba village. Hans Funk and E. Tietjens, with a four-horse team, went -to the top of the hill to haul water for our animals, and from there -our party proceeded along the Indian trail three or four miles, then -struck out over the trackless, sandy plain, to avoid rugged buttes and -deep gulches that rendered the trail impracticable for wagons. We went -on about fourteen miles, and camped in the sand; I was quite ill. -</p> -<p>Next day we traveled about twenty-five miles in a southeasterly -direction, over sandhills and up a long wash, to a divide, where we -made dry camp. We met four hunting parties, and two of the hunters -camped with us. The following morning we went on seven miles, to the -pools of water where the Oribas were camped with their flocks of sheep -and goats. Each flockmaster stood guard over his animals, for his turn -to get at the pools. We passed on three miles to the Oriba village, -located on the crest of a steep bluff. The houses were built close -together, and there were about five hundred inhabitants. Those Indians -obtained all their water from a well about a mile distant, and the -carrying of the precious liquid was going on day and night, while the -Indians were praying continually for more water. -</p> -<p>Leaving the Oriba village, we proceeded onward over a rough and sandy -country, reaching the Mohave Springs, where the Hopees water their -stock, on the 18th. That night we experienced a fearful windstorm. On -the 20th we came to the Little Colorado River, and on the 23rd arrived -at the place selected on my first trip for a settlement. Between this -time and my previous visit five houses had been built there, so our -purpose was interfered with a little. Next day we chose a place for the -pioneer camp, and S. B. Tanner and I started back to meet the company -from Utah which was to occupy the locality as a settlement, and which -had been following us closely. We met the newcomers that day, and -returned to the site that had been chosen. -</p> -<p>It was at this place that the first disagreement in the expedition -occurred. Captains Smith, Lake and Allen had charge of three sections -of the company. I invited them and others to a meeting to consult -over what should be done, and there presented to them my letter of -instructions from President Young and my appointment as president of -the mission. Captain Lot Smith opposed my presidency, and Captains Lake -and Allen failed to give me support. Things were not pleasant, and -the meeting was dismissed. Next day matters in camp were in a rather -confused condition. -</p> -<p>The succeeding day was Sunday, March 26th. Lot Smith called a meeting, -and invited me to speak. I recounted what we had done in searching out -and selecting this place for settlement, and welcomed the company to -it; I also gave information and instruction concerning the country. -When I finished, Lot Smith assumed charge of the meeting, and paid no -further attention to me. Next day I invited him, and also Major Ladd, -to take a walk with me. They came, and I asked Brother Smith what he -intended doing. He replied that he was going ahead independent of me. -I told him he had insulted me and trampled upon my God-given right, -through President Young, who had appointed me to preside over the -Arizona mission, and if he would persist in doing wrong he must bear -the responsibility. He was very defiant, so we separated. I called -Brother G. Lake, who had informed me that Lot Smith seemed to think he -was in charge of the companies but he (Lake) knew it was my place and -would sustain me. I told him he had betrayed my confidence, for when it -came to the test he had failed to keep his word. I advised him to think -the matter over, and as I had decided to return at once to Moencoppy, -our party bade good-bye to the newcomers, and we started. This was on -March 27th. -</p> -<p>On the 30th we reached the lower crossing of the river, and camped, the -stream being too much swollen to cross. S. B. Tanner shot a deer, and -by about five hours later he and the others brought in two more deer—a -valuable addition to our stock of provisions. By Saturday, April 1st, -the river had fallen, and other companies having come up, we crossed -and held a meeting. Next day another meeting was convened, and I called -David E. Fullmer to return with us, which he did. In a meeting held at -the old Arizona camp on April 4th, at which there was a large number of -those who had recently come from Utah, my letter of instructions from -President Young was read, and the brethren unanimously sustained me as -president of the mission. Our party continued the journey, and after -much toil reached Moencoppy settlement on April 7th. I was quite ill at -this time. -</p> -<p>We continued the work necessary to establishing a settlement, but -there were so many difficulties that some of our company, which had -been increased by additions from Utah, began to feel discouraged. I -admonished and cheered them, causing them to feel better. We also -arranged for some of the company, in charge of S. B. Tanner, to go -up the Little Colorado River and secure twenty-three land claims for -us. This party started on Monday, April 17th. On the 22nd a Brother -Phillips came from Moencoppy and said a small company had reached there -without water, and that their teams were so exhausted that they could -not travel longer than about noon. We comprehended their suffering -condition, gathered all the barrels and kegs we had, and filled them -with water—about one hundred gallons—and Brothers Roson and Thompson -went to their relief. I then made out some notices to put up, giving -instructions so that other companies should not be caught in the same -predicament as this one had been. -</p> -<p>From time to time our numbers were augmented by additions from Utah, -many having come in and located at the places we had selected. Among -those who joined us at Moencoppy was my son-in-law, H. O. Fullmer, and -my daughter, Rachel E. On the 17th of May the members of our settlement -proceeded up the river to where S. B. Tanner and party had taken up -land for us. There was some dissatisfaction in the company, but after -prayerfully considering the situation all was made right. Then, on May -19th, Brothers Tanner, Haskell and I started on an exploring trip. We -were gone till July 3rd, and traveled several hundred miles, going -north and east through the country of the Navajos, the Moquis and the -Zunis. We saw the villages of each, and also many ancient ruins. We -passed over some good country, but much of it was very rough, and our -trip was an arduous one. -</p> -<p>While on this journey we were traveling along the Rio Perco, a -tributary of the Rio Grande del Norte, when, on June 17th, as we were -following a trail through a forest, an Indian stepped out from the edge -of the undergrowth, held up his hand, and said: "Stop! Who are you, -where do you come from, where are you going, and what is your business -in the Navajo country?" -</p> -<p>"We are Mormons from Utah," was our response, in Spanish, the language -in which our interrogator had spoken. -</p> -<p>"Stop your wagon under this tree," continued he, indicating a place, -"and talk to us; for we hear the Mormons have the history of our -forefathers. The Americans and Spaniards say you claim this, but we -know they often speak falsely, and we wish to learn from your own lips -whether you have such a record, and how you came by it. We want you to -stop here till our people come together, and you can tell us the truth." -</p> -<p>By this time another Indian had presented himself. We turned aside as -ordered, and the first Navajo said to the newcomer: "Show these men -where water is." -</p> -<p>Seth B. Tanner and Thales H. Haskell unhitched our team, and led -them to drink, the Indian going as guide. I was asked to get out of -the wagon, and as I was doing so a large number of Indians appeared, -coming from all directions. Almost before I realized it, there were -two hundred and fifty to three hundred Navajos there, men, women and -children. My chair was taken out of the wagon, a blanket was spread for -me, and I sat down, the Indians sitting close around. Two chiefs, whom -I learned were Juan San Juall and Jualito, sat as near to me as they -could, and one of them said, "If you have the book of our forefathers, -tell us about God and them, and how you came by the book." -</p> -<p>I produced a copy of the Book of Mormon, told them it was a record of -God's dealings with their fore-fathers, and explained to them how it -was revealed to the Prophet Joseph Smith by an angel. As I proceeded to -tell what was in the Book of Mormon, tears came to the eyes of many in -the audience, and some of them spoke out, "We know that what you say is -true, for the traditions of our good old men who never told a lie agree -with your story. Our forefathers did talk with God, and they wrote; and -when they became wicked and went to war they hid up their records, and -we know not where they are." -</p> -<p>At this point the chiefs and about ten other leading men rose up and -embraced me, saying, "Continue to tell us of God and our forefathers, -for it does our hearts good to hear of them." -</p> -<p>I talked on for a time, and when I was through, Messrs. Tanner and -Haskell, who had listened to what had been going on, bore witness that -what I had said was true. We remained with the Indians for dinner, -and they wanted us to stay longer, but we felt that it was better -to proceed on our journey. This meeting, one of the most sudden and -singular in my experience, occurred in New Mexico, about thirty miles -north of the old mail route from Albuquerque westward. When it was over -we continued our journey south and west, turned west to Fort Wingate, -then on to Fort Defiance, and through the Moquis villages to our -settlement. -</p> -<p>On the day of our return to Moencoppy, July 3rd, Brothers Roson and -Thompson came to meet us with barrels of water—a relief that we -appreciated greatly. We were highly pleased to learn that all was well -in the settlement. -</p> -<p>Soon after this I released two of the missionaries till October 1st, -to visit their families in Utah, and five others till November 1st, -for the same purpose. During July and the early part of August we -were engaged in tending and gathering crops, and the work incident -to establishing a settlement, which was by no means easy. We also -visited and endeavored to keep on good terms with the Indians, and for -ourselves did so; but there were some of the Navajos who seemed bent -on making trouble, and who complained that the settlers on the Little -Colorado had taken some of their animals. Finally, on August 6th, we -received word from the Indian council that a delegation of chiefs -would meet with us in three days, to accompany some of us on a visit -to the "Mormon Chief," to settle the alleged grievances. Ira Hatch and -I set out that same evening to meet the delegation. I took very ill, -and it was only through the best care and with great effort that I -could travel, but we were determined not to disappoint the Indians. I -received marked attention from Ira Hatch, also from J. D. Lee and wife -at the Moenabbey, and in a few hours was able to move around again as -usual. We met the Indians, and made the journey north, reaching Salt -Lake City on the evening of August 22nd, the Indians being lodged at D. -B. Huntington's for the night. -</p> -<p>Next day President Young met the delegation in his schoolhouse, -and talked over the supposed wrongs of the Mormon settlers to the -Navajos—for they were only supposed, as it turned out. I acted as -interpreter, using the Spanish language. Efforts had been made to find -some other interpreter who could talk the Navajo dialect, but in vain. -Everything was made satisfactory to the red men, who remained in Salt -Lake City four days. At this time a delegation of Shoshones from Bear -River came with George Hill as interpreter, and these met the Navajos -and the two tribes "buried the hatchet." Then the Navajos received a -few presents and returned to their homes. -</p> -<p>I had a conversation with President Young, in which I told him I had -come from Arizona not to return unless he ordered me to do so. A few -days later he met me and said he had been thinking over my mission. He -intended to press onward in settling Arizona and New Mexico, and as -I knew what that country was, he thought I had better travel through -Utah and lecture on the prospects of the work in the southern mission, -and also call for volunteers to accompany me in returning to Arizona. -He told me further that I was to take up collections among the Saints -for the support of myself and family, and for an outfit for myself. -In pursuance of these instructions he gave me a letter to the Bishops -and other authorities. This document mentioned my missionary labors in -Arizona, said I was directed to lecture among the Saints on the mission -work and take up contributions, and counseled the authorities to render -me assistance in harmony with the call made of me. It closed as follows: -</p> -<p>"Brother Brown is also authorized to receive the names of those who -are willing or desirous of helping to build up the Kingdom of God -in that region. We learn that the brethren are discovering new and -desirable valleys in the neighborhood of their present settlements, and -elsewhere, and it is our intention to keep pushing out and onward as -fast as prudence and the whisperings of the Spirit of the Lord shall -dictate. -</p> -<p>"We desire the active co-operation of our brethren in this important -work, and shall be pleased to receive a goodly list of volunteers -through Brother Brown, consisting of men who love the Gospel, -have faith in the promises of the Father, and have the integrity, -determination and zeal of true Latter-day Saints. We have no fear that -too many will respond to this invitation, as the rich valleys south and -east of the Colorado offer homes for hundreds of those who desire to -extend the curtains of Zion in that direction. -</p> -<p>"We are informed that some of the brethren entertain the idea that it -is better to be called by the authorities to such missions than to -volunteer. To such we will quote the saying of the Lord to the Prophet -Joseph Smith, as contained in the Doctrine and Covenants: 'He that -waiteth to be commanded in all things is a slothful servant.' -</p> -<p>"Ever praying for the welfare of Israel, I remain your brother in the -Gospel, -</p> -<p class="right">"BRIGHAM YOUNG." -</p> -<p>This letter was dated September 16, 1876. -</p> -<p>Soon afterward I went as directed, traveling and lecturing in northern -Utah, with a visit to Almy, Wyoming; then worked my way southward in -the various counties, to Richfield. I lectured sixty-five times, and -secured about eighty volunteers, mostly from Sevier County. Ira Hatch -came up with me and at Richfield we separated, he taking my team and -going to Kanab, and I returning home to provide for my family and -then rejoin him at the town last named. I found several of my family -quite ill, and there had been one death—my Aunt Polly, who died on -Christmas day, a few days before my arrival home. -</p> -<p>The opening of the year 1877 found me with my family, who soon began to -amend in health. I was also able to supply them fairly well with what -they needed for sustenance during my absence, as the Bishops and Saints -whom I had visited had been very kind and liberal, in response to the -invitation of President Young to promote the interests of the southern -mission by rendering assistance to me so I could proceed to that field -of labor. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLXII"></a>CHAPTER LXII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">AGAIN IN ARIZONA—SETTLING DIFFICULTIES AMONG THE PEOPLE—OUR -RESERVOIR BURSTS—NEWS OF NOTABLE EVENTS—PREPARE TO REPEL AN -INDIAN RAID—INDIANS QUARREL, AND THE TROUBLE PASSES OVER—FUNERAL -AT MOENCOPPY—EXPLORING TRIP TO THE SOUTHEAST—A WHITE INDIAN -CHILD—MEET THE HEAD CHIEF OF THE NAVAJOS—HIS ADDRESS, AND -PROPOSITION TO ACCOMPANY ME TO SALT LAKE CITY—AGREE ON A DATE FOR -THE JOURNEY—CONTINUE MY TRIP OYER INTO NEW MEXICO, THEN RETURN TO -MOENCOPPY—ACCUSATION AGAINST ME DISPROVED—INDIANS GATHER TO GO TO -SALT LAKE CITY—MAKE THE TRIP—AT PRESIDENT YOUNG'S DEATHBED—VISIT OF -THE INDIANS—HONORABLE RELEASE FROM MY MISSION—RESUME HOME MISSIONARY -LABORS—IN PRISON FOR CONSCIENCE SAKE. -</p> -<p>MY stay at home was brief, and the 26th of January, 1877, found me -again at Kanab, ready to proceed southward. Three days later the start -was made, and on the morning of February 5th we reached Moencoppy. -The people there were in poor spirits, and considerably dissatisfied. -During my absence they had sowed about fourteen acres of fall grain and -had built eight log rooms. On my arrival, A. S. Gibbons made complaint -against S. B. Tanner, for they had had a disagreement. Tanner was found -to be in error, and made the matter right. -</p> -<p>This trouble settled, the work of plowing and planting and setting out -trees, was proceeded with. Friendly Navajo and Oriba Indians visited -us, and as the United Order was being preached to the Church at that -time, I gave my views on the subject in an address at the Thursday -evening meeting, March 8th. Again on Sunday, the 11th, I preached to -the Saints, telling them plainly the wrong that was in their neglect -of duty and disaffection. My remarks had quite a salutary effect, and -matters moved more smoothly. -</p> -<p>Shortly after midnight on the morning of March 23rd, the message was -brought that our reservoir had given way. We hurried out, but had to -wait till daylight before we could do effective work in repairing the -dam. In the meantime the Indians were greatly excited because the water -was injuring their crops, and we had to pacify the red men as best -we could, and make good the damage. Two days after this my daughter, -Mrs. Fullmer, became a mother, and I rendered her necessary care and -attention. -</p> -<p>On March 31st we received mail with the news of the result of the -presidential election, when Hayes and Tilden were the candidates, also -of Amasa M. Lyman's death, and of John D. Lee being sentenced to be -shot. On April 4th we received tidings of Lee's execution. -</p> -<p>Our time was well occupied now with the work around the settlement; -I also engaged in studying the Navajo language, preparatory to an -extended visit among those Indians. All went well till May 8th, when -I learned that the Piute Indians intended to steal our animals. Chief -Patnish was dead, and his people were angry. For the first time in the -history of the mission, we called out a guard, gathered our animals -and property, and provided against a raid on the part of the savages. -We were assisted by some friendly Navajos. At our inspection we -ascertained that we could fire eighty-five shots without stopping to -reload. On the 17th, two Piute Indians came in and informed us that a -council had been held to discuss the raid on us, but the vote was six -to five against molesting us, and the council broke up in a fight. The -five Indians who were in favor of attacking us started to seek the -assistance of the Ute Indians, while the others came to our side. A -week later we had a talk with some of the Piutes, and the threatened -trouble was averted. -</p> -<p>A funeral occurred in the settlement on May 27th—that of Minty, the -little daughter of W. J. Johnston. I preached the funeral sermon. For -some time previous to and after this occasion my health was quite poor. -On June 1st we had another Indian scare, and made ready for attack, but -the alarm was without sufficient cause. -</p> -<p>Before this time several of our company had endeavored to learn the -Navajo language, but met with little success; so I determined to -study the Indian language and customs myself, that I might be able to -talk freely with the red men. Accordingly, on June 4th, I went up the -Moencoppy Wash to Chief Hustelso's camp, about twenty-five miles. It -was arranged that I should be left there alone, except that Ira Hatch's -eight-year old girl was to stay with and wait on me. The Indian camp -was located two or three miles from where George A. Smith, Jr. was -killed some years before, probably by the same Indians. -</p> -<p>H. O. Fullmer and Ira Hatch went with me, and eight Navajos assisted -in letting my wagon down into the Wash, where I was left. The bed -of the stream was perhaps three thousand feet below the plain above -on the north side, while the cliffs on the south towered up almost -perpendicularly about five thousand feet. The Indian camp was in the -deep recess, the descent into which was both difficult and dangerous. A -wagon could not be drawn down or up by team, but for a thousand feet or -so had to be lowered from one cliff to another with ropes. In one place -the Indians had cut eighteen steps, to enable them to get their animals -up and down; and then occasionally a horse would go over and be killed. -</p> -<p>In this place the first night gave me a decidedly lonesome feeling. -Chief Hustelso was friendly, but not so his people, except a few -old men. The young men were very surly, and would not talk. Some of -them were shooting arrows, and I tried to be friendly and proposed -to shoot with them, but three of the young braves drew their bows on -me, as if intending to kill me. I made no headway that night, and I -realized the gloominess that had prevented my companions remaining -there and learning to speak the Navajo tongue. The next day or two I -was threatened and illtreated, the burrs taken off my wagon, and I was -subjected to other annoyances. The little girl with me did fairly well, -for, being a half-breed Indian herself, she affiliated with the Indian -children without difficulty. -</p> -<p>Then the Indians became less offensive in their conduct day by day, -and I learned rapidly to converse with them, and began to experience -kindness at their hands. Several strange Indians came from a -considerable distance to see me, and on June 12th, about three hundred -and fifty Navajos gathered around to hear me tell them of the Book of -Mormon, its discovery and contents. Book in hand I related to them -the story of the volume being the history of their forefathers. Some -laughed at me and others asked most searching questions, which I was -able to answer satisfactorily in their own dialect. -</p> -<p>Then came the inquiry, "If it is our book, how did you get it? Did you -steal it?" I was getting pretty well puzzled, owing to my imperfect -acquaintance with the Navajo language. I told them that the book was -obtained in the east, about so many days' journey off. But I could not -explain to them that it was in a stone box in the Hill Cumorah, and -that the writings were on gold plates, for I did not know what terms to -use to convey my meaning. One Indian told me the book could not have -lasted so long as I said, because paper would decay, he knew that. -In order to learn what hill was, I made a small hill of sand, and by -comparison with the mountains and much explanation I learned the word -for hill. -</p> -<p>I had noticed, almost up to the plateau above, some slate rock; and -after great difficulty I managed to climb and get several pieces -of slate down, being aided by the little girl. Then I improvised a -stone box, set it in the sand hill, placed the book therein, and thus -ascertained how to say stone box, in Navajo, and explained that the -record was deposited therein. I was almost beaten to tell of gold -plates, for I did not know the words to use. At last I bethought me of -a brass suspender buckle, and pointed out that what I was referring to -was like that, but was not that; and a little piece was worth several -silver dollars. Then one Indian recognized what I wanted to say, and -gave me the word for gold, on the coins of which he had seen small -letters. I was thus able to explain that the record was on plates -of gold; but the way I learned to do it was one of the marvelous -experiences of my life, and illustrates the difficulties I had to meet -in learning the Navajo language. -</p> -<p>When I reached the point of telling how the Book of Mormon plates were -preserved and obtained, my audience was quite in touch with me, and -they rejoiced and wept while I told them further of its contents. From -that time no friendship was too great for me, and before my departure -I spent a day, by invitation, viewing Indian sports. By June 20, I was -through at Hustelso's camp and ready for a journey of exploration which -had been planned. -</p> -<p>On June 21st our exploring party, consisting of six persons, including -my son-in-law and his wife and child, started on a trip, the general -direction of travel being a little south of east. Our journey led us -through some good country, and some that was very rough. We went a -short distance into New Mexico, and obtained considerable knowledge -of the country and its inhabitants, there being many Indian villages, -houses and farms on the route we traveled. As we were crossing over a -broad mesa, on June 27, after passing the Fort Defiance road, we met -with a strange person among the people. This was a fullblood Indian -girl seven or eight years of age, with white hair, blue eyes, and skin -as fair as the fairest white person. -</p> -<p>Next day we reached the camp of Pal Chil Clane, a Navajo chief at -whose place a council had been appointed. From there a messenger was -dispatched to Totoso-ne—Huste, the head chief of the Navajo nation. On -the evening of the following day that chief arrived in the camp. -</p> -<p>A consultation was held on June 29th with the chieftain, at which we -informed him of our desire to settle the country, to teach the Indians -the Gospel, and to aid in improving their general condition; we also -told of the Book of Mormon, a record of the Indians' forefathers, which -had been made known. The chief responded that it was a departure from -his usual rule to come and see the white men. Before this, they always -had come to him, or he had sent good men to meet the government agents -and others. This also had been his custom with the Mormons up to that -occasion. Among other things he said: -</p> -<p>"When I heard that you had come, I quit work and came to see you. My -heart is glad at the meeting with you, and that I see your wagon there, -and the brush shade that your men have built. Stop here four days, and -many of our best men will come and talk to you, for a great many of -our people want to go and see the Mormons. We shall have a big talk -and know what to do. We are glad that you come among us as friends, -that you are making a road through our country, and that you have built -houses at Moencoppy. We want to live with you in peace and let your -animals eat grass in peace. But water is scarce in this country, there -is barely enough for our numerous flocks and increasing people, and our -good old men do not want your people to build any more houses by the -springs; nor do we want you to bring flocks to eat the grass about the -springs. We want to live by you as friends. I sent some good men with -you last year, and they say you talked one talk all the time. The great -Mormon father he talked straight all the time. I think that a good road -to travel in. I have had two daughters prisoners among the Apaches -for many years but have never left my home to search for them, for I -love my home and my people, and I do not love to travel. I have sent -good and true men to search for my children, and have appealed to the -American captains in different places, yet my daughters have not been -brought back. I am an old man now, and it is hard for me to travel long -roads, but I wish to see the Mormons and my father their captain. I am -inclined to go with you. I want twenty-five or thirty men to go with -me, and one or two women, to see your women and learn how they do. I am -much pleased to see you and your daughter and her baby. I want to see -more of your people. The Americans and your people differ in religion. -The Mormons say their captain talks with God (Pagocheda), and Americans -say God does not talk to men. We do not know what to believe. When God -talks to us, then we shall know. Until then we want to live as friends." -</p> -<p>After our talk we separated, he promising to return in three days. -He came, and I accompanied him to a Navajo religious feast, where I -was introduced to thirteen chiefs and over two hundred other Navajo -Indians. This was on July 2nd. It was decided that some of them would -go to see the Mormons, and be at Moencoppy in thirty-eight days. Then -we bade the Indians good-by, and proceeded on our journey, going over -into New Mexico, and back to Moencoppy, where we arrived on July 15th. -There were quite a number of Navajos, Piutes and Hopees there, and I -had to talk with them and three Mexicans till quite late. -</p> -<p>A week later, on July 22nd, I declined to administer the sacrament, -owing to the feeling of dissatisfaction among the people. A. S. Gibbons -and M. P. Mortensen circulated reports against me, that I had used -provisions contributed to the mission, and I had a full investigation -made; this showed that the accusation was entirely wrong. Other -meetings were held subsequently, and the ill feeling that had arisen -was dispensed with. The mission affairs then proceeded smoothly again. -</p> -<p>It was on the morning of August 8th that the Navajo Indian delegation -began to assemble for the journey north, Totoso-ne-Huste among the -number, and by the 10th all were ready for the start. The journey was a -hard one much of the way, but when we got among the settlements in Utah -we were well treated, and the Indians highly pleased. We reached Salt -Lake City August 28, 1877. -</p> -<p>The next day I visited President Young. He was very ill, and I merely -called to see him. The great pioneer and prophet who had done so -much for the opening up and settlement of the Great West was on his -deathbed. The magnificent work of his life was over. In half an hour -after I left his room, the noble spirit passed from his body, and he -slept in death, awaiting the resurrection morn. -</p> -<p>On the evening of August 29, the <em>Deseret News</em> published the following -regarding the Navajo delegation and myself: -</p> -<p>"Indian Delegation.—Last evening Elder James S. Brown arrived from the -south with a delegation of Navajo Indians, one of whom is a woman, the -first female Navajo, we believe, that has ever visited this part of -the country. Garanu Namunche, or Totoso-ne-Huste, the former being his -Spanish and the latter his Indian name, is at the head of the party. He -is, in fact, the head chief of the Navajo nation. He is accompanied by -two other leading men, Honeco, brother of the former, and Esclepelehen, -son of the same. In June last Elder Brown and a party of brethren -visited the northeastern part of Arizona and the north-western portion -of New Mexico, and found a strong spirit of inquiry among the Navajos -relative to the Mormon people, their methods of farming, manufacturing, -and in relation to their institutions generally. These inquiries were -incited by the report of the Navajo delegation which visited this city -a year ago, and these composing the one now here have come to see, -hear and examine for themselves, that they may be witnesses of the -same things. Brother Brown and party held a council with the Indians -at the camp of Pal Chil Clane, about two hundred men of the tribe -being present on the occasion, including Totoso-ne-Huste, the leading -chief already mentioned. It was then that the latter proposed to pay -the present visit. Manlete, or Pahada Pahadane, is the war chief of -the nation, but in the estimation of the tribe is second in rank to -Totoso-ne-Huste, although the whites, or "Americans," recognize the war -chief as the head. The delegation are stopping at the house of Brother -Brown, and have been visiting the leading places of interest in the -city today. Elder Brown purposes taking them north to Bear River on -Monday." -</p> -<p>On August 30th, the Indians and I met Daniel H. Wells, who had been -counselor to President Young in the First Presidency. At that interview -President Wells told me I had performed a great and good work, and -to ask me to return to Arizona was too much to require of me. I was -therefore honorably released from that mission. Subsequently I received -a formal release from President John Taylor, who succeeded to the -presidency of the Church. -</p> -<p>After the funeral of President Young, which was held on September 2nd, -I accompanied the Indians as far south as Gunnison, Sanpete County, -on their way home. There I bade them goodbye, and returned northward, -to resume my missionary labors, traveling and lecturing among the -settlements in Utah, southern Idaho, and western Wyoming. I also -purchased a tract of eighty acres of land on the Redwood Road, in the -western part of Salt Lake City, and worked on that in the spring and -summer, traveling and preaching in the autumn and winter as President -Young had directed me to do. -</p> -<p>Thus my time was occupied till the spring of 1892 with the exception -of the months of March, April and May, 1888. With a firm conviction -that plurality of wives was a law of God. I had entered into that -relationship honorably with a sincere purpose to follow the right. My -family were united with me in accepting this union as of the highest, -holiest, most sacred character in the sight of the Most High. I -could not feel to cast aside my wives whom I had married under these -conditions, and therefore, on March 12, 1888, I was sentenced to prison -on a charge of unlawful cohabitation, the legal term applied to living -with more than one wife, the law being specially directed at one of the -religious practices of the Latter-day Saints. The judgment pronounced -against me was three months' imprisonment in the penitentiary and to -pay a fine of one hundred dollars and costs, which amounted in my case -to twenty-seven dollars and fifty cents. I paid the fine and served the -term, less the time allowed for good behavior, and was released May 28, -1888, having been in prison two months and sixteen days. -</p> -<p>As was the case with other Mormons in my position, our offense was not -looked upon even by non-Mormons acquainted with the circumstances as -containing the element of crime; but our incarceration was in fact an -imprisonment for conscience sake, that being the position in which the -law found us. A term in the penitentiary under those conditions and at -that time, while a severe hardship, especially upon one in my state of -health, was by no means a moral disgrace, since those who had to endure -it were of the better class of men, whose uprightness, honor, integrity -and sincerity were beyond question in the community where their lives -were an open book. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLXIII"></a>CHAPTER LXIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">VISITED BY PRESIDENT JOSEPH F. SMITH—CALLED ON ANOTHER MISSION TO THE -SOCIETY ISLANDS—PREPARE TO RESPOND—A BLESSING BY APOSTLE LORENZO -SNOW—APPOINTED TO PRESIDE OYER THE SOCIETY ISLANDS MISSION—ATTEMPTS -TO DISCOURAGE ME FROM UNDERTAKING THE JOURNEY—SURPRISE PARTY BY MY -CHILDREN—FAREWELL RECEPTION IN THE WARD HALL—START ON MY MISSION, -ACCOMPANIED BY MY SON AND OTHERS WHO HAD BEEN CALLED—VOYAGE TO -TAHITI—MADMAN ON BOARD THE VESSEL—AT MARQUESAS ISLANDS—STRANGE -CHARACTERS—TATTOOED WHITE MAN—HIS PECULIAR CAREER—CATCHING -SHARKS—ARRIVE AT PAPEETE—MY RECEPTION THERE—MEET NATIVE JOSEPHITE -PREACHERS, WHO SEEM CONFUSED—ELDERS FROM UTAH GREET US—IN POOR HEALTH. -</p> -<p>ON March 30, 1892, President Joseph F. Smith called at my residence -in Salt Lake City, and handed me a letter written by an Elder who was -on the island of Tahiti. At the same time President Smith asked me -how I would like to take another mission to the Society Islands, in -the South Pacific Ocean. I told him I did not wish any man to call me -on a mission—that my health was not good, and such a journey as he -suggested was a big undertaking for one in my condition. He replied -that he would leave the letter for me to read, and would call the next -day to learn what I thought of it. He came according to appointment, -and informed me that the First Presidency wanted me to undertake the -mission. I replied that when properly called I was not afraid to go, as -I had faith that God would not require of any man more than he would -have the ability to do if he were faithful. The day following this -conversation I visited the First Presidency and learned that they were -a unit in requesting me to go to the Society Islands. -</p> -<p>From this time I began to settle my affairs to meet the call. On April -8th, I was set apart for the mission, Elder Francis M. Lyman being -mouth in the blessing. On the 15th, I went to Ogden on business, and -while on the train met Apostle Lorenzo Snow, who told me he felt the -spirit of prophecy. He said that the mission I was going on should -be one of the greatest I had ever performed; that I would prosper -therein and be blessed with more power and influence than ever before; -that the Lord would be with me to sustain and comfort me, and that my -family should be provided for. As he spoke I felt a thrill of testimony -through my whole being. When he concluded he took from his pocket -two five-dollar gold pieces, remarking that he had been a missionary -himself, and insisted that I should take the money, keep it till I got -in a close place, and then use it, which I did. -</p> -<p>On April 22nd I received at President Woodruff's office a letter of -appointment to preside over the Society Islands Mission, which included -the Society and Tuamotu groups, comprising from eighty to one hundred -islands and an area of about fifteen hundred square miles. About this -time I had many visitors, a considerable number of whom expressed -surprise at my being appointed to such a mission at my time of life -and in my condition; for I was sixty-four years of age and walked -on crutches and one foot, as I had to abandon my artificial limb in -Arizona, owing to the intense pain it caused me. One man said that -he would not go in my situation for ten thousand dollars. But these -discouraging remarks did not raise a doubt in my mind of the propriety -of the call. -</p> -<p>On the 24th of April I was engaged in writing, when my children -and grandchildren to the number of sixty-five burst in upon me in -a surprise party. We had a happy time and I gave them a father's -blessing. Then we repaired to the Seventeenth Ward meeting house, where -members of the ward had assembled, and I preached a farewell sermon and -took an affectionate leave of the people. -</p> -<p>I sold some of my real estate to pay the expenses of my journey, and -for my family; also received contributions in money from a number of -friends; and on April 26th I started on my mission, accompanied by my -son Elando. We stayed over night at Ogden, then continued on to San -Francisco, arriving there April 28th. On April 30th we boarded the -barkentine <em>City of Papeete</em>, which sailed the next day. -</p> -<p>The sea voyage occupied the entire month of May, Tahiti coming into -view on the evening of the 31st. Our fare, cabin, was seventy-five -dollars each. The first few days out we had headwinds, and there was -a goodly share of seasickness. On the 10th a native of Tahiti, named -Manhele, commonly known as John Bull, became violently insane, and -had to be restrained. On the 12th he freed himself and crawled out on -the jib boom, from which he was about to plunge into the sea, when he -was secured. It took five men to handle him. At five o'clock on the -morning of the 15th it was discovered that the madman had made a fire -by rubbing two sticks together. Fortunately he was detected in time to -prevent the ship being set aflame. A few days after this occurrence his -condition improved and continued so to the end of the voyage. -</p> -<p>It was at the Marquesas Islands on May 26th, when we sailed into port, -that I went ashore with the rest of the passengers, and met a native -of Rapia, a very uninviting person in appearance. The people warned us -to beware of him as he was a savage and had killed five men. He told -me he had seen me forty years before on his native island, and related -circumstances of the event that convinced me his statement was true. -</p> -<p><img src="images/marquesas.jpg" id="marquesas" alt="Marquesas Fire Dancers"></p> -<p class="caption">Marquesas Fire Dancers -</p> -<p>The next man I spoke to ashore was John H. Rumrell of Boston, -Massachusetts, who was taken prisoner by natives on the Marquesas -Islands in 1847, and in the following year was tattooed from the tip -of his nose to just above his eyebrows, and back to his ear on the -left side of his face; on the right side the tattooing went from the -lower part of the nose back to the ear; while above the eyebrow, and -reaching to the ear, was another strip. The ink was pricked in with -human bone. He said that it was because of this tattooing that he -would not return to his people. In his experience he had been without -clothing for years. He had two sons and one daughter, and lived like -the natives in every respect. He related how that on one occasion the -natives had killed a white man and cooked and ate him, and at the same -time they had killed a colored man, who was eaten raw, before the -flesh was cold. Mr. Rumrell said he seldom heard from his relatives -in Boston. He seemed almost oblivious to everything except what was -immediately before him; he took as little interest in civilization as -did the natives, and I have not found a lower class of people in the -South Pacific than on the five of eleven Marquesas islands which were -inhabited at the time of this visit. -</p> -<p>The captain of our vessel informed me that the inhabitants of the group -numbered about four thousand eight hundred souls, and that there were -ten deaths among the natives to one birth, the chief cause of this -mortality being the opium habit. The French governor was trying to -prohibit the use of the drug, but so far had not been successful. -</p> -<p>On the voyage down to the Marquesas we saw many flying fish, whales and -other varieties of the finny tribe. On May 12th the sailors caught two -sharks, and after cutting them up threw them overboard. We left the -port of Taihai, in the Marquesas, on May 28th, and on the 31st sighted -Tahiti, entering the harbor of Papeete on June 1st, after considerable -trouble. -</p> -<p>I remained on board till the afternoon. Mr. Dorence Atwater, formerly -United States consul there, came on the vessel, and recognizing me told -me he had an empty room that I was welcome to occupy with my friends -until I could do better. I felt that this courtesy had been offered as -an answer to my prayers to the Lord. I accepted the invitation and we -went to the house he had been speaking of, from where we returned to -the wharf, and he bade me good evening. -</p> -<p>While resting myself a moment near a group of natives I spoke to them, -when one came forward and asked why I was there. I replied that I had -come to preach the Gospel. At this he called four of his companions and -introduced them as Mormon missionaries of the Reorganized Church of -Latter-day Saints, or followers of young Joseph Smith, the Prophet's -son. I told them I did not belong to their organization, but to the -true Church of Saints, the same as when I was on the islands before. -They seemed surprised and confused, and after a pause inquired if I -knew the Josephite missionaries that came from America. I answered -that all the true Mormon missionaries came from Salt Lake City and -vicinity. Then I asked if they knew where I could get a bed, and after -consultation one of them said I could go with him. My baggage, however, -was not through the custom house, and the captain suggested that I had -better stay on board, so I went back to the vessel. -</p> -<p>That evening Elders Joseph W. Damron and Wm. A. Seegmiller, -missionaries from Utah, came on board and asked if there were any -Latter-day Saints there. I introduced myself, then my son Elando, and -Elder Thomas Jones. Elder Damron insisted that we go on shore with him -for the night, which we did, and my son and I were comfortably located -at the home of Tiniarau, where we remained some time. The other Elders -went to a house about three miles distant, but next day moved to Mr. -Atwater's place. For some days I was very tired and in poor health, and -remained at the house talking to people who called. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLXIV"></a>CHAPTER LXIV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">FIRST SABBATH IN TAHITI—MEET SEVERAL PERSONS WHOM I KNEW OVER -FORTY YEARS BEFORE—HOW THEY REMEMBERED ME—SEEK PERMISSION TO HOLD -PUBLIC MEETINGS—WIDOW OF MY OLD FRIEND, JOHN LAYTON, CALLS ON -ME—OTHER FRIENDS—PREACH TO THE JOSEPHITES—GOVERNOR REFUSES TO -PERMIT US TO HOLD PUBLIC MEETINGS—GET ADVICE OF THE UNITED STATES -CONSUL—A LAWYER'S COUNSEL—JOSEPHITES TELL OF B. F. GROUARD—I -EXPLAIN HOW HE HAD TURNED INTO THE WRONG PATH—THE CHURCH NEVER -DISORGANIZED—MISSIONARY LABORS—GREETING A FRENCH ADMIRAL—EARLY -MISSIONARIES TO TAHITI—THEIR SEVERE EXPERIENCES—SIXTY-FOURTH -ANNIVERSARY OF MY BIRTH—LEARN OF MORMONS WHO WERE HANGED FOR -HAVING KILLED A POLICEMAN IN THE TROUBLE WHEN I WAS ARRESTED ON -MY FIRST MISSION TO THE ISLANDS—MEET A NATIVE OF PITCAIRN'S -ISLAND—HIS STORY—VISIT TAUTILA—SEVERE VOYAGE—A BAPTISM—SAIL FOR -TUBUOI—AMONG STRANGERS—CELEBRATION OF A FRENCH FETE DAY—DINE WITH -THE GOVERNOR—PEOPLE BECOME LESS UNFRIENDLY TO US—BREAKING OF THE -CLOUDS—BAPTIZE TWENTY-FOUR PERSONS—ENCOURAGING RESULTS OF MISSIONARY -EFFORTS. -</p> -<p>OUR first Sabbath in Tahiti (June 5, 1892,) we attended the Josephite -meeting. The service was very brief, and the people seemed worried. -Next day several of the Josephites called on me, and after a lengthy -conversation told me they knew I spoke the truth to them. I was also -visited by a number of friends who were young when I was on the islands -before, but who remembered me. One who came from Anaa said he was -present when I first landed on that island, and he knew of my labors -and my having been arrested by the French. He remembered me by my -voice, and said the people who heard me then would know me in the same -way, if they did not by seeing me. Many natives came and said they were -glad to see and hear me, though they had been born since I left the -country. -</p> -<p>A Mr. Henry, a son of a former minister of the Church of England, -called, and I loaned him a Voice of Warning. He invited me to spend the -evening with himself and wife, but I had an appointment. I went next -evening, however, and passed a very enjoyable time, as I did on several -occasions afterwards. During that week I was visited by very many -people. Mr. Atwater gave us the privilege of holding public meetings -in his house, but we understood it was necessary to get the permission -of the director and secretary of the interior for the province, so -Mr. Atwater and I called. That official said we were to submit the -application to the governor, and he would notify Mr. Atwater of the -reply. On Saturday evening I talked on the market grounds to a large -number of people, several of whom recognized me as having been on the -island forty years before. That evening, at the wharf, I also met with -an aged man from Anaa, who had known me on my former mission, and who -said that if I would go there the people would follow my teachings. -</p> -<p>On Sunday, the 12th, who should come to see me but Mrs. Layton, a -native, the widow of my old friend John Layton. I had seen her in San -Francisco. My own sister could not have been more pleased to see me, -and I was very glad to meet her. She gave me the best history of my -former friends on the islands that I was able to obtain. Next morning -I took a short stroll, then returned to the house. The other Elders -distributed tracts among the English-speaking residents of Papeete, -and I received another call from Mrs. Layton, who brought her little -granddaughters and also a man—the son of an old friend of mine—who -said that on my former visit to the island I had named him Iatobo, -after my own Tahitian name. -</p> -<p>It was while taking breakfast, on the 14th, with a Mr. Mervin, some of -whose children had been blessed in the Church, that an old lady who -came up, recognized me, and shook hands so persistently that it seemed -as if she did not intend to let go, and did not do so for some minutes. -She had seen the French officers take me away from Anaa. The old lady -had known me on sight, though forty years had passed. The same day I -met an aged man who also recognized me from having known me before. -That same evening I was given the privilege of addressing the Josephite -meeting and told them how and by whom the Gospel had been brought to -them, and which was the true Church. I tendered my services to preach -in their meeting house, but my offer was not accepted. -</p> -<p>On the 16th I started with Elder Seegmiller to visit the old prison -where I had been incarcerated by the French, but the distance being -too great I had to give up the journey. Next day we received from the -governor a reply to our application for permission to hold public -meetings. Our request was denied, the reason assigned being that we -believed in polygamy. We had no disposition to let the matter rest -there, so we called on the United States consul for advice. He told us -to make application in writing for permission to preach, and if refused -to submit it to him. This we did on the 20th, and next day received an -unfavorable answer. The governor asked what we taught, and we told him. -We stated that we did not teach polygamy. The reason he then gave for -refusing us the permission desired was that there were enough religions -there and he did not want another established. Mr. Atwater suggested -that we consult with Mr. Bonett, formerly director and secretary of the -interior, and an able lawyer. We did so, and he informed us that it was -not necessary to get permission to preach, but that we must notify the -mayor or justice of the peace of the time and place of our meetings. -</p> -<p>To return a few days: On Sunday, the 19th of June, we attended a -Josephite meeting, where all were friendly but the presiding officer; -yet after meeting he told us to come and eat, sent a half-caste to wait -on us, and otherwise was quite attentive. After dinner we talked to -the audience, who appeared well pleased. They said B. F. Grouard had -set native songs to American tunes, and that he had also sent letters -endorsing the Josephite church; he had been one of the first to preach -the true Gospel to their fathers, as I had been, and they were confused -at my coming, for they could not refute what I had said. I was under -the necessity of telling them how that Grouard had turned into the -wrong path—an action which they admitted was quite possible. After -our talk this day we felt that we had done our full duty towards those -Josephites in explaining to them the true condition of affairs. -</p> -<p>On the afternoon of the 20th my old friend Mahana Toro called, but did -not seem so friendly as in former times. He was about seventy years of -age, and very much broken in health. He also had joined the Josephites -under the misapprehension that they were of the same Church as I was. I -told him the difference, that the Josephite organization was distinct, -and was not the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, which -never had been disorganized. He then seemed to feel more kindly towards -me, and visited me on subsequent occasions, bringing gifts of oranges. -</p> -<p>My health was very poor, and at times I was quite ill. I was able -most of the time, however, to get around, and to preach to the -people, either those who called on me, or those I had the privilege -of visiting. My missionary companions were also energetic in their -labors. Occasionally we had the opportunity to extend our acquaintance -into prominent circles of society. For instance, on June 27th, we -attended a select party in honor of the French admiral. There was a -grand illumination. I also visited captains of vessels engaged in -traffic between the islands, and had pleasant chats with them on -the principles of the Gospel. I did not fail to talk to the natives -whenever occasion offered, and this was frequent. On July 2nd, in the -market square, a large crowd gathered around me as I preached, and -most of them acknowledged the truth of the principles I taught. Then, -lest the police stop me for raising an excitement, I changed to asking -questions, as in conversation, so no offense could be taken by the -officers. -</p> -<p>I learned an interesting bit of missionary history on July 3rd. This -day, I met Mr. J. S. Henry, who said his father was one of the first -Christian missionaries on the islands, having come to Tahiti in 1797. -They had a very hard time of it. For years their clothing was made of -the bark of the bread-fruit tree, and they had gone barefooted for a -long time, their shoes and clothing having worn out. They had been five -years without receiving any supply from their society. My informant -was born on the island. I loaned him a copy of the <em>Deseret News</em>, which -contained sermons by President Wilford Woodruff and by Elder C. W. -Penrose, who was editor of the paper at that time. -</p> -<p>Monday, July 4, 1892, was the sixty-fourth anniversary of my birth, and -I was spending it in far off Tahiti. I had but few callers that day, -and consequently but few congratulations. I continued my efforts to -make myself more proficient in the Tahitian language, and from day to -day proceeded with the duties that rested on me. July 12th an aged man -Tematu called on me, saying that he was from the island of Anaa, and -had been my servant on the occasion of my former visit. He told me of -the four members of the Church that were hanged by the French; for in -the trouble then they had killed a policeman and had wounded severely a -Catholic priest. The names of the executed men were Tefaitina, Reifara, -Maru, Mafeuta and Temutu. -</p> -<p>Among the very aged people I met was one who called on me on July 18, -Timou, aged one hundred and three years. I also met, at a blacksmith -shop, on July 21st, a native of Pitcairn's island, William Christenson. -He was a descendant of one of the mutineers of the British ship <em>Bounty</em>. -He told the story as follows: The <em>Bounty</em> sailed from England in the -year 1689, the company intending to collect plants from the South -Sea Islands. They called at Tahiti, and made their collection, then -got some natives and their wives and some other women on board, and -put out to sea. Fletcher Christenson, first mate, and some of the -crew mutinied, getting control of the vessel. They put the captain, -whose name was Blythe, and those who wished to go with him, into the -best boat, supplied them with such articles as they desired which -were at hand, and set them adrift. This party subsequently reached -England, while the first mate and crew ran the ship into a small bay at -Pitcairn's Island, where they wrecked the vessel, taking the supplies -on shore. All went well for a time, till the native men became jealous -of the white men and killed most of them. Afterwards, at the instance -of the remaining white men, the women killed the native men who had -escaped in the former trouble, so there were left but two of the white -men and the women. These, and after them, their descendants, lived on -the island, which was but a few miles in circumference. The population -increased to about four hundred souls, when the British government -moved them to Norfolk Island. Some of them returned to Pitcairn's, and -at that time (1892) there were one hundred and thirty-six souls on the -island, every one belonging to the Seventh Day Adventists, and all -speaking the English language. Mr. Christenson said that the only names -of the mutinous crew he remembered besides those of the captain and his -own progenitor, were John Adams, —— McKay, John Mills, Isaac Brown and -—— Yindle. Christenson's story does not harmonize precisely with the -generally accepted history of the affair, but I have given it as he -related it. -</p> -<p>For a considerable time we had endeavored to get passage for some -of the Elders to the island of Tuamotu, but were unsuccessful, so -we divided Papeete into missionary districts, Elder Damron and my -son Elando taking the east side, and Elders Seegmiller and Jones the -western district. During the latter part of July and the greater -portion of August, I was quite ill, and was troubled greatly with -neuralgia. On August 14th, we applied to the Josephites for permission -to speak in their house, but it was refused, resulting in quite a -discussion among the members of the Josephite congregation, some of -whom were quite friendly to us. On the 23rd my son Elando and I left -Papeete, by invitation, for Tautila, going in a boat in which there -were four other men and a woman, the latter being a sister of the owner -of the craft. When we got off Haapape the wind became so high that the -men were obliged to row for the shore, and we found refuge in the home -of Terumana, a native, who fed us on native food and gave each of us a -good bed. -</p> -<p>We had to remain there till 11 p.m. on the 25th, when we started to sea -again, the night being pitch dark. The woman made me as comfortable -as was possible in the small boat, and all went well for a time with -the exception of seasickness. Then it came on to rain very hard, and -we were all wet. Early in the morning we ran into shore, and the men -in charge of the boat asked us to pray, which I did. We then proceeded -on our way with a cocoanut each for breakfast, and at half-past eight -p.m., on the 26th, reached the mouth of a river on Tautila. -</p> -<p>Our host was Mr. Hiotina, and his wife's name was Teumere. She was -an invalid, her frame almost a skeleton, but she was a very bright -woman intellectually. Her memorizing of Scripture passages was truly a -marvel. The next day after our arrival was Saturday, and many people -came out of curiosity to see us. On Sunday, the 28th, about sixty -people assembled, and our host requested us to hold religious services, -which we did. While I was preaching on faith, repentance, and baptism, -taking my text from the third chapter of Matthew, an old lady went -over to my son, who was near the door, and requested baptism. This was -the first application of the kind made to us on the island. The lady -had been a member of the Church, but had become negligent. At 5 p.m. -that day she was baptized by Elder Elando Brown, and I confirmed her -a member of the Church, there being many people present, among them a -Protestant minister. -</p> -<p>We stayed on Tautila until September 9th, visiting among the people and -preaching and talking to them, as opportunity afforded, though we could -not get a house to preach in. On the 9th we returned to Papeete, the -voyage being very rough and trying. I could hardly stand on my crutches -when we landed, at 10 p.m. -</p> -<p>On the 11th we arranged for four of us to go to Tubuoi, but the -governor informed the captain that he could take but two white -passengers, so on August 15th Elder Seegmiller and I left on a vessel -bound for the island named. The voyage lasted till the 20th and was -decidedly uncomfortable. We did not have sufficient food, there was no -bedding, and the water on board was filthy. Worn and exhausted, we were -glad to get ashore at Tapuai, where we were coldly greeted. We secured -a comfortable lodging room, so far as appearances were concerned, and -plenty of fleas for bed-fellows. Our room-mate was a young man named -Alexander Drolett, interpreter for the French captain of a government -schooner that was lying in the harbor. There we met Tapuni, a native -Josephite preacher who had been on the island about five months. He -tried to be sociable, but was ill at ease, apparently being discomfited -by our arrival. We found the people generally very distant, as if they -did not wish us there. Mr. Drolett, however, was kind and sociable, and -we had the privilege of explaining to him the nature of our calling on -the islands. -</p> -<p>September 22, 1892, was the one hundredth anniversary of the first -French republic, and a feast and holiday had been proclaimed. Flags -were hoisted, and the people gathered to the feast. We were among those -invited, and were seated at the table with the captain of the French -schooner and his interpreter, and the governor and his wife, also -Tapuni. About ninety persons were at the feast. Dinner was served in -French and native styles blended. This was followed by singing, and by -dancing and contortions of the old heathen fashion, until I was worn -out. -</p> -<p>The following day the French schooner left, and Elder Seegmiller and -I sent a letter to our brethren at Papeete. As we were in the house -a policeman called and gazed at us for a time, then left without -speaking. Next came the native governor, Tahuhuetoma, who entered -without noticing me, but I slapped him on the shoulder and asked him -if he had eyes, whereat he spoke, but had little to say. Then came a -native, Tehaheatihi, from the village of Mahu, on the south side of the -island. He was very friendly, and said he had joined the Josephites -but had discovered his mistake. I was quite ill, so could not accept -his invitation to accompany him to Mahu, except on the condition that -he furnish a conveyance, which he promised to try to do. Our landlord, -however, told us not to trouble, but to remain till Sunday, when we -would all go to Mahu, and could speak to the people there. He said -Tapuni was not pleased, but that made little difference. -</p> -<p>Next day was Saturday, the 24th—the occasion of greater kindness to -us from the natives than previously; for two children aged ten and -twelve years brought us some food, as did also the governor's wife. On -Sunday further friendship was displayed, and the people came to ask -us questions; but we were unable to go to Mahu, and were refused the -privilege of speaking at the religious services in the place where -we were. On Monday, however, we went to Mahu, where we met twelve to -fifteen men, with whom we had a pleasant visit, talking to them quite -freely. -</p> -<p>During that week we met a number of people who exhibited a kindly -feeling towards us in conversation. Some applied for baptism, but -I advised them to wait. By the end of the week the clouds over the -mission began to break. When Sunday came there was a religious feast, -but we were not allowed to take part, so, with about five natives, held -services of singing, prayer and conversation. Again in the afternoon -we had a meeting at which about thirty persons were present, and I -explained how the authority had continued in the Church from the -Prophet Joseph to the present organization. At that meeting Elder -Seegmiller spoke publicly in the native tongue for the first time. -There were several applications for baptism, and on the following -Tuesday, October 4th, Elder Seegmiller baptized twenty-four persons, -whom I confirmed members of the Church. Thus the missionary work on the -island was opened up again, with a fair start for prosperity. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLXV"></a>CHAPTER LXV. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">MIRACULOUS HEALING—MEET AND CONFOUND THE JOSEPHITES—FURTHER -MISSIONARY SUCCESS—MEET A NATIVE WHO WAS PRESENT WHEN I WAS -SENTENCED TO BE BURNED—ELDER JOHN LAYTON'S GRAVE—ARRANGE TO RETURN -TO TAHITI—DISAPPOINTED—PREACH A FUNERAL SERMON—FORBIDDEN TO HOLD -PUBLIC MEETINGS—BLIND WOMAN ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTY YEARS OLD—HER -TESTIMONY—ADMINISTER TO HER FOR HER EYESIGHT, AND SHE IS ENABLED TO -SEE A LITTLE—SHE PRAISES THE LORD—PREACHING AND BAPTIZING—SAIL -FOR PAPEETE—AN ODD CARGO—HARD VOYAGE—HELD BY A CALM—LAND ON -TAHITI—SAIL FOR AVAROA—ON A WELL-ORDERED SCHOONER—CALL AT VARIOUS -ISLANDS—LANCE A CARBUNCLE—CHRISTMAS DAY AT SEA—WATERMELONS—A -BEAUTIFUL RESIDENCE AND CORDIAL WELCOME—PERFORM THREE MARRIAGE -CEREMONIES—CONFERENCE OF SAINTS IN THE TUAMOTU ISLANDS—MEET A NATIVE -CHILEAN—VISIT VARIOUS PLACES—PUBLIC WELCOME—FISHING—ON THE ISLAND -OF ANAA—VISIT WHERE I WAS IMPRISONED—GRAVES OF THOSE CONCERNED IN -THE TROUBLE THEN—WARRANT SERVED ON ME—SUMMONED TO THE GOVERNMENT -HOUSE—WARNED AGAINST CREATING A DISTURBANCE. -</p> -<p>IT was on October 6, 1892, that the first case of miraculous healing -after our arrival occurred. We were becoming recipients of greater -kindness from the natives, and that day Roai, the oldest man on -the island, was brought to us, shaking violently with a chill. He -appeared to be dying. Some cocoanut oil was brought—no other was -obtainable—and we blessed it and anointed and blessed him, when the -chill immediately left him. He rested well, and next morning was in his -usual good health. -</p> -<p>On the 7th there was quite an argument among the people as to whether -the Josephites or the Mormons should have the meeting house. The -decision was in our favor, and we were also offered a house in the -village of Taahuaia. The Josephite preacher, Tapuni, wanted to hold -joint meetings with us, as we both followed the same form of baptism; -but we refused, as we could not make any alliance with him. We -represented the true Church of Jesus Christ, while his organization was -by persons who had been excommunicated, and had not divine authority. -</p> -<p>When Sunday came we held three meetings, blessed fourteen children, and -took dinner with the policeman. Next day, the 10th, we ordained Ote an -Elder, and added nine persons to the Church by baptism. On the 11th we -met a man—the fourth on the island—who was on the island of Raivavai -when the natives had built a fire to burn me, and when I was delivered -by the power of God. They claimed to have been present when I was -sentenced, but denied taking any part in the proceedings. -</p> -<p>Friday, October 14th, we bade the Saints of Mahu farewell (having, the -day previous, ordained two Elders, two Priests, one Teacher and one -Deacon) and went to Taahuaia, where the people were quite indifferent -to us. From time to time, however, we were able to converse with some -of them, and baptized several. On the 23rd, the governor gave us -permission to hold meetings, and we began doing so. I visited the grave -of Elder John Layton on the 24th, and on the 25th arranged to leave on -a schooner for Tahiti. My health had been quite poor for some time. I -did not go on the boat, however, for it was so heavily laden that there -was no room, so it sailed on the 27th without me. Monday, October 31st, -I preached the funeral sermon of a little girl. -</p> -<p>On the 5th of November, the Josephite preacher and his wife called -on me. In the evening a special meeting of the people was held, the -purpose of which was kept secret from us. That night I dreamed I was -on trial and the judge said he knew I was not guilty, but because of -the demand of the people he would have to give judgment against me and -assess a fine of twenty dollars, which the court would pay. I awoke and -told Elder Seegmiller the natives had made a decision against us, as we -learned the next day, when the governor withdrew from us the privilege -of holding meetings. -</p> -<p>We went to Mataura on November 7th, to see a man possessed of a devil. -The evil spirit was dumb, and for three years the man had not spoken -to anyone, but sat or laid around. We also visited the school where -there were about thirty students, and the teacher called one pupil to -the blackboard, where the exercise in writing required of her was well -done. Then we called on Tetuatehiapa, the oldest woman on the island. -She was one hundred and twenty years of age, and had been blind for -eight years. The people said she had insisted that she would live till -the servants of God came from Salt Lake City. When told who we were she -rejoiced greatly, and exclaimed, "I always said you would come again! -The Lord has brought you, and has prolonged my life till you came. I -rejoice exceedingly at the mercies of the Lord!" On November 8th, we -baptized her with seven others, and on the 10th administered to her for -her blindness by laying hands on her head and blessing her. When we had -attended to the ordinance she stated that she could see a little, which -was more than she had done for eight years. "God be praised for His -mercies," she said. -</p> -<p>Sunday, November 13th, I preached twice to large congregations at Mahu, -where we arrived on the 11th. We also had a number of applicants for -baptism, and on the 14th eight members were added to the Church by the -ordinance, and we blessed two children. A Catholic priest called on us, -and I had a pointed discussion with him on authority in the Church, and -the true Gospel. We parted good friends, he promising to come again -next day, but he did not do so; although he passed by the house, but -never looked towards us. On the 16th we added five more souls to -the Church by baptism. -</p> -<p>Our missionary labors continued in different villages, and on November -23 Elder Seegmiller baptized the school teacher at Mataura, also two of -the governor's daughters. On the 21st the captain of a schooner that -had called at the island told us we could go to Tahiti on his vessel, -starting on the 24th. Elder Seegmiller aided me in preparing for the -voyage, and I bade farewell to the people, who were very much attached -to us. I shook hands with the governor, when his eyes filled with -tears, he kissed me, and was so full of emotion that it was difficult -for him to speak. In due time the vessel sailed, Elder Seegmiller going -on it to Mataura, three miles down the coast, where he went ashore, as -we had agreed, and I was alone so far as a missionary companion was -concerned. -</p> -<p>At Mataura the French police justice and his wife, a Marquesas woman, -came aboard, and at 6 p.m. we weighed anchor. The schooner was very -much crowded, the cargo including four women, two children, fourteen -men, three horses, twenty hogs, one goat, one dog, about one hundred -chickens, eight or ten turkeys, eleven thousand cocoanuts, and a lot -of other things. The most comfortable place I could find was on the -companion-way, where I sat, as I was not able to use my crutches on -the vessel. The first night out I found I could not sleep in my berth, -as it was too cramped and the tobacco smoke and foul air were too much -for me, so I camped on the companion-way with my blanket, and was very -seasick. The next night I fared about the same, and it was pretty hard -on me; but the third night, Saturday, I went below before the others -did, and obtained a fairly good night's rest. -</p> -<p>Sunday, November 27, we sighted Tahiti, but a heavy rain and calm -held us back over Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday. On the last-named -day the crew caught a shark, and we had some of it boiled for supper. -Thursday, December 1st, we landed at Papeete in a heavy rainstorm, and -quite exhausted. I was met by my son Elando, and once on shore I was -refreshed with palatable food and good news from my family. We spent -our time the next fourteen days in missionary labors in Papeete, to -the best advantage, and on the sixth baptized eight persons into the -Church. My health was decidedly poor at this time. -</p> -<p>We had arranged with Mr. Henry Marvin for passage on the schooner -<em>Avaroa</em> to the Tuamotu islands, sailing on December 15th. We left -on the date named and though we had some headwinds and calms, we had -a good voyage; for the captain (a Hawaiian) and crew were agreeable, -the vessel was kept clean and in perfect order, and the table was well -supplied with a good variety of food. We sighted several islands, and -on the 20th stopped at Niau, which has a population of one hundred, all -members of the Josephite Church. Their presiding officer and a number -of his people came on board and gave us six chickens and six baskets -of cocoanuts as a token of friendship. I talked to them on the Gospel -message I had to deliver as a missionary. -</p> -<p>We went ashore on the island of Apatai on the 23rd, as Mr. Marvin -had some business there. The people were rather indifferent to us as -missionaries. I visited the governor, who said he had been my servant -on the island of Anaa when I was there forty years before. He was very -much afflicted with a carbuncle on the back of his head and neck, and -could move about only by crawling on his hands and knees. I lanced his -carbuncle, and he recovered. -</p> -<p>Christmas Day, 1892, was spent on the schooner <em>Avaroa</em>, and we sought -the coolest place we could find and ate watermelons, thinking of our -mountain home and the loved ones in Utah. Next day we sailed into -port at Taroa, and were met by Elder Joseph W. Damron and some native -Saints. I was welcomed to the home of Mr. Mapuhi, a seven-roomed frame -house, built on pillars of coral stone and beautifully furnished in -American fashion. The place seemed perfectly lovely, and a surprise for -us in the way of a spring mattress to sleep on was doubly welcome. The -following day was the 27th, and I had the privilege of preaching to a -good audience. -</p> -<p>The 28th of December was Wednesday, and the morning was marked by the -receipt of an invitation to a triple wedding and feast to be held -that afternoon at the government building. I attended and by request -performed the marriage ceremony for the three couples. I also availed -myself of the opportunity to address the assemblage briefly on the -subjects of marriage and baptism for the dead. This day I had the -unusual experience of standing in the door of the house where we were -lodging and viewing a large school of whales pass by. -</p> -<p>New Year's day, 1893, was the time for a conference of the Saints to be -held on the island of Faiti, so preparations were made on December 29th -for us to leave Taroa. On this date I met a native Chilean, who said -he came from San Antonio, about thirty miles south of Valparaiso. When -I heard this, it called to my mind a statement of Dr. J. M. Bernhisel, -that he had learned from the Prophet Joseph Smith that that was near -the place where Lehi and his colony, told of in the Book of Mormon, -landed in America, on their journey from Jerusalem. In the afternoon we -started, on Mapuhi's schooner, for Faiti, six boatloads of the Saints -going along. Our vessel had twenty persons aboard. The wind was fair, -and on Saturday, December 31st, we reached Faiti, landing about 9:30 -a.m. Our reception was rather cool, as we were ushered into a large -room, almost bare save a long table and a few chairs, and were left -alone much of the time. However, we had good beds at night. In the -morning, Sunday, January 1st, we held meeting, and I called for those -who had known me on my former mission to stand up. Seventeen persons -arose to their feet, and stated that they remembered and recognized me. -Our meetings at conference were well attended. The presiding officer of -the Church in the Tuamotu islands was a blind man, and he asked me a -number of questions to satisfy himself that I was the same one who had -been there forty years before with Elders Pratt and Grouard. I baptized -him at that time. When he was fully convinced he remarked that if I had -not come he would not have received the young missionaries, referring -to Elders Damron, Jones, and my son Elando. -</p> -<p>It was January 4th before the people gave us the public reception that -was customary. At the ceremony an aged man related how they had prayed -that I might come back to them again, to teach them the true Gospel. -That day the French gen d' armes made some charges of irregularity -against the owner of our boat, saying the captain had not the proper -papers. It was generally understood, however, that the trouble -originated with the Catholic priest. Matters were finally settled. Next -morning I went fishing with our landlord and caught six nice rock cod, -where the sea was ten fathoms deep. The water was so clear that through -a glass we could see the bottom, with the myriad beauties and great -variety of fish at that place. The anchor of the canoe got fast in a -coral reef, and our host dived down and released it. -</p> -<p>We continued to hold meetings all the week to give the people a correct -understanding of our mission; then, on January 9th, my son Elando and -I sailed for the island of Anaa, arriving there at noon that day, and -being warmly welcomed by the people of Tuuhora, where we landed. -</p> -<p>On the 11th, I walked over the ground where I had been held a prisoner -by the French government, and visited the cemetery where was the grave -of the policeman who had been killed in an affray subsequent to my -departure. On the afternoon of the 13th, I visited the graves of those -who were hanged by the French government for their part in the tragedy. -Upon my return from the cemetery, a warrant was served on me by a -policeman. It was in both French and English, the English translation -reading as follows: -</p> -<p>"<em>Monsieur Jacob, Ministre Mormon:</em> -</p> -<p>"The gen d' arme chief of port at Anaa invites Mr. Jacob (James), -Mormon minister at Tuuhora, to come to the government house at Tuuhora -(Fare Hau), to listen to a communication which he desires him to hear. -</p> -<p class="right">"Cy. Cours, -</p> -<p class="right">"The Gen d' arme Chief of Post. -</p> -<p>"Tuuhora, 13th January, 1893." -</p> -<p>Of course I responded to this invitation from the chief of police, so -with my son Elando reported as requested, to listen to an order made -by the governor of the Tuamotu group of islands. The chief of police -warned us particularly that if we caused the slightest disturbance -among the people over the meeting house, or otherwise, it might result -seriously to me. This was repeated six times, in an emphatic tone of -voice. The officer refused utterly to hear anything from us, saying, "I -follow out my instructions. You must not step your foot inside of the -meeting house at Temeraia, nor the house here." -</p> -<p>Finding it was useless for us to say anything, we bade the chief of -police and the interpreter (Mr. Burns, an Englishman) good-bye, and -left them to their stench of strong drink. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLXVI"></a>CHAPTER LXVI. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">PREACHING AND VISITING—PEARL FISHING—PLACE OF MY ARREST IN -1851—ACCIDENT TO A YOUNG MAN—INCIDENT WITH THE GOVERNOR OF ANAA—SEE -A LEPER—CAPTURE OF AN EEL—CONFERENCE ON ANAA—TIME OF DEDICATION -OF SALT LAKE TEMPLE—SPECIALLY INTERESTING MEETINGS—NEW ELDERS FROM -UTAH—START BACK TO TAHITI—ANOTHER FUNERAL SERMON—MEET THE FRENCH -GOVERNOR OF THE TUAMOTU ISLANDS—HIS CORDIAL GREETING—ARRIVE AT -PAPEETE—APPOINTMENTS FOR THE NEW MISSIONARIES—FAIL TO GET A PASSAGE -TO TUBUOI—MY HEALTH VERY POOR—LEARN OF THE DEDICATION OF THE SALT -LAKE TEMPLE—ELDERS UNANIMOUS IN THE DECISION THAT I SHOULD RETURN HOME -BECAUSE OF MY ILLNESS—I DEMUR—CONCLUDE TO GO—TROUBLE ON ANAA—MY -SIXTY-FIFTH BIRTHDAY—NOTABLE KINDNESS OF A NATIVE CHILD—SAIL FROM -PAPEETE—DIFFICULTY IN LANDING FROM SMALL BOATS—IN THE SOCIETY -ISLANDS—REACH SAN FRANCISCO—ARRIVE IN SALT LAKE CITY—REPORT THE -SUCCESSFUL OPENING OF THE SOCIETY ISLANDS MISSION. -</p> -<p>AFTER the severe warning from the governor, we returned to our -missionary labors, preaching to the people as we could find -opportunity. The Sunday following this occurrence (January 15th) we -had three well-attended meetings in a private meeting house, and -on Monday we went in a boat to Putuahara, a town of two thousand -people on my first visit but now dwindled down to a place with less -than sixty inhabitants. All the ablebodied men were away, engaged in -pearl-fishing. This is the place where the people killed the French -policeman and severely beat the Catholic priest, as already stated. -</p> -<p>We conversed with and preached to the inhabitants until the 25th, when -we went to Otopipi, but returned that same day, as our friends there -were absent from home. Our missionary work in Putuahara continued till -February 4th, when we again went to Otopipi. Next day being Sunday I -had the privilege of preaching to a large congregation. There were -thirty-one native members of the Church present. Many of the people in -attendance were Catholics, and my remarks raised quite a discussion -among them, some of them being for and others against me. Early -on Monday, according to previous arrangement, we sailed around to -Temeraia, receiving a hearty welcome there. -</p> -<p>At this place we met the granddaughter of John Hawkins, once an Elder -in this mission and now a Josephite. I also visited the spot where I -had been arrested in the year 1851. The house had been cleared away -since then, and an old wrecked boat occupied the site. We held meetings -and had a large attendance, though the weather was intensely hot and -oppressive, and my health quite poor. -</p> -<p>On February 17th a young man named Temia fell thirty-five feet from a -tree and broke his arm in three places, the bones coming through his -skin in one place. With such hot weather, and no surgical or medical -attendance available, it looked as though his chances for recovery -seemed slight. We visited him again on the 28th, and his case looked -even more serious. We administered to him, and he ultimately recovered. -Towards the latter part of the month the people began to feel more -friendly to us, and received us more cordially than at first. -</p> -<p>While we were in meeting on March 1st, the governor passed, and as -he was averse to recognizing us then as previously, I called to him -and asked the reason. His reply was that it was not wise to do so. I -continued to talk with him, and he became more sociable, confessing -that it was the darkness of his heart that had caused him to act so -improperly. I advised him to repent of his sins and ask the Lord to -give him light, and he felt better. Two days after this I beheld the -unusual sight of a leper, as one passed the house—a painful picture -to behold. The third day a man and his wife were baptized into the -Church. A visit to Tuuhora was made on March 6th. and on the return -voyage, while diving for pearls, an eel was discovered under a rock -in deep water. It took quite a light to capture it, but it was a fine -one—about four feet long. We went to Putuahara on March 13, and during -the remainder of the month continued our missionary labors, meeting -with no unusual experiences. -</p> -<p>On March 31st, Elders Damron and Jones came from Fakariva, and -native members of the Church began to arrive in preparation for our -conference, which was set for April 6th, 1893. At 7 o'clock that -morning we assembled in conference, being the same actual time when -the Saints were meeting for the dedication of the Temple in Salt Lake -City, Utah—10 a.m. at the latter place. I explained to the Saints in -conference the nature and importance of the event just named. Elder -Damron also spoke on temple building, and after the close of our -meeting we went to the seashore, where we held a short service, and -my son Elando baptized five persons into the Church. We also ordained -three native Elders and appointed two of them to preside over branches -of the Church. The conference continued till Sunday evening, and all in -attendance had a most enjoyable time. -</p> -<p>We had received word on Saturday that eight Elders had arrived at -Papeete from Utah, and at the close of conference we decided that we -had better return to Tahiti as soon as possible. Next morning we bade -farewell to the weeping Saints, and set sail for Tuuhora. From there we -took passage for Taroa. On April 12th, we stopped at Apatai, where I -went ashore and met a number of people whom I had baptized on my former -mission. They did not display much of a hospitable feeling, as none -invited me to their houses. -</p> -<p>Taroa was reached on April 16th, and the hearty welcome there was -highly appreciated after a voyage which had been very unpleasant to me, -as I had been quite ill. We were met by Messrs. Marvin and Mapuhi, and -escorted to the latters fine residence. It being Sunday, we attended -meetings. My son Elando was also called on, on on April 21st, to preach -the funeral sermon over a young man who had died of consumption. -</p> -<p>On the morning of April 27th, the schooner <em>Avaroa</em> came into port, -having on board the French governor of the Tuamotu group, also the -native governor of Taroa. We had a friendly chat with them, the -Frenchman saying he had been in Salt Lake City. He invited me to visit -him when I went to Fakariva again. Next day the people assembled to pay -their respects to the governor, and we also had another pleasant chat -with him. -</p> -<p>We started from Taroa on Monday, May 1st, on the <em>Avaroa</em>, but as the -vessel was going out to sea she struck on a rock which disabled the -rudder, and it took till evening to repair it. Then we sailed for -Fakariva, reaching there the following afternoon. The French governor -went ashore, and later we did the same. Next morning we took breakfast -with him, being invited to come again whenever we were on the island. -That afternoon we sailed for Tahiti, reaching Papeete harbor on -Saturday, May 6th, and meeting there Elders Edward Sudbury, Frank Goff, -Frank Cutler, Eugene M. Cannon, Carl J. Larsen, Thomas L. Woodbury, -Fred C. Rossiter and Jesse M. Fox, all from Utah. -</p> -<p>At a meeting of the missionaries held on May 13th, Elders Carl J. -Larsen and Thomas L. Woodbury were appointed to go to the Tuamotu -islands, Elders Frank Goff and Jesse M. Fox to Tubuoi, with my son -Elando and myself and the others remaining on Tahiti for a short time. -Through Mr. Marvin we engaged passage on a French man-of-war going to -Tubuoi, the captain giving his permission. But after we had packed -our trunks and purchased our provisions for the journey, the captain -suggested that we had better get a permit from the governor. We tried -to do so, but that official responded with an abrupt "No." So we had to -await another opportunity. -</p> -<p>For some time previous to this date my health had been poorer than -usual, and it grew worse, so that it was with difficulty I attended to -missionary labors and to conducting the mission affairs. I continued -at work, however, the best I could, and my fellow-missionaries were -devoted to their duties. Some of them were in the best of health, but -others were not so fortunate; indeed, one of them, Edward Sudbury, was -under the necessity of returning home shortly after the date of which I -write. On May 25th we received mail telling us of the dedication of the -Temple in Salt Lake City, and the notable events connected therewith. -</p> -<p>I had tried to get a hall in which to hold meetings for the European -residents of Papeete, my last efforts in that line being on June 13th, -but I was unsuccessful, so we had to do without, and endeavor to reach -them and the natives in other ways. On June 25th we held a council -meeting of all the Elders on Tahiti, eight in number, at which methods -for the best conduct of the mission were considered. Among other events -of the meeting was the unanimous expression by my fellow-missionaries -of the opinion that my state of health was such that I should go home. -A motion that I do so was put and carried, all but myself voting in -favor of my going by the next mail steamer, which sailed July 8th. I -thought that if conditions improved before that time, I would be at -liberty to remain longer in the mission field. Elder Sudbury was also -in such health that he was booked to start home at the same time, and -my son Elando was selected to accompany us, and give me the attention I -needed. -</p> -<p>My health showing no signs of improvement, passage was secured on -the brig Galilee, bound for San Francisco. On June 27th we had seen -two persons from Anaa, who informed us there was trouble there, -the missionaries not obtaining their rights to preach. I gave such -advice as I felt would be safe to follow, and Elder J. W. Damron, who -succeeded me in the presidency of the mission, was left to deal with -affairs. -</p> -<p>On July 4th, my sixty-fifth birthday, John Hawkins, one of my -fellow-laborers of forty-two years before, who had apostatized and -joined the Josephites, called, with others. He was particularly bitter -towards the Church. That day little Tapura, between six and seven years -old, brought me, of her own volition, a large and beautiful bouquet of -flowers—an act of kindness scarcely to be expected in one so young. -She is the daughter of Mr. Topaz, who was very kind to us. -</p> -<p>The day previous to our going on board, the neighbors brought in -bananas and cocoanuts for our use on the voyage, and we were treated -well. We bade farewell to friends and associates, all being sorry at -the parting, and on July 8th I sailed for the last time from the harbor -of Papeete, island of Tahiti. The words of Apostle Lorenzo Snow, spoken -to me before commencing my journey, had been fulfilled. Though this -mission had not been so long as some of the others I had filled, it had -been one of the greatest and best I had performed, so far as relates -to the work I had been the means of accomplishing in reopening and -establishing the Society Islands mission. -</p> -<p>Our vessel this voyage was very different to those we often had to use -in our travels from place to place, even in the same island. We also -bade adieu to the native method of landing from boats, which always -brought discomfort and often serious peril. For illustration, it was -no uncommon thing, when approaching harbor, to have to pass through -breakers across a coral reef where there was barely room for the boat -to glide between the rocks. Sometimes the vessel would be run close -to the opening, the occupants would spring out on to the rocks on each -side of the passage, and seizing the boat, would hold it there till -the large or "three-twin-sisters" wave came along; and then, by its -aid, would drag or push the boat through in safety. In such times as -these my lame condition was hindersome to the extent of being more than -annoying; it was exasperating. But I always got through, though it was -hard work, and my companions gave the needed assistance with perfect -willingness. -</p> -<p>The voyage to San Francisco was without particular event more than is -usual on such occasions, as was also the journey from San Francisco to -Salt Lake City by rail. We reached home about the middle of August, -and were welcomed cordially. I reported to the First Presidency the -condition of affairs in the mission, the progress we had made, with the -difficulties that were to be met with. Elando and I had been absent for -sixteen months, and had worked with diligence to perform our part. -</p> -<p>Our efforts had been blessed of the Lord, for many people who had been -astray from the path of life were led to direct their footsteps in the -straight and narrow path. The Society Islands mission had been reopened -successfully, and yet continues to prosper, the membership in the -Church there being quite numerous. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLXVII"></a>CHAPTER LXVII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">INVITED TO THE MIDWINTER FAIR, SAN FRANCISCO, AND ACCEPT—JOURNEY TO -CALIFORNIA—KIND TREATMENT RECEIVED—AN HONORED GUEST—WRITE A PAMPHLET -ON THE DISCOVERY OF GOLD AT SUTTER'S MILL RACE—FIRST ACCURATE ACCOUNT -PUBLISHED—AGAIN AT HOME—PREPARING MY AUTOBIOGRAPHY FOR PUBLICATION—A -GREAT TASK—PROGRESS OF THE WORK—MY HISTORY OF THE FIRST MISSION TO -THE PACIFIC ISLANDS—UTAH'S SEMI-CENTENNIAL JUBILEE—NOT A UTAH PIONEER -OF 1847—PIONEER JUST THE SAME—MORMON BATTALION RECOGNIZED IN THE UTAH -CELEBRATION—INVITED TO JOIN IN THE PARADE—COMPARATIVE NARROWNESS OF -COMMITTEE'S COURTESY—LETTERS FROM CALIFORNIA, REGARDING THE PIONEER -CELEBRATION THERE IN 1898—INVITED WITH THREE OTHERS OF THE MORMON -BATTALION, TO BE SPECIAL GUESTS AS THE SURVIVORS OF THE PARTY THAT -DISCOVERED GOLD IN CALIFORNIA IN 1848—APPRECIATION OF THE COURTESY -EXTENDED BY CALIFORNIANS. -</p> -<p>AS my health was far from satisfactory, I was able to do but little -after my return from the Society Islands in August, 1893. I gave my -farm some attention, and traveled occasionally among the people. In -February, 1894, I received an invitation from James H. Love, manager -for the concession of the '49 mining camp at the Midwinter Fair, in -Golden Gate Park, San Francisco, to be present there. The invitation -came to me through Israel Evans, of Lehi, Utah, who had been with me in -California in 1848. I accepted, and in company with Israel Evans and my -son James T. Brown, went to California in the month named. -</p> -<p>This visit to California extended about thirty days. We were treated -with the greatest kindness. Our place of lodging at the miner's cabin -on the fair grounds was comfortably fitted, and besides viewing the -most excellent exhibits of this notable Midwinter Exposition, we also -visited most of the places of interest in the locality. We were honored -guests in every parade, and nothing more could be desired in the way of -courtesies to make our stay pleasant. -</p> -<p>While in California on this occasion I wrote my pamphlet. "Authentic -History of the First Discovery of Gold in Sutter's Mill Race, -California." This was the first accurate history of that event I had -seen in print, all the other accounts having been gathered from hearsay -and broken narratives, while I had the advantage of being an actual -participant in the historic occurrence. -</p> -<p>In March, 1894, I returned home, and continued my ordinary labors, my -health being considerably improved. At this time I began preparing -my journal for publication, having to rewrite it to place it in -presentable form, as much of it had been noted down under very adverse -circumstances; it was also necessary to condense it greatly, many items -of real interest being abbreviated to a considerable extent. -</p> -<p>I believe now that if I had realized at the outset what a great task -it was, I should not have attempted it, notwithstanding the fact that -I was fully aware that my life's experience had been filled with -unusually interesting episodes. But I had not been accustomed to giving -up a work once undertaken with a good aim; so I have continued to the -present, and as I prepare this chapter, the earlier part of the work is -in the hands of the printer. The only literary experience I have had -previous to this work is writing a history of the first mission to the -Pacific Islands and the subsequent progress of events in the Society -Islands mission up to 1893, the manuscript of which history was filed -with and is now a part of the records of the Church historian's office. -</p> -<p>In July, 1897, Utah's Semi-Centennial Jubilee was celebrated, the -occasion being the fiftieth anniversary of the entrance of the Mormon -Pioneers into the valley of the Great Salt Lake, July 24, 1847. The -chief ceremonies were in Salt Lake City, July 20th to 25th, and I had -the honor and pleasure of being present. I had not the privilege of -being classed as one of the pioneers, for these were limited in the -celebration to those who reached Utah in 1847, and I did not arrive -there from the west till 1848. With the Mormon Battalion members, -however, I was a Mormon pioneer, in the memorable journey across the -country to the Pacific; I was also a pioneer in California, and later -in Utah and surrounding places. The committee on the semi-centennial -celebration, however, noted the fact that the members of the Mormon -Battalion were entitled to recognition in connection with the Utah -pioneer band, for the work of both was intimately associated. In -pursuance of this, there was sent to me under date of July 19th, a -letter containing this announcement: -</p> -<p>"Survivors of the Mormon Battalion, the Nauvoo Legion, Captain Ballo's -Band, and the Martial Band, are requested to meet at Pioneer Square on -Tuesday next, July 20th, at 9 o'clock a.m., sharp, for the purpose of -marching in advance of the original band of Pioneers to witness the -unveiling ceremonies upon that occasion. Those who are able to walk are -earnestly requested to do so, but those who are too feeble to walk will -join them at the Monument. -</p> -<p>"Hoping to see you with us at the appointed time, I am, -</p> -<p class="centered">"Yours respectfully, -</p> -<p class="right">"H. F. MCGARVIE, -</p> -<p class="right">"Assistant Director-General." -</p> -<p>I responded to this limited notice, in common with other members of the -Mormon Battalion at hand. But the summary treatment was in such strong -contrast to the consideration and courtesy extended at the Midwinter -Fair, and subsequently at the California Golden Jubilee, that its -effect was to enhance greatly, in the minds' of those who participated -in the California and the Utah celebrations, the admiration for the -California managers in their broad and thorough comprehension of the -amenities of such historic public events. But I must add here that the -Mormon Battalion members, whose journey west was over another route -than that followed by the companies which came direct to the Salt -Lake Valley, were fitly honored in the hearts of Utah's people as of -the pioneer band in the great west. December 1, 1897, I received the -following; -</p> -<p class="right">"1216 HYDE STREET, SAN FRANCISCO, -</p> -<p class="right">"November 29, 1897. -</p> -<p>"<em>Mr. James S. Brown:</em> -</p> -<p>"DEAR SIR: The celebration committee of the Society of California -Pioneers, expect, though as yet no formal action has been taken, to -invite yourself, Mr. J. Johnston, Mr. Azariah Smith, and Mr. Henry W. -Bigler, who were with Marshall at Coloma on the 24th of January, 1848, -to come to San Francisco as honored guests of the Society, and at its -expense, to participate in the semi-centennial celebration of that -eventful day, on the 24th of January next. -</p> -<p>"If we should send such an invitation to you, will you come and be with -us? Letters from Mr. Bigler and Mr. Smith lead me to hope that they -will accept the invitation. -</p> -<p>"So soon as formal action is taken, you will be informed either by -myself or by the secretary of our committee. -</p> -<p class="centered">"Yours truly, -</p> -<p class="right">"JOHN S. HITTELL. -</p> -<p class="right">"A member of the Celebration Committee." -</p> -<p>My response was that if my health would permit, and all things were -satisfactory, I should be pleased to accept such an invitation. I -received another letter from Mr. Hittell, under date of December 15th, -in which he said: -</p> -<p>"<em>Mr. James S. Brown:</em> -</p> -<p>"DEAR SIR: This evening the celebration committee of the Pioneer -Society adopted a resolution to invite you to attend the Golden Jubilee -of California, as an honored guest of the Society, which will provide -you with first class transportation from and to your home, and take -charge of your hotel bill from the 22nd of January till the 31st of -January, 1898, in this city. -</p> -<p>"Mr. B. H. and Mr. H. B. Luther, brothers, say that they were at Coloma -on the 24th of January, 1848, as boys, with their father and mother. -Do you know them and remember when they reached Coloma? They say their -mother, who was with them there, is still living." -</p> -<p>Under date of December 25th, Mr. Hittell also wrote me: -</p> -<p>"<em>Captain James S. Brown:</em> -</p> -<p>"DEAR SIR: Please let me know the amount of the railroad fare from Salt -Lake to Ogden, so that we may forward the sum to you by letter; we -expect to send you a ticket from Ogden to this city, including a lower -berth in a sleeping car. -</p> -<p>"We hope that you, Bigler, Smith and Johnston will all come in the same -car. I have addressed a similar letter to each of the other three. -</p> -<p>"Thanks for your letter of December 20th. I was satisfied that Gregson -and the Luthers were not at the sawmill on the 24th of January, 1848. -</p> -<p>"I suppose the best train would be the one leaving Salt Lake City at -9:10 p.m., on January 20th, arriving at San Francisco January 22nd, at -9:45 a.m. Does that suit you?" -</p> -<p>The next communication on the subject was as follows: -</p> -<p>"EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT, THE SOCIETY OF CALIFORNIA PIONEERS, NO. 5, -PIONEER PLACE, SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, -</p> -<p class="right">"January 7, 1898, -</p> -<p>"<em>James S. Brown, Esq., Salt Lake City:</em> -</p> -<p>"DEAR SIR: The Society of California Pioneers invites you to attend the -Golden Jubilee Celebration of our State, and to accept the hospitality -of the Society in San Francisco, from the 22nd till the 31st of -January, 1898. Enclosed find a pass from the S. P. R. R. Co., for your -passage from Ogden to San Francisco and return. We send you today by -Wells, Fargo & Co.'s Express, fifteen dollars in coin to pay for your -sleeping berth and meals on the way. We have engaged a lower berth for -you on the Pullman car which leaves Ogden on the night of Thursday, the -20th instant. -</p> -<p>"The reception committee will meet you on the Oakland boat on the morning -of Saturday, the 22nd, and will wear the badge of the Society. Should -you miss seeing them you will go to the Russ House, where we have -engaged rooms and board for you. -</p> -<p>"Should you not be able to come, please return the enclosed railroad -pass, and notify the ticket agent at Ogden that you will not use the -sleeping berth. -</p> -<p class="centered">"Yours truly, -</p> -<p class="right">"J. I. SPEAR, Secretary. -</p> -<p>"P. S.—We have arranged to have your railroad pass extended for thirty -days if you wish it. S." -</p> -<p>Like my Mormon Battalion companions who were with me on the memorable -24th of January, 1848, I could not but feel highly gratified at the -courtesy extended, and look forward with pleasure to the commemoration, -under so favorable circumstances and with such marvelous progress as -California had made in civilization, of the fiftieth anniversary of a -notable event, which at the time of its occurrence, came to us in the -midst of hardships, fatigue and almost exile from home and relatives, -yet was a world-wonder in the results which followed the announcement -to the world of California's great gold discovery. -</p> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTERLXVIII"></a>CHAPTER LXVIII. -</h2> -<p class="chapterHeading">TRIP TO CALIFORNIA—MET BY THE COMMITTEE ON RECEPTION OF THE SOCIETY -OF CALIFORNIA PIONEERS—RECEIVED WITH GREAT CORDIALITY—HONORED GUESTS -AT CALIFORNIA'S GOLDEN JUBILEE—THE CELEBRATION—COURTESIES EXTENDED -TO MORMON BATTALION MEMBERS PRESENT AT THE DISCOVERY OF GOLD—RETURN -HOME—RESOLUTIONS BY SOCIETY OF CALIFORNIA PIONEERS—REPORT OF -RECEPTION COMMITTEE OF CALIFORNIA GOLDEN JUBILEE—SKETCH OF -MARSHALL'S SURVIVING COMPANIONS—COMPLETE MY AUTOBIOGRAPHY—MY SON -HOMER ACCIDENTALLY KILLED—THE OLD FOLKS—PUBLICATION OF LIFE OF A -PIONEER—CONCLUSION. -</p> -<p>IN response to the invitation from the Society of California Pioneers, -I left Salt Lake City on January 20, 1898, in company with Henry W. -Bigler, Azariah Smith and Wm. J. Johnston, who, like myself, were -guests of the Society. We reached Oakland, California, January 22, -and were met by Mr. John H. Jewett, president of the society, and a -committee consisting of Messrs. John S. Hittell, Almarin B. Paul, -General Wm. H. Pratt, and Misses Anna P. Green and Mary M. Green. The -ladies pinned badges of the Society of California Pioneers on the -lapels of our coats. We were received with the greatest cordiality, and -were taken to the Russ House, San Francisco, where we were comfortably -lodged, being shown special consideration by the proprietor and -his amiable wife, and from that time on we were given the best of -attention. Nothing that could be done was too good for us, and language -fails to express our high appreciation of the courtesy and kindness -bestowed. -</p> -<p>Whenever we attended any of the functions of California's Golden -Jubilee Celebration, or desired to visit a place, carriages were at our -service. January 24th was the fiftieth anniversary of the discovery -of gold at Sutter's mill race, and there was a magnificent pageant in -celebration of the event. We occupied the post of distinction in the -procession, our carriage bearing the legend, "Companions of Marshall." -We were the only survivors of that notable occasion, fifty years -before. The place of honor was also accorded to us at the celebration -ceremonies in the evening at Wood's Pavilion, and on the 27th we were -at a reception in Pioneer Hall, and greeted the multitudes, old and -young, anxious to see and shake hands with us; and at the Mining Fair -our treatment was characterized by the same cordial and distinguished -welcome. The celebration ceremonies lasted the entire week. When at our -hotel we were besieged by reporters, and hundreds of people called to -see us, and get our autographs. Our photographs also were taken for the -Society of Pioneers. -</p> -<p>Outside of the celebration proper, there was the same magnanimous -kindness. I could not name all the citizens who extended to us marked -courtesies, but feel that I must specially mention Captain John T. -McKenzie of the steamer <em>San Rafael</em>, who was very attentive, also Hon. -Irving Scott, manager of the great Union Iron Works, at which place we -had a particularly interesting visit and entertainment. -</p> -<p>Two of my companions started home on January 31st, and the third on -February 2nd. I stayed a few days longer, visiting my brother at -Petaluma. I also went to many other places of interest, then returned -home, all expenses of my journey being provided. A few days later I -received the following: -</p> -<p>"EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT, THE SOCIETY OF CALIFORNIA PIONEERS, NO. 5, -PIONEER PLACE, SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, -</p> -<p class="right">"February 9, 1898, -</p> -<p>"<em>James S. Brown, Esq., Salt Lake City, Utah:</em> -</p> -<p>"DEAR SIR: I have the honor of advising you that at the monthly meeting -of the members of the Society held at Pioneer Hall on Monday, February -7, 1898, the following resolutions were unanimously adopted: -</p> -<p>"<em>Whereas</em>, The Golden Jubilee just passed marks the second grand event -as connected with the first discovery of gold in California, and as all -pioneers feel gratified at the universal desire of the people to pay -tribute to the pioneer days, now be it -</p> -<p>"<em>Resolved</em>, That the Society of California Pioneers tenders its -thanks to the press generally; to the state and city officials; to the -military as a body; to the various mining associations; to the Native -Daughters and Native Sons of the Golden West, and to the many other -organizations that participated in making the grand pageant of January -24th a splendid success. And be it further -</p> -<p>"<em>Resolved</em>, That the thanks of this society are also tendered to -Henry W. Bigler, James S. Brown, Wm. J. Johnston and Azariah Smith, -the companions of Marshall, in lending their presence for the Jubilee; -and especially do we appreciate the efforts and labors of the -executive committee of the Golden Jubilee, and we also return thanks -to the Southern Pacific Company for complimentary passes to the four -companions of Marshall to and from San Francisco and Ogden, also for -its liberal contribution to the Golden Jubilee held under auspices of -the society; and also to Irving M. Scott on part of the Union Iron -Works, for the invitation to the companions of Marshall and members of -this Society to visit the works, and the placing at our disposal their -tug for the trip, and further for the many courtesies extended to all -by the several officers connected with the works while there. -</p> -<p class="right">"J. H. JEWETT, President." -</p> -<p>On February 20th this note came: -</p> -<p class="right">"1316 HYDE STREET, SAN FRANCISCO, -</p> -<p class="right">"February 18, 1898. -</p> -<p>"<em>Mr. James S. Brown:</em> -</p> -<p>"Dear Sir: Your letter of the 16th inst, with the news that you -had arrived safely at home, has given me pleasure. I felt some -responsibility for my part in bringing four old men so far away from -home, but now that I know all have arrived in good health at Salt Lake, -I congratulate myself that events have turned out so favorably. I have -had no letter from Mr. Bigler or Mr. Smith, but they will write to me. -</p> -<p>"I spoke promptly to Mr. Spear, the secretary, about sending fifteen -dollars to pay for the expenses of your return trip, and I understood -him to promise that the money would be transmitted to you by check. -</p> -<p>"The Pioneer Society will long preserve a pleasant recollection of -the participation of the four companions of Marshall in our Jubilee -celebration, and personally I shall always be glad to hear of their -welfare. -</p> -<p class="centered">"Yours truly, -</p> -<p class="right">"JOHN S. HITTELL." -</p> -<p>Here is the closing communication in relation to my latest visit to -California and the occasion which caused it: -</p> -<p class="right">"San Francisco, March 9, 1898. -</p> -<p>"<em>Mr. James S. Brown, Salt Lake City:</em> -</p> -<p>"DEAR SIR: Enclosed please find a copy of the report of the reception -committee of the Golden Jubilee: -</p> -<p>"<em>To John H. Jewett, President of the California Pioneers:</em> -</p> -<p>"The reception committee appointed by the Society to receive its guests -attending the celebration of the Golden Jubilee on the 24th of January -last, begs leave to report that its task has been completed. -</p> -<p>"On the morning of January 22nd all the members of the committee -received and welcomed the four companions of Marshall on the overland -train at Oakland, and escorted them to the Russ House, where, under -the direction of President John H. Jewett, they were provided with -comfortable accommodations. -</p> -<p>"These four men, the only survivors of those who were with Marshall at -Coloma when he discovered gold there on Monday, the 24th of January, -1848, are: -</p> -<p>"I. Henry W. Bigler, born in Harrison County, West Virginia, August -28th, 1815, who in his diary made the only written record of the gold -discovery on the day of its occurrence. He is now a resident of St. -George, Utah. -</p> -<p>"2. Azariah Smith, born at Boylston, New York, on the 1st of August, -1828, who, on the first Sunday after the discovery, wrote in his diary -that gold had been found in the preceding week. -</p> -<p>"3. James S. Brown, born in Davison County, North Carolina, on the 4th -of July, 1828, who recollects that on the evening of January 24th, -1848, H. W. Bigler said he would write in his diary that something like -gold had been discovered, as it might be important some day. He resides -in Salt Lake City. -</p> -<p>"4. Wm. J. Johnston, born near New Baltimore, Ohio, on the 21st of -August, 1824, and now resides in Ramah, New Mexico. -</p> -<p>"These four men are all clear in mind, and for their years, strong and -active in body. -</p> -<p>"In the procession on the 24th they occupied a carriage marked -'Companions of Marshall.' On the evening of that day, they were -entertained in our hall with special honor, and two days later they -held a reception in the same place. Various members of our Society, -and especially Captain McKenzie, showed them much attention. They -were guests of honor at the Mining Fair on the opening evening. Hon. -Irving M. Scott, manager of the Union Iron Works, gave them a special -entertainment at his shipyard; and other citizens contributed to make -their stay in our city pleasant. The whole Jubilee week was a round of -festivity for them. -</p> -<p>"Messrs. Bigler and Smith were escorted to their returning train at -Oakland on the 31st of January. Mr. Johnston two days later, and Mr. -Brown in the next succeeding week. They all reached their homes safely, -and all have written to members of the committee acknowledging the -attention and honor shown to them by the Society of California Pioneers. -</p> -<p>"As they are the only persons now living who saw gold in the days of -its discovery, their attendance at our semi-centennial celebration -connected our Jubilee in a highly interesting manner with the great -event which it commemorated. We may add that personal acquaintance with -these venerable men has been a source of pleasure to all members of -this committee, as well as to many other Pioneers. -</p> -<p class="centered">"Respectfully submitted, -</p> -<p class="right">"JOHN S. HITTELL, Chairman. -<br>"ALMARIN B. PAUL, -<br>"W. H. PRATT." -</p> -<p>Upon my return home, I again gave attention to this autobiography, -which proved no light task, as my health has been far from good. -</p> -<p>On the 14th of December, 1899, a keen sorrow came to myself and family. -My son Homer, in his twenty-sixth year, died on that date, as a result -of injuries received at a cave-in at the Silver King mine, Park City, -Utah, three weeks before. When war broke out between Spain and the -United States in 1898, he enlisted in response to President McKinley's -call for volunteers, and became a member of Troop C, Utah Volunteer -Cavalry. After his return from California, where the cavalry was sent, -he was married, the event occurring two months before the accident -which cost him his life. On December 19, he was buried in Salt Lake -City, the funeral services being held at the Seventeenth Ward assembly -rooms. -</p> -<p>In the summer of 1898, I was added to the list of Utah's Old Folks, -attending the excursion to Lagoon, Davis County, in July, 1898, to -Geneva, Utah County, in July, 1899, and again at Lagoon on July 6, -1900. The Old Folks include all people over seventy years of age, -independent of creed, race or color; these are accorded receptions, -excursions, and similar happy courtesies, as marks of honor and respect -to the aged. The central committee having this highly appreciated -undertaking in charge has for its chairman the Presiding Bishop of the -Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. -</p> -<p>By the close of 1899, I had completed the preparation of my life's -history for publication in a neat volume, and soon thereafter arranged -for the printing, which at this date, July, 1900, is accomplished. Now -that I have reached the seventy-second annual milestone of my life, I -realize that the period for especially notable or thrilling events in -my mortal career is past; and in the publication of my autobiography, I -sincerely trust that this humble final extended labor on my part will -achieve the principle aim of its performance, that of doing good to -those who live after me, in the witness its record bears of the mercy, -power, and goodness of God, and the latter-day progress of His great -and loving design for the blessing and salvation of His children. With -this attainment, the influence of the record, LIFE OF A PIONEER, will -be in accord with the sincere desire and earnest effort of my soul -throughout life. -</p><p></p> - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Life of a Pioneer, by James S. Brown - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LIFE OF A PIONEER *** - -***** This file should be named 54331-h.htm or 54331-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/4/3/3/54331/ - -Produced by the Mormon Texts Project -(http://mormontextsproject.org), with thanks to Heidi Billy - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/old/54331-h/images/brown.jpg b/old/54331-h/images/brown.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7140e2f..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h/images/brown.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/54331-h/images/chased.jpg b/old/54331-h/images/chased.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3ee9571..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h/images/chased.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/54331-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/54331-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 599f348..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/54331-h/images/fire.jpg b/old/54331-h/images/fire.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 31aeba6..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h/images/fire.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/54331-h/images/marquesas.jpg b/old/54331-h/images/marquesas.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3428668..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h/images/marquesas.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/54331-h/images/surrounded.jpg b/old/54331-h/images/surrounded.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c96e77c..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h/images/surrounded.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/54331-h/images/typical.jpg b/old/54331-h/images/typical.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 796f49a..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h/images/typical.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/54331-h/images/war.jpg b/old/54331-h/images/war.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e994860..0000000 --- a/old/54331-h/images/war.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/54331.txt b/old/54331.txt deleted file mode 100644 index f134b17..0000000 --- a/old/54331.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17313 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Life of a Pioneer, by James S. Brown - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Life of a Pioneer - Being the Autobiography of James S. Brown - -Author: James S. Brown - -Release Date: March 9, 2017 [EBook #54331] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ASCII - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LIFE OF A PIONEER *** - - - - -Produced by the Mormon Texts Project -(http://mormontextsproject.org), with thanks to Heidi Billy - - - - - - - - -[Image: James Brown] - - -LIFE OF A -PIONEER - - -BEING THE -AUTOBIOGRAPHY -OF -JAMES S. BROWN. - - -SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH: - -GEO. Q. CANNON & SONS CO., Printers. -1900. - - - -PREFACE. - -THE life of a pioneer in Western America always is full of peril -and hardship; often it has a large share of startling episodes and -thrilling adventures; not infrequently it is associated with notable -historic events; and the experiences met with develop independence of -character, firmness of purpose, and, in those whose spiritual nature -is not dwarfed by unworthy conduct, a sublime faith in God that when -man puts forth his highest endeavor all things beyond the scope of his -efforts are ordered for the best by the Great Ruler of the universe. -When to the pioneer's experiences are added those that come from travel -in foreign lands, perils of the sea, and the hostility of warlike foes, -the narrative of such a life cannot fail to be alike profitable and -interesting reading to both young and old. - -The subject of the autobiographical sketch in this volume feels that -he is not presumptuous in saying that each class of experience named -in relation to the pioneer and the traveler has been his. The perils -and hardships of the pioneers in whose work he commingled have been -the theme of song and story for half a century; the thrilling and -adventurous character of his experiences as frontiers-man and Indian -interpreter were of a kind notable even in those avocations; his -association with historic events of moment includes the period when -the territorial area of the great Republic was almost doubled by the -acquisition of the Pacific slope and the Rocky Mountain region, and -when the great gold discovery in California was made, since he was -a member of the famous Mormon Battalion and also was present at the -finding of gold in California, being the first man to declare--on -tests made by himself--that the little yellow flakes were the precious -metal; and his reliance on Deity is portrayed in his missionary work -at home and in foreign lands, with civilized people and among savages, -often in circumstances when life itself apparently was forfeit to duty -conscientiously performed. - -In the following pages there is no claim to transcendent literary -merit. Yet the writer feels that the narrative is presented in the -plain and simple language of the people, with a clearness and force -of expression that will be pleasing and impressive to every reader -possessed of ordinary or of superior educational attainments; while -the very simplicity and directness of the language used, far from -embellishing the events described, prove an invaluable guide in -securing accuracy, that not an incident shall be overdrawn or given -undue importance. - -The purpose of the writer has been to relate the story of his life, for -the benefit and entertainment of his children and friends, and of all -others who may read it, and to do so with a strict regard for veracity; -for he feels that the numerous thrilling and sensational incidents in -his life were sufficiently exciting to bear a toning down that comes -from calm contemplation when the agitation of the immediate occurrence -has passed, rather than to need the coloring of a graphic pen. In such -a presentation, too, he feels that the result of his labors in this -respect will be a further step in carrying out that which has been the -leading purpose of his life, namely, to do good to all mankind, to the -glory of God. - -With a fervent desire and firm confidence that every worthy aim in -presenting this autobiography shall be achieved, and shall find a -vigorous and ennobling response in the hearts of those who read it, the -leading events of his life, and the narration thereof, are respectfully -submitted to his family and friends by - -THE AUTHOR. - - - -CONTENTS. - -CHAPTER I. - -Home of the Author--A Career of Thrilling Experiences--His Birth -and Parentage--Early Avocations--Migration from North Carolina -to Illinois--Life on the Frontier--Dangers to Early Settlers--A -Frontiersman--Father's Advice--More Settlers Come--Churches and -Schools--Limited Opportunities--Frozen Feet--Unimpressionable to the -Preaching of the Time--Talk of a New Religion, Prophets, Miracles, -etc.--Prosecution of the New Church--"Showers of Stars"--Popular -Adverse Views of the Mormons--The Mormons Driven from Missouri -Into Illinois--Mormon Elder Comes to Preach--Converts Uncle -James Brown--Preaches Again--Preparations to Mob the Elder--His -Scriptural Doctrine Disconcerts Enemies and Secures him Friends--His -Discourse--Effect on Young James S. Brown of the First Gospel Sermon to -him--His Testimony to the Spirit and Truth of the Elder's Message. - -CHAPTER II. - -Persecuted by Playmates--Give Them an Effective Check--Fight -with Wild Beasts--Parents Join the Mormons--The Author Holds -Back--Assassination of Joseph and Hyrum Smith--Mormons Leave Illinois -for the West--Exciting Times--My Winter's Work--Father Decides to -Wait a While Before Leaving Illinois--My Determination to go with the -Mormons--Confide a Secret to my Mother--A New Consultation--Change In -the Family Plans--Father Prepares to Start--Gives me Permission to -Go--Thinks of Leaving me because of My Illness--I Feel to Prefer Death -to Being Left Behind. - -CHAPTER III. - -Start for Nauvoo--Taken Severely Ill--The Lord Answers my Prayer -for Relief--Pass through Carthage--In Nauvoo "The Beautiful," -but Almost Deserted City--Scene on the Iowa Shore--Cross the -Mississippi--Curious Make-up of the Exiles' Teams--The Bad Roads--Stuck -in the Mud--Repairing Camps--Good Order Maintained--Unnecessary -Killing of Game Forbidden--Reach Grand River and Put In a Crop--Learn -of the Call for the Mormon Battalion--Apostles as Recruiting -Officers--Call for Volunteers--Response by the Camp--Received into -the church by Baptism--Filled with the Love of the Gospel--Get the -Spirit to Enlist--Consult my Relatives and Ezra T. Benson--An Elder's -Promise--Join the Mormon Battalion. - -CHAPTER IV. - -Start for the Battalion Rendezvous--A Journey of Hardship--In the -Mormons' Camp on Missouri River--First Experiences in the Army--Blessed -by Apostles--Prophetic Address by President Brigham Young--The -Battalion starts on its Long Journey--Doing Camp Duty--Heavy Storms and -Insufficient Rations--Hard Experiences--At Fort Leavenworth--Mexican -Mules as a Cure for Egotism--Colonel Allen Taken Ill--On the Santa Fe -Road--Suffering from Thirst--Sickness among the Troops--Dr. G. B. -Sanderson, a Tyrannical Quack--Army Merchants--Order of Marching. - -CHAPTER V. - -Crossing of the Kaw River--Indian Farmers--Fierce Storm on Stone Coal -Creek--Crossing a Creek with Precipitous Banks--Ruins of an Ancient -City--Wagonload of Sick Upset in a Stream--Sad News of Col. Allen's -Death--Dispute over His Successor--Military Rules Disregarded In -Settling The Question--Troops Dissatisfied--Sickness In Camp--Harshness -of the New Commander, Lieutenant Colonel Smith--Brutality of the Doctor ---Doses of Objectionable Medicine in an Old Iron Spoon--In the Comanche -Indian Country---Abuse from Lieutenant Colonel Smith--Scarcity of -Fuel--Buffalo Chips--Cooking Food under Great Difficulties--Increase of -Sickness--Up the Grand Valley of the Arkansas--Detachment of Sick Sent -to Pueblo--Mirages--Herds of Buffalo--On the Sick List--Reach the Rocky -Mountains--Prehistoric Ruins--In Mexican Villages--Arrival at Santa Fe. - -CHAPTER VI. - -Exemplary Conduct of the Mormon Troops--Lieutenant Colonel P. St. -George Cooke Arrives and Assumes Command--A Welcome Change--Another -Detachment of Sick, also the Laundresses, Sent to Pueblo--Selecting -Men to Continue the Journey to California--Reducing the -Baggage--Difficulties of the 1,100 Miles Journey Ahead--Poor -Equipment Therefor--Leave Santa Fe--Roads of Heavy Sand--On One-third -Rations--Hardships Increase--Galled Feet and Gnawing Stomachs--More -Sick Men for Pueblo--Leaving the Last Wagons--Mules and Oxen In a Pack -Train--In an Unknown Country--Hunting a Pass over the Mountains--Alarm -of an Enemy--A Beaver Dam--Crossing the Rio Grande Del Norte--Great -Suffering Among the Troops. - -CHAPTER VII. - -Pushing to the West--Overhearing a Conversation with Col. Cooke--The -Colonel Fears the Men Will Starve--No Berries, not even Bark Of Trees, -for Food--True State of Affairs as to the Outlook Kept from Most of the -Troops--Hides, Intestines, and even soft Edges of Hoofs and Horns of -Animals Eaten--"Bird's Eye Soup."--In a Snowstorm--Relics of Ancient -Inhabitants--Camp without Water--Old Silver and Copper Mines--Hardest -Day of the Journey--Men Appear as if Stricken with Death--The Writer -so Ill as to be Unable to Travel Longer, and Expects to Die--Uncle -Alexander Stephens Comes with Water and Revives Him--Awful Suffering in -Camp--Reported Sick Next Morning--Brutal Dr. Sanderson Gives a Deadly -Dose of Laudanum, but the Writer Vomits it After Being Made Fearfully -Sick--In Terrible Distress for Days--Healed by the Laying on of Hands -of the Elders of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints - -CHAPTER VIII. - -On the Summit of the Rocky Mountains--Crossing the Backbone of the -North American Continent--Review of the Journey--Graves Opened by -Wolves--Mutilated Bodies--An Unparalleled Journey of Hardship--The -Prospect Ahead--A Matter of Life and Death--Start Down the Pacific -Slope--Descending the Cliffs with Wagons--One Vehicle Slips and is -reduced to Kindling Wood and Scrap Iron--Into a New Climate--Change -in the Character of Vegetation--Wild Horses and Cattle--Attacked by -Wild Cattle--Several Men Hurt and one Mule Gored to Death--A Number -of Cattle Killed--Supply of Beef--Reach the Pan Pedro River--Traveling -Through a Heavy Growth of Mesquit and Chapparal--Approach the Mexican -Garrisoned Town of Tucson--News of Approach of a Large American Army -Sent to the Mexicans--Order Issued by Colonel Cooke. - -CHAPTER IX. - -On the Trail to Tucson--Excitement In the Town--Meet Mexican -Soldiers--Our Numbers Overrated by the Indians--Mexican Commander -under Orders to Oppose us--Colonel Cooke Announces his Wish to Pass on -Without Hostilities--Arrest of Corporal Cassaduran, son of the Mexican -Commander at Tucson, and other Mexicans who are Held as Hostages -for the Return of our Interpreter--The Interpreter is Liberated--An -Armistice Proposed--Surrender of Tucson Demanded--Mexican Prisoners -Released--Surrender is Refused--Colonel Cooke orders the Battalion to -Prepare for Battle--Advance toward the Town--Flight of the Mexicans--At -the Gates of Tucson--Our Line of Battle--Address by Colonel Cooke--We -Enter the Town, and Pass Through to Camp--Purchases of Wheat, -Corn, etc.--The battalion nearly Starved--Night Alarm of a Mexican -Attack--Difficulties of Getting into Line--No Enemy in Sight--Start -Across the Gila Desert--Agony on the Burning Sands and Alkali -Flats--Strengthened by the Divine Blessing--Reach the Gila River. - -CHAPTER X. - -On the Gila River--Pima Indian Village--Welcome Gifts from the -Pimas--Among the Maricopa Indians--Asleep on the Trail--Visit from -a Bear--Loss of Provisions Through an Attempt to Float a Quantity -Down the Gila--Hard Traveling--Crossing the Colorado River--Gloom In -the Camp--Lower and Upper California--Terrible March over the Tierra -Caliente, or Hot Lands--Digging Wells for Brackish Water--Advance -Guard Reach a Mountain Spring--Water Carried back to Revive the -Fainting Troops--Last Spoonful of Flour Used--Dividing the Rations--In -the Canyons of the Sierra Nevada--Hewing Roads through Rocks and -Brush--Feeding on Live Acorns and Green Mustard--News of Victories -by United states Troops in California--Preparing to Engage the -Retiring Mexican Army--First House Seen in California--Beef Without -Salt--Trade for Acorn Mush--Heavy Storm and Flood In Camp--a Few Pounds -of Flour Secured--Dancing in Mud and Water--Receive Orders to go to -Los Angeles--Discover a Body of Troops in Line of Battle--Advance -to the Attack--Supposed Foe Proves to be Friendly Indians--Presence -of the Mormon Battalion prevents an Intended Attempt by Mexicans to -Retake California, also an Uprising of Californians Against the United -States--On a Battlefield where General Kearney had Fought--Relics -of the Encounter--Prophecy of President Brigham Young and its -Fulfillment--Source of His Inspiration. - -CHAPTER XI. - -Ordered to San Diego--First View of the Pacific Ocean--Rumors -of the Enemy--Complimentary Order, by Lieut. Col. Cooke, on -the Achievements of the Mormon Battalion--Reported Hostility of -Col. Fremont to Gen. Kearney--Living on Beef Alone--Obtain some -Flour--Routine of the Camp--Ordered to Los Angeles--Damage by an -Earthquake--Wild Horses and Cattle Driven Into the Sea--Arrival at -Los Angeles--Rumors of an Attack--Constructing a Fort--Guarding Cajon -Pass--Surrounded by Wild Cattle--Take Refuge In a Ravine--Col. Fremont -Arrested--Site of San Bernardino--Getting out a Liberty Pole--Brush -with the Indians--Clearing Los Angeles of Dogs--Wickedness in the -Town--Brutality of Bull Fights, Horse Racing, etc.--Always Ready for -an Attack--First Raising of the Stars and Stripes on a Liberty Pole in -California. - -CHAPTER XII. - -Term of Enlistment Expires--Battalion Members Preparing to Return to -their Families--One company Re-enlists--An Insolent Spaniard--Pistol -Snapped in the Writer's Face--Almost a Deathblow--Desperate Fight -Stopped by Bystanders--Serious Trouble with Another Spaniard--Learn -the Lesson to Avoid those who Gamble or Drink Intoxicants--Spanish -Character--Class of California's Inhabitants in 1847--Condition of the -Country--Appearance of the Towns and Villages--Difficulty in Securing -an Outfit for Members of the Battalion to Journey Eastward. - -CHAPTER XIII. - -Mormon Battalion Mustered out of Service--One Hundred and Fifty -Members Organize to Return Fast to the Rocky Mountains--Start on the -Journey--Difficulties of the Route--Dealing with Wild Horses and -Cattle Stampede of a Pack Animal--Chase Into an Indian Camp--Lost All -Night in a Swamp--Suffering on the Desert for Lack of Water--Arrive -Near Sutter's Fort--On the Site of Sacramento Party Decide to Remain -Over for the Year, and Obtain Employment--Meet Captain J. A. Sutter -and James W. Marshall--Proposition to Capt. Sutter--Engaged to Work -on a Sawmill--Proceedings at the Millsite--Mill Started Up--The Writer -Engaged to Direct Indians Laboring at the Tail Race--Conversation with -Mr. Marshall--Marshall Talks About Finding Gold--He and the Writer make -a Search for Gold, but Finding None, Defer the Investigation till Next -Morning--Marshall's Faith in his Being Successful In Discovering the -Precious Metal. - -CHAPTER XIV. - -Arrival of the Members of Mormon Battalion at Sutter's Fort Opens the -Way for the Discovery of Gold In California--James W. Marshall out -Early on January 24, 1848--"He is Going to Find a Gold Mine"--Regarded -as a "Notional" Man--"Boys, I have got Her Now!"--Testing the Scales -of Metal--"Gold, Boys, Gold!"--First Proclamation of the Great Gold -Discovery--Second and Third Tests--All Excitement--Three or Four -Ounces of Gold Gathered--Agree to Keep the Discovery Secret--Find -the Precious Metal Farther Down the Stream--How the Secret Leaked -out--More Discoveries--First Publication of the News made in a -Mormon Paper--Washing out the Metal--First Gold Rocker--Gathering -Gold--Part taken by Mr. Marshall, the Mormons and Capt. Sutter in the -Discovery--Misfortunes of Sutter and Marshall--Account of the Gold -Discovery Certified to by Several Eye Witnesses - -CHAPTER XV. - -Prepare to Leave California--Snow in the Mountains Causes a Wait till -the Last of June--Discover a Rich Gold Prospect--Leave it to Make the -Journey over the Mountains--No Regrets at Abandoning the Mines in -Answer to a Call of Duty--Camp Organized in Pleasant Valley--Start -on the Trip--Three Members of the Party Ahead, Looking out the -Route, Found Murdered by Indians at Tragedy Springs--Covering the -Bodies--Stampede of Animals--Guarding Against Hostile Indians--Crossing -the Divide in Snow--The Writer Fooled--Take Two Indians Prisoners--Cutting -a Road--Horses Stolen by Indians--Pursuit to Capture them--In -Carson Valley--Along Humboldt River--At Steamboat Springs--Over the -Desert--Member of the Party Wants to Kill Indians--The Writer's -Emphatic Objection--Indians Wound Stock--Addison Pratt as a Lucky -Fisherman--Writer Trades with an Indian--The Red Man's Trick--Writer -Pursues him into the Indian Camp--Escape from Danger--Journey to Bear -River--Hot and Cold Water Springs--Reach Box Elder--View the Great -Salt Lake--Arrive at Ogden, where Captain Brown and some Saints had -Settled--Journey to the Mormon Camp on what is now Pioneer Square, Salt -Lake City--Heartily Welcomed by Relatives and Friends--Rejoicing and -Thanksgiving. - -CHAPTER XVI. - -Contentment Among the Saints in Great Salt Lake Valley--Rude Dwellings -and Short Rations--Trying Experiences--Rescue of Mormon Battalion -Members from Starvation--Carry News of California Gold Discovery to -the East--Re-union of Mormon Battalion Members--Addresses by the -First Presidency and Others--Settling a New Country--Organization of -Minute Men--Cold Winter--The Gold Fever--Tenor of the Preaching and -Prophesyings of those Times--Instructing the People in Industrial -Pursuits--Policy Towards the Indians. - -CHAPTER XVII. - -Scarcity of Food in the Great Salt Lake Valley--Wild Vegetables -for Greens--Fair Prospects for Crops--Clouds of Crickets lay -Bare the Fields--People struggle Against the Pests Almost to -Despair--Vast Flocks of Sea Gulls, as the Clouds of Heaven, Come to -the Rescue--Destruction of the Crickets--People Praise the Lord--The -Writer Invited to a Meeting, Ordained a Seventy, and Called with -Others to go on a Mission to the Society Islands--Words of Presidents -Brigham Young and Heber C. Kimball--Preparations to Travel to -California with an Emigrant Company--Description of the Route by -Captain Jefferson Hunt--Start on My Mission--Prophecy by President -Willard Richards--Battle with Indians at Provo Averted by Apostle C. -C. Rich--Prospects of Utah Valley to Support Population--Overtake the -Emigrant Company--Discussions at Beaver River--Company Starts for -Walker's Pass--Turned Back by Scarcity of Water--Experience on the -Desert--Dissensions in the Company--Futile Attempt to send some of -the Members Back--Apostle C. C. Rich Foresees Further Trouble, and -Endeavors to Save the Mormon Part of the Train by Advising Them to -Return to the Old Spanish Trail--Methodist and Campbellite Ministers -Incite the Company Against their Mormon Guide, Captain Hunt--Main -Company Disregards Captain Hunt's Warning of Danger, and Leaves the Old -Spanish Trail to Search for the Route Through Walker's Pass--Mormons go -with Captain Hunt on the Southern Route. - -CHAPTER XVIII. - -Caught in a Snowstorm--Via the Santa Clara and Rio Virgen to -the Muddy--News of Sad Disaster to the Emigrant Company--Making -Charcoal and Nails--An Apostle as a Blacksmith--Searching for Water -on the Desert--Crossing an Alkali Stream--Discover Gold near Salt -Springs--Hurrying on over the Desert--Cattle Poisoned at Bitter -Springs--Killing Animals to Relieve their Sufferings--First Wagon -over Cajon Pass, going West--Severe Journey to the Summit of the -Pass--All get Over Safely--Sense of Great Relief--Grass and Water -In Abundance--Overtaken by survivors of the Emigrant Company--Their -Story of Terrible Suffering--Divide Provisions with Them--Celebrating -Christmas, 1849--Continuing the Journey North--Spanish Warning in a -Cemetery to Indians--Cruelty of the Spaniards to the Indians--The -Writer Placed In Charge of the Company--Directed to go to the Gold -Mines. - -CHAPTER XIX. - -Journeying Toward the Gold Diggings--Threatened by Wild -Horses--Difficulties of Traveling--Convocation of the Feathered -Creation--Rejoin Our Friends--Ferrying Across a River--Strike a Gold -Prospect--On a Prospecting Tour--An Agreement that Failed--Instructed -to go to San Francisco to proceed on a Mission--Trip to -Stockton--Gamblers, Sharpers and Miners at that Place--A Temptation -Overcome--Arrive in San Francisco--Welcomed by Saints--Receive Kind -Treatment--On Hoard a Vessel Bound for Tahiti. - -CHAPTER XX. - -Sailing for the South Pacific--Severe Attack of Seasickness--Becalmed -in the Tropics--Intense Heat--Marquesas Islands--Cannibals--Reach -Tahiti--Land at Papeete--Meet with Friends--Hearty Welcome--Preaching -to the Natives--Animosity of Protestants and Catholics Toward the -Mormons--Jealousy of French Government Officials on the Island--Watched -by Detectives--Six Natives Baptized--Learning the Language--Rumors -of an Intention to Expel the Mormons--Elders B. F. Grouard and T. -Whitaker Arrested--Appeal for Aid--Their Release and Return to their -Missionary Labors--Meet with Brother Pratt Again--Interview with the -Governor--That Official Refuses Elders Pratt and Brown Permission to -Visit Another Island--Scarcity of Food at Huaua--Eating Seasnails and -Bugs--Strange Dishes of Food--Almost Perish from Thirst--Visit to -Tiarara--Acquiring the Language. - -CHAPTER XXI. - -Offer of Transportation to the Island of Tubuol--Apply to the Governor -for Permission to go--Troops on Parade--Suite of Queen Pomere--Call -on the Governor--Conversation in Three Languages--Directed to Come -Again Next Day--Put off by the Governor--Latter Refuses the Permission -Asked--His Prejudice Against the Mormons--Demands a Statement of Their -Doctrines--Not Required of Other Denominations--Writer's Interview -with the Governor--Return to Huaua--Other Elders Requested to Assemble -then--Bitterness of Protestant Ministers--Natives comment on Mormons -Learning Their Language Quickly. - -CHAPTER XXII. - -Visit to Papeete--Duck-Hunting Trip--A Peculiar Woman--Along a -Perilous Path--An Opinion of English Ministers--Arrival of S. A. -Dunn--Learn of More Missionaries Arriving at Tubuoi--News from my -Father and Others--Letters from the First Presidency and Some of the -Apostles--Written Statement Sent to the Governor of Tahiti--Visit the -Governor--Our Statement Rejected--List of Questions and Statement -Presented by the Governor--Reply of Elder A. Pratt--Objections by the -Governor--Permission given us to Travel and Preach on the Islands. - -CHAPTER XXIII. - -Return to Huahua--Heavy Rainstorms--Refusal of an Offer to be -Carried Over a Stream--Perilous Swimming Feat--Episode with a Wild -Boar--Start on a Trip Around the Island--Obtain a Loaf of Bread--People -not Desirous of Listening to the Mormon Elders--Customs of the -Natives--Reputation of Protestant Clergy on Tahiti--With the Chief -Magistrate of Uairai--Across a Small Bay in a Canoe--French Garrison at -the Isthmus--With my Friend Pohe--Review of a Hard Journey--Again at -Huaua. - -CHAPTER XXIV. - -Scarcity of Food--Traveling In Heavy Rains--Call on a Protestant -Minister--Arrival of Another Missionary and Letters from Home--Visitors -from Metia--Hold a Sacrament Meeting--Go to Papara--Abused by the -Protestant Minister--Preach to the People--Young Woman Miraculously -Healed at Baptism--Great Excitement--Rage of the Protestant -Ministers--Persecution Instituted--Arrested for Preaching--Released on -Promising to Return to Huaua--Plenty of Friends--Unintentional Escape -from Gen d'Armes--Arrival at Papeete--Charge on which Officers seek to -Arrest me--Abused by Rev. Mr. Howe--A Quiet Answer Calls Out Cheers -from the Crowd--Tide Turns in my Favor--Excitement Calms Down, and -Efforts to Arrest Me Cease. - -CHAPTER XXV. - -Several Baptisms--Visit Papara Again--Coldness of the People--Bitter -Efforts of the Protestant Ministers--Natives Visit Me In -Secret--Anti-Mormon Mass Meeting--Foolish and Vicious scheme to -Ensnare the Writer--It is Easily Defeated--Return to Papeete--More -Baptisms--Departure of Elder Dunn--I am left Alone--Brethren come -from Tubuoi--Elders Appointed to Labor in Different Islands--The -writer Assigned to the Tuamotu Group--Leave on the Elders' Schooner -the _Ravai_ or _Fisher_--Meet with Contrary Winds--Driven to Various -Islands--Encounter a Violent storm--In Great Peril--Vessel Beyond -Control--Storm calms Down--Reach Tubuoi--First Preaching of the Gospel -there, in 1844. - -CHAPTER XXVI. - -Hearty Welcome in Tubuoi--Start for Tuamotu--Reach Papeete, -Tahiti--Visit to Huaua--Leave Tahiti--Writer gets Relief from -Seasickness--Broiled Fish and Cocoanuts--in a School of Whales--Thrown -onto a Coral Reef--Total Wreck Imminent--Three Persons yet Ashore--Boat -goes out to Sea--Wreck of Elder Dunn's Party--Three Days In the Sea, -Clinging to a Capsized Boat--Clothing Torn off by Sharks--Skin Taken -off by the Sea and Sun--Reach the Island of Anaa--Recognized by a -Man who had seen me in a Dream--Preaching and Baptizing--Many of -the Natives Church Members--Make a Rude Map of the California Gold -Fields--Tell of Having been in the Mormon Battalion--Catholic Priests -Elicit this Information as Part of a Scheme to have me Expelled from -the Island. - -CHAPTER XXVII. - -Invited to Organize Schools--Catholic Priests Displeased at -Mormon Success--Good Attendance at the Schools--Threats by the -Priests--Discomfiture of the Latter--Feast and Address of Welcome by -the Natives to the Writer--Preaching and Baptisms--Catholic Priests -seize a Schoolhouse Belonging to the Saints--Disturb a Saints' -Meeting--More Baptisms--Further Annoyance by Catholics--People Decide -Against Them--Town Officials Appealed to--They Uphold the Decision in -Favor of the Mormons--Priests Write to Governor Bonard, Making False -Charges Against me--A Peculiar Dream. - -CHAPTER XXVIII. - -Go to Temaraia--Miraculous Healings--Child Assailed by an Evil -Spirit--Strange Occurrence--Gift of Sea Biscuits--Perform a Surgical -Operation--Hammering out Teeth--The Writer as a Surgeon and -Dentist--Roughs Disturbs Meeting--They are Stricken with Death--Fatal -Sickness among the People--Lower Classes of Natives at a Feast--Their -Reverence for Religious Services and Preachers--Two Parties of Natives -in Battle Array--Fighting Averted by the Writer Addressing the -Contending Factions in Favor of Peace--Wars among the Natives--Some -of their Practices--Gathering and Keeping Human Heads--Causes of -Cannibalism--Conversation with one who had been a Cannibal--Flavor of -Native and White Men's Flesh Compared--The Tastiest Part of the Human -Body. - -CHAPTER XXIX. - -Hold Conference in Putuhara--Instructions to the Saints--Go to -Otapipi--Opposition at Temaraia--Officials Bribed by Catholic -Priests--Arrival of a French Warship--The Writer is Arrested while -Expounding the Scriptures to the Natives--Cause of Arrest is False -Accusation by Catholic Priests--I Plead Not Guilty--Ordered Taken -to Tahiti--Painful Prison Experience--Cannibals in Custody--Start -for the Ship--Sympathy of the Natives--Hurried into the Ship's -Boat--In a School of Whales--A Frightened Boat Load--On Board the -Warship--Uncomfortable Quarters--Questionable French Courtesy--Among -Cockroaches, Filth, and Inconveniences--Soft Side of a Plank for a Bed. - -CHAPTER XXX. - -Voyage to Papeete--In a Tahitian Dungeon--Cruel Treatment--Write to -Friends--Kindness of the American Hotel Keeper--Brought Before the -Governor--False Charges Read, and Plea of Not Guilty Entered--Perjured -Testimony Against Me--Forbidden to Look at, or even Cross-Examine -Witnesses--Secrecy of the Alleged Trial--Demand My Rights as -an American Citizen--Confusion of the Governor--Returned to My -Cell--American Consul takes up my Case--Gives Bonds that I will Leave -the Protectorate--Elders and Friends Call on me--My Visitors Allowed to -Say but Little, and Sometimes Excluded--Decision of the Governor that I -must Leave the Society Islands--Fair Trial Refused me--Letter from the -American Consul--Taken to the Consul's Office--Advised to Leave--Elders -Decide that I should go Outside of the French Protectorate--Set Sail -from Papeete. - -CHAPTER XXXI. - -Leaving Tahiti under the Order of Banishment--Supply of Provisions -Exhausted--Caught in a Calm--Suffering from Lack of Food--Reach -Tubuoi--Go Ashore upon Invitation of the Queen--Sail for Raivavai--Meet -Elder Pratt There--Left Alone on the Island--Savage Character of the -Natives--The Governor a Friend--Visit from House to House--People -Generally Unwilling to Receive the Gospel--Council Decides that I must -Leave the Island or be Killed--A Time of Excitement--Storm Passes for -a while--Baptize Twenty Persons--Noted Chief and the Heiress to the -Throne Join the Church--More Bitterness and Excitement--Two Parties of -Natives Meet to Engage in Battle--Manage to Reconcile Them and Prevent -Bloodshed--Further Threats Against the Mormons--Some Church Members -feel to Retaliate but are Restrained--Passengers Arrive with False -and Scandalous Stories About the Mormons--Persecution Increases--The -Few Saints on the island Become Sorrowful and Discouraged--Protestant -Ministers Advise Expulsion of the Saints--Renewal of the Faith and Zeal -of the Church Members. - -CHAPTER XXXII. - -People Gather at a Feast, and to Decide what to do with the -Mormons--Threats to have Roast Missionary--Saints hold Prayer and -Testimony Meeting--Kept Awake all Night--Council of Natives Decides -to Roast and Eat me--Fire is Built--Men Sent to Drag me to the -Council--Promises of Presidents Brigham Young and Willard Richards Come -to my Mind--All Fear Is Banished--Saints and Their Enemies Ordered -to Separate--All but Two Mormons Stand by me--Sublime Courage of a -Native and His Wife--The Charge Against Me--I Appeal to the Bible, but -our Enemies Refuse to be Guided by the Law of God--Notified of the -Decision that I am to be Burned--Spirit of the Lord Rests upon me in -Great Power, Inspiring me to Defy our Enemies--Spirit of Confusion -Enters our Foes--They Quarrel and Fight With Each Other--Difficulty In -Restraining Church Members--Deliverance which the Lord Wrought out for -me--I am Allowed to proceed Unmolested--Meet a Member of the Council -which Condemned me to Death--His Testimony that a Pillar of Light -Descended from Heaven and Rested on me, Filling them with Fear--No more -Anti-Mormon Councils--Natives show no Disposition to Receive the Gospel. - -CHAPTER XXXIII. - -Long time without News from Home--Letter from Elder B. F. -Grouard--Released from my Missionary Labors in the Islands--Little -Opportunity to Leave Raivavai--Natives Build a Schooner--Fast and -Pray to Learn whether I should sail on the Vessel--The Answer--Sail -for Rapia--Driven Back to Raivavai--Make a New Start--Arrive at -Rapia--Ridiculous Idea of the People Concerning a Mormon Elder--I am -Forbidden to go Ashore, on Pain of Death--Feeling is Modified Somewhat, -and I go Ashore--Battle Between the Natives--An Old Man Gives me -Food--Attend a Meeting, get Permission to Speak a Few Words and am -Ordered from the Island--Increase of Sentiment of Toleration--Invited -to Supper at the Governor's--Strange Custom of Women Waiting on -Men--Rather than Follow it, I Submit to being Called a Heathen. - -CHAPTER XXXIV. - -Determine to Preach to the People--Refused a House--Hold an Open-Air -Meeting--Strange Congregation--Six other Meetings--Visit a Native -King--He Commands me to Leave--I do so In Order to Avoid Being Put -to Death--Watermelons and Other Vegetables--Native Tradition of the -Peopling of the Islands--Visit of a Protestant Minister--Sail for -Tahiti--In a Heavy Storm--Prayers by Frightened Natives--I am Asked to -Pray with them, but Decline to Follow their Methods--Reach the Harbor -of Papeete--American Consul Obtains Permission for me to Land--Go -to Work with a Carpenter--Warned not to be Alone lest I should be -Killed--Watched by Gen d'Armes--Trouble at Anaa, and Arrest of Native -Mormons--These are Brought to Papeete--How they got Letters to me, and -their Replies--My Former Persecutors of Raivavai Come to Me for Advice, -and I Return Good for Evil. - -CHAPTER XXXV. - -Watched Closely by Gen d'Armes--Experience when at Prayer--Take Dinner -with the Rev. Mr. Howe--Dining with a Catholic Bishop--Impatience -of the Governor--Leave Tahiti on the _Abyssinia_--Curiosity of -Passengers and Sailors--Difficulty in Getting out of the Harbor--Hear -of More Trouble at Anaa--Captain's comment on Mormon Books--A -Waterspout--Crossing the Equator--Encounter a Terrible Storm--A -Tidal Wave--Ship Springs a Leak--Panic on Board--All Hands to the -Pumps--Stopping a Leak--Fair Weather Again. - -CHAPTER XXXVI. - -Arrive at San Francisco--A Wrecked Ship--The _Abyssinia_ -Condemned--Gathering Wreckage--Drunken sailors--My Trunk Held for -Hospital Fees--Go Ashore, where all Is Changed and Strange--My -Dilapidated Appearance--Seek Guidance of the Lord--Wander -Almost in Despair--Meet an Old Friend--Find a Home--My Trunk -Released--Meet Elders Going on Missions--Well Treated by Saints and -Strangers--Providences of the Lord--Outward Bound Elders Entrusted -Money to me for their Families--Engage to Carry Mail to Los Angeles--On -a Steamer for San Pedro--Taken Severely Ill. - -CHAPTER XXXVII. - -Become Desperately Ill--Nursed Back to Consciousness--Kindness -of an Aged Spanish Couple--Belt with Money Entrusted to me -Disappears--Intense Anxiety--Discover the Money--Great Suffering--Land -at San Pedro--Left on the Beach--Drag Myself to the Shelter of an Old -Wall--Kindness of a Spaniard and His Wife--A Terrible Night--Seek -a Passage to Los Angeles with Freighters--Refusals--Meet a Kind -Teamster--Reach Los Angeles--Dumped on the Street--Find Shelter, but -a Chilly Welcome--Start Next Morning, Sick and Hungry, to Find a New -Place--So Ill I have to Lie Down in the Street--Two Friends from San -Bernardino--Am Told that I have the Smallpox--My Friends Give me Money -and start in Search of a House where I can be Cared for--Failing to -Secure a Room, they Engage the City Marshal to get a Place, and they -Leave for San Bernardino--I wander for Shelter, but Doors are Closed, -and People Avoid me--Lodge in a Doctor's Office while the Doctor is -out--Scare the People by Shouting "Smallpox!"--The Doctor Returns but -Leaves me in Possession. - -CHAPTER XXXVIII. - -City Marshal and Doctor Come to Remove me--Taken to a Deserted House, -which had been Used as a Sheepfold--Bedded In Sheep Manure--An Indian -Nurse who Becomes Frightened--Spanish Nurse Sent to me--In a boat with -Patient Job--My Fever Increases--Attacked by Robbers--Relieved by -City Marshal with Posse--Marshal takes the Money I have in my care, -for Safe Keeping--Spanish Nurse Scared off--Queer Sailor Nurse--He -Drinks Whisky, Sings and Dances--His Thoughtful Care of me--Visited -by my Cousin--Kindness of San Bernardino Saints--Recovering from my -Illness--My Clothing Burned--Heavy Expense Bill Against me--Tell the -City Marshal of my Arrival in California as a United States Soldier in -the Mexican War--Kindness of the Marshal--Los Angeles Assumes the Bill -for Medical Attention Given me--Start for San Bernardino--Exhausted -on the Journey--Almost Die of Thirst--Relieved by a Party of Spanish -Ladies--Kindness of Spanish Families--Arrive at San Bernardino and Meet -Friends and Relatives - -CHAPTER XXXIX. - -Report my Mission--Prepare to Continue the Journey to Utah--Have -to Remain at San Bernardino for a Time--Sickness among the -People--Instances of Healing by Administration--Engage to Travel -with a Pack Train to Salt Lake City--Get a "Bucking Mule"--Start on -the Journey--In a Hostile Indian Country--Signs of Danger--Prepare -for Trouble--Sudden Appearance of an Indian--Our Party Want to -Shoot--I Protest, and make Friends with the Indian--Other Red Men -Appear--Difficulty of Restraining our Party--I converse with the -Indians, who tell of a Camp of Mormons and Mexicans a short Distance -Ahead--How I Understood the Indians--Discover the Camp Spoken of--Rest -a Day--Move Toward the Santa Clara--Danger Ahead--A Fire Across our -Path--We Dash Through It--Hostile Indians--An Exciting chase--Meet -Apostles A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich--Arrive at Cedar City--Stop -at Parowan--Journey North, Preaching en Route--Reach Salt Lake -City--Settle with the People for whom I have Money--Report to President -Young--Preach In the Tabernacle--Released from my Mission--Cost of my -Mission to the Society Islands. - -CHAPTER XL. - -Travel on Foot to Ogden--Well Received by Relatives and -Friends--Reply to Inquiries by the People Regarding the Society -Islands and the Inhabitants Thereof--Called to go to Fort Hall -Order Countermanded--Called on a Mission to the Indians--Design of -the Mission--Organization of the Company, and Start from Salt Lake -City--Hard Work of the Journey--Attacked by Wolves--Fatal Duel at -Fort Bridger--Plans of Desperadoes--We go to Smith's Fork--Build -a Blockhouse--Arrival of More Men and Supplies--Threatening -Attitude of the Indians--Writer made Sergeant of the Guard and -Quartermaster--Instructions from Elder Orson Hyde--Life in our -new Camp--Cold Weather and Wild Beasts--Learning the Indian -Language--Give Shelter to Indians--Desperado Chief Killed by one of -his Men--Animals Perish from Cold and Starvation--Terrific Storms and -Snowdrifts--Saving our Stock--Shoshone Indians Ask for and Receive -Assistance--Hunt tor Antelope Falls--A Bachelor's Dance--Raising a -Liberty Pole--Partitioning out Lands--Plowing and Planting--Arrival of -and Instructions by Elder Orson Hyde--Selections for a Special Mission -to the Indians--Organization of Green River County. - -CHAPTER XLI. - -Set Apart by Elder Hyde for our Special Mission--Blessing Conferred -on the Writer--Discontent In Camp--Unity Again Prevails--Start on our -Journey--Warned at Green River to go no Farther--Not Deterred from -Performing our Mission--Proceed on our Journey--Futile Chase after -Buffalo--Scarcity of Water--A Welcome Snow Storm--Reach the Camp of -Washakie, the Shoshone Chief--Received with Caution--Tell the Chief -the Object of our Visit--Give him Bread and Sugar--Boiled Buffalo for -an Epicure Indian Powwow Called--Proceedings at the Council--Objection -to one of our Propositions, which we were not Annoyed at--Recital of -how Government Agents Sought to Supplant Washakie as Chief--Washakie a -Great Orator. - -CHAPTER XLII. - -Leave Washakie's Camp for the Other Portion of the Shoshone -Tribe--Indian Guide Leaves us--Following a Trail--Sight the Other -Camp--War Songs and Dances--Indians Preparing for War--Chief Gives -up his Lodge to us, Warning us of Men in his Camp he Cannot Control ---Indian Braves in War Paint--Surrounded by Fifteen Hundred or Two -Thousand Indians--Learn that L. B. Ryan, a White Desperado Chief, is -in Camp, and has sworn Vengeance on Mormons Escape seems Impossible, -but we Trust in God--Retire for the Night--Ryan and Seven Warriors -at our Lodge--Ryan Enters and Demands to know where we are from, and -our Business--He is Told, Threatens us, and Summons his Indian Braves -Inside our Lodge--Though the Enemy are two to one, we are Ready for -them--Prepare for a Fight to the Death--Ryan and his Men Leave the -Lodge, War Dance Outside--We Conclude to Sell our Lives as Dearly -as Possible--War Party Approach the Lodge and Slit it In a Number -of Places, then suddenly Depart--Our Lives being Spared, we Remain -in Camp till Next Day--The chief Befriends us, Warning us not to -Return the way we Came--Dispute as to the Route of Travel, and how -it is Settled--Satisfied that Ryan intended to Ambush us--Rainstorm -Obliterates our Tracks--Camp in the Rain--On the Alert for an -Enemy--Shoot a Buffalo--Ward and Davis give chase, while Bullock -and I continue on our Route--Camp at a ash--Bullock Taken very -Ill--A Terrible Night--Ward and Davis not Returning by Morning, we -Move on--Fear that Bullock will Die--Discover our Comrades in the -Canyon--Being Hungry, we Overeat--Another Night of Sickness--Emerge -from the Canyon--Press Forward to Green River--Welcomed by -Friends--Three of our Party go on to Fort Supply, and I Remain to meet -Chief Washakie. - -CHAPTER XLIII. - -Engaged as interpreter--Class of People at Green River--Appointed -Deputy Sheriff--Drover Threatens to Kill Boatmen Arrest Ordered--Ride -into the Outlaws' Camp--Bluffing the Captain--A Perilous Situation ---Parley with Drovers--Compromise Effected--Dealing with -Law-breakers--"Bill" Hickman as Sheriff Swimming Cattle Over Green -River--A Drover's Failure--Writer Employed to get Cattle Over--How it -is done Secret of Success--Arrival of Washakie--The Ferryman Offends -him--The Angry Indian Swears Vengeance on the White Man--His Parting -Threat--In Peril of an Indian Massacre. - -CHAPTER XLIV. - -Consternation at Washakie's Declaration--People Hurry across the -River--The Writer is Asked to Attempt a Reconciliation--Night too Dark -to Travel--Chief Washakie and Braves Appear at Sunrise--The Chief -notes that the People are Terror-Stricken, and Decides that he will be -their Friend--Troublous Exploits of Mountain Men--Sheriff's plan of -Arrest--How the Scheme Worked--Desperadoes Freed by the Court--Chasing -an Offender--Surrounded by his Associates--Coolness and Pluck of the -Sheriff Win--Ready to Return Home--A Trying Experience. - -CHAPTER XLV. - -Go to Fort Supply--Start back to Green River and meet O.P. Rockwell -at Fort Bridger--He brings me a Trader's License, also Goods to Trade -to the Indians--Being Late in the Season, We Store the Goods, and go -to Salt Lake City--Receive the Approval of Governor Young--Move to -Ogden--Accompany Governor Young as Interpreter--My Horse Stolen--Called -on a Mission to the Shoshones--On going to Salt Lake City, I am -Released--Ordered to take part In Disarming Indians at Ogden--A -Difficult Job--Chase to Mound Fort--Hand-to-hand Struggle with a -Powerful Savage--Indians Disarmed, but Sullen--Chief's Brother Offers -all his Possessions for his Gun--Precautions Taken to Feed the Indians -that Winter--Teach the Indian Language in School--Prosper In Business. - -CHAPTER XLVI. - -Another Mission to the Indians--Start for the Shoshone -Camp--Difficulties of Travel--Near the Crows and Blackfeet--A Dream -gives Warning of Danger--Discover a Large Body of Indians--No -Opportunity of Escape--Ride into the Camp of a Hunting and War -Party--Meet chief Washakie--A Day's March--Situation Critical--Hold a -Council--Present the Book of Mormon--All but Washakie Speak Against us -and the Book--Awaiting the Chief's Decision. - -CHAPTER XLVII. - -Washakie's Bold Attitude--Tells his Councilors they are Fools--Says the -White Men, who are Wise, have Books--Tells the Tradition of how the -Indians fell into Darkness--Great Spirit Angry at the Red Man--Advocates -that the Indians live like White People--His Powerful Speech Gains the -Day for us--Shoshone Tradition--We Start Home--A Hungry Trip--Return to -the Indians, Finding them Sullen--Fourth of July Celebration at Fort -Supply--Return Home. - -CHAPTER XLVIII. - -Affairs at Home--Start for Fort Supply--Illness of myself and -Family--Gift of Healing--Trouble with Indians at Fort Supply--Turbulent -Red Men--I Help one off my Bed--They Persist In Taking or Destroying -our Property--We Stop them--One Attempts to Kill me--Indians -Retire from the Fort--Almost a Conflict--I check the White Men -from Shooting--Indians Withdraw--We send to Governor Young for -Assistance--Our Stock and Guards Driven in--Indian Agent Appears with -Annuities--The Savages Submit--We Guard Day and Night--Indians more -Peaceful--Reinforcements Arrive from the Governor--Matters Quiet Down. - -CHAPTER XLIX. - -Start Home from Fort Supply--Camp alone at Needle Rook--Awakened by my -Horse--Surrounded by Wolves--Flash Powder all Night to keep off the -Wild Beasts--Reach Home--Supplies Short--Hardships of a Grasshopper -Year--Getting my cattle out of a Canyon--Perils of being Caught in the -Snow--Great Suffering--Breaking a Snow Road--Business Affairs. - -CHAPTER L. - -Called on a Mission to Deep Creek Indians--Short Time for the -Journey--Prepare for the Trip--Journey in the Desert--Horses -Stolen--Travel on Foot--Saved from Perishing with Thirst--Meet the -Indians--Could Understand and Speak to them--Indian Agent's Offer--I -act as interpreter--Preach to the Indians--On the Return Trip--Visit -Governor Young with a Delegation of Bannock Indians. - -CHAPTER LI. - -Utah Militia Organized--Elected Captain of a Company--Hear of -Johnston's Army--Scouting Party sent out--I am Chosen as Guide--Travel -to the Bear Lake Country--Cold Nights and Little Food--Complaint in -the Party--Prove that I am Right--Reach Lost Creek--Some of the Men -Object to Double Guard--A Discovery that Removes all Objections--Strike -the Trail of Horsemen--Prepare for Action--Take a Camp by Surprise--The -Men are Friends--Arrive at Ogden--Called to go on an Important -Errand--Tussle with an Indian--Fail in Getting Desired Information, and -Return to Ogden. - -Chapter LII. - -Off on Another Scout--Again on Bear River--Dream of Seeing -Troops--Dream Fulfilled--Send Word back of Discovery--Five Hundred -Cavalrymen--Heavy Storm--My only Remaining Companion taken Ill--He -is Healed and I am Stricken Down--Camp in the Snow--My companion, -Expecting me to die, Prepares to take my Body Home--He Returns, Prays -for me and I am Healed--Stricken Down Again--I Direct him to Leave -me and Return Home--He obeys Reluctantly--I Expect to die--Peculiar -Experiences--Four Young Men, sent by my Comrade, come to my Relief-- -Journey on--Lighting fire in a Storm--The Young Men Pray for me, and I -am Relieved--Traveling Homeward--Kind Treatment--Reach Ogden--Act as -Sexton--Guard over Spies--Utah Militia Recalled--Missionary Labors in -Weber County. - -CHAPTER LIII. - -Mormons Abandon their Homes and Move South--Prepare for the Worst--Go -to Payson--Affairs Being Settled, Return to Ogden---Called to go -East as a Missionary--Journey across the plains--Meet my Parents In -Iowa--Preaching and Traveling--My Father's Testimony--Missionary -Labors--Called to Missouri--Sent to bring a Herd of Cattle--Return to -my Parents' Home--Bid Farewell to Them--Purchasing Cattle. - -CHAPTER LIV. - -Given Charge of a Company to Cross the Plains to Utah--Composition -of the Camp--Start West--Perform Baptisms--Meet a War Party of -Sioux Indians--Place where A. W. Babbitt was Killed--Meet More -Indians--How Trouble was Avoided--Camp Life and Duties--Enter Salt Lake -Valley--Company Greeted by the Church Authorities--Report to President -Young and am Released--Trade at Camp Floyd--Experience with a Thief--Go -to Work on the Ogden Canyon Road--Hardships Endured. - -CHAPTER LV. - -Called on a Mission to Great Britain--Prepare to Depart--Start Without -Purse or Scrip--Journey to Salt Lake City--Set Apart for the Mission ---Begin the Journey Eastward--Organization of the Company--My Post as -Chaplain--Overtaken by Apostles A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich--Traveling -Through the Mountains--Snowstorms and Wind--Forage is Scarce--Meetings -with the Indians--Captain Reynolds' Exploring Party--Army Deserters in -our Camp--Mail from Home--Emigrants Westward Bound--Dissatisfaction -In Camp--Feeling about Apostles Lyman and Rich--I Resign as Captain, -but am Elected again, and Finally Resume Command--Mail Robbery--More -Disagreeable Storms--Meet a Handcart Company and Apostle George Q. -Cannon--Reach the Missouri River--Visit my Father and his Family--Go to -St. Joseph, Missouri--My first View of a Railway Train--At my old Home -in Brown County, Illinois--Journey Eastward by Rail--Arrive in New York -for the First Time--Find Friends. - -CHAPTER LVI. - -Visit Various Places of Interest in New York and Vicinity--Arrival -of the Great Eastern--Preach at Williamsburg--New York's Celebration -of the Fourth--My Thirty-second Birthday--Secure Passports and Ocean -Passage--Crowded in the Steerage--Foggy and wet Weather--View of the -Irish Coast--Fleet of British Warships--Land in Liverpool--Assigned -to Birmingham Conference--In Birmingham--Listen to an Anti-Mormon -Lecture--Visiting from House to House as a Mormon Missionary--Places -of Interest--Transferred to Nottingham Conference--Preaching and -Visiting--Mission Travels--Go to London--See Notable Places--News of my -Daughter's Death--Birth of Another Daughter--Return to Nottingham. - -CHAPTER LVII. - -Again at Missionary Labors--Baptisms--Become Quite Ill--Appointed -President of the Nottingham District, Embracing three -Conferences--Visited by Apostles A. M. Lyman, C. C. Rich and -Others--Settling Differences among Church Members--Attend a -Phrenological Lecture--Get a Chart--Go to Liverpool--In Conference -at Nottingham--My Pastorate Enlarged--Witness a Military -Review--More Baptisms--Visit Sheffield--Fixing my Name--Poverty in -Nottingham--Invited to take a Trip to Paris--Go to London--Have to -give up the Visit to France--In Poor Health--Return to Nottingham--See -Professor Blondin. - -CHAPTER LVIII. - -Prolonged Illness--Attend to my Duties with Difficulty--Letter Telling -of the Battle of Bulls Run--Witness an Execution by Hanging--Visit -from George Q. Cannon, Joseph F. Smith and Others--Death of the -Prince Consort--Go to Birmingham--Conference of the Priesthood In the -British Mission--Large Meeting In Odd Fellows' Hall, Birmingham--Again -at Nottingham--Visit Liverpool--Consult a Physician, but get little -Relief--See the Liverpool Grand National Races--Depravity Among Poorer -Classes in Liverpool--Again at Nottingham--Released to Return Home--Bid -the People Farewell--Display of their Affection for me--Report of my -Labors Published in the Millennial Star--On Board Ship--Placed in -Charge of the Company--Sail for America--Driven by Headwinds along -the Coasts of the Isle of Man, Wales, Ireland and Scotland--Severe -Seasickness--Get to Sea--Slow Voyage--Deaths and Burials at sea--Land -at New York--Guest of Hon. W. H. Hooper--Journey to Florence, -Nebraska--Captain and Guide of Independent Company--Reach Salt hake -City--Report to President Young--Again at Home. - -CHAPTER LIX. - -Remove from Ogden to Salt Lake City at the Request of President -Young--Necessity for Preaching among the Saints--In the Employ of -President Young--On Another Mission, this time in Utah---Preaching -and Lecturing--Build a House--Go to the Canyon to get Finishing -Lumber--Shot in Mistake for a Bear--My Wound very Serious--Taken to -Wanship to Receive Care--My Family Notified and Surgical Assistance -Obtained--Moved to my Home--In Bed Nine Months--Two Surgical -Operations--Grow Stronger--Employed at the Warm Springs--Dr. -Robinson--Abscesses in my Wounded Limb--Out of Employment--Go to the -California line to Examine a Gold Prospect--Perilous Journey--Indians -on the Warpath--Remarkable experience with a Band of Savages--Gift of -Speaking their Language--Unable to work the Gold Claim Because of Lack -of Water--Return to Salt Lake City--Go to the Gold Discoveries on the -Sweetwater--Discover a Placer claim--An Attempt to Rob me of It--Bush -for a Mine--Hold the Claim--Assailed by Hostile Indians--A Race for -Life--Three Men Killed--We Abandon Camp--Suffer with my Lame Limb--Lose -the Mining Claim--Hauling Coal and Produce--Almost Die--Confined to Bed -for Months--Amputation of my limb to save my Life--Recovery--Attend to -my Nursery--Advent of the Railway--Traveling and Preaching--A Slight -Sunstroke. - -CHAPTER LX. - -Called on a Mission to the United States--Journey Eastward--Visit -Relatives en Route--Reach New York--Measured for an Artificial -Limb--How It was Paid for--Visit and Preach--Meet Poor -Encouragement--Go to Boston--World's Peace Jubilee--Bunker Hill--Again -at New York--Released to Return Home--Back in Utah--Traveling and -Preaching--Sent for by President Young--Called on a Mission to -Arizona--Directed to Furnish Names of Others--Send the List--President -Young adds other Names--Set Apart for our Mission--Difficult to Collect -Money due me--Leave my Family Poorly Provided for but Trusting In the -Lord--Placed In Charge of the Mission--Letter of Instructions--Start -South--People Contribute Liberally--Traveling in Storm--Arrive at -Kanab--In Arizona--A Hard Journey--Marriage of my Daughter--Reach Lee's -Ferry on the Colorado--Crossing the River--Reach Moencoppy Wash--Decide -to Winter There--Explore the Vicinity--Meet Friendly Indians--Building -a House--Exploring the Little Colorado--A Difficult Trip--Description -of the Route--Find a Place for Another Settlement--San Francisco -Mountains--Fine Forest Growth--Caught in Deep Snow--Through with a -Perilous Journey--Decide to Return to Salt Lake City and Report--Heavy -Snow--Trip Homeward--Cordially Greeted by President Young--With my -Family. - -CHAPTER LXI. - -Attend Meetings with the First Presidency and Apostles--More -Missionaries called to Arizona--Many Inquiries Regarding the -Mission--Outline the Route--Preparations for Travel--Start -South--Aided by Contributions--Reach Moencoppy--Meet Lot Smith -and Company--Baptisms--Start for the Little Colorado River--Guide -Missionary Companies to the Place we had Selected for Settlement--Lot -Smith Refuses to Acknowledge my Appointment from President Young -as President of the Mission--He Assumes Leadership of the new -Settlement--I Return with my Party to Moencoppy--Other Companies of -Missionary Settlers sustain my Presidency--My Health is Poor--Settlers -Discouraged--Cheer them up--Work of Frontier Life--Succor a Company -whose Water Supply is Exhausted--Taking up Land--Make a Long -Exploring Trip--Introduce Book of Mormon to Navajos--Return to -Moencoppy--Indians Dissatisfied--Go to Salt Lake City with a Delegation -of Navajo Chiefs--Their Supposed Grievances Settled--Tell President -Young I have come Home to Stay--He Sends me out Again--Directed to -Procure Volunteers--Letter of Instructions--Lecture, and take up -Contributions--Return Home--My Family Ill--Provide Supplies for -Them--Conditions Improve. - -CHAPTER LXII. - -Again in Arizona--Settling Difficulties Among the People--Our -Reservoir Bursts--News of Notable Events--Prepare to Repel an -Indian Raid--Indians Quarrel, and the Trouble Passes Over--Funeral -at Moencoppy--Exploring Trip to the Southeast--A White Indian -Child--Meet the Head Chief of the Navajos--His Address, and -Proposition to Accompany me to Salt Lake City--Agree on a Date for -the Journey--Continue my Trip Over into New Mexico, then Return to -Moencoppy--Accusation Against me Disproved--Indians Gather to go to -Salt Lake City--Make the Trip--At President Young's Deathbed--Visit -the Indians--Honorable Release from my Mission--Resume Home Missionary -Labors--In Prison for Conscience Sake. - -CHAPTER LXIII. - -Visited by President Joseph F. Smith--Called on Another Mission to the -Society Islands--Prepare To Respond--A Blessing by Apostle Lorenzo -Snow--Appointed to Preside over the Society Islands Mission--Attempts -to Discourage me from Undertaking the Journey--Surprise Party by my -Children--Farewell Reception In the Ward Hall--Start on my Mission, -Accompanied by my Son and Others who had been Called--Voyage to -Tahiti--Madman on Board the Vessel--At Marquesas Islands Strange -Characters--Tattooed White Man--His Peculiar Career--Catching Sharks ---Arrive at Papeete--My Reception There--Meet Native Josephite -Preachers, who seem Confused--Elders from Utah Greet us--in Poor Health. - -CHAPTER LXIV. - -First Sabbath in Tahiti--Meet Several Persons whom I Knew over -Forty Years Before--How they Remembered me--Seek Permission to hold -Public Meetings--Widow of my Old Friend, John Layton, Calls on -me Other Friends--Preach to the Josephites--Governor Refuses to -Permit us to Hold Public Meetings--Get Advice of the United states -Consul--A Lawyer's Counsel--Josephites tell of B. F. Grouard--I -Explain how he had Turned into the wrong Path--The Church Never -Disorganized--Missionary Labors--Greeting a French Admiral--Early -Missionaries to Tahiti--Their Severe Experiences--Sixty-fourth -Anniversary of my Birth--Learn of Mormons who were Hanged for -Having Killed a Policeman in the Trouble when I was Arrested on -my First Mission to the Islands--Meet a Native of Pitcairn's -Island--His Story--Visit Tautila--Severe Voyage--A Baptism--Sail for -Tubuoi--Among Strangers Celebration of a French Fete Day--Dine with -the Governor--People Become less Unfriendly to us--Breaking of the -Clouds--Baptize Twenty-four Persons--Encouraging Results of Missionary -Efforts. - -CHAPTER LXV. - -Miraculous Healing--Meet and Confound the Josephites--Further -Missionary Success--Meet a Native who was Present when I was -Sentenced to be Burned--Elder John Layton's Grave--Arrange to Return -to Tahiti--Disappointed--Preach a Funeral Sermon--Forbidden to Hold -Public Meetings--Blind Woman one Hundred and Twenty Years Old Her -Testimony--Administer to her for her Eyesight, and she Is Enabled to -see a Little--She Praises the Lord--Preaching and Baptizing--Sail -for Papeete--An odd Cargo--Hard Voyage--Held by a Calm--Land on -Tahiti--Sail for Avaroa--On a Well-ordered Schooner--Call at Various -Islands--Lance a Carbuncle--Christmas Day at Sea--Watermelons--A -Beautiful Residence and Cordial Welcome--Perform Three Marriage -Ceremonies--Conference of Saints in the Tuamotu Islands--Meet a Native -Chilean--Visit Various Places--Public Welcome--Fishing--On the Island -of Anaa--Visit Where I was Imprisoned--Graves of those Concerned In -the Trouble Then--Warrant Served on me--Summoned to the Government -House--Warned Against Creating a Disturbance. - -CHAPTER LXVI. - -Preaching and Visiting--Pearl Fishing--Place of my Arrest in -1851--Accident to a Young Man--Incident with the Governor of Anaa--See -a Leper--Capture of an Eel--Conference on Anaa--Time of Dedication -of Salt Lake Temple--Specially Interesting Meetings--New Elders from -Utah--Start back to Tahiti--Another Funeral Sermon--Meet the French -Governor of the Tuamotu Islands--His Cordial Greeting--Arrive at -Papeete--Appointments for the New Missionaries--Fall to get a Passage -to Tubuoi--My Health Very Poor--Learn of the Dedication of the Salt -Lake Temple--Elders Unanimous in the Decision that I should Return Home -Because of my Illness--I Demur--Conclude to go--Trouble on Anaa--My -Sixty-fifth birthday--Notable Kindness of a Native child--Sail from -Papeete--Difficulty In Landing from Small Boats--In the Society -Islands--Reach San Francisco--Arrive in Salt Lake City--Report the -Successful Opening of the Society Islands Mission. - -CHAPTER LXVII. - -Invited To the Midwinter Fair, San Francisco, and Accept--Journey to -California--Kind Treatment Received--An Honored Guest--Write a Pamphlet -on the Discovery of Gold at Sutter's Mill Race--First Accurate Account -Published--Again at Home--Preparing my Autobiography for Publication--A -Great Task--Progress of the Work--My History of the First Mission to -the Pacific Islands--Utah's Semi-Centennial Jubilee--Not a Utah Pioneer -of 1847--Pioneer Just the Same--Mormon Battalion Recognized in the Utah -Celebration--Invited to join In the Parade--Comparative Narrowness of -Committee's Courtesy--Letters from California Regarding the Pioneer -Celebration there in 1898--Invited with three Others of the Mormon -Battalion, to be Special Guests as the Survivors of the Party that -Discovered Gold In California in 1848--Appreciation of the Courtesy -Extended by Californians. - -CHAPTER LXVIII. - -Trip to California--Met by the Committee on Reception of the Society -of California Pioneers--Received with Great Cordiality--Honored Guests -at California's Golden Jubilee--The Celebration--Courtesies Extended -to Mormon Battalion Members Present at the Discovery of Gold--Return -Home--Resolutions by Society of California Pioneers--Report of -Reception committee of California Golden Jubilee--Sketch of -Marshall's Surviving Companions--Complete my Autobiography--My Son -Homer Accidentally Killed--The Old Folks--Publication of Life of a -Pioneer--Conclusion. - - - -ILLUSTRATIONS. - -Portrait of James S. Brown - -Fire Prepared to Roast the Missionary--Sentenced to Death - -A Typical Tahitian with his Burden of Bread Fruit and Feii - -A War Party of Shoshones Dancing around their Prisoners while in the -Chief's Lodge - -Surrounded by a Pack of Hungry Wolves - -Chased By a War Party - -Marquesas Fire Dancers - - - -LIFE OF A PIONEER -BEING -THE AUTOBIOGRAPHY -OF - -JAMES S. BROWN. - - - -CHAPTER I. - -HOME OF THE AUTHOR--A CAREER OF THRILLING EXPERIENCES--HIS BIRTH -AND PARENTAGE--EARLY AVOCATIONS--MIGRATION PROM NORTH CAROLINA -TO ILLINOIS--LIFE ON THE FRONTIER--DANGERS TO EARLY SETTLERS--A -FRONTIERSMAN--FATHER'S ADVICE--MORE SETTLERS COME--CHURCHES AND -SCHOOLS--LIMITED OPPORTUNITIES--FROZEN FEET--UNIMPRESSIONABLE TO THE -PREACHING OF THE TIME--TALK OF A NEW RELIGION, PROPHETS, MIRACLES, -ETC.--PERSECUTION OF THE NEW CHURCH--"SHOWERS OF STARS"--POPULAR -ADVERSE VIEWS OF THE MORMONS--THE MORMONS DRIVEN FROM MISSOURI -INTO ILLINOIS--MORMON ELDER COMES TO PREACH--CONVERTS UNCLE -JAMES BROWN--PREACHES AGAIN--PREPARATIONS TO MOB THE ELDER--HIS -SCRIPTURAL DOCTRINE DISCONCERTS ENEMIES AND SECURES HIM FRIENDS--HIS -DISCOURSE--EFFECT ON YOUNG JAMES S. BROWN OF THIS FIRST GOSPEL SERMON -TO HIM--HIS TESTIMONY TO THE SPIRIT AND TRUTH OF THE ELDER'S MESSAGE. - -THE subject and author of this Life-Sketch of a Pioneer is James -Stephens Brown, now (1900) in his seventy-second year, a resident of -Salt Lake City, Utah, his home less than a quarter of a mile from and -within the summer morning's shadow of the majestic Temple of the Lord -erected on that spot which he beheld a barren and desolate wilderness, -on his entrance into the valley of the Great Salt Lake, over half a -century ago. His life has been one of thrilling experiences--more than -ordinarily falls to the lot even of a pioneer settler in the Great -West--a life in which hardship and perils by sea and land, among dusky -savages and with white men, have contributed largely to the events -of his career; withal one in which he has had abundant occasion to -recognize and acknowledge the power and protecting care of an Almighty -Providence. - -It is at the urgent request and advice of valued friends, familiar -to a considerable extent with my life and labors, that I place this -autobiography in form to be easily accessible to those desirous of -perusing it; and I am not unmindful of the fact that this simple -recital of events is not only of intense interest in numerous episodes -which it records, but is of historic value in being a plain and -truthful narrative of the personal experiences of a western pioneer. - -I was born on Independence Day, July 4, 1828, in Davidson County, North -Carolina, U.S.A. My father was Daniel Brown; he was the youngest son -of his father's family, and was born in Rowan County, North Carolina, -June 30, 1804. My father's father was James Brown, a native of Rowan -County, North Carolina, 1757 being the year of his birth. His wife -was the widow of a Revolutionary War soldier named Emerson, who was -killed in the war for American independence, leaving his wife and -two children, Margaret and John Emerson. My grandfather James Brown -married the widow Emerson, who bore him nine children--three sons and -six daughters--Jane, Polly, Nancy, Susan, Patsy, William, Obedience, -James (captain of Company C, Mormon Battalion), and Daniel (my father); -her maiden name was Mary Williams. All the family had an excellent -reputation, being upright, thrifty, and good and industrious citizens. - -With these introductory remarks, I will proceed to an account of my -boyhood's days. I was reared at the farming and stock business, also -at getting out saw timber and wood for cooperware. My parents had -moved from North Carolina to Brown County, Illinois, in the autumn of -1831, and had purchased an extensive tract of land. We were a large -family; the country was then wild and with very few inhabitants, and -the climate was unhealthy; so it was with great effort that father and -mother succeeded in making a home and gathering about them the comforts -of life. - -We were frontier settlers, and while father had his pick of land, he -also had the hardships and privations of a new country to endure. There -were no churches or schoolhouses nearer than ten miles from our home, -and grist mills and blacksmith shops were equally distant. Thus the -family was reared without the advantage of schools, or of church-going -religious training. But we were thoroughly acquainted with border -life, with hunting, fishing, and all the sports indulged in by hardy -pioneers, and even learned to shake terribly from the ague, and burn -with fever spells, while we were well dosed with quinine and calomel, -and had enormous doctor's bills to pay. - -In our operations we trained horses and cattle to work, stocked our own -plows, made our own harrows, rakes and forks, braided our own whips -from the pelts of wild beasts which we ourselves dressed, raised our -own honey, and made our own sugar, with some to sell. We had a good -sugar orchard, and plenty of wild fruits and nuts for the gathering. As -the first settlers of new countries are more or less subject to dangers -from outlaws, wild beasts, and savage men, we found it important to be -well armed, and on the alert day and night to defend life and liberty. - -Thus we learned the use of firearms and the tomahawk. My father was -an expert with the old Kentucky rifle, and some of his boys were not -far behind him; he trained them always to shoot with a rising sight, -to keep cool, and always to have their powder dry and plenty of it. He -also taught us to tell the truth, and used to say: "Be honest, stand up -for your rights, and fight for your country and friends." - -In the year 1835, people began to settle in around us, and then the -circuit riders, as they were called--the ministers--commenced to call -around and hold meetings in private houses. There were Baptists, -Freewill Baptists, Methodists, Campbellites, and others. From 1836 to -1838 some small churches and schoolhouses were built, so that we began -to get spiritual food, such as it was; and also some schooling, with -the benefit of the hickory rod that always was kept "in soak," so to -speak, and woe to the unruly student when it was called into service! - -So far as the author is concerned, he managed to get along without the -rod the short time he was permitted to attend school. He was kept close -at work on the farm in summer, and in the winter months was engaged -getting out timber and hauling to market the farm products. Once his -feet were frozen so that he lost every nail from his toes. As to the -religious teachings of the time, there was a great deal of thundering -and thundering, but it failed to indicate any lightening of the -author's path, for he fished and hunted on the Sabbath day, just the -same. - -Some time in the '30s we began to hear a little about false prophets, a -new religion, miracles, money-diggers, thieves, liars, miracle-workers, -deceivers, witches, speaking in tongues and interpretation of the same, -walking on the water, and visits from angels. As time went on, all -these things were combined to form a grand excuse for raising mobs to -expel the new Church from the borders of civilization. Then came news -of murder, rapine, house-burning, and destruction of towns and cities -in Missouri. There were great "showers" of stars in the firmament -about this time. On popular rumor, and from hearing only one side of -the story, almost everybody decided that such a previously unheard-of -people as the Mormons ought to be shot or burned at the stake. This was -the sentiment to be found on every hand. - -As a culmination of these things came the tidings that the Missourians -had driven the Mormons from the state of Missouri into Illinois. A -little later, and a Latter-day Saint Elder named Jacob Pfoutz entered -the neighborhood of my Uncle James Brown's home, converted him, his -wife, and several of the neighbors. This Elder was brought down by my -uncle to see his two sisters, Aunts Polly and Nancy Brown. - -Elder Pfoutz was given permission to preach in the schoolhouse about -three miles from my father's house. The news spread like a prairie fire -that the Mormons had come and would preach on Friday. I think this was -in the autumn of 1840. I was at my aunt's at the time, and decided to -go and hear the strange preacher. Like most of the people, I went out -of curiosity, more than anything else. I had just turned my twelfth -year, and had begun to take some interest in religion, going to every -meeting for which I could obtain permission from my parents, yet not -thinking for a moment but that all religions were right. - -At the first meeting held by the Mormon, the house was pretty well -filled. Some who attended did so with the thought that after the -services were over they would tar and feather the Elder and ride him on -a rail, as such things had been indulged in in Missouri, and threats -had been made freely. Others were going to confound him, and still -others wanted to see the fun, as they said. - -The preacher was a plain-spoken man of thirty-five to forty years old, -of German descent. He was plainly dressed, and without that urbane -polish which ministers usually have. When he began his discourse, -he raised up very calmly and deliberately and read from Matthew, -seventh chapter, verses fifteen to twenty. He spoke from that text -and corroborating passages, supporting his argument throughout by -scripture. At the conclusion of his address, some of the people said -they did not want to mob a man who preached like that, while others -"sniffed" their noses and tried to get up a sneering laugh, but failed. -The Elder was invited to my aunt's house and was granted permission to -preach on Sunday in their oak-grove, while several of the religiously -inclined followed him to his stopping place and plied him with -questions. - -As to myself, it seemed that I had not only heard it thunder, but I -had seen the lightning and felt it through every fibre of my system, -from the crown of my head to the soles of my feet. I was revived as -the showers of heaven revive the parched earth and impart life to -the languishing vegetation. Notwithstanding the fact that I knew -the Latter-day Saints, or Mormons, were looked upon as filth, in -fact as even worse than rubbish, that they had been called the very -off-scourings of the earth, that they were regarded as deserving to be -put to death, yet from that very day I received their doctrine in or by -the spirit. - -Now that sixty years have rolled by since the events here narrated; -that I have passed through mobbings, robbings, fines and penalties; -have been banished and once sentenced to death; Paul-like have fought -with wild beasts, have been shipwrecked and almost starved; have -famished on thirsty deserts; have had the scalping-knife wielded over -my head while the Indian warwhoop saluted my ears and the savage -warrior danced with tomahawk in hand, exulting over the victim intended -to be slain and scalped in trophy of victory; have laid in dungeons -for my religion's sake--thanks be to God that I yet live and bear a -faithful testimony of the truth and spirit that possessed my soul from -that first Gospel sermon I ever heard. I have listened to ministers of -various Christian denominations advocate good and virtuous principles, -but I never knew any of them to preach the fullness of the Gospel of -the Lord Jesus as did that humble Mormon Elder. - - - -CHAPTER II. - -PERSECUTED BY PLAYMATES--GIVE THEM AN EFFECTIVE CHECK--FIGHT -WITH WILD BEASTS--PARENTS JOIN THE MORMONS--THE AUTHOR HOLDS -BACK--ASSASSINATION OF JOSEPH AND HYRUM SMITH--MORMONS LEAVE ILLINOIS -FOR THE WEST--EXCITING TIMES--MY WINTER'S WORK--FATHER DECIDES TO -WAIT A WHILE BEFORE LEAVING ILLLNOIS--MY DETERMINATION TO GO WITH THE -MORMONS--CONFIDE A SECRET TO MY MOTHER--A NEW CONSULTATIONS--CHANGE IN -THE FAMILY PLANS--FATHER PREPARES TO START--GIVES ME PERMISSION TO -GO--THINKS OF LEAVING ME BECAUSE OF MY ILLNESS--I FEEL TO PREFER DEATH -TO BEING LEFT BEHIND. - -FROM the very day my parents entertained the Latter-day Saint Elders in -their house my former playmates in the neighborhood commenced a crusade -on me, calling me a Mormon, and many hard names, whenever they met me. -When we gathered at the mill pond, our usual place of bathing, they -would baptize me, as they called it, in the name of Beelzebub; but I -called it drowning, for it seemed to me that when three or four of them -got me under the water they never knew when to let me up. Then when I -got out of the water they would mockingly "lay hands" on me in the name -of Beelzebub, going through a ceremony and at short intervals calling -"Pluck," when they would pull my hair with a severe twitch, and would -spit on me and laugh. Once my clothes were taken and thrown into a bed -of itching nettles, and when I tried to get them out with a pole I was -pushed in among the nettles. At the gristmill, also, they would punish -me in a shameful manner. At last I became so provoked that I went after -them with a strong jack-knife. Though some of them were eighteen or -nineteen years old, they ran off, fully convinced that I would have -hurt them if I could have caught them. The miller interposed and gave -them a severe reprimand. From that time they never tried to punish -me. My medicine had worked well, and thereafter I was looked on as a -leading boy among them. - -During this period I had some perilous experiences with wild animals. -My father had a pet deer, and a bulldog owned by the family caught -it by the nose; I tried to get the dog off, when the frightened -deer kicked and tore my clothes almost off, lacerating my flesh -considerably. Soon after this the deer was followed, in the woods near -the house, by a large buck, which my father shot. The animal's shoulder -was broken, and I followed it to the millpond and sprang into the water -to hold it. As I seized its horn the buck, which had a footing, threw -me around, lacerating my left hand considerably. For a time my life -was in peril from the wild animal, but I struggled and finally used my -pocket knife on its throat. Some time after this episode a man named -John Bos shot and wounded a big buck near our home. It being night, he -came to the house for assistance, and father and I went out. The dogs -reached the buck, which charged on them, and as it was seized by the -nose by one of them father and I caught the buck's hind feet. It kicked -us free, and I had a close call from being severely if not fatally -hurt; but we returned to the attack, and finally secured the game. - -As time went on the older people in our neighborhood took interest in -the Mormon Elders, and some of them joined the new Church, while others -became very intolerant and hostile. My parents and my eldest brother -and sister united with the Mormons; yet I held back, for though fully -in sympathy with what my relatives had done I did not consider myself -worthy to join, for I thought that to be a church member I must have -some great experience and see great lights, such as I had heard people -testify of. Thus I stayed out and watched developments. - -Finally, in July, 1844, the news reached us that the Prophet Joseph -Smith and his brother Hyrum, the Patriarch, had been assassinated -in Carthage jail by a mob; also, that the Mormons had been ordered -to leave the state, and were going either to the Rocky Mountains, -California, or Vancouver Island. In fact, there were many kinds of -rumors afloat, and there was great excitement. - -In the fall of 1845 permission was given me to go to a river town five -miles from home, to work at a slaughter and packing house, where my -cousin, Homer Jackson, and I got employment that season. We heard that -the Mormons were going to start west the next spring--in fact, their -purpose was a topic of frequent conversation. We returned home in the -latter part of January, 1846, and soon learned that the Church leaders -were leaving Nauvoo for a new home in the unknown western wilds, and -that every true Mormon was expected to join them as soon as possible. - -Shortly after this, father called a family meeting to consider what -to do. It was a great venture to start out with a large family on -a journey of a thousand miles or more into an unknown wilderness, -among savage tribes; so after long discussion of the matter, it was -decided to be too great an undertaking at that particular time. It was -regarded as inadvisable to take the chances of starving to death in the -wilderness. Besides, property was very low, and it was folly to sell -out a good home at so great a sacrifice as seemed necessary. - -When this decision was reached, father turned to me and said: "Well, -Jimmy, what do you think about it?" I answered that where the Mormons -went I would go, and where they died I would die. This was the first -time I had been asked a question, and as I was not a member of the -Church my reply surprised the others. Being inquired of as to how I -would go, I suggested that perhaps someone wanted a teamster, or maybe -there was some widow who would take a boy for his labor in return -for food and clothing. Father asked if I would leave the family and -go out west and starve; and he suggested that as I did not belong to -the Mormons they would not have me. To this I said I would join them, -and that my mind was made up to go with the Mormons at all hazards. -Then father ordered me to keep quiet, saying he would thrash me if I -talked of leaving home. This closed the discussion, for in those days -thrashing was the great panacea for disobedience, whether at home or -in the school room. But that threat clinched my resolve to go with the -Mormons even at the risk of life, for I was thoroughly satisfied of the -justice of their cause. - -I said no more then, but at the first opportunity told my mother that -soon I would come up missing, as I was going with the Mormons, and -should hide if searched for, if I had to go among the Indians. Mother -said I would starve, but my reply was that I could live on what others -did. My mother was convinced that I would go, and her mother's heart -was as so touched that she could not withhold my secret from my father, -who believed, too, that I would do as I had said. - -One evening, soon afterward, I overheard them talking of the matter. -Father said it would break up the family if they did not move west, for -Jim certainly would go; they were satisfied that the Mormon doctrines -were true, and thought that perhaps they had better make an effort to -sell out and move. My heart was filled with joy at these words. - -When morning came, father set out to buy oxen, and was successful. He -also sold his farm but reserved the crop, as he had to wait till after -harvest for part of his pay for the land. He thought that by fitting -out two good teams, and providing wagons and tools, he and Alexander -Stephens (mother's brother) and two of his sisters (old maids), and -myself could go out into Iowa, where we could put in some corn and -build a cabin or two. Then my uncle and I could do the rest while -father returned, took care of the harvest, and brought up the family, -when we would follow the Church as best we could until a resting place -was found. - -The way now seemed open. My father felt encouraged, and all went well -until a few days before the time for starting, when I was stricken down -with fever and ague, and shook or chilled every other day till the -first of May, at which time all was ready for moving. Efforts were made -to persuade me that I could not stand the journey, but should allow one -of the other boys to go in my stead. But I could not see it in that -light. While father was talking of the matter to mother I overheard -him say, "We will have to let James go, for he will not be satisfied -without, but he will get enough of it when he has had a few days, and -has camped out and shaken a few times with the ague." I thought to -myself, "You are mistaken, father, for I would rather die than be left -behind." - - - - -CHAPTER III. - -START FOR NAUVOO--TAKEN SEVERELY ILL--THE LORD ANSWERS MY PRAYER -FOR RELIEF--PASS THROUGH CARTHAGE--IN NAUVOO "THE BEAUTIFUL," -BUT ALMOST DESERTED CITY--SCENE ON THE IOWA SHORE--CROSS THE -MISSISSIPPI--CURIOUS MAKE-UP OF THE EXILES' TEAMS--THE BAD ROADS--STUCK -IN THE MUD--REPAIRING CAMPS--GOOD ORDER MAINTAINED--UNNECESSARY KILLING -OF GAME FORBIDDEN--REACH GRAND RIVER AND PUT IN A CROP--LEARN OF THE -CALL FOR THE MORMON BATTALION--APOSTLES AS RECRUITING OFFICERS--CALL -FOR VOLUNTEERS--RESPONSE BY THE CAMP--RECEIVED INTO THE CHURCH BY -BAPTISM--FILLED WITH THE LOVE OF THE GOSPEL--GET THE SPIRIT TO -ENLIST--CONSULT WITH MY RELATIVES AND EZRA T. BENSON--AN ELDER'S -PROMISE--JOIN THE MORMON BATTALION. - -MAY 1st, 1846, was a pleasant day, and we made our start for Nauvoo, -passing through Versailles to a point some ten miles from home to the -first night's camp. I was encouraged to think I had kept so well, but -about ten o'clock the second day I began to shake, and my teeth fairly -to crack. I prayed earnestly to the Lord to heal me. I was quite weak, -and all thought me very sick. But that was the last "shake" I had, for -I began to get well from that time. - -It was on May 4th, I believe, that we reached Nauvoo, having passed -through Mount Sterling, the county seat of Brown County, also through -Carthage, where the Prophet Joseph Smith and his brother the Patriarch -Hyrum Smith had been assassinated. We found the roads so muddy and such -hard traveling that we did not make more than fifteen miles a day. When -we came in sight of the Temple at Nauvoo our hearts were filled with -mingled joy and sorrow--joy that we had seen the Temple of the Lord, -and sorrow that the Saints had been so cruelly driven from it. - -As we passed through the city we saw many houses which had been -abandoned--indeed, the city itself seemed almost deserted. At some of -the houses stood covered wagons, into which people were packing goods -preparatory to their flight into the wilderness, they knew not where. - -Looking westward across the great Mississippi River, we saw long trains -of wagons strung out over the high rolling prairie. The country was -new, and the roads muddy, so we rested three or four days, visiting the -Temple and viewing the city that was beautiful for situation, but now -was left with few inhabitants. Everything in and about the city that -formerly hummed with industry and life was now lonely, saddened, and -forlorn, and silent but for the preparations for flight by the remnant -therein. - -About the 8th of May we crossed the great "father of waters" and -joined the "rolling kingdom" on its westward journey. We found friends -and acquaintances, made up a company of our own, and passed and were -repassed on the trip. Climbing an eminence from which we looked east -and west, covered wagons could be seen as far as the eye could reach. -The teams were made up of oxen, milch cows, two-year-old steers and -heifers, and very few horses and mules. The teamsters were of both -sexes, and comprised young and old. The people who could walk did so, -and many were engaged in driving loose stock. - -Hundreds of teams stuck in the mud, and we had to double-up and help -one another out. Many times we had to wade in mud half to our knees and -lift our wagons out of the mire. In this the women not infrequently -would join their husbands and sons, and the old adage came true in -numerous instances--women for a dead lift; when they plunged into the -mud and put their shoulders to the wheels the men were urged to do -double effort, and the wagon always rolled out and onward, at the rate -of twelve to fifteen miles per day. - -At every creek we found campers, some repairing wagons, yokes, chains, -etc., doctoring sick cattle, washing clothes, or helping forward -friends whose teams were weak. In all this there was excellent order, -for the camps were organized in a general way by tens, fifties and -hundreds. Peace and harmony prevailed all along the line. Evening -prayers were attended to in each camp. There was much singing, mostly -of sacred hymns or sentimental songs; and from no quarter could coarse -songs be heard. Sometimes the camp would meet in a sociable dance in -the evenings, to drive dull care away; and then there always was good -order and the most perfect friendship and peace. - -The camps were instructed not to kill game of any kind to waste its -flesh; they were not even to kill a snake on the road, for it was their -calling to establish peace on earth, and good will toward man and -beast. Thus all went on in peace and order. - -At one of the headwaters of the Grand River, Iowa, we found some -hundreds of people putting in gardens and field crops (corn and -potatoes). A few cabins had been built, so father and our party decided -to stop there. We put in a few acres of corn and garden stuff, then -father returned to Illinois to bring up the rest of the family, leaving -my Uncle Alexander Stephens and myself to look after the crop and -stock, which we did faithfully. - -About the 6th of July we heard that President Young and several of the -Twelve Apostles had returned from the most advanced companies, and -that there would be a meeting held at the white oak grove--the usual -place of meeting--the next day. There was also a rumor in camp that a -government recruiting officer had come to enlist volunteers, for the -United States had declared war against Mexico. - -Of course this latter tidings was a great surprise, as the Mormons had -been denied protection against mob violence and had been forced beyond -the borders of civilization in the United States, and our camps were -stretched out in an Indian country, from the Mississippi River to the -Missouri. Surprised as we were at the government's demand, we were -still more so to think that our leaders would entertain for a moment -the idea of encouraging compliance therewith. Yet rumor said that -President Young and the prominent men with him had come as recruiting -officers as well. - -All who could be spared from the tents went eagerly to the White Oak -grove, and there learned that the rumors were true. The United States -government demanded that a battalion of five hundred men be raised -by the Mormon Church, then fleeing from mob violence for the want of -protection by that government whose right and duty it was to protect -them. The men of the moving camp were required to leave their families -in the wilderness, almost unprotected, and go to a foreign land to -fight their country's battles. - -But wonders never cease. The leading men among the Mormons--Brigham -Young, Heber C. Kimball, Wilford Woodruff, and others of the Twelve -Apostles--stood before the people and called for volunteers to engage -in the Mexican war, saying that the five hundred men must be raised if -it took the whole strength of the camp to do it. If the young men would -not enlist, the middle-aged and old men would, said President Young; -the demand of our country should be met if it took the Twelve Apostles -and the High Priests. - -At the close of the meeting there were many who were enthused, while -others appeared confused and did not seem to catch the spirit of -the matter. I was not yet a member of the Church, but all the old -stories of the war of the Revolution and that of 1812, with the later -Black Hawk Indian wars, brightened in my memory so that the spirit -of the patriots awoke within me, and although I was averse to war -and bloodshed, I had a desire to serve my country in any legitimate -way. Yet I felt that, as I was under age, and, as my Uncle Alexander -Stephens had decided to enlist, the responsibility of my father's -affairs now rested on me. - -My uncle and I were standing by the roadside talking over the -situation, when along came Ezra T. Benson, who had been recently -selected as one of the Twelve Apostles; there also came Richmond -Louder, one of my associates from boyhood, and Matthew Caldwell. -Richmond Louder and I had talked previously of being baptized together. -He said they were going down to attend to that sacred ordinance, and -invited me to accompany them, which I did gladly. We went to the south -fork of the Grand River, and with Uncle A. Stephens as a witness were -baptized. This was on the 7th of July, 1846. Then we went to the house -of General Charles C. Rich, where we were confirmed, I think under the -hands of Elders Willard Richards and Ezra T. Benson, in the presence of -President Brigham Young and others of the Twelve Apostles. - -This done, the happiest feeling of my life came over me. I thought I -would to God that all the inhabitants of the earth could experience -what I had done as a witness of the Gospel. It seemed to me that, if -they could see and feel as I did, the whole of humankind would join -with us in one grand brotherhood, and the universe would be prepared -for the great Millennial morn. - -When we returned to camp, my aunts partook of the same feeling that -had filled me. Then I got the spirit to enlist, and after a short -consultation with those most concerned they advised me to lay the -matter before Ezra T. Benson. Accordingly, the next morning Uncle A. -Stephens and I went over to the grove. I told the Elder my feelings, -and the responsibilities left upon me by my father. Elder Benson said -the Spirit's promptings to me were right, and I had started right. He -told me to go on, saying I would be blessed, my father would find -no fault with me, his business would not suffer, and I would never be -sorry for the action I had taken or for my enlistment. Every word he -said to me has been fulfilled to the very letter. - -Uncle Alexander Stephens and I then went to a tent where men were -giving in their names as volunteers. We handed in our names, and were -enrolled as members of the historic Mormon Battalion. - - - -CHAPTER IV. - -START FOR THE BATTALION RENDEZVOUS--A JOURNEY OF HARDSHIP--IN THE -MORMONS' CAMP ON THE MISSOURI RIVER--FIRST EXPERIENCES IN THE -ARMY--BLESSED BY APOSTLES--PROPHETIC ADDRESS BY PRESIDENT BRIGHAM -YOUNG--THE BATTALION STARTS ON ITS LONG JOURNEY--DOING CAMP -DUTY--HEAVY STORMS AND INSUFFICIENT RATIONS--HARD EXPERIENCES--AT FORT -LEAVENWORTH--MEXICAN MULES AS A CURE FOR EGOTISM--COLONEL ALLEN TAKEN -ILL--ON THE SANTA FE ROAD--SUFFERING FROM THIRST--SICKNESS AMONG THE -TROOPS--DR. G.B. SANDERSON, A TYRANNICAL QUACK--ARMY MERCHANTS--ORDER -OF MARCHING. - -IT was about one o'clock in the afternoon of July 9 when we bade our -friends an affectionate farewell, and started on what we understood to -be a journey of one hundred and thirty-eight miles, to join the army -of the United States at our country's call. We had provisions enough -put up to last us on our trip. The night previous our old clothes -had received the necessary repairs. Our preparations were hasty and -incomplete, for we had been told (by an unauthorized person, as we -afterwards learned) that when we got to Sarpy's Point, on the Missouri -River, we would draw uniforms, clothing, blankets, and rations, and -would have to cast aside our old clothes. - -Our initial trip was begun without a blanket to wrap ourselves in, -as we thought we could find shelter in the camps along the line of -march. But in this we were mistaken, for everybody seemed to have -all they could do to shelter their own. The first night we camped on -the bank of a small stream, where we fell in with twelve or fifteen -other volunteers who had not so much as a bit of bread, but plenty of -assurance in asking for what others had. We divided with them, then -scraped what leaves we could and laid down thereon, with a chunk of -wood for our pillow. Next morning we divided our last morsel of food -with what we learned later were the very roughest element of the -battalion. - -For five days we journeyed, much of the time in heavy rain and deep -mud, sleeping on the wet ground without blankets or other kind of -bedding, and living on elm bark and occasionally a very small ration -of buttermilk handed to us by humane sisters as we passed their tents. -We thought our experience was pretty rough, but I do not remember that -I heard murmuring from the lips of anyone, for we felt that we were in -the service of God and our country. - -When we reached the Missouri River we found that some four hundred men -had rendezvoused there. In the camps of the Latter-day Saints, close -by, there were some thousands of men, women and children; a brush -bowery had been erected, where the people met for religious worship. -We soon found friends who welcomed us to camp, and we were invited to -a social dance and farewell party. We had excellent music, the best -dinner that the country could afford, and, above all, a spirit of -brotherly love and union that I have never seen surpassed. With all on -the altar of sacrifice for God and His kingdom and for our country, it -seemed that everything and everybody looked to the accomplishment of -one grand, common cause, not a dissenting voice being heard from anyone. - -July 16, 1846, we were mustered into the service of the United States, -and, under command of Col. James Allen, marched down the bluffs to the -Missouri bottoms, where we camped in a cottonwood grove. Some flour -and other provisions were issued to us, and we peeled the bark off -a tree for a bread tray or kneading trough. Some rolled their dough -around sticks and stuck or held it before the fire, and others baked -their bread in the ashes; for we had not yet drawn any camp equipage. -We received one blanket apiece, and had that charged up, the amount to -be taken out of our pay. - -I am not writing a history of the Mormon Battalion, but am relating my -individual experiences in that detachment of the United States army, as -I recollect them; so it will not be expected of me to tell much of what -others saw, or to narrate events as they remember them, but as they -impressed themselves upon my mind at the time of occurrence. - -Just before our last farewell to friends at the Missouri River, and -preparatory to taking up our line of march, we were formed into a -hollow square, and President Brigham Young, with Heber C. Kimball and -others of the Apostles, came to our camp, rode into the square, and -gave us parting blessings and instructions. The words of President -Young, as they fastened themselves upon my memory, were in substance as -follows: "Now, brethren, you are going as soldiers at your country's -call. You will travel in a foreign land, in an enemy's country; and -if you will live your religion, obey your officers, attend to your -prayers, and as you travel in an enemy's land, hold sacred the property -of the people, never taking anything that does not belong to you only -in case of starvation; though you may be traveling in an enemy's -country, do not disturb fruit orchards or chicken coops or beehives, do -not take anything but what you pay for--although it is customary for -soldiers to plunder their enemies in time of war, it is wrong--always -spare life when possible; if you obey this counsel, attending to -your prayers to the Lord, I promise you in the name of the Lord God -of Israel that not one soul of you shall fall by the hands of the -enemy. You will pass over battlefields; battles will be fought in your -front and in your rear, on your right hand and on your left, and your -enemies shall flee before you. Your names shall be held in honorable -remembrance to the latest generation." - -Heber C. Kimball and other prominent men of the Church confirmed what -President Young had said, and all bade us an affectionate farewell, -with "God bless you and spare your lives." - -Thus we set out in good cheer on our journey of more than two thousand -miles in a section of the continent wholly unknown to us. - -In the month of July, from about the 20th, we passed down through the -towns and villages along the river, for two hundred miles, to Fort -Leavenworth. The heat was excessive, and the roads dusty, when we -started out. A great part of the way we had only a small ration of -food, for it did not seem to be in the country, and we suffered much -from want. We took regular turns in standing guard around the camp and -in herding the stock. Heavy rains came on, and for several days we -pressed forward amid such terrible storms as I never had experienced -before. With less than half rations, and that badly or insufficiently -cooked, from lack of proper utensils and experience, and having to lie -on the ground without any bedding save one blanket each, it is a wonder -the entire camp were not down sick instead of a few. But with all this -hardship there were no desertions and few complaints. Everything seemed -to move harmoniously among the men. - -The command crossed the river at Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, and soon -afterwards we drew a tent to each mess of six men. This afforded us -great relief at nights, protecting us from the dews and rain; but in -the daytime the whiteness of the tents seemed to intensify the heat so -that there was no comfort in them. While at Fort Leavenworth we washed -our old clothing and made ourselves as comfortable as possible. Soon we -drew camp equipage and rations from the government. We got flintlock -muskets, and accoutrements consisting of bayonets, cartridge-boxes, -straps and belts, canteens, haversacks, etc., also a knapsack each. -We drew our first pay, forty-two dollars each, sent part of it to our -families, and fitted ourselves out with new clothes and shoes. - -With all the paraphernalia of soldiers, we seemed so burdened as to -be able neither to run nor to fight. Then to be obliged to travel all -day under a broiling sun, or in driving rain or fierce winds, across -sandy deserts and over trackless mountains, going sometimes sixty to -ninety miles without water, in an enemy's country--kind reader, you -may picture such scenes in your imagination, but it is impossible for -you to realize the conditions except by actual experience therein. -It is equally impossible for me to find language to describe fitly -the situation at that time at the United States military post of Fort -Leavenworth. - -The place being an outfitting station for United States forces in the -war with Mexico, all was bustle and activity; steamboats were unloading -material, and teams filled the streets; many of the new recruits -were very rough indeed, and drinking and fighting seemed to be their -pastime; myself and companions were amazed and shocked at the profane -and vulgar language and vile actions that we were compelled to listen -to and witness; with all else, squads of soldiers were being drilled, -the bugle sound was frequent, as were also the beating of the drum and -the playing of the fife; everywhere the men were preparing for victory -or death, and many were so reckless they did not seem to care which -came. - -As our battalion was preparing quietly for the great march before us, -a band of very small Mexican mules was brought in to be used as teams -in our transportation department. The animals were unaccustomed to -harness, and very wild, so there was a detail of men from each company -assigned to do the harnessing. It fell to my lot to engage in the work, -and great was my surprise to see one of those little mules dragging -three to five men about the yards. I thought I was able to handle one -of the little long-eared animals myself, but had the conceit taken out -of me in quick order by having my hands burned with the rope, as I -was jerked and dragged about in fertilizer in the yards--there being -an abundance there. But we accomplished our work, with some sport and -considerable cost to our patience and muscular energy. - -From the 10th to the 15th of August, companies A, B, and C moved out on -the Santa Fe road, and in two or three days were followed by companies -D and E. Our esteemed colonel, James Allen, having been taken ill, -ordered Captain Jefferson Hunt of company A to take command until the -colonel should recover and settle up the business of outfitting the -battalion. - -Our route lay over rolling hills, through some timbered country and -some prairie. The weather was warm, and there was much suffering, -especially from lack of drinking water, this being scarce. The sick -felt the hardship particularly, and there was quite a number down with -chills and fever; such water as was obtainable was of poor quality, -warm and unhealthy, and added to the number of the sick. - -Each company had a large wagon and three or four yoke of oxen to haul -the tents and camp equipage, and one issue of rations, I think it was -for one week. The government had assigned a doctor to our command, -George B. Sanderson of Platte County, Missouri. He proved to be so -cruel and tyrannical as to incur the ill-will of every man in the -command. He had immediate charge of the hospital wagons, and no matter -how ill a man was, he was not allowed to ride in the company's wagon -until he had reported to this cruel quack, who had to be honored with -the title of physician and surgeon. With his permission a man was -allowed to crawl into his company's wagon, which was filled nearly to -the bows with tents and other camp equipage. Sometimes there would be -five or six crowded in together, some shaking with ague and others -burning with fever. Our company wagon was called the Gray Eagle; John -Gilbert was the teamster, and did all in his power to favor those of -his comrades who deserved it. - -Besides the company and hospital wagons, there were sutlers' or -merchants' wagons--speculators that are permitted to follow the army -for what they can make off the troops. They carry in stock such -things as they know from experience the soldier most needs, and many -luxuries; they had almost everything to entice the famishing soldier, -who had to stand guard over them and their stores. Many times, through -hardships, we seemed compelled to patronize them. Our suffering was -their opportunity, and they were not slow to take advantage of it. -Their prices were enormous, and their bills never failed to reach the -paymaster by each payday; after these were paid, the soldier came in -for the balance, if there was any. Some were very unfortunate through -sickness, and had to patronize the sutler, or merchant; others were -unwise in their purchases; and thus the eight dollars a month wages -often was spent before it was earned. - -Our commissary and ammunition department included over a hundred -wagons; the three or four pieces of artillery followed close in our -rear, in charge of a wagonmaster and assistants. - -The usual order of marching, as I remember it, was: an advance guard; -then the colonel and his staff; next came the body of the command; then -a rearguard, the baggage and hospital wagons, etc. Only on special -occasions was the main body of the battalion permitted to march at -will, as long as it remained between the front and rear guards. When -the country was specially rough, and roads had to be made, the road -hands, or, in military language, the sappers and miners, were allowed -extra rations, and had to start out very early with the advance guard. - - - -CHAPTER V. - -CROSSING OF THE KAW RIVER--INDIAN FARMERS--FIERCE STORM ON STONE COAL -CREEK--CROSSING A CREEK WITH PRECIPITOUS BANKS--RUINS OF AN ANCIENT -CITY--WAGONLOAD OF SICK UPSET IN A STREAM--SAD NEWS OF COL. ALLEN'S -DEATH--DISPUTE OVER HIS SUCCESSOR--MILITARY RULES DISREGARDED IN -SETTLING THE QUESTION--TROOPS DISSATISFIED--SICKNESS IN CAMP--HARSHNESS -OF THE NEW COMMANDER, LIEUTENANT COLONEL SMITH--BRUTALITY OF THE -DOCTOR--DOSES OF OBJECTIONABLE MEDICINE IN AN OLD IRON SPOON--IN THE -COMANCHE INDIAN COUNTRY--ABUSE FROM LIEUTENANT COLONEL SMITH--SCARCITY -OF FUEL--BUFFALO CHIPS--COOKING FOOD UNDER GREAT DIFFICULTIES--INCREASE -OF SICKNESS--UP THE GRAND VALLEY OF THE ARKANSAS--DETACHMENT OF SICK -SENT TO PUEBLO--MIRAGES--HERDS OF BUFFALO--ON THE SICK LIST--REACH THE -ROCKY MOUNTAINS--PREHISTORIC RUINS--IN MEXICAN VILLAGES--ARRIVAL AT -SANTA FE. - -WE crossed the Kaw River about the 17th of August, being ferried over -in flat boats by some half civilized Delaware and Shawnee Indians. -Where we crossed the river it was from three to four hundred yards -wide. The country in the neighborhood seemed to be well adapted to -farming. The Indians had good crops of corn and watermelons, and knew -as well as white men how to charge for them. These Indians were an -intelligent-looking people, having log cabins for dwellings. - -From the Kaw we traveled to Spring Creek, over a beautiful country, and -there joined the companies that had preceded us. We met with rainstorms -that made it very disagreeable for us at night, when two of us would -spread one blanket and lie down on it. It would wet through at once; -and though we had tents over us, we often slept on the wet ground, in -wet clothes. - -Moving onward to Stone Coal Creek, we there endured one of the severest -storms of wind and rain that any of us ever had experienced. Nearly -every tent was blown down; several government wagons were overturned, -and others were sent rolling before the wind as though they were -express or stage coaches; many men fell on their faces and held to -the shrubbery to avoid being carried away by the violence of the -hurricane, while others not so fortunate as to be able to catch hold -of a shrub were driven some rods before the blast. Some were bruised -and others badly frightened, but none received serious injury; and -although everybody was thoroughly soaked, not even the sick seemed to -be unfavorably affected in health by their experience. - -The storm over and our clothing dried, we resumed our march. Coming to -a deep creek with precipitous banks, we had to hold the wagons back -with ropes and let them down gradually to the bed of the stream; then -a number of men with ropes, on the opposite side, assisted the teams -in drawing the wagons up the steep bank. We passed over some very fine -land to a place we named Allen's Grove, and camped. Next day we came -to the ruins of a city of the dim, distant past; the stone walls were -yet visible to the traveler. That night we rested on Beaver Creek. On -the 25th or 26th, while traveling through a beautiful country of rich -soil, one wagon with five or six people was upset into a creek, and -the occupants received a dangerous ducking, though I do not recall any -serious results following. - -It was on this day that a messenger from Fort Leavenworth overtook us, -bringing the sorrowful news of the death of our esteemed commander, -Colonel James Allen. It was a sad blow to us, for all had learned to -respect, and, indeed, even to love him. Yet I have felt sometimes that -it was a kind providence to him that he was taken from us, for his -nature was too kind and sympathetic to have forced his men through what -the Mormon Battalion had to endure before reaching its destination. - -Colonel Allen's death left a vacancy in the command that was not -difficult to fill according to military rules, as the next officer -in rank should have occupied his place. But plain as is the military -law on the subject, there arose a dispute, and much feeling was -worked up. The council of officers decided that, as Captain Jefferson -Hunt of company A had been placed in charge by Colonel Allen till the -latter should rejoin the command, he should continue in that position. -Accordingly, he led the battalion to Council Grove, where it was -learned that Lieutenant Colonel Smith was on the way, intending to -assume command. Thus the quiet of the camp was again disturbed, and -much feeling manifested. There were many warm discussions between the -officers and among the soldiers as well. - -It was at Council Grove that Lieutenant Colonel Smith, Major Walker, -and G. B. Sanderson overtook us. The question of command was further -discussed, Captain Hunt standing up for his rights. But in the council, -Captain Nelson Higgins of Company D (my company) moved that Smith -should be recognized as the commanding officer; this was seconded by -Captain Davis of Company E; all the officers but three, viz.: Laron -Clark, Samuel Gully, and Wesley W. Willis, voted for the motion, and -the question was settled. Lieutenant Colonel A. J. Smith took command, -to the disgust of the soldiers, a large majority of whom, if not all, -were quite dissatisfied. Next day we reached Diamond Springs, where the -battalion was inspected by Lieutenant Colonel Smith. - -At this time there was much sickness in camp, chills and fever and -mumps. This condition was produced by frequent changes of drinking -water, and by poorly-cooked food, as many times we had to depend on -dry weeds for fuel. When a man became sick, it had been the custom for -him to crawl into the company wagon. Our new commander soon dropped -on the kindness of the teamster, and put an end to it without mercy. -The commander was so rough and ungentle, and had so much pomposity and -assurance, that the whole command was disgusted, and almost all were -angry. He ordered the sick out of the wagons, and directed that before -they could ride they must be reported by the doctor as unable to walk, -and had to take a dose of the doctor's drugs from his old rusty spoon. -We soon began to realize that we had fallen into bad hands. - -The doctor often talked to the men as though they were brutes. He was -very unfeeling, and the men would not respond to his sick call ("Jim -along, Josey") when it was possible for them to walk alone. When we -stopped he would sit in front of his tent with his book on his knee, a -long chest of medicine before him, a colored man for his body servant, -and a hospital steward standing in front of the wagon. At sick call, -everyone who could not walk had to be taken before the doctor's tent, -and there be seated or laid down, sometimes on the wet ground, then, -like going to a mill, wait for his grist, or dose of calomel. There -was not much chance to miss it, for, when a man's name was called and -responded to, the hospital steward was ordered to give him such and -such a dose, and the old iron spoon, with its contents of we knew -not what, was presented in the presence of the doctor. Under these -circumstances we began to feel at least the rigors of military rule. - -About this time we entered the Comanche Indian country, and on -September 2 camped on Cottonwood Creek. The Indians were said to be -very hostile, yet we had no trouble with them. I think it was here that -we began to see signs of buffalo, and the prairie dog villages. Timber -was very scarce, and the country was more uninviting than that we had -passed over. - -Shortly after Lieutenant Colonel Smith took command we were drawn up -in line, and some military laws were read to us. At the end of almost -every sentence there was the word death, as punishment for infraction -of the law. We were then talked to in a most offensive and domineering -manner, until some of us began to wonder what we had done to merit such -severity and downright abuse. - -We were tired and footsore, and suffered much from lack of water. The -country showed such a sameness of forbidding features that the journey -became very monotonous and tiresome. Fuel was so scarce that we had to -dig trenches two or three feet long, and eight or ten inches wide and -a foot deep, fill these with dry grass, and start a fire and pile on -buffalo chips, with which to do our cooking. The result was our food -often was half raw and badly smoked, and many of the men were brought -down with severe diarrheal complaints. As many had traveled the road in -advance of us, even buffalo chips for fuel were so scarce that often we -had to go for miles to gather them. - -When we reached Pawnee Fork we found it a very difficult stream to -cross. The wagons had to be let down the steep bank with ropes, by the -men, and had to be taken up the opposite bank in the same manner. - -The events narrated here will indicate that it is not all of a -soldier's duty when on a long march to tramp all day with musket and -accoutrements and knapsack, but the soldier on such a journey as we -had must push and pull wagons up hill, hold them back when going down -hill, haul them through deep sands, and help them and the teams out -of quicksands; he must stand guard and night-herd stock; must press -on, over rough or smooth ground, rain or shine; must wade rivers, and -when crossing streams is not allowed to take off his clothing, but has -to plunge into the water, and then travel on in wet clothes; besides, -there are many other experiences that are far from pleasant. - -We pushed along the best we could to the Arkansas River, through a -very uninviting country, in which we began to find brackish water and -saleratus. We traveled up the broad river bottoms of the Arkansas -eighty to one hundred miles, the water being poor and unhealthy. Many -were added to the corps of "Jim along, Joseys," and had to be led or -carried by their comrades to the unfeeling doctor, many times to be -cursed at by him, and then to take a dose from his nauseating spoon. -Quite a number of the sick were badly salivated by the drugs given them. - -About September 15 or 16, we crossed the river where the roads fork, -one going toward Fort Benton, and the other leading to Santa Fe. There -we parted with Captain Nelson Higgins, he having been detailed to take -a small squad of men and the families to a Spanish town called Pueblo, -some hundred miles away, there to winter. Meanwhile, we pushed our -way over barren plains and sandy deserts to the Cimmaron River. We -saw deceptive rivers, ponds and lakes; we chased after them for miles -sometimes, till we found that, like jack o' lantern or will o' the -wisp, we could not get nearer to them. Finally we learned that they -were mirages--a peculiar reflection of the sun upon the great plains or -sandy deserts. It seemed impossible for the inexperienced to discern -the difference between the mirage and a body of real water. - -In this barren country we saw immense herds of buffalo; in our long -march we came to ponds of water made perfectly filthy by the buffalo, -and rendered offensive by the broiling hot sun, the liquid being almost -as thick as gruel; but we were so terribly famished with thirst that we -were glad to get even such foul water. - -When the Cimmaron River was reached, there was good water, and good -feed for our stock, but our rations were reduced one-third, and we were -pretty well worn down. - -On the 18th or 19th of September it was my place to be on guard. I had -stood the journey very well, but by this time had become affected by -the alkali, and that day was so badly afflicted with diarrhea as to be -almost unable to drag myself into camp. But rather than march to "Jim -along, Josey," I took my place on guard. That night there came on one -of the most terrible storms I ever have experienced. I had to brace -myself with my musket to stand. From that date I have never been free -from pain in the right limb, near the instep, caused by the severe -exposure. Next day it became necessary to go on the sick list, to -remain several days. - -About the 23rd we began to come to timber in the hills, and having been -for nine or ten days with nothing but grass and buffalo chips for fuel, -we were in a situation to appreciate the change. Soon we were among the -sandhills, where traveling was hard, and passed the Rabbit Ears (Black -Peak and Agua Fria Peak), two high mountain peaks. In this mountainous -region we found traces of the inhabitants of a past age, in old stone -walls and in numerous' irrigation canals long since dry. - -On the 2nd or 3rd of October we came to the Red River. The mountain -air was bracing, but there were many men who yet remained sick. About -this time the command was culled over by Lieutenant Colonel Smith and -the doctor, and all who were considered able to stand a forced march to -Santa Fe were ordered forward on the double quick. - -The sick men were left to take care of themselves as best they could, -with the broken down teams of the command to look after. My lot was -still with the invalids, and of course I had to remain. Yet we were -only about two days behind the strong men who left us in the mountains; -we reached Santa Fe on October 12th, having passed through several -Mexican villages, the houses of which were low and flat-roofed, and -covered principally with cement and tile. We saw the very small Mexican -sheep and goats, the people milking the latter, by sitting at the back -end, in an earthen pot, and there milking regardless of anything that -might drop into the vessel intended for milk only. - -From the appearance of Santa Fe we had no reason to doubt that it was -between three and four hundred years old; for it looked at least that -far behind the times. Mexicans and Indians, badly mixed, made up the -population. Their costume, manners, habits, and in fact everything, -were both strange and novel to us, and of course were quite an -attraction. Many of the people looked on us with suspicion, and if -it had been in their power no doubt they would have given us a warm -reception; others appeared to be pleased, doubtless because it made -trade better for them, and on that account they seemed very friendly. -They brought into camp, for sale, many articles of food; the strongest -of these were red pepper pies, the pepper-pods as large as a teacup, and -onions (savoyas) as large as saucers, to be eaten raw like turnips. - -A few days' rest and change of food at Santa Fe, and the command was -ready to resume its arduous march. - - - -CHAPTER VI. - -EXEMPLAR'S CONDUCT OF THE MORMON TROOPS--LIEUTENANT COLONEL -P. ST. GEORGE COOKE ARRIVES AND ASSUMES COMMAND--A WELCOME -CHANGE--ANOTHER DETACHMENT OP SICK, ALSO THE LAUNDRESSES, SENT TO -PUEBLO--SELECTING MEN TO CONTINUE THE JOURNEY TO CALIFORNIA--REDUCING -THE BAGGAGE--DIFFICULTIES OF THE 1,100 MILES JOURNEY AHEAD--POOR -EQUIPMENT THEREFOR--LEAVE SANTA FE--ROADS OF HEAVY SAND--ON ONE-THIRD -RATIONS--HARDSHIPS INCREASE--GALLED FEET AND GNAWING STOMACHS--MORE -SICK MEN FOR PUEBLO--LEAVING THE LAST WAGONS--MULES AND OXEN IN A PACK -TRAIN--IN AN UNKNOWN COUNTRY--HUNTING A PASS OVER THE MOUNTAINS--ALARM -OF AN ENEMY--A BEAVER DAM--CROSSING THE RIO GRANDE DEL NORTE--GREAT -SUFFERING AMONG THE TROOPS. - -WHILE we were in Santa Fe, Colonel Sterling Price came in with his -cavalry command, and soon the town prison was filled with them, so that -it became necessary for a guard from the Mormon Battalion to be posted -at the prison. I do not recall that any of our command was put into the -prison, though it is possible one or two might have been, for a few of -them got rather too much wine; but it was a very few who acted that -way. There were many invalids of other commands left to garrison Santa -Fe, and they caused considerable disturbance, many of them getting into -prison. - -It seems that word had gone ahead to the Mexican town that the Mormons -were a very hard class of outlaws, consequently at first we were looked -upon as "toughs" of the very worst kind. But when the people had an -opportunity to see our superior conduct in contrast with that of the -other troops, they realized the true situation, and male and female -thronged our camp in friendly visit. - -It was on October 13, 1846, that Lieutenant Colonel P. St. George Cooke -assumed command of the Mormon Battalion, having been designated for -that purpose, and by this proceeding we were liberated from the little -tyrant Lieutenant Colonel A. J. Smith. - -By order of Colonel Cooke, Captain James Brown of Company C took -command of all the sick that were unable to continue the journey to -California; also of most of the laundresses, and a few able-bodied -men, with directions to go north to Pueblo, and join Captain Higgins. -In order to determine who were not able to continue the march to -California, we were drawn up in line, and the officers and Dr. -Sanderson inspected the whole command. The doctor scrutinized every one -of us, and when he said a man was not able to go, his name was added to -Captain Brown's detachment, whether the man liked it or not; and when -the doctor said a man could make the trip, that settled the matter. The -operation was much like a cooper culling stave timber, or a butcher -separating the lean from the fat sheep. - -My desire was very strong to continue the overland journey, and when -the doctor neared me, I braced up and tried to look brave and hardy. -To the doctor's inquiry, "How do you feel?" my answer was, "First -rate." He looked at me suspiciously and said, "You look d--d pale and -weak," then passed on, and I was greatly relieved at having gone safely -through the inspection. - -In order No. 8, Colonel Cooke called the particular attention of the -company commanders to the necessity of reducing baggage as much as -possible; that means for transportation were very deficient; that the -road was almost impracticable, much of it being in deep sand, and -how soon we would have to abandon our wagons it was impossible to -ascertain; that skillets and ovens could not be taken, and but one -camp-kettle to each mess of ten men. - -Colonel Cooke very properly and correctly pointed out that everything -seemed to conspire to discourage the extraordinary undertaking of -marching the battalion 1,100 miles, for the much greater part of the -way through an unknown wilderness, without road or trail, and with a -wagon train. He said the battalion was much worn by traveling on foot, -marching from Nauvoo, Illinois; their clothing was very scant, there -was no money to pay them, or clothing to issue; the mules were utterly -broken down; the quartermaster's department was out of funds and its -credit bad; animals were scarce, and those procured were inferior and -deteriorating every hour from the lack of forage. All this made it -necessary that such careful preparation as could be should be made in -advance. - -It can be easily seen from this statement that the condition and -prospects of the battalion were not very encouraging; yet there -were very few of the men who had the least desire to retrace their -steps--they knew what they had passed through, but looking ahead they -tried to hope for the best, realizing, just as they had been told, that -the country through which they had to travel was an unknown region. - -With the colonel's orders carried out, we got ready to move, and about -the 21st of October we left Santa Fe and traveled six or eight miles -to a stream called Agua Fria (cold water). Grass for animals was very -short, the nights were very cold, and our road was in heavy sand almost -from the start. Our advance was slow, for the best teams had been taken -for extra service or express duties in other departments. Besides, -there was added to our already overburdened animals the load of sacks, -packsaddles, lashing-ropes, etc., necessary in the event of being -compelled to abandon the wagons, so we would not be entirely without -means of transportation. There was also the burden of sheep pelts and -blankets to use under pack saddles, and as most of these were bought -second-hand, they were well stocked with the insects commonly called -"greybacks." - -In a short time we drew near to the mountains, and the weather became -colder. Having but one blanket each we began to use the pelts and -saddle-blankets to splice out our scanty store of bedding. Thus -we proceeded over sandy roads, through the towns and villages of -Spaniards, Indians and Greasers--the surroundings presented being of -such a sameness that the journey became very monotonous. - -Soon after leaving Santa Fe our rations were reduced to one-third -the regular amount allowed by law to the soldier. A detail of men -was called as a substitute for mules, to move and to lighten the -loads of the ammunition wagons. Each soldier was required to carry -sixty-four rounds of cartridges that contained each a one-ounce ball, -three buck-shot, and powder enough to send them where they should be, -besides the heavy paper they were wrapped in, and extra flints for the -firelock--about two hundred ounces added to the already overburdened -soldier. - -Now the soldier must wade the tributaries of the Rio Grande del Norte, -sometimes waist deep and more, and is not allowed even to take off his -shoes, or any of his wearing apparel. An officer, perched on his white -mule on some point or eminence overlooking the whole command, with a -hawk's eye for keen military experience, calls to this or that squad of -men, with a horrid oath, as if they were brutes; often he curses the -men until they long for a battle where perchance someone would remember -the tyrant with an ounce ball and three buckshot. And yet, if that -feeling were not quenched in the soldier's bosom it would not require -an engagement with the enemy to accomplish the deed. But, praise God, -that feeling quickly passed off as the men marched along, their clothes -wet, and their thick soled cowhide army shoes partly filled with -sand--the chafing and galling of the flesh without and the gnawing and -grinding of the stomach within defied the mind to dwell upon any one -subject for long at a time. - -Is it any wonder that under these conditions fifty-five of our comrades -wore down and collapsed so they had to go on the sick list and it -became necessary for Lieutenant W. W. Willis to take command of that -number of invalid soldiers, and join Captains Higgins and Brown at -Pueblo? This company of sick and exhausted men left us, on their -return, about the 10th or 12th of November. - -About this time, the quartermaster was ordered to leave the remaining -two heavy ox-wagons, while the company commanders were directed to -reduce their tent-poles two-thirds; that is, to cast away all the -upright poles and use muskets instead, and to put gores in the back -part of the tents so they could shelter nine men in place of six; we -were also to leave one-third of the campkettles. - -Then came some sport in putting packs on a number of our mules and -worn-out oxen. Some of these, which did not look as though they could -travel a hundred miles further, when the crupper was put in place would -rear up, wheel around, and kick in a most amusing style; nor did they -cease until their strength failed them. - -When this sport, if sport it may be called, was over we began to -realize in a small degree the gravity of our situation. Our guides -were "at sea," so to speak. We were in an enemy's land, with not a -soul in camp who knew anything of the country. Men had been sent ahead -to hunt a route for us to travel, and every time, on their return, -they reported impassable barriers ahead--rough, high, steep mountains, -without springs of water or creeks, or sandy plains, and barren deserts -that it would be impossible to cross. In this dilemma we had to bear to -the south, along the river, in hopes of finding a pass to the west. - -One night, while camped near the Rio Grande del Norte, we heard a great -noise as though a band of horses were crossing the river. This created -quite an alarm, as there had been rumors of Mexicans revolting. For a -short time it was thought it was Mexican cavalry crossing to attack -us by night, but on the colonel making inquiries of the guides it was -learned that the noise proceeded from beaver playing in the river. -After watching and listening for a time, all settled down, contented -that there was no enemy at hand. - -On resuming our march next day, we passed through a grove of cottonwood -trees, and saw where many of them had been cut down by the beaver. Some -of the trees were two feet or more in diameter, had been cut off in -long sections, and a surprisingly large dam had been constructed by the -beaver across the river. This dam had caused to be formed a large pond, -in which the beaver congregated at certain seasons, for sport. Thus the -mystery of our midnight disturbance was solved to our satisfaction. - -We passed along the sandy road to a large bend in the river, which -Colonel Cooke decided was the place where we would cross the stream. He -stationed himself on an abrupt point of rock, from which he could view -the whole proceeding. Men were detailed from each company to follow the -wagons through the river. In order to avoid a rocky ridge the stream -had to be crossed twice within quarter of a mile. There were very heavy -quicksands, and if the teams were allowed to stop one minute it was -doubtful whether they could start again; consequently the precaution of -having men close at hand was very important, though the average soldier -did not understand the real reason for forcing him into the water -without stripping off at least part of his raiment. - -The crossing was made early in the day, and the water was very cold, as -I had ample evidence, being one of those detailed to attend the wagons. -Our comrades took our muskets over the point while we lifted at the -wagons. As the water was waist deep, when the men would stoop to lift -it would wet our clothing very nearly to the armpits; our shoes also -were filled with sand. - -Wet and cold, almost chilled, we continued our march through deep -sands, pushing and pulling at the wagons till our clothing dried on our -bodies, our shoes became so dry and hard that walking was very painful -and difficult, and our feet became raw. If this had been all, we might -have had less reason to complain; but when an irritated officer (not -all the officers pursued such a reprehensible course, but a few of them -did) swore at us as if we were brutes, when we were already burdened -almost beyond endurance, it is no wonder there was an impulsive desire -to retaliate. For my own part, my feelings never were so outraged, -and the desire for revenge never ran so high and wild as then. But we -cooled down, though our physical sufferings were not lessened; as we -tramped on through the sands we became so weak it was almost impossible -to keep our ankles from striking together as we walked, and our hard -and dry shoetops would cut our ankles till the blood came. - - - -CHAPTER VII. - -PUSHING TO THE WEST--OVERHEARING A CONVERSATION WITH COL. COOKE--THE -COLONEL FEARS THE MEN WILL STARVE--NO BERRIES, NOT EVEN BARK OF TREES, -FOR FOOD--TRUE STATE OF AFFAIRS AS TO THE OUTLOOK KEPT FROM MOST -OF THE TROOPS--HIDES, INTESTINES, AND EVEN SOFT EDGES OF HOOFS AND -HORNS OF ANIMALS EATEN--"BIRD'S EYE SOUP."--IN A SNOWSTORM--RELICS -OF ANCIENT INHABITANTS--CAMPING WITHOUT WATER--OLD SILVER AND COPPER -MINES--HARDEST DAY OF THE JOURNEY--MEN APPEAR AS IF STRICKEN WITH -DEATH--THE WRITER SO ILL AS TO BE UNABLE To TRAVEL LONGER, AND -EXPECTS TO DIE--UNCLE ALEXANDER STEPHENS COMES WITH WATER AND REVIVES -HIM--AWFUL SUFFERING IN CAMP--REPORTED SICK NEXT MORNING--BRUTAL DR. -SANDERSON GIVES A DEADLY DOSE OF LAUDANUM, BUT THE WRITER VOMITS IT -AFTER BEING MADE FEARFULLY SICK--IN TERRIBLE DISTRESS FOR DAYS--HEALED -BY THE LAYING ON OF HANDS OF THE ELDERS OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST -OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS. - -IT was but a little while after this that we left the Rio Grande del -Norte, and pressed on toward the west. One day, while passing up a -brushy canyon, my place being with the advance guard, in the rear of -the road hands, I had occasion to step into the brush by the roadside. -While there, out of sight, Col. Cooke and staff and guides came along -and stopped right opposite me, so close that I dared not move lest they -should see me. As they came up, the colonel inquired of the guides if -there were no fruit or berries that men could live on; the reply was, -no, not a thing. They were talking about some place ahead that the -guides were acquainted with. The colonel then asked if there were no -trees that had bark something like elm bark, which men could live on -for a few days; but the answer was that there was neither fruit, roots -nor bark, that the country was a barren waste. - -Upon receiving this information, the colonel exclaimed, "What can we -do?" In response, the suggestion was that the guides did not know -unless some of the stronger men and mules were sent on a forced march -to the first place in California, where they could get a bunch of beef -cattle and meet us on the desert with them. There was some further -conversation, when it was ended by the colonel exclaiming, with a -despairing oath, "I expect the men will starve to death!" - -The deep gloom of sadness hung over those who knew of the situation. -All of the men, however, were not informed of the gravity of the -position we were in. At that time we were drawing less than half -rations. The fresh meat we had was more like glue or jelly than beef. -The plan had been adopted of slaughtering the weak cattle first, so -that the stronger animals could travel faster. When an animal became -too weak to hold up one end of a yoke, or to carry a packsaddle, it was -slaughtered, and the flesh issued to the men. Not a scrap of the animal -would be left on the ground; the hide, intestines--all was eaten; even -the tender or soft edges of the hoofs and horns would be roasted, and -gnawed at so long as a human being possibly could draw subsistence -therefrom. Many times we were without water to wash the offal. The -bones would be carried along, broken up, and boiled and re-boiled, in -some instances as long as there could be seen a single "bird's eye" -(the name given to solitary spots of grease that would come to the -surface) of grease rise on the water; then each man was eager for his -share. - -Sometimes cattle became so weak that men were left with them to come -up to the command after night. On one occasion, when an old ox could -not be got into camp and had to be left four or five miles back, men -were sent bright and early next morning, to bring him in. It snowed -that night, and in camp things generally were disagreeable. The ox was -brought in, slaughtered, and issued to us for rations. If any man had -failed to get his share of that white ox at that time there might have -been a row, but a fair distribution maintained peace. The place of our -camp was called White Ox Creek, and we laid by for one day to rest and -refresh ourselves. - -From there we traveled over a rough country, but one that evidently -had been inhabited ages ago, for we found stone walls, pottery by the -acre, and old and dry canals--their former source of water having -disappeared. We found in a rock a deep and large hole with water -sufficient to supply the command; we secured it by drawing all night, -until everything was watered. Then we moved on, and next night camped -without water. We passed many old mines, supposed to be of silver and -copper, and there were said to be gold mines in the vicinity. Late at -night we traveled, and were on the march early the following morning. -All day we pressed forward as rapidly as possible, there being no -water, and late at night the command came to a place called Dry Lake. - -That was the hardest day for me that came in the experience of the -whole journey. I had been run down so low with a severe attack of -dysentery that I could travel no longer, and laid down. My thirst was -intense, and it did not seem possible that I could live till morning. -It seemed that everyone was traveling as best he could, for the -rearguard passed me without taking any notice. Men went by, looking -like death, their mouths black, their eyes sunken till it was difficult -to recognize them. Some eyes had a staring glare, which looked as if -the monster death were close at hand. Yet the men staggered on, their -feet hitting each other, tit for tat, as one was dragged past the -other. The hopes of these men were greater than mine, for I had ceased -to march. This was the first time I had felt there was little reason to -hope that I would ever reach camp again, for I supposed that all the -men had passed me. The sun's rays faded away on the eastern mountain -tops, and the bright orb dropped beneath the western horizon. For -a moment I felt that with me the vital spark would soon sink below the -mortal horizon, as if to accompany the king of day. - -Just when my hopes were flickering as does a candle when the wick has -all but burned out, there came to my ears the sound as of the tinkling -of a tin can that seemed to keep time with a soldier's step as he -marched. Gradually the sound became more distinct until its approach -was a certainty. Then my uncle, Alexander Stephens, came in sight. He -had been left to bring up an old spotted ox which had failed, and had -driven the animal into the shade of a rocky cliff, where the ox laid -down, while the driver hunted around and found a dripping of water -as it seeped from a crevice in the rock. He had quenched his thirst -and filled his canteen, resting in the meantime, then followed on the -trail, pricking the ox with his bayonet. - -When Uncle Alexander Stephens came up he handed me his canteen, and the -draught of water quickly revived me. I did not think myself able to -rise to my feet, but with a little assistance I got up, and took hold -of the packsaddle. My knapsack, musket and accoutrements were lashed to -the ox, and by a final effort we reached Dry Lake camp, by halting at -short intervals along the four miles we had to travel. - -Wretched, wretched indeed, was the condition of the command that night. -It is doubtful whether at any time in the long march the men suffered -more than they did then and the forty-eight hours preceding. Next -morning, at the doctor's call, many had to be helped by their comrades -to the place designated for the sick. - -For myself, two men sat me upon the ground, and held me up till my time -came to be questioned. Dr. Sanderson called out, "What is the matter -with you?" When he received the information asked for he remarked -gruffly: "I've a d--d great mind not to report you sick. I never saw -such a d--d set of men in my life. They will not report till d--d nigh -dead." I answered that it did not matter to me whether he entered me on -the sick list or not, for I could not walk. At this he said sharply. -"Not a d--d word out of you or I'll make you walk." - -Then he ordered the steward to give me a dose of castor oil and -laudanum, stating the quantity. The steward, William Spencer, said, -"Isn't it a rather heavy dose?" to which the doctor responded with a -curse, telling him to do as he was ordered. At that the dose was poured -into a teacup, filling it half full. It was given to me, the steward -saying in a low tone of voice. "If you do not throw it up it will kill -you." I was assisted back to the company's wagon, and soon vomited the -medicine, but not until it had changed my countenance so much that the -lieutenant of my company, Cyrus Canfield, did not know me. He came and -ordered me out of the wagon, telling me to go to my own company. It was -sometime before he could be convinced who I really was, then remarked -that I looked so near dead that he could not believe it was I. But when -he recognized me he was very kind, and was willing to do anything he -could for my relief. - -For four days I lay in a dull stupor, when that phase of the disease -was checked, and a very high fever set in. My sufferings were so -terrible that some of my messmates came into the tent, anointed me with -oil, then administered to or prayed for me; and although burning with -a high fever till it seemed that I could not live, I was instantly -healed, so that when they took their hands off the fever was entirely -gone, and I was wet with perspiration. From that time I began to gather -strength. That was my first experience with the ordinance of healing by -the laying on of hands by the Elders of the Church of Jesus Christ of -Latter-day Saints. - - - -CHAPTER VIII. - -ON THE SUMMIT OF THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS--CROSSING THE BACKBONE OF THE -NORTH AMERICAN CONTINENT--REVIEW OF THE JOURNEY--GRAVES OPENED BY -WOLVES--MUTILATED BODIES--AN UNPARALLELED JOURNEY OF HARDSHIP--THE -PROSPECT AHEAD--A MATTER OF LIFE AND DEATH--START DOWN THE PACIFIC -SLOPE--DESCENDING THE CLIFFS WITH WAGONS--ONE VEHICLE SLIPS AND IS -REDUCED TO KINDLING WOOD AND SCRAP IRON--INTO A NEW CLIMATE--CHANGE -IN THE CHARACTER OF VEGETATION--WILD HORSES AND CATTLE--ATTACKED BY -WILD CATTLE--SEVERAL MEN HURT AND ONE MULE GORED TO DEATH--A NUMBER OF -CATTLE KILLED--SUPPLY OF BEEF--REACH THE SAN PEDRO RIVER--TRAVELING -THROUGH A HEAVY GROWTH OF MESQUIT AND CHAPPARAL--APPROACH THE MEXICAN -GARRISONED TOWN OF TUCSON--NEWS OF APPROACH OF A LARGE AMERICAN ARMY -SENT TO THE MEXICANS--ORDER ISSUED BY COLONEL COOKE. - -AT the camp at Dry Lake, which we reached between November 20 and 25, -we laid over a day, and a party was sent ahead to cut a road over the -divide. I was too weak for four or five days to take much interest in -what passed; and in the meantime the command reached and crossed the -divide, or summit of the Rocky Mountains--the backbone of the North -American continent--where the waters are divided, flowing on either -side to the Atlantic and Pacific respectively. - -For eighteen hundred miles the Mormon Battalion members had made a hard -and weary march. Starting from Nauvoo, on the Mississippi River--the -"father of waters"--as exiles, they had passed over a lovely country, -yet at a season of the year when travel was difficult, to the Missouri -River. At the latter point the battalion was mustered into service, and -moved over an excellent country two hundred miles to Fort Leavenworth; -thence through what is now the state of Kansas, passing over a goodly -land to the Great Plains, a timberless country, where water is scarce. -There they began to be footsore and leg-weary, and to suffer severely -from heat and thirst. Soon they came to the desert, and for nine days -tried cooking their shortened rations over "buffalo chip" fires, with -fuel even scarcer than it was poor; often having very little water, and -that brackish, so that men and hearts began to grow weak and ill. - -At this point in the long journey they commenced passing the open -graves of soldiers, many of whom laid down their lives in the advance -companies. Their graves were open for the reason that wolves had dug -up the dead bodies and devoured the flesh from the bones; the blankets -in which the bodies were wrapped were torn to shreds, while in some -instances the carcass still hung together, except that the fingers and -toes had been eaten off by wild beasts. The road was also strewn with -dead horses and cattle, so that as the battalion advanced the gruesome -sights became more frequent and therefore excited less comment. And in -turn the battalion contributed a share of dead to the lonely graves of -the plains. - -Then, on the sandy roads, there was the rough order to put the shoulder -to the wheel and help the jaded teams; and the battalion waded creeks -and rivers with quicksand bottoms, or lifted or pulled at ropes in -lowering or raising their wagons over rough and precipitous places--in -what appeared at that time a rough and worthless country, which may not -have changed greatly since. - -At times they were called forward to tramp sand roads for teams, and -then to return and pull at ropes or push at wagons which, without -assistance, the teams could not control. Then when Santa Fe was passed -the journey was proceeded upon with reduced rations, down the difficult -country along the Rio Grande del Norte. Onward the struggle continued, -over sandy deserts and through a rough, mountainous region, where the -hardships were intense, and where there seemed no eye to pity and no -hand to pass even a drop of water to moisten the parching tongue. It -was not human capability, it was the divine power that sustained them -in such extremities as they had to endure. - -It was thus the renowned Mormon Battalion toiled and struggled on their -journey to the summit of the lofty Rocky Mountain range--the crest -of the continent--a journey whose details of privation, and peril, -and patient courage, cannot be told in human words, and never can be -realized except by those who experienced it. So many lofty mountain -spurs had been crossed, that the final ascent seemed quite gradual. - -Leaving now this general survey of the past, I recall that from the -lofty eminence we had reached on our march, the descent was very abrupt -and difficult, through the rugged defiles to the west. But with the -battalion it was a case of life and death. That was no place to remain, -there was no earthly help at hand, no way to life open but to trust -in God and persevere in the onward movement. So with the pick-axe and -crow-bar we commenced to clear the most feasible road down by chopping -away the shrubbery and brush and removing that and the rocks. - -After much of the baggage had been taken down the mountain one way by -pack animals, long ropes and guy-ropes were attached to the wagons and -the descent with them began by another way. The wagons were lowered for -a distance of half a mile or so, men standing as best they could on -the mountain side, letting the vehicle down gradually, then holding it -till other men could get a fresh footing and lower it still further. -Thus one by one the wagons were let down in safety, all but one. By -some mishap that got adrift from the men, and to save their lives they -had to let it go until there was nothing of it but scrap-iron and -kindling-wood. As there was already an abundance of the latter around -us, no one was desirous of descending to the rugged depths of the -ravine to secure even a relic of that terrible descent. - -It was thought by our commander and guides that it would require from -six to eight days to make the descent, but thanks to the tact and skill -of some of our men who had been accustomed to frontier life, the work -was done in two days, and we were again where the wagons could stand on -partially level ground. - -In a very brief space of time we found ourselves plunged into a warm -climate, where we could not see any plant or shrub that we had been -acquainted with before. There was some small, scrubby ash, sycamore -and black walnut, but everything, even to the rocks, had a strange -appearance. We also had entered the land of wild horses and cattle, -which roamed the hills by thousands. The wild cattle became excited at -the rumbling wagons, and gathered thickly along our way. - -At last the muskets commenced to rattle, partly through fear, and -partly because we wanted beef. Finally a herd of wild cattle charged -our line, tossed some men into the air, pierced others with their -horns, knocking some down, and ran over others, attacking one light -wagon, the hind end of which was lifted clear from the road. One large -bull plunged into a six-mule team, ran his head under the off-swing -mule, throwing him entirely over the near one and thrusting his horn -into the mule's vitals, injuring our animal so it had to be left on the -ground, where it expired in a few minutes. There were several men and -mules roughly used and bruised, just the number I do not now recall. -The attacking party lost twenty or twenty-five of their number killed, -with many others badly or slightly wounded. - -We had plenty of beef for a few days, and might have secured much -more. I never understood the reason why we were not allowed to lay -by and "jerk" an abundance of meat for the subsequent use of the -command, but the stop was not permitted. Many of the men felt greatly -disappointed and indignant because we were denied the privilege of -availing ourselves of this splendid opportunity of replenishing our -scanty rations. We were half starving at the time, and perhaps if we -had been allowed to lay by a few days we would have gorged ourselves to -our injury. It may be that would have been more serious than to have -stormed, as some did, at being ordered to march on. It is possible this -was the view taken by our commander, though we never knew. - -Continuing our advance to lower levels, the climate was mild and -pleasant. Our course was northwesterly until we passed a deserted -ranch called San Bernardino, in what is now Arizona, and followed -down the San Pedro River. I think this was the south fork of the Gila -River. There was some good country along this lovely stream. It was -there we first saw the mescal and mesquit, the former being the plant -from which the Mexicans distil their whisky (pulque), the latter a tree -somewhat resembling the black locust, but growing with a very spreading -habit, making it difficult to travel among. In many places it had to be -cut down and cleared away before we could proceed. There was another -scrubby tree-growth which the Spaniards call chapparal. This brush grew -very thick in places, so that in cutting it away travel became very -tedious. - -Here the guides told Colonel Cooke that if we followed along the stream -it would be a hundred miles farther than if we cut across the bend, but -if we took the latter route we would have to pass through a Mexican -fortified town, where a body of soldiers had been left to guard it as -an outpost. At that time it was impossible for us to learn the strength -of the place; but it was thought that we might get some supplies of -provisions and some animals. At the same time there was considerable -risk that we would have to fight, and perhaps get defeated, in which -case it would be not only a loss of property but of life as well. - -On December 12 and 13 we followed down the San Pedro, our course -being nearly due north, near the base of a mountain extending towards -the Gila River. The guide, Leroux, with others, returned from an -exploration of the table-land to the west, leading to Tucson. They -found a party of Apache Indians and some Mexicans distilling mescal, -and learned from them that the Mexican garrison at Tucson numbered -about two hundred men. The interpreter with the guides, Dr. Foster, -had thought it proper to go to Tucson, and Leroux told the Mexicans to -inform the commander at Tucson that an American army was approaching -en route to California; that the advance guard numbered about three -hundred and sixty men, and if it stopped to drill it would give time -for the main army to come up; that the strength of the main army could -be judged by the size of its vanguard; and that if Foster did not -rejoin the advance guard by a given time it would be understood that he -was a prisoner at Tucson. Upon learning what had been done and said, -Colonel Cooke issued the following order: - -"Headquarters Mormon Battalion, Camp on the San Pedro, Dec. 13, 1846. - -"Thus far on our course to California we have followed the guides -furnished us by the general. These guides now point to Tucson, a -garrison town, as on our road, and assert that any other course is -one hundred miles out of the way, and over a trackless wilderness of -mountains, rivers and hills. We will march then to Tucson. We came -not to make war on Sonora, and less still to destroy an important -outpost of defense against Indians. But we will take the straight road -before us and overcome all resistance, but shall I remind you that the -American soldier ever shows justice and kindness to the unarmed and -unresisting? The property of individuals you will hold sacred; the -people of Sonora are not our enemies. - - "By order of Lieutenant Colonel Cooke. - - "P. C. Merrill, Adjutant." - - - -CHAPTER IX. - -ON THE TRAIL TO TUCSON--EXCITEMENT IN THE TOWN--MEET MEXICAN -SOLDIERS--OUR NUMBERS OVERRATED BY THE INDIANS--MEXICAN COMMANDER -UNDER ORDERS TO OPPOSE US--COLONEL COOKE ANNOUNCES HIS WISH TO -PASS ON WITHOUT HOSTILITIES--ARREST OF CORPORAL CASSADURAN, SON OF -THE MEXICAN COMMANDER AT TUCSON, AND OTHER MEXICANS WHO ARE HELD -AS HOSTAGES FOR THE RETURN OF OUR INTERPRETER--THE INTERPRETER IS -LIBERATED--AN ARMISTICE PROPOSED--SURRENDER OF TUCSON DEMANDED--MEXICAN -PRISONERS RELEASED--SURRENDER IS REFUSED--COLONEL COOKE ORDERS THE -BATTALION TO PREPARE FOR BATTLE--ADVANCE TOWARD THE TOWN--FLIGHT OF -THE MEXICANS--AT THE GATES OF TUCSON--OUR LINE OF BATTLE--ADDRESS BY -COLONEL COOKE--WE ENTER THE TOWN, AND PASS THROUGH TO CAMP--PURCHASES -OF WHEAT, CORN, ETC.--THE BATTALION NEARLY STARVED--NIGHT ALARM OF -A MEXICAN ATTACK--DIFFICULTIES OF GETTING INTO LINE--NO ENEMY IN -SIGHT--START ACROSS THE GILA DESERT--AGONY ON THE BURNING SANDS AND -ALKALI FLAT---STRENGTHENED BY THE DIVINE BLESSING--REACH THE GILA RIVER. - -ON the 14th the battalion ascended to the plateau, traveling up hill -for eight or nine miles, when it struck the trail leading to Tucson. -Colonel Cooke selected fifty men, with whom he pushed forward. Passing -the vanguard, he soon reached water, where he found four or five -Mexican soldiers cutting grass. Their arms and saddles were on their -horses near by, easily accessible to our men. But these had no wish to -molest them, and the Mexicans appeared to pay little attention to us. - -The colonel learned from a Mexican sergeant that rumors of a large -force of American troops coming had reached Tucson, and great -excitement prevailed in the town. Of course the colonel, who was -possessed of generalship as well as a stern sense of discipline, took -no pains to disabuse the Mexicans' minds, and thus possibly expose -our little army to unnecessary peril. Indians who had seen us from a -distance had overestimated largely our numbers, and thus served to -impress the people of Sonora with the accuracy of the statement made by -the guides. - -The colonel also learned from the Mexican sergeant that the commander -of the garrison had orders from the governor not to allow any armed -force to pass through the town without resistance. A message was -therefore sent to the commander by this same sergeant, saying that the -people need not be alarmed, as we were their friends and would do them -no harm, as we wished merely to purchase supplies and pass on. - -The next day we traveled about twelve miles, passing a distillery, and -camped without water. The battalion marched in front of the wagons, to -protect the provisions. Here a new (to us) species of cactus proved -very troublesome. It was jointed, and when an animal rubbed against the -thorns it broke loose at the joints, and sections about three inches -long would stick fast to the animal. The same variety of cactus is -found in southern Utah. - -This day a corporal, the son of Cassaduran, commander of the Mexican -post at Tucson, and three Mexican soldiers were met with. They showed -no signs of fear until Colonel Cooke ordered them arrested, when they -seemed terribly frightened. On arriving at our camp, the corporal was -questioned by the commander as to Dr. Foster. He said (and it proved to -be true) that Foster was under guard, but had been requested earnestly -to come with them, and had refused. He had feigned indignation at being -arrested, lest the Mexicans should be suspicious as to our numbers and -should get reinforcements and fight us. As he anticipated, his conduct -inspired them with terror. - -One of the Mexican prisoners was released and sent to the garrison -with two of the guides, one of whom took a note to the commander of -the post, demanding Foster's release and stating that the other three -Mexicans were held as hostages. About midnight, Dr. Foster was brought -into camp by two officers, one of whom was authorized to arrange a -special armistice. - -Colonel Cooke sent a proposition to the Mexican commander that he -deliver up a few arms as a guaranty of surrender, and that the -inhabitants of Tucson would not fight against the United States, unless -released as prisoners of war. The Mexican prisoners also were released. -Our camp at this time was about sixteen miles from Tucson; and on our -advance the following day, when a few miles out, a cavalryman met us -with a note from Captain Cassaduran, declining the proposition to -surrender. We were thereupon ordered to load our muskets and prepare -for an engagement. We had not traveled far, however, before two other -Mexicans met us, with the news that the garrison at Tucson had fled, -and had forced most of the inhabitants to leave the town. They also -had taken two brass pieces of artillery with them. A little later in -the day, about a dozen well armed men, probably soldiers in citizens' -dress, met and accompanied the battalion to Tucson. But before passing -through the gates a halt was ordered. - -That morning, when we were striking camp for the march into Tucson, Dr. -Sanderson opened up again by remarking that "every d--d man who could -stand alone ought to fall into line." Our first move was to form ranks -with everything in proper order to make an assault or receive a charge. -Then we moved out in line of battle. When within three or four miles of -the fort a stop was made, we were faced to the right, and the command -came to forward march, double-quick time. At that the whole column -moved on a smart trot. Some of us, at least, thought we were advancing -upon an enemy that had been discovered by the commander; but when we -had gone pell-mell over cobblerock and gullies, through brush and -cactus, for a distance of nearly three quarters of a mile, we received -the command to halt. Then came orders to left face, file left, march. -This move brought us back into the road, where we filed to the right -and marched on to the fort. - -At the gates of the fort. Colonel Cooke made a brief speech, stating -that the soldiers and citizens had fled, leaving their property behind -and in our power; that we had not come to make war on Sonora; and that -there must not be any interference with the private property of the -citizens. - -We then marched through the town, where a few aged men and women and -some children brought us water and other small tokens of respect. We -made no halt in the village, which had contained some four or five -hundred inhabitants, of which number all but about a hundred had fled. -Our stop was made about half a mile down stream from the place. - -In the town we made purchases of wheat, corn, beans and peas, which we -parched or boiled. We were so near starved that we could not wait for -this food to be more than half cooked before we ate it. There was no -general supply purchased at Tucson, but each man or mess obtained as -much as could be with the scanty means on hand. - -On the night of December 17, Albern Allen and his son Rufus C. Allen -had been placed on picket guard above Tucson, with orders that if any -body of men, say ten or more, appeared, an alarm was to be fired, and -the guards were to run into camp. Sometime between midnight and two -o'clock a body of Mexicans put in an appearance, and the alarm was -given as ordered. The bugle sounded at the colonel's quarters, and soon -Lieutenant George Oman, who was officer of the day, rushed through the -camp, shouting, "Beat that drum; if you cannot beat the drum, beat the -fife!" The drum-major, R. D. Sprague, obeyed the order, and hit the -drum. Immediately the stern voice of the colonel shouted to cease that -music. In less time than it takes to tell it, lights sprang up through -the camp. Then came the sharp command from the colonel, "Dust those -fires!" and the flames went out; the adjutant rushed through the camp -with orders to the officers to form their companies into line, the men -were commanded to fall in, and all was rustle and bustle. - -The writer had been up relieving his stomach of half-boiled wheat, -corn and peas, and had just got settled back in bed when the alarm -was fired, so he heard all that was going on. As we all slept in our -pantaloons, the first thing I thought of in that country of prickly -pears was my boots; and while reaching for these and bumping heads with -comrades, some of the men whose muskets were used for uprights for the -tent thought these the first articles in the emergency and seized them, -the tent coming down and the ridge-pole making another bump on heads. -At the same time we were all trapped in the fallen tent, which was -pinned down tight. I was trying to get the left boot on the right foot, -and my footwear being rather small I had no easy job. All being caught -in the tent-trap, the thought came how easy it would be for a body of -Mexican cavalry in a charge to cut us to pieces, and we soon burst -through the tent and fell into line. - -For the first time in the whole march the writer brought up the rear -in getting to his place, and received a rebuke from the officer -in command, George P. Dykes. Right here, however, in that brief -experience, I learned a lesson I have never forgotten, namely, order -in dressing and undressing. We had been in the habit of putting -our clothing anywhere and each throwing his on top of another's, -if convenience appeared to suggest it, so that in the dark it was -difficult for each to get into his own raiment. I realized then how -important it was to have "a place for everything and everything in its -place;" hence to put every article of wearing apparel down so that in -the darkest hour of night I knew where to place my hand on it, and when -armed always to have my weapons in the best possible order and where -the hand might be laid on them without any mistakes. - -Notwithstanding all the confusion, it seemed to me we were in line of -battle in very short order, awaiting an attack of Mexican cavalry. -There was a few minutes' breathless silence after we were ready for the -assault, and no enemy appearing, reconnoitering parties were sent out -to ascertain the true situation. We were held in readiness an hour or -more, then learning that everything was quiet, were permitted to retire -to our tents, but not without some apprehension of danger until the -dawn of day, which came bright and peaceful, and we began our march out -on what was known as the Ninety-five Mile Desert, which lay between us -and the Gila River. - -After the first day's march on that awful stretch of barren waste, we -began to straggle along, and before the Gila was reached the command -was scattered along on the clay beds and sand strips for twenty miles. -We traveled night and day, not stopping at any one place more than six -hours. - -The command was in a most deplorable condition on this journey. Many -were the men that lay down by the wayside without a hope that they -would live to reach water, and often thinking that they were behind the -command. But after they had rested for a few hours and perhaps dozed -long enough to dream that they died on the desert, and that the wolves -that were howling around were dragging their emaciated carcasses over -the sands or perchance in the alkali pools, so strongly impregnated -with poisonous stuff that it would consume, in a short time, the flesh -if not the bones also, then the thought of home and loved ones would -come; and what was sometimes last, though not the least, would be the -memory of the promises which the servants of God had made when we left -the dear ones of home. Then the worn and weary soldier would stagger -to his feet, survey the surroundings, and perhaps would catch sight, -in the distance, of some comrade who was staggering and reeling onward -toward the setting sun, and would follow in his path. - -So the almost dead soldier would go on, his feet playing pit-a-pat as -they dragged past each other, until his limbs would refuse to carry him -farther, and down he would go and repeat the agonizing experience of -a few hours previous. He would also chew a buckshot or two to induce -moisture in his parching tongue, and would offer an earnest prayer from -his humble soul--a further exertion which he would not have brought his -wearied mind to do if it had not been for the confidence he placed in -the promises of God, made through His faithful servants. - -Thus, dear reader, the renowned Mormon Battalion passed forward across -the great Gila Desert, almost without a human reason to hope that they -would reach the goal, and only able to accomplish their aim through -divine grace. When they succeeded in reaching the banks of the river, -their clothes were so tattered and torn that it was with difficulty -they could cover their nakedness. - - - -CHAPTER X. - -ON THE GILA RIVER--PIMA INDIAN VILLAGE--WELCOME GIFTS FROM THE -PIMAS--AMONG THE MARICOPA INDIANS--ASLEEP ON THE TRAIL--VISIT PROM -A BEAR--LOSS OF PROVISIONS THROUGH AN ATTEMPT TO FLOAT A QUANTITY -DOWN THE GILA--HARD TRAVELING--CROSSING THE COLORADO RIVER--GLOOM -IN THE CAMP--LOWER AND UPPER CALIFORNIA--TERRIBLE MARCH OVER THE -TIERRA CALIENTE, OR HOT LANDS--DIGGING WELLS FOR BRACKISH WATER--ADVANCE -GUARD REACH A MOUNTAIN SPRING--WATER CARRIED BACK TO REVIVE THE -FAINTING TROOPS--LAST SPOONFUL OF FLOUR USED--DIVIDING THE RATIONS--IN -THE CANYONS OF THE SIERRA NEVADA--HEWING ROADS THROUGH ROCKS AND -BRUSH--FEEDING ON LIVE ACORNS AND GREEN MUSTARD--NEWS OF VICTORIES -BY UNITED STATES TROOPS IN CALIFORNIA--PREPARING TO ENGAGE THE -RETIRING MEXICAN ARMY--FIRST HOUSE SEEN IN CALIFORNIA--BEEF WITHOUT -SALT--TRADE FOR ACORN MUSH--HEAVY STORM AND FLOOD IN CAMP--A FEW POUNDS -OF FLOUR SECURED--DANCING IN MUD AND WATER--RECEIVE ORDERS TO GO TO -LOS ANGELES--DISCOVER A BODY OF TROOPS IN LINE OF BATTLE--ADVANCE -TO THE ATTACK--SUPPOSED FOE PROVES TO BE FRIENDLY INDIANS--PRESENCE -OF THE MORMON BATTALION PREVENTS AN INTENDED ATTEMPT BY MEXICANS TO -RETAKE CALIFORNIA, ALSO AN UPRISING OF CALIFORNIANS AGAINST THE UNITED -STATES--ON A BATTLEFIELD WHERE GENERAL KEARNEY HAD FOUGHT--RELICS -OF THE ENCOUNTER--PROPHECY OF PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG AND ITS -FULFILLMENT--SOURCE OF HIS INSPIRATION. - -WHERE we reached the Gila River it was a lovely stream, four or live -rods wide; but the country was covered with alkali grass and mesquit -brush. We rested part of a day, then proceeded down the river eight -or ten miles, coming to a Pima Indian village. The Pima Indians were -superior to any that we had fallen in with heretofore. They were an -agricultural people, peacefully inclined, and kind and loving toward -each other. Those in the village appeared the picture of good health. -They came and went by twos, the males and females keeping each sex, -to themselves. They seemed the most affectionate people I had ever -met; happy and innocent in appearance--a large and handsome class of -persons. Each Indian was wrapped in a large home-made blanket. - -The Pimas had corn, wheat, pumpkins, beans, and, I think, peas. Some -of the Indians noted our wretched and starved condition, and cut up a -lot of pumpkins--as we cut them for cows. These they boiled, and handed -to the soldiers as the latter passed by and took the proffered food in -anything they could get to hold the steaming hot vegetables. The men -were indeed thankful for these favors, although they came from Indians. - -It was between the 20th and 25th of December when we left the Pima -Indian village, and passed down the Gila River to a broad, open, -fertile valley in the Maricopa Indian country. At the Maricopa Indian -villages we met many fine specimens of the native inhabitants. We -traded brass buttons for food. One brass button had more purchasing -power than a five dollar gold piece. - -It was some five or six days before we passed out of the Maricopas' -farming country. There was a large bend in the river, and we traveled -three days over a rough, sandy country before we came to the stream -again. On this march we camped without water. The writer was one of -those who stood guard around the stock. The feed was so scarce that -we were kept running all night. I was so completely worn out next day -that at about eleven a.m. I sought rest by dropping out of the command -and hiding from the rearguard behind a clump of brush that grew on a -sand knoll. No sooner had I laid down than I fell into a sound slumber, -oblivious to all danger. - -When the writer awakened from that sleep the rearguard had passed on -long before; the sun had changed position so that the drowsy soldier -felt perfectly lost, but gradually he came to realize that it was three -or four o'clock p.m. Some six or eight feet from where he had been -lying he found fresh bear tracks, telling him of the wild beast that -had been viewing him while wrapt in slumber. He hurried forward on the -trail, and reached camp just as the night guards were being posted and -his comrades were becoming greatly concerned for his safety. - -Our route lay down the river, through deep sand and mesquit brush, -where we had not only to chop and clear away the brush, but had to push -and pull the wagons until our souls as well as our bodies were worn -out. We gathered mesquit and a kind of pod to feed our mules. We were -six days traveling sixty miles, to the crossing of the Colorado River, -or Red River, as it was called by some. - -The reader will not wonder that on reaching this point a mountain of -gloom rested upon the whole command, causing the men almost to despair -as they, on the 10th day of January, 1847, stood on the banks of the -swift-flowing Colorado--the stream being half a mile wide at that -place--with no alternative but to wade across, pulling and pushing at -the wagons, then to cut and burn their way out, through the thick brush -on the bottom land, to the bench or bluff that opened out on a barren -desert, known to the Mexicans as Tierra Caliente, or the Hot Lands. - -Now the command entered upon another soul-trying march. The route from -the crossing of the Colorado was over the northeast corner of Lower -California, some sixty miles above the Gulf of California, then into -the south-eastern part of Upper California. The stronger men, with a -little extra ration, preceded the main army, to dig wells in the desert. - -No sooner was the almost hopeless march commenced than men began to -lag behind, so that when the advance guard came to a halt at any part -of the journey, others were miles behind. The first day we came to a -well that General Phil. Kearney and his men had dug, but it had caved -in so badly that it was almost as much work to clean it as to dig a new -one; and when it was cleaned, our men dug another. The water was scant -and brackish. We remained at that point only until the rear of the -command caught up, then proceeded on our way, stopping but a short time -in any one place, until we reached Cariza, a splendid spring near the -base of the Sierra Nevada range of mountains. The first men to reach -water filled kegs and canteens, lashed them to the stouter animals, and -hastened back to succor and revive the famishing men who were bringing -up the rear. - -On that terrible march many of the weaker men despaired of ever -reaching water. We passed several, who, with sunken and glazed eyes and -blackened mouths and looking as ghastly as death, stammered to us as -we passed them: "Goodby, I shall never live to reach water. I cannot -go a step farther, but shall die on this spot." Poor fellows! I verily -believe that if they had not been resuscitated by the water that was -carried back, their words would have been painfully true before the -rising of another sun. - -If it had not been for some fresh mules and beef cattle that we met on -this tedious march, we never could have got through with the wagons, -and possibly would have lost some men, as our flour had given out and -we were reduced so near to starvation as to eat every particle of the -worn-out beef ox; even the tender part of the horns and hoofs, and the -intestines, were broiled on the coals and eaten, without water to wash -them. - -In our mess, the last spoonful of flour was made into a thin gravy by -stirring it into some water where some of our glue-like beef had been -boiled. This so-called gravy was divided among the men by spoonfuls, -then the pan was scraped with a table knife and wiped into a spoon, -and with the point of the same knife it was divided into seven parts. -Each man watched the division; and I do not believe there was one man -out of the seven but would have fought for his share of that spoonful -of pan-scrapings. Nor do I believe there was one of them who would -have robbed his comrades. For the last three or four hundred miles we -had been in the habit of cooking the food, and dividing it into seven -equal parts. Then one man would turn his back, and the cook or the one -who made the division would touch each morsel and say, "Who shall have -that?" whereupon the one whose back was turned would say, so and so, -calling each messmate by name, until all had been "touched off," as we -used to call it. - -From our camp at the spring we passed into the canyons of the Sierra -Nevada. The days had been excessively hot on the desert, and it was -very cold and frosty in the mountains at night. We soon came to where -the canyons were too narrow for our wagons; then with crowbar and -pickaxe and sledge we went at the jagged rocks until the pass was -sufficiently widened, and with our shoulders to the wheels or by -tugging at ropes we got our train to the summit. - -It was while passing through this range of mountains that we first saw -live-oak acorns. They were bitter as wormwood; yet we ate considerable -quantities of them, and as we descended the western slope they became -very abundant, and served for a change. As we passed down to the -valleys we found green mustard, which was boiled and eaten without -pepper or salt. - -About this time one of our guides or interpreters brought word from -the governor of San Diego that several battles had been fought by the -California troops and United States forces, and that we might meet a -large Mexican army retreating to Sonora. In consequence of receiving -this news, Colonel Cooke ordered a drill. We had secured a few beef -cattle and some fresh mules, and with this increase of strength and the -prospect of engaging the Mexicans we were spurred on from one mountain -summit to another, pushing and pulling the wagons--a business we were -well versed in, from oft repeated lessons. - -At Warner's Ranch, we came to the first house we had seen in -California. Mr. Warner hailed from the state of Massachusetts. From him -the colonel purchased two or three fat beeves. The beef was good, yet -we had nothing to eat with it, not even pepper or salt for seasoning, -and it did not satisfy the cravings of hunger. We rested a day at the -ranch, and some of us wandered off up the creek in hopes of finding -wild fruit or game. We came to a small camp of Indians who were engaged -in hulling and leaching live-oak acorns, then pounding them to a pulp -in stone mortars; this was boiled to a thick mush in home-made earthen -pots. The writer bantered one of the old ladies for about three or four -quarts of that cold-ochre mush, by offering her the belt that held -his pantaloons in place. She accepted the offer, and he, being without -proper utensil to receive his purchase, substituted his hat for a pan, -and the mush was scooped into it. Then when he found himself in the -dilemma of his pantaloons threatening to desert him, he seized the -alternative of holding up that portion of his attire with one hand, and -carrying his hat and its contents in the other, and proceeded to camp, -where his purchase was divided and devoured as a sweet morsel. - -From Warner's Ranch we traveled over low hills and camped on a little -narrow flat between two hills. In the night it came on to rain -terribly, and the flat was so flooded that we awoke to find ourselves -half-side deep in water. At dawn one of the boys crawled out of the -water and wet blankets, and crowed; for he had learned that the men who -had been sent back to recover some flour which had been left in the -boat had come in with about four hundred pounds. Soon every man in camp -had heard the glad tidings of the arrival of this expedition, about -which there had been much anxiety. - -In a short time the writer was called on by the orderly sergeant of -his company, D, to go with him and receive the portion of flour to be -issued to the company. At the door of the tent where the flour was -being divided we met Col. Cooke, who was sitting with his head down, as -if in deep study. Some of the boys had found a riddle that had fared -better than its owner, and near by one of them struck up the tune -of "Leather Breeches Full of Stitches," or some similar lively air. -Immediately a number of men formed a couple of French fours and began -dancing in water half to their shoe tops. The colonel caught the sound, -started up, and inquired what it was. Some one replied, "Oh, nothing, -only the boys are dancing and making merry over the prospect of getting -a little flour." The colonel shrugged his shoulders and remarked, "I -never saw such a d--d set of men before in my life. If they can get out -somewhere so they can dry their clothes and have a little flour they -will be as happy as gods!" - -Doubtless the colonel could call to mind often having seen us stagger -into camp, and perhaps could remember a dozen or so of us rush to where -his mule was being fed corn mixed with beans, which the well-fed mule -would object to by throwing his head first one way, then the other, -scattering the half-chewed corn and beans in the sand, where the hungry -soldiers would pick it from, rub it in their hands, and eat it raw; for -to the famishing soldier beans are not so objectionable. - -I am reminded at this point in my narrative that three croaking ravens -had followed the command nearly all the way from Santa Fe, for the -bits that escaped the soldier's eye. Surely if it had not been for the -ravens' keener vision they would have left in disgust, and would have -given us a very hard name. Even the wolf might have told his fellows -not to follow such a greedy lot, which did not leave a bone till it was -pounded and boiled and re-boiled till it could not be scented, and if -perchance a bit was found it was too hard for even wolves' teeth. - -From this camp we moved to the west under orders from General Kearney -to go to Los Angeles. While on the march toward that point, just as we -emerged from a canyon, we heard the drum and fife in an open valley. -Soon we saw a military force forming in line of battle, and as we drew -nearer we discovered their spears or lances gleaming in the sunlight, -and officers dashing up and down the lines giving commands. Our advance -guard slowed up, and we were ordered to form in line of battle. Every -officer took his place, the command dressed in proper order, and, as we -advanced, comrades looked into each other's faces as if to say, "How -do you feel about it?" One asked Alexander Stephens the question, and -received a prompt reply, "First-rate. I had as lief go into battle as -not. If we must die, the sooner the better, for it seems that we must -be worn till we starve and die anyhow. I do not fear death a particle." -Others were heard to say as much, and although the ashy look of death -shone in many faces, from the privations undergone, I do not think -there was a tremor in any heart, or a single man who showed the white -feather. - -As we drew near the force in our path, there was a dead silence, as if -awaiting the order to wheel into line and open fire, for we were within -rifle range. Just then two of the opposite party came out on horseback -to meet us. The colonel sent two of our interpreters forward, and -the command was halted. Soon our guides returned and stated that the -supposed foe was a band of Indians which had had a battle with Mexicans -in the vicinity a few days before, and the Indians had returned to bury -their dead. They had taken us for enemies, but their fears were turned -into joy on discovering that we were American soldiers. - -With all our bravery, there was a sigh of relief when we heard the news -that our supposed enemies were friends. It was now late in the day. -and both parties went into camp within a short distance of each other. -Friendly visits back and forth were made that evening. The Indians were -dressed in Spanish costume and were armed the same as the Mexicans; -as I remember them they displayed bravery, and some skill in Mexican -military tactics. - -Next day we proceeded on our way, and passed down a dry wash, the -bottom of which was mostly lined with a whitish cobblestone, upon which -the feet of some comrade showed blood at every step for a hundred yards -or more. I cannot now recall the man's name. We continued our march -from that place, and afterwards learned that the Mexicans had intended -to make an effort to regain California, but the timely arrival of the -battalion prevented any attempt to execute the movement. - -So far as I can remember, it was between January 23 and 27, 1847, that -we passed over a battlefield where General Kearney and his little -command had fought and beaten the Mexicans. There lay broken swords and -firearms, and dead horses and mules; and there also were the graves of -the slain, while all around the blood-stained soil was plainly within -our view, fixing the scene upon our memory. - -Here came to our minds the words of President Brigham Young, in his -farewell address to the battalion, in which he said: "You are now going -into an enemy's land at your country's call. If you will live your -religion, obey and respect your officers, and hold sacred the property -of the people among whom you travel, and never take anything but what -you pay for, I promise you in the name of Israel's God that not one of -you shall fall by the hand of an enemy. Though there will be battles -fought in your front and in your rear, on your right hand and on your -left, you will not have any fighting to do except with wild beasts." - -Here I pause and ask: Who on earth dare to make, of himself, such a -promise, under the circumstances and in the name that this promise had -been made? And yet over three hundred men who heard it could stand -up after they had filled the time of their enlistment, and before -high heaven and all the world could bear testimony to the literal -fulfillment of those words spoken eight months before, in the camp in -Missouri Valley, two thousand miles distant. I ask the honest reader: -From whence came such foresight, if not from the Eternal God, the -Creator of the heavens and the earth, and all things therein? To Him we -ascribe all honor and glory, power and praise, for our success in that -great, wonderful and unparalleled march of twenty-five hundred miles -made by infantry. Who shall say that God had not made bare His arm in -support of that ever memorable Mormon Battalion? But as yet the whole -task of the battalion had not been completed. - - - -CHAPTER XI. - -ORDERED TO SAN DIEGO--FIRST VIEW OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN--RUMORS -OF THE ENEMY--COMPLIMENTARY ORDER, BY LIEUT. COL. COOKE, ON THE -ACHIEVEMENTS OF THE MORMON BATTALION--REPORTED HOSTILITY OF -COL. FREMONT TO GEN. KEARNEY--LIVING ON BEEF ALONE--OBTAIN SOME -FLOUR--ROUTINE OF THE CAMP--ORDERED TO LOS ANGELES--DAMAGE BY AN -EARTHQUAKE--WILD HORSES AND CATTLE DRIVEN INTO THE SEA--ARRIVAL AT -LOS ANGELES--RUMORS OF AN ATTACK--CONSTRUCTING A FORT--GUARDING CAJON -PASS--SURROUNDED BY WILD CATTLE--TAKE REFUGE IN A RAVINE--COL. FREMONT -ARRESTED--SITE OF SAN BERNARDINO--GETTING OUT A LIBERTY POLE--BRUSH -WITH THE INDIANS--CLEARING LOS ANGELES OF DOGS--WICKEDNESS IN THE -TOWN--BRUTALITY OF BULL FIGHTS, HORSE RACING, ETC.--ALWAYS READY FOR -AN ATTACK--FIRST RAISING OF THE STARS AND STRIPES ON A LIBERTY POLE IN -CALIFORNIA. - -ORDERS had been received changing our destination from Los Angeles to -San Diego, passing by way of the Mission San Luis del Rey. When we -reached the San Diego Mission we passed it by and camped between it and -the town. It was en route to this place that we came in sight of the -waters of the great Pacific Ocean, a view that was most pleasurable to -us, and which we hailed with shouts of joy, as we felt that our long -march of starvation was about over. We were now drawing five pounds of -fair beef, without salt or pepper. - -Another day's march, and we had completed the journey over the nation's -highway across the continent. We were allowed one day at San Diego, -when we were ordered back to the San Luis del Rey Mission. There -was some disappointment, but the order to return was obeyed without -murmuring. It was thought we would meet the enemy, as it was said there -was a force of about eighteen hundred Californians, under General -Flores, lurking in the mountains northwest of San Luis del Rey Mission, -but we did not see them. At the Mission we were required to do fatigue -duty, as it was called, which included cleaning up the place, it having -been neglected a long time. At this place the following was issued by -Col. Cooke: - - "HEADQUARTERS, MISSION OF SAN DIEGO, - - "January 30, 1847. - -"Lieutenant Colonel commanding congratulates the battalion on its safe -arrival on the shores of the Pacific Ocean, and the conclusion of its -march of over two thousand miles. History may be searched in vain for -an equal march of infantry; nine-tenths of it through a wilderness, -where nothing but savages and wild beasts are found, or deserts where, -for want of water, there is no living creature. There, with almost -hopeless labor, we have dug deep wells, which the future traveler will -enjoy. Without a guide who had traversed them, we have ventured into -trackless prairies, where water was not found for several marches. With -crowbar and pickaxe in hand, we have worked our way over mountains, -which seemed to defy aught save the wild goat, and hewed a passage -through a chasm of living rock more narrow than our wagons. To bring -these first wagons to the Pacific, we have preserved the strength of -the mules by herding them over large tracts, which you have laboriously -guarded without loss. - -"The garrison of four presidios of Sonora, concentrated within the -walls of Tucson, gave us no pause; we drove them out with their -artillery; but our intercourse with the citizens was unmarked by a -single act of injustice. Thus marching, half naked and half fed, and -living upon wild animals, we have discovered and made a road of great -value to our country. - -"Arrived at the first settlement of California, after a single day's -rest, you cheerfully turned off from the route to this point of -promised repose, to enter upon a campaign, and meet, as we believed, -the approach of the enemy; and this, too, without even salt to season -your sole subsistence of fresh meat. - -"Lieutenants A.J. Smith and George Stoneman of the First Dragoons, have -shared and given valuable aid in all these labors. - -"Thus, volunteers, you have exhibited some high and essential qualities -of veterans. But much remains undone. Soon you will turn your strict -attention to the drill, to system and order, to forms also, which are -all necessary to the soldier. - - "By order of Lieutenant-Colonel P. St. George Cooke. - - [Signed.] "P. C. Merrill, Adjutant." - -It is stated by Sergeant Daniel Tyler, in his "History of the Mormon -Battalion," that February 4th was the date of the reading of the order. -Its spirit and tone were an agreeable surprise to us, as the general -tenor of the colonel's course had been so different, apparently, that -we did not look for him to do the battalion justice. Yet if he had -been less stern and decisive, it would have been worse for us. We had -stern realities to deal with, consequently like means were necessary -to overcome the obstacles we had to contend with. It required push and -vim to enable the battalion to perform the heroic deeds demanded of it, -and a sympathy that would have caused the men to shrink back instead -of seeing that every one stood to his post of duty would have been a -fatal error. After all, Col. P. St. George Cooke was a good military -commander, maintaining excellent military discipline; and for one the -writer feels to say, Peaceful be his sleep. - -It was about the 4th or 5th of February when we got back to the -mission, and the order given, with others, was made known. The other -orders included such directions as to trim the hair so that none came -below the tip of the ear, and shave the beard all but the mustache. - -We were informed that we had no right to think in acting for -ourselves--that the government paid men to think for us, and it was our -duty to obey orders. We were allowed very little time in which to wash -our rags and hunt down the insects that had waged a continuous warfare -on us all the way from Albuquerque or the Rio Grande del Norte to the -coast; yet we turned on the creeping foe, and never relented till we -routed him, nor showed any quarter till the last one was gone. We also -had to repel an attack from the nimble flea in great numbers, in which -we realized that this impudent insect did not care where he hit. - -While we were still living on beef alone, without pepper or salt, we -were ordered out on squad drill, which seemed to continue about eight -hours per day. The reason given for this was the supposed threatened -attack from eight hundred Californians in the mountains; and further, -the rumors that Col. John C. Fremont, with eight hundred or a thousand -men, claimed it was his right, and not Gen. Kearney's, to dictate -to the United States forces in California. In fact, it was reported -that Col. Fremont was in open hostility to Gen. Kearney, who was -military governor of California by orders from Washington. Under these -circumstances, we were kept in constant readiness, not knowing the -moment we would be called into active service. - -Our training daily was one hour for each pound of beef issued, the beef -costing less than a cent a pound to the government. Sergeant Tyler says -our rations were five pounds a day, and I say it was not half enough, -for we were ravenously hungry all the time. If the reader doubts this, -let him try the ration for a little while, and doubt will disappear. - -About February 25 we obtained bolted flour and some other supplies of -provisions that had been brought from the Sandwich Islands, by Major -Sward, to San Diego, and thence to San Luis del Rey by mule team. In -the meantime we had received a small amount of unbolted flour, brought -by Lieutenant Oman and a small detachment of the battalion sent out for -the purpose. Then the beef rations were reduced; so that during the -whole twelve months' service we did not once have issued to us the full -rations allowed by the government to the American soldier--if we had -full rations in one thing, another was lacking. Either the government -made a great saving from regulations in feeding us, or a steal put -money into some contractors' pockets. - -Day after day the duties of soldier were performed, drilling, out on -detached duty, or marching here, there and everywhere, early and late, -by day and by night, just to suit the fancy of some of our officers, -and not always upon real occasion for the movements. It would seem that -in many respects the soldier's life is much like a faithful wife's; and -in others much unlike a woman's work. Like hers, in that the task seems -never done, busy all day and up at every hour of night in response to -calls of first one child, then another, or even to the exploits of -some mischievous cat, her rest broken and her life worn away; unlike -hers, in that she usually has a dry shelter, regular meals, and a -place to lie down when she can rest, while the soldier in time of war -never knows where he will make his bed at night, often is without food -and drink, having to move at the word of command over deserts, rocks, -mountains, plains and rivers--a stranger to the locality he may call -his home. But the toils of both are necessary, she to rear the nation's -pride and strength--a soldier in the right; he to protect her and -himself, to defend their country's rights and avenge her wrongs. - -Returning to the narrative of garrison duty, it appeared to me the -hours of drill were more than Sergeant Tyler's account will admit of; -but I shall not dispute with him, as I write from memory. I do recall -that roll call came at daylight, sick call at 7:30 a.m., breakfast call -at 8:40, drill at 10 a.m. and 3 p.m. roll call at sundown, tattoo at -8:30, and taps at 9 p.m., after which lights must be out except in case -of sickness. All must be silent then, as the men are supposed to have -retired for the night. - -On or near the 20th of March, companies A, C, D and E took up their -journey to the Puebla de Los Angeles. We traveled over a hilly country, -where there were numerous herds of cattle and bands of horses. In some -places we passed down to and along the sandy beach around big bluffs -over which, so we were told, the Californians, some years previously, -had driven thousands of horses and cattle to rid the country of them, -as they had overrun the place so that all were suffering for food. This -story seemed confirmed by the great amount of bones that we saw among -the rocks and sands at the foot of deep declivities along the seashore. - -On the way to Los Angeles we passed a stone church that had been badly -shaken; the walls had been good mason work, but now were mostly broken -down. We were told that an earthquake did the damage, and that some -three hundred people had been killed. On by the San Gabriel River we -went, arriving at Los Angeles in about four days' march from where we -had started out. We marched into the main street and stacked our arms -as if to say, "We have possession here." - -Most of the citizens stood aloof, looking as if the cause they had -supported was lost, but soon the merchants brought out buckets of -whisky and wine, which they set before the command, inviting us to help -ourselves. Some accepted the invitation rather freely, while others -refrained from touching the beverages. We returned to the river at -night, and camped. In a day or two we were marched about two miles up -the stream, and above the town, where we again ran out of provisions -and had to go hungry; nor did we break our fast till 11 a.m. next day. - -At this time the air was full of alarming rumors. A revolt of Californians -was talked of; then it was Fremont who was said to be in -rebellion against General Kearney's authority; and again, a powerful -band of Indians was ready to pounce down upon us. It was not very -unexpectedly, therefore, that we received orders to occupy the most -commanding point overlooking the town. Soon after this we learned that -a supply of provisions for the command had been landed at San Pedro, -about twenty-one miles distant, and teams and wagons were sent at once, -under an escort of soldiers, the writer being one. We returned next -day, heavily loaded. - -About this date, the command began the erection of a fort, or rather -began to throw up earthworks. Lieutenant Rosecranz was ordered with a -small detachment to Cajon Pass, a narrow opening in the Sierra Nevada -range, about eighty miles east of us. The object was to guard the pass -against the advance of any foe, for, as has been said, there were many -rumors of impending danger. In a short time, Lieutenant Pace, with -twenty-nine officers and men of the battalion--the writer being one of -the number--received orders to relieve the detachment of Lieutenant -Rosecranz. Pace's command had just reached the Rosecranz party, finding -the latter in the act of striking camp, when a dispatch came by pony -express ordering us to return as well. - -On our march out, the wild cattle, which were there by thousands, -became excited and began to bellow and crowd toward us. We could see -them for miles coming on the run. They closed in quickly until we were -surrounded by them on three sides, with a deep gulch or very brushy -ravine on the fourth. We retreated in double-quick time to this gulch, -and were compelled to remain in what shelter it afforded until the next -day, before we could pass on in safety. - -The unsettled state of the country kept us constantly busy. Our fort -was pushed to completion, and we having obtained what artillery Colonel -Fremont had, the twelve or fifteen pieces now in our possession were -placed in proper position for defense. Everything was made as complete -as could be, and the warclouds began to give way. Fremont had been -placed under arrest for insubordination or rebellion, I do not recall -which, and this contributed to the peace of the country. - -A Spaniard was hired to haul a liberty pole from San Bernardino Canyon, -a distance of eighty miles, and as he dared not undertake the journey -without a military escort, Corporal Lafayette Shepherd and fourteen -men, among whom the writer was included, were sent to protect the -Spaniard and help get the pole down to the fort. On that trip we camped -on the present site of San Bernardino City, then a wild and lonely -wilderness, with not a house or farm in sight. At that time the country -abounded in wild cattle, bear, and other wild animals. - -Just where we came out on the plain we camped for the night, and in the -morning our Spanish friend went out into the hills to see if he could -kill a deer. Soon he came upon a party of Indians jerking beef, and he -shot into their camp. They came out, returned his fire, and gave him -chase. We were getting breakfast when he dashed into our camp, shouting -that the Indians were upon us, and for us to get our guns. Of course, -we complied, and were ready in short order, but as no Indians came, the -Spaniard insisted that we go in and rout them, as they were killing the -citizens' cattle, and our commander had given a promise of protection -from this. Hastily we saddled our mules and started, expecting every -moment to meet the Indians, who were on foot. We found no one before we -came to the campfires, around which was strewn considerable beef. Soon -we discovered the Indians fleeing up the mountain, and on our jaded -mules we gave chase, but when we reached the summit the Indians were -going up the opposite ridge. We dismounted and poured a few volleys -into the brush above them. They did not fire back. I do not think any -harm was done. They were fleeing for their lives and did not show -any opposition to us, and we had no desire to harm them, but simply -to demonstrate to the Californians that as United States soldiers we -were ready to protect them and their property, as was promised by our -officers. - -We hastened back to the fort with our charge, the logs in the rough -being about fifty feet each, the two making a pole between ninety and -ninety-five feet long when completed, which was done by the members of -the battalion at the fort. - -Another event about this period was an order by Colonel Cooke for a -detail of good marksmen and trusty men to go through the town and shoot -or bayonet all the dogs to be found in the streets. The colonel had -notified the town authorities of his intention. Accordingly the detail -was made and ammunition issued. The writer was one of the trusted -marksmen. We sallied forth in the town of Los Angeles, where the dogs -were more numerous than human beings, and commenced our disagreeable -and deadly work. Muskets rattled in every street and byway, dogs barked -and howled in every direction, and women and children wept to have -the animals spared. But military orders had to be obeyed, for the dog -nuisance had become intolerable. After that, there were sanitary orders -sent forth, and the streets were cleared of the dogs and a great amount -of bones and other rubbish. - -With all this cleaning up, there still was tolerated the greater -nuisances of liquor drinking, gambling, the most lewd and obscene -conduct that could be imagined, Sabbath breaking by horse racing, cock -and bull righting, men righting and knifing one another--indeed, the -Sabbath was the greater day for all these vices. - -Bull fighting was carried on inside of a square of one to four acres -surrounded by one-story adobe flat-roofed houses, on which spectators -would climb, and thus have an excellent view of the whole exhibition -of cruelty and bravado and jeopardy to life. Numbers of the wildest -and most ferocious bulls were taken, and were brought into the arena -one at a time. The animal was turned loose, and a man would tease him -into fury with a sharp lance. A horseman would charge and make thrust -after thrust at the maddened bull, striving to pierce him just behind -the horns, the aim being to cut the pith of the spinal column at that -point. If this were done, the animal would fall dead on the spot. As -a general thing, the bull was more apt to gore the rider's horse, and -give the rider himself a very close call; but a number of very expert -horsemen were kept in readiness to lasso the bull or cast a blanket -over his eyes and thus blindfold him until his tormentor got out of -danger. In this cruel sport many horses were sacrificed, and sometimes -the riders as well. It was not an unusual thing for a hundred or more -of these wild bulls to be collected at a time, and the bloody sport to -be kept up three or four days and perhaps more. Sometimes a grizzly -bear would be captured and turned loose with a wild bull, the death -of one and perhaps both being the result. The whole populace seemed -to enjoy this cruel sport, shouting and screaming thereat all the day -long. Males and females, of all ages and conditions, met on a common -level to witness this wild and reckless amusement. - -Horse racing took place on the principal streets. One popular part of -this pastime was to secure an old male chicken; this was buried all but -the head in a hole in the street, the soil being packed in as tight as -could be and have the bird live. An Indian stood by to rebury the fowl -as fast as the horsemen resurrected him by seizing him by the head when -riding past at full speed. The aim was to swoop down, seize the cock's -head, pull the bird out of the hole, and hold to the head to the end of -the contest, which was indulged in by a dozen or more. When one rider -tore the bird from the hole all the others would charge on him and try -to capture it. The possessor would strike right and left, to hold his -prize, until the poor fowl was torn to pieces. Often the bird fell to -the ground alive, was buried again, and some one else would lead in -the dash for it. Just before the rider reached the fowl, a horseman -on either side would lash the horse unmercifully, so that the rider -could not slow up to get a better chance at the exposed head. This game -would be continued till some one carried the fowl's head to the end in -triumph. - -It was said that a scheme existed to draw the attention of the -Americans during the most exciting of these sports, and then raid our -camp; but if this ever was thought of it failed, for with us everything -was kept in readiness for an emergency, and sometimes we lay at night -with loaded muskets and fixed bayonets. Besides, we had become very -proficient in military tactics, and every man had learned well his duty -as a soldier. - -The fort having been completed, and every reasonable anticipation for -surprise in the return of the Mexican forces or for an uprising having -been cut off, on the morning of the Fourth of July, 1847, the Stars and -Stripes was hoisted on the pole in triumph, and floated in the breezes -from the Pacific Ocean--I think the first time that glorious banner -waved from a liberty pole in California, although Commodore Sloat had -raised the American flag at Monterey on July 7, 1846. - - - -CHAPTER XII. - -TERM OF ENLISTMENT EXPIRES--BATTALION MEMBERS PREPARING TO RETURN TO -THEIR FAMILIES--ONE COMPANY RE-ENLISTS--AN INSOLENT SPANIARD--PISTOL -SNAPPED IN THE WRITER'S FACE--ALMOST A DEATHBLOW--DESPERATE FIGHT -STOPPED BY BYSTANDERS--SERIOUS TROUBLE WITH ANOTHER SPANIARD--LEARN -THE LESSON TO AVOID THOSE WHO GAMBLE OR DRINK INTOXICANTS--SPANISH -CHARACTER--CLASS OF CALIFORNIA'S INHABITANTS IN 1847--CONDITION OF THE -COUNTRY--APPEARANCE OF THE TOWNS AND VILLAGES--DIFFICULTY IN SECURING -AN OUTFIT FOR MEMBERS OF THE BATTALION TO JOURNEY EASTWARD. - -THE members of the Mormon Battalion had been purchasing horses and -mules and a general outfit for a return to our friends at the close -of our term of enlistment, which was drawing nigh. At the same time, -Col. Stephenson, of the New York volunteers, and other commissioned -officers, were making strenuous efforts to have us re-enlist for -another twelve months, or six months at least, telling us they had -authority to impress us if they chose, but they preferred to have us -come as volunteers. It had been reported that although the Californians -had been whipped, there was not concord, and that as soon as the Mormon -Battalion left the country the Californians would revolt and make an -effort to overthrow United States supremacy; but while we remained -there was no fear. - -Now, as there were many of the battalion who had spent all their -wages--ninety-six dollars for their year's service--it may have -appeared to them that the only thing to do was to re-enlist. Horses -could be purchased cheaply, and provisions were not high, but some -money was needed. Consequently, one company re-enlisted under Capt. -Davis of company E, while the rest of the command were busy preparing -for their journey east to meet the Saints somewhere, they knew not just -where. - -Comparatively few of our command had acquired sufficient knowledge -of the Spanish language to do their own trading, and these acted as -interpreters for their comrades. The writer happened to be one of -the few who had made some success in picking up the language. On one -occasion, when hunting the town and adjacent country for such articles -as we needed in our outfit, he became fatigued and went into a cafe -for a cup of coffee. On entering the restaurant he found, besides the -landlord, three or four good-appearing Spaniards, who soon began to -question him about the United States and its people. Their questions -were being answered in a courteous manner, when the attendant, who was -a tall, fine-looking Spaniard, interposed with the remark that America -was a fine country, but her soldiers were cowards and babies. The -writer was alone, and scarcely knew how to treat the insult; besides, -there was a possibility that it was intended as a joke. Therefore, he -felt that it would be improper to be too abrupt in replying, and said, -quietly, that America was a good country and her soldiers were the -bravest of the brave. - -At that moment the Spanish-Californian stepped back and brought out -an American hat that had been cut through on the side by some sharp -instrument. Said he: "Here is one's hat--I killed him in battle. He -was a great baby." Reaching back, he brought out a dragoon's sword and -a holster, with two iron-mounted U. S. pistols. His eyes flashed, and -he mimicked the dying soldier, saying all the Americans were cowards. -My blood was up, and I taunted him by asking him how it was, if the -Americans were such cowards and babies, and fled from the Spaniards on -the battlefield, that the Americans had taken the country. Pointing to -the Stars and Stripes floating over the fort on the hill, I said, "That -shows where the brave men are; it is the Californians who are cowards -and babies." In an instant a pistol was snapped in my face, and I saw -the fire roll from the flintlock. Quick as a flash, I caught a heavy -knife that was handy, leaped on to the counter, and was bringing the -weapon down on the head of my assailant, when both of us were seized by -bystanders, and were disarmed. I started for camp, but was dragged back -to compromise the affair. When I re-entered the room the proprietor -was priming his weapon with mustard seed. He said it was all fun, and -we should make up. The spectators were anxious to settle, and offered -to treat. Some of the Spaniards expressed regret at the occurrence. -The matter was dropped, though I never was convinced that that Spanish -attendant did not have murder in his heart. - -On another occasion I had an unpleasant experience with another -Spaniard. It was when I was on guard duty at the prison in Los Angeles. -A very large, well dressed Spaniard came across the street from a -drinking saloon and gambling den. He wore a large sombrero worth about -eight dollars. He had been gambling and drinking, but was not drunk. -Said he, "I have lost all my money, and I want to leave this hat with -you for four dollars. If I do not bring the money back, you may keep -the hat; it is worth eight dollars, and will sell for that any day." -His offer was rejected, when he showed some displeasure, again -urging the loan, and promising to bring the money back in a short time. -Finally he prevailed, left the hat and took the money. - -In two or three hours the Spaniard returned, saying he wanted his -sombrero, at the same time promising to bring the money next day. Of -course this proposition was rejected, whereupon he showed considerable -temper, but at last said it was all right, he would find the money; and -added, "Come over to the saloon and have a drink of wine, and we will -be good friends." Thinking that would settle the matter, I complied -with his request. He had on a long Spanish sarapa, or blanket, and as -we neared the door he stepped ahead, leaned over the counter, and said -something to the bartender. As I entered the door I was again asked for -the hat, and he in turn was requested to hand over the money. He grew -angry, threatened, and finally challenged me to fight. As I squared off -to meet his impending assault, the Spaniard drew a large bowie knife -for a thrust at me, but was stopped by some bystanders. I was at the -time nineteen years of age, and my young blood was thoroughly aroused. -I rushed for my musket, which was loaded and had bayonet fixed, and -with the hurting end foremost I was quickly back at the saloon, -forcibly declaring my readiness for the conflict. The bystanders closed -in and called for peace, the four dollars was soon raised, and the -sombrero found its way back into the hands of its angry owner, who -displayed considerable effect of the liquor he had been drinking. But I -learned an impressive lesson, namely, to avoid the companionship of men -who drink intoxicants or who follow games of chance for a livelihood. -Even if a man does not indulge himself, those who do are liable to -ask favors, and if these are not granted the next thing is insult, -which often ends in bloodshed, or did in those days in California. In -illustration of the light estimate of human life, I can recall a man's -foot being kicked about the street, and no more notice being taken of -it than if it were an animal's. - -As to Spanish character, the writer can say from a close acquaintance -that when the Spaniards are sober and friendly, they are very friendly, -hospitable and polite, being very good company; in fact, we seldom -met with a more wholesouled and agreeable people. Yet it is doubtful -if there are any people who will resent an insult quicker and more -seriously than they will. They are brave and manly; yet those who are -of mixed blood, such as the Greasers, are low, degraded, treacherous -and cruel. In California there were a few of the higher class, many -more of a medium kind, and still more of the lower class; so that in -summing up the total of California's inhabitants in 1846-7, the country -was only half civilized and thinly inhabited. - -At that time the country was wild, being overrun with wilder horses, -cattle, sheep and goats. In places, wild oats and mustard abounded, -in many sections the mustard being as high as a man's head when on -horseback, and so dense that a horse could be forced only a few -feet through it. In the foothills and mountains wild game was very -abundant, consisting of elk, deer, bear, and smaller game. Along the -water courses and on the lakes waterfowl was plentiful. There were -millions of acres of uncultivated land, as good as any on the globe. -The climate is scarcely equalled anywhere. The chief products of the -soil then were wheat, barley, beans, peas, apples, peaches, plums, -apricots, pears, dates, figs, olives, grapes, black pepper, spices, -and many fruits not named here. These all seemed to grow very near to -perfection, especially when properly cared for. The greater part of -the labor was performed by native Indians, and that too with the most -primitive tools. The buildings were low, being one-story adobe, with -flat roofs covered with cement, or a natural tar that exuded from the -earth; sometimes tile was used, but I do not remember seeing one brick -building or shingle roof in all the land. - -Under the conditions which existed, it was no easy matter for a hundred -and fifty men to get an outfit together to travel over the mountains -east, as that number of the battalion intended to do; but having -commenced before we were discharged from service--say some time in -June--to purchase our horses, saddles, and everything necessary for a -pack train, we were partly prepared for the journey when the day came -for us to be mustered out. - - - -CHAPTER XIII. - -MORMON BATTALION MUSTERED OUT OF SERVICE--ONE HUNDRED AND FIFTY -MEMBERS ORGANIZE TO RETURN EAST TO THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS--START ON THE -JOURNEY--DIFFICULTIES OF THE ROUTE--DEALING WITH WILD HORSES AND -CATTLE--STAMPEDE OF A PACK ANIMAL--CHASE INTO AN INDIAN CAMP--LOST ALL -NIGHT IN A SWAMP--SUFFERING ON THE DESERT FOR LACK OF WATER--ARRIVE -NEAR SUTTER'S FORT--ON THE SITE OF SACRAMENTO--PARTY DECIDE TO REMAIN -OVER FOR THE YEAR, AND OBTAIN EMPLOYMENT--MEET CAPT. J. A. SUTTER AND -JAMES W. MARSHALL--PROPOSITION TO CAPT. SUTTER--ENGAGED TO WORK ON -A SAWMILL--PROCEEDINGS AT THE MILLSITE--MILL STARTED UP--THE WRITER -ENGAGED TO DIRECT INDIANS LABORING AT THE TAIL RACE--CONVERSATION WITH -MR. MARSHALL--MARSHALL TALKS ABOUT FINDING GOLD--HE AND THE WRITER MAKE -A SEARCH FOR GOLD, BUT FINDING NONE, DEFER THE INVESTIGATION TILL NEXT -MORNING--MARSHALL'S FAITH IN HIS BEING SUCCESSFUL IN DISCOVERING THE -PRECIOUS METAL. - -ON the 16th of July, 1847, the close of the Mormon Battalion's term of -enlistment, we were called into line, and an officer passed along as in -ordinary inspection. Then, without further ceremony, he said. "You are -discharged." I do not think one-half of the command heard him, he spoke -so low. Some of us thought he may have felt ashamed because of his -conduct toward us on our march to Santa Fe. He was the little bigot, -Lieutenant A. J. Smith. - -Thus we bade adieu to United States military authority and returned -to the ranks of civil life. One hundred and fifty of us organized -ourselves into hundreds, fifties and tens, and were soon on our way -to meet our friends somewhere, as we supposed, in the Rocky Mountains -east; and still we did not know just where. We sought information as -best we could, and the most that we could learn was that by following -under the base of the Sierra Nevada range six hundred miles we would -come to Sutter's Fort, where we could obtain further information as to -the best route to where we supposed we would find our friends. - -It was about the 20th of July when the first company moved out on the -intended journey; and in three or four days the remaining hundred -followed. We passed Gen. Pico's ranch about twenty miles northward, -and from there crossed over a mountain so high and steep that it made -our heads swim, and it was with difficulty that we could sit on our -horses. In places, it was impossible for us to dismount, for lack of -room. Two mules lost their footing and fell twenty-five or thirty feet -before they could regain a foothold, and it was very hard work to get -them back on the trail. We traveled some eighteen or twenty miles from -Pico's ranch to Francisco ranch, where we joined the fifty who had -preceded the main body, and were waiting for us to come up. - -A meeting was held, at which it was decided to purchase forty or fifty -beef cattle, which was done at not to exceed four dollars per head. The -course of our journey from this time was northward. The country where -we were traveling was a wilderness of hill and dale, deep gorges, and -brush, so that the first two days we lost ten or fifteen head of beef -cattle. It was decided to make sure of the remainder by slaughtering -and jerking or curing the beef, and next morning there came a battle -with the cattle, which had become wild and ferocious, plunging at the -men on horseback everywhere, so we had to shoot them down as best we -could. After stopping two or three days to jerk the beef, we proceeded -on our journey. - -Many of our horses were bronchos, or wild, when we purchased them, and -gave us much trouble. The packs would get loose and turn under the -animals, which would run and kick, scattering things as they went. -One day Alexander Stephens, William Garner and I had a horse stampede -with its burden. I gave pursuit, and as I had no thought of anything -but capturing the animal, I chased it about three miles, right into -an Indian camp. The Indians must have seen me coming and fled. Their -fires were burning, pots boiling, and camp equipage laid around. From -appearances there must have been fifteen to twenty families; their -tracks were thick and fresh. The runaway horse seems to have been -so excited that, like its pursuer, it ran in among the camp before -observing the danger; then it turned and I secured it with a lasso. -At that moment I recognized the peril of my own position, in the -possibility of being ambushed by Indians. It may be needless to state -that I got out of that place in a hurry; although I had lost sight of -the camp and was confused for a little time till I found my trail. - -Upon returning, I met my two comrades, who had had all they could do -to take care of the other pack animals, and were very anxious about -me. It was getting late in the day, and the company had passed out of -sight. We followed as fast as we could, but darkness overtook us and -we soon found ourselves wandering in the bullrushes and marshes of the -east end of Tulare Lake. Turn which way we would we could not find any -trail out. At last we found a spot more solid than the surroundings; -we halted and felt around in the darkness; every way we went it was -mud and water. The night was so dark that we could not see each other -or the horses, and finally we tied the animals together so we could -hold them, took off the pack, and waited around till daylight. I do not -think either of us slept fifteen minutes that night. We had nothing to -make a fire with, and if we had, it would not have been wise to have -attracted savage Indians with one. Early in the morning we prepared to -seek a way out, and to our surprise, discovered close by a bullrush -boat which an aged Indian was pushing through the rushes. The boat had -been made by twisting and braiding the rushes together, and reminded us -of what the prophet says about embassadors going forth in vessels of -bullrushes. We could not learn from whence the Indian came or whither -he was going, nor yet his errand. We bade him good day, and soon found -the trail of our company. After going three or four miles, we met some -of our men who had been sent in search of us; they had passed the night -in great anxiety concerning our safety. Thankfully we reached the camp -to have a bite of food and proceed on our journey, grateful that we yet -had our hair on the top of our heads, where the darkey says; "the wool -ought to grow." - -Our journey took us over cold mountain streams, some of which we -forded, carrying our baggage on our heads and making from three to five -trips each way; others we built rafts for, by tying dry logs together -with our lash-ropes, piling them with baggage, and drawing them over -or pushing them with poles, the men swimming their horses and often -themselves. These streams were quite numerous. Among those I remember -were the Tulare, the San Joaquin River, and others. The crossing of -these streams was hard on man and beast, the water being cold close to -the mountains, and the work hazardous owing to the rapid currents and -boulders in the channels of the rivers. On this journey we were two -days on dry plains, and suffered almost to death; some of our horses -became so thirsty that their eyes turned white as milk and blind as -bats; they staggered against anything they came to. Some of the men -gave out entirely, and if it had not been for some of the stronger men -and horses that pushed forward and then returned to aid the others, -many of the latter never would have been able to have reached camp. Men -had their tongues swollen and eyes sunken and glazed; some could not -drink water when it was brought to them, until their lips and mouths -had been bathed and some of the liquid poured into their throats. -Fortunately for the writer, he was one of the stronger ones who went -ahead and returned to his comrades the last day on the desert; the -scene was terrible beyond the powers of description. - -Fully five hundred and fifty miles of that journey was made without -seeing a house, or a white woman or child. There were many Indians -and their ranches, but the savages gave us no particular trouble. We -pressed forward till August 26, when we came to the American River, -two miles above Sutter's Fort and about a mile and a half from the -Sacramento River, at the point where the city of Sacramento now stands. -The locality was then a forest of cottonwood timber and undergrowth. - -When we reached the vicinity of Sutter's Fort a consultation was held, -at which it was decided that most of the party would remain until -next year, and obtain employment where they could. Captain John A. -Sutter and James Marshall contemplated building a gristmill and also a -sawmill, but had no skilled workmen to perform the task. Accordingly, -a committee was appointed from our number, who informed Captain -Sutter that we had among us carpenters, blacksmiths, wheelwrights, -millwrights, farmers and common laborers; that we were in need of -horses, cattle, and a general outfit for crossing the mountains early -the next summer, and that if we could not get all money for our pay -we would take part in supplies for our journey; the committee also -inquired what the prospect for employment was. Captain Sutter gave the -committee encouragement, and asked them to call on him again in two or -three days. - -The result was, that between August 29 and September 5, from forty to -sixty of us called on Captain Sutter. Some were employed to work on the -gristmill; others took contracts on the mill race. The race was seven -or eight miles long, and was also intended for irrigation. - -Between the 8th and the 11th of September, Alexander Stephens, James -Berger and the writer started for the site that had been selected by -Mr. Marshall for the sawmill; we were the first Mormons to arrive at -the place. Peter L. Wimmer and family and William Scott had preceded -us a few days, having two wagons loaded with tools and provisions; the -teams were oxen, and were driven by two of Captain Sutter's civilized -Indians. Some weeks after we went up, Henry W. Bigler, Azariah Smith, -William Johnston, and Israel Evans, members of the Mormon Battalion, -came to the camp. - -Upon our arrival at the millsite, work was begun in earnest. The cabin -was finished, a second room being put on in true frontier style. While -some worked on the cabin, others were getting out timbers and preparing -for the erection of the sawmill. The site was at a point where the -river made considerable of a bend, just in the bank of what appeared to -be an old river bed, which was lowered to carry the water from the mill. - -Between January 15th and 20th, 1848, the mill was started up. It was -found that it had been set too low, and the tail race would not carry -off the water, which would drown or kill the flutter wheel. To remedy -this defect, several new pieces of timber were needed, and all hands -were put to work within ten or fifteen rods of the tail race, getting -out the timbers. - -Part of the time I was engaged in directing the labors of a gang of -Digger Indians, as I had picked up sufficient of their dialect to make -them understand me clearly. It had been customary to hoist the gates of -the forebay when we quit work in the evening, letting the water through -the race to wash away the loosened sand and gravel, then close them -down in the morning. The Indians were employed to dig and cast out the -cable rock that was not moved by the water. - -On January 23, I had turned away from the Indians and was with the -white men. Mr. Marshall came along to look over the work in general, -and went to where the tail race entered the river. There he discovered -a bed of rock that had been exposed by the water the night before, the -portion in view in the bottom of the race being three to six feet wide -and fifteen to twenty feet long. Mr. Marshall called me to him as he -examined the bed of the race, and said: "This is a curious rock; I am -afraid it will give us trouble." Then he probed a little further, and -added: "I believe it contains minerals of some kind, and I believe -there is gold in these hills." - -At this statement I inquired, "What makes you think so?" He answered -that he had seen blossom of gold, and upon my asking where, he said it -was the white quartz scattered over the hills; on my inquiring further -as to what quartz was, he told me it was the white, flint-like rock so -plentiful on the hills. I said it was flint rock, but he said no, it -was called quartz in some book he had read, and was an indication of -gold. He sent me to the cabin for a pan to wash the sand and gravel, -and see what we could find. I went to a cabin which had been built near -the millsite by Alexander Stephens, Henry W. Bigler, James Berger, -Azariah Smith, William Johnston and myself, and in which we were doing -our own cooking. I brought the pan and we washed some of the bedrock -that we had scaled up with a pick. As we had no idea of the appearance -of gold in its natural state, our search was unsuccessful. - -Mr. Marshall was determined to investigate further, but it was no use -that night. He rose and said: "We will hoist the gates and turn in all -the water that we can tonight, and tomorrow morning we will shut it -off and come down here, and I believe we will find gold or some other -mineral here." - - - -CHAPTER XIV. - -ARRIVAL OF MEMBERS OF THE MORMON BATTALION AT SUTTER'S FORT OPENS THE -WAY FOR THE DISCOVERY OF GOLD IN CALIFORNIA--JAMES W. MARSHALL OUT -EARLY ON JANUARY 24, 1848--"HE IS GOING TO FIND A GOLD MINE"--REGARDED -AS A "NOTIONAL" MAN--"BOYS, I HAVE GOT HER NOW!"--TESTING THE SCALES -OF METAL--"GOLD, BOYS, GOLD!"--FIRST PROCLAMATION OF THE GREAT GOLD -DISCOVERY--SECOND AND THIRD TESTS--ALL EXCITEMENT--THREE OR FOUR -OUNCES OF GOLD GATHERED--AGREE TO KEEP THE DISCOVERY SECRET--FIND -THE PRECIOUS METAL FARTHER DOWN THE STREAM--HOW THE SECRET LEASED -OUT--MORE DISCOVERIES--FIRST PUBLICATION OF THE NEWS MADE IN A -MORMON PAPER--WASHING OUT THE METAL--FIRST GOLD ROCKER--GATHERING -GOLD--PART TAKEN BY MR. MARSHALL, THE MORMONS AND CAPTAIN SUTTER IN -THE DISCOVERY--MISFORTUNES OF SUTTER AND MARSHALL--ACCOUNT OF THE GOLD -DISCOVERY CERTIFIED TO BY SEVERAL EYE WITNESSES. - -IT is my understanding that when Captain Sutter and Mr. Marshall -were contemplating the erection of the two mills, an apparently -insurmountable obstacle confronted them in the inability to get and -pay for the skilled labor necessary for portions of the work. This -obstacle was removed by the proposition our committee had made to -Captain Sutter at the first interview; and in the two or three days' -time asked in August, 1847, by the captain, a decision was reached to -go ahead. Therefore, if it had not been for the opportune appearance of -the mustered-out members of the Mormon Battalion, the sawmill would not -have been built that winter, nor would the discovery of gold have been -made at that time. But for the action of those Mormons in connection -with the enterprise proposed by Captain Sutter and Mr. Marshall, in -offering the desired class of labor upon the terms they did, the state -of California might have waited indefinitely to have been developed and -to be christened the Golden State, and the entrance to the bay of San -Francisco might never have received the title of the Golden Gate. - -Resuming the narrative of my association with Mr. Marshall on the -afternoon of January 23rd, I will state further that each of us went -our way for the night, and did not meet again till next morning. I -thought little of what Marshall had said of finding gold, as he was -looked on as rather a "notional" kind of man; I do not think I even -mentioned his conversation to my associates. At an unusually early hour -in the morning, however, those of us who occupied the cabin heard a -hammering at the mill. "Who is that pounding so early?" was asked, and -one of our party looked out and said it was Marshall shutting the gates -of the forebay down. This recalled to my mind what Mr. Marshall had -said to me the evening before, and I remarked, "Oh, he is going to find -a gold mine this morning." - -A smile of derision stole over the faces of the parties present. We ate -our breakfast and went to work. James Berger and myself went to the -whipsaw, and the rest of the men some eight or ten rods away from the -mill. I was close to the mill and sawpit, and was also close to the -tail race, where I could direct the Indians who were there. - -This was the 24th day of January, 1848. When we had got partly to work, -Mr. Marshall came, with his old wool hat in his hand. He stopped within -six or eight yards of the sawpit, and exclaimed, "Boys, I have got her -now!" Being the nearest to him, and having more curiosity than the -rest of the men, I jumped from the pit and stepped to him. On looking -into his hat I discovered ten or twelve pieces or small scales of what -proved to be gold. I picked up the largest piece, worth about fifty -cents, and tested it with my teeth; as it did not give, I held it aloft -and exclaimed, "Gold, boys, gold!" At that, all dropped their tools -and gathered around Mr. Marshall. Having made the first proclamation -of the very important fact that the metal was gold, I stepped to the -work bench and put it to the second test with the hammer. As I was -doing this it occurred to me that while en route to California with the -Mormon Battalion, we came to some timber called manzanita. Our guides -and interpreters said the wood was what the Mexicans smelted their gold -and silver ores with. It is a hard wood and makes a very hot fire, and -also burns a long time. Remembering that we had left a very hot bed of -these coals in the fireplace of the cabin, I hurried there and made the -third test by placing the metal upon the point of an old shovel blade, -and then inserted it in among the coals. I blew the coals until I was -blind for the moment, in trying to burn or melt the particles; and -although these were plated almost as thin as a sheet of note paper, the -heat did not change their appearance in the least. I remembered hearing -that gold could not be burned up, so I arose from this third test, -confident that what had been found was gold. Running out to the party -still grouped together, I made the second proclamation, saying, "Gold, -gold!" - -At this juncture all was excitement. We repaired to the lower end of -the tail race, where we found from three to six inches of water flowing -over the bed of rock, in which there were crevices and little pockets, -over which the water rippled in the glare of the sunlight as that shone -over the mountain peaks. James Berger was the first man to espy a scale -of the metal. He stooped to pick it up, and found some difficulty in -getting hold of it, as his fingers would blur the water, but he finally -succeeded. The next man to find a piece was H. W. Bigler; he used his -jack-knife, getting the scale on the point of the blade, then, with his -forefinger over it placed it in his left hand. - -As soon as we learned how to look for it, since it glittered under the -water in the rays of the sun, we were all rewarded with a few scales. -Each put his mite into a small phial that was provided by Marshall, and -we made him the custodian. We repeated our visits to the tail race for -three or four mornings, each time collecting some of the precious metal -until we had gathered somewhere between three and four ounces. - -The next move was to step and stake off two quarter sections, beginning -at the mill, one running down the river and the other up. Then we -cut and hauled logs and laid the foundation of a cabin on each of -them; one was for Sutter, the other for Marshall. This matter being -finished, Mr. Marshall was prepared to dictate terms to us, for every -tool and all the provisions in that part of the country belonged to -Sutter and Marshall. They had full control, and we were depending on -the completion of the mill for our pay. Marshall said that if we would -stay by him until the mill was completed and well stocked with logs, he -would supply us with provisions and tools, and would grant us the first -right to work on their gold claims. We all assented to his proposition, -and also agreed that we would not disclose the secret of the gold -discovery until we learned more about it and had made good our claims. -Not having the remotest idea of the extent of the gold deposits, we -pushed the mill as rapidly as possible; for as yet we had not received -one dollar's pay for our four months' labor. - -Soon there came a rainy day, when it was too wet to work. H. W. Bigler -thought it a good day to hunt ducks, so he put on an old coat, and was -gone all day. When he returned, we said, "Where are your ducks?" - -He said, "Wait a while, I will show you; I have got them all right." - -Finally he drew an old cotton handkerchief from his pocket; in the -corner of it he had at least half an ounce of gold tied up. For a while -all were excited, and he was asked a great many questions like the -following: "Did you find it on Sutter's claim along the river?" "How -far is it from here?" "All in one place?" "Is there any more?" "How did -you get it, you had no pick or shovel?" "Can you find the place again?" - -He replied that he had found it down below Sutter's claim, along the -river where the bedrock cropped out along the bank, and in little rills -that came down the hills to the river, indeed, everywhere that he found -the bedrock cropping out. - -"Then you found it in more than one place?" - -"Yes, more than a dozen." - -It was now proposed that we keep this discovery a secret, as the -discovery in the race had been kept. So the mill work was pushed with -vigor to completion. But in the meantime Marshall had felt it his duty -to inform his partner of the discovery. Accordingly, he wrote a letter -stating the facts, and sent me out to find a strange Indian who would -take it to Captain Sutter, fearing that if he sent it by someone who -was acquainted with the circumstances the secret might leak out. About -this time Wm. Johnston found that he had some urgent business below and -must go there, and did so; he went to the gristmill and along the camps -on that mill race. Then somehow or other the bag came untied and our -old cat and all the kittens ran out, and to the camps they went, until -everybody heard of the gold discovery. But, like all great truths, -people were slow to believe the story. - -In a short time, however, Sidney S. S. Willis and Wilford Hudson, whose -curiosity had been aroused, began to feel that they would like a little -venison; and with that for an excuse they took their guns and set out -on foot, having been assured that by following up the river they would -come to the sawmill, which they succeeded in doing the first day. I -think it was only a thirty-five miles journey. I believe they stayed -one day and two nights with us; then, after a thorough examination of -the bedrock, sand and gravel, and the surroundings, they gathered a few -specimens, among which was one nugget worth about five dollars--the -largest by long odds that had been discovered up to that time. - -As Willis and Hudson passed back on their way home, they discovered -a small ravine or creek in which there was some of the same kind of -bedrock which they had seen at the mill race, and by picking around -in the sand and gravel they discovered quite a rich prospect. That -was just above what was afterwards called Mormon Island, about twelve -or fifteen miles above the gristmill, and about the same distance -below the sawmill. Then they returned to the mill, told their story, -and showed the specimens to the boys. Some of these went to Sutter's -Fort, to a little grocery store kept by a Mormon named Smith, who came -around Cape Horn to California by the ship Brooklyn. The story of the -find was told, and specimens exhibited to Smith, who wrote to Samuel -Brannan. The latter was publishing a paper in San Francisco at the -time; and from that press the news went forth to the world. Brannan was -a Mormon Elder, and the press was owned by a company of Mormons who had -sailed from New York around Cape Horn, and were presided over by Samuel -Brannan. - -From one hundred to one hundred and fifty Mormons flocked to Mormon -Island; then people from every part of the United States followed, and -the search for gold commenced in earnest. With jack, butcher, and table -knives, the search was made in the crevices, after stripping the soil -from the bedrock with pick and shovel. Next, we conceived the idea of -washing the sand and fine gravel in tin pans, but these were scarce -and hard to get hold of. Alexander Stephens dug out a trough, leaving -the bottom round like a log. He would fill that with sand and gravel -that we scraped off the bedrock, and would shake it, having arranged it -so as to to pour or run water on the gravel; finally he commenced to -rock the trough, which led to the idea of a rocker. His process caused -the gold to settle at the bottom; then he arranged the apparatus on an -incline so that the gold would work down and also to the lower end of -the trough. At short intervals he would turn what was collected into a -tub of water, and at night it would be cleaned and weighed on a pair of -wooden scales that Stephens made also, using silver coins for weights, -counting the silver dollar equal to one ounce of gold. This rocker led -to the renowned gold rocker; I am under the impression that Stephens -made the first rocker ever used in California. - -The next and last process that we used in gathering gold was to spread -a sheet on the sandy beach of the river, placing some big rocks on the -corners and sides to keep it well stretched. We then would fill in the -rich dirt on the upper edge, and throw on water to wash the dirt down -into the river, leaving the gold on the sheet. Occasionally we took -up the sheet and dipped it into a tub of water, washing the gold off -the sheet into the tub. At night we would clean up our day's work, -averaging from twelve to fifteen dollars each. Our best paying dirt was -carried on our shoulders from Dry Gulch, fifteen to sixty rods to where -we could find water to wash it. We made buckskin pouches or wallets to -carry the gold in; it was not dust, nor yet nuggets, but small scales. - -Sutter's capital and enterprise and Marshall's shrewd sagacity have -been given the credit of the great gold discovery in California. The -facts are, that James W. Marshall discovered the first color; in less -than an hour six Mormons found color as well, and within six weeks -Mormons had discovered it in hundreds of places that Mr. Marshall had -never seen, the most notable of which was Mormon Island, to where the -first rush was made, and from where the news was spread to the world. -As to Sutter's enterprise and capital, he furnished the graham flour -and mutton, wheat and peas, black coffee and brown sugar, teams and -tools, while we, the members of the Mormon Battalion, did the hard -labor that discovered the metal. It is also true that we were in -Sutter's employ at that date, and that we did not get paid for our -labor. I worked one hundred days for the firm, and never received a -farthing for it. I heard a number of other men say they never got their -pay. It was our labor that developed the find, and not Marshall's and -Sutter's, and we were never paid for it; when we went for a settlement -we were told by Captain Sutter that he could not settle with us, for -his bookkeeper had gone to the mines, and his books were not posted. He -cursed Marshall and the mines, and declared that he was a ruined man; -that the discovery was his ruin, for it had drawn off his laborers and -left everything to go to rack, and that he was being robbed. - -I do not wish it to be understood that I charge Sutter and Marshall -with being dishonorable, for I do not. I think they were honorable men -in a business way. The fact is, they were completely overrun with all -classes of people, and were confused, so that the people took advantage -of them, their business was undermined, and there was a general -collapse of their affairs and of every industry and business. The cry -was, "Gold! Gold! More Gold! Away to the gold fields!" Every other -enterprise was sacrificed in the rush for gold. - -With due respect to Captain John A. Sutter and James W. Marshall, -to whom the world has given the credit for the great gold find, I -believe that if they had been taken out and shot to death the day of -the discovery, they would have suffered less, and would have met their -Maker just as pure, if not more honored in this world, than to have -lived and endured what they did. As far as I am concerned, I say peace -to their remains, for on this earth they have been greatly wronged, if -I have read their history correctly. Like a lynching scrape where there -is an outburst of the people, it is very difficult to find those who -are responsible for the crime. Regarding the wrongs did these men, it -seemed as if the whole population of that locality picked on them. - -I will add here, that my account of the gold discovery in California -was submitted in 1893 to the following members of the party who were at -the place in January, 1848, and who were the only survivors within my -reach at the time: Orrin Hatch and William S. Muir, Woods Cross, Davis -County; George W. Boyd, and H. D. Merrill, Salt Lake City; and Israel -Evans, Lehi, Utah County, Utah. They united in giving me a certificate -that they knew this account to be a true and correct statement of the -discovery of gold in California, at Sutter's mill race. - - - -CHAPTER XV. - -PREPARE TO LEAVE CALIFORNIA--SNOW IN THE MOUNTAIN--CAUSES A WAIT -TILL THE LAST OF JUNE--DISCOVER A RICH GOLD PROSPECT--LEAVE IT TO -MAKE THE JOURNEY OVER THE MOUNTAINS--NO REGRETS AT ABANDONING THE -MINES IN ANSWER TO THE CALL OF DUTY--CAMP ORGANIZED IN PLEASANT -VALLEY--START ON THE TRIP--THREE MEMBERS OF THE PARTY AHEAD, LOOKING -OUT THE ROUTE, FOUND MURDERED MY INDIANS AT TRAGEDY SPRINGS--COVERING -THE BODIES--STAMPEDE OF ANIMALS--GUARDING AGAINST HOSTILE -INDIANS--CROSSING THE DIVIDE IN SNOW--THE WRITER FOOLED--TAKE TWO -INDIANS PRISONERS--CUTTING A ROAD--HORSES STOLEN BY INDIANS--PURSUIT -TO CAPTURE THEM--IN CARSON VALLEY--ALONG HUMBOLDT RIVER--AT STEAMBOAT -SPRINGS--OVER THE DESERT--MEMBER OF THE PARTY WANTS TO KILL -INDIANS--THE WRITER'S EMPHATIC OBJECTION--INDIANS WOUND STOCK--ADDISON -PRATT AS A LUCKY FISHERMAN--WRITER TRADES WITH AN INDIAN--THE RED -MAN'S TRICK--WRITER PURSUES HIM INTO THE INDIAN CAMP--ESCAPE FROM -DANGER--JOURNEY TO BEAR RIVER--HOT AND COLD WATER SPRINGS--REACH BOX -ELDER--VIEW THE GREAT SALT LAKE--ARRIVE AT OGDEN, WHERE CAPTAIN BROWN -AND SOME SAINTS HAD SETTLED--JOURNEY TO THE MORMON CAMP ON WHAT IS NOW -PIONEER SQUARE, SALT LAKE CITY--HEARTILY WELCOMED BY RELATIVES AND -FRIENDS--REJOICING AND THANKSGIVING. - -IN June, 1848, some thirty-seven members of the Mormon Battalion -rendezvoused at a flat some six or eight miles from Coloma, California, -near where the first gold discovery was made. This assemblage was -preparatory to crossing the Sierra Nevada mountains at or near the -head of the American River; for we had learned that it was next to -impossible to take wagons at this time of the year by what was called -the Truckee route, and as we had become accustomed to pioneer life it -was thought we could find a better route, so it was proposed to open -up one by the way stated. We had been successful in getting a few -hundred dollars each from the mines, and had fitted ourselves out with -wagons and ox teams, seeds and tools; for our protection on the journey -we bought of Captain Sutter two brass Russian cannon, one a four -pounder and the other a six-pounder. - -Some of the company, eight or ten, had pitched camp at the site -selected, and were waiting for others who were tardy in getting -their outfit. Early in May, a party consisting of David Browett, Ira -J. Willis, J. C. Sly, Israel Evans, Jacob M. Truman, Daniel Allen, -Henderson Cox, Robert Pixton, and, I think, J. R. Allred, went out -about two or three days ahead, and found the country covered with deep -snow, so that at that time it was impracticable to go forward with the -wagons; the party therefore returned to the main camp, and waited till -the last of June. During this wait, David Browett, Daniel Allen and -Henderson Cox, being anxious to be moving, started a second time to -search out the route, and were surprised at night and all were killed -by Digger Indians. They had been gone some eight or ten days before -the main body got together, and about twenty days before we started. -Alexander Stephens and I, it seems to me, and some two or three others, -did not join the party, as I remember, until June 29. - -The day before starting from the gold diggings on our journey was kind -of an off-day, in which the writer had some spare time and wandered off -from camp, with pick and shovel, up into a dry gulch, where he soon -struck a very rich prospect of gold, about a quarter of a mile from -water. This was about 11 o'clock a.m. By sundown he had carried the -rich dirt down in his pantaloons, and washed out forty-nine dollars -and fifty cents in gold; yet kind reader, strange as it may appear, -he, with his partners, hitched up and rolled out the next morning, and -joined the main camp at what we called Pleasant Valley, but now, I -think, known as Dutch Flat. I have never seen that rich spot of earth -since; nor do I regret it, for there always has been a higher object -before me than gold. We had covenanted to move together under certain -conditions, and those conditions existing we were in honor bound to -move the next day. We did move, leaving that rich prospect without ever -sticking a stake in the gulch, but abandoning it to those who might -follow. Some may think we were blind to our own interests; but after -more than forty years we look back without regrets, although we did see -fortunes in the land, and had many inducements to stay. People said, -"Here is gold on the bedrock, gold on the hills, gold in the rills, -gold everywhere, gold to spend, gold to lend, gold for all that will -delve, and soon you can make an independent fortune." We could realize -all that. Still duty called, our honor was at stake, we had covenanted -with each other, there was a principle involved; for with us it was God -and His kingdom first. We had friends and relatives in the wilderness, -yea, in an untried, desert land, and who knew their condition? We did -not. So it was duty before pleasure, before wealth, and with this -prompting we rolled out and joined our comrades in Pleasant Valley. - -At our camp in Pleasant Valley we organized with Jonathan Holmes as -president, and with captains of tens. Then there were chosen eight or -nine vaqueros or herdsmen, to take charge of all the loose stock from 4 -a.m. till 8 p.m.; but in the main the herdsmen were the chief pioneers -for the camp. I remember only a few of them: W. Sidney, S. S. Willis, -Israel Evans, Jacob M. Truman, Wesley Adair and James S. Brown. - -The date of our start from Pleasant Valley I cannot now recall, further -than that it was between the 25th of June and the 1st of July. We -made slow progress, for the road was very rough. About six of us rode -ahead, and looked out and marked the route. We would go ahead half the -day, and then return to meet the train, often finding them camped, the -men working the road, cutting the timber, rolling rock, and digging -dugways, or mending wagons. Sometimes we had to lay over a day or two -to make the road passable. - -Thus we pushed forward on our journey till we came to a place we called -Tragedy Springs, for near a beautiful spring at this place we found the -remains of the three brethren who had preceded us, they having been -murdered by Indians, and buried in a shallow grave. We first found -bloody arrows, then stones with blood on them, then the nude bodies, -partly uncovered; these were recognized by Daniel Allen's purse of gold -near by. Our feelings cannot be described through the medium of the -pen, therefore I must leave these to the reader's imagination. We built -a wall of rough rock around the grave, then covered it with flat stones -to protect the bodies from wild beasts. This was the best we could do, -for the bodies were so decomposed that we could not do more. The names -of the deceased and manner of death, with proper dates, were cut in a -large tree that stood near by. - -The night we came to Tragedy Springs was very dark, and our camp -being in a dense forest of large trees, the darkness was intensified. -Guards were at their posts around stock and camp, when suddenly, from -some cause we never knew, the stock stampeded. This raised a great -excitement, and before it subsided one of our cannon was discharged; -as it belched forth its stream of fire, and the sound of the explosion -echoed in forest and hills, the animals were stampeded still worse, -only a few horses that had been securely tied remaining. We were -compelled to lay by for two days to get things together, but we finally -did so, recovering all our stock. - -We made another start, going to a place we called Leek Springs, because -of there being so many leeks growing wild. We had to stop over and mark -our way among rocky ridges. Thence we moved on, musket in one hand, or -in a handy place to the teamster, with his goad or whip in the other -hand, the train moving in close order and constantly on the alert for -an attack by man or beast. - -We ascended a very high spur of the Sierra Nevada range, on the south -side. When we reached the summit the wind blew as if it were the middle -of November. As we crossed over we came to a large snowdrift; on the -north side of the mountain our wagons rolled over the snow as if -on marble pavement, but when we came to where the sun had shone in -the latter part of the day, our wagons went down to the hub, and four -were capsized and some of them badly broken. The others succeeded in -reaching the bottom in safety. It took us till after dark to pick up -the pieces and get them together to be ready to start the next morning. - -We all gathered around the campfire and discussed the subject of -standing guard, when the writer remarked that there was no need of -guards--that he would agree to take care of all the Indians that would -come around that night, for it was so cold and disagreeable that he -supposed no human being would come there from choice. Just then someone -inquired what an object on a rock was. Some said it was an owl, others -that it was an Indian. Two or three of us took our guns and sallied -forth to settle the dispute finding to our surprise two Indians with -feathered headdresses on, and with long bows, and quivers full of -arrows. They were within easy bowshot of us. The party had the laugh on -the writer for once. - -We took the Indians prisoners, disarmed them, and prepared a place -for them to sleep, after giving them their supper. The writer was one -called on to guard them, and he promptly complied. The Indians made -good company, though they were very nervous, and we had to threaten -them frequently to keep them from making a break for liberty. At -midnight the guards were changed, and at dawn we made ready to descend -to the camp below, arriving there just as the Indians moved off; we had -released our prisoners. The Indians soon began to come in from every -quarter, all armed. We moved in close order, every man well armed. -The savages numbered three to our one; they flanked us and we could -see them on every hand, in threatening attitude. In this situation -we had to chop and roll logs out of the way, move rock, and make -dugways, lifting at and holding wagons to keep them from turning over. -Consequently, our progress was slow, and the journey very hazardous. -Finally, when we had worked our way carefully along the difficult -route, passing over the summit of the great Sierras, which divide -the waters of the great deserts from those which flow to the Pacific -Ocean, the threatening red men slunk out of sight, and we found a rough -camping place, where we lay all night upon our arms, but nothing came -to alarm us. - -We continued down the canyon and came to a more open country, camping -by a river bend where there was good feed, water, and fuel. We had -begun to feel more safe from the red men, yet that night they stole -in past our guards and took some of our saddle horses which were tied -within four or five rods of our wagons. The Indians escaped, and were -detected only by our guards hearing them cross the river; this was -about 4 a.m. Early in the morning we learned more definitely our loss, -and eight or ten of us gave pursuit, following the trail across a sandy -country and over the foothills, ultimately succeeding in the recovery -of all our horses but one, and for that we captured an Indian pony that -had the distemper, as we discovered after it had been turned into our -herd. That was one of the hardest day's rides that the writer remembers -in all his experiences, for we put our horses through all they could -live for. Every moment we were liable to ambush, for the Indians -divided into three parties and we did the same. One of our party -supposed he had killed an Indian, or certainly wounded him, just as he -entered into the thick brush. - -It was late the next day when we resumed our journey, and that night -we camped in Carson Valley, where we looked on an extensive plain or -desert. Being unable to discern any evidences of water, we turned to -the north, just under the base of the mountains, traveling over a very -hard route, until we came to the Truckee River, where we entered the -old emigrant road. We followed that road till we came to the sink of -the Humboldt, then called St. Mary's River. The distance was said to be -forty-five miles; be that as it may, we were twenty-four hours covering -it, and I do not think we had any rest or sleep during the whole trip. - -We passed the wonderful Hot or Steamboat Springs. I remember seeing -a dog run up to one of them as if to lap the water, and as he did so -his feet slipped into the edge of the pool. He was so surprised at the -heat that he gave one yelp of pain and jumped into the middle of the -spring, stretched out his legs, and never gave another kick. In a very -short time the hair was all scalded off him. The incident reminded me -of the story of a Dutchman who, when he came to a hot spring, ordered -his teamster to drive on, as hell could not be more than a mile away. -We did not feel to blame the Dutchman, if the springs were like this; -for, from the surroundings, hades did not appear to be far off, and we -passed on without any desire to linger about the dreadful place. It was -about 4 a.m. when, as we approached the Humboldt River, our horses and -cattle hoisted their heads, began to sniff, and broke into a trot; from -that they started into a run, and we had enough to do to keep up with -them till they reached the water. - -We had a short rest, and resumed our journey, for there was no food -for our stock, and the water was brackish, so we traveled eight or ten -miles and camped for the night. As the grazing was still short, we made -a very early start, and were soon joined by two Indians, who remained -with us all day and were very friendly. When we camped they stopped -with us, and as we had been told the place was a dangerous one for -Indians, the presence of these two caused a suspicion that they were -spies, and probably would signal their fellows when to attack the train. - -We had been in camp only a short time when a white horse was led in. -The animal had a slight wound on his wethers and a mark of blood some -six inches down on his shoulder. This wound had been caused by the -horse rolling on some burned willow stumps, one of the men having seen -him roll; and there were on the animal the black marks from the charred -wood. Yet some of the camp insisted that the wounds were from Indian -arrow's. At this time some one came up from the river and caused a -flame of excitement by saying he had seen an Indian skulking in the -brush, although he admitted that it might have been a bird or a wild -animal, for, while he saw something move, he was not in a position to -say just what it was. The discussion now waxed hot, and one man leveled -his gun at one of the Indians, declaring he would shoot him. The writer -was standing near by and caught the gun to prevent such an act, and was -in turn threatened with being shot, when the trouble was stopped by -others interfering. - -That night, when the camp was called together as usual, for prayers -and consultation, and prayers had been said, the same man who had -threatened to shoot the Indian moved that we lay by the next day, hunt -down all the Indians we could find, and by killing rid the country of -the "d--d black rascals." This startling proposition seemed to stun -the senses of the men for a moment, for no such spirit had invaded the -camp before, our motto being peace on earth, good will to man. The -proposition was so repugnant to the writer's feelings that he made his -maiden speech in strongly opposing the motion, declaring that if such -a cruel step were taken he would be a swift witness against all who -engaged in the wicked and savage action; he also asserted that he would -inform on them at the earliest opportunity, for as yet the Indians in -that vicinity had done us no harm, and it was as much murder to kill -one of them as to kill a white man. Others sided with the writer and -the matter was dropped. - -We passed on up the river until we came to near the narrows or canyon. -There some of our stock was wounded by Indian arrows. I do not recall -just how many were injured or died from their wounds. The Indians who -did the damage kept out of our sight. - -I must mention Elder Addison Pratt, who joined us at Sutter's Fort, as -he was returning from a five years' mission to the Society Islands, in -the South Pacific Ocean. He was a great fisherman, and it was along -this part of the route that he used to catch the little speckled trout -in such numbers as to attract both our admiration and our gratitude. -He would go where no one else would ever think of finding fish, and -would meet with wonderful success. In fact, some of the party were so -astonished at his good luck that they declared he could catch fish in a -cow track. He was a good, jolly soul, and made the best of everything. - -Our train journeyed on in peace till we came to Goose Creek, where the -writer traded a mare to an Indian, for a mule. The red man was given -several articles for the difference. He sauntered around for a little -while, then mounted the mule, and away he went, taking the articles -with him. The writer pursued alone for four or five miles, and first -thing he knew was too near the Indian camp to turn back, so he rushed -in among them, dismounted, changed the mare for the mule, and rode off. -The Indians looked surprised and frightened, and made no resistance. I -never realized the hazard I had taken till the danger was over; then I -was glad to rejoin my fellow-travelers. - -We crossed Goose Creek Mountains and again struck out into the -trackless desert, pioneering our own way, rolling the rocks and cutting -the road. We reached the Malad, a very difficult stream to cross, but -we succeeded in getting over without serious damage. From there our -route lay to the Bear River, which we crossed in safety by blocking up -our wagon boxes. I think the crossing was made just above where Bear -River City is now located. From there we traveled southward under the -base of the mountains to where we found two springs, one of hot water -and the other of very cold water, within a very few feet of each other; -they flowed in the same gulch or ravine. Along this route we had naught -but an Indian trail to guide us. When we reached Box Elder we thought -it the finest place we had seen since leaving Carson Valley. - -While in California we had learned that the Latter-day Saints had -settled near the south end of the Great Salt Lake; and as we had -been in sight, from the mountains, of the north end of the lake for -some days, we began to feel that we were nearing a place of rest. We -journeyed on till we came to the Ogden and Weber rivers, where we found -that Captain James Brown, of company C of the Mormon Battalion, and a -few of the Saints had settled; the country looked very wild. We still -pursued our way southward, till we reached the present site of Salt -Lake City, entering the Sixth Ward Square--now Pioneer Square--where -the Saints had built houses and a stockade. I think the date of our -arrival at this place was the 28th of September, 1848. - -We were heartily welcomed, by relatives and friends, after our long and -tedious march of near four thousand miles, and our more than two years' -absence from those we loved and who loved us. Our meeting and greeting -were far more joyous and precious than the glittering gold we had left -behind. Neither our friends nor ourselves had any regrets for our -having left the gold fields when we remembered our marching away, over -two years before, to the tune of "The Girl I Left Behind Me," for we -were so very glad to find her again, no matter if it were in a desert. -We all rejoiced, and gave thanks to God for His protecting care and our -safe return to the bosom of friends. - - - -CHAPTER XVI. - -CONTENTMENT AMONG THE SAINTS IN GREAT SALT LAKE VALLEY--RUDE DWELLINGS -AND SHORT RATIONS--TRYING EXPERIENCES--RESCUE OF MORMON BATTALION -MEMBERS FROM STARVATION--CARRY NEWS OF THE CALIFORNIA GOLD DISCOVERY -TO THE EAST--RE-UNION OF MORMON BATTALION MEMBERS--ADDRESSES BY THE -FIRST PRESIDENCY AND OTHERS--SETTLING A NEW COUNTRY--ORGANIZATION OF -MINUTE MEN--COLD WINTER--THE GOLD FEVER--TENOR OF THE PREACHINGS AND -PROPHESYINGS OF THOSE TIMES--INSTRUCTING THE PEOPLE IN INDUSTRIAL -PURSUITS--POLICY TOWARD THE INDIANS. - -NOTWITHSTANDING the fact of the aspect in the Great Salt Lake Valley -being gloomy, most of the people were contented with their lot, -although the experiences of 1847 and 1848 had been anything but -encouraging. Some of the inhabitants were living in log cabins, others -in dugouts, and still others in wagons, while some who did not have -the latter had built brush sheds; almost everybody was living on short -rations, crickets and grasshoppers having destroyed most of the crops. -The whole face of the country was brown and dry, except small streaks -along the water courses. There was no provender for our stock, and we -could only turn them out upon the range, and trust them and ourselves -to a kind Providence. Timber for fuel was in the mountains, and higher -up in these there was timber for fencing and building purposes. In -order to get either, we had to make roads at great expense, building -bridges and cutting dugways, sometimes going in armed companies to -protect ourselves from the threatening Indian tribes. A long brush -bowery was built in the town; we met there for religious services, and -for all other purposes that made it necessary for the people to be -called together. - -October 6, 1848, a general conference of the Church was held, and the -people as a rule felt blessed, although there were a few who were very -much discouraged as the rations grew short and the cold weather pinched -more closely. - -Some time in October, news reached us that a small detachment of the -Mormon Battalion coming from California was starving to death on the -western deserts. Their old comrades in arms soon gathered supplies and -fitted up a team, and six or seven of us went out to give assistance. -We met the suffering company at the point of the West Mountains, about -two days earlier than we had expected. The men were suffering, but not -quite so badly as we had been led to believe from the word we had got. -It was snowing when we met them, and continued to do so the greater -part of the night and of the next day, so that we suffered much from -cold before we reached shelter, for everything was soaked through. The -company brought considerable gold, which was exhibited to many of the -people. - -Some of our comrades were not so fortunate as to find their families in -the Great Salt Lake Valley, so they pushed on to where these had been -left, in Iowa or Nebraska. Those men bore the news of the great gold -discovery in California, and, as evidence of the truth of their story, -showed the precious metal they had secured. Thus the Mormon Battalion -not only was at the discovery of gold in California and took part -therein, but bore the news thereof eastward, until it spread to the -world, causing great excitement. - -The last detachment of the battalion for the season having arrived in -the valley, a feast was prepared, and a re-union of the soldiers and -their friends was called. It was made as grand an affair as could be -under the circumstances, Presidents Brigham Young and Heber C. Kimball -leading out with liberal hands. We were welcomed in royal style; -interesting speeches were made by the First Presidency of the Church, -and also by the officers and soldiers of the battalion. - -From that time things moved quietly, people making roads and getting -out timber for various purposes, herding stock, fencing, and so on. -At length the Indians began to run off and kill the stock. A meeting -was called and one hundred men selected to enroll themselves as minute -men, the writer being one of the company. We were required each to -keep a horse on hand, and to be ready at a minute's warning to march -to any point of attack. We had to fit out ourselves, as there was no -quartermaster's department on which officers could issue requisitions -and have them honored. We had to provide our own provisions, and -everything necessary for a campaign, at our own expense. Most of the -young men having horses of their own, and many of them having become -expert horsemen, a full quota was furnished for the company. We had -turned over to the Church authorities, for the public defense, our -two brass Russian cannon. The minute men met for drill at regularly -appointed times. - -The winter of 1848-9 was quite cold. Many people had their feet badly -frozen. For one, the writer suffered so severely from this cause that -he lost every nail from the toes of both feet. In February and March -there began to be some uneasiness over the prospects, and as the days -grew warmer the gold fever attacked many so that they prepared to go -to California. Some said they would go only to have a place for the -rest of us; for they thought Brigham Young too smart a man to try to -establish a civilized colony in such a "God-forsaken country," as they -called the valley. They further said that California was the natural -country for the Saints; some had brought choice fruit pips and seed, -but said they would not waste them by planting in a country like the -Great Salt Lake Valley; others stated that they would not build a -house in the valley, but would remain in their wagons, for certainly -our leaders knew better than to attempt to make a stand in such a dry, -worthless locality, and would be going on to California, Oregon or -Vancouver's Island; still others said they would wait awhile before -planting choice fruits, as it would not be long before they would -return to Jackson County, Missouri. - -This discouraging talk was not alone by persons who had no experience -in farming and manufacturing, but by men who had made a success at -their various avocations where they had been permitted to work in -peace, before coming west. Good farmers said: "Why the wheat we grew -here last year was so short that we had to pull it; the heads were -not more than two inches long. Frost falls here every month in the -year--enough to cut down all tender vegetation. More, James Bridger -and Gudger, who have been in this country ten years or more, say that -corn cannot be raised anywhere in these mountains. In fact, Bridger has -told President Young that he will give a thousand dollars for the first -bushel of corn raised in the open air here, for he says it cannot be -done." - -It was at this time of gloom that President Young stood before the -whole people, and said, in substance, that some people had misgivings, -and some were murmuring, and had not faith to go to work and make their -families comfortable; they had got the gold fever and were going to -California. Said he: "Some have asked me about going. I have told them -that God has appointed this place for the gathering of His Saints, -and you will do better right here than you will by going to the gold -mines. Some have thought they would go there and get fitted out and -come back, but I told them to stop here and get fitted out. Those who -stop here and are faithful to God and His people will make more money -and get richer than you that run after the god of this world; and I -promise you in the name of the Lord that many of you that go, thinking -you will get rich and come back, will wish you had never gone away from -here, and will long to come back but will not be able to do so. Some -of you will come back, but your friends who remain here will have to -help you; and the rest of you who are spared to return will not make -as much money as your brethren do who stay here and help build up the -Church and kingdom of God; they will prosper and be able to buy you -twice over. Here is the place God has appointed for His people. We have -been kicked out of the frying-pan into the fire, out of the fire into -the middle of the floor, and here we are and here we will stay. God has -shown me that this is the spot to locate His people, and here is where -they will prosper; He will temper the elements for the good of His -Saints; He will rebuke the frost and the sterility of the soil, and the -land shall become fruitful. Brethren, go to, now, and plant out your -fruit seeds." Stretching his arms to the east and to the west, with his -hands spread out, he said: "For in these elements are not only all the -cereals common to this latitude, but the apple, peach and plum; yea, -and the more delicate fruits, the strawberry and raspberry; and we will -raise the grape here and manufacture wine; and as the Saints gather -here and get strong enough to possess the land, God will temper the -climate, and we shall build a city and a temple to the Most High God -in this place. We will extend our settlements to the east and west, to -the north and to the south, and we will build towns and cities by the -hundreds, and thousands of the Saints will gather in from the nations -of the earth. This will become the great highway of the nations. Kings -and emperors and the noble and wise of the earth will visit us here, -while the wicked and ungodly will envy us our comfortable homes and -possessions. Take courage, brethren. I can stand in my door and can see -where there is untold millions of the rich treasures of the earth--gold -and silver. But the time has not come for the Saints to dig gold. It is -our duty first to develop the agricultural resources of this country, -for there is no country on the earth that is more productive than this. -We have the finest climate, the best water, and the purest air that can -be found on the earth; there is no healthier climate anywhere. As for -gold and silver, and the rich minerals of the earth, there is no other -country that equals this; but let them alone; let others seek them, -and we will cultivate the soil; for if the mines are opened first, we -are a thousand miles from any base of supplies, and the people would -rush in here in such great numbers that they would breed a famine; -and gold would not do us or them any good if there were no provisions -in the land. People would starve to death with barrels of gold; they -would be willing to give a barrel of gold for a barrel of flour rather -than starve to death. Then, brethren, plow your land and sow wheat, -plant your potatoes; let the mines alone until the time comes for you -to hunt gold, though I do not think this people ever will become a -mining people. It is our duty to preach the Gospel, gather Israel, pay -our tithing, and build temples. The worst fear that I have about this -people is that they will get rich in this country, forget God and His -people, wax fat, and kick themselves out of the Church and go to hell. -This people will stand mobbing, robbing, poverty, and all manner of -persecution, and be true. But my greater fear for them is that they -cannot stand wealth; and yet they have to be tried with riches, for -they will become the richest people on this earth." - -My dear reader, the writer stood on the Sixth Ward Square, Salt Lake -City, in the year 1849, fifty-one years ago, and heard the foregoing -spoken by President Brigham Young. Now it is 1900. and I bear my -testimony to the literal fulfillment of most of those sayings, and that -portion which has not yet come to pass I most assuredly believe will do -so. I entreat the reader of this to pause and reflect. Was there divine -inspiration in this matter, or not? - -About the same time, Parley P. Pratt, one of the Twelve Apostles, told -the people to save the hides of their cattle, tan them, and make boots -and shoes for their families. He said that in the mountains there was -spruce, pine bark, and shumac, with tanning properties; advised that -they be gathered, and the beef hides tanned; and predicted that the -time would come when leather would be tanned here, and boots and shoes -would be manufactured and exported. It was also stated that we would -raise sheep here, and would manufacture woollen fabrics and export them. - -As the writer walked away from meeting that day, in company with some -old and tried men, who had been mobbed and robbed, and driven from -their homes, and whom he looked upon almost as pillars of the Church, -one of them said he had passed through such and such trials in the -past, but that that day, 1849, was the darkest he ever had seen in the -Church. The thought of trying to settle this barren land, he said, was -one of the greatest trials he had met. There were some three of the -party particularly whom the writer thought were staunch men; one of -these asked another what he thought of the preaching that day, and got -the reply that it would do "to preach to d--d fools, but not to men of -sense"--that it was insulting to a man's better senses, it was absurd -to think that it was possible to manufacture anything for export from -a country like this, where we were more likely to starve to death than -to do anything else. Now, after half a century has passed away, the -writer refers to the manufacturing and mercantile establishments in -these mountain valleys to establish which were the divinely inspired -utterances of that day. - -On one occasion in 1849, President Heber C. Kimball, when preaching to -the people, exhorted them to be faithful as Saints, to cultivate the -earth, and let others dig the gold. He said it was not for the Saints -to dig it, but the time would come when they would learn to use it, -and not abuse it, or the power that it gives; they would possess it by -millions, and the time would come when people would be willing to give -a bushel of gold for a bushel of wheat, when judgments and calamities -would be poured out on the nations of the earth. He declared that -people would come here by thousands, yea, tens of thousands would yet -flee to Zion for safety; they would come with their burdens on their -backs, having nothing to eat, and the people here would have to feed -them; others would bring their gold and silver, and envy the people -here their peace and comfort, for God would temper the climate so -that the Saints would be able to raise everything they needed. Elder -Kimball further said: "Brethren, build good, large granaries, fill -them with wheat, and keep it against the time when it will be needed. -Some people think we have passed the day of trial, but let me tell you -that you need not fear that, for if you are faithful you shall have -all the trials you can bear, and if you are not faithful you will have -more, and will apostatize and go to hell. Some people have come from -the eastern states and the old country and said: "Brother Kimball, O -that we could have been with you in Kirtland, in Jackson county, and -in Nauvoo, and shared the trials of the Saints with you!" Brethren, -hold on a little while, and you shall have all the trials you will -be able to stand; for God has said that He will have a tried people, -so you may prepare yourselves; for before the roof is on the temple -that we will build here, the devils will begin to howl, and before -the capstone is laid you will begin to have your trials. Your leaders -will be hunted as wild beasts; we shall not be with you, and men will -be left to themselves for awhile. Then is the time that you should be -filled with light, that you may be able to stand through the days of -trial. Now, you can leave your bench-tools on the workbench, and your -plows and farming tools in the field; and can lie down and go to sleep -without locking or bolting your doors; but the time will come when, -if you do this, your tools will be stolen from you. These mountains -will be filled with robbers, highwaymen, and all kinds of thieves and -murderers, for the spirit of the old Gadianton robbers lurks here in -the mountains, and will take possession of men, and you will have to -watch as well as pray, to keep thieves away. Therefore, brethren, -begin now to take better care of your tools; attach locks and bolts -to your doors, and do not wait until the horse is stolen before you -lock the door." Elder Kimball referred to the fact that the young men -were becoming restless and did not know what to do; they ran hither -and thither to the mines, and became rude and uncultivated. Said he: -"Let me tell you, boys, what to do. Marry the girls and build homes for -yourselves. Do not leave the young ladies to take up with strangers -who will marry them and then desert them. If you do not marry them, -I counsel the middle-aged and old men to marry the girls and treat -them well, and let them have the opportunity to obey the first command -of God to man, to multiply and replenish the earth. Brethren, take -to yourselves more wives; for if you do not, the time will come when -you will not be permitted to do so. Seek wisdom by faith and prayer; -study and read all good books; study the arts and sciences; build good -schoolhouses, and educate your children, that they may be able to -perform the great work that will come upon them." - -Some of the most practical and best informed men in the community -were called to deliver free lectures on farming, stockraising, etc., -for many of the people had come from manufacturing centers and had -no experience in agricultural life, consequently these people needed -instruction, and it was given in every industrial pursuit that was -practicable at the time, and that by experienced men. Thus the people -were incited in their labors to subdue this wild and then desert -land--for it was barren and waste in the extreme. - -President Brigham Young also instructed the people to treat the Indians -kindly, and divide food with them, "for," said he, "it is cheaper to -feed than to fight them. Teach them that we are their friends. Indeed, -treat every man civilly and kindly; treat every man as a gentleman -until you prove him to be a rascal--then let him alone." - -The foregoing is the tenor of the teaching and preaching to the people -in 1848 and 1849, in what is now the State of Utah. - - - -CHAPTER XVII. - -SCARCITY OF FOOD IN THE GREAT SALT LAKE VALLEY--WILD VEGETABLES FOR -GREENS--FAIR PROSPECTS FOR CROPS--CLOUDS OF CRICKETS LAY BARE THE -FIELDS--PEOPLE STRUGGLE AGAINST THE PEST ALMOST TO DESPAIR--VAST -FLOCKS OF SEA GULLS, AS THE CLOUDS OF HEAVEN, COME TO THE -RESCUE--DESTRUCTION OF THE CRICKET--PEOPLE PRAISE THE LORD--THE -WRITER INVITED TO A MEETING, ORDAINED A SEVENTY, AND CALLED WITH -OTHERS TO GO ON A MISSION TO THE SOCIETY ISLANDS--WORDS OF PRESIDENTS -BRIGHAM YOUNG AND HEBER C. KIMBALL--PREPARATIONS TO TRAVEL TO -CALIFORNIA WITH AN EMIGRANT COMPANY--DESCRIPTION OF THE ROUTE BY -CAPTAIN JEFFERSON HUNT--START ON MY MISSION--PROPHECY BY PRESIDENT -WLLLARD RICHARDS--BATTLE WITH INDIANS AT PROVO AVERTED BY APOSTLE C. -C. RICH--PROSPECTS OF UTAH VALLEY TO SUPPORT POPULATION--OVERTAKE -THE EMIGRANT COMPANY--DISCUSSIONS AT BEAVER RIVER--COMPANY STARTS FOR -WALKER'S PASS--TURNED BACK BY SCARCITY OF WATER--EXPERIENCE ON THE -DESERT--DISSENSIONS IN THE COMPANY--FUTILE ATTEMPT TO SEND SOME OF -THE MEMBERS BACK--APOSTLE C. C. RICH FORESEES FURTHER TROUBLE, AND -ENDEAVORS TO SAVE THE MORMON PART OF THE TRAIN BY ADVISING THEM TO -RETURN TO THE OLD SPANISH TRAIL--METHODIST AND CAMPBELLTTE MINISTERS -INCITE THE COMPANY AGAINST THE MORMON GUIDE, CAPTAIN HUNT--MAIN COMPANY -DISREGARDS CAPTAIN HUNT'S WARNING OF DANGER, AND LEAVES THE OLD SPANISH -TRAIL TO SEARCH FOR THE ROUTE THROUGH WALKER'S PAST--MORMONS GO WITH -CAPTAIN HUNT ON THE SOUTHERN ROUTE. - -WHEN seed time came that year, provisions were very scarce. People dug -segos and thistle roots, and gathered cow cabbage, as we called a plant -that was found in the canyons. We ate these as greens, cooked the hides -of beef cattle--in fact, gathered everything eatable, and worked hard -and put in our crops. These started out with fair prospects for harvest -until the grain was from one to six inches high. Then there came down -from the mountains myriads of black crickets, their bodies nearly as -large as a man's thumb. They entered upon wheat and corn fields, and -swept or ate every green thing before them. Field after field was -cleared of vegetation. Whole families with their chickens moved out to -their farms and made war upon the crickets. Men, women and children -fought from morning till night, and still the enemy advanced from field -to field. Men almost despaired, women wept, and to all human appearance -our cause was lost. The crickets ate the crops so close into the ground -that they could not start again. The people held fast meetings and -prayed for protection. I am not positive that there were any special -meetings for that purpose, but it was customary to fast and pray the -first Thursday in each month. - -Almost everybody was in despair, and the enemy did not seem to be -diminished in numbers. With their war cry, or ce-ce, the crickets -advanced, and, seeming to call up their reserve forces, with a bold -front kept up their march. Then there came from the west and northwest -what seemed to me might be justly called the clouds of heaven, or -perhaps more properly the clouds of salvation. These were white sea -gulls, which flew so close together and were so numerous as to form -a cloud wherever they went. They covered almost the whole farming -district north and southeast of the city--the main farming district -in Salt Lake Valley at that time; they visited Davis County and other -places as well; and when they lit down the fields looked as though -covered with snow. The gulls came at sunrise and returned to the west -at sundown, after having gorged and disgorged themselves the entire -day, being tame as chickens. They kept up the work of deliverance day -after day, as the crickets continued to come down from the mountains. -I believe that was the first time this kind of birds had been seen by -any of the settlers. When they had completed their work of mercy they -went away, leaving a grateful people who returned thanks to the Giver -of every good gift. The Saints in the valley then were united and their -meetings were well attended. - -One Sunday, Brother Jedediah M. Grant came down from the stand, took -the writer by the arm, and asked him to take a walk. The request was -granted readily, and I was led to Brother Lorenzo Young's house on City -Creek, where we found the First Presidency, some members of the Twelve -Apostles, and some of the first council of the Seventies. There the -writer was ordained to the Priesthood of a Seventy, and his name was -enrolled in the third quorum. Shortly after that he was invited with -others to attend a council meeting of the First Presidency and Twelve -Apostles, in President Kimball's schoolhouse. When we got in and were -seated, President Young said, "Brethren, if any of you have anything to -say, say on." There being no response, the president rose to his feet -and said, "I move that Elders Addison Pratt, Hyrum Blackwell and James -S. Brown take a mission to the Society Islands, in the South Pacific -Ocean." President H. C. Kimball said, "I second the motion." The -question was put and unanimously sustained, and the president turned to -me and asked, "Brother James, will you go?" The answer was, "I am an -illiterate youth, cannot read or write, and I do not know what good I -can do; but if it is the will of the Lord that I should go, and you say -so, I will do the best that I can." The president then took a seat near -me, placing his right hand on my left knee, and said, "It is the will -of the Lord that you go, and I say go; I am not afraid to risk you. And -I promise you in the name of the Lord God of Israel that if you go you -will be blessed, and do good, and be an honor to yourself and to the -Church and kingdom of God. Although men will seek your life, you shall -be spared and return to the bosom of the Church in safety." - -This council was on Sunday evening, some time in September, 1849, and -we were to start no later than the 10th of October; indeed, we were -instructed to get ready as soon as possible, so that we could join a -company of emigrants which was organizing to go through to California -by the southern route, as it was too late to go by the northern route. - -As Elder Addison Pratt and I had agreed to go sowing wheat together on -Monday morning, I thought I could speak to him without any notice being -taken of it. I said to him, in a low tone of voice, that I guessed we -would not sow much wheat next day. President H. C. Kimball jumped from -his seat as quick as a flash, and pointing his finger directly at me, -said, "What is that, Brother Jimmie?" When I told him what I had said, -he continued, "Jimmie, it is not for you to sow wheat or to reap it, -but your calling is to sow the good seed of the Gospel, and gather -Israel from this time henceforth. Mind that, now; let others sow the -wheat." From that time I felt a weight of responsibility that I had -never thought of before. - -We then went to preparing for our journey, Apostle C. C. Rich had been -called to go through to California, so he and Brother Pratt and I -fitted up a team, I having a good wagon and one yoke of oxen; they each -furnished a yoke of oxen. In a few days we were ready for the start. We -had a rodometer attached to our wagon, to measure the distance. - -In the meantime, the emigrants called a meeting before taking their -departure. They had employed Captain Jefferson Hunt of company A, -Mormon Battalion fame, to be their guide, as he had come through that -route with pack animals. He was invited to tell them what they might -expect. He described the route to them with the roughest side out, lest -they might say that he had misled them by making things more favorable -than they really were. In concluding his remarks he said: "From Salt -Springs, we cross to a sandy desert, distance seventy-five miles to -Bitter Springs, the water so bitter the devil would not drink it; and -from thence away hellwards, to California or some other place. Now, -gentlemen, if you will stick together and follow me, I will lead you -through to California all right; but you will have to make your own -road, for there is none save the old Spanish trail from Santa Fe to -California, by the Cajon Pass through the Sierra Nevada Mountains." - -The emigrant company consisted of about five hundred souls, and one -hundred wagons and teams, the latter in poor condition. Feeling in high -spirits, the company moved out between the 1st and 8th of October. C. -C. Rich, Francis Pomeroy and I remained to follow up on horseback, in -three or four days. Pratt and Blackwell, taking our team, started with -the main body. They got to the Cottonwoods, when one of my oxen became -so lame that they could not proceed any farther. Blackwell returned to -inform me of the situation, and I went down and traded with John Brown, -late Bishop of Pleasant Grove, for another ox, mine having been pricked -in shoeing. Then they overtook the main company, and all proceeded -together. - -On the 8th we followed. I started out alone, to meet with the others -at Cottonwood. As I passed the home of Dr. Willard Richards, counselor -to President Brigham Young, Dr. Richards came out and met me; he took -me by the right knee with his right hand, as I sat on my horse, and -said, "Starting out on your mission, I suppose?" I replied, "Yes, sir." -"Well, Brother James, I am glad, and sorry; glad to have you go and -preach the Gospel, and sorry to part with good young men that we need -in opening up a new country." At that he gave my knee an extra grip. -Stretching his left hand out to the southwest, his chin quivering and -his eyes filling with tears, he said, "Brother James, when you are -upon yonder distant islands, called to preside over a branch of the -Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, men will seek your life, -and to all human appearance, there will be no possible escape; then -look unto God, and His angels shall draw near unto you, and you shall -be delivered, to return home to this people. Do not stop to write to -Brother Pratt, your president, to Brother Brigham, or to me, for you -will require the immediate protection of God. Then put your trust -in Him, and He will deliver you; for I promise you in the name of -Israel's God that you shall be delivered from your enemy and return -to this people. Goodbye, and God bless you." Need I tell the reader -that my mind was greatly impressed by those prophetic words, their -inspired character being established so vividly in my later experience? -Prophetic I knew them to be, and impressive they were indeed; and the -impression has been deep and lasting. - -I then went on to Brother Jacob M. Truman's, on Big Cottonwood Creek, -and stayed with him that night. Next morning I passed on to Brother -William Bills', where I met with Brothers C. C. Rich and F. Pomeroy, -and we proceeded on to Provo by the Indian trail, having been joined by -Alexander Williams, with whom we stayed. - -At Provo we learned that the citizens and Indians had had some trouble, -and there was considerable excitement, as there were but few settlers -at that place and the Indians were quite numerous. The latter were -singing war songs and working up a spirit of war preliminary to making -an attack that night or next morning, as was supposed. The people -were preparing to receive them as best they could. Guards were posted -around the camp, and men put on picket duty, so that any enemy might be -discovered readily. - -The Indians made no move until after daylight; but just before sunrise -they started from their camps in force, to attack us. We advanced to -meet them, so as to prevent their assailing us in the small fort, -where the women and children were. The savages marched up as if to -give us open battle. We formed across the road, and each man took his -post ready for action. I always have believed that if it had not been -for the presence of Apostle C. C. Rich, and his cool, conciliatory -action, there would have been bloodshed, for there were some very -hot-headed white men, who would have preferred war to peace. Through -Brother Rich's influence, the cause of the trouble was looked into, a -conciliation effected, and war averted, so that after breakfast we of -the missionary party proceeded on to what was called Hobble Creek--now -the city of Springville, with a population of over two thousand souls. -I remember that we thought the place would be capable of sustaining -eight or ten families, or a dairy, believing there was not enough water -for more. - -From Hobble Creek we passed on from one small stream to another, -expressing our opinion as to the capacity of the water supply; and in -no instance did we suppose that there was water sufficient for more -than fifteen families, judging from what we could see then. Again, -the barrenness of the country was such that it did not seem that more -than seventy-five or a hundred head of cattle could find feed within -reach of water. Now thousands of head of horned stock and horses are -sustained at the same places. - -We kept on our way until we overtook the wagon train on Sevier River. -We came up with the emigrants just as they were ready to move on, but -did not find them so full of glee as they were on the start from the -city. Still, we rolled on very peaceably until we came to Beaver River, -where the country began to look more forbidding. Then the ardor of the -emigrants began to weaken. - -At this place the company was joined by a man named Smith with a pack -train of about seventeen men; also James Flake, with thirty Latter-day -Saints; besides, there were William Farrer, John Dixon. H. W. Bigler, -George Q. Cannon, and others, whose names I do not now recall. Smith -felt confident that he could find Walker's Pass, in the Sierra Nevada -Mountains. This supposed pass had been spoken of often, but men had -been disappointed as often in finding it, or rather in not finding -it. Smith's story excited our whole camp so that there was a general -desire to try the new route, and go down through the canyon and out on -to the sandy desert. The whole company except a very few favored the -idea of leaving the route they had hired a guide for, and they urged -Captain Hunt to strike out and look for water. He said, "Gentlemen, I -agreed to pilot you through to California on the Old Spanish Route by -the Cajon Pass. I am ready to do so, and am not under any obligations -to lead you in any other way; and if you insist on my doing so you must -be responsible, for I will not be responsible for anything. On this -condition, if you insist on changing your route, I will do the best I -can to find water, but I do not have any reason to hope for success -when I leave the trail." - -The company hurrahed for the Walker Pass, and Captain Hunt struck out a -day ahead while the company shod and doctored their lame and sick stock -for one day. Then we moved out ten miles on to the plain southwest of -where Minersville, Utah, now stands, and camped. - -Sometime in the night Captain Hunt came into camp, so near choked from -the lack of water that his tongue was swollen till it protruded from -his mouth; his eyes were so sunken in his head that he could scarcely -be recognized. His horse, too, for the need of water, was blind, and -staggered as he was urged on. Their stay had been thirty-six hours, -on the sands, without water. About 2 o'clock next morning our stock -stampeded from the guards and ran back to water. Two-thirds of the men -went in pursuit, and animals and men did not return to camp till 2 -o'clock in the afternoon. - -By this time confusion and discontent abounded in camp. A committee was -appointed to inquire into the condition of every team, and to ascertain -the food supply, with the avowed intention of sending all back who -failed to have what were considered the requisites for the journey. I -think that one-third of the company, our wagon included, were found -wanting when weighed in that committee's balances. But when we were -ordered to return, those who gave the command found that they were -without authority and no one would heed them. So the discontent was -patched up for a time, and we proceeded on to Little Salt Lake Valley, -where we struck the old Spanish trail again. Then the company began to -split up, some going on after night, and others stopping. - -Brother C. C. Rich told me that it had been shown to him that there was -going to be trouble, and he felt led to believe that if we would go -with the pack train he could at least lead the brethren there back on -to the trail and save them. This was in the night, as we slept together -in the wagon. He awoke and asked me if I were awake. Finding that I -was, he told me what would befall the company. To save the brethren -and all who would heed him, he purchased some ponies and went with the -packers. - -As we passed along the Spanish trail--said to be three hundred and -fifty years old--on the great desert, we could follow the route by -the bones of dead animals in many places. It is said that many fierce -battles have been fought between Mexicans and Indians along this trail. -So far as we were concerned, although it was known that the Indians -were very hostile, they gave us no trouble. - -When we reached what is called the Rim of the Basin, where the waters -divide, part running into the Colorado River and on to the Pacific -Ocean, and part into the Salt Lake Valley, the company called meetings, -and several made speeches, saying there must be a nearer and better -route than that on which the Mormon guide was leading them. One -Methodist and one Campbellite preacher in the company said that they -had started to California, and not hellwards, as the Mormon guide had -stated at the outset, quoting what Captain Hunt had said just before -starting. Others claimed that they had been on the mountains, and upon -looking west had seen something green, which they asserted was an -indication of water. Some of them celebrated the proposed separation -from us by boring holes in trees then filling these with powder and -firing them, exploded the trees in symbol of the break-up of the -company. - -Next morning all but seven wagons turned off to the right, -toward the supposed Walker's Pass. We preferred to follow the guide. -The company was thoroughly warned by Captain Hunt of the danger of -dying from lack of water. In our party there were eleven men, two women -and three children. The main company expressed pity for us and tried -to persuade us to go with them, but we felt confident that our course -was the safest, notwithstanding their superior numbers. They seemed to -rejoice at their conclusion, while we regretted it for their sakes. -Thus we separated, the emigrant company heading for Walker's Pass, and -our small party continuing on the old Spanish trail, or southern route -to California. - - - -CHAPTER XVIII. - -CAUGHT IN A SNOWSTORM--VIA THE SANTA CLARA AND RIO VIRGEN TO -THE MUDDY--NEWS OF SAD DISASTER TO THE EMIGRANT COMPANY--MAKING -CHARCOAL AND NAILS--AN APOSTLE AS A BLACKSMITH--SEARCHING FOR WATER -ON THE DESERT--CROSSING AN ALKALI STREAM--DISCOVER GOLD NEAR SALT -SPRINGS--HURRYING ON OVER THE DESERT--CATTLE POISONED AT BITTER -SPRINGS--KILLING ANIMALS TO RELIEVE THEIR SUFFERINGS--FIRST WAGON -OVER CAJON PASS, GOING WEST--SEVERE JOURNEY TO THE SUMMIT OF THE -PASS--ALL GET OVER SAFELY--SENSE OF GREAT RELIEF--GRASS AND WATER IN -ABUNDANCE--OVERTAKEN BY SURVIVORS OF THE EMIGRANT COMPANY--THEIR -STORY OF TERRIBLE SUFFERING--DIVIDE PROVISIONS WITH THEM--CELEBRATING -CHRISTMAS, 1849--CONTINUING THE JOURNEY NORTH--SPANISH WARNING IN A -CEMETERY TO INDIANS--CRUELTY OF THE SPANIARDS TO THE INDIANS--THE -WRITER PLACED IN CHARGE OF THE COMPANY--DIRECTED TO GO TO THE GOLD -MINES. - -WHEN the company had separated the weather was very threatening, and it -soon began to snow very fast. We pulled on until late in the afternoon, -and camped on the mountain. Next day we came to some Indian farms -where the savages had raised corn, wheat and squash. We passed on to -the Santa Clara, followed it down for three or four days, and found -a written notice to those who came that way: "Look out, for we have -killed two Indians here." With this warning, we felt that we must keep -a vigilant guard all the time. From the Santa Clara we had a very long -drive across the mountain and down a long, dry, rocky slope until we -came to the Rio Virgen. We went along that stream three or four days; -where we left it we found a cow with an Indian arrow sticking in her. -We next passed over a high plateau to a stream well named the Muddy. -There we laid by and doctored and shod our lame cattle. - -While we were on the Muddy, Brother C. C. Rich and party came down -the stream to us, bringing sad and heartrending news from the great -emigrant company, which had broken into factions and become perfectly -demoralized and confused. Some had taken packs on their backs and -started on foot, their cattle dying, their wagons abandoned. All were -despondent, and unwilling to listen to anybody. I think, from the -best information we ever got of them, I would be safe in saying that -four-fifths of them met a most horrible fate, being starved or choked -to death in or near what was afterwards called Death Valley. In after -years the miners of Pahranagat found the irons of the wagons very handy -for use in their pursuits. - -On the Muddy we burned charcoal and made nails to shoe our cattle, -having to throw the animals down and hold them while Apostle C. C. Rich -shod them. Brother Rich did his work well, for the shoes never came -loose till they wore off. - -From the Muddy I accompanied Captain Hunt and Henry Rollins twelve -miles and found some small pools of water about two miles to the right -of the trail; I went back to turn the packers to it, while Captain -Hunt and Henry Rollins went ahead in search of more pools of water and -found some. George Q. Cannon and I stayed there as guides for the wagon -train, and turned them off to the water. When the train arrived, about -11 o'clock p.m., we had to dip water with cups and water the stock from -buckets. Then we pressed on till daylight, made a halt long enough to -take breakfast, and pushed on, for there was no feed for our stock. - -About 2 p.m. we came to the Los Vegas, where we rested a day, then -continued our journey over mountains and across dry deserts from day -to day until we reached a stream of water about three rods wide. It -was so strong with alkali that we dared not allow our cattle to drink -of it, but put the lash to them so that they could not get a sup as we -crossed it twice. Thence we traveled across a very sandy desert for -twelve miles to the Salt Springs, where the train went around a point -of the mountain. A. Pratt and I, with three or four others, followed -on a small trail that passed over a notch of the mountain. While going -through a narrow pass, Brother A. Pratt said it looked as if there -might be gold there. At that we went to looking in the crevices of -the rock, and in a few minutes one of the party found a small scale, -and then another. Among the rest, I saw the precious metal projecting -from a streak of quartz in the granite rock. From there we went over -about one and a half miles to the Salt Springs, and met with the teams. -Several of the party journeyed back to look further for the gold. I -took along a cold chisel and hammer, and chipped out some at the place -I had found, but as our teams were weakening very fast and there was -neither food nor water at that place to sustain our stock, we had to -push on across the sandy desert of seventy-five miles, day and night, -until we came to the Bitter Springs. - -These were the springs that Captain Hunt had told the emigrant company -about before they left Salt Lake City, that from thence it was "away -hellward to California or some other place." It certainly began to -look that way now, when our cattle began to weaken and die all along -the trail. The springs would have been as properly named if they had -been called Poison Springs, instead of Bitter, for it seemed that from -that place our cattle began to weaken every moment, and many had to -be turned loose from the yoke and then shot to get them out of their -misery. - -We had to shoot one of Brother Pratt's oxen to end its suffering. This -act fell to my lot. Oh, how inhuman and cruel it seemed to me, to drive -the patient and faithful dumb animal into a barren desert, where there -is neither food nor drink, to goad him on until he falls from sheer -exhaustion, so that he bears any punishment, to make him rise, that his -master sees fit to inflict, without giving a single moan, then to walk -around and calmly look him in the face and fire the deadly missile into -his brain, then leave his carcass to the loathsome wolves and birds of -prey! - -In looking back over a period of fifty years since then, the writer -cannot call to memory a single act in his life that seemed so cruel -and ungrateful as that; and still there was no earthly means to save -the poor creature from a more horrible death, which would have come if -he had been left in that driving snowstorm, when his whole frame shook -with cold, there to lie and starve--one of the most miserable deaths -that the human mind can conceive of. Of the two evils we chose the -least by ending the suffering in a moment, when it would have taken -hours if it had not been for this act of mercy, as we call it after -taking in the whole situation. - -From Bitter Springs our team took the lead to the end of the journey, -or to Williams' Ranch, being the first team that ever crossed over -the Cajon Pass going west, as I remember. Ascending to the first pass -from the Bitter Springs our situation was most gloomy. In mud and -snow, with darkness come on, every rod of the road became more steep -and difficult. The summit was two miles ahead and the nearest team -half a mile back. We moved by hitches and starts, and could only make -three or four rods at a time. Two of us pushed at the wagon while the -other drove. Our guide was a few feet ahead, marking out the road, and -saying, "Crowd up, boys, if possible. Let us wallow on over the summit, -for it is our only salvation to cross and try to open the road if -possible for the weaker teams." - -Finally, with a shout of triumph, we reached the summit in two feet of -snow, at 11 o'clock at night. Our guide told us to go on down and build -fires at the first place where we could find anything for our stock, -and he would go back and cheer the rest on as best he could. - -The descent being quite steep, we soon made the distance of three or -four miles to where there was but about six inches of snow, and where -we found some feed. Our matches were all damp, and we were wet as could -be. We split up our spare yoke and struck fire with flint and steel, -crawled into the wagon, and started a fire in the frying-pan. Then, as -there was plenty of fuel, we made a roaring fire outside, took a bite -to eat, and turned in for a few moments' rest, being satisfied that the -others of the party had halted before they reached the summit, and as -the guide was with them we thought they would take a rest and come on -at daybreak. - -This conjecture proved right, for about 4 o'clock a.m. Captain Hunt -hallooed to us and called for a cup of coffee. He seemed to be chilled -to the bone, so we soon stirred the fire and got him something to eat. -He told us all the teams would make the riffle, but for us to have -a good fire, for some of the men would be chilled nearly to death. -Then he directed us to go ahead until we found feed for the stock, -and he would remain until the company came up. We advanced about ten -miles, and halted for our cattle to feed and rest. In the meantime -we discovered the company coming down the slope of the mountain. Our -feelings, as well as theirs, were much relieved at the sight, as we -beheld each other, and when they had rested their teams they came on to -our camping place for another stop, while we moved ahead to the Mohave -River. When we reached that stream, I presume that we felt as pleased -as a man liberated from a life sentence in a dungeon, for we had reason -to feel assured that we would succeed in our journey, as we had only -one more hard scramble of thirty miles, and had pleasant weather and -plenty of feed and water for our stock, with time to rest in. Some -shouted: "Daylight once more; thank God for our deliverance!" - -It was while we lay here that some of the company which had parted -with us at the Rim of the Basin came up to us with packs on their -backs, half-starved. The story of the condition of their comrades was -horrifying beyond description. Men, women and children suffered death -alike by thirst and starvation. This painful episode affords one more -instance of where the majority had been wrong and the minority right. -The new arrivals said that when we parted from them they were sorry for -us. But now we were more sorry for them than they had been for us. - -We divided our food the second or third time to relieve these starving -people, then pursued our course up stream for nine or ten days. There -we rested our cattle, did some hunting, and replenished our food supply -with wild meat, principally venison, quail and the gray squirrel. We -found plenty of wild grapes, and also discovered that the raccoon lived -in that part of the world. - -It was about the 17th of December when we crossed the Cajon Pass, in -the Sierra Nevada Mountains; from thence we moved via the Cocomonga -Ranch to Williams' Ranch, arriving there on December 24th. At Williams' -we found C. C. Rich and party; we joined in with them and had a -good Christmas dinner. There we traded for new supplies to last us -up to the gold mines on the Mariposa and the Stanislaus rivers, in -northern California, or the upper country. The writer acted as pilot, -interpreter and quartermaster for the company of something like fifty -men. - -It was about the 27th of January when we left the ranch, from which -we traveled to Los Angeles, thence twenty miles to the north, where -C. C. Rich and ten or fifteen men left us, and H. Egan took charge of -the company as captain. We followed up the Santa Barbara road at the -rate of fifteen miles per day. The roads were very rough and hilly. -The whole country was still in a very wild state. We were frequently -warned to be on our guard for bandits, which were said to be roaming in -the locality. We passed in peace, however, nothing out of the general -routine happening until we arrived at the San Antonio Mission. The -alcalde invited me into the chapel. To me, at that time, it seemed -to be very grand, so attractive was the decoration. The alcalde then -opened the gates of the cemetery, in which I saw a pillar of burnt -adobes with four Indian skulls on it, for the rest of the Indians -to see what they might expect if they committed any outrages on the -citizens. - -From all that I have learned about Spain's treatment of the red men, -it has been very cruel, yet the Spaniards claimed their methods were -necessary in order to Christianize the aborigines. At that time the -Indians in California were more cruelly treated than the slaves in the -south; many of them had scars on their backs ten or twelve inches long, -caused by the lash of the Spaniards. - -We continued our journey up towards San Francisco until the 11th of -February, when we arrived at a town called the Mission San Juan. There -we received a letter from Apostle C. C. Rich; it was dated February -8, 1850. The mission was old and dilapidated, and at that date was -occupied by a very rough class of men. The surrounding country was very -beautiful and fertile. - -About 7 o'clock that same evening Captain Howard Egan assembled the -company together, and called on the writer to take charge. Then he went -forward to overhaul the company that had preceded us. Next morning we -continued on our journey, crossing a deep stream of water, and going to -near Fisher's Ranch, where we received a few lines from Captain Egan, -ordering us to stop the ox teams and forward the mule teams to San Jose -to get provisions. We obeyed, and purchased a beef animal and dried the -meat. - -When Captain Egan returned to camp he told me that Apostle C. C. Rich -thought I had better continue with the company on to the mines, until I -saw or heard from him again. Accordingly I did so. - -Retracing our steps about four miles, we turned to the left on a trail -that led us to Gilroy's Ranch, thence to Rancho Pacheco. There we met -a Frenchman who directed us across the mountains. Meantime our company -appointed six of us to precede the wagons and mark out the road, as we -were again entering into a wilderness with no roads except Indian and -wild animals' trails. - - - -CHAPTER XIX. - -JOURNEYING TOWARD THE GOLD DIGGINGS--THREATENED BY WILD -HORSES--DIFFICULTIES OF TRAVELING--CONVOCATION OF THE FEATHERED -CREATION--REJOIN OUR FRIENDS--FERRYING ACROSS A RIVER--STRIKE -A GOLD PROSPECT--ON A PROSPECTING TOUR--AN AGREEMENT THAT -FAILED--INSTRUCTED TO GO TO SAN FRANCISCO TO PROCEED ON A MISSION--TRIP -TO STOCKTON--GAMBLERS, SHARPERS AND MINERS AT THAT PLACE---A TEMPTATION -OVERCOME--ARRIVE IN SAN FRANCISCO--WELCOMED BY SAINTS--RECEIVE KIND -TREATMENT--ON BOARD A VESSEL BOUND FOR TAHITI. - -ON the second day of our journey toward the mines we were confronted -by a band of wild mustang horses. Two of our men who happened to be -half a mile ahead of the other four of us were cut off from us by the -wild animals, so that the confusion of the situation was such that we -did not rejoin them for three days. The band was about three hours -in passing us, and the trail was one mile in width. We thought it a -low estimate to say that there were seven or eight thousand horses. -There seemed to be hundreds of the finest animals dashing up and down, -flanking the main herd, and driving, and shaping the course followed. -To save ourselves and our horses from being taken in by them, we tied -our horses' heads close together, and then stood between them and the -wild band with our rifles in hand ready to shoot the leaders or any -stallion that might attempt to gather in our horses, as we had heard -that they did not hesitate to attempt to do when out on the open plains -as we were. We supposed from all that we could learn that they had been -to the San Joaquin River for water, and were returning over the plains -to the foothills for pasture. The noise made by them as they galloped -past us was like distant, heavy thunder, only it was a long, continuous -roar or rumbling sound; we stood in almost breathless silence, and -mingled fear and delight, and viewed the magnificent picture. At last -the animals passed, and we heaved a sigh of relief. - -We proceeded on for about four hours, when we had to call another halt -and take similar precautions, and for the same reason, except that -there were only about five hundred horses. When they passed we steered -our course for the lower end of the Tulare Lake, where, so we had -heard, a ferry had been located a few days before. As there was no road -to travel, we thought we would go high enough and then follow the San -Joaquin River down until we came to the crossing. - -Night overtaking us, we camped by a slough where bear tracks, large and -small, were in great abundance. For fear of Indians we dared not make -much fire, so we passed a very lonely night, being filled with anxiety -about our lost comrades, not knowing what had become of them; for, as -near as my memory serves me, this was our second night camp since they -were separated from us. To add to our troubles and gloom, the night was -intensely dark, and a drizzling rain was falling. - -Suddenly our horses all broke from us. We followed them by the sound -of their feet as they ran, and after a long chase through swamps and -sloughs we succeeded in capturing them. Then the next trouble came. We -had lost one man and all our pack, and were without supper. Being out -of hailing distance, it was by mere chance that we found our man and -camp late in the night. Our horses had become so frightened that it was -necessary to sit up till morning, to keep them quiet; so that only two -of us could get a dreamy snooze at a time. - -Next morning dawned and our friends were still missing. We journeyed -on, passing down the sloughs to the river. At times it seemed that the -whole feathered tribe had met over our heads and all around in one -grand carnival, to consult over the advent of the white man into that -swampy country. We had never before beheld such a grand aggregation of -waterfowl, and the writer has never seen its equal since. For a time, -we could not understand each other's talk, because of the clatter. Our -next surprise was about five hundred elk which passed in front of us, -but the deep sloughs between prevented our replenishing our scanty -store of rations. - -Soon we were pleased at falling in with our lost friends. They had -found a lone wagon trail towards the river. We dispatched two of our -party to meet the main company, and the rest of us followed the wagon -trail to the river, where we found a man named Woods who had got -there three days ahead of us, with a rowboat and a small supply of -provisions and groceries. Salt pork and hard sea biscuit were selling -at seventy-five cents per pound, and everything else proportionately -high. The boat had just been launched. - -The next day, when the wagons came in, we took them apart and crossed -in a boat, all except my wagon; it being heavy and having the rodometer -attached to it, we got a cable rope and thought to tow the wagon over -with the load, but when it had reached the middle of the river, which -was about fifteen rods wide, the rope parted and the wagon turned over -and over. Then Irwin Stoddard jumped in and made the rope fast to the -hind axle, and as he could not manage the pole of the wagon, I jumped -in to help him. Between us, we liberated the pole, so that after great -exertion and hazard of life we finally succeeded in saving the vehicle, -but we were thoroughly chilled through. We did not cross our animals -till next morning, when we drove them in and they swam over, and we -were soon on our way to and up the Merced River. Six of us proceeded -ahead of the teams, traveling on horseback, to see what we could learn -that would be of benefit to the company. - -On the third day, I think it was, we came to a small mining camp called -Burns' Diggings, on the south side of the Merced River. There we struck -a very good prospect, and stopped until the main company came up. As it -was evident that we could take from twelve to fifteen dollars per day to -the man, we advised the company to begin work there, as the country was -so muddy and soft that we could not make much headway in traveling -higher into the foot hills. They agreed to accept our advice; then came -a quite laughable performance. Those who had been the very worst drones -in camp were now the first with the pick and washpan. They pitched into -the creek as if they expected to scoop up the gold by shovelfuls, leaving -their teams hitched to their wagons; while those who had been on hand -early and late, taking a more methodical view of things, first formed -the camp, got their dinner, and then went quietly to prospecting up -and down the creek. By this time our drones decided there was no gold -there, and that they would go where there was some. What a lesson we -learned there of human nature! The next day, however, things settled -down a little more like business, after it was ascertained that some -had been making from fifteen to twenty-five and fifty, and some even as -high as one hundred dollars per day, to the man. Next day, Captain Egan -and five others of our number were elected to go further up into the -mountains and prospect for the company, while the others dug gold. The -latter were to keep an account of all they earned, and when we returned -they were to give us an equal share with those who stayed and worked. - -On these conditions six of us set out on horseback and with pack mules. -When we got well into the mountains it began to rain and snow so that -we were not able to do much but cut browse for our horses. The snow -became so deep that we had to go ahead of our horses and break the road -so as to get out. We were soaked to the skin, and our bedclothes were -all wet. Our provisions were almost gone; so we set out for our camp, -after spending ten days in a most miserable condition. We traveled -in snow two and a half feet deep from 2 p.m. until 6 a.m. before we -succeeded in reaching camp, when we found that Apostle Rich had been -there, and the men had sent every dollar's worth of gold they had dug -in our absence to Stockton for supplies of provisions, clothing, tools, -etc., so there was none left to pay us our proportion. - -As Apostle C. C. Rich had brought word that Brother A. Pratt desired me -to meet him in San Francisco by a certain date, I packed up my effects, -sold my oxen to Captain Jefferson Hunt for two hundred dollars, and -bade adieu to the rest of the camp, who owed me one hundred dollars, -and they yet owe it. - -I traveled in company with C. C. Rich and Howard Egan. On the 20th of -March, when we got out of the hills, we took the main road to Stockton, -crossing the Merced, Tuolumne, and Stanislaus rivers, all tributaries -to the San Joaquin River. We arrived in Stockton on March 28th. The -place was at that time a point of debarkation where freight was landed -for the many mining camps. There were a few trading establishments and -warehouses, and three or four large gambling houses in and around which -were gathered freighters, packers, and one of the most motley gangs it -has ever been my lot to see. Bands of music were in the gambling halls. -At one of these I noted twelve tables, four men at each, armed with -bowie knives and revolvers; and to me it looked as if there were more -gold and silver exposed on those twelve tables than six mules could -draw. On the street and around the door, calling on the passers-by to -come in and have a free drink and listen to the music, were men whom I -soon learned were called cappers, or ropers-in, to the gambling hall; -they would steam men up with drink, get them to gambling, and rob them. -Sometimes men would come in from the mines with their buckskin wallets -containing three to four hundred dollars' worth of gold. They would -stand around with perfect strangers and drink free whisky until they -became dazed, then would set down their wallets of gold on a card, and -the next moment their money would be taken up by the gambler, who would -continue dealing his cards as unconcernedly as he would knock the ashes -from his cigar. The poor, silly miner would turn away with a sickly -look, having not even enough left to get him a change of clothing. -He would go into the street with his old miner's clothes on, without -a dime to pay for his supper or to get a night's lodging. Sometimes -thousands of dollars would change hands in a few moments. This was -in the spring of 1850, when the strong, with revolver and bowie -knife, were law, when gamblers and blacklegs ran many of the towns in -California. - -By this time I imagine that the reader asks what, as a missionary, -I was doing there. I might answer by quoting the saying of Christ, -that it was not the righteous but the sinners that He had come to -call to repentance. But I will not offer this excuse, for it was -not applicable; and as open confession is good for the soul, I will -make one, hoping that it may be not only good for my soul, but be a -warning to all who read it. I was twenty-one years old at the time, -and was alone on the street. I did not know where to go or what to -do. My companions had left on business, and as I started along the -street I met with an old time friend who appeared very much pleased to -see me. His pleasure was reciprocated. He asked me to go in and have -something to drink; I thanked him and said that I was not in the habit -of indulging. He said, "Oh, come in, and have a little wine for old -friendship's sake. There is no harm in a little wine; come, go in and -hear the music, anyway." With that I turned in with him to the largest -gambling den in the town. The place was packed with men of almost every -nationality. This was the house I have described. - -In the time of great excitement, it must be confessed, the writer was -tempted to lay down a purse of one hundred dollars, as he had that -amount with him. But the next instant the thought came to him, Would -you try to beat a watchmaker or a gunsmith at his trade? The idea -was so absurd that he then thought how foolish it was to try to beat -these professional gamblers at their own game. Then the disgrace that -attached to the act became so repulsive to his nature, that he felt -ashamed that he ever had been tempted; and to this day, in a life of -seventy-two years, he has never gambled. He has always felt thankful -that that simple thought came to him at that time and place. - -As soon as I could arrange a little business that detained me at -Stockton, I boarded a steamboat called the _Captain Sutter_, bound for -San Francisco, paying twenty-five dollars for a seventy-five mile ride -on the crowded deck. I paid two dollars for a dinner that consisted -of tough beef, poor bread, and a cup of tea. Such were "times" in -California in 1850. - -We landed at the great wharf in San Francisco about 8 o'clock that -evening, April 5th. I went up town, where the streets were crowded, -then returned and slept on the deck of the boat. Next morning, I took -my trunk to the Boston House, and leaving it there, sought friends. -I was not long in finding Brother Morris, who directed me to Brother -Cade's, who, together with his good lady, received me very kindly. He -inquired if I had any place to stop at, and when I told him no, he -said, "Stop and have dinner with us, then bring your trunk here and -stay until you can do better, if you can do with such fare as we have. -We are old and cannot do very well, but you are welcome to stay with us -as long as my old lady can cook for us." - -With thanks, the writer accepted the kind offer, and from there visited -the Saints in San Francisco. I met Amasa M. Lyman and Charles C. -Rich, two of the Twelve Apostles, also found Addison Pratt, my fellow -missionary. Brother and Sister Cade were not willing that I should stop -over night at any other place, or pay for my washing. The good old lady -said she had money enough to last her while she lived and pay for the -washing of my clothes. Sister Ivins, who lived near by, sent for my -clothes and had them well laundered. While I stayed there, Sister Cade -presented me with five dollars and a nice silk handkerchief, and the -old gentleman gave me a good inkstand. Sister Patch, who lived near by, -gave me five dollars and a silk vest, and many of the Saints showed us -favors. - -On April 19th we carried our trunks on board the brig _Frederick_, -Captain Dunham commanding. The fare was one hundred dollars each, in -the cabin. We returned on shore and stayed over night, and having -received our instructions and blessings from Apostles A. M. Lyman and -C. C. Rich, we boarded the vessel at 6 o'clock a.m., April 20, and -sailed away to the southwest, for the island of Tahiti, South Pacific -Ocean. - - - -CHAPTER XX. - -SAILING FOR THE SOUTH PACIFIC--SEVERE ATTACK OF SEASICKNESS--BECALMED -IN THE TROPICS--INTENSE HEAT--MARQUESAS ISLANDS--CANNIBALS--REACH -TAHITI--LAND AT PAPEETE--MEET WITH FRIENDS--HEARTY WELCOME--PREACHING -TO THE NATIVES--ANIMOSITY OF PROTESTANTS AND CATHOLICS TOWARD THE -MORMONS--JEALOUSY OF FRENCH GOVERNMENT OFFICIALS ON THE ISLAND--WATCHED -BY DETECTIVES--SIX NATIVES BAPTIZED--LEARNING THE LANGUAGE--RUMORS -OF AN INTENTION TO EXPEL THE MORMONS--ELDERS B. F. GROUARD AND T. -WHITAKER ARRESTED--APPEAL FOR AID--THEIR RELEASE AND RETURN TO THEIR -MISSIONARY LABORS--MEET WITH BROTHER PRATT AGAIN--INTERVIEW WITH THE -GOVERNOR--THAT OFFICIAL REFUSES ELDERS PRATT AND BROWN PERMISSION TO -VISIT ANOTHER ISLAND--SCARCITY OF FOOD AT HUAUA--EATING SEASNAILS AND -BUGS--STRANGE DISHES OF FOOD--ALMOST PERISH FROM THIRST--VISIT TO -TIARARA--ACQUIRING THE LANGUAGE. - -LEAVING San Francisco on April 20, 1850, the wind being fair, we made -about eight knots per hour, and soon lost sight of the land over which -the Stars and Stripes waves. The writer became very seasick, and -remained so for the voyage. He was seven days without an action of his -bowels, and he could not retain any kind of food on his stomach until -we got down in the tropics, when two flying fish flew aboard ship at -night, and the steward cooked them for the sick man. That was the first -thing he had a relish for. The captain said that if he had ever heard -of anybody dying of seasickness he would have had no hopes of getting -the writer ashore. - -The monotony of the voyage was broken only by vast fields of seaweed, -so dense that it greatly impeded our progress. Seabirds and fish were -very plentiful, and many times attracted the attention of the voyagers, -who caught several kinds of fish, including dolphin, shark and -porpoise. The fishing afforded some amusing sport, the writer gaining -courage enough at one time to crawl out on the jibboom and catch one -fish. - -The most trying event of the whole voyage was a calm in the torrid -zone, where we lay for eight days; it was said that in that time we -gained only eight miles. During that calm all the pitch broiled out of -the seams of the deck, making it leak so that it had to be recalked and -repitched. It became so hot that a man could not endure his bare feet -on it, and if it had not been for the seamen throwing water on deck -it seemed that we could not have lived through the terrible ordeal. -Finally a gentle breeze came to our relief, and we were wafted in sight -of the Marquesas Islands. We passed so close to these that the captain -expressed a fear that we were in danger of being attacked by the -natives of Nukahuia, the principal island. He said they were cannibals, -and that small vessels had been captured by the natives coming off in -such numbers, in canoes, as to overpower the crews. Hence he thought it -dangerous to be so close with such light winds as we had. The wind soon -freshened to a gale, and thus our fears were allayed as we bore down -close along to the northward of the Tuamotu group, sighting some of -them, to Tahiti, on which we landed on May 24, 1850. - -Tahiti is the principal island of the Society group; it is said to -be eighty miles in length, varying from two miles at the isthmus to -forty miles in the widest place. The highest mountain summit is said -to be five thousand feet or more. The capital, Papeete, is in latitude -17 degrees 32 minutes south, longitude 144 degrees 34 minutes west. -The islands were invaded by the French in 1843. In 1847 the war was -concluded, but not until much blood had been spilled and the country -laid waste. Then a French protectorate was established there, and -consequently, at the time we arrived, we found ourselves under the -French flag, and had to apply to Governor Bonard for permission to -go on shore. This was granted, but very reluctantly, and we paid the -secretary three francs for each of us. - -Once on shore, we found Brother Pratt's old friends, Hamatua and -Pohe, who treated us very kindly and on May 25th got our baggage from -the vessel, then took us in their boat around the northeast of the -island to their home in a little village called Huaua, where we were -met by their families and six or seven Church members. It seemed to -be impossible for them to rejoice any more than they did, and under -the circumstances we could not be treated with greater kindness. They -provided us with the best the land produced, making us cordially -welcome. - -Brother Pratt preached to them, while I was deaf and dumb, so far as -the spoken language was concerned; but the actions of the natives spoke -louder than words. When it came to meal time, they spread before us -roast pig, and fish, taro, fais, bananas, cocoanuts, sweet-potatoes, -popoie, oranges, pine and vee apples, doavas, bread fruit, etc. We had -appetites equal to the occasion, and felt no remorse for not having -done justice to the table, or to the chest which was a substitute for a -table. - -We soon learned that the Protestant ministers and Catholic priest were -very much prejudiced against us, and were doing all they could to -prevent the people receiving us into their houses, advising them not to -hold any conversation with us, or attend our meetings. We also learned -that the government officials were jealous of Mormon influence, and -that a watch was kept over us, in other words, the natives said that -detectives were on our track, and that a ship of war had been sent -to Tubuoi for Elders B. F. Grouard and T. Whitaker, who were on that -island as Mormon missionaries, and who had been accused of speaking -against the government. It may be imagined, therefore, that in all -respects our stay was not so pleasant as otherwise it might have been. - -As it was, however, we made the best of the situation. Brother Pratt -preached and talked much of the time to a few who gathered around, and -he soon baptized six persons. I studied the language by committing a -few words to memory, then forming them into sentences, and having them -corrected by the natives. Then, when I heard one tell another what to -do, I watched what was done. I collected many sentences, and walked -the beach till I committed them to memory. At first it seemed a very -difficult task to catch the sounds, but in a short time I could begin -to understand, and then to talk. For a change I would rest myself -from studying the language by practicing reading and writing, having -provided myself with copybooks and other necessary material before -leaving San Francisco. - -The home we had been made so welcome to was situated a few rods from -the beach, and between two little streams of water that came tumbling -down from the steep precipices in the background into a small valley, -which was heavily timbered. There were some six or seven small huts or -dwellings and twenty-five or thirty people all told. No business was -carried on further than gathering the fruit that grew, uncultivated, -in abundance for the needs of the population; and with little effort -they caught fish as they cared to consume it. As most of the people -of the village were quiet and peaceable, it will be understood why we -called the place our lonely retreat, or lonely Huaua. We visited other -villages occasionally, and tried to interest the inhabitants and preach -to them, but in vain. They would give us food, and sometimes offered to -keep us over night, but as a rule they were very cold and indifferent -towards us. - -Under the circumstances the best we could do was to study the language -and prepare ourselves for future usefulness as the way might open. -Meanwhile, many rumors were in circulation about the French driving -the Mormons out of the country; and the Protestant ministers and -Catholic priest seemed to spare no pains to spread all the slanderous -stories they ever had heard about the Mormons. So many rumors were in -circulation that we did not know what to believe, so we remained in -suspense till July 17, when, to our surprise, Brother Grouard came in -through a heavy rain and told us that he and Brother Whitaker had been -brought from Tubuoi, where they had been building a small schooner for -the use of the mission. He said they had been arrested on the charge of -speaking against the French government. They had landed that morning -from a ship of war, and he had got permission to come and see us, but -had to return that evening so as to be at the trial next morning. He -had left a horse five miles back, because the road was so rough that he -could cover the distance on foot quicker than on horseback, and had no -time to lose. He greatly desired that Brother Pratt and I should be at -his trial. Said he, "I am innocent, but I do not know what they will -prove, and we want you to stand by us." So it was agreed that Brother -Hamatua and I should go on foot early next morning, and Brothers Pratt -and Pohe would come as soon as the wind quieted down, as it was then -too high to venture out in the boat. - -Brother Hamatua and I set out early in the morning, in a heavy rain, -which continued to pour down till we reached Papeete, at 11 o'clock, -when we met Brother Grouard coming from his trial, he having been -discharged. He said Brother Whitaker would also be acquitted, although -the prejudice against them was very strong. - -Brothers Grouard and Whitaker thought the government would board and -lodge them at least till it got ready to return them home again, but -in this they were mistaken, so they and I did the best we could for -ourselves. We soon learned that the steamship _Sarien_ would leave for -Tubuoi in three or four days, and the brethren would be taken back on -that. Brother Grouard sought the permission of the governor for Brother -Pratt and me to go on the _Sarien_ with him. This was refused on the -ground that two Mormon missionaries were enough on that island. The -governor did not wish any more to go until he knew more about them. - -The wind kept so high that Brother Pratt did not reach Papeete until -Brothers Grouard and Whitaker had been acquitted and had gone. I had -started home, and was overhauled by Brother Grouard, who said something -had broken on the ship and they had to stop to repair it; that he -could not remain to see Brother Pratt, but would stay with me as long -as he could. He had only a few moments to stop, so I proceeded about -six miles, when I learned that Brother Pratt was on the way by boat. -Upon obtaining this information I went back to the house where we had -stayed two or three nights, finding the place barren and uninviting. -Everything was very lonely with no friends there. I feared that I would -be alone that night, but at last Brother Pratt came. The boat had -stopped, with our bedding and provisions, three or four miles up the -coast. Although the night was very dark, and the road lay through the -woods and across creeks, Brother Pratt thought we had better try to -make the boat for the night, as we had to give up going to Tubuoi. - -This course was followed, and we found our friends and bedding all -right. Not being satisfied, however, with the situation, we went back -to Papeete next morning, to see the governor ourselves. When we met -him, Brother Pratt asked the reason why we could not be free to go -where we chose. He replied that there had been some trouble with Mr. -Grouard, and as it was his business to look after government affairs, -he wished to inquire into the matter further before permitting more -American missionaries to go there. Said he: "While I do not wish to -interfere with religion, it is my duty to keep peace, and if you will -call again in a month or six weeks, I will let you know more about it." - -At this we went to the boat, and with our friends returned to lonely -Huaua. Indeed, if it had not been for our friends Hamatua and Pohe and -their families, our stay at the place for some time after this would -have been very uncomfortable. Food had become very scarce, so that we -had to eat seasnails, and bugs that played on the surface of salt water -pools. These bugs were about the size of the end of a man's thumb; in -form and action they very much resembled the little black bugs found -along the edges of our fresh water streams, and called by some people -mellow bugs. I submit that a dish of these, without pepper or salt, was -a strange sight to present to a white man--their legs sticking out in -all directions; yet, when a man has gone long enough without food, they -become quite tempting, and he is not very particular about the legs, -either. - -We also had other strange dishes set before us. When other food failed, -the natives would go to the mouths of small fresh water streams, and -dig in the sands, just where the high tide flowed, and at a depth of -twelve to eighteen inches they would find a something that resembled -young snakes more than anything else I can compare them to. They were -from six to ten inches in length, had a snake's mouth, and a spinal -column, or we should have called them worms; they were without fins, or -we might have called them eels. The natives had a name for them, but -I have forgotten it. When they were boiled in salt water--put a quart -or two into a pot of cold seawater, then hang them over the fire and -see them squirm a few moments--they were ready for the missionary's -meal, taken without pepper or salt. When cooked, a person seizes one -by the head and extracts it from the dish, or the banana leaf, as the -case may be. He retains the head between his thumb and forefinger, then -takes hold of the body with his teeth, draws it through these, and -thus strips off the flesh in his mouth. He then lays down the head and -backbone, and repeats the operation until he has completed his repast. - -Just a moment, my friendly reader; we have another dish for you on the -Society Islands, that you may enjoy better. It is a peculiar kind of -fish, very rare indeed, for they seldom appear more than once or twice -in a year: then they are present by myriads. They come up out of the -sea into the fresh water streams so thickly that they can be dipped up -with a frying-pan or bucket. Sometimes the natives dip them up with an -open bucket, or with a sack having a hoop in the mouth, thus taking -them by bushels. These fish are of a dark color, and from half an -inch to an inch and a quarter long. When boiled they look like boiled -rice, and a man can eat about as many of them as he can grains of that -vegetable. When they are eaten with the cream of the cocoanut they are -quite palatable. This dish is not very common, as I remember seeing it -in only three or four places. - -Besides the dish named, we had a small shellfish called maava. It -lives in a shell so much like a snail's that we called it a seasnail. -It was cooked in the shell, and was quite acceptable for a change in -hard times. We also had a large shellfish called pahua; again, we had -a jelly-fish which, when taken and laid in a dish, very much resembled -the white of an egg; it had neither scales nor bones, and was eaten -raw, without pepper or salt. - -Still another course of food which we had was wild boar from the -mountains. I can only say that the flesh is hard and tough. Brother -Pratt shot a boar with his shotgun. This pleased the natives very much. -I also gave chase to one which led me so far away from water that I -felt I should die of thirst and heat. On my descent returning, I came -to a lone cocoanut tree that had plenty of nuts on. I tried in vain to -climb the tree; then I clubbed the nuts that were only forty feet or -so up, but finding that it was impossible to obtain drink in that way, -I sat down in the shade in despair, and felt for a moment that I could -not live to reach water. At last my nerves became somewhat steadied, -and I took aim at the stem of a nut, it being not so thick as my little -finger. The bullet cut one stem entirely away and passed through -another close to the nut. Thus two cocoanuts dropped, and hopes of -life sprung up anew, only to perish, for I found it impossible to open -the nuts. After a brief rest, I started down the mountain again, and -succeeded in reaching a cocoanut grove where an old man was throwing -down nuts. I told him of my suffering and he hastened down, opened a -nut, and gave me a drink that was most refreshing. May he receive a -prophet's reward, for he gave me drink when it seemed that life was -fast ebbing away. The welcome draught refreshed me so that I gained the -village early, being wiser for the experience of following wild boars -in the mountains away from water. Although the temptation came to me -several times afterward, I never chased a wild boar again; but at one -time I killed one which appeared to be about two years old, without a -chase. This, and hunting ducks and fishing a little, greatly relieved -the monotony of our involuntary stay. - -For a change from our living at Huaua, I went to visit Pohe, nephew -of my old friend Hamatua, who lived at Tiara, three miles up the -coast, making my home with him. I visited among the people there, and -by hearing none but the Tahitian language spoken, I progressed very -fast therein; indeed my progress astonished the natives at Tiara, who -said. "The Lord helps the Mormon missionaries learn our language, for -in three months they speak it better than other foreigners do in five -years." - - - -CHAPTER XXI. - -OFFER OF TRANSPORTATION TO THE ISLAND OF TUBUOI--APPLY TO THE GOVERNOR -FOR PERMISSION TO GO--TROOPS ON PARADE--SUITE OF QUEEN POMERE--CALL -ON THE GOVERNOR--CONVERSATION IN THREE LANGUAGES--DIRECTED TO COME -AGAIN NEXT DAY--PUT OFF BY THE GOVERNOR--LATTER REFUSES THE PERMISSION -ASKED--HIS PREJUDICE AGAINST THE MORMONS--DEMANDS A STATEMENT OF THEIR -DOCTRINES--NOT REQUIRED OF OTHER DENOMINATIONS--WRITER'S INTERVIEW -WITH THE GOVERNOR--RETURN TO HUAUA--OTHER ELDERS REQUESTED TO ASSEMBLE -THERE--BITTERNESS OF PROTESTANT MINISTERS--NATIVES COMMENT ON MORMONS -LEARNING THEIR LANGUAGE QUICKLY. - -DURING my stay at Tiara, news came to Brother Pratt that a schooner -from Lurutu was at Papeete, and that the captain had proffered to take -us to Tubuoi free of charge. On receiving this message I returned at -once to Huaua. Brother Pratt requested me to visit Governor Bonard, and -see if we could get permission to make the trip, it being near the time -when we were to call on him again. It was necessary for us to give him -eight days' notice of our coming, and as the vessel was to sail in ten -days, there was no time to lose. - -On August 9th I set out, two native boys accompanying me. When we -reached Hapape, we saw there about four hundred soldiers. Then we met -Governor Bonard and staff, and after them saw Queen Pomere and suite, -all in their military dress. It was difficult to tell which made the -finest appearance. On our arrival in Papeete we were told that the -troops had gone out on dress parade and review, preparatory to sailing -to the island of Huhine, to settle some trouble between the natives -of that island and some shipwrecked foreigners. It was late when we -reached Papeete, and we went to the house of a native named Didi, -staying over night; he was very kind to us. I also met with the owner -of the Lurutu vessel, who told me he would take us to Tubuoi free of -charge, if we wished to go. He seemed very friendly toward us. - -The next day, August 10th, I went to see the governor. I met a sentinel -at the gate, who ordered me to halt. Then he called for the officer -of the day, who told me to wait till he gave notice to the governor. -The officer went in, and soon returned and beckoned me forward. I -advanced past a second sentinel, when the officer ushered me into the -presence of his excellency, who rose from his seat and met me. When -we had shaken hands, he very politely bade me to be seated, and then -said pleasantly: "Do you speak English?" This question being answered -in the affirmative, he said, "Me speak lete." Then we entered upon a -conversation. As I understood a little French, and both of us could -speak a limited amount of Tahitian, we made a jargon of one-third -English, one-third French, and one-third Tahitian. Then we laughed -heartily at each other because of our novel attempts in the three -languages. The governor invited me to call next morning, when his -French captain, who could speak English, would be there. Then, with -French politeness, he bowed me out and off. - -Next morning I went, and met the governor going to church. He said he -had forgotten it was Sunday, so I would have to wait an hour or two, -and come again. This I did, being stopped by the sentinel as before, -going through all the ceremonies of the previous visit, and being -ushered into the same room. I met the English-speaking captain, to whom -I made my business known. Said he, "The governor declines to grant -your request." I was not disappointed, for I was well satisfied from -what I had learned the day before that that would be the result, but -as the talk had not been very conclusive, I had called for a clearer -understanding, hoping the governor might yield when he understood us -better. In this I was mistaken, however, as it seemed the governor was -thoroughly filled with prejudice against even the name of Mormon Elder. - -I asked Governor Bonard his reasons for detaining us where we were. He -said that in the first place he had no proof that we were good men, -and he wished to know what we would preach, and what our doctrines -and faith were. I told him that we preached the Gospel which Jesus -Christ and His Apostles preached, and could produce our credentials, -if he desired to see them. He said no, he did not wish that of us; -neither did he wish to interfere with religious matters, but it was -for peace in the country that he wished us to stop there; for if we -and everybody who desired it were allowed to set forth new doctrines -among the people, and get them divided among themselves, they would -be fighting, and it was his place to keep the peace. Said he, "Before -you go from this island, I wish to know more about your doctrine." I -told him that was what we wished him and every good man to know, and to -embrace it if he would. Then he said that he desired the Mormon Elders -to get together, and make a declaration of what they would preach -and how far they would obey the laws. I replied that that was just -what we wished to do, but if he refused us the privilege of going to -Tubuoi we did not know when we could get together. Said he, "You had -better write to your friends at Tubuoi, and have them come here. Your -faces are strange to me, and you are from a foreign country. We have -no proof that you are good men. The doctrine you preach is new to me -and if you will gather all your white brethren, and make a declaration -of the doctrine you preach, and how far you will obey the laws of the -land, signing your names to it, then, if I accept of it as being good -doctrine, you will have liberty to go anywhere you wish, and have our -protection." My answer was that we had no objection to acquainting him -with our doctrine. I asked him if he made the same requirement of other -denominations that he did of us, and received the information that he -did not. Upon this, I inquired why he made it of us, and he stated that -there had been some difficulty already with B. F. Grouard. "Well," -said I, "did you not acquit Grouard?" "Yes," he said, "but we would -like to look further into the matter, and if possible prevent further -trouble." They had lost two good seamen going after Grouard, and one -fell overboard on the return trip, but they succeeded in rescuing him. - -When I found that I could not prevail on the governor to allow us our -liberty, I left and visited the captain of the _Lurutu_. With him I -boarded his novel vessel. It was of very frail construction; all the -stays and braces were made by hand from the bark of a tree called by -the natives burson, and resembling somewhat the basswood of the Eastern -and Middle States. The captain said he sailed by the sun by day, and -at night by the moon and stars, but in cloudy weather by instinct, -or guess. I asked if they did not get lost sometimes; he said no, -they were well acquainted with the sea. They had been three years -in building the schooner. It would carry about forty tons. The crew -conveyed the products of their island three hundred and sixty miles to -Tahiti principally, but occasionally to other islands. To me the vessel -appeared a frail craft, and wholly without comforts, for white men at -least. - -Having satisfied my curiosity about the strange craft, I returned -to Huaua on August 11, and reported results to President Pratt, who -wrote immediately to the different Elders to come and sign with us -the document the governor had suggested. The mails were so irregular -and uncertain that we had not the remotest idea when our release -would come, for if ever our letters were received by the Elders, it -might be three or even six months before they could get a passage to -Tahiti. Thus the reader can see that we were doomed to tarry almost as -prisoners in the little valley of Huaua, which was only about eighty -rods wide by one hundred and fifty in length, being bounded on the -south by high, steep mountains, that were almost impossible to cross, -at least by a white man not accustomed to climbing them; and on the -northeast the open sea rolled and surged upon the rocks and the sandy -beach, to within fifteen rods of where we slept, our heads being not -more than ten feet above high water mark. This was not all; for the -Protestant ministers were very bitter against us, and so prejudiced -that it was useless for us to try to enlighten them in regard to -ourselves or our faith. They seemed to spare no pains in spreading -their venom among the people, and in every way possible intimidated the -natives so that our friends were but few, though our enemies had no -power over them. With the aid of a book, however, we could improve in -the language, and did so to the extent that when we had been there five -months the natives who were not of us said, "Surely the Lord is with -the Mormons, for in five months they speak our language better than -other foreigners do in five years. No one can learn our language like -the Mormon Elders unless the Lord helps them." Thus encouraged, we bore -our imprisonment the best we could. - - - -CHAPTER XXII. - -VISIT TO PAPEETE--DUCK-HUNTING TRIP--A PECULIAR WOMAN--ALONG A -PERILOUS PATH--AN OPINION OF ENGLISH MINISTERS--ARRIVAL OF ELDER S. -A. DUNN--LEARN OF MORE MISSIONARIES ARRIVING AT TUBUOI--NEWS FROM MY -FATHER AND OTHERS--LETTERS FROM THE FIRST PRESIDENCY AND SOME OF THE -APOSTLES--WRITTEN STATEMENT SENT TO THE GOVERNOR OF TAHITI--VISIT THE -GOVERNOR--OUR STATEMENT REJECTED--LIST OF QUESTIONS AND STATEMENT -PRESENTED BY THE GOVERNOR--REPLY OF ELDER A. PRATT--OBJECTIONS BY THE -GOVERNOR--PERMISSION GIVEN US TO TRAVEL AND PREACH ON THE ISLANDS. - -ON September 5th, 1850, I met with the opportunity of going to Papeete -in a boat that was passing. My friends took me out in a canoe to the -larger vessel. I was very seasick. The wind was so high that in two -hours we were in Taunoa, where we stayed over night. On the 6th we got -to Papeete, where I received a letter from B. F. Grouard. I answered -it the same day. We found friends who treated us very kindly; then -returned to our lonely retreat, traveling through a heavy rainstorm all -the way. - -We continued our studies without anything to vary the monotony until -October 2nd, when President Pratt and Hamatua, and three children from -the latter's family, took their blankets and went into the mountains -for a change, while I made a visit to my friend Pohe to get my books, -which had been left with him. When I returned I continued my studies -alone until Brother Pratt and party came back; then, on September 15th, -I went to Papeno, duck-hunting. As Sister Hamatua had some relatives -there, she and her stepdaughter accompanied me, thinking that my stay -would be made more pleasant. Sister Hamatua was between fifty and sixty -years of age, was well versed in the scriptures, and as true to her -religion as anyone I have ever met. She had never had any children of -her own, and yet she had taken three young babes, from their birth, and -nursed them at her own breast, and gave them suck and reared them. I -think one mother had died at her child's birth, and with another child -the young mother had cast it away to die, as it was illegitimate, and -she denied its being her child. The third had been promised to Sister -Hamatua before its birth, and at that time she claimed it and took it -home the same hour. I saw the children, and the natives bore witness to -the truth of the narrative here given. The youngest child was princess -of Tubuoi, her name was Aura, and at the time I write of she was a -bright girl of eight years. - -We went on our journey to Papeno, passing down along the cliffs of rock -and precipitous and deep, dark caverns that were almost impassable. -The shrieking and howling of the wind as it was forced up through -the crevices in the rocks by the surging waves from the open sea, -combined with the dangers of the route, had such an effect on my nerves -that I have never desired a repetition of the hazardous trip, though -I traveled many times on the Brom (state road), parallel with the -perilous path. I had no desire to pass over or even to think of the -jeopardy we were in on that terrible trail. Suffice it to say, that we -reached our journey's end in safety, and stayed with the governor of -the village, who treated us very kindly. We returned next day, the 16th -of September. On our way we saw a ship heading for Papeete. This gave -us hope that we would get some news from the outer world. - -September 22nd. Pipitila and I started for Papeete, thinking we would -meet with the Elders, or at least get some word from them. All that we -could learn was that they were expected in Tubuoi instead of in Tahiti. -We stayed in Taunaa, where we met with friends who treated us well. One -old man said that he had become tired of the English ministers, for -they preached one thing and did the opposite. Said he, "I have been a -fool that has no eyes all my life. I have belonged to the Protestant -church ever since it has been here, and still I am like a fool, for I -am black or dark in my heart. I have tried ever since the missionaries -came to get light. They came and went back and died, and still I am -a fool, and darkness fills my soul, for I never learned before that -Christ was baptized. You have given me the first light that I have ever -had on the Gospel." We returned to our home on September 25th and found -all well. On October 3rd friends from Tiara came to visit us, and for a -time broke the monotony of our island-prison life. - -Nothing out of the usual happened till November 6th, when I was ready -to start on a trip of inquiry. A little girl came in and said there -was an old white man out at the creek, and that he was asking for -Brother Pratt. In a few minutes Brother S. A. Dunn came in, and to our -great surprise and joy he brought word that Brother Pratt's family and -a company of Elders had arrived at Tubuoi, all well. He had letters -for us, too. I received one from my father--the first word that I had -had since 1847. I also had a letter from my old friend and comrade, -Jonathan C. Holmes, stating that my Uncle Alexander Stephens had been -wounded in a battle with the Ute Indians in Utah County, but that he -was getting around again very well. - -Brother Pratt received letters from the First Presidency of the Church, -also from Apostles Amasa M. Lyman and Charles C. Rich, all bringing -good news and words of encouragement to us. Elder Dunn told us that he -had called on Governor Bonard, who seemed very pleasant and who told -him that as soon as we would get together and make a statement of what -we would preach, and signed the same, we would have liberty to go where -we chose, and should have the protection of the French government. - -November 8th we wrote as follows to the governor: - -"Whereas, we, the undersigned, have been requested by his excellency, -Governor Bonard, of Tahiti, to make a statement of the intentions of -our mission to the Society Islands, in compliance therewith we proceed -to give the following: - -"1st. To preach the everlasting Gospel, which brings life and salvation -to the children of men. 'For I am not ashamed of the Gospel of Christ, -for it is the power of God unto salvation to every one that believeth, -to the Jew first, and also to the Greek.'--(Romans 1:16.) - -"2nd. To teach the people by precept and by example the habits of -virtue and industry, which are so desirable to the happiness and -prosperity of civilized life. - -"3rd. To observe and keep the laws of every land wherein we dwell, -so far as it is required of preachers of the Gospel in Christian -countries; and to teach and admonish the people to observe and keep the -laws of the land. - -"Huaua, Tahiti, November 8, 1850. - - "[Signed] Addison Pratt, - "Simeon A. Dunn, - "James S. Brown." - -We started on November 10th to see the governor and present to him -the foregoing. Traveling on foot, we went to Papeno, where we were -very kindly received by the governor, at whose house we stopped over -night. Many of his friends called to see and greet us. On the 11th we -proceeded to Papeete, arriving there in time to pass the guard and -be ushered into the governor's office, where we were received very -coldly. The governor was engaged talking with two officers. We stood -until observed, from a side room, by a French officer, who invited -us (speaking in English) to come in and be seated; he then called an -interpreter. When the latter came he looked over the article that we -had presented, and rejected it. Then he produced one which the governor -had had drawn up, and which he read as follows: - -"On my arrival at Tahiti, two or three persons styled Mormon -missionaries were residing either at Tubuoi or at the Pamutus. As -they were already there, I thought it proper to allow them to remain, -considering the small number of persons forming the mission, upon -conditions, however, that they attended strictly to the laws which -govern the lands of the protectorate, not interfering in any way with -politics or civil matters, but solely religious, with which I have no -intention whatever to interfere. - -"Now that a large number of persons attached to the Mormon mission -request permission to reside at the Society Islands, tending to create -a sort of church government embracing all the lands of the protectorate -of France, to create, it might be said, a new existence in the -population of the islands, it is now my duty to interfere. - -"I requested to be informed as to what are the means of the Mormons for -their living. - -"1st. From whence the society of Mormon missionaries derive the power -of forming themselves into a body? - -"2nd. What are the forms of government and the discipline which govern -this society? - -"3rd. What guarantee of morality and good conduct do they require from -members appointed as missionaries for the foreigners? - -"4th. What guarantee do they require before conferring grades and -offices on natives? - -"5th. What duty do they require either from foreigners or from native -members, not including religious dogmas, with which I shall not -interfere? - -"6th. What number of religious services do they hold weekly or monthly? - -"7th. Finally, what morals do the Mormons preach? - -"These questions put, and satisfactorily answered. This is what it is -my duty to make known to the Mormon missionaries: As men, they, as all -foreigners, are permitted to reside in the islands of the protectorate, -and have a right to French protection by conforming themselves to the -laws of the country; as missionaries, with an open pulpit which might -consequently give them great influence over the population, and create, -as it were, a new power, it is my duty to impose conditions that they -guarantee, consequently: - -"1st. The Mormon missionaries shall bind themselves to preach their -religion without interfering in any way or under any pretext with -politics or civil matters. - -"2nd. They shall withhold from speaking from the pulpit against the -religion established in the islands of the protectorate, or the laws -and the acts emanating from the authorities. - -"3rd. They shall not exact from the inhabitants of the islands of the -protectorate any tax, either in money, labor, provisions or material. - -"4th. They shall not inflict penalties upon any one, either in money, -labor, provisions, or material, for failing to comply with the rules of -the religion they preach. - -"5th. They cannot acquire land in the name of the society, without the -approbation of the protectorate government. - -"6th. No person can be allowed to unite himself with them, as a Mormon -missionary, in the Society Islands, before having signed that he -adheres to the present declaration, and whenever proof might be made -of guilt of an infringement of these articles, it would occasion his -exclusion from the islands of the protectorate. - -"The persons calling themselves Mormon missionaries, and who sent -a delegate to me whom I could not recognize officially, are hereby -informed that before I can authorize them as a society they must reply -categorically to the questions which I have put to them; that until -then their residence is illegal, and I refuse, as it is my duty to -do, all authorization to the Mormon missionaries to take up their -residence. Moreover, it is my duty to inform them that when they are -constituted a society no meetings, except on days regularly known as -days of prayer and preaching, can be held without the permission of the -authorities, on pain of being prosecuted according to law." - -When this long and proscriptive roll had been read and strongly -emphasized, we were handed a copy, and the interpreter said we could -make such answers as we saw fit. At this we went to a quiet place, and -on November 12th President Pratt wrote out the following reply: - -"As it has been requested by his excellency, the governor of Tahiti, -to give answer to certain questions that he has propounded to us, we -herein comply: - -"1st. First, as it is declared in the New Testament of our Lord and -Savior Jesus Christ, that they that preach the Gospel shall live off -the Gospel, we are sent forth by the authority of the Church to which -we belong with expectation that those to whom we preach will contribute -to our necessities, so far as life and health are concerned, of their -own free will. Second, we have no authority from those who sent us to -the islands to form ourselves into a body compact, either civil or -religious, nor have we any intention of so doing. Third, the reason of -our going to Tubuoi is this: I, Addison Pratt, arrived at Tubuoi in -the year 1844, in the capacity of a missionary of the Gospel of Jesus -Christ. I remained there in that capacity about nineteen months, and -when I was about to leave there I was invited, by the authorities of -the island then in power, to return to them with my family, and reside -with them as their preacher. They wished also to be instructed in the -arts and sciences of civilized life. After I left Tubuoi, I went to -Anaa, to assist Mr. Grouard in his missionary labors, having been sent -for by request of the people living there. I remained at Anaa about -nine months, and while there a general conference was held, by the -people we had baptized, on the 6th of October, 1846. At that meeting a -request was made by the people of whom Aniipa was head, to send by me -to our Church, in North America, for more missionaries to assist Mr. -Grouard and myself, as the Gospel had spread in several islands of that -group. The company that has arrived at Tubuoi are the missionaries who -have been sent for, as I returned to North America in the year 1847 -and laid the minutes of the conference held at Anaa, and the request -of the people of Tubuoi, before the Church. A part of that company -now at Tubuoi are preachers of the Gospel, and a part of them are -mechanics and husbandmen; they have brought with them tools and seeds -for carrying out the object for which they were sent. - -"2nd. The forms of government by which the society is governed are -those set forth by Jesus Christ and His Apostles, as laid down in the -New Testament, to which we have referred. - -"3rd. We request them to be strictly virtuous in every sense of the -word, observing and keeping the laws of the land wherein they dwell, -and teaching the people so to do. - -"4th. We request of them all that is contained in the articles. - -"5th. We request of them what is contained in the third article and -nothing more. - -"6th. We have no stated times for religious services except upon the -Sabbath; we hold semi-annual conferences. Besides these, we are subject -to the will of the people. - -"7th. We preach to and admonish the people to keep all the commandments -of God, and strictly obey the laws of the land wherein they dwell." - -Our answer was signed by Addison Pratt, Simeon A. Dunn and James S. -Brown, and was presented to his excellency, who objected to the first -statement, about our means of support. He said he wished men to get a -living in a more honorable way than that. The second paragraph he did -not like. He seemed to dislike scripture references. We told him we had -been reared to work, that we still expected to labor for our living, -and that a part of our people had come to work and a part to preach the -Gospel. - -After he had interrogated us to his satisfaction, and placed about us -all the restrictions that seemed possible, the governor told us that -if we would go with Mr. Dugard, one of his officers, he would give us -permits to reside among the islands of the protectorate, after we had -signed the articles he presented to us. - -As we left the governor's presence, Mr. Dugard told us that, as it was -getting rather late, we had better call at his office the next morning -at 8 o'clock, and he would attend to our case. We complied with his -suggestion but did not find him at home. The lady of the house told -us to call at 2 o'clock and he would be there. In a short time we met -the interpreter who advised us to call at 11 o'clock, which we did, -finding the official ready to wait on us, as we supposed; but instead, -he directed us to go to a certain notary public, who would give us our -permits. We did as instructed and obtained the documents, paying three -francs each. Thus we were permitted to go as ministers of the Gospel -among the islands of the French protectorate. - - - -CHAPTER XXIII. - -RETURN TO HUAUA--HEAVY RAINSTORMS--REFUSAL OF AN OFFER TO BE -CARRIED OVER A STREAM--PERILOUS SWIMMING FEAT--EPISODE WITH A WILD -BOAR--START ON A TRIP AROUND THE ISLAND--OBTAIN A LOAF OF BREAD--PEOPLE -NOT DESIROUS OF LISTENING TO THE MORMON ELDERS--CUSTOMS OF THE -NATIVES--REPUTATION OF PROTESTANT CLERGY ON TAHITI--WITH THE CHIEF -MAGISTRATE OF UAIRAI--ACROSS A SMALL BAY IN A CANOE--FRENCH GARRISON AT -THE ISTHMUS--WITH MY FRIEND POHE--REVIEW OF A HARD JOURNEY--AGAIN AT -HUAUA. - -AS there were no vessels bound for where we wished to go at this time, -on November 13th we started on our return from Papeete to Huaua, but it -rained so hard that we had to seek shelter after traveling six miles. -We came to a creek about two rods across, and began to take off our -shoes preparatory to wading it. Just then a sprightly little woman came -along and told us she would carry us across on her back. She said, -"There are little sharp shells and rocks that will cut your feet, and -they will not hurt mine, for I am used to them. My feet are tough, but -you are not used to going barefoot like us, and your feet are tender. -I will gladly carry you over free rather than see you cut your feet." -She plead with such earnestness and so innocently that it became almost -a temptation, especially as she would have considered it a great honor -to carry the servants of God, as she was pleased to call us. Said she, -"You need not be afraid that I will fall down with you; I can carry you -with ease." When her very kind offer was declined, she seemed very much -disappointed. We tried to console her by telling her how greatly we -appreciated her kindness, then proceeded on our way, but owing to the -heavy rain soon called at a native's house, where we were pleasantly -entertained. He spread the best food he had. This was put on the bed. -He also asked us to take seats on the bed, offering as an excuse, "The -fleas are so bad we have to get up there to be out of the way, or they -will get in the food." - -We accepted the situation with thanks, and felt that we were right -royally treated. The people from around flocked in until the house -was so thoroughly packed with humanity that the fleas had a fine -opportunity to gorge themselves. The people did not seem to be much -annoyed by them, but talked and sang till 11, o'clock, when we turned -in for the remainder of the night, concluding that the fleas had been -so feasted that they were willing to let us slumber in peace, which we -did. - -November 14th we resumed our journey, only to be driven in by the rain, -but not until we were thoroughly drenched. Having met with our old and -well tried friend, Hamatua, when the storm subsided we continued our -journey to Papeno. A call was made on the governor of that district, -who told us that the river was so swollen that it was not safe for -white men to attempt to cross. He said the natives could go over -safely, but we could not do so, and told the party they were welcome -to stay with him all night. The writer thought that if a native could -cross the river he could, so he prepared for the attempt. The stream -was about fifteen rods wide. The governor, himself a very large and -powerful man, said, "If you go I will go with and assist you, for you -cannot cross there alone. Two natives have been swept down to the sea -and drowned. If I go with you we can cross safely, but I am afraid to -have you go alone." At that both of us got ready to cross. He took -hold of my right arm close to the shoulder. We waded in till the swift -current took our feet from under us, then we swam with all our power, -and finally gained the opposite shore by swimming three times the -width of the river. The governor could have turned and swam back again -without any trouble, but I had quite enough to satisfy my conceit, and -ever since have been willing to acknowledge that a native can beat me -in the water. - -Brothers Pratt and Dunn were well satisfied to wait for the water to -fall before they tried to cross, and by late in the evening the stream -was down so that they came over with comparative ease. We stayed with -some very good friends, and on the 15th of November reached home. All -were well. Things went on as usual until the 28th, when the natives -came running and said a wild hog had come down from the mountains and -was at the next door neighbor's, with his tame hogs. The people wished -us to come with bubus (guns) and shoot him. On a previous occasion, -before I could understand the natives, a wild hog had come down and -was with the hogs of our host. There was great excitement among the -natives, so Brother Pratt hastened and got his shotgun, and went out -and killed the hog. He told me to hold on with my gun, and would not -let me know what the excitement was until it was over. Now, the natives -shouted that Prita's (Pratt's) gun was the strong one, that he was the -brave hunter and knew how to shoot, but that my weapon was too small -a bore--it could not kill if I hit the hog. But on this occasion I -outdistanced the old gentleman with my small-bore rifle. I shot the -hog just behind the shoulder; it ran a few jumps and fell in the thick -brake. As the animal was out of sight, and the natives could not see -any evidence of its having been hit, they blamed me for not letting -Brother Pratt get there first, saying he would have killed the hog and -we would have had something to eat. Brother Pratt good naturedly joined -in with them; they looked disappointed, and tried to laugh me to shame, -but in the height of their ridiculing me a lad who had followed the -track a rod or two into the brake shrieked out in terror: "Here is the -hog, dead! I was near stepping on him before I saw him!" The laugh was -turned. - -The hog was soon dressed, and the natives had to examine my gun. They -concluded that both Brother Pratt and I were good gunners, and had good -weapons. The hog was a boar, a year and a half old or more, and if -it had been fat would have dressed two hundred pounds. All were well -pleased for it was a time of scarcity of food. - -On December 2nd Brother Dunn and I started to go around Tahiti on foot, -passing by Papeete. Hametua Vaheni, John Layton's wife, and the two -small girls of the house, went with us to Papeete. We stayed at Faripo -the first night, with Noiini, who was very kind to us. Next morning we -proceeded on our way to Hapape, where we stopped at the house of Teahi, -a relative of Hametua Vaheni. There we took breakfast, and continued -our journey to Taunoa, where we remained over night with Tamari. There -we left our baggage while we went on to Papeete to see what news we -could get. We spent most of the day to no purpose, returning to where -we had stayed the night before. - -Next morning, the 4th, we started without breakfast. On the way we -purchased a loaf of bread--a rare treat to us, as we had not even seen -bread for several days. We ate it as we walked along, stopping at a -small brook to get a drink. At Wamau, a man invited us into his house. -As it had begun to rain we accepted his kind offer with thankfulness. -Upon entering the house we were requested to take a seat upon the bed. -Some very fine oranges were set before us, and soon the house was -filled with young people mostly, who seemed very desirous of learning -who we were, where we were from, and what our business was. We told -them, and they appeared to be very much disappointed. We soon found -that they had no use for us, so we went on our way and soon came to a -cemetery in which was a large monument of masonry with an iron cross on -it. At one grave there was a candle burning. We were told by some of -the people that in the time of the war a great battle had been fought -there between the natives and the French, and that the monument had -been built in honor of a great French general who had fallen. - -From there we passed on through a large cocoanut grove, and in a short -time came to a small village called Tapuna. We turned into a house and -not finding anyone at home, sat down for a rest. In a little while we -were discovered by some of the villagers, who invited us in, and as is -usual among that people, inquired of us, saying, "Who are you, where do -you come from, where are you going, and what is your business here in -our land?" When we informed them that we were ministers of the Gospel, -they were very much pleased, but when we told them that our Church -was called the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, commonly -known as the Mormon Church, they almost invariably showed signs of -disappointment, and seemed to have less interest in us. Still there -were some in almost every village who were kind enough to keep us over -night, give us the very best they had, and often go with us a little -way on our journey the next day. They never failed to have a hymn sung, -and often a chapter from the Bible read, and would call on us to offer -prayer. Then the eldest of the young men who had called in--sometimes -there were ten or fifteen--would shake hands with us, followed by all -the rest, apparently according to age. The young women then would do -likewise, observing the same rule, after which the older people would -follow, the women coming first in this case, such being their custom. - -Before we left Tapuna, one man desired us to visit his mother, who -was sick with consumption. We complied with this wish, but found that -she had no faith in the Gospel. From there we passed on to an English -missionary's home, the headquarters of one Mr. Chisholm. He was not in, -so we passed on to the next house, where, according to what the people -said, a very dissipated missionary had lived, and the other had come to -take his place. We were told that the newcomer was no better than the -old one, for both were drunken and lustful and behaved very badly with -the women. Such was the general reputation, among the natives, of the -Protestant clergy at that date. - -We went on till we were called into a house where the people said they -wished to know what we had to say of religion. As soon as they learned -that we differed from their views they displayed no further concern in -us, and we departed. After wading many streams, and getting very tired -and hungry, we reached a village called Uairai, where we were invited -in to have a meal. We had been indoors but a few minutes when the -people of the village came running in as if to a dog fight or a monkey -show; for it was rarely they saw two white men traveling as we were, -they being accustomed to seeing the missionary in a hammock carried by -four stout men. - -When we had been there a short time two men came in with a message from -the governor or chief magistrate of the village, desiring us to call at -his residence. As soon as we had partaken of refreshments we complied -with the request, the whole assemblage of people following us. We found -his honor holding some kind of meeting with the more aged people, the -exact nature of which we did not learn. He invited us in, gave us -seats, and shook hands with us very warmly. He then stood before us and -said, "Who are you, where do you come from, what is your business here, -and where are you going?" We answered that we were ministers of the -true Gospel of Jesus Christ, and were traveling to preach to all people -that were willing or wished to hear the Gospel of salvation. "Well," he -said, "that is what we want here, but I must see the French governor -and our ministers before I can give permission for any one to preach." - -When the meeting was over he came to us again and said he would be -pleased to have us stop over night with him. We accepted his kind -invitation to visit his house, and all the congregation followed, for -a time seeming very desirous of learning from us the true Gospel. We -conversed with them quite awhile and there was not one to oppose us, -but all seemed very well pleased with what we had to say. - -Supper over, we returned to the house of Miapui, where we had left our -valises, and where we spent the night, being well treated by our host -and by all who called on us. - -Next morning our host accompanied us on our way until we met his -brother, whom he instructed to see us across a small bay that extended -up to the base of the mountain, which was so steep that we could not -go around its head. We were taken across in a canoe, paying a dollar -and a half. The man said the use of the canoe cost him that amount, but -he would take nothing for his services. He then conducted us through a -thick forest of timber and underbrush to the Brom (state) road. - -We next proceed to the isthmus, to a French fort garrisoned by one -company of soldiers. The isthmus is about one and a half miles across. -From there we turned to the northwest, towards Huaua, as it was too -rough, steep and dangerous to proceed closely along the coast. We -traveled homeward till 1 o'clock p.m., when we came to a little hamlet -called Otufai. There we met a man named Aili, who invited us to dinner. -We accepted his courtesy and while there the school-teacher called and -asked us to go home with him. We also availed ourselves of this kind -invitation, finding the teacher, whose name was Tuamau, very friendly. -We spent the night with him, being treated well, but he did not evince -much interest in what we had to say on religious matters. - -The following morning it was raining very hard, and for a time it -seemed that we were weatherbound; but breakfast over, it cleared off, -and we proceeded on our way to Hitia, where we stopped at the house of -Fenuas and got dinner. Then we went on to Tiara and visited with our -friend Pohe (in English, dead), or, as he was sometimes called, Mahena -Toru (third day). He made us feel very much at home. This we were in a -condition to fully appreciate, for we had traveled on foot in the hot -sands and sun about one hundred and fifty miles, until we felt that -we were almost parboiled. We had waded many streams of water, which, -though very disagreeable, helped to make our journey more tolerable, -through being cooling. The sharp rocks and shells in the water courses -made us pay penance instead of pennies for crossing them. Sometimes the -streams were so swollen and ran so swiftly as to be very dangerous, -because the crossings were so near the sea that if a man were to lose -his footing he was liable to be carried into the billows, from whence -it would be almost if not quite impossible to escape. - -On the 9th of December we passed down three miles to Huaua, where we -found all our friends well, and some prospects of getting an opening to -preach. - - - -CHAPTER XXIV. - -SCARCITY OF FOOD--TRAVELING IN HEAVY RAINS--CALL ON A PROTESTANT -MINISTER--ARRIVAL OF ANOTHER MISSIONARY AND LETTERS FROM -HOME--VISITORS FROM METIA--HOLD A SACRAMENT MEETING--GO TO -PAPARA--ABUSED RY THE PROTESTANT MINISTER--PREACH TO THE PEOPLE--YOUNG -WOMAN MIRACULOUSLY HEALED AT BAPTISM--GREAT EXCITEMENT--RAGE -OF THE PROTESTANT MINISTERS--PERSECUTION INSTITUTED--ARRESTED -FOR PREACHING--RELEASED ON PROMISING TO RETURN TO HUAUA--PLENTY -OF FRIENDS--UNINTENTIONAL ESCAPE FROM GEN D' ARMES--ARRIVAL AT -PAPEETE--CHARGE ON WHICH OFFICERS SEEK TO ARREST ME--ABUSED BY REV. MR. -HOWE--A QUIET ANSWER CALLS OUT CHEERS FROM THE CROWD--TIDE TURNS IN MY -FAVOR--EXCITEMENT CALMS DOWN, AND EFFORTS TO ARREST ME CEASE. - -ON the 16th of December I set out from Huaua on a short journey to -a small hamlet called Tapuna. Everywhere I went the people were -complaining of the great scarcity of food; still they managed to -furnish me with plenty, treating me very hospitably. About the 20th I -returned to Huaua and preached to the people. On the 29th and 30th I -attended to my correspondence. - -January 1, 1851, I started for Tarepu, finding the roads quite muddy. -It rained heavily, so that all the streams were so swollen as to make -my journey very hard and tiresome. The majority of the people were -rather surly and indifferent, so much so as not to invite me in out of -the storm, so I had to pass along to where I found more hospitality. -The trip altogether was a hard and ungrateful one. I had to swim some -of the watercourses, and barely escaped being carried into the sea. -I got everything I had with me, even to my watch, thoroughly soaked. -Then I sought a place sheltered from the view of the passers-by, and -there dried my clothes. As I was alone almost all the time on this trip -I felt it to be long and tedious, without any profitable results, as -far as I could see. Yet I remembered that my experience was that of a -fisherman; and as my calling was to fish for men I did not complain, -but continued my journey to Hitia. There I called on one Mr. Baff, a -Protestant minister. I left a copy of the Voice of Warning for him to -read. When he returned it he sent a note thanking me for the privilege -of perusing it, but he did not express an opinion of the work. I never -had the pleasure of meeting the gentleman again. - -Having been informed that Elders Pratt and Dunn had an opportunity of -going to Tubuoi, I hastened back to Huaua, to find that they had not -yet engaged their passage. After resting two or three days, Brother -Pratt sent me down to Papeete to secure passage for them on Captain -Johnson's schooner, which was expected to sail in a few days. I met -Mr. Johnson, with whom I made a contract, and returned next day. Then, -on January 13th, all hands went down to Papeete. We found that Brother -John Layton had come from California, and brought letters for us from -the Elders who had been sent to the Sandwich Islands. - -Mail matters considered and answers written, the program was changed so -that Elder Dunn did not go to Tubuoi, and as Brother Pratt had to wait -a few days before he could start, part of the native family that had -accompanied us remained to see him off, while the others returned with -Brother Dunn and I to lonely Huaua. In the meantime we learned that -Priest John Hawkins was expected down from Anaa in a few days, when -Brother Dunn was to return with him to Anaa. - -When we were at Huaua without Brother Pratt, the place seemed doubly -lonesome. On January 30th, I went to Papeete and learned that Brother -Hawkins had arrived with some native brethren from Metia, and that all -had started in their canoes for Huaua, to which place I repaired the -next day. All were well. The native brethren went back to Papeete, and -Brother Hawkins and wife stayed at Huaua a day or two; then he also -went down, returning to us in eight or ten days, accompanied by Elder -Joseph Busby, from Tubuoi. The latter said that he had started for -home, if it was agreeable to the brethren. He told us that it would -be two months before the brethren would come with their new schooner, -which they were building. - -March 2nd, all hands went to Taunua, to a sacrament meeting. We met in -a house close down by the beach, where we saw the vessel that Brother -Busby sailed on for home. There were sixty-seven brethren and sisters -at the meeting, and we had a very good-spirited time. We returned -to Huaua; and it was on March 12th, when, in company with our old, -faithful friend and brother, Hamatua, and family, I set sail in a -whaleboat for Papara. We had a fine breeze till we came to a hamlet -called Otura, where we stayed one night and were well cared for by our -host, a brother in the Church. On the 13th we continued our voyage by -sea, having to row most of the time, for there was no wind. We reached -our destination, Papara, on the 14th, and stopped at the house of -Purua, a brother of Hamatua, who had died, and his widow had sent for -Hamatua to come and move her and her family to his home. We found our -friends here very kind, and well pleased to meet us. - -While at Papara, many people came in to see us. These manifested a -desire to know who I was, and my business there, but showed great -reluctance in shaking hands with me. I learned that the cause of this -diffidence was that they were afraid of the Protestant ministers. For -a while they kept very shy of me. I called on their minister, Mr. -Chisholm, and presented him with a Voice of Warning, which I asked him -to read; but when I held it out to him he said no, he would not read -it or anything the Mormons had; "but," said he, "I want to exhort you, -and show you that you are deluded." I asked what he knew about our -Church to cause him to be so excited. He said he had had a letter from -Simeon A. Dunn, one of our Elders, and that public opinion was enough -to satisfy him that we were false teachers and deceivers of the people. -At that he called one Mr. Davis from a side room. The latter was -totally blind, and had spent most of his life on the islands. Both of -them reviled at me, and rehearsed many of the old slanders about Joseph -Smith and the Mormons. I left them in disgust, returning to my friends, -where I found many people congregated. These were quite sociable. - -Soon a messenger came from the minister and asked what kind of baptism -we believed in. When I said that we believed in immersion, that seemed -to please the people very much, as I turned to the third chapter of -Matthew and showed them that Christ was baptized in that manner. From -that time the house was thronged with people anxiously inquiring for -the doctrines we taught. - -On March 16th I was sent for by a sick man, who wanted to be anointed. -When I told him about the order of the Church, and that he should -repent and be baptized for the remission of his sins, and thus become -entitled to the blessings of the Gospel, he said that it was of no use -to him for he was a great sinner and could not repent in one day. Then -he said, "I shall have to remain sick." He had his own way to look at -things, and as we were unable to convince him otherwise, we returned to -our stopping place. - -Shortly after this I was called to see a young woman who had been under -medical treatment by the Protestant ministers for four months. Her -name was Maui. She had been reduced to a mere skeleton, and was unable -to stand alone. When I came, she said she had heard of the doctrine -that I had preached to the people, and knew it was true, "for," said -she, "it is all in the Bible." She was the foremost scholar of the -district, and was highly respected by the ministers as well as by the -whole people. When it became known that I had been called to see her, -it aroused an excitement, and many people came together, insomuch that -the house could not hold them all. As I talked with her on the first -principles of the Gospel, she would say, "Yes, that is so, for it is in -the Bible;" and she said, "I am willing to be baptized now, for I know -that what you tell me is the truth." I asked the consent of her parents -and of her young husband, who readily acceded to her desire. Then I -told them that if they would take her to a suitable place by the creek, -I would meet them there and attend to the baptizing. Accordingly, they -carried her to the creek, some ten or twelve rods away, where I met -them, prepared for the work. There were probably one hundred people -assembled. After singing and prayer, I went into the water and the -friends of the young woman helped her to me, I having to aid in holding -her on her feet while I said the baptismal ceremony. When she came up -out of the water she thanked God, saying, "I am healed of the Lord," -and walked out of the water and home without assistance, although her -friends offered aid. This excited the people so much that some of the -young woman's particular friends prepared to come into the water of -baptism, but the older ones prevailed on them to wait a while, saying -maybe they would all go together. - -When I had changed my clothing and had gone to where the new convert -was, I found her sitting on the bed and praising God, bearing her -testimony that she was healed of the Lord, and that we had the true -Gospel. The baptism of this young woman was the first that I had -administered, she being my first convert. The house where we had -assembled was crowded to overflowing, and when I had confirmed her I -returned to my stopping place, the people following me. There must have -been at least three hundred of them. Several brought bedding and camped -under the trees around the house, while others were preparing a feast -for the occasion, in which they roasted eleven big hogs, and gathered -fish, fruit and vegetables for the roast. - -This was too much for the Protestant ministers, for, as I was sitting -at a table expounding the scriptures to the people, in came a lusty -Frenchman in citizen's clothes. He took a seat among the people for a -short time, then slipped away and donned his police uniform, with belt, -sword and pistol; then, with a comrade similarly attired, he reappeared -at the door and asked me if I had a permit from the governor. I told -him I had one at home, but not with me. At that he, in a rather rough -tone of voice, bade me follow them. Without hesitation I did so, and -about a hundred of the people came after us to the mission station, -where I was ushered into the presence of Messrs. Chisholm, Howe -and Davis. All of them were what were called English or Protestant -missionaries. Mr. Howe acted as chief spokesman or prosecutor, while -Mr. Chisholm filled the role of justice, Mr. Davis appearing to be his -assistant. Thus arrayed, they told me that I had been arrested and -brought before them because I had raised a very unusual excitement -among the people, and I could not produce a permit from the government -as a resident on the island. They said I was capable of making much -disturbance among the people, and the decision they had come to was -that if I would not agree to leave the place by 8 a.m. next day I would -be locked up in a dungeon until I did agree to leave. - -Of course I consented to depart at the appointed time, thinking I -could get my permit and return in a few days. Then they told me I -was at liberty, but they did not release me until they had scored -me unmercifully with their tongues for belonging to such a set of -impostors as "Old Joe Smith and the Mormons" were. Said Mr. Chisholm, -"You are a fine young man, capable of doing much good if you had not -been deceived by that impostor, Old Joe Smith." They told me to cease -my preaching and deceiving the people, and that I had better go home. -At that I pocketed their insults and left them. Many of the people -followed me to my stopping place, some of them shouting triumphantly -for the young Mormon missionary, and calling shame on the English -ministers. - -A house full of people had assembled, and we sat up till a late hour -that night talking on the principles of the Gospel. Early next morning -our boat was filled with the family and provisions, and we sailed at 8 -o'clock. I put on a fisherman's suit and took the helm, facing outward -from the shore. I did not have any particular object in view at the -time in doing this, yet it seemed to serve a purpose, for we had sailed -but a few miles when we saw two mounted gen d' armes come out of the -woods to the sandy beach, where they stopped and watched our boat till -they seemed satisfied there was no missionary on board, and passed on. -Then it occurred to us that if I had not been in the unintentional -disguise they would have stopped our boat and arrested me, for they -were well armed, and could have reached us easily with their firearms. -As we afterwards learned, they passed on to where we had come from -and made a thorough search for me, going through houses, turning up -the beds, and scouring the coffee groves and every place the supposed -Mormon missionary could have hidden. Then they and the Protestant -missionaries called a meeting of the people and thoroughly warned them -against the Mormons, and especially against young Iatobo (James), as -they called me. At this mass meeting Mr. Baff, one of the oldest of the -English missionaries, appeared with the others I have mentioned. - -There was another incident that seemed to be very providential, though -disagreeable at the time. The wind died away to a perfect calm, and -when we came to an opening in the outlying coral reef, we thought that -by going out through the opening we might catch a breeze, and could -hoist the sail and make better headway; so we steered for the open -sea. There we found that we had to row all day before we could get -back within the reef. Thus we were carried so far from the land that -passers-by could not discern who we were, and we were kept from the gen -d' armes till sundown. Then we landed away from the thoroughfare, in -heavy timber. In that way we escaped our enemies, for next morning we -were off and out in the open sea soon after sunrise. We rowed all day -and till 11 o'clock p.m., then landed in an obscure place, and were up -and off again by sunrise, putting out to sea and keeping there till we -reached the western passage to the harbor of Papeete. There we went -ashore near a large American tile establishment's wholesale and retail -department. Just in front of this lay a large American warship. The -water was very deep, so that the vessel was moored to the shore, the -gangway resting upon the street, where a great many people had gathered. - -As soon as we landed I stepped into the retail department referred to, -on some little errand. In a couple of minutes or so I was confronted by -the Rev. Mr. Howe, who has been mentioned before. He was a fine-looking -English gentleman of thirty-five or forty years of age. He came up and -shook hands with me, saying, "Mr. Brown, are you aware that the gen -d' armes are in search of you? You must have been in hiding somewhere. -They have searched Papara for you, and now are searching this town, and -there is great excitement over your actions. You had better be cautious -what you are about." I could not understand at first what he meant, so -I asked him what I had done to create such a great excitement as to -have the police hunting for me. I said I had not been in hiding at all, -had not thought of such a thing. He replied, "Why, sir, you have gone -and plunged a young lady head and ears into the cold water, and we have -had her under medical treatment for four months, and expected her to -die. Now you have endangered her life by plunging her into cold water. -She is one of the most talented and smartest women of this island. We -have taken great pains to educate her, and she is widely known and -respected by everyone who knows her." - -"Well," said I, "what harm have I done? She was healed of her sickness, -as she and her mother testified to me before I left, and every person -who was present can bear witness of the same." - -"Ah, well," said he, "you have such a fierce countenance and expressive -voice as to excite a person under the most excruciating pain until -they would not realize they had any suffering at all. She may relapse -and die, then you will have grave responsibilities to meet for your -unwarranted act." He continued talking, turning to intimidation and -abusive language until he said it was a great pity that one of my -natural endowments lacked in educational attainments, for if I had -been taught in Greek or Latin I would have understood that baptism was -_baptiso_ in Latin, and meant merely the application of water, and not -to plunge people head and ears in the shameful and ridiculous manner -that he said I had done. - -By this time we were talking so very loud as to attract the attention -of all around. Finally Mr. Howe said, "Do you teach the people that -baptism is essential to the salvation of man or the soul?" I told him -I did. "Then," said he, "you teach a lie, and I will follow you up and -tell the people that you are a liar and teach false doctrine." As my -calling as a missionary would not admit of a violent retaliation, I -merely said to him that in my country that would be very ungentlemanly -language for one minister to use towards another, but I supposed it was -some of the Greek and Latin that he had been learned in. Then I turned -away from him. - -My action brought a tremendous cheer from the Americans on board the -warship, and from all who understood the conversation. The people -assembled hurrahed for the Mormon boy. At that my antagonist turned -very red in the face. Some of the natives ran up to him, pointing their -fingers at him, and shouting, "Look how red his nose is! The Mormon boy -has whipped him!" They rushed around me to shake hands, and seemed as -if they would carry me on their shoulders. It should be understood that -we talked partly in English and partly in Tahitian, so that all could -understand in a general way what we said, for we had grown very earnest -if not heated in our discussion. - -Soon after this I went up through the town and there learned from -several people that there had been much excitement over my having -baptized the sick young lady, and that the police had searched the -place over for me. I realized then that if it had not been for the -calm weather we had had at sea we would have got into town just at -the height of the excitement, and I would have been locked in prison. -So, thanks for the calm, although when we were in it we wished for -wind that we might make better headway; but that delay gave time for -reflection, and for the news of the young lady's convalescence to reach -Papeete, so that I could pass on my way without further insult. - - - -CHAPTER XXV. - -SEVERAL BAPTISMS--VISIT PAPARA AGAIN--COLDNESS OF THE PEOPLE--BITTER -EFFORTS OF THE PROTESTANT MINISTERS--NATIVES VISIT ME IN -SECRET--ANTI-MORMON MASS MEETING--FOOLISH AND VICIOUS SCHEME TO -ENSNARE THE WRITER--IT IS EASILY DEFEATED--RETURN TO PAPEETE--MORE -BAPTISMS--DEPARTURE OF ELDER DUNN--I AM LEFT ALONE--BRETHREN COME -FROM TUBUOI--ELDERS APPOINTED TO LABOR IN DIFFERENT ISLANDS--THE -WRITER ASSIGNED TO THE TUAMOTU GROUP--LEAVE ON THE ELDERS' SCHOONER, -THE RAVAI OR FISHER--MEET WITH CONTRARY WINDS--DRIVEN TO VARIOUS -ISLANDS--ENCOUNTER A VIOLENT STORM--IN GREAT PERIL--VESSEL BEYOND -CONTROL--STORM CALMS DOWN--REACH TUBUOI--FIRST PREACHING OF THE GOSPEL -THERE, IN 1844. - -WE reached our home at Huaua on the 20th of March, and found all well. -On the 23rd I baptized Tereino and Maioa, and on the 24th Brother Dunn -baptized two other persons besides Brother Hamatua and two of his -children. Then I sailed for Papara, after providing myself with the -permit that I lacked on our previous visit. We stopped at Taunua the -first night, the 25th, having had to row all the way. - -On the 26th we reached Papara, where the people acted very coolly -towards us. There was one friend, however, who dared invite us in and -provide us with food and lodging. On inquiry, we learned that the young -lady who had been ill and was healed at her baptism was sound and well, -and had been so from the time she was baptized. We also learned that -Messrs. Howe, Chisholm, Baff and Davis had called the people together -after the baptism, inquired of them where I was, had the town searched -for me, and had sought diligently to learn if I had spoken against them -or against the French government; but they failed to learn anything of -this kind on which to base an accusation against me and had to content -themselves by telling the people all the foul slanders they had heard -against the Mormons and Joseph Smith, and by warning the people against -us, saying that if they took us in or bade us Godspeed they would -not be permitted to partake of the sacrament in their church, and if -they went to hear us preach they would be excommunicated. They sent a -delegation to the young lady whom I had baptized, to see if she had -been healed, and through being intimidated she said no. Her relatives -had quarreled over the matter, some being in favor of her saying that -she was not, while others said that she was healed. The report that the -delegation made to their masters, however, was that she said she had -not been healed; when I went to see her, she ran out to meet me, and -told me that she had not been sick one day since she had been baptized. - -By such means as those I have named, the ministers sought to turn the -people against us, and strongly forbade them to show us any favors -whatever; and when the natives could come secretly and talk with us -they would explain, "Now, if we come openly and investigate your -doctrine and are not satisfied with it, then we will be turned out -of society. For that reason we dare not receive you or come and talk -openly with you. Our hearts are good towards you, but we are watched by -the police, so that we dare not be friendly with you where we can be -seen." - -As soon as the ministers learned that we had returned, they called -another meeting, at which they seemed to take delight in abusing and -vilifying the Mormons in general and me in particular. When the meeting -was over, they called two pretty young women, and privately told them -to dress themselves as nicely as they could and perfume themselves and -make themselves as attractive as possible, then to take their Bibles -and hymn books and get into conversation with the Mormon missionary, -Iatobo (James). They were to be very sociable and friendly to me. -They had been told also that they would learn that the Mormons were -licentious deceivers, and that my actions would show that I was a -licentious rascal and would lead them astray. Orders were also given -them that when they had proved this they were to return and report to -the ministers. I came into possession of this information regarding the -scheme through the spirit of discernment, and by the confession of the -parties themselves. - -The young ladies came as instructed, and the moment they entered the -door and I inhaled the perfumes I had the discernment of their mission -and the instructions they were under from their ministers. Nevertheless -they were welcomed in and took seats just in front of and close to the -writer, on a mat. In the blandest and most pleasant manner they began -to make scripture inquiries, accepting every answer as final, and -assenting to all I had to say. They became more and more sociable and -bold, until at length one of them raised on her knees, and placing her -open Bible upon the writer's knee, at the same time looked him squarely -in the face with her most pleasant smile. He at once moved his chair -back, and said to them, "You have not come here with the object that -you profess to come with, but your mission is a deceptive one, and you -have been sent here by your ministers to try to deceive me, thinking to -lead me into lewd and wicked practices that I am a stranger to. Now, -if you wish anything of that kind you must return to your masters who -sent you, and tell them that if they wish you to be accommodated in -that way, they will have to do it themselves, for Mormon Elders are not -guilty of such practices, though they have proofs that the ministers -are. And I exhort you to be ashamed and to repent of your sins, and be -baptized for their remission, and you will know that what I have told -you is true." - -At this rebuke, they both confessed openly that every word I had said -was true, and that they had been sent for no other purpose than the one -I have stated. As they had come straight from the minister's house, -they wondered how the writer could tell them so directly what their -ministers had ordered them to do, and how he came to read their mission -so accurately. They said, "_No te varua tera_" (that is of the Spirit); -for no one else could have told him so correctly. At that they took -their leave, and I heard no more of them or their mission. - -The ministers called another meeting on March 29th. I attended that, -and after service asked permission to speak a few moments. This being -granted by Mr. Davis, I merely gave notice that I was a minister of -the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, there on a mission -to teach the true Gospel, and if any wished to hear me I was at their -service, if they would permit. There was no response, so a hymn was -sung, and the people dispersed. At night a few came to hear me, but -seemed to be under such restraint that there was no pleasure in talking -to them. - -We spent several days at the place without any success, owing to the -great prejudice of the people, and the unwarranted hatred of their -ministers. Then we left for Papeete, starting on April 2nd, and -arriving at our destination at daylight on the 3rd. Having had to row -all the way, we were very tired, so stopped to get some needed rest. -In the evening we baptized one person, Maua. On the 6th we attended -meeting with about twenty of the Tuamotu Saints, then the boat and the -others of the party went home while I tarried till the next day, going -home by land to Hapape, where I found a boat bound direct for Huaua, so -I took passage on it, and was wafted there speedily. - -It was on April 19th that I started for Otumaro. On the 21st we got to -that place, where I stayed while the others of the party made a visit -to Papara. On their return I joined them and proceeded to Papeete, -where I left the boat again and walked the remainder of the journey. -The next day the rest of the party came up by sea; and on the 29th we -baptized three more persons. - -While at Otumaro, some Matia brethren came from Hitia after a -missionary or two. Matia is a small island about ninety miles north -of Tahiti. Brother Dunn, being very tired of Huaua, concluded that -he would go with them, they taking his trunk and bedding on their -shoulders and marching off, apparently in triumph. They insisted that -I should go with them as well, but having been left in charge of the -mission on Tahiti, I did not feel at liberty to leave, as Brother Pratt -had told me to remain there until the new schooner should arrive. -Therefore I turned alone to my missionary labors. On the 29th I -baptized Tuane; and at Huaua on May 4th I baptized Tafatua and Tafai, -who had been baptized by Brother Pratt; they confessed that they had -been led astray, but desired to return to the true fold. The same day I -administered the sacrament to twenty-one souls. - -Just at dark on May 12th, 1851, we heard a gun fired at sea. We -hastened to the beach, and, sure enough, it was our long-looked-for -brethren on their new schooner, which was named the Ravai (Fisher.) -Brother John Hawkins having joined us, he and Hamatua went off in a -canoe to get the news. They found all well. Next day we joined them in -the harbor of Papeete, and remained with them on board the schooner and -wrote letters. - -On the 15th Brothers Pratt, John Layton, Hawkins and the wives of the -last two, as well as some of the native brethren, sailed in a whaleboat -for Huaua, while we stopped at Hapape and took a nap, and at 2 o'clock -a.m. started back, reaching our destination at daylight on the 16th. -We rested on the 17th, and on the 18th, in council, Elders Thomas -Whitaker, Julian Moses and two native brethren were appointed to -labor as missionaries on Tahiti; Elders John Hawkins, Alviras Hanks, -Simeon A. Dunn and James S. Brown were appointed to labor among the -inhabitants of the Tuamotu group of islands. - -On May 19th, Brothers Pratt, Layton and Hawkins set out for Papeete, -and at 3 p.m. Brothers T. Whitaker and Pohe, with their families, -started for Pueu in a boat belonging to some of their relatives. On -the 21st, the schooner--the new one built at Tubuoi, and commanded by -Benjamin F. Grouard--called with the brethren who went down the day -before on board. She was bound for Anaa, two hundred and ten miles -east, or nearly so. When they got opposite Huaua, Captain Grouard came -ashore and said they desired me to accompany them, as they intended to -call by Tubuoi before returning to Tahiti. - -In fifteen or twenty minutes I was ready, and we soon boarded the -little vessel. She was thirty-five or forty tons burden, had poor -accommodations on board, and was insufficiently supplied with -provisions. We started, but the wind being contrary, we soon had to -change our course, so that on the 24th we sighted Riroa, and on the -25th we touched at Uratua and got some cocoanuts. In consequence of -the strong current there, we could not make much headway, but in -trying to beat around it we sighted Anutua. On the next tack we came -to Aunua, where we went ashore and found a small branch of the Church. -The Saints were very kind to us, showing every favor they could, and -pressing us to allow one of our number to remain with them. But it was -not considered proper to grant the request, so we held two meetings and -preached to them, giving them all the cheer and comfort that we could, -and then left. They seemed to appreciate our visit and counsel as only -Latter-day Saints can. - -Again we sailed for Anaa, but the strong wind and waves prevailed -against us, so that we were driven so far from our course that we -sighted Faraua on May 31st, and on June 1st we encountered a very -heavy storm, commencing at 5:30 and continuing till 11 p.m. when it -seemed to abate a little. At 7 p.m. all sails had been taken in save -the foresail, which was close-reefed, and as the vessel was beyond our -control, our best seamen being willing to admit that they could do -nothing for us, the helm was lashed down, and all hands went below. -The hatch was securely fastened down, leaving only two of our best and -bravest men lashed on deck with slack rope. Everyone seemed to realize -our peril, and that we must rely alone on the Almighty to save us from -destruction. There was land all around, and the wind and currents -were so strong that it was impossible, with the means at our command, -to direct the course of our little Fisher. I must leave the friendly -reader to draw his own conclusions as to the condition we were in, for -I have not the ability to describe it. Suffice it to say that through -the mercies of the Lord we were spared to find ourselves perfectly -landlocked by three islands, namely, Anutua, Apatai and Aunua. Again -getting control of the vessel, we put into the harbor at Apatai, that -being considered the safest place. There we found some Church members, -and were treated very kindly. We remained there until the 6th, holding -meetings and preaching to the people. - -Apatai is one of the islands of poison fish, and we felt the effects of -these slightly before we left. We had a fair wind for Anaa on the 6th, -when we started, but it soon died away and we were left to drift with -a very strong current. On the 7th we found ourselves drifted down by -the side of Anutua. Having some natives of that island on board they -were sent ashore. Jonathan Crosby went with them, and returned with the -boat. From thence we had a pleasant voyage to Anutua. There we went -ashore and preached to the people. Brothers Grouard's and Hawkins' -wives also landed. - -We left them on the 9th. and sailed for Tubuoi. Having a fair and -strong wind, we were wafted to Matia, where we left some passengers -belonging to that island. We also took in a small supply of provisions, -as our store was very scanty. Then we continued towards Tubuoi, having -a favorable wind till we got within eighty miles of our destination. -Then a strong headwind forced us to change our course, so that we put -into a small island called Loivivi. This was on the 17th. The island -does not exceed four miles in length and two in width; there were three -hundred and eighty-three people living on it. They had the wildest and -fiercest look of any that we had met on our cruise, yet they behaved -very well to us. On the 18th we sailed again for Tubuoi, and on the -20th we cast anchor at that island, which lies between the twenty-third -and twenty-fourth parallels, south latitude. It is only twelve or -fifteen miles in length, and from a distance resembles the tops of -mountains in a plain. Its inhabitants numbered four hundred, all told. - -It was on this island that the Gospel was first preached in this -dispensation, in the islands of the Pacific Ocean. This preaching was -by Elder Addison Pratt, July 12, 1844. He was accompanied by Elders -Noah Rogers and B. F. Grouard, they having been sent by the Prophet -Joseph Smith, from Nauvoo, Hancock County, Illinois, U.S.A., in the -year 1843. Knowlton Hanks was one of the missionaries who left Nauvoo, -but he died on the voyage from Boston to Tubuoi, after the vessel had -rounded Cape Horn. - - - -CHAPTER XXVI. - -HEARTY WELCOME IN TUBUOI--START FOR TUAMOTU--REACH PAPEETE, -TAHITI--VISIT TO HUAUA--LEAVE TAHITI--WRITER GETS RELIEF FROM -SEASICKNESS--BROILED FISH AND COCOANUTS--IN A SCHOOL OF WHALES--THROWN -INTO A CORAL REEF--TOTAL WRECK IMMINENT--THREE PERSONS GET ASHORE--BOAT -GOES OUT TO SEA--WRECK OF ELDER DUNN'S PARTY--THREE DAYS IN THE SEA, -CLINGING TO A CAPSIZED BOAT--CLOTHING TORN OFF BY SHARKS--SKIN TAKEN -OFF BY THE SEA AND SUN--REACH THE ISLAND OF ANAA--RECOGNIZED BY A -MAN WHO HAD SEEM ME IN A DREAM--PREACHING AND BAPTIZING--MANY OF -THE NATIVES CHURCH MEMBERS--MAKE A RUDE MAP OF THE CALIFORNIA GOLD -FIELDS--TELL OF HAVING BEEN IN THE MORMON BATTALION--CATHOLIC PRIESTS -ELICIT THIS INFORMATION AS PAST OF A SCHEME TO HAVE ME EXPELLED FROM -THE ISLAND. - -WHEN we landed on Tubuoi on May 20th, we found the people feeling well. -They were greatly pleased to see us, and we rejoiced to meet with and -preach to them. We traveled from village to village preaching, and -visited the people from house to house, being received everywhere in -the most friendly manner. - -On July 1st and 2nd we attended to correspondence, and on the 3rd -everything was in readiness and we sailed with a cargo of cattle for -Tahiti. Elder A. Hanks and the writer were bound for the Tuamotu group -of islands. On the 6th, after a pleasant voyage, with the exception of -seasickness, we landed at Papeete, Tahiti, all well. - -Our captain said that he would only remain in harbor a day or two, -then would sail for Anaa. As I desired to visit the brethren at Huaua, -fifteen miles up the coast, I started at 4 p.m., afoot and alone, and -reached my destination the same evening. I was surprised when the whole -family, men, women and children, leaped from their beds and embraced -me, and wept for joy. Some refreshments were provided, and we then -turned in for the remainder of the night. - -I stayed there until the 8th, and met with Elders Julian Moses and T. -Whitaker, who accompanied me to Papeete, where we arrived at 1 o'clock -p.m., and found the vessel being prepared to sail. Brother Hanks was -detained in getting his permit until it was too late to get out of the -passage till the 9th, then the wind came straight into the passage, so -that we had to drop anchor till late in the afternoon. We managed to -get clear that night, but the wind being contrary we did not lose sight -of land till the 10th; then we had a perfect calm for two days. Late in -the evening of the 12th we got a light breeze. This day was the first -time in my life that I could say that I was well at sea. Never before -that evening had I gone below and enjoyed a meal of victuals; but from -that time on I could take my rations with the rest except in a storm. - -On July 13th we sighted and passed Metia, and sighted Tikahau; the -14th Matea was in view, and we passed along close to the weather end -of Riroa; the 18th we were near Uratua. There two boats were let down, -one to pull up through the lagoon of the island, twenty miles long, to -where Brother Hawkins lived, and the other to fish. About 11 p.m. we -neared the village when the natives came and conducted us to the place. -They spread some broiled fish and cocoanuts before us; and of course we -were thankful to get that, for there was no other food on the island. -This was all that some of the inhabitants ever had to eat on their own -island, save an occasional pig or a chicken. After the refreshments we -turned in for the night. - -Next morning we were feasted as best the people could do. We preached -to them, then sailed away; for our schooner was waiting for us. We -next headed for Riroa, as we could not get a wind for Anaa, which we -had been trying to reach from the time we left Tahiti. On the 21st we -passed through a school of whales to the harbor. Again we encountered -a strong current coming out of the passage, and a headwind. Then, in -trying to beat up into the harbor, our vessel failed to stay, and we -were driven into the coral rock, which stood up in the water like -tree-tops. Crash we went, and the vessel began to quiver and jar. All -hands and the cook had an awful scare, and for a few moments it looked -as though our vessel would be a total wreck, and we be all spilled into -the raging billows, among crags and rocks. But thanks to the Lord, this -was averted. Three of us succeeded in gaining the shore in safety, and -the vessel put to sea for the night, coming in on the 22nd to anchor. - -On shore we were feasted on broiled fish, cocoanuts and roast pig. The -people seemed overjoyed at our visit. We called a meeting and preached -to them, encouraging them in their religious duties. - -It was while we were on this island that we heard from Brothers Dunn -and Crosby, who were well. We also heard from Manahuni and party, who -left Tahiti at the same time that we departed on our first cruise. They -sailed for Anaa, in a small, open boat called the _Anaura_, the same that -Brother Grouard made many trips in from island to island, and in which -he had many narrow escapes. But Manahuni and his party of six brethren -and sisters had a much severer experience than any former party. Their -boat capsized in a heavy storm, the same that we had been caught in on -our former cruise. They lost everything save their lives, and these -were preserved only by clinging to the keel of the boat for three days -and three nights. Finally the boat righted itself, and they drifted to -the island of Tikahau, but not till the last rag of clothing had been -torn from their bodies by sharks, and much of the skin--all of the -cuticle--had sloughed off through their being in the salt water and -hot sun so long. But their lives were spared to them, and they were -nourished by the kind people of Tikahau, until they were able to reach -the island of their destination, Anaa. - -A fair wind for Anaa came on July 26th, so we left for that place. -At dawn on the 28th we sighted the island, and at 10 o'clock a.m. we -landed at Tuuhora. As we neared the shore I was seated in the stern of -the boat, when a man came bounding through the water and passed all our -party till he came to me. Then he reached out his hand, which had in it -five pearls wrapped in a little rag, and said, "Here! I have seen you -before. You have come to be our president, for you have been shown to -me in a dream. Welcome, welcome to our land!" Just then he turned his -back for the writer to get on, and in this way took me to the shore, -where the people soon prepared a feast of welcome, as is their custom -when their friends come to see them. No feast, no welcome. - -The feasting over, with Brothers Hanks and Hawkins I visited the -branches, the three of us traveling together, preaching and baptizing -the people, who came forward in large numbers to receive the ordinance. -August 5, 1851, Brother Hanks left for Taroa, and Brother Hawkins -for Arutua. I had been appointed to preside on Anaa, and commenced -my labors in that duty. On the 6th I was instructed, by Elder B. F. -Grouard, to travel and preach, to reorganize the branches wherever -it was necessary, and to organize and teach schools as I might find -it prudent; in fact, to do all things pertaining to my calling as a -missionary. Thus I started out alone. - -One of the first things I found after I began my labors was that there -were four Catholic priests on the island, building four stone churches; -that they had about thirty natives employed on them, and that no others -would attend their religious services; it was claimed that there were -about nine hundred persons belonging to the Mormon Church, most of them -being members in good standing. There were no natives there belonging -to the Catholic church. - -On one occasion soon after my arrival, I was being questioned, in a -conversation, about California and the gold fields, and also about my -birthplace and the city of my residence. I took a sheet of paper and -sketched a rough outline of the gold fields. One of the natives who -apparently had been greatly interested in the narrative, asked for the -sketch. It being given to him, he went off and soon returned with a -large sheet of drawing paper, on which he requested me to draw a map, -on a larger scale, showing my birthplace, where Salt Lake City was -from there, and the location of the gold fields. Then the question was -asked, how I came to be in California at so early a date. I told them -I went there in the Mormon Battalion, in the service of the United -States, during the war with Mexico. Little did I think I was mapping -out the outlines of a foundation for a wicked and false charge to be -preferred against me by the Catholic priest. Neither did I have the -remotest idea that my rude sketch would be used in crediting me with -being a civil engineer of no mean ability, nor that my having been in -the army of the United States would entitle me to the dignity of a -highly educated military graduate from some United States army school; -nor was I aware that my walk and carriage were that of an officer in -the military establishment of my government. Yet the sequel will show -that all this was the case. - - - -CHAPTER XXVII. - -INVITED TO ORGANIZE SCHOOLS--CATHOLIC PRIESTS DISPLEASED AT -MORMON SUCCESS--GOOD ATTENDANCE AT THE SCHOOLS--THREATS BY THE -PRIESTS--DISCOMFITURE OF THE LATTER--FEAST AND ADDRESS OF WELCOME BY -THE NATIVES TO THE WRITER--PREACHING AND BAPTISMS--CATHOLIC PRIESTS -SEIZE A SCHOOLHOUSE BELONGING TO THE SAINTS--DISTURB A SAINTS' -MEETING--MORE BAPTISMS--FURTHER ANNOYANCE BY CATHOLICS--PEOPLE DECIDE -AGAINST THEM--TOWN OFFICIALS APPEALED TO--THEY UPHOLD THE DECISION IN -FAVOR OF THE MORMONS--PRIESTS WRITE TO GOVERNOR BONARD, MAKING FALSE -CHARGES AGAINST ME--A PECULIAR DREAM. - -ON August 7th I was solicited by the chief men of Putuhara to assist -them in organizing a school. Indeed, the whole people were anxious to -have me aid them in this, therefore I took hold as requested. They had -no school at that time, and were looking for a white Elder to start -one, as they themselves had but a vague idea of the proper order or -rules to govern such an organization. The writer did not have the -remotest idea that he would meet with the antagonism of the Catholic -priests in this matter, as there was a unanimous desire for him among -the people, who had rejected the offer of the priest stationed at that -place. However, I soon heard that the priest was displeased because the -people had rejected him and supported us by sending their children to -our school, and by feasting me and showing me marked preference in many -ways. Our house was crowded to its full capacity every evening, while -the priest sat alone in his studio. - -On August 12th we had thirty-six students; by the 14th the school had -increased to sixty-five. The priest came to the door, looked in, then -turned short on his heel, and went away without speaking, yet showing -his displeasure in his manner. Soon he got a house to run opposition -in school work, but he failed to get pupils. Then he became very cross -and snarly at every one he came in contact with; at least, so said the -people. - -In company with some of my friends, I went to Otapipi on August 15th. -We met a man with a letter from the head Catholic priest, for me. It -was in the Tahitian language, and began as follows: "Iarran Iatobo, i -te Atua" (James, how do you do in the Lord?) and continued, translated -into English: "This is what I have to say to you: Do not trouble our -schools, and we will not trouble yours. If you do so again, I will send -for the governor's aide de camp, and we will have you tried before -him. You must not trouble us any more." It closed with "Tidar Paran -Iaraan ae, Tavara" (That is all the talk. Good bye to you.) As we had -not knowingly interfered with their schools we did not make any reply, -but continued our journey to Otapipi, and held a prayer meeting at -that place at 3 o'clock p.m. While there I saw a priest and his two -attendants coming across the lake. They landed, and came straight to -the house where we had put up. The priest walked in without hesitation, -and politely offered to shake hands. We met him as politely, and took -his hand. Then he asked if we had received a letter from the priest -below. We informed him that we had. "Well," said he, "we don't want -you to interfere with our schools, and we will not with yours." At -the same time he threatened me with the governor's authority, if we -did not "walk straight." After some discourse, I asked him what kind -of a God he worshiped. He said a spirit without body or parts; but he -failed to find any Scripture to support his belief, and the people -who had gathered around laughed at him, making him feel very much out -of temper. On August 16th he called a few children together and spoke -briefly to them in Latin or some language that I did not understand. -Then he departed for another village. - -Soon after this, the people prepared a feast in honor of our visit. -The food consisted of roasted fish and fowl. Many little presents were -also brought, such as could be made from the fiber of the cocoanut -husk, mats, shells, etc. When all was laid before us, the spokesman -said, in substance, in the Tahitian language: "James, as a token of -our great love and respect for you, the servant of God, we, the people -of Otapipi, Anaa, have collected of all the varieties of food that our -land affords, and a few articles of use. Here is a pig, there is a -fish, and fowl, and here are cocoanuts. This is meat and drink for us, -and all that is produced in our land. We wish you to accept it from all -of us as your true friends, and we wish you to eat and be full. Be our -president and teacher in the Gospel, and a teacher of our children; for -we are glad to have you come to our land as a father and guide. Our -hearts are full of gladness that God has sent you to our land, that we -may be taught to love the true and living God, for we have always been -in the dark, and did not know there was a true and living God to love -and worship. Now we have no more to say. Amen." - -The foregoing is a fair representation of the addresses made to us on -occasions such as that was. That night the house could not hold all -who came to search the Scriptures and sing sacred hymns. Three persons -offered themselves for baptism, and were put off till Sunday, the 17th, -when I preached on faith, repentance, and baptism for the remission of -sins. At the afternoon services, I exhorted the people to be faithful, -told them the conditions on which they could be admitted into the -Church, and said that all who felt to accept those conditions might be -accommodated that evening, as I had three candidates to wait on at the -close of the services. - -When the meeting was over, the whole congregation gathered down by the -seaside. We sang a hymn and prayed, and I went down into the water and -remained there until I had baptized thirty-five souls. When these were -confirmed, the people remained together to a late hour before they -would disperse. On August 18th, agreeable to the request of the people -and with the approval of the rulers of the village, I opened a school, -classified the students, and chose teachers for each class, then laid -down rules to govern them. The feasting was continued from day to day -to August 24th. On Sunday, the 25th, I preached from the second chapter -of the Acts of the Apostles. At the close of the meeting three persons -presented themselves for baptism, and we attended to the ordinance. -One of those baptized was Mahia, who, forty years later, presided over -the entire mission, being, at the latter time, totally blind. Besides -the three mentioned, sixteen others were baptized, and all of them -confirmed. - -On the 26th, the school was continued in good order. That day the news -came that the Catholic priest had taken charge of our meeting house -at Temarari, although the house was built and owned by the Latter-day -Saints. The priest claimed the right to control it in the interest of -his church; and the Saints requested me to come and help them regain -possession of the house. With two of the natives, I started on the -27th, quite a company, male and female, following us. When we arrived -a feast was prepared; the people gave us a perfect ovation. We held -meeting that evening, the 28th, and I preached from the twelfth chapter -of Luke. - -At the close of the meeting the bell was rung for school. In came the -priest to take charge, but as he had no right to the hour, and the -people did not want him to teach, but desired me to take charge, I told -them that when they settled the dispute about the house, if it was -desired by the whole people and their officers that I should proceed, I -would do so. They arranged to settle the matter in a day or two. - -On the 30th I received a letter from Elder T. W. Whitaker, of Tahiti, -and I wrote to the white Elders. The same evening I had a call from two -of the Catholic priests, whose names were Tavara and Harara. Evidently -they were very much disturbed in their feelings, as the people were -still feasting with and showing every respect possible to me, while -they passed the priests by with a cold nod. - -Sunday morning, August 31st, I preached on the attributes of God. At -the close of our meeting the priests rang the bell and came marching -in with their lamps and images, demanding possession of the house. We -told them we had business matters to attend to, and were not ready to -give up the place. Nevertheless, they piled their things on the table -in front of me as I sat writing. They had as much as two or three men -could carry. They crowded their things right into my way, so I asked -what they meant by such conduct, and who had invited them there before -we got through with our business. They replied that it was their time -for meeting, and demanded the house, claiming it was a public building, -and that they had a right to hold their meetings in it. I said that -it had been built and was owned by the Mormon people, and that we did -not propose to be disturbed by the intruders until we had finished our -business. At that they flew into a rage and threatened us with the law, -as they had done before, but finally they cooled down, carried their -things out, and waited until we were through and had left. Then they -held their services. I do not think they had over six persons in their -congregation. They dispersed quietly, and at 10 o'clock a.m. we held -meeting again. I preached on faith and baptism. One hundred and thirty -people attended our meeting. In the evening I baptized and confirmed -twenty-five persons. - -On Monday, September 1st, I took up school by request of the people -and their peace officers. On the 4th we had thirty students. On the -5th, two native Elders went with me to Tuuhora. We received a call from -a priest; also held a prayer meeting, but few people attended it. On -Sunday we held three meetings, administered the sacrament, baptized -nineteen souls, and confirmed them. On Monday, the 8th, we organized -a school with fifty students, and with the peace officers selected a -teacher for each class. The Catholic priest called on me and forbade -me changing his hours of school. As I had not attempted to interfere -with him or his schools, I came to the conclusion that he was seeking -an occasion against me under the law, as they had threatened me with -before. I knew they were jealous, for where I stopped the people would -throng around me and the priests were left alone. - -When the older people had gone through some morning exercises that -day, desiring on my part to prevent further trouble with the priest, I -sent him word that as soon as we got through with the younger classes -he could occupy the building, but not before, as he had threatened -to do. Just as the messenger returned, the priest rang the bell most -spitefully, and then came rushing into the school room, his eyes -flashing angrily. Our school was greatly disturbed. I advanced, and -asked him civilly if he wished to attend our school. He said yes, -evidently misunderstanding me. I pointed him to a seat, saying we were -much pleased to have our school increase, and would he please give -me his name. I must confess that I felt a little mischievous, and to -retaliate slightly for their constant meddling in our affairs. He saw -the point, flew into a rage, and sent for the landholders of the place -to have me put out of the house. The landholders came, and told him -they did not wish to have me disturbed, as they had sent for me to come -and take up a school; that the people preferred me to him; that he was -the one who had made the disturbance, not me, and that he must give way -and cease his interference. - -Not satisfied with that decision, the priest sent for the governor -and chief men of the town, who came, and with them a large crowd of -citizens. When the governor had heard both sides, he confirmed the -decision of the landholders, and called for a vote of the people to say -which of us should teach school. The vote was unanimous against the -priest. Then the governor told him that as the people did not want him -he must leave the house at once, and not disturb me or my school any -more, for none of the people had any use for him, as he had witnessed; -they had all voted against him, and all wanted Iatobo. - -At this, the priest took up his books and slates, and after accusing me -of everything that was mean and low, and calling the Mormon people the -vilest names, he withdrew. Later, he wrote a letter to Governor Bonard, -of Tahiti, and circulated it for signatures. We learned afterwards -that he got thirty signers. I believe that eleven were French traders, -and the other nineteen were natives whom the traders had in their -employment. We also learned, at the cost of inquiry, that the priest's -letter contained the charges upon which I was subsequently arrested. -But at that time we continued our school in peace. - -On September 12th I was feasted in royal style by non-members of the -Church. They called on one of the native Elders to deliver the address, -which he did in a most eloquent manner. I responded in the usual way, -and accepted their kind offering. The cook disposed of the spread to -the great satisfaction of the whole assembly, on such occasions all -present being directly interested in the distribution of the eatables. - -About this time the writer had a remarkable dream. He dreamed that God -appeared, and told him to go to a field of his earthly father's, and -replant where the birds and squirrels had destroyed the grain. Then his -father appeared and showed him where to begin the labor. When he had -been furnished with seed and a hoe, he went to work, and the replanting -was soon done. Then he was shown a field of wheat that, in the spring -of the year, was about eight inches high. The ground was quite wet, -and the grain was growing nicely. While he was gazing on the bright -prospects, a herd of cattle came in, breaking down the fence. They -seemed to trample everything they came to. Then he heard a voice say, -"Drive them out;" and as he attempted to do so, a fiery red bull made -a charge toward him so that it seemed impossible for him to escape -being gored to death; but as the animal lowered its head to make the -deadly thrust, the writer seized it by both horns and bore its head -to the earth. The animal was coming with such force that it turned a -somersault, both horns being sunk to the head in the earth, and the -bull's neck being broken. Then a black and white bull, very peculiarly -marked, came up in the same fierce manner, only to meet with a similar -fate. At that the herd cleared the field, but not until much damage had -been done. - -When he awoke, the writer felt that there was more trouble ahead for -him, but he did not know from what source it would come. Of the priests -who had given so much annoyance, one had fiery red hair, and another -was white and dark spotted, or freckle-faced. - - - -CHAPTER XXVIII. - -GO TO TEMARAIA--MIRACULOUS HEALINGS--CHILD ASSAILED BY AN EVIL -SPIRIT--STRANGE OCCURRENCE--GIFT OF SEA BISCUITS--PERFORM A -SURGICAL OPERATION--HAMMERING OUT TEETH--THE WRITER AS A SURGEON -AND DENTIST--ROUGHS DISTURB A MEETING--THEY ARE STRICKEN WITH -DEATH--FATAL SICKNESS AMONG THE PEOPLE--LOWER CLASSES OF THE NATIVES -AT A FEAST--THEIR REVERENCE FOR RELIGIOUS SERVICES AND PREACHERS--TWO -PARTIES OF NATIVES IN BATTLE ARRAY--FIGHTING AVERTED BY THE WRITER -ADDRESSING THE CONTENDING FACTIONS IN FAVOR OF PEACE--WARS AMONG -THE NATIVES--SOME OF THEIR PRACTICES--GATHERING AND KEEPING HUMAN -HEADS--CAUSES OF CANNIBALISM--CONVERSATION WITH ONE WHO HAD BEEN A -CANNIBAL--FLAVOR OF NATIVE AND WHITE MEN'S FLESH COMPARED--THE TASTIEST -PART OF THE HUMAN BODY. - -ON September 19th, Nihiru, a native brother, came with his canoe and -gave the writer a free passage to a village on the east end of the -island, called Tematahoa. We arrived in the evening and found a great -deal of sickness among the people. Just at dark on the 20th, a brother -named Pasai came from Temaraia with a sick man to have him anointed and -administered to. I attended to that and he was healed. - -On the 21st, Sunday, I preached on the signs, gifts of healing, etc. -There were about two hundred and fifty persons in the congregation. In -the evening I baptized and confirmed eighteen persons. Monday morning I -opened school with twenty-eight pupils; next day there were forty-one. - -On the following day, September 24th, a man and his wife came to me -with a child three and a half months old. They said that a short -time before their child had been taken sick in the night, and they -had talked to each other of having it anointed. At this, the child -spoke, and stated in plain words, like an adult, that it would not -be anointed. It said many words as plainly as any person could do. -From that time it grew worse to the day it was brought to me to be -administered to. The parents said they did not belong to the Church, -but desired to be baptized, for they believed the Gospel as the Mormon -Elders taught it. Their names were Tauahi and Taui. We baptized them -and one other person, then administered to the child, which lay limp -as if dead. We could not tell whether it was dead or alive. However, -when we took our hands off its head, it opened its eyes and looked as -if nothing was the matter. Then it nursed as any healthy child might. -There were many people gathered there, and all were astonished at what -had taken place. Finally the babe went to sleep as if nothing had been -wrong with it, and the whole company rejoiced at the great change that -had come. They said that truly it was the Almighty who had healed the -child through His servant. - -I turned and gave my attention to some writing that was necessary, and -the crowd became unusually quiet. In a few minutes a strong rushing or -movement among the people attracted my attention, and as I turned to -face the people there appeared to be an ashy paleness over the faces -of the whole assembly. All seemed terrified and speechless. At that -moment an aged couple, a man and his wife, entered the door and went -straightway to where the sleeping infant lay. They bowed down over it -and kissed it, and then went through some ancient heathen ceremony that -I could not understand. Then they walked direct to their canoes and -sailed across the lake to where they had come from. From that moment -the relatives of the child began to mourn and say that it would die; -and sure enough, inside of an hour it was a corpse. The parents were -asked why they had lost faith and given up the child. They said the old -people who had kissed the babe had power with evil spirits, and had -afflicted it in the first place; that their power had been broken by -the Priesthood, and they could not reunite it with the babe until they -could come and touch it; and when they had done that, the parents and -all concerned lost faith, and could not resist the influence that came -with the old pair of witches, as we think they would be called by some -civilized people. I must confess it was a strange thing to me. I had -never before witnessed anything so strange. - -It was on the 27th of September that the child died. On the same day a -Scotchman came and brought me a few sea biscuits. I was very thankful -to him for the favor, for bread was such a rarity in that part of the -country as to give a man some satisfaction in seeing it, even though -he might not have the pleasure of eating it. Thanks to the benevolent -Scotchman. I regret that I have forgotten his name. The next day I -preached on the resurrection of the dead, and baptized and confirmed -eighteen persons into the Church. - -Before leaving my reminiscences of this place, I will narrate two -incidents of some note to me. In one, we were called to see a man -who had been confined to his room the greater part of a year with a -swelling in his hip and thigh. On examination it was found that his -whole hip and thigh were filled with a thick and very noxious pus. -No one in the village dared to lance it, but when I told him his -condition he insisted that I should cut it whether it killed or cured. -I hesitated to comply with his wish until all his immediate relatives -had been consulted, and had given their assent. Otherwise, the -superstition of the people was so great that if in the operation the -patient succumbed the operator would have the gravest responsibility to -meet. But when all concerned had given sanction, and each had assumed -his or her responsibility, I performed the operation most successfully, -the wound discharging at least six pints of the most offensive matter, -and the patient being greatly relieved from his terrible suffering. The -operation was performed with a penknife, for in that country at that -time the only surgical instrument ever used for cutting was a shark's -tooth or a scale from a broken bottle. - -In this case the operation seemed to the people very little less than -a miracle. The news thereof spread all over the island, insomuch that -the operator acquired much practice in similar cases, such as swollen -jaws, boils, carbuncles, etc., and though he performed many operations, -he never received one cent as pay. If the people had toothache, he was -called on and performed the operation of extraction, in some instances -using a rusty nail, or any kind of an old iron, in place of a hammer -or mallet, to punch the tooth out. His best dentist tool was his rifle -bullet mold, using both ends for forceps. He never failed to give -satisfaction, for there were neither dentists nor surgeons in that part -of the world. - -The other incident, and a very singular one, which occurred at that -place was this: On one occasion seven very rough characters came into -our sacrament meeting. Some of them were said to be from an adjacent -island. They came, took seats at the back of the hall, and behaved -very rudely, making loud remarks and threats about the young ladies of -the choir. When they partook of the sacrament they said that when the -meeting was out they would administer ihe sacrament in a very different -manner to that in which the Mormons did it. Sure enough, at the close -of the meeting they pushed along through the congregation till they -came to the young ladies, and made wicked propositions to them, which -were very quickly spurned. Then they passed on, still making their -boasts of what they would do at nightfall. But they failed in carrying -out their threats, for in a very short time three of them were stricken -down with violent cramps, so terrible that all three were corpses -before the next morning. The other four had strong symptoms of the same -complaint, and inside of a week they were dead also. The people said it -was the power of evil spirits that had been sent to destroy them, that -they might not be permitted to carry out their wicked purposes. The -whole people were so excited that they shot off guns, blew horns, built -large fires, prayed and shouted in wild confusion, to drive away the -evil spirits; and many people were smitten with sickness and some died. - -On the 29th of September we sailed for Putuhara. The wind blew a gale, -and we had a fearful passage, but succeeded in reaching our destination -in safety, and in time for evening meeting, when we preached to a large -congregation. October 1st, I baptized and confirmed three persons. On -the same day the roughest people of the island assembled to feast and -dance. It seemed that to quarrel and fight was the principal number -on their program, and they appeared to indulge in everything that -was wicked. They killed pigs, chickens and dogs, roasted all alike, -and ate them with great relish. They also ran through the streets -with torchlights and firebrands, and the confusion was so great and -turbulent that it looked more like an actual battle of savages than a -dance. All ages participated, from the child of tender years up to the -old grayheaded man and woman, all of them two-thirds naked, and some of -the children entirely nude. - -I had seen Indians in their warpaint and dances, but this excelled in -confused savage deeds anything I ever beheld before. It seemed that -they never knew what order meant. Yet, strange to say, at the first -tap of the church bell they reminded me of a turkey gobbler which, -when in full strut, seeing a dog run at him, drops his feathers so -suddenly that he does not look like the same bird. So it was with that -savage-looking lot. At the first tap of the bell they became as silent -as if dead, then retreated to their hiding places, and not another yell -was heard from any of them, so great was their reverence for religious -services. At one time, though, it did seem that they could not be -silenced short of bloodshed, for there were two opposing parties mixed -up together. - -When the confusion was straightened out and peace apparently restored, -the parties separated, only to come together again later, with more -roast pigs, chickens and dogs. Then they ate of their feast until full, -when some unwise person of one party made an insulting remark about the -other party. Quickly the participants in the feast formed for battle, -armed with clubs and stones. At that moment one man from each party -ran for the ormatua (missionary). I went out and stepped up on to a -large chest, at the same time calling aloud for peace. Strange as it -may seem, although their clubs and stones were raised to strike fatal -blows, and the women and children were shrieking and crying, the moment -the natives recognized me among them they dropped their ugly weapons -and listened, and the spokesman of each party came forward to plead his -particular case. I caught the spirit of the situation and addressed -them briefly on the subject of peace, order and good will to all, and -exhorted them to leave their grievances to two or more of their cooler -and wiser men to settle. This they agreed to do; then they joined -forces and made an attack on the writer, not for blood, but of love and -respect. Men and women seized on to him, embracing him and shaking his -hands until he was nearly smothered and almost borne to the ground. - -I would not have it understood that this great reverence and respect -was shown to me for any superiority that I would claim; but it was a -man's calling as a minister of the Gospel which they held sacred before -the Lord. So long as he did not betray their confidence, the minister's -influence was almost unbounded, and with all their faults the natives -had many most estimable qualities. - -From this great excitement, and the accounts that he had heard from -time to time, the writer was led to inquire into the manner of warfare, -the traditions and the superstitions, as also into the causes for and -cannibalism of the islanders. Their wars usually had an origin in very -trivial causes, such as family quarrels, thefts, politics and disputes -over land or over fishing waters. At one time the islands had a dense -population, and the strong would go on the warpath for conquest, one -village or island being pitted against another. Their ariis (kings), -as they call them--I think it would be more proper to designate them as -chiefs, as the Indians do--attain power through brave and heroic acts, -and the great havoc they make among their adversaries. Their weapons -consisted chiefly of spears made from fish bone and hard wood, stones -and slings, clubs, and a rudely fashioned glove made by winding bark -and shark's teeth together in such a way as to have the teeth stand out -thickly on the inside of the hand. With this latter weapon they would -grapple with and tear out each other's entrails. They had rude drums -and some kind of whistles for musical instruments. - -In war, the two parties approach each other, dancing, boasting and -threatening, until within a few feet of each other, when they leap -at and onto one another in a hand-to-hand conflict, fighting as wild -beasts, to a finish. Their mothers, sisters, daughters and aunts -prepare themselves with strong baskets made from the cocoanut leaf, and -swing these on their backs; then (each with a sharp rock or a seashell -in her hand) they enter the battlefield in rear of their nearest male -relative. When the latter has dispatched his man or disabled him so -that the women can finish him, he engages another adversary, while the -woman beheads his victim, puts the head into her basket, swings it on -her back, and continues to follow her male relative to victory or death. - -When a war is over, and the victorious party returns home, each family -has a place for the captured heads, where they are put in rows, being -set some six or eight inches below the surface of the ground, and easy -of access. This was done so that when any question arose as to the -bravest family, or the member of a family to take the first place as -dictator or chief, the mori, or place of skulls may be visited and a -tally made, when the one with the highest number of skulls or heads is -given the coveted position. In these contests they also count the heads -taken by their ancestors, as far back as they can find them, no matter -how many generations they cover. Thus the family with the most skulls -gets the place sought, which is generally that of chief or king. - -When a battle is ended, the victors pass over the ground, often -bleeding from their wounds, and starved and well nigh exhausted from -being without food. The islanders have a tradition that whatever gives -them pain they should eat. So if they are wounded by a sharp stone -which by any means has fastened itself into a man's flesh, or by a -sliver, they extract and eat it, saying, "You are my enemy, you never -shall hurt me more." Thus they seem to satisfy the vicious spirit of -revenge. This strange proceeding may have had something to do with the -origin of cannibalism. Still, I am rather inclined to think it had its -beginning in starvation, and to that was added the spirit of revenge. -Thus the appetite was cultivated until, with very slight pretext, -human life became sacrificed to a depraved and vicious appetite. These -practices and others seemed to be justified in their savage minds, -insomuch that they did not scruple in gathering up the slain and -feeding upon them. - -His curiosity having been awakened in searching into heathen life, the -writer made inquiries at the most authentic sources of information for -further light on this custom. In one case he found an old lady who was -the last of the fifth generation back. Her intellect seemed bright, -although she could not open her eyes except with her fingers. When -questioned in regard to cannibalism, she lifted her eyelids and said, -"I have followed my fathers, brothers, husband and sons in battle, and -we ate our victims as we would eat pork or fish." When asked if she -had eaten white man's flesh, she replied, "Yes; we captured some white -men on a small schooner and ate them." The next inquiry was whether -there was any difference in the taste of the white man's and of the -native's flesh. "Yes," said she; "the white man's flesh is hard, tough -and salty, while the flesh of the native is sweet and tender." Then -came the question as to what part of the human body was preferable to -eat. She said the heel and the hand of a fourteen year-old girl were -the sweetest morsels of flesh she ever ate. Being asked if she did not -have feelings of remorse when they had committed actions like these, -her answer was: "Not a bit, it was in our days of heathendom; but now, -since the Gospel has come to us, we have no desire for anything of that -kind, though formerly we took pleasure in our practices, for our minds -were very dark." - - - -CHAPTER XXIX. - -HOLD CONFERENCE IN PUTUHARA--INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SAINTS--GO TO -OTAPIPI--OPPOSITION AT TEMARAIA--OFFICIALS BRIBED BY CATHOLIC PRIESTS ---ARRIVAL OF A FRENCH WARSHIP--THE WRITER IS ARRESTED WHILE EXPOUNDING -THE SCRIPTURES TO THE NATIVES--CAUSE OF ARREST IS FALSE ACCUSATION BY -CATHOLIC PRIESTS--I PLEAD NOT GUILTY--ORDERED TAKEN TO TAHITI--PAINFUL -PRISON EXPERIENCE--CANNIBALS IN CUSTODY--START FOR THE SHIP--SYMPATHY -OF THE NATIVES--HURRIED INTO THE SHIP'S BOAT--IN A SCHOOL OF -WHALES--A FRIGHTENED BOAT LOAD--ON BOARD THE WARSHIP--UNCOMFORTABLE -QUARTERS--QUESTIONABLE FRENCH COURTESY--AMONG COCKROACHES, FILTH, AND -INCONVENIENCES--SOFT SIDE OF A PLANK FOR A BED. - -LEAVING the revolting subject of cannibalism, I will return to our -missionary labors. Peace and quiet having been restored, the people -assembled in Putuhara on October 5th for conference, Elder James S. -Brown presiding. After reports of the various branches had been made, -as presiding Elder I reported the condition of the Church generally on -the island, made a few opening remarks, and called on the different -Elders to speak. One after another these referred to themselves and the -people generally having a desire for me to write home to the Church -authorities, to get a missionary to each village. All spoke of their -love for the Gospel, and their wish to have it preached on all the -adjacent islands. There was such enthusiasm among the people that it -seemed unwise to hold a lengthy conference. The zeal of the people -there was such that it well nigh drove them into a frenzy; so after -the business of the conference had been done, I addressed them on the -object of a house of worship, that it was a place in which to worship -the true and living God, and not a dancehouse or a place to have -lawsuits, quarreling, fighting, and worshiping of idols in, as they had -been doing. A motion was made and carried that our building be kept -exclusively for a house of worship. Thus everything else was forbidden -by the landholders. At the close of the conference eight persons were -baptized and confirmed. - -The schools of the different villages met on October 6th, to read and -spell in friendly contest. October 7th, the school in Putuhara had -increased to one hundred pupils. That day the rougher element of the -place assembled again in their wild dancing; they sold their jewelry -for fat dogs and pigs. On the 11th, the non-Mormon women of the place -prepared a great feast for us, and turned it over with pride, saying, -"Here is a token of our love for you, and we desire you to accept it -and remain in our town and teach us of the Lord." - -We preached on Sunday, the 12th, and on that day also baptized and -confirmed five persons. Next day, school was opened with one hundred -pupils. A great deal of sickness was reported in the town. On the 14th, -school was continued in good order, and we departed in a small canoe -for Otapipi, where we found the people pleased to see us. The school -there was intact. Next day I wrote to Elder Alviras Hanks that I had -heard of his having been cast away on another island. - -Sunday, October 19th, I preached, and baptized two persons. On the -24th I went to Temaraia, where I met with more opposition from the -Catholic priest, with regard to school matters, and learned that he had -bribed Governor Telidha, also Parai, the mouthpiece of the town, as -he was called. Having them for his backing, the priest was very bold -and defiant, and no doubt thought that by keeping up an excitement the -Catholics would gain some support for the foul and false charges which -he had made against me. By the means I have named, the priest got a -decision against us, and for the first time we were compelled to yield, -but much against the people's desires. Still, all settled down from -high excitement to peace and quiet, till October 28th, when the French -frigate _Durance_ made its appearance northwest of the island. - -The warship had on board the governor's aide de camp, who landed at -Tuuhora with his guards. On the 29th he crossed the lagoon to Temaraia, -where we were. At 8 p.m., while I was engaged in expounding the -scriptures to a few of the natives, in came a French gen d' arme and a -native officer. They presented me with a warrant, which, being in the -French language, I could not read. The officers stood for a minute or -so, when I gave them to understand that I was unable to decipher the -document. Thereupon the native officer said that it meant that I was -to appear before the governor's aide de camp, down at the stockade, at -9 o'clock, and if I did not come willingly, they had orders to drag me -there like a dog. They being armed with swords and pistols, I thought -it wisest to go willingly, especially as there was no chance to do -otherwise. The officers were quite haughty, yet somewhat nervous, for -they had been told that I was prepared to make a strong resistance. Of -course, I accompanied them readily and without a word, and was soon -ushered into the august presence of the governor's aide. I found him -seated in a small room, in which were four or five other officers and -a few soldiers armed with muskets and cutlasses. When I entered, the -interpreter arose, read a long list of charges, and asked for my plea. -I answered not guilty to each accusation. - -It will be remembered by the reader that when I first landed on the -island I sketched, at the request of some of the natives, a rough -outline of the United States, pointing out my birthplace, also Salt -Lake City, and where gold had been discovered in California. From that -time the Catholic priests had conspired to entrap me, to break my -influence, and to close my schools. - -The charges against me began, as near as I now remember them, and -with memory refreshed from brief notes taken at the time, by an -assertion that I had subverted the laws of the French protectorate; -had interfered with government schools; had hoisted the American flag; -had enrolled some three thousand men for the American government, to -be controlled by the Mormon Church; had armed the men; was a civil -engineer of no mean ability; had ordered the people to demolish some -of the towns, and rebuild with better fortifications; that my walk -and general movements indicated military ability, and undoubtedly I -had been brought up at a military school in the United States; that -I had mapped out plans of defense; had great power with the native -people, and was capable of doing much mischief in the country. These, -and many other charges of a frivolous nature, were in the list, all of -them without the slightest foundation in fact, except that I had much -influence with the people. - -I stated that I proposed to prove myself innocent of every one of the -accusations made. To this the officer made answer that they had the -most positive proof to establish the charges, which were very serious. -He gave me two hours to settle my business, and see friends, when I -would have to return to the stockade and stay where the governor's aide -thought proper. The next day I was to be taken on board the man-of-war. -and go as a prisoner to Tahiti, for trial. - -Upon receiving this information, I claimed the right to be tried where -I was accused of having committed the offense, and where I had the -witnesses in my behalf. "No;" said the officer, "your crime is too -great to be tried before any less authority than the governor." I asked -to have witnesses summoned, and the officer inquired if I had any way -of taking them to Tahiti. He knew, of course, that I was helpless in -that regard, and being so answered, told his men to take me in charge. -Accordingly, they marched me to where the arrest had been made. - -I gathered up some of my effects, bade goodbye to my friends, and -returned to the stockade. There I was ordered to a seat under an open -shed till daylight, being guarded by two lustful police, who took -unwarranted liberty with some lewd females, behaving most shamefully -in the prisoner's presence. My friends brought bedding for me and -attempted to spread it, but were rudely driven away by the guards, who -took turns at pacing in front of me, while the other interested himself -with the females spoken of, who were void of shame. - -That night I was mortified and disgusted as I never had been before -with peace officers. At last the long night wore past, and dawn -appeared. Then close to my right, in a stockade, I saw about fifteen -native cannibals, who could barely hide their nakedness. They had been -captured by French soldiers on some island in the north, and were -accused of killing, upon different occasions, the white crews of three -small schooners. They were also charged with eating their victims, as -well as robbing and scuttling the schooners. - -I took my last glance at those fierce-looking monsters just at sunrise -on October 30th, when I was called before the aide de camp to sign my -name four times in English, and four times in the Tahitian language. -Then I was ordered into a filthy old boat that was used to collect oil. -The boat's crew were rough and dirty, and scoffed and jeered at me and -otherwise made the sail across the lagoon to Tuuhora as disagreeable as -they could. - -When we landed at Tuuhora it was among about one hundred and fifty -French marines. They, too, must jeer, and satisfy their curiosity by -gathering around and impertinently staring me in the face, jabbering -together and laughing, while the natives met me with sympathy expressed -in their countenances. Two soldiers kept close to me, however, and did -not allow much opportunity for conversation with anyone. I was served -with a bowl of fish broth and a small piece of bread, and when this -was eaten I was ordered to the landing, to one of the boats from the -warship. By this time there were probably five hundred native people -gathered. These followed to the boat, declaring that where their -missionary went they would go, too, and saying, "It is the Catholic -priests who have done this, with their lies." - -The news of the arrest had been heralded during the night to every -village, and boats and canoes were coming in, laden with sympathizing -friends, not only Church members, but full as many that did not belong -to the Church. They said, "E mea hama teie" (a shameful thing, this). -The excitement became so general that the guard was increased to about -twenty armed men, and the prisoner was urged to hurry into the boat. -As the water was from shoe-top to knee-deep between the shore and the -boat, I attempted to take off my shoes and turn my pants up, but I was -forbidden to stop, and was crowded into the vessel. When I reached -it, it was full of sympathizing men, women and children, weeping and -accusing the Catholic priests. Fully five hundred people lined the -shore, some with rolls of bedding, while others were laden down with -baskets of cocoanuts. - -When the guards arrived with their prisoner, the boat was ordered -cleared, and as the native people were rather slow to obey the command, -the soldiers pricked them with their cutlasses and bayonets. I was -urged into the boat, which was soon manned, and the boatmen soon pulled -from the shore, while many scores of people wept aloud, shrieking out -my native name, "Iatobo, Iatobo; no te Catholic te i a ne peapea" -(James, James, of the Catholics this trouble). They waved handkerchiefs -as long as we could see them. - -As the boat was going out to the ship, it ran into what seemed to us to -be hundreds or even thousands of whales. For a while the sea seemed to -be black with them. At the same time the boatmen took in their oars and -became pale and still as death, lest the monsters should take fright -and knock us into eternity and the boat into splinters. The oarsmen -were better aware of the danger than I was, and were ashy pale. Indeed, -it may have been the same with me for aught I know, for I did not see -my own face as I saw theirs. But I had been where cattle stampeded, -where the wild buffalo was rampant, or wild mustangs were charging by -thousands on the plains by night and by day; had been surrounded by -packs of fierce and hungry wolves; had been in the brush when grizzly -bear were thick around, or when rattlesnake and deadly viper hissed -in my ears; and I had been chased by savage Indians; still I do not -remember a time when I felt that every hair on my head was trying -to let on end more than I did for a few moments as these great sea -monsters glided past so near that we could almost put our hands on -their long, black backs, while they shot by swiftly, spouting the briny -spray almost in our faces. The thought of the loss of the boat did not -concern me so much as it did to think how easy it was for a whale, at -one stroke of its monster tail, to make of us convenient shark's food. -While in this truly great peril, minutes seemed hours to us, and when -it passed we breathed freely again, and soon gained the great warship -that was lying off shore, for there was no harbor or anchorage at that -island. - -I was next required to try a new experiment, to me, that of climbing -a rope ladder up the side of a ship as the latter rolled and pitched -in the waves. After a struggle I succeeded in reaching the deck in -safety, there to be surrounded by the marines as though I had been a -wild beast. When their curiosity had been satisfied, I was ordered down -on to what was called Swaltses' battery, the gun deck. There I found -that as I walked my head came in uncomfortable contact with the beams -of the upper deck, and at each one I had to duck my head. This greatly -amused the marines, and they got a mopstick, a broomstick, or any kind -of a stick. Some would press the sticks on the sides of their noses, -while others held theirs back of them, poking their sticks up so as to -hit the beams above. Then they would form into a squad and march by and -duck heads with me, while some were giving commands which I supposed -meant, "Left, duck, left duck"--at any rate, that was the action. Then -they would shout and laugh. - -Soon meal time came, and I was conducted into the hold of the ship, -and there assigned to a small, filthy room. There was an old chair in -it, and a bunk without bedding. The room swarmed with cockroaches, -which seemed to be thicker than flies. I was served with a bowl of fish -broth, and one small loaf of bread and a bottle of wine, for the day's -rations. Then an officer called me to follow him to the upper deck and -to the bow of the ship, where he made me understand, by unmistakable -motions, that I was to use the chains for a water closet. In disgust I -remembered that I was among Frenchmen, the most stylish, the proudest, -and the most fashionable people in the world. I was an American, -"honored" with two uniformed and armed French attendants, who never -left me alone only when I was in my room, following me everywhere, -allowing none to obstruct my path, and even being careful to keep me -from falling out through the portholes, as, when I leaned over a big -gun to look out upon the deep, they would take me by the arm, lead me -away, and show me the big hole in the deck, and my room. - -By this time the writer began to understand French courtesy, under some -conditions, and to realize his own situation. He asked himself what the -outcome would be, he reviewed every action performed on the island of -Anaa, and could not see wherein he had trenched upon anybody's rights -or done anything against the law. He failed to discover one intentional -or other wrong; so he felt to trust in the Lord, and made himself as -contented as possible, though he found the boards in the berth as hard -as American boards, notwithstanding that they were French lumber. - - - -CHAPTER XXX. - -VOYAGE TO PAPEETE--IN A TAHITIAN DUNGEON--CRUEL TREATMENT--WRITE TO -FRIENDS--KINDNESS OF THE AMERICAN HOTEL KEEPER--BROUGHT BEFORE THE -GOVERNOR--FALSE CHARGES READ, AND PLEA OF NOT GUILTY ENTERED--PERJURED -TESTIMONY AGAINST ME--FORBIDDEN TO LOOK AT, OR EVEN CROSS-EXAMINE -WITNESSES--SECRECY OF THE ALLEGED TRIAL--DEMAND MY RIGHTS AS -AN AMERICAN CITIZEN--CONFUSION OF THE GOVERNOR--RETURNED TO MY -CELL--AMERICAN CONSUL TAKES UP MY CASE--GIVES BONDS THAT I WILL LEAVE -THE PROTECTORATE--ELDERS AND FRIENDS CALL ON ME--MY VISITORS ALLOWED TO -SAY BUT LITTLE, AND SOMETIMES EXCLUDED--DECISION OF THE GOVERNOR THAT I -MUST LEAVE THE SOCIETY ISLANDS--FAIR TRIAL REFUSED ME--LETTER FROM THE -AMERICAN CONSUL--TAKEN TO THE CONSUL'S OFFICE--ADVISED TO LEAVE--ELDERS -DECIDE THAT I SHOULD GO OUTSIDE OF THE FRENCH PROTECTORATE--SET SAIL -FROM PAPEETE. - -ON November 3rd, 1851, we set sail for Tahiti, and on the 6th made the -port of Papeete, having had a rough voyage. When the ship anchored, a -police boat came alongside, and the prisoner was ordered to try his -skill at climbing down the rope ladder. He promptly obeyed orders, and -soon found himself locked up in a cobblestone dungeon, six by eight -feet, quite damp, and so dark that not a ray of light penetrated it -anywhere. For his bed he had a board dressed out like a washboard. He -had a good mattress and pillows and blankets of his own, but they were -locked up in an adjoining room and he was denied the use of them. What -the object was he never learned, unless it was done to punish him. He -remained in that condition fourteen hours out of the twenty-four, and -was fed on bread and water that was very filthy. The water was kept -in a small keg in a corner of his cell, and was thick with a green, -moss-like substance. In an opposite corner was a different kind of -French water closet to that he had on shipboard--a keg which was never -emptied during the prisoner's stay there. Unlike the water keg, it was -replenished often. As to the result of such conditions in that hot -climate, I leave it to the reader to conjecture; for I had enough of it -without dwelling further on the subject. - -On November 7th I wrote letters to Elders Thomas Whitaker and Julian -Moses, the brethren who had been assigned to labor on Tahiti. On the -8th, one Mr. Lampher, proprietor of the American hotel in Papeete, -sent me a prime dinner. It was received with thanks, and was duly -appreciated. - -On the 10th I was called out by the turnkey; immediately an armed -soldier took position on either side of me, while a sergeant stepped -directly in front, then moved three steps in advance, and gave the -command to forward march. In this order we passed two lines of -sentinels and went to the governor's mansion, where we met another -officer, who commanded a halt, and I was directed to be seated for -thirty minutes. Then I was called into the governor's office, where I -was confronted by his excellency and seven officers. They were in full -uniform and had sidearms. Each had in his hands what appeared to be -notes. I was at once ordered to be seated, and the very profligate son -of a Protestant professor acted as interpreter, read the long list of -charges spoken of, and asked for my plea thereto. I answered not guilty. - -Then the trial began. They placed on the witness stand a native named -Tania, who had been admitted recently to the Catholic church. He -had been posted in what he should say, but seemingly had some pangs -of conscience, for when he stood up he turned his eyes toward me, -then to the court, and back to me, and answered the questions in -a hesitating way, his confusion being so great that the governer, -through the interpreter, ordered me not to look at the witness, as -he said my countenance was so fierce and vivid as to baffle the most -substantial witness. I was not permitted to ask a question, not even to -cross-examine the witness. - -The next testimony came from a man who had been brought to Papeete -a prisoner, but who had been discharged without the formality of a -hearing, evidently that they might have him for a witness against -me. Both he and the preceding witness were put on the stand without -being sworn. Not a single spectator was permitted to be present, so I -concluded that if it was a court at all that was trying me it was a -military court martial. - -When I saw how onesidedly things were going, I arose and asked the -court what right it had to try me with closed doors, not even allowing -me the opportunity to defend myself. I told them I was an American -citizen, and claimed my rights as such under existing treaties and -international laws. I quoted law that I had never read or heard -mentioned, for it was given to me of the Lord in the hour that I had -need. I can never forget the expression on the faces of those officers. -Not one of them would look me in the eye. As I spoke, every face was -turned downward. At the conclusion of my remarks I was marched back to -the filthy cell, without another word being said. - -About this time Mr. W. H. Kelly, the American consul, called on the -governor, and on making inquiries about me and my alleged crime and -arrest, was told that I was a very dangerous man, a man learned in -treaties and international laws. "Why," said the governor to Mr. Kelly, -"he can quote more of them than my officers, and he has great power -and influence with the native people. He is undoubtedly a military -man of no mean ability. For these reasons he cannot be permitted to -take up his residence as a minister under the French protectorate." I -learned the foregoing from Mr. W. H. Kelly, who told me that he had to -sign bonds to the amount of fifty thousand francs, and that sum would -be forfeited if I did not leave the protectorate by the first vessel -sailing from port, or if I was known to preach another discourse under -the French government. - -That evening Elder T. Whitaker called at my cell with two pies for me. -We were allowed to speak but few words to each other. When the prison -door had been locked again, I wrote to Elder B. F. Grouard, who, as I -learned from Brother Whitaker, had arrived in port. November 11th, my -old friend Pahe called with a basket of fruit, which was admitted, but -the giver was permitted to say scarcely a word. - -I had a call on the 12th from Elders S. A. Dunn and Julian Moses. Their -short visit gave me much satisfaction, as they brought news from home. -On the 13th Elder Grouard and some other friends called with some -food, but they were not admitted, the food being passed in to me by a -murderer. - -On November 14th I was called before the governor's aide de camp, who -said, "I suppose you have heard the decision of the governor and his -council?" I told him no. He then said, "They have decided that you must -leave the protectorate by the first vessel sailing from port, or you -will be detained until you are willing to comply with that decision." -I asked if they intended to send me away without a fair trial. He said -yes; that the governor had it in his power to send out anyone that -raised a disturbance in the country. I asked him to show that I had -raised a disturbance. He said, "It does not need proof, for the Mormon -missionaries have caused the government a great deal of trouble, and -the decision is that you must go by the first vessel leaving port, or -remain in prison till you agree to do so." With this, I was satisfied -that there was no redress for the wrong that was being done me. - -I was then marched back to the cell, where I received a letter from W. -H. Kelly, the American consul. It read as follows: - -"CONSULATE OF THE UNITED STATES, TAHITI, - -November 14, 1851. - -"_Mr. James Brown_: - -"DEAR SIR:--Having been informed, through the governor of the -protectorate, that you are a state prisoner in Papeete, charged with -the crime of rebellion and attempting to subvert the laws of the -protectorate established on the island of Anaa, I am bound to furnish -the honorable secretary of state of the United States with all charges -and punishments to which the citizens of the United States may render -themselves amenable, under the laws of the countries in which they may -reside. - -"You will therefore oblige me by furnishing me with an unbiased -and clear statement of the facts connected with your arrest and -imprisonment. I do not wish to know what has been told to you, or of -what you have heard from others, but simply the truth of the whole -transaction. - -"This letter will be forwarded to his excellency, Governor Bonard, who -will, through the proper channel, have it forwarded to you. - -"I remain, sir, your obedient servant, - -"W. H. KELLY, - -"United States Consul." - -Elder B. F. Grouard kindly came down and wrote my reply to Mr. Kelly. -This was on November 15th. The same day I was called out into the yard, -when a sergeant and two soldiers took me in charge and marched me along -a back alley to the rear of the consul's office. Then the sergeant -stepped forward and notified Mr. Kelly that they had brought their -prisoner to him, and without further ceremony the officers disappeared -by the same alley by which they came. - -Mr. Kelly welcomed me to his office, and congratulated me on regaining -my liberty. Then he told me of his visit to Governor Bonard, the -conversation they had had, and about his signing the bonds for my -release. He said, "Mr. Brown, the French authorities are afraid of you. -They say that you are a highly educated man, and that you are capable -of doing much mischief in the country. Now you have your liberty in and -about my office, but you must not go off alone in any by-place, for -the French are a very excitable people, and they will watch every move -that you make, and would shoot you if they could find you alone in the -brush or where they could do it without being detected. Now, I have -got horses, and will accompany you to any place you may wish to go, to -visit your friends or to settle up what business you may have to do. -But you must not be caught alone, for the French fear that you could -raise an army and cause much trouble. As your friends are in town, you -and they had better have a consultation here in my office, and see what -you can do." - -Accordingly, the Elders came into the consul's office, and together -with him said the best thing they thought could be done was that I -should go on board the little schooner _Ravai_, and that they get -it ready for sea as quickly as possible, so as to leave port before -any other vessel did, for if I did not go the fifty thousand francs -would be forfeited. The schooner was the vessel owned by the Saints -of Tubuoi, and commanded by Captain B. F. Grouard; it was bound for a -cruise among the Tuamotu group of islands before going to the island of -Raivavai, four hundred miles southeast of Tahiti, and outside of the -protectorate. It was thought that we could make the cruise intended, -and then go on to Raivavai without any danger of forfeiting the pledge. -Conformably with this conclusion, the vessel was got ready, and on the -17th we sailed from Papeete. - - - -CHAPTER XXXI. - -LEAVING TAHITI UNDER THE ORDER OP BANISHMENT--SUPPLY OF PROVISIONS -EXHAUSTED--CAUGHT IN A CALM--SUFFERING FROM LACK OF FOOD--REACH -TUBUOI--GO ASHORE UPON INVITATION OF THE QUEEN--SAIL FOR RAIVAVAI--MEET -ELDER PRATT THERE--LEFT ALONE ON THE ISLAND--SAVAGE CHARACTER OF THE -NATIVES--THE GOVERNOR A FRIEND--VISIT FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE--PEOPLE -GENERALLY UNWILLING TO RECEIVE THE GOSPEL--COUNCIL DECIDES THAT I MUST -LEAVE THE ISLAND OR BE KILLED--A TIME OF EXCITEMENT--STORM PASSES FOR -AWHILE--BAPTIZE TWENTY PERSONS--NOTED CHIEF AND THE HEIRESS TO THE -THRONE JOIN THE CHURCH--MORE BITTERNESS AND EXCITEMENT--TWO PARTIES OF -NATIVES MEET TO ENGAGE IN BATTLE--MANAGE TO RECONCILE THEM AND PREVENT -BLOODSHED--FURTHER THREATS AGAINST THE MORMONS--SOME CHURCH MEMBERS -FEEL TO RETALIATE, BUT ARE RESTRAINED--PASSENGERS ARRIVE WITH FALSE -AND SCANDALOUS STORIES ABOUT THE MORMONS--PERSECUTION INCREASES--THE -FEW SAINTS ON THE ISLAND BECOME SORROWFUL AND DISCOURAGED--PROTESTANT -MINISTERS ADVISE EXPULSION OF THE SAINTS--RENEWAL OF THE FAITH AND ZEAL -OF THE CHURCH MEMBERS. - -AS we were leaving the Tahitian harbor we encountered a strong -headwind, and beat our way against wind and waves until our little -schooner became somewhat disabled. Provisions began to be scarce, and -everything seemed to be against us. Finally we changed our course, -heading for Tubuoi. When we got within about eighty miles of that -island, our food supply became exhausted; we had not one mouthful on -board, and were in a dead calm for some time. Then a gentle breeze -sprang up and wafted us to port, where we arrived on November 29th. -Before this relief, however, we suffered considerably from lack of food. - -I supposed that I had to remain on board the schooner until it was -ready to sail for Raivavai; but when Pitamai Vehene, the queen, heard -that I had been banished she came off in her own canoe and invited -me to go ashore with her, saying, "This is my island, and the French -have no right here. I will be responsible for all the trouble that may -arise." As the brethren and general authorities of the island thought -it was safe to do so, I accepted the invitation, going ashore in the -queen's canoe, and remained on the island till December 8th. Then I -boarded the little schooner again, and we started for Raivavai, where -we landed on the 9th, and found President Pratt in good health. - -On December 10th, Elder Pratt sailed away in the schooner, leaving me -to take his place in presiding over the interests of the Church on the -island. Brother Pratt's friends became my friends, and gave me food and -shelter. There were eight Church members on the island; all the rest of -the inhabitants, three hundred and eighty-three in number, opposed us, -many of them being the most savage and rudest I had met--in fact, they -were scarce removed from cannibalism. Some of them did not hesitate -to tell of their experiences in eating human flesh, and that they had -sacrificed infant children to their idols. They showed the coals before -their heathen gods, where they had roasted their babes. Some of them -felt proud to relate these things, saying it was in their heathenish -days, before the Gospel had come to their land, but now they thought it -very bad, and they had no disposition to repeat their evil deeds. - -I was shown to the house of Governor Fate, who received me very kindly. -He and his wife had received the Gospel on Anaa, and although he was -the legal heir to the throne, as they called it, through his joining -the Church he had lost much of his influence. But he was a very good -man, rendering me all the assistance in his power, while I visited -from house to house, trying to make the acquaintance of the people. I -went to every home on the island, endeavoring to inform the people on -the Gospel, but they were unwilling to give heed, and treated me with -marked indifference, often passing by and looking as surly as mad bulls. - -The island was not to exceed fourteen miles in circumference, its high -and very rugged peaks penetrating the clouds, which nearly always were -hanging over and about. The mountains were so steep as to defy all but -the wild goats, of which there were some hundreds among the cragged -rocks. It was said that the beginning of the existence of these animals -on the island was that a sea captain had turned three or four pairs of -them loose some years before, and they had increased to hundreds. - -Having satisfied my curiosity by traveling over and around the island, -visiting the ancient places of worship and seeing the heathen gods and -places of skulls and sacrifice, I again called at every house, trying -to become more friendly and sociable with the people; but the same -stolid feelings still prevailed. I attended their meetings, told them -my business in the land, and asked the privilege of preaching to them. -Part were favorable, and part were not. I baptized a few, and that -caused much excitement. - -A council was called to adopt some way by which the islanders could -get rid of Mormonism and the American plant, as they called me. Some -proposed to fasten the "plant" on a log, and tow it out to sea, where -the sharks would eat it, while others suggested burning or making a -roast of me. - -At last the matter was carried so far that it was decided that I must -leave the island or be killed. I learned that they had just about -decided on the latter course, so I hastened to go before the council to -try and allay their feelings, if possible, and appease their wrath, but -I found it utterly impossible to reason with them. My presence, instead -of having a conciliatory effect, created the wildest confusion. I was -confronted by a native called Tabate, who was a very stout, heavy set -man, and who exclaimed, "I will slay you!" At that moment my friend, -Governor Fate, stepped between us, and some of the more peaceably -disposed took hold of Tabate, while my friends insisted that I leave -the house to save bloodshed, saying that Tabate was a very desperate -man, but if I left the room they thought the council could restrain -him. Accordingly I withdrew with my friends. The council had a hot time -of it for awhile, but finally the more consistent party prevailed, so -that the matter passed over for the time being. Still, a bad feeling -rankled in their bosoms, and I could hear threats that the more rabid -party was going to have a fat missionary for a roast. - -Although this bitterness continued with many of the people, I baptized -some twenty souls, and blessed several infants. I also administered to -the sick, and, as I can now remember, all were healed but one child, -which died of hip disease, it being a mere skeleton when I was called. - -Other councils were held to see what could be done to get rid of the -"plant Mormonism, from America," before it spread over the island and -became master. But the friends and relatives of those who belonged to -the Church would oppose any harsh measures, saying, "Wait until our -missionaries of the English church come and we hear what they say." - -Now, Elder Pratt had baptized one man who was seventy-five or eighty -years of age. He was one of the first born, and his feet had never been -wet in salt water. His name was Tauteni (thousand), because he had -slain so many people in war, and he could count skulls in his mori or -place of skulls, with the best of them. He was well acquainted with the -taste of human flesh; had been a great high priest of the natives in -their heathenish days, and was supposed to have great influence with -the spirits of men. He had a grand-daughter who was said to be the -heir to the throne. This girl was brought forward by the old man for -baptism. He had reared her, and her parents being willing, I baptized -her. This created great excitement and another council was held, where -feelings ran so high that it was very hard to conciliate our opponents. -But the old man told them that it was his and her father's fault, and -not the missionary's, that she was baptized. The girl, whose name was -Teraa, also declared that it was by her wish and not mine that she -became a member of the Church. This cooled them down a little, but -occasionally local difficulties would arise, and the natives would take -sides and arm themselves for war. One time I heard the shrieks of the -women, and the warwhoops of and commands given among the men. - -Although, one day when I was stopping at a village called Tatake, I -had heard that there was going to be a battle fought, such rumors were -so frequent that I did not pay much attention thereto till I heard the -warwhoops and shouts. Then I jumped up, ran out, and beheld thirty to -forty men coming from the upper village, Anatomu. They were armed with -muskets, and were in their war costumes, dancing and going through the -manoeuvres peculiar to the natives just before going into an action. -At the same time another party was approaching from the inland village -of Atibona. These, too, were ready, and with their drums, whistles and -shrieks made quite a showing. Still there were some among them inclined -to conciliation rather than war. - -With my friends, I went out and plead with the two parties to be -reconciled, and finally we prevailed so that both bodies of men retired -without fighting, and a few of each party met and shook hands, some of -both parties seeming friendly to us for a time. - -For a short time after this we had comparative quiet, yet threats came -about the Mormons, and there was talk of taxing us for the support -of the Protestant church. Our brethren claimed rights in the school -and meeting houses, but were refused these; then they threatened to -burst open the houses, and came to me to get my sanction to do so; -but I could not consent to being a party to such a movement, knowing -that would give the enemy the pretext they wanted, in order to carry -out their threats. My party was not pleased with my position, and -threatened to break in the houses anyway, and assert their rights to -occupancy. I told them that if they did I would disown them; that they -could not be my brethren if they indulged in anything of the kind, as -it was for us to be on the side of peace and defense, and not to be -aggressors. Finally they said they would obey my counsel. Then things -passed along more smoothly for a time. - -Soon a schooner came from the island of Ruruta, with about one hundred -passengers on board. They brought the alleged news that all the -American Elders had left Tubuoi, and were going home. These passengers -also seemed to have been well posted in all the old slanders about the -Church, and with many new ones about the Elders. These slanders were -industriously circulated by the new comers, who said that the people -of Tubuoi were glad that the Mormons had left their land. From these -stories, and the persecutions the Saints had endured on the island, -the few Church members grew sorrowful and discouraged. When I went -from Anatomu to Tatake, I found two of the native brethren and two -sisters very sad, and as soon as we met they gave vent to their pent-up -feelings, wept bitterly, and said that I had to leave the island, and -they intended to follow me, no matter where I went. I told them not to -fear, and tried to pacify them as best I could. - -At our next appointment for a meeting there were but five out of -thirty attended. This seemed strange, for there always had been a -full attendance; but now everyone was sad and gloomy. The spirit of -mobocracy seemed to thrive on the filthy slanders that had come by -the Ruruta schooner. Meetings were called and threats made. Clouds of -darkness lowered and filled the atmosphere; the spirit of death seemed -to hover around, for the boisterousness of the people had given way to -a sullen, murderous disposition, more to be dreaded than when there was -abundance of noise and threats. - -At this time two young Protestant ministers came and made three or four -inflammatory speeches, telling the people that they had admitted a wolf -into the fold, and if they did not get rid of him the ministers would -not call again. "Drive him off, and pluck up that American plant, or -it will overshadow your land, and control you," said they. Thus the -wild and heathenish passion was fanned into a lively flame of renewed -persecution. Yet, strange to say, when the spirit of death seemed to -rest most heavily upon us, the brethren and sisters returned to me with -renewed zeal, and all but two men stood firm thereafter. - - - -CHAPTER XXXII. - -PEOPLE GATHER AT A FEAST, AND TO DECIDE WHAT TO DO WITH THE -MORMONS--THREATS TO HAVE ROAST MISSIONARY--SAINTS HOLD PRAYER AND -TESTIMONY MEETING--KEPT AWAKE ALL NIGHT--COUNCIL OF NATIVES DECIDES -TO ROAST AND EAT ME--FIRE IS BUILT--MEN SENT TO DRAG ME TO THE -COUNCIL--PROMISES OF PRESIDENTS BRIGHAM YOUNG AND WILLARD RICHARDS COME -TO MY MIND--ALL FEAR IS BANISHED--SAINTS AND THEIR ENEMIES ORDERED -TO SEPARATE--ALL BUT TWO MORMONS STAND BY ME--SUBLIME COURAGE OF A -NATIVE AND HIS WIFE--THE CHARGE AGAINST ME--I APPEAL TO THE BIBLE, -BUT OUR ENEMIES REFUSE TO BE GUIDED BY THE LAW OF GOD--NOTIFIED OF -THE DECISION THAT I AM TO BE BURNED--SPIRIT OF THE LORD RESTS UPON ME -IN GREAT POWER, INSPIRING ME TO DEFY OUR ENEMIES--SPIRIT OF CONFUSION -ENTERS OUR FOES--THEY QUARREL AND FIGHT WITH EACH OTHER--DIFFICULTY IN -RESTRAINING CHURCH MEMBERS--DELIVERANCE WHICH THE LORD WROUGHT OUT FOR -ME--I AM ALLOWED TO PROCEED UNMOLESTED--MEET A MEMBER OF THE COUNCIL -WHICH CONDEMNED ME TO DEATH--HIS TESTIMONY THAT A PILLAR OF LIGHT -DESCENDED FROM HEAVEN AND RESTED ON ME, FILLING THEM WITH FEAR--NO MORE -ANTI-MORMON COUNCILS--NATIVES SHOW NO DISPOSITION TO RECEIVE THE -GOSPEL. - -ABOUT the 5th of May, 1852, the whole people were called to assemble -at the village of Tatake and prepare a feast, and at the same time to -decide definitely what to do with the Mormon minister and his pipis -(disciples). Everything was excitement. The young braves came armed -with muskets, shouting and yelling, saying they were going to have a -fat roast for tomorrow, while the old councillors, twenty-five or -thirty in number, came with slow, quiet steps and grave countenances, -and filed into the schoolhouse just at dark. Then the people gathered, -loaded down with roast pig, and fruit, fish and poultry. They kindled -fires and began shouting, singing and dancing. - -Soon the young braves were dancing around the house that they were in; -for by this time every member of the Church had come to one place. -The mob seemed to be fully enthused with the spirit of murder, as -they shouted, "Tomorrow we will have a fat young missionary for a -roast!" Just then they fired a salute, seemingly under the foundation -or sill of the house--a frame building. Then they commenced to tear -down the post and pole fence that enclosed the premises. This fence, -together with other wood, was piled up in a heap, as people in timbered -countries stack timber to burn it off their land. Then the natives -covered the wood with coral rock, as if they were going to burn a lime -kiln. They kept up a continual howl all the night long, firing their -guns, singing their war songs, and burning their camp-fires. - -While this was going on, we held prayer and testimony meeting, never -sleeping a moment the whole night. Many times we could hear the crowd -outside boasting what a fine, fat missionary roast they were going to -have enanahe (tomorrow.) - -Daylight came, and the village was all alive with people, as in -America on the Fourth of July, at a barbecue. Soon the feasting began. -The council had been all night in deciding what they would do with -the Mormons and their minister. The provisions at the feast were -apportioned to each village according to its numbers, and subdivided -among the families, so that a full allowance was made for the Mormon -pupu (party). They sent to me the portion of ten men, saying: "Here, -this is for you, Iatobo (James), eat it and get fat for the roast," -laughing contemptuously as they did so. By this time the whole people -were in high glee, eating, drinking, talking, laughing and jeering, as -if all hands were bent on pleasure only. When the feasting was over, -all became silent, and it seemed as though everybody had gone to sleep. - -By 1 o'clock p.m. all were astir again. Two great ruffians came into -my apartment, armed with long clubs. They said they had been sent to -order me before the council, and if I refused to come they were to drag -me there. Everybody seemed to be on the qui vive. As quick as thought, -the promises of President Brigham Young flashed through my mind; also -the promise of Dr. Willard Richards, in which he told me, in the name -of the Lord God of Israel, that though men should seek my life, yet I -should return in safety to the bosom of the Saints, having done good -and honor to myself and the Church and Kingdom of God. He also gave me -instructions what to do; this was when starting on my mission. The next -thought that came to my mind was: Have I forfeited those promises? The -answer that came quickly from the Spirit was no; and this drove away -all fear. Not a doubt was left in my mind. - -Without hesitation I arose and walked out to the beach, where the -people had assembled, the Saints following me. We passed by the log -heap to the assemblage, at the head of which stood twelve or fifteen -stout, athletic, young braves, with hair cut close. They were stripped -naked to their breechclouts, and were oiled. They stood with folded -arms, and certainly seemed formidable, although they were without -weapons, for they had a fierce and savage look about them that must be -seen to be realized in its effect. - -As we came near, the man Tabate stepped out from the crowd and said, -"All the Britons stand to the right hand with the sheep, and all the -Mormons stand to the left hand where the goats are." Everyone responded -to the order except two men from the Mormon party, who drew off to -themselves and were neutral. At that, one faithful Mormon man named -Rivae and his wife with an eight months old babe in her arms, stepped -forward, well knowing what the sentence was to be. This brave brother -said, "If you burn this man," pointing to the writer, "you burn me -first." His heroic wife stepped forward, holding her babe at arm's -length, and shouted, "I am a Mormon, and this baby is a Mormon, for -'nits make lice,' and you will have to burn all of us, or Mormonism -will grow again." I had told the people the story of the massacre at -Haun's Mill, Missouri, in which some of the mob shot the children who -had crept for safety under the bellows in the blacksmith shop, the -murderers saying, as they butchered the innocents, "Nits will make -lice"--Mormons in that instance. - -Rivae and his wife was ordered to stand back, while as a prisoner I was -called to take a position in the space between the two parties. As I -obeyed the command, I was confronted by Tabate, the spokesman or judge, -who had been the chief promoter of all the trouble from the beginning. -Said he: "Iatobo, you have caused the people of our land to sin by -having them to travel more than a Sabbath day's journey on the Sabbath. -You have also taught the people that God is a material God, and that is -not lawful to teach in our land." To this I answered, "Show me where -the teaching is wrong from the Bible." At the same time I opened the -Bible. A strong and determined voice told me to shut the book, and put -it up, for that was the law of God, and the decision of the landholders -and authorities was that I should be burned to death, and thus they -would rid the land of Mormonism. - -Pointing to the left and rear of the prisoner, to the log heap, which -was then at the zenith of its burning, with haughty demeanor and in an -exulting voice, Tabate said, "Look there at that fire. It is made to -consume the flesh off of your bones." In that moment the Spirit of the -Lord rested mightily upon me, and I felt as though I could run through -a troop and leap over a wall. "In the name of Israel's God," I said, -"I defy ten of your best men, yea, the host of you, for I serve that -God who delivered Daniel from the den of lions, and the three Hebrew -children from the fiery furnace!" - -[Image: Fire Prepared to Roast the Missionary--Sentenced to Death.] - -Dear reader, it is impossible for me to describe the power, the cool -resignation, the unshaken confidence, and the might that overshadowed -my soul and body, that thrilled through every fibre of my existence. -For there was absolutely not one particle of fear or tremor in my -whole being. But I did feel thankful for that great and marvelous -deliverance, because in the very moment that I defied the host the -spirit of division rested upon the judge who had passed the sentence, -his counselors, and the executioners, insomuch that the counselors -faced the executioners, and they grappled with each other in a sharp -tussle. From that ensued a fight, until the whole people were mixed up -in it. - -Even two of our old tottering Mormons, Tautene and Hauty, came in with -their clubs, and were so enraged that they actually champed their -teeth together till the froth filled the corners of their mouths, as -I have seen it with mad dogs. Both of them had been great warriors -in their time, and could boast of having eaten human flesh, but at -this time they were so old and feeble that I took each of them by -the arms and forced them from the fight into the house, where I had -ordered all the Mormons to go. I told them to stay in the house or I -would excommunicate them from the Church. As they seemed to be almost -ungovernable, I gave Fute, a priest and a stout man, a club, and told -him to keep them in the house if he had to knock them down to do it, -while I went back to the battleground, picked up my Bible and hat, and -returned to find my party reconciled to their fate, and feeling more -like rejoicing than fighting. In an effort to free himself from her -clinging embrace Hauty had struck his wife with a club. This was before -I had got hold of him. She was trying to keep him out of the melee. The -woman was very lame for weeks after receiving the blow. - -During all this time our enemies quarreled and fought with clubs -and stones, pulled hair and screamed. They did not cease fighting -till sundown. Then, with many sore heads, and more sore limbs, they -dispersed, and I doubt very much if the majority of them knew what they -had been fighting for. After they left, a feeling of quiet and safety -pervaded the village, especially in and about our residence, such as -we had not before known on the island, and for weeks everything was -strangely peaceful. People who once seemed surly and defiant, now had -a tame and subdued expression in their countenances, and appeared to -prefer passing by unnoticed rather than otherwise. - -Some two months later, I was traveling alone in the timber, and at a -short turn in the road I chanced to meet one of the old counselors who -decided that I should be burned. We were close together before we saw -each other. At sight of me he turned and ran as hard as he could, and -I, without any particular object in view, gave chase and ran him down. -I seized him by the neck, and asked why he ran from me and why he was -afraid of me. Said he: "Your God is a God of power, and I was afraid -to meet His servant." I inquired how he knew that my God was a God of -power, and why they had not burned me when they had decided to do so. -He answered: "At the moment that you defied us there was a brilliant -light, or pillar of fire, bore down close over your head. It was as -bright as the sun. We remembered reading in the Bible about Elijah -calling fire down from heaven so that it consumed the captains and -their fifties, and we thought that you had prayed to your God of power, -and that He had sent that fire to burn us and our people if we harmed -you. The young men did not see the light. They were going to burn you, -and we tried to stop them. So we got into a fight. Now we all know that -you are a true servant of God, and we do not like to meet you, out of -fear." - -From what I was able to learn, that feeling was shared by the whole -community, and I was treated with great respect ever afterwards. I -felt freer and safer when alone than ever before. Indeed, there never -was another council meeting called to devise a way to get rid of the -Mormons from that island, while I remained there. But for all that, the -islanders did not want to learn the Gospel. Yet ever afterward, when -they feasted I was always remembered with a very liberal portion of -the very best they had. I do not remember baptizing another soul there -after that event. There I remained, and part of the time I fished, also -hunted the wild chickens that abounded in the mountains--fowls of the -common Dominique variety, which had grown wild in the fastnesses of the -hills, and could fly equal to the sagehen or prairie chicken. - - - -CHAPTER XXXIII. - -LONG TIME WITHOUT NEWS FROM HOME--LETTER FROM ELDER B. F. -GROUARD--RELEASED FROM MY MISSIONARY LABORS IN THE ISLANDS--LITTLE -OPPORTUNITY TO LEAVE RAIVAVAI--NATIVES BUILD A SCHOONER--FAST AND -PRAY TO LEARN WHETHER I SHOULD SAIL ON THE VESSEL--THE ANSWER--SAIL -FOR RAPIA--DRIVEN BACK TO RAIVAVAI--MAKE A NEW START--ARRIVE AT -RAPIA--RIDICULOUS IDEA OF THE PEOPLE CONCERNING A MORMON ELDER--I AM -FORBIDDEN TO GO ASHORE, ON PAIN OF DEATH--FEELING IS MODIFIED SOMEWHAT, -AND I GO ASHORE--BATTLE BETWEEN THE NATIVES--AN OLD MAN GIVES ME -FOOD--ATTEND A MEETING, GET PERMISSION TO SPEAK A FEW WORDS AND AM -ORDERED FROM THE ISLAND--INCREASE OF SENTIMENT OF TOLERATION--INVITED -TO SUPPER AT THE GOVERNOR'S--STRANGE CUSTOM OF WOMEN WAITING ON -MEN--RATHER THAN FOLLOW IT, I SUBMIT TO BEING CALLED A HEATHEN. - -WHEN I had spent seven months alone on the island of Raivavai, without -any news from the outer world or perhaps it would be more proper to -say inner world--for this island and Rapia are as near out of the -world as any portion of it can be--I began to wonder when I could hear -some tidings of the brethren on the other islands. I had not had an -opportunity to leave Raivavai in all the time that I had been there; -nor did I have the slightest idea when it would be possible for me -to return to the land of my nativity, for the natives told me that -within their memory there had been seven years at a time when they had -not so much as seen a sail, and it was not infrequent for from one to -three years to pass without a vessel calling. Therefore it will not be -thought strange when I say that the time became very monotonous. - -Here is an extract from a letter received just before I did leave the -island; it was from Elder B. F. Grouard, counselor to President Pratt -in the presidency of the mission, and bears date of Papeete, Tahiti, -April 18, 1852: - -"DEAR BROTHER JAMES:--I embrace the present opportunity of writing you -a line, perhaps for the last time before leaving for California, though -I hope we may be able to arrange matters so that you will be permitted -to come here and make one of our party across. The governor is now -absent, down at Raiatea, consequently nothing can be done about your -case until he returns. * * * * - -"Wednesday, 21st.--Mr. Kelly has sent for you on his own -responsibility. You must be careful and not go on shore on the -protectorate islands, but be sure and come, or rather, he has -authorized me to send for you. - -"I have the honor to be, your brother in Christ, and fellow laborer in -the Gospel, B. F. GROUARD." - -From this it will be seen that I was released from further labors in -that mission. I also was without any means in sight to get away from -the land that had been so fruitful of troubles to me. It is true that -the natives had a schooner of twenty or twenty-five tons burden in -course of construction, but they were so uncertain and tardy in their -movements that there was really no dependence to be placed in anything -of the kind that they undertook. Indeed, it was doubtful whether they -would complete the vessel at all, though six or eight weeks was ample -time in which to finish it. Besides, they were liable to get into a -quarrel that would cause delay for many months. Again, so frail was -the boat that it did not seem that it ever could be safe to go to sea. -Nearly every stave and brace was made from the bark of the buru tree, -and twisted by hand. The anchor was a chunk of wood with old scraps of -iron spiked on to it, and for a chain the same kind of material was -used as for the stays and braces. The galley was only a square box of -two and a half feet, filled with soil and tied down to the deck with a -bark rope; and as to the helm, it had to be held by hand, taking two or -three men to manage it, especially in rough weather. The compass was -no better than a tin plate; in fact, it could not be of any service -whatever--and the sails were almost rotten. But at last the boat was -launched, and leaked so badly that it did not seem possible to make it -of service; but the natives persevered and baled it out, and it was -soaked up until they considered it safe. - -This boat being built, it seemed to offer a possible means for me to -see white men's land again. There was no one for me to advise with, the -very men who had planned my destruction being the owners and masters -of the craft. The voyage they anticipated taking was said by them to -be seven hundred miles, to the island of Rapia, and from thence a like -distance to Tahiti, in all fourteen hundred miles. The food and fresh -water supply was also very uncertain. The water had to be carried in -large gourds and cocoanuts. Nor was this all that had to be considered. -In those parts there are dense fogs and rainstorms, for days together, -so that navigation is very hazardous where there is only the sun, moon, -and stars to depend upon, and these obscured. - -The reader will perceive the gravity of the situation that confronted -the writer when he came to decide what to do. As the time drew near for -the boat's departure, I retired to a lonely place in the woods, and -there fasted and prayed for three days, fasting all the time and going -to my retreat to pray as often in the three days as I thought proper. -This was done in order to ascertain from the divine Source whether or -not I should take the risk of going on that vessel at that time. The -answer came plain and distinct to my understanding, though not in words -to the natural senses, yet to my entire satisfaction that all would be -well if I went. From that moment I hungered and thirsted, but had not -done so before in all the time that I had fasted. - -Accordingly, on September 22, 1852, I engaged passage on the Raivavai -schooner, bound for Rapia. On the 23rd I went aboard, and we sailed -out, but some of the rigging gave way, and we were bound to return for -repairs. On the 24th we tried again, passing out of the harbor with a -light breeze, at 5 o'clock a.m. There were sixty-two souls on board, -all seasick. On the 26th and 27th there was a dead calm. At daylight -on the 28th we found ourselves on the opposite side of the island and -very near it, surrounded by hundreds of great whales. Our navigators -were so confused that they did not know their own island until they -went ashore. Again the rigging gave way, and we had to put into port to -repair it and to replenish our food supply. - -On October 4th we sailed once more, and with a strong and fair wind on -the 9th we reached the island of Rapia, which has a high and abrupt -coast with a good harbor, but a very narrow passage thereto, in which -we were hailed by a fisherman who inquired about the white man on -board. When the crew told him it was a Mormon Elder, he hastened to the -shore, ran to the village and told the people that a Mormon Elder was -on the schooner. The people had never seen a Mormon, but had heard the -most ridiculous stories about us. They became excited, and frightened -as well, for they had heard that Mormons had cloven feet and shells -on their backs, and were some kind of mongrel between man and beast. -They also had been told that the Mormons were so lustful that it was -very difficult for the females to escape from them. This being the -only information the people had about the Latter-day Saints, it was -no wonder that the men armed themselves with muskets and fish spears, -and came to the landing or lay in ambush, the females keeping at a -respectful distance, while the more brave and fearless ventured to come -on board, inspect the "animal," and forbid him to set his foot on shore -on pain of death. Strange as this statement of affairs may appear, it -is nevertheless true. - -At length a number of the people came on board and spied around as if -to discover the peculiar features of a Mormon Elder, and they, with -my friends, thought that possibly it was safe for me to go ashore; -accordingly I went in the first canoe. As we neared the landing, six or -seven men, some with muskets and some with fishing spears, rose up out -of the brush and tall grass, and peeked and pried, as they afterwards -said, to discern the cloven foot. As they could not discover the -deformities which they had expected to find, they said, "Why, he looks -like any other white man or minister; we do not want to kill him." -There were others who, however, acted very surly, and would not speak -nor shake hands, but told my friends that I must leave their island or -I would be killed. Finally we were permitted to go up to the village, -where the people all ran together to see the stranger. None dared -invite him into their houses, so he took his seat out on a log, while -they feasted. His friends joined with the feasting parties, thinking -it would be better for him if they were sociable with the people and -acquainted them with the supposed monster's customs and habits, as also -with what he had been teaching the people. - -Two weeks before we landed, the inhabitants of this village had had a -battle with the people of another village across the island, and some -of both parties had been killed, while others were yet suffering from -their wounds. This, I suppose, had something to do with the spirit of -murder and bloodshed that hung so thickly around the place. When the -people finished feasting, one old man brought me some food on a banana -leaf, and then slipped away as if he did not wish anybody to see him. -To me it seemed a case of root hog, or die, or at least it was to eat -or starve, so the kind offer was thankfully received. I found the -admonition of Paul, wherein he said, eat what is set before you, and -ask no questions, for conscience, sake appropriate in this case. - -The bell was soon rung for meeting, and the people quickly came -together. I met with them, and at the conclusion of their services -asked the privilege of acquainting them with my business in their -country; for myself and native friends were the first Mormons who had -ever been there, and to save the necessity of anyone else coming I felt -it my bounden duty to offer them the Gospel, as it has to be preached -in every land and to every people. I succeeded in saying a few words, -and received for my pains an order from the presiding priest to go out -of the house and leave the island. - -Although many of the people seemed to sanction the course of the -priest, there were a few who did not seem to favor it; but to save -trouble I left the house. The people then began to discuss the order -and to question its justice, as we had been mild and made no display of -obstinacy. At last they concluded that the Mormon was not quite so bad -as he had been represented, and that he might come into the governor's -and have supper at a table which the Protestant ministers had furnished -for their own accommodation, and where they had left some dishes and a -chair; so I was comfortably seated at the table and the food brought -on. Quite a handsome young girl of about sixteen stood by the table, -and as soon as a blessing was asked, she, with her fingers, tore the -roasted chicken to pieces, stripped the flesh from off the bones, and -held this to my mouth, saying, "There!" - -I drew back a little, as that was so strange a custom that I did not -appreciate it. The girl was quite dark complexioned, and some one -observed, "She is so dark that he thinks she is dirty. Let her get some -soap and wash before him, and then see if he will eat." As the people -seemed so strange in their actions, I thought there was some trick to -be played, so I waited until she had washed her hands and, in obedience -to orders, stepped up, saying that her hands were clean, "Look, that is -my color, and not dirt." Still I felt dubious about taking the bait. -Then she was told to step back, and another young lady was called for. -This one was quite fair, with rather light brown or auburn hair. They -said "Now he will eat, for he will think she is white," but I still -refused the courtesy. Then some one who was standing by said, "Let him -feed himself, like a heathen." At this the master of ceremonies said, -"Why do you not eat?" I tried to explain to them that it seemed to me -to be wrong to require so much of the females--that they should prepare -the food and then stand or sit by and put it into a man's mouth. -"Well," said he, "she was the first to sin, and she ought to wait on -the man." - -At this an old man who lay flat on his stomach with the Bible before -him, opened the book to where Paul said that when he was in Rome he did -as the Romans did. The old man had his hair bushed, and, apparently, -the very brand of heathenism in his face. I would have thought as much -of looking on a brush heap or in a muskrat house for intelligence as to -have anticipated anything smart from him. He said, "My friend, do you -believe in the Bible?" I said, "Yes, and it is good to do as it says." -"Then," said he, "you are a liar; for Paul said that when he was in -Rome he did as the Romans did, and now you are in Rapia you will not do -as the Rapians do; for it is our way for the women to put the food into -our mouths. That is the way we do in this land." - -Sure enough, I learned that this was true; for when the meal is ready -it is brought into the room in baskets, and the male portion of the -household get down on their hands and knees, while the females pick -the bones from the fish, pork or poultry, as the case may be, and with -their fingers put the flesh into their masters' mouths. To conclude -with, the woman dips her hand into a dish of water, and wipes his -mouth. Then he moves away, and the wife and daughter take the scraps, -or what may be left. It is considered as great a shame on that island -for a man to put food into his mouth as it is in China for a Mongolian -to have his queue cut off. But to me it seemed so ridiculous that my -stay there was too short to make it seem even human. I did not adopt -the custom, preferring to be called a heathen by those who did practice -it. - - - -CHAPTER XXXIV. - -DETERMINE TO PREACH TO THE PEOPLE--REFUSED A HOUSE--HOLD AN OPEN-AIR -MEETING--STRANGE CONGREGATION--SIX OTHER MEETINGS--VISIT A NATIVE -KING--HE COMMANDS ME TO LEAVE--I DO SO IN ORDER TO AVOID BEING PUT -TO DEATH--WATERMELONS AND OTHER VEGETABLES--NATIVE TRADITION OF THE -PEOPLING OF THE ISLANDS--VISIT OF A PROTESTANT MINISTER--SAIL FOR -TAHITI--IN A HEAVY STORM--PRAYERS BY FRIGHTENED NATIVES--I AM ASKED TO -PRAY WITH THEM, BUT DECLINE TO FOLLOW THEIR METHODS--REACH THE HARBOR -OF PAPEETE--AMERICAN CONSUL OBTAINS PERMISSION FOR ME TO LAND--GO -TO WORK WITH A CARPENTER--WARNED NOT TO BE ALONE LEST I SHOULD BE -KILLED--WATCHED BY GEN D' ARMES--TROUBLE AT ANAA, AND ARREST OF NATIVE -MORMONS--THESE ARE BROUGHT TO PAPEETE--HOW THEY GOT LETTERS TO ME, AND -THEIR REPLIES--MY FORMER PERSECUTORS OF RAIVAVAI COME TO ME FOR ADVICE, -AND I RETURN GOOD FOR EVIL. - -AS I felt the great need of reform among the people of Rapia, I tried -again to get the privilege of preaching to them in their house, but -found them unyielding on that point. There were three native brethren -and their wives who had come with me. I was impressed that we ought -to make yet another trial to leave our testimony with the islanders, -so we went out by the side of their meeting house, which was a frame -building set up on blocks some eighteen inches or two feet from the -ground, the dirt floor being thatched with dry grass. We stood within -ten feet of the house and commenced to sing. Before we were ready to -read our text, it seemed that everybody in the village had come around, -but not in the ordinary way. They crowded into the meeting house and -some filled the windows, while others lay down and poked their heads -out under the sills of the house; still others got down on their hands -and knees some five or six rods off and crawled along through the -shrubbery, taking hold of the brush as they drew near, lying flat down -and drawing themselves along, taking sticks and poking the weeds aside -so they could get a better view. With this most singular congregation -before us, and the most perfect order (for it seemed as if there was -not a whisper,) we read a chapter in the Bible--the third of Matthew, -I believe--then preached on faith, repentance, and baptism for the -remission of sins. At the dismissal of our services the whole assembly -withdrew, and after that I had lots of food, such as it was. - -We held seven meetings on that little fragment of terra firma, and -visited the king in the west village. We found the royal personage at -home, sitting Indian fashion on his couch, half naked. He appeared to -be a man of unusually strong character, very surly, and did not want -to talk. When I attempted to tell him the object of my mission to -his country, his neck swelled out, and he began blowing through his -nostrils like a mad bull. He said, "You leave my country." By this time -my native friends discovered that danger was gathering around us, and -told me that we must not delay one moment, but must get away as quickly -as possible, for that village had suffered defeat at the hands of the -people of the other village, and we could not be friendly with the king -and his followers if we were to the others. - -We got away, and afterwards it developed that my friends had foreseen -a peril that I had not fully understood, for when the king said we had -better get away from his country, that was his ultimatum, and if we had -remained longer every one of us would have been slain, as the people -were preparing for the slaughter. - -On our retreat I observed a castor oil bean tree loaded with beans. -Its trunk was as large as a man's body. I began to inspect it when my -friends called out, "Hurry up, or we will every one be killed," so we -hastened to more friendly and hospitable parts, where we came across -a large gourd, or calabash vine, and a watermelon patch. Never having -seen anything of the kind on any other island where I had been, my -inquisitive propensities were set to work ascertaining how those things -came there. Were they a spontaneous growth? If not, where did they come -from, since this little island is so remote from all others, and the -natives tell me that white men seldom visit them? I inquired of the -people where they got the seed of the vegetables named. "Why," said -they, "our forefathers brought them here." - -"Where did they come from?" - -The reply was, "From the rising of the sun." On hearing this, I asked -from what country, and was answered, "We do not know. It was a big -land, so big they did not know its boundary. It was a land of food, and -of great forests of big trees, and great fresh waters that were filled -with fish." - -I next inquired, "How came they to leave such a good land?" The -response was in these words: "We do not know, only they said they got -lost in the fog, and were several days without seeing the sun. Then -the strong winds came and blew them over here, and their vessel was -wrecked on this island. They never could get back to the lands of their -forefathers, so they stayed here. They increased so fast that all could -not live on this land, so they made canoes and tried to get back, but -the winds were against them, that they were carried away to the west, -and for a long time those left here supposed the others were lost in -the sea; but after a time it was learned that there were other lands -where the sun goes down. Then our people made canoes and went to them, -and we think that is the way these islands became peopled, for they are -the same kind of people as ourselves." - -"Have you any other knowledge of your forefathers?" - -"No, we do not know anything but that which the fathers have said. They -used to say that if they could get back to their fatherland they could -find metal to make fish spears and hooks with. When the first white -men's ship came in sight we tried to go to it, thinking we could get -some fishing tackle therefrom. We thought that vessel must have come -from our fathers' land. But the wind was so strong we could not get to -the ship, and it was a long time before another one came. Finally we -reached one, and got such things as our fathers had told us about." - -Read the Book of Mormon, page 427, 63d chapter, 5th to 9th verses. Was -the ship that Hagoth built the same that was wrecked on the island of -Rapia, South Pacific Ocean, about 25 deg. south latitude, and, as near -as I can find out from French charts, time reckoned from Paris, France, -in longitude 140 west? - -The reader may form his own conclusions, as I return to my narrative -of our stay on the island. When we had returned from our visit to the -surly king, one man by the name of Mesearee opened his house for us to -hold meeting in, but very few attended with us. - -October 17th, the bark _John Williams_ called with one Mr. Platt, -a Protestant minister, on board. This clergyman was a man of fine -address. He came ashore and preached, then sprinkled all the infant -children of the village. Though very pleasant, he refused to talk with -me in the Tahitian language, saying that if we did so on the Scriptures -it would cause a split among the people. I insisted that he show the -natives the scripture for his mode of baptism, but he declined to do -that, and boarded his vessel and sailed away. - -October 27, 1852, we sailed for Tahiti. On the 29th we encountered a -very heavy storm, so severe that we lost all of our sails, and had to -lash two of our strong men on deck with slack rope so that they might -fasten down the hatch and companion ways. The rest of us had to go -below, for the sea was lashed into a foamy mass as white as snow. It -did not seem possible for us to survive the terrible ordeal. As in -almost all similar cases, the wicked will pray--that is in times of -great danger, if at no other time--so the natives who went below, some -fifty-nine in number, divided themselves into three praying parties. -One of these occupied the bow, one stationed itself amidships, and one -was in the stern of the vessel. Then a man in one party would pray at -the top of his voice, and so on with each party in turn. Thus they -prayed, passing the word back and forth, as long as the sea raged in -its fury. - -In all of our travels together, those in charge of the vessel had never -honored me with a request to attend prayers, or once called me to ask a -blessing, but now, in our great peril, one of the old priests found his -way in the dense darkness to my berth, and said: "Iatobo, you pray to -your God of power, to spare us, that we may not die in this great sea." -I told him no, for I had done my praying on land, before I had boarded -the schooner, and now I had all that I could do to hold myself in the -berth, that I might not be thrown out and killed. He returned with -a grunt, and commanded the rest to pray. These conditions continued -for six or seven hours, when the wind abated, and the little schooner -pitched and rolled as if she would go to the bottom. - -November 1, 1852, we sighted a reef called Hereheretue. On the 9th -we came in view of Metia, and on the 10th we went into the harbor of -Papeete, Tahiti. It was on the 11th when, through the intervention -of Mr. Kelly, American consul, I got permission to land. The same -gentleman gave me an introduction to one Charles Hill, a carpenter, -who was rather a backslider from the Mormon Church. Still, he was very -friendly, and said that if I would assist him in carpenter work he -would board and lodge me until I could get a passage home. Mr. Kelly -counseled me not to be alone anywhere, as a watch would be kept over me -every minute I was on the island. He said he would not be responsible -if I preached or traveled out of the town, as I was liable to be shot -the moment that I was found alone. Said he, "The French are more bitter -towards you than ever. They seem to think you would turn everything -upside down if you were allowed to run at large. I have never seen -them so excited over anything as they are about you. They are actually -afraid of you, for fear that if you were permitted to go among the -people again they would revolt at once, and there would be another -war." He also said that he would arrange matters so that I could go -with Mr. Hill to and from his work, and if we kept close together, he -thought it all safe, as Mr. Hill was well known; but that I had better -stop in his office till he could see the governor, and I could go out -to Mr. Hill's in the evening with him, as he lived in the suburbs of -the town. Mr. Kelly also told me there had been more trouble at Anaa, -and a number of our people from there were in prison on Tahiti; and -further, that I was held responsible for all the trouble on that island. - -It having been arranged for me to stop with Mr. Hill, he called for -me in the evening, and next morning I went to work with him at his -business. In the meantime the news of my arrival on Tahiti spread very -fast, and the sons of the prisoners from Anaa, who had followed their -parents in disguise, and could visit the prisoners one at a time, put -pencil and paper into their hands on the sly, so that they could write -to me. Five or six of the young men dressed themselves as the regular -"toughs" of the town, and met Mr. Hill and me, one of them bearing a -note in his hand. When they got near us they began to dance and sing -in a very rude manner, acting as if they would not give any of the -road to us. Then they pushed the one with the note against me, and -as he passed it into my hand the rest circled clear around so as to -obscure me from two gen d' armes who followed us day and night. Then -the young men would shout and laugh as if they had done it to annoy me -in particular. Thus I received letters from the natives. The young men -would meet us again, and I would pass to them the answers, while they -would appear to the looker-on to be running against me purposely, to -insult and annoy me. Sometimes I would try to show my displeasure by -scolding at them. In this way a regular correspondence was carried on -between the unfortunate prisoners and myself, during my stay. In that -manner I learned that there were twenty-three of them in prison, there -being ten Elders, five Priests, four Teachers and four Deacons. On the -12th there were eight more prisoners brought from the island of Anaa, -six brethren and two sisters. All of the thirty-one were put to work on -the steep side of a mountain, to make a road up to a fort. The hillside -was so steep that some of them fell and were hurt quite seriously. -Sometimes the prisoners were beaten by the guards that attended them. -Their provisions were very poor, and they had not even enough of that. - -I will again mention my former persecutors of the island of Raivavai, -with whom I traveled to Tahiti, for they came to me in great trouble, -and said their schooner had been so badly damaged in the storm we had -been in that the French had condemned it, and would not allow them to -go to sea again. They were four hundred miles from home, without money, -provisions or friends. They very humbly asked my advice, which I gave -freely, telling them to state their case to the French authorities, -and these would be bound to find a way to have them returned home and -give them support until they did so. This pleased them very much; they -seemed to appreciate the counsel of one whom they had sat in judgment -and helped to pass sentence upon, ordering him to be burned. Doubtless -some of them had aided in gathering the fuel to make the fire for the -burning. I condoled with them as much as the conditions would admit -of; and when I came to part with them they seemed to feel, and in fact -said, that I had been a true friend to them. They wept as though they -were my near relatives. Thus returning good for evil brought blessings. - - - -CHAPTER XXXV. - -WATCHED CLOSELY BY GEN D' ARMES--EXPERIENCE WHEN AT PRAYER--TAKE DINNER -WITH REV. MR. HOWE--DINING WITH A CATHOLIC BISHOP--IMPATIENCE OF THE -GOVERNOR--LEAVE TAHITI ON THE ABYSSINIA--CURIOSITY OF PASSENGERS AND -SAILORS--DIFFICULTY IN GETTING OUT OF THE HARBOR--HEAR OF MORE TROUBLE -AT ANAA--CAPTAIN'S COMMENT ON MORMON BOOKS--A WATERSPOUT--CROSSING -THE EQUATOR--ENCOUNTER A TERRIBLE STORM--A TIDAL WAVE--SHIP SPRINGS A -LEAK--PANIC ON BOARD--ALL BANDS TO THE PUMPS--STOPPING A LEAK--FAIR -WEATHER AGAIN. - -SO far as my own conduct was concerned, now that I was again on -the island of Tahiti, I continued with Mr. Hill. Two gen d' armes -followed us or hung around where we were at work all day, and at night -tramped about the house where we lived. At daylight the night guards -disappeared in the brush. One morning I stepped three or four rods into -the brush, for my morning devotions, and as I was engaged with my eyes -closed I heard a rustling in the leaves. Supposing it was the hogs that -ran around there, I paid no attention until I was through, when I saw -two officers standing within fifteen feet of and in front of me, gazing -straight into my face. They were heavily armed, but did not interfere -with me, so I returned to the house, while they mounted the fence and -sat there till we went to work, when they followed us up as usual. - -During this time I met with Mr. Howe, the presiding official of the -Protestant mission on the islands. He appeared to feel very sympathetic -toward me, and invited me to take dinner with him and his good old -lady. I accepted the invitation, and he made me a present of a Tahitian -Bible, also of a Tahitian and English dictionary. He is the same Mr. -Howe spoken of before, when he was so radically opposed to me, but -now he seemed charitable and kind. After I left his house, and was -passing along in sight of the Catholic bishop's office, the bishop -sent a servant after me, inviting me in to dine and wine. Accordingly, -I called, finding him a very polite gentleman. He met me at the door -of his library, took me by the hand and courteously led me to a seat, -then set out some wine, saying he was very sorry that he had but one -glass of wine in the room, though he set out two glasses, but poured -all the wine into one, which he presented to me. At that moment the -saying of the Lord Jesus came to my mind, to be harmless as doves but -wise as serpents. I adopted as much French politeness as I was capable -of, divided the wine into the two glasses, presented him the one with -the most wine in, telling him that I could not think of drinking -alone--that he must join me or I should decline his very kind offer. I -thought that if he could stand to drink the largest half of the wine, I -could afford to try the least half, and as I preferred him to drink his -first, I delayed until he had swallowed it, when I drank to his health. -We had a sociable chat, and he insisted on my stopping to supper, when -he would have plenty of wine. I told him I could not, as my attendants, -the gen d' armes, were waiting patiently for me. He next presented -me two books, telling me that they would show how the priesthood had -descended from Peter down to the present pope. The books being in the -French language, were of no use to me, so I bade him good-bye. - -I learned from Mr. Kelly that the governor was impatient at my stay -on the island, so I disposed of everything that I could spare, raised -sixty dollars thereby, and prepared to sail on the English ship -_Abyssinia_, from Sydney, Australia, and commanded by Captain George -Gordon. - -November 24, 1852, I boarded the _Abyssinia_, paying sixty dollars -steerage passage to San Francisco, California. When I got on the deck, -the seamen and some of the passengers crowded around me, and stared at -me as if I had been a wild beast. When I saluted them with, "Gentlemen, -how are you?" they looked at each other as much as to say, "Shall we -return the compliment?" At last one of the sailors took off his hat, -made a bow, and said, "Please sir, can you speak English?" I answered, -"Yes, sir, a little." The next question was, "And are you a Mormon -Elder?" My reply was, "Yes," and was followed with, "Well, pardon me, -but I thought a Mormon Elder had a cloven foot and a shell on his back, -and I expected that you would be brought aboard in a case, as I have -been told that the Mormons were a kind of half beast, fierce, and wild." - -Some of the others said that they had had the same ideas. A third party -exclaimed, "What d--d lies they have told us! We have been anxious -to see this Elder ever since we heard there was one coming on board, -and we thought to see you brought in a big cage. We cannot see any -difference in you and common men." So much for wild and slanderous -stories afloat in those days and in that part of the world. - -Shortly the vessel was got under way, but just as we entered the -passage the wind slackened so that we came very near being crushed -against the reef. Five boats from a French warship came to our aid, as -we had cast anchor to save ourselves, and the Frenchmen towed us back -to a safe location, where we lay until the 26th. - -We tried it again on the 27th, and as we passed out of the harbor we -went close to the French warship, which was weighing anchor. On the -deck stood the Catholic bishop, who held up his cross and made signs. -He said there was trouble in Anaa again, and he was going there. - -After we sailed, the captain of the _Abyssinia_ asked me to lend -him some books on Mormonism. I let him take the Book of Mormon and -the Doctrine and Covenants. He returned them on the 29th, saying, -"I believe the books and your prayers have made me sick." He did -not trouble me any more about Mormonism, yet treated me with proper -respect, as a rule. - -There were several male and female passengers on board, a portion of -the latter being of the lewd class, judging from their actions; and -the former were not much better. I loaned all the books that I had to -passengers and seamen. Nearly all on board treated me in a courteous -manner. - -On November 30th a waterspout passed close to our ship, causing much -excitement. Its roar was frightful, as it carried a very great column -of water up into the air, and spread it out into the clouds like a -whirlwind on land, but on so much larger scale as to be a dread to -seamen. - -December 1st we sighted what the captain called Flint's Island. It was -large and high, and appeared to be inhabited. On the 10th we crossed -the equator, where the seamen had some sport at the expense of several -of the passengers who had not crossed it before. They made preparations -for Neptune, and told many stories of his pranks with those who dared -cross his path without paying penance, or treating the ship's crew. - -On the 20th we encountered a terrific storm, which carried away most of -our sail, and left us badly damaged. On Christmas day we had something -like a tidal wave in a calm sea. The wave was so great that it swept -away the main topgallant sail and the jib boom. Two seamen were carried -below for dead. The ship sprung a leak in the bow, and the peril became -so great that all the seamen and the male passengers were called to -lend a hand. It being in the night, the consternation was so intense -that passengers were on the deck in their night clothes, screaming. -Some shouted to pray, and others did pray with all the fervor at their -command, especially when the carpenter, reporting that the vessel -was parting in her beams, called for men to turn the windlass, and -for kettles of hot tar, blankets, caulking, chisels, and anything to -make repairs. As the wind began to freshen, the boat headed before -it, without any regard to course. The next order was, "Down with the -hatches!" - -"Aye, aye, sir." - -"Then sound her." - -"Aye, sir." - -"How is she?" - -"Gaining water, sir." - -It was hurry to the pumps, and the carpenter was asked, "How is she?" - -"All right, sir." - -"Heave away at the windlass! Keep the pumps going!" - -The carpenter had been pinning timber across the breach, and with -windlass power preventing if possible the seam from spreading any more -until he could make it safe. Blankets were dipped in hot tar and driven -into the parting. With these efforts and by keeping the pumps going -steadily for eight hours, the boat was partly freed from the rolling -sea, and at length was patched up and put on her course. The captain -then said that his greatest fear had been that, as his cargo was coal, -the friction of the fuel and the water coming in below would cause the -cargo to take fire. When we got righted and on our course, we had light -winds, and cold and wet weather until the voyage was ended. - - - -CHAPTER XXXVI. - -ARRIVE AT SAN FRANCISCO--A WRECKED SHIP--THE ABYSSINIA -CONDEMNED--GATHERING WRECKAGE--DRUNKEN SAILORS--MY TRUNK HELD FOR -HOSPITAL FEES--GO ASHORE, WHERE ALL IS CHANGED AND STRANGE--MY -DILAPIDATED APPEARANCE--SEEK GUIDANCE OF THE LORD--WANDER -ALMOST IN DESPAIR--MEET AN OLD FRIEND--FIND A HOME--MY TRUNK -RELEASED--MEET ELDERS GOING ON MISSIONS--WELL TREATED BY SAINTS AND -STRANGERS--PROVIDENCES OF THE LORD--OUTWARD-BOUND ELDERS ENTRUST MONEY -TO ME FOR THEIR FAMILIES--ENGAGE TO CARRY MAIL TO LOS ANGELES--ON A -STEAMER FOR SAN PEDRO--TAKEN SEVERELY ILL. - -ON January 8th, 1853, we passed into the bay of San Francisco, where -we came close to a big New York clipper ship, fast on a rock in the -passage. While we were looking at the vessel, the tide came in and -lifted it up; then it dropped back and was smashed as if it were only a -matchbox. Luckily, the ship had been there long enough to be surrounded -by boats sufficient to save the passengers, and perhaps their baggage. - -We soon dropped anchor from our dismantled bark, which, as I afterwards -learned, was condemned as being unseaworthy, and never was allowed -to go to sea again. The seamen on our vessel went to picking up the -wreckage from the clipper ship. They chanced to catch a barrel of -whisky, when the captain ordered it to be carried below. That made -the sailors desperate. They seized an ax, crushed the barrel head in, -and each seaman dipped with his cup. Within fifteen minutes they were -wild with drunkenness. They armed themselves with axes, hand-spikes, -belaying pins, marlinspikes, and any and everything they could lay hold -of. Then the officers, and some of the passengers who had incurred -their displeasure, were made to hunt hiding places below in doublequick -time. That condition did not last long, however, before a compromise -was effected, the captain took his position again, and the men went to -landing passengers and baggage. I got my trunk ready to depart, when -the captain demanded five dollars of me, for hospital fees, he said. As -I had not so much as one dollar, I had to leave my trunk and go ashore, -very sick and cold. - -When I reached the streets I found things so changed from when I was -there before that I felt lost in the throng of people. It seemed to me -that everyone was seeking his own gain, regardless of his fellow-men. -It was push, ram, jam, on all sides. I had worn my clothes pretty well -out, my hat had been so crushed that my hair was showing in the crown, -and my shoe soles were worn very nearly off. - -In this condition I asked the Lord, in silent prayer, to show me -what I should do. The Spirit said, "Go up the street." I was then on -California Street. I obeyed the whisperings, until I got near the top -of the street. Without any consolation the thought came, What shall I -do? The still, small Voice said, "Go up the street," and I obeyed again. - -At last, almost despairing of everything, wholly sick and tired, -suffering from lack of some refreshment, and feeling that there was no -relief for me, I saw a man start across the street above me, and from -the same side. When he neared the center of the street, he stopped and -seemed to be looking at me. As I advanced, he turned around, and walked -back two or three steps. By this time I started across toward him, and -he came to meet me. It was Redick N. Allred, of the Mormon Battalion. - -We did not recognize each other until we went to shake hands. He said, -"How are you?" I answered, "Tired, sick, and hungry." "Well," said he, -"come back across the street with me, to a lunch stand, and we will -have something to eat." Soon the inner man was comforted, when Brother -Allred told me there were thirty-six Elders in San Francisco, bound to -foreign lands on missions. He led me to some of my old friends, and -I found John Layton, whom I had been acquainted with on the Society -Islands. He told me that if I would I could come and stop with him, and -chop the wood and do the marketing; for his wife, being an islander, -could not talk English well. I accepted the kind offer, and thus was -provided with a home. - -I also met with Major Jefferson Hunt. We saw a Captain King, took -supper with him, and told him that the captain of the vessel I had come -on had retained my trunk because I had not five dollars to pay the -hospital fees. Brother Badlam gave me the money to get my trunk, and -Captain King gave me a note to a custom officer. I obtained my trunk -after I had paid the captain of the _Abyssinia_ the money, and I followed -him up to the custom house, to the officer there, to whom I showed -Captain King's note. The officer gave the sea captain a look, then said -something to him, and without a word more he returned me the money. - -I next visited the Elders, and attended meetings with them. They -had arrived several days before me, and had sold their teams in the -southern part of California. They had also taken up some collections -among the Saints. Brother John M. Horner having been very liberal to -them, a number of them rendered me assistance. - -One day, as I was passing Widow Ivins', she called to me, and ran out -to meet me, saying, "Here is ten dollars that a lady gave me to hand to -you, and here is thirty dollars more that she wishes you to convey to -that body of Elders that is in town, to help them on their missions." -I asked the name of the lady, and the reply was, "I am not at liberty -to disclose her name." She said the lady was not a Mormon, but had -attended our meetings, and had stated that she was unworthy to be -personally known to us; so I never learned who she was. - -At one time, when I was walking along the street alone, I was met by -a stranger, who offered to shake hands with me. As we grasped hands, -he pushed a five-dollar gold piece into mine. I said, "What does this -mean?" He replied, "None of your d--d business. Take it, and bless -yourself with it. I have money due me, and if I am successful in -collecting it, I will see you again." At that he dashed away in the -busy throng, and I never saw him more, that I am aware of. - -On a still further occasion, I was met by an entire stranger, who put -a dollar in my hand and said, "Come, let us have some good cider and -cake." I begged to be excused, but he would not listen to it; I had -to go with him anyhow. We stepped to a lunch stand, where he said, -"Let this man have what he calls for; I want to catch that man," and -away he went. The proprietor asked what I would have, and I told him I -would await the return of my friend. He said, "Never mind him, he is -all right; he may not be back again till tomorrow morning." Then he -insisted on my order, so I took some crackers and cider; but I never -saw my friend again. Thus it seemed to me that great and wondrous -were the mysterious providences of the Lord, for I had landed in -San Francisco on the 8th of January, 1853, and by the 26th I had -seventy-five dollars handed to me, much of it by entire strangers -whom I had never seen before, nor have I seen them since. It seems -mysterious to me how my way opened up and my necessities were met. - -The Elders outward bound treated me very kindly. They fitted themselves -out for their several destinations, paid their passage, and then had -some fifteen hundred dollars to send to their families, with their -photographs and some small parcels, all of which they entrusted to me, -with three small trunks, to take to San Bernardino. Of the money seven -hundred and fifty dollars in gold was put into a belt and girded around -my body; the balance was in drafts or checks. - -In the meantime, some of the Elders had met with Mr. Holliday, overland -mail contractor. As he had not perfected his arrangements for regular -mail service, he made some inquiries of the Elders about sending mail -sacks by chance carrier to Los Angeles. They referred him to me, as -they thought there would be something in it for me. He called, and I -agreed to take charge of three sacks if he would deliver them on the -steamer _Sea Bird_, on the morning of the 29th. On that date he sent the -sacks just as we were putting off. He told me the pay would be all -right when the sacks were delivered. - -I had paid thirty-five dollars for my passage to San Pedro, and we -steamed out. On the morning of the 30th we landed at Monterey, and -lay there till 4 p.m. During that time I had a severe chill, followed -by a very high fever, which held on till next morning, when a heavier -chill came on, like the ague, followed by fever. I had made my bed -down on some nail kegs that were on deck; for the boat was so crowded -with passengers of all classes that there was no possible chance for -comfort. It semed that everyone was seeking his own convenience, -regardless of his neighbor. - - - -CHAPTER XXXVII. - -BECOME DESPERATELY ILL--NURSED BACK TO CONSCIOUSNESS--KINDNESS -OF AN AGED SPANISH COUPLE--BELT WITH MONEY ENTRUSTED TO ME -DISAPPEARS--INTENSE ANXIETY--DISCOVER THE MONEY--GREAT SUFFERING--LAND -AT SAN PEDRO--LEFT ON THE BEACH--DRAG MYSELF TO THE SHELTER OF AN OLD -WALL--KINDNESS OF A SPANIARD AND HIS WIFE--A TERRIBLE NIGHT--SEEK -A PASSAGE TO LOS ANGELES WITH FREIGHTERS--REFUSALS--MEET A KIND -TEAMSTER--REACH LOS ANGELES---DUMPED ON THE STREET--FIND SHELTER, BUT -A CHILLY WELCOME--START NEXT MORNING, SICK AND HUNGRY, TO FIND A NEW -PLACE--SO ILL I HAVE TO LIE DOWN IN THE STREET--TWO FRIENDS FROM SAN -BERNARDINO--AM TOLD THAT I HAVE THE SMALLPOX--MY FRIENDS GIVE ME MONEY -AND START IN SEARCH OF A HOUSE WHERE I CAN BE CARED FOR--FAILING TO -SECURE A ROOM, THEY ENGAGE THE CITY MARSHAL TO GET A PLACE, AND THEY -LEAVE FOR SAN BERNARDINO--I WANDER FOR SHELTER, BUT DOORS ARE CLOSED, -AND PEOPLE AVOID ME--LODGE IN A DOCTOR'S OFFICE WHILE THE DOCTOR IS -OUT--SCARE THE PEOPLE BY SHOUTING "SMALLPOX!"--THE DOCTOR RETURNS BUT -LEAVES ME IN POSSESSION. - -ON the voyage down from San Francisco I grew so desperately sick that -I lost my reasoning powers, becoming so delirious that afterwards I -could only remember removing my coat and vest and turning into bed, on -the nail kegs, with my trunks and the mail sacks about me. The next -thing that I recall was in the after part of the day, February 1st, -1853, when I began to regain consciousness. There was an old Spanish -gentleman and his good old "mahara" (wife) rubbing my hands and feet, -while a big crowd of the passengers stood around. My first thought -was: What does this mean--who am I--where did I come from--where am I -going---how did I come here, and why are these strangers so interested -in me as to be rubbing my hands? The next thing, the old gentleman -brought me some refreshments, with a cup of coffee; and when I finally -returned to consciousness I inquired what had been the matter. I was -told that I had been a very sick man, but was much better, and would -soon be well. When the crowd were satisfied that the worst was past -they dispersed, but the old gentleman and lady sat near, as if to -anticipate any favor I might need. Doubtless the good old couple have -been gathered home to their fathers long ere this writing. If so, -peace to their ashes; may they in no wise lose their reward, for they -administered to the suffering stranger, although they were foreigners, -while my own countrymen passed rudely by. - -With consciousness returned, I remembered the money that I had in -charge. I felt about my body, and to my surprise and mortification -the belt was gone. The next thought I had was that I had been robbed -by some one on board, and I wondered what could be done to regain the -property, or, if it could not be recovered, how could I make amends to -the poor women and children whom their husbands and fathers had sent -it to? How could I prove my innocence to them? By this time the mental -sufferings had overcome the physical pain, and in despair I drew the -blankets close about me. In so doing I felt the belt of money lying -at my back, under cover. The buckle had been ripped or cut off, most -likely the latter, for, as I learned afterwards, in some way it was -noised around that I had money. - -The reaction of the mental faculties was too much for my weak state, -and I almost swooned away; but when I fully recovered from the shock -to my nerves, I rolled the belt snugly up, and raised on my knees with -my blankets so drawn about my shoulders as to cover the front part of -the trunk. Then I placed the belt inside, at the same time taking some -article out, so as to divert the observers' attention from my real -purpose; I then laid down, suffering with a terrible fever, and put in -one night more of great wretchedness. - -About 3 or 4 p.m. next day, February 2nd, we landed at San Pedro. There -was a great rush for the shore, and for the four or five vehicles -that were in waiting. The most of the passengers seemed to be without -baggage, save a roll of blankets or a satchel, and as the the writer -had so much and was sick, he was the last person to land. Every vehicle -was gone, and all the passengers were out of sight before he got his -baggage ashore. When this did come, it was thrown on the beach just -above high water mark. - -At that early date there was not a hotel, boardinghouse, or restaurant -anywhere in sight from the landing. One wall of an old adobe warehouse -stood near by, and the only thing for the writer to do was to seek -what shelter that wall afforded. Thither he dragged his effects, then -dropped down on his bedding exhausted. He lay there until he had -excited the curiosity of a Spaniard and his wife who were some distance -away. They came down and asked what was the matter, and as I did not -know, I could not tell them. They saw that my face was swollen and -they seemed afraid to come close, but inquired what I wished, and if -they could do anything for me. I asked for milk and bread, which they -supplied, and left me to my fate for the night. - -The experiences of that terrible night baffle the writer's powers of -description. Suffice it to say, he passed it alone, with the heavy mist -of the briny deep resting upon him, while the fever and thirst seemed -to be consuming his body. - -At last the morning light came through a dense fog; but by 8 or 9 -o'clock that had partly passed away. Some freight teams came down from -Los Angeles, and the sufferer felt somewhat encouraged to think there -was a prospect of his reaching civilization at the place where he had -helped to rear the first liberty pole which was to bear aloft the Stars -and Stripes on the Pacific coast. He accosted the freighters, feeling -assured that he would not be denied a passage, as he was prepared to -pay for this accommodation. The first man said no; he had all that he -could haul. The second teamster said no, he was not doing a passenger -business. The third said, "I don't know. It is too d--d bad to leave -you here sick. I guess I can take you. Throw on your things if you can, -and hurry about it." When the writer made an effort to do as invited, -the freighter lent him a hand, and when the baggage was aboard the -teamster said, "Come, get on here. It's a poor place for a sick man, -away up on a goods box, among the bows, but it's your only chance with -me. Up there!" and away we went on our journey twenty-one miles to Los -Angeles, where we arrived about 8 p.m. - -Near the center of the city, on the sidewalk at a street corner, my -effects were dumped. I wandered around to find shelter, and at last -reached Jesse D. Hunter's place. Hunter had been captain of Company B -in the Mormon Battalion, and I thought I could do no better than stop -with him, though I did not meet anything very inviting. I was coldly -granted the privilege of dragging my blankets into the kitchen, and of -bunking down on the dirt floor, after a light supper of bread and milk, -the first food I had had since the night before. But I was too ill to -do better, and Mr. Hunter was so cool and indifferent that I was glad -to leave his place next morning without any further accommodations. - -I started out alone, and turned so sick and dizzy that I had to lie -down in the street on my blankets. While there I was approached by -Daniel Clark and James Bailey from San Bernardino. They asked if my -name was Brown, and if I was a returning missionary. I told them yes. -They said they had heard of me, and that I had the smallpox, so they -had been searching the town for me, and happening to see me lie down in -the street, they became satisfied they had found the object of their -search. Each of them threw me ten dollars in gold, and went in search -of a room or place where I could be cared for. Failing in finding that, -they called on the mayor, who started the marshal out to hunt a place. -When Clark and Bailey had done all they could--and they were as kind -as they could be--they had the mail sacks delivered, but did not find -the pay that was to be all right on delivery. Then they went home to -San Bernardino, while I did the best I could to find shelter, but my -face was so terribly swollen that every door was shut against me; and -when the news spread that there was a man around the streets with the -smallpox, I could have the sidewalk to myself wherever I went. - -At last I found Dr. Jones' office open, but dark and with no one in it. -I dragged my bedding through the office to the bedroom, where I spread -my blankets and turned in, leaving the door open and lights burning. -When anyone came to the door I would shout "Smallpox!" and it was -amusing to hear the people run. - -About 11 p.m. the doctor came, and I shouted "Smallpox!" Said he: -"Who is here?" I answered, "The man whom you said had the smallpox." -He responded, "All right, but I would not have had it happen for five -hundred dollars. Be quiet, you have done just right. But how did you -get in?" - -"Why, the door was open," I replied, and he said: "I never did such a -thing before in my life. It must have been done on purpose for you, for -it was not fit for you to be out." The doctor then held his breath, -stepped in over me, took up his bed, and walked away. - - - -CHAPTER XXXVIII. - -CITY MARSHALL AND DOCTOR COME TO REMOVE ME--TAKEN TO A DESERTED HOUSE, -WHICH HAD BEEN USED AS A SHEEPFOLD--BEDDED IN SHEEP MANURE--AN INDIAN -NURSE WHO BECOMES FRIGHTENED--SPANISH NURSE SENT TO ME--IN A BOAT WITH -PATIENT JOB--MY FEVER INCREASES--ATTACKED BY ROBBERS--RELIEVED BY -CITY MARSHAL WITH POSSE--MARSHAL TAKES THE MONEY I HAVE IN MY CARE, -FOR SAFE KEEPING--SPANISH NURSE SCARED OFF--QUEER SAILOR NURSE--HE -DRINKS WHISKY, SINGS AND DANCES--HIS THOUGHTFUL CARE OF ME--VISITED -BY MY COUSIN--KINDNESS OF SAN BERNARDINO SAINTS--RECOVERING FROM MY -ILLNESS--MY CLOTHING BURNED--HEAVY EXPENSE BILL AGAINST ME--TELL THE -CITY MARSHAL OF MY ARRIVAL IN CALIFORNIA AS A UNITED STATES SOLDIER IN -THE MEXICAN WAR--KINDNESS OF THE MARSHAL--LOS ANGELES ASSUMES THE BILL -FOR MEDICAL ATTENTION GIVEN ME--START FOR SAN BERNARDINO--EXHAUSTED -ON THE JOURNEY--ALMOST DIE OF THIRST--RELIEVED BY A PARTY OF SPANISH -LADIES--KINDNESS OF SPANISH FAMILIES--ARRIVE AT SAN BERNARDINO AND MEET -FRIENDS AND RELATIVES. - -EARLY next morning, the marshal and doctor were there with suitable -refreshments, and when the patient had made a feint at eating they told -him they had secured a room if he could put up with it. Sheep had been -kept in it, and it was smoked very black, but they assured him that -the conditions were favorable to recovery from the disease. Then they -took him by his arms and assisted him into an old cart that they had -standing at the door; they had an Indian to lead the horse. - -The patient could not see a particle only as he held his eyes open with -his fingers. He told them of his trunk, which had been left all this -time where the freighter had dumped it when the writer came into town. -The trunk was brought, and the Indian led out, the marshal and doctor -bringing up the rear. - -When we passed the suburbs, we turned to the right, to an old deserted -adobe house of two rooms. The front yard had been used as a sheepfold. -The doors had been broken down, and the sheep had had free access to -the rooms, until the sheep manure was some five or six inches deep on -the dirt floor. The rooms were very poorly lighted at best; and to add -to the darkness, the sheepherders had camped in them till the whole of -the inside of the rooms was smoked as black as a stove. The doctor said -it was the best they could do, adding: "It is too d--d bad to put you -in such a place, but if you will put up with it, it will be the very -best thing for you in the end. The sheepy smell, and the darkness, with -some ointment that I will give you, will prevent your being marked; -whereas, if you were kept in a light, clean room, you have got the -disease so bad that you would be marked all over. Then again you have -been so badly exposed that you must put up with the treatment in order -to recover properly, lest something else follows." - -I told him that my condition was such that I was compelled to submit to -any treatment they saw fit to give. Then they got some tools, removed -the dry, hard packed manure, and placed my mattress down on the dirt -floor, so that when the covering was spread ready for me it was just -level with the manure on the front, the foot, head and back being -against the walls. - -Having turned in, I opened my eyes with my fingers, and found myself -in twilight, with an Indian man for a nurse. The marshal and doctor -left, saying that I should be cared for. Then the nurse went off, and -soon returned with a custard in a coffee basin; this he said was worth -fifty cents. He brought it, and an iron spoon to eat the custard, but -when I opened my eyes in such an unnatural way, they appeared so badly -bloodshot that the nurse took fright and ran away, leaving me to my -fate until 5 or 6 o'clock p.m. Then an old Spaniard, who was very badly -pox-marked, came and said he had been engaged as a nurse, as the Indian -was so frightened at the disease that he would not return. The Spaniard -seemed to comprehend the conditions. He got a Spanish roll of bread and -a pint of milk for fifty cents, then straightened up the bed and left -for the night. Next morning he was on hand to attend to my wants. - -This was on February 6, 1853. The smallpox began to appear in pustules, -or rather boils; for it so resembled the latter that I began to think -of patient old Job. I was sore from the crown of my head to the soles -of my feet, and yet it was only blisters that day, comparatively -speaking. - -The Spanish nurse seemed to understand his business, for as I would -roll and toss, the old gentleman would tuck the bedclothes about me, -saying, "Must not let the air to you. Must keep warm, and have warm -drink, and have the bowels moderately easy." Then he would apply the -ointment, and be as cheerful as possible, doing all that he could to -divert my mind from my sufferings. - -Night came on and the blisters enlarged; I became very sick at the -stomach, and the kind old nurse stayed by me till daylight on the 7th. -The fever still raged fiercely. Night again came, and the nurse got -alarmed at seeing some six or seven rough men, armed, approaching the -house. He hastily gathered his arms full of cobblestones, ran in and -piled them on the edge of the bed, and cried out, "Can you fight? The -robbers are coming. Murder! murder!" At that I raised in bed, opened my -eyes in the new way, and took up a cobble rock, the nurse standing by -the bed shouting "Murder!" - -The next moment three ruffians appeared at the partition door, in the -house, while another presented himself at the window, near the head -of the bed. So far as I could see, they were armed with revolvers and -bowie knives. There must have been two or three men at the outside door. - -The shock came so suddenly that I had no time to get thoroughly scared -until I heard men running around the northwest corner of the house. -The latter noise was by the marshal and a posse which he had summoned -hastily, for a party had been in the saloon and had heard the ruffians -say, "Let's go and rob that man who has got the smallpox, for he has -got money." It must be that some of the party had been the ones who -had ripped the belt off of me while on shipboard, where they had been -disturbed before they had time to slip it away. Thus they had learned -about the money, and when they got to drinking and gambling, they -probably had decided on robbing the smallpox man to make a raise, but -had talked too loud for the success of their plan. The marshal acted -so promptly that they were foiled in their plot, for when they heard -him and his posse coming, and the nurse shouting "Murder!" they fled -to the southeast and passed over into a dark, deep, brushy ravine, -out of sight, just as the marshal and party gained the south side of -the building. The officer said he saw them, but had not time to shoot -before they disappeared in the brush and darkness. - -The marshal came into the house and informed me of the plot and how he -came to hear of it. He said, "Now, if you have any money or valuable -papers, you had better send for some trusty friend to come and take -care of them. I will send for anyone that you will name." I told him -I did not know of a better friend than the one who had come to my -relief, and if he, the marshal, would take care of the valuables, I -would be much obliged. He said he would take charge of them and have -them deposited for safekeeping till I wanted them. I then handed out -my memorandum book, with the names of the men who sent the money, the -amounts, and the names of those to whom it was sent. Then, my eyes -being propped open, I poured the money on to a handkerchief they had -spread over my lap. As the money was mostly in gold ten and twenty -dollar pieces, in fifty dollar packages, it was easily and quickly -counted, and found to tally with the memoranda. Then the drafts and -checks were counted, and all put together in the belt--some fifteen -hundred dollars--and handed over to the marshal, with Dr. Jones as -witness. - -When the gold was being counted out, some of the would-be robbers -appeared at the window, and doubtless saw that the marshal was taking -charge of the valuables, by which action their plot fell through, -and I was not troubled any more. But the experience was enough for -the Spanish nurse, for the robbers undoubtedly were Spaniards or -"greasers," and if they could take revenge on him they would do it. -Some of the marshal's posse stayed till they felt satisfied the danger -was all over, then they, with the nurse, left, and next day sent to -me an old badly pox-marked sailor for an attendant. He came in with a -bottle of whisky that he said was a hundred years old. - -The first thing the new nurse said was, "Hello, old chum! What are you -doing there? Come, and have a drink with me." The next breath he said, -"No, no, for I know it would not do for you. I will drink for you. So -here goes." He then took a liberal draught, and wanted to know what he -could do for my comfort. On being told there was nothing I wanted just -then, he said, "Let me sing you a song," and he sang a very comical -ditty. Then he said, "I'll dance a jig for you," and at it he went. In -the performance he kicked the dry manure pretty nearly all over me and -my bed, for he was "three sheets in the wind and the fourth fluttering" -(three-fourths drunk, or more.) - -When he saw what he had done, he dropped on his knees and begged -pardon, making the most humble apology. Said he, "Never mind, old chum, -just lay over to starboard, and I will make it all right." He brushed -and brushed away, then said, "Now to larboard, and I will fix you all -right." So he pounded away, talking all the time in his sailor phrases. -Finally he partially sobered up, and it would have been hard to find a -more thoughtful and attentive nurse. From that time on he stayed with -me, told many interesting sea stories, and sang love songs. - -On February 10th my cousin, John M. Brown, who was passing through that -part of the country, came to the door and called. "Is that you, James?" -At the same time he threw a ten dollar gold piece on the bed; but not -having had the smallpox, he dare not come in. We had not met before in -eight years. At that date I was suffering intensely, if not the worst -that I had done, for I was down so weak that I could not help myself at -all. - -On the 11th, W. G. Sherwood, of San Bernardino, came in, saying that -the Saints had raised some money for me, and had sent him to take care -of me until I was able to come out to them. Brothers D. Clark and J. -Bailey had told President Seeley of my condition. I felt indeed very -thankful for the favors shown me. - -On the 14th the smallpox had nearly died away, and by the 19th I was -considered out of all danger, with prudence. On the 20th, the doctor -and marshal came and ordered all of my bedding and a good suit of -clothes that I had on when taken down, boots, hat, and all, piled in -the yard, and there burned. They said my expenses had been five dollars -per day for the house, because of the disease and being close to where -the landlord and his family lived. The nurses also had to be paid the -same amount per day. I told them I had been out on a long mission at my -own expense, and now had so little money that it would cost me every -dollar that I had to meet the loss of my clothes and bedding, so it was -impossible for me to settle such a bill, one hundred and forty dollars. -I had paid for every article I had used except a little medicine the -doctor had furnished. - -The marshal and doctor said they understood that I had come into the -country as a soldier in the time of the Mexican war. I told them that I -had helped to build the fort that overlooked the town, and that I went -to San Bernardino canyon and helped get down the first liberty pole -that ever bore the Stars and Stripes on this western coast. At this -they asked a number of questions, as if to satisfy themselves whether -or not I had told them the truth, and when they became convinced the -marshal said: "Mr. Brown, do not make any trouble, for we will see that -you do not have to pay that bill; you are worthy of all the care that -you have had, and more too. Los Angeles will pay that, and you are -free to go on your way. We are pleased to have made your acquaintance, -and that you have recovered so well; for your case has been a very -remarkable one, to have had the disease so badly and after being -exposed as you were, to have recovered so soon, with scarce a mark left -on you. It has been a most wonderful case, and we congratulate you on -your safe recovery, and wish you success on your journey to Salt Lake." -Of course I could not feel otherwise than very grateful to those two -gentlemen for their kind attention and largeness of soul. Then we bade -each other good-bye and I am not conscious that we have ever met since -that day. - -Brother Sherwood and I stored my trunk, put our other effects on his -poor old stallion, went down town and got my money and some provisions -and a bottle of old whisky, and were amused to see so many people run -from the smallpox, while others stood afar off and gazed. Finally, on -February 21st, we set out for San Bernardino, eighty miles, on foot, -one leading and the other punching the old horse, which was so weak -that he stumbled wherever the road was a little rough. We only got ten -miles that day. - -On the 22nd we proceeded on our journey another ten miles, when it was -impossible for me to go any further. I was thoroughly exhausted, and -had to lie down or drop. We were ten miles from water, and so thirsty -that it seemed that I must die on that arid plain. Brother Sherwood, -however, proved equal to the emergency. He got me on to a pair of -blankets, led the old horse up so as to cast a shadow over me, then -hastened to soak a piece of bread in some old whisky. He gave me the -bread, saying it would slake my thirst, and stimulate me. Strange as it -seemed to me, it did so, and in a short time I was able to rise alone, -and sit up. - -We had not been there a great while when we saw a party of Spanish -ladies coming in on another road, that appeared to unite with the one -we were on; so by an effort we gained the junction just as they did. -They stopped their cart, and asked if we would have some wine. We said -we preferred water, and they gave us both. Seeing that I was very ill, -they invited me to ride with them, making room so that I had a place -between the two on the front seat and rested my head and shoulders on -the laps of the two on the rear seat, while they bathed my head with -water, and urged me to take a little more wine. It did seem that if it -had not been for this most unexpected kindness I should have died of -thirst and exhaustion before we could have reached any other source of -support. - -Brother Sherwood followed in the rear to where the ladies lived, but -before he came up I was helped on to a bed in a cool room, and had some -refreshments, with a cup of chocolate. Oh, how thankful I was to those -blessed Spanish "senoritas!" When their husbands came in, they shook -hands and seemed to be pleased that their wives had dealt so kindly -with the strange American. Brother Sherwood soon arrived, and they -unpacked his horse and took care of it, while the women supplied him -with water to bathe his hands and face, and with refreshments. Then he -and I retired early. - -Next morning, February 23, we were served with chocolate and tortias -(pancakes) before we were out of bed. Our hosts had only a humble -home, but so kind were they in their attentions to us that it aroused -suspicions of a large bill to pay, but when we asked them the amount -they shrugged their shoulders Spanish fashion, and with a pleasant -smile said, in Spanish, "Nothing; friendship; no more." As we bade them -good-bye they said they would be pleased for me to allow them to have -the little smallpox scab that was on my nose, if we thought it would -not leave a mark, so they and Brother Sherwood removed it, and thought -it would not leave any pit; therefore I allowed him to remove it and -leave it with them. Still it did leave its mark till this day. - -We proceeded on to a ranch where we met with a fourth cousin of mine, -John Garner, who kindly offered me a seat in his wagon. He was loaded -and could not start till late, but we could reach his place before -midnight, and Brother Sherwood could push on; for when we started -Sherwood would not be able to keep up. I accepted his proposition, and -we reached his home at 11 o'clock p.m. - -On the 24th I went to what they called at that time, I believe, Fort -San Bernardino. There I found many warm-hearted friends, and a number -of relatives, among them John M. and Alexander Brown, my cousins. I -made my home with the latter, who, with his wife, was very kind to me. -I also visited many old acquaintances. My trunk I sent for by Sidney -Tanner, and he brought it from Los Angeles free of charge. - - - -CHAPTER XXXIX. - -REPORT MY MISSION--PREPARE TO CONTINUE THE JOURNEY TO UTAH--HAVE -TO REMAIN AT SAN BERNARDINO FOR A TIME--SICKNESS AMONG THE -PEOPLE--INSTANCES OF HEALING BY ADMINISTRATION--ENGAGE TO TRAVEL -WITH A PACK-TRAIN TO SALT LAKE CITY--GET A "BUCKING" MILE--START ON -THE JOURNEY--IN A HOSTILE INDIAN COUNTRY--SIGNS OF DANGER--PREPARE -FOR TROUBLE--SUDDEN APPEARANCE OF AN INDIAN--OUR PARTY WANT TO -SHOOT--I PROTEST, AND MAKE FRIENDS WITH THE INDIAN--OTHER RED MEN -APPEAR--DIFFICULTY OF RESTRAINING OUR PARTY--I CONVERSE WITH THE -INDIANS, WHO TELL OF A CAMP OF MORMONS AND MEXICANS A SHORT DISTANCE -AHEAD--HOW I UNDERSTOOD THE INDIANS--DISCOVER THE CAMP SPOKEN OF--REST -A DAY--MOVE TOWARD THE SANTA CLARA--DANGER AHEAD--A FIRE ACROSS OUR -PATH--WE DASH THROUGH IT--HOSTILE INDIANS--AN EXCITING CHASE--MEET -APOSTLES A. M. LYMAN AND C. C. RICH--ARRIVE AT CEDAR CITY--STOP -AT PAROWAN--JOURNEY NORTH, PREACHING EN ROUTE--REACH SALT LAKE -CITY--SETTLE WITH THE PEOPLE FOR WHOM I HAVE MONEY--REPORT TO PRESIDENT -YOUNG--PREACH IN THE TABERNACLE--RELEASED PROM MY MISSION--COST OF MY -MISSION TO THE SOCIETY ISLANDS. - -ON February 27th, I was called on by President Seeley of the branch of -the Church at San Bernardino, to give a report of my mission, and I did -so before the congregation. On March 9th, I prepared to come home with -John and Alexander Brown, to Salt Lake City, but for some reason they -gave up the idea of traveling at that time, and I had to await another -opportunity. Then we looked about the country, thinking that we would -make some improvements, if we did not meet with a better chance to come -to Utah. - -About this time there was a great amount of sickness in the place, and -Elder Thomas Whitaker, from the islands, and I had numerous calls to -administer to the sick. Many seemed to be possessed of evil spirits; -certainly, if they had lived in Mary Magdalene's day it would have -been said of them that they had seven devils in them; for the actions -were the same as in those days, and the evil spirits would not come -out except through fasting and prayer. Consequently, President Seeley -ordered a fast and a prayer meeting for the Saints. It was very well -attended, and good results followed. Many people were healed of the -diseases afflicting them. One incident I will mention: There lived -in the town a man named John Brown; he had a Spanish wife and one or -two children. One evening, Major Jefferson Hunt's wife called on me -to come as quickly as possible, for Mr. Brown's child looked as if it -were dying. I went in, and found the mother and child in bed together. -The little one acted as if it were choking to death, and was fighting -for breath; it gnashed its teeth and frothed at the mouth. I anointed -it with consecrated oil, and as there was no other Elder handy I -administered to the child, when every symptom of its trouble left it -immediately, but seized on the mother. She raved, frothed and foamed -at the mouth, gnashed her teeth, cramped, and seemed so ill that she -could not live five minutes. Sister Hunt anointed her with oil, and I -administered to her. She was healed that moment. An Indian woman was -sitting there sewing, and the same power that had afflicted the child -and its mother took hold of the Indian woman. By this time another -sister had stepped in, and she and Sister Hunt raised the Indian woman -up, for she had fallen over. They called on me to lay hands on her, -but I did not feel to do so at once. I told them to wet her face and -rub her hands. They did so, and she grew worse every minute, until I -administered to her, by laying my hands upon her and praying, rebuking -the evil spirits, commanding them in the name of the Lord to come -out of her and to depart from her and from that house, and from the -houses and homes of the Saints, and to get hence to their own home, -and trouble us no more. That moment the evil spirits left, and did not -return again. The three persons who were afflicted were perfectly well -next morning, and I never heard of their being afflicted afterwards. - -There had been a number of cases where persons had been similarly -affected, and some of them were not healed until they had been baptized -seven times in succession, when they were permanently cured. Indeed, -there were very many remarkable cases of healing in San Bernardino -about that time. - -On April 15th, my cousin, John M. Brown, learned that a man named -Lamper was going to start with the mail to Salt Lake City, and had only -four men with him. As that was too small a number to be safe, it was -ascertained that if he could have three or four more he would like it -very much. He told John M. Brown that if he would raise two or three -other men, he would wait at the mouth of the Cajon Pass for them. - -As my cousin had never had any experience with pack animals, he told me -that if I would go with him and help with the stock and packs, for that -service he would furnish everything needed en route, he knowing that I -had had experience in that line, and in the handling of wild horses and -mules. - -I accepted the offer, so we made ready, and were off on the 19th of -April. We overtook the party in waiting at the place agreed upon. The -animal provided for my saddle mule was wild, large and strong, and -given to jumping stiff-legged, or bucking, as it is called. It was a -hard animal to handle, and was successful in dumping its rider three -times in the fore part of the journey, to the amusement of his five -comrades. We had nineteen head of animals, and traveled at the rate of -fifty miles per day, for the first half of the journey, because our -route led us through a hostile Indian country. - -We stood regular turns of guard, and all went well till the last day -before we came to the Muddy. That day we saw danger signs, of Indians. -I will say now, my friendly reader, if ever you travel in an Indian -country, and come to fresh Indian tracks, yet do not see an Indian, -then you may be sure that some red man wants a few horses and some -plunder, if, indeed, he does not want a scalp or two to hang to his -bridle-bit or surcingle. That was our danger sign, plenty of fresh -Indian tracks, where they had rolled large boulders into the narrow -passes in the road, or gorges where the road passed through. This -satisfied us that we were in danger of an unpleasant surprise, so we -examined every firelock, made sure there was powder in every tube, good -waterproof caps on, ammunition handy, packs securely bound, saddles -well girt, and every man prepared to act promptly in case of an attack. - -At this time we were crossing from the Las Vegas to the Muddy. I -think the distance without water was sixty-five miles, so there was -no alternative for us but to press forward to the Muddy River, were -we arrived in safety about 4 a.m., watered our stock, and got a hasty -meal, giving our animals a very short time for rest and to feed. - -At daylight we began to saddle up for another start. Just as we were -ready to mount, a large, stout Indian raised up out of the willows -within bow-shot, and hallooed. He had his bows and arrows in hand. At -that my cousin John leveled his gun on the red man, when I seized it -and forbade anyone to shoot, as others of the party had made ready for -the worst. At that moment the Indian held out his hand and came toward -us, as if to shake hands. Every man of the party but myself was ready -and anxious to open fire on the Indian, but I stood between him and -them until they had mounted. I told them if there was one shot fired -every one of us would be killed. The Indian said to me that he wished -to be friendly. Then I mounted and the party started, and at the same -time twenty-five or thirty Indians, all well armed, raised up out of -the brush within easy pistol range. My party again drew their guns, -when I told them to hold on, for the Indians were friendly, and their -object was merely to beg some food; but some of my party were hard to -control. - -As my companions trotted up, I fell back with the Indians, who talked, -and I began to understand them, although I had not been among them -one day. It was given me to understand them, and I told my companions -that I did so. I told them further, that I would stand between them -and the Indians, if they would not shoot. One said, "How do you know -that they are friendly if you have never been among them before? They -are following us up. Send them away, if you know so much about their -friendship." - -The Indians told me that when the sun got to such a position, pointing -to where it would be at about 9 o'clock a.m., we would come to a large -camp of Mormons and non-Mormons, with their families; that they had -horses, mules and horned stock, and wagons, also some sheep and goats. -There was a lot of Mexicans camped with them, and these had pack-mules. -This, and more, was told me in the Indian dialect, and was as plain to -my understanding as if it had been spoken in my native tongue; yet my -party were slow to believe, and some of them cursed the Indians, saying -that if the black rascals were friendly, why did they not go back, -instead of following us up. Being fearful that our party could not be -restrained much longer, I halted and talked with the Indians, telling -them I was afraid my friends would shoot them unless they fell back, -and ceased to follow up so closely. The Indians replied that I would -soon learn that what they had said was true, as they did not talk two -ways. - -Just then we saw a Mexican come dashing down the hillside towards us. -When he came to us and shook hands, then confirmed what the Indians -had told me, my cousin John said, "I believe Jim does understand the -Indians, for he understands the Spanish language, and the Spaniards -have told him just what the Indians have said. I believe he is half -Indian, or he would not be so friendly with and understand them so -well." - -Soon we came to a raise, from which we could see the camps, just as -they had been described to us minutely in the morning, by the Indians, -who followed us up to the camps, and with pride pointed out to us -everything they had spoken of, saying, "We do not lie." I believe that -our party had become satisfied that the Indians had made the signs seen -on the road the day before, and then had laid in ambush to intimidate -us, that they might get something to eat, for they were very closely -run for food; again, it may have been that they meant more serious -things and were deterred therefrom by learning of the approach of the -company we found in camp. - -At any rate we felt safer to lay by with the camp one day, and rest -ourselves and stock; then we proceeded over a big dry bench to the Rio -Virgen, then up that river and across another high plateau to Beaver -Dam. From there we crossed another high rolling country of some forty -miles or more, to Santa Clara. When we got half way across we saw -a signal smoke, apparently on the Santa Clara where the road comes -to that stream, or perhaps a little above. Feeling conscious of our -weakness, we watched the smoke with no little concern, and as I had had -considerably more acquaintance with the red men than any others of the -party, I told them that from the way the fire was managed there was -mischief ahead, and we must prepare for the worst. Our animals were -thirsty and well jaded, yet there was no choice for us but to brave the -danger ahead. Then the examination of firelocks and the cinching of -saddles was in order. That matter, however, was delayed so long as we -felt safe. - -When the preparation was made, and the smoke had grown denser, we -advanced and saw that the streak of fire was in the narrows of the -canyon. It extended from cliff to cliff, and evidently was made -in a scheme of plunder or massacre, most likely both. Under the -circumstances, we were compelled to run the gauntlet, so it was hastily -decided for me to lead the way. I agreeing to do this if the party -would obey my orders, and not fire until I did, or gave the command to -them. If I gave the warwhoop they were to do the same. The first order -was to draw weapons for action, then charge with all possible speed. -Away we went, and as we neared the flames we chose the most open spot, -or that which seemed freest of fire. Although there was a continuous -stream of flames clear across the canyon, some places were freer than -others. We chose the place where the least fire was, the flames there -being not more than two or two and a half feet high. If the timber in -the canyon had been larger, it might have afforded the Indians a better -opportunity, but instead of secreting themselves in the bottom of the -ravine, they had chosen the cliffs on either side. - -Just before we reached the fire, we urged our animals up to the best -speed, and, raising as big a warwhoop as we were capable of, and -brandishing our firearms in the most threatening manner, we dashed -through. At the same time, the Indians showed themselves in the cliffs -with drawn bows, trying to take aim through the timber. They answered -our whoop or yell, and gave chase, but they being on foot, and our -animals having become thoroughly frightened at the sudden change that -had taken place and with the evergoading spurs of their riders, rushed -on ahead. Though very thirsty, our animals never attempted to drink, -although we crossed the stream a number of times. For fully five miles -we never slackened our speed, the Indians keeping in sight of us for -fully that distance, when they gave up the chase. Then our stock and -ourselves quenched our thirst, and we continued on at as good a speed -as was consistent with our conditions. Finally we met Apostles Amasa M. -Lyman and C. C. Rich, with two or three wagons and twelve or fourteen -men, mostly mounted. As it was camp time, we made a joint camp, and -had no more trouble. If an arrow had been shot at us, we did not know -it, though there may have been a hundred or more. We did not think it -advisable to try to ascertain, as we felt that our scalps were more -precious than this information, or than money or horseflesh. It was -distance between us and the scalping-knife of the red men that we were -hunting for just then. - -We stood double guard that night, and all passed off peacefully. Next -morning, each party proceeded on its way in peace, we to Cedar Fort, or -city, where we arrived May 5th, and met with many friends. We attended -meeting with the people, I was called on to give an account of my -mission, and did so. - -On May 6th, we proceeded to Parowan, and as it was considered safe from -there on, my cousin John M. Brown and I stopped there with friends -we had not seen for years. The rest of the party, having the mail in -charge, went ahead, and we tarried one week, being royally treated. I -preached two or three times. We resumed the journey on the 15th. In -passing along, I preached in most of the towns where we stayed over -night. - -When we came to Lehi, I commenced to settle with the people whom I had -money for, then went on to Little Cottonwood and settled with more, -then to Big Cottonwood, where I found still others for whom I had money. - -On May 22nd we arrived in Salt Lake City, and stopped with our uncle. -Alexander Stephens. On the 23rd, I called at President Brigham Young's -office and reported myself and mission. He received me very kindly, and -welcomed me home again. I also met Brothers H. C. Kimball and Jedediah -M. Grant, a number of the Twelve Apostles, and other prominent men. All -were very courteous, and expressed pleasure at my safe return. - -On the 24th and 25th, I called and settled with all I had money, -checks, or drafts for, and I found them all well, and much pleased to -get the needed relief, financially. On the 26th, as I desired to go to -Ogden City, I called at President Young's office to bid him good-bye. -He kindly invited me to come to the stand in the Tabernacle on June -7th, to preach. I did so, though it delayed me in my intended visit to -my friends and relatives in Ogden City. When I filled that call, I was -honorably released from further labors in the missionary field at that -time. My mission had occupied three years and eight months, and cost me -every dollar that I had when I started out. I was then worth fifteen -hundred dollars in good property, which I spent; but I never regretted -it. The experience that I had gained I counted worth much more than the -money expended. - - - -CHAPTER XL. - -TRAVEL ON FOOT TO OGDEN--WELL RECEIVED BY RELATIVES AND FRIENDS--REPLY -TO INQUIRIES BY THE PEOPLE REGARDING THE SOCIETY ISLANDS AND -THE INHABITANTS THEREOF--CALLED TO GO TO FORT HALL--ORDER -COUNTERMANDED--CALLED ON A MISSION TO THE INDIANS--DESIGN OF THE -MISSION--ORGANIZATION OF THE COMPANY, AND START FROM SALT LAKE -CITY--HARD WORK OF THE JOURNEY--ATTACKED BY WOLVES--FATAL DUEL AT -FORT BRIDGER--PLANS OF DESPERADOES--WE GO TO SMITH'S FORK--BUILD -A BLOCKHOUSE--ARRIVAL OF MORE MEN AND SUPPLIES--THREATENING -ATTITUDE OF THE INDIANS--WRITER MADE SERGEANT OF THE GUARD AND -QUARTERMASTER--INSTRUCTIONS FROM ELDER ORSON HYDE--LIFE IN OUR -NEW CAMP--COLD WEATHER AND WILD BEASTS--LEARNING THE INDIAN -LANGUAGE--GIVE SHELTER TO INDIANS--DESPERADO CHIEF KILLED BY ONE OF -HIS MEN--ANIMALS PERISH FROM COLD AND STARVATION--TERRIFIC STORMS AND -SNOWDRIFTS--SAVING OUR STOCK--SHOSHONE INDIANS ASK FOR AND RECEIVE -ASSISTANCE--HUNT FOR ANTELOPE FAILS--A BACHELOR'S DANCE--RAISING A -LIBERTY POLE--PARTITIONING OUT LANDS--PLOWING AND PLANTING--ARRIVAL OF -AND INSTRUCTIONS BY ELDER ORSON HYDE--SELECTIONS FOR A SPECIAL MISSION -TO THE INDIANS--ORGANIZATION OF GREEN RIVER COUNTY. - -ON June 9, 1853, I started to Ogden City, afoot and alone. On the 10th, -I paid out the last quarter of a dollar that I had to the ferryman, to -set me across the Weber River, at East Weber. From there I crossed the -hills to my Uncle John Stephens', and found him and his family well and -pleased to see me. I reciprocated the pleasure, had dinner and a short -visit, then went on to Ogden City, where I again met with Cousin John -M. Brown and his father's family, and our two aunts, Polly and Nancy -Brown; as also more relatives and former friends, all of whom treated -me with much kindness, and as if the lost had been found. - -The first Sabbath after my arrival in Ogden, I was called on to give -a report of my mission, and to preach. By doing this, there was a -great spirit of inquiry excited about the Society Islands and their -inhabitants. I found that scarce one in a thousand of the people -had the remotest idea of affairs on the islands I had been to. The -questions asked and the answers given were about like this: - -Q. Where are the islands? - -A. In the South Pacific Ocean. - -Q. What are they like? - -A. The spur of a mountain in a vast plain. - -Q. What are the chief products? - -A. Cocoanuts, oranges, lemons, limes, citrus fruits, arrowroot, sweet -potatoes or yams (a species of potato that takes about eighteen -months to mature), coffee, cotton, chili pepper, corn, rice, tobacco, -sugarcane; a root called taro grows in the swamps and somewhat -resembles the Indian turnip that grows in the Middle States, and on the -islands is cultivated for food, being one of the most staple products; -breadfruit grows in great abundance; there is a fruit called viapple -and another called doava, neither of which is of much importance. There -are also pineapples, bananas, and a fruit called feii which grows on a -plant like the banana, and is one of the best and most generally used -fruits there. - -Q. Is the soil rich? - -A. Yes; but this is limited to small strips along the coasts and the -water courses. - -Q. What kind of a climate is it? - -A. Very hot. Papeete, the capital of Tahiti, is in seventeen degrees -thirty-two minutes south latitude, and one hundred and forty-four -degrees thirty-four minutes west longitude, computed from Greenwich, -and if it were not for the frequent rains, southerly breezes, and the -constant trade winds, it would be almost impossible for human beings to -live there. - -Q. What kinds of timber grow there? - -A. Various kinds of scrubby timber not known in our country, chief of -which is hutu or tamana, an excellent timber for shipbuilding, and for -fine furniture; there is also sandal wood, the heart being of great -value, as it is used for perfume, and decorating musical instruments, -work-boxes, etc. - -Q. Having given a brief description of the islands composing the -Society group, the Tubuoi and Tubuoimono archipelago, and of their -principal products, the next question was: What kind of people inhabit -them? - -A. They are very large in stature, are brave, and formerly were very -warlike. Their complexion is like that of the American Indian, and -their habits are much the same. They are hospitable to a fault. In -their heathenish days, they were idol-worshipers and very devout. -Originally, their government was patriarchal, but as they increased it -became tribal, then confederate. A district of country called monteina -would combine for war purposes, and finally would become a monarchy. -Thus they had their kings and queens, and began to have royalty. As -to other matters, there are no native animals, but of fowls there are -such as sea birds, and the common wild duck; also of reptiles, a small, -harmless, greenish lizard. The greatest insect pests are the nimble -flea and the common mosquito, in numberless quantities. Many years ago -the people had the smallpox, and as it was a strange disease to them, -and they were without the knowledge of how to treat it, they died by -hundreds, if not by thousands. As soon as they learned that it was -contagious, the people fled to the mountains, and there hid away until -their swine and chickens went wild, in which state these increased, -producing the wild boar and wild chickens, which are frequently -hunted by the people, and which, but for the rugged fastnesses of the -mountains, soon would become extinct. - -[IMAGE: A TYPICAL TAHITIAN WITH HIS BURDEN OF BREAD FRUIT AND FEII.] - -I will leave that subject now and return to my own experiences after -getting home. I turned my hand to farm labor, and anything I could get -to do until the 6th of September. Then Major Moore, having received -orders from Governor Young to raise a company of men and send them -north to Fort Hall, to protect or assist a company there on some -business, called me to take charge of that company. When we were within -three hours of starting, the order to go was countermanded, and I -continued to work for two dollars per day until the 8th of October, -when, at a general conference, I was called, with several others, to -take a mission to the Indian tribes east of the Salt Lake valley. - -Elder Orson Hyde was chosen to lead the company to somewhere in the -region of the Green River, select a place, and there build an outpost -from which to operate as peacemakers among the Indians, to preach -civilization to them, to try and teach them how to cultivate the -soil, to instruct them in the arts and sciences if possible, and by -that means prevent trouble for our frontier settlements and emigrant -companies. We were to identify our interests with theirs, even to -marrying among them, if we would be permitted to take the young -daughters of the chief and leading men, and have them dressed like -civilized people, and educated. It was thought that by forming that -kind of an alliance we could have more power to do them good, and keep -peace among the adjacent tribes as also with our own people. - -It was known that there were wicked and cruel white men among the -Indians, working up the spirit of robbery and murder among the savage -tribes, and against the Mormon people. Our missionary call was to take -our lives in our hands, as true patriots, and head off, and operate as -far as possible against the wicked plots of white men who were trying -to carry their plans to success through the Indians, and possibly set -the savages on the war path, that the government might send troops out. -and thus make a better market for the schemers' herds of cattle and -horses. - -From the October conference I returned to Ogden City, settled what -little business I had, and prepared for the mission, going to Salt Lake -City on the 15th, ready for the work assigned me. There I reported -myself, but the majority of the men who had been called at the same -time that I was were not ready until the 1st of November, when we met -in the Council House, and there effected an organization. - -It was in the evening, about 8 o'clock, when we met. There were -thirty-nine men who reported themselves ready to start next morning. -November 2nd. Elders Orson Hyde, Parley P. Pratt and Ezra T. Benson, -of the Twelve Apostles, were present, and organized the company by -appointing Elders John Nebeker president and captain, John Harvey -first counselor and lieutenant and James S. Brown second counselor -and lieutenant. The captain and lieutenants were so that we might act -in a military capacity if necessity required it, and the president -and counselors were for ecclesiastical affairs. The officers were -blessed and set apart by the three Apostles named. The Apostles told -the members of the company that they would be blessed equally with the -officers if they would be prayerful, do their duty, and hearken to and -be united with their officers. We were also told that some of us might -have to take Indian wives. - -On November 2nd twenty wagons, with one hundred and ten head of cattle, -horses and mules, were ready for a start. To each man there was three -hundred pounds of flour, seventy-five pounds of seed wheat, and forty -pounds of seed potatoes. Each man fitted himself up with such other -provisions and seed as he chose or could do. We started out at 1 -o'clock p.m., and that night camped in Emigration Canyon. - -We crossed the Little Mountain on November 3rd. Having to double teams, -we made slow headway, and only got to within four miles of the Big -Mountain. On the 5th, we crossed that, and camped at its eastern base. -The road was very bad, so that we made but few miles on the 6th, and -camped in the foothills, where our stock was attacked about 3 o'clock -a.m. by a pack of big gray wolves, which were so savage that every man -had to be called out to fight them. The night was very dark, and we -fired guns, built fires in a circle around the stock, and stayed with -them till daylight. Yet, with all that, some of the milch cows had part -of their udders torn off, while others were badly gashed as by a sharp -knife. By hard work we succeeded in preventing the wolves killing any -of our animals, and then got an early start on the morning of the 7th. - -As we were heavily loaded, and the roads very rough, we did not reach -Fort Bridger until November 15th. At that place there were twelve or -fifteen rough mountain men. They seemed to be very surly and suspicious -of us and the spirit of murder and death appeared to be lurking in -their minds. Many of our party could feel that terrible influence and -made remarks about it. It was not long till we were informed by some of -the party at the fort that two men there had fought a duel the night -before with butcher knives, and both were killed. The others of the -party had dug a hole and had thrown both men into it as they had fallen -and died--clasped in each other's arms. Thus the gloom and cloud of -death that we had felt so plainly was partially explained. We passed -one and a half miles above the fort, and camped on Black's Fork. That -night it snowed about six inches. - -We learned from the men at Fort Bridger that fifteen or twenty mountain -men had moved over on to Henry's Fork, and that the Ute Indians were -coming over there to winter. That was the place we were heading -for, and some of the roughest men of the mountains were claiming -that as their country. Our information now being that there was a -well-organized band of from seventy-five to a hundred desperadoes in -the vicinity of Green River, at the very point that we had hoped to -occupy with our little company, the situation was serious; and with -snow on the ground, to decide what to do was an important matter. -We broke camp and passed over the divide to Smith's Fork. There the -Spirit seemed to forbid us going any farther, and we held a short -consultation, which resulted in the appointment of a committee of five, -of which the writer was one. - -This committee followed up the creek to a point where the water comes -down through the foothills, and there, between the forks of the stream, -selected a spot for winter quarters, and to build a blockhouse. Then -they returned and made their report, which was accepted by the captain -and his men. The camp was moved to the chosen ground on November 27th. -We at once pitted our potatoes, the committee named being retained -to draft and superintend the erection of the blockhouse. The writer -made the plans of the blockhouse, which was built with four wings, or -rooms, of equal size; these, uniting at the corners, formed a center -room, which was built two stories high. All the rooms were provided -with port holes, the center being used for storage, and the upper for a -guardhouse, from which the country around could be overlooked. The plan -being accepted, every man went to work with a will, and in two weeks -the house was ready for occupancy. This was not an hour too soon, for -the weather was very cold and threatening. - -On the 26th, Captain Isaac Bullock came in with fifty-three men and -twenty-five wagons. When they joined us our company was ninety-two -strong, all well armed; and when our blockhouse was completed we -felt safer than ever. The work of building was continued until all -were comfortably housed in log cabins, and a heavy log corral was -constructed for our stock in case of an emergency. - -We had not been settled down long, when some of the mountaineers paid -us a visit and applauded our energy and enterprise. Notwithstanding -that, we could easily discern a feeling of envy on their part. In -consequence, we did not feel any too safe, especially when the snow -became deep between our friends and ourselves, for we frequently -heard that the Ute Indians, then a very warlike and hostile tribe, -were threatening to come upon us from the east, by an open country. -Under the circumstances, we could see the wisdom of our military -organization; and as we had to have a regular guard, we found that -we must have a sergeant thereof; accordingly, the author was elected -to fill that position, and as we had several beef cattle and other -provisions in common, a commissary or quartermaster was necessary, -and the sergeant was called to fill that position also. We further -perfected our organization by electing a captain for every ten men. -We were also instructed to keep our firearms in perfect order, and to -have our powder dry, that we might be prepared for any emergency. Thus -provided for, we continued to get out fencing limber, and exploring -parties were sent out, which acted as scouts, and we learned the -resources of the country, and sought out every advantage. - -It was on December 8 when Apostle Orson Hyde came into camp. He -preached to us that evening, and gave many words of encouragement. On -the 9th he examined our work and defenses. He was highly pleased with -the country, and applauded our choice of location; in fact, he seemed -generally well pleased with what we had done. He preached again, and -gave us much cheer and sound instructions. We prepared our mail in -answer to the one he had brought us, and on the 10th he set out on his -return trip, every one feeling blessed by his visit. - -In our religious and social arrangements, we held regular meetings, had -lectures on different subjects, organized a debating society, and had -readings. On December 26, F. M. Perkins and a party returned from Salt -Lake City, bringing much interesting news, and also supplies of food. -On the 28th, the weather was so cold that we had to abandon outdoor -work. - -Wolves became troublesome to our stock, so we put strychnine and set -traps for the wild beasts, which killed several head of cattle and one -of the strongest horses in our band. The wolves were very numerous, -and when they band, as they do sometimes, and did then, it is almost -impossible for any kind of stock to escape without some loss. Yet, with -rifle, trap and poison, we kept about even with our ravenous enemies. - -January 1, 1854, the weather was fine. On the 5th cold and storms came, -and we also heard more threatening news from the Ute Indians; but this -did not alarm us much, though it prompted us to increased diligence in -looking after our stock. There was some dissatisfaction about guard -duty, as some thought there was too much of it to suit them, and felt -that others should stand two hours to their one; but that was soon -settled and we continued our studies in the Shoshone Indian dialect, -having Elisha B. Ward, an old mountaineer and trapper, and his Indian -wife, Sally, to assist us. Then there was an Indian family of four who -got starved out and came to us for help. We took them in, fed them, -and gave them a room to themselves. Then Sally's brother, Indian John, -and his wife, Madam, came, so that we took them in and fed them. This -condition afforded us increased facilities for studying the Shoshone -dialect, which we carefully availed ourselves of. - -About this time, Louis Tromley, a Frenchman, stabbed Samuel Callwell. -The affair took place near Fort Bridger. Callwell was said to be at the -head of the gang of desperadoes who plied their vocation from Bridger -to Green River, and back on the emigrant route to Laramie; he was a -large, trim built man, about six feet six inches tall, and very daring. -But after a bowie knife was plunged into his vitals he did not survive -long, dying in about twenty-four hours from the time he received the -fatal wound. Tromley was one of Callwell's band, and made his escape. -It was thought by some that if his victim had lived he would have made -trouble for us, but this quarrel gave the gang something else to do. - -We continued our labors and studies; yet with all the opportunities -at hand, there were only about six of us out of the ninety-two that -made even fair progress in learning the Indian tongue. On February 7, -we received more mail. About the 22nd we lost many of our cattle from -starvation and cold. Deep snows fell, and drifted so that our houses -were completely buried, and from the south side we could walk right -up on top of our cabins, while on the north the snow drifted to the -tops of the doors, and packed so hard in one night that it had to be -cut out with the spade, the large chunks being laid back on the floor -until we could get out far enough to clear the houses. This condition -continued for many days. On March 8, the wind blew fearfully, and the -snow drifted so deep that we had to break snow roads, and then drive -our poor cattle and horses from point to point where the snow had been -blown off, leaving the grass bare. In this way many of our animals were -saved. - -On the 12th of March, a party of fifteen or twenty Shoshone Indians -came and pitched camp close to the blockhouse. They were very hungry, -and we divided bread with them, that being the only kind of food we -had left; and in turn their presence afforded us better opportunity -to study their language and customs, a knowledge of the latter being -essential to the successful interpreter. On March 18, more hungry -Indians came. They appeared almost starved, and they begged until they -became a nuisance; yet we divided with them, and ran ourselves short -before our store could be replenished. On the 27th we turned out on a -general hunt for antelope; at this time we were living on bread and -water. Our hunt failed, as it was probable the starving Indians had -killed or run off all the game from that part of the country. On the -29th the weather was still blustery, with heavy snow. We cleared the -blockhouse, and had a jolly dance, to drive dull care away. There being -no ladies to join with us, we christened it the bachelor's dance. - -April 1st came, and we cleared the snow and ice from our houses. On the -5th we received another mail from Salt Lake City, and on the 6th we -hoisted the first liberty pole that was raised in Green River County -to spread the Stars and Stripes of the United States of America to -the mountain breeze. On the 17th there was continuous snow and rain, -making very disagreeable weather. Committees were appointed to select -and stake off the farm land, the writer being on one of the committees. -We also placed out picket guards and chose men to herd our stock, and -corral them at night. On the 18th we started the plows, marking to each -mess their portion, as the committee had been directed to do. From the -23rd to the 26th we had cold, snowy weather. - -On the 28th President Nebeker and C. Merkley started for Salt Lake -City, and on May 1st D. R. Perkins and some others left for their -homes. The rest of the company continued to plow and plant. On the 7th -it snowed, and on the 8th Apostle Orson Hyde came with twenty-five new -men, bringing us a fresh supply of provisions. This supply was very -much appreciated, for we were, and had been for some weeks, living -on bread alone. The new company also brought our mail. I had eleven -letters, all containing good news from home. - -Elder Hyde preached to us on the evening of the 9th, and we had good -cheer; everyone seemed to be encouraged. We also held a council meeting -to select Elders to go to the Indian camps, and learn as near as -possible the feeling of the red men, and their movements, and to carry -out the object of our mission. In that meeting, Elder Hyde called on -the council for four or five Elders to volunteer to go east and hunt -up the Indian camps. There were seven volunteered, namely, E. B. Ward, -Isaac Bullock, John Harvey, J. Arnold, W. S. Muir, James S. Brown and -one other whose name I have lost. Elder Hyde said that E. B. Ward, -Isaac Bullock, and James S. Brown were three accepted from that list, -while James Davis was taken for the fourth. The persons named were then -sustained by the vote of the council, without a dissenting voice. Elder -Hyde gave us some instructions, and said the party would start in one -week from that day, or as much sooner as they chose. - -The council meeting then adjourned, and Judge W. I. Appleby organized -the county of Green River by appointing the officers therefor, Mr. -Appleby having been duly commissioned as judge, and authorized to act -in the capacity in which he did. - - - -CHAPTER XLI. - -SET APART BY ELDER HYDE FOR OUR SPECIAL MISSION--BLESSING CONFERRED -ON THE WRITER--DISCONTENT IN CAMP--UNITY AGAIN PREVAILS--START ON OUR -JOURNEY--WARNED AT GREEN RIVER TO GO NO FARTHER--NOT DETERRED FROM -PERFORMING OUR MISSION--PROCEED ON OUR JOURNEY--FUTILE CHASE AFTER -BUFFALO--SCARCITY OF WATER--A WELCOME SNOW STORM--REACH THE CAMP OF -WASHAKIE, THE SHOSHONE CHIEF--RECEIVED WITH CAUTION--TELL THE CHIEF THE -OBJECT OF OUR VISIT--GIVE HIM BREAD AND SUGAR--BOILED BUFFALO FOR AN -EPICURE--INDIAN POWWOW CALLED--PROCEEDINGS AT THE COUNCIL--OBJECTION -TO ONE OF OUR PROPOSITIONS, WHICH WE WERE NOT ANNOYED AT--RECITAL OF -HOW GOVERNMENT AGENTS SOUGHT TO SUPPLANT WASHAKIE AS CHIEF--WASHAKIE A -GREAT ORATOR. - -ANOTHER meeting was held on the 10th of May, and Elder Hyde preached -again. Then he called on those who had been selected for the mission, -told us to be wise as serpents and harmless as doves, to be cautious -and do all the good that we could to the red men, and said that God -would bless us. He also said, "I do not know which to appoint for the -leader, Brother Brown or Brother Bullock. They are both good men, but -as Brother Bullock is the eldest, he may have more experience." He -then blessed us, and promised me in my blessing that angels should go -before me, the visions of the Lord should be open to my view, and no -weapon that was raised against me should prosper, but that I should go -forth in the power and demonstration of the Lord God, and be mighty -in gathering Israel. Then he further instructed the party, and turned -again to me, pronouncing more blessings in line with those he had -given. Elder Hyde then started on his return trip home, and we prepared -ourselves as speedily as consistent for our expedition into a country -mostly unknown to us. - -April 11th and 12th were blustery, and there was snow. A reaction of -spirit took place among the brethren of the camp, or probably it would -be more proper to say that another spirit came upon the camp--a spirit -of great discontent. For a time it seemed as if it would break up the -mission, but finally it was overcome, and all went well again. - -On the 13th of April we set out on our journey, and went to Green -River the first day, through rain and sleet part of the time. At -Green River we found about thirty of the roughest kind of mountain -men, engaged in drinking, gambling and carousing. Some Frenchmen, -Mexicans or "Greasers," Indians, half-breeds, and some Americans of a -low class, associated there, and insisted on us dining with them, and -were very hospitable. They warned us not to venture any farther in the -direction that we were going, saying that if we did so we would not -return alive--that there would not be a "grease spot" left of us. This -statement corresponded with what we had heard before, yet it did not -deter us. There were in the crowd, Joshua Terry, also four Spaniards -from the west, bound for Taos, New Mexico. They joined us, and we -crossed the river, which was so deep that it was all that we possibly -could do to ford it. The venture was harder than we expected it to be, -but we succeeded, and struck out for the head of Bitter Creek, via -Pilot Butte, making all the distance consistent with the condition of -our animals. When we reached Bitter Creek, we followed up to the head, -then bore to the southeast, crossing a high, dry country, for two days -without water, then came in sight of a small herd of buffalo. - -The Mexicans, with Ward and Davis, gave chase to the herd, while -Bullock and I kept on our course with the pack animals, guided across -the plains by mountain peaks and openings in the range of mountains. -The hunters did not rejoin us until the latter part of the next day. -They succeeded in killing one poor buffalo bull, and were so thirsty -that they opened the tripe and drank the liquid it contained, to save -their lives, for they were so far gone as not to be able to bring any -portion of the carcass to camp. That day we came across a shallow pool -of water, where we rested a short time. - -We had been told that by crossing the country in the direction we were -going we would be sure to strike the Indian trail leading in toward the -headwaters of the Platte River; consequently we continued on till we -came to the main divide between the waters of the east and the west. -There Joshua Terry and the Spaniards parted with us, and we kept along -on the divide, or summit of the Rocky Mountains, between the Platte and -the Rio Grande, while they passed over. That night we camped on the -divide, and had a snowstorm on us, in which we were fortunate, as by -that means we obtained water for ourselves and animals. The next day -we struck the trail of a few Indians, and by following it up five or -six miles reached another trail which it ran into. This we continued to -follow until 3 p.m., when we came to the camp of Washakie, the Shoshone -Indian chief. - -The first Indian we met would not speak when we accosted him. He shook -his head, and pointed to the chief's lodge. That spirit of "mum" seemed -to pervade the entire camp, and when we rode up in front of the chief's -lodge, that Indian dignitary came out, bowed, and shook hands with each -one of us, but without uttering a word. By gestures he invited us to -dismount, come in, sit down, and tell the truth regarding our errand to -his camp, but no lies. Then he had some clean, nice robes spread for -us. At the same time his women folks came out, taking our horses by the -bits. We dismounted, and took seats as invited. The chief and ourselves -were all "mum" until the horses had been unsaddled, and everything -belonging to us had been put under the bottom of the lodge, just to the -rear of where we sat. - -These proceedings being over, the chief said: "Who are you, from where -do you come, and what is your errand to my country?" Then, by gestures, -he said, "Tell me the truth; do not tell me any lies, nor talk any -crooked talk." Here he paused, and, by motions, invited us to reply. - -We told him we were Mormons, from the Salt Lake country, sent by the -big Mormon captain, to make the acquaintance of him and his people, -that we might talk and be friendly with them, as we wished them to be -friendly with us and with all good people, as also with all the Indian -tribes, for we all had one Peap (father), and it was not pleasing to -Him to see His children nabitink (fight). We said the Great Father had -told our chief many things about all the Indian tribes, and one part -of our business was to learn better the Indian dialects, manners and -customs, so that we could tell the Indians what the Great Spirit had -told our big captain about them. Another part was to warn them that -it would not be many snows before the game of their country would -be killed off or disappear, and we wished to tell them, and to show -them how to till the earth, and raise stock, and build houses, like -the white man did, so that when the game was all gone their wives and -children would not starve to death. We said that some of us might want -to come out into his country and marry some of their good daughters and -rear families by them. We would educate them, so they could read some -good books that we had, and from them they could learn more about the -Great Father, or Spirit. - -Washakie sat and listened very attentively until we were through, when -he said, "Wait a while. My little children are very hungry for some of -the white man's food, and they want some sugar." - -At that we gave him all the bread and sugar we had. He passed it to -his wife, who in turn distributed it to the hungry little ones. Then, -without another word, the chief walked out, but soon returned. His wife -then set a camp kettle partly filled with buffalo beef that had been -partially dried. - -If I should tell the stranger to Indian customs how it was seasoned, I -doubt not he would say. "I could not eat of such food. I know I should -starve to death first." But stop, my friend, do not be too positive -about that. These Indians have a custom among them that when they kill -a buffalo they skin it, leaving the carcass on the hide; then they -slice the flesh in long strips, remove the bones, turn the contents of -the tripe over the meat, thoroughly knead or mix it all through the -beef, and, with a slight shake, hang the meat on a horse rope or lay it -on some sticks for a few hours; then they put it into a camp kettle and -boil it, when it is ready for their guests. Such was part of the life -on the great western plains in 1854. - -Supper over, the council of the camp began to file in; the pipe was -lit, and a rude figure of some of the planets drawn in the ashes of the -fire that occupied the center of the lodge. Then the old man sitting -on the left of the chief held the pipe, we having been seated on the -right of the chief. The latter commenced, and told the story of our -visit, from the time we came into the lodge up to that moment. It was -told without interruption, and then the pipe was started on its way, -following the course of the sun. Every man except the one holding the -pipe put his hand over his mouth, and sat perfectly silent and still. -The one with the pipe took from one to three long draws, allowing the -smoke from the last one to escape gradually through his nostrils, at -the same time passing the pipe with his right hand to the next person; -then, if he had anything to say, he did it in as few words as possible, -and put his hand over his mouth, thus signifying that he had no more to -say. Occasionally some old man, when he took the pipe, made some signs -above and in front of him, struck himself on the breast and offered -a few words of prayer. Thus the pipe was whiffed by all the Indians -of the council, and was then passed into the hands of the white men, -who, in turn, took a whiff as a vow of peace and friendship. Then -the pipe went to the chief, who glanced around the circle, and, as -every man's hand was over his mouth, the chief summed up the subject -in a few words, but always to the point. There being no appeal from -this decision, it is usual at the conclusion of councils for some one -present to walk through the camp and cry aloud that portion intended -for the public, or if it is an order for the whole camp, they get it in -the same way. This crier was called the high ranger of the camp. - -In our case, the only objection that was raised to our proposition was -when we suggested that some of us might want to take some of the young -Indian women for wives. One old and wise counselor said, "No, for we -have not got daughters enough for our own men, and we cannot afford to -give our daughters to the white man, but we are willing to give him -an Indian girl for a white girl. I cannot see why a white man wants -an Indian girl. They are dirty, ugly, stubborn and cross, and it is a -strange idea for white men to want such wives. But I can see why an -Indian wants a white woman." Then the old man drew a graphic picture of -the contrast he was making, and we gave up that point without pursuing -our suit farther. Chief Washakie, however, said the white men might -look around, and if any one of us found a girl that would go with him, -it would be all right, but the Indians must have the same privilege -among the white men. With this the council ended. - -At that time Washakie told us that only a few snows before then he was -chief of all the Shoshones, and the Indians acknowledged him as such, -but he was called to Fort Laramie, to have a talk with the agents of -the big father at Washington, and to receive blankets and many other -things. There the agents called a quiet, unobtrusive man, who never had -been a chief, nor was in the line of chiefs, and designated him as head -of the Shoshones, telling the Indians they must have him as chief, and -respect him as such, and that they, the agents, would recognize him in -that position, and through him they would do all government business. -Then the agents passed out a great quantity of blankets and other -Indian goods, through their appointed chief. In this act, the Indians -saw that the agents had chosen a favorite of their own, so the red men -called him "Tavendu-wets" (the white man's child), but never recognized -him as chief. - -That act of the government agents was the opening wedge to divide the -Shoshone tribe into discontented factions, and thereby weaken it. -Possibly that was the purpose in view, for before that the tribe was -very powerful, with a chief at their head unexcelled for bravery, skill -and farsightedness. Chief Washakie was a bold, noble, hospitable, and -honorable man. As an orator, I think he surpassed any man I ever met. - - - -CHAPTER XLII. - -LEAVE WASHAKIE'S CAMP FOR THE OTHER PORTION OF THE SHOSHONE -TRIBE--INDIAN GUIDE LEAVES US--FOLLOWING A TRAIL--SIGHT THE OTHER -CAMP--WAR SONGS AND DANCES--INDIANS PREPARING FOR WAR--CHIEF -GIVES UP HIS LODGE TO US, WARNING US OF MEN IN HIS CAMP HE CANNOT -CONTROL--INDIAN BRAVES IN WAR PAINT--SURROUNDED BY FIFTEEN HUNDRED -OR TWO THOUSAND INDIANS--LEARN THAT L. B. RYAN, A WHITE DESPERADO -CHIEF, IS IN CAMP, AND HAS SWORN VENGEANCE ON MORMONS--ESCAPE SEEMS -IMPOSSIBLE, BUT WE TRUST IN GOD--RETIRE FOR THE NIGHT--RYAN AND SEVEN -WARRIORS AT OUR LODGE--RYAN ENTERS AND DEMANDS TO KNOW WHERE WE ARE -FROM, AND OUR BUSINESS--HE IS TOLD, THREATENS US, AND SUMMONS HIS -INDIAN BRAVES INSIDE OUR LODGE--THOUGH THE ENEMY ARE TWO TO ONE, -WE ARE READY FOR THEM--PREPARE FOR A FIGHT TO THE DEATH--RYAN AND -HIS MEN LEAVE THE LODGE--WAR DANCE OUTSIDE--WE CONCLUDE TO SELL OUR -LIVES AS DEARLY AS POSSIBLE--WAR PARTY APPROACH THE LODGE AND SLIT -IT IN A NUMBER OF PLACES, THEN SUDDENLY DEPART--OUR LIVES BEING -SPARED, WE REMAIN IN CAMP TILL NEXT DAY--THE CHIEF BEFRIENDS US, -WARNING US NOT TO RETURN THE WAY WE CAME--DISPUTE AS TO THE ROUTE -OF TRAVEL, AND HOW IT IS SETTLED--SATISFIED THAT RYAN INTENDED TO -AMBUSH US--RAINSTORM OBLITERATES OUR TRACKS--CAMP IN THE RAIN--ON THE -ALERT FOR AN ENEMY--SHOOT A BUFFALO--WARD AND DAVIS GIVE CHASE, WHILE -BULLOCK AND I CONTINUE ON OUR ROUTE--CAMP AT A WASH--BULLOCK TAKEN -VERY ILL--A TERRIBLE NIGHT--WARD AND DAVIS NOT RETURNING BY MORNING, -WE MOVE ON--FEAR THAT BULLOCK WILL DIE--DISCOVER OUR COMRADES IN THE -CANYON--BEING HUNGRY, WE OVEREAT--ANOTHER NIGHT OF SICKNESS--EMERGE -FROM THE CANYON--PRESS FORWARD TO GREEN RIVER--WELCOMED BY -FRIENDS--THREE OF OUR PARTY GO ONTO FORT SUPPLY, AND I REMAIN TO MEET -CHIEF WASHAKIE. - -THE morning after the council, Chief Washakie asked us where we were -going to from his camp. We said we wished to go to White Man's Child's -camp of Shoshones. Said he, "Maybe that is good, maybe not. I don't -know. I hear there are bad men over there. I don't know." As there -was no trail leading to that camp, we asked him to send a guide with -us. He replied, "Maybe one go." Our horses having been brought up, -we saddled them, and after a good friendly shake of the hand of the -chief and of some of his council, we started to the southeast, with a -young brave on the lead. When we had traveled about twenty miles, our -guide disappeared over a ridge, but as we had come to a trail it did -not matter to us so long as we could see pony tracks to follow. Still -a feeling of mistrust lurked within us, as it had done all day. We -discussed the matter, but could see no other way open than to press -forward. - -Soon we ascended a hill, from the top of which we could hear a drum, -then many voices in a war song. As we rounded a little point of the -hill we saw numerous lodges, and what appeared to be thousands of -Indians. A large proportion of the latter were dancing and singing -songs. About this time we felt a heavy feeling, and were certain that -the spirit of murder was in the Indian camp. Everybody we met until we -came to the chief's lodge looked as if they were going to war, judging -by the expression of their eyes. - -The chief came slowly out, coolly shook hands with us, ordered our -stock taken care of, and a dish of boiled meat set before us. Then his -family left the lodge, taking their effects, leaving only three robes -for us. The sun was just setting, and the chief said we could occupy -his lodge that night, as he was going away, being afraid to stop there, -as there were men in camp that he could not control. Then he walked off -and out of sight. - -At this time three braves came by in their war paint, stepping along -very lightly, and stripped and armed as if ready for a fight. They took -a sharp glance at us, then passed on up the creek, to where the singing -and dancing were going on. Then war whoops rent the air, and we were -alone around the campfire. - -There we were, surrounded by three hundred Indian lodges, and between -fifteen hundred and two thousand Indians, principally Shoshones, -though there were Cheyennes and Arapahoes mixed with them, for trading -purposes, we supposed. It was dark, our horses had been taken away, we -knew not where, and we were between four and five hundred miles from -any source of protection, so far as we knew. The chief had confessed -his inability to control some men in his camp, and had acknowledged -that he was afraid to stop in his own lodge, he and his family seeking -safer quarters. We were also without food, and the shadow of death -seemed to hover over and close around us, while the war song and dance -were heard plainly. We had also learned that L. B. Ryan, successor to -Samuel Callwell as chief of the organized band of desperadoes, was -at that time beating up and organizing a war party to carry on his -nefarious work of robbery, and that he had sworn vengeance on the first -Mormons that he met. We believed that he was the uncontrollable power -that the chief had referred to. - -Under these circumstances, it was a grave question as to what we could -do for the best. Escape by flight was impossible, and as for attempting -to fight three hundred to one, that was folly. Then what should we do? -Put our trust in God, and go to bed, and if we were killed we wouldn't -have to fall. This was our conclusion, so we attended prayers, and -retired about 8 o'clock. - -Soon the drum and some kind of whistle were heard drawing closer to -us. In a few minutes our outdoor fire was surrounded by L. B. Ryan and -seven young warriors, all well armed with Colt's revolvers. The Indians -had bows and arrows in hand, ready for action. Their paleface companion -undoubtedly was the leader. - -After a brief pause, Ryan came into the lodge and squatted down just -opposite to where Bullock and I lay. He picked up a stick of wood, and -with a cutlass chipped off pieces and stirred up the coals, starting -a bright light. Then he said. "Gentlemen, where do you hail from, and -what is your business here?" - -Mr. Bullock being spokesman, informed him that we were from Utah, -and our business in part was to get acquainted with the Indians, to -ascertain the openings for trade, and to look out the resources of the -country. - -Ryan continued, "Gentlemen, if you have got any papers for me, bring -them out. I have been robbed by the Mormons of my bottom dollar, and by -the eternal gods I am going to have revenge." - -He then smote the billet of wood a heavy blow, at which signal the -seven braves filed into the lodge, and squatted in order, with bows -tightly corded, and arrows in hand. Ward, Davis, and I, were fully -prepared to meet the attack as best we could. Bullock having the -talking to do, was not so well prepared, until I rubbed his ribs with -my bowie knife handle, when he got ready as quickly as possible. There -were eight against four, all inside of one Indian lodge, watching for -the signal from Ryan, and we would have acted promptly on his signal, -or that of one of his braves, and without doubt would have got our -share of the game, in exchanging lead for arrows. It is possible that -Ryan took the same view, for he suddenly rose up and walked out, the -warriors following him. They closed the lodge door behind them, thus -giving us the opportunity to consult, while they held their council and -danced around the fire and sang. - -We hastily concluded that if they entered again it would be to massacre -our party, and that if they began to come in we would fire on them the -moment they opened the deerskin door. I, being in the most convenient -position, was to give the first shot, presuming that Ryan would be -in the lead, and we would be sure to dispose of him in that way. -Meanwhile, all the rest would fire into the war party, whose shadows -could be seen through the lodge, as they were between it and a big -outdoor fire. The next move on our part was for Davis, who lay most -convenient to the back part of the lodge, to make with his knife as -large an opening as possible in the lodge, that we might escape through -it into the creek that passed near by, the banks of which were only six -or eight feet high. Our decision was that the moment we left the lodge -every man was to try and if possible make his escape, no matter what -the conditions might be, so that if either one of us could get away, -and tell where he last saw the rest, it might be some satisfaction to -our friends and relatives. Then each man took the most easy position to -act his part, made ready his firelock, and held it with finger on the -trigger. - -Just then the party outside came around in their dance circle, straight -for the lodge door, Ryan in the lead. They sang and danced right up to -the door, but did not lift it. Next they circled around the lodge, and -with their scalping knives, or some other sharp instruments, slit the -lodge in a number of places. Then, as they came around to the front, -they gave a war whoop, and passed up the creek in the direction whence -they came. Thus we still lived, and were spared the awful necessity of -shedding man's blood, even in self-defense, thanks be to God for His -protection and mercies. Still the clouds hung so low, and so thickly -around, that we could not feel safe in an attempt to leave camp. - -Next morning the chief sent us some boiled buffalo beef, and called and -talked a few moments. He impressed us with the fact that the danger -was not yet over, and that we were safer in his lodge and camp than -we would be out of it, so we contented ourselves as best we could by -loitering around, while the drum and the whistling reeds of the war -party, and the wild shouts, continued all day. At last night came, and -we turned in, as we had done the evening before, with all our clothes, -arms and boots on. - -[IMAGE: A WAR PARTY OF SHOSHONES DANCING AROUND THEIR PRISONERS WHILE IN THE -CHIEF'S LODGE] - -Nothing occurred that night to mar our peace, but the ever threatening -din of the drum and the savage yell of the red man. Again the morning -light broke over us, and our scalps were still in place, but the very -elements seemed to say, "Stay in camp." The Spirit whispered to every -one of us the same thing. We were a unit, and therefore lingered in the -place, closely watching every move. - -Finally the chief came, and our horses were brought. This was at about -1 o'clock p.m. Then, as plainly as ever we saw the clouds in the -firmament break and scatter, we felt the clouds of death begin to part. -We waited no longer; our horses were saddled, packs were put in place, -and the chief gave us a slight indication, letting us understand that -it was a good time to move. At that moment Ryan and his allies came up, -apparently changed in their behavior. Ryan inquired of us by what route -we intended to return. Mr. Bullock said we expected to go to Washakie's -camp, and thence back by the same route we had come on. Immediately the -chief stepped away into the brush, we mounted, and saying good-bye, -started down the creek. - -A few moments later, as we rounded a bend, the chief popped out of the -brush just in front of and so as to meet us. Without seeming to notice -us in the least, he said, "Do not go the way you said you would, for -there are men in my camp that I cannot control." Brother Bullock did -not catch the idea, but the other three of us did. We understood his -action as well as his words. Soon we came to where we had got to decide -which course we would take. Brother Bullock was determined to keep his -word, and go by the route that he had told Ryan he would do, but the -three others were a unit in insisting on taking another way. We told -him we understood perfectly the chief, that if we went by that route we -would be ambushed, and every soul of us would be killed. Still Brother -Bullock insisted on keeping his word with the Indians; and more, he had -promised Washakie that he would return by his camp. Then Ward and Davis -came straight out and said they knew that meant death, and they would -not follow on that trail; so they started off another way. - -At this juncture I said: "Brother Bullock, I never deserted my -file-leader in my life, and I will not do it now. I will follow you to -the death, for I am certain that path leads there, and if you persist -in going that way I will follow, and will claim my blood at your hands, -for the others, the three of us, see alike." Then Ward and Davis turned -and said that on the same conditions as those I had named they would go -with Brother Bullock; but the latter said the price was too great, and -he would go with us, but he very much regretted breaking his word with -the red man. - -Every minute was precious at that time. We were well satisfied that -Ryan would not shrink to do from ambush what he had hesitated to do in -the chief's lodge, and that if he could strike our trail he would do it -to the death; so we made the best speed consistent with the conditions -surrounding us. - -As we were passing up the long slope of the mountain, and while yet -almost in sight of the camp, a small, dense, black cloud arose in the -south. It passed in our rear and over the Indian camp, and torrents of -rain seemed to fall there, while we were caught only in the storm's -edge. Thus our tracks were completely obliterated. Soon we came into a -trail leading along our way, and followed it to quite a bold running -creek. As the rain had ceased where we were, to further elude our -enemies we followed up in the bed of the creek until we came to a rocky -ridge which led us up among the cliffs, where it would be difficult -for any one to follow us and make much headway. While there among the -rocks, Ward and Davis saw an old mountain sheep, which they pursued -and captured, but he fell in a place so difficult of access, and night -coming on, that it was impossible to get but a small portion of him. -Bullock and I kept on our course, and were overtaken by our companions -just at dark. - -We pushed on as quickly as possible, for the rain was coming on in -torrents. At last the night became so densely dark that we could only -keep together by the noise of our camp equipage, and by talking. It was -impossible to see where we were going, so we camped in a sag. It rained -so hard that it was with much work that we started a fire, and then it -was quite as difficult to keep it going till we could frizzle a morsel -of the old ram; so each bolted his rations half raw, and having hobbled -our animals securely, we rolled ourselves in half-wet blankets and laid -down or the ground, which already had been soaked to the consistency of -mud, and we wallowed there until next morning. Then two of us brought -up and saddled horses, while the other two frizzled a little more of -the ram, which was bolted, as before, for it was too tough to chew in -a way anything like satisfactory. We then wrung our blankets, for they -were full of water, as in the place where we had laid down the water -was half shoetop deep. - -By sunrise we were mounted, feeling satisfied that our track of the -day before had been covered up, and thirty miles of our flight was -behind us. The country was high and barren, but we avoided conspicuous -points, and traveled the most secluded way, ever on the alert to catch -the first sight of an enemy, or of any kind of game, for our portion of -flesh of the ram of the Rockies had disappeared. - -In the after part of the day the sun shone. This was while we were -crossing the head of an open flat, in a dry country, with a dry gully -coursing down through it. This gully was fringed with an abundant -growth of sagebrush, and as we looked down the flat we saw some animals -coming out from a bend in the gully. We ascertained to our delight that -there were seven buffaloes. Our decision was to spare no efforts in an -endeavor to secure one of the animals, for this was a rare chance, as -the Indians had hunted every bit of game that it was possible for them -to do in that part of the country. - -To accomplish our most desirable object at this particular time, Ward, -Davis and I secured our horses, leaving Bullock to guard them and -the pack mules. The three of us made our way down the gulch, and as -the wind came to us from the buffaloes, there was no danger of them -scenting us. Thus we secured an excellent position, and waiting a few -minutes for them to feed to within about sixty yards of us, we decided -on the one that had the sleekest coat, thinking he would be the best -beef; for all were very poor old bulls, and we did not wish to injure -more than we needed to keep us from starvation. We all took deliberate -aim, and three rifles rang out as one. The only result visible to us -was that the game wheeled, and ran directly on the back track, leaving -us without even a hope of buffalo meat until we followed on their trail -seventy or eighty rods. There we found where one animal had cast his -cud, and later we saw some blood splattered about. All felt sure we had -hit the buffalo, for each knew how his rifle shot, and said he never -drew a nicer bead on an animal in his life. Then Ward and Davis got -their horses and gave chase, as the game had run almost parallel with -our route toward the notch in the mountains for which we were aiming. - -Bullock and I kept on the course our party had marked out to travel, -but before we reached the mountain pass we were heading for, night and -rain came on, and we had to camp in an open greasewood plain. Coming to -a very deep wash that had good feed in it, we concluded to hobble our -animals in the wash. It was difficult to get our stock in, as the banks -were very steep, but at last we succeeded in getting them down, and -felt that they were tolerably safe for the night, with some watching. -We gathered a little greasewood, for there was no other fuel, and tried -to get a tire started in the rain and darkness. - -During this time, Bullock began to have cramps, in the stomach and -bowels, and then in his limbs, and soon he was taken with a heavy -chill. It seemed that he would die, in spite of all that I could do -for him. I rubbed him, prayed for him, and put him in a pack of wet -blankets, for we had no other, and were without any earthly comfort for -such an emergency. At last I caught some rain in the frying-pan, then -got hold of our cracker sack, in which was about two tablespoonfuls of -crumbs and dust that had rubbed off the crackers. I heated the water, -put the crumbs in, and brought the mixture to a boil, stirring it so -that it appeared something like gruel, and gave it to the sick man, -who became easier. Then I went out, feeling my way, to see what had -become of our stock, and got so far off in the darkness that I had -great difficulty in finding my way back to my sick companion, but after -much anxiety and bother I found him suffering intensely. I set to work -rubbing him and encouraging him the best I could. I spent the entire -night in attending to him and watching the stock. - -Morning came, and still the hunters were unheard of. At one time I -almost despaired of the sick man's life, and thought, if he died, -what could I do with him, so far away from help. I could not take him -home, neither could I put him out of reach of wild beasts, for I had -no spade, pickaxe or shovel; nor was there timber in sight to cremate -him. I had not a mouthful of food, and what had become of our partners, -Ward and Davis, I could not tell. Then came the reaction of the spirit, -and the thought that I must do the best that I could. It would not do -to despair. I must pray for the patient, pack up, and get out of that -place. - -The patient seemed to rally with the dawn of day, and by sunrise we -were on our way, and entered the canyon we had been heading for. We -saw no signs of our friends until we reached their camp in the canyon, -for it had rained so heavily as to obliterate the horse tracks. As -they had gone on, we were not quite sure that it was their camp and -tracks, and the canyon afforded excellent opportunity for ambush. But -we were there and must go through. The sick man held up with wonderful -fortitude, though suffering greatly. About 2 p.m. we sighted our -comrades, the buffalo hunters. They mistook us for enemies and fled, -until they found a convenient place to hide themselves and horses, and -where they watched until they saw the gleaming of the sunlight upon our -rifle barrels. Then they recognized us, and as we came up we had a warm -greeting. - -Being together once more we hid our animals among the cedars, and -selected our camp with care, as it was night. Our hunters had been -successful, after a chase of ten miles, in getting the buffalo; they -had a hard and hazardous fight with the wounded animal, and it took -them till after dark before they could get what buffalo meat they could -carry on their horses. They also had a very severe night of it; but -the lost were found, and with plenty of buffalo meat in camp we were -thankful. - -We broiled and ate, boiled and ate and ate raw liver, and marrow out of -the bones; for be known that men in the condition we were, with severe -hunger, do not always realize how much they have eaten until they -eat too much. So it was with us. When we were through with the meal, -we prepared to "jerk" the remainder of the beef, but before that was -done my three companions were attacked with vomiting and purging; then -followed chills and cramps, and for about four or five hours it seemed -they might all die. I could not say which would go first, and the -previous night's experience was reiterated. I confess that I had been -guilty of as much folly and unreason as they, but being more robust -than the others, I could endure more than they; but I had the very same -kind of an attack as they did, before the journey was over. - -When morning came, a sicker and a harder looking lot of men seldom -is seen in the mountains. Yet we must travel, so passed through that -canyon out onto an open plain, leaving the creek to the south of us. -In the afternoon we came to a smooth clay grade, on which were fresh -horse and moccasin tracks, and four large capital letters, in English; -I think they were N, W, H and E. We concluded they had been marked out -with a sharp stick, but not in a manner intelligible to us, so we were -suspicious and cautiously pushed on to a place of shelter and rest. - -It was on the 1st day of June that we reached the Middle Ferry on Green -River, Green River County, Utah. There we met with W. I. Appleby, -probate judge, Hosea Stout, prosecuting attorney, William Hickman, -sheriff, Captain Hawley, the ferryman, and his family and some others. -They did not have to be told what we most needed, but supplied with -liberal hand our necessities, for all were aware that the object of -our mission had been to protect just such as they, and the innocent -immigrants, and their property, from not only the raids of the red men, -but also from the more wicked and baser white brigands. - -We rested at Green River until the 4th of June, when my fellow -missionaries left for Fort Supply. I remained as interpreter, and to -fill our appointment with Chief Washakie, who was to be at the ferry by -July 15. - - - -CHAPTER XLIII. - -ENGAGED AS INTERPRETER--CLASS OF PEOPLE AT GREEN RIVER--APPOINTED -DEPUTY SHERIFF--DROVER THREATENS TO KILL BOATMEN--ARREST ORDERED--RIDE -INTO THE OUTLAWS' CAMP--BLUFFING THE CAPTAIN--A PERILOUS -SITUATION--PARLEY WITH DROVERS--COMPROMISE EFFECTED--DEALING WITH -LAW-BREAKERS--"BILL" HICKMAN AS SHERIFF--SWIMMING CATTLE OVER GREEN -RIVER--A DROVER'S FAILURE--WRITER EMPLOYED TO GET CATTLE OVER--HOW IT -IS DONE--SECRET OF SUCCESS--ARRIVAL OF WASHAKIE--THE FERRYMAN OFFENDS -HIM--THE ANGRY INDIAN SWEARS VENGEANCE ON THE WHITE MAN--HIS PARTING -THREAT--IN PERIL OF AN INDIAN MASSACRE. - -AS I had become a fairly good interpreter, the ferry company proposed -to pay my board at Green River while I stayed, as there was no one else -there who could converse with the Indians. The country was new and -wild, and while there were some very good people, the road was lined -with California immigrants and drovers, many of them of a very rough -class, to say the best of them. They would camp a day or two on the -river, and drink, gamble and fight; then the traders and rough mountain -men, half-caste Indians, French and Spaniards, were numerous; there -were also blacksmith and repair shops, whisky saloons, gambling tables, -and sometimes there would be a perfect jam of wagons and cattle, and -two or three hundred men. There were quarrels and fights, and often -men would be shot or stabbed. As the court had been organized only -about two months, it was almost impossible for the sheriff or any -other officer to serve a writ or order of court, unless he had a posse -to back him. Sometimes the ferryman at the Upper Ferry would be run -off his post, and a company of mountain men would run the ferry and -take the money, and it would require every man that was on the side -of law and order to back the officer. In this situation I, though a -missionary, was summoned to take charge of a posse of men to assist the -sheriff in making arrests. - -One time there came a man with four thousand head of cattle. He crossed -the river, passed down about four miles and camped under a steep sand -bluff. He had missed a calf, and sent a man back for it. A small -party of Indians, passing along that way, had picked up the animal -and carried it off, supposing that the drovers had abandoned it. The -man who had been sent for the calf, not finding it, rode up to the -ferry and demanded the animal of the boatmen. These told him they did -not have his calf, whereupon he swore at them, called them liars and -thieves, and threatened to kill them, at the same time leveling his -double-barreled shotgun at them. - -Judge Appleby happened to be standing within a few feet of the boatmen, -and heard the whole conversation. He ordered the sheriff to take the -man, dead or alive. The sheriff summoned me to his aid, and we started -at once for the culprit. When we got to within four rods of him he -called out, "Do you want anything of me, gentlemen?" The sheriff said, -"Yes; I am the sheriff, and you are my prisoner." The man being on -horseback, defied the sheriff and fled. We fired two shots in the air, -thinking he would surrender, but he did not, and the sheriff pressed -into service the horses of two immigrants near by, and he and I pursued -the fugitive, following him about four miles, where we suddenly came -upon his camp of twenty-four men, armed with double-barrelled shotguns. - -The man having had considerably the start of us, had time to get the -camp rallied and ready for action, telling them that two men had shot -at and were then in hot pursuit of him. We were not aware of his camp -being there until we reached the brow of the bluff; then our only -chance was to ride boldly down into the camp, which we did, the sheriff -shouting, "Hold on, gentlemen! I am the sheriff of this county." The -captain of the camp, being a cool-headed and fearless man, said to his -men, "Hold on, boys, wait for the word." - -The moment we got into camp we dismounted, and I presume that at least -a dozen guns were leveled at us, their holders being greatly excited, -and swearing death to us if we dared to lay a finger on the fugitive, -or on any other person in the camp. The captain, however, said, "Hold -on, boys! Let's hear what these men have to say." Then the sheriff said -the man (pointing to the culprit) had committed an offense against the -law, in threatening the lives of the boatmen, and leveling his gun as -if to carry out the threat, and the sheriff had been ordered by the -judge to arrest him, but he had defied the officer and fled. "But," -said the captain, "you shot at him." To this the sheriff replied, "We -called on him to halt, and as he refused to obey, a couple of shots -were fired over his head to make him stop, but he did not do so, and we -followed him to your camp. I now demand him of you as his captain." - -At this the captain declared that the sheriff had shot at his man and -had scared him almost to death. He pointed to the man, who was shaking -as if he had a treble shock of the ague, and continued that before -the sheriff should take him every drop of blood in the camp should be -shed. The men brawled out, "Hear! Hear!" when the sheriff said, "All -right, Captain. You may get away with us two, but we have between -seventy-five and one hundred men just over the hills here, and in less -than twenty-four hours we will have you and every man in your camp, and -your stock will have to foot the bill." - -Thereupon the captain made response that he would come and answer -for his man, but the sheriff could not take him. Thus the matter was -compromised subject to the court's approval. The captain promised to be -at the judge's within two hours, and was there. So the whole matter was -settled without bloodshed. - -This incident is only an illustration of what had to be met every few -days, in which men would refuse to yield to the law until they had to -do so or die, and many were the times that we had to force them down -with the revolver, when, if we had not had "the drop" on them they -would not have yielded. We met men face to face, with deadly weapons, -and if it had not been for the cunning and the cool head of "Bill" -Hickman, as he was commonly called, blood would have been shed more -than once when it was avoided. I speak of "Bill" Hickman as I found -him in the short time I was with him. In his official capacity he was -cunning, and was always ready to support the law while I was with him -on Green River. - -One day about 10 o'clock a.m., a herd of four hundred head of cattle -came up, and the owners ferried their wagons across the river. Then -they tried to swim their cattle over but could not do so. I stood by -and watched their futile efforts until I observed the reason the cattle -would not go across. Then I attempted to tell the captain that he could -not swim his stock with the sun shining in their faces. The captain -being one of those self-sufficient men often met with, rather snubbed -me, saying, "I have handled cattle before today." I turned away, -remarking that he never would get his cattle across in that manner, and -saying that I could put every head over at the first attempt. - -Some one repeated to the "boss" what I had said, and asked him why he -did not get that mountaineer to help, as he understood the business -better than anyone else on the river. "Well," he said, "we will make -another try, and if we do not succeed, we will see what he can do." The -trial was another failure. Then he came to me and said, "Cap., what -will you charge me to swim those cattle, and insure me against loss?" -I answered, "You have wearied your cattle and fooled them so much that -it will be more trouble now than at first, but if you will drive your -stock out on that 'bottom' and call your men away from them, I will -swim them and insure every hoof, for twenty-five cents a head." Said -he, "I will do it, for it will cost fifty cents a head to cross them in -the boat. So you will take charge of them on the 'bottom?'" - -"Yes," said I, "so you do not let them scatter too much." - -The river was booming, but I knew of a place where the bank was three -or four feet higher than the water, and where the stream ran swiftly, -setting across to where the cattle would reach a gradual slope. I then -went to a camp of Indians near by, and hired four of them to assist -me. They stripped and mounted their ponies with their robes about -them. One went between the cattle and the river, so as to lead, and -the others circled around the stock and got them all headed toward the -place designated for them to take to the water. Then they caused the -cattle to increase their speed until they were on the gallop, when the -Indians gave a few yells and shook their robes, the man in the lead -leaped his horse into the river, and every hoof took to the water, -and were across safe and sound within thirty minutes from the time -they started. The captain paid without objecting, and would have me -go over and take supper with him and his family. He said, "Aside from -having my cattle across safe and sound, I have the worth of my money in -valuable experience." Next day he was back over the river, and would -tell of the incident and say to the drovers he met with, "There is that -mountaineer. I am ---- if he can't beat any man swimming cattle that I -ever saw." And others would tell the drovers the same story. - -Now, my friendly reader, I will tell you the secret of swimming horses -and cattle across a river. It is: Find a place (which you always can -do) somewhere in the bends of the watercourse, where you can swim -your stock from the sun, and where they take to the water the deeper -the better, even if you have to make them jump from the banks. The -swifter the current the better; then they are not so likely to injure -one another in jumping. Again, see that the outcoming place is on -a grade, and the water is shallow. Then have some good swimmer, on -horseback, take the lead; push your stock to a lively gait, and success -is assured. I had charge of swimming ten thousand head of cattle across -Green River, in the months of June and July, 1854, and never lost a -hoof, yet forced hundreds of them over banks eight to ten feet high, -into the water. In such case, the water must be deep, or we might have -sustained damage. I have found, as a rule, that nearly all men who have -much money or property think that they know it all, and are hard to -convince. But some of the drovers learned by object lessons, and almost -all of them thought they could swim their own cattle; and so they could -have done, if they had known the correct plan, or had made the effort -after sundown or before sunrise. - -About the time set for his arrival, Washakie, the great Shoshone -chieftain, came in with seven of his braves, and quietly walked around. -First, he inspected the boat and its fixtures, or tackle; then he -went to the brewery, the bakery, store, court room, whisky saloon, -blacksmith shops, card tables, saw much money changing hands, and -observed that money would purchase about anything the white man had. - -When the chief had had a friendly visit all around, he went to the -office of Captain Hawley, the ferryman. There he saw the captain taking -and handling considerable money, among the precious metal being two -or three fifty-dollar gold slugs. He asked for one of these, but the -captain laughed at him, and offered him a silver dollar. - -This action offended Washakie, who walked away, and by some means got -hold of some intoxicants. Then he began to think what was going on -in the land of his forefathers, and came to me and said: "This is my -country, and my people's country. My fathers lived here, and drank -water from this river, while our ponies grazed on these bottoms. Our -mothers gathered the dry wood from this land. The buffalo and elk -came here to drink water and eat grass; but now they have been killed -or driven back out of our land. The grass is all eaten off by the -white man's horses and cattle, and the dry wood has been burned; and -sometimes, when our young men have been hunting, and got tired and -hungry, they have come to the white man's camp, and have been ordered -to get out, and they are slapped, or kicked, and called 'd--d Injuns.' -Then our young men get heap mad, and say that when they have the -advantage of the white man, as they have often, they will take revenge -upon him. Sometimes they have been so abused that they have threatened -to kill all the white men they meet in our land. But I have always been -a friend to the white man, and have told my people never to moisten our -land with his blood; and to this day the white man can not show in all -our country where the Shoshone has killed one of his people, though -we can point to many abuses we have patiently suffered from him. Now -I can see that he only loves himself; he loves his own flesh, and he -does not think of us; he loves heap money; he has a big bag full of it; -he got it on my land, and would not give me a little piece. I am mad, -and you heap my good friend, and I will tell you what I am going to -do. Every white man, woman or child, that I find on this side of that -water," pointing to the river, "at sunrise tomorrow I will wipe them -out" (rubbing his hands together). He went on: "You heap my friend; you -stay here all right; you tell them to leave my land. If they are on the -other side of my water, all right, me no kill them, they go home to -their own country, no come back to my land. Tomorrow morning when the -sun come up, you see me. My warriors come, heap damn mad, and wipe them -all out, no one leave." - -"Good-by, you tell him, chief, he mad!" was Washakie's parting -exclamation, as he mounted his horse and rode away to his camp on the -Big Sandy, some fifteen miles back from the Green River. - - - -CHAPTER XLIV. - -CONSTERNATION AT WASHAKIE'S DECLARATION--PEOPLE HURRY ACROSS THE -RIVER--THE WRITER IS ASKED TO ATTEMPT A RECONCILIATION--NIGHT TOO DARK -TO TRAVEL--CHIEF WASHAKIE AND BRAVES APPEAR AT SUNRISE--THE CHIEF -NOTES THAT THE PEOPLE ARE TERROR-STRICKEN, AND DECIDES THAT HE WILL BE -THEIR FRIEND--TROUBLOUS EXPLOITS OF MOUNTAIN MEN--SHERIFF'S PLAN OF -ARREST--HOW THE SCHEME WORKED--DESPERADOES FREED BY THE COURT--CHASING -AN OFFENDER--SURROUNDED BY HIS ASSOCIATES--COOLNESS AND PLUCK OF THE -SHERIFF WIN--READY TO RETURN HOME--A TRYING EXPERIENCE. - -AS might have been expected, I lost no time in apprising the people -of the Indian threat, and the white population promptly complied with -the order to move; so that by daylight there was little of value -on that side of the river. There was great consternation among the -people, and Captain Hawley was quite willing to send a fifty-dollar -slug to the chief; but it was late in the evening, and no one to go -but myself. There was no telling how much liquor there might be in the -Indian camp, so it was not a pleasant job for either friend or foe to -approach the savages on such a dark night as that was. Although I had -Washakie's promise of friendship, I knew that when the Indians were -drunk they were not good company, and I did not care to expose myself -to unnecessary danger. - -Individually I had nothing at stake, but there were others who had -their families and thousands of dollars' worth of property at the -mercy of the enraged red men. In this crisis, when I was asked if I -would take the risk, and what amount I would give my service for, I -said I would undertake to go that night and attempt a reconciliation, -and charge fifty dollars, if they would provide me with a good horse. -That they agreed to do. The night was so dark, however, that it was -impossible to get hold of a horse, so we had to move all of value that -could be taken across the river. We also made every preparation for -defense that was possible during the night. - -Next morning, true to his promise, Chief Washakie, with fifteen well -armed men, came up, just at sunrise. I went out to meet him, and found -him perfectly sober and friendly, as also his men. The chief rode up -and glanced at the desolate appearance of everything, and saw that -the women and children were greatly frightened. His companions sat on -their horses and looked across the river. Finally the noble chief said, -referring to those who had left their homes. "Tell them to come back. -We will not hurt them. We will be good friends." - -Thus ended the big scare, and the people returned. But there was -another stir to come; for in a few days the ferryman from the Upper -Ferry, ten miles above the Middle Ferry, told Judge Appleby that a -party of rough mountaineers had driven him off, threatening his life -if he did not leave immediately. They had taken charge of the ferry, -and were running it and pocketing the money. There were twenty-eight -of them, determined "cut-throats," a part of the desperado band I have -referred to before. The judge ordered the sheriff to summon every -available man, and go at once and ascertain who the leaders were, -then arrest them and bring them before the court. There were only -fourteen men obtainable for the posse, and this number included the -ferryman. The sheriff delegated me to take charge of the posse and -go up on the east side of the river, ahead of him and the ferryman, -who would come up on the west side some time after, so as not to -create any unnecessary suspicion. He instructed us to be sociable with -the outlaws, treat and be treated, and join in any game that might -be engaged in. Said he, "We will get them drunk and divided among -themselves, and then I think we can manage them." - -The plan was laid, and every man being well armed, we set out on our -hazardous mission. We had with us one man who could drink an enormous -amount of whisky and yet not get drunk, for he would turn around and -put his ringer down his throat and vomit up the liquor before it would -affect him much. He said, "Boys, I can make a dozen of them drunk, -and keep straight myself." He was asked how he would go about it, and -replied, "Well, I will offer to drink more whisky than any man on the -river, and we will drink by measure; then I will slip out and throw -it up. To hide the trick you must push me out of doors roughly, as if -mad. At other times jam me up in a corner, so I can throw up. Thus I -will have half of them so drunk that anyone of you can handle half a -dozen of them at once." His statement of his ability to drink and empty -his stomach of it being corroborated, he was assigned that part of the -strategy. Then another man, who had been a soldier in the Mexican war, -said, "Well, if you will get them drunk, I will win the money from -their own party to buy the whisky, for I know just how to do it." He -was given that part, for whisky was fifty cents a drink. - -When we had perfected arrangements as far as possible, we rode up, -dismounting as if we had just happened to call and knew nothing of the -trouble. Each man took his part, and played it well. To our surprise, -we found their leader, L. B. Ryan, apparently in a drunken stupor; he -was the same person I had met in the Shoshone Indian camp, five or six -weeks before. As he and the sheriff had been on good terms, they drank -together and appeared to be quite friendly; but the ferryman and one of -the band of outlaws got into a fight, and revolvers and bowie knives -were drawn. Twenty-five or thirty of the mountain men, with deadly -weapons flourishing, rushed into the saloon in front of which the fight -began. One man slashed the other with a knife, and one of them fired -two shots, but some bystander knocked the weapon up, so it did no harm. -The prompt action of the sheriff and his supports, together with the -aid of a number of immigrants, stopped the row. If it had not been for -that, a dozen men might have been slain in as many minutes. Some of the -men were of the most desperate character, and swore and made terrible -threats of what they would do. - -At last the combatants drank together, while a number of others got so -intoxicated they could scarcely stand alone. Then the sheriff called -Ryan to one side and quietly arrested him, placing him under ten -thousand dollars bonds for his appearance in court on a certain date. -The ferryman and some of the more moderate of the outlaws compromised -their difficulties, and business settled down to a normal condition. We -went back to the Middle Ferry, and the sheriff made his returns on the -official papers. - -At the time appointed for Ryan to appear in court, he was there, -with seven young, well-armed warriors and a number of his band, who -sauntered around the court room. Ryan was so desperate and so well -supported by his clique that the court was glad to let him down and out -as easily as possible; for it was evident that the court must do that -or die. So Ryan and his gang returned to their haunts more triumphant -than otherwise. - -So we had to deal with desperate men every day or two, and it was -seldom indeed that we could effect an arrest without a determined show -of arms. Yet, we were not compelled to use them. The offenders must -see that we had them, and had the nerve to use them, before they would -yield. In one instance I was ordered by the sheriff to take a man who -had broken from the officer. The man was running, and I followed, -revolver in hand. As the fugitive ran, he drew his weapon and wheeled -around. I was so near as to place my revolver uncomfortably close to -his face before he could raise his weapon. He saw at once that I had -the "drop" on him, as we used to say, and delivered his revolver to -me. The next moment the sheriff and posse had their backs together and -weapons raised, while twenty-four armed men appeared on the scene and -demanded the man. But when they looked into the muzzles of fourteen -Colt's revolvers with bright, shining, waterproof caps exposed, and the -sheriff called out in a firm and decisive voice, "I am the sheriff of -Green River County, and have a writ for this man," they paused, though -some of them swore the officers could not take the man from camp, and -advanced in a threatening manner. Then the sheriff commanded, "Halt! -The first man that advances another step, or raises his weapon, is a -dead man. Stand! I, as sheriff, give you fair warning." At that some of -the more cautious said, "Hold on, boys! We must not oppose an officer," -and all concluded they must give up the man and submit to the law for -that time. The offense of the accused was shooting the ferryman's dog, -while the latter was eating something under the table, and while the -ferryman's wife and daughter were standing at the table washing dishes; -and when the ferryman remonstrated at such conduct, threatening to -shoot him. Ultimately the matter was compromised, the culprit and his -friends paying the costs. - -On the 7th of July, I began preparations to return to Fort Supply, as -my real missionary labors seemed to have come to an end in that part, -and I was glad of it. From May 13 to July 8, 1854, had been one of the -most hazardous, soul-trying, disagreeable experiences of my life, for -the short period it occupied. I have written a very brief synopsis -of it in the foregoing account; for it might seem impossible to the -person of ordinary experience for so many thrilling incidents as I had -witnessed to happen in so short a time. - - - -CHAPTER XLV. - -GO TO FORT SUPPLY--START BACK TO GREEN RIVER AND MEET O. P. ROCKWELL -AT FORT BRIDGER--HE BRINGS ME A TRADER'S LICENSE, ALSO GOODS TO TRADE -TO THE INDIANS--BEING LATE IN THE SEASON, WE STORE THE GOODS, AND GO -TO SALT LAKE CITY--RECEIVE THE APPROVAL OF GOVERNOR YOUNG--MOVE TO -OGDEN--ACCOMPANY GOVERNOR YOUNG AS INTERPRETER--MY HORSE STOLEN--CALLED -ON A MISSION TO THE SHOSHONES--ON GOING TO SALT LAKE CITY, I AM -RELEASED--ORDERED TO TAKE PART IN DISARMING INDIANS AT OGDEN--A -DIFFICULT JOB--CHASE TO MOUND FORT--HAND-TO-HAND STRUGGLE WITH A -POWERFUL SAVAGE--INDIANS DISARMED, BUT SULLEN--CHIEF'S BROTHER OFFERS -ALL HIS POSSESSIONS FOR HIS GUN--PRECAUTIONS TAKEN TO FEED THE INDIANS -THAT WINTER--TEACH THE INDIAN LANGUAGE IN SCHOOL--PROSPER IN BUSINESS. - -ON July 9, I started for Fort Supply, arriving there on the 11th, where -I found all well. On the 14th I began a journey back to Green River, -but met Porter Rockwell at Fort Bridger. He had a license from Governor -Brigham Young for me to trade with the Indians; also some two or three -thousand dollars' worth of Indian goods for me to market. At that time -there was no opportunity to trade, as the Indians had disposed of their -robes, pelts and furs for the season, so we sent the goods to Fort -Supply and had them stored there. - -I accompanied Rockwell to Salt Lake City, arriving there on July 19. We -reported conditions to the governor, who received us very kindly, and -approved of what we had done. On August 15 I went to Ogden City and on -the 28th accompanied Governor Young, as interpreter, to Chief Catalos' -camp of Shoshones, four miles north of Ogden. This large camp of -Indians had some grievances to settle, and particularly desired to ask -favors and get a better understanding with the white men through their -big chief. The Indians claimed that they were friendly to the whites, -and wanted the latter to be friendly to them; they also wished to have -trade brought to them. The governor gave them a liberal present of -assorted Indian goods, talked friendship, and told them he would leave -other goods with me to trade. He also advised them to be good people, -and to live at peace with all men, for we had the same great Father. -Governor Young told them it would be good for them to settle down like -the white man, and learn of him how to cultivate the land as he did, -so that when the game was all gone they could live and have something -to eat and to feed their families on. The Indians said this was "heap -good talk," and their hearts felt good; so we parted with them in the -best of feelings, notwithstanding that some of their bad Indians had -stolen my only horse from where I had picketed him on the bottoms. I -did not learn the facts in the case in time to get redress, and all the -consolation I could obtain was that the thief did not know it was my -animal--"heap no good Indian steal your horse." - -I returned to Ogden City, and there continued to trade with the Indians -as they came, until October 10, on which date I received a letter -from Elder Orson Hyde, stating that Governor Young wished me to go on -a mission among the Shoshones that winter. I answered the call, but -when I got to Salt Lake City, on the way, it had been learned that the -Indians had gone out so far into the buffalo country that it was not -advisable for me to follow them; so I returned to Ogden and continued -to visit and trade with the Indians, and got up my winter's wood. - -On November 20 Wm. Hickman, L. B. Ryan and D. Huntington came up from -Salt Lake City with an order to Major Moore and the citizens of Weber -County to disarm Chief Little Soldier and his band of Indians, and -distribute them among the families in Weber County where the people -were best able to feed and clothe them for the winter, and set them -to work; for they had become very troublesome to the citizens of that -county, by killing cattle, burning fences, and intimidating isolated -families. On the 30th the major called on me to go with his party to -the Indian camp at West Weber. I did so, and with considerable talking -we got the Indians to accompany us to Ogden City. Still, they felt very -warlike and stubborn, being unwilling to give up their arms. - -In the midst of the parley, the three men from Salt Lake City returned -to that place, and the Indians were allowed to go with their arms -across the Ogden River and camp among the willows near Mound Fort. On -December 1st we went after them, finding them so hostile that we had -to make a show of arms before they would submit to our proposition of -distributing them among the whites, but when we brought a squad of -armed men they very reluctantly and sullenly complied, so we marched -them back to Ogden City, to a location on Main Street, near where the -old tithing office stood. Almost every man that had side arms was -called to mingle among the Indians, so that each man could command a -warrior by disarming him by force if he refused to surrender his arms -at the command of the major, which command I was required to repeat -in the Indian dialect. At the word, each man was to take hold of an -Indian's gun, and I was to tell the aborigines to surrender; but there -was not a man who obeyed the order, for what reason I do not know. I -then went through the crowd of Indians and took every weapon with my -own hands. The white men took them from me, and they were stored in the -tithing office, a guard being placed over them. - -Just then a young Indian was observed on horseback, going northward -as fast as his horse could carry him. Some one said, "There goes that -Indian boy to warn a camp over by Bingham Fort!" Major Moore had one of -the fastest animals in the county; he ordered me to "take her and beat -the boy into camp, or run her to death. Don't spare horseflesh. Call -out the citizens and disarm every Indian you find." - -I obeyed the order, and found a small party of Indians camped in the -center of what was called Bingham Fort. Just as the Indian boy reached -the camp, I entered the east gate of the square, and rode to the west -gate, shouting to the people, "To arms! To arms! Turn out, every man, -and help to disarm the Indians!" Men turned out quickly and surrounded -the camp. I succeeded in reaching the west gate just in time to wheel -and grab a big Ute's gun as he was trying to pass me. He held to it -firmly, and both struggled with a death-like grip. We looked each other -squarely in the eyes, with a determined expression. At last his eyes -dropped, and his gun was in my possession. He was full of wrath and a -desire for vengeance. I found him to be one of the strongest men I had -ever grappled with anywhere. - -I next turned to the camp and disarmed all the Indians in it, placed -their weapons under guard and sent them to Ogden, then vainly tried -to talk the red men into reconciliation. I next returned to Ogden, -and there found the whites and Indians on the streets, the latter as -discontented as ever. The major and I tried to pacify them, but they -were very stubborn and sullen. At last the chief's brother said, "Here -are my wife, my children, my horses and everything that I have. Take -it all and keep it, only give me back my gun and let me go free. I -will cast all the rest away. There is my child," pointing to a little -three-year-old, "take it." The little innocent held up its hands and -cried for the father to take it, but he frowned and looked at it as -with a feeling of disgust, saying, "Go away. You are not mine, for I -have thrown you away, and will not have you any more." - -This spirit was but a reflex of that which animated the whole band; -"for," said they, "we are only squaws now. We cannot hunt or defend our -families. We are not anybody now." But finally, though very sullenly, -they went home with the whites and pitched their tents in the back -yards. To us it did seem hard to have them feel so bad, but they had no -means of support for the winter, the citizens could not afford to have -their stock killed off and their fences burned, and it was the better -policy to feed the Indians and have them under control. They could husk -corn, chop wood, help do chores, and be more comfortable than if left -to roam; but for all that, they were deprived of that broad liberty to -which they and their fathers before them had been accustomed, therefore -they felt it most keenly. As I was the only white man who could talk -much with them, I was kept pretty busy laboring with them. - -In the evening of December 3rd the Indians had a letter from Governor -Young. I read and interpreted it to them. Then for the first time they -seemed reconciled to their situation. Their chief was filled with the -spirit of approval of the course that had been taken with them, and he -preached it long and strong. After that, the Indians and the citizens -got along very well together, and I continued teaching and preaching to -the former. - -December 5th I took up school and taught the Indian language, or rather -the Shoshone dialect. I had about thirty male adults attending. Brother -George W. Hill, who afterwards became the noted Shoshone interpreter in -Weber County, was one of them. - -I was very much prospered that winter, purchased a city lot and quarter -of another on Main Street, fenced the lot, closed my trading with the -Indians, and settled with D. H. Wells for the goods I had had. - - - -CHAPTER XLVI. - -ANOTHER MISSION TO THE INDIANS--START FOR THE SHOSHONE -CAMP--DIFFICULTIES OF TRAVEL--NEAR THE CROWS AND BLACKFEET--A DREAM -GIVES WARNING OF DANGER--DISCOVER A LARGE BODY OF INDIANS--NO -OPPORTUNITY OF ESCAPE--RIDE INTO THE CAMP OF A HUNTING AND WAR -PARTY--MEET CHIEF WASHAKIE--A DAY'S MARCH--SITUATION CRITICAL--HOLD A -COUNCIL--PRESENT THE BOOK OF MORMON--ALL BUT WASHAKIE SPEAK AGAINST US -AND THE BOOK--AWAITING THE CHIEF'S DECISION. - -AT a general conference held in Salt Lake City, April 6, 1855, I was -again called to go east among the Indians, to labor with and for them. -I was appointed by President Brigham Young to take the presidency of -the mission among the Shoshones. At this call I hastened to provide -as comfortably as possible for my family, and to fit myself for the -mission assigned me. - -I set out on May 8, 1855, in company with four other Elders, going -east via Salt Lake City. I drove one of the two teams, to pay for the -hauling of my baggage, as I had no team of my own. On the 10th we -reached Salt Lake City, and left the same day. On the 11th we overtook -another wagon and two of our fellow-missionaries. We arrived at Fort -Supply on the 17th, having had a pleasant trip. We found seven Elders -planting the crop. On the 18th we joined them in the work of plowing -and seeding, and repairing the stockade and fences. On the 29th, eight -of us fitted up a four-horse team and wagon and six saddle horses -and started for the Shoshone camps, which we had heard were on the -headwaters of either the Green or the Snake River. On June 1st we came -to a tributary of the Green River, called the Fontenelle. There we -rested one day, then moved camp up to the mouth of the canyon. - -On the 3rd of June, E. B. Ward, Joshua Terry and I crossed over the -divide between the Green and Snake Rivers, leaving Elder George W. -Boyd in charge of camp. The three of us went along the western slope, -passing one lodge of friendly Indians. On the 5th we came to Siveadus' -camp of twenty lodges. He and his people were very cool towards us, -so we proceeded to a stream called Piney, and up that to the top of -the divide, from where we could see to the head waters of the Wind -River. Having been told that Washakie and his camp were somewhere on -the headwaters of Horse Creek, we made for that point, traveling over -snowdrifts that we supposed were fifty feet deep. The descent was very -steep, and in some places rather dangerous. That night our coffee -basins, that were left standing half or two-thirds full of water, had -become frozen solid; and the weather seemed seasonable for Christmas. - -We suffered much with cold until 10 o'clock a.m., on the 7th of June. -We turned northeast, and came onto Horse Creek, camping just below -its mouth, under a high, steep bluff, in a fine grove of cottonwoods. -Everything seemed deathly still. We were in the borders of the Crow -and Blackfeet Indians' country, with jaded horses, so that if we were -discovered it would be impossible to escape. We began to feel a little -concern for our scalps, for we were aware that both the Crows and the -Blackfeet were hostile. We gathered our wood, taking care that no -branch or anything connected with our fire would make much blaze or -smoke, lest by it we should be discovered. Everything being placed in -the best possible position for flight or fight, as might seem best if -emergency should arise, we rested there that night; and something told -us we should not go farther north, but that south should be our course -in the morning. - -Early the following morning, about 3 o'clock, I dreamed that I saw a -large band of Indians come down and pitch camp on the creek above us. -I was so forcibly impressed that I awoke the other two men, and told -them I felt confident that the dream was true, and that we would prove -it at daylight. They agreed with me, so I told them to make as dark a -fire as was possible, and to get breakfast, while I would go on the -high bluff that overlooked camp and the country adjacent, where I would -watch everything that moved, and if there were friends or foes in the -country we would see them or their lights before they should see ours. -We all arose at once, the others preparing the meal and saddling the -horses ready for a hasty move, while I went up on the bluff and there -kept a sharp lookout until the dawn. At the first streaks of daylight I -saw a blue smoke creeping up through the willows, perhaps a mile and a -half above me, then another and another, until it was plain there was -a camp of Indians just where I had dreamed they were. Soon the tops of -lodges appeared, then a band of ponies was driven up. By this time it -was fairly daylight. - -I reported to the others what I had seen, and we took breakfast. By the -time the sun cast his earliest rays over the landscape, we were in the -saddle. Then came the question, what shall we do? To flee was folly, -for it was not likely that we would escape the ever vigilant eye of -the red man, in an open country like that was. We decided to ride out -boldly on the open bench, and go straight to their camp. No sooner had -we done so than we were discovered, and some twenty or more warriors -started to encircle us, but we rode direct for the camp without showing -any concern. - -Soon we were completely surrounded by a score of armed warriors in full -costume of war paint; as these closed in their circle, they saluted us -with a war-whoop. Some had "green" scalps hanging from their bridle -bits, while others had them suspended from their surcingles. As the -warriors drew nearer to us it became evident that they were of the -Shoshone tribe, but we could not recognize any one of them, and they -did not appear to recognize us. When we spoke to them and offered to -shake hands, they shook their heads and pointed us to the camp, while -they proudly escorted us there, some going before us and clearing the -way up to the lodge of Washakie, their chief, who, with some of his -leading men, stood waiting to receive us. As we rode up, Washakie and -his associates stepped forward, and in a very friendly manner shook -hands. By gestures they said, "We are moving camp, and you will go -and camp with us tonight. Then we will hear what you have to say. -We fell in with a war party of Crows and Blackfeet yesterday, and -defeated them, and now we are fleeing to a safe place for our women -and children, lest they get reinforcements and come upon us and our -families;" then with a motion, the chief said, "Forward," and soon the -whole band was on the move. - -We estimated that the Indians numbered about three thousand all told, -and there was a pony for every soul; they were well supplied with -rifles, Colt's revolvers, bows, arrows, shields and some cutlasses, -and large, heavy knives. They were excellently mounted, and their -discipline could not well be improved for the country they were -passing over and the force they were most likely to fall in with. -Their flanking party was so arranged as to act as a front guard, and -at the same time drive all the game into a circle and thence into a -second circle, so that everything, down to the smallest chipmunk and -squirrel, was bagged. This was over a strip of country about eight -miles by thirty; and the pack of sagehens and squirrels that was -brought into camp was astonishing. The old and middle-aged men formed -the rear guard, while the whole female portion of the camp drove the -pack animals. The chief and his most confidential advisers rode just in -front of these, and we were called to be a part of the escort. - -When all was on the move, the camp made quite a formidable appearance. -It looked to us as if the shrubbery on our way had changed suddenly -into a moving army, what with people and ponies all moving up hill and -down, over the rolling country, to the south, between the high Snake -and Wind River ranges of the great Rocky Mountains. We thought of -ancient Israel, of the Ten Tribes coming from the north country, and of -the promises that had been made to the Indians by the prophets of their -forefathers. - -To us this was a great day of thought and meditation, for at times it -seemed to us that we could see the opening glories of a better day, and -could almost declare, "Now is the dawn of the day of Israel," for we -had a letter from that modern Moses, President Brigham Young, to read -and interpret to the red men, and also the Book of Mormon to introduce -to them that very evening, for the first time; and the question -uppermost in our minds was as to whether they would receive it or not, -for there were many hard looking countenances in the throng, and we -could see plainly from their frowns that they were not at all friendly -to us. - -When we had traveled till about 3 o'clock p.m., camp was made in -a lovely valley. The chief's lodge was first pitched, clean robes -spread, and we were invited to take seats thereon. Our horses, packs -and all, were taken charge of by the women of the camp, just where we -dismounted, and we had no more to do with our animals until we had use -for them next day. - -A little fire having been built in the center of the lodge, the -councilors began to file into their places, each very quietly shaking -hands with us, some of them very coldly. When all was quiet, the chief -said, by gesture, "Now tell us what you have to say. Tell it straight, -and no crooked talk, for we do not want any lies, but the truth." It -seemed to us that they were ready for square work, so, with as few -words as possible, we told Washakie we had a letter from the big Mormon -captain to him and his people. Then he said, "Tell us what it says," -and between the three of us we could tell him every word. - -I am sorry that I have not at hand the full text of the letter, but -it was a very friendly document, and, so far as I can now remember, -told them that President Young had sent us to Washakie and his people -as their friends, that we were truthful and good men, who would tell -them many good things about how to live in peace with all people; -that President Young and the Mormon people were true friends to the -Indian race, and wished them to be our friends, that we might live in -peace with each other, for it would not be many years before all the -game would be killed off or driven out of the country, and the white -men would want to come and settle in the land; that if the Indians -would settle down and build houses like the white man, and cultivate -the land as the white man did, when the game was gone they and their -families would have something to eat. President Young proposed to -furnish seed and tools, and some good men to show and help the Indians -to put in their crops. The letter further said that after a while, -when we understood each other better, we would tell them about their -forefathers, and about God; that we had a book that told a great many -things regarding the Great Spirit's dealings with their forefathers, -and what He would do for them and their children. Then we presented the -Book of Mormon to Washakie, while his lefthand man filled the pipe and -drew a rude figure of the sun, in the ashes of the smouldering fire; -he also muttered a few unintelligible words, smote his chest with his -hand, took a whiff or two from the pipe, passed it to the next man on -his left, and reached for the book; he opened it and said it was no -good for them--that it was only good for the white man. - -In that same order the pipe and book passed around the circle -twenty-one times, and each time the Indian made a new figure in the -ashes, each representing a different planet. During the whole time only -one man spoke at once. One said, "This book is of no use to us. If the -Mormon captain has nothing better to send than this, we had better send -it, his letter, and these men, back to him, and tell him that they -are no good to us, that we want powder, lead and caps, sugar, coffee, -flour, paints, knives, and blankets, for those we can use. Send these -men away to their own land." - -Another of the council, when it came to his turn, said, "We have no use -for this book. If the paper were all cut out and thrown away, we could -sew up the ends and put a strap on it, and it would do for the white -man's money bag; but we have no use for it, for we have no money to -put in it." He could not understand what good it was to the Shoshone, -and said, "Let the white man take it and go home, and come back with -something that we can eat, or use to hunt with." - -These were the sentiments expressed by the members of the council. But -Washakie had not yet spoken, and we anxiously awaited his decision. - - - -CHAPTER XLVII. - -WASHAKIE'S BOLD ATTITUDE--TELLS HIS COUNCILORS THEY ARE FOOLS--SAYS -THE WHITE MEN, WHO ARE WISE, HAVE BOOKS--TELLS THE TRADITION OF -HOW THE INDIANS FELL INTO DARKNESS--GREAT SPIRIT ANGRY AT THE RED -MAN--ADVOCATES THAT THE INDIANS LIVE LIKE WHITE PEOPLE--HIS POWERFUL -SPEECH GAINS THE DAY FOR US--SHOSHONE TRADITION--WE START HOME--A -HUNGRY TRIP--RETURN TO THE INDIANS, FINDING THEM SULLEN--FOURTH OF JULY -CELEBRATION AT FORT SUPPLY--RETURN HOME. - -THE book passed around the entire circle without a solitary friend, -and came back to our hands. The chief reached for it, and when he got -hold of the volume he looked at and opened it, turned leaf after leaf -as readily as though he had been accustomed to books, then straightened -to his full height as he sat there, and looked around the circle. "Are -you all done talking?" he asked. Seeing every man with his hand on his -mouth, he spoke: "You are all fools; you are blind, and cannot see; -you have no ears, for you do not hear; you are fools, for you do not -understand. These men are our friends. The great Mormon captain has -talked with our Father above the clouds, and He told the Mormon captain -to send these good men here to tell us the truth, and not a lie. They -have not got forked tongues. They talk straight, with one tongue, and -tell us that after a few more snows the buffalo will be gone, and if -we do not learn some other way to get something to eat, we will starve -to death. Now, we know that is the truth, for this country was once -covered with buffalo, elk, deer and antelope, and we had plenty to eat, -and also robes for bedding, and to make lodges. But now, since the -white man has made a road across our land, and has killed off our game, -we are hungry, and there is nothing for us eat. Our women and children -cry for food, and we have no meat to give them. The time was when our -Father who lives above the clouds loved our fathers who lived long ago, -and His face was bright, and He talked with our fathers. His face shone -upon them, and their skins were white like the white man's. Then they -were wise, and wrote books, and the Great Father talked good to them -but after a while our people would not hear Him, and they quarreled and -stole and fought, until the Great Father got mad, because His children -would not hear Him talk. Then He turned His face away from them, and -His back to them and that caused a shade to come over them, and that -is why our skin is black and our minds dark." Stripping up his shirt -sleeve, he continued: "That darkness came because the Great Father's -back was towards us, and now we cannot see as the white man sees. We -can make a bow and arrows, but the white man's mind is strong and -light." Picking up a Colt's revolver, he went on: "The white man can -make this, and a little thing that he carries in his pocket, so that -he can tell where the sun is on a dark day and when it is night he can -tell when it will come daylight. This is because the face of the Father -is towards him, and His back is towards us. But after a while the Great -Father will quit being mad, and will turn His face towards us. Then -our skin will be light." Here the chief showed his bare arm again, and -said: "Then our mind will be strong like the white man's, and we can -make and use things like he does." - -The chief next drew a strong contrast between the Indian's way of -living and the white man's, telling his people that the mode of the -white man was far preferable to that of the Indian. He also told them -that the Great Father had directed "the big Mormon captain to send -these men to us to talk good talk, and they have talked good, and made -our hearts feel very glad, and we feel that it is good for them to come -and shake hands. They are our friends, and we will be their friends. -Their horses may drink our water, and eat our grass, and they may sleep -in peace in our land. We will build houses by their houses, and they -will teach us to till the soil as they do. Then, when the snow comes -and the game is fat, we can leave our families by the Mormons, and go -and hunt, and not be afraid of our families being disturbed by other -Indians, or by anybody else, for the Mormons are a good people. Let -these three good men go, and find a good place for us to live, close -by where they live; and after a while we will come, and they will show -us how to build houses, for they are our good and true friends, and -we wish they would go home, and bring some blankets, powder and lead, -knives, paints, beads, flour, sugar and coffee, to trade for our furs, -pelts and robes." - -Washakie spoke thus with great power and wisdom, while his wise old -councilors sat with their heads bowed, and their hands over their -mouths, only grunting assent to the strong points of his powerful -speech, of which this account is only a brief synopsis. - -No vote was taken, but seemingly every man gave his assent to the -chief's decision, by a grunt of approval. Then each man quietly -withdrew, and a kettle of boiled antelope meat was set before us. The -chief had a separate dish put before him. Then we retired for the night. - -The camp was almost destitute of food, notwithstanding the squirrels -and sagehens that had been taken the day before. The whole camp was -hungry, and the last morsel of our provisions was gone, so next -morning, June 9th, we left camp, having a very scant breakfast of meat; -but we had introduced the Book of Mormon, and had had the pleasure of -having it received favorably by Washakie, the great Shoshone chief, and -his council, as the history of their forefathers. The chief said the -wolves had written that book when they were men, but had since been -turned into wolves; that being an ancient tradition among the Shoshones. - -We rode hard all day the day that we left the Shoshone camp, and at -sundown camped by a mountain leek spring, without a bite to eat. Nor -had we had anything to eat at dinner time; so we made our supper of -mountain leeks. Next morning, the 10th, we had leeks for breakfast, -and at sunrise we were in the saddle, and on our way back to where we -had left the other brethren. I was on the lead, with a double-barreled -shotgun before me. We had not gone very far before a blue mountain -pheasant flew up from under my horse's head, and lit in the trail a few -yards in front. I shot it so quickly that I never thought of my horse -being frightened. Another man jumped from his saddle, and had the bird -skinned before the blood had stopped flowing, while the other built a -fire. The pheasant was broiled and eaten before the animal heat could -have gone out of it, if it had been left where it was shot. Then we -traveled all that our horses could bear until 3 o'clock p.m., when we -came to a flock of sagehens. As I was still on the lead, I shot three -of them before the rest fled. We broiled one of them, and soon devoured -it, as we had the other bird, then continued our journey till evening. - -As we traveled along by a small stream of water, I saw a fish about -eighteen inches long, and almost as quick as thought shot at and -stunned it, so that it turned up at the top of the water long enough -for an Indian boy who was traveling with us to shoot an arrow through -it. With the arrow sticking through it, the fish shot up to where the -creek widened out, and I, thinking the water only knee-deep, plunged in -up to my hips. I caught the fish, we broiled it for supper, and ate it -as we had done the birds and leeks--without salt or pepper. - -On the 11th we had a bird for breakfast, and traveled till afternoon, -counting that we had journeyed about one hundred and twenty-five miles, -and reached our camp, where we found all well. The boys soon spread -a white man's meal before us, and each of us did our part without a -grumble. Then we made a short drive, and on the 12th pushed forward on -our way to Fort Supply, reaching that place on the 14th. We found all -well, and in good spirits. - -June 15th we loaded two wagons with a large assortment of Indian goods, -as we had agreed to meet the Indians with the merchandise, in twenty -days, on the Labarg, a tributary of Green River. On the 20th we reached -that stream and as there were no Indians there I sent Joshua Terry, E. -Barney Ward, and my cousin James M. Brown, to inform the red men that -we were on time as agreed. It seemed that after we left them they had -quarreled and divided into three parties, and came very near righting -among themselves. They were therefore very different in spirit to when -we left them. At last they began to come and lodge in three distinct -camps around our wagons. - -On the 28th, all the Indians were very sullen and did not seem to be -the same people they were a few days before. Knowing something of their -nature, we turned out about seventy-five dollars' worth of provisions -and other goods as a present. Still that did not seem to satisfy them; -they wanted all we had. Finally I told them that we had done as we had -agreed to do, and if they wished to trade we were ready. They continued -to manifest a very mean spirit, and we were not able to sell more than -five hundred dollars' worth of goods out of a stock of three thousand -dollars. - -On June 30th we left three of our party with the Indians, while the -rest of us returned to Fort Supply with our stock of goods. The -Indians felt very bad because we had not given them all we had. It was -July 4th when we arrived at the fort, and found the brethren there -celebrating the glorious Independence Day. I was quite ill, but the -brethren insisted on my taking the lead of the ceremonies. That being -my birthday, I accepted the offer, and we had a very enjoyable time. - -From July 5th to the 18th we continued our farm labors. Then E. B. Ward -and three or four other men, including myself, set out on a little -exploring trip among the hills. We crossed over to Henry's Fork, then -returned to Smith's Fork, where we selected a place for the Indians -to settle when they saw fit. Having thus completed our obligations to -them, we returned to the fort, and continued our labors until August -1st, when we had a recruit of twelve men sent to us, under command of -John Phelps. About August 3rd or 4th I rebaptized all the Elders, and -baptized three of the first Shoshone women that ever came into the -Church. Their names were Mary, Sally Ward, and Corger. I also baptized -a young Indian man named Corsetsy. From the 5th to the 7th, the Indians -came and went, attended our meetings regularly, and felt very friendly -and somewhat inquisitive. We gave them a few presents. They said -they were well pleased to have us locate in their country, and were -satisfied with the places we had selected for them to settle and live -upon as we did. On the 7th of August, Joshua Terry and I started for -Salt Lake City, each with an ox team and two wagons loaded with furs, -pelts and robes. We arrived in the city on the 11th, and reported our -success to Governor Young, who was pleased with our efforts. We also -settled for the goods we had had of him. - -On the 13th I started for Ogden City, and reached there the next day, -meeting my wife and firstborn child, a daughter, who was born August -10th. - - - -CHAPTER XLVIII. - -AFFAIRS AT HOME--START FOR FORT SUPPLY--ILLNESS OF MYSELF AND -FAMILY--GIFT OF HEALING--TROUBLE WITH INDIANS AT FORT SUPPLY--TURBULENT -RED MEN--I HELP ONE OFF MY BED--THEY PERSIST IN TAKING OR DESTROYING -OUR PROPERTY--WE STOP THEM--ONE ATTEMPTS TO KILL ME--INDIANS -RETIRE FROM THE FORT--ALMOST A CONFLICT--I CHECK THE WHITE MEN -FROM SHOOTING--INDIANS WITHDRAW--WE SEND TO GOVERNOR YOUNG FOR -ASSISTANCE--OUR STOCK AND GUARDS DRIVEN IN--INDIAN AGENT APPEARS WITH -ANNUITIES--THE SAVAGES SUBMIT--WE GUARD DAY AND NIGHT--INDIANS MORE -PEACEFUL--REINFORCEMENTS ARRIVE FROM THE GOVERNOR--MATTERS QUIET DOWN. - -AUGUST 14, 1855, I went to Salt Lake City, and on September 3rd -returned home. On the 5th my family were taken sick with cholera morbus. - -Notwithstanding this sickness, I started on my return to Fort Supply, -for it was the faith of myself and family that if I went to my mission -they would be healed. Just as I mounted my horse to start out, my -uncle, Captain James Brown, came along and said, "Jimmie, are you going -off and leaving your family sick?" - -I told him, "Yes, sir." - -Said he, "You are cold-hearted, and I would not do it." - -When I told him that they with me believed that if I would go to my -missionary labors they would be healed sooner than if I should neglect -my duties in that line, he, with uplifted hands, said, "Jim, you're -right. Go ahead, and God bless you. Your family shall be healed, -and not suffer. I will go in and pray for them." He did so, and I -afterwards learned that they were healed the same hour that I proceeded -on my journey. I did not see them again till December 20th, when they -told me that they had not been sick one day after I left. - -Although when I started out I was very ill myself with the same -trouble, and had to call at a friend's and get a dose of painkiller, -and take a rest for an hour or two before I could proceed on my way to -Salt Lake City, yet on the 13th I started for Fort Supply, and overtook -the two wagons which had preceded me the day before. I travelled with -them until the 17th, then left them and went on horseback forty-five -miles to the fort. I was very sick for five days, so that I had to keep -my bed part of the time. I found all well and the wheat harvest ready -for the laborers, a heavy frost having injured the crops considerably. -On Friday, September 28th, I sent four men to invite Washakie to the -fort, and on the 29th we learned that Chief Tibunduets (white man's -child) had just returned with his band from Salt Lake City. October 1st -I sent Isaac Bullock and Amenzo Baker to visit him. They found him and -all of his band feeling very bad and revengeful. - -October 10th Tibunduets and his band threw down our fencing and came -charging up through our field, riding over wheat shocks, and singing -war songs. At the same time the warriors from a camp above came into -the fort with their weapons in their hands. Our men tried to be -friendly and talked peace to them, but it was not what they wanted. -They said they were "heap mad," for when they were in Salt Lake City -the big Mormon captain had written with blood on their children, and -a number of these had died while they were among the Mormons. These -Indians refused the seats offered them, but jumped on the beds and -behaved very saucily, saying they wanted pay for the death of their -children who had died on the Mormon lands. Of course, we could not -afford to give presents of that kind, and their demands were rejected. - -Three of the hostile Indians went to my room, and one engaging me in -conversation, the other two jumped on my bed and stretched themselves -full length on it. My cousin James M. Brown called my attention to -their rude actions, and I turned around and told them to get off my -bed, but they answered with a contemptuous laugh. I told them a second -time, and they sneered again. I stepped to the side of the bed and told -them the third time, and as they refused, I jerked one of them off the -bed so quickly that it surprised him, and the other one thought he -preferred to get off without that kind of help, and did so quickly. - -Tibunduets made heavy demands on us, which we could not comply with. We -told him that we were not prepared to do his bidding, and he replied, -"You're a wolf and a liar, and you will steal." Then the Indians turned -their horses into our fields among our shocks of wheat and oats, while -their women went to digging and sacking our potatoes, the Indians -throwing down our fences in many places and ordering our men out of the -fields. They told us to leave their lands, and continued their insults -until I sent some men out to order their women out of the potato -patch. The squaws only laughed at our men, who returned and reported -the results. Then I went out myself, and as I passed a brush fence, I -caught up a piece of brush and started towards the potato diggers, who -screamed and ran away before I got near enough to use the stick. - -I returned to the house and soon was followed by two young braves, who -rode up in front of the door and called for the captain. I answered -in person, when the braves said, "You heap fight squaw, you no fight -Injun." They continued their insulting words and threats of violence, -until at last I ordered them out of the fort, upon which one of them -drew his bow and pointed his arrow at me, within three feet of my -breast. At that one of my men pushed the horse's head between me and -the arrow. At the same time Amenzo Baker handed me a Colt's revolver, -and another man covered the Indian with a revolver. - -At that movement the Indians started for the big gate, and as there was -quite a number of warriors inside the fort I called my men out with -their guns, for the Indians seemed determined on bloodshed. They rushed -outside, and the white men followed them to where a young chief sat -on his horse, just outside of the gate. There must have been a signal -given to the camp above, for the warriors came running with their -rifles in hand, until seventy-five to one hundred warriors were on the -ground, while there were only about forty white men. Everybody wanted -to say something, and in the confusion that followed some ten or twelve -men leveled their guns to shoot, being in such close quarters that they -struck each other as they brought their weapons into position. - -At that moment I sprang under the guns and held some of them up, and -forbade the men to shoot. This act seemed to please the young chief, -and he commanded his men to desist. I ordered my men back and into -their bastions, and to bar the gate. This done, I took a position in -the watchtower, where I talked with their chief through a porthole, and -told him that we were in a position to do them harm, but did not wish -to do so, yet they must withdraw in peace and not molest our property, -for we should defend it and ourselves to the best of our ability. I -said that if they would withdraw peacefully we would not interfere with -them, but to that they would not agree. After considerable parleying, -however, they did withdraw to their camp among the cottonwood timber -and willows on the creek, and built large fires, around which they -danced and sang war songs the greater part of the night, while we made -every possible preparation for defense. - -As captain of the fort, I wrote a despatch to the governor and -superintendent of Indian affairs, stating the facts. Then we covered -with blankets a slab bridge that had to be crossed near the gates, to -deaden the sound of the horse's feet as he went out, and a clever young -man by the name of Benjamin Roberts speeded away with the note to Salt -Lake City. - -On the 11th all was quiet. A few Indian lodges remained near our fort, -and the women and children were around them as usual, so Isaac Bullock -and I went down to learn what the situation was. We found some of them -friendly, while others were very sulky. The main part of the Indian -camp had gone down the creek, and we thought it safe to turn our stock -out under a mounted guard, with one man in the watchtower to keep a -lookout. About 2 p.m. the man at the watchtower sounded an alarm, -saying he saw a great dust in the north; and a few minutes later he -shouted that a large body of horsemen was in sight, coming rapidly from -the north, while our horse guards were coming with our band of horses, -hastening with all speed to the fort. Immediately every man was called -to take a position for prompt action. I occupied a commanding place, -giving instructions to the men not to shoot without my order, and then -not unless they felt sure of making every shot tell. They were told to -see that every tube was filled with powder, "for here they come," said -I; "keep cool boys, for it is a close race with our men and horses." - -It was a question of which would reach the fort first, they or the -Indians. The race was so close that the guards with our band just -succeeded in getting in with the animals in time to close the gates -against the Indian ponies, whose riders called out, "Open the gates!" -They were answered with a positive "No! not until you give up your -arms." They had three mountain men in their party of over one hundred -warriors, who shouted that they would be responsible if we would let -them in, for the Indian agent, George Armstrong, was a short distance -in the rear, with two wagons loaded with goods for the Indians. - -As I had not been advised of the agent's approach from any other -source, I still refused them admittance. Soon the agent's wagons were -in sight, and some of his party came up and told the Indians they would -have to give up their arms before they could enter the fort, for the -captain was determined not to allow them in with their arms. At last -they submitted, and the gate was opened just wide enough for one man to -pass through. I stepped outside, the Indians handed their arms to me, I -passed them to the other men, and they placed them on a part of a wagon -sheet. Then the weapons were bound up strongly and taken away and put -in my room, and a guard placed over them. The Indians were then told -that they could enter the fort and pass directly into the blockhouse, -but would not be permitted to wander around in the fort. - -About this time the agent's wagons rolled up and were hastily unloaded. -Then a friendly smoke took place, and a short council, in which the -Indians agreed that they would withdraw in peace and go to their -hunting grounds, and would not molest us any more. They said we might -remain on their lands let our stock eat grass and drink water in peace; -that we might cultivate the lands and use what timber we wanted, and -that they would be our friends, and we their friends. The goods the -agent had for the Indians were then turned over to them. - -On the 13th the red men brought in a report that the Sioux Indians -had killed one of Jack Robinson's beeves. This they did to screen -themselves, for it was they and not the Sioux who had killed the -animal. The agent gave them a beef ox, and they moved down the creek. -On the 14th the agent and party returned home, and we kept up a guard -day and night to prevent being surprised by the renegades of the Indian -camps; for we had evidence of their treachery. We had given them back -their arms, and when they obtained all we had for them they said the -white man was "heap good, Shoshone no kay nabatint Mormon." (Shoshones -do not want to fight Mormons.) They packed and left, feeling quite -pleased. - -General R. T. Burton with a party of twenty-five men were met at Fort -Bridger on the 16th, by myself and a small party. On the 17th I went -with them to Fort Supply, while they concluded to send out a scout -to ascertain whether the Indians really had crossed the Green River -or not, thinking that if they did we could be satisfied that all was -right. When our scouts returned and reported that all had crossed the -river and gone farther on, General Burton and command returned home, -while myself and men did up our fall work at Fort Supply. - - - -CHAPTER XLIX. - -START HOME FROM FORT SUPPLY--CAMP ALONE AT NEEDLE ROCK--AWAKENED BY -MY HORSE--SURROUNDED BY WOLVES--FLASH POWDER ALL NIGHT TO KEEP OFF THE -WILD BEASTS--REACH HOME--SUPPLIES SHORT--HARDSHIPS OF A GRASSHOPPER -YEAR--GETTING MY CATTLE OUT OF A CANYON--PERILS OF BEING CAUGHT IN THE -SNOW--GREAT SUFFERING--BREAKING A SNOW ROAD--BUSINESS AFFAIRS. - -THE writer left Fort Supply December 14, 1855, and started for his home -in Ogden City on horseback and alone, having placed Isaac Bullock in -charge of affairs at the fort. The first night out I camped at a place -called Needle Rock, just east of Yellow Creek. There I selected a spot -where the feed was good, picketed out my horse, set my saddle over the -picket pin, and spread my blankets so as to lay my head on the saddle, -lest the coyotes should cut my riata and turn loose the horse. - -As I was alone and yet in an Indian country, I did not make a fire, but -ate a cold lunch, rolled up in my blankets, and soon dropped to sleep, -to be awakened by my horse snorting and kicking. The animal brushed his -nose on my head before I was sufficiently awake to understand what he -meant by his actions; but no sooner was I aroused than I found that he -was surrounded by a pack of large, grey wolves which were growling and -snapping at his heels and at each other. The night was so dark that I -could plainly see the fierce eyes of my ravenous enemies shining in the -darkness all around me. - -I had a good Colt's revolver, but having heard that if wolves smelled -blood when they were gathered in such a pack they would attack man -or beast, I reserved my fire. I remembered having heard that these -wild beasts were afraid of the flash and smell of burning powder, so -I spread some gunpowder on the leathers of my saddle, and with flint -and steel struck fire, and in that way flashed powder by intervals all -night. The wolves would run off, but return in a short time, as if -determined to have flesh. My horse was too weak to attempt to flee, -and as for myself I had become so chilled and benumbed that it was -with some difficulty that I could keep up the flashes till daylight, -at which time the pack of wolves went away, leaving horse and rider -to resume their sufficiently hazardous journey without such unwelcome -company. - -I crossed over to the head of Echo Canyon, where I found a yoke of oxen -that some emigrants had left to die. As the animals had got rested -up, I thought I could drive them in and save their lives, but had to -abandon them in Round Valley, Weber Canyon. Then, on a poor, jaded -horse, I pursued my way, arriving at home about 9 p.m. on December 20th. - -[IMAGE: SURROUNDED BY A PACK OF HUNGRY WOLVES] - -I found all well, but winter supplies of food so short that I sold the -only respectable suit of clothes I had for breadstuff. I had about worn -out all the rest of my clothing when I was in the Indian country, so -that I had but one old flannel shirt left, and that I had made out of -two old ones. I had one pair of buckskin pants, a rough beaver cap and -a pair of moccasins. - -It will be remembered by the early residents of Utah that the year -1855 was a grasshopper year, as well as a season of great drought, and -therefore one of the hardest years that many of the people had ever -experienced, both for man and beast. Hundreds of horses and cattle -starved to death, and many of the people barely escaped the same sad -fate. I could do no better than to let my horses go out on the range to -die of starvation and cold, and turn my hand to anything I could get to -do to earn an honest dollar. - -Soon after arriving home I was called to devote a portion of my time in -traveling from settlement to settlement, and preaching to the people; -also in visiting the Indian camps along the Weber River and preaching -and talking to them, for it was a terrible winter for the Indians. -Before entering upon these duties, however, I returned to where I had -left my cattle to rest for a few days, and where the feed was tolerably -good. When I started out it commenced to storm and by the time I -reached the cattle the snow was eighteen inches deep. - -Before I could get out of the canyon with the animals the snow was two -and a half feet deep. My horse gave out, and I had to travel on foot, -breaking the trail and leading the horse a few rods, then going back -and driving up the cattle. I continued these efforts until myself and -stock were exhausted. When I tried to start a fire, my matches were -all wet. I had left my rifle and shotpouch at home, and in the pouch -were my faithful flint and steel, which had never failed me. But for -the snow, the night was total darkness. At last I reached a clump of -cottonwood trees, and for a time I thought I would die of exhaustion -and thirst. I knew that if I ceased to exert myself I would chill to -death. Finally it occurred to my mind to tear off a piece of my shirt, -roll it up, hold it in one hand, and with my revolver shoot through it -and start a fire. I found a large sagebrush, and from it gathered the -dry bark. This I wrapped around the roll of shirt, then fired a shot -through it, and in that way succeeded in starting a flame. As there -was plenty of wood handy, I built and kept up a large fire during the -night. The river banks were so steep that it was impossible in the -darkness to get water to drink. I was driven almost frantic by thirst, -but finally thought to take off my heavy leggings, place them in a -position so that they would form a kind of basin, and cover them with -snow, so the fire would melt it to water in the leather bowl. In that -way I obtained water and quenched my terrible thirst. My blankets and -everything I had on had been soaked thoroughly with the melting snow, -but I succeeded in drying all during the night. - -The dawn of day was welcome indeed, but my troubles were not yet over, -for I found my animals standing in snow to their necks, and they would -not move out of their tracks only as I broke an opening around and -urged them on. The snow was so wet and heavy that it was an awful task -to break a road and get those animals through for the first five miles. -After that the snow was not so deep, and with a very great effort and -hazard of life I succeeded in reaching Ogden, as thankful as I ever was -in my life to get home--to "home, sweet home." - -Being once more with my family and friends, I got up my winter wood -and visited the people as a teacher. In the spring I finished a -two-roomed house that I had under way on Main Street. I then moved -into it, preparatory to going to Fort Supply again, but was honorably -released by President Young from further missionary labors in that -part. I rented land, put in corn and potatoes, and spent the fore part -of the summer at farm labor. Having acquired a fourth interest in -three ferries on Green River, I arranged with my three partners, Isaac -Bullock, Louis Robinson and W. Hickman, so that I did not have to go -there, as my health was not very good; hence I remained at Ogden. - - - -CHAPTER L. - -CALLED ON A MISSION TO DEEP CREEK INDIANS--SHORT TIME FOR THE -JOURNEY--PREPARE FOR THE TRIP--JOURNEY IN THE DESERT--HORSES -STOLEN--TRAVEL ON FOOT--SAVED FROM PERISHING WITH THIRST--MEET THE -INDIANS--COULD UNDERSTAND AND SPEAK TO THEM--INDIAN AGENT'S OFFER--I -ACT AS INTERPRETER--PREACH TO THE INDIANS--ON THE RETURN TRIP--VISIT -GOVERNOR YOUNG WITH A DELEGATION OF BANNOCK INDIANS. - -ON August 22, 1856, I received a letter from President Young, calling -me to take a mission of thirty days, west across the desert, to Deep -Creek, to the Indians in that region. As I did not understand fully -the object of the mission, I thought there was some mistake in the -letter, since the distance that had to be traveled out and back would -be about five hundred miles and I was to preach to a tribe of Indians -I had never seen, much less being able to speak their dialect, and do -it all with only thirty days' rations. To me it was, to say the least, -a singular call; so I went to Salt Lake City August 23rd, to find out -that the letter meant just what it said, no less; only that Geo. W. -Armstrong, an Indian agent from Provo, was going out to distribute some -goods among the Indians, and it would be a good time to send a few -missionaries to preach to the red men. - -From Salt Lake City I returned to Ogden and purchased a splendid mare -of widow Ruth Stuart, on credit, promising to pay when I could. On the -27th I joined Mr. Armstrong and twenty-five other men in Salt Lake -City, fitting up for the journey, some as guards to the agent and some -as missionaries. Among those I remember were Seth M. Blair, Oliver -Huntington, Ormus Bates, John Whitney, J. Cooley, Harrison Sagers, -Harrison Sevier, and Peter Conover; there were others whose names I do -not now recall. - -The company left the city on August 29th, and traveled through Tooele, -Rush Valley, and over Johnson's Pass into Skull Valley. With five -others of the party, however, I went around by what is now called -Dugway, and met the rest of the company at the springs in Skull Valley. - -On September 2nd, we reached Granite Rock, sometimes called Granite -Mountain, as it stands out in the midst of the desert. There the -company camped at some alkali springs, where, with cup and bucket, it -took all night to dip water for the stock. Next morning we found that -the Indians had stolen all the team horses, eight head, so the agent -called on the men to volunteer their saddle horses to take his wagons -across the desert. Among the rest, I let my horse go, and eight of us -set out on foot to cross the desert, while some went after the stolen -stock. Other horsemen pushed across to water, and the teams brought up -the rear. - -The route was brushy and rocky, in some places there was heavy sand, in -other parts stiff alkali mud, and much of the time without a sign of a -road. The writer was taken very sick with a severe bowel complaint and -was compelled to turn to one side, so I fell behind my fellow footmen. -The teams lagged in the sand and mud till long after dark. I became so -weak and faint that I could not travel any longer, and I laid down on -the damp ground, so tired and thirsty that it seemed impossible for me -to live until morning without relief. When I had laid down for some -time, I heard my bunkmate, Doc. Woodward, shout that he had found water -and filled his canteen, and was coming back hunting the missed and -needy one. When he got near enough for me to answer him, I did so, and -with a drink I was somewhat revived. I was helped on my friend's horse, -and we proceeded on for about five miles to camp and water. One of the -party gave me a brandy toddy, spread my blankets, and I turned in, a -very grateful sufferer. I was given a cup of coffee, after which I felt -very much relieved, and by morning was ready to resume the journey, the -wagons having come up about 11 p.m. Next morning, September 4th, we -moved up five or six miles, to what was called Fish Springs. There we -found a number of Indians, and the party pitched camp for a few days. - -When the animals had been cared for and fires built, the Indians -gathered around in considerable numbers. As they were talking among -themselves, the writer understood and commenced to speak with them -in their own dialect, at which they were surprised and said one to -another, "Who is this man, that talks our talk? He has never been in -our country before." I was no less astonished myself; and I call the -reader's attention now to the peculiar feature of a man being called -to fit himself out with provisions to last him thirty days, travel out -in the desert two hundred and fifty or three hundred miles, and preach -to a tribe of Indians in whose country he had never been and whom he -had never seen before. Yet when the agent's interpreters failed to get -the Indians to understand, the agent asked if I could talk with them. I -told him I had never seen these Indians before that hour, "but," said -I, "I understand them, and you see they understand me." "Yes," said -the agent, but I do not see how it is that you can talk with them. I -have two men employed as interpreters, but they cannot make the Indians -understand. Now if you can make them comprehend what I wish to tell -them, I will pay you three dollars per day from the time that you left -home until you return there." - -"I do not know whether I can do your talking or not," was my response -to this proposition. "I came here to preach to this people, and I have -power given me to do it in their own tongue. But I do not know whether -I will be permitted to speak for you or not; if I am, I will talk for -you." "All right," said Mr. Armstrong, "have them form a circle in -front of my wagons, and tell them who I am, and what the great father -at Washington has sent me here for; that I have brought them clothing -and blankets as a present from the great father at Washington, and that -he expects them to be good people and live in peace with each other, -and also with other people, and if they will do so the great father -will send good men to bring more goods to them." - -When I told them what the agent wanted, they at once formed a circle as -desired, to the satisfaction of all present. Then the agent distributed -the goods, to the great pleasure of the Indians. He talked very kindly -to them and gave them much good advice. I interpreted what he said, and -then continued to preach to them, telling them about the Book of Mormon -and their forefathers, and many other things of interest to them. I -seemed to have perfect liberty of speech as I desired it, in their -dialect, and they listened attentively to all I had to say. - -The next day Seth M. Blair, Peter Conover, Ormus Bates and myself and -four or five other men that belonged to the missionary part of the -camp, employed an Indian guide to travel south around the head of Deep -Creek, to see what natural advantages there were for settlements, but -we failed to find anything inviting until we came to Deep Creek, where -the country seemed quite suitable for stock raising. About the 11th of -September the party returned to the agent's camp, where we again met -with many of the Indians, who wished us to stop and live with them as -their friends, adding, "If you will not stop with us, then tell the big -Mormon captain to send some good Mormon men that will tell the truth -and show us how to make clothes like the white man." - -It was the next day, I think, that the party started back to Salt Lake -City, the agent having secured his team horses. We traveled north of -Granite Rock, and around the point of the mountain to the lake, thence -along the shore to Grantsville. We tarried one day with Mr. Cooley, and -partook of the hospitality of himself and family. - -After our visit to the Deep Creek Indians, some of them claimed to have -received dreams and visions, in which heavenly messengers appeared and -told them to go into Tooele and call on the Bishops, who would tell -them what to do, and for them to obey the Bishops. Accordingly, scores -of them went to Grantsville and related their story, when they were -told to believe in Christ and repent and be baptized. Many of them -obeyed this advice, and then a missionary was sent out and located -among them. - -With our one day's rest at Grantsville, the party continued on to Salt -Lake City, where Mr. Armstrong paid me ninety dollars in cash for my -services as interpreter. I returned home and paid the ninety dollars -on the mare I had purchased on credit for the mission. My labors as -a missionary, however, were still called for, and I visited all the -settlements in Weber County, also the Indian camps, and acted as a -presiding teacher in Ogden City, often being called to arbitrate -differences between the white people and Indians. About that time Snag, -the Bannock Indian chief, and twelve of his prominent men called on me -to accompany them to Salt Lake City to see President Brigham Young on -some business. They said they wished a friendly talk, and to tell some -of their grievances and ask some favors of him. The latter constituted -the greater part of their business. I accompanied them to President -Young's residence, where he received them kindly, furnishing them with -necessary supplies of food and fuel. Next day, after they had had a -very friendly talk with the President, he gave orders to the Bishops -in the northern settlements to supply the Indians' wants as far as -practicable, as it was cheaper to feed than to fight them. Then after -all the complaints of the Bannocks had been satisfactorily adjusted, we -left, they for their homes in the north near Fort Hall, the writer for -Ogden, where I continued my labors. - - - -CHAPTER LI. - -UTAH MILITIA ORGANIZED--ELECTED CAPTAIN OF A COMPANY--HEAR OF -JOHNSTON'S ARMY--SCOUTING PARTY SENT OUT--I AM CHOSEN AS GUIDE--TRAVEL -TO THE BEAR LAKE COUNTRY--COLD NIGHTS AND LITTLE FOOD--COMPLAINT IN THE -PARTY--PROVE THAT I AM RIGHT--REACH LOST CREEK--SOME OF THE MEN OBJECT -TO DOUBLE GUARD--A DISCOVERY THAT REMOVES ALL OBJECTIONS--STRIKE THE -TRAIL OF HORSEMEN--PREPARE FOR ACTION--TAKE A CAMP BY SURPRISE--THE -MEN ARE FRIENDS--ARRIVE AT OGDEN--CALLED TO GO ON AN IMPORTANT -ERRAND--TUSSLE WITH AN INDIAN--FAIL IN GETTING DESIRED INFORMATION, AND -RETURN TO OGDEN. - -IN the spring of 1857 I rented some land and put in a crop. Soon after -this an order came from Governor Young to the Weber County officials -to organize the militia of the county, which was done. I was elected -captain of the first company of infantry in the Weber militia district. -The company consisted of captain, commissioned and non-commissioned -officers, and one hundred men of the rank and file. Chauncey W. West, -then the Bishop of Weber County, was commissioned general of the -district. He appointed days for drill, and four companies came together -in Ogden City for that service. - -At that time we had not learned of threatened danger from any source -except occasional Indian raids; but no sooner had we got properly -organized and ready for self-defense than news came from the east to -Governor Young that an invading army was coming, with hostile threats -against the citizens of Utah. - -As the governor had not been officially notified of the approach of -United States troops, his official oath bound him to repel any invading -forces. He accordingly sent out scouts to ascertain the movements of -the troops referred to, and soon learned that there was a well equipped -army of nearly ten thousand men on their way west, with the avowed -purpose, it was said, of destroying the Mormon Church and people. - -Some time in August General West called out twelve or fifteen men as a -scouting party, to go over in the Bear Lake country, along the emigrant -road, and from there to the head of Lost Creek and down the Weber -River. He had heard of a party going up Lost Creek, and over to the -Bear Lake country. General West appointed Major Monroe to take charge -of the party, of which the writer was called to be one, as I had been -acquainted with mountain travel and understood the Indian language. -General West told the major to make no move of importance without -consulting me as to the journey. - -The party proceeded to the divide between North Ogden and Ogden -Valley, where we halted and the major privately told me that he was -not accustomed to journeys of that kind, and wished me to lead the -party through, for I had more experience than he had. I declined the -responsibility, but the major said: "I will be responsible if you will -lead." so I headed out to Blacksmith Fork and thence to Bear Lake, and -around the east side thereof to the river. We crossed to the California -road near the present site of Montpelier, thence back east to the -road where Cokeville settlement is now located. As we failed to learn -anything of importance, we returned back over the river and struck out -for the head of Lost Creek, where it was supposed that we would fall in -with the scouts from the approaching army. - -The nights began to be cold, and the food supply was getting low. The -horses were somewhat jaded, the route very rough, and the most of the -party were young and inexperienced. They began to complain and said -that nobody had ever traveled in so rough a country as that, and it -was all foolishness to be wearing ourselves out in that way. They -said the writer did not know himself where he was going, and I had -no business to be on the lead, as that was Major Monroe's place. The -major, however, promptly told the party that I was in the proper place. -Finally I called a halt and told the party that I knew that we were -going just right and had been on a trail all day, but they did not know -it. They asked, "Where is your trail?" and I again told them that we -were on it. They laughed at me when I said, "I can prove it to you, and -even tell you the color of the horses that have passed this way." But -they thought me a fool to talk thus, so I told one of the young men to -jump down and remove the leaves from a root of a tree that stood near -by a steep bank, as it was plain to the practiced eye that an old trail -passed there, and when the leaves were removed he would find that the -bark had been bruised at the roots of the tree by the hoofs of passing -horses. He found the trail and the bark off the tree roots, as I had -said. I told the men to look on the tree about the height of a pony's -side, and they would find hair that would tell them the color of the -ponies that had passed there. They found bay and white horses' hair. -Next I said to them, "Look on the point of that snag which projects -over the trail." They did so, and found a duplicate of the hair they -had found on the tree. Then they said that I could prove anything I -pleased, and they would not dispute with me any more. - -The party passed on down Lost Creek, to a point where the country was -more open. When camping time came we turned into a little creek bottom -and put out the stock. I remarked to the major that I felt as though we -should put on a double guard that night. This was more than some of the -boys thought they could stand. Several said that I would run the party -to death, but that they would not submit to any extra guard. Others -said there was no use for any guard, for nobody but Brown would ever -lead a party there; but just then some one hallooed, and we found, on -looking, that no one was missing from camp. One said it was a coyote, -another that it was an owl. Again the cry was heard distinctly, and no -doubt remained of its being a human voice. Then the order was given to -get up the stock, ready for whatever might come. The horses were soon -picketed near camp, and every man thought it was proper to put on a -double guard that night, some of the boys remarking that Brown was not -such a fool as they had thought. - -Things settled down for the night, and next morning the party started -out. We had gone less than a mile when we saw fresh horse tracks made -by shod horses, and the droppings looked so new that I directed a -young man to ascertain if they were warm. The novel way in which the -young man performed that task created some merriment for the moment. -Then the party continued on a short distance, when we saw a smoke just -over the creek bank ahead. Every man was ready to obey orders, and all -dismounted at command and tightened up their saddle girths. Then came -the order to see that every tube was filled with dry powder, and each -man was assigned his position for action. - -The party was instructed not to halt without orders, and not to let -a horse put his head down to drink. If perchance we saw a blanket, -a handkerchief, or any camp equipage, we were to pass it unnoticed; -if brush or any obstructions were observed, we might be certain that -all such signs meant ambuscade. We then advanced cautiously and found -evidence of a party about our own number, lying encamped at the fire. -We pressed forward on the trail, and found several bushes lapped across -it, so that we felt certain we would soon fall in with those ahead, -whom we felt sure could be none other than a scouting party from -Johnston's army. We prepared for the worst, and as we were moving on -double-quick time we saw a man running towards a grove of cottonwood -trees, from a point of the mountain. Next we saw the horses of a party -of scouts, the top of whose tent was soon discovered. - -Quickly capturing the horses, we charged on the tent and surrounded it. -taking the men by surprise. As they began to file out of their tent, -our party leveled their rifles and called on them to surrender. Just -at that moment one of the surprised party recognized one of our men, -so that we only required them to acknowledge that they were "dropped -on," a phrase used in those times to express the condition. We were not -long in ascertaining that the party was a scout from Davis County, in -pursuit of the same reported detachment we had been sent to intercept. -But neither of us had seen or heard anything of the party that was -supposed to be in the region of country we had been over. Without much -delay, our party hastened home to Ogden City, and joined our regiment, -finding much excitement and hearing many rumors. - -It seemed that there was no rest for me, for in a day or two General -West called on me to visit the camp of James and Ben Simons, who lived -about twenty miles up the Weber River. The men named were Cherokee -Indians who, it was said, were in possession of some important -information which the general wanted to get. He told me to learn what I -could from the Simonses, as they were friendly. - -When I got to the mouth of the canyon I chanced to meet Ben Simons -coming from Salt Lake City. It was evident the Indian had been -drinking, and as soon as I met him he drew his Colt's revolver and -said, "Hold on there!" threatening to kill me if I was Uncle Sam's man. -I succeeded in riding close alongside of him, grabbed his pistol and -held the muzzle away from me. I tried to persuade him not to shoot, for -we must be good friends. He yelled again that if I were a Mormon I must -fight his old uncle or he would kill me. He was a powerful man, and I -had all that I could do to keep the pistol turned from me. - -For ten miles I had to tussle with that Indian, and at times thought -I would have to shoot him in self-defense; but after the most -disagreeable and hazardous ten miles' ride of my whole life, we came -to Gordon Beckstead's ranch. Simons regarded Beckstead as his friend. -The latter persuaded the warrior to dismount and have a drink of whisky -with him, and let me go my way, for I was a good friend to both of them. - -I went to James Simons' camp but failed to get the information desired. -Simons was very friendly, and said that if he heard anything of -interest he would be pleased to let us know it at once. I then returned -to my regiment, which was ordered into camp the next day. We bivouacked -on the east bench in Ogden City. - - - -CHAPTER LII. - -OFF ON ANOTHER SCOUT--AGAIN ON BEAR RIVER--DREAM OF SEEING -TROOPS--DREAM FULFILLED--SEND WORD BACK OF DISCOVERY--FIVE HUNDRED -CAVALRYMEN--HEAVY STORM--MY ONLY REMAINING COMPANION TAKEN ILL--HE -IS HEALED AND I AM STRICKEN DOWN--CAMP IN THE SNOW--MY COMPANION, -EXPECTING ME TO DIE, PREPARES TO TAKE MY BODY HOME--HE RETURNS, -PRAYS FOR ME, AND I AM HEALED--STRICKEN DOWN AGAIN--I DIRECT HIM -TO LEAVE ME AND RETURN HOME--HE OBEYS RELUCTANTLY--I EXPECT TO -DIE--PECULIAR EXPERIENCES--FOUR YOUNG MEN, SENT BY MY COMRADE, -COME TO MY RELIEF--JOURNEY ON--LIGHTING FIRE IN A STORM--THE YOUNG -MEN PRAY FOR ME, AND I AM RELIEVED--TRAVELING HOMEWARD--KIND -TREATMENT--REACH OGDEN--ACT AS SEXTON--GUARD OVER SPIES--UTAH MILITIA -RECALLED--MISSIONARY LABORS IN WEBER COUNTY. - -THE first night in camp at Ogden, General West and his adjutant, D. -Gamble, called at my tent, and told me I was wanted to take charge -of a scouting party to go over in the Bear Lake country, and start -by sunrise next morning. They directed me to choose the men I would -like to have accompany me, and they should be released to go home and -prepare. I made a list of five young, active men, who met me next -morning at sunrise, having received their orders. We proceeded to the -emigrant road across the Bear River, about fifteen miles above the -lake. There we met with some emigrants, but could not learn anything -from them, so we crossed back to the foot hills, and there camped in a -secluded place, where we could overlook the emigrant road. Next morning -at 4 o'clock I awoke from a dream, in which I had seen two hundred and -fifty cavalrymen come and pitch camp just across the river from where -we were; then I saw two hundred and fifty more come and reinforce the -first detachment; I also saw their baggage and artillery wagons. I was -impressed so forcibly with the dream that I called my comrades and told -them to prepare for a move, while I went up one of the high points -and watched developments. At daybreak I saw the camp of the first two -hundred and fifty men, saw them form in line for roll call, and a -mounted guard drive their horses across the river towards our camp. - -The main object of our scout was to learn if the army or any portion of -it was coming down Bear River and into Salt Lake Valley from the north, -and if we saw any troops on that route to communicate the information -to headquarters at the earliest moment possible, so that our forces -could meet them at the best places on the route, and repulse them. -That that end might be served I sent two of my men with a dispatch to -General West, and as soon as the messengers had gone out of call I -again went on the hill. Everything was ready to move as developments -might indicate, and just as the first party was saddling its horses I -saw the second two hundred and fifty come up and join the first party. -Then the five hundred cavalrymen proceeded down the river, just as I -had seen them in my dream. This necessitated a second dispatch and two -more of my men, leaving me only one, with whom I followed up the troops -till they camped. It rained and snowed alternately all that day and -night. My comrade, James Davis, and I went after dark within the lines -of the troops, but did not learn of their intentions. Davis was taken -with something like a congestive chill, and we were forced to retreat -into the hills, where we camped for the night. Davis was so bad that I -worked in the storm all night with him and prayed for him; at last he -was healed and we set out on our way home at daylight. - -About 8 a.m. the writer came down sick, just the same as my friend had -been, only I also suffered with pleurisy in the right side. I could -ride no further, so we camped in the snow, where it was about eight -inches deep. Snow was still falling as it can only in the mountain -country. Our clothes were wet as could be, and our blankets were in the -same condition. The only food we had was the crumbs and dust from some -crackers. - -Davis succeeded in making a fire, but by that time I had cramped so -that I could not speak. Davis, supposing I was dying, started out to a -quakingasp grove to get some poles to make an Indian litter or drag, -on which he thought to take my body home. As he went he felt he ought -to have faith and pray for his comrade, as he had been prayed for the -night before; so he fell on his knees and prayed, as he afterwards -said, as he never had done before. Then something said to him, "Go back -and put your hands on him and pray again, and he will be healed;" and -it was even so. - -We then traveled some fifteen miles, when the sun shone. We partly -dried our blankets by a fire and the sun, and continued our journey -for some ten miles, when I had a second attack of illness, which was -so severe that I thought I had better die alone in the mountains than -to allow the enemy to gain the advantage in the country. Consequently, -I told Davis to make my horse fast by the trail and spread my -blankets, that I might lie down. This done, I directed him not to -spare horseflesh, but take the news to our friends as soon as it was -possible. Davis did not want to leave me in that plight, but was urged -to go. He started reluctantly, and in tears. - -For a time it seemed that I had rendered my last services to family -and friends, as I lay down by an Indian trail, sixty miles from any -white man's habitation. While I was pondering the situation, a magpie -came flying down over me, and said "quack," then alighted on a willow -near by, in plain sight. Next came a raven, which gave its "croak," as -it settled down near me, and it seemed as though it had found prey. -Being aware of the habits of these carrion birds, I wrapped my head -in blankets, to prevent the birds from picking out my eyes, if the -worst came to me; yet I knew that my body could not be protected from -the wild beasts that roamed in the mountains, such as the bear, wolf, -wolverine, panther or mountain lion, wild cat and lynx, some of which, -if not all these various kinds, would be tugging at my carcass inside -of twenty-four hours. - -Then the birds circled over me, as if to say, "We want an eye," or -some fragment of my body, I felt that my time was nigh, and unless the -providence of God interposed, I would go the way of all the earth before -the rising of the sun. I was chilled to the very bone, and cramped so -that it was impossible for me to build a fire. It did not seem possible -for me to survive until my companion could ride sixty miles and send -relief. - -While I pondered the situation, four young men who had been sent with -fresh horses and food supplies came up, they having met Davis, who -sent them on with all speed. I think the eldest of them was not over -seventeen years old. They soon built a fire and prepared much needed -refreshments, and I was greatly benefited by that special providence of -God, as it certainly seemed to me to be. While I partook of the food, -the young men saddled my horse, rolled up my blankets, and we rode -eight or ten miles that night, and camped while the rain came down in -torrents. The boys soon provided me with shelter by sticking willows in -the ground and winding the tops together and spreading blankets over, -so that it afforded a little protection for me, and I was soon wrapped -in wet blankets. - -The next thing was to start a fire. Every match had got wet, and the -boys thought it impossible to make a fire, so they asked me what they -should do. I told them to get some cotton out of a quilt if they could -find a dry spot in it, then put a small priming of powder in a rifle -and ram down the cotton on the powder; in the next place, go to the -heaviest topped sagebrush they could find, and carefully reach under -and strip the dry bark off the main stalk of sagebrush, and in that way -get a tinder, then come to my shelter and hold the bark loosely over -the muzzle of the gun and fire it off. They got a light, but they had -too much powder and it blew the fire out. They tried repeatedly without -satisfactory results, and the case was becoming desperate, as darkness -was coming on. Two of them got under cover with me, and I finally -succeeded in measuring the powder to them. Then they started a flame, -and as wood was plenty they made a rousing fire. - -In the meantime I took to cramping and suffered so severely that one -of the boys remarked. "Brother Brown will die. O what shall we do?" -Another said, "Let us pray." Then one led in prayer, and he prayed -mightily. As soon as he was through, one said, "Let us go in and lay -hands on him," and in a moment they all gathered around me, placed -their hands on my head, and prayed from their hearts. The cramping -ceased and never returned as severe as it was before; yet I suffered -greatly from the pain in my side. The writer regrets very much that he -cannot recall the names of those young lads. I believe they were all -sent from Willard City, Box Elder County. God bless them, whoever they -are. Their action showed them to be young heroes, with great faith in -God; and but for them I would have died that fearful night. - -Next morning, the party was up, and off we went down Blacksmith's -Fork Canyon and across to Wellsville, where I was taken in by Bishop -Peter Maughan and his good wife, who did all they could to relieve my -sufferings. The Bishop also saw that the boys were well taken care of. - -The following morning Samuel Obray drove up with a light, covered -wagon, and a good team, and I was helped into the wagon. Sister Maughan -had provided a large canteen full of composition tea. She came to the -wagon, and without thinking of anything else, she placed it partly -under the side where I had the pleurisy pain. Then the team started -for Brigham City, and before we had gone five miles the pain had -disappeared from my side, thanks to the Bishop and Sister Maughan for -their special kindness, and S. Obray. The latter delivered me into the -hands of Colonel Smith in Brigham City, where I was cared for until -next day, and then the colonel forwarded me to my home in Ogden City, -where I recovered after suffering from a severe cold and cough for a -few days. - -During my absence the regiment had gone to Echo Canyon, and there was -scarcely an able-bodied man to be found in the city. The women and -children were cutting and hauling wood, and doing all the outdoor work -as best they could. A great deal of sickness was brought on by exposure -and hardships. At a Sabbath meeting a general vote of thanks was given -the writer for his efforts for the general good of the people and his -self-sacrifice. - -About this time there was a very worthy young man named Yough, who -died, and I was called on to take the part of sexton and bury the -deceased, as well as some small children that had died. Meanwhile, -there were four prisoners brought in from the north; they were -supposed to be spies. I was called on to be one of the guards to take -them to Salt Lake City, where they were turned over to the military -authorities. Then I returned home, to learn that the troops my scouts -and I had seen on Bear River were General R. T. Burton's battalion of -Utah cavalry, which had been sent out to intercept a detachment of -Johnston's army which had been discovered in that direction, but had -returned to the main body, which went into winter quarters at Fort -Bridger. Then the Utah militia was withdrawn from Echo Canyon. - -I was next called to take up my missionary labors in Weber County. -From 1856 to 1859 I baptized and rebaptized four hundred persons, and -visited with the catechism from house to house. In that work I spent -the winter of 1857-8. - - - -CHAPTER LIII. - -MORMONS ABANDON THEIR HOMES AND MOVE SOUTH--PREPARE FOR THE WORST--GO -TO PAYSON--AFFAIRS BEING SETTLED, RETURN TO OGDEN--CALLED TO GO -EAST AS A MISSIONARY--JOURNEY ACROSS THE PLAINS--MEET MY PARENTS IN -IOWA--PREACHING AND TRAVELING--MY FATHER'S TESTIMONY--MISSIONARY -LABORS--CALLED TO MISSOURI--SENT TO BRING A HERD OF CATTLE--RETURN TO -MY PARENTS' HOME--BID FAREWELL TO THEM--PURCHASING CATTLE. - -SOME time in May, 1858, as I remember, an order came from President -Brigham Young for everybody living north of Utah County to move south -and leave their homes prepared for burning; for it had been decided -that if Johnston's army came in, as it had threatened to do, with -hostile intentions, the people would lay waste the country and fight -to the bitter end. I do not remember that there was a dissenting voice -from this determination. - -Everybody moved out to the south, myself and family going to Payson, -one hundred miles from Ogden. There we made a camp, and I cut wild hay -and hauled it for a livelihood, that being the only employment I could -find. - -In the latter part of July, when peace had been re-established, I -returned home and made hasty preparations for my family for the winter, -as I had been called by President Brigham Young to accompany General -Horace S. Eldredge to Florence, Nebraska, with a company consisting -of twenty men who were going on business and partly as missionaries. -I belonged to the latter class. I went into the western part of Iowa, -being assigned to that field of labor, while the others went to their -several destinations. - -The company was to have moved out on the 1st of September, so I. A. -Canfield and I, fitted with a four-mule team and light wagon, were in -Salt Lake City ready to start at the appointed time; but the rest of -the party would not or could not be ready for ten or twelve days, so we -returned home and stayed until the 11th. We then went to Salt Lake City -and waited until the 14th, and, as the party was still tardy, we moved -out to the top of the Little Mountain, and there camped. From that -place we proceeded to the Weber River, where we were overtaken by John -Neff and Dusten Arna, who were to join the party when it came up. As -their teams were not in the best of plight for the journey, we traveled -together to Ham's Fork, where we stopped on the 19th, and waited for -those yet in the rear to come up. About 8 o'clock that evening H. S. -Eldredge, Jos. W. Young and Horton Haight reached our camp. - -On the 20th, the company having got together, proceeded on the way to -the Sweetwater. On the 26th we reached the Platte River, where I was -taken very sick with hemorrhoids of the bowels. With that exception, -all moved smoothly. On the 28th we passed Fort Laramie, and my health -began to improve, though I had been brought almost to death's door, and -the company was detained one afternoon in consequence. After that I -improved, and the company made rapid headway. October 3rd two deserters -from Fort Laramie passed the party. They had stolen two horses and a -mule from the government, and, as I remember it, made good their escape. - -Nothing happened out of the ordinary until October 19th, when the -party arrived at Florence, Nebraska, on the Missouri River. From that -point each went to his field of labor or to his business, as planned -beforehand. Canfield and I crossed the river to L. O. Littlefield's, in -Crescent City, and stayed over night with him and his family, and on -the 20th proceeded on our way to Calhoun, Harrison County, Iowa, where -my father lived with his family. We were soon overtaken by Clayton Webb -and B. H. Dennis, my brothers-in-law. I accepted a seat in their buggy -and they took me to my father's home. - -I had not seen father for eleven years. I was an entire stranger to -every one of the family, who kept a hotel. I went in and ate with -strangers, and did not make myself known until after all the evening -work was done. Then after I was satisfied that they had not the -remotest idea of my identity, I told them who I was. It was some -time before they could realize that what I said was true. To them it -seemed that the dead had come to life, and the long lost had been -found, for they had all given up hope of ever seeing me again. It was -not difficult for me to recognize my father and mother, but my elder -brother and sister were dead, and the younger ones had all grown out of -memory. - -When I had visited with them a few days, I preached several times in -the public schoolhouse, and then traveled and preached. On one occasion -I had a walk and talk with my father alone. We talked of my absence, -and he said, "James, I had given up all hopes of ever seeing your face -again, but thanks be to God I have that privilege. You always have -stood up for the faith and have been a man through thick and thin for -your religion." Then he said, "Oh that I had the faith that I once had, -and felt as I have felt! I would be a happy man if I had the spirit -that you have, and that I once had." He burst into a flood of tears, -and exclaimed, "Oh, my God, I am in the dark and I do not know that I -shall ever feel as I once felt. Then I could divide the last loaf, yes, -the last morsel of food that I had with a Mormon. Talk about heaven! -The true spirit of Mormonism is heaven. I thank God that you have kept -the faith, though you have had a hard time of it." Then he added, -"James, stick to it and never give it up; for if there is any salvation -for me or any of my family it will be through you, for you are the -Joseph of my family, and I have known it since before you were born." -He then seemed as humble as a little child, and continued: "James, be -faithful in the work, but as for me or any of my family going to Utah, -I don't think we will ever go." - -I told him he could do no better than to go with his entire family and -renew their covenants, for the good Spirit was for all who would seek -it in the proper way. At last father said that he did not know what -they should do yet, the weather being wet and cold. - -We returned into the house and I stayed with the family the first -month, preaching in the public schoolhouse every Sabbath. Then my -brother Willis and I traveled around from place to place, and preached -everywhere we found an opportunity, first to Raglan Township, and then -to the northeast, forty miles into Shelby County. We preached several -times in Garden Grove schoolhouse, and went from there to a small town -called Monteno, thence to Pottawatomie County. We preached to a full -hall in Council Bluffs City, then went out on Mosquito Creek, in what -was called the Garner settlement. Thus we continued to travel and -preach from place to place and bear our testimonies, as health and -opportunity permitted. - -In January, 1859, preached my cousin Ira Johnson's funeral sermon; he -had been accidentally shot and killed while out with a surveying party -in that region of country. The same day I baptized six persons and -confirmed them; this was at my father's house, and from that time my -father seemed quite changed in his feelings. He said it was all that he -could do to keep out of the water, and stated that he had never felt -better in his life than he did on that occasion. Said he, "James, I -want you to preach all the time." - -On April 7th I received a letter from General Horace S. Eldredge, -asking me to come down to Platte County, Missouri, and receive one -hundred and seventy-seven head of work oxen that he had contracted -for with Mr. Lampton and Mr. Thompson, cattle merchants. Having also -received the written contract for the cattle, I started on the 8th, -and on the 9th I took passage on the steamboat _Satan_, which lay -at the Council Bluffs landing. I paid ten dollars for passage to -Parkville, Platte County, Missouri. The boat called at all important -towns and landings. Nothing out of the ordinary happened except that -we were driven under a high sandbank in a short bend of the river, -by a powerful wind storm, and in trying to extricate the boat, the -side-wheel next the shore threw the water with such force against the -bank as to cause it to cave in onto the boat, so that the guards and -wheelhouse were carried away. - -I landed at Parkville on April 13th, stopped overnight, and on the 14th -proceeded eight miles to Mr. Thompson's. On the 15th I went with him -to his partner in the contract, Mr. Lampton. The men General Eldredge -promised in his letter on the 15th to send to help drive and care for -the cattle, did not arrive until the 27th, when Eldredge came with five -men. He furnished money to pay the expenses, and gave instructions, -then returned to St. Louis. On the 28th, 29th and 30th, myself and -party received and branded one hundred and seventy-seven head of work -oxen and two valuable mules. - -We started for the north on May 1st, traveling through Rochester, -Marysvale, Lindon and Sydney, keeping from the river and on the high, -rolling prairies, through what was called the Platte purchase in -Missouri. We arrived in Council Bluffs on May 15th, and went from -there to Florence, Nebraska, where I delivered up the drove of cattle -and span of mules, on the 16th, to Bishop Frederick Kesler, who was -General Eldredge's agent. We lost but one head from among the cattle, -although we had an exceedingly stormy and muddy time of it most of the -way, having to swim several streams that had been swollen by the heavy -rains, so that the journey was taken with great hardships, and danger -as well. - -I went to my father's home on the 17th, in Calhoun County, Iowa, -settled with my father, who was very kind to me and my brother Willis, -helping us to two yoke of oxen to cross the plains with. We bade -farewell to the parental home and to the family on the 27th. Father -accompanied us to Council Bluffs and paid our expenses until the 30th, -when we parted with him. We crossed the river at Omaha, and moved up to -Florence, where we went into a camp or rendezvous and waited for others -to come to make a company strong enough to cross the plains. - -The company had its camp some three miles northwest of Florence, where -General Eldredge, the Church agent, and Elder George Q. Cannon, agent -for the European emigration, both called on me to go out into Nebraska -and also to cross into Iowa and purchase work cattle for them. Each -furnished me with five hundred dollars in gold then, and as it was the -time that hundreds of gold hunters were returning from Pike's Peak, I -had great success in my purchases, spending a thousand dollars some -days in the purchase of cattle, buying whole teams as they stood on the -road, sometimes wagons, equipage and provisions. I would hire a trusty -man to drive them up to Florence, and then I would replenish my pockets -and go on again. For ten days I traveled early and late, and did -thousands of dollars' worth of business for the Church and emigration. - - - -CHAPTER LIV. - -GIVEN CHARGE OF A COMPANY TO CROSS THE PLAINS TO UTAH--COMPOSITION -OF THE CAMP--START WEST--PERFORM BAPTISMS--MEET A WAR PARTY OF -SIOUX INDIANS--PLACE WHERE A. W. BABBITT WAS KILLED--MEET MORE -INDIANS--HOW TROUBLE WAS AVOIDED--CAMP LIFE AND DUTIES--ENTER SALT LAKE -VALLEY--COMPANY GREETED BY THE CHURCH AUTHORITIES--REPORT TO PRESIDENT -YOUNG AND AM RELEASED--TRADE AT CAMP FLOYD--EXPERIENCE WITH A THIEF--GO -TO WORK ON THE OGDEN CANYON ROAD--HARDSHIPS ENDURED. - -ON Sunday, June 12th, Elders Eldredge and Cannon visited the camp and -held meeting, then organized the company, naming James S. Brown for -president and captain, the selection being unanimously sustained. -George L. Farrell was made sergeant of the guard, William Wright -chaplain, and John Gordon secretary. A captain was appointed over each -ten wagons, namely: first, Wm. Steel; second, W. Williams; third, -Christopher Funk; fourth, Newbury; fifth, Kent; sixth, Giddens. -These names were suggested by Messrs. Eldredge and Cannon, and were -unanimously sustained by the company of three hundred and fifty-three -souls. The outfit consisted of fifty-nine wagons and one hundred and -four yoke of oxen, eleven horses, thirty-five cows, and forty-one -head of young cattle that were driven loose. We had provisions for -seventy-five days. - -On June 13th, 1859, the company set out for Salt Lake City, Utah. -There were nine different nationalities of people represented, namely; -English, Irish, Scotch, Welsh, Danish, Swedish, Norwegians and -Icelanders; we also had some Americans from the Eastern, Middle and -Southern States, all mixed together. Many of them had never driven an -ox one mile in their lives, and the result was almost like herding -a train on the plains. If it had not been for G. L. Farrell, James -Hickson, Samuel Garnet and Willis Brown, all excellent ox teamsters, -besides some five or six others that were quite handy, we would -doubtless have had most destructive stampedes. As it was, the company -did not have any serious mishaps. In a few days the train became -regulated and we had more system and order in travel. For the first -five or six days of the journey the stock seemed in danger of being -destroyed by flies and mosquitoes, and the people suffered much from -the same cause. On the 18th we passed Captain Rowley with the handcart -company. - -On June 19th the camp stopped on the Loup Fork, a tributary of the -Platte River. There was a small town there called Columbus. On the 20th -the company moved up the river and camped on a small stream, Looking -Glass Creek. That afternoon I baptized and rebaptized eighty souls, -and other Elders confirmed them, while some men of the company bridged -the stream. On the 21st we proceeded to Genoa Ferry, where we were -joined by Captain Walding's company of thirty-seven souls and ten more -wagons, thus increasing my company to three hundred and ninety persons -and sixty-nine wagons, with cattle and other property in proportion. -At that place we chartered the ferry boat from J. Johnston and did the -work ourselves. We paid seventy-five cents a wagon, and it took fifteen -hours' hard labor to cross. The stock all swam safely over, and the -company camped on the west bank. The handcart company came up that -night about 10 o'clock. On the 23rd our company proceeded up the river. - -We met with a company of Sioux Indians on the 24th. These formed a -line of battle across the road ahead of the company, and sent two men -to meet us. I was traveling in advance of the company, and although -I had never been among the Sioux Indians in my life for an hour, nor -had I ever been where I had an opportunity to study their language, I -had not the slightest difficulty in talking to them, or they to me. -Consequently I learned at once that these Indians were on the war path, -and were hunting the Omahas and Poncas. They were hungry and said they -must have food from the company; so they were told to form a line -parallel with the road, and to keep one-fourth of a mile back, so as -not to stampede the train or frighten the women and children. They were -allowed to send two men on foot to spread blankets where the company -could put such food as we had to share. - -Meanwhile I gave orders to the sergeant of the guard, G. L. Farrell, -and the several captains to draw up in close order, have every teamster -in his place, and all the women and children in the wagons, and for -each man to have his gun where he could lay his hand on it without a -moment's delay. Each family was to place some food on the blankets by -the roadside. Not one team was to stop without orders. The wagons were -to be corralled as quickly as possible, if they must be, at the first -signal from the captain to do so; for the Indians appeared very warlike -in their paint and feathers. - -When the red men learned that it was a company of Mormons they had -met, they readily complied with the captain's terms, and a number rode -up and shook hands with him. As the company passed their lines of not -more than one hundred and fifty warriors, there came fourteen buffalo -in sight, quite close, and attention was turned to them so much that -the Indians took what the company had placed on their blankets and we -passed on without further interruption. - -It was about this date that the teamsters had become acquainted with -their teams and the latter acquainted with their drivers, so that -things began to work more orderly than before. The camp was called -together every evening for prayers, and for instructions for the next -day. - -About the 26th the company started across from the Loup Fork to Wood -River. That night the stock took fright and gave some trouble before -they were recovered; but the next morning the company resumed its -journey, leaving Wood Birdno to pursue two valuable young fillies, one -his own and the other belonging to Captain Brown. Mr. Birdno did not -overtake the company till the fifth day. - -One evening the company camped on a tributary of the Platte River, -where Almon W. Babbitt was killed by the Sioux Indians some eighteen -months or two years before. The company crossed the stream and camped -just opposite where that terrible tragedy occurred, and just as the -cattle were being unyoked the Sioux Indians flocked into camp, all -well-armed warriors. I saw that it was quite possible that they meant -mischief, as there were no Indian families in sight; so I called to -the company to continue their camp duties as if nothing unusual had -happened, but for every man to see to his firearms quietly and be ready -to use them if an emergency should arise. Then I turned to the chief, -and it being again given to me to talk and understand the Indians, I -asked what their visit meant, if it was peace that they go with me to -the middle of the corral of wagons and smoke the pipe of peace and have -a friendly talk, as myself and people were Mormons and friends to the -Indians, and that I wished them to be good friends to me and my people. - -The chief readily responded, and called his peace council of smokers -to the center of the corral, where they seated themselves in a circle. -I took a seat to the right hand of the chief and then the smoking and -talking commenced. The chief assured me that their visit was a friendly -one, and to trade with the emigrants. I inquired of him why, if their -visit meant peace, they all came so well armed. He answered that his -people had just pitched camp a short distance back in the hills, and -not knowing who we were had come down before laying down their arms. - -By this time it seemed that there were about three Indians to one white -person in the camp. I told the chief that it was getting too late to -trade, my people were all busy in camp duties, and I was going to send -our stock to where there was good feed for them. It was my custom, I -said, to send armed men to watch over them, and the guards always had -orders to shoot any wild beast that might disturb them, and if anybody -were to come among the stock in the night, we thought them to be -thieves and our enemies. If they attempted to drive off our stock, the -guards had orders to shoot, and our camp guards also were ordered to -shoot any thief that might come prowling around camp at night. I said -that, as we did not desire to do the Indians any harm, we wished the -chief and his men to go to their camp, as it was now too late to trade. -But in the morning, when the sun shone on our wagon covers, not when it -shone on the mountain tops in the west, but when it shone on our tents -and wagon covers, they could leave their arms behind and come down with -their robes, pelts and furs, and we would trade with them as friends; -but he was not to allow any of his men to visit our camp or stock at -night. - -The chief said that was heap good talk, and ordered his people to -return to their own camp. They promptly obeyed, to the great relief -of the company, which had been very nervous, as scarcely one of them -except myself had ever witnessed such a sight before. - -Next morning, between daylight and sunrise, the Indians appeared on -the brow of the hill northeast of camp. There seemed to be hundreds of -them formed in a long line and making a very formidable array. Just as -the sunlight shone on the tents and wagon covers they made a descent -on us that sent a thrill through every heart in camp, until it was -seen that they had left their weapons of war behind, and had brought -only articles of trade. They came into the center of the corral, the -people gathered with what they had to trade, and for a while a great -bargaining was carried on. For once I had more than I could do in -assisting them to understand each other, and see that there was no -disturbance or wrong done in the great zeal of both parties. - -The trading was over without any trouble, there was a hearty shaking of -hands, and the company resumed its journey up the river, passing and -being repassed by numerous companies moving west to Pike's Peak and to -Utah, California, or Oregon. There were gold seekers, freighters, and a -host of families of emigrants; and as the company advanced to the west -we met many people going to the east. They were traveling all ways, -with ox, horse and mule teams, as well as by pack trains of horses and -mules; while some were floating down the Platte River in small row -boats. - -I have omitted many dates, but feel that I must say that some time -in July we came up with Captain Horton Haight, who started two weeks -ahead of us, with a Church train of seventy-five wagons of freight. -Both trains passed Fort Laramie that same day. Mine camped seven miles -above the fort on the river, where we laid over the next day, and had -our wagons unloaded and thoroughly cleaned from the dust and dirt; -then they were reloaded so as to balance their loading anew. All sick -cattle were doctored, while the female portion of camp washed and did -considerable baking. The next day we proceeded on to the Black Hills, -in good spirits, the people generally well and encouraged. The road -then began to be rough and gravelly, so that the cattle began to get -sore-footed, and that changed the tone of feelings of some of the -people. - -We went on in peace over hills and dales to the Sweetwater, thence up -that stream to what was called the last crossing, where we stopped -one day, and again overhauled our load, doctored sick cattle, baked, -etc. From there we crossed the summit of the great Rocky Mountains to -Pacific Springs, so called because their waters flow down the Pacific -slope. From that point we traveled over very sandy plains and saleratus -deserts, to the Little Sandy, then to what was called the Big Sandy, -and thence to Green River, the last hundred miles being the most -soul-trying of the whole journey, owing to being sandy and poisonous to -the stock. We traveled day and night, all that the cattle could endure, -and in fact more than many of the people did endure without much -complaint and fault-finding. - -After a day's rest on the Green River, however, and being told that -there was no more such country to cross, the train entered on the last -one hundred and fifty miles of the journey, crossing over to Ham's -Fork, then to Fort Bridger on Black's Fork, and on to the two Muddys -and to Quaking Asp Ridge, the highest point crossed by the emigrant -road. From there we went down into Echo Canyon, then to Weber River, -crossed it and over the foothills to East Canyon Creek and to the -foot of the Big Mountain, where we met Apostles John Taylor and F. -D. Richards. A halt was called to listen to the hearty welcome and -words of cheer from the Apostles. Then the company passed over the Big -Mountain to the foot of the Little Mountain, where we camped. Many of -the people were sick from eating chokecherries and wild berries found -along the roadside. - -Next day we proceeded to the top of Little Mountain. When I saw the -last wagon on the summit, I left the sergeant, G. L. Farrell, in -charge, and went ahead to report the approach of my company and their -condition, as there were one hundred or more without food for their -supper. I called first on General H. S. Eldredge, and took dinner with -him. He received me very kindly, and accompanied me to President -Brigham Young's office. The President welcomed us as cordially as a -father could. After he had inquired and was told the condition of the -company, he sent word to Bishop Edward Hunter to have the tithing yard -cleared for the cattle, to have cooked food for all who needed it, and -to have the company camp in Union Square. - -When steps had been taken to carry out these orders, I called at my -father-in-law's in the Fourteenth Ward, where I learned that my family -were well. Then I went back, met the company on the bench east of the -city, and conducted it down to the square, where we found Bishop Hunter -and a number of other Bishops and people of the several wards, with -an abundance of cooked food for supper and breakfast for the whole -company. Several of the Twelve Apostles were on the ground to bid the -company a hearty welcome, and delivered short addresses of good cheer. -This was August 29, 1859. - -Next morning, the 30th, Orson Hyde, Orson Pratt, Wilford Woodruff, Ezra -T. Benson, Charles C. Rich and Erastus Snow of the Twelve Apostles, -Bishop Hunter and other prominent officers of the Church, came to the -camp, called the people together, and again bade the Saints welcome to -our mountain home. They advised the people where to go, and what to do -to support themselves for the winter. - -It was while yet on the Union Square that Apostle Charles C. Rich told -me that he and others had been called to take a mission to England, -leaving home in the spring, and that they would like me to go with -them; he thought I had better shape my affairs so that I would be ready -for the call. - -During the day the people found shelter and friends, and I reported -to the _Deseret News_ office and to President Young, who told me I was -honorably released from any further responsibility for the company. - -On our journey across the plains we had two deaths in the company, and -five births, and had lost twenty-five head of cattle--a very small -percentage compared with losses in general. - -After the interview with President Young, I followed up my brother -Willis, who had gone ahead with our team. We stopped that night at -Charles C. Rich's, twelve miles north of Salt Lake City, and on -September 1st reached my home in Ogden City, where we found all well -and pleased to meet us again. - -At Ogden many friends and relatives called to see us. In a day or two -after our arrival, we went to cutting bulrushes along the slough on -the bottom lands, with a scythe, that being the only chance for us to -winter our stock. In a short time we purchased a wagon load of butter -and eggs, and took it to Camp Floyd, forty miles southwest of Salt Lake -City. We made a good profit on that load, then made a second trip and -had stolen from us one of our mules worth one hundred and fifty dollars. - -As we could not get a trace of the mule, Willis returned to the city to -get another animal, so we could move our wagon. About 12 o'clock one -night, while he was gone and I was sleeping alone in the wagon, the -moon shining bright and clear, a thief cut the hind end of the wagon -cover open, and drew out one of the quilts. As he was taking the second -I awoke and caught him in the act. I asked what he was doing there, -and was told it was none of my business, but to get out of his wagon, -or he would send an officer after me. At the same time he put his hand -on an old fashioned United States holster pistol that he had in his -belt, then staggered off, feigning drunkenness. I saw that he went -into a corner where he could not pass out, so I hastened and called -the landlord, Mr. Kinney, a man about sixty years old, and told him -what had happened. Said he, "If he went in there he cannot get through -that way." He peeped into a dark corner, where the buildings were so -close that a man could not squeeze through. "Here he is; come out, you -thief," said he, and the midnight marauder made a break to pass. The -old gentleman struck at him as he went by, and the next instant I had -him by the throat. By that time the thief had got his pistol disengaged -from his belt, but before he could turn it towards me I caught it from -his grasp, threw him heavily on the ground, and held him there till Mr. -Kinney brought an officer. - -Meanwhile we were surrounded by half a dozen gamblers, one of whom -said to the thief, "What are you doing down there, Rainbow?" A second -ordered him to get up. They all seemed to know him, but all were -strangers to me. I had passed the pistol to the old landlady, who -brought it out, offered it to the officers, and told them she saw the -thief try to shoot me when I snatched it and passed it to her. At that -the thief swore the weapon was not his, but mine, and that I had drawn -it to shoot him. Then the officers told me to keep the pistol, and they -let the thief go to a saloon in a gambling house, where he treated the -crowd, and told them that he had an engagement for a woman to meet him -there that night, but he found a man instead, and that was all there -was of it. At that the officers liberated him, and I concluded that I -had got into a den of thieves, so disposed of my load and left for home -as soon as I could. All the profit that we had made in the first trip -was lost in the second, for we never recovered the mule. - -The weather being cold, we threw up that business and took a contract -amounting to two hundred and fifty dollars on the Ogden Canyon road, -and in the bitter cold weather of winter worked till the job was -completed. That work finished, we took another contract to get out -timber for the first county jail in Weber County, and continued to work -in the canyon until April 1st. The winter had been so long and severe -that we sold part of our wearing apparel and bed clothes for hay to -keep life in our animals. - - - -CHAPTER LV. - -CALLED ON A MISSION TO GREAT BRITAIN--PREPARE TO DEPART--START -WITHOUT PURSE OR SCRIP--JOURNEY TO SALT LAKE CITY--SET APART FOR THE -MISSION--BEGIN THE JOURNEY EASTWARD--ORGANIZATION OF THE COMPANY--MY -POST AS CHAPLAIN--OVERTAKEN BY APOSTLES A. M. LYMAN AND C. C. -RICH--TRAVELING THROUGH THE MOUNTAINS--SNOWSTORMS AND WIND--FORAGE -IS SCARCE--MEETINGS WITH THE INDIANS--CAPTAIN REYNOLDS' EXPLORING -PARTY--ARMY DESERTERS IN OUR CAMP--MAIL FROM HOME--EMIGRANTS WESTWARD -BOUND--DISSATISFACTION IN CAMP--FEELING ABOUT APOSTLES LYMAN AND -RICH--I RESIGN AS CAPTAIN, BUT AM ELECTED AGAIN, AND FINALLY RESUME -COMMAND--MAIL ROBBERY--MORE DISAGREEABLE STORMS--MEET A HANDCART -COMPANY, AND APOSTLE GEORGE Q. CANNON--REACH THE MISSOURI RIVER--VISIT -MY FATHER AND HIS FAMILY--GO TO ST. JOSEPH, MISSOURI--MY FIRST VIEW -OF A RAILWAY TRAIN--AT MY OLD HOME IN BROWN COUNTY, ILLINOIS--JOURNEY -EASTWARD BY RAIL--ARRIVE IN NEW YORK FOR THE FIRST TIME--FIND FRIENDS. - -SOME time in February of this year (1860), I received a letter from -President Brigham Young, informing me that I had been selected to -accompany Apostles Amasa M. Lyman and Charles C. Rich on a mission to -Great Britain, starting in April. The letter authorized me to call on -Bishop Chauncey W. West, to have my city and five-acre lots fenced and -cultivated by labor tithing, for the benefit of my family; also for the -Bishop to furnish my family, from time to time, with such necessary -articles as they needed and could not otherwise obtain. I called on the -Bishop as authorized, and showed him the letter, but the work he was -called on for never was done, and my family suffered in consequence. - -I settled my business and prepared for the mission, and in April -attended conference in Salt Lake City, where my name was presented and -sustained with those of many others called to perform missions. On the -19th of April, I blessed my family and bade farewell to them till I -should be released from the duty which now rested upon me of preaching -the Gospel among the inhabitants of the British Isles. I had a ham -and a few articles of food, a light change of clothing, and my rifle. -These I put in the wagon of H. Hanson, who was starting to Salt Lake -City, on his way to fill a mission in Denmark. Then, with my shot-pouch -and a new pair of boots across my shoulder, I began my journey from -Ogden, intending to hunt up a yoke of cattle I had on the range, and -drive them to Salt Lake City. Not a dollar of money did I have--I was -entirely without purse or scrip. I found my cattle, drove them to Salt -Lake City, turned them over to my father-in-law, Nathan Tanner, to pay -a debt I was owing and to obtain some flour for food on my journey, and -I was ready on April 20th, the date appointed, to leave on my mission. -But some of the others were not ready, and the departure was postponed -to April 25th. - -On the last named date, we gathered at the Church historian's office -in Salt Lake City, to be set apart and receive instructions for our -missions. President Brigham Young there gave us counsel never to -be forgotten, and our hearts rejoiced therein. Each of us received -a certificate of our missionary appointment, signed by the First -Presidency, Brigham Young, Heber C. Kimball, and Daniel H. Wells. -We were then instructed to meet next day, the 26th, at the mouth of -Parley's Canyon, and to proceed therefrom under command of Joseph W. -Young, our baggage being hauled by teams owned by the Church that were -going to Florence, Nebraska. - -President Young had designated me to take charge of one of the teams, -with permission to leave it when Apostles Lyman and Rich overtook us, -which they expected to do in three or four days. Thus I had in my care -four yoke of oxen and a large government wagon; and, in company with -several others, went to President Young's mill south of the city. We -took on from a thousand to twelve hundred pounds of flour to each -wagon, and proceeded to the place of rendezvous, where there were -gathered thirty wagons, with about forty missionaries and the Beebe and -Buzzard families, who were going back to their farms in Iowa. - -On April 17th, Presidents Young and Wells came out and organized the -company, appointing Joseph W. Young as captain, and John Woolley -as sergeant of the guard. Myself and two others were selected as -chaplains. The company was instructed as to necessary duties in -crossing the plains, and we started. Our route was up Parley's Canyon, -then down Silver Creek to the Weber River, thence up to the mouth of -Chalk Creek. At the Spriggs coal pit a number of us visited the mine, -the tunnels of which went straight into the mountain side. Then we -proceeded across to Bear River, and followed along the Big Muddy. The -Beebe and Buzzard families and E. D. Woolley and company continued on -by way of Fort Bridger, while the rest of us made a road across the -bend of the Muddy. - -Apostles A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich overtook us on May 4th, and we all -camped together that night. Walter M. Gibson and I were transferred -to Samuel White's wagon, and on the 5th we bade farewell to Joseph W. -Young's company, taking an early leave of them, and proceeded to Ham's -Fork, on which we camped for the night. There I was made captain of the -company, with John Tobin as sergeant of the guard, and W. H. Dame as -chaplain. Guards were placed out to take care of the stock. That night -there was quite a snowstorm. - -Next morning, the weather was cold and disagreeable. We made our way -to Green River, where we met some people who had apostatized from the -Church, and were going back to St. Louis; we also met some Shoshone -Indians who were friendly. We camped on the Big Sandy that night, and -had quite a hunt for our animals, which strayed off because there was -so little grass. But we recovered all of them. - -On May 10th we came to Pacific Springs, where we met Buzzard, Beebe, -Woolley and company, and received them into our company without any -change in organization. That day we crossed over the South Pass and -the Sweetwater River, and camped on Willow Creek. Next day we went -through a number of snowdrifts, passed over the Rocky Ridge and to -the Sweetwater, following along the river. That night we met a party -of Shoshone Indians returning from a fight with the Crow Indians. The -following morning, the 12th, we missed part of our animals, and were -detained till 11 o'clock securing them again. We then moved forward on -our journey, and on the 13th, at the second crossing of the Sweetwater, -encountered a severe snowstorm. - -From then till the 18th the wind was very high, and the weather -disagreeable. Grass was very scarce. On the 14th we met a band of -Arapahoe Indians on a buffalo hunt, and on the 15th met Captain -Reynolds with a party of explorers. We afterwards heard that the -entire party were killed by Blackfeet Indians, on the headwaters of -the Missouri River. On the 18th, as we were traveling down the Platte -River, Sergeant Min, with a small party of soldiers from Fort Laramie, -searched the wagons in our company for three deserters from Camp Floyd. -There were two of them in our camp. They had come to us in Parley's -Canyon, saying they had been discharged. One of them, George Kelly, -showed his discharge papers, but he had re-enlisted, and deserted after -receiving his bounty. The other was a servant who had stolen a gold -watch. His name was Alexander Demster. Both were taken to Fort Laramie. - -On May 20th we arrived within seven miles of Fort Laramie, where we -rested our animals and attended to necessary work for proceeding -farther. We also built a raft and went across to the fort for our -mail, getting a few letters. There was none for me. We wrote to our -families, and on the 22nd again moved forward. This time we had two -other discharged soldiers with us; one of them had a wife and child. -I had changed from Samuel White's wagon to D. Savage's, and drove his -six-mule team most of the way. From the 23rd on we met many people -bound for California, Oregon, or the Pike's Peak gold mines. - -We passed Chimney Rock on May 25th, and rested that evening at a -fair camping ground. There had been some dissatisfaction on the part -of owners of teams because the grass had been short and the animals -were not doing well. Fault was found with the camping places, and as -Apostles Lyman and Rich often had been consulted and had suggested the -location for camp, these prominent members of our company felt that -if there were any blame in making the choice it belonged to them. So -the Apostles asked forgiveness for what they had done, and promised -they would have no more to do with directing the journeyings of the -company. When I found that I was deprived of the counsel of such men, I -resigned my office as captain. John Tobin also resigned as sergeant of -the guard. That night was passed with the camp in a disorganized state, -and next morning there was no one to lead out with orders to proceed. -The team owners and others found themselves well puzzled, and began -to realize the mistake that had been made. By advice of Apostle C. C. -Rich, I called the company together, but none knew what to do. Finally, -Elder Rich suggested that they elect as captain someone they would not -find so much fault with. The vote was for me, and at the request of -Elder Rich I again assumed command, and we moved on. John Brown was -selected as sergeant of the guard. - -At Ash Hollow we learned that the St. Joseph and Great Salt Lake mail -coach had been robbed on Greasewood Creek, by Shoshone Indians, and -that the mail carriers had been killed. We were detained at Ash Hollow -several hours on the 27th, by the severe illness of A. Beebe's wife. -For several days thereafter there were high winds, and showers, making -the roads very disagreeable, so that it took us till May 31st to reach -Buffalo Creek, where we saw some buffalo. The next night we camped -ten miles above Fort Kearney. On June 2nd we called at Dr. Henry's -ranch for dinner, and seven miles further on reached the place where -Joseph E. Johnson and his brother had located, and were publishing a -paper called the _Mountain Echo_. At this point Nephi Johnson and Daniel -Babbitt left us, as they had reached the end of their journey. We -continued on four miles further, and camped. - -Proceeding on our journey, we reached and crossed the Elkhorn River on -June 6th, and that night met and camped with a company of Latter-day -Saints crossing the plains with handcarts. The company was in good -spirits, and glad to see us, and we spent the evening in singing the -songs of Zion. Just as we had gone to bed, Apostle George Q. Cannon; -who had charge of the Church emigration that year, came up, in company -with Horton Haight and others, and we were glad to arise and shake -hands with him. He was a particular friend and brother with whom -several of us had traveled many miles and spent many pleasant hours. -After a long talk Elder Cannon turned in with me for sleep. - -On the morning of June 7th, the members of the handcart company were -called together, and Apostles Lyman and Rich gave them some good -instructions. Then we bade them good-bye, and proceeded to Florence, -where we met many warm-hearted Saints from Europe. On the 8th, I -procured a span of mules from Horton Haight, and a carriage from George -Q. Cannon, and accompanied by J. C. Rich, crossed the Missouri River -to Calhoun, Harrison County, Iowa, where we met with my father and his -family. They were well, and greatly pleased to see me. We visited with -my relatives till the 11th, when J. C. Rich and I parted at Crescent -City, while I returned to Florence, where my father visited me on the -12th, and invited Apostles Lyman and Rich and myself to take dinner at -the finest hotel in the town, which we did. My father promised me there -that if he lived and was able to sell his property, he would accompany -me to Utah when I returned from my mission. - -On June 15th, I went to Omaha in company with J. C. Rich, F. M. Lyman, -and R. McBride, where we were joined next day by A. M. Lyman, C. C. -Rich, G. Q. Cannon, and John Tobin. We took passage on the steamboat -_Omaha_ for St. Joseph, Missouri, where we landed on the morning of the -18th. That day while strolling through the city with Francis M. Lyman, -I first saw a locomotive and railway train in motion. It was to us a -grand sight, and we viewed it with admiration and satisfaction. At 6 -a.m., on the 19th, we boarded the train, C. C. Rich, J. C. Rich and -John Tobin going to St Louis, and the rest of us to Quincy, Illinois, -where I left the party and went to Versailles, Brown County. There I -received a hearty welcome from relatives and friends. - -I remained in that locality five days, until the 24th, visiting uncles, -brother-in-law, cousins, and other relatives, and also the farm on -which I was reared. At Versailles, on the evening of the 21st, I -lectured, by request, on my travels and experiences. The schoolroom -being too small to accommodate the people, the Methodist church was -procured, and was well filled, many of the audience being my old -schoolmates. They were glad to meet me, as I was to meet them. - -I stayed that night with Joseph F. Vandeventer, and next day, in -company with him and his brother Thomas, visited my father's old farm, -then owned by William Knox. There were many changes about the place. -The cemetery was fenced into a pasture, and I was unable to find my -brother's grave. The fruit trees in the orchard were well grown, and I -was given some good apples and the best cider I ever tasted, made from -fruit from trees I had set out with my own hands. - -That day's walk brought to my recollection my youthful days, my hunts -through the woods and my adventures, my toilsome labors in grubbing -underbrush and clearing the land, threshing wheat in the hot, autumn -sun, feeding stock in the cold winter, my cold fingers, benumbed body, -and frozen toes--once shedding my toenails through frost, and peeling -the skin off my feet--in short, I was reminded of much toil on the -part of my parents, brothers and sisters and myself, and of many days -of sickness with fever and ague. We returned to Versailles, and next -evening, the 23rd, after more visiting, I consented to preach, and was -given good attention by a large congregation. On the 24th, I went down -to the river landing at the mouth of Crooked Creek, with my uncle and -Joseph F. Vandeventer, but learning that the boats were uncertain, I -resolved to go to Meridotia and there take train for New York, in order -to meet Elder C. C. Rich. To do this, it was necessary for me to borrow -twenty dollars, which I did of Mr. Vandeventer. At 9 o'clock that -evening I was on my way, on the Quincy and Toledo line, passing through -the great Wabash valley. After several changes of cars, and crossing -North River on a ferry boat, I landed in New York City on June 26th, -without knowing a soul that lived there. - -I walked up to Broadway, and took a Sixth Avenue omnibus to -Twenty-third Street, where I found the residence of Brother Jonas -Croxall, and introduced myself to his wife, as he was not at home. I -had eaten but two meals since I got into the cars at Meridotia, and -they cost me seventy-five cents. I had ridden over one thousand miles -on the cars from Illinois, and had ninety-five cents when I reached -the end of the journey. My supper that night was provided at Brother -Croxall's. About 11 o'clock in the evening Brothers Croxall and A. -M. Lyman came in, they having been on a visit together at Brother -Schettler's. - - - -CHAPTER LVI. - -VISIT VARIOUS PLACES OF INTEREST IN NEW YORK AND VICINITY--ARRIVAL -OF THE GREAT EASTERN--PREACH AT WILLIAMSBURG--NEW YORK'S CELEBRATION -OF THE FOURTH--MY THIRTY-SECOND BIRTHDAY--SECURE PASSPORTS AND OCEAN -PASSAGE--CROWDED IN THE STEERAGE--FOGGY AND WET WEATHER--VIEW OF THE -IRISH COAST--FLEET OF BRITISH WARSHIPS--LAND IN LIVERPOOL--ASSIGNED -TO BIRMINGHAM CONFERENCE--IN BIRMINGHAM--LISTEN TO ANTI-MORMON -LECTURE--VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AS A MORMON MISSIONARY--PLACES -OF INTEREST--TRANSFERRED TO NOTTINGHAM CONFERENCE--PREACHING AND -VISITING--MISSION TRAVELS--GO TO LONDON--SEE NOTABLE PLACES--NEWS OF MY -DAUGHTER'S DEATH--BIRTH OF ANOTHER DAUGHTER--RETURN TO NOTTINGHAM. - -THE 27th of June was spent with Apostle A. M. Lyman and J. Croxall, -walking about the city of New York. That day F. M. Lyman and Reuben -McBride arrived, and next day Apostle Lyman and his son Francis M. left -for Boston. With Reuben McBride, I visited the various departments of -the place where J. Croxall and his son worked. We then crossed East -River with Thomas Miller, and strolled through Williamsburg. We were -introduced to a Brother Stone and family, with whom we stayed all -night. On the 29th we were made acquainted with many Latter-day Saints -in Williamsburg, then crossed over to Brooklyn, where we went through -the navy yard and other places; at the first named place we went on -board the old ship of war _North Carolina_. That day we heard the salutes -fired for the _Great Eastern_, as she steamed up the wharf in New York. -The ocean monster was hailed with joy and enthusiasm. She had been -sighted at sea the evening before. - -In New York City, on the 30th, we visited Barnum's museum, Castle -Garden, the postoffice, and had a view of the _Great Eastern_. I received -a letter from my family reporting all well. The 1st of July was Sunday, -and we met with the Latter-day Saints in Williamsburg. The speakers at -the meetings that day were Apostle C. C. Rich, Elder Walter Gibson and -myself. I crossed over to New York that night, and the remainder of our -stay in the city was the guest of Bernard A. Schettler, who treated me -very kindly. During the next few days we visited many factories, ships -and places of interest, and wrote letters home. On the 4th, which was -my thirty-second birthday anniversary, there was a grand celebration. -The militia of New York City paraded, passing the George Washington -monument in review. There was a grand fireworks display in the evening; -and in the afternoon we witnessed the aeronaut, Mr. Wise, ascend out -of sight with a balloon. On the 9th we sent to Washington for our -passports. W. H. Dame and I were appointed on the 12th to take the -money of our party, secure berths on the steamship _Edinburgh_, of the -Blackball line between New York and Liverpool, and to purchase articles -necessary for the journey across the Atlantic Ocean. We attended to -this duty on the 13th. - -July 14th, our party, thirteen in number, went on board, and at 12 -o'clock noon, the vessel left the landing. We paid twenty-five dollars -each for steerage passage. There were nearly three hundred passengers, -and the berths were all taken up, so our lot was rather hard. Being -very much crowded for room as well, it was plain that our part of the -voyage was not to be very pleasant; but we were on board and had to -make the best of it. - -By the 18th we were off the banks of Newfoundland, in a dense, damp -fog, that obscured the sun and made it impossible to see more than a -few rods from the ship. The steam siren kept up a constant whistling, -to warn other vessels of our location and approach. The fog lasted till -the 23rd, when it lighted up, but the weather was cloudy, with some -rain. On the 24th a vessel bore in sight. - -Next day we had headwinds, and the sun shone for a short time. We came -in sight of the southwest coast of Ireland, and at the cry of "Land!" -every countenance brightened. All were on deck to catch a glimpse of -the welcome scene. As this proceeding was going on, we heard the cry, -"Sail ho!" and in a short time there came into full view a fleet of her -majesty Queen Victoria's warships, eleven in number. They were steaming -along the coast to the south and in advance of us. Suddenly they -changed their course and came to meet us. When they drew near, their -signal flags were hoisted on the masts, making a beautiful and imposing -appearance. - -That night at 11 o'clock we ran into Queenstown, the harbor of Cork, -Ireland. There some passengers for Ireland, and mail were taken off, -and we headed for the coast of England, coming in sight of Wales the -next day. - -Early on the morning of the 27th we were on the muddy, dark waters -of the Mersey, and soon landed in Liverpool, where the dank, smoky, -mildewed walls looked to us as if they had stood for a thousand years. -To our eyes the city had a very dismal and forbidding appearance. - -After the usual custom house inspection, we sent our baggage to the -Latter-day Saints' office at 42 Islington, and walked there ourselves, -a distance of a mile and a half. At the office we met Elder N. V. Jones -and others, who received us very kindly. The following day we were -appointed to our various missionary fields, J. C. Rich and I being -assigned to Birmingham pastorate. That afternoon Elder Rich and I paid -a visit to Birkenhead, across the river Mersey, and met with some of -the Saints. - -Sunday, July 29th, we all attended meeting with the Liverpool Saints, -in their assembly room on Great George's Street. Next day, Elder Rich -and I took train for Birmingham, passing through a tunnel a mile and -a half long on the route. Arriving at New Street station, Birmingham, -we hailed a cab and were taken to No. 163 Burton Place, Spring Hill. -There we had expected to find Elder Charles W. Penrose, but he was not -at home. His sister-in-law met us, and seemed surprised at our call. I -told her who we were, and we received a rather mistrustful invitation -to come in; but after questioning us some she became satisfied of our -identity, and provided us with something to eat. - -Later, F. G. Blake, who was traveling Elder in that place, came in, and -we took a walk with him, meeting Elder Penrose. We all went to West -Bromwich that evening, and heard one Mr. Bird, an old apostate from -Utah, lecture against the Mormons. He was doing this for money, and the -large hall was full of people. He made many false accusations against -the Latter-day Saints, which were loudly applauded by his ignorant -hearers. After the lecture we returned to Birmingham, and stayed all -night at Elder Penrose's. - -To us, Birmingham seemed as dark, smokey and mildewed as did Liverpool; -but it was well located. The place was one of the busiest manufacturing -centers of the world. The railway lines passing through do not obstruct -or occupy the streets; on one of the roads, which is built on a series -of arches, the cars run level with the chimneys on three-story houses; -and other roads pass beneath the city, running under large houses. -The New Street station was one of the best and most commodious I have -ever seen; indeed it is now one of the largest in the world, occupying -eleven acres, with a fine iron and glass roof eleven hundred feet long. - -After visiting from house to house with the Saints on August 1st, we -preached that evening in the Oxford Street Hall. Next day our visiting -continued, and we found a dull spirit among the people. Trade was -very bad, and the working people were extremely poor. Many of them -were unable to give us a good meal of victuals unless they suffered -themselves in consequence; yet they seemed very kind to us, but -sluggish in spirit. That night we preached in Hockley Chapel, Farm -Street. - -On the 3rd we visited the different markets in the city; on the 4th -met Elders A. M. Lyman, C. C. Rich and N. V. Jones; and on the 5th -were with the Saints in conference in the Odd Fellows' Hall, where -large congregations assembled. The presidents of the branches in the -Birmingham conference made favorable reports, and the Gospel was -preached by Apostles Lyman and Rich and others of the Elders. That -night J. C. Rich and I stayed at Brother Acock's. It did not seem -possible to get the people into the notion of going to bed before -midnight; that seeming to be the custom in the English cities. - -The Gillott steel and gold pen factory was the object of an interesting -visit by J. C. Rich, F. G. Blake and myself on August 6th. We passed -through the factory, and saw the work from rolling the large bars -of steel down to finishing the pen ready for use; there were four -hundred persons employed in the factory. That evening the Elders met in -council, and J. C. Rich and I were appointed to labor in the Nottingham -pastorate. Next day, in company with several others, I visited the -grave of Elder James H. Flanagan, who died while on a mission; his body -was interred in the old Birmingham cemetery. In the evening we had a -pleasant sociable at the home of Brother Smith, and next day J. C. Rich -and I took the train for Nottingham, where we were met at the station -by Elder Edward Reid, president of the conference, and were conducted -to No. 24 Promenade, Robinhood Street, where the wife of Elder David -John had dinner waiting for us. We next went to Radcliffe Chapel, -where we met with a goodly number of Saints, and preached to them. -Elder David John presided over the Nottingham pastorate. The day after -reaching the town I took a severe cold, and had to lay by the next day. - -We found Nottingham a very different place to Liverpool and Birmingham. -The town and adjacent country were not so smoky and unhealthful. The -town had about one hundred and eighty thousand inhabitants, and was the -center of the silk and cotton lace and hosiery industries. - -On Sunday, August 12th, Elders A. M. Lyman and N. V. Jones (who had -come from Liverpool) and I preached to the Saints; on the 13th J. C. -Rich and I went to visit G. Wright, at the request of his niece who -lived in Utah; his home was at Fisherton, on the river Trent, and after -an unwelcome greeting there we returned to Nottingham. Next day we went -to Mansfield with Elder James Payne, passing through the place where -Robin Hood roamed. That evening we preached to the Saints, then spent -the next two days preaching in different villages. At Pixton, on the -16th, we visited a coal pit. - -Leicester, the county seat of Leicestershire, and center of the boot -and shoe trade, was our destination on August 19th. We preached there -that night, and on Monday visited the museum. The rest of the week we -spent in visiting and preaching in several villages, then returned to -Nottingham. At Loughborough, on the 22nd, our meeting was disturbed -by several rude young men, who laughed and asked questions in an -offensive manner. A stone was hurled through the window at me, while I -was preaching. It passed just in front of me, but no one was hit. The -meeting was dismissed in confusion. - -On the 26th, we went to Derby for a couple of days. My health continued -to be very poor during this period of my travels. Burton-on-Trent, a -place noted for the brewing of malt liquors, was visited on the 28th, -and that night I preached at Branston, then stayed at the house of a -chimney-sweep named Doman. He had been in the Church nineteen years. -Next day we preached in the pottery district, then returned to Derby, -where, on the 31st, we went through Fox & Company's shot factory, going -to the top of the tower, two hundred and twenty steps. That evening we -went to a theatre. - -During the first part of September, I traveled and preached, visiting -Nottingham, Derby, Belper and several adjacent villages. I attended -the Derby races on the 6th; there were about twenty thousand people in -attendance. On the 12th, I left Nottingham for London in company with -Brothers J. C. Rich and Blackburn, and Sister Cook and daughter, going -via the Midland railway. From St. Pancras station we went to Brother -John Cook's, at No. 30 Florence Street, Cross Street, Islington, -London, where I made my home during my stay in the metropolis. There we -met with Elders John Brown, F. M. Lyman, and John Gleason. - -I remained in London and vicinity until October 3rd. During our stay -at the national capital we visited many interesting places, among them -being the tunnel under the Thames, which is reached by a flight of one -hundred steps, is four hundred yards from end to end, and while we were -passing through there were some fifteen to twenty ships lying above it, -and steamboats passing over it up and down the river. We visited the -British hospitals for invalided soldiers and sailors, and went from -there to Greenwich, whence is measured longitude east and west, and -where we also saw the standard weights and measures of Great Britain. - -The British Museum; the King's Library; Westminster Abbey, where Great -Britain's rulers are anointed and crowned by the archbishops of the -Church of England; the Parliament buildings, wherein are the House -of Lords and House of Commons, with the throne and the woolsack; -Buckingham Palace, the city residence of Queen Victoria; St. Paul's -Cathedral, which was undergoing repairs; National Gallery; Cattle -Market; Zoological Gardens, with the giraffe, the hippopotamus, the -rhinoceros and all manner of beasts and birds; South Kensington Museum; -Hyde Park; White Tower of London, where are the block and ax used in -beheading Queen Anne Boleyn and Mary, Queen of Scots, also the royal -regalia, and much other material of historic value; London Bridge, with -its vast traffic; Crystal Palace with its tower four hundred and twelve -steps to the top, from which can be seen six counties of England; -Anatomical Museum; Madame Tussaud's Bazar; the Dockyards, and the rich -residence portion of London, all were visited by us, and were very -interesting and entertaining. - -On September 13th we attended a tea party of the Saints near King's -Cross station. Several times I preached to congregations, both on the -Surrey side of the Thames, and on the north side. On the 14th, Elders -A. M. Lyman and N. V. Jones came from Scotland to London. I received a -letter from home on the 25th, Tuesday, bringing the sad intelligence -of the death of Deseret Ann, my second daughter, also of the birth to -her mother, my wife Rebecca, of a daughter. I wrote an answer to that -letter the same day. During the time I was in London I had a severe -cold and my health was far from good. I returned to Nottingham on -October 3rd, via the Great Northern railway, and resumed my missionary -labors in that conference. - - - -CHAPTER LVII. - -AGAIN AT MISSIONARY LABORS--BAPTISMS--BECOME QUITE ILL--APPOINTED PRESIDENT -OF THE NOTTINGHAM DISTRICT, EMBRACING THREE CONFERENCES--VISITED BY -APOSTLES A. M. LYMAN, C. C. RICH AND OTHERS--SETTLING DIFFERENCES AMONG -CHURCH MEMBERS--ATTEND A PHRENOLOGICAL LECTURE--GET A CHART--GO TO -LIVERPOOL--IN CONFERENCE AT NOTTINGHAM--MY PASTORATE ENLARGED--WITNESS -A MILITARY REVIEW--MORE BAPTISMS--VISIT SHEFFIELD--FIXING MY -NAME--POVERTY IN NOTTINGHAM--INVITED TO TAKE A TRIP TO PARIS--GO TO -LONDON--HAVE TO GIVE UP THE VISIT TO FRANCE--IN POOR HEALTH--RETURN TO -NOTTINGHAM--SEE PROFESSOR BLONDIN. - -THE month of October was occupied in traveling and preaching in the -district where I was assigned to labor as a missionary. In fulfilling -this calling I visited, besides the town of Nottingham, which was -headquarters, Derby, Leicester, Burton-on-Trent, Radcliffe, Arnold, -Hucknall, Mansfield, Pixton, Ilkiston, Woodhouse, Wirksworth, Mount St. -Bernard, Tutbury and other places, preaching in some of them several -times. On October 23, I visited the Mount Saint Bernard monastery, and -a reformatory for incorrigible boys. The first named was a Catholic -institution. - -November was occupied similarly to October, and in addition to most of -the places visited in the last named month, I was at Belper, Carlton, -Coalville and other small towns. On the 11th I baptized three young -women, Annie Simpson, Harriet Cadman and Eliza Bates. The weather -turning cold and stormy, my health was not very good. Apostle C. C. -Rich came on the 24th and on the 28th we went to Sutton, where I had to -stop for several days, I was so ill. - -The month of December had some very cold and stormy weather, but my -health was somewhat improved. I continued in my missionary district, -going to several new places. I was invited by Sisters Underwood and -Burrows to take dinner on Christmas. Mr. Burrows was a policeman, -and was not a member of the Church. I stayed with him at his home -on Christmas night. The next evening we had a meeting in Radcliffe, -at which an unpleasant spirit was displayed by some. I advised the -Saints to fast and pray to get the Spirit of the Lord. Brother John -was offended with this advice, and remonstrated, and when the meeting -was dismissed there was a feeling of dissatisfaction among the people. -On the 30th of December I was appointed to the presidency of the -Nottingham pastorate, embracing the Nottingham, Derby and Leicester -conferences of the Church. I was quite ill at this time, with the -mumps. My appointment came from Apostles A. M. Lyman, C. C. Rich and -George Q. Cannon, the presidency of the European mission of the Church -of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. - -The opening of the year 1861 found me quite ill, and for the first few -days of January I was confined to my bed most of the time. On the 6th -we held conference in Nottingham, and on the evening before, Elders -A. M. Lyman, C. C. Rich, G. Gates, J. Gleason, C. Welsh, A. Orme and -H. Druce came to meet with us. We had a good time at the conference. -Elders A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich stayed with us till the 11th, and I -visited part of the time with them, going to various villages in the -neighborhood, where they preached. During the remainder of the month I -traveled and preached and attended to the conference books and business -generally. Brother David John came to me on the 28th, being very -sorry for the unpleasant remarks he had made, and we settled matters -satisfactorily to both, parting with the best of feelings. The next day -he and his family moved to South Wales. My health continued to be quite -poor. On the 30th I took a shock from an electric battery, hoping it -would do me some good. - -My health was not much improved during the month of February; but I -continued my missionary visits and other duties, writing to my father -and family, and endeavoring to carry the Gospel message wherever I -could. On the 13th, at the urgent request of Sister Mary Wilson, I -visited her parents and sick sister at Newark, being kindly received -and invited to call again. From the 19th to the 23rd, Elder C. C. Rich -paid a visit to the conference and preached to the people. - -On March 2nd I attended a meeting called at Pinxton to settle a -difficulty among some of the members of the Church. It had continued -about three years, but after a long meeting we succeeded in arranging -matters, and three of the parties concerned agreed to repent and be -baptized. My visits to the various branches continued. On the 6th I -baptized Wm. Burton, Miss Cadman and Miss Betts. On the 12th I was -associated in the confirmation of twelve persons who had been baptized -by Elder J. C. Rich the evening before. On the 25th of this month I -attended one of the Fowler and Wells lectures on phrenology, and was so -interested that on the 28th I obtained a phrenological chart of myself. - -I attended a tea party on April 1st, about two hundred persons being -present. The evening was spent pleasantly, in singing, reciting and -speech-making and partaking of lunch. The next day I baptized seven -persons at Nottingham. In the course of my missionary duties, I called -a meeting of the Mansfield branch on April 9, to settle a difficulty -of long standing. I released from performing any Church official -duties all who held the Priesthood, because of continual jarring and -contention among them. On the 18th I went with some emigrating Saints -to Liverpool, to assist them, settling their business and getting their -tickets. - -At Liverpool, on the 19th, I accompanied Apostle C. C. Rich on a -search among the docks for a ship that could be chartered, but we were -not successful in finding one. The next day the Saints went on board -the ship _Underwriter_, which had been chartered previously for this -company, and I assisted those who had come with me to get settled on -the vessel. The next day, Sunday, the presidency of the mission went -on the ship, where the company was organized with Elder Milo Andrus -as president, Elders H. Duncan and C. W. Penrose as counselors, and -John Cook as steward. The migrating Saints were also given appropriate -instructions by Apostles Lyman, Rich and Cannon. Next day the vessel -sailed, and on the following day, Tuesday, I returned to my missionary -duties at Nottingham and vicinity. On the 29th, the day after holding a -conference at Nottingham, I baptized six persons. - -In the early part of May--the 5th--conference was held in Leicester, -Apostle C. C. Rich being in attendance. He remained till the 9th, -preaching to the people in different places. On the 17th I received a -letter from Apostle George Q. Cannon, informing me that my district -had been enlarged, the Lincolnshire conference being detached from -Elder Joseph F. Smith's district and added to mine, so there were four -conferences in my pastorate. On the 20th I baptized one man and two -women who had been cut off the Church, but desired to return. Next day -I was a spectator, with about forty thousand other people, at a review -of the Nottingham Rifles, before the Duke of Newcastle, at Nottingham -Forest. On the 25th Apostle G. Q. Cannon came from Liverpool, held -meetings, and attended to business in conference. - -On June 2nd I attended to three more baptisms, and on the 6th was at -the Sheffield conference, which was in charge of Elder Joseph F. Smith. -During my stay there I visited a large manufactory of steel and iron -ware, and called on the Norfolk giant, but he was too ill to be seen. -On the 13th I returned to Nottingham, traveling as far as Grantham with -Apostles Lyman and Rich, who went on to London. The remainder of the -month was occupied in my general duties. It was in this month that I -wrote to the _Millennial Star_, explaining how my name was James Brown, -and then because of others of the same name I became known as James -Brown 2nd, then James Brown 3rd, and had concluded to take my mother's -maiden name, Stephens, so that thereafter I would have an initial to -distinguish me, and be known as James S. Brown. - -At Nottingham, on June 6, many poor people marched through the streets, -asking and singing for food, or money to buy it. The next day after -meeting, I was presented by Sister Elizabeth Wilson with a small -anchor, cross and heart she had made out of a stone she had picked up -on the beach at Folkestone, England. On the 8th I received a letter -from Apostle C. C. Rich, inviting Elder J. C. Rich and myself to meet -him and Apostle A. M. Lyman in London on the 14th, to take a trip to -Paris, France. Accordingly, I arranged the conference business, and we -were in London on the date named, attending conference. - -Our contemplated visit to France had to be given up, however, as the -Apostles were called to Scotland to attend to some matters there. We -visited many places of interest in London, such as the Anatomical -Museum, the Polytechnic Institute, Crystal Palace, Bank of England, -the Fire Monument, the Docks, Tower of London, St. Paul's Cathedral, -Smithfield Market, the Mint, Windsor Castle, and Eton College. On the -17th, at Crystal Palace, we heard the chorus of three thousand five -hundred children. At Eton College we found the students inclined to be -impudent, throwing pebbles at passers-by and staring rudely at them. - -During the latter part of my stay in London I was quite ill, and had -to remain indoors part of the time, once being in all day. I returned -to Nottingham on the 24th, where the only thing of particular interest -outside of my missionary duties that I observed during that month was -on the 30th, when I went out to the park and saw Professor Blondin -perform on the tight rope. - - - -CHAPTER LVIII. - -PROLONGED ILLNESS--ATTEND TO MY DUTIES WITH DIFFICULTY--LETTER TELLING -OF THE BATTLE OF BULL'S RUN--WITNESS AN EXECUTION BY HANGING--VISIT -FROM GEORGE Q. CANNON, JOSEPH F. SMITH AND OTHERS--DEATH OF THE -PRINCE CONSORT--GO TO BIRMINGHAM--CONFERENCE OF THE PRIESTHOOD IN THE -BRITISH MISSION--LARGE MEETING IN ODD FELLOWS' HALL, BIRMINGHAM--AGAIN -AT NOTTINGHAM--VISIT LIVERPOOL--CONSULT A PHYSICIAN, BUT GET LITTLE -RELIEF--SEE THE LIVERPOOL GRAND NATIONAL RACES--DEPRAVITY AMONG POORER -CLASSES IN LIVERPOOL--AGAIN AT NOTTINGHAM--RELEASED TO RETURN HOME--BID -THE PEOPLE FAREWELL--DISPLAY OF THEIR AFFECTION FOR ME--REPORT OF MY -LABORS PUBLISHED IN THE MILLENNIAL STAR--ON BOARD SHIP--PLACED IN -CHARGE OF THE COMPANY--SAIL FOR AMERICA--DRIVEN BY HEADWINDS ALONG -THE COASTS OF THE ISLE OF MAN, WALES, IRELAND AND SCOTLAND--SEVERE -SEASICKNESS--GET TO SEA--SLOW VOYAGE--DEATHS AND BURIALS AT SEA--LAND -AT NEW YORK--GUEST OF HON. W. H. HOOPER--JOURNEY TO FLORENCE, -NEBRASKA--CAPTAIN AND GUIDE OF INDEPENDENT COMPANY--REACH SALT LAKE -CITY--REPORT TO PRESIDENT YOUNG--AGAIN AT HOME. - -DURING the remainder of the year 1861 I was in very poor health, often -having to stay in my room all day, and when I was able to get about, -many times it was with great difficulty, as I was quite lame in my -hips and shoulder. I tried various applications and simple remedies, -but to little purpose. I moved around as best I could, however, and -by determined efforts I was able to attend to my duties, visiting the -Saints, and preaching the Gospel wherever opportunity offered, whether -at indoor or outdoor meetings. Sometimes, when I was able to get to -the meetings of the Saints, I was too ill to stand up and preach, but -toward the latter part of the year my health improved a little. - -The civil war in America was on, having begun after I left; and on -August 5th I received a letter telling of the battle of Bull's Run, -near Manassas Junction, which was fought July 21, 1861, and in which -the Union forces were defeated. On the 16th of August I went to the -Derbyshire jail yard in Derby, and there saw a young man named George -Smith executed by hanging. He had murdered his father. From thirty-five -to forty thousand people witnessed the execution. - -On the 1st of September Apostle George Q. Cannon was in Nottingham, -attending conference, and we had large meetings and an excellent time. -On October 1st Elder Joseph F. Smith and other missionaries came from -Sheffield on a visit, and remained several days, spending the time -among the Saints. At Nottingham we had a tea party in the Arboretum, at -which about two hundred persons were present. I was visiting the Saints -at Pinxton on December 14th, the day that Prince Albert, husband of -Queen Victoria, died at Windsor Castle. - -I started for Birmingham on the 31st of December to attend a conference -of those in the British Mission who held the Holy Priesthood. This -conference began on Wednesday, January 1, 1862, and was largely -attended. We had a most enjoyable time in making reports of our -experiences and in receiving instruction and testifying of the -blessings of the Gospel. The meetings began at 10 a.m. and lasted -till 2 p.m., then at 4 p.m. and lasted till 7 p.m. They continued -through Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday, the presidency -of the European Mission, Apostles A. M. Lyman, Charles C. Rich and -George Q. Cannon, being in attendance and directing the meetings. On -Sunday, the 5th, we met with the Saints in Odd Fellows' Hall, the -congregation numbering about fifteen hundred persons; an excellent -feeling prevailed. Next day the Priesthood meetings were concluded, and -on Tuesday I left Birmingham for Derby, in my own missionary district. -On the 27th of January I was in Nottingham, and baptized and confirmed -Elizabeth Hardy. - -My health again became quite bad, but I performed my duties, preaching, -baptizing, visiting and conversing with the people on the subject of -the Gospel, and attending to the business in my pastorate, until March -5th, when I took the train for Liverpool. There I consulted Apostles A. -M. Lyman and G. Q. Cannon, and on the 7th Elder Cannon introduced me to -Dr. Smith, who pronounced my ailment neuralgia, and prescribed turkish -baths and the magnetic-electric machine. I remained in Liverpool till -the 22nd, occasionally visiting, in company with some of the Elders, -places of interest such as the new park and the botanical gardens. On -March 11th we saw the Liverpool races at Aintree, a suburb. There were -two plate races and the grand national steeple chase. At one hurdle -a horse fell on his rider and the latter was picked up for dead, but -he recovered; three other riders were unhorsed. About twenty thousand -people were in attendance at these races. It was while in Liverpool, on -March 18th, as I was walking through the northwest part of the town in -company with Elder George J. Taylor, that I saw hundreds of people in -the most degraded state in which I ever beheld human beings. - -My health having improved a little, I returned to Nottingham on the -22nd, Apostle G. Q. Cannon's wife and child accompanying me. Mrs. -Cannon had been very ill, and had been advised to go to Nottingham in -the hope of the change benefiting her health. On reaching Nottingham, -I there resumed my missionary labors. My health again began to fail, -and early in April I received notice of my release to return home. On -the 7th of April Sister Cannon went to Liverpool in company with her -husband. I settled business of the conference and went to different -branches and bade the Saints good-bye. They exhibited their affection -for me by many words and acts of kindness. On April 13th I preached -my farewell sermon in Nottingham, and it was with mingled feelings of -sorrow and joy that I bade the Saints farewell--sorrow to leave them, -and joy to see the display of love toward me by both members of the -Church and numbers of people who were not members. On Monday, April -14th, I went to Liverpool. The next day I wrote the following, which -was published in the _Millennial Star_: - - "Liverpool, April 15, 1862. - -"_President Cannon:_ - -"DEAR BROTHER:--I take pleasure in writing to you a brief report of -my labors in the ministry of the Nottingham District. On the 7th -of August, 1860, I was appointed by the presidency here, namely: -A. M. Lyman and C. C. Rich, to labor as a traveling Elder in the -aforementioned district, where I continued my labors in company with -Elder Joseph C. Rich and under the pastoral charge of Elder David -John, until January 1st, 1861. I then received an appointment to the -presidency of the Nottingham District, composed of the Nottingham, -Derby, Leicester and Lincolnshire conferences, where I continued my -labors until the 14th instant, when I arrived in Liverpool, having -received your letter of release, with the privilege of returning to our -mountain home in Utah. - -"I can truly say that I have taken much pleasure in my field of labor, -for I have seen my feeble exertions in connection with the Priesthood -laboring with me crowned with success. I have witnessed an increase -of the good Spirit among the Saints. We have not only witnessed these -symptoms of increase, but have added by baptism some two hundred and -fifty souls, besides many rebaptisms; and many misunderstandings of the -Saints have been corrected, so that, with a few exceptions, the Saints -are in fellowship with one another. - -"In that district, I think, there have been some four excommunicated -and five disfellowshiped during the last twenty-one months; and with -the present year's emigration, we have two hundred emigrated from -that district. Suffice it to say, that the district is in a healthy -condition. The Saints are feeling very well, and are full of the spirit -to emigrate. Many strangers are becoming very much interested in our -meetings, insomuch that some of them attend regularly; and on Sunday -evening, the 13th, after I preached my farewell sermon in Nottingham, -some four or five strangers, whom I have no recollection of ever seeing -before,--shook hands with me, saying, 'God bless you,' and at the same -time they did not forget to bless me themselves, thus exemplifying -their faith by their works. I find the people in the midland counties -to be a kindhearted people; and when once you get the crust of -tradition in which they are encased cracked, so as to feed them with -the bread of eternal life, they generally receive it with great joy and -gladness. - -"Although I have not enjoyed very good health any of the time I have -been in this country, I feel sometimes to regret leaving the mission, -when I reflect upon the memory of so many warm throbbing hearts for -Zion, whose circumstances are rather forbidding at present; yet I -feel that if they would arouse with more energy and life, and be -more faithful in reading the _Stars_ and _Journals_, attend their -meetings, and be more faithful in their duties, and not pore over their -poverty so much, the time is not far distant when they will be able to -accomplish that most desirable object of going to Zion. - -"And now I beg to bid good-bye to the Saints of the Nottingham -District, and say, may the God of Israel bless and preserve them, -together with all the Saints and the honest in heart in all the world. -And as I expect to leave this country on the 21st instant, I bid adieu -to her majesty's dominions and to all her subjects. I have lifted up my -voice and cried aloud, and spared not, till I feel that my skirts are -clear, so far as this mission to the British nation is concerned. - -"And now with kind regards to yourself, Presidents Lyman and Rich, my -brethren and co-laborers in the ministry and the many faithful Saints -under their watchcare, I bid all an affectionate farewell, praying God -to bless and prosper every effort made to advance the interests of His -kingdom. - - "I subscribe myself your brother in the Gospel of Christ, - - "JAMES S. BROWN." - -I was variously engaged the next two days in preparing for the voyage, -and in assisting others. On Saturday, the 19th, I went on board the -ship _John J. Boyd_, on which we were to sail. That day a young man who -resided at Nottingham and who had been courting Miss Mary Oakey, from -the same district, came to Liverpool, and the young lady went out with -him. They were never seen again by us. We supposed they had eloped. - -On Monday, the 21st, I again went on board. Apostles A. M. Lyman, C. C. -Rich and George Q. Cannon came on the vessel and organized the company -of emigrating Saints, with the following presidency: James S. Brown, -president; John Lindsay and J. C. Rich, counselors. The Apostles gave -us much good instructions and bade us good-bye, after which we made a -further temporary organization so as to call watches for the night; -then, after prayer, we retired, it being about midnight. Next day the -company was organized into nine wards, with a presiding teacher over -each. There were on board six hundred and ninety-six emigrating Saints, -and the crew, which made the total up to seven hundred and thirty-five -souls. - -At half-past seven o'clock on the 23rd we weighed anchor, and the -vessel was towed about twenty miles out to sea, and left, in a strong -headwind. We beat about the Irish Channel all day, and about 4 p.m., -drew so close to the Isle of Man that we could see the towns and -distinguish the houses. Then we tacked about and sailed away along the -coast of Wales. Nearly everybody on board was seasick, and one child, -about five months old, in a family named Hardy, died. It was buried at -sea on the 24th. Myself and counselors went among the people, waiting -on them and cheering them. - -Next day the heavy headwind continued, and the seasickness seemed very -severe. I was affected myself, but still was able to help others. We -went along between the Isle of Man and the coast of Ireland, and by the -26th, when the wind became lighter, we could see the coast of Ireland -on our left and the Scottish hills on the right. We could also see the -Irish houses, farms and roads quite plainly. It was noon on the 27th -before we passed out of sight of land, the last we saw being a small -island off the northwest coast of Ireland. - -From that time on we experienced all kinds of weather, from a dead calm -to a heavy gale. On the 1st of May the wind was so strong it carried -away the jib-boom and fore-top-gallant mast. On the 5th a little boy -named Benjamin V. Williams died from a fall down the hatchway on May -1st. Taking all things together, however, we got along fairly well. -Once we had to complain to the captain of rough treatment by the third -mate and some of the sailors, and it was checked. On May 21st we -sighted Sandy Hook, and on June 1st we cast anchor in the bay of New -York. On the voyage we had had cases of measles and whooping-cough, and -there were seven deaths in our company while we were at sea. - -On landing in New York I received an invitation from Hon. Wm. H. Hooper -for the Utah Elders to stay at the Astor House at his expense. Eleven -of us availed ourselves of the courtesy extended. On June 2nd the -emigrants were landed and we proceeded west via Niagara Falls and the -lakes to Detroit, then by way of Chicago, Quincy and Hannibal to St. -Joseph, Missouri. From that point we went to Florence, Nebraska, by -steamboat, and there I turned over my charge to Joseph W. Young, who -was conducting affairs at that place. - -I was next assigned to an independent company which had its own -outfit, and was selected as captain and guide. The company consisted -of two hundred and fifty souls, with fifty wagons and teams. We left -Florence in the latter part of June, and arrived in Salt Lake City on -September 23, 1862. I made my report to President Brigham Young, and -was honorably released. I stayed in the city till after the October -conference of the Church, then hastened home to my family in Ogden -City, finding them all well. - - - -CHAPTER LIX. - -REMOVE FROM OGDEN TO SALT LAKE CITY AT THE REQUEST OF PRESIDENT -YOUNG--NECESSITY FOR PREACHING AMONG THE SAINTS--IN THE EMPLOY OF -PRESIDENT YOUNG--ON ANOTHER MISSION, THIS TIME IN UTAH--PREACHING -AND LECTURING--BUILD A HOUSE--GO TO THE CANYON TO GET FINISHING -LUMBER--SHOT IN MISTAKE FOR A BEAR--MY WOUND VERY SERIOUS--TAKEN TO -WANSHIP TO RECEIVE CARE--MY FAMILY NOTIFIED AND SURGICAL ASSISTANCE -OBTAINED--MOVED TO MY HOME--IN BED NINE MONTHS--TWO SURGICAL -OPERATIONS--GROW STRONGER--EMPLOYED AT THE WARM SPRINGS--DR. -ROBINSON--ABSCESSES IN MY WOUNDED LIMB--OUT OF EMPLOYMENT--GO TO THE -CALIFORNIA LINE TO EXAMINE A GOLD PROSPECT--PERILOUS JOURNEY--INDIANS -ON THE WARPATH--REMARKABLE EXPERIENCE WITH A BAND OF SAVAGES--GIFT OF -SPEAKING THEIR LANGUAGE--UNABLE TO WORK THE GOLD CLAIM BECAUSE OF LACK -OF WATER--RETURN TO SALT LAKE CITY--GO TO THE GOLD DISCOVERIES ON THE -SWEETWATER--DISCOVER A PLACER CLAIM--AN ATTEMPT TO ROB ME OF IT--RUSH -FOR A MINE--HOLD THE CLAIM--ASSAILED BY HOSTILE INDIANS--A RACE FOR -LIFE--THREE MEN KILLED--WE ABANDON CAMP--DEFER WITH MY LAME LIMB--LOSE -THE MINING CLAIM--HAULING COAL AND PRODUCE--ALMOST DIE--CONFINED TO BED -FOR MONTHS--AMPUTATION OF MY LIMB TO SAVE MY LIFE--RECOVERY--ATTEND TO -MY NURSERY--ADVENT OF THE RAILWAY--TRAVELING AND PREACHING--A SLIGHT -SUN-STROKE. - -SHORTLY after my return from my mission to Europe, President Brigham -Young was in Ogden, and told me he wished me to locate my family in -Salt Lake City, preparatory to my going on another mission, if not a -foreign, a home mission; "for," said he, "I don't know of any people -on earth that need more preaching to than do the Latter-day Saints -at home. We send our Elders out to preach and to gather the people -from workshops and factories, then set those people down here in a -new country and leave them to do the best they can, without necessary -experience; and the result is that many of them get discouraged and -apostatize; whereas, if the Elders would keep the harness on, and -preach to and encourage them, they would stay and make good Latter-day -Saints." - -I moved to Salt Lake City according to President Young's advice, and -was about eleven months in his employ. Then, by his appointment, I -traveled through the Territory, preaching, and lecturing on my travels -and experiences. The people in Utah were liberal, giving me much -assistance, principally in the way of farm products. - -In 1863 I purchased a lot from President Young, began the erection of a -two-story-adobe house, and moved into it in 1864. It was not completed, -and in August I went into the mountains to get finishing lumber. On the -night of the 20th of that month I was shot by a camp mate, in mistake -for a bear. The young man who shot me was Alexander Gilbert. The bullet -entered two-thirds of the way above my knee, on the inside of the left -thigh, and shattered the bone into many fragments. The weapon was a -United States yauger, and carried a half-ounce ball, which was broken -to bits, and, with parts of my clothing, including two pieces of a -brass suspender buckle, lodged in my limb. - -The accident occurred in Alexander Canyon, about three miles above -Wanship, Summit County, between 11 and 12 o'clock at night. There were -four of us in camp at the time. The man who did the shooting ran and -told George G. Snyder, who was soon at my side with a team and light -spring wagon, and with some stimulants. He and my camp mates tenderly -lifted me on the bed, and conveyed me to the home of my father-in-law, -Nathan Tanner, in Wanship, where I was kindly cared for by him and his -family, and my own family notified of the accident that had befallen -me. My wound being of a most serious character, the best surgical -attention procurable at the time was obtained. - -The surgeon advised amputation, but I objected as long as there was any -hope of saving the limb. I laid there till November, then was moved to -my home in Salt Lake City. For nine months I laid on my back, unable -to move from that position. During that time two surgical operations -were performed, taking out parts of shattered bone and the bullet. I -was reduced to a skeleton, and became so weak I could not feed myself -or even lift a sheet of paper between my thumb and finger. After the -second surgical operation, however, I began to improve, and in a few -weeks could get around with a crutch and a cane. - -As I grew stronger, I was able to work some in my nursery; and when, in -the autumn of that year, 1865, the municipality opened the Warm Springs -to the public I was given charge thereof, and remained in that position -till the autumn of 1866. I was there at the time Dr. J. King Robinson, -who had had a dispute with the city over the Warm Springs property, was -killed, October 22, 1866. When I was brought from Wanship in November, -1864, after being shot, Dr. Robinson, as associate surgeon in my case, -was the first one to do any cutting on my limb. - -During the time after I was able to move around, subsequent to the -months I had to lie in bed, my wounded limb gave me much trouble. -Abscesses would form, causing me severe pain, then would burst, and -when the pus was drained the flesh would heal again. But I was able -to perform only light physical labor, so when, late in the autumn of -1866, business fell off at the Warm Springs, I was notified that, as I -was unable to do all the work required and the bath house did not have -sufficient patronage to pay two men's wages, my services were no longer -required. While business was good I had purchased a hack, one of the -first in the city, to convey passengers to and from the Warm Springs, -the route being to the business part of town, but as traffic fell off I -had to dispose of the vehicle. Thus when I was thrown out of employment -I was left without means of obtaining a livelihood for myself and -family. - -I had some specimens of the gold I had discovered near the southeastern -boundary of California in 1849, when I was going on my first mission to -the Society Islands. I showed the specimens to President Brigham Young, -and in the spring of 1867, with a company which he had authorized me -to select, started for the California border, our destination being a -point in the desert known as Salt Springs. The company included Wood -Birdno, Lemuel Steele, Dr. Hickman, Robert Egbert and seven others -besides myself. - -On reaching Los Vegas, we learned from white men, of whom there were -about fifty there, that the Indians were on the warpath. Two of the -savages had been killed by the white men, and their tribe was seeking -revenge. The red men had challenged the white men to come out of their -fort and fight; but the challenge was not accepted. We were warned that -to continue the journey meant certain death, so I told my companions -they were at liberty to return, but I proposed to go on. All of the -company elected to do the same. - -We proceeded very carefully, and in going along a narrow canyon we -observed fresh Indian tracks. These were noticeable for about five -miles, but in that distance we saw no Indians, though we momentarily -expected them, and kept a sharp lookout. At last we discovered one -Indian who claimed to be friendly, but he left us soon--an action which -we accepted as an indication of trouble. In the afternoon we selected a -camping place on an almost bare knoll, where it seemed impossible for -a man to find shelter enough to hide himself. As I was very tired, my -companions spread some quilts for me to lie down on. Scarce had they -done so when a large Indian rose up from a little gully where he had -been hidden. He was within shooting distance, and was well armed. As -soon as we saw him, my companions seized their weapons, whereupon I -shouted "Hold on!" - -The Indian made a motion as if to express a wish to shake hands, and -I threw my hand up and down again, in an involuntary movement, the -meaning of which I did not know in Indian sign language. The stranger -received it as a friendly invitation, and came forward and shook hands. -Again, as on former occasions, I had the gift of the tongue or language -which the Indians in this vicinity--near Williams' Ranch--spoke, though -I had never heard it before. I talked to him, and learned that there -were other Indians secreted close by. He called to them, and about -fifteen rose up and came to camp. I was informed that white men had -killed some of their number, and that one wounded Indian was lying a -short distance away. This one I asked to be brought in and laid near my -bed, which was done. Dr. Hickman examined his wounds, a shot through -the cheek and one in the hip, which he said were not fatal. - -I also directed a piece of wagon cover spread out, and told the Indians -I wanted their weapons laid on that, which was done. Then some of our -company rolled the wagon cover up and tied it, so the guns could not be -got at readily if there were trouble. Then, when our guards had been -set for the night, we laid down and slept in peace and safety. We made -a bargain with the Indians to take care of our animals at a place where -there was good grass, and they did so. - -The next day we moved on and met no further trouble or danger. We -reached our destination in due course, and examined the gold prospect, -which was quite rich. But there was no water within twenty-five miles, -and it was not practicable to work the mines with the methods within -our reach in those days. We had to give up and return home, our route -of travel being by way of the Colorado River as far as Call's Fort, -then by the settlements on the Muddy into Utah. I reported the trip and -its results to President Young. - -At that time there had arisen some excitement over gold discoveries -on the Sweetwater, near South Pass. Fourteen years previous to that -date I had related to President Young how the Indians had told me of -gold in that locality. President Young showed me specimens that had -been brought him from the new discovery, and told me to get a few men -and see what I could do, as he believed it was a good opportunity for -me. I did so, and in July, 1867, in company with Foster Curtis, Brower -Pettit, Benjamin Brown and B. Y. Hampton, started for the Sweetwater. - -Reaching our destination, we prospected for the precious metal. One -day I went out alone, and at the base of a slope near the Teresa mine -I discovered free gold. I dug a hole and worked at it, securing dirt -that carried fifty to sixty cents per pan. It was a placer claim, and -I decided that we would occupy it. While I was getting out some of -the gold, S. Sharp Walker came along and saw it, and on going to camp -told the men. I did not know this till after, but early next morning, -before daylight, I overheard a man in the tent next to our wagon tell -of a plan to seize the claim. A lot of men were there, Mormons and -non-Mormons. I awoke my companions, and it was agreed that they should -go and stake the claim, while I should get it recorded. This we did, -and had the work accomplished before day was fairly on. I reached the -claim, to which the others had preceded me, before those who intended -to jump it arrived at the place, and when the latter came up I was -prepared to defend it. One man said he had staked the claim before -us, but as his statement was not true, we stood him off and retained -possession. - -Our party went to work, while I started to find my horses, which had -strayed away. As I rode up on a knoll, I discovered a war party of -seventy-five or eighty Indians, supposed to be Sioux. I had intended to -dismount and fasten my saddle, but finding I was discovered and that -about twenty-five of the Indians were closing in on me with horses much -faster than I had. I started for camp with the loose saddle, skurrying -over rocks and sagebrush. On the way back I found my horses and started -them, and they ran directly into camp. In the ride my foot came out of -the stirrup, and my lame limb dangled, beyond any power of mine to use -it. Two Indians ran close up on me and one drew his bow with a fixed -arrow. I straightened up, expecting to receive the missile in my back. -Just then some of the men who were in our camp, and who had heard my -shouts, came out and fired, and my pursuer turned to save himself, -while I escaped injury. - -At the camp all was excitement. One man, Corinth Lawrence, had been -shot and scalped, his body being found some time after I came in. -Isador Morris had had a narrow escape. That day there were two others -killed on their way to camp. They were Anthony Showell, an eastern -man, and Orson Taylor, from Springville, Utah. Showell was found and -buried, but Taylor's body never was discovered, that I can recall. -In the camp there were George Naylor, Gilbert Webb, Jesse West, John -Pitts, Robert Watson, Jr., George Boyd and many others from Salt Lake -City, as well as men who had come from various parts of the country. -The man who had tried to jump the claim I had found assumed charge and -got the camp together, intending to make a stand in the brush. I knew -the danger of such a proceeding with seventy-five or eighty hostile -Indian warriors near, so, with my companions, withdrew to a better -position; soon all the camp followed, and we prepared for defense. The -intended claim-jumper, whose name I am unable to recall, was a partner -of Corinth Lawrence, and requested me to take charge of the funeral of -the dead man, which I did, and he was buried as carefully as we could -do it. That day I suffered greatly with my lame limb, and an abscess -burst and discharged freely. - -[IMAGE: CHASED BY A WAR PARTY] - -Next morning we broke camp and returned home, for it was not safe to -remain there, in a hostile Indian country. Later in the season, Brower -Pettit and Foster Curtis returned to our claim, but it had been seized, -and was held by parties from California. There was a great rush in -of people, and the town of South Pass, or Atlantic City, was built. -The next spring I went out with more men, but our claim could not be -regained, so we had to give it up. The parties who seized it took many -thousands of dollars out of it. The second year, however, the mining -boom collapsed. - -During the summer and autumn of this year, 1868, grading for the -Union Pacific Railway was going on. I hauled coal from Coalville to -Salt Lake City, and also hauled tithing produce from Ogden and Logan, -taking produce for pay, so that my family was well supplied with -provisions. On my last trip from Ogden I was caught in a snowstorm on -the sandridge, took a congestive chill, and almost died on the way. -When I reached home I was unable to get off my wagon. I was cared for -by my family, but suffered greatly, and in addition to the suppuration -in my thigh, the wound bled so as to endanger my life. Finally, on May -27, 1869, my left limb was amputated about four inches from the hip -joint. The surgeons were Dr. W. F. Anderson, Dr. H. J. Richards and Dr. -J. M. Bernhisel. Apostles Wilford Woodruff and George Q. Cannon were -present also. The operation which I had objected to for nearly five -years became necessary to save my life. - -In a few weeks from the time of the amputation I was able to get out -a little, and pruned a few trees. From that time on I worked, though -it was under many difficulties, till I had pruned my nursery of ten -thousand trees, and had given them necessary care. I was able to be -present at the ceremonies at the entrance of the railway into Salt Lake -City, January 10, 1870. During the succeeding two years I attended to -my nursery, also traveled and lectured on my experiences and preached -as a home missionary, from Paris, Idaho, on the north, to St. George, -Utah, on the south. In the summer of 1871, while working in my orchard, -I was overcome by heat, having a slight sunstroke, some of the effects -of which have never left me. Still my health was better than before my -limb was amputated, and with crutches I got along fairly well. - - - -CHAPTER XL. - -I CALLED ON A MISSION TO THE UNITED STATES--JOURNEY EASTWARD--VISIT -RELATIVES EN ROUTE--REACH NEW YORK--MEASURED FOR AN ARTIFICIAL -LIMB--HOW IT WAS PAID FOR--VISIT AND PREACH--MEET POOR -ENCOURAGEMENT--GO TO BOSTON--WORLD'S PEACE JUBILEE--BUNKER HILL--AGAIN -AT NEW YORK--RELEASED TO RETURN HOME--BACK IN UTAH--TRAVELING AND -PREACHING--SENT FOR BY PRESIDENT YOUNG--CALLED ON A MISSION TO -ARIZONA--DIRECTED TO FURNISH NAMES OF OTHERS--SEND THE LIST--PRESIDENT -YOUNG ADDS OTHER NAMES--SET APART FOR OUR MISSION--DIFFICULT TO COLLECT -MONEY DUE ME--LEAVE MY FAMILY POORLY PROVIDED FOR BUT TRUSTING IN THE -LORD--PLACED IN CHARGE OF THE MISSION--LETTER OF INSTRUCTIONS--START -SOUTH--PEOPLE CONTRIBUTE LIBERALLY--TRAVELING IN STORM--ARRIVE AT -KANAB--IN ARIZONA--A HARD JOURNEY--MARRIAGE OF MY DAUGHTER--REACH LEE'S -FERRY ON THE COLORADO--CROSSING THE RIVER--REACH MOANCOPPY WASH--DECIDE -TO WINTER THERE--EXPLORE THE VICINITY--MEET FRIENDLY INDIANS--BUILDING -A HOUSE--EXPLORING THE LITTLE COLORADO--A DIFFICULT TRIP--DESCRIPTION -OF THE ROUTE--FIND A PLACE FOR ANOTHER SETTLEMENT--SAN FRANCISCO -MOUNTAINS--FINE FOREST GROWTH--CAUGHT IN DEEP SNOW--THROUGH WITH A -PERILOUS JOURNEY--DECIDE TO RETURN TO SALT LAKE CITY AND REPORT--HEAVY -SNOW--TRIP HOMEWARD--CORDIALLY GREETED BY PRESIDENT YOUNG--WITH MY -FAMILY. - -ON the 8th of April, 1872, at the general conference of the Church in -Salt Lake City, I was called on a mission to the eastern part of the -United States, and hastened to settle my business preparatory to my -departure. At 5 p.m. on May 1st I left Salt Lake City, going by train -to Ogden, and then east. There were about twenty-five other Elders -in the company. My companion in the Pullman car was Moroni Brown, of -Ogden. On reaching Missouri Valley Junction, Iowa, I stopped over with -my brother-in-law, B. H. Dennis. On May 4th, I went to Calhoun and -preached in the schoolhouse; returned to Missouri Valley Junction on -the 6th, preaching in the courthouse. My father paid the expense of -securing the last-named building. - -I continued my journey on the 7th going by way of Chicago, -Philadelphia, Newark and Jersey City, to New York. There we met with -Elder Wm. C. Staines, and on the 12th went with him to Brooklyn. On the -13th I was measured at Mr. Hudson's, 696 Broadway, New York, for an -artificial limb. The way I came to do this was through Leonard Wines, -of Salt Lake City. Mr. Wines and I had been good friends in our younger -days. In later years he had made some money on the mail line west, -and meeting me one day on the train the idea struck him that I ought -to have an artificial leg. The result was that he and some friends -whom he called on raised the necessary amount to pay for it, which sum -he presented to me, telling of his purpose. Naturally I had a high -appreciation of his kindness. It was on May 27th that I received the -artificial limb. - -We obtained lodgings with Brother Isaac Elkington and family, and -visited and preached where we could. We met very little encouragement -from the people. On June 13th we left for Boston on a steamer of the -Neptune Line, going first to Providence, from which place we went by -rail to Boston, and thence to Portsmouth, N. H. At the latter place I -visited my father-in-law, Thomas Lester. - -On the 17th of June we were at the World's Peace Jubilee, in Boston, -and also visited Bunker Hill and mingled with the vast assemblage -there. I paid a visit to the home of Thomas Lester, Jr., about fifteen -miles out from Boston, on the 18th, and then returned to New York, -where, on the 19th, we met President George A. Smith of the First -Presidency of the Church. He told us we were at liberty to return home, -as the antagonism was so great that there was no chance to preach -the Gospel to the people at that time. That evening we filled an -appointment at Paterson. N. J., staying at the home of W. Dover till -the 23rd, when we returned to New York. - -Having been released from our mission, owing to the indifference of the -people, we started home the first of July. For some three years after -my return I traveled and preached as I had done formerly, in southern -Idaho, western Wyoming and northern Utah. - -On Wednesday evening, September 29, 1875, on returning from a preaching -tour in the northern part of Utah County, I was informed by my family -that President Young had sent for me to do some interpreting in the -Navajo language. I had met the Navajo Indians going away from his -office, and as I knew my presence was not necessary then, and as I was -quite ill with a nervous headache, I did not go up till next day. - -Going to see President Young, I met him in front of his office, in -his carriage. He said he had wanted me to talk with the Navajos, but -I was too late, for they were gone, "but," said he, "I knew you had -the spirit of it." He then drove off, and his private secretary, Elder -George Reynolds, invited me into the office, saying the President -wanted to see me particularly on missionary business. At this I went -inside and waited. Soon the President came in and after speaking to -some others who were waiting for him, came to me and said, "Oh, Brother -James, that I could see you as I have seen you, strong and active! I -should like to send you on a mission to those Indians, for you are just -the man to go there with a few other good men. The Spirit of the Lord -is upon them and they need a few men among them who will teach them the -truth." - -To this statement I replied that I was unable to endure hardships and -exposure as I had done, for my health was very poor and I was not able -to wait on myself in camp life. I stated, however, that what the Spirit -of the Lord directed through him I was willing to try to do to the best -of my ability; and added, "You know where to find me; I am just where I -always have been, on hand." - -President Young then said. "Bless your soul, the Spirit does and has -dictated to me all the time to send you to take charge of a mission -in that country. You are just the man for it, and if I had sent you -before, we would have had a mission and settlements there now. I think -that if we fit you up with a good spring wagon or carriage, and some -good brethren to wait on you, that you can go. Just get a list of names -of good men, and hand them to me--a list of men that will stand by -you, but none of your babies. I want good men to go with you on this -mission, so hand me a list of names." - -When the conversation ended, I returned home, and after much thought -and prayer for the guidance of the Lord, wrote the following names, my -own at the head of the list: Daniel B. Roson, John C. Thompson, Seth B. -Tanner, Morton P. Mortenson, Bengt Jenson, Hans Funk, Ernest Tietjens -and John Davies. The latter got excused, and President Young added the -following: Andrew L. Gibbons, Luther C. Burnham, Thales H. Haskell, Ira -Hatch, Warren M. Johnson and William H. Gibbons. These were called on a -mission October 9, 1875, at the general conference. On Monday, October -11th, we were set apart for our mission. - -I found some difficulty in collecting debts due me, over a thousand -dollars altogether, so that I could not get enough to fit me out -comfortably nor to provide for my family. Still I was determined to go. -When it came to parting from my family, it was hard to leave them, with -only ten days' supply of fuel and less than fifty pounds of flour in -the house, and not knowing where the next would come from. It seemed as -if they could not endure the separation when they saw me fitted out so -poorly. But I blessed them in the name of the Lord, and told them that -if they would live their religion they would not suffer so much want -when I was away as if I had stayed home. Then we separated sorrowfully, -and on October 30th I went by train to Provo. Some of the company had -preceded me a day or two. I had in the meantime received much personal -instruction from President Young, and was given the following letter: - - "SALT LAKE CITY, U.T., October 28, 1875. - -"_Elder James S. Brown. Salt Lake City:_ - -"DEAR BROTHER:--You are hereby appointed to take charge of the mission -about to go south and southeast of the Colorado River. - -"It will become your duty to found settlements in suitable locations, -where the brethren can congregate in cultivating the earth to bring -forth substance for the families of the brethren who may feel disposed -to join you. - -"You will work in harmony with other brethren who are now in the south -building up new locations, and will in all things seek the welfare of -those associated with you, and the building up of the kingdom of God. - -"In the formation of settlements, and in all circumstances that may -arise on your mission, you will seek the wisdom of the Spirit of the -Lord, and be guided by its whisperings in all things from day to day. - -"The brethren with whom you are associated are counseled to act under -your directions, that the spirit of union and concert of action may -characterize all your movements. And we call upon all men unto whom -you shall come to aid and assist you according to their ability in -promoting so good and glorious a cause as settling this rugged new, -country. - -"We would counsel you, if you will do it, to sustain each other as -brethren, and work together in the holy order that God has revealed. - -"We pray God our Heavenly Father to bless and prosper you and to make -you instrumental in accomplishing much good to those with whom you are -called upon to associate, and to labor for on this mission, in the name -of Jesus Christ. Amen. - -"Your brethren in the Gospel, - - "BRIGHAM YOUNG, - "DANIEL H. WELLS, - -"First Presidency of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints." - -From Provo I got a ride with a team to Spanish Fork, where, on Sunday, -October 31st, I preached to the people, having great liberty of the -Spirit. Then Bishop Snell asked the people for a contribution and they -responded liberally, raising twenty-two sacks of flour, twenty-six -bushels of potatoes, and thirteen dollars in money. That night I went -on to Salem and preached, and also received a small donation from the -people. I next went to Payson, where I preached on Monday evening, and -where the people subscribed liberally, so that I had thirty-three dollars -in currency, fifty sacks of flour, and twenty-six bushels of potatoes. -Thus my words to my destitute family were fulfilled, and they were -provided for as well as myself. - -At Payson I met some of my missionary companions, and we moved on -southward. Others joined us on the journey, and on November 9th we -reached Salina, where we pitched our tent and I camped out for the -first time on our trip. At Richfield we received contributions of -provisions, and again at Panguitch. Much of our journey between these -two places was in storm--rain and snow--and was far from comfortable. -On the 18th we crossed the rim of the Great Basin. We reached Kanab on -the 20th, where we were joined by the four brethren who had been called -from the southern settlements. - -I left Kanab on November 22nd, going to Navajo Wells. Before leaving -Kanab I had telegraphed to President Young, written to my family, and -arranged with Bishop L. John Nuttall to have our mail sent after us as -soon as possible. At Navajo Wells I joined our party, and next day we -went on to the Buckskin Mountains, making dry camp that night. On the -24th we reached House Rock Spring, where we were overtaken with letters -from home. I had one from my eldest daughter. Lydia Jane, stating that -she was to be married to Homer Manley Brown on November 22nd. It had -been arranged before I left home that the wedding was to take place -this month. - -We traveled steadily on, the country being dry and forbidding. Our -beef cattle having run off, Ira Hatch and Luther C. Burnham went to -find them. Burnham brought them into camp at Badger Creek, on the -26th, but it was 2 o'clock on the morning of the 27th when Ira Hatch -got in from his fruitless search. That day we went on to Lee's Ferry, -on the Colorado River. We had sent two men ahead to arrange for us to -be ferried over the river, but they reported that it was not possible -to cross that night. I thought differently, and as it was Saturday, -I determined to get over. Some of the party objected and some were -willing, and this division delayed our crossing with the wagons till -about 10 p.m.; but we were safely over the stream. Next day our animals -were ferried over. At the ferry, Mrs. Lee was out of provisions, and -we helped her to some, and also gave her ten dollars, of which I -contributed two dollars. Next morning she sent me a Navajo blanket and -a cotton handkerchief. - -We left Lee's Crossing on November 29th, and continued over a dry, -rough, difficult road till December 3rd, when we reached Moancoppy, -the pleasantest spot we had seen since before arriving at Kanab. I was -impressed to make this place winter quarters, and designated a site -for a fort. We were all pleased to have a rest from traveling, as our -feed had given out and our stock was sick with the epizootic. Near this -place there were some old Indian farms and a few stone huts laid up -without mortar, but all had been deserted. There were also some springs -near by. - -The morning after we had camped there, a small hunting party of Navajos -came in, and after we had given them their breakfast they smoked -their corn-husk cigarettes and departed. A. S. Gibbons, Ira Hatch and -I examined the country around Moancoppy, and found a few ponds of -water and a good place for a reservoir to catch the spring rains; we -also discovered a fertile spot of a few acres, and two small springs. -December 5th was Sunday. We held a meeting, and all our company, -thirteen in number, expressed themselves as feeling well and zealous in -our missions. - -On Monday we explored the vicinity, but found nothing inviting outside -the neighborhood of our camp, where we all were satisfied a missionary -station should be built, as it was the best we could do. We went to -work getting timber and doing other necessary work, my part being -to guard against hostile Indians. T. H. Haskell and Ira Hatch, our -interpreters, went to the Oriba Indian village, some fifty miles away. -On their return they reported all was peaceful; they were accompanied -by Chief Tuba and his wife Telassinimki, who were highly pleased to see -their old Mormon friends. - -On the 8th we laid out a house twenty by forty feet and twelve feet -high, to be built of stone. Our beef cattle having become very wild, we -had to kill them and cure the meat. - -J. C. Thompson, Ira Hatch, S. B. Tanner, L. C. Burnham and I started -on December 9th on an exploring trip up the Little Colorado River and -around the San Francisco Mountains. When we had gone twelve miles, -breaking the road through the canyon, we were glad to find some pools -of water, and to rest for the night. Next day we came to the Little -Colorado River from forty to fifty miles above its mouth. The river -bottom was about half a mile wide, and the water very low. We continued -up the river to the Black Falls, where the stream passes over a ledge -of volcanic rock twelve or fourteen feet high. Four miles farther up -it ran through a very narrow gorge, and we had to pass over the hills -through deep sand, which our team found it very difficult to cross. - -Fifteen miles farther on we came to Grand Falls, where the river runs -over shelving rocks for eighty to a hundred feet. Higher up the stream -the bottoms widened out, in some places to four miles, the timber was -better and the stream was larger. We killed two antelope and dried the -meat. Our forward journey continued to the old Beel trail, then on to -Sunset Crossing and the old Prescott road. Seven miles above was a mail -station, and there, at 9 o'clock on the night of Friday, December 17th, -the mail carriers met, and we learned some general news from them. Next -day we traveled fifteen miles farther, to where some Mexican herders -were camped with about four thousand sheep. The water in the river had -improved in quantity and quality, and the surroundings were such that -we felt we could recommend it as a place for settlement. We were also -impressed to return to Moancoppy, and started on that journey on the -19th. We changed our course and took more to the hill country, heading -for the San Francisco Mountains. - -The return trip was very hard. We saw plenty of timber--the finest -forest growth I ever beheld. On December 24th, when crossing the divide -between the San Francisco Mountains and Mount Hendrick, we encountered -a terrific snowstorm, and had to camp for the night. Next day we -continued on our way, making slow progress in the deep snow. We passed -below the snow line on a very rough country, where sometimes, with -brake set, it took the four of us all we could do to keep the wagon -right side up. We were thankful to reach the river on the 28th and -Moancoppy on the 29th. - -At a brief consultation that day, it was decided that I should return -to Salt Lake City and report to President Young the result of our -explorations. Next day the bandaging of my artificial leg gave way and -T. H. Haskell repaired it. On New Year's Day, 1876, J. C. Thompson, W. -H. Gibbons and I set out for Kanab, where we arrived on January 6th. - -I requested Bishop Nuttall to forward me to Orderville, which he did. -From there Bishop H. O. Spencer took his team and conveyed me to -Panguitch. We met a heavy snowstorm on the road, the snow on the rim of -the Basin being up to the wagonbox. From Panguitch I was forwarded to -Monroe, where I telegraphed President Young that I would be in the city -by January 15th. I was advanced by team from there to the railroad, -where a pass sent by President Young was ready for me, and I arrived -in Salt Lake City and reported to him at 6 p.m. on the 14th. At the -railway station I was met by my children and the neighbors and two -vehicles. If I had been President Young's own son he could not have -received me more cordially than he did when I reached his office. After -our conversation I returned home, where my folks thought I should have -gone first; but they were overjoyed to see me, as I was to see them, -all in good health and well provided for. We were highly gratified to -realize that the Lord had heard and answered our prayers. - - - -CHAPTER LXI. - -ATTEND MEETINGS WITH THE FIRST PRESIDENCY AND APOSTLES--MORE -MISSIONARIES CALLED TO ARIZONA--MANY INQUIRIES REGARDING THE -MISSION--OUTLINE THE ROUTE--PREPARATIONS FOR TRAVEL--START -SOUTH--AIDED BY CONTRIBUTIONS--REACH MOENCOPPY--MEET LOT SMITH -AND COMPANY--BAPTISMS--START FOR THE LITTLE COLORADO RIVER--GUIDE -MISSIONARY COMPANIES TO THE PLACE WE HAD SELECTED FOR SETTLEMENT--LOT -SMITH REFUSES TO ACKNOWLEDGE MY APPOINTMENT FROM PRESIDENT YOUNG -AS PRESIDENT OF THE MISSION--HE ASSUMES LEADERSHIP AT THE NEW -SETTLEMENT--I RETURN WITH MY PARTY TO MOENCOPPY--OTHER COMPANIES OF -MISSIONARY SETTLERS SUSTAIN MY PRESIDENCY--MY HEALTH IS POOR--SETTLERS -DISCOURAGED--CHEER THEM UP--WORK OF FRONTIER LIFE--SUCCOR A COMPANY -WHOSE WATER SUPPLY IS EXHAUSTED--TAKING UP LAND--MAKE A LONG -EXPLORING TRIP--INTRODUCE BOOK OF MORMON TO NAVAJOS--RETURN TO -MOENCOPPY--INDIANS DISSATISFIED--GO TO SALT LAKE CITY WITH A DELEGATION -OF NAVAJO CHIEFS--THEIR SUPPOSED GRIEVANCES SETTLED--TELL PRESIDENT -YOUNG I HAVE COME HOME TO STAY--HE SENDS ME OUT AGAIN--DIRECTED TO -PROCURE VOLUNTEERS--LETTER OF INSTRUCTIONS--LECTURE, AND TAKE UP -CONTRIBUTIONS--RETURN HOME--MY FAMILY ILL--PROVIDE SUPPLIES FOR -THEM--CONDITIONS IMPROVE. - -MY stay at home lasted till January 30, 1876. I attended several -meetings with the First Presidency, the Twelve Apostles, and other -leading brethren in the Church. They were consulting as to the best -means of colonizing that part of Arizona we had been exploring, and two -hundred missionaries were called to go there and settle the country. -Scores of visitors also came to my house to inquire regarding my -travels and the place where I had been. I went over to Apostle John -Taylor's house on invitation, and there George Goddard reported our -conversation, as I was requested to outline the route to Arizona, which -outline was afterwards published in the Deseret News. During my stay I -also made a brief visit to Ogden. - -As the time drew near for me to start south again, President Young -loaned me a team and light wagon to travel with. He also advised me to -find a boy about sixteen years old to go with and wait on me. I was -thinking of how I should follow this counsel, when John Reidhead, who -was one of those called to the Arizona mission, came in and proffered -his son--an offer I was pleased to accept. On Friday, January 28, -Brother Reidhead and son started south with my team and baggage. - -Early on the morning of Sunday, January 30, I took leave of my family, -and went by train to Spanish Fork, making an appointment at Springville -as I passed. I was met at the station at Spanish Fork, and conveyed to -the meetinghouse, where I addressed the congregation. That evening I -returned to Springville and filled the appointment there. Next morning -I was met by Brother Reidhead and son, and proceeded to Payson. I -had had raised for me, by subscription, a span of small mules, so I -sent back President Young's team and harness, and went on my journey, -preaching almost every evening in one or other town on the way. We were -treated very kindly. Our route lay through Fillmore, Beaver, Parowan, -Cedar City, Toquerville, and on to Kanab, which we reached February -23, finding Bishop Nuttall quite ill. We made our home at Bishop Levi -Stewart's. - -On March 2nd we set out from Kanab, and reached Moencoppy on the 8th, -where we found all well. The building constructed by the settlers was -so far completed as to protect us comfortably from storm and cold; and -a dam had been constructed, with a water ditch three miles long, giving -us quite a reservoir. Plowing also had been begun, though the weather -was very disagreeable. - -On the 11th, J. C. Thompson and A. S. Gibbons went to meet Lot Smith -and a company coming from Utah. On Sunday, the 12th, we held meeting, -and a young man named Franklin D. Gillespie, who had fallen in with us, -desired to be baptized into the Church, as did Ly and his wife, two of -the Oriba Indians. The ordinance was attended to, and I also ordained -the chief, Tuba, a Priest. - -During the next three days I arranged affairs of the company, some -of the men being directed to locate springs, to act as guides to the -companies coming, attend to our mail, etc., and on the 15th, with S. -B. Tanner, Ira Hatch, and J. B. Reidhead, set out with six mules and -a light wagon to search a road for vehicles between Moencoppy and the -Oriba village. Hans Funk and E. Tietjens, with a four-horse team, went -to the top of the hill to haul water for our animals, and from there -our party proceeded along the Indian trail three or four miles, then -struck out over the trackless, sandy plain, to avoid rugged buttes and -deep gulches that rendered the trail impracticable for wagons. We went -on about fourteen miles, and camped in the sand; I was quite ill. - -Next day we traveled about twenty-five miles in a southeasterly -direction, over sandhills and up a long wash, to a divide, where we -made dry camp. We met four hunting parties, and two of the hunters -camped with us. The following morning we went on seven miles, to the -pools of water where the Oribas were camped with their flocks of sheep -and goats. Each flockmaster stood guard over his animals, for his turn -to get at the pools. We passed on three miles to the Oriba village, -located on the crest of a steep bluff. The houses were built close -together, and there were about five hundred inhabitants. Those Indians -obtained all their water from a well about a mile distant, and the -carrying of the precious liquid was going on day and night, while the -Indians were praying continually for more water. - -Leaving the Oriba village, we proceeded onward over a rough and sandy -country, reaching the Mohave Springs, where the Hopees water their -stock, on the 18th. That night we experienced a fearful windstorm. On -the 20th we came to the Little Colorado River, and on the 23rd arrived -at the place selected on my first trip for a settlement. Between this -time and my previous visit five houses had been built there, so our -purpose was interfered with a little. Next day we chose a place for the -pioneer camp, and S. B. Tanner and I started back to meet the company -from Utah which was to occupy the locality as a settlement, and which -had been following us closely. We met the newcomers that day, and -returned to the site that had been chosen. - -It was at this place that the first disagreement in the expedition -occurred. Captains Smith, Lake and Allen had charge of three sections -of the company. I invited them and others to a meeting to consult -over what should be done, and there presented to them my letter of -instructions from President Young and my appointment as president of -the mission. Captain Lot Smith opposed my presidency, and Captains Lake -and Allen failed to give me support. Things were not pleasant, and -the meeting was dismissed. Next day matters in camp were in a rather -confused condition. - -The succeeding day was Sunday, March 26th. Lot Smith called a meeting, -and invited me to speak. I recounted what we had done in searching out -and selecting this place for settlement, and welcomed the company to -it; I also gave information and instruction concerning the country. -When I finished, Lot Smith assumed charge of the meeting, and paid no -further attention to me. Next day I invited him, and also Major Ladd, -to take a walk with me. They came, and I asked Brother Smith what he -intended doing. He replied that he was going ahead independent of me. -I told him he had insulted me and trampled upon my God-given right, -through President Young, who had appointed me to preside over the -Arizona mission, and if he would persist in doing wrong he must bear -the responsibility. He was very defiant, so we separated. I called -Brother G. Lake, who had informed me that Lot Smith seemed to think he -was in charge of the companies but he (Lake) knew it was my place and -would sustain me. I told him he had betrayed my confidence, for when it -came to the test he had failed to keep his word. I advised him to think -the matter over, and as I had decided to return at once to Moencoppy, -our party bade good-bye to the newcomers, and we started. This was on -March 27th. - -On the 30th we reached the lower crossing of the river, and camped, the -stream being too much swollen to cross. S. B. Tanner shot a deer, and -by about five hours later he and the others brought in two more deer--a -valuable addition to our stock of provisions. By Saturday, April 1st, -the river had fallen, and other companies having come up, we crossed -and held a meeting. Next day another meeting was convened, and I called -David E. Fullmer to return with us, which he did. In a meeting held at -the old Arizona camp on April 4th, at which there was a large number of -those who had recently come from Utah, my letter of instructions from -President Young was read, and the brethren unanimously sustained me as -president of the mission. Our party continued the journey, and after -much toil reached Moencoppy settlement on April 7th. I was quite ill at -this time. - -We continued the work necessary to establishing a settlement, but -there were so many difficulties that some of our company, which had -been increased by additions from Utah, began to feel discouraged. I -admonished and cheered them, causing them to feel better. We also -arranged for some of the company, in charge of S. B. Tanner, to go -up the Little Colorado River and secure twenty-three land claims for -us. This party started on Monday, April 17th. On the 22nd a Brother -Phillips came from Moencoppy and said a small company had reached there -without water, and that their teams were so exhausted that they could -not travel longer than about noon. We comprehended their suffering -condition, gathered all the barrels and kegs we had, and filled them -with water--about one hundred gallons--and Brothers Roson and Thompson -went to their relief. I then made out some notices to put up, giving -instructions so that other companies should not be caught in the same -predicament as this one had been. - -From time to time our numbers were augmented by additions from Utah, -many having come in and located at the places we had selected. Among -those who joined us at Moencoppy was my son-in-law, H. O. Fullmer, and -my daughter, Rachel E. On the 17th of May the members of our settlement -proceeded up the river to where S. B. Tanner and party had taken up -land for us. There was some dissatisfaction in the company, but after -prayerfully considering the situation all was made right. Then, on May -19th, Brothers Tanner, Haskell and I started on an exploring trip. We -were gone till July 3rd, and traveled several hundred miles, going -north and east through the country of the Navajos, the Moquis and the -Zunis. We saw the villages of each, and also many ancient ruins. We -passed over some good country, but much of it was very rough, and our -trip was an arduous one. - -While on this journey we were traveling along the Rio Perco, a -tributary of the Rio Grande del Norte, when, on June 17th, as we were -following a trail through a forest, an Indian stepped out from the edge -of the undergrowth, held up his hand, and said: "Stop! Who are you, -where do you come from, where are you going, and what is your business -in the Navajo country?" - -"We are Mormons from Utah," was our response, in Spanish, the language -in which our interrogator had spoken. - -"Stop your wagon under this tree," continued he, indicating a place, -"and talk to us; for we hear the Mormons have the history of our -forefathers. The Americans and Spaniards say you claim this, but we -know they often speak falsely, and we wish to learn from your own lips -whether you have such a record, and how you came by it. We want you to -stop here till our people come together, and you can tell us the truth." - -By this time another Indian had presented himself. We turned aside as -ordered, and the first Navajo said to the newcomer: "Show these men -where water is." - -Seth B. Tanner and Thales H. Haskell unhitched our team, and led -them to drink, the Indian going as guide. I was asked to get out of -the wagon, and as I was doing so a large number of Indians appeared, -coming from all directions. Almost before I realized it, there were -two hundred and fifty to three hundred Navajos there, men, women and -children. My chair was taken out of the wagon, a blanket was spread for -me, and I sat down, the Indians sitting close around. Two chiefs, whom -I learned were Juan San Juall and Jualito, sat as near to me as they -could, and one of them said, "If you have the book of our forefathers, -tell us about God and them, and how you came by the book." - -I produced a copy of the Book of Mormon, told them it was a record of -God's dealings with their fore-fathers, and explained to them how it -was revealed to the Prophet Joseph Smith by an angel. As I proceeded to -tell what was in the Book of Mormon, tears came to the eyes of many in -the audience, and some of them spoke out, "We know that what you say is -true, for the traditions of our good old men who never told a lie agree -with your story. Our forefathers did talk with God, and they wrote; and -when they became wicked and went to war they hid up their records, and -we know not where they are." - -At this point the chiefs and about ten other leading men rose up and -embraced me, saying, "Continue to tell us of God and our forefathers, -for it does our hearts good to hear of them." - -I talked on for a time, and when I was through, Messrs. Tanner and -Haskell, who had listened to what had been going on, bore witness that -what I had said was true. We remained with the Indians for dinner, -and they wanted us to stay longer, but we felt that it was better -to proceed on our journey. This meeting, one of the most sudden and -singular in my experience, occurred in New Mexico, about thirty miles -north of the old mail route from Albuquerque westward. When it was over -we continued our journey south and west, turned west to Fort Wingate, -then on to Fort Defiance, and through the Moquis villages to our -settlement. - -On the day of our return to Moencoppy, July 3rd, Brothers Roson and -Thompson came to meet us with barrels of water--a relief that we -appreciated greatly. We were highly pleased to learn that all was well -in the settlement. - -Soon after this I released two of the missionaries till October 1st, -to visit their families in Utah, and five others till November 1st, -for the same purpose. During July and the early part of August we -were engaged in tending and gathering crops, and the work incident -to establishing a settlement, which was by no means easy. We also -visited and endeavored to keep on good terms with the Indians, and for -ourselves did so; but there were some of the Navajos who seemed bent -on making trouble, and who complained that the settlers on the Little -Colorado had taken some of their animals. Finally, on August 6th, we -received word from the Indian council that a delegation of chiefs -would meet with us in three days, to accompany some of us on a visit -to the "Mormon Chief," to settle the alleged grievances. Ira Hatch and -I set out that same evening to meet the delegation. I took very ill, -and it was only through the best care and with great effort that I -could travel, but we were determined not to disappoint the Indians. I -received marked attention from Ira Hatch, also from J. D. Lee and wife -at the Moenabbey, and in a few hours was able to move around again as -usual. We met the Indians, and made the journey north, reaching Salt -Lake City on the evening of August 22nd, the Indians being lodged at D. -B. Huntington's for the night. - -Next day President Young met the delegation in his schoolhouse, -and talked over the supposed wrongs of the Mormon settlers to the -Navajos--for they were only supposed, as it turned out. I acted as -interpreter, using the Spanish language. Efforts had been made to find -some other interpreter who could talk the Navajo dialect, but in vain. -Everything was made satisfactory to the red men, who remained in Salt -Lake City four days. At this time a delegation of Shoshones from Bear -River came with George Hill as interpreter, and these met the Navajos -and the two tribes "buried the hatchet." Then the Navajos received a -few presents and returned to their homes. - -I had a conversation with President Young, in which I told him I had -come from Arizona not to return unless he ordered me to do so. A few -days later he met me and said he had been thinking over my mission. He -intended to press onward in settling Arizona and New Mexico, and as -I knew what that country was, he thought I had better travel through -Utah and lecture on the prospects of the work in the southern mission, -and also call for volunteers to accompany me in returning to Arizona. -He told me further that I was to take up collections among the Saints -for the support of myself and family, and for an outfit for myself. -In pursuance of these instructions he gave me a letter to the Bishops -and other authorities. This document mentioned my missionary labors in -Arizona, said I was directed to lecture among the Saints on the mission -work and take up contributions, and counseled the authorities to render -me assistance in harmony with the call made of me. It closed as follows: - -"Brother Brown is also authorized to receive the names of those who -are willing or desirous of helping to build up the Kingdom of God -in that region. We learn that the brethren are discovering new and -desirable valleys in the neighborhood of their present settlements, and -elsewhere, and it is our intention to keep pushing out and onward as -fast as prudence and the whisperings of the Spirit of the Lord shall -dictate. - -"We desire the active co-operation of our brethren in this important -work, and shall be pleased to receive a goodly list of volunteers -through Brother Brown, consisting of men who love the Gospel, -have faith in the promises of the Father, and have the integrity, -determination and zeal of true Latter-day Saints. We have no fear that -too many will respond to this invitation, as the rich valleys south and -east of the Colorado offer homes for hundreds of those who desire to -extend the curtains of Zion in that direction. - -"We are informed that some of the brethren entertain the idea that it -is better to be called by the authorities to such missions than to -volunteer. To such we will quote the saying of the Lord to the Prophet -Joseph Smith, as contained in the Doctrine and Covenants: 'He that -waiteth to be commanded in all things is a slothful servant.' - -"Ever praying for the welfare of Israel, I remain your brother in the -Gospel, - -"BRIGHAM YOUNG." - -This letter was dated September 16, 1876. - -Soon afterward I went as directed, traveling and lecturing in northern -Utah, with a visit to Almy, Wyoming; then worked my way southward in -the various counties, to Richfield. I lectured sixty-five times, and -secured about eighty volunteers, mostly from Sevier County. Ira Hatch -came up with me and at Richfield we separated, he taking my team and -going to Kanab, and I returning home to provide for my family and -then rejoin him at the town last named. I found several of my family -quite ill, and there had been one death--my Aunt Polly, who died on -Christmas day, a few days before my arrival home. - -The opening of the year 1877 found me with my family, who soon began to -amend in health. I was also able to supply them fairly well with what -they needed for sustenance during my absence, as the Bishops and Saints -whom I had visited had been very kind and liberal, in response to the -invitation of President Young to promote the interests of the southern -mission by rendering assistance to me so I could proceed to that field -of labor. - - - -CHAPTER LXII. - -AGAIN IN ARIZONA--SETTLING DIFFICULTIES AMONG THE PEOPLE--OUR -RESERVOIR BURSTS--NEWS OF NOTABLE EVENTS--PREPARE TO REPEL AN -INDIAN RAID--INDIANS QUARREL, AND THE TROUBLE PASSES OVER--FUNERAL -AT MOENCOPPY--EXPLORING TRIP TO THE SOUTHEAST--A WHITE INDIAN -CHILD--MEET THE HEAD CHIEF OF THE NAVAJOS--HIS ADDRESS, AND -PROPOSITION TO ACCOMPANY ME TO SALT LAKE CITY--AGREE ON A DATE FOR -THE JOURNEY--CONTINUE MY TRIP OYER INTO NEW MEXICO, THEN RETURN TO -MOENCOPPY--ACCUSATION AGAINST ME DISPROVED--INDIANS GATHER TO GO TO -SALT LAKE CITY--MAKE THE TRIP--AT PRESIDENT YOUNG'S DEATHBED--VISIT OF -THE INDIANS--HONORABLE RELEASE FROM MY MISSION--RESUME HOME MISSIONARY -LABORS--IN PRISON FOR CONSCIENCE SAKE. - -MY stay at home was brief, and the 26th of January, 1877, found me -again at Kanab, ready to proceed southward. Three days later the start -was made, and on the morning of February 5th we reached Moencoppy. -The people there were in poor spirits, and considerably dissatisfied. -During my absence they had sowed about fourteen acres of fall grain and -had built eight log rooms. On my arrival, A. S. Gibbons made complaint -against S. B. Tanner, for they had had a disagreement. Tanner was found -to be in error, and made the matter right. - -This trouble settled, the work of plowing and planting and setting out -trees, was proceeded with. Friendly Navajo and Oriba Indians visited -us, and as the United Order was being preached to the Church at that -time, I gave my views on the subject in an address at the Thursday -evening meeting, March 8th. Again on Sunday, the 11th, I preached to -the Saints, telling them plainly the wrong that was in their neglect -of duty and disaffection. My remarks had quite a salutary effect, and -matters moved more smoothly. - -Shortly after midnight on the morning of March 23rd, the message was -brought that our reservoir had given way. We hurried out, but had to -wait till daylight before we could do effective work in repairing the -dam. In the meantime the Indians were greatly excited because the water -was injuring their crops, and we had to pacify the red men as best -we could, and make good the damage. Two days after this my daughter, -Mrs. Fullmer, became a mother, and I rendered her necessary care and -attention. - -On March 31st we received mail with the news of the result of the -presidential election, when Hayes and Tilden were the candidates, also -of Amasa M. Lyman's death, and of John D. Lee being sentenced to be -shot. On April 4th we received tidings of Lee's execution. - -Our time was well occupied now with the work around the settlement; -I also engaged in studying the Navajo language, preparatory to an -extended visit among those Indians. All went well till May 8th, when -I learned that the Piute Indians intended to steal our animals. Chief -Patnish was dead, and his people were angry. For the first time in the -history of the mission, we called out a guard, gathered our animals -and property, and provided against a raid on the part of the savages. -We were assisted by some friendly Navajos. At our inspection we -ascertained that we could fire eighty-five shots without stopping to -reload. On the 17th, two Piute Indians came in and informed us that a -council had been held to discuss the raid on us, but the vote was six -to five against molesting us, and the council broke up in a fight. The -five Indians who were in favor of attacking us started to seek the -assistance of the Ute Indians, while the others came to our side. A -week later we had a talk with some of the Piutes, and the threatened -trouble was averted. - -A funeral occurred in the settlement on May 27th--that of Minty, the -little daughter of W. J. Johnston. I preached the funeral sermon. For -some time previous to and after this occasion my health was quite poor. -On June 1st we had another Indian scare, and made ready for attack, but -the alarm was without sufficient cause. - -Before this time several of our company had endeavored to learn the -Navajo language, but met with little success; so I determined to -study the Indian language and customs myself, that I might be able to -talk freely with the red men. Accordingly, on June 4th, I went up the -Moencoppy Wash to Chief Hustelso's camp, about twenty-five miles. It -was arranged that I should be left there alone, except that Ira Hatch's -eight-year old girl was to stay with and wait on me. The Indian camp -was located two or three miles from where George A. Smith, Jr. was -killed some years before, probably by the same Indians. - -H. O. Fullmer and Ira Hatch went with me, and eight Navajos assisted -in letting my wagon down into the Wash, where I was left. The bed -of the stream was perhaps three thousand feet below the plain above -on the north side, while the cliffs on the south towered up almost -perpendicularly about five thousand feet. The Indian camp was in the -deep recess, the descent into which was both difficult and dangerous. A -wagon could not be drawn down or up by team, but for a thousand feet or -so had to be lowered from one cliff to another with ropes. In one place -the Indians had cut eighteen steps, to enable them to get their animals -up and down; and then occasionally a horse would go over and be killed. - -In this place the first night gave me a decidedly lonesome feeling. -Chief Hustelso was friendly, but not so his people, except a few -old men. The young men were very surly, and would not talk. Some of -them were shooting arrows, and I tried to be friendly and proposed -to shoot with them, but three of the young braves drew their bows on -me, as if intending to kill me. I made no headway that night, and I -realized the gloominess that had prevented my companions remaining -there and learning to speak the Navajo tongue. The next day or two I -was threatened and illtreated, the burrs taken off my wagon, and I was -subjected to other annoyances. The little girl with me did fairly well, -for, being a half-breed Indian herself, she affiliated with the Indian -children without difficulty. - -Then the Indians became less offensive in their conduct day by day, -and I learned rapidly to converse with them, and began to experience -kindness at their hands. Several strange Indians came from a -considerable distance to see me, and on June 12th, about three hundred -and fifty Navajos gathered around to hear me tell them of the Book of -Mormon, its discovery and contents. Book in hand I related to them -the story of the volume being the history of their forefathers. Some -laughed at me and others asked most searching questions, which I was -able to answer satisfactorily in their own dialect. - -Then came the inquiry, "If it is our book, how did you get it? Did you -steal it?" I was getting pretty well puzzled, owing to my imperfect -acquaintance with the Navajo language. I told them that the book was -obtained in the east, about so many days' journey off. But I could not -explain to them that it was in a stone box in the Hill Cumorah, and -that the writings were on gold plates, for I did not know what terms to -use to convey my meaning. One Indian told me the book could not have -lasted so long as I said, because paper would decay, he knew that. -In order to learn what hill was, I made a small hill of sand, and by -comparison with the mountains and much explanation I learned the word -for hill. - -I had noticed, almost up to the plateau above, some slate rock; and -after great difficulty I managed to climb and get several pieces -of slate down, being aided by the little girl. Then I improvised a -stone box, set it in the sand hill, placed the book therein, and thus -ascertained how to say stone box, in Navajo, and explained that the -record was deposited therein. I was almost beaten to tell of gold -plates, for I did not know the words to use. At last I bethought me of -a brass suspender buckle, and pointed out that what I was referring to -was like that, but was not that; and a little piece was worth several -silver dollars. Then one Indian recognized what I wanted to say, and -gave me the word for gold, on the coins of which he had seen small -letters. I was thus able to explain that the record was on plates -of gold; but the way I learned to do it was one of the marvelous -experiences of my life, and illustrates the difficulties I had to meet -in learning the Navajo language. - -When I reached the point of telling how the Book of Mormon plates were -preserved and obtained, my audience was quite in touch with me, and -they rejoiced and wept while I told them further of its contents. From -that time no friendship was too great for me, and before my departure -I spent a day, by invitation, viewing Indian sports. By June 20, I was -through at Hustelso's camp and ready for a journey of exploration which -had been planned. - -On June 21st our exploring party, consisting of six persons, including -my son-in-law and his wife and child, started on a trip, the general -direction of travel being a little south of east. Our journey led us -through some good country, and some that was very rough. We went a -short distance into New Mexico, and obtained considerable knowledge -of the country and its inhabitants, there being many Indian villages, -houses and farms on the route we traveled. As we were crossing over a -broad mesa, on June 27, after passing the Fort Defiance road, we met -with a strange person among the people. This was a fullblood Indian -girl seven or eight years of age, with white hair, blue eyes, and skin -as fair as the fairest white person. - -Next day we reached the camp of Pal Chil Clane, a Navajo chief at -whose place a council had been appointed. From there a messenger was -dispatched to Totoso-ne--Huste, the head chief of the Navajo nation. On -the evening of the following day that chief arrived in the camp. - -A consultation was held on June 29th with the chieftain, at which we -informed him of our desire to settle the country, to teach the Indians -the Gospel, and to aid in improving their general condition; we also -told of the Book of Mormon, a record of the Indians' forefathers, which -had been made known. The chief responded that it was a departure from -his usual rule to come and see the white men. Before this, they always -had come to him, or he had sent good men to meet the government agents -and others. This also had been his custom with the Mormons up to that -occasion. Among other things he said: - -"When I heard that you had come, I quit work and came to see you. My -heart is glad at the meeting with you, and that I see your wagon there, -and the brush shade that your men have built. Stop here four days, and -many of our best men will come and talk to you, for a great many of -our people want to go and see the Mormons. We shall have a big talk -and know what to do. We are glad that you come among us as friends, -that you are making a road through our country, and that you have built -houses at Moencoppy. We want to live with you in peace and let your -animals eat grass in peace. But water is scarce in this country, there -is barely enough for our numerous flocks and increasing people, and our -good old men do not want your people to build any more houses by the -springs; nor do we want you to bring flocks to eat the grass about the -springs. We want to live by you as friends. I sent some good men with -you last year, and they say you talked one talk all the time. The great -Mormon father he talked straight all the time. I think that a good road -to travel in. I have had two daughters prisoners among the Apaches -for many years but have never left my home to search for them, for I -love my home and my people, and I do not love to travel. I have sent -good and true men to search for my children, and have appealed to the -American captains in different places, yet my daughters have not been -brought back. I am an old man now, and it is hard for me to travel long -roads, but I wish to see the Mormons and my father their captain. I am -inclined to go with you. I want twenty-five or thirty men to go with -me, and one or two women, to see your women and learn how they do. I am -much pleased to see you and your daughter and her baby. I want to see -more of your people. The Americans and your people differ in religion. -The Mormons say their captain talks with God (Pagocheda), and Americans -say God does not talk to men. We do not know what to believe. When God -talks to us, then we shall know. Until then we want to live as friends." - -After our talk we separated, he promising to return in three days. -He came, and I accompanied him to a Navajo religious feast, where I -was introduced to thirteen chiefs and over two hundred other Navajo -Indians. This was on July 2nd. It was decided that some of them would -go to see the Mormons, and be at Moencoppy in thirty-eight days. Then -we bade the Indians good-by, and proceeded on our journey, going over -into New Mexico, and back to Moencoppy, where we arrived on July 15th. -There were quite a number of Navajos, Piutes and Hopees there, and I -had to talk with them and three Mexicans till quite late. - -A week later, on July 22nd, I declined to administer the sacrament, -owing to the feeling of dissatisfaction among the people. A. S. Gibbons -and M. P. Mortensen circulated reports against me, that I had used -provisions contributed to the mission, and I had a full investigation -made; this showed that the accusation was entirely wrong. Other -meetings were held subsequently, and the ill feeling that had arisen -was dispensed with. The mission affairs then proceeded smoothly again. - -It was on the morning of August 8th that the Navajo Indian delegation -began to assemble for the journey north, Totoso-ne-Huste among the -number, and by the 10th all were ready for the start. The journey was a -hard one much of the way, but when we got among the settlements in Utah -we were well treated, and the Indians highly pleased. We reached Salt -Lake City August 28, 1877. - -The next day I visited President Young. He was very ill, and I merely -called to see him. The great pioneer and prophet who had done so -much for the opening up and settlement of the Great West was on his -deathbed. The magnificent work of his life was over. In half an hour -after I left his room, the noble spirit passed from his body, and he -slept in death, awaiting the resurrection morn. - -On the evening of August 29, the _Deseret News_ published the following -regarding the Navajo delegation and myself: - -"Indian Delegation.--Last evening Elder James S. Brown arrived from the -south with a delegation of Navajo Indians, one of whom is a woman, the -first female Navajo, we believe, that has ever visited this part of -the country. Garanu Namunche, or Totoso-ne-Huste, the former being his -Spanish and the latter his Indian name, is at the head of the party. He -is, in fact, the head chief of the Navajo nation. He is accompanied by -two other leading men, Honeco, brother of the former, and Esclepelehen, -son of the same. In June last Elder Brown and a party of brethren -visited the northeastern part of Arizona and the north-western portion -of New Mexico, and found a strong spirit of inquiry among the Navajos -relative to the Mormon people, their methods of farming, manufacturing, -and in relation to their institutions generally. These inquiries were -incited by the report of the Navajo delegation which visited this city -a year ago, and these composing the one now here have come to see, -hear and examine for themselves, that they may be witnesses of the -same things. Brother Brown and party held a council with the Indians -at the camp of Pal Chil Clane, about two hundred men of the tribe -being present on the occasion, including Totoso-ne-Huste, the leading -chief already mentioned. It was then that the latter proposed to pay -the present visit. Manlete, or Pahada Pahadane, is the war chief of -the nation, but in the estimation of the tribe is second in rank to -Totoso-ne-Huste, although the whites, or "Americans," recognize the war -chief as the head. The delegation are stopping at the house of Brother -Brown, and have been visiting the leading places of interest in the -city today. Elder Brown purposes taking them north to Bear River on -Monday." - -On August 30th, the Indians and I met Daniel H. Wells, who had been -counselor to President Young in the First Presidency. At that interview -President Wells told me I had performed a great and good work, and -to ask me to return to Arizona was too much to require of me. I was -therefore honorably released from that mission. Subsequently I received -a formal release from President John Taylor, who succeeded to the -presidency of the Church. - -After the funeral of President Young, which was held on September 2nd, -I accompanied the Indians as far south as Gunnison, Sanpete County, -on their way home. There I bade them goodbye, and returned northward, -to resume my missionary labors, traveling and lecturing among the -settlements in Utah, southern Idaho, and western Wyoming. I also -purchased a tract of eighty acres of land on the Redwood Road, in the -western part of Salt Lake City, and worked on that in the spring and -summer, traveling and preaching in the autumn and winter as President -Young had directed me to do. - -Thus my time was occupied till the spring of 1892 with the exception -of the months of March, April and May, 1888. With a firm conviction -that plurality of wives was a law of God. I had entered into that -relationship honorably with a sincere purpose to follow the right. My -family were united with me in accepting this union as of the highest, -holiest, most sacred character in the sight of the Most High. I -could not feel to cast aside my wives whom I had married under these -conditions, and therefore, on March 12, 1888, I was sentenced to prison -on a charge of unlawful cohabitation, the legal term applied to living -with more than one wife, the law being specially directed at one of the -religious practices of the Latter-day Saints. The judgment pronounced -against me was three months' imprisonment in the penitentiary and to -pay a fine of one hundred dollars and costs, which amounted in my case -to twenty-seven dollars and fifty cents. I paid the fine and served the -term, less the time allowed for good behavior, and was released May 28, -1888, having been in prison two months and sixteen days. - -As was the case with other Mormons in my position, our offense was not -looked upon even by non-Mormons acquainted with the circumstances as -containing the element of crime; but our incarceration was in fact an -imprisonment for conscience sake, that being the position in which the -law found us. A term in the penitentiary under those conditions and at -that time, while a severe hardship, especially upon one in my state of -health, was by no means a moral disgrace, since those who had to endure -it were of the better class of men, whose uprightness, honor, integrity -and sincerity were beyond question in the community where their lives -were an open book. - - - -CHAPTER LXIII. - -VISITED BY PRESIDENT JOSEPH F. SMITH--CALLED ON ANOTHER MISSION TO THE -SOCIETY ISLANDS--PREPARE TO RESPOND--A BLESSING BY APOSTLE LORENZO -SNOW--APPOINTED TO PRESIDE OYER THE SOCIETY ISLANDS MISSION--ATTEMPTS -TO DISCOURAGE ME FROM UNDERTAKING THE JOURNEY--SURPRISE PARTY BY MY -CHILDREN--FAREWELL RECEPTION IN THE WARD HALL--START ON MY MISSION, -ACCOMPANIED BY MY SON AND OTHERS WHO HAD BEEN CALLED--VOYAGE TO -TAHITI--MADMAN ON BOARD THE VESSEL--AT MARQUESAS ISLANDS--STRANGE -CHARACTERS--TATTOOED WHITE MAN--HIS PECULIAR CAREER--CATCHING -SHARKS--ARRIVE AT PAPEETE--MY RECEPTION THERE--MEET NATIVE JOSEPHITE -PREACHERS, WHO SEEM CONFUSED--ELDERS FROM UTAH GREET US--IN POOR HEALTH. - -ON March 30, 1892, President Joseph F. Smith called at my residence -in Salt Lake City, and handed me a letter written by an Elder who was -on the island of Tahiti. At the same time President Smith asked me -how I would like to take another mission to the Society Islands, in -the South Pacific Ocean. I told him I did not wish any man to call me -on a mission--that my health was not good, and such a journey as he -suggested was a big undertaking for one in my condition. He replied -that he would leave the letter for me to read, and would call the next -day to learn what I thought of it. He came according to appointment, -and informed me that the First Presidency wanted me to undertake the -mission. I replied that when properly called I was not afraid to go, as -I had faith that God would not require of any man more than he would -have the ability to do if he were faithful. The day following this -conversation I visited the First Presidency and learned that they were -a unit in requesting me to go to the Society Islands. - -From this time I began to settle my affairs to meet the call. On April -8th, I was set apart for the mission, Elder Francis M. Lyman being -mouth in the blessing. On the 15th, I went to Ogden on business, and -while on the train met Apostle Lorenzo Snow, who told me he felt the -spirit of prophecy. He said that the mission I was going on should -be one of the greatest I had ever performed; that I would prosper -therein and be blessed with more power and influence than ever before; -that the Lord would be with me to sustain and comfort me, and that my -family should be provided for. As he spoke I felt a thrill of testimony -through my whole being. When he concluded he took from his pocket -two five-dollar gold pieces, remarking that he had been a missionary -himself, and insisted that I should take the money, keep it till I got -in a close place, and then use it, which I did. - -On April 22nd I received at President Woodruff's office a letter of -appointment to preside over the Society Islands Mission, which included -the Society and Tuamotu groups, comprising from eighty to one hundred -islands and an area of about fifteen hundred square miles. About this -time I had many visitors, a considerable number of whom expressed -surprise at my being appointed to such a mission at my time of life -and in my condition; for I was sixty-four years of age and walked -on crutches and one foot, as I had to abandon my artificial limb in -Arizona, owing to the intense pain it caused me. One man said that -he would not go in my situation for ten thousand dollars. But these -discouraging remarks did not raise a doubt in my mind of the propriety -of the call. - -On the 24th of April I was engaged in writing, when my children -and grandchildren to the number of sixty-five burst in upon me in -a surprise party. We had a happy time and I gave them a father's -blessing. Then we repaired to the Seventeenth Ward meeting house, where -members of the ward had assembled, and I preached a farewell sermon and -took an affectionate leave of the people. - -I sold some of my real estate to pay the expenses of my journey, and -for my family; also received contributions in money from a number of -friends; and on April 26th I started on my mission, accompanied by my -son Elando. We stayed over night at Ogden, then continued on to San -Francisco, arriving there April 28th. On April 30th we boarded the -barkentine _City of Papeete_, which sailed the next day. - -The sea voyage occupied the entire month of May, Tahiti coming into -view on the evening of the 31st. Our fare, cabin, was seventy-five -dollars each. The first few days out we had headwinds, and there was -a goodly share of seasickness. On the 10th a native of Tahiti, named -Manhele, commonly known as John Bull, became violently insane, and -had to be restrained. On the 12th he freed himself and crawled out on -the jib boom, from which he was about to plunge into the sea, when he -was secured. It took five men to handle him. At five o'clock on the -morning of the 15th it was discovered that the madman had made a fire -by rubbing two sticks together. Fortunately he was detected in time to -prevent the ship being set aflame. A few days after this occurrence his -condition improved and continued so to the end of the voyage. - -It was at the Marquesas Islands on May 26th, when we sailed into port, -that I went ashore with the rest of the passengers, and met a native -of Rapia, a very uninviting person in appearance. The people warned us -to beware of him as he was a savage and had killed five men. He told -me he had seen me forty years before on his native island, and related -circumstances of the event that convinced me his statement was true. - -[Image: Marquesas Fire Dancers] - -The next man I spoke to ashore was John H. Rumrell of Boston, -Massachusetts, who was taken prisoner by natives on the Marquesas -Islands in 1847, and in the following year was tattooed from the tip -of his nose to just above his eyebrows, and back to his ear on the -left side of his face; on the right side the tattooing went from the -lower part of the nose back to the ear; while above the eyebrow, and -reaching to the ear, was another strip. The ink was pricked in with -human bone. He said that it was because of this tattooing that he -would not return to his people. In his experience he had been without -clothing for years. He had two sons and one daughter, and lived like -the natives in every respect. He related how that on one occasion the -natives had killed a white man and cooked and ate him, and at the same -time they had killed a colored man, who was eaten raw, before the -flesh was cold. Mr. Rumrell said he seldom heard from his relatives -in Boston. He seemed almost oblivious to everything except what was -immediately before him; he took as little interest in civilization as -did the natives, and I have not found a lower class of people in the -South Pacific than on the five of eleven Marquesas islands which were -inhabited at the time of this visit. - -The captain of our vessel informed me that the inhabitants of the group -numbered about four thousand eight hundred souls, and that there were -ten deaths among the natives to one birth, the chief cause of this -mortality being the opium habit. The French governor was trying to -prohibit the use of the drug, but so far had not been successful. - -On the voyage down to the Marquesas we saw many flying fish, whales and -other varieties of the finny tribe. On May 12th the sailors caught two -sharks, and after cutting them up threw them overboard. We left the -port of Taihai, in the Marquesas, on May 28th, and on the 31st sighted -Tahiti, entering the harbor of Papeete on June 1st, after considerable -trouble. - -I remained on board till the afternoon. Mr. Dorence Atwater, formerly -United States consul there, came on the vessel, and recognizing me told -me he had an empty room that I was welcome to occupy with my friends -until I could do better. I felt that this courtesy had been offered as -an answer to my prayers to the Lord. I accepted the invitation and we -went to the house he had been speaking of, from where we returned to -the wharf, and he bade me good evening. - -While resting myself a moment near a group of natives I spoke to them, -when one came forward and asked why I was there. I replied that I had -come to preach the Gospel. At this he called four of his companions and -introduced them as Mormon missionaries of the Reorganized Church of -Latter-day Saints, or followers of young Joseph Smith, the Prophet's -son. I told them I did not belong to their organization, but to the -true Church of Saints, the same as when I was on the islands before. -They seemed surprised and confused, and after a pause inquired if I -knew the Josephite missionaries that came from America. I answered -that all the true Mormon missionaries came from Salt Lake City and -vicinity. Then I asked if they knew where I could get a bed, and after -consultation one of them said I could go with him. My baggage, however, -was not through the custom house, and the captain suggested that I had -better stay on board, so I went back to the vessel. - -That evening Elders Joseph W. Damron and Wm. A. Seegmiller, -missionaries from Utah, came on board and asked if there were any -Latter-day Saints there. I introduced myself, then my son Elando, and -Elder Thomas Jones. Elder Damron insisted that we go on shore with him -for the night, which we did, and my son and I were comfortably located -at the home of Tiniarau, where we remained some time. The other Elders -went to a house about three miles distant, but next day moved to Mr. -Atwater's place. For some days I was very tired and in poor health, and -remained at the house talking to people who called. - - - -CHAPTER LXIV. - -FIRST SABBATH IN TAHITI--MEET SEVERAL PERSONS WHOM I KNEW OVER -FORTY YEARS BEFORE--HOW THEY REMEMBERED ME--SEEK PERMISSION TO HOLD -PUBLIC MEETINGS--WIDOW OF MY OLD FRIEND, JOHN LAYTON, CALLS ON -ME--OTHER FRIENDS--PREACH TO THE JOSEPHITES--GOVERNOR REFUSES TO -PERMIT US TO HOLD PUBLIC MEETINGS--GET ADVICE OF THE UNITED STATES -CONSUL--A LAWYER'S COUNSEL--JOSEPHITES TELL OF B. F. GROUARD--I -EXPLAIN HOW HE HAD TURNED INTO THE WRONG PATH--THE CHURCH NEVER -DISORGANIZED--MISSIONARY LABORS--GREETING A FRENCH ADMIRAL--EARLY -MISSIONARIES TO TAHITI--THEIR SEVERE EXPERIENCES--SIXTY-FOURTH -ANNIVERSARY OF MY BIRTH--LEARN OF MORMONS WHO WERE HANGED FOR -HAVING KILLED A POLICEMAN IN THE TROUBLE WHEN I WAS ARRESTED ON -MY FIRST MISSION TO THE ISLANDS--MEET A NATIVE OF PITCAIRN'S -ISLAND--HIS STORY--VISIT TAUTILA--SEVERE VOYAGE--A BAPTISM--SAIL FOR -TUBUOI--AMONG STRANGERS--CELEBRATION OF A FRENCH FETE DAY--DINE WITH -THE GOVERNOR--PEOPLE BECOME LESS UNFRIENDLY TO US--BREAKING OF THE -CLOUDS--BAPTIZE TWENTY-FOUR PERSONS--ENCOURAGING RESULTS OF MISSIONARY -EFFORTS. - -OUR first Sabbath in Tahiti (June 5, 1892,) we attended the Josephite -meeting. The service was very brief, and the people seemed worried. -Next day several of the Josephites called on me, and after a lengthy -conversation told me they knew I spoke the truth to them. I was also -visited by a number of friends who were young when I was on the islands -before, but who remembered me. One who came from Anaa said he was -present when I first landed on that island, and he knew of my labors -and my having been arrested by the French. He remembered me by my -voice, and said the people who heard me then would know me in the same -way, if they did not by seeing me. Many natives came and said they were -glad to see and hear me, though they had been born since I left the -country. - -A Mr. Henry, a son of a former minister of the Church of England, -called, and I loaned him a Voice of Warning. He invited me to spend the -evening with himself and wife, but I had an appointment. I went next -evening, however, and passed a very enjoyable time, as I did on several -occasions afterwards. During that week I was visited by very many -people. Mr. Atwater gave us the privilege of holding public meetings -in his house, but we understood it was necessary to get the permission -of the director and secretary of the interior for the province, so -Mr. Atwater and I called. That official said we were to submit the -application to the governor, and he would notify Mr. Atwater of the -reply. On Saturday evening I talked on the market grounds to a large -number of people, several of whom recognized me as having been on the -island forty years before. That evening, at the wharf, I also met with -an aged man from Anaa, who had known me on my former mission, and who -said that if I would go there the people would follow my teachings. - -On Sunday, the 12th, who should come to see me but Mrs. Layton, a -native, the widow of my old friend John Layton. I had seen her in San -Francisco. My own sister could not have been more pleased to see me, -and I was very glad to meet her. She gave me the best history of my -former friends on the islands that I was able to obtain. Next morning -I took a short stroll, then returned to the house. The other Elders -distributed tracts among the English-speaking residents of Papeete, -and I received another call from Mrs. Layton, who brought her little -granddaughters and also a man--the son of an old friend of mine--who -said that on my former visit to the island I had named him Iatobo, -after my own Tahitian name. - -It was while taking breakfast, on the 14th, with a Mr. Mervin, some of -whose children had been blessed in the Church, that an old lady who -came up, recognized me, and shook hands so persistently that it seemed -as if she did not intend to let go, and did not do so for some minutes. -She had seen the French officers take me away from Anaa. The old lady -had known me on sight, though forty years had passed. The same day I -met an aged man who also recognized me from having known me before. -That same evening I was given the privilege of addressing the Josephite -meeting and told them how and by whom the Gospel had been brought to -them, and which was the true Church. I tendered my services to preach -in their meeting house, but my offer was not accepted. - -On the 16th I started with Elder Seegmiller to visit the old prison -where I had been incarcerated by the French, but the distance being -too great I had to give up the journey. Next day we received from the -governor a reply to our application for permission to hold public -meetings. Our request was denied, the reason assigned being that we -believed in polygamy. We had no disposition to let the matter rest -there, so we called on the United States consul for advice. He told us -to make application in writing for permission to preach, and if refused -to submit it to him. This we did on the 20th, and next day received an -unfavorable answer. The governor asked what we taught, and we told him. -We stated that we did not teach polygamy. The reason he then gave for -refusing us the permission desired was that there were enough religions -there and he did not want another established. Mr. Atwater suggested -that we consult with Mr. Bonett, formerly director and secretary of the -interior, and an able lawyer. We did so, and he informed us that it was -not necessary to get permission to preach, but that we must notify the -mayor or justice of the peace of the time and place of our meetings. - -To return a few days: On Sunday, the 19th of June, we attended a -Josephite meeting, where all were friendly but the presiding officer; -yet after meeting he told us to come and eat, sent a half-caste to wait -on us, and otherwise was quite attentive. After dinner we talked to -the audience, who appeared well pleased. They said B. F. Grouard had -set native songs to American tunes, and that he had also sent letters -endorsing the Josephite church; he had been one of the first to preach -the true Gospel to their fathers, as I had been, and they were confused -at my coming, for they could not refute what I had said. I was under -the necessity of telling them how that Grouard had turned into the -wrong path--an action which they admitted was quite possible. After -our talk this day we felt that we had done our full duty towards those -Josephites in explaining to them the true condition of affairs. - -On the afternoon of the 20th my old friend Mahana Toro called, but did -not seem so friendly as in former times. He was about seventy years of -age, and very much broken in health. He also had joined the Josephites -under the misapprehension that they were of the same Church as I was. I -told him the difference, that the Josephite organization was distinct, -and was not the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, which -never had been disorganized. He then seemed to feel more kindly towards -me, and visited me on subsequent occasions, bringing gifts of oranges. - -My health was very poor, and at times I was quite ill. I was able -most of the time, however, to get around, and to preach to the -people, either those who called on me, or those I had the privilege -of visiting. My missionary companions were also energetic in their -labors. Occasionally we had the opportunity to extend our acquaintance -into prominent circles of society. For instance, on June 27th, we -attended a select party in honor of the French admiral. There was a -grand illumination. I also visited captains of vessels engaged in -traffic between the islands, and had pleasant chats with them on -the principles of the Gospel. I did not fail to talk to the natives -whenever occasion offered, and this was frequent. On July 2nd, in the -market square, a large crowd gathered around me as I preached, and -most of them acknowledged the truth of the principles I taught. Then, -lest the police stop me for raising an excitement, I changed to asking -questions, as in conversation, so no offense could be taken by the -officers. - -I learned an interesting bit of missionary history on July 3rd. This -day, I met Mr. J. S. Henry, who said his father was one of the first -Christian missionaries on the islands, having come to Tahiti in 1797. -They had a very hard time of it. For years their clothing was made of -the bark of the bread-fruit tree, and they had gone barefooted for a -long time, their shoes and clothing having worn out. They had been five -years without receiving any supply from their society. My informant -was born on the island. I loaned him a copy of the _Deseret News_, which -contained sermons by President Wilford Woodruff and by Elder C. W. -Penrose, who was editor of the paper at that time. - -Monday, July 4, 1892, was the sixty-fourth anniversary of my birth, and -I was spending it in far off Tahiti. I had but few callers that day, -and consequently but few congratulations. I continued my efforts to -make myself more proficient in the Tahitian language, and from day to -day proceeded with the duties that rested on me. July 12th an aged man -Tematu called on me, saying that he was from the island of Anaa, and -had been my servant on the occasion of my former visit. He told me of -the four members of the Church that were hanged by the French; for in -the trouble then they had killed a policeman and had wounded severely a -Catholic priest. The names of the executed men were Tefaitina, Reifara, -Maru, Mafeuta and Temutu. - -Among the very aged people I met was one who called on me on July 18, -Timou, aged one hundred and three years. I also met, at a blacksmith -shop, on July 21st, a native of Pitcairn's island, William Christenson. -He was a descendant of one of the mutineers of the British ship _Bounty_. -He told the story as follows: The _Bounty_ sailed from England in the -year 1689, the company intending to collect plants from the South -Sea Islands. They called at Tahiti, and made their collection, then -got some natives and their wives and some other women on board, and -put out to sea. Fletcher Christenson, first mate, and some of the -crew mutinied, getting control of the vessel. They put the captain, -whose name was Blythe, and those who wished to go with him, into the -best boat, supplied them with such articles as they desired which -were at hand, and set them adrift. This party subsequently reached -England, while the first mate and crew ran the ship into a small bay at -Pitcairn's Island, where they wrecked the vessel, taking the supplies -on shore. All went well for a time, till the native men became jealous -of the white men and killed most of them. Afterwards, at the instance -of the remaining white men, the women killed the native men who had -escaped in the former trouble, so there were left but two of the white -men and the women. These, and after them, their descendants, lived on -the island, which was but a few miles in circumference. The population -increased to about four hundred souls, when the British government -moved them to Norfolk Island. Some of them returned to Pitcairn's, and -at that time (1892) there were one hundred and thirty-six souls on the -island, every one belonging to the Seventh Day Adventists, and all -speaking the English language. Mr. Christenson said that the only names -of the mutinous crew he remembered besides those of the captain and his -own progenitor, were John Adams, ---- McKay, John Mills, Isaac Brown and ----- Yindle. Christenson's story does not harmonize precisely with the -generally accepted history of the affair, but I have given it as he -related it. - -For a considerable time we had endeavored to get passage for some -of the Elders to the island of Tuamotu, but were unsuccessful, so -we divided Papeete into missionary districts, Elder Damron and my -son Elando taking the east side, and Elders Seegmiller and Jones the -western district. During the latter part of July and the greater -portion of August, I was quite ill, and was troubled greatly with -neuralgia. On August 14th, we applied to the Josephites for permission -to speak in their house, but it was refused, resulting in quite a -discussion among the members of the Josephite congregation, some of -whom were quite friendly to us. On the 23rd my son Elando and I left -Papeete, by invitation, for Tautila, going in a boat in which there -were four other men and a woman, the latter being a sister of the owner -of the craft. When we got off Haapape the wind became so high that the -men were obliged to row for the shore, and we found refuge in the home -of Terumana, a native, who fed us on native food and gave each of us a -good bed. - -We had to remain there till 11 p.m. on the 25th, when we started to sea -again, the night being pitch dark. The woman made me as comfortable -as was possible in the small boat, and all went well for a time with -the exception of seasickness. Then it came on to rain very hard, and -we were all wet. Early in the morning we ran into shore, and the men -in charge of the boat asked us to pray, which I did. We then proceeded -on our way with a cocoanut each for breakfast, and at half-past eight -p.m., on the 26th, reached the mouth of a river on Tautila. - -Our host was Mr. Hiotina, and his wife's name was Teumere. She was -an invalid, her frame almost a skeleton, but she was a very bright -woman intellectually. Her memorizing of Scripture passages was truly a -marvel. The next day after our arrival was Saturday, and many people -came out of curiosity to see us. On Sunday, the 28th, about sixty -people assembled, and our host requested us to hold religious services, -which we did. While I was preaching on faith, repentance, and baptism, -taking my text from the third chapter of Matthew, an old lady went -over to my son, who was near the door, and requested baptism. This was -the first application of the kind made to us on the island. The lady -had been a member of the Church, but had become negligent. At 5 p.m. -that day she was baptized by Elder Elando Brown, and I confirmed her -a member of the Church, there being many people present, among them a -Protestant minister. - -We stayed on Tautila until September 9th, visiting among the people and -preaching and talking to them, as opportunity afforded, though we could -not get a house to preach in. On the 9th we returned to Papeete, the -voyage being very rough and trying. I could hardly stand on my crutches -when we landed, at 10 p.m. - -On the 11th we arranged for four of us to go to Tubuoi, but the -governor informed the captain that he could take but two white -passengers, so on August 15th Elder Seegmiller and I left on a vessel -bound for the island named. The voyage lasted till the 20th and was -decidedly uncomfortable. We did not have sufficient food, there was no -bedding, and the water on board was filthy. Worn and exhausted, we were -glad to get ashore at Tapuai, where we were coldly greeted. We secured -a comfortable lodging room, so far as appearances were concerned, and -plenty of fleas for bed-fellows. Our room-mate was a young man named -Alexander Drolett, interpreter for the French captain of a government -schooner that was lying in the harbor. There we met Tapuni, a native -Josephite preacher who had been on the island about five months. He -tried to be sociable, but was ill at ease, apparently being discomfited -by our arrival. We found the people generally very distant, as if they -did not wish us there. Mr. Drolett, however, was kind and sociable, and -we had the privilege of explaining to him the nature of our calling on -the islands. - -September 22, 1892, was the one hundredth anniversary of the first -French republic, and a feast and holiday had been proclaimed. Flags -were hoisted, and the people gathered to the feast. We were among those -invited, and were seated at the table with the captain of the French -schooner and his interpreter, and the governor and his wife, also -Tapuni. About ninety persons were at the feast. Dinner was served in -French and native styles blended. This was followed by singing, and by -dancing and contortions of the old heathen fashion, until I was worn -out. - -The following day the French schooner left, and Elder Seegmiller and -I sent a letter to our brethren at Papeete. As we were in the house -a policeman called and gazed at us for a time, then left without -speaking. Next came the native governor, Tahuhuetoma, who entered -without noticing me, but I slapped him on the shoulder and asked him -if he had eyes, whereat he spoke, but had little to say. Then came a -native, Tehaheatihi, from the village of Mahu, on the south side of the -island. He was very friendly, and said he had joined the Josephites -but had discovered his mistake. I was quite ill, so could not accept -his invitation to accompany him to Mahu, except on the condition that -he furnish a conveyance, which he promised to try to do. Our landlord, -however, told us not to trouble, but to remain till Sunday, when we -would all go to Mahu, and could speak to the people there. He said -Tapuni was not pleased, but that made little difference. - -Next day was Saturday, the 24th--the occasion of greater kindness to -us from the natives than previously; for two children aged ten and -twelve years brought us some food, as did also the governor's wife. On -Sunday further friendship was displayed, and the people came to ask -us questions; but we were unable to go to Mahu, and were refused the -privilege of speaking at the religious services in the place where -we were. On Monday, however, we went to Mahu, where we met twelve to -fifteen men, with whom we had a pleasant visit, talking to them quite -freely. - -During that week we met a number of people who exhibited a kindly -feeling towards us in conversation. Some applied for baptism, but -I advised them to wait. By the end of the week the clouds over the -mission began to break. When Sunday came there was a religious feast, -but we were not allowed to take part, so, with about five natives, held -services of singing, prayer and conversation. Again in the afternoon -we had a meeting at which about thirty persons were present, and I -explained how the authority had continued in the Church from the -Prophet Joseph to the present organization. At that meeting Elder -Seegmiller spoke publicly in the native tongue for the first time. -There were several applications for baptism, and on the following -Tuesday, October 4th, Elder Seegmiller baptized twenty-four persons, -whom I confirmed members of the Church. Thus the missionary work on the -island was opened up again, with a fair start for prosperity. - - - -CHAPTER LXV. - -MIRACULOUS HEALING--MEET AND CONFOUND THE JOSEPHITES--FURTHER -MISSIONARY SUCCESS--MEET A NATIVE WHO WAS PRESENT WHEN I WAS -SENTENCED TO BE BURNED--ELDER JOHN LAYTON'S GRAVE--ARRANGE TO RETURN -TO TAHITI--DISAPPOINTED--PREACH A FUNERAL SERMON--FORBIDDEN TO HOLD -PUBLIC MEETINGS--BLIND WOMAN ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTY YEARS OLD--HER -TESTIMONY--ADMINISTER TO HER FOR HER EYESIGHT, AND SHE IS ENABLED TO -SEE A LITTLE--SHE PRAISES THE LORD--PREACHING AND BAPTIZING--SAIL -FOR PAPEETE--AN ODD CARGO--HARD VOYAGE--HELD BY A CALM--LAND ON -TAHITI--SAIL FOR AVAROA--ON A WELL-ORDERED SCHOONER--CALL AT VARIOUS -ISLANDS--LANCE A CARBUNCLE--CHRISTMAS DAY AT SEA--WATERMELONS--A -BEAUTIFUL RESIDENCE AND CORDIAL WELCOME--PERFORM THREE MARRIAGE -CEREMONIES--CONFERENCE OF SAINTS IN THE TUAMOTU ISLANDS--MEET A NATIVE -CHILEAN--VISIT VARIOUS PLACES--PUBLIC WELCOME--FISHING--ON THE ISLAND -OF ANAA--VISIT WHERE I WAS IMPRISONED--GRAVES OF THOSE CONCERNED IN -THE TROUBLE THEN--WARRANT SERVED ON ME--SUMMONED TO THE GOVERNMENT -HOUSE--WARNED AGAINST CREATING A DISTURBANCE. - -IT was on October 6, 1892, that the first case of miraculous healing -after our arrival occurred. We were becoming recipients of greater -kindness from the natives, and that day Roai, the oldest man on -the island, was brought to us, shaking violently with a chill. He -appeared to be dying. Some cocoanut oil was brought--no other was -obtainable--and we blessed it and anointed and blessed him, when the -chill immediately left him. He rested well, and next morning was in his -usual good health. - -On the 7th there was quite an argument among the people as to whether -the Josephites or the Mormons should have the meeting house. The -decision was in our favor, and we were also offered a house in the -village of Taahuaia. The Josephite preacher, Tapuni, wanted to hold -joint meetings with us, as we both followed the same form of baptism; -but we refused, as we could not make any alliance with him. We -represented the true Church of Jesus Christ, while his organization was -by persons who had been excommunicated, and had not divine authority. - -When Sunday came we held three meetings, blessed fourteen children, and -took dinner with the policeman. Next day, the 10th, we ordained Ote an -Elder, and added nine persons to the Church by baptism. On the 11th we -met a man--the fourth on the island--who was on the island of Raivavai -when the natives had built a fire to burn me, and when I was delivered -by the power of God. They claimed to have been present when I was -sentenced, but denied taking any part in the proceedings. - -Friday, October 14th, we bade the Saints of Mahu farewell (having, the -day previous, ordained two Elders, two Priests, one Teacher and one -Deacon) and went to Taahuaia, where the people were quite indifferent -to us. From time to time, however, we were able to converse with some -of them, and baptized several. On the 23rd, the governor gave us -permission to hold meetings, and we began doing so. I visited the grave -of Elder John Layton on the 24th, and on the 25th arranged to leave on -a schooner for Tahiti. My health had been quite poor for some time. I -did not go on the boat, however, for it was so heavily laden that there -was no room, so it sailed on the 27th without me. Monday, October 31st, -I preached the funeral sermon of a little girl. - -On the 5th of November, the Josephite preacher and his wife called -on me. In the evening a special meeting of the people was held, the -purpose of which was kept secret from us. That night I dreamed I was -on trial and the judge said he knew I was not guilty, but because of -the demand of the people he would have to give judgment against me and -assess a fine of twenty dollars, which the court would pay. I awoke and -told Elder Seegmiller the natives had made a decision against us, as we -learned the next day, when the governor withdrew from us the privilege -of holding meetings. - -We went to Mataura on November 7th, to see a man possessed of a devil. -The evil spirit was dumb, and for three years the man had not spoken -to anyone, but sat or laid around. We also visited the school where -there were about thirty students, and the teacher called one pupil to -the blackboard, where the exercise in writing required of her was well -done. Then we called on Tetuatehiapa, the oldest woman on the island. -She was one hundred and twenty years of age, and had been blind for -eight years. The people said she had insisted that she would live till -the servants of God came from Salt Lake City. When told who we were she -rejoiced greatly, and exclaimed, "I always said you would come again! -The Lord has brought you, and has prolonged my life till you came. I -rejoice exceedingly at the mercies of the Lord!" On November 8th, we -baptized her with seven others, and on the 10th administered to her for -her blindness by laying hands on her head and blessing her. When we had -attended to the ordinance she stated that she could see a little, which -was more than she had done for eight years. "God be praised for His -mercies," she said. - -Sunday, November 13th, I preached twice to large congregations at Mahu, -where we arrived on the 11th. We also had a number of applicants for -baptism, and on the 14th eight members were added to the Church by the -ordinance, and we blessed two children. A Catholic priest called on us, -and I had a pointed discussion with him on authority in the Church, and -the true Gospel. We parted good friends, he promising to come again -next day, but he did not do so; although he passed by the house, but -never looked towards us. On the 16th we added five more souls to -the Church by baptism. - -Our missionary labors continued in different villages, and on November -23 Elder Seegmiller baptized the school teacher at Mataura, also two of -the governor's daughters. On the 21st the captain of a schooner that -had called at the island told us we could go to Tahiti on his vessel, -starting on the 24th. Elder Seegmiller aided me in preparing for the -voyage, and I bade farewell to the people, who were very much attached -to us. I shook hands with the governor, when his eyes filled with -tears, he kissed me, and was so full of emotion that it was difficult -for him to speak. In due time the vessel sailed, Elder Seegmiller going -on it to Mataura, three miles down the coast, where he went ashore, as -we had agreed, and I was alone so far as a missionary companion was -concerned. - -At Mataura the French police justice and his wife, a Marquesas woman, -came aboard, and at 6 p.m. we weighed anchor. The schooner was very -much crowded, the cargo including four women, two children, fourteen -men, three horses, twenty hogs, one goat, one dog, about one hundred -chickens, eight or ten turkeys, eleven thousand cocoanuts, and a lot -of other things. The most comfortable place I could find was on the -companion-way, where I sat, as I was not able to use my crutches on -the vessel. The first night out I found I could not sleep in my berth, -as it was too cramped and the tobacco smoke and foul air were too much -for me, so I camped on the companion-way with my blanket, and was very -seasick. The next night I fared about the same, and it was pretty hard -on me; but the third night, Saturday, I went below before the others -did, and obtained a fairly good night's rest. - -Sunday, November 27, we sighted Tahiti, but a heavy rain and calm -held us back over Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday. On the last-named -day the crew caught a shark, and we had some of it boiled for supper. -Thursday, December 1st, we landed at Papeete in a heavy rainstorm, and -quite exhausted. I was met by my son Elando, and once on shore I was -refreshed with palatable food and good news from my family. We spent -our time the next fourteen days in missionary labors in Papeete, to -the best advantage, and on the sixth baptized eight persons into the -Church. My health was decidedly poor at this time. - -We had arranged with Mr. Henry Marvin for passage on the schooner -_Avaroa_ to the Tuamotu islands, sailing on December 15th. We left -on the date named and though we had some headwinds and calms, we had -a good voyage; for the captain (a Hawaiian) and crew were agreeable, -the vessel was kept clean and in perfect order, and the table was well -supplied with a good variety of food. We sighted several islands, and -on the 20th stopped at Niau, which has a population of one hundred, all -members of the Josephite Church. Their presiding officer and a number -of his people came on board and gave us six chickens and six baskets -of cocoanuts as a token of friendship. I talked to them on the Gospel -message I had to deliver as a missionary. - -We went ashore on the island of Apatai on the 23rd, as Mr. Marvin -had some business there. The people were rather indifferent to us as -missionaries. I visited the governor, who said he had been my servant -on the island of Anaa when I was there forty years before. He was very -much afflicted with a carbuncle on the back of his head and neck, and -could move about only by crawling on his hands and knees. I lanced his -carbuncle, and he recovered. - -Christmas Day, 1892, was spent on the schooner _Avaroa_, and we sought -the coolest place we could find and ate watermelons, thinking of our -mountain home and the loved ones in Utah. Next day we sailed into -port at Taroa, and were met by Elder Joseph W. Damron and some native -Saints. I was welcomed to the home of Mr. Mapuhi, a seven-roomed frame -house, built on pillars of coral stone and beautifully furnished in -American fashion. The place seemed perfectly lovely, and a surprise for -us in the way of a spring mattress to sleep on was doubly welcome. The -following day was the 27th, and I had the privilege of preaching to a -good audience. - -The 28th of December was Wednesday, and the morning was marked by the -receipt of an invitation to a triple wedding and feast to be held -that afternoon at the government building. I attended and by request -performed the marriage ceremony for the three couples. I also availed -myself of the opportunity to address the assemblage briefly on the -subjects of marriage and baptism for the dead. This day I had the -unusual experience of standing in the door of the house where we were -lodging and viewing a large school of whales pass by. - -New Year's day, 1893, was the time for a conference of the Saints to be -held on the island of Faiti, so preparations were made on December 29th -for us to leave Taroa. On this date I met a native Chilean, who said -he came from San Antonio, about thirty miles south of Valparaiso. When -I heard this, it called to my mind a statement of Dr. J. M. Bernhisel, -that he had learned from the Prophet Joseph Smith that that was near -the place where Lehi and his colony, told of in the Book of Mormon, -landed in America, on their journey from Jerusalem. In the afternoon we -started, on Mapuhi's schooner, for Faiti, six boatloads of the Saints -going along. Our vessel had twenty persons aboard. The wind was fair, -and on Saturday, December 31st, we reached Faiti, landing about 9:30 -a.m. Our reception was rather cool, as we were ushered into a large -room, almost bare save a long table and a few chairs, and were left -alone much of the time. However, we had good beds at night. In the -morning, Sunday, January 1st, we held meeting, and I called for those -who had known me on my former mission to stand up. Seventeen persons -arose to their feet, and stated that they remembered and recognized me. -Our meetings at conference were well attended. The presiding officer of -the Church in the Tuamotu islands was a blind man, and he asked me a -number of questions to satisfy himself that I was the same one who had -been there forty years before with Elders Pratt and Grouard. I baptized -him at that time. When he was fully convinced he remarked that if I had -not come he would not have received the young missionaries, referring -to Elders Damron, Jones, and my son Elando. - -It was January 4th before the people gave us the public reception that -was customary. At the ceremony an aged man related how they had prayed -that I might come back to them again, to teach them the true Gospel. -That day the French gen d' armes made some charges of irregularity -against the owner of our boat, saying the captain had not the proper -papers. It was generally understood, however, that the trouble -originated with the Catholic priest. Matters were finally settled. Next -morning I went fishing with our landlord and caught six nice rock cod, -where the sea was ten fathoms deep. The water was so clear that through -a glass we could see the bottom, with the myriad beauties and great -variety of fish at that place. The anchor of the canoe got fast in a -coral reef, and our host dived down and released it. - -We continued to hold meetings all the week to give the people a correct -understanding of our mission; then, on January 9th, my son Elando and -I sailed for the island of Anaa, arriving there at noon that day, and -being warmly welcomed by the people of Tuuhora, where we landed. - -On the 11th, I walked over the ground where I had been held a prisoner -by the French government, and visited the cemetery where was the grave -of the policeman who had been killed in an affray subsequent to my -departure. On the afternoon of the 13th, I visited the graves of those -who were hanged by the French government for their part in the tragedy. -Upon my return from the cemetery, a warrant was served on me by a -policeman. It was in both French and English, the English translation -reading as follows: - -"_Monsieur Jacob, Ministre Mormon:_ - -"The gen d' arme chief of port at Anaa invites Mr. Jacob (James), -Mormon minister at Tuuhora, to come to the government house at Tuuhora -(Fare Hau), to listen to a communication which he desires him to hear. - - "Cy. Cours, - - "The Gen d' arme Chief of Post. - -"Tuuhora, 13th January, 1893." - -Of course I responded to this invitation from the chief of police, so -with my son Elando reported as requested, to listen to an order made -by the governor of the Tuamotu group of islands. The chief of police -warned us particularly that if we caused the slightest disturbance -among the people over the meeting house, or otherwise, it might result -seriously to me. This was repeated six times, in an emphatic tone of -voice. The officer refused utterly to hear anything from us, saying, "I -follow out my instructions. You must not step your foot inside of the -meeting house at Temeraia, nor the house here." - -Finding it was useless for us to say anything, we bade the chief of -police and the interpreter (Mr. Burns, an Englishman) good-bye, and -left them to their stench of strong drink. - - - -CHAPTER LXVI. - -PREACHING AND VISITING--PEARL FISHING--PLACE OF MY ARREST IN -1851--ACCIDENT TO A YOUNG MAN--INCIDENT WITH THE GOVERNOR OF ANAA--SEE -A LEPER--CAPTURE OF AN EEL--CONFERENCE ON ANAA--TIME OF DEDICATION -OF SALT LAKE TEMPLE--SPECIALLY INTERESTING MEETINGS--NEW ELDERS FROM -UTAH--START BACK TO TAHITI--ANOTHER FUNERAL SERMON--MEET THE FRENCH -GOVERNOR OF THE TUAMOTU ISLANDS--HIS CORDIAL GREETING--ARRIVE AT -PAPEETE--APPOINTMENTS FOR THE NEW MISSIONARIES--FAIL TO GET A PASSAGE -TO TUBUOI--MY HEALTH VERY POOR--LEARN OF THE DEDICATION OF THE SALT -LAKE TEMPLE--ELDERS UNANIMOUS IN THE DECISION THAT I SHOULD RETURN HOME -BECAUSE OF MY ILLNESS--I DEMUR--CONCLUDE TO GO--TROUBLE ON ANAA--MY -SIXTY-FIFTH BIRTHDAY--NOTABLE KINDNESS OF A NATIVE CHILD--SAIL FROM -PAPEETE--DIFFICULTY IN LANDING FROM SMALL BOATS--IN THE SOCIETY -ISLANDS--REACH SAN FRANCISCO--ARRIVE IN SALT LAKE CITY--REPORT THE -SUCCESSFUL OPENING OF THE SOCIETY ISLANDS MISSION. - -AFTER the severe warning from the governor, we returned to our -missionary labors, preaching to the people as we could find -opportunity. The Sunday following this occurrence (January 15th) we -had three well-attended meetings in a private meeting house, and -on Monday we went in a boat to Putuahara, a town of two thousand -people on my first visit but now dwindled down to a place with less -than sixty inhabitants. All the ablebodied men were away, engaged in -pearl-fishing. This is the place where the people killed the French -policeman and severely beat the Catholic priest, as already stated. - -We conversed with and preached to the inhabitants until the 25th, when -we went to Otopipi, but returned that same day, as our friends there -were absent from home. Our missionary work in Putuahara continued till -February 4th, when we again went to Otopipi. Next day being Sunday I -had the privilege of preaching to a large congregation. There were -thirty-one native members of the Church present. Many of the people in -attendance were Catholics, and my remarks raised quite a discussion -among them, some of them being for and others against me. Early -on Monday, according to previous arrangement, we sailed around to -Temeraia, receiving a hearty welcome there. - -At this place we met the granddaughter of John Hawkins, once an Elder -in this mission and now a Josephite. I also visited the spot where I -had been arrested in the year 1851. The house had been cleared away -since then, and an old wrecked boat occupied the site. We held meetings -and had a large attendance, though the weather was intensely hot and -oppressive, and my health quite poor. - -On February 17th a young man named Temia fell thirty-five feet from a -tree and broke his arm in three places, the bones coming through his -skin in one place. With such hot weather, and no surgical or medical -attendance available, it looked as though his chances for recovery -seemed slight. We visited him again on the 28th, and his case looked -even more serious. We administered to him, and he ultimately recovered. -Towards the latter part of the month the people began to feel more -friendly to us, and received us more cordially than at first. - -While we were in meeting on March 1st, the governor passed, and as -he was averse to recognizing us then as previously, I called to him -and asked the reason. His reply was that it was not wise to do so. I -continued to talk with him, and he became more sociable, confessing -that it was the darkness of his heart that had caused him to act so -improperly. I advised him to repent of his sins and ask the Lord to -give him light, and he felt better. Two days after this I beheld the -unusual sight of a leper, as one passed the house--a painful picture -to behold. The third day a man and his wife were baptized into the -Church. A visit to Tuuhora was made on March 6th. and on the return -voyage, while diving for pearls, an eel was discovered under a rock -in deep water. It took quite a light to capture it, but it was a fine -one--about four feet long. We went to Putuahara on March 13, and during -the remainder of the month continued our missionary labors, meeting -with no unusual experiences. - -On March 31st, Elders Damron and Jones came from Fakariva, and -native members of the Church began to arrive in preparation for our -conference, which was set for April 6th, 1893. At 7 o'clock that -morning we assembled in conference, being the same actual time when -the Saints were meeting for the dedication of the Temple in Salt Lake -City, Utah--10 a.m. at the latter place. I explained to the Saints in -conference the nature and importance of the event just named. Elder -Damron also spoke on temple building, and after the close of our -meeting we went to the seashore, where we held a short service, and -my son Elando baptized five persons into the Church. We also ordained -three native Elders and appointed two of them to preside over branches -of the Church. The conference continued till Sunday evening, and all in -attendance had a most enjoyable time. - -We had received word on Saturday that eight Elders had arrived at -Papeete from Utah, and at the close of conference we decided that we -had better return to Tahiti as soon as possible. Next morning we bade -farewell to the weeping Saints, and set sail for Tuuhora. From there we -took passage for Taroa. On April 12th, we stopped at Apatai, where I -went ashore and met a number of people whom I had baptized on my former -mission. They did not display much of a hospitable feeling, as none -invited me to their houses. - -Taroa was reached on April 16th, and the hearty welcome there was -highly appreciated after a voyage which had been very unpleasant to me, -as I had been quite ill. We were met by Messrs. Marvin and Mapuhi, and -escorted to the latters fine residence. It being Sunday, we attended -meetings. My son Elando was also called on, on on April 21st, to preach -the funeral sermon over a young man who had died of consumption. - -On the morning of April 27th, the schooner _Avaroa_ came into port, -having on board the French governor of the Tuamotu group, also the -native governor of Taroa. We had a friendly chat with them, the -Frenchman saying he had been in Salt Lake City. He invited me to visit -him when I went to Fakariva again. Next day the people assembled to pay -their respects to the governor, and we also had another pleasant chat -with him. - -We started from Taroa on Monday, May 1st, on the _Avaroa_, but as the -vessel was going out to sea she struck on a rock which disabled the -rudder, and it took till evening to repair it. Then we sailed for -Fakariva, reaching there the following afternoon. The French governor -went ashore, and later we did the same. Next morning we took breakfast -with him, being invited to come again whenever we were on the island. -That afternoon we sailed for Tahiti, reaching Papeete harbor on -Saturday, May 6th, and meeting there Elders Edward Sudbury, Frank Goff, -Frank Cutler, Eugene M. Cannon, Carl J. Larsen, Thomas L. Woodbury, -Fred C. Rossiter and Jesse M. Fox, all from Utah. - -At a meeting of the missionaries held on May 13th, Elders Carl J. -Larsen and Thomas L. Woodbury were appointed to go to the Tuamotu -islands, Elders Frank Goff and Jesse M. Fox to Tubuoi, with my son -Elando and myself and the others remaining on Tahiti for a short time. -Through Mr. Marvin we engaged passage on a French man-of-war going to -Tubuoi, the captain giving his permission. But after we had packed -our trunks and purchased our provisions for the journey, the captain -suggested that we had better get a permit from the governor. We tried -to do so, but that official responded with an abrupt "No." So we had to -await another opportunity. - -For some time previous to this date my health had been poorer than -usual, and it grew worse, so that it was with difficulty I attended to -missionary labors and to conducting the mission affairs. I continued -at work, however, the best I could, and my fellow-missionaries were -devoted to their duties. Some of them were in the best of health, but -others were not so fortunate; indeed, one of them, Edward Sudbury, was -under the necessity of returning home shortly after the date of which I -write. On May 25th we received mail telling us of the dedication of the -Temple in Salt Lake City, and the notable events connected therewith. - -I had tried to get a hall in which to hold meetings for the European -residents of Papeete, my last efforts in that line being on June 13th, -but I was unsuccessful, so we had to do without, and endeavor to reach -them and the natives in other ways. On June 25th we held a council -meeting of all the Elders on Tahiti, eight in number, at which methods -for the best conduct of the mission were considered. Among other events -of the meeting was the unanimous expression by my fellow-missionaries -of the opinion that my state of health was such that I should go home. -A motion that I do so was put and carried, all but myself voting in -favor of my going by the next mail steamer, which sailed July 8th. I -thought that if conditions improved before that time, I would be at -liberty to remain longer in the mission field. Elder Sudbury was also -in such health that he was booked to start home at the same time, and -my son Elando was selected to accompany us, and give me the attention I -needed. - -My health showing no signs of improvement, passage was secured on -the brig Galilee, bound for San Francisco. On June 27th we had seen -two persons from Anaa, who informed us there was trouble there, -the missionaries not obtaining their rights to preach. I gave such -advice as I felt would be safe to follow, and Elder J. W. Damron, who -succeeded me in the presidency of the mission, was left to deal with -affairs. - -On July 4th, my sixty-fifth birthday, John Hawkins, one of my -fellow-laborers of forty-two years before, who had apostatized and -joined the Josephites, called, with others. He was particularly bitter -towards the Church. That day little Tapura, between six and seven years -old, brought me, of her own volition, a large and beautiful bouquet of -flowers--an act of kindness scarcely to be expected in one so young. -She is the daughter of Mr. Topaz, who was very kind to us. - -The day previous to our going on board, the neighbors brought in -bananas and cocoanuts for our use on the voyage, and we were treated -well. We bade farewell to friends and associates, all being sorry at -the parting, and on July 8th I sailed for the last time from the harbor -of Papeete, island of Tahiti. The words of Apostle Lorenzo Snow, spoken -to me before commencing my journey, had been fulfilled. Though this -mission had not been so long as some of the others I had filled, it had -been one of the greatest and best I had performed, so far as relates -to the work I had been the means of accomplishing in reopening and -establishing the Society Islands mission. - -Our vessel this voyage was very different to those we often had to use -in our travels from place to place, even in the same island. We also -bade adieu to the native method of landing from boats, which always -brought discomfort and often serious peril. For illustration, it was -no uncommon thing, when approaching harbor, to have to pass through -breakers across a coral reef where there was barely room for the boat -to glide between the rocks. Sometimes the vessel would be run close -to the opening, the occupants would spring out on to the rocks on each -side of the passage, and seizing the boat, would hold it there till -the large or "three-twin-sisters" wave came along; and then, by its -aid, would drag or push the boat through in safety. In such times as -these my lame condition was hindersome to the extent of being more than -annoying; it was exasperating. But I always got through, though it was -hard work, and my companions gave the needed assistance with perfect -willingness. - -The voyage to San Francisco was without particular event more than is -usual on such occasions, as was also the journey from San Francisco to -Salt Lake City by rail. We reached home about the middle of August, -and were welcomed cordially. I reported to the First Presidency the -condition of affairs in the mission, the progress we had made, with the -difficulties that were to be met with. Elando and I had been absent for -sixteen months, and had worked with diligence to perform our part. - -Our efforts had been blessed of the Lord, for many people who had been -astray from the path of life were led to direct their footsteps in the -straight and narrow path. The Society Islands mission had been reopened -successfully, and yet continues to prosper, the membership in the -Church there being quite numerous. - - - -CHAPTER LXVII. - -INVITED TO THE MIDWINTER FAIR, SAN FRANCISCO, AND ACCEPT--JOURNEY TO -CALIFORNIA--KIND TREATMENT RECEIVED--AN HONORED GUEST--WRITE A PAMPHLET -ON THE DISCOVERY OF GOLD AT SUTTER'S MILL RACE--FIRST ACCURATE ACCOUNT -PUBLISHED--AGAIN AT HOME--PREPARING MY AUTOBIOGRAPHY FOR PUBLICATION--A -GREAT TASK--PROGRESS OF THE WORK--MY HISTORY OF THE FIRST MISSION TO -THE PACIFIC ISLANDS--UTAH'S SEMI-CENTENNIAL JUBILEE--NOT A UTAH PIONEER -OF 1847--PIONEER JUST THE SAME--MORMON BATTALION RECOGNIZED IN THE UTAH -CELEBRATION--INVITED TO JOIN IN THE PARADE--COMPARATIVE NARROWNESS OF -COMMITTEE'S COURTESY--LETTERS FROM CALIFORNIA, REGARDING THE PIONEER -CELEBRATION THERE IN 1898--INVITED WITH THREE OTHERS OF THE MORMON -BATTALION, TO BE SPECIAL GUESTS AS THE SURVIVORS OF THE PARTY THAT -DISCOVERED GOLD IN CALIFORNIA IN 1848--APPRECIATION OF THE COURTESY -EXTENDED BY CALIFORNIANS. - -AS my health was far from satisfactory, I was able to do but little -after my return from the Society Islands in August, 1893. I gave my -farm some attention, and traveled occasionally among the people. In -February, 1894, I received an invitation from James H. Love, manager -for the concession of the '49 mining camp at the Midwinter Fair, in -Golden Gate Park, San Francisco, to be present there. The invitation -came to me through Israel Evans, of Lehi, Utah, who had been with me in -California in 1848. I accepted, and in company with Israel Evans and my -son James T. Brown, went to California in the month named. - -This visit to California extended about thirty days. We were treated -with the greatest kindness. Our place of lodging at the miner's cabin -on the fair grounds was comfortably fitted, and besides viewing the -most excellent exhibits of this notable Midwinter Exposition, we also -visited most of the places of interest in the locality. We were honored -guests in every parade, and nothing more could be desired in the way of -courtesies to make our stay pleasant. - -While in California on this occasion I wrote my pamphlet. "Authentic -History of the First Discovery of Gold in Sutter's Mill Race, -California." This was the first accurate history of that event I had -seen in print, all the other accounts having been gathered from hearsay -and broken narratives, while I had the advantage of being an actual -participant in the historic occurrence. - -In March, 1894, I returned home, and continued my ordinary labors, my -health being considerably improved. At this time I began preparing -my journal for publication, having to rewrite it to place it in -presentable form, as much of it had been noted down under very adverse -circumstances; it was also necessary to condense it greatly, many items -of real interest being abbreviated to a considerable extent. - -I believe now that if I had realized at the outset what a great task -it was, I should not have attempted it, notwithstanding the fact that -I was fully aware that my life's experience had been filled with -unusually interesting episodes. But I had not been accustomed to giving -up a work once undertaken with a good aim; so I have continued to the -present, and as I prepare this chapter, the earlier part of the work is -in the hands of the printer. The only literary experience I have had -previous to this work is writing a history of the first mission to the -Pacific Islands and the subsequent progress of events in the Society -Islands mission up to 1893, the manuscript of which history was filed -with and is now a part of the records of the Church historian's office. - -In July, 1897, Utah's Semi-Centennial Jubilee was celebrated, the -occasion being the fiftieth anniversary of the entrance of the Mormon -Pioneers into the valley of the Great Salt Lake, July 24, 1847. The -chief ceremonies were in Salt Lake City, July 20th to 25th, and I had -the honor and pleasure of being present. I had not the privilege of -being classed as one of the pioneers, for these were limited in the -celebration to those who reached Utah in 1847, and I did not arrive -there from the west till 1848. With the Mormon Battalion members, -however, I was a Mormon pioneer, in the memorable journey across the -country to the Pacific; I was also a pioneer in California, and later -in Utah and surrounding places. The committee on the semi-centennial -celebration, however, noted the fact that the members of the Mormon -Battalion were entitled to recognition in connection with the Utah -pioneer band, for the work of both was intimately associated. In -pursuance of this, there was sent to me under date of July 19th, a -letter containing this announcement: - -"Survivors of the Mormon Battalion, the Nauvoo Legion, Captain Ballo's -Band, and the Martial Band, are requested to meet at Pioneer Square on -Tuesday next, July 20th, at 9 o'clock a.m., sharp, for the purpose of -marching in advance of the original band of Pioneers to witness the -unveiling ceremonies upon that occasion. Those who are able to walk are -earnestly requested to do so, but those who are too feeble to walk will -join them at the Monument. - -"Hoping to see you with us at the appointed time, I am, - - "Yours respectfully, - - "H. F. MCGARVIE, - - "Assistant Director-General." - -I responded to this limited notice, in common with other members of the -Mormon Battalion at hand. But the summary treatment was in such strong -contrast to the consideration and courtesy extended at the Midwinter -Fair, and subsequently at the California Golden Jubilee, that its -effect was to enhance greatly, in the minds' of those who participated -in the California and the Utah celebrations, the admiration for the -California managers in their broad and thorough comprehension of the -amenities of such historic public events. But I must add here that the -Mormon Battalion members, whose journey west was over another route -than that followed by the companies which came direct to the Salt -Lake Valley, were fitly honored in the hearts of Utah's people as of -the pioneer band in the great west. December 1, 1897, I received the -following; - - "1216 HYDE STREET, SAN FRANCISCO, - - "November 29, 1897. - -"_Mr. James S. Brown:_ - -"DEAR SIR: The celebration committee of the Society of California -Pioneers, expect, though as yet no formal action has been taken, to -invite yourself, Mr. J. Johnston, Mr. Azariah Smith, and Mr. Henry W. -Bigler, who were with Marshall at Coloma on the 24th of January, 1848, -to come to San Francisco as honored guests of the Society, and at its -expense, to participate in the semi-centennial celebration of that -eventful day, on the 24th of January next. - -"If we should send such an invitation to you, will you come and be with -us? Letters from Mr. Bigler and Mr. Smith lead me to hope that they -will accept the invitation. - -"So soon as formal action is taken, you will be informed either by -myself or by the secretary of our committee. - - "Yours truly, - - "JOHN S. HITTELL. - - "A member of the Celebration Committee." - -My response was that if my health would permit, and all things were -satisfactory, I should be pleased to accept such an invitation. I -received another letter from Mr. Hittell, under date of December 15th, -in which he said: - -"_Mr. James S. Brown:_ - -"DEAR SIR: This evening the celebration committee of the Pioneer -Society adopted a resolution to invite you to attend the Golden Jubilee -of California, as an honored guest of the Society, which will provide -you with first class transportation from and to your home, and take -charge of your hotel bill from the 22nd of January till the 31st of -January, 1898, in this city. - -"Mr. B. H. and Mr. H. B. Luther, brothers, say that they were at Coloma -on the 24th of January, 1848, as boys, with their father and mother. -Do you know them and remember when they reached Coloma? They say their -mother, who was with them there, is still living." - -Under date of December 25th, Mr. Hittell also wrote me: - -"_Captain James S. Brown:_ - -"DEAR SIR: Please let me know the amount of the railroad fare from Salt -Lake to Ogden, so that we may forward the sum to you by letter; we -expect to send you a ticket from Ogden to this city, including a lower -berth in a sleeping car. - -"We hope that you, Bigler, Smith and Johnston will all come in the same -car. I have addressed a similar letter to each of the other three. - -"Thanks for your letter of December 20th. I was satisfied that Gregson -and the Luthers were not at the sawmill on the 24th of January, 1848. - -"I suppose the best train would be the one leaving Salt Lake City at -9:10 p.m., on January 20th, arriving at San Francisco January 22nd, at -9:45 a.m. Does that suit you?" - -The next communication on the subject was as follows: - -"EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT, THE SOCIETY OF CALIFORNIA PIONEERS, NO. 5, -PIONEER PLACE, SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, - - "January 7, 1898, - -"_James S. Brown, Esq., Salt Lake City:_ - -"DEAR SIR: The Society of California Pioneers invites you to attend the -Golden Jubilee Celebration of our State, and to accept the hospitality -of the Society in San Francisco, from the 22nd till the 31st of -January, 1898. Enclosed find a pass from the S. P. R. R. Co., for your -passage from Ogden to San Francisco and return. We send you today by -Wells, Fargo & Co.'s Express, fifteen dollars in coin to pay for your -sleeping berth and meals on the way. We have engaged a lower berth for -you on the Pullman car which leaves Ogden on the night of Thursday, the -20th instant. - -"The reception committee will meet you on the Oakland boat on the morning -of Saturday, the 22nd, and will wear the badge of the Society. Should -you miss seeing them you will go to the Russ House, where we have -engaged rooms and board for you. - -"Should you not be able to come, please return the enclosed railroad -pass, and notify the ticket agent at Ogden that you will not use the -sleeping berth. - - "Yours truly, - - "J. I. SPEAR, Secretary. - -"P. S.--We have arranged to have your railroad pass extended for thirty -days if you wish it. S." - -Like my Mormon Battalion companions who were with me on the memorable -24th of January, 1848, I could not but feel highly gratified at the -courtesy extended, and look forward with pleasure to the commemoration, -under so favorable circumstances and with such marvelous progress as -California had made in civilization, of the fiftieth anniversary of a -notable event, which at the time of its occurrence, came to us in the -midst of hardships, fatigue and almost exile from home and relatives, -yet was a world-wonder in the results which followed the announcement -to the world of California's great gold discovery. - - - -CHAPTER LXVIII. - -TRIP TO CALIFORNIA--MET BY THE COMMITTEE ON RECEPTION OF THE SOCIETY -OF CALIFORNIA PIONEERS--RECEIVED WITH GREAT CORDIALITY--HONORED GUESTS -AT CALIFORNIA'S GOLDEN JUBILEE--THE CELEBRATION--COURTESIES EXTENDED -TO MORMON BATTALION MEMBERS PRESENT AT THE DISCOVERY OF GOLD--RETURN -HOME--RESOLUTIONS BY SOCIETY OF CALIFORNIA PIONEERS--REPORT OF -RECEPTION COMMITTEE OF CALIFORNIA GOLDEN JUBILEE--SKETCH OF -MARSHALL'S SURVIVING COMPANIONS--COMPLETE MY AUTOBIOGRAPHY--MY SON -HOMER ACCIDENTALLY KILLED--THE OLD FOLKS--PUBLICATION OF LIFE OF A -PIONEER--CONCLUSION. - -IN response to the invitation from the Society of California Pioneers, -I left Salt Lake City on January 20, 1898, in company with Henry W. -Bigler, Azariah Smith and Wm. J. Johnston, who, like myself, were -guests of the Society. We reached Oakland, California, January 22, -and were met by Mr. John H. Jewett, president of the society, and a -committee consisting of Messrs. John S. Hittell, Almarin B. Paul, -General Wm. H. Pratt, and Misses Anna P. Green and Mary M. Green. The -ladies pinned badges of the Society of California Pioneers on the -lapels of our coats. We were received with the greatest cordiality, and -were taken to the Russ House, San Francisco, where we were comfortably -lodged, being shown special consideration by the proprietor and -his amiable wife, and from that time on we were given the best of -attention. Nothing that could be done was too good for us, and language -fails to express our high appreciation of the courtesy and kindness -bestowed. - -Whenever we attended any of the functions of California's Golden -Jubilee Celebration, or desired to visit a place, carriages were at our -service. January 24th was the fiftieth anniversary of the discovery -of gold at Sutter's mill race, and there was a magnificent pageant in -celebration of the event. We occupied the post of distinction in the -procession, our carriage bearing the legend, "Companions of Marshall." -We were the only survivors of that notable occasion, fifty years -before. The place of honor was also accorded to us at the celebration -ceremonies in the evening at Wood's Pavilion, and on the 27th we were -at a reception in Pioneer Hall, and greeted the multitudes, old and -young, anxious to see and shake hands with us; and at the Mining Fair -our treatment was characterized by the same cordial and distinguished -welcome. The celebration ceremonies lasted the entire week. When at our -hotel we were besieged by reporters, and hundreds of people called to -see us, and get our autographs. Our photographs also were taken for the -Society of Pioneers. - -Outside of the celebration proper, there was the same magnanimous -kindness. I could not name all the citizens who extended to us marked -courtesies, but feel that I must specially mention Captain John T. -McKenzie of the steamer _San Rafael_, who was very attentive, also Hon. -Irving Scott, manager of the great Union Iron Works, at which place we -had a particularly interesting visit and entertainment. - -Two of my companions started home on January 31st, and the third on -February 2nd. I stayed a few days longer, visiting my brother at -Petaluma. I also went to many other places of interest, then returned -home, all expenses of my journey being provided. A few days later I -received the following: - -"EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT, THE SOCIETY OF CALIFORNIA PIONEERS, NO. 5, -PIONEER PLACE, SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, - - "February 9, 1898, - -"_James S. Brown, Esq., Salt Lake City, Utah:_ - -"DEAR SIR: I have the honor of advising you that at the monthly meeting -of the members of the Society held at Pioneer Hall on Monday, February -7, 1898, the following resolutions were unanimously adopted: - -"_Whereas_, The Golden Jubilee just passed marks the second grand event -as connected with the first discovery of gold in California, and as all -pioneers feel gratified at the universal desire of the people to pay -tribute to the pioneer days, now be it - -"_Resolved_, That the Society of California Pioneers tenders its -thanks to the press generally; to the state and city officials; to the -military as a body; to the various mining associations; to the Native -Daughters and Native Sons of the Golden West, and to the many other -organizations that participated in making the grand pageant of January -24th a splendid success. And be it further - -"_Resolved_, That the thanks of this society are also tendered to -Henry W. Bigler, James S. Brown, Wm. J. Johnston and Azariah Smith, -the companions of Marshall, in lending their presence for the Jubilee; -and especially do we appreciate the efforts and labors of the -executive committee of the Golden Jubilee, and we also return thanks -to the Southern Pacific Company for complimentary passes to the four -companions of Marshall to and from San Francisco and Ogden, also for -its liberal contribution to the Golden Jubilee held under auspices of -the society; and also to Irving M. Scott on part of the Union Iron -Works, for the invitation to the companions of Marshall and members of -this Society to visit the works, and the placing at our disposal their -tug for the trip, and further for the many courtesies extended to all -by the several officers connected with the works while there. - - "J. H. JEWETT, President." - -On February 20th this note came: - - "1316 HYDE STREET, SAN FRANCISCO, - - "February 18, 1898. - -"_Mr. James S. Brown:_ - -"Dear Sir: Your letter of the 16th inst, with the news that you -had arrived safely at home, has given me pleasure. I felt some -responsibility for my part in bringing four old men so far away from -home, but now that I know all have arrived in good health at Salt Lake, -I congratulate myself that events have turned out so favorably. I have -had no letter from Mr. Bigler or Mr. Smith, but they will write to me. - -"I spoke promptly to Mr. Spear, the secretary, about sending fifteen -dollars to pay for the expenses of your return trip, and I understood -him to promise that the money would be transmitted to you by check. - -"The Pioneer Society will long preserve a pleasant recollection of -the participation of the four companions of Marshall in our Jubilee -celebration, and personally I shall always be glad to hear of their -welfare. - - "Yours truly, - - "JOHN S. HITTELL." - -Here is the closing communication in relation to my latest visit to -California and the occasion which caused it: - - "San Francisco, March 9, 1898. - -"_Mr. James S. Brown, Salt Lake City:_ - -"DEAR SIR: Enclosed please find a copy of the report of the reception -committee of the Golden Jubilee: - -"_To John H. Jewett, President of the California Pioneers:_ - -"The reception committee appointed by the Society to receive its guests -attending the celebration of the Golden Jubilee on the 24th of January -last, begs leave to report that its task has been completed. - -"On the morning of January 22nd all the members of the committee -received and welcomed the four companions of Marshall on the overland -train at Oakland, and escorted them to the Russ House, where, under -the direction of President John H. Jewett, they were provided with -comfortable accommodations. - -"These four men, the only survivors of those who were with Marshall at -Coloma when he discovered gold there on Monday, the 24th of January, -1848, are: - -"I. Henry W. Bigler, born in Harrison County, West Virginia, August -28th, 1815, who in his diary made the only written record of the gold -discovery on the day of its occurrence. He is now a resident of St. -George, Utah. - -"2. Azariah Smith, born at Boylston, New York, on the 1st of August, -1828, who, on the first Sunday after the discovery, wrote in his diary -that gold had been found in the preceding week. - -"3. James S. Brown, born in Davison County, North Carolina, on the 4th -of July, 1828, who recollects that on the evening of January 24th, -1848, H. W. Bigler said he would write in his diary that something like -gold had been discovered, as it might be important some day. He resides -in Salt Lake City. - -"4. Wm. J. Johnston, born near New Baltimore, Ohio, on the 21st of -August, 1824, and now resides in Ramah, New Mexico. - -"These four men are all clear in mind, and for their years, strong and -active in body. - -"In the procession on the 24th they occupied a carriage marked -'Companions of Marshall.' On the evening of that day, they were -entertained in our hall with special honor, and two days later they -held a reception in the same place. Various members of our Society, -and especially Captain McKenzie, showed them much attention. They -were guests of honor at the Mining Fair on the opening evening. Hon. -Irving M. Scott, manager of the Union Iron Works, gave them a special -entertainment at his shipyard; and other citizens contributed to make -their stay in our city pleasant. The whole Jubilee week was a round of -festivity for them. - -"Messrs. Bigler and Smith were escorted to their returning train at -Oakland on the 31st of January. Mr. Johnston two days later, and Mr. -Brown in the next succeeding week. They all reached their homes safely, -and all have written to members of the committee acknowledging the -attention and honor shown to them by the Society of California Pioneers. - -"As they are the only persons now living who saw gold in the days of -its discovery, their attendance at our semi-centennial celebration -connected our Jubilee in a highly interesting manner with the great -event which it commemorated. We may add that personal acquaintance with -these venerable men has been a source of pleasure to all members of -this committee, as well as to many other Pioneers. - - "Respectfully submitted, - - "JOHN S. HITTELL, Chairman. - "ALMARIN B. PAUL, - "W. H. PRATT." - -Upon my return home, I again gave attention to this autobiography, -which proved no light task, as my health has been far from good. - -On the 14th of December, 1899, a keen sorrow came to myself and family. -My son Homer, in his twenty-sixth year, died on that date, as a result -of injuries received at a cave-in at the Silver King mine, Park City, -Utah, three weeks before. When war broke out between Spain and the -United States in 1898, he enlisted in response to President McKinley's -call for volunteers, and became a member of Troop C, Utah Volunteer -Cavalry. After his return from California, where the cavalry was sent, -he was married, the event occurring two months before the accident -which cost him his life. On December 19, he was buried in Salt Lake -City, the funeral services being held at the Seventeenth Ward assembly -rooms. - -In the summer of 1898, I was added to the list of Utah's Old Folks, -attending the excursion to Lagoon, Davis County, in July, 1898, to -Geneva, Utah County, in July, 1899, and again at Lagoon on July 6, -1900. The Old Folks include all people over seventy years of age, -independent of creed, race or color; these are accorded receptions, -excursions, and similar happy courtesies, as marks of honor and respect -to the aged. The central committee having this highly appreciated -undertaking in charge has for its chairman the Presiding Bishop of the -Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. - -By the close of 1899, I had completed the preparation of my life's -history for publication in a neat volume, and soon thereafter arranged -for the printing, which at this date, July, 1900, is accomplished. Now -that I have reached the seventy-second annual milestone of my life, I -realize that the period for especially notable or thrilling events in -my mortal career is past; and in the publication of my autobiography, I -sincerely trust that this humble final extended labor on my part will -achieve the principle aim of its performance, that of doing good to -those who live after me, in the witness its record bears of the mercy, -power, and goodness of God, and the latter-day progress of His great -and loving design for the blessing and salvation of His children. With -this attainment, the influence of the record, LIFE OF A PIONEER, will -be in accord with the sincere desire and earnest effort of my soul -throughout life. - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Life of a Pioneer, by James S. Brown - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LIFE OF A PIONEER *** - -***** This file should be named 54331.txt or 54331.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/4/3/3/54331/ - -Produced by the Mormon Texts Project -(http://mormontextsproject.org), with thanks to Heidi Billy - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/54331.zip b/old/54331.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 25a7098..0000000 --- a/old/54331.zip +++ /dev/null |
